From e0c6872cf40896c7be36b11dcc744620f10adf1d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Norbert Preining <norbert@preining.info>
Date: Mon, 2 Sep 2019 13:46:59 +0900
Subject: Initial commit

---
 macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.dtx | 60196 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
 1 file changed, 60196 insertions(+)
 create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.dtx

(limited to 'macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.dtx')

diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b5db259b49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,60196 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+%% Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000
+%%           2001 2002 2003 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008
+%% Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert
+%% Copyright 2018 GitHub minitoc organisation (David Carlisle)
+%
+% This file may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in:
+%    http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is GitHub minitoc organisation
+% https://github.com/minitoc/minitoc.
+%
+% This work consists of all the files listed in the file minitoc.l
+% distributed with it.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\ProvidesFile{minitoc.dtx}%
+%</driver>
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/05]
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{minitoc}
+%<*package>
+    [2018/07/12 v62 minitoc.dtx file]
+%</package>
+%<package>\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14]
+%<*driver>
+\listfiles
+\documentclass[10pt,a4paper,titlepage,oneside,openright]{book}
+%\documentclass[10pt,a4paper,titlepage,twoside,openright]{book}
+\newlength{\iwidth}
+\newlength{\awidth}
+\newlength{\bwidth}
+\newlength{\cwidth}
+\newlength{\dwidth}
+\newlength{\wkdim}
+\setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+\addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+%
+% To add a kind of minitoc in the index
+%
+%\newcommand{\xhead}[1]{\section*{#1}\relax\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}\phantomsection}
+\newcommand{\xhead}[1]{\phantomsection\textbf{#1}\relax\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}}
+%
+% To frame a flag.
+\newlength{\flagframethickness}
+\setlength{\flagframethickness}{.1pt}
+\newcommand{\flagbox}[1]{\begingroup\fboxrule=\flagframethickness\fboxsep=0pt\textcolor{black}{\fbox{\protect#1}}\endgroup}
+\AtBeginDocument{\setlength{\flagframethickness}{1mm}}
+\AtBeginDocument{\definecolor{FBcolor}{gray}{.93}}
+\AtBeginDocument{\renewcommand{\flagbox}[1]{\begingroup\fboxrule=\flagframethickness\fboxsep=0pt\textcolor{FBcolor}{\fbox{\protect#1}}\endgroup}}
+\newcommand{\flagboxa}[1]{\raisebox{-2mm}{\flagbox{\protect#1}}}
+\newcommand{\flagboxu}[1]{\raisebox{2mm}{\flagbox{\protect#1}}}
+%
+\def\ATOC#1{{#1}\stepcounter{section}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}#1}}
+\newlength{\widthinc}\setlength{\widthinc}{3.5cm}
+\makeatletter\@mparswitchfalse\makeatother % les notes marginales à gauche!
+\makeatletter
+\def\mydotfill#1{% Filling dots; #1 = separation (dimension)
+  \leavevmode
+  \cleaders \hb@xt@ #1{\hss\ensuremath{\cdot}\hss}\hfill
+  \kern\z@}
+\def\mysymbfill#1#2{% Filling symbols; #1 = separation (dimension) #2 = symbol;
+  \leavevmode
+  \cleaders \hb@xt@ #1{\hss\ensuremath{#2}\hss}\hfill
+  \kern\z@}
+\makeatother
+\let\RR\raggedright % or \RaggedRight ?
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.lan}{\input{\jobname.lan}}{\typeout{WARNING: \jobname.lan NOT FOUND}\def\LANG{0}}
+\IfFileExists{marvosym.sty}{\usepackage{marvosym}\def\myCoffeecup{~\Coffeecup}}{\let\myCoffeecup\relax}
+\IfFileExists{mparhack.sty}{\usepackage{mparhack}}{}  % not used if oneside.
+\usepackage{chngpage} % to enlarge the biblio
+\IfFileExists{natbib.sty}{\usepackage[sort&compress,comma,numbers,square]{natbib}\citeindextrue}{}
+\IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{\usepackage[tight]{shorttoc}}{}
+\IfFileExists{fnbreak.sty}{\usepackage{fnbreak}}{} % Checks split footnotes
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\usepackage{ifthen}
+\newcounter{currlevel}\setcounter{currlevel}{-1}
+\makeatletter
+\gdef\@idxitem#1{%
+ \par
+ \hangindent 40\p@
+ \ifthenelse{#1 > \value{currlevel}}{{%
+  \nobreak
+  }{\ifthenelse{#1 = \value{currlevel}}{%
+    \pagebreak[0]%
+  }{%
+    \pagebreak[2]%
+  }}%
+  \setcounter{currlevel}{#1}%
+  \hangindent 40pt
+}}%
+\makeatother
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\makeatletter
+\providecommand*{\toclevel@chaptersom}{0}
+\makeatletter\providecommand*{\toclevel@sectionsom}{0}
+\let\nouppercase\relax
+\def\Shorttableofcontents#1#2{\bgroup\c@tocdepth=#2\@restonecolfalse
+  \if@tightshtoc
+     \parsep\z@
+  \fi
+  \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\fi
+  \@ifundefined{chapter}%
+  {\section*{{#1}
+        \@mkboth{\nouppercase{#1}}{\nouppercase{#1}}}%
+                         \addcontentsline{toc}{sectionsom}{#1}}%
+  {\chapter*{{#1}
+        \@mkboth{\nouppercase{#1}}{\nouppercase{#1}}}%
+                         \addcontentsline{toc}{chaptersom}{#1}}%
+  \@startshorttoc{toc}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi\egroup}
+\def\l@chaptersom{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1em}{2.3em}}
+\makeatother
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% \IfFileExists{repeatindex.sty}{\usepackage{repeatindex}}{}% To improve the index; DOES NOT WORK %%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\IfFileExists{sectsty.sty}{\usepackage[garrulous]{sectsty}% To fix long sectionning titles...
+   \partfont{\RR}%
+   \chapterfont{\RR}%
+   \sectionfont{\RR}%
+   \subsectionfont{\RR}%
+   \subsubsectionfont{\RR}}{} % NOT \paragraph or \subparagraph !
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \usepackage[space,sort]{cite} % cite does not work well with hyperref...
+%\RequirePackage[nocompress,sort]{cite}[2003/11/04] % cite[compress] or cite[sort] does not work well with hyperref;
+% use a recent recent version of cite.sty to use its sort option.
+% In fact, I use (above): \IfFileExists{natbib.sty}{\usepackage[sort,comma,numbers,square]{natbib}}{}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\providecommand\citedash{\mbox{--}\nolinebreak}
+\providecommand\citemid{,\nolinebreak[1]}
+\providecommand\citepunct{,\nolinebreak[1]\hspace{.13em plus .1em minus .1em}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\renewcommand\citedash{\mbox{--}\nolinebreak}
+\or\relax
+\renewcommand\citedash{\mbox{-}\nolinebreak}
+\fi
+\let\bibpreamble\relax
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\long\def\bibpreamble{\noindent {\bfseries This bibliography contains many URLs; you must be aware that
+some of them might be inaccessible because they are obsolete, or because their site is down or encounters
+some unexpected problem. Note also that the response of some sites may be slow (several seconds).
+For instance, the entries
+\cite{latex-fonts-ki-joo-kim,bibtex-ki-joo-kim,pdf-ki-joo-kim}, from the \url{http://www.geocities.com/kijoo2000/}
+site, are very difficult to contact.
+
+The URLs beginning with ``\texttt{https:}'' to the TUGboat site may have a restricted access to the TUG members during
+one year after publication. Being a member of TUG is useful and cheap!
+
+Some URLs may contain an extension not supported by your Web browser; in such cases, you should try to access to the
+document manually. An example is~\cite{JMPL1}, whose extension is \suffix{.ps.gz}.
+
+Some URLs are too long for some tools; when possible, I shortened the URL to display only the contents the
+directory, as for~\cite{pdftex}, or by using an URL to the catalogue entry (as for~\cite{arabi}
+and~\cite{antomega}); when not possible, you should try
+to access to the document manually.\par\lneed{12}%
+}}
+\or\relax
+\long\def\bibpreamble{\noindent {\bfseries Cette bibliographie contient de nombreux URLs; vous devez être
+avertis que certains d'entre eux pourraient être inaccessibles parce qu'ils sont obsolètes, parce que leur site
+est inactif ou subit un problème inattendu. Notez aussi que certains sites peuvent être lents à~répondre (quelques
+secondes).
+Par exemple, les entrées
+\cite{latex-fonts-ki-joo-kim,bibtex-ki-joo-kim,pdf-ki-joo-kim}, depuis le site \url{http://www.geocities.com/kijoo2000/},
+sont très difficiles à~atteindre.
+
+Les URLs commençant par {\froff\og{} \texttt{https:}~\fg{}} vers le site de TUGboat peuvent avoir leur accès restreint
+aux membres du TUG pendant un an après leur publication. Être membre du TUG est utile et n'est pas très cher!
+
+Certains URLs peuvent contenir un suffixe non supporté par votre navigateur Web; dans un tel cas, vous devriez
+essayer d'accéder au document manuellement. Un exemple est~\cite{JMPL1}, dont le suffixe est \suffix{.ps.gz}.
+
+Certains URLs sont trop longs pour certains logiciels; lorsque c'était possible, j'ai raccourci l'URL pour
+n'afficher que le contenu du répertoire, ainsi par exemple pour~\cite{pdftex}, ou en utilisant un URL vers
+l'entrée dans le catalogue (comme pour~\cite{arabi} and~\cite{antomega}); lorsque ce n'était pas possible,
+vous devrez essayer d'accéder manuellement au document.\par\lneed{12}%
+}}
+\fi
+% inclusion graphique centrée verticalement
+% #1=hauteur apparente [0pt] optionnelle, #2=largeur, #3=fichier image
+% \newlength{\hivc}\setlength{\hivc}{0pt}
+% \newcommand{\IVC}[3][0pt]{\parbox[c][#1][c]{#2}{\setlength{\hivc}{#1}\leavevmode\rule[-.5\hivc]{0pt}{\hivc}\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=#2]{#3}}}
+\newcommand{\IVC}[3][0pt]{\parbox[c][#1][c]{#2}{\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,clip,width=#2]{#3}}}
+%
+\renewcommand\citemid{,\nolinebreak[1]}
+\renewcommand\citepunct{,\nolinebreak[1]\hspace{.13em plus .1em minus .1em}}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\usepackage[english2,tight,hints,listfiles]{minitoc}
+\or\relax
+\usepackage[french2,tight,hints,listfiles]{minitoc}
+\fi
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\providecommand{\seename}{\protect\emph{see}}
+\gdef\see#1#2{\protect\emph{see}~#1}
+\or\relax
+\providecommand{\seename}{\protect\textit{voir}}
+\gdef\see#1#2{\protect\emph{voir}~#1}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% NEW INDEX COMMANDS
+% -- packages
+\newcommand{\pack}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}\ipack{#1}}
+\newcommand{\upack}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}}
+\newcommand{\ipack}[1]{\ipackA{#1}\ipackB{#1}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\ipackA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ipackB}[1]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\ipackA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ipackB}[1]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}}
+\fi
+% -- packages with special names (#1=real name, #2=sort)
+\newcommand{\packa}[2]{\protect\textsf{#1}\ipacka{#1}{#2}}
+\newcommand{\upacka}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}}
+\newcommand{\ipacka}[2]{\ipackaA{#1}{#2}\ipackaB{#1}{#2}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\ipackaA}[2]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ipackaB}[2]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\ipackaA}[2]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ipackaB}[2]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}}}
+\fi
+% -- classes
+\newcommand{\class}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}\iclass{#1}}
+\newcommand{\uclass}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}}
+\newcommand{\iclass}[1]{\iclassA{#1}\iclassB{#1}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\iclassA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (class)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\iclassB}[1]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\iclassA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (classe)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\iclassB}[1]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}}
+\fi
+% -- scripts
+\newcommand{\scrp}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iscrp{#1}}
+\newcommand{\uscrp}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\iscrp}[1]{\iscrpA{#1}\iscrpB{#1}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\iscrpA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (script)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\iscrpB}[1]{\index{Scripts=\protect\leavevmode Scripts\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\iscrpA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (script)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\iscrpB}[1]{\index{Scripts=\protect\leavevmode Scripts\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\fi
+% -- tools
+\newcommand{\tool}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}\itool{#1}}
+\newcommand{\utool}[1]{\protect\textsf{#1}}
+\newcommand{\itool}[1]{\itoolA{#1}\itoolB{#1}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\itoolA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (tool)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\itoolB}[1]{\index{Tools=\protect\leavevmode Tools\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\itoolA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (outil)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\itoolB}[1]{\index{Outils=\protect\leavevmode Outils\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}}}
+\fi
+% -- examples
+\newcommand{\exam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iexam{#1}}
+\newcommand{\uexam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\iexam}[1]{\iexamA{#1}\iexamB{#1}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\iexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(example document)}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\iexamB}[1]{\index{Examples=\protect\leavevmode Examples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\iexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(exemple de document)}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\iexamB}[1]{\index{Exemples=\protect\leavevmode Exemples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\fi
+% -- old examples
+\newcommand{\oexam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ioexam{#1}}
+\newcommand{\uoexam}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\ioexam}[1]{\ioexamA{#1}\ioexamB{#1}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\ioexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(old example document)}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ioexamB}[1]{\index{Old Examples=\protect\leavevmode Old Examples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\ioexamA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(ancien exemple de document)}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ioexamB}[1]{\index{Anciens exemples=\protect\leavevmode Anciens exemples\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\fi
+% -- features
+\newcommand{\feat}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ifeat{#1}}
+\newcommand{\ufeat}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\ifeat}[1]{\ifeatA{#1}\ifeatB{#1}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\ifeatA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (feature)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ifeatB}[1]{\index{Features=\protect\leavevmode Features\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\ifeatA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (dispositif)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ifeatB}[1]{\index{Dispositifs=\protect\leavevmode Dispositifs\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- extensions/suffixes
+\newcommand{\suffix}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\isuffix{#1}}
+\newcommand{\usuffix}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\isuffix}[1]{\isuffixA{#1}\isuffixB{#1}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\isuffixA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (extension)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\isuffixB}[1]{\index{Extensions=\protect\leavevmode Extensions\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\isuffixA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (suffixe)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\isuffixB}[1]{\index{Suffixes=\protect\leavevmode Suffixes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- options (minitoc)
+\newcommand{\opt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iopt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\optd}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ioptd{#1}}
+\newcommand{\uopt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\iopt}[1]{\ioptA{#1}\ioptB{#1}}
+\newcommand{\ioptd}[1]{\ioptdA{#1}\ioptdB{#1}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\ioptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (option)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ioptB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\ioptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(default option)}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ioptdB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (default)}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\ioptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (option)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ioptB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\ioptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(option par défaut)}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ioptdB}[1]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (défaut)}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- options (other packages)
+% \newcommand{\optp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}~\protect\textsf{(#2)}\ioptp{#1}{#2}}
+\newcommand{\optp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ioptp{#1}{#2}}
+%\newcommand{\uoptp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}~\protect\textsf{(#2)}}
+\newcommand{\uoptp}[2]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\ioptp}[2]{\ioptpA{#1}{#2}\ioptpB{#1}{#2}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\ioptpA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(\protect\textsf{#2} package)}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ioptpB}[2]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1#2=\protect\texttt{#1}~\textsf{(#2)}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\ioptpA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(paquetage \protect\textsf{#2})}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ioptpB}[2]{\index{Options=\protect\leavevmode Options\hfil\null>#1#2=\protect\texttt{#1}~\textsf{(#2)}}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- language options
+\newcommand{\lopt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ilopt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\loptd}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\iloptd{#1}}
+\newcommand{\ulopt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\ilopt}[1]{\iloptA{#1}\iloptB{#1}}
+\newcommand{\iloptd}[1]{\iloptdA{#1}\iloptdB{#1}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\iloptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(language option)}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\iloptB}[1]{\index{Language options=\protect\leavevmode Language options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\iloptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(default language option)}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\iloptdB}[1]{\index{Language options=\protect\leavevmode Language options\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (default)}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\iloptA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(option de langue)}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\iloptB}[1]{\index{Options de langue=\protect\leavevmode Options de langue\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\newcommand{\iloptdA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} \hbox{(option de langue par défaut)}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\iloptdB}[1]{\index{Options de langue=\protect\leavevmode Options de langue\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bfseries #1} (défaut)}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- names
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\oinameA}[2]{\relax}
+\newcommand{\oinameB}[2]{\relax}
+\newcommand{\inameA}[2]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\inameaA}[3]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\inameB}[2]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}}
+\newcommand{\inameaB}[3]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\oinameA}[2]{\relax}
+\newcommand{\oinameB}[2]{\relax}
+\newcommand{\inameA}[2]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\inameaA}[3]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\inameB}[2]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}}
+\newcommand{\inameaB}[3]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- authors names in bib
+\newcommand{\bname}[3]{\bnameA{#1}{#2}{#3}\bnameB{#1}{#2}{#3}}
+\newcommand{\bnamea}[4]{\bnameaA{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}\bnameaB{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}
+
+\newcommand\sksep{\ensuremath{\hookrightarrow}}% % put before the bib. refs in the index
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\skname}[2]{\sksep\protect\cite{#1}}
+\newcommand{\bnameA}[3]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#3}}}
+\newcommand{\bnameaA}[4]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#4}}}
+\newcommand{\bnameB}[3]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#3}}}
+\newcommand{\bnameaB}[4]{\index{People=\protect\leavevmode People\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#4}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\skname}[2]{\sksep\protect\cite{#1}}
+\newcommand{\bnameA}[3]{\index{#2 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#3}}}
+\newcommand{\bnameaA}[4]{\index{#3 #1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}\hfil\null|skname{#4}}}
+\newcommand{\bnameB}[3]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#2 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#3}}}
+\newcommand{\bnameaB}[4]{\index{Personnes=\protect\leavevmode Personnes\hfil\null>#3 #1=\protect\mbox{\protect\textsc{#2}}, \protect\mbox{\protect\textrm{#1}}|skname{#4}}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- tool names in bib
+\newcommand{\btool}[2]{\btoolA{#1}{#2}\btoolB{#1}{#2}}
+\newcommand{\btoola}[3]{\btoolaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\btoolaB{#1}{#2}{#3}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\btoolA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (tool)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\btoolB}[2]{\index{Tools=\protect\leavevmode Tools\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\btoolaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (tool)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}}
+\newcommand{\btoolaB}[3]{\index{Tools=\protect\leavevmode Tools\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\btoolA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (outil)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\btoolB}[2]{\index{Outils=\protect\leavevmode Outils\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\btoolaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (outil)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}}
+\newcommand{\btoolaB}[3]{\index{Outils=\protect\leavevmode Outils\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- pack names in bib
+\newcommand{\bpack}[2]{\bpackA{#1}{#2}\bpackB{#1}{#2}}
+\newcommand{\bpacka}[3]{\bpackaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\bpackaB{#1}{#2}{#3}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\bpackA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\bpackB}[2]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\bpackaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (package)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}}
+\newcommand{\bpackaB}[3]{\index{Packages=\protect\leavevmode Packages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\bpackA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\bpackB}[2]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\bpackaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (paquetage)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}}
+\newcommand{\bpackaB}[3]{\index{Paquetages=\protect\leavevmode Paquetages\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- class names in bib -- nom, [ nom-tri ], clé-bib
+\newcommand{\bclass}[2]{\bclassA{#1}{#2}\bclassB{#1}{#2}}
+\newcommand{\bclassa}[3]{\bclassaA{#1}{#2}{#3}\bclassaB{#1}{#2}{#3}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\bclassA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (class)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\bclassB}[2]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\bclassaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (class)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}}
+\newcommand{\bclassaB}[3]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\bclassA}[2]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (classe)\hfil\null|skname{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\bclassB}[2]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\bclassaA}[3]{\index{#2=\protect\leavevmode \protect\textsf{#1} (classe)\hfil\null|skname{#3}}}
+\newcommand{\bclassaB}[3]{\index{Classes=\protect\leavevmode Classes\hfil\null>#2=\protect\textsf{#1}|skname{#3}}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- environments
+\newcommand{\env}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ienv{#1}}
+\newcommand{\uenv}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\ienv}[1]{\ienvA{#1}\ienvB{#1}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\ienvA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (environment)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ienvB}[1]{\index{Environments=\protect\leavevmode Environments>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\ienvA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (environnement)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ienvB}[1]{\index{Environnements=\protect\leavevmode Environnements>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- files
+\newcommand{\xfile}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ixfile{#1}}
+\newcommand{\uxfile}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\ixfile}[1]{\ixfileA{#1}\ixfileB{#1}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\ixfileA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (file)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ixfileB}[1]{\index{Files=\protect\leavevmode Files\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\ixfileA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (fichier)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ixfileB}[1]{\index{Fichiers=\protect\leavevmode Fichiers\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- graphic files
+\newcommand{\xgrf}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ixgrf{#1}}
+\newcommand{\uxgrf}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\ixgrf}[1]{\ixgrfA{#1}\ixgrfB{#1}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\ixgrfA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(graphic file)}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ixgrfB}[1]{\index{Graphic files=\protect\leavevmode Graphic files\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\ixgrfA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(fichier graphique)}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ixgrfB}[1]{\index{Fichiers graphiques=\protect\leavevmode Fichiers graphiques\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- flags (graphic) files
+\newcommand{\xgrfl}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\ixgrfl{#1}}
+\newcommand{\uxgrfl}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\ixgrfl}[1]{\ixgrflA{#1}\ixgrflB{#1}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\ixgrflA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(flag file)}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ixgrflB}[1]{\index{Flags files=\protect\leavevmode Flags files\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\ixgrflA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(fichier drapeau)}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\ixgrflB}[1]{\index{Fichiers drapeaux=\protect\leavevmode Fichiers drapeaux\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- .mld /mlo couples
+\newcommand{\xmldo}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1.ml[d{\BAR}o]}\ixfile{#1.mld}\ixfile{#1.mlo}}
+\newcommand{\ixmldo}[1]{\ixfile{#1.mld}\ixfile{#1.mlo}}
+\newcommand{\uxmldo}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1.ml[d{\BAR}o]}}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- depth counters
+\newcommand{\dcnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\idcnt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\udcnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\idcnt}[1]{\idcntA{#1}\idcntB{#1}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\idcntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(depth counter)}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\idcntB}[1]{\index{Depth counters=\protect\leavevmode Depth counters\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\idcntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} \hbox{(compteur de profondeur)}\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\idcntB}[1]{\index{Compteurs de profondeur=\protect\leavevmode Compteurs de profondeur\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- counters
+\newcommand{\cnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\icnt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\ucnt}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand{\icnt}[1]{\icntA{#1}\icntB{#1}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\icntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (counter)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\icntB}[1]{\index{Counters=\protect\leavevmode Counters\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\icntA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (compteur)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\icntB}[1]{\index{Compteurs=\protect\leavevmode Compteurs\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- commands
+\newcommand{\lit}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}} % literal string
+\newcommand{\clit}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs #1}} % literal command string
+\newcommand{\com}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs #1}\icom{#1}}
+\newcommand{\ucom}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs #1}}
+\newcommand{\icom}[1]{\icomA{#1}\icomB{#1}}
+\newcommand{\fkcom}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs[fake]#1}\icom{#1}\icom{fake#1}}
+\newcommand{\ncom}[1]{\protect\texttt{\bs[no]#1}\icom{#1}\icom{no#1}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\icomA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bs #1} (command)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\icomB}[1]{\index{Commands=\protect\leavevmode Commands\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bs #1}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\icomA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{\bs #1} (commande)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\icomB}[1]{\index{Commandes=\protect\leavevmode Commandes\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{\bs #1}}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- messages
+%\newcommand{\mess}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}\imess{#1}}
+%\newcommand{\umess}[1]{\protect\texttt{#1}}
+% \let\Buttonbox\Ovalbox % to be changed easily
+\def\Buttonbox#1{\fbox{\mbox{#1}}} % to be changed easily
+% \def\Buttonbox#1{\keystroke{\mbox{#1}}} % to be changed easily
+\newcommand{\lmess}[1]{\imessA{#1}\imessB{#1}\footnotesize
+ \hyperlink{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}}
+\newcommand{\phmess}{\footnotesize
+ \item[]{\textcolor{white}{\Buttonbox{\phantom{\texttt{M0000}}}}}}
+\newcommand{\RMP}[1]{\reversemarginpar
+  \marginpar[{\raggedleft\strut\footnotesize\hyperlink{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}\texttt{~~}}]{{\raggedright\strut\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\hyperlink{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}}%
+  }\normalmarginpar}
+\newcommand{\NMP}[1]{\normalmarginpar
+  \marginpar[{\raggedleft\Strutt\footnotesize\hypertarget{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}\texttt{~~}}]{{\raggedright\strut\footnotesize\hypertarget{#1}{\Buttonbox{\texttt{#1}}}\texttt{~~}}%
+  }\normalmarginpar}
+\newcommand{\imess}[1]{\imessA{#1}\imessB{#1}\RMP{#1}}
+\newcommand{\jmess}[1]{\imessA{#1}\imessB{#1}\NMP{#1}}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\newcommand{\imessA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (message)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\imessB}[1]{\index{Messages=\protect\leavevmode Messages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\or\relax
+\newcommand{\imessA}[1]{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode \protect\texttt{#1} (message)\hfil\null}}
+\newcommand{\imessB}[1]{\index{Messages=\protect\leavevmode Messages\hfil\null>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}}
+\fi
+\newcommand{\HPH}{\footnotesize\hphantom{\fbox{\texttt{M0000}}}}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% -- Stacked Messages in Margin \SMM{\lmess{W0054}\\ \lmess{W0055}}
+\newcommand{\SMM}[1]{\bgroup%
+    \let\imess\lmess % local redefinition, to avoid stupid errors.
+    \marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}%
+    \protect #1%
+    \end{tabular}}\egroup}
+% -- idem. plus a Z dangerous bend above
+\newcommand{\SMMZ}[1]{\bgroup%
+    \let\imess\lmess % local redefinition, to avoid stupid errors.
+    \marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}%
+    \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127}\hfill\null\\*[3ex]
+    \protect #1%
+    \end{tabular}}\egroup}
+% -- idem. plus a ZZ double dangerous bend above
+\newcommand{\SMMZZ}[1]{\bgroup%
+    \let\imess\lmess % local redefinition, to avoid stupid errors.
+    \marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}%
+    \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127\kern2pt\char127}\hfill\null\\*[3ex]
+    \protect #1%
+    \end{tabular}}\egroup}
+% Redefine \virage and \Virage (beware to the braces!)
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+\renewcommand{\virage}{%
+    \reversemarginpar{\marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}%
+    \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127\kern2pt}\hfill\null\\
+    \HPH
+    \end{tabular}}}\normalmarginpar}
+\renewcommand{\Virage}{%
+    \reversemarginpar{\marginpar{\footnotesize\texttt{~~}\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}%
+    \null\hfill\Strutt\hbox{\manfnt\char127\kern2pt\char127}\hfill\null\\
+    \HPH
+    \end{tabular}}}\normalmarginpar}%
+} %%% ATBEGINDOCUMENT
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\gdef\envname{environment}
+\gdef\envsname{environments}
+\gdef\Envsname{Environments}
+\gdef\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Change history}}%
+                 \markboth{{Change history}}{{Change history}}}
+%\def\generalname{General}
+\gdef\generalname{}
+\or\relax
+\gdef\envname{environnement}
+\gdef\envsname{environnements}
+\gdef\Envsname{Environnements}
+\def\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Historique des modifications}}%
+                 \markboth{{Historique des modifications}}{{Historique des modifications}}}
+%\def\generalname{G\'en\'eral}
+\gdef\generalname{}
+\fi
+\gdef\generalname{} %ESSAI
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\setlength{\ptcindent}{0pt}
+\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt}
+\makeatletter
+\InputIfFileExists{ltxdoc.cfg}%
+{\typeout{*************************************^^J%
+          * Local config file ltxdoc.cfg used^^J%
+          *************************************}}
+{}
+\RequirePackage{doc}
+\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
+\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi
+\columnseprule \z@  \columnsep 35\p@
+% \twocolumn[\glossary@prologue]%
+\onecolumn \glossary@prologue%JPFD
+\raggedright
+\GlossaryParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}
+{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
+\AtBeginDocument{\MakeShortVerb{\|}}
+\AtBeginDocument{\providecommand{\phantomsection}{}}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmtt}{bx}{n}{<-> ssub * cmtt/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontFamily{OMS}{cmtt}{\skewchar\font 48}  % '60
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmtt}{m}{n}{<-> ssub * cmsy/m/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OMS}{cmtt}{bx}{n}{<-> ssub * cmsy/b/n}{}
+\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{cmss}{m}{it}{<->ssub*cmss/m/sl}{}
+\CodelineNumbered
+\DisableCrossrefs
+\setlength{\textwidth}{375pt} % was 355pt
+\newlength{\winf}\setlength{\winf}{\textwidth} % width in frame
+\newlength{\winp}\setlength{\winp}{\textwidth} % width in minipage
+\addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxrule}
+\addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxsep}
+\addtolength\marginparwidth{30pt}
+\addtolength\oddsidemargin{20pt}
+\addtolength\evensidemargin{20pt}
+\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
+\def\cmd#1{\cs{\expandafter\cmd@to@cs\string#1}}
+\def\cmd@to@cs#1#2{\char\number`#2\relax}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\cs[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}}
+\providecommand\marg[1]{%
+  {\ttfamily\char`\{}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily\char`\}}}
+\providecommand\oarg[1]{%
+  {\ttfamily[}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily]}}
+\providecommand\parg[1]{%
+  {\ttfamily(}\meta{#1}{\ttfamily)}}
+\def\oc@scan#1{%
+  \ifx\oc@bslash#1%
+                      \egroup\let\next\oc@bslash\else
+  \ifcat a\noexpand#1%
+                      #1\let\next\oc@scan\else
+  \ifx\oc@percent#1%
+                      \def\next{\char`\%\egroup}%
+  \else
+                      #1\let\next\egroup
+  \fi\fi\fi\next}
+\def\oc@bslash{\bgroup\oc@ttf\char`\\\oc@scan}%
+\def\oc@verb#1{%
+  \catcode`#1\active
+  \uccode`\~`#1%
+  \uppercase{\def~{{\oc@ttf\char`#1}}}}
+\begingroup
+  \obeyspaces%
+  \catcode`\/=\catcode`\\
+  /catcode`/\/active
+  /catcode`<=/catcode`{%
+  /catcode`>=/catcode`}%
+  /catcode`/{/active%
+  /catcode`/}/active%
+  /gdef/oldc< \end{oldcomments}>%
+  /gdef/begmac<    \begin{macrocode}>%
+  /gdef/obs</def <</oc@ttf/ >>>%
+/endgroup%
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\/=\catcode`\\
+  \catcode`\\=13
+  /catcode`/|=/catcode`/%
+  /catcode`/%=13
+  /gdef/oldcomments{|
+    /makeatletter
+    /let/do/oc@verb/dospecials
+    /frenchspacing/@vobeyspaces/obs
+    /raggedright
+    /oc@verb/>|
+    /oc@verb/<|
+    /let\/oc@bslash
+    /let%/oc@percent
+    /obeylines
+    /parindent/z@
+    /ttfamily/expandafter/let/expandafter/oc@ttf/the/font
+    /rmfamily
+    /hfuzz/maxdimen
+    }
+/endgroup
+\begingroup
+  \sloppy%
+  \obeylines%
+  \gdef\oc@percent#1^^M{%
+    \ifvmode%
+    \def\commentline{#1}%
+    \ifx\commentline\oldc%
+    \end{oldcomments}%
+    \else%
+    \ifx\commentline\begmac%
+    \begin{macrocode}%
+    \else%
+    \leavevmode%
+    #1^^M%
+    \fi\fi%
+    \else%
+    {\oc@ttf\char`\%}#1^^M%
+    \fi}%
+\endgroup%
+% \@addtoreset{CodelineNo}{part}
+\def\partname{File}
+\newcommand*{\DocInclude}[1]{%
+  \relax
+  \clearpage
+  \docincludeaux
+  \IfFileExists{#1.fdd}{\def\currentfile{#1.fdd}}{\def\currentfile{#1.dtx}}%
+  \ifnum\@auxout=\@partaux\relax
+    \@latexerr{\string\include\space cannot be nested}\@eha
+  \else \@docinclude#1 \fi}
+\def\@docinclude#1 {\clearpage
+\if@filesw \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\@input{#1.aux}}\fi
+\@tempswatrue\if@partsw \@tempswafalse\edef\@tempb{#1}\@for
+\@tempa:=\@partlist\do{\ifx\@tempa\@tempb\@tempswatrue\fi}\fi
+\if@tempswa \let\@auxout\@partaux \if@filesw
+\immediate\openout\@partaux #1.aux
+\immediate\write\@partaux{\relax}\fi
+\let\@ltxdoc@PrintIndex\PrintIndex
+\let\PrintIndex\relax
+\let\@ltxdoc@PrintChanges\PrintChanges
+%\let\PrintChanges\relax
+\let\@ltxdoc@theglossary\theglossary
+\let\@ltxdoc@endtheglossary\endtheglossary
+\part{\currentfile}%
+  {\let\ttfamily\relax
+  \xdef\filekey{\filekey, \thepart={\ttfamily\currentfile}}}%
+\DocInput{\currentfile}%
+\let\PrintIndex\@ltxdoc@PrintIndex
+\let\PrintChanges\@ltxdoc@PrintChanges
+\let\theglossary\@ltxdoc@theglossary
+\let\endtheglossary\@ltxdoc@endtheglossary
+\clearpage
+\@writeckpt{#1}\if@filesw \immediate\closeout\@partaux \fi
+\else\@nameuse{cp@#1}\fi\let\@auxout\@mainaux}
+\gdef\codeline@wrindex#1{\if@filesw
+        \immediate\write\@indexfile
+            {\string\indexentry{#1}%
+            {\filesep\number\c@CodelineNo}}\fi}%
+\let\filesep\@empty
+\def\aalph#1{\@aalph{\csname c@#1\endcsname}}
+\def\@aalph#1{%
+  \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or
+         j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or
+         t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or y\or z\or A\or B\or C\or
+         D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or
+         N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or
+         X\or Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}
+\def\docincludeaux{%
+  \def\thepart{\aalph{part}}\def\filesep{\thepart-}%
+  \let\filekey\@gobble
+  \g@addto@macro\index@prologue{%
+    \gdef\@oddfoot{\parbox{\textwidth}{\strut\footnotesize
+       \raggedright{\bfseries File Key:} \filekey}}%
+    \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}%
+  \global\let\docincludeaux\relax
+ \gdef\@oddfoot{%
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname ver@\currentfile\endcsname\relax
+    File \thepart: {\ttfamily\currentfile} %
+   \else
+    \GetFileInfo{\currentfile}%
+    File \thepart: {\ttfamily\filename} %
+    Date: \filedate\ %
+    Version \fileversion
+    \fi
+    \hfill\thepage}%
+ \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}%
+\def\task#1#2{}
+% ``Change History'' in TOC
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\gdef\envname{environment}
+\gdef\envsname{environments}
+\gdef\Envsname{Environments}
+\gdef\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Change history}}%
+                 \markboth{{Change history}}{{Change history}}}
+%\def\generalname{General}
+\gdef\generalname{}
+\or\relax
+\gdef\envname{environnement}
+\gdef\envsname{environnements}
+\gdef\Envsname{Environnements}
+\def\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Historique des modifications}}%
+                 \markboth{{Historique des modifications}}{{Historique des modifications}}}
+%\def\generalname{G\'en\'eral}
+\gdef\generalname{}
+\fi
+\gdef\generalname{} %ESSAI
+\let\sv@glossary@prologue\glossary@prologue
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\def\glossary@prologue{\sv@glossary@prologue\relax\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Change History}}
+\or\relax
+\def\glossary@prologue{\sv@glossary@prologue\relax\phantomsection\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Historique des modifications}}
+\fi
+%% redefine \glossaryentry
+\def\nouse#1{\mbox{}}
+%%%
+% morefloats.sty ...
+% \iffalse
+%% This is morefloats.sty as of 27-July-1990
+%% Don Hosek, Quixote <dhosek@ymir.claremont.edu>
+% \fi
+%
+% The task at hand is to increase \LaTeX's current limit of 18 unprocessed
+% floats in memory at once to 36. An examination of latex.tex reveals that
+% this is accomplished by allocating an insert register for each unprocessed
+% float. A quick check of lplain.lis reveals that there is room, in fact,
+% for 230 additional unprocessed floats, but \TeX's main memory would be
+% exhausted long before that happened.
+%
+% First we allocate the additional insert registers needed:
+\newinsert\bx@S
+\newinsert\bx@T
+\newinsert\bx@U
+\newinsert\bx@V
+\newinsert\bx@W
+\newinsert\bx@X
+\newinsert\bx@Y
+\newinsert\bx@Z
+\newinsert\bx@AA
+\newinsert\bx@BB
+\newinsert\bx@CC
+\newinsert\bx@DD
+\newinsert\bx@EE
+\newinsert\bx@FF
+\newinsert\bx@GG
+\newinsert\bx@HH
+\newinsert\bx@II
+\newinsert\bx@JJ
+\newinsert\bx@KK
+\newinsert\bx@LL
+\newinsert\bx@MM
+\newinsert\bx@NN
+\newinsert\bx@OO
+\newinsert\bx@PP
+\newinsert\bx@QQ
+\newinsert\bx@RR
+\newinsert\bx@SS
+\newinsert\bx@TT
+\newinsert\bx@UU
+\newinsert\bx@VV
+\newinsert\bx@WW
+\newinsert\bx@XX
+\newinsert\bx@YY
+\newinsert\bx@ZZ
+\newinsert\bx@AAA
+\newinsert\bx@BBB
+%
+% That accomplished, the next step is to define the macro \verb+\@freelist+
+% which is merely a list of the box registers each preceded by \verb+\@elt+.
+% This approach allows processing of the list to be done far more efficiently.
+% A similar approach is used by Mittelbach \& Sch\"opf's \texttt{doc.sty}~\cite{doc} to
+% keep track of control sequences which should not be indexed.
+\gdef\@freelist{\@elt\bx@A\@elt\bx@B\@elt\bx@C\@elt\bx@D\@elt\bx@E
+               \@elt\bx@F\@elt\bx@G\@elt\bx@H\@elt\bx@I\@elt\bx@J
+                \@elt\bx@K\@elt\bx@L\@elt\bx@M\@elt\bx@N
+                \@elt\bx@O\@elt\bx@P\@elt\bx@Q\@elt\bx@R
+                \@elt\bx@S\@elt\bx@T\@elt\bx@U\@elt\bx@V
+                \@elt\bx@W\@elt\bx@X\@elt\bx@Y\@elt\bx@Z
+                \@elt\bx@AA\@elt\bx@BB\@elt\bx@CC\@elt\bx@DD
+                \@elt\bx@EE\@elt\bx@FF\@elt\bx@GG\@elt\bx@HH
+                \@elt\bx@II\@elt\bx@JJ\@elt\bx@KK\@elt\bx@LL
+                \@elt\bx@MM\@elt\bx@NN\@elt\bx@OO\@elt\bx@PP
+                \@elt\bx@QQ\@elt\bx@RR\@elt\bx@SS\@elt\bx@TT
+                \@elt\bx@UU\@elt\bx@VV\@elt\bx@WW\@elt\bx@XX
+                \@elt\bx@YY\@elt\bx@ZZ\@elt\bx@AAA\@elt\bx@BBB}
+\makeatother
+%%%
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\CodelineIndex
+% \PageIndex
+% \RecordChanges
+\input{minitoc.pre}
+\providecommand{\capstart}{\empty}
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\usepackage{fancybox}
+% \usepackage[english]{keystroke} % ERRORS
+\or\relax
+\froff\usepackage{fancybox}\fron
+% \usepackage[french]{keystroke}  % ERRORS
+\fi
+%
+%%%% FANCYHDR
+% \usepackage{fancyhdr}
+%%%% FANCYHDR
+\renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{%
+ \markboth{[\thechapter]~---~#1}{[\thechapter]~---~#1}}
+\providecommand{\hyperlink}[2]{\empty}
+\providecommand{\hypertarget}[2]{\empty}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \makeatletter
+% \def\SpecialIndex#1{\@bsphack\special@index{\expandafter\@gobble
+%                                       \string#1\actualchar
+%       \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar\string#1\verbatimchar}%
+%     \@esphack}
+% \def\SpecialMainIndex#1{\@bsphack\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar \string\main}%
+%                         \@esphack}
+% \def\SpecialIndex@#1#2{%
+%    \@SpecialIndexHelper@#1\@nil
+%    \def\@tempb{ }%
+%    \ifcat \@tempb\@gtempa
+%       \special@index{\quotechar\space\actualchar
+%                      \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar
+%                      \quotechar\bslash\quotechar\space\verbatimchar#2}%
+%    \else
+%      \def\@tempb##1##2\relax{\ifx\relax##2\relax
+%           \def\@tempc{\special@index{\quotechar##1\actualchar
+%                       \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar
+%                       \quotechar\bslash\quotechar##1\verbatimchar#2}}%
+%         \else
+%           \def\@tempc{\special@index{##1##2\actualchar
+%                        \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar
+%                        \bslash##1##2\verbatimchar#2}}%
+%         \fi}%
+%      \expandafter\@tempb\@gtempa\relax
+%      \@tempc
+%    \fi}
+ \makeatletter
+ \def\SpecialMainEnvIndex#1{\@bsphack\special@index{%
+                                       #1\actualchar
+                                       {\string\ttfamily\space#1}
+                                          (\envname)%
+                                       \encapchar \string\main}%
+     \special@index{\Envsname\levelchar{%
+                    \string\ttfamily\space#1}\encapchar
+            \string\main}\@esphack}
+ \def\SpecialUsageIndex#1{\@bsphack
+    {\let\special@index\index\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar \string\usage}}%
+    \@esphack}
+ \def\SpecialEnvIndex#1{\@bsphack
+     \index{#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}
+            (\envname)\encapchar \string\usage}%
+     \index{Envsname\levelchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}\encapchar
+            \string\usage}\@esphack}
+% %\@ifundefined{main}{\def\main#1{\underline{#1}}}{}
+% %\@ifundefined{usage}{\def\usage#1{\textit{#1}}}{}
+\gdef\main#1{\textsf{#1}}
+\gdef\usage#1{\textit{#1}}
+% \gdef\hyperpage#1{\textbf{#1}}
+ \makeatother
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% NEW ENV
+ \makeatletter
+ \def\SpecialMainEnvIndex#1{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (\envname)\hfil\null}%
+     \index{\Envsname=\protect\leavevmode\Envsname>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+                            }
+%
+ \def\SpecialUsageIndex#1{\@bsphack
+    {\let\special@index\index\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar \string\usage}}%
+    \@esphack}
+ \def\SpecialEnvIndex#1{\index{#1=\protect\leavevmode\protect\texttt{#1} (\envname)\hfil\null}%
+     \index{\Envsname=\protect\leavevmode\Envsname>#1=\protect\texttt{#1}}%
+                            }
+% %\@ifundefined{main}{\def\main#1{\underline{#1}}}{}
+% %\@ifundefined{usage}{\def\usage#1{\textit{#1}}}{}
+\let\ohyperpage\hyperpage
+\gdef\main#1{\textbf{#1}}
+\gdef\usage#1{\textsf{#1}}
+\gdef\hyperpage#1{\textit{\ohyperpage{#1}}}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+  \includecomment{ENGLISH}
+  \excludecomment{FRENCH}
+  \typeout{ENGLISH DOC}
+\or\relax
+  \excludecomment{ENGLISH}
+  \includecomment{FRENCH}
+  \typeout{FRENCH DOC}
+\else\relax
+  \includecomment{ENGLISH}
+  \excludecomment{FRENCH}
+  \typeout{BAD LANGUAGE: ENGLISH DOC BY DEFAULT}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+  \setcounter{GlossaryColumns}{1}
+\def\ABK{\penalty-1\xspace}
+\def\NL{\mbox{}\hfill\mbox{}\\}
+\def\NC{\penalty-1\hspace{2em}\P~}
+\let\origdoublepage\cleardoublepage
+\newcommand{\clearemptydoublepage}{%
+  \clearpage
+    {\pagestyle{empty}\origdoublepage}%
+    }
+\let\cleardoublepage\clearemptydoublepage
+\interfootnotelinepenalty=9999
+\let\svfinalhyphendemerits\finalhyphendemerits
+\finalhyphendemerits=\maxdimen
+\lefthyphenmin=3
+\righthyphenmin=3
+%%% pb \envname
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\gdef\envname{environment}
+\gdef\envsname{environments}
+\gdef\Envsname{Environments}
+\gdef\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Change history}}%
+                 \markboth{{Change history}}{{Change history}}}
+%\def\generalname{General}
+\gdef\generalname{}
+\or\relax
+\gdef\envname{environnement}
+\gdef\envsname{environnements}
+\gdef\Envsname{Environnements}
+\def\glossary@prologue{\section*{{Historique des modifications}}%
+                 \markboth{{Historique des modifications}}{{Historique des modifications}}}
+%\def\generalname{G\'en\'eral}
+\gdef\generalname{}
+\fi
+%%% fixed notes
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FZ}{\texttt{O}~and~\texttt{o} are the letter~\texttt{O}, \texttt{0}~is the zero digit.}
+\or\relax
+\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FZ}{\texttt{O}~et~\texttt{o} sont la lettre~\texttt{O}, \texttt{0}~est le chiffre zéro.}
+\fi
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FAC}{Spoken in Acadia and some parts of the south
+of the USA, like Louisiane.}
+\or\relax
+\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FAC}{Parlée en Acadie et dans certaines parties du
+sud des États-Unis, comme la Louisiane; voir~\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Français_cadien}\,.}
+\fi
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FARSINOTE}{By \protect\name{Mohammad}{Ghodsi} (\texttt{ghodsi@rose.ipm.ac.ir}) and the
+\upack{Farsi\TeX} Project Group. See the \upack{Farsi\TeX} site at~\url{http://www.farsitex.org}}
+\or\relax
+\froff\DeclareFixedFootnote*{\FARSINOTE}{Par \protect\name{Mohammad}{Ghodsi} (\texttt{ghodsi@rose.ipm.ac.ir}) et le
+\upack{Farsi\TeX} Project Group. Voir le site de \upack{Farsi\TeX} à~\url{http://www.farsitex.org}}\fron
+\fi
+\ifx\KOMAScript\undefined%
+  \DeclareRobustCommand{\KOMAScript}{\textsf{K\kern.05em O\kern.05em M\kern.05em A\kern.1em-\kern.1em Script}}
+\fi
+\ifx\PLaTeX\undefined
+\makeatletter
+\DeclareRobustCommand\PLaTeX{%   after latex.dtx
+        P\kern-.08em L\kern-.36em
+        {\setbox0\hbox{T}%
+         \vbox to\ht0{\hbox{%
+                            \csname S@\f@size\endcsname
+                            \fontsize\sf@size\z@
+                            \math@fontsfalse\selectfont
+                            A}
+                      \vss}%
+        }%
+        \kern-.15em
+        \TeX\@}%
+\makeatother
+\fi
+\def\PLaTeXe{P\LaTeXe}
+\def\quocngu{Qu\'{\^o}c Ng\~u\kern-.42ex\raisebox{.07ex}{\footnotesize'}}
+%%%% Strings by language
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\def\LLL{\mbox{LANGUAGE}}
+\def\OFFSET{\mbox{OFFSET}}
+\def\NB{\mbox{NUMBER}}
+\def\NNN{\mbox{LINE}}
+\def\PREPA{\mbox{PREPARATION}}
+\def\CCC{\mbox{CLASS}}
+\def\INAME{\mbox{INTERNAL\_NAME}}
+\def\SEQ{\mbox{SEQUENCE}}
+\def\NTITLE{\mbox{NEW\_TITLE}}
+\def\FILE{\mbox{FILE}}
+\def\CTR{\mbox{COUNTER}}
+\def\VAL{\mbox{VALUE}}
+\def\EXTEN{\mbox{EXTENSION}}
+\def\STRING{\mbox{STRING}}
+\def\COMMAND{\mbox{COMMAND}}
+\def\PACK{\mbox{PACK}}
+\or\relax
+\def\LLL{\mbox{LANGUE}}
+\def\OFFSET{\mbox{DÉPLACEMENT}}
+\def\NB{\mbox{NOMBRE}}
+\def\NNN{\mbox{LIGNE}}
+\def\PREPA{\mbox{PRÉPARATION}}
+\def\CCC{\mbox{CLASSE}}
+\def\INAME{\mbox{NOM\_INTERNE}}
+\def\SEQ{\mbox{SÉQUENCE}}
+\def\NTITLE{\mbox{NOUVEAU\_TITRE}}
+\def\FILE{\mbox{FICHIER}}
+\def\CTR{\mbox{COMPTEUR}}
+\def\VAL{\mbox{VALEUR}}
+\def\EXTEN{\mbox{SUFFIXE}}
+\def\STRING{\mbox{CHAÎNE}}
+\def\COMMAND{\mbox{COMMANDE}}
+\def\PACK{\mbox{PAQUETAGE}}
+\fi
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% On float pages, push the floats to the top
+\makeatletter
+\setlength{\@fptop}{\topskip}
+\addtolength{\@fptop}{-10pt}
+\setlength{\@fpsep}{1.5\baselineskip plus 0fil}
+\setlength{\@fpbot}{0pt plus 1fill}
+\makeatother
+\usepackage{dblaccnt} % here!
+\def\magicminitoc{\columnwidth=\linewidth\null\hfilneg\hspace*{-\itemindent}\hspace*{-\leftmargin}\hspace*{-\labelwidth}\minitoc\hfill\null}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newsavebox{\Citname}% See TLC2 p 849
+\newenvironment{Citation}[1]%
+  {\sbox\Citname{#1}\unskip\noindent}%
+  {\null\hspace*{\fill}\nolinebreak[1]%
+   \quad\hspace*{\fill}%
+   \finalhyphendemerits=0\relax
+   \usebox{\Citname}}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newsavebox{\BMTC}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% Load hypernat.sty to compress citations; beware to the catcode of ``:''.
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\IfFileExists{hypernat.sty}{\usepackage{hypernat}}{}
+\or\relax
+\froff\IfFileExists{hypernat.sty}{\usepackage{hypernat}}{}\fron
+\fi
+\begin{document}
+\pagestyle{headings}
+% \setcounter{lofdepth}{2}
+% \mtcsetdepth{minilof}{2}
+\raggedbottom
+\addtolength{\marginparsep}{.5em}%ESSAI
+\setlength{\marginparpush}{1.0ex}%
+% % FANCYHDR
+% \renewcommand{\chaptermark}[1]{%
+%  \markboth{[\thechapter]~---~#1}{[\thechapter]~---~#1}}
+% \pagestyle{fancy}
+% \fancyhf{} % RAZ
+% %\newlength{\fancyoff}\setlength{\fancyoff}{\marginparwidth}\addtolength{\fancyoff}{\marginparsep}
+% \newlength{\fancyoff}\setlength{\fancyoff}{\leftmargin}
+% \fancyheadoffset[RO,LE]{\fancyoff}
+% \fancyhead[RO]{\large\bfseries\upshape\thepage}
+% \fancyhead[RE]{\large\bfseries\upshape\thepage}
+% \fancyhead[LO]{\large\bfseries\upshape\leftmark}
+% \fancyhead[LE]{\large\bfseries\upshape\leftmark}
+% \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{0.4pt}
+% \renewcommand{\footrulewidth}{0pt}
+% \addtolength{\headheight}{2pt}
+% % FANCYHDR
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\let\fron\relax
+\let\froff\relax
+\selectlanguage{english}\nonfrenchspacing
+    \def\reftextfaceafter {on the \reftextvario{facing}{next} page}%
+    \def\reftextfacebefore{on the \reftextvario{facing}{preceding} page}%
+    \def\reftextafter     {on the \reftextvario{next}{following} page}%
+    \def\reftextbefore    {on the \reftextvario{page before}{preceding page}}%
+    \def\reftextcurrent   {on \reftextvario{this}{this} page}%
+%%    \def\reftextcurrent   {\relax}%
+    \def\reftextfaraway#1{on page~\pageref{#1}}%
+    \def\reftextpagerange#1#2{on pages~\pageref{#1}--\pageref{#2}}%
+    \def\reftextlabelrange#1#2{\ref{#1} to~\ref{#2}}%
+\or\relax
+\fron\selectlanguage{french}\frenchspacing
+    \renewcommand{\listfigurename}{Liste des figures}%
+    \renewcommand{\listtablename}{Liste des tableaux}%
+    \renewcommand\figurename{{\scshape Figure}}% JPFD (je n'aime pas Fig.)
+    \renewcommand\tablename{{\scshape Tableau}}% JPFD (je n'aime pas Tab.)
+    \def\reftextfaceafter {page \reftextvario{ci-contre}{ci-contre}}%
+    \def\reftextfacebefore{page \reftextvario{ci-contre}{ci-contre}}%
+    \def\reftextafter     {page suivante}%
+    \def\reftextbefore    {page pr\'ec\'edente}%
+    \def\reftextcurrent   {sur cette page}%
+%%    \def\reftextcurrent   {\relax}%
+    \def\reftextfaraway#1{page~\pageref{#1}}%
+    \def\reftextpagerange#1#2{pages~\pageref{#1}--\pageref{#2}}%
+    \def\reftextlabelrange#1#2{\ref{#1} \`a~\ref{#2}}%
+\fi
+%% small in index
+\let\svtheindex\theindex
+%% preface of index
+  \setlength{\IndexMin}{.95\textheight}%
+  \addtolength{\IndexMin}{-5pt}%
+\ifcase\LANG\relax
+\long\def\Indexhead{In this index, italic style numbers (\textcolor{red}{\textit{123}}) are page numbers
+(and hyperlinks, thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}), normal roman numbers
+(123) are code line
+references for usage, bold roman numbers (\textbf{123}) are code line references for definitions;
+colored numbers in square brackets, like this:~{\sksep}\cite{minitoc}, are bibliographic references, eventually
+sorted and compressed.
+
+The names of commands, environments, files, suffixes, options, features, messages identifiers\,\footnote{The
+messages identifiers appear in the right margin of the text, near the points of usage.}, and languages,
+are in \texttt{typewriter} font
+(\textbf{\texttt{bold}} for default options or the default language).
+The names of tools, packages and classes are in \textsf{sans serif} font.
+The people names are in \textrm{roman} for the first names, in \textsc{Small Caps} for the family names,
+separated by a comma, the
+family name first\,\footnote{For some oriental names (like japanese, korean, vietnamese or indian names),
+it is sometimes difficult to know which is the first or the last
+name.}, like in ``\textsc{Lamport},~Leslie'' in the index.%
+
+Some commands (like the internal names of language specific letters) are not indexed.
+
+\noindent{\makeatletter\usebox{\BMTC}}
+%
+\par\bigskip}%
+\or\relax
+\long\def\Indexhead{Dans cet index, les nombres en italique (\textcolor{red}{\textit{123}}) sont des numéros de pages
+(et des hyperliens, grâce à~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}),
+les nombres en fonte romaine normale (123) sont des références à~des lignes de code d'utilisation,
+les nombres en fonte romaine grasse (\textbf{123}) sont des références à~des lignes de code de définition;
+les nombres colorés entre crochets carrés, comme ceci:~{\sksep}\cite{minitoc-fr}, sont des références bibliographiques,
+éventuellement triées et compressées.
+
+Les noms des commandes, environnements, fichiers, suffixes, options, dispositifs, identificateurs de messages\,\footnote{Les
+identificateurs de messages apparaissent dans la marge droite du texte, près des points d'utilisation.} et
+langues sont en fonte de \texttt{machine à~écrire} (\textbf{\texttt{grasse}} pour les options et la langue par défaut).
+Les noms des outils, des paquetages et des classes sont en fonte \textsf{sans empattement}.
+Les noms de personnes sont en \textrm{romain} pour les prénoms, en \textsc{Petites Capitales}
+pour les noms de familles, séparés par
+une virgule, le nom de famille en premier\,\footnote{Pour certains noms orientaux (par exemple, japonais, coréens,
+vietnamiens ou indiens), il est parfois difficile de savoir quel est le prénom ou le nom de famille.},
+comme dans «~\textsc{Lamport},~Leslie~» dans l'index.%
+
+Certaines commandes (comme les noms internes de lettres spécifiques de certaines langues) ne sont pas indexées.
+
+\noindent{\makeatletter\usebox{\BMTC}}
+%
+\par\bigskip}%
+\fi
+\makeatletter
+   \def\subitem{\@idxitem{1}\hspace*{15pt}}%
+   \def\subsubitem{\@idxitem{2}\hspace*{30pt}}%
+\makeatother
+%% \def\theindex{\svtheindex\small\setlength{\columnseprule}{0pt}\setlength{\columnsep}{45pt}\sloppy}
+\makeatletter
+\renewenvironment{theindex}{%
+   \columnsep=2.1em%
+   \def\item{\@idxitem{0}\relax}%
+   \def\subitem{\@idxitem{1}\relax\hspace*{15pt}}%
+   \def\subsubitem{\@idxitem{2}\relax\hspace*{30pt}}%
+   \begin{multicols}{2}[\chapter*{\indexname}\Indexhead][10\baselineskip]%
+   \mtcaddchapter[\indexname]%
+   \@mkboth{\indexname}{\indexname}%
+   \small\setlength{\columnseprule}{0pt}%
+   \setlength{\parskip}{0pt}%
+   \setlength{\parsep}{0pt}%
+   \setlength{\columnsep}{2.1em}%
+   \sloppy\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}\thispagestyle{plain}\pagestyle{myheadings}\def\item{\@idxitem{0}}%
+%%   \raggedcolumns
+   \setcounter{collectmore}{-1}% Not perfect, but acceptable.
+   \raggedbottom}%
+   {\end{multicols}}
+\makeatother
+\nonfrenchspacing
+\mtcsetformat{minitoc}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}
+\mtcsetformat{minilof}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}
+\mtcsetformat{minilot}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}
+\raggedbottom
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% \def\MakePrivateLetters{\catcode`\^^?=11}
+  \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+  \setcounter{GlossaryColumns}{1}
+  \setlength{\IndexMin}{.95\textheight}
+  \addtolength{\IndexMin}{-5pt}
+  \IndexPrologue{\section*{Index}%
+            \markboth{Index}{Index}%
+            Numbers written in italic refer to the page
+            where the corresponding entry is described;
+            numbers underlined refer to the
+              code line of the
+            definition; numbers in roman refer to the
+              code lines
+            where the entry is used.}
+  \DocInput{minitoc.dtx}
+  \clearpage
+%%  \begin{SMOOTH}
+  \xspaceskip=0.6em plus 0.1em minus .2em % tiny extensible
+\def\pfill{\unskip\hspace*{1ex}\dotfill\penalty500\strut\nobreak
+               \dotfil\hspace*{1ex}\ignorespaces}%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \begin{RaggedRight}
+%              \PrintChanges
+% \end{RaggedRight}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%  \end{SMOOTH}
+  \flushbottom
+  \IfFileExists{natbib.sty}{\citeindexfalse}{}
+  \setcounter{secnumdepth}{0}
+  \mtcsetrules{minitoc}{on}
+  \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\kern1sp\vspace*{-.5ex}\relax\begin{multicols}{4}[\kern-2.ex]\raggedcolumns}%
+  \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\relax\vspace{-1.5ex}}%
+  \setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.75em}%
+  \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.75em}%
+  \setlength{\awidth}{\textwidth}
+  \addtolength{\awidth}{-1pt}
+%  \addtolength{\awidth}{2\fboxrule}
+%  \addtolength{\awidth}{2\fboxsep}
+%  \def\kernafterminitoc{\kern-.5\baselineskip\kern.5ex}
+  \def\kernafterminitoc{\kern-1\baselineskip\kern.5ex}
+  \makeatletter\savebox{\BMTC}{\relax{\begin{minipage}[t]{\awidth}\minitoc[l]\end{minipage}}}\makeatother%
+  \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty}%
+  \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty}%
+  \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt}%
+  \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{0pt}%
+  \begin{mtchideinmaintoc}[0]
+  \PrintIndex
+  \end{mtchideinmaintoc}
+  \AtEndDocument{\setcounter{tocdepth}{6}}
+  \mtcfixindex[chapter]
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \CheckSum{0}
+%
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+%
+% \lefthyphenmin=3
+% \righthyphenmin=3
+% \hyphenation{Mittelbach}
+% \hyphenation{Jackowski}
+% \hyphenation{Impatient}
+% \hyphenation{make-index}
+% \hyphenation{hyper-link}
+%
+% \DoNotIndex{\@,\@@par,\@beginparpenalty,\@empty}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@flushglue,\@gobble,\@input}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@makefnmark,\@makeother,\@maketitle}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@namedef,\@ne,\@spaces,\@tempa}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@tempb,\@tempswafalse,\@tempswatrue}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@thanks,\@thefnmark,\@topnum}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@@,\@elt,\@forloop,\@fortmp,\@gtempa,\@totalleftmargin}
+% \DoNotIndex{\",\/,\@ifundefined,\@nil,\@verbatim,\@vobeyspaces}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\|,\~,\ ,\active,\advance,\aftergroup,\begingroup,\bgroup}
+% \DoNotIndex{\|,\~,\ ,\active,\advance}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\mathcal,\csname,\def,\documentstyle,\dospecials,\edef}
+% \DoNotIndex{\mathcal,\csname,\def,\documentstyle,\dospecials}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\egroup}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\else,\endcsname,\endgroup,\endinput,\endtrivlist}
+% \DoNotIndex{\else,\endcsname,\endinput,\endtrivlist}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\fi,\fnsymbol,\futurelet,\gdef,\global}
+% \DoNotIndex{\fi,\fnsymbol,\futurelet}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hbox,\hss,\if,\if@inlabel,\if@tempswa,\if@twocolumn}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\ifcase}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\ifcat,\iffalse,\ifx,\ignorespaces,\index,\input,\item}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ifcat,\ignorespaces,\index,\item}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\jobname,\kern,\leavevmode,\leftskip,\let,\llap,\lower}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\leavevmode,\leftskip,\let,\llap,\lower}
+% \DoNotIndex{\let,\llap,\lower}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\next,\newpage,\nobreak,\noexpand,\nonfrenchspacing}
+% \DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\next,\newpage\nonfrenchspacing}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\obeylines,\or,\protect,\raggedleft,\rightskip,\rm,\sc}
+% \DoNotIndex{\obeylines,\or,\raggedleft,\rm,\sc}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\setbox,\setcounter,\small,\space,\string,\strut}
+% \DoNotIndex{\setbox,\small,\space,\string,\strut}
+% \DoNotIndex{\strutbox}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\thefootnote,\thispagestyle,\topmargin,\trivlist,\tt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\thefootnote,\topmargin,\trivlist,\tt}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\twocolumn,\typeout,\vss,\vtop,\xdef,\z@}
+% \DoNotIndex{\twocolumn,\typeout,\vss,\vtop,\z@}
+% \DoNotIndex{\,,\@bsphack,\@esphack,\@noligs,\@vobeyspaces,\@xverbatim}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\`,\catcode,\end,\escapechar,\frenchspacing,\glossary}
+% \DoNotIndex{\`,\end,\escapechar,\frenchspacing,\glossary}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hangindent,\hfil,\hfill,\hskip,\hspace,\ht,\it,\langle}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\leaders,\long,\makelabel,\marginpar,\reversemarginpar,\markboth,\mathcode}
+% \DoNotIndex{\leaders,\long,\makelabel,\marginpar,\reversemarginpar,\mathcode}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\mathsurround,\mbox,\newcount,\newdimen,\newskip}
+% \DoNotIndex{\mathsurround,\mbox}
+% \DoNotIndex{\nopagebreak}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\parfillskip,\parindent,\parskip,\penalty,\raise,\rangle}
+% \DoNotIndex{\parfillskip,\parindent,\parskip,\raise,\rangle}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\section,\setlength,\TeX,\topsep,\underline,\unskip,\verb}
+% \DoNotIndex{\section,\TeX,\underline,\verb}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\vskip,\vspace,\widetilde,\\,\%,\@date,\@defpar}
+% \DoNotIndex{\widetilde,\\,\%,\@date,\@defpar}
+% \DoNotIndex{\[,\{,\},\]}
+% \DoNotIndex{\count@,\ifnum,\loop,\today,\uppercase,\uccode}
+% \DoNotIndex{\baselineskip,\begin,\tw@}
+% \DoNotIndex{\a,\b,\c,\d,\e,\f,\g,\h,\i,\j,\k,\l,\m,\n,\o,\p,\q}
+% \DoNotIndex{\r,\s,\t,\u,\v,\w,\x,\y,\z,\A,\B,\C,\D,\E,\F,\G,\H}
+% \DoNotIndex{\I,\J,\K,\L,\M,\N,\O,\P,\Q,\R,\S,\T,\U,\V,\W,\X,\Y,\Z}
+% \DoNotIndex{\1,\2,\3,\4,\5,\6,\7,\8,\9,\0}
+% \DoNotIndex{\!,\#,\$,\&,\',\(,\),\+,\.,\:,\;,\<,\=,\>,\?,\_}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\discretionary,\makeatletter,\makeatother}
+% \DoNotIndex{\discretionary}
+% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\discretionary,\immediate,\makeatletter,\makeatother}
+% \DoNotIndex{\meaning,\par,\relax,\renewenvironment}
+% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\meaning,\newenvironment,\par,\relax,\renewenvironment}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\repeat,\scriptsize,\selectfont,\the,\undefined}
+% \DoNotIndex{\repeat,\scriptsize}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\arabic,\do,\makeindex,\null,\number,\show,\@ehc}
+% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\arabic,\do,\makeindex,\null,\number,\show,\write,\@ehc}
+% \DoNotIndex{\do,\makeindex,\null,\number,\show,\@ehc}
+% \DoNotIndex{\@author,\@ehc,\@ifstar,\@sanitize,\@title,\everypar}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\if@minipage,\if@restonecol,\ifeof,\ifmmode}
+% \DoNotIndex{\if@minipage,\if@restonecol,\ifmmode}
+% \DoNotIndex{\lccode,\onecolumn,\openin,\p@,\SelfDocumenting}
+% ^^A % \DoNotIndex{\newtoks}
+% \DoNotIndex{\settowidth,\@resetonecoltrue,\@resetonecolfalse,\bf}
+% \DoNotIndex{\clearpage,\closein,\lowercase,\@inlabelfalse}
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\selectfont,\mathcode,\newmathalphabet,\rmdefault}
+% \DoNotIndex{\mathcode,\newmathalphabet,\rmdefault}
+% \DoNotIndex{\bfdefault}
+% \DoNotIndex{\*}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ }
+% ^^A \DoNotIndex{\MessageBreak}
+% ^^A lettres de l'hébreu
+% \DoNotIndex{\alef,\ayin,\bet,\finalmem,\finalnun,\kaf,\lamed,\mem,\nun,\resh,\shin,\tav,\tet,\vav,\yod}
+% ^^A lettres hebrew2
+% \DoNotIndex{\hebalef}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hebayin}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hebbet}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hebfinalmem}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hebfinalnun}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hebkaf}
+% \DoNotIndex{\heblamed}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hebmem}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hebnun}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hebresh}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hebshin}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hebtav}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hebtet}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hebvav}
+% \DoNotIndex{\hebyod}
+% ^^A lettres arabi
+% \DoNotIndex{\T}
+% \DoNotIndex{\alef}
+% \DoNotIndex{\alefhamza}
+% \DoNotIndex{\dal}
+% \DoNotIndex{\fa}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ha}
+% \DoNotIndex{\jeem}
+% \DoNotIndex{\kaf}
+% \DoNotIndex{\lam}
+% \DoNotIndex{\meem}
+% \DoNotIndex{\qaf}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ra}
+% \DoNotIndex{\seen}
+% \DoNotIndex{\sheen}
+% \DoNotIndex{\waw}
+% \DoNotIndex{\yahamza}
+% ^^A lettres bulgares
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRF}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRT}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyra}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyre}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrf}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrg}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrhrdsn}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyri}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrp}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyru}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh}
+% ^^A lettres du cyrillique
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRA}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRF}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRG}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRH}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRO}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRP}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRT}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRZ}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRa}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRb}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRc}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRe}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRg}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRi}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRishrt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRk}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRl}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRn}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRo}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRp}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRr}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRs}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRv}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRyu}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyra}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrch}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyre}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrerev}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrf}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrg}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrhrdsn}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyri}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrii}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrishrt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrje}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrm}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyro}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrp}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrsftsn}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyru}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyry}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyryu}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh}
+% ^^A lettres farsi3
+% \DoNotIndex{\alef}
+% \DoNotIndex{\dal}
+% \DoNotIndex{\fa}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ha}
+% \DoNotIndex{\jeem}
+% \DoNotIndex{\kaf}
+% \DoNotIndex{\lam}
+% \DoNotIndex{\meem}
+% \DoNotIndex{\nun}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ra}
+% \DoNotIndex{\seen}
+% \DoNotIndex{\sheen}
+% \DoNotIndex{\taa}
+% \DoNotIndex{\waw}
+% \DoNotIndex{\ya}
+% ^^A lettres mongolb
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRA}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRG}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRH}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRZ}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyra}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrch}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrerev}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrg}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyri}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrishrt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyru}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyry}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh}
+% ^^A lettres russianb
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRO}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRa}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRb}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRc}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRe}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRg}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRi}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRishrt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRk}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRl}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRn}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRo}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRp}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRr}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRs}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRv}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRyu}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyra}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyre}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyri}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrn}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyro}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh}
+% ^^A lettres serbianc
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRS}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRT}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyra}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrd}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyre}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyri}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrje}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrzh}
+% ^^A lettres ukrainian
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRP}
+% \DoNotIndex{\CYRZ}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyra}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrb}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrc}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyre}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyri}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrii}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrishrt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrk}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrl}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrm}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrr}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrs}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrsftsn}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyrt}
+% \DoNotIndex{\cyryu}
+% ^^A not true macros
+% \DoNotIndex{\PTC@,\MTC@,\STC@}
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{minitoc.dtx}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \title{{\Large The \textsf{minitoc} package}\thanks{This document
+%   corresponds to \textsf{minitoc}~\fileversion, dated \filedate.}}
+% \author{Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert, et al.}
+% \or\relax
+% \title{{\Large Le paquetage \textsf{minitoc}}\thanks{Ce document
+%   correspond à~\textsf{minitoc}~\fileversion, daté \filedate.}}
+% \author{Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert, et al.}
+% \fi
+% \makeatletter
+% \let\SVtitle\@title
+% \let\SVdate\@date
+% \let\SVauthor\@author
+%
+% \def\@maketitle{%
+%   \newpage
+%   \null
+%   \vskip 2em%
+%   \begin{center}%
+%   \let \footnote \thanks
+%     {\LARGE \SVtitle \par}%
+%     \vskip 1.5em%
+%     {\large
+%       \lineskip .5em%
+%       \begin{tabular}[t]{c}%
+%         \SVauthor
+%       \end{tabular}\par}%
+%     \vskip 1em%
+%     {\large \SVdate}%
+%   \end{center}%
+%   \par
+%   \vskip 1.5em}
+% \makeatother
+% \maketitle
+% \doparttoc
+% ^^A \dopartlof \dopartlot
+% \dominitoc \dominilof \dominilot
+% {\parskip=0pt
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{\clearpage\Shorttableofcontents{Summary}{0}}{}
+% \renewcommand{\contentsname}{Table of contents}
+% \renewcommand{\listfigurename}{List of figures}
+% \renewcommand{\listtablename}{List of tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{\clearpage\Shorttableofcontents{Sommaire}{0}}{}
+% \fi
+% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6}
+% \makeatletter
+% \let\l@chaptersom\l@chapter
+% \makeatother
+% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6}
+% \tableofcontents
+% \mtcaddchapter
+% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6}
+% \listoffigures
+% \mtcaddchapter
+% \setcounter{tocdepth}{6}
+% \listoftables
+% \mtcaddchapter
+% }
+% ^^A FIX INDEX?
+% \let\svmacro\macro
+% \let\svendmacro\endmacro
+% \let\svenvironment\environment
+% \let\svendenvironment\endenvironment
+% ^^A \renewenvironment{macro}[1]{\bgroup\DescribeMacro{#1}}{\egroup}
+% ^^A \renewenvironment{environment}[1]{\bgroup\DescribeEnv{#1}}{\egroup}
+% ^^A FIX INDEX?
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter*{About this document\markboth{About this document}{About this document}}
+% \markboth{About this document}{About this document}
+% \mtcaddchapter[About this document]
+% This document is rather thick, but please, be not afraid: you do not need to read every page.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item The most useful chapters are in the first part (``{User's Manual}'', page~\pageref{p+UM}):
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item the chapter~``The \upack{minitoc} package'', page~\pageref{o+minitoc}, describes the essential commands to use
+%       the package;
+% \item the chapter ``Frequently Asked Questions'', page~\pageref{FAQ}, may help you to solve some
+%       specific problems;
+% \item the chapter ``Memento'', page~\pageref{c+memento}, is a set of tables to be used as a
+%       remainder of the commands of this package;
+% \item the chapter ``Examples of documents'', page~\pageref{c+exdocs}, gives the code of some documents showing the
+%       basic usage of the \upack{minitoc} package and some interesting situations;
+% \item the chapter ``Messages'', page~\pageref{c+messages}, is certainly boring, but it should be searched if you get some
+%       warning or error messages from the \upack{minitoc} package, because it explains them and also the informative
+%       messages (table~\vref{t+allmess} will help you to find the meaning of a message);
+% \item the chapter ``Jargon'', page~\pageref{c+jargon}, attemps to explain
+%       most of the technical terms used here;
+% \item the chapter ``Installation'', page~\pageref{c+installation}, describes
+%       all the files included in the distribution of the package;
+% \item the chapter ``Postface'', page~\pageref{c+postface},
+%       gives an abbreviated history of the package.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \item The second part, ``Implementation'', page~\pageref{p+ID}, is much more technical; you can read it if you are
+%       interested in the details of the coding of the package.
+%       The chapter ``Language definition (\suffix{.mld}) and object
+%       (\suffix{.mlo}) files'', page~\pageref{c+code+mld.files}, may be useful if you are interested by some language.
+%       This chapter contains many maps and illustrations.
+% \item The third part, ``Complements'', page~\pageref{p+complements}, contains a bibliography, a detailed history of
+%       the package, a list of acknowlegments, and an index.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% For this document, I have used:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{%
+% \item a short table of contents (summary), with the \com{shorttoc} command from my \pack{shorttoc}
+%       package~\cite{shorttoc}, displaying only parts and chapters;}{\relax}
+% \item a main table of contents (\com{tableofcontents}), with a maximum depth~(6);
+% \item a main list of figures (\com{listoffigures}) and a main list of tables (\com{listoftables});
+% \item for each part, a table of contents displaying only the chapters (\com{parttoc} with
+%       \dcnt{parttocdepth} equal to~1);
+% ^^A \item for each part, a list of figures (\com{partlof}) and a list of tables (\com{partlot}) when useful;
+% \item for each chapter, a complete table of contents (\com{minitoc} with \dcnt{minitocdepth} equal to~6);
+% \item for each chapter, a list of figures (\com{minilof}) and a list of tables (\com{minilot}) when useful;
+% \item customized parameters for the layout of the mini-tables; as the PDF version of the documentation uses hyperlinks
+%       (with the help of the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web}),
+%       these mini-tables should help you to navigate within the document;
+% \item some hyperlinks, placed in the right margin, contain a message identifier; the link points to the description
+%       of the message in the ``Messages'' chapter; try this one:~\rightarrowfill\null\imess{I0001}
+% \item some flags, with hyperlinks to articles (mainly in Wikipedia) about countries or languages;
+% \item the \pack{calc} package~\cite{calc} to make some computations with comfort;
+% \ifBT\relax
+% \item the \pack{booktabs} package~\cite{booktabs} to format the tables;
+% \else\fi
+% \item the \pack{doc}~\cite{doc} and \pack{docstrip}~\cite{docstrip} packages to document the code;
+% \item many other packages to improve the presentation of the documentation.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter*{À~propos de ce document\markboth{À~propos de ce document}{À~propos de ce document}}
+% \markboth{À~propos de ce document}{À~propos de ce document}
+% \mtcaddchapter[À~propos de ce document]
+% Ce document est assez épais, mais s'il vous plaît, n'en soyez pas effrayés: vous n'avez pas besoin de lire toutes
+% les pages.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Les chapitres les plus utiles sont dans la première partie («~{Manuel de l'utilisateur}~», page~\pageref{p+UM}):
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item le chapitre~«~Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}~», page~\pageref{o+minitoc}, décrit les commandes essentielles
+%       pour utiliser le paquetage;
+% \item le chapitre «~Questions fréquemment posées~», page~\pageref{FAQ}, peut vous aider à~résoudre certains
+%        problèmes spécifiques;
+% \item le chapitre «~Mémento~», page~\pageref{c+memento}, est un ensemble de tableaux à~utiliser
+%       comme aide-mémoire des commandes de ce paquetage;
+% \item le chapitre «~Exemples de documents~», page~\pageref{c+exdocs}, donne le code de quelques documents montrant
+%       l'utilisation basique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et quelques situations intéressantes;
+% \item le chapitre «~Messages~», page~\pageref{c+messages}, est certainement
+%       fastidieux, mais il faut le consulter lorsque vous recevez des messages d'avertissement ou d'erreur du paquetage
+%       \upack{minitoc}, parce qu'il les explique ainsi que les messages informatifs (le tableau~\vref{t+allmess}
+%       vous aidera à~trouver la signification d'un message);
+% \item le chapitre «~Jargon~»,
+%       page~\pageref{c+jargon}, essaye d'expliquer la plupart des termes techniques utilisés ici;
+% \item le chapitre «~Installation~»,
+%       page~\pageref{c+installation}, décrit tous les fichiers inclus dans la distribution du paquetage;
+% \item le chapitre «~Postface~», page~\pageref{c+postface}, donne un historique abrégé du paquetage.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \item La deuxième partie, «~Implantation~», page~\pageref{p+ID}, est bien plus technique; vous pouvez la lire si vous êtes
+%       intéressés par les détails du codage du paquetage.
+%       Le chapitre «~Fichiers de définition (\suffix{.mld}) et objets (\suffix{.mlo}) de langue~»,
+%        page~\pageref{c+code+mld.files}, peut être utile si vous êtes intéressés par une certaine langue.
+%       Ce chapitre contient de nombreuses cartes et illustrations.
+% \item La troisième partie, «~Compléments~», page~\pageref{p+complements}, contient une bibliographie, un historique
+% détaillé du paquetage, une liste des remerciements et un index.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% Pour ce document, j'ai utilisé:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \IfFileExists{shorttoc.sty}{%
+% \item une table des matières abrégée (sommaire), avec la commande \com{shorttoc} de mon
+%       paquetage \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc}, n'affichant que les parties et chapitres;}{\relax}
+% \item une table des matières principale (\com{tableofcontents}), avec une profondeur maximale~(6);
+% \item une liste principale des figures (\com{listoffigures}) et une liste principale des tableaux
+%       (\com{listoftables});
+% \item pour chaque partie, une table des matières ne montrant que les chapitres (\com{parttoc} avec
+%       \dcnt{parttocdepth} égale à~1);
+% ^^A \item pour chaque partie, une liste des figures (\com{partlof})
+% ^^A et une liste des tableaux (\com{partlot}) lorsque c'est utile;
+% \item pour chaque chapitre, une table des matières complète (\com{minitoc} avec \dcnt{minitocdepth} égale à~6);
+% \item pour chaque chapitre, une liste des figures (\com{minilof}) et une liste des tableaux (\com{minilot})
+%       lorsque c'est utile;
+% \item des paramètres adaptés pour la mise en page mini-tables; comme la version PDF de la documentation utilise
+%       des hyperliens, (à~l'aide du paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}), ces mini-tables devraient
+%       vous aider à~vous déplacer dans le document;
+% \item quelques hyperliens, placés dans la marge de droite, contiennent un identificateur de message; le lien
+%       renvoie à~la description du message dans le chapitre «~Messages~»;
+% \item quelques drapeaux avec des hyperliens vers des articles (principalement de Wikipedia) sur des pays ou des langues;
+%       essayez celui-ci:~\rightarrowfill\null\imess{I0001}
+% \item le paquetage \pack{calc}~\cite{calc} pour faire certains calculs plus confortablement;
+% \ifBT\relax
+% \item le paquetage \pack{booktabs}~\cite{booktabs} pour formater les tableaux;
+% \else\fi
+% \item les paquetages \pack{doc}~\cite{doc} et \pack{docstrip}~\cite{docstrip} pour documenter le code;
+% \item de nombreux autres paquetages pour améliorer la présentation de la documentation.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \part{User's Manual}\label{p+UM}
+% \or\relax
+% \part{Manuel de l'utilisateur}\label{p+UM}
+% \fi
+% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns}
+% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
+% \parttoc
+% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\empty}
+% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\empty}
+% ^^A \partlof
+% ^^A \partlot
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{The \upack{minitoc} package}\label{o+minitoc}\ipack{minitoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \frenchspacing
+% \chapter{Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}}\label{o+minitoc}\ipack{minitoc}
+% \fi
+% ^^A \pagestyle{headings}
+% \minitoc
+% \lsneed{5}
+% \mtcskip
+% \minilof
+% \lsneed{5}
+% \mtcskip
+% \minilot
+% \section{Introduction}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \upack{minitoc} package, initially written by \name{Nigel}{Ward} and \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}, has been
+% almost completely redesigned by \name{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert} (ONERA/Centre de Toulouse).
+% A summary of the evolution of this package is given in the chapter~\vref{c+postface}.
+% This package creates a mini-table of contents
+% (a ``minitoc''\,\footnote{The \upack{minitoc} package introduces
+%                 its own jargon, explained in this document.
+%                 It should not be too difficult, however, to learn and use; it will be used here, of course.})%
+% at the beginning of each chapter of a document.
+% It is also possible to have a mini-list of
+% figures (a ``minilof'') and a mini-list of tables (a ``minilot'').
+% The document class should of course define chapters
+% (classes like \class{book} or \class{report}~\cite{classes}) or sections
+% (classes like \class{article}\,\footnote{As the standard \class{proc} class~\cite{proc}, and the \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc} and
+% \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews} classes, load the standard
+% \class{article} class, these classes will be just considered as variants of the \class{article} class.})~\cite{classes}.
+% Thus, this package should not be used with
+% document classes without standard sectionning commands (like \class{letter}).
+% When the document class defines a ``part'' sectionning level
+% (i.e.,~classes like \class{book}, \class{report} and \class{article}),
+% you can create a ``partial'' table of contents
+% (a ``parttoc'') at the beginning of each part of a document.
+% It is also possible to have a partial list of figures (a ``partlof'')
+% and a partial list of tables (a ``partlot'').
+% When the document class has no \com{chapter} command
+% but has a \com{section} command, you may use section
+% level tables of contents (``secttocs'') at the beginning of each section; and you can also have section level
+% lists of figures (``sectlofs'') or of tables (``sectlots'').
+%
+% All these tables (``minitocs'', ``partlots'', ``sectlofs'', etc.) are collectively referenced as ``mini-tables''
+% (or sometimes ``mini-lists'').
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, écrit initialement par \name{Nigel}{Ward} et \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}, a été presque
+% complètement reconstruit par \name{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert} (ONERA/Centre de Toulouse).
+% Un résumé de l'évolution de ce paquetage est donné dans le chapitre~\vref{c+postface}.
+% Ce paquetage crée une mini-table des matières (une «~minitoc~»\,\footnote{Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}
+% introduit son propre jargon, expliqué dans ce document. Il ne devrait, cependant, pas être trop difficile de
+% l'apprendre et de l'utiliser; il sera évidemment utilisé ici.}) au début de chaque chapitre d'un document.
+% Il est aussi possible d'avoir une
+% mini-liste des figures (une «~minilot~») et une mini-liste des tableaux (une «~minilot~»). La classe de document
+% devrait, bien sûr, définir des chapitres (classes telles que \class{book} ou \class{report}) ou des sections
+% (classes telles que \class{article}\,\footnote{Puisque la classe standard \class{proc}~\cite{proc}, ainsi que les classes
+% \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc} et \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews}, chargent la classe
+% standard \class{article}, ces classes seront simplement considérées comme des variantes de la classe \class{article}.})~\cite{classes}.
+% Donc, ce paquetage ne devrait pas être utilisé avec des classes de document ne possédant pas les commandes de
+% sectionnement standard (classes telles que \class{letter}).
+% Lorsque la classe de document définit un niveau de sectionnement «~partie~» (c'est-à-dire des classes telles
+% que \class{book}, \class{report} et \class{article}), vous pouvez créer une table des matières
+% «~partielle~» (une «~parttoc~») au début de chaque partie d'un document. Il est aussi possible d'avoir une liste
+% des figures partielle (une «~partlof~») et une liste des tableaux partielle (une «~partlot~») au début de chaque
+% partie d'un document. Lorsque la classe de document ne possède pas de commande \com{chapter} mais a une
+% commande \com{section}, vous pouvez utiliser des tables des matières au niveau section («~secttocs~») au
+% début de chaque section; et vous pouvez aussi avoir des listes des figures («~sectlofs~») ou des tableaux («~sectlots~»)
+% au niveau section.
+%
+% Toutes ces tables («~minitocs~», «~partlofs~», «~sectlots~», etc.) sont collectivement référencées sous le terme de
+% «~mini-tables~» (ou parfois «~mini-listes~»).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% \noindent
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Important restrictions}\label{note+sectionning}%
+% \textbf{Note}\virage: you cannot use chapter level and section level mini-tables in the same document.
+% This restriction is intented to avoid documents with full of local
+% tables of contents, lists of figures and tables at every sectionning level.
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Restrictions importantes}\label{note+sectionning}%
+% \textbf{Note}\virage: vous ne pouvez pas utiliser des mini-tables au niveau chapitre et au niveau section dans
+% le même document. Cette restriction est destinée à~éviter des documents pleins de mini-tables des matières,
+% listes de figures et listes de tableaux locales à~chaque niveau de sectionnement.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% \noindent
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \textbf{Note}\virage: the commands relative
+% to the part level are defined only if the document class defines \com{part}.
+% The commands relative
+% to the section level are defined only if the document class
+% defines \com{section} but does not define \com{chapter}.
+% \or\relax
+% \textbf{Note}\virage: les commandes relatives au niveau partie ne sont définies que si la classe de document
+% définit \com{part}.
+% Les commandes relatives au niveau section ne sont définies que si la classe de document définit \com{section}
+% mais ne définit pas \com{chapter}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Version}
+% The current version of this package is~\#61. You will find a resumed history of the package in the ``Postface''
+% chapter (chapter~\vref{c+postface}) and a more detailed history in ``Changes History'', page~\pageref{c+history}.
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Version}
+% La version courante de ce paquetage est~\#61. Vous trouverez un historique résumé de ce paquetage dans le
+% chapitre «~Postface~» (chapitre~\vref{c+postface}) et un historique plus détaillé dans «~Historique des
+% modifications~», page~\pageref{c+history}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{License}
+% This package must be distributed and/or may be modified under the
+% conditions of the \textbf{\LaTeX{} Project Public License}, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (as convenient) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% \begin{quote}
+%    \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}
+% \end{quote}
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of \LaTeX{}
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% But please don't bother me about hacked versions; they will not be supported.
+% However, suggestions for corrections and reasoned improvements are welcome.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Licence}
+% Ce paquetage doit être distribué et/ou peut être modifié sous les conditions de la
+% \textbf{\LaTeX{} Project Public License}, soit la version~1.3 de cette licence soit (au choix) toute version
+% ultérieure. La plus récente version de cette licence est dans
+% \begin{quote}\froff
+%     \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}
+% \end{quote}
+% et la version~1.3 ou ultérieure fait partie de toutes les distributions de \LaTeX{} version 2003/12/01 ou
+% ultérieure.
+%
+% Mais, s'il vous plaît, ne me parlez pas de versions bricolées; elles ne seront pas maintenues.
+% Cependant, les suggestions de corrections et d'améliorations raisonnables sont les bienvenues.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Using the \upack{minitoc} package}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utiliser le paquetage \upack{minitoc}}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Loading the package and creating the mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Charger le paquetage et créer les mini-tables}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\usepackage}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To use the \upack{minitoc} package, you must insert a command:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour utiliser le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, vous devez insérer une commande:
+% \fi
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{usepackage}\verb|[...options...]{minitoc}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% in the preamble of the document\,\footnote{This command must
+% be placed \emph{after} any modification done on the sectionning
+% commands; if you modify some sectionning commands after loading the
+% \upack{minitoc} package, this one might not work properly.}.
+% The mini-table of contents will be in the chapter,
+% after the \com{chapter} command, at the point of the \com{minitoc}
+% command. The \com{minitoc} command may occur \emph{almost anywhere}\,\footnote{``Almost anywhere'' means
+% ``in a normal place'', like between two paragraphs of normal text, or in a (wide enough) minipage, but not in a
+% too strange position (like a marginal note or a footnote). Even a multicolumn or a floating environment can be used,
+% but with care. But note that a minitoc can be rather long, if the chapter is complex and if you are asking for
+% details with a high value for \dcnt{minitocdepth}.
+% As an example, I~once used a \com{afterpage} command
+% (\pack{afterpage} package~\cite{afterpage}) to place the long
+% minilof of chapter~\vref{c+code+mld.files} (so the minilof was forced to begin at the top of the next page).} inside a chapter.
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% Of course, it is better
+% to put it at the beginning of the chapter, eventually after some introductory material. But you can also decide
+% to put it at the end of the chapter. You should use the same conventions in all chapters. If you want to add the
+% mini-table of contents for a chapter, you must use the sequence given in table~\vref{mtc+minitoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% dans le préambule du document\,\footnote{Cette commande doit être placée \emph{après} toute modification faite sur
+% les commandes de sectionnement; si vous modifiez des commandes de sectionnement après le chargement du paquetage
+% \upack{minitoc}, celui-ci pourrait ne pas fonctionner correctement.}.
+% La mini-table des matières sera dans le chapitre, après la commande \com{chapter}, à~l'emplacement de la
+% commande \com{minitoc}. La commande \com{minitoc} peut se placer \emph{presque
+% n'importe~où}\,\footnote{<<~Presque n'importe~où~>> signifie <<~en un endroit normal~>>, comme entre deux alinéas
+% de texte normal, ou dans une minipage (suffisamment large), mais pas dans une position trop bizarre (comme une
+% note marginale ou infrapaginale). Même un environnement multi-colonnes ou flottant  peut être utilisé, mais avec
+% soin. Mais notez qu'une minitoc peut être assez longue, si le chapitre est complexe et si vous demandez des
+% détails avec une valeur élevée de \dcnt{minitocdepth}.
+% Par exemple, il m'est arrivé d'utiliser une commande \com{afterpage} (paquetage \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage})
+% pour placer la longue minilof du chapitre~\vref{c+code+mld.files} (pour forcer la minilof à~commencer en haut de la
+% page suivante).} à~l'intérieur d'un chapitre.
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% Bien sûr, il est préférable de la placer au début du chapitre, éventuellement
+% après un texte introductif. Mais vous pouvez aussi décider de la placer à~la fin du chapitre. Vous devriez
+% utiliser les mêmes conventions dans tous les chapitres. Si vous souhaitez ajouter la mini-table des matières pour
+% un chapitre, vous devez utiliser la séquence donnée dans le tableau~\vref{mtc+minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[ht]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commands for a \texttt{minitoc}}\label{mtc+minitoc}
+% \centering
+% {\small\ttfamily
+% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{book\}}}&\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}\texttt{[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}}&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
+% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{minitoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
+% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcskipamount}\}\{\com{bigskipamount}\}&\emph{default}&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{default}&\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
+% \emph{or:}&&\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{minitoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{section\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
+% \ldots&\\
+% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{dominitoc}&&\\
+% \com{dominilof}&&\\
+% \com{dominilot}&&\\
+% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{or} \com{faketableofcontents}\hspace*{-3cm}\\
+% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoffigures}\hspace*{-3cm}\\
+% \com{listoftables}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoftables}\hspace*{-3cm}\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{chapter}\{...\}&&\\
+% \com{minitoc}&\emph{if you want one}&\\
+% \com{mtcskip}&&\\
+% \com{minilof}&\emph{if you want one}&\\
+% \com{mtcskip}&&\\
+% \com{minilot}&\emph{if you want one}&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \end{tabularx}}}
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[ht]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes pour une \texttt{minitoc}}\label{mtc+minitoc}
+% \centering
+% {\small\ttfamily
+% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{book\}}}&\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}\texttt{[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}}&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
+% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{minitoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
+% \com{setlength}\{\com{mtcskipamount}\}\{\com{bigskipamount}\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{mtcSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
+% \emph{ou:}&&\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{minitoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{minitoc\}\{section\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{dominitoc}&&\\
+% \com{dominilof}&&\\
+% \com{dominilot}&&\\
+% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{ou} \com{faketableofcontents}\hspace*{-3cm}\\
+% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoffigures}\hspace*{-3cm}\\
+% \com{listoftables}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoftables}\hspace*{-3cm}\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{chapter}\{...\}&&\\
+% \com{minitoc}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\
+% \com{mtcskip}&\\
+% \com{minilof}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\
+% \com{mtcskip}&\\
+% \com{minilot}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \end{tabularx}}}%
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For each mini-table of contents, an auxiliary file will be
+% created with a name of the form \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N},
+% where \meta{N} is the absolute chapter number.
+% ``Absolute'' means that this number is unique,
+% and always increasing from the first chapter\,\footnote{The concept of an ``absolute'' counter for the
+% mini-tables has solved some obscure problems, and also made obsolete some commands, like \com{firstpartis},
+% \com{firstchapteris}, and \com{firstsectionis}.}.
+% The suffix is \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} for mini-lists of figures and
+% is \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} for mini-lists of tables.
+% (If under MS-DOS or any operating system with short extensions to filenames, see section~\vref{MS-DOS} and
+% section~\vref{.8+3}). There are similar commands for mini-tables at the part or section level, depending on the
+% document class.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour chaque mini-table des matières, un fichier auxiliaire sera créé avec un nom de la forme
+% \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu du chapitre. «~Absolu~» signifie que ce numéro est
+% unique, et croit toujours depuis le premier chapitre\,\footnote{Le concept d'un compteur <<~absolu~>> pour les
+% mini-tables a résolu certains problèmes ténébreux, et aussi frappé d'obsolescence certaines commandes, telles que
+% \com{firstpartis}, \com{firstchapteris} et \com{firstsectionis}.}.
+% Le suffixe est \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} pour les mini-listes de figures et \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} pour
+% les mini-listes de tableaux.
+% (Si vous travaillez sous MS-DOS ou tout autre système d'exploitation utilisant des suffixes courts pour les
+% noms de fichiers, voyez la section~\vref{MS-DOS} et la section~\vref{.8+3}). Il y a des commandes similaires aux
+% niveaux partie ou section, selon la classe du document.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Preparing the mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Préparation des mini-tables}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The commands\,\footnote{The code of these \clit{do.{}.{}.{}} commands is directly derived from that of
+% the \pack{xr} package~\cite{xr}, by \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}, with his permission.}
+% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, and \com{dominilot} (for mini-tables at the chapter level),
+% take respectively the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, \emph{document}\suffix{.lof}, and \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} files,
+% and cut slices from them to create the
+% \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}, \emph{document}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N}, and \emph{document}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} files.
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes\,\footnote{Le code de ces commandes \clit{do.{}.{}.{}} est directement dérivé de celui du
+% paquetage \pack{xr}~\cite{xr}, de \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}, avec sa permission.}
+% \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} et \com{dominilot} (pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre, prennent
+% respectivement les fichiers \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} et \emph{document}\suffix{.lot},
+% et en
+% prélèvent des tranches pour créer les fichiers \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}, \emph{document}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N}
+% et \emph{document}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The commands \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, and \com{dosectlot} (for mini-tables at the section level)
+% and \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, and \com{dopartlot} (for mini-tables at the part level) are analog.
+%
+% The\virage{} \com{mtcprepare} command invokes (and replaces) all these preparation commands when they are available
+% with the document class and if the adequate contents file exists.
+% This command accepts also an optional argument to set the default position of the title
+% for \emph{all} the mini-tables.
+%
+% All\SMMZ{\lmess{W0098}}\label{x+W0098} the preparation commands are \emph{ignored} if the \com{nofiles} command is invoked
+% in the preamble, to avoid to overwrite the mini-table auxiliary files.
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% To\virage{} obtain a satisfactory result (i.e.,~non empty), please note that all these commands must
+% \emph{imperatively be put before} any command analog to the \com{tableofcontents}, \com{listoffigures},
+% and \com{listoftables} commands, or their \verb|\fake...| siblings.
+%
+% It\virage{} is also \emph{strongly} recommended to put these commands \emph{before} any sectionning command producing an
+% entry in the table of contents (for the \verb|\do...toc| commands), and \emph{before}
+% any \com{caption}-like command
+% producing an entry in the list of figures (for the \verb|\do...lof| commands) or in the list of tables
+% (for the \verb|\do...lot|) commands; else disorder in the mini-tables might result.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof} et \com{dosectlot} (pour les mini-tables au niveau section),
+% et \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof} et \com{dopartlot} (pour les mini-tables au niveau partie) sont
+% analogues.
+%
+% La\virage{} commande \com{mtcprepare} invoque (et remplace) toutes ces commandes de préparation lorsqu'elles sont
+% disponibles pour la classe du document et si le fichier de contenu adéquat existe.
+% Cette commande accepte aussi un argument optionnel pour établir la position par défaut du titre
+% pour \emph{toutes} les mini-tables.
+%
+% Toutes\SMMZ{\lmess{W0098}}\label{x+W0098} les commandes de préparation sont \emph{ignorées} si
+% la commande \com{nofiles} est invoquée dans le préambule, pour éviter d'écraser les fichiers auxiliaires des mini-tables.
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Pour\virage{} obtenir un résultat satisfaisant (c'est-à-dire, non vide), veuillez noter que toutes ces commandes doivent
+% \emph{impérativement être placées avant} toute commande analogue aux commandes \com{tableofcontents},
+% \com{listoffigures} et \com{listoftables}, ou leurs cousines \verb|\fake...|!
+%
+% Il\virage{} est aussi \emph{fortement} recommandé de placer ces commandes \emph{avant} toute commande de
+% sectionnement produisant une entrée dans la table des matières (pour les commandes \verb|\do...toc|), et
+% \emph{avant} toute commande analogue à~\com{caption} produisant une entrée dans la liste des figures (pour les
+% commandes \verb|\do...lof|) ou dans la liste des tableaux (pour les commandes \verb|\do...lot|); sinon les
+% mini-tables pourraient être dans le désordre.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Placing the mini-tables}\label{s+placing}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Placement des mini-tables}\label{s+placing}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskipamount}
+% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcskip} command may be used to add a vertical
+% skip between two mini-tables. Its height is
+% \com{mtcskipamount} (equal to \com{bigskipamount} by default).
+% \com{mtcskip} eliminates any immediate previous vertical
+% skip, to not accumulate vertical space when a mini-table is
+% empty and skipped by the \optd{checkfiles} option.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{mtcskip} peut être utilisée pour ajouter un saut vertical entre deux mini-tables. Sa hauteur
+% est \com{mtcskipamount} (égale à~\com{bigskipamount} par défaut). \com{mtcskip} élimine tout saut vertical
+% qui précède immédiatement, afin de ne pas accumuler des espaces verticaux lorsqu'une mini-table est vide et donc
+% ignorée par l'option \optd{checkfiles}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The section-level table of contents will be in the section,
+% after the \com{section} command, at the point of the \com{secttoc} command. The \com{secttoc} command
+% may occur \emph{almost anywhere} inside a section. It is often better to put it at the beginning of the section,
+% or after some short introductory material. You should use the same conventions in all sections. If you want to add
+% a~section-level table of contents for a section, you must use the sequence given in Table~\vref{mtcsecttoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% La table des matières au niveau section sera dans la section, après la commande \com{section}, à~l'emplacement
+% de la commande \com{secttoc}. La commande \com{secttoc} peut être placée \emph{presque n'importe~où}
+% à~l'intérieur d'une section. Bien sûr, il est préférable de la placer au début de la section, ou éventuellement
+% après un texte introductif. Vous devriez utiliser les mêmes conventions dans toutes les sections. Si vous
+% souhaitez ajouter la table des matières au niveau section pour une section, vous devez utiliser la séquence
+% donnée dans le tableau~\vref{mtcsecttoc}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[!t]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commands for a \texttt{secttoc}}\label{mtcsecttoc}
+% \centering{\small\ttfamily
+% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{article\}}}&\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{setlength}\{\com{stcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
+% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{secttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{default}&\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcSSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
+% \emph{or:}&&\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{secttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{subsection\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{dosecttoc}&&\\
+% \com{dosectlof}&&\\
+% \com{dosectlot}&&\\
+% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{or} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\
+% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\
+% \com{listoftables}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{section}\{...\}&&\\
+% \com{secttoc}&\emph{if you want one}&\\
+% \com{sectlof}&\emph{if you want one}&\\
+% \com{sectlot}&\emph{if you want one}&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \end{tabularx}}}
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[t!]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes pour une \texttt{secttoc}}\label{mtcsecttoc}
+% \centering{\small\ttfamily
+% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}\texttt{[...]\{article\}}}&\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{setlength}\{\com{stcindent}\}\{24pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
+% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{secttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{stcSSfont}\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
+% \emph{ou:}&&\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{secttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{secttoc\}\{subsection\}\{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{dosecttoc}&&\\
+% \com{dosectlof}&&\\
+% \com{dosectlot}&&\\
+% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{ou} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\
+% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\
+% \com{listoftables}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{section}\{...\}&&\\
+% \com{secttoc}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\
+% \com{sectlof}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\
+% \com{sectlot}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \end{tabularx}}}
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For each section-level table of contents, an auxiliary file will be
+% created with a name of the form \emph{document}\suffix{.stc}\meta{N},
+% where \meta{N} is the absolute section number.
+% The suffix is \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} for section-level lists of figures and
+% is \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} for section-level lists of tables.
+% (If under MS-DOS or any operating system with short extensions to filenames, see section~\vref{MS-DOS} and
+% section~\vref{.8+3}).
+% \or\relax
+% Pour chaque table des matières au niveau section, un fichier auxiliaire sera créé avec un nom de la forme
+% \emph{document}\suffix{.stc}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de section.
+% Le suffixe est \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} pour les
+% listes de figures au niveau section et \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} pour les listes de tableaux au niveau section.
+% (Si vous travaillez sous MS-DOS ou tout autre système d'exploitation utilisant des suffixes courts pour les
+% noms de fichiers, voyez la section~\vref{MS-DOS} et la section~\vref{.8+3}).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\usepackage}
+% \begin{macro}{\FloatBarrier}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{rem+FB}As\imess{W0056} floats (figures and tables) could drift\footnote{%
+% \begin{Citation}{\name{Donald}{Arseneau}}%
+% \noindent\textsl{A float is like a ship in harbor.
+% There is a place in the text which is the anchor location. The figure or ``ship'' can float around to various places
+% relative to the anchor, but always downstream or downwind.  A float with bad placement parameters is like a ship
+% that slips its anchor and eventually crashes on the rocks at the end of a chapter.}\end{Citation}}
+% somewhere outside the printing area of the text of the section, the sectlofs and
+% sectlots can be rather strange. In order to have a better
+% behaviour of these mini-tables, it may be useful to add the
+% \opt{insection} option in the \com{usepackage} command:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{usepackage}\verb|[insection]{minitoc}|
+% \end{verse}
+% if you want more consistent sectlofs and sectlots.
+% The \opt{insection} option loads the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} with its \optp{verbose}{placeins}
+% and \optp{section}{placeins} options.
+% Sometimes, it might be necessary to use the \com{FloatBarrier} command of this package to correctly place the
+% figure or table and have a correct mini-table.
+% The options \optp{above}{placeins} or \optp{below}{placeins} options should not be used, because they allow
+% floats to drift above
+% or below a \com{FloatBarrier} (or a section limit): the barrier becomes ``porous'' upwards\footnote{But a float
+% can not drift upwards beyond the top of the current page.}~($\uparrow$) or
+% downwards~($\downarrow$), or both~($\updownarrow$). The \optp{section}{placeins} option makes a more ``watertight''
+% barrier~($\equiv$). This is illustrated by the figure~\vref{f+barrier}.
+%
+% The \pack{placeins} package, by \name{Donald}{Arseneau}, is available
+% on CTAN archives; note that the file \xfile{placeins.sty} contains its own
+% documentation, with a copy in \xfile{placeins.txt}. You need a version whose date is at least 2005/04/18.
+% \begin{figure}[p]
+% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
+% \centering
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{section}{placeins} option\strut}}\\
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\
+% \midrule
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\
+% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
+% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{above}{placeins} option\strut}}\\
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\
+% \midrule
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
+% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\uparrow}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
+% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{below}{placeins} option\strut}}\\
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\
+% \midrule
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Forbidden Area}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\
+% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
+% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\downarrow}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{With the \optp{above}{placeins} and \optp{below}{placeins} options\strut}}\\
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Action}\\
+% \midrule
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
+% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Floats inserted here}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
+% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Allowed Area}}}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \caption{Float barriers}\label{f+barrier}
+% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
+% \end{figure}
+%
+% Since version~\#45, this option also loads the \pack{flafter} package (described in~\cite{ltoutput}
+% and~\cite[page~286]{TLC2}) to force a float to appear \emph{after} its reference.
+% The \optp{above}{placeins} and \optp{below}{placeins} options of the \pack{placeins} package are no more used,
+% because they allowed the floats to move out of the section.
+%
+% In\virage{} all cases, it is \emph{strongly} recommended to verify the position of
+% the floats and, if necessary, to look at the messages of the \pack{placeins} package
+% in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file.
+% The placement of floats is a very complex problem, so some manual intervention may be necessary, like the use
+% of the \pack{float} package~\cite{float} or, better, of the \pack{floatrow} package~\cite{floatrow}.
+% \or\relax
+% \label{rem+FB}Comme\imess{W0056} les éléments flottants (figures et tableaux) pourraient
+% dériver\,\footnote{\selectlanguage{english}%
+% \begin{Citation}{\name{Donald}{Arseneau}}%
+% \noindent\textsl{A float is like a ship in harbor. There is
+% a place in the text which is the anchor location. The figure or ``ship'' can float around to various places relative to
+% the anchor, but always downstream or downwind. A float with bad placement parameters is like a ship that slips
+% its anchor and eventually crashes on the rocks at the end of a chapter.}\end{Citation}}
+% quelque part en dehors de la zone d'impression
+% du texte de la section, les sectlofs et sectlots peuvent être assez étranges. Afin d'avoir un meilleur
+% comportement de ces mini-tables, il peut être utile d'ajouter l'option
+% \opt{insection} dans la commande \com{usepackage}:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{usepackage}\verb|[insection]{minitoc}|
+% \end{verse}
+% si vous désirez des sectlofs et sectlots plus cohérentes.
+% L'option \opt{insection} charge le paquetage
+% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} avec ses options \optp{verbose}{placeins} et \optp{section}{placeins}.
+% Les options \optp{above}{placeins} ou \optp{below}{placeins} ne devraient pas être utilisées, car elles permettent aux éléments
+% flottants de dériver au-dessus ou en dessous d'une \com{FloatBarrier} (ou d'une limite de section):
+% la barrière devient «~poreuse~» vers l'amont\,\footnote{Mais un élément flottant ne peut pas dériver vers
+% l'amont au-delà du sommet de la page courante.}~($\uparrow$) ou vers l'aval~($\downarrow$), ou dans les
+% deux sens~($\updownarrow$).
+% Il peut même être nécessaire d'utiliser la commande \com{FloatBarrier} de ce paquetage pour placer
+% correctement la figure ou la table et avoir une mini-table correcte.
+% L'option \optp{section}{placeins} place une barrière plus étanche~($\equiv$).
+% Ceci est illustré par la figure~\vref{f+barrier}.
+%
+% Le paquetage \pack{placeins}, de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}, est disponible sur les archives CTAN;
+% notez que le fichier \xfile{placeins.sty}
+% contient sa propre documentation, dont une copie est dans \xfile{placeins.txt}. Il vous faut une version plus
+% récente que 2005/04/18.
+% \begin{figure}[p]
+% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
+% \centering
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec l'option \optp{section}{placeins}\strut}}\\
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\
+% \midrule
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\
+% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
+% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec l'option \optp{above}{placeins}\strut}}\\
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\
+% \midrule
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
+% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\uparrow}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
+% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec l'option \optp{below}{placeins}\strut}}\\
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\
+% \midrule
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}~\emph{Zone interdite}~\mysymbfill{1.em}{\times}}}\\
+% \com{section}&\textcolor{red}{\mysymbfill{.4em}{\equiv}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
+% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\downarrow}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lO{1}@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Avec les options \optp{above}{placeins} et \optp{below}{placeins}\strut}}\\
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Action}\\
+% \midrule
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
+% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textbf{Flottants insérés ici}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
+% \com{section}&\textcolor{green}{\mysymbfill{1.em}{\updownarrow}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{1}{c@{}}{\textcolor{green}{\emph{Zone autorisée}}}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \caption{Barrières pour les flottants}\label{f+barrier}
+% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
+% \end{figure}
+%
+% Depuis la version~\#45, cette option charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter} (décrit dans~\cite{ltoutput}
+% et~\cite[page~292]{TLC2F}) pour forcer un élément flottant à~n'apparaître qu'\emph{après} sa référence.
+% Les options \optp{above}{placeins} et \optp{below}{placeins} du paquetage \pack{placeins} ne sont plus utilisées,
+% car elles permettaient aux éléments de sortir de la section.
+%
+% Dans\virage{} tous les cas, il est \emph{fortement} recommandé de
+% vérifier la position des éléments flottants et, si nécessaire, de regarder les messages du paquetage \pack{placeins}
+% dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}.
+% Le placement des éléments flottants est un problème très complexe, donc une intervention manuelle peut être nécessaire,
+% comme l'utilisation du paquetage \pack{float}~\cite{float}, ou, mieux, du paquetage \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If you want to add the partial table of contents for a part,
+% you must use the sequence given in Table~\vref{mtc+parttoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% Si vous voulez ajouter une table des matières partielle pour une partie, vous devez utiliser la séquence donnée
+% dans le tableau~\vref{mtc+parttoc}.
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[t!]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commands for a \texttt{parttoc}}\label{mtc+parttoc}
+% \centering{\small\ttfamily
+% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\com{documentclass}[...]\{book\}}&\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\
+% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\
+% \com{setlength}\{\com{ptcindent}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
+% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{parttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
+% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\
+% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{default}&\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcCfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcSfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
+% \emph{or:}&&\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{parttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{chapter\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{section\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{default}\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{doparttoc}&&\\
+% \com{dopartlof}&&\\
+% \com{dopartlot}&&\\
+% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{or} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\
+% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\
+% \com{listoftables}&\emph{or} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{part}\{...\}&&\\
+% \com{parttoc}&\emph{if you want one}&\\
+% \com{partlof}&\emph{if you want one}&\\
+% \com{partlot}&\emph{if you want one}&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \end{tabularx}}}
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[t]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes pour une \texttt{parttoc}}\label{mtc+parttoc}
+% \centering{\small\ttfamily
+% \fbox{\begin{tabularx}{\winf}{@{}llY{1}@{}}
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{documentclass}[...]\{book\}}&\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{usepackage}[...\emph{options}...]\{minitoc\}}&\\
+% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\
+% \com{setlength}\{\com{ptcindent}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
+% \com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcoffset}\}\{0pt\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}\{parttoc\}\{0pt\}&\emph{default}&\\
+% \ldots&\null\hfil\null&\\
+% \com{setcounter}\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{2\}&\emph{défaut}&\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcCfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{renewcommand}\{\com{ptcSfont}\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
+% \emph{ou:}&&\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetdepth}\{parttoc\}\{2\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{*\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{chapter\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\com{mtcsetfont}\{parttoc\}\{section\}\{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries\}}&\emph{défaut}\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \bs begin\{document\}&&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{doparttoc}&&\\
+% \com{dopartlof}&&\\
+% \com{dopartlot}&&\\
+% \com{tableofcontents}&\emph{ou} \com{faketableofcontents}&\\
+% \com{listoffigures}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoffigures}&\\
+% \com{listoftables}&\emph{ou} \com{fakelistoftables}&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \com{part}\{...\}&&\\
+% \com{parttoc}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\
+% \com{partlof}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\
+% \com{partlot}&\emph{si vous en voulez une}&\\
+% \ldots&&\\
+% \end{tabularx}}}
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For each partial table of contents, an auxiliary file will be
+% created with a name of the form \emph{document}\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N},
+% where \meta{N} is the absolute part number.
+% The suffix is \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} for partial lists of figures and
+% is \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} for partial lists of tables.
+% (If under MS-DOS or any operating system with short
+% extensions to filenames, see section~\vref{MS-DOS} and section~\vref{.8+3}).
+% \or\relax
+% Pour chaque table des matières au niveau partie, un fichier auxiliaire sera créé avec un nom de la forme
+% \emph{document}\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de partie.
+% Le suffixe est \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} pour les
+% listes de figures au niveau partie et \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} pour les listes de tableaux au niveau partie.
+% (Si vous travaillez sous MS-DOS ou tout autre système d'exploitation utilisant des suffixes courts pour les
+% noms de fichiers, voyez la section~\vref{MS-DOS} et la section~\vref{.8+3}).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% \noindent
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \textbf{Note}\virage: the user is responsible of asking or not asking
+% a mini-table (mini-toc, -lof or -lot) for some chapter. Asking a minilof for a
+% chapter without any figure would result in an empty and ugly mini-list
+% of figures (i.e.,~the title and two horizontal rules).
+% He is also responsible of requiring or not requiring
+% a partial toc (lof or lot) for some part. Asking a partlof for a
+% part without any figure would result in an empty and ugly part
+% list of figures (i.e.,~the title alone on a page). Analogous remarks
+% apply to section-level mini-tables (secttoc, sectlof, and
+% sectlot) and to the part-level mini-tables (parttoc, partlof, and partlot).
+% \or\relax
+% \textbf{Note}\virage: l'utilisateur est responsable de demander ou non une mini-table (mini-lof, -lof ou -lof) pour
+% un certain chapitre. Demander une minilof pour un chapitre sans aucune figure aura pour résultat une mini-liste
+% des figures vide et laide (c'est-à-dire le titre et deux filets horizontaux). Il est aussi responsable de demander
+% ou non une table des matières partielle (ou une liste partielle des figures ou des tableaux) pour une certaine
+% partie. Demander une partlot pour une partie sans aucune figure aura pour résultat une liste partielle des figures
+% vide et laide (c'est-à-dire le titre seul sur une page). Des remarques analogues s'appliquent aux mini-tables
+% au niveau section (secttoc, sectlof et sectlot) et aux mini-tables au niveau partie (parttoc, partlof et partlot).
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% But since version \#35, empty mini-tables are just ignored and
+% this problem should disappear in normal circumstances. Nevertheless, it is recommended
+% to put no \com{minitoc} command in
+% a chapter without sections and no \com{minilof} or
+% \com{minilot} command in a chapter without figures or tables.
+% The \optd{checkfiles} (see section~\vref{s+placing}) package option
+% (default) skips empty mini-tables (with a note in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file);
+% the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option restores
+% the old behaviour (empty mini-tables are displayed).
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Mais depuis la version~\#35, les mini-tables vides sont simplement ignorées et ce problème devrait disparaître
+% dans des circonstances normales. Néanmoins, il est recommandé de ne pas mettre de commande \com{minitoc} dans un
+% chapitre sans sections ni de commande \com{minilof} ou \com{minilot} dans un chapitre sans figures ou sans
+% tableaux. L'option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles} (voir la section~\vref{s+placing}), active par
+% défaut, saute les mini-tables vides (avec un note dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}); l'option de paquetage
+% \opt{nocheckfiles} rétablit l'ancien comportement (les mini-tables vides sont imprimées).
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, the mini-tables and partial tables of contents
+% contain only references higher and to sections and
+% subsections. The counters \dcnt{parttocdepth},
+% \dcnt{minitocdepth} and \dcnt{secttocdepth},
+% similar to \dcnt{tocdepth}, allow the user to modify this behaviour. Mini or partial
+% lists of figures or tables are not affected by the value of
+% these counters, but if there are depth counters for these lists (\dcnt{lofdepth} and
+% \dcnt{lotdepth}), as done by the \pack{subfigure} and
+% \pack{subfig} packages~\cite{subfigure,subfig}\label{h.subfig} from
+% \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}, new depth counters are created if necessary, with obvious names like
+% \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth}, \dcnt{minilofdepth}, \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth},
+% and \dcnt{sectlotdepth}.
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Par défaut, les mini-tables et tables des matières partielles ne contiennent que les références jusqu'aux sections et
+% sous-sections. Les trois compteurs \dcnt{parttocdepth}, \dcnt{minitocdepth}
+% et \dcnt{secttocdepth}, similaires à~\dcnt{tocdepth}, permettent à~l'utilisateur de
+% modifier ce comportement. Les mini-listes des figures ou des tableaux ne sont pas affectées par ces compteurs, mais
+% s'il existe des compteurs de profondeur pour ces listes (\dcnt{lofdepth} et
+% \dcnt{lotdepth}), comme cela est fait par les paquetages\label{h.subfig}
+% \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure} et
+% \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig} de \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}, de nouveaux compteurs sont créés si
+% nécessaire, portant des noms évidents tels que \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth},
+% \dcnt{minilofdepth}, \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth} et \dcnt{sectlotdepth}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Starred chapters, parts and sections}\label{s+starred.chap}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Chapitres, parties et sections étoilés}\label{s+starred.chap}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection}
+% \noindent
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \textbf{NOTE}: if using \com{chapter*} and a
+% \or\relax
+% \textbf{NOTE}: si vous utilisez \com{chapter*} et une commande
+% \fi
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% command\Virage{} to add something in the
+% table of contents, the numbering of the \upack{minitoc} auxiliary files would be altered.
+% To avoid that problem, a first method is to say:
+% \or\relax
+% pour\Virage{} ajouter quelque chose dans la table des matières, la numérotation des fichiers auxiliaires de
+% \upack{minitoc} serait altérée. Pour éviter ce problème, une première méthode est de dire:
+% \fi
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{addstarredpart}\verb|{...}|\\
+% \com{addstarredchapter}\verb|{...}|\\
+% \com{addstarredsection}\verb|{...}|
+% \end{quote}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These commands apply only for the level of a part-, mini- or
+% sect-toc; for lower levels, the usual command is sufficient:
+% \or\relax
+% Ces commandes ne s'appliquent que pour le niveau d'une  part-, mini- ou
+% sect-toc; pour des niveaux inférieurs, utilisez, comme d'habitude:
+% \fi
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}|
+% \end{quote}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% So, to add a section-level entry in the global toc and in the
+% minitoc of a starred chapter:
+% \or\relax
+% Donc, pour ajouter une entrée de niveau section dans la table des matières globale et dans la minitoc
+% d'un chapitre étoilé:
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{verse}
+%    \com{chapter*}\verb|{Title of chapter}|\\
+%    \com{addstarredchapter}\verb|{Title of chapter}|\\
+%    \com{minitoc}\\
+%    \com{section*}\verb|{First section}|\\
+%    \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{First section}|\\
+%    \com{section*}\verb|{Second section}|\\
+%    \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{Second section}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{verse}
+%    \com{chapter*}\verb|{Titre du chapitre}|\\
+%    \com{addstarredchapter}\verb|{Titre du chapitre}|\\
+%    \com{minitoc}\\
+%    \com{section*}\verb|{Première section}|\\
+%    \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{Première section}|\\
+%    \com{section*}\verb|{Seconde section}|\\
+%    \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{Seconde section}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \fi
+% \lneed{3}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% There is sometimes a problem with mini-tables when
+% you use \com{chapter*} (or \com{section*}): the minitocs
+% appear in the wrong chapter. You can add a \com{adjustmtc}
+% (or \com{adjuststc} or \com{adjustptc}) command at the end
+% of the starred chapter (or section or part) to increment the
+% corresponding counter. Do not use commands like \com{stepcounter}\verb|{mtc}| or \com{addtocounter}\verb|{mtc}{...}|
+% (which should work, but it is cheating), because the \pack{mtcoff} package (see section~\vref{o+mtcoff}) knows
+% what to do about \com{adjustmtc} (and others), but can do
+% nothing about \com{stepcounter} or \com{addtocounter}, as they are a standard basic commands
+% of \LaTeX, not \upack{minitoc} specific commands. Syntax:\nopagebreak
+% \or\relax
+% Il y a parfois un problème avec des mini-tables lorsque vous utilisez \com{chapter*} (ou \com{section*}):\ les
+% minitocs apparaissent dans le mauvais chapitre. Vous pouvez ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc} (ou
+% \com{adjuststc}, ou \com{adjustptc}) à~la fin du chapitre étoilé (ou de la section ou partie étoilée) pour
+% incrémenter le compteur correspondant. N'utilisez pas de commandes telles que \com{stepcounter}\verb|{mtc}|
+% ou \com{addtocounter}\verb|{mtc}{...}| (ceci
+% devrait marcher, mais c'est de la triche), parce que le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} (voir la section~\vref{o+mtcoff})
+% sait quoi faire avec \com{adjustmtc} (et autres), mais ne sait pas quoi faire de \com{stepcounter} ou
+% \com{addtocounter}, car ce sont des
+% commandes \LaTeX{} basiques standard, pas des commandes spécifiques de \upack{minitoc}. Syntaxe:\nopagebreak
+% \fi
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{adjustptc}\verb|[|\emph{n}\verb|]|\qquad
+% \com{adjustmtc}\verb|[|\emph{n}\verb|]|\qquad
+% \com{adjuststc}\verb|[|\emph{n}\verb|]|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% where \emph{n} is the increment (default:~1).
+% \or\relax
+% où \emph{n} est l'incrément (défaut:~1).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementstc}
+% \begin{macro}{\incrementptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\incrementmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\incrementstc}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% There are similar commands to \emph{decrement} or \emph{increment} by~1 these counters:
+% \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc},
+% \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, and \com{incrementstc};
+% the same remarks as above apply. These commands have no argument.
+% But a more clever way to solve this problem would be using commands similar to:
+% \or\relax
+% Il y~a des commandes similaires pour \emph{décrémenter} ou \emph{incrémenter} de~1 ces compteurs:
+% \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc},
+% \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc} et \com{incrementstc};
+% les mêmes remarques que ci-dessus s'appliquent. Ces commandes n'ont pas d'argument.
+% Mais une manière plus élégante de résoudre ce problème serait d'utiliser des commandes similaires~à:
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|
+% \end{quote}
+% This\virage{} command adds an entry in the table of contents (and adjusts the
+% counter, because it calls \com{adjustmtc}). The
+% table~\vref{t+mtcadd} summarizes these commands, that you put
+% \emph{after} \com{chapter*}, etc.\
+% If the optional argument is omitted or empty or blank, no entry will
+% be visible in the table of contents nor in the minitocs.
+% If the optional argument is something invisible
+% (like~\verb|~|, \com{space} or \com{quad}), the result will be strange
+% but still logically correct. See also section~\vref{faq.30} for the problems with \com{mtcaddpart}.
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|
+% \end{quote}
+% Cette\virage{} commande ajoute une entrée dans la table des matières (et ajuste le compteur,
+% car elle appelle \com{adjustmtc}).
+% Le tableau~\vref{t+mtcadd} liste ces commandes, que vous placez \emph{après} \com{chapter*}, etc.\ Si
+% l'argument optionnel est omis, ou est vide ou blanc, aucune entrée ne sera visible dans la table des matières ni
+% dans les minitocs. Si l'argument optionnel est quelque chose d'invisible (comme~\verb|~|, \com{space} ou \com{quad}),
+% le résultat sera étrange mais cependant logiquement correct. Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq.30} pour les
+% problèmes avec \com{mtcaddpart}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[th]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Adding an entry in the ToC for
+% a starred part, chapter, or section}\label{t+mtcadd}
+% \centering
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Level}&%
+% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{With title}}\\
+% \midrule
+% part&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\
+% chapter&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\
+% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
+% \thickline
+% \textbf{Level}&%
+% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{With title}}\\
+% \hline
+% part&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\
+% chapter&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\
+% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\
+% \thickline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \fi
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[th]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption[Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une partie, un chapitre ou une
+% section étoilés]{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une partie, un chapitre ou une
+% section étoilés}\label{t+mtcadd}
+% \centering
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Niveau}&%
+% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{Avec titre}}\\
+% \midrule
+% partie&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\
+% chapitre&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\
+% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
+% \thickline
+% \textbf{Niveau}&%
+% \multicolumn{1}{c}{\textbf{Avec titre}}\\
+% \hline
+% partie&\com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\
+% chapitre&\com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\
+% section&\com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\
+% \thickline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \fi
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Typesetting of the mini-tables}
+% The mini-tables are typeset in a \env{verse}-like environment, and can be split over several pages.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Composition des mini-tables}
+% Les mini-tables sont composées dans un environnement analogue à~\env{verse}, et donc peuvent s'étendre sur
+% plusieurs pages.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Chapter-level mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Mini-tables au niveau chapitre}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% The mini-table of contents is typeset in the \com{mtcfont}
+% font, which is \verb|\small\rmfamily| by default.
+% In fact, the font \com{mtcfont} is selected at the beginning of a minitoc, minilof or minilot. More
+% selective choices are made with the following fonts.
+% Section entries are typeset
+% in the \com{mtcSfont} font, which is \verb|\small\bfseries| by default.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% La mini-table des matières est composée dans la fonte \com{mtcfont}, qui est
+% \verb|\small\rmfamily| par défaut.
+% En fait, la fonte \com{mtcfont} est sélectionnée au début d'une minitoc, minilof ou minilot. Des choix
+% plus sélectifs sont faits avec les fontes suivantes.
+% Les entrées de type section sont composées dans la fonte
+% \com{mtcSfont}, qui est \verb|\small\bfseries| par défaut.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltSfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For subsections, subsubsections, paragraphs and subparagraphs, the
+% commands \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont},
+% \com{mtcPfont} and \com{mtcSPfont} are available
+% (by default, \verb|\small\rmfamily|) to enable the use of various fonts. Mini lists of figures and tables are
+% typeset in the fonts \com{mlffont} and \com{mltfont}, which are \verb|\small\rmfamily| by default.
+% There are also \com{mlfSfont} and \com{mltSfont} for sub-figures and sub-tables entries.
+% See tables~\vrefrange{t+mtc+f1}{t+mtc+f2}\,\footnote{Thanks to \name{Stefan}{Ulrich},
+% who contributed these tables initially.}.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les sous-sections, sous-sous-sections,
+% paragraphes et sous-paragraphes, les commandes \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont},
+% \com{mtcPfont} et \com{mtcSPfont} sont disponibles (par défaut, \verb|\small\rmfamily|) pour permettre
+% l'utilisation de fontes diverses. Les mini-listes de figures et de tableaux sont composées dans les fontes
+% \com{mlffont} et \com{mltfont}, qui sont \verb|\small\rmfamily| par défaut.
+% Il y a aussi \com{mlfSfont} et \com{mltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tableaux.
+% Voir les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+mtc+f1}{t+mtc+f2}\,\footnote{Merci à~\name{Stefan}{Ulrich},
+% qui a fourni ces tableaux initialement.}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Note\Virage{} that the default choice of fonts is certainly not perfect and hence it is not definitive. A~symptom of this
+% imperfection is the presence of poor alignments in the mini-tables, if bold and non-bold fonts are mixed\,\footnote{This
+% appears, e.g., if you are using the Computer Modern Roman (CMR) fonts~\cite{cmt}.
+% The symptom disappears if you do not use bold
+% CMR fonts or if you use the TX fonts (\pack{txfonts} package~\cite{txfonts}),
+% for instance\IfFileExists{txfonts.sty}{, like in this document}{\relax}. See also section~\vref{faq.29}.}
+% (the true length of
+% \texttt{1em} is not the same for the fonts). This can often be adjusted by changing some fonts.\par
+% \or\relax
+% Notez\Virage{} que le choix de fontes par défaut n'est certainement pas parfait et n'est donc pas définitif.
+% Un symptôme de
+% cette imperfection est la présence d'alignements imprécis dans les mini-tables, si des fontes grasses et non-grasses
+% sont mélangées\,\footnote{Ceci apparaît notamment si vous utilisez les fontes Computer Modern Roman (CMR)~\cite{cmt}.
+% Le symptôme disparaît si vous n'utilisez plus de fontes CMR grasses ou si vous utilisez les fontes TX (paquetage
+% \pack{txfonts}~\cite{txfonts}), par exemple\IfFileExists{txfonts.sty}{, comme dans ce document}{\relax}.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq.29}.}
+% (la longueur effective de \texttt{1em} n'est pas la même pour ces fontes).
+% Ceci peut souvent être corrigé en changeant quelques fontes.
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \footnotesize
+% \caption{Fonts and titles for the mini-table commands}\label{t+mtc+f1}
+% \centering
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% Command
+%     &\FontDefault{Font}{default setting}
+%         &\FontDefault{Title string}{default setting}
+%             &\FontDefault{Title font}{default setting}\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\part...} commands:}\\[1ex]
+% \com{parttoc}%
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\com{normalsize}\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang}
+%               &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \com{partlof}%
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang}
+%               &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &
+%               &\\[1ex]
+% \com{partlot}%
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang}
+%               &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &
+%               &\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\mini...} commands:\Chap}\\[1ex]
+% \com{minitoc}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \com{minilof}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mlfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &
+%                     &\\[1ex]
+% \com{minilot}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &
+%                     &\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\sect...} commands:\Sec}\\[1ex]
+% \com{secttoc}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \com{sectlof}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &
+%                     &\\[1ex]
+% \com{sectlot}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &
+%                     &\\[1ex]
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with
+%      \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with
+%      no \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang default for english;
+%      changed by the language definition files or
+%      \com{renewcommand}.}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{All these fonts use \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape, and \V\mdseries\ by default.}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}}
+% \thickline
+% Command
+%     &\FontDefault{Font}{default setting}
+%         &\FontDefault{Title string}{default setting}
+%             &\FontDefault{Title font}{default setting}\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\part...} commands:}\\[1ex]
+% \com{parttoc}%
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang}
+%               &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \com{partlof}%
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang}
+%               &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &
+%               &\\[1ex]
+% \com{partlot}%
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang}
+%               &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &
+%               &\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\mini...} commands:\Chap}\\[1ex]
+% \com{minitoc}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \com{minilof}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \com{minilot}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &
+%                     &\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut For the \V{\sect...} commands:\Sec}\\[1ex]
+% \com{secttoc}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \com{sectlof}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &
+%                     &\\[1ex]
+% \com{sectlot}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &
+%                     &\\[1ex]
+% \thickline
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with
+%      \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with
+%      no \com{chapter} level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang default for english;
+%      changed by the language definition files or
+%      \com{renewcommand}.}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{All these fonts use \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape, and \V\mdseries{} by default.}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \fi
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \footnotesize
+% \caption{Fontes et titres pour les commandes de mini-tables}\label{t+mtc+f1}
+% \centering
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% Commande
+%     &\FontDefault{Fonte}{choix par défaut}
+%         &\FontDefault{Chaîne titre}{choix par défaut}
+%             &\FontDefault{Fonte du titre}{choix par défaut}\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\part...}:}\\[1ex]
+% \com{parttoc}%
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang}
+%               &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \com{partlof}%
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang}
+%               &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\com{normalsize}\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &
+%               &\\[1ex]
+% \com{partlot}%
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang}
+%               &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &
+%               &\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\mini...}:\Chap}\\[1ex]
+% \com{minitoc}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \com{minilof}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mlfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &
+%                     &\\[1ex]
+% \com{minilot}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &
+%                     &\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\sect...}:\Sec}\\[1ex]
+% \com{secttoc}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \com{sectlof}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &
+%                     &\\[1ex]
+% \com{sectlot}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &
+%                     &\\[1ex]
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau
+%      \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau
+%      \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang par défaut pour l'anglais;
+%      changé par les fichiers de définition de langue ou
+%      \com{renewcommand}.}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{Toutes ces fontes utilisent \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape\ et \V\mdseries\ par défaut.}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}llll@{}}
+% \thickline
+% Commande
+%     &\FontDefault{Fonte}{choix par défaut}
+%         &\FontDefault{Chaîne titre}{choix par défaut}
+%             &\FontDefault{Fonte du }{choix par défaut}\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\part...}:}\\[1ex]
+% \com{parttoc}%
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{ptcfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &\FontDefault{\com{ptctitle}}{Table of Contents\Lang}
+%               &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \com{partlof}%
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{plffont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &\FontDefault{\com{plftitle}}{List of Figures\Lang}
+%               &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{plfSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &
+%               &\\[1ex]
+% \com{partlot}%
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{pltfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &\FontDefault{\com{plttitle}}{List of Tables\Lang}
+%               &\FontChapSec{\com{ptifont}}{\V\LARGE\V\bfseries}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontChapSec{\com{pltSfont}}{\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%          &
+%               &\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\mini...}:\Chap}\\[1ex]
+% \com{minitoc}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mtcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{mtctitle}}{Contents\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \com{minilof}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mlffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{mlftitle}}{Figures\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mlfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &
+%                     &\\[1ex]
+% \com{minilot}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{mlttitle}}{Tables\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{mtifont}}{\V\large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{mltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &
+%                     &\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Strut Pour les commandes \V{\sect...}:\Sec}\\[1ex]
+% \com{secttoc}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{stcfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{stctitle}}{Contents\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+% \com{sectlof}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{slffont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{slftitle}}{Figures\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{slfSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &
+%                     &\\[1ex]
+% \com{sectlot}%
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{sltfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &\FontDefault{\com{slttitle}}{Tables\Lang}
+%                     &\FontDefault{\com{stifont}}{\V\Large\V\bfseries}\\[1ex]
+%     &\FontDefault{\com{sltSfont}}{\V\small\V\rmfamily}
+%             &
+%                     &\\[1ex]
+% \thickline
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau
+%      \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau
+%      \com{chapter} (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\Lang par défaut pour l'anglais;
+%      changé par les fichiers de définition de langue ou
+%      \com{renewcommand}.}\\
+% \multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{Toutes ces fontes utilisent \V\rmfamily, \V\upshape\ et \V\mdseries\ par défaut.}
+% \end{tabular}
+% \fi
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \small
+% \caption{Fonts for the mini-table entries}\label{t+mtc+f2}
+% \centering
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% Level&Font&Default setting\\
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{parttoc} entries:}\\
+% \Strut
+% Chapter\Chap
+%      &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap
+%          &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\
+% Section
+%      &\com{ptcSfont}
+%          &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\
+%                                    \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\
+% Subsection
+%         &\com{ptcSSfont}
+%             &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\
+% Subsubsection
+%         &\com{ptcSSSfont}
+%             &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\
+% Paragraph
+%         &\com{ptcPfont}
+%             &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\
+% Subparagraph
+%         &\com{ptcSPfont}
+%             &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{minitoc} entries:\Chap}\\
+% \Strut
+% Section
+%     &\com{mtcSfont}
+%         &\V\small\V\bfseries\\
+% Subsection
+%     &\com{mtcSSfont}
+%         &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\
+% Subsubsection
+%     &\com{mtcSSSfont}
+%         &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\
+% Paragraph
+%     &\com{mtcPfont}
+%         &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\
+% Subparagraph
+%     &\com{mtcSPfont}
+%         &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{secttoc} entries:\Sec}\\
+% \Strut
+% Subsection
+%     &\com{stcSSfont}
+%         &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\
+% Subsubsection
+%     &\com{stcSSSfont}
+%         &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\
+% Paragraph
+%     &\com{stcPfont}
+%         &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\
+% Subparagraph
+%     &\com{stcSPfont}
+%         &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex]
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with \com{chapter}
+%      level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with no \com{chapter}
+%      level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+% \thickline
+% Level&Font&Default setting\\
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{parttoc} entries:}\\
+% \Strut
+% Chapter\Chap
+%      &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap
+%          &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\
+% Section
+%      &\com{ptcSfont}
+%          &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\
+%                                    \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\
+% Subsection
+%         &\com{ptcSSfont}
+%             &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\
+% Subsubsection
+%         &\com{ptcSSSfont}
+%             &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\
+% Paragraph
+%         &\com{ptcPfont}
+%             &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\
+% Subparagraph
+%         &\com{ptcSPfont}
+%             &\emph{(like \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{minitoc} entries:\Chap}\\
+% \Strut
+% Section
+%     &\com{mtcSfont}
+%         &\V\small\V\bfseries\\
+% Subsection
+%     &\com{mtcSSfont}
+%         &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\
+% Subsubsection
+%     &\com{mtcSSSfont}
+%         &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\
+% Paragraph
+%     &\com{mtcPfont}
+%         &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\
+% Subparagraph
+%     &\com{mtcSPfont}
+%         &\emph{(like \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt For the \com{secttoc} entries:\Sec}\\
+% \Strut
+% Subsection
+%     &\com{stcSSfont}
+%         &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\
+% Subsubsection
+%     &\com{stcSSSfont}
+%         &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\
+% Paragraph
+%     &\com{stcPfont}
+%         &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\
+% Subparagraph
+%     &\com{stcSPfont}
+%         &\emph{(like \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex]
+% \thickline
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap for document classes with \com{chapter}
+%      level (e.g., \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec for document classes with no \com{chapter}
+%      level (e.g., \class{article}).}\\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \fi
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \small
+% \caption{Fontes pour les entrées des mini-tables}\label{t+mtc+f2}
+% \centering
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% Niveau&Fonte&Choix par défaut\\
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{parttoc}:}\\
+% \Strut
+% Chapitre\Chap
+%      &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap
+%          &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\
+% Section
+%      &\com{ptcSfont}
+%          &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\
+%                                    \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\
+% Sous-section
+%         &\com{ptcSSfont}
+%             &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\
+% Sous-sous-section
+%         &\com{ptcSSSfont}
+%             &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\
+% Paragraphe
+%         &\com{ptcPfont}
+%             &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\
+% Sous-paragraphe
+%         &\com{ptcSPfont}
+%             &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{minitoc}:\Chap}\\
+% \Strut
+% Section
+%     &\com{mtcSfont}
+%         &\V\small\V\bfseries\\
+% Sous-section
+%     &\com{mtcSSfont}
+%         &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\
+% Sous-sous-section
+%     &\com{mtcSSSfont}
+%         &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\
+% Paragraphe
+%     &\com{mtcPfont}
+%         &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\
+% Sous-paragraphe
+%     &\com{mtcSPfont}
+%         &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex]
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{secttoc}:\Sec}\\
+% \Strut
+% Sous-section
+%     &\com{stcSSfont}
+%         &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\
+% Sous-sous-section
+%     &\com{stcSSSfont}
+%         &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\
+% Paragraphe
+%     &\com{stcPfont}
+%         &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\
+% Sous-paragraphe
+%     &\com{stcSPfont}
+%         &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex]
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau \com{chapter}
+%      (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau \com{chapter}
+%      (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+% \thickline
+% Niveau&Fonte&Choix par défaut\\
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{parttoc}:}\\
+% \Strut
+% Chapitre\Chap
+%      &\com{ptcCfont}\Chap
+%          &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\Chap\\
+% Section
+%      &\com{ptcSfont}
+%          &\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l}\V\normalsize\V\rmfamily\Chap\\
+%                                    \V\small\V\bfseries\Sec \end{tabular}\\
+% Sous-section
+%         &\com{ptcSSfont}
+%             &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\
+% Sous-sous-section
+%         &\com{ptcSSSfont}
+%             &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\
+% Paragraphe
+%         &\com{ptcPfont}
+%             &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\
+% Sous-paragraphe
+%         &\com{ptcSPfont}
+%             &\emph{(comme \com{ptcfont})}\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{minitoc}:\Chap}\\
+% \Strut
+% Section
+%     &\com{mtcSfont}
+%         &\V\small\V\bfseries\\
+% Sous-section
+%     &\com{mtcSSfont}
+%         &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\
+% Sous-sous-section
+%     &\com{mtcSSSfont}
+%         &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\
+% Paragraphe
+%     &\com{mtcPfont}
+%         &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\
+% Sous-paragraphe
+%     &\com{mtcSPfont}
+%         &\emph{(comme \com{mtcfont})}\\[1ex]
+% \hline
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Strutt Pour les entrées d'une \com{secttoc}:\Sec}\\
+% \Strut
+% Sous-section
+%     &\com{stcSSfont}
+%         &\V\normalsize\V\bfseries\\
+% Sous-sous-section
+%     &\com{stcSSSfont}
+%         &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\
+% Paragraphe
+%     &\com{stcPfont}
+%         &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\
+% Sous-paragraphe
+%     &\com{stcSPfont}
+%         &\emph{(comme \com{stcfont})}\\[1ex]
+% \thickline
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Chap pour les classes de document avec le niveau \com{chapter}
+%      (par~ex. \class{book}, \class{report}).}\\
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}l@{}}{\Sec pour les classes de document sans le niveau \com{chapter}
+%      (par~ex. \class{article}).}\\
+% \end{tabular}
+% \fi
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+% ^^A \ifFLP\floatpagestyle{plain}\fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[!p]
+% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Available languages}\label{t+languages}
+% \ilopt{afrikaan}%
+% \ilopt{afrikaans}%
+% \ilopt{albanian}%
+% \ilopt{arab}%
+% \ilopt{arabic}%
+% \ilopt{arab2}%
+% \ilopt{arabi}%
+% \ilopt{armenian}%
+% \ilopt{bahasai}%
+% \ilopt{bahasa}%
+% \ilopt{indon}%
+% \ilopt{indonesian}%
+% \ilopt{bahasam}%
+% \ilopt{malay}%
+% \ilopt{meyalu}%
+% \ilopt{bangla}%
+% \ilopt{basque}%
+% \ilopt{bengali}%
+% \ilopt{bicig}%
+% \ilopt{uighur}%
+% \ilopt{bicig2}%
+% \ilopt{uighur2}%
+% \ilopt{bicig3}%
+% \ilopt{uighur3}%
+% \ilopt{bithe}%
+% \ilopt{manju}%
+% \ilopt{brazil}%
+% \ilopt{brazilian}%
+% \ilopt{breton}%
+% \ilopt{bulgarian}%
+% \ilopt{bulgarianb}%
+% \ilopt{buryat}%
+% \ilopt{buryat2}%
+% \ilopt{catalan}%
+% \ilopt{chinese1}%
+% \ilopt{chinese2}%
+% \ilopt{croatian}%
+% \ilopt{czech}%
+% \ilopt{danish}%
+% \ilopt{devanagari}%
+% \ilopt{hindi}%
+% \ilopt{dutch}%
+% \iloptd{english}%
+% \ilopt{american}%
+% \ilopt{australian}%
+% \ilopt{british}%
+% \ilopt{canadian}%
+% \ilopt{newzealand}%
+% \ilopt{UKenglish}%
+% \ilopt{USenglish}%
+% \ilopt{english1}%
+% \ilopt{english2}%
+% \ilopt{esperant}%
+% \ilopt{esperanto}%
+% \ilopt{estonian}%
+% \ilopt{ethiopia}%
+% \ilopt{ethiopian}%
+% \ilopt{ethiopian2}%
+% \ilopt{farsi1}%
+% \ilopt{farsi2}%
+% \ilopt{farsi3}%
+% \ilopt{finnish}%
+% \ilopt{finnish2}%
+% \ilopt{french}%
+% \ilopt{frenchb}%
+% \ilopt{frenchle}%
+% \ilopt{frenchpro}%
+% \ilopt{francais}%
+% \ilopt{acadien}%
+% \ilopt{canadien}%
+% \ilopt{french1}%
+% \ilopt{french2}%
+% \ilopt{galician}%
+% \ilopt{german}%
+% \ilopt{austrian}%
+% \ilopt{germanb}%
+% \ilopt{germanb2}%
+% \ilopt{greek}%
+% \ilopt{greek-mono}%
+% \ilopt{greek-polydemo}%
+% \ilopt{greek-polykatha}%
+% \ilopt{guarani}%
+% \ilopt{hangul1}%
+% \ilopt{hangul2}%
+% \ilopt{hangul3}%
+% \ilopt{hangul4}%
+% \ilopt{hangul-u8}%
+% \ilopt{hanja1}%
+% \ilopt{hanja2}%
+% \ilopt{hanja-u8}%
+% \ilopt{hebrew}%
+% \ilopt{hebrew2}%
+% \ilopt{hindi-modern}%
+% \ilopt{icelandic}%
+% \ilopt{interlingua}%
+% \ilopt{irish}%
+% \ilopt{italian}%
+% \ilopt{italian2}%
+% \ilopt{japanese}%
+% \ilopt{japanese2}%
+% \ilopt{japanese3}%
+% \ilopt{japanese4}%
+% \ilopt{japanese5}%
+% \ilopt{japanese6}%
+% \ilopt{kannada}%
+% \ilopt{latin}%
+% \ilopt{latin2}%
+% \ilopt{latinc}%
+% \ilopt{latinc2}%
+% \ilopt{latvian}%
+% \ilopt{latvian2}%
+% \ilopt{letton}%
+% \ilopt{letton2}%
+% \ilopt{lithuanian}%
+% \ilopt{lithuanian2}%
+% \ilopt{lowersorbian}%
+% \ilopt{lsorbian}%
+% \ilopt{magyar}%
+% \ilopt{hungarian}%
+% \ilopt{magyar2}%
+% \ilopt{magyar3}%
+% \ilopt{malayalam-b}%
+% \ilopt{malayalam-keli}%
+% \ilopt{malayalam-keli2}%
+% \ilopt{malayalam-mr}%
+% \ilopt{malayalam-omega}%
+% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana}%
+% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana2}%
+% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana3}%
+% \ilopt{manju}%
+% \ilopt{mexican}%
+% \ilopt{mongol}%
+% \ilopt{mongolb}%
+% \ilopt{mongolian}%
+% \ilopt{ngermanb}%
+% \ilopt{ngerman}%
+% \ilopt{naustrian}%
+% \ilopt{ngermanb2}%
+% \ilopt{norsk}%
+% \ilopt{norsk2}%
+% \ilopt{nynorsk}%
+% \ilopt{nynorsk2}%
+% \ilopt{occitan}%
+% \ilopt{occitan2}%
+% \ilopt{polish}%
+% \ilopt{polish2}%
+% \ilopt{polski}%
+% \ilopt{portuguese}%
+% \ilopt{portuges}%
+% \ilopt{romanian}%
+% \ilopt{romanian2}%
+% \ilopt{romanian3}%
+% \ilopt{russian}%
+% \ilopt{russianb}%
+% \ilopt{russianc}%
+% \ilopt{russian2m}%
+% \ilopt{russian2o}%
+% \ilopt{russian-cca}%
+% \ilopt{russian-cca1}%
+% \ilopt{russian-lh}%
+% \ilopt{russian-lhcyralt}%
+% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}%
+% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrwin}%
+% \ilopt{samin}%
+% \ilopt{scottish}%
+% \ilopt{serbian}%
+% \ilopt{serbianc}%
+% \ilopt{slovak}%
+% \ilopt{slovene}%
+% \ilopt{spanish}%
+% \ilopt{castillan}%
+% \ilopt{castillian}%
+% \ilopt{spanish2}%
+% \ilopt{spanish3}%
+% \ilopt{spanish4}%
+% \ilopt{swahili}%
+% \ilopt{swedish}%
+% \ilopt{swedish2}%
+% \ilopt{thai}%
+% \ilopt{turkish}%
+% \ilopt{ukrainian}%
+% \ilopt{ukraineb}%
+% \ilopt{uppersorbian}%
+% \ilopt{usorbian}%
+% \ilopt{vietnam}%
+% \ilopt{vietnamese}%
+% \ilopt{welsh}%
+% \ilopt{xalx}%
+% \ilopt{khalkha}%
+% \ilopt{xalx2}%
+% \ilopt{xalx3}%
+% \centering
+% \hspace*{-.5\widthinc}\begin{minipage}{\textwidth+\widthinc}\raggedright\small
+% \selectlanguage{french} ^^A to get better spacing
+% \begin{multicols}{4}
+% \begin{itemize}
+% ^^A \leftmargin=-1em \itemindent=-1em
+% ^^A \def\labelitemi{--}
+% \item afrikaan (afrikaans)
+% \item albanian
+% \item arab (arabic)\,$^{c}$
+% \item arab2\,$^{a,c}$
+% \item arabi\,$^{c,j}$
+% \item armenian\,$^c$
+% \item bahasai (bahasa, indon, indonesian)\,$^c$
+% \item bahasam (malay, meyalu)\,$^c$
+% \item bangla (bengali)\,$^c$
+% \item basque
+% \item bicig (uighur)\,$^{c,i}$
+% \item bicig2 (uighur2)\,$^{c,i}$
+% \item bicig3 (uighur3)\,$^{c,i}$
+% \item bithe (manju)\,$^c$
+% \item brazil (brazilian)
+% \item breton
+% \item bulgarian\,$^c$
+% \item bulgarianb\,$^c$
+% \item buryat\,$^c$
+% \item buryat2\,$^c$
+% \item catalan
+% \item chinese1\,$^{c,g}$
+% \item chinese2\,$^{c,g}$
+% \item croatian
+% \item czech
+% \item danish
+% \item devanagari (hindi)$^c$
+% \item dutch
+% \item english$^{\dagger}$ (american, australian, british, canadian, newzealand, UKenglish, USenglish)
+% \item english1
+% \item english2
+% \item esperant (esperanto)
+% \item estonian
+% \item ethiopia (ethiopian)\,$^c$
+% \item ethiopian2\,$^{c,e,h}$
+% \item farsi1\,$^{c,f,g}$
+% \item farsi2\,$^{c,f,g}$
+% \item farsi3\,$^{c,j}$
+% \item finnish
+% \item finnish2
+% \item french (frenchb, frenchle, frenchpro, francais, acadien, canadien)
+% \item french1
+% \item french2
+% \item galician
+% \item german (austrian)
+% \item germanb
+% \item germanb2
+% \item greek\,$^c$
+% \item greek-mono\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item greek-polydemo\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item greek-polykatha\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item guarani\,$^h$
+% \item hangul1\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hangul2\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hangul3\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hangul4\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hangul-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$
+% \item hanja1\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hanja2\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hanja-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$
+% \item hebrew\,$^{c,h}$
+% \item hebrew2\,$^{c,h}$
+% \item hindi-modern\,$^c$
+% \item icelandic\,$^f$
+% \item interlingua
+% \item irish
+% \item italian
+% \item italian2
+% \item japanese\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item japanese2\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item japanese3\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item japanese4\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item japanese5\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item japanese6\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item kannada\,$^c$
+% \item latin
+% \item latin2
+% \item latinc
+% \item latinc2
+% \item latvian (letton)\,$^e$
+% \item latvian2 (letton2)\,$^c$
+% \item lithuanian
+% \item lithuanian2\,$^{c,h}$
+% \item lowersorbian (lsorbian)
+% \item magyar (hungarian)
+% \item magyar2
+% \item magyar3
+% \item malayalam-b\,$^c$
+% \item malayalam-keli\,$^c$
+% \item malayalam-keli2\,$^c$
+% \item malayalam-mr\,$^c$
+% \item malayalam-omega\,$^{c,e,g,h}$
+% \item malayalam-rachana\,$^c$
+% \item malayalam-rachana2\,$^c$
+% \item malayalam-rachana3\,$^c$
+% \item mexican
+% \item mongol\,$^c$
+% \item mongolb (mongolian)\,$^{c,f,h}$
+% \item ngermanb (ngerman, naustrian)
+% \item ngermanb2
+% \item norsk
+% \item norsk2
+% \item nynorsk
+% \item nynorsk2
+% \item occitan
+% \item occitan2
+% \item polish
+% \item polish2\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item polski\,$^c$
+% \item portuguese (portuges)
+% \item romanian
+% \item romanian2
+% \item romanian3
+% \item russian\,$^{b,c}$
+% \item russianb\,$^{b,c}$
+% \item russianc\,$^{b,c}$
+% \item russian2m\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item russian2o\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item russian-cca\,$^{c,g,h}$
+% \item russian-cca1\,$^{c,g,h}$
+% \item russian-lh\,$^{c,g,h}$
+% \item russian-lhcyralt\,$^{c,g,h}$
+% \item russian-lhcyrkoi\,$^{c,g,h}$
+% \item russian-lhcyrwin\,$^{c,g,h}$
+% \item samin
+% \item scottish
+% \item serbian
+% \item serbianc\,$^c$
+% \item slovak
+% \item slovene
+% \item spanish (castillan, castillian)
+% \item spanish2
+% \item spanish3\,$^{e,f}$
+% \item spanish4
+% \item swahili
+% \item swedish
+% \item swedish2
+% \item thai\,$^{c,d,f,g}$
+% \item turkish
+% \item ukrainian (ukraineb)\,$^{b,c}$
+% \item uppersorbian (usorbian)
+% \item vietnam (vietnamese)\,$^{c,d}$
+% \item welsh
+% \item xalx (khalkha)\,$^c$
+% \item xalx2\,$^c$
+% \item xalx3\,$^c$
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{multicols}
+% \hrule
+% \begin{multicols}{2}\footnotesize
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item[()]The languages between parentheses are aliases of a main language
+%        and their \suffix{.mld} files will load the \suffix{.mld} file
+%        of that main language.
+% \item[$^{\dagger}$] The presence of the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory.
+% \item[$^a$] The \ulopt{arab(ic)}\ilopt{arab}\ilopt{arabic} and \lopt{arab2} languages require the use of the
+%        \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}).
+% \item[$^b$] The \ulopt{russian} language is not yet supported
+%        by the \pack{babel} system~\cite{babel,babel-user}, but
+%        \lopt{russianb}~\cite{russianb} is supported if you use
+%        babel-3.6 or a higher version; \lopt{russianc} is an extra. Look also at other \suffix{.mld} files for russian.
+% \item[$^c$] Some languages may require specific fonts.
+% \item[$^d$] Requires the \pack{CJK} package~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}.
+% \item[$^e$] Requires \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), the version of \LaTeX\ for Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$).
+% \item[$^f$] Requires a 8-bits input encoding.
+% \item[$^g$] Uses also a \suffix{.mlo} file.
+% \item[$^h$] Requires a specific input encoding.
+% \item[$^i$] The \lopt{bicig} language is also known as \lopt{uighur}.
+% \item[$^j$] The \lopt{arabi} and \lopt{farsi3} languages require the use of the
+%        \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} package~\cite{arabi}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{multicols}
+% \end{minipage}
+% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
+% \end{table}
+% ^^A \ifDP\else\afterpage{\clearpage}\fi
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[!p]
+% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
+% \changeskips
+% ^^A \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
+% \caption{Langues disponibles}\label{t+languages}
+% \ilopt{afrikaan}%
+% \ilopt{afrikaans}%
+% \ilopt{albanian}%
+% \ilopt{arab}%
+% \ilopt{arabic}%
+% \ilopt{arab2}%
+% \ilopt{arabi}%
+% \ilopt{armenian}%
+% \ilopt{bahasai}%
+% \ilopt{bahasa}%
+% \ilopt{indon}%
+% \ilopt{indonesian}%
+% \ilopt{bahasam}%
+% \ilopt{malay}%
+% \ilopt{meyalu}%
+% \ilopt{bangla}%
+% \ilopt{basque}%
+% \ilopt{bengali}%
+% \ilopt{bicig}%
+% \ilopt{uighur}%
+% \ilopt{bicig2}%
+% \ilopt{uighur2}%
+% \ilopt{bicig3}%
+% \ilopt{uighur3}%
+% \ilopt{bithe}%
+% \ilopt{manju}%
+% \ilopt{brazil}%
+% \ilopt{brazilian}%
+% \ilopt{breton}%
+% \ilopt{bulgarian}%
+% \ilopt{bulgarianb}%
+% \ilopt{buryat}%
+% \ilopt{buryat2}%
+% \ilopt{catalan}%
+% \ilopt{chinese1}%
+% \ilopt{chinese2}%
+% \ilopt{croatian}%
+% \ilopt{czech}%
+% \ilopt{danish}%
+% \ilopt{devanagari}%
+% \ilopt{hindi}%
+% \ilopt{dutch}%
+% \iloptd{english}%
+% \ilopt{american}%
+% \ilopt{australian}%
+% \ilopt{british}%
+% \ilopt{canadian}%
+% \ilopt{newzealand}%
+% \ilopt{UKenglish}%
+% \ilopt{USenglish}%
+% \ilopt{english1}%
+% \ilopt{english2}%
+% \ilopt{esperant}%
+% \ilopt{esperanto}%
+% \ilopt{estonian}%
+% \ilopt{ethiopia}%
+% \ilopt{ethiopian}%
+% \ilopt{ethiopian2}%
+% \ilopt{farsi1}%
+% \ilopt{farsi2}%
+% \ilopt{farsi3}%
+% \ilopt{finnish}%
+% \ilopt{finnish2}%
+% \ilopt{french}%
+% \ilopt{frenchb}%
+% \ilopt{frenchle}%
+% \ilopt{frenchpro}%
+% \ilopt{francais}%
+% \ilopt{acadien}%
+% \ilopt{canadien}%
+% \ilopt{french1}%
+% \ilopt{french2}%
+% \ilopt{galician}%
+% \ilopt{german}%
+% \ilopt{austrian}%
+% \ilopt{germanb}%
+% \ilopt{germanb2}%
+% \ilopt{greek}%
+% \ilopt{greek-mono}%
+% \ilopt{greek-polydemo}%
+% \ilopt{greek-polykatha}%
+% \ilopt{guarani}%
+% \ilopt{hangul1}%
+% \ilopt{hangul2}%
+% \ilopt{hangul3}%
+% \ilopt{hangul4}%
+% \ilopt{hangul-u8}%
+% \ilopt{hanja1}%
+% \ilopt{hanja2}%
+% \ilopt{hanja-u8}%
+% \ilopt{hebrew}%
+% \ilopt{hebrew2}%
+% \ilopt{hindi-modern}%
+% \ilopt{icelandic}%
+% \ilopt{interlingua}%
+% \ilopt{irish}%
+% \ilopt{italian}%
+% \ilopt{italian2}%
+% \ilopt{japanese}%
+% \ilopt{japanese2}%
+% \ilopt{japanese3}%
+% \ilopt{japanese4}%
+% \ilopt{japanese5}%
+% \ilopt{japanese6}%
+% \ilopt{kannada}%
+% \ilopt{latin}%
+% \ilopt{latin2}%
+% \ilopt{latinc}%
+% \ilopt{latinc2}%
+% \ilopt{latvian}%
+% \ilopt{latvian2}%
+% \ilopt{letton}%
+% \ilopt{letton2}%
+% \ilopt{lithuanian}%
+% \ilopt{lithuanian2}%
+% \ilopt{lowersorbian}%
+% \ilopt{lsorbian}%
+% \ilopt{magyar}%
+% \ilopt{hungarian}%
+% \ilopt{magyar2}%
+% \ilopt{magyar3}%
+% \ilopt{malayalam-b}%
+% \ilopt{malayalam-keli}%
+% \ilopt{malayalam-keli2}%
+% \ilopt{malayalam-mr}%
+% \ilopt{malayalam-omega}%
+% \ilopt{malayalam-keli}%
+% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana}%
+% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana2}%
+% \ilopt{malayalam-rachana3}%
+% \ilopt{manju}%
+% \ilopt{mexican}%
+% \ilopt{mongol}%
+% \ilopt{mongolb}%
+% \ilopt{mongolian}%
+% \ilopt{ngermanb}%
+% \ilopt{ngerman}%
+% \ilopt{naustrian}%
+% \ilopt{ngermanb2}%
+% \ilopt{norsk}%
+% \ilopt{norsk2}%
+% \ilopt{nynorsk}%
+% \ilopt{nynorsk2}%
+% \ilopt{occitan}%
+% \ilopt{occitan2}%
+% \ilopt{polish}%
+% \ilopt{polish2}%
+% \ilopt{polski}%
+% \ilopt{portuguese}%
+% \ilopt{portuges}%
+% \ilopt{romanian}%
+% \ilopt{romanian2}%
+% \ilopt{romanian3}%
+% \ilopt{russian}%
+% \ilopt{russianb}%
+% \ilopt{russianc}%
+% \ilopt{russian2m}%
+% \ilopt{russian2o}%
+% \ilopt{russian-cca}%
+% \ilopt{russian-cca1}%
+% \ilopt{russian-lh}%
+% \ilopt{russian-lhcyralt}%
+% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}%
+% \ilopt{russian-lhcyrwin}%
+% \ilopt{samin}%
+% \ilopt{scottish}%
+% \ilopt{serbian}%
+% \ilopt{serbianc}%
+% \ilopt{slovak}%
+% \ilopt{slovene}%
+% \ilopt{spanish}%
+% \ilopt{castillan}%
+% \ilopt{castillian}%
+% \ilopt{spanish2}%
+% \ilopt{spanish3}%
+% \ilopt{spanish4}%
+% \ilopt{swahili}%
+% \ilopt{swedish}%
+% \ilopt{swedish2}%
+% \ilopt{thai}%
+% \ilopt{turkish}%
+% \ilopt{ukrainian}%
+% \ilopt{ukraineb}%
+% \ilopt{uppersorbian}%
+% \ilopt{usorbian}%
+% \ilopt{vietnam}%
+% \ilopt{vietnamese}%
+% \ilopt{welsh}%
+% \ilopt{xalx}%
+% \ilopt{khalkha}%
+% \ilopt{xalx2}%
+% \ilopt{xalx3}%
+% \centering
+% \hspace*{-.5\widthinc}\begin{minipage}{\textwidth+\widthinc}\raggedright\small
+% \selectlanguage{french} ^^A to get better spacing
+% \begin{multicols}{4}
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item afrikaan (afrikaans)
+% \item albanian
+% \item arab (arabic)\,$^{a,c}$
+% \item arab2\,$^{a,c}$
+% \item arabi\,$^{c,j}$
+% \item armenian\,$^c$
+% \item bahasai (bahasa, indon, indonesian)\,$^c$
+% \item bahasam (malay, meyalu)\,$^c$
+% \item bangla (bengali)\,$^c$
+% \item basque
+% \item bicig (uighur)\,$^{c,i}$
+% \item bicig2 (uighur2)\,$^{c,i}$
+% \item bicig3 (uighur3)\,$^{c,i}$
+% \item bithe (manju)\,$^c$
+% \item brazil (brazilian)
+% \item breton
+% \item bulgarian\,$^c$
+% \item bulgarianb\,$^c$
+% \item buryat\,$^c$
+% \item buryat2\,$^c$
+% \item catalan
+% \item chinese1\,$^{c,g}$
+% \item chinese2\,$^{c,g}$
+% \item croatian
+% \item czech
+% \item danish
+% \item devanagari (hindi)$^c$
+% \item dutch
+% \item english\,$^{\dagger}$ (american, australian, british, canadian, newzealand, UKenglish, USenglish)
+% \item english1
+% \item english2
+% \item esperant (esperanto)
+% \item estonian
+% \item ethiopia (ethiopian)\,$^c$
+% \item ethiopian2\,$^{c,e,h}$
+% \item farsi1\,$^{c,f,g}$
+% \item farsi2\,$^{c,f,g}$
+% \item farsi3\,$^{c,j}$
+% \item finnish
+% \item finnish2
+% \item french (frenchb, frenchle, frenchpro, francais, acadien, canadien)
+% \item french1
+% \item french2
+% \item galician
+% \item german (austrian)
+% \item germanb
+% \item germanb2
+% \item greek\,$^c$
+% \item greek-mono\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item greek-polydemo\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item greek-polykatha\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item guarani\,$^h$
+% \item hangul1\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hangul2\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hangul3\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hangul4\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hangul-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$
+% \item hanja1\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hanja2\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item hanja-u8\,$^{c,e,f,g,h}$
+% \item hebrew\,$^{c,h}$
+% \item hebrew2\,$^{c,h}$
+% \item hindi-modern\,$^c$
+% \item icelandic\,$^f$
+% \item interlingua
+% \item irish
+% \item italian
+% \item italian2
+% \item japanese\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item japanese2\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item japanese3\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item japanese4\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item japanese5\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item japanese6\,$^{c,d,g}$
+% \item kannada\,$^c$
+% \item latin
+% \item latin2
+% \item latinc
+% \item latinc2
+% \item latvian (letton)\,$^e$
+% \item latvian2 (letton2)\,$^c$
+% \item lithuanian
+% \item lithuanian2\,$^{c,h}$
+% \item lowersorbian (lsorbian)
+% \item magyar (hungarian)
+% \item magyar2
+% \item magyar3
+% \item malayalam-b\,$^c$
+% \item malayalam-keli\,$^c$
+% \item malayalam-keli2\,$^c$
+% \item malayalam-mr\,$^c$
+% \item malayalam-omega\,$^{c,e,g,h}$
+% \item malayalam-rachana\,$^c$
+% \item malayalam-rachana2\,$^c$
+% \item malayalam-rachana3\,$^c$
+% \item mexican
+% \item mongol\,$^c$
+% \item mongolb (mongolian)\,$^{c,f,h}$
+% \item ngermanb (ngerman, naustrian)
+% \item ngermanb2
+% \item norsk
+% \item norsk2
+% \item nynorsk
+% \item nynorsk2
+% \item occitan
+% \item occitan2
+% \item polish
+% \item polish2\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item polski\,$^c$
+% \item portuguese (portuges)
+% \item romanian
+% \item romanian2
+% \item romanian3
+% \item russian\,$^{b,c}$
+% \item russianb\,$^{b,c}$
+% \item russianc\,$^{b,c}$
+% \item russian2m\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item russian2o\,$^{c,e}$
+% \item russian-cca\,$^{c,g,h}$
+% \item russian-cca1\,$^{c,g,h}$
+% \item russian-lh\,$^{c,g,h}$
+% \item russian-lhcyralt\,$^{c,g,h}$
+% \item russian-lhcyrkoi\,$^{c,g,h}$
+% \item russian-lhcyrwin\,$^{c,g,h}$
+% \item samin
+% \item scottish
+% \item serbian
+% \item serbianc\,$^c$
+% \item slovak
+% \item slovene
+% \item spanish (castillan, castillian)
+% \item spanish2
+% \item spanish3\,$^{e,f}$
+% \item spanish4
+% \item swahili
+% \item swedish
+% \item swedish2
+% \item thai\,$^{c,d,f,g}$
+% \item turkish
+% \item ukrainian (ukraineb)\,$^{b,c}$
+% \item uppersorbian (usorbian)
+% \item vietnam (vietnamese)\,$^{c,d}$
+% \item welsh
+% \item xalx (khalkha)\,$^c$
+% \item xalx2\,$^c$
+% \item xalx3\,$^c$
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{multicols}
+% \hrule
+% \begin{multicols}{2}\footnotesize
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item[()] Les langues entre parenthèses sont des alias d'une langue principale et leurs fichiers \suffix{.mld}
+%       chargeront le fichier \suffix{.mld} de celle-ci.
+% \item[$^{\dagger}$] La présence du fichier \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire.
+% \item[$^a$] Les langues <<~\ulopt{arab(ic)}~>>\ilopt{arab}\ilopt{arabic} et <<~\lopt{arab2}~>> requièrent l'utilisation du paquetage
+%       \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}).
+% \item[$^b$] La langue <<~\uopt{russian}~» n'est pas encore supportée par le
+%       système \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user},
+%       mais <<~\lopt{russianb}~>>~\cite{russianb} est supportée si vous utilisez
+%       babel-3.6 ou une version supérieure; <<~\lopt{russianc}~>> est un supplément. Regardez aussi les autres
+%       fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour le russe.
+% \item[$^c$] Certaines langues peuvent requérir des fontes spécifiques.
+% \item[$^d$] Requiert le paquetage \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}.
+% \item[$^e$] Requiert \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), la version de \LaTeX\ pour Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$).
+% \item[$^f$] Requiert un codage en entrée sur 8~bits.
+% \item[$^g$] Utilise aussi un fichier \suffix{.mlo}.
+% \item[$^h$] Requiert un codage en entrée spécifique.
+% \item[$^i$] La langue \lopt{bicig} est aussi connue sous le nom de ouïghour (\emph{\lopt{uighur}}).
+% \item[$^j$] Les langues <<~\lopt{arabi}~>> et <<~\lopt{farsi3}~>> requièrent l'utilisation du paquetage
+%       \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{multicols}
+% \end{minipage}
+% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
+% ^^A \vspace*{-2\baselineskip}
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+% ^^A \ifDP\else\afterpage{\clearpage}\fi
+% ^^A \afterpage{\clearpage}
+% \lneed{9}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Titles for chapter-level mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Titres pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Titles are typeset in the \com{mtifont} (\verb|\large\bfseries| by
+% default) font and the text strings of the titles are defined by
+% \com{mtctitle}, \com{mlftitle}
+% and \com{mlttitle}, which
+% are the strings ``Contents'', ``Figures'' and ``Tables'' by default.
+% These title commands should be redefined by \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} for
+% languages other than english.
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% The language definition files like
+% \xfile{french.mld} and \xfile{english.mld} (the suffix
+% \suffix{.mld} means ``minitoc language definition (file)'')
+% (and many others, see the list in table~\vref{t+languages} and section~\vref{fo+lang}) are available.
+% You can easily prepare a similar file for a preferred language (see section~\vref{faq.26}).
+% You can change the language of these titles by using the
+% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}} macro.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres sont composés dans la fonte \com{mtifont} (\verb|\large\bfseries| par défaut) et les textes des
+% titres sont définis par \com{mtctitle}, \com{mlftitle} et \com{mlttitle}, qui sont les
+% chaînes «~Contents~», «~Figures~» et «~Tables~» par défaut. Ces titres devraient être redéfinis
+% par \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} pour les langues autres que l'anglais.
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% Les fichiers de définition de langue tels que \xfile{french.mld}
+% et \xfile{english.mld} (le suffixe \suffix{.mld} signifie «~\emph{minitoc language definition
+% (file)}~») (et bien d'autres, voir la liste dans le tableau~\vref{t+languages} et la section~\vref{fo+lang}) sont
+% disponibles. Vous pouvez facilement préparer un fichier similaire pour votre langue préférée
+% (voir la section~\vref{faq.26}).
+% Vous pouvez changer la langue de ces
+% titres en utilisant la macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{7}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Part-level mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Mini-tables au niveau partie}
+% \fi
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcCfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The partial table of contents is typeset in the \com{ptcfont}
+% font, which is defined as \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default.
+% In fact, the font \com{ptcfont} is selected at the beginning of a parttoc, partlof or partlot. More
+% selective choices are made with the following fonts.
+% Chapter entries are typeset in the \com{ptcCfont} font,
+% which is \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| by default.
+% Section entries are typeset in the \com{ptcSfont} font,
+% which is \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default.
+% \or\relax
+% La table des matières au niveau partie est composée dans la fonte \com{ptcfont}, qui est définie comme
+% étant \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut.
+% En fait, la fonte \com{ptcfont} est sélectionnée au début d'une parttoc, partlof ou partlot. Des choix
+% plus sélectifs sont faits avec les fontes suivantes.
+% Les entrées de type chapitre sont composées dans la fonte
+% \com{ptcCfont}, qui est \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| par défaut.
+% Les entrées de type section sont composées dans la fonte \com{ptcSfont}, qui est
+% \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{4}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For subsections, subsubsections, paragraphs and subparagraphs, the
+% commands \com{ptcSSfont}, \com{ptcSSSfont},
+% \com{ptcPfont}, and \com{ptcSPfont} are available
+% (by default, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) if you
+% want to use various fonts.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les sous-sections, sous-sous-sections, paragraphes et
+% sous-paragraphes, les commandes \com{ptcSSfont}, \com{ptcSSSfont}, \com{ptcPfont} et \com{ptcSPfont} sont
+% disponibles (par défaut, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) si vous souhaitez utiliser diverses fontes.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{4}
+% \begin{macro}{\plffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Partial lists of figures and tables are
+% typeset in the fonts \com{plffont} and \com{pltfont}, which are
+% \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default.
+% There are also \com{plfSfont} and \com{pltSfont} for sub-figures and sub-tables entries.
+% \or\relax
+% Les listes de figures et de tableaux au niveau partie sont composées dans les fontes \com{plffont} et \com{pltfont}, qui
+% sont \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut.
+% Il y a aussi  \com{plfSfont} et \com{pltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tableaux.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{9}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Titles for part-level mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Titres pour les mini-tables au niveau partie}
+% \fi
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Titles are typeset in the \com{ptifont} (\verb|\LARGE\bfseries| by
+% default) font and the text strings of the titles are defined by
+% \com{ptctitle}, \com{plftitle}
+% and \com{plttitle}, which
+% are the strings ``Table of Contents'',
+% ``List of Figures'' and ``List of Tables'' by default.
+% These title commands should be redefined by \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} for
+% languages other than english.
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% The language definition files like
+% \xfile{french.mld} and \xfile{english.mld} (and many others; for a complete list, see
+% table~\vref{t+languages}) are available. Read also section~\vref{fo+lang}.
+% You can easily prepare a similar file for a preferred language (see section~\vref{faq.26}).
+% You can change the language of these titles by using the
+% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}} macro.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres sont composés dans la fonte \com{ptifont} (\verb|\LARGE\bfseries| par défaut) et les textes des
+% titres sont définis par \com{ptctitle}, \com{plftitle} et \com{plttitle}, qui sont les
+% chaînes «~Table of Contents~», «~List of Figures~» et «~List of Tables~» par défaut.
+% Ces commandes de titres devraient être redéfinies par \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle}
+% pour les langues autres que l'anglais.
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% Des fichiers de définition de langue tels que \xfile{french.mld} et \xfile{english.mld} (et de
+% nombreux autres; pour une liste complète, voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages}) sont disponibles. Lire aussi
+% la section~\vref{fo+lang}.
+% Vous pouvez facilement préparer un fichier similaire pour votre langue préférée (voir la section~\vref{faq.26}).
+% Vous pouvez changer la langue de ces titres
+% en utilisant la macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Section-level mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Mini-tables au niveau section}
+% \fi
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcSSSfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The section-level table of contents
+% is typeset in the \com{stcfont}
+% font, which is defined as \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default.
+% In fact, the font \com{stcfont} is selected at the beginning of a secttoc, sectlof or sectlot.
+%
+% More selective choices are made with the following fonts.
+% Subsection entries are typeset in the \com{stcSSfont} font,
+% which is \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| by default.
+% Subsubsection entries are typeset in the \com{stcSSSfont} font,
+% which is \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default.
+% \or\relax
+% La table des matières au niveau section est composée dans la fonte \com{stcfont}, qui est définie comme
+% étant \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut.
+% En fait, la fonte \com{stcfont} est sélectionnée au début d'une secttoc, sectlof ou sectlot.
+%
+% Des choix plus sélectifs sont faits avec les fontes suivantes.
+% Les entrées de sous-section sont composées dans la fonte \com{stcSSfont}, qui est
+% \verb|\normalsize\bfseries| par défaut.
+% Les entrées de sous-sous-section sont composées dans la fonte \com{stcSSSfont}, qui est
+% \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\slffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltSfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For paragraphs and subparagraphs, the
+% commands \com{stcPfont} and \com{stcSPfont}
+% are available (by default, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) if you
+% want to use various fonts. Section-level lists of figures and tables are
+% typeset in the fonts \com{slffont} and \com{sltfont}, which are
+% defined as \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| by default.
+% There are also \com{slfSfont} and \com{sltSfont} for sub-figures and sub-tables entries.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les paragraphes et sous-paragraphes, les commandes \com{stcPfont} et \com{stcSPfont} sont disponibles
+% (par défaut, \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily|) si vous désirez utiliser diverses fontes. Les listes de figures et de
+% tableaux au niveau section sont composées dans les fontes \com{slffont} et \com{sltfont}, qui sont définies
+% comme étant \verb|\normalsize\rmfamily| par défaut.
+% Il y a aussi  \com{slfSfont} et \com{sltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tableaux.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{9}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Titles for section-level mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Titres pour les mini-tables au niveau section}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\stifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\slftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\slttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Titles are typeset in the \com{stifont} (\verb|\normalsize\bfseries| by
+% default) font and the text strings of the titles are defined by
+% \com{stctitle}, \com{slftitle}
+% and \com{slttitle}, which are the strings ``Contents'', ``Figures'' and ``Tables'' by default.
+% These title commands should be redefined by \com{renewcommand} or \com{mtcsettitle} for
+% languages other than english.
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% The language definition files like \xfile{french.mld} and \xfile{english.mld} (and also many others, as listed in
+% table~\vref{t+languages} and explained in section~\vref{fo+lang}) are available.
+% You can easily prepare a similar file for your preferred language (see section~\vref{faq.26}).
+% You can change the language of these titles by using the
+% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}} macro.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres sont composés dans la fonte \com{stifont} (\verb|\normalsize\bfseries| par défaut) et les textes des
+% titres sont définis par \com{stctitle}, \com{slftitle} et \com{slttitle}, qui sont les
+% chaînes «~Contents~», «~Figures~» et «~Tables~» par défaut.
+% Ces commandes de titres devraient être redéfinies par \com{renewcommand} ou \com{mtcsettitle}
+% pour les langues autres que l'anglais.
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% Des fichiers de définition de langue tels que \xfile{french.mld} et \xfile{english.mld} (et de
+% nombreux autres, voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages} et la section~\vref{fo+lang}) sont disponibles. Vous pouvez
+% facilement préparer un fichier similaire pour votre langue préférée (voir la section~\vref{faq.26}).
+% Vous pouvez changer la langue de ces titres
+% en utilisant la macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Position of the titles}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Position des titres}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{For mini-tables at the part level}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Pour les mini-tables au niveau partie}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, titles are on the left. The preparation commands \com{doparttoc},
+% \com{dopartlof} and \com{dopartlot} accept an optional argument
+% to change the default position of the
+% corresponding title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center,
+% \texttt{[r]} for right, or \texttt{[e]} (or \texttt{[n]}) for empty (no title).
+% The change is global for all the document.
+% If you want to change the position of the title for only one parttoc
+% (or partlof or partlof), just use such an optional argument with the
+% command \com{parttoc} (or \com{partlof} or \com{partlot}).
+% \or\relax
+% Par défaut, les titres sont cadrés à~gauche. Les commandes de préparation \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof} et
+% \com{dopartlot} acceptent un argument optionnel pour changer la position par défaut du titre correspondant:
+% \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, ou \texttt{[e]} (ou
+% \texttt{[n]}) pour vide (pas de titre). La modification est globale pour le document.
+% Si vous souhaitez changer la position du titre pour une seule parttoc (ou partlof ou partlot), il vous suffit
+% d'utiliser un tel argument optionnel avec la commande
+% \com{parttoc} (ou \com{partlof} ou \com{partlot}).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{For mini-tables at the chapter level}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, titles are on the left. The preparation commands \com{dominitoc},
+% \com{dominilof} and \com{dominilot} accept an optional argument
+% to change the default position of the
+% corresponding title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center,
+% \texttt{[r]} for right, or \texttt{[e]} (or \texttt{[n]}) for ``empty'' (``no'' title).
+% The change is global for all the document.
+% If you want to change the position of the title for only one minitoc
+% (or minilof or minilof), just use such an optional argument with the
+% command \com{minitoc} (or \com{minilof} or
+% \com{minilot}).
+% \or\relax
+% Par défaut, les titres sont cadrés à~gauche. Les commandes de préparation \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} et
+% \com{dominilot} acceptent un argument optionnel pour changer la position par défaut du titre correspondant:
+% \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, ou \texttt{[e]} (ou
+% \texttt{[n]}) pour vide (pas de titre). La modification est globale pour le document.
+% Si vous souhaitez changer la position du titre pour une seule minitoc (ou minilof ou minilot), il vous suffit
+% d'utiliser un tel argument optionnel avec la commande
+% \com{minitoc} (ou \com{minilof} ou \com{minilot}).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{For mini-tables at the section level}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Pour les mini-tables au niveau section}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, titles are on the left. The preparation commands \com{dosecttoc},
+% \com{dosectlof} and \com{dosectlot} accept
+% an optional argument to change the default position of the
+% corresponding title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center,
+% \texttt{[r]} for right, or \texttt{[e]} (or \texttt{[n]}) for empty (no title).
+% The change is global for all the document.
+% If you want to change the position of the title for only one secttoc
+% (or sectlof or sectlof), just use such an optional argument with the
+% command \com{secttoc} (or \com{sectlof} or
+% \com{sectlot}).
+% \or\relax
+% Par défaut, les titres sont cadrés à~gauche. Les commandes de préparation \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof} et
+% \com{dosectlot} acceptent un argument optionnel pour changer la position par défaut du titre correspondant:
+% \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, ou \texttt{[e]} (ou
+% \texttt{[n]}) pour vide (pas de titre). La modification est globale pour le document.
+% Si vous souhaitez changer la position du titre pour une seule secttoc (ou sectlof ou sectlot), il vous suffit
+% d'utiliser un tel argument optionnel avec la commande
+% \com{secttoc} (ou \com{sectlof} ou \com{sectlot}).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{12}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Summary of the positionning of titles}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Résumé du positionnement des titres}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To summarize: by default, all titles are on the left. However, each one of the
+%        following preparation commands:
+%        \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}
+%        \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},\\
+%        \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},\\
+%        \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},\\
+%        \com{mtcprepare}\\
+%        \end{tabular}\par\noindent
+%        accepts an optional argument to change the positionning of the
+%        title: \texttt{[l]} for left (default), \texttt{[c]} for center,
+%        \texttt{[r]} for right, \texttt{[e]} or \texttt{[n]} for empty (no
+%        title), for all the corresponding mini-tables (for all mini-tables in the case of \com{mtcprepare}).
+% \or\relax
+% Pour résumer, par défaut, tous les titres sont sur la gauche. Cependant, chacune des commandes de préparation
+% suivantes:
+%        \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}
+%        \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},\\
+%        \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},\\
+%        \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},\\
+%        \com{mtcprepare}\\
+%        \end{tabular}\par\noindent
+%        accepte un argument optionnel pour modifier le positionnement du titre: \texttt{[l]} pour gauche (défaut),
+%        \texttt{[c]} pour centré, \texttt{[r]} pour droite, \texttt{[e]} ou \texttt{[n]} pour vide (pas de
+%        titre), pour toutes les mini-tables correspondantes (de toutes les mini-tables dans le cas de
+%        \com{mtcprepare}).
+% \fi
+% \lneed{9}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The following insertion commands:
+%        \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}
+%        \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\
+%        \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\
+%        \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot}
+%        \end{tabular}\par\noindent
+%        accept the same optional arguments, but these options change the
+%        positionning only for the title of the current mini-table.
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes d'insertion suivantes:
+%        \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}
+%        \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\
+%        \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\
+%        \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot}
+%        \end{tabular}\par\noindent
+%        acceptent les mêmes arguments optionnels, mais ces options changent le positionnement seulement pour le
+%        titre de la mini-table courante.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Line spacing in the mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Espacement des lignes dans les mini-tables}
+% \fi
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tightmtctrue}
+% \begin{macro}{\tightmtcfalse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% With the commands \com{tightmtctrue} (or the \opt{tight}
+% package option) and \com{tightmtcfalse} (or the \optd{loose}
+% package option, which is the default), the mini-tables will have less (tight) or more (loose) space
+% between contents lines.
+% \or\relax
+% Avec les commandes \com{tightmtctrue} (ou l'option de paquetage \opt{tight}) et
+% \com{tightmtcfalse} (ou l'option de paquetage \optd{loose}, qui est le choix par défaut), les
+% mini-tables auront moins (\emph{tight}) ou plus (\emph{loose}) d'espacement entre les lignes de leurs entrées.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\parsep}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But\imess{I0043} with the \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (\class{scrartcl},
+% \class{scrbook} and \class{scrreprt}), it may sometimes be necessary
+% to use the following options or commands, because we need to set \com{parskip} to zero in place of
+% \com{parsep} to tighten the mini-table. The efficiency of the following options depends on the options given
+% to these \KOMAScript{} classes (\optp{parindent}{KOMA-Script} option, \optp{parskip}{KOMA-Script} option and variants).
+% \or\relax
+% Mais\imess{I0043} avec les classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (\class{scrartcl},
+% \class{scrbook} et \class{scrreprt}), il peut être
+% nécessaire d'utiliser les options ou commandes suivantes, car il nous faut forcer à~zéro \com{parskip} au lieu
+% de \com{parsep} pour resserrer la mini-table. L'efficacité des options ci-dessous dépend des options données
+% à~ces classes \KOMAScript{} (options \optp{parindent}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{parskip}{KOMA-Script} et variantes).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ktightmtctrue}
+% \begin{macro}{\ktightmtcfalse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the \KOMAScript{} classes, with the commands \com{ktightmtctrue} (or the \opt{k-tight}
+% package option) and \com{ktightmtcfalse} (or the \optd{k-loose}
+% package option, which is the default), the mini-tables will have less (tight) or more (loose) space
+% between contents lines.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les classes \KOMAScript, avec les commandes \com{ktightmtctrue} (ou l'option de
+% paquetage \opt{k-tight}) et
+% \com{ktightmtcfalse} (ou l'option de paquetage \optd{k-loose}, qui est le choix par défaut), les
+% mini-tables auront moins (\emph{tight}) ou plus (\emph{loose}) d'espacement entre les lignes de leurs entrées.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Simplified commands for fonts}\label{s+simp-font-commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Commandes simplifiées pour les fontes}\label{s+simp-font-commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To simplify the redefinition of the fonts for mini-tables, there are two
+% useful commands:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{sectionning-level}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}|\\
+% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% For instance,
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minitoc}{subsection}%|\\
+% \verb|           {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}|
+% \end{quote}
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minilof}{subfigure}%|\\
+% \verb|           {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}|
+% \end{quote}
+% will redefine \com{mtcSSfont} and \com{mlfSfont} with the given font commands.
+%
+% Note that \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}| allows also to redefine \com{ptcfont}, etc.
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% Moreover,
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{parttoc}{\Large\rmfamily\itshape\mdseries}|
+% \end{quote}
+% will redefine \com{ptifont} (for titles in the parttocs, partlofs and partlofs) with the given font commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des fontes des mini-tables, il y~a deux commandes utiles:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{niveau-sectionnement}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}|\\
+% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% Par exemple:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minitoc}{subsection}%|\\
+% \verb|           {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}|
+% \end{quote}
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minilof}{subfigure}%|\\
+% \verb|           {\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}|
+% \end{quote}
+% redéfinira \com{mtcSSfont} et \com{mlfSfont} avec les commandes de fontes données.
+%
+% Notez que \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}| permet aussi de redéfinir \com{ptcfont}, etc.
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% De plus,
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|{parttoc}{\Large\rmfamily\itshape\mdseries}|
+% \end{quote}
+% redéfinira \com{ptifont} (pour les titres dans les parttocs, partlofs et partlofs) avec les commandes de fontes
+% données.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Simplified command for mini-table titles}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Commande simplifiée pour les titres des mini-tables}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To simplify the redefinition of the titles for mini-tables, the
+% \com{mtcsettitle} command is also available:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{title string}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% For instance,
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{minitoc}{Description of contents}|
+% \end{quote}
+% will redefine \com{mtctitle} with the given string. This command checks that you redefine a title for a
+% mini-table type available in your document class.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des titres des mini-tables, la commande
+% \com{mtcsettitle} est aussi disponible:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{chaîne titre}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% Par exemple,
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsettitle}\verb|{minitoc}{Description du contenu}|
+% \end{quote}
+% redéfinira \com{mtctitle} avec la chaîne donnée. Cette commande vérifie que vous redéfinissez un titre pour un
+% type de mini-table disponible dans votre classe de document.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Simplified command for mini-table depths}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Commande simplifiée pour les profondeurs des mini-tables}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To simplify the redefinition of the depths for mini-tables, the
+% \com{mtcsetdepth} command is also available:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{depth}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% For instance,
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{minitoc}{4}|
+% \end{quote}
+% will set the counter \dcnt{minitocdepth} with the given value. This command checks that you set a depth for a
+% mini-table type available in your document class (and that it is possible to change its depth).
+% \or\relax
+% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des profondeurs des mini-tables, vous disposez de la commande
+% \com{mtcsetdepth}:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{profondeur}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% Par exemple:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetdepth}\verb|{minitoc}{4}|
+% \end{quote}
+% forcera le compteur \dcnt{minitocdepth}~la valeur donnée. Cette commande vérifie que vous forcez une profondeur
+% pour un type de mini-table disponible dans votre classe de document (et qu'il est possible de changer sa
+% profondeur).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Simplified command for mini-table offsets}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Commande simplifiée pour les déplacements des mini-tables}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To simplify the redefinition of the offsets for mini-tables, the
+% \com{mtcsetoffset} command is also available:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{offset}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% For instance,
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{minitoc}{-4em}|
+% \end{quote}
+% will set the macro \com{mtcoffset} to the given value. This command checks that you set a offset for a
+% mini-table type available in your document class (and that it is possible to change its offset).
+% \or\relax
+% Pour simplifier la redéfinition des déplacements des mini-tables, vous disposez de la commande
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{déplacement}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% Par exemple:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}\verb|{minitoc}{-4em}|
+% \end{quote}
+% forcera la macro \com{mtcoffset} à~la valeur donnée. Cette commande vérifie que vous forcez un déplacement
+% pour un type de mini-table disponible dans votre classe de document (et qu'il est possible de changer son
+% déplacement).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \noindent
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \textbf{NOTE:}\Virage{} the argument of \com{mtcsetoffset} is \emph{not} verified. It must be a length value,
+% without shrink nor stretch part. A positive offset is towards the right, a negative one towards the left.
+% \or\relax
+% \textbf{NOTE:}\Virage{} l'argument de \com{mtcsetoffset} \emph{n'est pas} vérifié. Ce doit être une valeur de
+% longueur, sans partie compressible ou extensible. Un déplacement positif se fait vers la droite, un déplacement
+% négatif se fait vers la gauche.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Polymorphic entries in the mini-tables}\label{ss+polym}\index{polymorphic entry}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Entrées polymorphes dans les mini-tables}\label{ss+polym}\index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The title of a sectionning command can appear in several places:
+% a)~at the beginning of the section, of the chapter or of the part;
+% b)~in the page header;
+% c)~in the main TOC;
+% d)~in the minitoc of the chapter (for a section title or lower);
+% e)~in the parttoc of the part (for a chapter title or lower).
+% A sectionning command has two arguments: an optionnal one, \textsl{OA}, and a mandatory one, \textsl{MA}, like in:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\section[|\textsl{OA}\verb|]{|\textsl{MA}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% \textsl{OA} is taken as \textsl{MA} if omitted. Normaly, \textsl{OA} is used in the TOC and in the minitables, as in
+% the page headers when necessary. \textsl{MA} is used as title for the sectionning unit and is the default for
+% \textsl{OA}. But, some times, you may need to have a different version (a~variant) for a sectionning unit title
+% in a minitable. So, it is now possible to define such variants by detecting if that title is used inside some
+% minitable: the following flags are defined (when meaningful):
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Level}&\textbf{Flag:}&\textbf{for tocs,}&\textbf{for lofs,}&\textbf{for lots.}\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{Part}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{Chapter}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% But these flags are used to build three new commands, to be called from inside the optionnal argument
+% (\textsl{OA}) of a
+% sectionning command or that of a caption:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{From \textsl{OA} of}:&\textbf{Command}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\
+% \midrule
+% sect. command&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\
+% figure caption&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\
+% table caption&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% Such entries are ``polymorphic''.
+% See the example~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}, for a short demonstration.
+% \or\relax
+% Le titre d'une commande se sectionnement peut apparaître en plusieurs endroits:
+% a)~au début de la section, du chapitre ou de la partie;
+% b)~dans l'en-tête de page;
+% c)~dans la table des matières principale;
+% d)~dans la minitoc du chapitre (pour un titre de section ou inférieur);
+% e)~dans la parttoc de la partie pour un titre de chapitre ou inférieur).
+% Une commande de sectionnement a deux arguments: un facultatif, \textsl{AF}, et un obligatoire, \textsl{AO}, comme dans:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\section[|\textsl{AF}\verb|]{|\textsl{AO}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% \textsl{AF} est pris égal à~\textsl{AO} si omis. Normalement, \textsl{AF} est utilisé dans la table des
+% matières principale et dans les minitables, ainsi que dans les en-têtes de page si nécessaire.
+% \textsl{AO} est utilisé comme titre de l'unité de sectionnement est la valeur par défaut pour~\textsl{OA}.
+% Mais, parfois, vous pouvez vouloir une version différente (une variante) comme titre d'unité de
+% sectionnement dans une minitable. Donc, il est maintenant possible de définir de telles variantes en détectant
+% si ce titre est utilisé à~l'intérieur d'une minitable: les indicateurs suivants sont définis (lorsqu'ils ont un sens):
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Niveau}&\textbf{Indicateur:}&\textbf{pour TdMs,}&\textbf{pour~LdFs,}&\textbf{pour~LdTs.}\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{Partie}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{Chapitre}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% Mais ces indicateurs sont utilisés pour construire trois nouvelles commandes, devant être appelées depuis
+% l'intérieur de l'argument optionnel
+% (\textsl{AO}) d'une commande de sectionnement ou de celui d'un caption:
+% \begin{center}
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Depuis l'\textsl{AO} de}:&\textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\
+% \midrule
+% commande sect.&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\
+% caption figure&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\
+% caption table&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{center}
+% De telles entrées sont dites «~polymorphes~».
+% Voir l'exemple~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}, pour une courte démonstration.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Languages for the titles}\label{fo+lang}
+% Most of the strings defined in the language definition files (\suffix{.mld}) were taken from the
+%            superb \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} of \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams},
+%            some were adapted, others were made available by gentle users
+%            or taken from specific packages, like \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex},
+%            \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi},
+%            \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX} (armenian)~\cite{armtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} (bangla, bengali)~\cite{bangtex},
+%            \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX} (spanish)~\cite{spanish4}.
+%            \devnag\ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} for \TeX~\cite{devanagari},
+%            \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop},
+%            \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani},
+%            \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} and \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o},
+%            \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} (mongol)~\cite{mlsquick,montex}, \pack{CJK} (chinese,
+%            korean-hangûl/hanja, japanese, thai)~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega},
+%            \pack{polski}~\cite{polski,platex-pl} (polish),
+%            \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}~\cite{slatex} (swedish),
+%            \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi} (farsi or iranian), or \pack{vietnam}~\cite{vietnam}
+%            --- latvian (letton),
+%            \lopt{greek-mono}, \lopt{greek-polydemo}, \lopt{greek-polykatha}, \lopt{polish2}, \lopt{russian2m}, \lopt{russian2o} and \lopt{spanish3}
+%            need \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), i.e.,~the Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) version of \LaTeX, (see~\cite{antomega}),
+%            or even found by searching on the Web (\xfile{bulgarianb.mld} for upper cyrillic bulgarian,
+%            \xfile{japanese.mld} for japanese, \xfile{serbianc.mld} for cyrillic serbian).
+%            Other languages are welcome\,\footnote{I~am searching for the titles in corsican, in
+%            particular.}. See table~\vref{t+languages}.
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Langues pour les titres}\label{fo+lang}
+% La plupart des chaînes définies dans les fichiers de définition de langue (\suffix{.mld}) ont été prises
+% dans le superbe paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, certaines ont été adaptées,
+% d'autres ont été mises à~disposition par d'aimables utilisateurs ou prises dans des paquetages spécifiques, tels
+% que \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}, \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}
+% (arménien)~\cite{armtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} (bânglâ, bengalî)~\cite{bangtex},
+% \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX} (espagnol)~\cite{spanish4}.
+% \devnag\ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} pour \TeX~\cite{devanagari},
+% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}, \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani}, \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} and
+% \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o},
+% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} (mongol)~\cite{mlsquick,montex}, \pack{CJK} (chinois,
+% coréen-hangûl/hanja, japonais, thaï)~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega},
+%            \pack{polski}~\cite{polski,platex-pl} (polonais),
+%            \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}~\cite{slatex} (suédois),
+% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi} (farsi ou iranien)
+% \pack{vietnam}~\cite{vietnam} --- le latvien (letton), des variantes de grec
+% (\lopt{greek-mono}, \lopt{greek-polydemo}, \lopt{greek-polykatha}), de polonais (\lopt{polish2}), de russe (\lopt{russian2m}, \lopt{russian2o}) et
+% d'espagnol (\lopt{spanish3}) ont besoin
+% de \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), c'est-à-dire de la version de \LaTeX\ pour Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$),
+% (voir~\cite{antomega}), --- ou ont même été trouvées en
+% cherchant sur le Web (\xfile{bulgarianb.mld} pour le haut bulgare cyrillique, \xfile{japanese.mld} pour le
+% japonais, \xfile{serbianc.mld} pour le serbe cyrillique). D'autres langues sont les bienvenues\,\footnote{Je recherche
+% notamment les titres pour le corse (\emph{corsican}).}.
+% Voir le tableau~\vref{t+languages}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But\Virage{} for some oriental languages\,\footnote{Mainly for chinese, farsi, hangûl (korean), hanja (korean), japanese,
+% \lopt{malayalam-omega}, thai and some variants of russian.}, the sources of the titles use some exotic encodings which
+% are difficult to manipulate in a
+% \suffix{.dtx} file, hence the \suffix{.mld} file is then just a wrapper which loads a special file,
+% nicknamed a \suffix{.mlo}
+% file\,\footnote{The extension \suffix{.mlo} means \emph{minitoc language object}.}, not generated by the
+% \suffix{.dtx} file in the current version of \upack{minitoc} package, but via \env{filecontents}
+% environments in the \xfile{minitoc.ins} file, and playing with the ``catcode'' of
+% the ``delete'' character.
+% \or\relax
+% Mais\Virage{} pour certaines langues orientales\,\footnote{Principalement pour le chinois, le farsi, le coréen (hangûl et
+% hanja), le japonais, le \lopt{malayalam-omega}, le thaï et certaines variantes du russe.}, les sources des titres
+% utilisent quelques
+% codages exotiques qu'il est difficile de manipuler dans un fichier \suffix{.dtx}, donc le fichier \suffix{.mld} est alors
+% un simple emballage qui charge un fichier spécial, surnommé fichier \suffix{.mlo}\,\footnote{Le
+% suffixe \suffix{.mlo} signifie \emph{minitoc language object} (objet de langue pour minitoc).}, qui n'est pas
+% engendré par le fichier \suffix{.dtx} dans la version actuelle du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, mais via des
+% environnements \env{filecontents} dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.ins},
+% et en jouant sur le «~catcode~» du caractère «~delete~».
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Altering the layout of the mini-tables}\label{s+alt+layout}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Modifier la mise en page des mini-tables}\label{s+alt+layout}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The layout of a mini-table is described in the figure~\vref{fig+ltoc} (this figure is adapted from~\cite{tocloft}),
+% which defines some internal commands (these are not \emph{dimensions}, but \LaTeX{} commands, created by
+% \com{newcommand}, modifiable via \com{renewcommand}).
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \relax\com{@dotsep}, which is the separation between the dots in the dotted line. It is a pure number
+%       expressing \emph{math units}; 18~math units make \texttt{1em} (one quad), which is about the width of a~``m''
+%       in the current font. As the real size of \texttt{1em} is font dependent, the separation between the dots
+%       may vary if you use different fonts for different types of entries in the mini-tables.
+% \item \relax\com{@pnumwidth}, is the width of the space reserved for the page number. It is a \LaTeX\ command
+%       containing the representation of a length (e.g.,~\texttt{1.55em}).
+% \item \relax\com{@tocrmarg}, is the distance (margin) between the right border of the table and the end of the
+%       dotted line. It should be larger than \com{@pnumwidth}, and can be a rubber length (i.e.,~contain
+%       some glue, like \texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil}); if you specify the ``\texttt{...~plus~1fil}'' portion,
+%       the text of the entry will be ragged on right; it is useful if you have long entries, and it can avoid
+%       most hyphenations.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \or\relax
+% La mise en page est décrite dans la figure~\vref{fig+ltoc} (cette figure a été adaptée de~\cite{tocloft}), qui
+% définit certaines commandes internes (ce ne sont pas des \emph{dimensions}, mais des commandes \LaTeX, crées par
+% \com{newcommand}, modifiables via \com{renewcommand}).
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \relax\com{@dotsep}, qui est la séparation entre les points de conduite dans une ligne de points. C'est un
+%       nombre pur exprimant des \emph{unités mathématiques}; 18~unités mathématiques font \texttt{1em} (un
+%       cadratin), qui est à~peu près la largeur d'un~«~m~» dans la fonte courante. Comme la taille effective de
+%       \texttt{1em} dépend de la fonte, la séparation entre les points peut varier si vous utilisez des fontes
+%       différentes pour des types différents d'entrées dans les mini-tables.
+% \item \relax\com{@pnumwidth}, qui est la largeur de l'espace réservé pour le numéro de page. C'est une commande
+%       \LaTeX\ contenant la représentation d'une longueur (par~ex., \texttt{1.55em}).
+% \item \relax\com{@tocrmarg}, est la distance (marge) entre le bord droit de la table et la fin de la ligne de
+%       points de conduite. Elle devrait être plus grande que \com{@pnumwidth}, et peut être une longueur
+%       élastique (c'est-à-dire contenir de la glu, comme \texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil}); si vous spécifiez la
+%       portion «~\texttt{...~plus~1fil}~», le texte de l'entrée sera en déchiqueté sur la droite; ceci est utile si
+%       vous avez des entrées longues, et peut éviter la plupart des coupures de mots.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \fi
+% \newcommand{\maxx}{120}       ^^A picture width
+% \newcommand{\maxxm}{118}      ^^A \maxx - 2\
+% \newcommand{\maxy}{55}        ^^A picture height
+% \newcommand{\maxym}{53}       ^^A \maxy - 2
+% \newcommand{\maxyp}{57}       ^^A \maxy + 2
+% \newcommand{\findent}{20}     ^^A indent
+% \newcommand{\findentp}{22}    ^^A \findent + 2
+% \newcommand{\fnumwidth}{10}   ^^A numwidth
+% \newcommand{\ftocrmarg}{30}   ^^A \@tocrmarg
+% \newcommand{\fpnumwidth}{20}  ^^A \@pnumwidth
+% \newcommand{\fipn}{30}        ^^A \findent + \fnumwidth
+% \newcommand{\frmarg}{90}      ^^A \maxx - \ftocrmarg
+% \newcommand{\frnum}{100}      ^^A \maxx - \fpnumwidth
+% \newcommand{\fyi}{10}         ^^A 1st y height
+% \newcommand{\fyim}{8}         ^^A \fyi - 2
+% \newcommand{\fyii}{20}        ^^A 2nd y height
+% \newcommand{\fyiii}{25}       ^^A 3rd y height
+% \newcommand{\fyiv}{30}        ^^A 4th y height
+% \newcommand{\fyv}{40}         ^^A 5th y height
+% \newcommand{\fyvp}{42}        ^^A \fyv + 2
+% \newcommand{\flin}{4}         ^^A length of leader lines
+% \newcommand{\frmargm}{89}     ^^A \frmarg (90) - a little bit
+% \begin{figure}[tp]
+% \centering
+% \setlength{\unitlength}{\linewidth}
+% \divide \unitlength by \maxx
+% \icom{mtcindent}\icom{@pnumwidth}\icom{@tocrmarg}\icom{numwidth}\icom{@dotsep}%
+% \icom{linewidth}\icom{mtcindent}%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{picture}(\maxx,\maxyp)
+%   \put(0,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}}
+%   \put(\maxx,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}}
+%   \put(0,\maxy){\vector(1,0){\maxx}}
+%   \put(2,\maxym){\makebox(0,0)[tl]{\texttt{\bs linewidth-2\bs mtcindent}}}
+%   \put(\maxx,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\fpnumwidth}}
+%   \put(\maxxm,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @pnumwidth}}}
+%   \put(\frnum,\fyi){\line(0,1){\flin}}
+%   \put(\maxx,\fyv){\vector(-1,0){\ftocrmarg}}
+%   \put(\maxxm,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\texttt{\bs @tocrmarg}}}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}}
+%   \put(0,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\findent}}
+%   \put(2,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{indent}}}
+%   \put(\findent,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}}
+%   \put(\findent,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\fnumwidth}}
+%   \put(\findentp,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{numwidth}}}
+%   \put(\fipn,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}}
+%   \put(\maxx,\fyii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{487}}
+%   \put(\fipn,\fyii){title end}
+%   \put(\fipn,\fyiii){continue\ldots}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyiii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ title}}
+%   \put(\findent,\fyiv){\textbf{3.5}}
+%   \put(\fipn,\fyiv){Heading\ldots}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyiv){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ title}}
+%   \multiput(\frmargm,\fyii)(-\flin,0){12}{.}
+%   \multiput(\frmarg,\fyi)(-\flin,0){2}{\line(0,1){\flin}}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\flin}}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(1,0){0}}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @dotsep}}}
+% \end{picture}
+% \caption{Layout of a ToC (LoF, LoT) entry}\label{fig+ltoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{picture}(\maxx,\maxyp)
+%   \put(0,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}}
+%   \put(\maxx,0){\line(0,1){\maxyp}}
+%   \put(0,\maxy){\vector(1,0){\maxx}}
+%   \put(2,\maxym){\makebox(0,0)[tl]{\texttt{\bs linewidth-2\bs mtcindent}}}
+%   \put(\maxx,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\fpnumwidth}}
+%   \put(\maxxm,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @pnumwidth}}}
+%   \put(\frnum,\fyi){\line(0,1){\flin}}
+%   \put(\maxx,\fyv){\vector(-1,0){\ftocrmarg}}
+%   \put(\maxxm,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\texttt{\bs @tocrmarg}}}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}}
+%   \put(0,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\findent}}
+%   \put(2,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{indent}}}
+%   \put(\findent,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}}
+%   \put(\findent,\fyv){\vector(1,0){\fnumwidth}}
+%   \put(\findentp,\fyvp){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{\textit{numwidth}}}
+%   \put(\fipn,\fyv){\line(0,-1){\flin}}
+%   \put(\maxx,\fyii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{487}}
+%   \put(\fipn,\fyii){fin du titre}
+%   \put(\fipn,\fyiii){suite\ldots}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyiii){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ titre}}
+%   \put(\findent,\fyiv){\textbf{3.5}}
+%   \put(\fipn,\fyiv){En-tête\ldots}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyiv){\makebox(0,0)[br]{\ldots\ titre}}
+%   \multiput(\frmargm,\fyii)(-\flin,0){12}{.}
+%   \multiput(\frmarg,\fyi)(-\flin,0){2}{\line(0,1){\flin}}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(-1,0){\flin}}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyi){\vector(1,0){0}}
+%   \put(\frmarg,\fyim){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{\texttt{\bs @dotsep}}}
+% \end{picture}
+% \caption{Mise en page d'une entrée dans une table des matières (liste des figures, liste des tableaux)}\label{fig+ltoc}
+% \fi
+% \end{figure}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As these commands are internal (their names contain the ``\texttt{@}'' character) and must have a local effect only
+% on the specified  kinds of mini-tables, you should alter them indirectly via the \com{mtcsetformat} command:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{parameter}\verb|}{|\emph{value}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% where \emph{mini-table} is one of the \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc},
+% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} or \texttt{sectlot} keywords; \emph{parameter} is
+% one of the \texttt{dotinterval} (for \com{@dotsep}), \texttt{pagenumwidth} (for \com{@pnumwidth}), or
+% \texttt{tocrightmargin} (for \com{@tocrmarg}) keywords; so:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{partlof}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}|
+% \end{quote}
+% will set the right margin to \texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil} in the lists of tables at the part level. The elasticity
+% (\texttt{plus~1fil}) is useful if the table captions are long (it prevents most hyphenations).
+% \or\relax
+% Puisque ces commandes sont internes (leurs noms contiennent le caractère «~\texttt{@}~») et doivent avoir un
+% effet local seulement sur les types spécifiés de mini-tables, vous devriez les modifier indirectement via la commande
+% \com{mtcsetformat}:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{paramètre}\verb|}{|\emph{valeur}\verb|}|
+% \end{quote}
+% où \emph{mini-table} est l'un des mots-clés \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc},
+% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}; \emph{paramètre} est
+% l'un des mots-clés \texttt{dotinterval} (pour \com{@dotsep}), \texttt{pagenumwidth} (pour \com{@pnumwidth})
+% ou \texttt{tocrightmargin} (pour \com{@tocrmarg}); ainsi:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{partlof}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}|
+% \end{quote}
+% établira la marge de droite à~\texttt{2.55em~plus~1fil} dans la liste des tableaux au niveau partie. L'élasticité
+% (\texttt{plus~1fil}) est utile si les captions des tableaux sont longs (elle évite bien des coupures de mots).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Note that the \texttt{tocrightmargin} (for \com{@tocrmarg}) parameter should obviously be greater than the
+% \texttt{pagenumwidth} parameter (this appears in the figure~\vref{fig+ltoc}).
+%
+% If the \texttt{dotinterval} parameter (for \com{@dotsep}) is large enough (try 450, then increase or decrease),
+% the dots of leaders will be so much spread out that they will disappear.
+% \or\relax
+% Notez que le paramètre \texttt{tocrightmargin} (pour \com{@tocrmarg}) devrait manifestement être plus grand que
+% le paramètre \texttt{pagenumwidth} (ceci est visible dans la figure~\vref{fig+ltoc}).
+%
+% Si le paramètre \texttt{dotinterval} (pour \com{@dotsep}) est suffisamment grand (essayez 450, puis augmentez ou
+% diminuez), les points de conduite seront tellement espacés qu'ils disparaîtront.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \centering
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Horizontal rules}\label{t+horiz}
+% \ifBT
+% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}}
+% \toprule
+% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{defaults for}\\
+% \cmidrule(l){5-7}
+% &rules in&&no rules in&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \com{plfrule}&partlofs&\com{noplfrule}&partlofs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \com{pltrule}&partlots&\com{nopltrule}&partlots&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\
+% \com{mlfrule}&minilofs&\com{nomlfrule}&minilofs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\
+% \com{mltrule}&minilots&\com{nomltrule}&minilots&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\
+% \com{stcrule}&secttocs&\com{nostcrule}&secttocs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \com{slfrule}&sectlofs&\com{noslfrule}&sectlofs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \com{sltrule}&sectlots&\com{nosltrule}&sectlots&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(NA)}~=~not available.}
+% \end{tabular}}
+% \else
+% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}}
+% \thickline
+% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{defaults for}\\
+% &rules in&&no rules in&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\
+% \hline
+% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \com{plfrule}&partlofs&\com{noplfrule}&partlofs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \com{plfrule}&partlots&\com{noplfrule}&partlots&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\
+% \com{mlfrule}&minilofs&\com{nomlfrule}&minilofs&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\
+% \com{mltrule}&minilots&\com{nomltrule}&minilots&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{Y}&\textbf{(NA)}\\
+% \com{stcrule}&secttocs&\com{nostcrule}&secttocs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \com{slfrule}&sectlofs&\com{noslfrule}&sectlofs&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \com{sltrule}&sectlots&\com{nosltrule}&sectlots&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{(NA)}&\textbf{Y}\\
+% \thickline
+% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(NA)}~=~not available.}
+% \end{tabular}}
+% \fi
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% \medfigrule
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% \caption{Page numbers}\label{t+pn}
+% {\ttfamily%
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Page numbers (Default)\hfill}&&%
+% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries No page numbers\hfill}\\
+% \midrule
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}%
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}}
+% \thickline
+% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Page numbers (Default)\hfill}&&%
+% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries No page numbers\hfill}\\
+% \hline
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\
+% \thickline
+% \end{tabular}%
+% \fi}
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \centering
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Filets horizontaux}\label{t+horiz}
+% \ifBT
+% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}}
+% \toprule
+% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{défaut pour}\\
+% \cmidrule(l){5-7}
+% &filets dans&&pas de filets dans&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \com{plfrule}&parttocs&\com{noplfrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \com{pltrule}&parttocs&\com{nopltrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\
+% \com{mlfrule}&minitocs&\com{nomlfrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\
+% \com{mltrule}&minitocs&\com{nomltrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\
+% \com{stcrule}&secttocs&\com{nostcrule}&secttocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \com{slfrule}&secttocs&\com{noslfrule}&secttocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \com{sltrule}&secttocs&\com{nosltrule}&secttocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(ND)}~=~non disponible.}
+% \end{tabular}}
+% \else
+% {\small\begin{tabular}{@{}llllccc@{}}
+% \thickline
+% &&&&\multicolumn{3}{c}{défaut pour}\\
+% &filets dans&&pas de filets dans&\ttfamily book&\ttfamily report&\ttfamily article\\
+% \hline
+% \com{ptcrule}&parttocs&\com{noptcrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \com{plfrule}&parttocs&\com{noplfrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \com{plfrule}&parttocs&\com{noplfrule}&parttocs&\textbf{N}&\textbf{N}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \com{mtcrule}&minitocs&\com{nomtcrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\
+% \com{mlfrule}&minitocs&\com{nomlfrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\
+% \com{mltrule}&minitocs&\com{nomltrule}&minitocs&\textbf{O}&\textbf{O}&\textbf{(ND)}\\
+% \com{stcrule}&secttocs&\com{nostcrule}&secttocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \com{slfrule}&secttocs&\com{noslfrule}&secttocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \com{sltrule}&secttocs&\com{nosltrule}&secttocs&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{(ND)}&\textbf{O}\\
+% \thickline
+% \multicolumn{7}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{(ND)}~=~non disponible.}
+% \end{tabular}}
+% \fi
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% \medfigrule
+%
+% \bigskip
+%
+% \caption{Numéros de pages}\label{t+pn}
+% {\ttfamily%
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Numéros de pages (défaut)\hfill}&&%
+% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Pas de numéros de pages\hfill}\\
+% \midrule
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}%
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllcl@{}}
+% \thickline
+% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Numéros de pages (défaut)\hfill}&&%
+% {\hfill\rmfamily\bfseries Pas de numéros de pages\hfill}\\
+% \hline
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{ptcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noptcpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{mtcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomtcpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{stcpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nostcpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{plfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noplfpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{mlfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomlfpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{slfpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{noslfpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{pltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nopltpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{mltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nomltpagenumbers}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{sltpagenumbers}&\qquad&\com{nosltpagenumbers}\\
+% \thickline
+% \end{tabular}%
+% \fi}
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{9}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Special Features}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Dispositifs spéciaux}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Horizontal Rules}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Filets horizontaux}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, most of mini-tables have horizontal rules after their
+% titles and at their ends. The exception is the ``parttoc'' in a \class{book}- or
+% \class{report}-like document (i.e.,~when \com{chapter} is defined). To activate
+% or deactivate these rules, the commands of the table~\vref{t+horiz} are available.
+% But you can also use the following command, which is simpler:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetrules}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+
+% \end{quote}
+% where \emph{mini-table} is one of the \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc},
+% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot} keywords;
+% if the first argument is a star~(\texttt{*}), all mini-tables are affected;
+% the keywords \texttt{on} and \texttt{off} have the following synonyms\,\FZ:
+% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2}
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE},
+%       \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI},
+%       \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1};
+% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE},
+%       \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{samepage}
+% \or\relax
+% Par défaut, la plupart des mini-tables ont des filets horizontaux après leurs titres et à~leurs fins. L'exception
+% est la «~parttoc~» dans un document de type analogue à~\class{book} ou \class{report} (c'est-à-dire lorsque
+% la commande \com{chapter} est définie). Pour activer ou désactiver ces filets, les commandes du
+% tableau~\vref{t+horiz} sont disponibles. Mais vous pouvez aussi utiliser la commande suivante, plus simple:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetrules}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+
+% \end{quote}
+% où \emph{mini-table} est l'un des mots-clés \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc},
+% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot};
+% si le premier argument est une étoile~(\texttt{*}), toutes les mini-tables sont affectées;
+% les mots-clés \texttt{on} et \texttt{off} ont les synonymes suivants\,\FZ:
+% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2}
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE},
+%       \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI},
+%       \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1};
+% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE},
+%       \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-} et~\texttt{0}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{samepage}
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lsneed{4}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Page Numbers, Leaders}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Numéros de pages, points de conduite}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, the page numbers are listed in each minitoc, minilof, etc.\ Some authors want only the section
+% titles (with the section numbers),
+% but without page numbers. Hence the obvious declarations of table~\vref{t+pn} are available.
+% But you can also use the following command:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+
+% \end{quote}
+% where \emph{mini-table} is one of the \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc},
+% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot} keywords;
+% the keywords \texttt{on} and \texttt{off} have the following synonyms\,\FZ:
+% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2}
+% \begin{itemize}
+%       \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true},
+%       \texttt{TRUE}, \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V},
+%       \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1};\nopagebreak[4]
+%       \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false},
+%       \texttt{FALSE}, \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON},
+%       \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{samepage}
+% If the first argument is a star~(\texttt{*}), all mini-tables are affected.
+% \or\relax
+% Par défaut, les numéros de page sont cités dans chaque minitoc, minilof, etc.\ Certains auteurs désirent avoir
+% seulement les titres des sections (avec les numéros des sections), mais pas les numéros des pages. Donc les
+% déclarations évidentes du tableau~\vref{t+pn} sont disponibles.
+% Mais vous pouvez aussi utiliser la commande suivante:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb+|*}{on|off}+
+% \end{quote}
+% où \emph{mini-table} est l'un des mots-clés \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc},
+% \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot}, \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot};
+% les mots-clés \texttt{on} et \texttt{off} ont les synonymes suivants\,\FZ:
+% \begin{samepage}\lneed{2}
+% \begin{itemize}
+%       \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true},
+%       \texttt{TRUE}, \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V},
+%       \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI}, \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1};\nopagebreak[4]
+%       \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false},
+%       \texttt{FALSE}, \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON},
+%       \texttt{-}, et~\texttt{0}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{samepage}
+% Si le premier argument est une étoile~(\texttt{*}), toutes les mini-tables sont affectées.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% In the mini-tables, they are leaders of dots between
+% the section titles and the page numbers. The \opt{undotted}
+% package option removes these dots. The \optd{dotted} package option
+% is the default. See also section~\vref{s+alt+layout}.
+% \or\relax
+% Dans les mini-tables, il y~a des points de conduite entre les titres de sections et les numéros de pages.
+% L'option de paquetage \opt{undotted} supprime ces points de conduite. L'option de paquetage
+% \optd{dotted} est le choix par défaut. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+alt+layout}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Features for parttocs and other mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Dispositifs pour les parttocs et autres mini-tables}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, a parttoc (or a partlof or a
+% partlot), in a \class{book}- or \class{report}-class document, is preceded and followed by a
+% \com{cleardoublepage} (which acts like \com{clearpage} in a one-side document), and has a page style of
+% \texttt{empty}. Since version~\#32, you can modify this
+% behaviour by redefining the commands of table~\vref{t+parttoc+features}, whose meaning
+% is often obvious. A feature defined as \com{empty} does nothing.
+% \or\relax
+% Par défaut, une parttoc (ou une partlof ou une partlot), dans un document de classe \class{book} ou
+% \class{report},
+% est précédée et suivie par une \com{cleardoublepage} (qui agit comme \com{clearpage} dans un document en recto),
+% et a un style de page \texttt{empty}. Depuis la version~\#32, vous pouvez modifier ce comportement en
+% redéfinissant les commandes du tableau~\vref{t+parttoc+features}, dont la signification est souvent évidente.
+% Un dispositif défini comme étant \com{empty} ne fait rien.
+% \fi
+% \afterpage{\clearpage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[p]
+% \changeskips
+% \centering
+% \caption{Features for mini-tables}\label{t+parttoc+features}
+% {\small\ttfamily%
+% \let\Strut\relax
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Command \hfill}&&%
+% {\rmfamily\bfseries Default \hfill}\\
+% \midrule
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
+% %%
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% %%
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% %%
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{command}\texttt{\}}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifies the features for a mini-table.}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}%
+% \else
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcX{1}@{}}
+% \thickline
+% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Command \hfill}&&%
+% {\rmfamily\bfseries Default \hfill}\\\hline
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
+% %%
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% %%
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}|\feat{after}|\feat{open}|\feat{close}|\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{command}\texttt{\}}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifies the features for a mini-table.}\\
+% \thickline
+% \end{tabularx}%
+% \fi}
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[p]
+% \changeskips
+% \centering
+% \caption{Dispositifs pour les mini-tables}\label{t+parttoc+features}
+% {\small\ttfamily%
+% \let\Strut\relax
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Commande \hfill}&&%
+% {\rmfamily\bfseries Défaut \hfill}\\
+% \midrule
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
+% %%
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% %%
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% %%
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{commande}\texttt{\}}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}%
+% \else
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllcZ{1}@{}}
+% \thickline
+% \Strut\rmfamily\textbf{Type}&&{\vphantom{$P^2_3$}\rmfamily\bfseries Commande \hfill}&&%
+% {\rmfamily\bfseries Défaut \hfill}\\\hline
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{beforeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{afterparttoc}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{openparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{closeparttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily parttoc&&\com{thispageparttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{beforepartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{afterpartlof}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{openpartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{closepartlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlof&&\com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{beforepartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{afterpartlot}&\qquad&\com{cleardoublepage}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{openpartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{closepartlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily partlot&&\com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{thispagestyle}\{empty\}\\
+% %%
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{beforeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{afterminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{openminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{closeminitoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minitoc&&\com{thispageminitocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{beforeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{afterminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{openminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{closeminilof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilof&&\com{thispageminilofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{beforeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{afterminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{openminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{closeminilot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily minilot&&\com{thispageminilotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% %%
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{beforesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{aftersecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{opensecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{closesecttoc}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily secttoc&&\com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{beforesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{aftersectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{opensectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{closesectlof}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlof&&\com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{beforesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{aftersectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{opensectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{closesectlot}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \Strut\rmfamily sectlot&&\com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\qquad&\com{empty}\\
+% \multicolumn{5}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\rmfamily\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}|\feat{after}|\feat{open}|\feat{close}|\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\rmfamily\emph{commande}\texttt{\}}}\\
+% &\multicolumn{4}{@{}l@{}}{\rmfamily Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.}\\
+% \thickline
+% \end{tabularx}%
+% \fi}
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The command:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{keyword}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% allows you to redefine any of these commands. \emph{mini-table} is one of the mini-table names:
+% \texttt{parttoc}\ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}. \emph{keyword} is one of the followings: \feat{before},
+% \feat{after}, \feat{open}, \feat{close} or \feat{pagestyle}. \emph{commands} is either a sequence of commands like \com{clearpage},
+% \com{cleardoublepage},
+% \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|, etc., either \com{empty} (does nothing).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{mot-clé}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% vous permet de redéfinir chacune de ces commandes. \emph{mini-table} est l'un des noms de type de mini-table:
+% \texttt{parttoc}\ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}. \emph{mot-clé} est l'un des suivants: \feat{before},
+% \feat{after}, \feat{open}, \feat{close} ou \feat{pagestyle}. \emph{commandes} est soit une séquence de commandes telles que \com{clearpage},
+% \com{cleardoublepage}, \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|, etc., soit \com{empty} (ne fait rien).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{12}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection[Remark about page styles]{Remark about page styles\,\footnote{This remark is taken and adapted
+% from a draft of the second edition of the JMPL~\cite{JMPL1}, by
+% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}, where he comments the \upack{minitoc} package.}}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection[Remarque sur les styles de page]{Remarque sur les styles de page\,\footnote{Cette remarque est
+% tirée et adaptée d'une version préliminaire de la seconde édition du JMPL~\cite{JMPL1}, par
+% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}, où il commente le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagestyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\pagestyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \Virage{}default commands for
+% part-level mini-tables page styles are defined as being simply a standard \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}| command,
+% because in document classes defining the \com{chapter} command (like \class{book} or \class{report}),
+% the part-level mini-tables are on their own pages.
+% If the document is printed
+% recto-verso, the first page is recto. Usually, these pages are not numbered and have no header and no footer. This
+% behaviour is a consequence from the default definitions of the commands of table~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. If you want an
+% other behaviour, you can change these definitions. Note that, by default, only the \emph{first} page of these
+% mini-tables are in the \texttt{empty} page style. You can set the style of this first page by using
+% \com{thispagestyle} and set the style of the following pages by using \com{pagestyle}, but you must not forget
+% to reset the normal style after the mini-table. Look at this short theorical example\,\footnote{This example shows that
+% the third argument can be a \emph{sequence} of commands: we set the style of the current page and the style of the
+% following pages.}:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{before}%|\\
+% \verb|  {|\com{cleardoublepage}\verb|}|\\
+% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{pagestyle}%|\\
+% \verb|  {|\com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}|\com{pagestyle}\verb|{myheadings}}|\\
+% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{after}%|\\
+% \verb|  {|\com{cleardoublepage}\com{pagestyle}\verb|{headings}}|
+% \end{verse}
+% where we add a \com{cleardoublepage} before each parttoc, then we set the \texttt{empty} page style for
+% the first page of the parttocs,
+% the \texttt{myheadings} page style for the following pages of the parttocs,
+% and set \texttt{headings} page style for the pages after the mini-table, after a
+% \com{cleardoublepage}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les\Virage{} commandes par défaut pour les styles de page des mini-tables au niveau partie
+% sont définies comme étant simplement \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}|, car
+% dans les classes de document définissant la commande \com{chapter} (comme \class{book} ou \class{report}),
+% les mini-tables au niveau partie sont sur
+% leurs propres pages. Si le document est imprimé recto-verso, la première page est recto. Habituellement, ces pages
+% ne sont pas numérotées et n'ont ni en-tête ni bas de page.  Ce comportement est une conséquence des définitions par défaut
+% des commandes du tableau~\vref{t+parttoc+features}. Si vous désirez un comportement différent, vous pouvez changer
+% ces définitions. Notez que, par défaut, seule la \emph{première} page de ces mini-tables est composée dans le
+% style de page \texttt{empty}. Vous pouvez établir le style de cette première page en utilisant
+% \com{thispagestyle} et établir le style des pages suivantes en utilisant \com{pagestyle}, mais vous ne devez
+% pas oublier de rétablir le style normal après la mini-table. Regardez ce court exemple théorique\,\footnote{Cet exemple
+% montre que le troisième argument peut être une \emph{séquence} de commandes: nous établissons le style de la page
+% courante et le style des pages suivantes.}:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{before}%|\\
+% \verb|  {|\com{cleardoublepage}\verb|}|\\
+% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{thispagestyle}%|\\
+% \verb|  {|\com{thispagestyle}\verb|{empty}|\com{pagestyle}\verb|{myheadings}}|\\
+% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{parttoc}{after}%|\\
+% \verb|  {|\com{cleardoublepage}\com{pagestyle}\verb|{headings}}|
+% \end{verse}
+% où nous ajoutons une commande \com{cleardoublepage} avant chaque parttoc, puis nous établissons le style de page
+% \texttt{empty} pour la première page des parttocs, le style de page \texttt{myheadings} pour les pages
+% suivantes des parttocs, et établissons le style de page \texttt{headings} pour les pages après la mini-table,
+% après une commande \com{cleardoublepage}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The ``Chapter~0'' Problem (solved)}\label{faq.5}
+% Some documents do not begin with chapter number one, but with chapter
+% number zero (or even a weirder number).
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Le problème du <<~Chapitre~0~>> (résolu)}\label{faq.5}
+% Certains documents ne commencent pas par le chapitre numéro~un, mais par le chapitre numéro~zéro (ou même
+% portant un numéro plus bizarre).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis}
+% \begin{description}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \item[Before version~\#23 (1994/11/08)]
+% \or\relax
+% \item[Avant la version~\#23 (1994/11/08)]
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To make the \upack{minitoc}
+% package work with such documents, you must insert the command:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\meta{N}\texttt{\}}
+% \end{quote}
+% before the \com{dominitoc} and analogous commands. \meta{N}~is the number
+% of the first chapter. This command \emph{does not}
+% modify the numbering of chapters, you must use a
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{addtocounter}\verb|{chapter}{-1}|
+% \end{verse}
+% command to get a first chapter
+% numbered~0. The \com{firstpartis} and
+% \com{firstsectionis} commands are similar for parts and sections with
+% a non standard numbering.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour que le paquetage \upack{minitoc} fonctionne avec de tels documents, vous devez insérer la commande:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\meta{N}\texttt{\}}
+% \end{quote}
+% avant la commande \com{dominitoc} et les commandes analogues. \meta{N}~est le numéro du premier chapitre. Cette
+% commande \emph{ne modifie pas} la numérotation des chapitres, vous devez utiliser une commande
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{addtocounter}\verb|{chapter}{-1}|
+% \end{verse}
+% pour obtenir un premier chapitre numéroté~0. Et les deux commandes \com{firstpartis}
+% et \com{firstsectionis} sont similaires pour des parties et sections avec une numérotation non standard.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \item[Since version~\#23 (1994/11/08)]
+% \or\relax
+% \item[Depuis la version~\#23 (1994/11/08)]
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} commands are now obsolete, as this
+% problem has been solved (via the ``absolute'' numbering of the mini-table auxiliary files).
+% Thus now they just produce harmless warnings.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} commandes sont désormais obsolètes, car ce problème
+% a été résolu (via la numérotation «~absolue~»
+% des fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-tables). Elles produisent désormais seulement des avertissements bénins.
+% \fi
+% \end{description}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% ^^A \subsection{Special Entries for TOC, LOF, LOT, Bibliography and Index}\label{special.entries}
+% \subsection{Special Entries in the TOC}\label{special.entries}
+% \or\relax
+% ^^A \subsection{Entrées spéciales pour la table des matières, la liste des figures, la liste des tableaux, la
+% ^^A  bibliographie et l'index}\label{special.entries}
+% \subsection{Entrées spéciales dans la TdM}\label{special.entries}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If\SMMZ{\lmess{I0046}} you want to add entries in the Table of Contents for
+% objects like the Table of Contents itself, the List of
+% Figures, the List of Tables, the Bibliography or the Index,
+% you should use the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}
+% (package available from the CTAN archives).
+% \or\relax
+% Si\SMMZ{\lmess{I0046}} vous souhaitez ajouter des entrées dans la table des matières pour des objets tels que la table de
+% matières elle-même, la liste des figures, la liste de tableaux, la bibliographie ou l'index, vous devriez
+% utiliser le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson} (paquetage disponible sur les archives CTAN).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But these entries are considered as chapters (or sections in
+% an article class document) when the \suffix{.toc} file is
+% scanned to prepare the minitocs (the \com{dominitoc} phase).
+% \or\relax
+% Mais ces entrées sont considérées comme des chapitres (ou des sections dans un document de classe article)
+% lorsque le fichier est analysé pour préparer les minitocs (la phase \com{dominitoc}).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Note\imess{I0043} that the same problems appear if you use one of the \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} or
+% \class{scrartcl} \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} with some options (\optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script},
+% \optp{liststotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script}, and \optp{idxtotoc}{KOMA-Script}).
+% The solutions are the same ones.
+% \or\relax
+% Notez\imess{I0043} que les mêmes problèmes apparaissent lorsque vous utilisez l'une des classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}
+% \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} or \class{scrartcl} avec certaines options (\optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script},
+% \optp{liststotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script}, \optp{bibtotocnumbered}{KOMA-Script} et \optp{idxtotoc}{KOMA-Script}).
+% Les solutions sont les mêmes.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% So you must add an \com{mtcaddchapter} command, \emph{without
+% argument}, after each of the involved commands \com{tableofcontents},
+% \com{listoffigures}, and \com{listoftables}.
+% \or\relax
+% Donc vous devez ajouter une commande \com{mtcaddchapter}, \emph{sans argument}, après chacune des commandes
+% \com{tableofcontents}, \com{listoffigures} et \com{listoftables} mises en jeu.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibliography}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the bibliography, you should add a \com{adjustmtc} command after the \com{bibliography} command.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour la bibliographie, vous devriez ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc} après la commande \com{bibliography}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\printglossary}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixglossary}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the glossary, it is a bit more complicated, you should add the
+% following commands just after the \com{printglossary} command:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \com{mtcaddchapter}
+% \end{quote}
+% \lneed{3}
+% But\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{W0006}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{E0026}} this can be done by:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+
+% \end{quote}
+% where the optional argument is the level for the glossary entry in the TOC\@.
+% By default, if \com{chapter} is defined, the \texttt{chapter} level is used, else
+% the \texttt{section} level.
+% If neither \com{chapter} or \com{section} are defined, the \texttt{part} level will be used if \com{part} is
+% defined; else an error is reported. You \emph{must} check the result and,
+% if necessary, adjust the optional argument.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour le glossaire, c'est un peu plus compliqué;
+% vous devriez ajouter les commandes suivantes juste après la commande \com{printglossary}:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \com{mtcaddchapter}
+% \end{quote}
+% \lneed{3}
+% Mais\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{W0006}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{E0026}} ceci peut être remplacé par:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+
+% \end{quote}
+% où l'argument optionnel est le niveau de l'entrée du glossaire dans la table des matières. Par défaut, si
+% \com{chapter} est définie, le niveau \texttt{chapter} est utilisé, sinon le niveau \texttt{section}.
+% Si ni \com{chapter} ni \com{section} ne sont définies, le niveau \texttt{part} sera utilisé si \com{part} est
+% définie; sinon une erreur est signalée. Vous \emph{devez} de vérifier le résultat et, si
+% nécessaire, ajuster l'argument optionnel.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\printindex}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the index, it is like for the glossary, you should add the
+% following commands just after the \com{printindex} command:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \com{mtcaddchapter}
+% \end{quote}
+% \lneed{3}
+% But\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}\\\lmess{E0027}} this can be done by:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+
+% \end{quote}
+% where the optional argument is the level for the index entry in the TOC\@.
+% By default, if \com{chapter} is defined, the \texttt{chapter} level is used, else
+% the \texttt{section} level.
+% If neither \com{chapter} or \com{section} are defined, the \texttt{part} level will be used if \com{part} is
+% defined; else an error is reported. You \emph{must} check the result and,
+% if necessary, adjust the optional argument.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour l'index, c'est comme pour le glossaire:
+% vous devriez ajouter les commandes suivantes juste après la commande \com{printindex}:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \com{mtcaddchapter}
+% \end{quote}
+% \lneed{3}
+% Mais\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}\\\lmess{E0027}} ceci peut être remplacé par:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+
+% \end{quote}
+% où l'argument optionnel est le niveau de l'entrée d'index dans la table des matières. Par défaut, si
+% \com{chapter} est définie, le niveau \texttt{chapter} est utilisé, sinon le niveau \texttt{section}.
+% Si ni \com{chapter} ni \com{section} ne sont définies, le niveau \texttt{part} sera utilisé si \com{part} est
+% définie; sinon une erreur est signalée. Vous \emph{devez} vérifier le résultat et, si
+% nécessaire, ajuster l'argument optionnel.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\printnomenclature}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the nomenclature\,\footnote{If you are using the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl} or the \pack{nomentbl}
+% package~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomentbl} calls \pack{nomencl}).},
+% it is like for the glossary, you should add the
+% following commands just after the \com{printnomenclature} command:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \com{mtcaddchapter}
+% \end{quote}
+% \lneed{3}
+% But\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0095}\\\lmess{W0096}\\\lmess{E0039}\\\lmess{E0040}} this can be done by:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+
+% \end{quote}
+% where the optional argument is the level for the nomenclature entry in the TOC\@.
+% By default, if \com{chapter} is defined, the \texttt{chapter} level is used, else
+% the \texttt{section} level.
+% If neither \com{chapter} or \com{section} are defined, the \texttt{part} level will be used if \com{part} is
+% defined; else an error is reported. You \emph{must} check the result and,
+% if necessary, adjust the optional argument.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour la nomenclature\,\footnote{Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl} ou le paquetage
+% \pack{nomentbl}~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomentbl} appelle \pack{nomencl}).}, c'est comme pour le glossaire,
+% vous devriez ajouter les commandes suivantes juste après la commande \com{printnomenclature}:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lof}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{lot}{xchapter}{}|\\
+% \com{mtcaddchapter}
+% \end{quote}
+% \lneed{3}
+% Mais ceci peut être remplacé par:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb+[chapter|section|part]+
+% \end{quote}
+% où l'argument optionnel est le niveau de l'entrée de la nomenclature dans la table des matières. Par défaut, si
+% \com{chapter} est définie, le niveau \texttt{chapter} est utilisé, sinon le niveau \texttt{section}.
+% Si ni \com{chapter} ni \com{section} ne sont définies, le niveau \texttt{part} sera utilisé si \com{part} est
+% définie; sinon une erreur est signalée. Vous \virage\emph{devez} vérifier le résultat et, si
+% nécessaire, ajuster l'argument optionnel.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Of course, in documents were the TOC, LOF, LOT, bibliography
+% and/or glossary (or index or nomenclature) are processed as starred sections, you must
+% modify these additions to use section level commands.
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% And proceed \virage\emph{with extreme care}, tracking in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file the
+% insertion of \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} files (and siblings). They are
+% some examples in the \exam{mtc-add.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}),
+% \exam{mtc-ads.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}),
+% and \exam{mtc-nom.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex}) files distributed with
+% \upack{minitoc}. The \exam{mtc-ads.tex} example shows how much that problem is difficult.
+% \or\relax
+% Bien sûr, les documents dans lesquels la table des matières, la liste des figures, la liste des tableaux, la
+% bibliographie et/ou le glossaire (ou l'index ou la nomenclature) sont traités comme des sections étoilées,
+% modifiez ces additions pour utiliser des commandes au niveau section.
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% Et procédez \virage\emph{avec grand soin}, en suivant dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} l'insertion des
+% fichiers \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} (et
+% analogues). Il y~a divers exemples dans les fichiers
+% \exam{mtc-add.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}),
+% \exam{mtc-ads.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}) et
+% \exam{mtc-nom.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex})
+% distribués avec \upack{minitoc}.
+% L'exemple \exam{mtc-ads.tex} montre combien ce problème est difficile.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uopt{notoccite} option}\label{ss+notoccite}\iopt{notoccite}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{L'option \uopt{notoccite}}\label{ss+notoccite}\iopt{notoccite}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\cite}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This option loads the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite} (by \name{Donald}{Arseneau}).
+% It avoids problems with \com{cite} commands in
+% sectionning commands or captions: if you then run \BibTeX{} using the \texttt{unsrt} (unsorted) style, or a
+% similar style, these citations get numbered starting
+% from the page in the table of contents where is the parasite citation, not the number they should have in the main text.
+% The \pack{notoccite} package prevents this. As \upack{minitoc} prints TOCs, it is subject to the same problem.
+% See also \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=bibtocorder}.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette option charge le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite} (de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}).
+% Elle évite des problèmes avec des commandes \com{cite} situées dans des commandes de sectionnement ou des
+% captions: si vous exécutez alors \BibTeX{} en utilisant le style \texttt{unsrt} (non trié), ou un
+% style similaire, ces citations seront numérotées en commençant à~la page de la table des matières où se trouve la
+% citation parasite, et non avec le numéro qu'elles auraient dans le texte principal. Le paquetage
+% \pack{notoccite} évite ceci. Comme \upack{minitoc} imprime des tables des matières, il est sujet au même
+% problème.
+% Voir aussi \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=bibtocorder}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uopt{listfiles} and \uopt{nolistfiles} options}\label{s+listfiles}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles}
+% The \optd{listfiles} package option creates a list of the minitoc auxiliary files into the
+% file \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\footnote{This package option is now (since version~\#48) the default (list created).}.
+% This feature can help you to remove these auxiliary
+% files which are no more necessary after the \LaTeX\ run.
+%     Under Unix or Linux, you can try:
+%     \begin{quote}
+%     \verb+cat +\emph{document}\verb+.maf | +\tool{xargs}\verb+ -i -t \rm {}+
+%     \end{quote}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les options \uopt{listfiles} et \uopt{nolistfiles}}\label{s+listfiles}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles}
+% L'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles} crée une liste des fichiers auxiliaires minitoc dans le
+% fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\,\footnote{Cette option de paquetage est désormais (depuis la version~\#48)
+% le choix par défaut (liste créée).}.
+% Ce dispositif peut vous aider à~supprimer ces
+% fichiers auxiliaires qui ne sont plus nécessaires après l'exécution de \LaTeX.
+%     Sous Unix ou Linux, vous pouvez essayer:
+%     \begin{quote}
+%     \verb+cat +\emph{document}\verb+.maf | +\tool{xargs}\verb+ -i -t \rm {}+
+%     \end{quote}
+% \fi
+% ^^A \clearpage
+% ^^A \need{.75\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars.
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uopt{hints} option}\label{s+hints}\ioptd{hints}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{L'option \uopt{hints}}\label{s+hints}\ioptd{hints}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This package option detects some actions and the loading of some packages and classes
+% known as interacting with \upack{minitoc},
+% and also some frequent misuses and errors. This list of interacting packages and classes is, of course, not closed.
+% If a known package is loaded,
+% this option writes some hints in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file and
+% emits a warning. The hints written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file may suggest you to consult the
+% present document or
+% the \xfile{minitoc.bug} file. \virage\emph{Your advice about this option will be welcome.}
+% This option is activated by default, but you can inhibit it via the \opt{nohints} option.
+% The following (potential) problems are currently detected:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette option du paquetage détecte certaines actions et le chargement de certains paquetages et classes connus pour
+% interagir avec \upack{minitoc}, ainsi que certaines mauvaises utilisations et erreurs fréquentes. La liste des
+% paquetages et classes qui interagissent n'est évidemment pas close. Si un tel paquetage (ou classe) est chargé,
+% cette option écrit quelques indications (\emph{hints}) dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}
+% et émet un avertissement. Les
+% indications écrites dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} peuvent vous suggérer de consulter
+% le présent document ou le
+% fichier \xfile{minitoc.bug}. \virage\emph{Votre avis sur cette option sera le bienvenu.} Cette
+% option est activée par défaut, mais vous pouvez l'inhiber via l'option \opt{nohints}.
+% Les problèmes (potentiels) suivants sont actuellement détectés:
+% \fi
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \lneed{11}
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\schapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       Alteration of some of the following commands\,\footnote{The commands containing the ``\texttt{@}'' character
+%       in their names are internal commands of \LaTeX{}, of a package or of a class; they are sometimes altered by
+%       another packages; reconsider then the loading order of the packages.}:
+%       \com{part}, \com{@part}, \com{@spart}, \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter},
+%       \com{@schapter}, \com{section}, \com{@sect}, and \com{@ssect}.
+%       Note that the \pack{hyperref} (see section~\vref{faq.17}) package alters these commands at
+%       \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}, hence this problem might be reported if you use this package,
+%       but these alterations seem harmless. Note that the \pack{hyperref} must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}.
+% \or\relax
+%       L'altération de certaines des commandes suivantes\,\footnote{Les commandes contenant le caractère <<~\texttt{@}~>>
+%       dans leurs noms sont des commandes internes de \LaTeX{}, d'un paquetage ou d'une classe; elles sont parfois
+%       altérées par d'autres paquetages; reconsidérez l'ordre de chargement des paquetages.}:
+%       \com{part}, \com{@part}, \com{@spart}, \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter},
+%       \com{@schapter}, \com{section}, \com{@sect} et \com{@ssect}.
+%       Mais le paquetage \pack{hyperref} (voir la section~\vref{faq.17}) altère ces commandes lors de
+%       \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}, donc ce problème pourrait être signalé si vous utilisez ce paquetage, mais
+%       ces altérations semblent bénignes. Notez que le paquetage \pack{hyperref} doit être chargé \emph{avant}
+%       \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       Presence\virage{} of the following packages or classes, which need some precautions:
+%       \class{amsbook} (class),
+%       \class{memoir} (class),
+%       \pack{appendix},
+%       \pack{placeins} (beware to its options and its release date (2005/04/18 at least)),
+%       \class{scrbook} (class),
+%       \class{scrreprt} (class),
+%       \class{scrartcl} (class),
+%       \pack{tocbibind}, and
+%       \pack{tocloft}.
+% \or\relax
+%       Présence\virage{} des paquetages et classes suivants, qui demandent certaines précautions:
+%       \class{amsbook} (classe),
+%       \pack{appendix},
+%       \pack{placeins} (attention à~ses options et à~sa date (au moins 2005/04/18)),
+%       \class{scrbook} (classe),
+%       \class{scrreprt} (classe),
+%       \class{scrartcl} (classe),
+%       \pack{tocbibind} et
+%       \pack{tocloft}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{7}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       Presence\SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{W0025}\\\lmess{W0097}\\\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0040}\\\lmess{W0099}}
+%       of the following packages or classes, which, unfortunately, are \emph{incompatible}
+%       with the \upack{minitoc} package:
+%       \class{amsart} (class),
+%       \class{amsproc} (class),
+%       \pack{alphanum}, \pack{flowfram}\,\footnote{This package has its own system for minitocs.}, \class{jura} (class),
+%       \pack{titlesec}, and
+%       \pack{titletoc}\,\footnote{\label{fn+titlesec}The \upack{titlesec} package redefines
+%       the sectionning commands in a way
+%       completely alien to the standard \LaTeX\ way; hence \upack{minitoc} and \upack{titlesec}-\upack{titletoc} are
+%       fundamentaly \emph{incompatible}, and it is very sad.}.
+% \or\relax
+%       Présence\SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{W0025}\\\lmess{W0097}\\\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0040}\\\lmess{W0099}}
+%       des paquetages ou classes suivants, qui, malheureusement, sont \emph{incompatibles} avec le paquetage
+%       \upack{minitoc}:
+%       \class{amsart} (classe),
+%       \class{amsproc} (classe),
+%       \pack{alphanum}, \pack{flowfram}\,\footnote{Ce paquetage a son propre système de minitocs.}, \class{jura} (classe),
+%       \pack{titlesec} et
+%       \pack{titletoc}\,\footnote{\label{fn+titlesec}Le paquetage \upack{titlesec} redéfinit les
+%       commandes de sectionnement d'une manière complètement étrangère à~la manière standard de \LaTeX;
+%       donc \upack{minitoc} et \upack{titlesec}-\upack{titletoc} sont fondamentalement incompatibles,
+%       et ceci est fort regrettable.}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       Usage of \com{parttoc} without calling \com{doparttoc}, \ldots~,
+%       usage of \com{sectlot} without calling \com{dosectlot};
+%       or the reverse.
+% \or\relax
+%       Utilisation de \com{parttoc} sans appeler \com{doparttoc}, \ldots~,
+%       utilisation de \com{sectlot} sans appeler \com{dosectlot};
+%       ou l'inverse.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       Usage of \com{parttoc} without calling \fkcom{tableofcontents}, \ldots~, of \com{sectlot}
+%       without calling \fkcom{listoftables}.
+% \or\relax
+%       Utilisation de \com{parttoc} sans appeler \fkcom{tableofcontents}, \ldots~, de
+%       \com{sectlot} sans appeler \fkcom{listoftables}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{8}
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       Usage of \com{sectlof} and/or \com{sectlot} without
+%       using the \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} package option of \upack{minitoc}
+%       (or the \pack{placeins} package without
+%       its \optp{section}{placeins} option).
+% \or\relax
+%       Utilisation de \com{sectlof} et/ou \com{sectlot} sans utiliser l'option de paquetage
+%       \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} de \upack{minitoc} (ou le paquetage \pack{placeins}
+%       sans son option \optp{section}{placeins}).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%     If\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}}
+%     you are using short extensions (because of your operating system or the \opt{shortext}
+%     package option, see section~\vref{MS-DOS}) and go beyond the limit of 99~parts, chapters or sections,
+%     the \optd{hints} package option displays a warning.
+% \or\relax
+%     Si\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}}
+%     vous utilisez des suffixes courts (à~cause de votre système d'exploitation ou de l'option de paquetage
+%     \opt{shortext}, voyez à~la section~\vref{MS-DOS}) et que vous allez au-delà de la
+%     limite de 99~parties, chapitres ou sections,
+%     l'option de paquetage \optd{hints} signale un avertissement.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.abstract}
+%       If the \pack{abstract}\imess{I0040} package~\cite{abstract} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), is used with its
+%       \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option, a ``{Abstract}'' entry is added to the table of contents,
+%       as a starred chapter if the document class defines \com{chapter}, else as a starred section.
+%       This is detected and you should add a \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| or a \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]|
+%       command after your \env{abstract} environment.
+% \or\relax\label{h.abstract}
+%       Si le paquetage \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), est utilisé
+%       avec son option \optp{addtotoc}{abstract}, une entrée «~{Abstract}~» (ou équivalente) est ajoutée
+%       à~la table des matières, comme un chapitre étoilé si la classe de document définit \com{chapter}, sinon
+%       comme une section étoilée. Ceci est détecté et vous devriez ajouter une commande \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| ou
+%       \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]| après votre environnement \env{abstract}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{3}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.sectsty}
+%       If the \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (by \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) is used,
+%       it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package. The interaction has been pointed out
+%       by \name{Bil}{Kleb}.
+% \or\relax\label{h.sectsty}
+%       Si le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (de \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) est utilisé,
+%       il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. L'interaction a été signalée par
+%       \name{Bil}{Kleb}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{3}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.varsects}
+%       If the \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038}
+%       (by \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}) is used,
+%       it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \or\relax\label{h.varsects}
+%       Si le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038}
+%       (de \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}) est utilisé,
+%       il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{3}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.fncychap}
+%       If the \pack{fncychap} package~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086}
+%       (by \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}) is used,
+%       it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \or\relax\label{h.fncychap}
+%       Si le paquetage \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086}
+%       (de \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}) est utilisé,
+%       il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{3}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.hangcaption}
+%       If the \pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092}
+%       (by \name{David~M.}{Jones}) is used,
+%       it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \or\relax\label{h.hangcaption}
+%       Si le paquetage \pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092}
+%       (de \name{David~M.}{Jones}) est utilisé,
+%       il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{3}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.quotchap}
+%       If the \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087}
+%       (by \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}) is used,
+%       it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \or\relax\label{h.quotchap}
+%       Si le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087}
+%       (de \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}) est utilisé,
+%       il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{3}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.romannum}
+%       If the \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088}
+%       (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) is used,
+%       it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \or\relax\label{h.romannum}
+%       Si le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088}
+%       (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) est utilisé,
+%       il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{3}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.sfheaders}
+%       If the \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089}
+%       (by \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}) is used,
+%       it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \or\relax\label{h.sfheaders}
+%       Si le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089}
+%       (de \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}) est utilisé,
+%       il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{3}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.alnumsec}
+%       If the \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090}
+%       (by \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}) is used,
+%       it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \or\relax\label{h.alnumsec}
+%       Si le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090}
+%       (de \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}) est utilisé,
+%       il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{3}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.captcont}
+%       If the \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091}
+%       (by \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}) is used,
+%       it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \or\relax\label{h.captcont}
+%       Si le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091}
+%       (de \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}) est utilisé,
+%       il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{4}
+% \item
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.caption}\label{h.caption2}\label{h.ccaption}\label{h.mcaption}
+%       If one of the \pack{caption}~\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}}\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung},
+%       \pack{caption2}\footnote{This package is obsolete;
+%       now use the \upack{caption} package.}~\cite{caption2}, (both written by \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}),
+%       \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (written by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), or
+%       \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (written by \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), packages is used,
+%       it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \or\relax\label{h.caption}\label{h.caption2}\label{h.ccaption}\label{h.mcaption}
+%       Si l'un des
+%       paquetages \pack{caption}~\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}}\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung},
+%       \pack{caption2}~\cite{caption2}\,\footnote{Ce paquetage est obsolète; utilisez
+%       maintenant le paquetage \upack{caption}.}, (tous deux écrits par \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}),
+%       \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (écrit par \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), ou
+%       \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (écrit par \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), est utilisé,
+%       il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{4}
+% \bigskip
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax\label{h.float}\label{h.floatrow}\label{h.trivfloat}\label{h.rotfloat}
+%       If one of the\imess{I0053} \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow},
+%       \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, or \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages
+%       is used, you must remember that \emph{you can not use} the \upack{minitoc} facilities for preparing
+%       mini-tables of floats of the new defined types.
+% \or\relax\label{h.float}\label{h.floatrow}\label{h.trivfloat}\label{h.rotfloat}
+%       Si\imess{I0053} l'un des paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow},
+%       \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} ou \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}
+%       est utilisé, vous devez vous souvenir que \emph{vous ne pouvez pas utiliser} les facilités
+%       de \upack{minitoc} pour préparer des mini-tables de flottants des types nouvellement définis.
+% \fi
+% \bigskip
+% \lneed{4}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       If\imess{I0006} you try to insert empty mini-tables, the \optd{hints} option gives a global warning (except if you
+%       used also the \opt{nocheckfiles} option, see section~\vref{s+placing}).
+% \or\relax
+%       Si\imess{I0006} vous essayez d'insérer des mini-tables vides, l'option \optd{hints} vous donne un avertissement
+%       global (sauf si vous avez aussi utilisé l'option \opt{nocheckfiles}, voyez la
+%       section~\vref{s+placing}).
+% \fi
+% \bigskip
+% \lneed{4}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item
+% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       If you use\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} one of the obsolete commands
+%       (\com{firstpartis}, \com{firstchapteris}, or \com{firstsectionis}),
+%       a warning is issued for each use, of course, but also a global hint as reminder.
+% \or\relax
+%       Si vous utilisez\SMM{\lmess{W0003}\\\lmess{W0004}\\\lmess{W0005}} l'une des commandes obsolètes
+%       (\com{firstpartis}, \com{firstchapteris} ou
+%       \com{firstsectionis}), un avertissement est émis pour chaque utilisation, bien sûr, mais aussi une
+%       indication (\emph{hint}) globale comme rappel.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{2}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%      If you invoke a same preparation command more than once, an informative hint is issued for each spurious
+%      invocation.
+% \or\relax
+%      Si vous invoquez une même commande de préparation plus d'une fois, un \emph{hint} informatif est émis pour
+%      chaque invocation superflue.
+% \fi
+% \end{itemize}
+% ^^A
+% ^^A \clearpage
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Usage with MS-DOS}\label{MS-DOS}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec MS-DOS}\label{MS-DOS}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Under\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} MS-DOS (and other PC oriented old operating systems),
+% the filename extensions are limited to 3 characters.
+% The \upack{minitoc} package determines dynamically the type of
+% extensions available and will use it.
+% All other modifications will be done automatically.
+% The \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}
+% extensions will become \suffix{.M}\meta{N}, where \meta{N} is the absolute chapter
+% number.
+% The extensions \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} and \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} become
+% \suffix{.F}\meta{N} and \suffix{.T}\meta{N}.
+% The \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}
+% extensions become \suffix{.P}\meta{N}, where \meta{N} is the absolute part number.
+% The extensions \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} and \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} become
+% \suffix{.G}\meta{N} and \suffix{.U}\meta{N}.
+% The \suffix{.stc}\meta{N}
+% extensions become \suffix{.S}\meta{N}, where \meta{N} is the absolute section
+% number.
+% The extensions \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} and \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} become
+% \suffix{.H}\meta{N} and \suffix{.V}\meta{N}. All these extensions are listed in table~\vref{t+suffixes}.
+% Of course, this implies a limit of 99~chapters in a
+% document, but do you really need so many chapters (or sections in an
+% article)? The limit of 99~parts does not seem too serious for
+% most documents, but for sections, it could be tragical.
+% The \optd{hints} option (section~\vref{s+hints}) will report such situations.
+% See also section~\vref{.8+3}.
+% \begin{table}[th]
+% \centering
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Extensions of the auxiliary files}\label{t+suffixes}
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{mini-table}&\textbf{long extensions}&\textbf{short extensions}\\
+% &(UNIX, etc.)&(MS-DOS, etc,)\\
+% \midrule
+% parttoc&\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.P}\meta{N}\\
+% partlof&\suffix{.plf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.G}\meta{N}\\
+% partlot&\suffix{.plt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.U}\meta{N}\\
+% \midrule
+% minitoc&\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.M}\meta{N}\\
+% minilof&\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.F}\meta{N}\\
+% minilot&\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.T}\meta{N}\\
+% \midrule
+% secttoc&\suffix{.stc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.S}\meta{N}\\
+% sectlof&\suffix{.slf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.H}\meta{N}\\
+% sectlot&\suffix{.slt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.V}\meta{N}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% Sous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} MS-DOS
+% (et autres vieux systèmes d'exploitation pour PC), les suffixes des noms de fichiers sont
+% limités à~3~caractères. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} détermine dynamiquement le type de suffixes disponible et
+% l'utilisera. Toutes les autres modifications seront faites automatiquement. Les suffixes \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} deviendront
+% \suffix{.M}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de chapitre.
+% Les suffixes \suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} et \suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.F}\meta{N} et \suffix{.T}\meta{N}.
+% Les suffixes \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.P}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de partie.
+% Les suffixes \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} et \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.G}\meta{N} et \suffix{.U}\meta{N}.
+% Les suffixes \suffix{.stc}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.S}\meta{N}, où \meta{N} est le numéro absolu de section.
+% Les suffixes \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} et \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} deviennent \suffix{.H}\meta{N} et \suffix{.V}\meta{N}.
+% Tous ces suffixes sont listés dans le tableau~\vref{t+suffixes}.
+% Bien sûr, ceci implique une limite de 99~chapitres dans un document, mais avez-vous vraiment besoin d'autant de
+% chapitres (ou de sections dans un article)? La limite de 99~parties ne semble pas trop grave pour la plupart des
+% documents, mais pour les sections, ceci pourrait être tragique. L'option \optd{hints} (section~\vref{s+hints})
+% signalera de telles situations.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{.8+3}.
+% \begin{table}[th]
+% \centering
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Suffixes des fichiers auxiliaires}\label{t+suffixes}
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{mini-table}&\textbf{suffixes longs}&\textbf{suffixes courts}\\
+% &(UNIX, etc.)&(MS-DOS, etc,)\\
+% \midrule
+% parttoc&\suffix{.ptc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.P}\meta{N}\\
+% partlof&\suffix{.plf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.G}\meta{N}\\
+% partlot&\suffix{.plt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.U}\meta{N}\\
+% \midrule
+% minitoc&\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.M}\meta{N}\\
+% minilof&\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.F}\meta{N}\\
+% minilot&\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.T}\meta{N}\\
+% \midrule
+% secttoc&\suffix{.stc}\meta{N}&\suffix{.S}\meta{N}\\
+% sectlof&\suffix{.slf}\meta{N}&\suffix{.H}\meta{N}\\
+% sectlot&\suffix{.slt}\meta{N}&\suffix{.V}\meta{N}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Why several \LaTeX{} runs are required?}
+% The mini-tables, at part, chapter and section levels,
+% are using some space on the first pages on each chapter, part or section,
+% thus the page numbers are altered. After the first \LaTeX\ run, the
+% mini-tables and lists, partial tables and lists
+% and section-level tables and lists
+% will be empty (in fact skipped since version \#35);
+% after the second run, they appear (if not empty),
+% but because they modify the page numbering, page numbers
+% are wrong; after the third \LaTeX\ run, the mini, part- and section-level
+% tables and lists should be correct (see figure~\vref{fig+mtc+3comp}).
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Pourquoi plusieurs exécutions de \LaTeX\ sont-elles nécessaires?}
+% Les mini-tables, aux niveaux partie, chapitre et section, occupent un certain espace sur les premières pages de
+% chaque partie, chapitre ou section, donc la numérotation des pages est altérée. Après la première exécution de
+% \LaTeX, les mini-tables (aux niveaux partie, chapitre et section) seront vides (et en fait sautées depuis la
+% version~\#35); après la deuxième exécution, elles apparaissent (lorsqu'elles ne sont pas vides), mais puisqu'elles
+% modifient la numérotation des pages, les numéros des pages y~sont faux; après la troisième exécution, les
+% mini-tables devraient être correctes (voir la figure~\vref{fig+mtc+3comp}).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \upack{mtcoff} package}\label{o+mtcoff}\ipack{mtcoff}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le paquetage \upack{mtcoff} }\label{o+mtcoff}\ipack{mtcoff}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If a document has been prepared with the \upack{minitoc} package,
+% it contains many \upack{minitoc} specific commands, most of them being
+% \com{dominitoc},
+% \com{faketableofcontents}, and \com{minitoc} commands (and their
+% equivalents for lists of figures and tables).
+% If you want to typeset
+% this document without any mini-table, you have just to replace the
+% \upack{minitoc} package by the \pack{mtcoff} package (without option), and all these
+% commands will be ignored, eventually writing warning messages in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file.
+% At least two \LaTeX\ runs will be necessary to get a correct page numbering and cross references.
+% It also sanitizes the \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc},
+% \suffix{.lof}, and \suffix{.lot} files from \upack{minitoc} specific
+% commands which are now spurious.
+% \or\relax
+% Si un document a été préparé avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, il contient de nombreuses commandes
+% spécifiques de \upack{minitoc}, dont la plupart sont des commandes \com{dominitoc}, \com{faketableofcontents} et
+% \com{minitoc} (et leurs équivalentes pour les listes de figures et de tableaux).
+% Si vous souhaitez composer ce document sans aucune mini-table, il vous suffit de remplacer le paquetage
+% \upack{minitoc} par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} (sans option), et toutes ces commandes seront ignorées, en
+% écrivant éventuellement des messages d'avertissement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file.
+% Au moins deux exécutions
+% de \LaTeX\ seront nécessaires pour avoir une numérotation des pages et des références croisées correctes.
+% Ceci nettoie aussi les fichiers \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot} en y~éliminant les
+% commandes spécifiques de \upack{minitoc} devenues superflues.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \cleardoublepage
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{Frequently Asked Questions}\label{FAQ}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{Questions fréquemment posées}\label{FAQ}
+% \fi
+% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns}
+% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
+% \minitoc
+% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty}
+% ^^A \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty}
+% \mtcskip
+% ^^A \lsneed{5}
+% \lneed{6}
+% ^^A \mtcskip
+% \minilof
+% \mtcskip
+% \minilot
+%
+% \addtocounter{section}{-1} ^^A % Trick to get a section numbered zero
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Introduction}
+% ^^A \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Introduction}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Introduction}
+% ^^A \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Introduction}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Here is a list of problems and frequently asked questions about
+% the \upack{minitoc.sty} package. If the version has a number less than~61, please
+% upgrade to version~\#61. This list is also given in the \xfile{minitoc.bug} file,
+% in pure text form. The numbering of this list is done by date of the first occurrence of the question.
+%
+% If a problem arises, it is often wise to: a)~use the \optd{hints} option (see section~\vref{s+hints}),
+% which is activated by default, and b)~read the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file, which may contain pertinent
+% messages. If you do not find a solution, ask a question on an adequate news group, like \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex}
+% (in french) or \texttt{comp.text.tex} (in english) preferably, groups which I try to follow, or send me a mail
+% in last ressort (please join a minimal but complete example~\cite{talbot-mini,preusse}\,\footnote{See also:
+% \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl}
+% and \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} for good advices.} (or~``MCE'')
+% reproducing the problem; this example should use the \opt{hints} option).
+% \or\relax
+% Voici une liste de problèmes et de questions fréquemment posées («~foire aux questions~») à~propos du paquetage
+% \upack{minitoc}. Si votre version a un numéro plus petit que~61, vous êtes priés de faire une mise à~jour
+% à~la version~\#61. Cette liste est aussi donnée dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.bug}, sous
+% forme de texte pur (et en anglais). La numérotation de cette liste est faite selon la date de la première occurrence
+% de la question.
+%
+% Si un problème survient, il est souvent avisé: a)~d'utiliser l'option \optd{hints} (voir la
+% section~\vref{s+hints}), qui est activée par défaut, et b)~de lire le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, qui
+% peut contenir des messages pertinents. Si vous ne trouvez pas de solution, posez une question sur un groupe de
+% discussion adéquat, tel que \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} (en français), ou \texttt{comp.text.tex} (en anglais) de préférence,
+% que j'essaye de suivre, ou envoyez moi un courrier en dernier recours (prière de joindre un exemple complet
+% minimal~\cite{talbot-mini,preusse}\,\footnote{Voir aussi: \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl}
+% et \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} pour de bons conseils.} (ou «~ECM~»\/) reproduisant
+% le problème; cet exemple devrait utiliser l'option \opt{hints}).
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (1)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Avoiding a page break near the rules before and after a mini-table}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Éviter une coupure de page près des filets avant et après une mini-table}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\enlargethispage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This problem seemed solved since version~\#8, but version~\#12 added better fixes.
+% You may have to make some final tuning with \com{enlargethispage}.
+% See the \LaTeX\ manual~\cite{latex-manual}.
+% The \pack{needspace} package~\cite{needspace} may also be useful.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce problème semblait résolu depuis la version~\#8, mais la version~\#12 a ajouté de meilleures corrections. Vous
+% pouvez devoir faire quelques ajustements ultimes avec \com{enlargethispage}. Voir le manuel
+% \LaTeX~\cite{latex-manual}. Il peut aussi être utile d'utiliser le paquetage
+% \pack{needspace}~\cite{needspace}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A (2)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Implementing others layouts for a mini-table}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Implanter d'autres mises en page pour une mini-table}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Suggestions are welcome, but look at the section~\vref{s+alt+layout}.
+% There are yet some examples in chapter~\vref{c+exdocs}, for some layouts, like mini-tables on two or three columns.
+% \or\relax
+% Les suggestions sont les bienvenues, mais voyez la section~\vref{s+alt+layout}.
+% Il y~a quelques exemples dans le chapitre~\vref{c+exdocs}, pour quelques mises en page, comme des mini-tables
+% sur deux ou trois colonnes.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (3)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{A ``\texttt{\textbackslash\textbackslash}'' command in a contents line makes an error}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Une commande «~\texttt{\textbackslash\textbackslash}~» dans une entrée de contenu provoque une erreur}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\\}
+% \begin{macro}{\protect}
+% \begin{macro}{\linebreak}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Use \com{protect}\com{linebreak}. The \verb|\\| command should be used only in tabular material (\env{tabular}
+% environment and similar, or in the
+% \env{tabbing} environment) and in math arrays and equations, or in the \env{quote}-like environments.
+% \or\relax
+% Utilisez \com{protect}\com{linebreak}. La commande \verb|\\| ne devrait être utilisée que dans du matériel
+% de tableau (environnement \env{tabular} ou similaire, ou dans l'environnement \env{tabbing}) et dans les
+% tableaux (\emph{arrays}) et équations mathématiques, ou dans des environnements similaires à~\env{quote}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A (4)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Reordering chapters makes havoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Changer l'ordre des chapitres crée le chaos}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \emph{If you reorder chapters, havoc follows\ldots\ mini-tables
+% going in wrong chapters.}
+% \or\relax
+% \emph{Si vous changez l'ordre des chapitres, le chaos en découle,\ldots\
+% avec les mini-tables allant dans les  mauvais chapitres.}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The best way seems to make one run with the \pack{mtcoff}
+% package replacing the \upack{minitoc} package, then restore
+% the \upack{minitoc} package and re-execute \LaTeX\ at least three times
+% (yes, it is time consuming\ldots). See figure~\vref{fig+mtc+3comp}\footnote{I~used the \pack{pict2e}
+% package~\cite{pict2e}, by \namea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}, \name{Rolf}{Niepraschk} and \name{Josef}{Tkadlec}, to prepare this figure.}.
+% Running with the \pack{mtcoff} package ensures that the standard auxiliary files
+% are cleared from ``spurious'' commands introduced by \upack{minitoc}.
+% A more radical solution is to delete the \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc},
+% \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files relative to the document, then
+% re-execute \LaTeX\ at least three times.
+% \or\relax
+% La meilleure méthode semble d'effectuer une exécution avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} remplaçant
+% le paquetage  \upack{minitoc}, puis de rétablir le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et de ré-exécuter \LaTeX\ au
+% moins trois fois (oui, cela prend du temps\ldots). Voir la figure~\vref{fig+mtc+3comp}\,\footnote{J'ai utilisé le
+% paquetage \pack{pict2e}~\cite{pict2e}, de \namea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}, \name{Rolf}{Niepraschk}
+% et \name{Josef}{Tkadlec},
+% pour préparer cette figure.}.
+% Exécuter avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}
+% garantit que les fichiers auxiliaires standard seront purgés des commandes «~superflues~» introduites par
+% \upack{minitoc}. Une solution plus radicale est de détruire les fichiers \suffix{.aux}, \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}
+% et \suffix{.lot} relatifs au document, puis de ré-exécuter \LaTeX\ au moins trois fois.
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{figure}[tp]
+% \centering\bgroup\footnotesize
+% \def\NUM{\meta{N}}
+% \setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
+% \resizebox{1.0\textwidth}{!}{%
+% \begin{picture}(170,60)(-5,0)
+% \thicklines
+% \put(0,0){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(0,50){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(30,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(60,0){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(60,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(60,50){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(90,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(120,0){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(120,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(120,50){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(150,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(15,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(75,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(135,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(15,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}}
+% \put(75,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}}
+% \put(135,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}}
+% \put(15,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(75,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(135,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(30,35){\vector(1,0){30}}
+% \put(45,35){\line(0,1){10}}
+% \put(45,45){\vector(1,0){15}}
+% \put(90,35){\vector(1,0){30}}
+% \put(105,35){\line(0,1){10}}
+% \put(105,45){\vector(1,0){15}}
+% \put(90,45){\line(1,-1){5}}
+% \put(95,40){\line(0,-1){4}}
+% \put(95,30){\line(0,1){4}}
+% \put(95,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}}
+% \put(150,45){\line(1,-1){5}}
+% \put(155,40){\line(0,-1){10}}
+% \put(155,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}}
+% \put(15,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (1)}}
+% \put(75,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (2)}}
+% \put(135,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (3)}}
+% \put(45,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}}
+% \put(105,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}}
+% \put(97,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}}
+% \put(157,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}}
+% \put(75,50){\vector(0,1){5}}
+% \put(135,50){\vector(0,1){5}}
+% \put(90,25){\vector(1,0){5}}
+% \put(150,25){\vector(1,0){5}}
+% \put(75,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(A)}}
+% \put(135,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(C)}}
+% \put(92,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(B)}}
+% \put(152,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(D)}}
+% \end{picture}}
+% \egroup
+% \begin{flushleft}
+% \noindent\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize
+% \begin{itemize}\labelsep=1ex\itemindent=0pt
+% \item[(A)] \com{tableofcontents} produces a table of
+% contents, which is likely inaccurate.
+% \item[(B)] \com{minitoc} produces minitocs, which are likely inaccurate.
+% \item[(C)] \com{tableofcontents} produces a table of contents, which is accurate.
+% \item[(D)] \com{minitoc} produces minitocs, which are accurate.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{minipage}
+% \end{flushleft}
+% \caption{Three compilations for \upack{minitoc}}\label{fig+mtc+3comp}
+% \end{figure}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{figure}[tp]
+% \centering\bgroup\footnotesize
+% \def\NUM{\meta{N}}
+% \setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
+% \resizebox{1.0\textwidth}{!}{%
+% \begin{picture}(170,60)(-5,0)
+% \thicklines
+% \put(0,0){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(0,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(0,50){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(30,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(60,0){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(60,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(60,50){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(90,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(120,0){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(120,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(120,50){\line(1,0){30}}
+% \put(150,0){\line(0,1){50}}
+% \put(15,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(75,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(135,45){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs dominitoc\phantom{xxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(15,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}}
+% \put(75,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}}
+% \put(135,35){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs tableofcontents}}}
+% \put(15,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(75,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(135,25){\makebox(0,0){\texttt{\bs minitoc\phantom{xxxxxxxx}}}}
+% \put(30,35){\vector(1,0){30}}
+% \put(45,35){\line(0,1){10}}
+% \put(45,45){\vector(1,0){15}}
+% \put(90,35){\vector(1,0){30}}
+% \put(105,35){\line(0,1){10}}
+% \put(105,45){\vector(1,0){15}}
+% \put(90,45){\line(1,-1){5}}
+% \put(95,40){\line(0,-1){4}}
+% \put(95,30){\line(0,1){4}}
+% \put(95,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}}
+% \put(150,45){\line(1,-1){5}}
+% \put(155,40){\line(0,-1){10}}
+% \put(155,30){\vector(-1,-1){5}}
+% \put(15,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (1)}}
+% \put(75,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (2)}}
+% \put(135,5){\makebox(0,0){\LaTeX\ (3)}}
+% \put(45,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}}
+% \put(105,47){\makebox(0,10)[b]{\suffix{.toc}}}
+% \put(97,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}}
+% \put(157,30){\makebox(10,0)[l]{\suffix{.mtc}\NUM}}
+% \put(75,50){\vector(0,1){5}}
+% \put(135,50){\vector(0,1){5}}
+% \put(90,25){\vector(1,0){5}}
+% \put(150,25){\vector(1,0){5}}
+% \put(75,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(A)}}
+% \put(135,60){\makebox(0,0){\bf(C)}}
+% \put(92,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(B)}}
+% \put(152,20){\makebox(10,5)[lb]{\bf(D)}}
+% \end{picture}}
+% \egroup
+% \begin{flushleft}
+% \noindent\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize
+% \begin{itemize}\labelsep=1ex\itemindent=0pt
+% \item[(A)] \com{tableofcontents} produit une table matières, qui est probablement inexacte.
+% \item[(B)] \com{minitoc} produit des minitocs, qui sont probablement inexactes.
+% \item[(C)] \com{tableofcontents} produit une table matières, qui est probablement exacte.
+% \item[(D)] \com{minitoc} produit des minitocs, qui sont probablement exactes.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{minipage}
+% \end{flushleft}
+% \caption{Trois compilations pour \upack{minitoc}}\label{fig+mtc+3comp}
+% \end{figure}
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (5)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Extensions for the names of auxiliary files}\label{.8+3}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Suffixes pour les noms des fichiers auxiliaires}\label{.8+3}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \emph{This package creates auxiliary files with extensions like \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}.
+% Some operating systems allow only 3~characters extensions. What to do?}\par
+% \lneed{3}
+% No\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} modification is needed: all became automatic since
+% version \#28! If you insist to use 3~characters extensions,
+% even on operating systems allowing more, just use the package
+% option \opt{shortext}. Then you will get first the
+% autoconfiguration messages, then a message saying that you
+% will use short extensions. But then be careful to not have more
+% than 99~mini-tables of the same kind (even empty)!
+% \or\relax
+% \emph{Ce paquetage crée des fichiers auxiliaires ayant des suffixes tels que \suffix{.mtc}\meta{N}. Certains
+% systèmes d'exploitation ne permettent que des suffixes limités à~3~caractères. Que faire?}\par
+% \lneed{3}
+% Aucune\SMM{\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0055}} modification n'est nécessaire:
+% tout est devenu automatique depuis la version \#28! Si vous voulez vraiment
+% utiliser des suffixes de 3~caractères, utilisez simplement l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext}.
+% Alors vous recevrez d'abord les messages d'autoconfiguration, puis un message disant que vous allez
+% utiliser des suffixes courts.
+% Mais alors faites attention à~ne pas avoir plus 99~mini-tables du même type (même vides)!
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (6)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Playing with the chapter number}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Jouer avec le numéro de chapitre}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \emph{Do not cheat}\virage{} with the ``\texttt{chapter}'' counter, i.e.,~do not write ugly things like:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{setcounter}\verb|{chapter}{6}|
+% \end{verse}
+% The mechanism would break. It is better to add \com{chapter} commands,
+% to create empty (but numbered in a legal way) chapters.
+% Since version~\#10, the \upack{minitoc} package works with appendices.
+% Version \#19 allows to begin with a chapter other that number~1.
+% ^^A And look at~``Special Entries for TOC, LOF, LOT, Bibliography and Index'', section~\vref{special.entries}.
+% And look at~``Special Entries in the TOC'', section~\vref{special.entries}.
+%
+% Since version~\#23 (1994/11/08), the numbering of chapters and that of minitocs are independent, so that problem just
+% vanished.
+%
+% The same remarks apply to the \texttt{part} and \texttt{section} counters.
+% \or\relax
+% \emph{Ne trichez pas}\virage{} avec le compteur «~\texttt{chapter}~», donc n'écrivez pas des horreurs telles que:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{setcounter}\verb|{chapter}{6}|
+% \end{verse}
+% Ceci casserait la mécanique du paquetage. Il vaut mieux ajouter des commandes \com{chapter}, afin de
+% créer des chapitres vides (mais numérotés d'une manière légale). Depuis la version~\#10, le paquetage \upack{minitoc}
+% fonctionne avec les appendices.
+% La version \#19 vous permet de commencer par un chapitre numéroté autrement que un.
+% Et regardez «~Entrées spéciales dans la TdM~», section~\vref{special.entries}.
+%
+% Depuis la version~\#23 (1994/11/08), la numérotation des chapitres et celle des minitocs sont indépendantes,
+% donc ce problème a disparu.
+%
+% Les mêmes remarques s'appliquent aux compteurs \texttt{part} et \texttt{section}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A (7)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Supported document classes}\label{s+supported+classes}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Classes de document supportées}\label{s+supported+classes}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The\imess{W0017} \upack{minitoc} package is restricted to document classes which define
+% chapters in the standard way, like ``\class{book}'' and ``\class{report}'',
+% or sections in the standard way, like ``\class{article}''~\cite{classes}.
+% There are ``parttocs'' if the document class defines the \com{part} command.
+% Note that classes like ``\class{letter}''~\cite{letter}, which have not the classical sectionning structure, cannot be
+% supported. Classes using sectionning commands with other names are not supported\,\footnote{This would be
+% very difficult: any user can create new sectionning commands (often with the help from some packages) with
+% standard or new names; this is only limited by the imagination. The \upack{minitoc} package relies on the
+% names of the standard sectionning commands and on the syntax of these commands.}.
+% See also section~\vref{s+AMS}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le\imess{W0017} paquetage \upack{minitoc} est restreint aux classes de document qui définissent les chapitres
+% de la manière standard, comme «~\class{book}~» et «~\class{report}~», ou les sections de la manière standard,
+% comme «~\class{article}~»~\cite{classes}. Il y~a des «~parttocs~» si la classe de document définit
+% la commande \com{part}. Notez que des classes telles que «~\class{letter}~»~\cite{letter},
+% qui n'ont pas la structure de sectionnement classique, ne
+% peuvent pas être supportées. Les classes utilisant des commandes de sectionnement portant d'autres noms ne sont
+% pas supportées\,\footnote{Ce serait très difficile: tout utilisateur peut créer de nouvelles commandes de
+% sectionnement (souvent à~l'aide de certains paquetages) portant des noms standard ou nouveaux; ceci n'est limité
+% que par l'imagination. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} s'appuie sur les noms des commandes de sectionnement standard
+% et sur la syntaxe de ces commandes.}.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+AMS}.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (8)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Compatibility with \LaTeX{} versions}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Compatibilité avec les versions de \LaTeX{}}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some\imess{W0021} users have failed to make \upack{minitoc} to work. They got a message like:
+%       \begin{verse}
+%       \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0021|\\
+%       \verb|Undefined command ... \@inputcheck ...|\\
+%       \verb|Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.|
+%       \verb|Trying to continue...|
+%       \end{verse}
+%       or:\imess{W0022}
+%       \lneed{3}
+%       \begin{verse}
+%       \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0022|\\
+%       \verb|Undefined command ... \reset@font ...|\\
+%       \verb|Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.|\\
+%       \verb|Trying to continue... crossing fingers.|
+%       \end{verse}
+%       The \com{reset@font} command has been added to \xfile{latex.tex}
+%       on September~29th, 1991 and the \com{@inputcheck} command
+%       on March~18th, 1992 and this version of \xfile{latex.tex} has been
+%       released on March~25th, 1992. If you get this message, you
+%       have an old version of \xfile{latex.tex}. Get a recent one from
+%       the archives (or a recent distribution)
+%       and regenerate a \xfile{latex.fmt} format via \texttt{initex} (or your configuration tool).
+% \or\relax
+% Certains\imess{W0021} utilisateurs ne sont pas parvenus à~faire fonctionner \upack{minitoc}.
+% Ils ont reçu un message tel que:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0021|\\
+% \verb|Undefined command ... \@inputcheck ...|\\
+% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.|
+% \verb|Trying to continue...|
+% \end{verse}
+% ou:\imess{W0022}
+% \lneed{3}
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0022|\\
+% \verb|Undefined command ... \reset@font ...|\\
+% \verb|Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.|\\
+% \verb|Trying to continue... crossing fingers.|
+% \end{verse}
+% La commande \com{reset@font} a été ajoutée à~\xfile{latex.tex} le 29~septembre 1991, et la commande
+% \com{@inputcheck} le 18~mars 1992, et cette version de \xfile{latex.tex} a été distribuée le 25~mars 1992. Si
+% vous obtenez un tel message, vous avez une vieille version de \xfile{latex.tex}. Obtenez une version récente
+% depuis les archives (ou une distribution récente)
+% et régénérez un format \xfile{latex.fmt} via \texttt{initex} (ou votre outil de configuration).
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (9)
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Other mini-tables}\label{faq.9}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Autres mini-tables}\label{faq.9}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some demanding users want to have minilof, minilot and
+% minibbl (mini-bibliographies per part, chapter or section). First, ``minibbl'' is another problem, strongly
+% related to the \BibTeX's dealing with \suffix{.aux} files. Look
+% at the \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib}, \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits},
+% \pack{multibib}~\cite{multibib}, \pack{bibtopic}~\cite{bibtopic}, and \pack{splitbib}~\cite{splitbib} packages.
+% Version~\#13 has implemented basic minilofs and minilots.
+% Minibbls are not the aim of this package\footnote{See {\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multbib}}}.
+% \or\relax
+% Certains utilisateurs exigeants désirent avoir des minilofs, minilots et minibbls. Tout d'abord, les «~minibbls~»
+% (mini-bibliographies par partie, chapitre ou section) sont un autre problème,
+% fortement lié au traitement par \BibTeX\ des fichiers \suffix{.aux}.
+% Regardez les paquetages \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib}, \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits},
+% \pack{multibib}~\cite{bibunits}, \pack{bibtopic}~\cite{bibtopic} et \pack{splitbib}~\cite{splitbib}.
+% La version~\#13 a implanté les minilofs et minilots basiques. Les minibbls ne sont pas l'objet de ce
+% paquetage{\froff\,\footnote{Voir~: \froff\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=multbib}}}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% ^^A (10)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Why so many auxiliary files?}\label{faq.10}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Pourquoi autant de fichiers auxiliaires?}\label{faq.10}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This package creates a lot of auxiliary files and some users
+% have argued that it is too many. A deep redesign would be
+% necessary to avoid that. Using only one big auxiliary file
+% (or one for all minitocs, one for all minilofs, \ldots)
+% would make the reading of such file very slow, as it would
+% be read for each \ucom{miniXXX} macro!
+% Moreover, this would make the \optd{checkfiles} (see section~\vref{s+placing}) package
+% option impractical to implement.
+% Note that the many files \uxfile{*.mtc*}, etc., may be
+% deleted after the \LaTeX{} run. They are rebuilt by the preparation commands
+% (like \com{dominitoc} and siblings).
+% But, since version \#35,
+% \upack{minitoc} is able to detect and skip empty \uxfile{*.mtc*} files
+% (and siblings) to avoid ugly titles with just two thin rules.
+% It would not be easy to do with only one big auxiliary file.
+% Since version \#44, the \optd{listfiles} package option is available to create a list of these auxiliary
+% files; see section~\vref{s+listfiles}.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce paquetage crée des tas de fichiers auxiliaires et certains utilisateurs ont argué qu'il y en avait trop.
+% Une réorganisation profonde serait nécessaire pour éviter ce grand nombre. Utiliser un seul grand fichier
+% auxiliaire  (ou un pour toutes les minitocs, un pour toutes les minilofs, etc.) rendrait la lecture de ce
+% fichier très lente, car il devrait être lu pour chaque commande \ucom{miniXXX}! De plus, ceci
+% rendrait l'implantation de l'option \optd{checkfiles} (section~\vref{s+placing}) pratiquement impossible.
+% Notez que les nombreux fichiers \uxfile{*.mtc*}, etc., peuvent être détruits après l'exécution de \LaTeX.
+% Ils sont reconstruits par les commandes de préparation (comme \com{dominitoc} et ses analogues).
+% Mais, depuis la version \#35, \upack{minitoc} est capable de détecter et sauter les fichiers \uxfile{*.mtc*} (et
+% analogues) vides pour éviter des titres isolés avec seulement deux filets fins.
+% Tout ceci ne serait pas facile à~faire avec un seul gros fichier auxiliaire.
+% Depuis la version \#44, l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles} est disponible pour créer une liste de ces
+% fichiers auxiliaires; voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \lneed{5}
+% These files contain the mini-tables extracted from the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}, and \suffix{.lot} files.
+% They are no more useful after the \LaTeX\ run. If you run \LaTeX\ via a script or a ``makefile'', it may be
+% useful to add to it a cleaning feature (which should be optional, to allow debugging). The
+% table~\vref{t+suffixes} gives the list of the extensions for these files (note that a \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc}
+% auxiliary file is also created as a scratch file).
+%
+% As an example, you can look at the \tool{rubber} tool~\cite{rubber}
+% (written in Python) provided by \xname{Emmanuel}{Beffara}:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \url{http://iml.univ-mrs.fr/~beffara/soft/rubber/}
+% \end{quote}
+% \or\relax
+% Ces fichiers contiennent les mini-tables extraites des fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot}.
+% Ils ne sont plus utiles après l'exécution de \LaTeX. Si vous exécutez \LaTeX\ au moyen d'un script ou
+% d'un «~makefile~», il peut être utile de lui ajouter un dispositif de nettoyage (qui devrait être optionnel,
+% pour permettre la mise au point). Le tableau~\vref{t+suffixes} donne la liste des suffixes pour ces fichiers
+% (notez qu'un fichier auxiliaire \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc} est aussi créé comme fichier de travail).
+%
+% Comme exemple, vous pouvez regarder l'outil \tool{rubber}~\cite{rubber}
+% (écrit en Python) fourni par \xname{Emmanuel}{Beffara}:
+% {\froff\begin{quote}
+% \url{http://iml.univ-mrs.fr/~beffara/soft/rubber/}
+% \end{quote}}
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (11)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Mini-tables at levels other than chapter}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Mini-tables à~des niveaux autres que le chapitre}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Here also, some redesign was needed. From version~\#15, there are parttocs, partlofs and
+% partlots for the part level in \class{book}\texttt{\BAR}\class{report}-like and \class{article}-like documents,
+% secttocs, sectlofs and sectlots for the section level in \class{article}-like
+% documents. Note that you can not have minitocs features at chapter
+% and section level in the same document, because doing so would make
+% an almost unreadable monster. The user must choose the main class of
+% the document according to the size of it (e.g.,~do not write an article
+% of more than 100~sections: this is a report, or even a book!).
+%
+% \begin{center}\ttfamily
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
+% \toprule
+% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries part&\rmfamily\bfseries chapter&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
+% \midrule
+% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
+% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
+% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
+% \thickline
+% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries part&\rmfamily\bfseries chapter&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
+% \hline
+% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline
+% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline
+% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\thickline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \fi
+% \end{center}
+% \or\relax
+% Ici aussi, une reconstruction a été nécessaire. Depuis la version~\#15, il y a des parttocs, partlofs et partlots
+% pour le niveau partie dans les documents dont la classe est similaire
+% à~\class{book}, \class{report} ou \class{article},
+% des secttocs, sectlofs et sectlots pour le niveau section dans les documents dont la classe est similaire
+% à~\class{article}. Notez que vous ne pouvez pas avoir les dispositifs de \upack{minitoc} aux niveaux chapitre et
+% section dans le même document, car cela produirait un monstre presque illisible. L'utilisateur doit choisir la classe de
+% base du document selon la taille de celui-ci (par exemple, ne pas écrire un article de plus de 100~sections: c'est
+% un rapport, ou même un livre!).
+% \begin{center}\ttfamily
+% \ifBT
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
+% \toprule
+% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries partie&\rmfamily\bfseries chapitre&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
+% \midrule
+% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
+% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
+% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \else
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
+% \thickline
+% &\Strut \rmfamily\bfseries partie&\rmfamily\bfseries chapitre&\rmfamily\bfseries section\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\
+% \hline
+% \Strut book&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline
+% \Strut report&$*$&$*$&\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\hline
+% \Strut article&$*$&&$*$\vphantom{\Large Pj}\\\thickline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \fi
+% \end{center}
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (12)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Incompatibility with \LaTeX2.09}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Incompatibilité avec \LaTeX2.09}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\protect}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The more recent version of \LaTeXe{} adds \com{protect} before
+% \com{contentsline} in the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lof}
+% files. The version~\#17 of \upack{minitoc} attempts to be compatible with \LaTeXe{} and \LaTeX2.09.
+% This will be the \emph{last}
+% version usable with \LaTeX2.09. Versions~\#18 and later are \LaTeXe{} specific, and no more compatible
+% with \LaTeX2.09, which is completely obsolete.
+% \or\relax
+% La version la plus récente de \LaTeXe{} ajoute \com{protect} avant \com{contentsline} dans
+% les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lof}. La version~\#17 de \upack{minitoc} tente d'être compatible
+% avec \LaTeXe{} et \LaTeX2.09. Ce sera la \emph{dernière} version utilisable avec \LaTeX2.09. Les versions~\#18 et
+% ultérieures sont spécifiques de \LaTeXe, et ne sont plus compatibles avec \LaTeX2.09, qui est totalement obsolète.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A (13)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Documents resetting the chapter number at each part}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Documents ré-initialisant le numéro de chapitre pour chaque partie}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Since version~\#23, \upack{minitoc} works with document classes resetting
+% chapter (or section) number at each part (or chapter). This is possible because the auxiliary files for the
+% mini-tables have now an \emph{absolute} number.
+% \or\relax
+% Depuis la version~\#23, \upack{minitoc} fonctionne avec les classes de document qui ré-initialisent le numéro de
+% chapitre (ou de section) pour chaque partie (ou chapitre). Ceci est possible car les fichiers auxiliaires pour les
+% mini-tables ont désormais un numéro \emph{absolu}.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (14)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The mini-tables have too much spaced lines}
+% From version~\#29, you can have tight mini-tables with the \opt{tight} option, and
+% with the \opt{k-tight} option for the \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (since version~\#43).
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les mini-tables ont leurs lignes trop espacées}
+% Depuis la version~\#29, vous pouvez avoir des mini-tables plus resserrées avec l'option \opt{tight},
+% avec l'option \opt{k-tight} pour les classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} (depuis la version~\#43).
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (15)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The secttocs are wrong}
+% Secttocs did not work: corrected (version~\#38).
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les secttocs sont fausses}
+% Les secttocs ne fonctionnent pas: corrigé (version~\#38).
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (16)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Removing the lines of dots}
+% The lines of dots (leaders) between section titles and page numbers are removed by the \opt{undotted}
+% option (\#29). See also section~\vref{s+alt+layout}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Retirer les points de conduite}
+% Les lignes de points (points de conduite) entre les titres de sections et les numéros de pages sont retirés par
+% l'option \opt{undotted} (\#29). Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+alt+layout}.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (17)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Using the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}}\label{faq.17}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utiliser le paquetage \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}}\label{faq.17}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Since version~\#31, \upack{minitoc} works correctly with the powerful \pack{hyperref}
+% package~\cite{hyperref.web}, thanks to \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek},
+% using the work of \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne}, \xname{Didier}{Verna} and \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}.
+% \emph{Hence\Virage{} the \pack{minitoc-hyper} package~\cite{minitoc-hyper} is now obsolete and should no more be used.
+% It it still present on the CTAN archives for compatibility with old documents.}
+% If you add the loading of the \pack{hyperref} package to a document yet using \upack{minitoc},
+% you will get error message about spurious closing braces. Just let finish the \LaTeX\ run,
+% then re-\LaTeX\ the document. There will be no problem if you remove the loading of
+% \pack{hyperref} and add it again: the problem occurs only when upgrading from
+% \upack{minitoc}~\#30 to \upack{minitoc}~\#31 (or higher) with a document already processed and adding
+% \pack{hyperref} at the same time! It seems better to process the document with \upack{minitoc}~\#31 (or higher)
+% without \pack{hyperref}, then with \pack{hyperref}, because some internal commands written
+% into the auxiliary files have been modified. If used, the \pack{hyperref} package must be loaded \emph{before}
+% \upack{minitoc}. Note that the documents \xfile{minitoc.dtx} and \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} show (not so) basic examples
+% of the use of the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% Depuis la version \#31, \upack{minitoc} fonctionne enfin correctement avec le puissant paquetage
+% \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}, grâce à~\name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, qui a utilisé les travaux de
+% \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne}, \xname{Didier}{Verna} et \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}.
+% \emph{Donc\Virage{} le paquetage \pack{minitoc-hyper}~\cite{minitoc-hyper} est désormais obsolète et ne devrait plus être
+% utilisé. Il est encore présent sur les archives CTAN pour la compatibilité avec des anciens documents.}
+% Si vous ajoutez le chargement du paquetage \pack{hyperref} à~un
+% document utilisant déjà \upack{minitoc}, vous recevrez un message d'erreur concernant des accolades fermantes en
+% trop. Il suffit de laisser se terminer l'exécution de \LaTeX, puis de ré-exécuter \LaTeX\ sur le document. Il n'y
+% aura aucun problème si vous enlevez le chargement de \pack{hyperref} puis l'ajoutez de nouveau; ce problème ne
+% se produit que lorsque vous passez de \upack{minitoc} version~\#30 à~\upack{minitoc} version~\#31 (ou supérieure)
+% avec un document déjà traité et en ajoutant \pack{hyperref} en même temps! Il semble préférable de traiter le
+% document avec \upack{minitoc} version~\#31 (ou supérieure) sans \pack{hyperref}, puis avec \pack{hyperref},
+% parce que certaines commandes internes écrites dans les fichiers auxiliaires ont été modifiées. S'il est utilisé,
+% le paquetage \pack{hyperref} doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}. Notez que les documents
+% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} et \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} montrent des exemples (qui ne sont pas vraiment) basiques de
+% l'utilisation du paquetage \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (18)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Problem while upgrading \upack{minitoc}}
+% If upgrading from version~\#30 or lower to
+% version~\#31 or higher, you should delete the \suffix{.aux},
+% \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}, \suffix{.lot} files of the document,
+% else the first \LaTeX{} run with version~\#31 or higher will
+% produce a lot of errors (the next run should be ok). See also the section~\vref{faq.17}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Problème lors de la mise à~jour de \upack{minitoc}}
+% Lors de la mise à~jour de la version~\#30 ou inférieure vers la version~\#31 ou supérieure, vous devriez détruire
+% les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}, \suffix{.lot} du document, sinon la première exécution de \LaTeX{} avec
+% la version~\#31 ou supérieure produira beaucoup d'erreurs (l'exécution suivante devrait être correcte). Voir aussi
+% la section~\vref{faq.17}.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (19)
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{A local TOC for the set of appendices}\label{faq.19}%
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Une TdM locale pour l'ensemble des appendices}\label{faq.19}%
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\protect}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\partbegin}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some users need a table of contents for the appendices,
+% but without putting the entries of it into the main table of
+% contents. The solution is to put the appendices in a \com{part}
+% subdivision of the document and ask for a table of contents at
+% the \com{part} level:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \icom{doparttoc}\verb|\doparttoc           % after \begin{document}|\\
+% \verb|. . .|\\
+% \com{tableofcontents}\\
+% \verb|. . .|\\
+% \com{appendix}\\
+% \icom{part}\verb|\part{Appendices}    % create a part level subdivision|\\
+% \icom{parttoc}\verb|\parttoc             % create a local table of contents|\\
+% \verb|% To suppress the appendix part in the main toc|\\
+% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{setcounter}\idcnt{tocdepth}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{-1}}|\\
+% \icom{chapter}\verb|\chapter{First appendix}|\\
+% \verb|. . .|\\
+% \verb|% Add this at the end of appendices if there is something|\\
+% \verb|% after the appendices (like an index or a bibliography)|\\
+% \verb|% to put a bound to the contents of \parttoc|\\
+% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{partbegin}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}|
+% \end{verse}
+% See also section~\vref{faq.25}.
+% \or\relax
+% Certains utilisateurs ont besoin d'une table des matières pour les appendices, mais sans mettre les entrées de
+% cette table dans la table des matières principale. Une solution est de mettre les appendices dans une subdivision
+% \com{part} du document et de demander une table des matières au niveau de cette partie:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \icom{doparttoc}\verb|\doparttoc           % après \begin{document}|\\
+% \verb|. . .|\\
+% \com{tableofcontents}\\
+% \verb|. . .|\\
+% \icom{appendix}\verb|\appendix|\\
+% \icom{part}\verb|\part{Appendices}    % crée une subdivision de niveau partie|\\
+% \icom{parttoc}\verb|\parttoc             % crée une table des matières locale|\\
+% \verb|% Pour supprimer la partie appendices dans la TdM principale|\\
+% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{setcounter}\idcnt{tocdepth}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{-1}}|\\
+% \icom{chapter}\verb|\chapter{Premier appendice}|\\
+% \verb|. . .|\\
+% \verb|% Ajoutez ceci à la fin des appendices s'il y a quelque chose|\\
+% \verb|% après les appendices (comme un index ou une bibliographie)|\\
+% \verb|% pour placer une borne au contenu de \parttoc|\\
+% \icom{atttocontents}\icom{partbegin}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}|
+% \end{verse}
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq.25}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A (20)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \upack{appendix} package}\ipack{appendix}\label{faq+appendix}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{appendix}}\ipack{appendix}\label{faq+appendix}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc}
+% \begin{environment}{appendices}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If you use the \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}),\imess{I0042}
+% you will observe a serious problem with minitocs in the \env{appendices} environment
+% (and after it): they do not
+% match with their respective appendices. In fact, the environnement opening \ienv{appendices}\verb|\begin{appendices}| hides a
+% \com{addcontentsline} command for a chapter or a section, putting trouble
+% in the numbering of minitocs or secttocs. Several solutions are available. The first one is to add a
+% \com{adjustmtc} or \com{adjuststc} command
+% (depending on the level of the appendices, chapter or section) after \emph{each}
+% \ienv{appendices}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{appendices\}} command.
+% An other solution is to add the following commands in the preamble
+% \emph{after} the loading of the \pack{appendix} package:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\
+% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjustmtc}|
+% \end{verse}
+% if appendices are at the chapter level, OR:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\
+% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjuststc}|
+% \end{verse}
+% if appendices are at the section level.
+%
+% These two solutions may be modified by replacing \com{adjustmtc} by the sequence:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{chapterend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\chapterend}|\\
+% OR\\
+% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{sectend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\sectend}|
+% \end{quote}
+% when it is necessary to delimit the end of the preceding chapter or section\,\footnote{In fact, the commands
+% \com{partend}, \com{chapterend} and \com{sectend} should not be used directly by the user, in normal circumstances.}.
+%
+% A rather more elegant solution is to add an entry into the TOC via the \com{addappheadtotoc} command offered by
+% the \pack{appendix} package. As this entry is a chapter-level (or section-level) entry, it delimits correctly
+% the end of the preceding chapter or section.
+%
+% See also the \exam{mtc-amm.tex} example file (section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}),
+% which uses the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3},
+% which includes itself the \pack{appendix} package functionnality (these packages and this class are from the same author).
+% \or\relax
+% Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}),\imess{I0042} vous observerez un
+% sérieux problème avec les minitocs dans l'environnement \env{appendices} (et après lui): elles ne correspondent
+% pas avec leurs appendices respectifs. En fait, l'ouverture de l'environnement par \ienv{appendices}\verb|\begin{appendices}| dissimule une
+% commande \com{addcontentsline} pour un chapitre ou une section, semant le trouble dans la numérotation des
+% minitocs ou secttocs. Plusieurs solutions sont disponibles. La première consiste à~ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc}
+% ou \com{adjuststc} (selon que les appendices sont au niveau chapitre ou section) après \emph{chaque} commande
+% \ienv{appendices}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{appendices\}}. Une autre solution est d'ajouter les commandes suivantes dans le préambule
+% \emph{après} le chargement du paquetage \pack{appendix}:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\
+% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjustmtc}|
+% \end{verse}
+% si les appendices sont au niveau chapitre, OU:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|\let\oldappendices\appendices|\\
+% \verb|\def\appendices{\oldappendices\adjuststc}|
+% \end{verse}
+% si les appendices sont au niveau section.
+%
+% Ces deux solutions peuvent être modifiées en remplaçant \com{adjustmtc} par la séquence:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{chapterend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\chapterend}|\\
+% OU\\
+% \icom{addtocontents}\icom{sectend}\verb|\addtocontents{toc}{\sectend}|
+% \end{quote}
+% lorsqu'il est nécessaire de délimiter la fin du chapitre (ou de la section) précédent(e)\,\footnote{En fait, les
+% commandes \com{partend}, \com{chapterend} et \com{sectend} ne devraient pas être appelées directement par
+% l'utilisateur, dans des circonstances normales.}.
+%
+% Une solution plus élégante consiste à~ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières via la
+% commande \com{addappheadtotoc} fournie par le paquetage \pack{appendix}. Comme cette entrée est une entrée
+% au niveau chapitre (ou au niveau section), elle délimite correctement la fin du chapitre (ou de la section)
+% précédent(e).
+%
+% Voir aussi le fichier exemple \exam{mtc-amm.tex} (section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}),
+% qui utilise la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3},
+% qui inclut elle-même la fonctionnalité du paquetage \pack{appendix} (ces paquetages et cette classe sont du même auteur).
+% \fi
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% ^^A (21)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \upack{tocloft} package}\ipack{tocloft}\label{faq+tocloft}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{tocloft}}\ipack{tocloft}\label{faq+tocloft}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% (This\imess{I0047} answer is given in the documentation of the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}.)
+% The \pack{tocloft} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) and \upack{minitoc} packages
+% have an unfortunate interaction\,\footnote{Discovered by \name{Lyndon}{Dudding}.}, which fortunately can be fixed.
+% In the normal course of events, when \upack{minitoc} is used in a chaptered
+% document it will typeset section
+% entries in the minitocs in bold font. If \pack{tocloft} is used in
+% conjunction with \upack{minitoc}, then the minitoc section entries are
+% typeset in the normal font, except for the page numbers which are in
+% bold font, while the ToC section entries are all in normal font.
+%
+% One cure, if you want the minitoc section entries to be all in normal small
+% font, is to put:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \icom{renewcommand}\icom{mtcSfont}\verb|\renewcommand{\mtcSfont}{\normalfont\small}|
+% \end{verse}
+% or:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \icom{mtcsetfont}\verb|\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\normalfont\small}|
+% \end{verse}
+% in the preamble.
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% Otherwise, the cure is the following incantation:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \icom{renewcommand}\verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\bfseries}|\\
+% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecleader}{\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftdotsep}}|\\
+% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecpagefont}{\bfseries}|
+% \end{verse}
+% To have the section entries in both the ToC and the minitocs in bold then
+% put the incantation in the preamble. To have only the minitoc section
+% entries in bold while the ToC entries are in the normal font,
+% put the incantation between the \com{tableofcontents}
+% command and the first \com{chapter} command.
+%
+% As \pack{tocloft} is a very powerful and useful package, these cures are worth to be added if you need the
+% benefits of this package. See also section~\vref{faq+memoir}.
+% \or\relax
+% (Cette\imess{I0047} réponse est donnée dans la documentation du paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}.)
+% Les paquetages \pack{tocloft} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) et \upack{minitoc} ont une fâcheuse
+% interaction\,\footnote{Découverte par \name{Lyndon}{Dudding}.}, qui, heureusement, peut être corrigée.
+% Dans le cours normal des choses, lorsque \upack{minitoc} est utilisé dans un document avec chapitres, il
+% composera les entrées de sections dans une fonte grasse. Si \pack{tocloft} est utilisé en conjonction avec
+% \upack{minitoc}, alors les entrées de sections dans les minitocs sont composées dans la fonte normale, sauf pour
+% les numéros de pages qui sont en fonte grasse, tandis que les entrées de sections dans la table des matières
+% principale sont entièrement en fonte normale.
+%
+% Un remède, si vous voulez que toutes des entrées de sections dans les minitocs soient en fonte normale, est de
+% placer:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \icom{renewcommand}\icom{mtcSfont}\verb|\renewcommand{\mtcSfont}{\normalfont\small}|
+% \end{verse}
+% ou:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \icom{mtcsetfont}\verb|\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\normalfont\small}|
+% \end{verse}
+% dans le préambule.
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% Sinon, le remède est l'incantation suivante:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \icom{renewcommand}\verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\bfseries}|\\
+% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecleader}{\bfseries\cftdotfill{\cftdotsep}}|\\
+% \verb|\renewcommand{\cftsecpagefont}{\bfseries}|
+% \end{verse}
+% Pour que les entrées de sections dans la table des matières principale et dans les minitocs soient toutes en gras,
+% placez l'incantation dans le préambule. Pour que ces entrées soient en gras dans les minitocs mais en fonte
+% normale dans la table des matières principale, placez l'incantation entre la commande \com{tableofcontents} et
+% la première commande \com{chapter}.
+%
+% Puisque \pack{tocloft} est un paquetage très puissant et très utile, cela vaut la peine d'ajouter ces remèdes si
+% vous voulez profiter des avantages de ce paquetage. Voir aussi la section~\vref{faq+memoir}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A (22)
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \uclass{memoir} class}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq+memoir}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec la classe \uclass{memoir}}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq+memoir}
+% \fi
+% \SMMZZ{\lmess{E0028}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0032}\\\lmess{I0044}\\\lmess{M0001}}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} offers basically the functionnalities
+% of the \pack{appendix}, \pack{tocbibind}
+% and \pack{tocloft} packages (this class and these packages have the same author, \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}),
+% hence it has the same problems;
+% see above the available solutions (sections~\vref{faq+appendix},
+% \vref{special.entries}, and~\vref{faq+tocloft} respectively).
+% If your version of the \class{memoir} class is recent, the syntax of the \com{chapter} command is
+% different and the \class{memoir} class \emph{could be no more compatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package, but a
+% patch is inserted to fix the problem. Hopefully, if your version of the \class{memoir} class
+% is more recent than 2005/09/25, the patch is no more necessary.
+%
+% If you are using the \class{memoir} class (or the \pack{tocloft} package),
+% the \com{mtcsetfont} command has no effect (\com{mtcsettitlefont} works); you should use the font
+% commands which are specific of the \class{memoir} class (or of the \pack{tocloft} package).
+%
+% If you still want to use the \com{mtcsetfont} commands while using the \class{memoir} class (or of the
+% \pack{tocloft} package), you must disable the \class{memoir}/\pack{tocloft} font commands. This is done by
+% the following commands:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\let\cftpartfont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cftchapterfont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cftsectionfont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cftsubsectionfont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cftsubsubsectionfont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cftparagraphfont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cftsubparagraphfont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cftfigurefont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cftsubfigurefont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cfttablefont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cftsubtablefont\relax|
+% \end{quote}
+% \or\relax
+% La classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} offre essentiellement les fonctionnalités des
+% paquetages \pack{appendix}, \pack{tocbibind} et \pack{tocloft} (cette classe et ces paquetages ont
+% le même auteur, \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}),
+% et donc elle a les mêmes problèmes; voir ci-dessus les solutions disponibles (sections~\vref{faq+appendix},
+% \vref{special.entries} et~\vref{faq+tocloft} respectivement).
+% Si votre version de la classe \class{memoir} est récente, la syntaxe de la commande \com{chapter}
+% est différente et la classe \class{memoir} \emph{pourrait n'être plus compatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc},
+% mais une modification est insérée pour corriger le problème. Heureusement, si votre version de la classe \class{memoir}
+% est plus récente que 2005/09/25, la correction n'est plus nécessaire.
+%
+% Si vous utilisez la classe \class{memoir} (ou le paquetage \pack{tocloft}), la commande \com{mtcsetfont}
+% n'a aucun effet  (\com{mtcsettitlefont} fonctionne); vous devriez utiliser les commandes de fontes qui
+% sont spécifiques de la classe \class{memoir} (ou du paquetage \pack{tocloft}).
+%
+% Si vous souhaitez quand même utiliser les commandes \com{mtcsetfont} tout en utilisant la classe \class{memoir}
+% (ou le paquetage \pack{tocloft}), vous devez désactiver les commandes de fontes de \class{memoir}/\pack{tocloft}.
+% Ceci peut être fait par les commandes suivantes:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|\let\cftpartfont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cftchapterfont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cftsectionfont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cftsubsectionfont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cftsubsubsectionfont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cftparagraphfont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cftsubparagraphfont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cftfigurefont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cftsubfigurefont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cfttablefont\relax|\\
+% \verb|\let\cftsubtablefont\relax|
+% \end{quote}
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% ^^A (23)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{There are too many commands for fonts, titles, and depths}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Il y a trop de commandes pour les fontes, les titres et les profondeurs}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Since version \#41, the \com{mtcsetfont} and \com{mtcsettitlefont} commands are available. You do not need anymore
+% to know \com{mtcSSSfont}, \com{ptifont}, etc.
+% \or\relax
+% Depuis la version \#41, les commandes \com{mtcsetfont} et \com{mtcsettitlefont} sont disponibles. Vous
+% n'avez plus besoin de connaître \com{mtcSSSfont}, \com{ptifont}, etc.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Since version \#42, the \com{mtcsettitle} command is available.
+% You do not need anymore to know \com{mtctitle}, \com{slttitle}, etc.
+% \or\relax
+% Depuis la version \#42, la commande \com{mtcsettitle} est disponible.
+% Vous n'avez plus besoin de connaître \com{mtctitle}, \com{slttitle}, etc.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Since version \#43, the \com{mtcsetdepth} command is available.
+% You do not need anymore to know the counters \dcnt{minitocdepth}, \dcnt{sectlotdepth}, etc.
+% \or\relax
+% Depuis la version \#43, la commande \com{mtcsetdepth} est disponible.
+% n'avez plus besoin de connaître les compteurs \dcnt{minitocdepth}, \dcnt{sectlotdepth}, etc.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A (24)
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section[Compatibility with the \texorpdfstring{\AmS}{\emph{AmS}} document classes]%
+% {Compatibility with the {\AmS} document classes}\label{s+AMS}
+% This problem has been pointed out by \name{Henri}{Massias}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section[Compatibilité avec les classes de document de l'\texorpdfstring{\AmS}{\emph{AmS}}]%
+% {Compatibilité avec les classes de document de l'{\AmS}}\label{s+AMS}
+% Ce problème a été signalé par \name{Henri}{Massias}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{3}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Unfortunately, the \SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}}\class{amsart}
+% and \class{amsproc} document classes are
+% \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}.
+% The \class{amsbook} document class requires the insertion of commands if you want
+% a list of figures and/or a list of tables:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{listoffigures}\\
+% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % added|\\
+% \com{listoftables}\\
+% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % added|
+% \end{verse}
+% \or\relax
+% Malheureusement, les classes de document \SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}}\class{amsart}
+% et \class{amsproc} sont \emph{incompatibles} avec \upack{minitoc}.
+% La classe de document \class{amsbook} requiert l'insertion de commandes si vous désirez
+% une liste des figures et/ou une liste des tableaux:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{listoffigures}\\
+% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % ajout|\\
+% \com{listoftables}\\
+% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb| % ajout|
+% \end{verse}
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% ^^A (25)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Hiding some entries from the main table of contents}\label{faq.25}%
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Cacher certaines entrées dans la table des matières principale}\label{faq.25}%
+% \fi
+% \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% It is a problem similar to that of section~\vref{faq.19}.
+% An example is having a local table of contents for a chapter (\com{minitoc}) whose entries should not appear in
+% the main table of contents. Just use the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{chapter}\texttt{\{}\emph{Title}\texttt{\}}\\
+% \texttt{\bs begin\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{level}\texttt{]}\\
+% \com{minitoc}\\
+% \com{section}\texttt{\{}\emph{sub-title}\texttt{\}}\\
+% .{}.{}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs end\{mtchideinmaintoc\}}
+% \end{quote}
+% This environment accepts an optional numeric argument, which is the depth of hiding in the main toc (default:
+% \texttt{-1}, complete hiding).
+% You can look at the \exam{mtc-apx.tex} example file:\label{mtc-apx.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% C'est un problème similaire à~celui de la section~\vref{faq.19}.
+% Un exemple est d'avoir une table des matières locale pour un chapitre (\com{minitoc}) dont les entrées ne
+% doivent pas apparaître dans la table des matières principale. Utilisez simplement l'environnement
+% \env{mtchideinmaintoc}:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{chapter}\texttt{\{}\emph{Titre}\texttt{\}}\\
+% \texttt{\bs begin\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{niveau}\texttt{]}\\
+% \com{minitoc}\\
+% \com{section}\texttt{\{}\emph{sous-titre}\texttt{\}}\\
+% .{}.{}.\\
+% \texttt{\bs end\{mtchideinmaintoc\}}
+% \end{quote}
+% Cet environnement accepte un argument optionnel numérique, qui est la profondeur de masquage dans la table des
+% matières principale (par défaut: \texttt{-1}, masquage complet). Vous pouvez regarder le fichier d'exemple
+% \exam{mtc-apx.tex}:\label{mtc-apx.tex}
+% \fi
+% \end{environment}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-apx>
+\documentclass[oneside]{book}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-apx.tex}%
+  [2007/03/22]%
+\usepackage{lipsum} % provides filling text
+\usepackage{tocbibind} % adds some entries in the main TOC.
+\usepackage[tight,listfiles]{minitoc}
+\setcounter{minitocdepth}{3} \setcounter{parttocdepth}{3}
+\begin{document}
+\doparttoc \dominitoc % prepare the mini-tables
+\tableofcontents
+\mtcaddchapter % because tocbibind adds a chapter entry in the TOC
+\chapter{First}
+\minitoc
+First chapter
+\section{First section} \lipsum[1]
+\section{Second section} \lipsum[2]
+\chapter{Second}
+\minitoc
+Second
+\section{First section of second chapter} \lipsum[3]
+\section{Second section of second chapter} \lipsum[4]
+\appendix      % begins the appendices
+\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{Appendices} % adds a part entry in the TOC
+\adjustptc     % fixes the parttoc counter ptc
+\mtcsettitle{parttoc}{List of Appendices} % changes the parttoc title
+\parttoc       % adds a partial toc for the appendices
+\begin{mtchideinmaintoc}[-1] % hides the details of the appendices in the main TOC,
+%              % but chapter-level entries would be still visible in the main TOC
+%              % if you use 0 in place of -1 as optional argument.
+\chapter{First appendix}
+\minitoc
+First appendix
+\section{First section} \lipsum[5]
+\section{Second section} \lipsum[6]
+\chapter{Second appendix}
+\minitoc
+Second appendix
+\section{First section of second appendix} \lipsum[7]
+\section{Second section of second appendix} \lipsum[8]
+\end{mtchideinmaintoc} % end of hiding
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-apx>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlof}
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Of course, the environments \env{mtchideinmainlof}
+% and \env{mtchideinmainlot} are also available, to hide some entries in the main
+% list of figures or of tables.
+%
+% Note\virage{} that the position of the end of these environments must be adjusted to include a page break (like
+% the one done by a \com{chapter} command), else the restore command might be inserted too early into the
+% \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} or \suffix{.lot} file. There is an example file
+% (\exam{mtc-hi1.tex}):\label{mtc-hi1.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% Bien sûr, les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot} sont aussi disponibles, pour
+% masquer certaines entrées dans la liste principale des figures ou des tableaux.
+%
+% Notez\virage{} que la position de la fin de ces environnements doit être ajustée pour inclure un saut de page
+% (comme celui fait par une commande \com{chapter}), sinon la commande de restauration pourrait être insérée
+% trop tôt dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} ou \suffix{.lot}. Voici un fichier d'exemple
+% (\exam{mtc-hi1.tex}):\label{mtc-hi1.tex}
+% \fi
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+% \raggedcolumns
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-hi1>
+\documentclass{report}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-hi1.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]%
+\usepackage%
+  [tight,listfiles]{minitoc}
+\begin{document}
+\dominilof \listoffigures
+\dominilot \listoftables
+\chapter{First}
+\minilof \minilot
+\begin{figure}
+\caption{AAAA1}
+\end{figure}
+\begin{figure}
+\caption{AAAA2}
+\end{figure}
+\begin{table}
+\caption{TAAAA1}
+\end{table}
+\begin{table}
+\caption{TAAAA2}
+\end{table}
+\chapter{Second}
+\minilof \minilot
+%%----------------------
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We begin the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables.
+% In this document, we use the environment forms.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous commençons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la
+% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes environnements.
+% \fi
+% \raggedcolumns
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{mtchideinmainlof}
+\begin{mtchideinmainlot}
+\begin{figure}
+\caption{BBBB1}
+\end{figure}
+\begin{figure}
+\caption{BBBB2}
+\end{figure}
+\begin{table}
+\caption{TBBBB1}
+\end{table}
+\begin{table}
+\caption{TBBBB2}
+\end{table}
+\chapter{Third}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \lneed{3}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We terminate the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables.
+% In this document, we use the environment forms.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous terminons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la
+% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes environnements.
+% \fi
+% \raggedcolumns
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\end{mtchideinmainlot}
+\end{mtchideinmainlof}
+%%----------------------
+\minilof \minilot
+\begin{figure}
+\caption{CCCC1}
+\end{figure}
+\begin{figure}
+\caption{CCCC2}
+\end{figure}
+\begin{table}
+\caption{TCCCC1}
+\end{table}
+\begin{table}
+\caption{TCCCC2}
+\end{table}
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-hi1>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \end{multicols}}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But\virage{} it is also possible to use \emph{commands} in place of these environments:
+% you place a \com{mtchideinmainlof}
+% (or \com{mtchideinmainlot}) command in the first figure (or table) to
+% hide, \emph{before} its caption and a \com{endmtchideinmainlof} (or \com{endmtchideinmainlot}) command at the end of
+% the last figure (or table) to hide, \emph{after} its caption, like in this example file
+% (\exam{mtc-hi2.tex}):\label{mtc-hi2.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% Mais\virage{} il est aussi possible d'utiliser des \emph{commandes} à~la place de ces environnements: vous placez une
+% commande \com{mtchideinmainlof} (ou \com{mtchideinmainlot}) dans
+% la première figure (ou table) à~masquer, \emph{avant} son caption et une commande \com{endmtchideinmainlof}
+% (ou \com{endmtchideinmainlot}) à~la fin de la dernière figure (ou table) à~masquer, \emph{après} son caption,
+% comme dans cet exemple de fichier (\exam{mtc-hi2.tex}):\label{mtc-hi2.tex}
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-hi2>
+\documentclass{report}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-hi2.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+\usepackage%
+  [tight,listfiles]{minitoc}
+\begin{document}
+\dominilof \listoffigures
+\dominilot \listoftables
+\chapter{First}
+\minilof \minilot
+\begin{figure}
+\caption{AAAA1}
+\end{figure}
+\begin{figure}
+\caption{AAAA2}
+\end{figure}
+\begin{table}
+\caption{TAAAA1}
+\end{table}
+\begin{table}
+\caption{TAAAA2}
+\end{table}
+\chapter{Second}
+\minilof \minilot
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\virage{} begin the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables.
+% In this document, we use the command forms: a command is inserted \emph{before} the caption of the first ``hidden''
+% entry.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\virage{} commençons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la
+% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes commandes: une commande est insérée \emph{avant}
+% le caption de la \emph{première} entrée «~masquée~».
+% \fi
+% \raggedcolumns
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{figure}
+\mtchideinmainlof    % <--
+\caption{BBBB1}
+\end{figure}
+\begin{figure}
+\caption{BBBB2}
+\endmtchideinmainlof % <--
+\end{figure}
+\begin{table}
+\mtchideinmainlot    % <--
+\caption{TBBBB1}
+\end{table}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \lneed{3}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\virage{} terminate the hiding of figure entries in the list of figures and of table entries in the list of tables.
+% In this document, we use the command forms: a command is inserted \emph{after} the caption of the \emph{last} ``hidden''
+% entry.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\virage{} terminons le masquage des entrées de figures dans la liste des figures et des entrées de tableaux dans la
+% liste des tableaux. Dans ce document, nous utilisons les formes commandes: une commande est insérée \emph{après}
+% le caption de la \emph{dernière} entrée «~masquée~».
+% \fi
+% \raggedcolumns
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{table}
+\caption{TBBBB2}
+\endmtchideinmainlot % <--
+\end{table}
+\chapter{Third}
+\minilof \minilot
+\begin{figure}
+\caption{CCCC1}
+\end{figure}
+\begin{figure}
+\caption{CCCC2}
+\end{figure}
+\begin{table}
+\caption{TCCCC1}
+\end{table}
+\begin{table}
+\caption{TCCCC2}
+\end{table}
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-hi2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \flushcolumns
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This method, recommended while more delicate to apply, is much more reliable in delimiting the hiding domain:
+% it solves the problem of the asynchronism between the writing of floats and the writing of the normal text.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette méthode, recommandée bien que plus délicate à~appliquer, est bien plus fiable dans la délimitation du domaine de
+% masquage: elle résout le problème de l'asynchronisme entre l'écriture des éléments flottants et celle du texte normal.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (26)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Defining your own \usuffix{.mld} file}\label{faq.26}\isuffix{.mld}%
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Définir votre propre fichier \usuffix{.mld}}\label{faq.26}\isuffix{.mld}%
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, you should not directly modify one of the distributed \suffix{.mld} and \suffix{.mlo} files.
+% The simplest way to alter some
+% title is to redefine the corresponding command via \com{renewcommand} or better via
+% \com{mtcsettitle}.
+% If you really want to have your own \suffix{.mld} file, you copy an existing \suffix{.mld} file
+% into one with a new name (not
+% the name of a distributed \suffix{.mld} file). Then you modify this new \suffix{.mld} file and you can use it via
+% \com{mtcselectlanguage}. You can always contact me to add this new \suffix{.mld} file to the
+% distribution. These remarks apply also to the \emph{language}\usuffix{[.mld--.mlo]} pairs of language definition files.
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, vous ne devriez pas modifier directement l'un des fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo} de la
+% distribution. La
+% manière la plus simple de modifier un certain titre est de redéfinir la commande correspondante via
+% \com{renewcommand} ou mieux, via \com{mtcsettitle}. Si vous souhaitez vraiment avoir votre propre fichier
+% \suffix{.mld}, vous copiez un fichier \suffix{.mld} existant vers un fichier portant un nouveau nom
+% (pas le nom d'un fichier \suffix{.mld} de la distribution). Puis vous modifiez ce nouveau fichier \suffix{.mld} et
+% vous pourrez l'utiliser via \com{mtcselectlanguage}. Vous pouvez toujours me contacter pour ajouter ce nouveau
+% fichier \suffix{.mld} à~la distribution. Ces remarques s'appliquent aussi aux paires
+% \emph{langue}\isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{[.mld--.mlo]} de fichiers de définition de langues.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A (27)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \upack{abstract} package}\label{faq.27}\ipack{abstract}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{abstract}}\label{faq.27}\ipack{abstract}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{environment}{abstract}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the \pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), is used with its
+% \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option, a ``{Abstract}'' entry is added to the table of contents,
+% as a starred chapter if the document class defines \com{chapter}, else as a starred section.
+% This problem is detected by the \optd{hints} option and you should add
+% a \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| or a \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]|
+% command after your \env{abstract} environment.
+% \or\relax
+% Lorsque le paquetage \pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), est utilisé avec son option
+% \optp{addtotoc}{abstract}, une entrée «~{Abstract}~» (ou similaire) est ajoutée dans la table des
+% matières, comme un chapitre étoilé si la classe du document définit \com{chapter}, sinon comme une section
+% étoilée. Ce problème est détecté par l'option \optd{hints} et vous devriez ajouter une commande
+% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[]| ou  \com{mtcaddsection}\verb|[]| après votre environnement \env{abstract}.
+% \fi
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A (28)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \upack{sectsty} package}\label{faq.28}\ipack{sectsty}
+% If the \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (by \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
+% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course,
+% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{sectsty}}\label{faq.28}\ipack{sectsty}
+% Si le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} (de \name{Rowland}{McDonnell}) est utilisé, il doit être chargé
+% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr,
+% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (29)
+% \lneed{15}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Strange alignment in the minitocs}\label{faq.29}
+% \emph{In minitocs, subsections titles are not aligned with sections, as they are in the main table of contents.}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Alignement bizarre dans les minitocs}\label{faq.29}
+% \emph{Dans les minitocs, les titres des sous-sections ne sont pas alignés avec les sections,
+% alors qu'ils le sont dans la table des matières principale.}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\l@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@subsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@subsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@paragraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@subparagraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\renewcommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax %
+% The entries of a table of contents are formatted via internal commands like
+% \com{l@part}, \com{l@chapter}, \com{l@section}, etc.
+%
+% The ``part'' and ``chapter'' levels (and ``section'' for an article) use
+% specific commands which are somewhat complex for a more elaborated formatting.
+% For the ``section'' (in the \class{report} and \class{book} classes) and lower levels,
+% these commands are (\class{book} class, \xfile{book.cls}) by default:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \icom{renewcommand*}\icom{l@section}\icom{@dottedtocline}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}|\\
+% \icom{l@subsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}|\\
+% \icom{l@subsubsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}|\\
+% \icom{l@paragraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}}|\\
+% \icom{l@subparagraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}|
+% \end{quote}
+% which will be applied in the main table of contents and in the minitocs. The
+% arguments of \com{@dottedtocline} are
+% \begin{enumerate}[1)]
+% \item the logical depth (which will be compared to \dcnt{tocdepth} or \dcnt{minitocdepth}).
+% \item the indentation.
+% \item the width reserved for the section/subsection/\ldots\ number.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% In the standard \class{book}, \class{report} and \class{article} classes~\cite{classes}, the dimensions
+% (second and third arguments) are given in ``em'' units, and this unit
+% depends on the current font. In the main table of contents,
+% the section and subsection entries are witten in the \emph{same} font, hence
+% usually the alignment is correct. But in the minitocs, the section entries
+% are written in a bold font while the subsection entries are written in
+% a non bold font (the default font choices are given in table~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), hence one ``em'' has
+% different sizes in these two fonts and the alignement is changed.
+%
+% There are several solutions:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Redefine the \com{l@section} \ldots{} \com{l@subparagraph} commands
+%       to use font independent units (pt, mm, pc, etc.). This
+%       redefinition must be performed in a package or via a command defined by a package or between \com{makeatletter}
+%       and \com{makeatother}, because these commands have a~\verb|@| in
+%       their names; you must use \com{renewcommand*} to redefine
+%       these commands.
+% \item Use\virage{} the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft} to change the indentation, with
+%       font independent units. But then see \emph{also} section~\vref{faq+tocloft}.
+% \item Use the same font for the section and subsection entries
+%       in the minitocs, using the \com{mtcsetfont} command (see section~\vref{s+simp-font-commands}) or
+%       redefining the \com{mtcSfont}, \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont},
+%       \com{mtcPfont} and \com{mtcSPfont} commands (see table~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), or similar.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \or\relax
+%
+% Les entrées d'une table des matières sont mises en forme par des commandes internes telles que
+% \com{l@part}, \com{l@chapter}, \com{l@section}, etc.
+%
+% Les niveaux «~partie~» et «~chapitre~» (et «~section~» pour un article) utilisent des
+% commandes spécifiques qui sont assez complexes pour une mise en forme plus élaborée.
+% Pour les niveaux «~section~» (dans les classes \class{report} et \class{book}) et inférieurs,
+% ces commandes sont (class \class{book}, \xfile{book.cls}) par défaut:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \icom{renewcommand*}\icom{l@section}\icom{@dottedtocline}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}|\\
+% \icom{l@subsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}|\\
+% \icom{l@subsubsection}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}|\\
+% \icom{l@paragraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}}|\\
+% \icom{l@subparagraph}\verb|\renewcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}|
+% \end{quote}
+% qui seront appliquées dans la table des matières principale et dans les minitocs. Les
+% arguments de \com{@dottedtocline} sont
+% \begin{enumerate}[1)]
+% \item la profondeur logique (qui sera comparée à~\dcnt{tocdepth} ou \dcnt{minitocdepth});
+% \item l'indentation;
+% \item la largeur réservée pour le numéro de section/sous-section/\ldots
+% \end{enumerate}
+% Dans les classes standard \class{book}, \class{report} et \class{article}~\cite{classes}, les dimensions
+% (deuxième et troisième arguments) sont données en unités «~em~», et cette unité
+% dépend de la fonte courante. Dans la table des matières principale, les entrées de sections et de sous-sections
+% sont écrites dans la \emph{même} fonte, donc normalement l'alignement est correct. Mais dans les
+% minitocs, les entrées pour les sections sont écrites dans une fonte grasse tandis que celles des sous-sections
+% sont écrites dans une fonte non grasse (les choix par défaut pour ces fontes sont donnés dans
+% le tableau~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), donc un «~em~» a des tailles différentes
+% dans ces deux fontes et l'alignement est altéré.
+%
+% Il y a plusieurs solutions:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Redéfinir les commandes \com{l@section} \ldots{} \com{l@subparagraph} pour utiliser
+%       des unités indépendantes de la fonte (pt, mm, pc, etc.). Cette
+%       redéfinition doit être effectuée dans un paquetage ou via une commande définie dans un paquetage
+%       ou entre \com{makeatletter}
+%       et \com{makeatother}, puisque ces commandes contiennent un~\verb|@| dans leurs noms;
+%       vous devez utiliser \com{renewcommand*} pour redéfinir ces commandes.
+% \item Utiliser\virage{} le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft} pour changer l'indentation, avec des unités
+%       indépendantes de la fonte. Mais alors regardez \emph{aussi} la section~\vref{faq+tocloft}.
+% \item Utiliser la même fonte pour les entrées de sections et de sous-sections dans les minitocs,
+%       en utilisant la commande \com{mtcsetfont} (voir la section~\vref{s+simp-font-commands}) ou
+%       en redéfinissant les commandes \com{mtcSfont}, \com{mtcSSfont}, \com{mtcSSSfont},
+%       \com{mtcPfont} et \com{mtcSPfont} (voir le tableau~\vref{t+mtc+f2}), ou analogues.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Useful precautions with starred sectionning commands}\label{faq.30}
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item The\virage{} headers are not modified by \com{part*}, \com{chapter*} or \com{section*};
+%       it is \emph{necessary} to use \com{markboth} or \com{markright} to get correct page headers for
+%       the current and following pages.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item If\virage{} you need an entry in the table of contents for a \com{chapter*} or a \com{section*} command, you
+%       must use \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]} or \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}
+%       \emph{after} the starred sectionning command.
+%       If you need an entry in the table of contents for a \com{part*} command, the page number in the
+%       table of contents would be wrong, because \com{part*} implies a \com{clearpage} or a
+%       \com{cleardoublepage} before the first page of the part. Use the sequence
+%       \begin{quote}\small
+%       \com{cleardoublepage}\verb|     % \clearpage if openany option.|\\
+%       \com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|\\
+%       \com{part*}\verb|[|\emph{title}\verb|]|
+%       \end{quote}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \end{itemize}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Précautions utiles avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées}\label{faq.30}
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Les\virage{} en-têtes ne sont pas modifiés par \com{part*}, \com{chapter*} ou \com{section*};
+%       il est \emph{nécessaire} d'utiliser \com{markboth} ou \com{markright} pour obtenir des en-têtes de
+%       pages corrects pour la page courante et les suivantes.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item Si\virage{} vous désirez une entrée dans la table des matières pour une commande \com{chapter*} ou
+%       \com{section*} command, vous devez utiliser \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]} ou
+%       \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]} \emph{après} la commande de sectionnement étoilée.
+%       Si vous désirez une entrée dans la table des matières pour une commande pour une commande \com{part*},
+%       le numéro de page dans la table des matières serait erroné, car \com{part*} implique une commande
+%       \com{clearpage} ou \com{cleardoublepage} avant la première page de la partie. Utilisez la
+%       séquence
+%       \begin{quote}\small
+%       \com{cleardoublepage}\verb|     % \clearpage si option openany.|\\
+%       \com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|\\
+%       \com{part*}\verb|[|\emph{titre}\verb|]|
+%       \end{quote}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \end{itemize}
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (31)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with packages for captions}\label{faq.31}
+%       If\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}}
+%       one of the \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung},
+%       \pack{caption2}\footnote{This package is obsolete; now use a recent
+%       version of the
+%       \upack{caption} package.}~\cite{caption2}, (both written by \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}),
+%       \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), or
+%       \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (by \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), packages is used,
+%       it must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package, because such packages alter (redefine) the
+%       commands listing figures and tables. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec des paquetages pour les captions}\label{faq.31}\ipack{caption}\ipack{caption2}\ipack{ccaption}\ipack{mcaption}
+%       Si\SMM{\lmess{W0033}\\\lmess{W0034}\\\lmess{W0035}\\\lmess{W0036}}i
+%       l'un des paquetages \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung},
+%       \pack{caption2}\,\footnote{Ce paquetage est obsolète; utilisez
+%       maintenant une version récente du paquetage \upack{caption}.}~\cite{caption2}, (qui ont tous deux été écrits
+%       par \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}),
+%       \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} (écrit par \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}), ou
+%       \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} (écrit par \xname{Stephan}{Hennig}), est utilisé,
+%       il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car de tels paquetages altèrent (redéfinissent)
+%       les commandes de listage des figures et tableaux. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (32)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Bad interaction \upack{minitoc/hyperref/memoir}}\ipack{hyperref}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq.32}
+%        When the \upack{minitoc} and \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} packages are used in a document
+%        of class \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3},
+%        the chapter header ``Chapter'' does not appear on the first page of the chapter.
+%
+%        This problem is fixed in version~\#44 of \upack{minitoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Mauvaise interaction \upack{minitoc/hyperref/memoir}}\ipack{hyperref}\iclass{memoir}\label{faq.32}
+%        Lorsque les paquetages \upack{minitoc} et \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} sont utilisés dans un document
+%        dont la classe est \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}, l'en-tête de chapitre «~Chapitre~» n'apparaît pas
+%        sur la première page du chapitre.
+%
+%        Ce problème est corrigé dans la version~\#44 de \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (33)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \upack{varsects} package}\label{faq.33}\ipack{varsects}
+% If the \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} (by \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin})
+% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
+% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course,
+% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{varsects}}\label{faq.33}\ipack{varsects}
+% Si le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} (de \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}) est utilisé,
+% il doit être chargé
+% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr,
+% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (34)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Initial font settings}\label{faq.34}
+% The setting of the fonts in the mini-tables is a rather complex problem. If we take the parttocs as an example,
+% there is a \com{ptcfont} font-command which is used for two purposes\footnote{The same remarks apply
+% to the other mini-tables.}:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item First, to be used as default value for some other font-commands (like \com{ptcSPfont}). As its
+%       default value is used in the initialization of the \upack{minitoc} package, the value of these other
+%       commands is \emph{not altered} if you modify \com{ptcfont}. You must modify these commands one at a
+%       time.
+% \item Second, it is invoked at the beginning of each parttoc, partlof or partlot to set an initial font command.
+%       Then each entry of the mini-table calls its own font command (like \com{ptcSPfont}). Thus, if you
+%       modify \com{ptcfont}, you can obtain a global effect on the fonts in the parttocs, partlofs, and
+%       partlots. So you can play with the various parameters of the fonts (family, shape, series, size), if
+%       you want fancy mini-tables; but it is rather difficult.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% In\Virage{} the initialization of the \upack{minitoc} package, we have a sequence of commands:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \icom{let}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont     % (subsections)|\\
+% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont    % (subsubsections)|\\
+% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\let\ptcPfont\ptcfont      % (paragraphs)|\\
+% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont     % (subparagraphs)|\\
+% \icom{plffont}\verb|\let\plffont\ptcfont       % (figures)|\\
+% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\let\plfSfont\ptcfont      % (subfigures)|\\
+% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\let\pltfont\ptcfont       % (tables)|\\
+% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\let\pltSfont\ptcfont      % (subtables)|
+% \end{quote}
+% to define some default fonts. But this sequence is executed only once. If you alter \com{ptcfont}, the modification is
+% not applied to these font commands. The command \com{ptcfont} is invoked at the beginning of each parttoc.
+% \com{ptcCfont} is invoked for each chapter entry in a parttoc (\com{ptcSfont} for each section entry, etc.).
+% So \com{ptcfont} can be used to define some global characteristics for the fonts in the parttocs, while
+% \com{ptcCfont} (etc.) can be used to customize the fonts for each level of entries.
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Note that if you say:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \icom{let}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont     % (subsections)|\\
+% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont    % (subsubsections)|\\
+% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\let\ptcPfont\ptcfont      % (paragraphs)|\\
+% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont     % (subparagraphs)|\\
+% \icom{plffont}\verb|\let\plffont\ptcfont       % (figures)|\\
+% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\let\plfSfont\ptcfont      % (subfigures)|\\
+% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\let\pltfont\ptcfont       % (tables)|\\
+% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\let\pltSfont\ptcfont      % (subtables)|
+% \end{quote}
+% after loading the \upack{minitoc} package, these font commands will be ``associated'' to \com{ptcfont}, hence if you
+% modify \com{ptcfont} (by via \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}| or \com{renewcommand}), they will follow the
+% modification. But if you modify one of these commands via \com{renewcommand} or
+% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{...}| (\texttt{subsection} is an example),
+% the association is broken. But you could be more clever by saying something like
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{\ptcfont\itshape}|
+% \end{quote}
+% to preserve the association and modify only some parameters of a minitoc font command.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% For levels above subsection (part, chapter and section), the fonts a more specific in general, but you can, of course,
+% say something like \ucom{def}\com{ptcCfont}\verb|{|\com{ptcfont}\verb|}| to make a similar association.
+% You can even make other associations, like this:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|% for high sectionning levels:|\\
+% \icom{def}\verb|    \def\highlevelsfont{\rmfamily\bfseries\normalsize\upshape}|\\
+% \verb|% for low sectionning levels:|\\
+% \verb|    \def\lowlevelsfont{\rmfamily\mdseries\smallsize\upshape}|\\
+% \verb|% then for each level:|\\
+% \icom{ptcCfont}\verb|    \def\ptcCfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\
+% \icom{ptcSfont}\verb|    \def\ptcSfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\
+% \icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|    \def\ptcSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\
+% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|    \def\ptcSSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\
+% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|    \def\ptcPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}|\\
+% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|    \def\ptcSPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}|
+% \end{quote}
+% Then you can redefine \verb|\highlevelsfont| or \verb|\lowlevelsfont| to act on several fonts in one step, but you must
+% use \com{renewcommand}.  You cannot act on \verb|\highlevelsfont| or \verb|\lowlevelsfont| with \com{mtcsetfont}.
+%
+% Note that only the fonts for parttocs are used in the examples above; but, of course, the situation is the same for
+% minitocs and secttocs. \verb|\highlevelsfont| and \verb|\lowlevelsfont| are macro names that you can choice, they are not
+% part of the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Choix initiaux des fontes}\label{faq.34}
+% Le choix des fontes dans les mini-tables est un problème assez compliqué. Si nous prenons par exemple les
+% parttocs, il y~a une commande de fonte \com{ptcfont} qui est utilisée dans deux buts\,\footnote{Les mêmes
+% remarques s'appliquent aux autres mini-tables.}:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item Premièrement, pour être utilisée comme valeur par défaut pour quelques autres commandes de fontes (telles
+%       que \com{ptcSPfont}). Comme sa valeur par défaut est utilisée dans l'initialisation du paquetage
+%       \upack{minitoc}, la valeur de ces autres commandes \emph{n'est pas modifiée} si vous modifiez
+%       \com{ptcfont}. Vous devez modifiez ces commandes une à~la fois.
+% \item Deuxièmement, elle est invoquée au début de chaque parttoc, partlof ou partlot pour établir une commande
+%       de fonte initiale. Puis chaque entrée de la mini-table appelle sa propre commande de fonte (comme
+%       \com{ptcSPfont}). Donc, si vous modifiez \com{ptcfont}, vous pouvez obtenir un effet global sur les
+%       fontes dans les parttocs, partlofs et partlots. Vous pouvez ainsi jouer avec les divers paramètres des
+%       fontes (famille, forme, graisse, taille), si vous voulez des mini-tables enjolivées; mais ceci est assez
+%       difficile.
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% Dans\Virage{} l'initialisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, nous avons une séquence de commandes:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \icom{let}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont     % (subsections)|\\
+% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont    % (subsubsections)|\\
+% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\let\ptcPfont\ptcfont      % (paragraphs)|\\
+% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont     % (subparagraphs)|\\
+% \icom{plffont}\verb|\let\plffont\ptcfont       % (figures)|\\
+% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\let\plfSfont\ptcfont      % (subfigures)|\\
+% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\let\pltfont\ptcfont       % (tables)|\\
+% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\let\pltSfont\ptcfont      % (subtables)|
+% \end{quote}
+% pour définir quelques fontes par défaut. Mais cette séquence n'est exécutée qu'une seule fois. Si vous altérez
+% \com{ptcfont}, la modification n'est pas appliquée à~ces commandes de fontes. La commande \com{ptcfont} est
+% invoquée au début de chaque parttoc. \com{ptcCfont} est invoquée pour chaque entrée de chapitre dans une parttoc
+% (\com{ptcSfont} pour chaque entrée de section, etc.). Ainsi \com{ptcfont} peut être utilisée pour définir
+% quelques caractéristiques globales pour les fontes dans les parttocs, tandis que \com{ptcCfont} (etc.) peuvent
+% être utilisées pour personnaliser les fontes pour chaque niveau d'entrées.
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Notez que si vous dites:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \icom{def}\icom{ptcfont}\icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|\def\ptcSSfont{\ptcfont}     % (subsections)|\\
+% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|\def\ptcSSSfont{\ptcfont}    % (subsubsections)|\\
+% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|\def\ptcPfont{\ptcfont}      % (paragraphs)|\\
+% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|\def\ptcSPfont{\ptcfont}     % (subparagraphs)|\\
+% \icom{plffont}\verb|\def\plffont{\ptcfont}       % (figures)|\\
+% \icom{plfSfont}\verb|\def\plfSfont{\ptcfont}      % (subfigures)|\\
+% \icom{pltfont}\verb|\def\pltfont{\ptcfont}       % (tables)|\\
+% \icom{pltSfont}\verb|\def\pltSfont{\ptcfont}      % (subtables)|
+% \end{quote}
+% après avoir chargé le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, ces commandes de fontes seront «~associées~» à~\com{ptcfont},
+% donc si vous modifiez \com{ptcfont} (par une commande \com{renewcommand} ou via \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{*}{...}|),
+% elles suivront la modification. Mais si vous modifiez l'une de ces commandes via
+% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{...}| (\texttt{subsection} est un exemple) ou \com{renewcommand},
+% l'association est rompue. Mais vous pourriez agir plus subtilement en disant quelque chose comme
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{parttoc}{subsection}{\ptcfont\itshape}|
+% \end{quote}
+% pour préserver l'association et modifier seulement quelques paramètres d'une commande de fonte minitoc.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% Pour les niveaux au-dessus de la sous-section (partie, chapitre et section), les fontes sont plus spécifiques en
+% général, mais vous pouvez, bien sûr, utiliser une définition telle que
+% \ucom{def}\com{ptcCfont}\verb|{|\com{ptcfont}\verb|}| pour faire une
+% association similaire. Vous pouvez même faire d'autres associations, comme ceci:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|% pour les hauts niveaux de sectionnement:|\\
+% \icom{def}\verb|    \def\highlevelsfont{\rmfamily\bfseries\normalsize\upshape}|\\
+% \verb|% pour les bas niveaux de sectionnement:|\\
+% \verb|    \def\lowlevelsfont{\rmfamily\mdseries\smallsize\upshape}|\\
+% \verb|% puis pour chaque niveau:|\\
+% \icom{ptcCfont}\verb|    \def\ptcCfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\
+% \icom{ptcSfont}\verb|    \def\ptcSfont{\highlevelsfont}|\\
+% \icom{ptcSSfont}\verb|    \def\ptcSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\
+% \icom{ptcSSSfont}\verb|    \def\ptcSSSfont{\lowlevelsfont}|\\
+% \icom{ptcPfont}\verb|    \def\ptcPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}|\\
+% \icom{ptcSPfont}\verb|    \def\ptcSPfont{\lowlevelsfont\itshape}|
+% \end{quote}
+% Puis vous pouvez redéfinir \verb|\highlevelsfont| ou \verb|\lowlevelsfont| pour agir sur plusieurs fontes en une
+% seule fois, mais vous devez utiliser \com{renewcommand}. Vous ne pouvez pas agir sur \verb|\highlevelsfont| ou
+% \verb|\lowlevelsfont| avec \com{mtcsetfont}.
+%
+% Notez que seules les fontes pour les parttocs ont été utilisées dans les exemples ci-dessus; mais, bien sûr, la
+% situation est la même pour les minitocs et les secttocs. \verb|\highlevelsfont| et \verb|\lowlevelsfont| sont des
+% noms de macros que vous pouvez choisir, ils ne font pas partie du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (35)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \KOMAScript{} classes}\label{faq.35}
+% If\imess{I0043} a \KOMAScript{} class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, compatible with \upack{minitoc} (\class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} or
+% \class{scrartcl}), is used, some class options may cause problems with  the \upack{minitoc} package, because these
+% options add chapter or section entries in the table of contents. See section~\vref{special.entries}. Of course,
+% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec les classes \KOMAScript}\label{faq.35}
+% Si\imess{I0043} une classe \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, compatible avec \upack{minitoc} (\class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} ou
+% \class{scrartcl}), est utilisée, certaines options de la classe peuvent poser des problèmes avec le paquetage
+% \upack{minitoc}, car elles ajoutent des entrées de chapitre ou de section dans la table des matières. Voir la
+% section~\vref{special.entries}. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (36)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \uclass{jura} class or the \upack{alphanum} package}\label{faq.36}\iclass{jura}\ipack{alphanum}
+% The \class{jura}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0025}} class loads the \pack{alphanum} package,
+% which redefines the sectionning structure in a
+% non-standard way, after the loading of the \class{report} class.
+% This class and this package are \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec la classe \uclass{jura} ou le paquetage \upack{alphanum}}%
+% \label{faq.36}\iclass{jura}\ipack{alphanum}
+% La classe \class{jura}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}\\\lmess{W0025}} charge le paquetage \pack{alphanum},
+% qui redéfinit la structure de sectionnement d'une
+% manière non-standard, après le chargement de la classe \class{report}.
+% Cette classe et ce paquetage sont \emph{incompatibles} avec \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (37)
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \usuffix{.mld} files and the \upack{babel} package}\label{faq.37}\ipack{babel}\isuffix{.mld}
+% If you are using the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}, you can automatize the loading of the
+% \suffix{.mld} file by adding some code in the preamble of your document, like this:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{AtBeginDocument}\verb|{%|\\
+% \icom{addto}\icom{captions}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\verb|  \addto\captions|\emph{language1}\verb|{\mtcselectlanguage{|\emph{language2}\verb|}}}|
+% \end{quote}
+% where \emph{language1} is the language name for \pack{babel} and \emph{language2} the language name for
+% \upack{minitoc}; there are often identical, but there are exceptions (when you use a locally customized \suffix{.mld}
+% file, for instance).
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les fichiers \usuffix{.mld} et le paquetage \upack{babel}}\label{faq.37}\ipack{babel}\isuffix{.mld}
+% Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}, vous pouvez automatiser le chargement du
+% fichier \suffix{.mld} en ajoutant du code dans le préambule de votre document, comme ceci:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{AtBeginDocument}\verb|{%|\\
+% \icom{addto}\icom{captions}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\verb|  \addto\captions|\emph{langue1}\verb|{\mtcselectlanguage{|\emph{langue2}\verb|}}}|
+% \end{quote}
+% où \emph{langue1} est le nom de langue pour \pack{babel} et \emph{langue2} le nom de langue pour \upack{minitoc};
+% ils sont souvent identiques, mais il y~a des exceptions (lorsque vous utilisez un fichier \suffix{.mld} adapté
+% localement, par exemple).
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (38)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \upack{fncychap} package}\label{faq.38}\ipack{fncychap}
+% If the \pack{fncychap} package~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086} (by \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren})
+% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
+% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course,
+% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{fncychap}}\label{faq.38}\ipack{fncychap}
+% Si le paquetage \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap}\imess{W0086} (de \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}) est utilisé,
+% il doit être chargé
+% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr,
+% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (39)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \upack{quotchap} package}\label{faq.39}\ipack{quotchap}
+% If the \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} (by \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld})
+% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
+% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course,
+% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{quotchap}}\label{faq.39}\ipack{quotchap}
+% Si le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} (de \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}) est utilisé,
+% il doit être chargé
+% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr,
+% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (40)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \upack{romannum} package}\label{faq.40}\ipack{romannum}
+% If the \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson})
+% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
+% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the numbering of
+% the sectionning commands. Of course,
+% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{romannum}}\label{faq.40}\ipack{romannum}
+% Si le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) est utilisé,
+% il doit être chargé
+% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit)
+% la numérotation des commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr,
+% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (41)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \upack{sfheaders} package}\label{faq.41}\ipack{sfheaders}
+% If the \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (by \name{Maurizio}{Loreti})
+% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
+% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the
+% sectionning commands. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{sfheaders}}\label{faq.41}\ipack{sfheaders}
+% Si le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (de \name{Maurizio}{Loreti}) est utilisé,
+% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit)
+% les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (42)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \upack{alnumsec} package}\label{faq.42}\ipack{alnumsec}
+% If the \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} (by \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster})
+% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
+% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the
+% numbering of the sectionning commands. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{alnumsec}}\label{faq.42}\ipack{alnumsec}
+% Si le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} (de \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}) est utilisé,
+% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit)
+% la numérotation des commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (43)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \upack{captcont} package}\label{faq.43}\ipack{captcont}
+% If the \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} (by \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran})
+% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
+% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the caption
+% commands. Of course, the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{captcont}}\label{faq.43}\ipack{captcont}
+% Si le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} (de \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}) est utilisé,
+% il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit)
+% les commandes pour les captions. Bien sûr, l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (44)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Vertical spaces (gaps) for parttocs, partlofs, and partlots titles}\label{faq.44}\index{gaps}
+% These vertical gaps were hard-coded like for the chapter
+% heads in the \class{book} and \class{report} document classes.
+% The values were 50pt and 40pt, but some users want
+% to adjust them for the titles of the part-level mini-tables.
+% Since version~\#45, these gaps are defined by \com{mtcgapbeforeheads}
+% and \com{mtcgapafterheads}, with these defaults values. These
+% commands apply globally to parttocs, partlofs and partlots.
+% They are \emph{commands}, \virage\emph{not} dimensions, so they must be
+% modified via \com{renewcommand} (but \emph{not} via \com{setlength}).
+% An example of use is given in the \exam{mtc-gap.tex} document file:\label{mtc-gap.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Espacements verticaux (\emph{gaps}) pour les titres des parttocs,
+% partlofs et partlots}\label{faq.44}\index{gaps}
+% Ces sauts verticaux (\emph{gaps}) étaient codés «~en dur~» comme pour
+% les têtes de chapitres dans les classes de document \class{book}
+% et \class{report}. Les valeurs étaient 50pt et 40pt, mais
+% certains utilisateurs désirent les ajuster pour les titres
+% des mini-tables au niveau partie.
+% Depuis la version~\#45, ces sauts sont définis par \com{mtcgapbeforeheads}
+% et \com{mtcgapafterheads}, avec ces valeurs par défaut.
+% Ces commandes s'appliquent globalement aux parttocs, partlofs et partlots.
+% Ce sont des \emph{commandes}, \virage\emph{pas} des dimensions,
+% donc elles doivent être modifiées via \com{renewcommand}
+% (mais \emph{pas} via \com{setlength}).
+% Un exemple d'utilisation est donné dans le fichier document \exam{mtc-gap.tex}:\label{mtc-gap.tex}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-gap>
+\documentclass[a4paper,oneside,12pt]{book}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-gap.tex}[2007/01/04]%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We use the \pack{vruler} package (by \name{Zhuhan}{Jiang}) to display a vertical ruler showing the position of the titles:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous utilisons le paquetage \pack{vruler} (de \name{Zhuhan}{Jiang}) pour placer une échelle verticale montrant la position
+% des titres:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\usepackage{txfonts,vruler} % vertical graduation to note positions (Zhuhan Jiang)
+\usepackage[english2,tight,listfiles]{minitoc}
+\begin{document}
+\setvruler[1cm][0][10][3][0][0pt][0pt][0pt][] % with vruler package
+\doparttoc \faketableofcontents
+\part{First part}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A normal parttoc, with the normal gaps before and after it.
+% \or\relax
+% Une parttoc normale, avec des sauts verticaux normaux avant et après elle.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\parttoc
+\chapter{First chapter of first part} \chapter{Second chapter of first part}
+\part{Second part}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We set large gaps. Note the new position of the parttoc.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous forçons de plus grands sauts. Notez la nouvelle position de la parttoc.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\mtcgapbeforeheads}{100pt}
+\renewcommand{\mtcgapafterheads}{80pt}
+\parttoc
+\chapter{First chapter of second part} \chapter{Second chapter of second part}
+\part{Third part}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We set small gaps. Note the new position of the parttoc.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous forçons de plus petits sauts. Notez la nouvelle position de la parttoc.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\mtcgapbeforeheads}{20pt}
+\renewcommand{\mtcgapafterheads}{10pt}
+\parttoc
+\chapter{First chapter of third part} \chapter{Second chapter of third part}
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-gap>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A (45)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Vertical spacing before the bottom rule of a minitable}\label{faq.45}
+% The little spacing between a minitable and its bottom rule is implemented as a vertical kern that should
+% be sufficient to allow the
+% descending parts of the letters of the last entry of the mini-table. The values should depend on
+% the line spacing and of the font size. They are defined as macros that you can adjust by redefining them via
+% \com{renewcommand}. The (empirical) default values are given in table~\vref{t+kernafters}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Espacement vertical avant le filet inférieur d'une minitable}\label{faq.45}
+% Le petit espacement entre une minitable et le filet qui est en-dessous d'elle est réalisé par un crênage
+% vertical qui devrait suffire pour les jambages des lettres de la dernière entrée de la
+% minitable. Les valeurs devraient dépendre de l'interlignage et de la taille de la fonte.
+% Elles sont définies comme des macros que vous pouvez ajuster en les redéfinissant via \com{renewcommand}.
+% La table~\vref{t+kernafters} donne les valeurs par défaut (empiriques).
+% \fi
+% \begin{table}[!htb]
+% \changeskips
+% \centering
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \caption{Kernings before minitable bottom rules}\label{t+kernafters}
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Default value}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{kernafterparttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
+% \com{kernafterpartlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
+% \com{kernafterpartlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{kernafterminitoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-.5\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
+% \com{kernafterminilof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\
+% \com{kernafterminilot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
+% \com{kernaftersectlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
+% \com{kernaftersectlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \or\relax
+% \caption{Crênage avant le filet inférieur des minitables}\label{t+kernafters}
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Valeur par défaut}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{kernafterparttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
+% \com{kernafterpartlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
+% \com{kernafterpartlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{kernafterminitoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-.5\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
+% \com{kernafterminilof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\
+% \com{kernafterminilot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern0.ex}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
+% \com{kernaftersectlof}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
+% \com{kernaftersectlot}&\texttt{\bs kern-1.\bs baselineskip\bs kern.5ex}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \fi
+% \end{table}
+%
+% ^^A (46)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Another interaction between the \upack{tocloft} and \upack{minitoc} packages}\label{faq.46}\ipack{tocloft}
+% \emph{I~encountered an interaction between \pack{tocloft} and \upack{minitoc}.
+% I want to force \upack{minitoc} to not display the page numbers, but because
+% of \pack{tocloft} it doesn't. Here is an example code:}
+% \else\relax
+% \section{Une autre interaction entre les paquetages \upack{tocloft} et \upack{minitoc}}\label{faq.46}\ipack{tocloft}
+% \emph{J'ai rencontré une interaction entre \pack{tocloft} et \upack{minitoc}.
+% Je veux forcer \upack{minitoc} à~ne pas afficher les numéros de pages,
+% mais, à~cause de \pack{tocloft}, il n'y arrive pas. Voici
+% un exemple de code:}
+% \fi\relax
+% \begin{quote}
+% \com{documentclass}\verb|[12pt,a4paper]{book}|\\
+% \com{usepackage}\verb|{tocloft}|\\
+% \com{usepackage}\verb|{minitoc}|\\
+% \ienv{document}\verb|\begin{document}|\\
+% \com{frontmatter}\\
+% \com{dominitoc}\com{tableofcontents}\\
+% \com{mainmatter}\\
+% \com{chapter}\verb|{Chapter}|\\
+% \verb|\section{Section A} \section{Section B}|\\
+% \verb|\chapter{Second Chapter}|\\
+% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{minitoc}{section}{\normalfont\small}|\\
+% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\verb|{minitoc}{off}|\\
+% \com{minitoc}\\
+% \verb|\section{Section A} \section{Section B}|\\
+% \verb|\end{document}|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \emph{If I comment the line loading the \pack{tocloft} package,
+% I~will get a minitoc without page numbers as I~wanted.}
+% \else\relax
+% \emph{Si je commente la ligne chargeant le paquetage \pack{tocloft},
+% j'obtiens bien une minitoc sans numéros de pages comme désiré.}
+% \fi\relax
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% When using together \pack{tocloft} and \upack{minitoc}, the \pack{tocloft} package must be
+% loaded first, and its commands take precedence to format the entries
+% in the TOC (and in minitocs). To suppress the page numbers, you should try
+% the \verb|\cftpagenumbersoff{|\emph{XXX}\verb|}| command (from \pack{tocloft}), which is described
+% in the \xfile{tocloft.pdf} documentation~\cite[pages~45-56]{tocloft}; \emph{XXX} is the level
+% of entry (\texttt{chapter}, \texttt{sec}, \texttt{subsec}, etc.). There are similar remarks about
+% font related commands.
+%
+% The \pack{tocloft} package is more specialized in that job than \upack{minitoc}, so if it is
+% loaded, \upack{minitoc} uses the \pack{tocloft} tools.
+% There is the corrected example (\exam{mtc-tlo.tex}\label{mtc-tlo.tex}):
+% \else\relax
+% Lors de l'utilisation simultanée de \pack{tocloft} et \upack{minitoc},
+% le paquetage \pack{tocloft} doit être chargé le premier, et ses
+% commandes prennent le pas pour mettre en forme les
+% entrées dans la table des matières (et les minitocs). Pour
+% supprimer les numéros de pages, vous devriez essayer la
+% commande \verb|\cftpagenumbersoff{|\emph{XXX}\verb|}| (de \pack{tocloft}), qui est décrite dans la documentation
+% \xfile{tocloft.pdf}~\cite[pages~45-56]{tocloft}; \emph{XXX}
+% est le niveau de l'entrée (\texttt{chapter}, \texttt{sec}, \texttt{subsec}, etc.).
+% Il y a des remarques similaires sur les commandes concernant les fontes.
+%
+% Le paquetage \pack{tocloft} est davantage spécialisé dans
+% ce travail que \upack{minitoc}, donc s'il est chargé, \upack{minitoc}
+% se sert des outils de \pack{tocloft}. Voici l'exemple
+% corrigé (\exam{mtc-tlo.tex}\label{mtc-tlo.tex}):
+% \fi\relax
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-tlo>
+\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{book}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-tlo.tex}[2007/06/13]%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must load \pack{tocloft} \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons charger \pack{tocloft} \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}:
+% \fi\relax
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\usepackage{tocloft}
+\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
+\begin{document}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the global font for the minitoc entries:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons la fonte globale pour les entrées des minitocs:
+% \fi\relax
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{*}{\normalfont\small}
+\frontmatter
+\dominitoc \tableofcontents
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftpagenumbersoff}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the section entries in the minitocs, we suppress the page numbers and change the font
+% by using commands from the \pack{tocloft} package:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les entrées de sections dans les minitocs, nous supprimons les numéros de pages et changeons la fonte en
+% utilisant des commandes venant du paquetage \pack{tocloft}:
+% \fi\relax
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\cftpagenumbersoff{sec}
+\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\normalfont\small}
+\mainmatter
+\chapter{First Chapter} \minitoc
+\section{Section A} \section{Section B}
+\chapter{Second Chapter} \minitoc
+\section{Section A} \section{Section B}
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-tlo>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A (47)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \upack{hangcaption} package}\label{faq.47}\ipack{hangcaption}
+% If the \pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} (by \name{David~M.}{Jones})
+% is used, it must be loaded \emph{before}
+% the \upack{minitoc} package, because it alters (redefines) the sectionning commands. Of course,
+% the \optd{hints} option detects this problem.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{hangcaption}}\label{faq.47}\ipack{hangcaption}
+% Si le paquetage \pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} (de \name{David~M.}{Jones}) est utilisé,
+% il doit être chargé
+% \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, car il altère (redéfinit) les commandes de sectionnement. Bien sûr,
+% l'option \optd{hints} détecte ce problème.
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A (48)
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with the \upack{flowfram} package}\label{faq.48}\ipack{flowfram}
+% The \pack{flowfram}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}} package~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}, which
+% has its own system of minitocs, is hence \emph{incompatible}
+% with \upack{minitoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec le paquetage \upack{flowfram}}%
+% \label{faq.48}\ipack{flowfram}
+% Le paquetage \SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}}\pack{flowfram}, qui a son propre
+% système de minitocs, est donc \emph{incompatible}
+% avec \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+%
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{Memento}\label{c+memento}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{Mémento}\label{c+memento}
+% \fi
+% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
+% \minilot
+% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\empty}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\empty}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[!hbtp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Package options}\label{t+OPT}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Options}&\textbf{Default}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \opt{shortext}&\texttt{*NO*}&Short extensions for auxiliary files.\\
+% \optd{loose}, \opt{tight}&\optd{loose}&Spacing of lines in mini-tables.\\
+% \optd{k-loose}, \opt{k-tight}&\optd{k-loose}&Spacing of lines in mini-tables (\KOMAScript{} classes).\\
+% \optd{dotted}, \opt{undotted}&\optd{dotted}&Presence of leaders (dotted lines).\\
+% \opt{insection}&\texttt{*NO*}&Keeps floats (figures and tables) from drifting
+% outside of their section. Useful if you use sectlofs/sectlots.\\
+% \opt{notoccite}&\texttt{*NO*}&Useful if you have \com{cite} commands
+% in sectionning titles and use an unsorted bibliographic style.\\
+% \optd{listfiles}, \opt{nolistfiles}&\optd{listfiles}&Lists the minitoc auxiliary files
+% into \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.\\
+% \optd{hints}, \opt{nohints}&\optd{hints}&Adds hints in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log}
+% file. Useful to detect some problems. Option \opt{nohints} is inadvisable.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Language options are listed in
+% table~\vref{t+languages}. Default: \loptd{english}.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[!hbtp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Options du paquetage}\label{t+OPT}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Options}&\textbf{Défaut}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \opt{shortext}&\texttt{*NON*}&Suffixes courts pour les fichiers auxiliaires.\\
+% \optd{loose}, \opt{tight}&\optd{loose}&Espacement des lignes dans les mini-tables.\\
+% \optd{k-loose}, \opt{k-tight}&\optd{k-loose}&Espacement des lignes dans les mini-tables (classes \KOMAScript).\\
+% \optd{dotted}, \opt{undotted}&\optd{dotted}&Présence de points de conduite.\\
+% \opt{insection}&\texttt{*NON*}&Empêche les éléments flottants (figures et tableaux) de dériver en dehors de
+% leur section. Utile si vous utilisez des sectlofs/sectlots.\\
+% \opt{notoccite}&\texttt{*NON*}&Utile si vous avez des commandes \com{cite} dans les titres de
+% sectionnements et utilisez un style de bibliographie sans tri.\\
+% \optd{listfiles}, \opt{nolistfiles}&\optd{listfiles}&Liste les fichiers auxiliaires de minitoc
+% dans \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.\\
+% \optd{hints}, \opt{nohints}&\optd{hints}&Ajoute des indications (\emph{hints}) dans le fichier
+% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}.
+% Utile pour détecter certains problèmes. L'option \opt{nohints} est déconseillée.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{3}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Les options de langue sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+languages}.
+% Défaut: \loptd{english}.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{General commands}\label{t+SUC}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{faketableofcontents}&Replaces \com{tableofcontents}
+% if you want mini-tables of contents but no main table of contents.\\
+% \com{fakelistoffigures}&Replaces \com{listoffigures}
+% if you want mini-lists of figures but no main list of figures.\\
+% \com{fakelistoftables}&Replaces \com{listoftables}
+% if you want mini-lists of tables but no main list of tables.\\
+% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{language}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+% &Loads \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} to select a language for mini-tables titles.\\
+% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{depth}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Changes the depth for some mini-tables.\\
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{offset}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Changes the offset for some mini-tables.\\
+% \com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+% &Modifies the features for a mini-table.\\
+% \com{mtcsetfont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{sectionning-level}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{font commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+% &Redefines a minitoc font command.\\
+% \com{mtcsetformat}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\texttt{dotinterval\BAR pagenumwidth\BAR tocrightmargin}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{value}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Changes the layout of some mini-tables.\\
+% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Activates/inhibits page numbers in some or all mini-tables.\\
+% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Activates/inhibits horizontal rules in some or all mini-tables.\\
+% \com{mtcsettitle}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{title string}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Changes the title for some mini-tables.\\
+% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{font commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Changes the font of the title for some mini-tables.\\
+% \com{mtcskip}&To add a vertical skip between the mini-tables.\\
+% \com{mtcskipamount}&Length of \com{mtcskip}. Default: \com{bigskipamount}.\\
+% \com{tightmtcfalse}&Loose mini-tables. Default.\\
+% \com{tightmtctrue}&Tight mini-tables.\\
+% \com{ktightmtcfalse}&Loose mini-tables. Default. (\KOMAScript{} classes).\\
+% \com{ktightmtctrue}&Tight mini-tables. (\KOMAScript{} classes).\\
+% \com{undottedmtcfalse}&Dotted lines in mini-tables (from entry to page number). Default.\\
+% \com{undottedmtctrue}&No dotted lines in mini-tables (from entry to page number).\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes générales}\label{t+SUC}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{faketableofcontents}&Remplace \com{tableofcontents}
+% si vous souhaitez des mini-tables des matières mais pas de table des matières principale.\\
+% \com{fakelistoffigures}&Remplace \com{listoffigures}
+% si vous souhaitez des mini-listes des figures mais pas de liste des figures principale.\\
+% \com{fakelistoftables}&Remplace \com{listoftables}
+% si vous souhaitez des mini-listes des tableaux mais pas de liste des tableaux principale.\\
+% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\texttt{\{}\emph{langue}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+% &Charge \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} pour sélectionner une langue pour les titres des mini-tables.\\
+% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Change la profondeur pour certaines mini-tables.\\
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{déplacement}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Change le déplacement pour certaines mini-tables.\\
+% \com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commandes}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+% &Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.\\
+% \com{mtcsetfont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{niveau-sectionnement}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{commandes de
+% fonte}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+% &Redéfinit une commande de fonte minitoc.\\
+% \com{mtcsetformat}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\texttt{dotinterval\BAR pagenumwidth\BAR tocrightmargin}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{valeur}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Change la mise en page de certaines mini-tables.\\
+% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Active/inhibe les numéros de pages dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\
+% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Active/inhibe les filets horizontaux dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\
+% \com{mtcsettitle}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{chaîne titre}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Change le titre pour certaines mini-tables.\\
+% \com{mtcsettitlefont}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{}\emph{commandes de fonte}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Change la fonte du titre pour certaines mini-tables.\\
+% \com{mtcskip}&Pour ajouter un saut vertical entre les mini-tables.\\
+% \com{mtcskipamount}&Longueur de \com{mtcskip}. Défaut: \com{bigskipamount}.\\
+% \com{tightmtcfalse}&Mini-tables avec lignes peu serrées. Défaut.\\
+% \com{tightmtctrue}&Mini-tables avec lignes serrées.\\
+% \com{ktightmtcfalse}&Mini-tables avec lignes peu serrées. Défaut. (Classes \KOMAScript).\\
+% \com{ktightmtctrue}&Mini-tables avec lignes serrées. (Classes \KOMAScript).\\
+% \com{undottedmtcfalse}&Points de conduite dans les mini-tables (de l'entrée jusqu'au numéro de page). Défaut.\\
+% \com{undottedmtctrue}&Pas de points conduite dans les mini-tables (de l'entrée jusqu'au numéro de page).\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Part level commands}\label{t+SUC-P-a}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{tableofcontents} if you use \com{parttoc}$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoffigures} if you use \texttt{partlof}$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoftables} if you use \com{partlot}$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{part} command for which a parttoc is needed$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{part} command for which a partlof is needed$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}%
+%       &After each \com{part} command for which a partlot is needed$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{depth}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Depth of the following parttocs. Analog to \dcnt{tocdepth}. Default:~2.\\
+%       &Has no action on partlofs and partlots.\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{or:}}}\\
+% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{depth}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Idem, but can also act on partlofs and partlots.\\
+% \com{ptcindent}&Left/right indentation of a partial table. Default: \texttt{24pt}.\\
+% \com{ptcoffset}&Horizontal offset for parttocs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\
+% \com{plfoffset}&Horizontal offset for partlofs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\
+% \com{pltoffset}&Horizontal offset for partlots. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{offset}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Idem, but can also act on partlofs and partlots.\\
+% \com{ptcfont}&Font command for parttoc.\\
+%       &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (article)\\
+%       &or: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (book, report).\\
+% \com{ptcCfont}&Font command for parttoc, chapter entries.\\
+%       &Default: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
+% \com{ptcSfont}&Font command for parttoc, section entries.\\
+%       &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\\
+%       &or: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\\
+% \com{ptcSSfont}&Font command for parttoc, subsection entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{ptcSSSfont}&Font command for parttoc, subsubsection entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{ptcPfont}&Font command for parttoc, paragraph entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{ptcSPfont}&Font command for parttoc, subparagraph entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{plffont}&Font for partlof. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{plfSfont}&Font for partlof (subfigures). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{pltfont}&Font for partlot. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{pltSfont}&Font for partlot (subtables). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{ptctitle}&Title of parttocs. Default: \texttt{Table of Contents}.\\
+% \com{plftitle}&Title of partlofs. Default: \texttt{List of Figures}.\\
+% \com{plttitle}&Title of partlots. Default: \texttt{List of Tables}.\\
+% \com{ptifont}&Font for partXXX titles.\\
+%       &Default: \texttt{\bs Large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\hfill\null\\
+%       &or: \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\hfill\null\\
+% \com{mtcgapbeforeheads}&Vertical gap before part-level mini-tables titles. Default: 50pt\\
+% \com{mtcgapafterheads}&Vertical gap after part-level mini-tables titles. Default: 40pt\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} is an optional argument to set the
+% position of the title; the setting is local for the \ucom{partXXX} commands, global for the \ucom{dopartXXX}
+% commands. The values of~\emph{x} are: \texttt{l}~for left (default), \texttt{c}~for centered,
+% \texttt{r}~for right, \texttt{n}~or \texttt{e}~for no title.}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: defaults like \com{ptcfont}.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes au niveau partie}\label{t+SUC-P-a}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{tableofcontents} si vous utilisez \com{parttoc}$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoffigures} si vous utilisez \com{partlof}$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoftables} si vous utilisez \com{partlot}$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{part} pour laquelle une parttoc est
+% nécessaire$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{part} pour laquelle une partlof est
+% nécessaire$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}%
+%       &Après chaque commande \com{part} pour laquelle une partlot est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{parttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{profondeur}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Profondeur des parttocs ultérieures. Analogue à~\dcnt{tocdepth}. Défaut:~2.\\
+%       &N'a aucune action sur les partlofs et partlots.\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{ou:}}}\\
+% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{profondeur}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les partlofs et partlots.\\
+% \com{ptcindent}&Indentation gauche et droite d'une table partielle. Défaut: \texttt{24pt}.\\
+% \com{ptcoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les parttocs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\
+% \com{plfoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les partlofs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\
+% \com{pltoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les partlots. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{parttoc{\BAR}partlof{\BAR}partlot\}\{\emph{déplacement}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les partlofs et partlots.\\
+% \com{ptcfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs.\\
+%       &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (article)\\
+%       &ou: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries} (book, report).\\
+% \com{ptcCfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées chapitres.\\
+%       &Défaut: \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
+% \com{ptcSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées sections.\\
+%       &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\\
+%       &ou: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\\
+% \com{ptcSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées sous-sections$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{ptcSSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées, entrées sous-sous-sections$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{ptcPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées paragraphes$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{ptcSPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les parttocs, entrées sous-paragraphes$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{plffont}&Fonte pour les partlofs. Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{plfSfont}&Fonte pour les partlofs (sous-figures). Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{pltfont}&Fonte pour les partlots. Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{pltSfont}&Fonte pour les partlots (sous-tables). Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{ptctitle}&Titre des parttocs. Défaut: \texttt{Table of Contents}.\\
+% \com{plftitle}&Titre des partlofs. Défaut: \texttt{List of Figures}.\\
+% \com{plttitle}&Titre des partlots. Défaut: \texttt{List of Tables}.\\
+% \com{ptifont}&Fonte pour les titres des partXXX.\\
+%       &Défaut: \texttt{\bs Large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (article)\hfill\null\\
+%       &ou: \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries} (book, report).\hfill\null\\
+% \com{mtcgapbeforeheads}&Saut vertical avant le titre des mini-tables au niveau partie. Défaut: 50pt.\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+% \com{mtcgapafterheads}&Saut vertical après le titre des mini-tables au niveau partie. Défaut: 40pt.\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} est un argument optionnel pour établir la
+% position du titre; le choix est local pour les commandes \ucom{partXXX}, global pour les commandes \ucom{dopartXXX}. Les valeurs de~\emph{x} sont: \texttt{l}~pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{c}~pour centré,
+% \texttt{r}~pour droite, \texttt{n}~ou \texttt{e}~pour pas de titre.}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: la valeur par défaut est comme \com{ptcfont}.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Chapter level commands}\label{t+SUC-C}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{tableofcontents} if you use \com{minitoc}$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoffigures} if you use \com{minilof}$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoftables} if you use \com{minilot}$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{chapter} command for which a minitoc is needed$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{chapter} command for which a minilof is needed$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}%
+%       &After each \com{chapter} command for which a minilot is needed$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{depth}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Depth of the following minitocs. Analog to \dcnt{tocdepth}. Default:~2. Has no action on minilofs and minilots.\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{or:}}}\\
+% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{depth}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Idem, but can also act on minilofs and minilots.\\
+% \com{mtcindent}&Left/right indentation of a mini-table. Default: \texttt{24pt}.\\
+% \com{mtcoffset}&Horizontal offset for minitocs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\
+% \com{mlfoffset}&Horizontal offset for minilofs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\
+% \com{mltoffset}&Horizontal offset for minilots. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{offset}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Idem, but can also act on minilofs and minilots.\\
+% \com{mtcfont}&Font command for minitoc.\\
+%       &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{mtcSfont}&Font command for minitoc, section entries.\\
+%       &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
+% \com{mtcSSfont}&Font command for minitoc, subsection entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{mtcSSSfont}&Font command for minitoc, subsubsection entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{mtcPfont}&Font command for minitoc, paragraph entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{mtcSPfont}&Font command for minitoc, subparagraph entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{mlffont}&Font for minilof. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{mlfSfont}&Font for minilof (subfigures). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{mltfont}&Font for minilot. Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{mltSfont}&Font for minilot (subtables). Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{mtctitle}&Title of minitocs. Default: \texttt{Contents}.\\
+% \com{mlftitle}&Title of minilofs. Default: \texttt{Figures}.\\
+% \com{mlttitle}&Title of minilots. Default: \texttt{Tables}.\\
+% \com{mtifont}&Font for miniXXX titles.\\
+%       &Default: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} is an optional argument to set the
+% position of the title; the setting is local for the \ucom{miniXXX} commands, global for the \ucom{dominiXXX} commands. The values of~\emph{x} are: \texttt{l}~for left (default), \texttt{c}~for centered,
+% \texttt{r}~for right, \texttt{n}~or \texttt{e}~for no title.}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: defaults like \com{mtcfont}.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes au niveau chapitre}\label{t+SUC-C}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{tableofcontents} si vous utilisez \com{minitoc}$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoffigures} si vous utilisez \com{minilof}$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoftables} si vous utilisez \com{minilot}$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{chapter} pour laquelle une minitoc est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{chapter} pour laquelle une minilof est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{chapter} pour laquelle une minilot est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{minitocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{profondeur}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Profondeur des minitocs ultérieures. Analogue à~\dcnt{tocdepth}. Défaut:~2.\\
+%       &N'a aucune action sur les minilofs et minilots.\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{ou:}}}\\
+% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{profondeur}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les minilofs et minilots.\\
+% \com{mtcindent}&Indentation gauche et droite d'une mini-table. Défaut: \texttt{24pt}.\\
+% \com{mtcoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les minitocs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\
+% \com{mlfoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les minilofs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\
+% \com{mltoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les minilots. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{minitoc{\BAR}minilof{\BAR}minilot\}\{\emph{déplacement}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les minilofs et minilots.\\
+% \com{mtcfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs.\\
+%       &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{mtcSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sections.\\
+%       &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
+% \com{mtcSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sous-sections$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{mtcSSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sous-sous-sections$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{mtcPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées paragraphes$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{mtcSPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minitocs, entrées sous-paragraphes$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{mlffont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilofs.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{mlfSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilofs (sous-figures).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{mltfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilots.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{mltSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les minilots (sous-tables).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{mtctitle}&Titre des minitocs. Défaut: \texttt{Contents}.\\
+% \com{mlftitle}&Titre des minilofs. Défaut: \texttt{Figures}.\\
+% \com{mlttitle}&Titre des minilots. Défaut: \texttt{Tables}.\\
+% \com{mtifont}&Fonte pour les titres des miniXXX.\\
+%       &Défaut: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} est un argument optionnel pour établir la
+% position du titre; le choix est local pour les commandes \ucom{miniXXX},
+% global pour les commandes \ucom{dominiXXX}.
+% Les valeurs de~\emph{x} sont: \texttt{l}~pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{c}~pour centré,
+% \texttt{r}~pour droite, \texttt{n}~ou \texttt{e}~pour pas de titre.}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: la valeur par défaut est comme \com{mtcfont}.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Section level commands}\label{t+SUC-S}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{tableofcontents} if you use \com{secttoc}$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoffigures} if you use \com{sectlof}$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Before \fkcom{listoftables} if you use \com{sectlot}$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{section} command for which a secttoc is needed$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&After each \com{section} command for which a sectlof is needed$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}%
+%       &After each \com{section} command for which a sectlot is needed$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{depth}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Depth of the following secttocs. Analog to \dcnt{tocdepth}. Default:~2. Has no action on sectlofs and sectlots.\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{or:}}}\\
+% \com{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{depth}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Idem, but can also act on sectlofs and sectlots.\\
+% \com{stcindent}&Left/right indentation of a mini-table. Default: \texttt{24pt}.\\
+% \com{stcoffset}&Horizontal offset for secttocs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\
+% \com{slfoffset}&Horizontal offset for sectlofs. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\
+% \com{sltoffset}&Horizontal offset for sectlots. Command. Default: \texttt{0pt}.\\
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{offset}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Idem, but can also act on sectlofs and sectlots.\\
+% \com{stcfont}&Font command for secttoc.\\
+%       &Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{stcSSfont}&Font command for secttoc, subsection entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{stcSSSfont}&Font command for secttoc, subsubsection entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{stcPfont}&Font command for secttoc, paragraph entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{mtcSPfont}&Font command for secttoc, subparagraph entries$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{slffont}&Font for sectlof.\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{slfSfont}&Font for sectlof (subfigures).\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{sltfont}&Font for sectlot.\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{sltSfont}&Font for sectlot (subtables).\\&Default: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{stctitle}&Title of secttocs. Default: \texttt{Contents}.\\
+% \com{slftitle}&Title of sectlofs. Default: \texttt{Figures}.\\
+% \com{slttitle}&Title of sectlots. Default: \texttt{Tables}.\\
+% \com{stifont}&Font for sectXXX titles.\\
+%       &Default: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} is an optional argument to set the
+% position of the title; the setting is local for the \ucom{sectXXX} commands, global for the \ucom{dosectXXX} commands. The values of~\emph{x} are: \texttt{l}~for left (default), \texttt{c}~for centered,
+% \texttt{r}~for right, \texttt{n}~or \texttt{e}~for no title.}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: defaults like \com{stcfont}.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes au niveau section}\label{t+SUC-S}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{tableofcontents} si vous utilisez \com{secttoc}$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoffigures} si vous utilisez \com{sectlof}$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Avant \fkcom{listoftables} si vous utilisez \com{sectlot}$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{section} pour laquelle une secttoc est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{section} pour laquelle une sectlof est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]}&Après chaque commande \com{section} pour laquelle une sectlot est nécessaire$^{*}$.\\
+% \com{setcounter}\texttt{\{\dcnt{secttocdepth}\}\{}\emph{\texttt{profondeur}}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Profondeur des secttocs ultérieures. Analogue à~\dcnt{tocdepth}. Défaut:~2.\\
+%       &N'a aucune action sur les sectlofs et sectlots.\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l}{\emph{\texttt{ou:}}}\\
+% \ucom{mtcsetdepth}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{profondeur}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les sectlofs et sectlots.\\
+% \com{stcindent}&Indentation gauche et droite d'une mini-table. Défaut: \texttt{24pt}.\\
+% \com{stcoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les secttocs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\
+% \com{slfoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les sectlofs. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\
+% \com{sltoffset}&Correction horizontale pour les sectlots. Commande. Défaut: \texttt{0pt}.\\
+% \com{mtcsetoffset}\texttt{\{secttoc{\BAR}sectlof{\BAR}sectlot\}\{\emph{déplacement}\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}\\
+%       &Idem, mais peut aussi agir sur les sectlofs et sectlots.\\
+% \com{stcfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs.\\
+%       &Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{stcSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées sous-sections$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{stcSSSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées sous-sous-sections$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{stcPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées paragraphes$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{mtcSPfont}&Commande de fonte pour les secttocs, entrées sous-paragraphes$^{**}$.\\
+% \com{slffont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlofs.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{slfSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlofs (sous-figures).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{sltfont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlots.\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{sltSfont}&Commande de fonte pour les sectlots (sous-tables).\\&Défaut: \texttt{\bs small\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs mdseries}.\\
+% \com{stctitle}&Titre des secttocs. Défaut: \texttt{Contents}.\\
+% \com{slftitle}&Titre des sectlofs. Défaut: \texttt{Figures}.\\
+% \com{slttitle}&Titre des sectlots. Défaut: \texttt{Tables}.\\
+% \com{stifont}&Fonte pour les titres des sectXXX.\\
+%       &Défaut: \texttt{\bs large\bs rmfamily\bs upshape\bs bfseries}.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$: \texttt{[}\emph{x}\texttt{]} est un argument optionnel pour établir la
+% position du titre; le choix est local pour les commandes \ucom{sectXXX}, global pour les commandes \ucom{dosectXXX}. Les valeurs de~\emph{x} sont: \texttt{l}~pour gauche (défaut), \texttt{c}~pour centré,
+% \texttt{r}~pour droite, \texttt{n}~ou \texttt{e}~pour pas de titre.}\\
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{${**}$: la valeur par défaut est comme \com{stcfont}.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commands for horizontal rules}\label{t+SUC-rules}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \ncom{ptcrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in parttocs.\\
+% \ncom{mtcrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in minitocs.\\
+% \ncom{stcrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in secttocs.\\
+% \ncom{plfrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in partlofs.\\
+% \ncom{mlfrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in minilofs.\\
+% \ncom{slfrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in sectlofs.\\
+% \ncom{pltrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in partlots.\\
+% \ncom{mltrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in minilots.\\
+% \ncom{sltrule}&Activates or inhibits rules in sectlots.\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Activates/inhibits horizontal rules in some or all mini-tables.\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{kernafterparttoc}&Vertical kerning between a parttoc and its bottom rule.\\
+% \com{kernafterpartlof}&Vertical kerning between a partlof and its bottom rule.\\
+% \com{kernafterpartlot}&Vertical kerning between a partlot and its bottom rule.\\
+% \com{kernafterminitoc}&Vertical kerning between a minitoc and its bottom rule.\\
+% \com{kernafterminilof}&Vertical kerning between a minilof and its bottom rule.\\
+% \com{kernafterminilot}&Vertical kerning between a minilot and its bottom rule.\\
+% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&Vertical kerning between a secttoc and its bottom rule.\\
+% \com{kernaftersectlof}&Vertical kerning between a sectlof and its bottom rule.\\
+% \com{kernaftersectlot}&Vertical kerning between a sectlot and its bottom rule.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{By default, parttocs have no rules; minitocs and secttocs have rules. In
+% articles, parttocs have rules.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes pour les filets horizontaux}\label{t+SUC-rules}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \ncom{ptcrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les parttocs.\\
+% \ncom{mtcrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les minitocs.\\
+% \ncom{stcrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les secttocs.\\
+% \ncom{plfrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les partlofs.\\
+% \ncom{mlfrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les minilofs.\\
+% \ncom{slfrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les sectlofs.\\
+% \ncom{pltrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les partlots.\\
+% \ncom{mltrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les minilots.\\
+% \ncom{sltrule}&Active ou inhibe les filets dans les sectlots.\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{mtcsetrules}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Active/inhibe les filets horizontaux dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{kernafterparttoc}&Crênage vertical entre une parttoc et son filet inférieur.\\
+% \com{kernafterpartlof}&Crênage vertical entre une partlof et son filet inférieur.\\
+% \com{kernafterpartlot}&Crênage vertical entre une partlot et son filet inférieur.\\
+% \com{kernafterminitoc}&Crênage vertical entre une minitoc et son filet inférieur.\\
+% \com{kernafterminilof}&Crênage vertical entre une minilof et son filet inférieur.\\
+% \com{kernafterminilot}&Crênage vertical entre une minilot et son filet inférieur.\\
+% \com{kernaftersecttoc}&Crênage vertical entre une secttoc et son filet inférieur.\\
+% \com{kernaftersectlof}&Crênage vertical entre une sectlof et son filet inférieur.\\
+% \com{kernaftersectlot}&Crênage vertical entre une sectlot et son filet inférieur.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Par défaut, les parttocs n'ont pas de filets; les minitocs et secttocs ont
+% des filets. Dans les articles, les parttocs ont des filets.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commands for page numbers}\label{t+SUC-pn}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \ncom{ptcpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in parttocs.\\
+% \ncom{plfpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in partlofs.\\
+% \ncom{pltpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in partlots.\\
+% \ncom{mtcpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in minitocs.\\
+% \ncom{mlfpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in minilofs.\\
+% \ncom{mltpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in minilots.\\
+% \ncom{stcpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in secttocs.\\
+% \ncom{slfpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in sectlofs.\\
+% \ncom{sltpagenumbers}&Activates or inhibits page numbers in sectlots.\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Activates/inhibits page numbers in some or all mini-tables.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{By default, the page numbers are present.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes pour les numéros de pages}\label{t+SUC-pn}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \ncom{ptcpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les parttocs.\\
+% \ncom{plfpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les partlofs.\\
+% \ncom{pltpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les partlots.\\
+% \ncom{mtcpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les minitocs.\\
+% \ncom{mlfpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les minilofs.\\
+% \ncom{mltpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les minilots.\\
+% \ncom{stcpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les secttocs.\\
+% \ncom{slfpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les sectlofs.\\
+% \ncom{sltpagenumbers}&Active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les sectlots.\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\BAR*\}\{on{\BAR}off\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Active/inhibe les numéros de pages dans certaines mini-tables ou toutes.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{Par défaut, les numéros de pages sont présents.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commands for mini-tables features}\label{t+SUC-P-b}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}llZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Default}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{beforeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before a parttoc.\\
+% \com{beforepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before a partlof.\\
+% \com{beforepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before a partlot.\\
+% \com{afterparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after a parttoc.\\
+% \com{afterpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after a partlof.\\
+% \com{afterpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after a partlot.\\
+% \com{openparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a parttoc file.\\
+% \com{openpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a partlof file.\\
+% \com{openpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a partlot file.\\
+% \com{closeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a parttoc file.\\
+% \com{closepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a partlof file.\\
+% \com{closepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a partlot file.\\
+% \com{thispageparttocstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Page style for a parttoc.\\
+% \com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Page style for a partlof.\\
+% \com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Page style for a partlot.\\
+% \com{beforeminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action before a minitoc.\\
+% \com{beforeminilof}&\com{empty}&Action before a minilof.\\
+% \com{beforeminilot}&\com{empty}&Action before a minilot.\\
+% \com{afterminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action after a minitoc.\\
+% \com{afterminilof}&\com{empty}&Action after a minilof.\\
+% \com{afterminilot}&\com{empty}&Action after a minilot.\\
+% \com{openminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a minitoc file.\\
+% \com{openminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a minilof file.\\
+% \com{openminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a minilot file.\\
+% \com{closeminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a minitoc file.\\
+% \com{closeminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a minilof file.\\
+% \com{closeminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a minilot file.\\
+% \com{thispageminitocstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a minitoc.\\
+% \com{thispageminilofstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a minilof.\\
+% \com{thispageminilotstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a minilot.\\
+% \com{beforesecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action before a secttoc.\\
+% \com{beforesectlof}&\com{empty}&Action before a sectlof.\\
+% \com{beforesectlot}&\com{empty}&Action before a sectlot.\\
+% \com{aftersecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action after a secttoc.\\
+% \com{aftersectlof}&\com{empty}&Action after a sectlof.\\
+% \com{aftersectlot}&\com{empty}&Action after a sectlot.\\
+% \com{opensecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a secttoc file.\\
+% \com{opensectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a sectlof file.\\
+% \com{opensectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action before inserting a sectlot file.\\
+% \com{closesecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a secttoc file.\\
+% \com{closesectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a sectlof file.\\
+% \com{closesectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action after inserting a sectlot file.\\
+% \com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a secttoc.\\
+% \com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a sectlof.\\
+% \com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\com{empty}&Page style for a sectlot.\\
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{1}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commands}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}}&&\\
+% &Modifies the features for a mini-table.\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes pour les dispositifs des mini-tables}\label{t+SUC-P-b}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \null\hspace*{-.35em}\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth+.35em}{@{}llZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Défaut}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{beforeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant une parttoc.\\
+% \com{beforepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant une partlof.\\
+% \com{beforepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant une partlot.\\
+% \com{afterparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après une parttoc.\\
+% \com{afterpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après une partlof.\\
+% \com{afterpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après une partlot.\\
+% \com{openparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier parttoc.\\
+% \com{openpartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier partlof.\\
+% \com{openpartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier partlot.\\
+% \com{closeparttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier parttoc.\\
+% \com{closepartlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier partlof.\\
+% \com{closepartlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier partlot.\\
+% \com{thispageparttocstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Style de page pour une parttoc.\\
+% \com{thispagepartlofstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Style de page pour une partlof.\\
+% \com{thispagepartlotstyle}&\com{thispagestyle}\texttt{\{empty\}}&Style de page pour une partlot.\\
+% \com{beforeminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action avant une minitoc.\\
+% \com{beforeminilof}&\com{empty}&Action avant une minilof.\\
+% \com{beforeminilot}&\com{empty}&Action avant une minilot.\\
+% \com{afterminitoc}&\com{empty}&Action après une minitoc.\\
+% \com{afterminilof}&\com{empty}&Action après une minilof.\\
+% \com{afterminilot}&\com{empty}&Action après une minilot.\\
+% \com{openminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier minitoc.\\
+% \com{openminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier minilof.\\
+% \com{openminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier minilot.\\
+% \com{closeminitoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier minitoc.\\
+% \com{closeminilof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier minilof.\\
+% \com{closeminilot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier minilot.\\
+% \com{thispageminitocstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une minitoc.\\
+% \com{thispageminilofstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une minilof.\\
+% \com{thispageminilotstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une minilot.\\
+% \com{beforesecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action avant une secttoc.\\
+% \com{beforesectlof}&\com{empty}&Action avant une sectlof.\\
+% \com{beforesectlot}&\com{empty}&Action avant une sectlot.\\
+% \com{aftersecttoc}&\com{empty}&Action après une secttoc.\\
+% \com{aftersectlof}&\com{empty}&Action après une sectlof.\\
+% \com{aftersectlot}&\com{empty}&Action après une sectlot.\\
+% \com{opensecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier secttoc.\\
+% \com{opensectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier sectlof.\\
+% \com{opensectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action avant insertion d'un fichier sectlot.\\
+% \com{closesecttoc}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier secttoc.\\
+% \com{closesectlof}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier sectlof.\\
+% \com{closesectlot}&\com{cleardoublepage}&Action après insertion d'un fichier sectlot.\\
+% \com{thispagesecttocstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une secttoc.\\
+% \com{thispagesectlofstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une sectlof.\\
+% \com{thispagesectlotstyle}&\com{empty}&Style de page pour une sectlot.\\
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{1}{@{}l@{}}{\com{mtcsetfeature}\texttt{\{}\emph{mini-table}\texttt{\}\{\feat{before}{\BAR}\feat{after}{\BAR}\feat{open}{\BAR}\feat{close}{\BAR}\feat{pagestyle}\}\{}\emph{commandes}\texttt{\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}}&&\\
+% &Modifie les dispositifs pour une mini-table.\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Preparation and insertion commands}\label{t+SUC-PI}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1.1}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Type}&\textbf{Phase}&\multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Level}}\\
+% \cmidrule(l){3-5}
+%              &              &\textbf{part}&\textbf{chapter}&\textbf{section}\\
+% \midrule
+% table of contents&preparation&\com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+%         &insertion  &\com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+% \midrule
+% list of figures &preparation&\com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+%         &insertion  &\com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+% \midrule
+% list of tables  &preparation&\com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+%         &insertion  &\com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+% \midrule
+% all     &preparation&\multicolumn{3}{c@{}}{\null\mydotfill{.5ex}\com{mtcprepare}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\mydotfill{.5ex}\null}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{5}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Each of these commands accepts one optional argument~\emph{p},
+% which specifies the position of the
+% title of the mini-table. This argument~\emph{p} has a global effect for the preparation commands, but local for the
+% insertion commands. It is a letter: \texttt{[l]}~for left aligned (default), \texttt{[c]}~for centered,
+% \texttt{[r]}~for right aligned, \texttt{[e]}~or \texttt{[n]}~for empty (no title).}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes de préparation et d'insertion}\label{t+SUC-PI}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1.1}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}Z{.975}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Type}&\textbf{Phase}&\multicolumn{3}{@{}c@{}}{\textbf{Niveau}}\\
+% \cmidrule(l){3-5}
+%              &              &\textbf{partie}&\textbf{chapitre}&\textbf{section}\\
+% \midrule
+% table des matières&préparation&\com{doparttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosecttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+%         &insertion  &\com{parttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minitoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{secttoc}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+% \midrule
+% liste des figures &préparation&\com{dopartlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+%         &insertion  &\com{partlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlof}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+% \midrule
+% liste des tableaux  &préparation&\com{dopartlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dominilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{dosectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+%         &insertion  &\com{partlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{minilot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}&\com{sectlot}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\\
+% \midrule
+% tous     &préparation&\multicolumn{3}{c@{}}{\null\mydotfill{.5ex}\com{mtcprepare}\texttt{[}\emph{p}\texttt{]}\mydotfill{.5ex}\null}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{5}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Chacune de ces commandes accepte un argument optionnel~\emph{p},
+% qui spécifie la position du titre de la mini-table. Cet argument~\emph{p} a un effet global dans les commandes de
+% préparation, mais local dans les commandes d'insertion. C'est une lettre: \texttt{[l]}~pour aligné à~gauche
+% (défaut),
+% \texttt{[c]}~pour centré, \texttt{[r]}~pour aligné à~droite, \texttt{[e]}~ou \texttt{[n]}~pour vide (pas de titre).}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Adjustment commands}\label{t+SUC-A}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{adjustptc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Adjusts (increments) the parttoc counter \cnt{ptc} by~\emph{n}.\\
+% \com{adjustmtc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Adjusts (increments) the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc} by~\emph{n}.\\
+% \com{adjuststc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Adjusts (increments) the secttoc counter \cnt{stc} by~\emph{n}.\\
+% \com{decrementptc}&Adjusts (decrements by~1) the parttoc counter \cnt{ptc}.\\
+% \com{decrementmtc}&Adjusts (decrements by~1) the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc}.\\
+% \com{decrementstc}&Adjusts (decrements by~1) the secttoc counter \cnt{stc}.\\
+% \com{incrementptc}&Adjusts (increments by~1) the parttoc counter \cnt{ptc}.\\
+% \com{incrementmtc}&Adjusts (increments by~1) the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc}.\\
+% \com{incrementstc}&Adjusts (increments by~1) the secttoc counter \cnt{stc}.\\
+% \com{mtcaddpart}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}&Adds the title of a \com{part*} in the ToC.\\
+% \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}&Adds the title of a \com{chapter*} in the ToC.\\
+% \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{title}\texttt{]}&Adds the title of a \com{section*} in the ToC.\\
+% \com{mtcfixglossary}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Adjusts the entry for the glossary in the ToC.\\
+% \com{mtcfixindex}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Adjusts the entry for the index in the ToC.\\
+% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Adjusts the entry for the nomenclature in the ToC.\\
+% \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
+% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}Environment to hide entries in the main ToC.\\
+% \ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
+% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}Environment to hide entries in the main list of figures.\\
+% \com{mtchideinmainlof}\texttt{[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
+% \com{endmtchideinmainlof}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Pair of commands$^*$ to hide entries in the main list of figures.\\
+% \ienv{mtchideinmainlot}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
+% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}Environment to hide entries in the main list of tables.\\
+% \com{mtchideinmainlot}\texttt{[}\emph{depth}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
+% \com{endmtchideinmainlot}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Pair of commands$^*$ to hide entries in the main list of tables.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{l}{$*$: recommended form.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes d'ajustement}\label{t+SUC-A}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{adjustptc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Ajuste (incrémente) le compteur de parttocs \cnt{ptc} de~\emph{n}.\\
+% \com{adjustmtc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Ajuste (incrémente) le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc} de~\emph{n}.\\
+% \com{adjuststc}\texttt{[}\emph{n}\texttt{]}&Ajuste (incrémente) le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc} de~\emph{n}.\\
+% \com{decrementptc}&Ajuste (décrémente de~1) le compteur de parttocs \cnt{ptc}.\\
+% \com{decrementmtc}&Ajuste (décrémente de~1) le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc}.\\
+% \com{decrementstc}&Ajuste (décrémente de~1) le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc}.\\
+% \com{incrementptc}&Ajuste (incrémente de~1) le compteur de parttocs \cnt{ptc}.\\
+% \com{incrementmtc}&Ajuste (incrémente de~1) le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc}.\\
+% \com{incrementstc}&Ajuste (incrémente de~1) le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc}.\\
+% \com{mtcaddpart}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]}&Ajoute le titre d'une \com{part*} dans la TdM.\\
+% \com{mtcaddchapter}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]}&Ajoute le titre d'une \com{chapter*} dans la TdM.\\
+% \com{mtcaddsection}\texttt{[}\emph{titre}\texttt{]}&Ajoute le titre d'une \com{section*} dans la TdM.\\
+% \com{mtcfixglossary}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Ajuste l'entrée pour le glossaire dans la TdM.\\
+% \com{mtcfixindex}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Ajoute l'entrée pour l'index dans la TdM.\\
+% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\texttt{[chapter{\BAR}section{\BAR}part]}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Ajoute l'entrée pour la nomenclature dans la TdM.\\
+% \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
+% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmaintoc\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}Environnement pour cacher des entrées dans la TdM principale.\\
+% \ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
+% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlof\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}Environnement pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des figures principale.\\
+% \com{mtchideinmainlof}\texttt{[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
+% \com{endmtchideinmainlof}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Paire de commandes\,$^*$ pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des figures principale.\\
+% \ienv{mtchideinmainlot}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
+% \ucom{end}\texttt{\{mtchideinmainlot\}}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}Environnement pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des tableaux principale.\\
+% \com{mtchideinmainlot}\texttt{[}\emph{profondeur}\texttt{]} .{}.{}.
+% \com{endmtchideinmainlot}\hspace*{-\textwidth}&\\
+%       &Paire de commandes\,$^*$ pour cacher des entrées dans la liste des tableaux principale.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{l}{$*$: forme recommandée.}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tpb]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Classes and packages needing some precautions with \upack{minitoc}}\label{t+packs}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup\mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}c@{}clZ{1.5}Z{.7}Z{.8}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% &\textbf{P/C}&\textbf{Names}&\textbf{Author(s)}&\textbf{Page(s)}&\textbf{Reference(s)}\\
+% \midrule
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{abstract}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.abstract}&\cite{abstract}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{alnumsec}&\namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}&\pageref{h.alnumsec}&\cite{alnumsec}\\
+% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{alphanum}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\
+% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsart}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\
+% &\textbf{C}&\class{amsbook}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\
+% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsproc}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{appendix}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+appendix}&\cite{appendix}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{captcont}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.captcont}&\cite{captcont}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption}&\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption2}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption2}&\cite{caption2}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{ccaption}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.ccaption}&\cite{ccaption}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{float}&\name{Anselm}{Lingnau}&\pageref{h.float}&\cite{float}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{floatrow}&\name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}&\pageref{h.floatrow}&\cite{floatrow}\\
+% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{flowfram}&\name{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot}&\pageref{faq.48}&\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{fncychap}&\name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}&\pageref{faq.38}&\cite{fncychap}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hangcaption}&\name{David~M.}{Jones}&\pageref{faq.47}&\cite{hangcaption}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hyperref}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} and \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}&\pageref{faq.17}&\cite{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hyperref-o,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf}\\
+% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{jura}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{mcaption}&\name{Stephan}{Hennig}&\pageref{h.mcaption}&\cite{mcaption}\\
+% &\textbf{C}&\class{memoir}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+memoir}&\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{notoccite}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{ss+notoccite}&\cite{notoccite}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{placeins}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{rem+FB}&\cite{placeins}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{quotchap}&\name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}&\pageref{h.quotchap}&\cite{quotchap}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{romannum}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.romannum}&\cite{romannum}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{rotfloat}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} and \name{Leonor}{Barroca}&\pageref{h.rotfloat}&\cite{rotfloat}\\
+% &\textbf{C}&\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}\class{scrartcl},\\\class{scrbook} and\\\class{scrreprt}\end{tabular}&\name{Frank}{Neukam}, \name{Markus}{Kohm}, \name{Axel}{Kielhorn}, and \name{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski}&\pageref{faq.35}&\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sectsty}&\name{Rowland}{McDonnell}&\pageref{faq.28}&\cite{sectsty}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sfheaders}&\name{Maurizio}{Loreti}&\pageref{faq.41}&\cite{sfheaders}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfig}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfig}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfigure}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfigure}\\
+% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titlesec}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\
+% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titletoc}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocbibind}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{special.entries}&\cite{tocbibind}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocloft}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+tocloft}, \pageref{faq.46}&\cite{tocloft}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{trivfloat}&\name{Joseph~A.}{Wright}&\pageref{h.trivfloat}&\cite{trivfloat}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{varsects}&\namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}&\pageref{h.varsects}&\cite{varsects}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$:~\emph{Incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}.\quad\textbf{C}:~\textbf{C}lass.\quad\textbf{P}:~\textbf{P}ackage.}\\
+% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Any class not defining the main standard sectionning commands is
+% \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}.}\\
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[tpb]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Classes et paquetages nécessitant quelques précautions avec \upack{minitoc}}\label{t+packs}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup\mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}c@{}clZ{1.5}Z{.7}Z{.8}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% &\textbf{P/C}&\textbf{Noms}&\textbf{Auteur(s)}&\textbf{Page(s)}&\textbf{Référence(s)}\\
+% \midrule
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{abstract}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.abstract}&\cite{abstract}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{alnumsec}&\namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}&\pageref{h.alnumsec}&\cite{alnumsec}\\
+% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{alphanum}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\
+% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsart}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\
+% &\textbf{C}&\class{amsbook}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\
+% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{amsproc}&\AmS&\pageref{s+AMS}&\cite{amslatex}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{appendix}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+appendix}&\cite{appendix}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{captcont}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.captcont}&\cite{captcont}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption}&\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{caption2}&\name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}&\pageref{h.caption2}&\cite{caption2}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{ccaption}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.ccaption}&\cite{ccaption}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{float}&\name{Anselm}{Lingnau}&\pageref{h.float}&\cite{float}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{floatrow}&\name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}&\pageref{h.floatrow}&\cite{floatrow}\\
+% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{flowfram}&\name{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot}&\pageref{faq.48}&\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{fncychap}&\name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}&\pageref{faq.38}&\cite{fncychap}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hangcaption}&\name{David~M.}{Jones}&\pageref{faq.47}&\cite{hangcaption}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{hyperref}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} et \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}&\pageref{faq.17}&\cite{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hyperref-o,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf}\\
+% $*$&\textbf{C}&\class{jura}&\name{Felix}{Braun}&\pageref{faq.36}&\cite{jura}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{mcaption}&\name{Stephan}{Hennig}&\pageref{h.mcaption}&\cite{mcaption}\\
+% &\textbf{C}&\class{memoir}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+memoir}&\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{notoccite}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{ss+notoccite}&\cite{notoccite}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{placeins}&\name{Donald}{Arseneau}&\pageref{rem+FB}&\cite{placeins}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{quotchap}&\name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}&\pageref{h.quotchap}&\cite{quotchap}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{romannum}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{h.romannum}&\cite{romannum}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{rotfloat}&\name{Sebastian}{Rahtz} and \name{Leonor}{Barroca}&\pageref{h.rotfloat}&\cite{rotfloat}\\
+% &\textbf{C}&\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}l@{}}\class{scrartcl},\\\class{scrbook} et\\\class{scrreprt}\end{tabular}&\name{Frank}{Neukam}, \name{Markus}{Kohm}, \name{Axel}{Kielhorn} et \name{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski}&\pageref{faq.35}&\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sectsty}&\name{Rowland}{McDonnell}&\pageref{faq.28}&\cite{sectsty}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{sfheaders}&\name{Maurizio}{Loreti}&\pageref{faq.41}&\cite{sfheaders}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfig}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfig}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{subfigure}&\name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}&\pageref{h.subfig}&\cite{subfigure}\\
+% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titlesec}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\
+% $*$&\textbf{P}&\pack{titletoc}&\name{Javier}{Bezos}&\pageref{fn+titlesec}&\cite{titletoc}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocbibind}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{special.entries}&\cite{tocbibind}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{tocloft}&\name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}&\pageref{faq+tocloft}, \pageref{faq.46}&\cite{tocloft}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{trivfloat}&\name{Joseph~A.}{Wright}&\pageref{h.trivfloat}&\cite{trivfloat}\\
+% &\textbf{P}&\pack{varsects}&\namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}&\pageref{h.varsects}&\cite{varsects}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$*$:~\emph{Incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}.\quad\textbf{C}:~\textbf{C}lasse.\quad\textbf{P}:~\textbf{P}aquetage.}\\
+% \multicolumn{6}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{Toute classe ne définissant pas les principales commandes de sectionnement standard
+% est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}.}\\
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[tbph]
+% \capstart
+% \caption{Checking if inside a minitable}\label{t+ifinside}
+% \medskip
+% \centering
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Level}&\textbf{Flag}&\textbf{for tocs,}&\textbf{for lofs,}&\textbf{for lots.}\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{Part}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{Chapter}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{table}
+%
+% \begin{table}[tbph]
+% \capstart
+% \caption{Commands for polymorphic entries}\label{t+polym}\index{polymorphic entry}
+% \medskip
+% \centering
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{From \textsl{OA} of}:&\textbf{Command}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\
+% \midrule
+% sect. command&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\
+% figure caption&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\
+% table caption&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{table}
+% \else\relax
+% \begin{table}[tbph]
+% \capstart
+% \caption{Tester si à~l'intérieur d'une minitable}\label{t+ifinside}
+% \medskip
+% \centering
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}lllll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Niveau}&\textbf{Indicateur}&\textbf{pour TdMs,}&\textbf{pour~LdFs,}&\textbf{pour~LdTs.}\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{Partie}&&\com{ifinparttoc}&\com{ifinpartlof}&\com{ifinpartlot}\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{Chapitre}&&\com{ifinminitoc}&\com{ifinminilof}&\com{ifinminilot}\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{Section}&&\com{ifinsecttoc}&\com{ifinsectlof}&\com{ifinsectlot}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{table}
+%
+% \begin{table}[tbph]
+% \capstart
+% \caption{Commandes pour des entrées polymorphes}\label{t+polym}\index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe}
+% \medskip
+% \centering
+% \begin{tabular}{@{}llllll@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Depuis l'\textsl{AO} de}:&\textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Arg.~1}&\textbf{Arg.~2}&\textbf{Arg.~3}&\textbf{Arg.~4}\\
+% \midrule
+% commande sect.&\com{mtcpolymtoc}&\{$\rightarrow$parttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$minitoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$secttoc\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~toc\}\\
+% caption figure&\com{mtcpolymlof}&\{$\rightarrow$partlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilof\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlof\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lof\}\\
+% caption table&\com{mtcpolymlot}&\{$\rightarrow$partlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$minilot\}&\{$\rightarrow$sectlot\}&\{$\rightarrow$main~lot\}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{table}[btp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Obsolete commands}\label{t+SUC-O}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Command}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{firstpartis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} is the number of the first part.\\
+% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} is the number of the first chapter.\\
+% \com{firstsectionis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} is the number of the first section.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{These commands have no effect (except a harmless warning).}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{table}[btp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Commandes obsolètes}\label{t+SUC-O}
+% \centering
+% \bgroup
+% \mysize
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Commande}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+% \midrule
+% \com{firstpartis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} est le numéro de la première partie.\\
+% \com{firstchapteris}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} est le numéro du premier chapitre.\\
+% \com{firstsectionis}\texttt{\{}\emph{N}\texttt{\}}&\emph{N} est le numéro de la première section.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{Ces commandes n'ont aucun effet (excepté un avertissement bénin).}
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \egroup
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{Examples of documents}\label{c+exdocs}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{Exemples de documents}\label{c+exdocs}
+% \fi
+% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
+% \minitoc
+% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty}
+% \setcounter{columnbadness}{9000}%
+% \raggedcolumns
+% \mtcskip
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This chapter shows the code of some examples of documents.
+% Some are extracted or derived from real documents, others are just demonstrations to illustrate problems or features.
+% The code of some specific example files has been shown earlier:
+% \exam{mtc-apx.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-apx.tex},
+% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-hi1.tex},
+% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-hi2.tex},
+% \exam{mtc-gap.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-gap.tex},
+% and \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} on page~\pageref{mtc-tlo.tex},
+% \or\relax
+% Ce chapitre montre le code de quelques exemples de documents.
+% Certains ont été extraits ou inspirés de documents réels, les autres sont de simples démonstrations pour illustrer
+% des problèmes ou des possibilités.
+% Le code de fichiers d'exemples spécifiques a déjà été montré:
+% \exam{mtc-apx.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-apx.tex}),
+% \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-hi1.tex}),
+% \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-hi2.tex}),
+% \exam{mtc-gap.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-gap.tex}) et
+% \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} (page~\pageref{mtc-tlo.tex}).
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Note that the \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} is often used to provide filling text.
+% \or\relax
+% Notez que le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} est souvent utilisé pour fournir du texte de bourrage.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-2c.tex} document file}\label{mtc-2c.tex}\iexam{mtc-2c.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-2c.tex}}\label{mtc-2c.tex}\iexam{mtc-2c.tex}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document with a two columns layout.
+% The layout uses the \pack{multicol} standard package~\cite{multicol} and its \env{multicols} environment.
+% We set \com{mtcindent} to zero. We test several combinations. If a minitoc is long enough to be splitted on
+% both columns, the result may be funny.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document avec une mise en page sur deux
+% colonnes.
+% La mise en page utilise le paquetage standard \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol} et son environnement \env{multicols}.
+% Nous forçons \com{mtcindent} à~zéro. Si une minitoc est assez longue pour se répartir sur les deux colonnes,
+% le résultat peut être bizarre.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-2c>
+\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]%
+    {report}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-2c.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+\usepackage{multicol}
+\usepackage{lipsum}
+\usepackage%
+  [tight,latin,listfiles]{minitoc}
+\usepackage[latin]{babel}
+\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt}
+\begin{document}
+\dominitoc \tableofcontents
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \begin{environment}{multicols}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Two first chapters with a standard chapter head, a minitoc on one full width column, then the body of the chapter
+% on two columns:
+% \or\relax
+% Deux premiers chapitres avec un en-tête standard, une minitoc sur la largeur complète, puis le corps du chapitre sur
+% deux colonnes:
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter{Primum capitulum}
+\begin{multicols}{2}[\minitoc]
+\section{Prima sectio}
+\lipsum[1-2]
+\section{Secunda sectio}
+\lipsum[3-4]
+\end{multicols}
+\chapter{Secundum capitulum}
+\begin{multicols}{2}[\minitoc]
+\section{Prima sectio}
+\lipsum[5-6]
+\section{Secunda sectio}
+\lipsum[7-8]
+\section{Tertia sectio}
+\lipsum[9-10]
+\end{multicols}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \begin{environment}{multicols}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A third chapter entirely on two columns, so the chapter head and the minitoc are in the first column:
+% \or\relax
+% Un troisième chapitre entièrement sur deux colonnes, dont l'en-tête du chapitre et la minitoc sont
+% dans la première colonne:
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{multicols}{2}
+\chapter{Tertium capitulum}
+\minitoc
+\section{Prima sectio}
+\lipsum[11-12]
+\section{Secunda sectio}
+\lipsum[13-14]
+\section{Tertia sectio}
+\lipsum[15-16]
+\end{multicols}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \begin{environment}{multicols}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A fourth chapter, with the chapter head on one column, and the minitoc and the chapter body on two columns (the
+% minitoc is in the first column):
+% \or\relax
+% Un quatrième chapitre, avec l'en-tête de chapitre sur une seule colonne, mais la minitoc et le corps du chapitre
+% sur deux colonnes (la minitoc est dans la première colonne):
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter{Quadrum capitulum}
+\begin{multicols}{2}
+\minitoc
+\section{Prima sectio}
+\lipsum[16-17]
+\section{Secunda sectio}
+\lipsum[18-19]
+\section{Tertia sectio}
+\lipsum[20-21]
+\end{multicols}
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-2c>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-2nd.tex} document file}\label{mtc-2nd.tex}\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex}
+% This document tests the \xfile{french2.mld} minitoc language definition file
+% (section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) and its
+% supporting code in the \upack{minitoc} package. First, the preamble of the document uses the \lopt{french2}
+% minitoc package language option\footnote{The \pack{franc}, \pack{frnew} and \pack{mypatches} packages are local
+% additions, provided with the \upack{minitoc} package documentation sources.}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-2nd.tex}}\label{mtc-2nd.tex}\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex}
+% Ce document teste le fichier minitoc de définition de langue \xfile{french2.mld}
+% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) et le code
+% qui en assure le support dans le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Tout d'abord, le préambule du document utilise
+% l'option de langue \lopt{french2} du paquetage \upack{minitoc}\,\footnote{Les paquetages \pack{franc},
+% \pack{frnew} et \pack{mypatches} sont des additions locales, fournies avec les sources de la documentation
+% française du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-2nd>
+%% Test de french2.mld:
+%% « seconde » ou « deuxième » partie?
+%% compilez 3 fois.
+\documentclass{report}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-2nd.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+\usepackage[french2,tight,listfiles]{minitoc}
+\usepackage[french]{babel}
+\usepackage{franc,frnew}
+\usepackage[OT1,TS1,T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+\usepackage{mypatches}
+\begin{document}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test if there is only two parts: if yes, we will use ``seconde''.
+% Else (three or more parts), we will use ``deuxième''.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons s'il y a seulement deux parties: si oui, nous utiliserons «~seconde~».
+% Sinon (trois parties ou plus), nous utiliserons «~deuxième~».
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifmtcsecondpart
+Il n'y a que 2 parties: seconde.
+\else
+Il y a une partie ou plus de deux parties: deuxième.
+\fi
+\clearpage
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The body of the document, with two parts:
+% \or\relax
+% Le corps du document, avec deux parties:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\doparttoc
+\faketableofcontents
+\part{P1}
+\parttoc
+\chapter{P1C1}
+\chapter{P1C2}
+\part{P2}
+\parttoc
+\chapter{P2C1}
+\chapter{P2C2}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If you want also a third part, comment out this line and recompile 3~times:
+% \or\relax
+% Si vous voulez aussi une troisième partie, commentez la ligne suivante et recompilez 3~fois:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%% Commentez la ligne suivante puis recompilez 2 ou 3 fois.
+\end{document}
+\part{P3}
+\parttoc
+\chapter{P3C1}
+\chapter{P3C2}
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-2nd>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Observe the titles of the parttocs when the document has two then three parts. Note the changes after each
+% compilation. You can play by adding and removing parts. It would be interesting to add a starred part, with
+% starred chapters, at the beginning of the document, this part and these chapters having their entries in the TOC.
+% For instance, try to add the following lines after \com{faketableofcontents}:
+% \or\relax
+% Observez les titres des parttocs lorsque le document a deux puis trois parties. Notez les changements après
+% chaque compilation. Vous pouvez jouer en ajoutant et enlevant des parties. Il serait intéressant d'ajouter une
+% partie étoilée, avec des chapitres étoilés, au début du document, cette partie et ces chapitres ayant leurs
+% entrées dans la table des matières. Par exemple, essayez d'ajouter les lignes suivantes
+% après \com{faketableofcontents}:
+% \fi
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{part*}\verb|{Partie étoilée}|\\
+% \com{mtcaddpart}\verb|[Partie étoilée]|\\
+% \com{adjustptc}\verb|[-2] % IMPORTANT <<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<<|\\
+% \com{parttoc}\\
+% \com{chapter*}\verb|{Premier chapitre étoilé}|\\
+% \com{mtcaddchapter}\verb|[Premier chapitre étoilé]|\\
+% \verb|\chapter*{Second chapitre étoilé}|\\
+% \verb|\mtcaddchapter[Second chapitre étoilé]|
+% \end{verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% and you will see how the parttoc of the new starred part is titled.
+% \or\relax
+% et vous verrez comment la parttoc de la nouvelle partie étoilée est titrée.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-3co.tex} document file}\label{mtc-3co.tex}\iexam{mtc-3co.tex}
+% This document shows how to prepare a minitoc on three columns,
+% with some modifications of the code the \env{mtc@verse} environment.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-3co.tex}}\label{mtc-3co.tex}\iexam{mtc-3co.tex}
+% Ce document montre comment préparer une minitoc sur trois
+% colonnes, grâce à~quelques modifications du code de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we will use a wide paper format (A3) to set the text
+% on two columns and the main TOC on three columns, with the
+% \pack{multitoc} package~\cite{multitoc} (by \namea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}).
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, nous utiliserons un format de papier large (A3)
+% pour composer le texte sur deux colonnes et la table des
+% matières principale sur trois colonnes, avec le paquetage
+% \pack{multitoc}~\cite{multitoc} (de \namea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-3co>
+\documentclass[oneside]{book}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-3co.tex}%
+  [2007/02/19]
+\usepackage[a3paper]{geometry}
+\usepackage{lipsum}
+\usepackage{multicol}
+\usepackage[toc]{multitoc}
+\renewcommand{\multicolumntoc}{3}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\multicolumnmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\endmtc@verse}
+% \begin{environment}{multicols}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we load the \upack{minitoc} package, set some
+% parameters and define the number of columns for the
+% minitocs. We alter the \env{mtc@verse} environment to add a
+% \env{multicols} environment\footnote{Some vertical adjustments are necessary.}:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc},
+% établissons quelques paramètres et définissons le nombre de
+% colonnes pour les minitocs.
+% Nous altérons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse} pour lui
+% ajouter un environnement \env{multicols}\,\footnote{Quelques ajustements verticaux sont nécessaires.}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
+\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt}
+\mtcsetformat{minitoc}{tocrightmargin}{2.55em plus 1fil}
+\newcommand{\multicolumnmtc}{3}
+\makeatletter
+\let\SV@mtc@verse\mtc@verse
+\let\SV@endmtc@verse\endmtc@verse
+\def\mtc@verse#1{\SV@mtc@verse#1\removelastskip%
+ \begin{multicols}{\multicolumnmtc}\raggedcolumns\leavevmode\unskip
+ \vskip -1.5ex \vskip -1\baselineskip}
+\def\endmtc@verse{\end{multicols}\SV@endmtc@verse}
+\makeatother
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We begin the document, preparing the minitocs and the main TOC.
+% The (first) chapter begins with its minitoc, then the text
+% on two columns. We use the \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} to provide filling text;
+% the section number is used to select a \emph{lipsum} paragraph.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous commençons le document, en préparant les minitocs et la
+% table des matières principale. Le (premier) chapitre commence
+% avec sa minitoc, puis le texte sur deux colonnes. Nous
+% utilisons le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} pour
+% fournir du texte de bourrage;
+% le numéro de section est utilisé pour choisir un paragraphe \emph{lipsum}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}
+\dominitoc
+\tableofcontents
+\chapter{First chapter}
+\minitoc
+\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We use a lot of sections, to have a minitoc large enough to
+% use the three columns. A subsection with a long title gives
+% a good result (we have used \com{mtcsetformat} to avoid hyphenations).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous utilisons beaucoup de sections, pour avoir une minitoc
+% suffisamment grande pour utiliser les trois colonnes. Une
+% sous-section avec un titre long donne un bon résultat (nous avons utilisé \com{mtcsetformat} pour éviter les
+% coupures).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\section{First section}           \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Second section}          \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Third section}           \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Fourth section}          \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Fifth section}           \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Sixth section}           \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Seventh section}         \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Eighth section}          \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Ninth section}           \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Tenth section}           \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Eleventh section}        \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Twelfth section}         \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Thirteenth section}      \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Fourteenth section}      \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Fifteenth section}       \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Sixteenth section}       \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Seventeenth section}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Eighteenth section}      \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Nineteenth section}      \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Twentieth section}       \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Twenty-first section}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Twenty-second section}   \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Twenty-third section}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Twenty-fourth section}   \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\subsection{A very long subsection title, for the fun in
+a multicolumn table of contents}  \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Twenty-fifth section}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Twenty-sixth section}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Twenty-seventh section}  \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Twenty-eighth section}   \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Twenty-ninth section}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Thirtieth section}       \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Thirty-first section}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Thirty-second section}   \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Thirty-third section}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Thirty-fourth section}   \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Thirty-fifth section}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Thirty-sixth section}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Thirty-seventh section}  \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Thirty-eighth section}   \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Thirty-ninth section}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Fortieth section}        \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Forty-first section}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Forty-second section}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Forty-third section}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Forty-fourth section}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Forty-fifth section}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Forty-sixth section}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Forty-seventh section}   \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Forty-eighth section}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Forty-ninth section}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Fiftieth section}        \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Fifty-first section}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Fifty-second section}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Fifty-third section}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Fifty-fourth section}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Fifty-fifth section}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Fifty-sixth section}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Fifty-seventh section}   \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Fifty-eighth section}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Fifty-ninth section}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\end{multicols}
+\clearpage
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-3co>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-add.tex} document file}\label{mtc-add.tex}\iexam{mtc-add.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-add.tex}}\label{mtc-add.tex}\iexam{mtc-add.tex}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document shows how to add special entries in the table of contents, and the interaction with the
+% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document montre comment ajouter des entrées spéciales dans la table des matières, ainsi que l'interaction avec
+% le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{5}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-add>
+\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{report}
+%% \documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{book}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-add.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+\usepackage{url}
+\usepackage{tocbibind}
+\usepackage{makeidx}
+\makeatletter
+\newif\ifscan@allowed
+\scan@allowedtrue
+\makeatother
+\def\dotfil{\leaders\hbox to.6em{\hss .\hss}\hfil}%
+\def\pfill{\unskip~\dotfill\penalty500\strut\nobreak
+           \dotfil~\ignorespaces}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Load the \upack{minitoc} package, or \pack{mtcoff}.
+% \or\relax
+% Charger le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, ou \pack{mtcoff}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\usepackage[tight,hints,listfiles]{minitoc}
+%% \usepackage{mtcoff}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\makeindex
+\begin{document}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We call the mini-table preparation commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous appelons les commandes de préparation des mini-tables:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\dominitoc \dominilof \dominilot
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We are using the \pack{tocbibind} package to add special entries in the table of contents, so we must take
+% the precautions specified in section~\vref{special.entries}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous utilisons le paquetage \pack{tocbibind} pour ajouter des entrées spéciales dans la table des matières,
+% donc nous devons prendre les précautions spécifiées dans la section~\vref{special.entries}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\tableofcontents \mtcaddchapter
+\listoffigures \mtcaddchapter
+\listoftables \mtcaddchapter
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For a chapter, we want a minitoc, a minilof and a minitoc:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour un chapitre, nous voulons une minitoc, une minilof et une minitoc:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter{First chapter}\index{chapter!normal}
+\minitoc \mtcskip
+\minilof \mtcskip
+\minilot
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then the text of the chapter, with sections, figures and tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis le texte du chapitre, avec des figures et des tableaux:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\section{First section}
+
+\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{First figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{table}[tp] \caption{First table} \end{table}
+
+\section{Second section}
+A small nice citation from~\cite{dark}:\\
+\index{small}\index{citation}\index{nice}\index{A}\index{a}%
+\index{and}\index{bird}\index{But}\index{cannot}%
+\index{claim}\index{great}\index{he}\index{I}%
+\index{imagine}\index{it}\index{know}\index{land}%
+\index{on}\index{once}\index{that}\index{to}\index{tree}%
+\index{would}\index{yes}%
+\textsf{A bird cannot land once on a great tree and claim to know it.
+But I imagine that he would, yes.}\\
+\hbox{}\hfill
+Iain~M.~\textsc{Banks}~(1993),~\textsl{Against~a~dark~background.}%
+\index{Iain}\index{Banks}\index{Against}\index{dark}\index{background}
+
+\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Second figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{table} \caption{Second table} \end{table}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter*}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A starred chapter requires a special treatment; three solutions are possible.
+% You can test variations on
+% the \com{mtcaddchapter} command. Just uncomment one (and
+% only one) of the \com{mtcaddchapter} commands after
+% \com{chapter*} in the source code of \exam{mtc-add.tex}.
+% For each case, look at the Table of Contents
+% and the involved chapter.
+% \or\relax
+% Un chapitre étoilé nécessite un traitement spécial; trois solutions sont possibles. Vous pouvez tester des
+% variations sur la commande \com{mtcaddchapter}. Il suffit de décommenter une et une seule des trois
+% commandes \com{mtcaddchapter} après \com{chapter*} dans le code source de \exam{mtc-add.tex}. Pour chaque
+% cas, regardez la table des matières et le chapitre concerné.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter*{Second chapter, starred}
+\index{chapter!starred}
+%% UNCOMMENT ONE AND ONLY ONE OF THE 3 FOLLOWING LINES
+\mtcaddchapter[Second chapter, starred] % OK
+%% \mtcaddchapter[~]    % produces a (strange) correct result. OK
+%% \addcontentsline{toc}{xchapter}{}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%% \mtcaddchapter[]     % BAD SOLUTION
+%% \mtcaddchapter       % BAD SOLUTION
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\index{tests}
+
+This is a starred chapter; you can test here variations on
+the \verb|\mtcaddchapter| command. Just uncomment one (and
+only one) of the \verb|\mtcaddchapter| commands after
+\verb|\chapter*| in the source code of \texttt{mtc-add.tex}.
+For each case, look at the \index{Table of Contents}Table of Contents
+and at this chapter.
+\index{a}\index{added}\index{after}\index{also}\index{and}%
+\index{at}\index{can}\index{case}\index{chapter}\index{code}%
+\index{command}\index{commands}\index{Contents}\index{each}%
+\index{entries}\index{For}\index{here}\index{I}\index{in}%
+\index{index}\index{is}\index{Just}\index{just}\index{look}%
+\index{lot}\index{of}\index{on}\index{one}\index{only}%
+\index{source}\index{starred}\index{Table}\index{test}%
+\index{the}\index{This}\index{this}\index{to}\index{uncomment}%
+\index{variations}\index{you}%
+I also added a lot of index entries, just to test.
+
+\chapter{Third chapter}
+\index{chapter!normal}
+\minitoc \mtcskip
+\minilof \mtcskip
+\minilot
+\section{Third section}
+
+\begin{figure} \caption{Third figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{table} \caption{Third table} \end{table}
+
+\section{Fourth section}
+
+\begin{figure} \caption{Fourth figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{table} \caption{Fourth table} \end{table}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibliographystyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibliography}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%    As we want to add an entry for the bibliography in the table of contents, and we use the \pack{tocbibind} package
+%    for that, we must add a correction with \com{adjustmtc}:
+% \or\relax
+%    Comme nous voulons ajouter une entrée pour la bibliographie dans la table des matières, et que nous utilisons
+%    donc le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}, nous ajoutons une correction avec \com{adjustmtc}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\nocite*
+\def\noopsort#1{\relax}
+\bibliographystyle{plain}
+\bibliography{mtc-add}
+\adjustmtc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\printindex}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%    As we want to add an entry for the index in the table of contents, and we use the \pack{tocbibind} package
+%    for that, we must add a correction; two solutions are available: use \com{mtcfixindex} or
+%    the other given three lines:
+% \or\relax
+%    Comme nous voulons ajouter une entrée pour l'index dans la table des matières, et que nous utilisons
+%    le paquetage \pack{tocbibind} pour cela, nous devons ajouter une correction; deux solutions sont
+%    disponibles: utiliser \com{mtcfixindex} ou les trois autres lignes données:
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\printindex
+\mtcfixindex % use this OR the 3 following lines
+%% \addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{}
+%% \addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{}
+%% \mtcaddchapter
+%%
+
+\appendix
+\chapter{App.~1}
+\index{chapter!appendix}
+\minitoc \mtcskip
+\minilof \mtcskip
+\minilot
+\section{Fifth section}
+
+\begin{figure} \caption{Fifth figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{table} \caption{Fifth table} \end{table}
+
+\section{Sixth section}
+
+\begin{figure} \caption{Sixth figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{table} \caption{Sixth table} \end{table}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%    The next chapter asks for a minitoc, a minilof and a minilot, but contains no tables; hence
+%    the \upack{minitoc} package will give some warnings.
+% \or\relax
+%    Le chapitre suivant demande une minitoc, une minilof et une minilot, mais ne contient aucun tableau; donc le
+%    paquetage \upack{minitoc} émettra quelques avertissements.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter{App.~2}
+\index{chapter!appendix}
+%% contains no tables but asks for a minilot! No minilot printed.
+\minitoc \mtcskip
+\minilof \mtcskip
+\minilot
+\section{Seventh section}
+\begin{figure} \caption{Seventh figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{figure} \caption{Eighth figure} \end{figure}
+
+\section{Eighth section}
+
+\begin{figure} \caption{Ninth figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{figure} \caption{Eleventh figure} \end{figure}
+
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-add>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And we need also its small bibliographic data base:
+% \or\relax
+% Et nous avons aussi besoin de sa petite base bibliographique:
+% \fi
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \item the english documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package~\cite{minitoc}:
+% \or\relax
+% \item la documentation en anglais du paquetage \upack{minitoc}~\cite{minitoc}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-addbib>
+@MISC{minitoc,
+   TITLE="The {\textsf{minitoc}} package",
+   AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.",
+   NOTE="{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc.pdf}}",
+   MONTH=jul,
+   YEAR=2008}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \item the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package~\cite{minitoc-fr}:
+% \or\relax
+% \item la documentation en français du paquetage \upack{minitoc}~\cite{minitoc-fr}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+@MISC{minitoc-fr,
+   TITLE="Le paquetage {\textsf{minitoc}}",
+   AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.",
+   NOTE="{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/minitoc/minitoc-fr.pdf}}",
+   MONTH=jul,
+   YEAR=2008}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \item the documentation of the \upack{shorttoc} package~\cite{shorttoc}:
+% \or\relax
+% \item la documentation du paquetage \upack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+@MISC{shorttoc,
+   TITLE="The {\textsf{shorttoc}} package",
+   AUTHOR="Drucbert, Jean-Pierre F.",
+   NOTE="{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/shorttoc/shorttoc.pdf}}",
+   MONTH=aug,
+   YEAR=2002}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \item a novel~\cite{dark} from which a short citation is taken:
+% \or\relax
+% \item un roman~\cite{dark} d'où une courte citation est extraite:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+@BOOK{dark,
+   TITLE="{Against a Dark Background}",
+   AUTHOR="Banks, Iain Menzies",
+   PUBLISHER="Bantam Books",
+   ISBN="0553292240 (pb)",
+   YEAR=1993}
+%</mtc-addbib>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{itemize}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But the database created this way must be trimmed of some spurious lines;
+% on Unix-like systems, do\footnote{Note that we should use no preamble for
+% this file in \xfile{minitoc.ins}; nevertheless, some spurious lines are still generated. This
+% problem is not yet corrected now, so we keep the solution.}:
+% \or\relax
+% Mais la base ainsi créée doit être purgée des lignes superflues;
+% sur les systèmes analogues à~Unix, faites\,\footnote{Notez que nous
+% ne devrions pas utiliser de préambule pour ce fichier dans \xfile{minitoc.ins}; néanmoins, des lignes
+% superflues sont encore produites. Ce problème n'est pas encore corrigé, donc nous conservons cette solution.}:
+% \fi
+% \begin{verse}\small
+% \verb"cat mtc-add.bib | grep -v '^%%' > addbib;mv addbib mtc-add.bib"
+% \end{verse}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ads.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ads.tex}\iexam{mtc-ads.tex}
+% This document uses the \class{article} class and shows some problems for adding special entries in the
+% table of contents and some problems with floating objects. We need to use the \pack{tocbibind}
+% package~\cite{tocbibind} for the first ones and the \upack{minitoc} \opt{insection} package option to avoid
+% the drift if floating objects outside of their section. That gives the following document preamble:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ads.tex}}\label{mtc-ads.tex}\iexam{mtc-ads.tex}
+% Ce document utilise la classe \class{article} et montre quelques problèmes pour ajouter des entrées spéciales
+% dans la table des matières et quelques problèmes avec les objets flottants. Il nous faut utiliser le paquetage
+% \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} pour les premiers et l'option \opt{insection} du
+% paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour éviter la dérive des objets flottants hors de leur section. Ceci donne le
+% préambule suivant:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-ads>
+\documentclass[oneside,12pt,a4paper]{article}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-ads.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+\usepackage{url,tocbibind,makeidx}
+\makeatletter \newif\ifscan@allowed \scan@allowedtrue \makeatother
+\def\dotfil{\leaders\hbox to.6em{\hss .\hss}\hfil}%
+\def\pfill{\unskip~\dotfill\penalty500\strut\nobreak
+           \dotfil~\ignorespaces}%
+\usepackage[tight,hints,insection]{minitoc}
+%% \usepackage{mtcoff}
+\makeindex
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The preparation commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes de préparation:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}
+\doparttoc \dopartlof \dopartlot
+\dosecttoc \dosectlof \dosectlot
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The commands to prepare the table of contents, the list of figures and the list of tables. As we use the
+% \pack{tocbibind} package, we must add some \com{mtcaddsection} commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes pour préparer la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux. Comme nous
+% utilisons le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}, nous devons ajouter quelques commandes \com{mtcaddsection}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{6}
+\setcounter{parttocdepth}{6}
+\setcounter{secttocdepth}{6}
+\tableofcontents \mtcaddsection
+\listoffigures   \mtcaddsection
+\listoftables    \mtcaddsection
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The body of the document: a part with its part-level mini-tables, some sections with their section-level
+% mini-tables. The document has an index and contains figures and tables.
+% \or\relax
+% Le corps du document: une partie avec ses mini-tables au niveau partie, quelques sections leurs mini-tables au
+% niveau section. Le document a un index et contient des figures et des tableaux.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\part{Part~1}
+\parttoc \mtcskip \partlof \mtcskip \partlot
+
+\section{First section}
+\index{section!normal}
+\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot
+\subsection{First subsection}
+
+\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{First figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{table}[tp] \caption{First table} \end{table}
+
+\subsection{Second subsection}
+A small nice citation from~\cite{dark}:\\
+\index{small}\index{citation}\index{nice}\index{A}%
+\index{a}\index{and}\index{bird}\index{But}%
+\index{cannot}\index{claim}\index{great}\index{he}%
+\index{I}\index{imagine}\index{it}\index{know}%
+\index{land}\index{on}\index{once}\index{that}%
+\index{to}\index{tree}\index{would}\index{yes}%
+A bird cannot land once on a great tree and claim to know it.
+But I imagine that he would, yes.\\
+\hbox{}\hfill Iain~M.~\textsc{Banks} (1993), \textsl{Against a dark background.}%
+\index{Iain}\index{Banks}\index{Against}\index{dark}\index{background}
+\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Second figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{table} \caption{Second table} \end{table}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\section*}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Here, we try a starred section, with its entry in the table of contents. You can try several solutions (good or bad).
+% \or\relax
+% Ici, nous essayons une section étoilée, avec son entrée dans la table des matières. Vous pouvez essayer plusieurs
+% solutions (bonnes ou mauvaises).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\section*{Second section, starred}
+\index{section!starred}
+%% UNCOMMENT ONE AND ONLY ONE OF THE 4 FOLLOWING LINES
+\mtcaddsection[Second section, starred] % OK
+%% \mtcaddsection[]     % BAD
+%% \mtcaddsection[~]    % produces a (strange) correct result.
+%% \mtcaddsection       % BAD
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\index{tests}
+
+This is a starred section; you can test here variations on
+the \verb|\mtcaddsection| command. Just uncomment one (and
+only one) of the \verb|\mtcaddsection| commands after
+\verb|\section*| in the source code of \texttt{mtc-add.tex}.
+For each case, look at the \index{Table of Contents}Table of Contents
+and at this section.
+\index{a}\index{added}\index{after}\index{also}\index{and}%
+\index{at}\index{can}\index{case}\index{section}%
+\index{code}\index{command}\index{commands}%
+\index{Contents}\index{each}\index{entries}\index{For}%
+\index{here}\index{I}\index{in}\index{index}\index{is}%
+\index{Just}\index{just}\index{look}\index{lot}%
+\index{of}\index{on}\index{one}\index{only}\index{source}%
+\index{starred}\index{Table}\index{test}\index{the}%
+\index{This}\index{this}\index{to}\index{uncomment}%
+\index{variations}\index{you}%
+I also added a lot of index entries, just to test.
+
+\section{Third section}
+\index{section!normal}
+\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot
+\subsection{Third subsection}
+
+\begin{figure} \caption{Third figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{table} \caption{Third table} \end{table}
+
+\subsection{Fourth subsection}
+
+\begin{figure} \caption{Fourth figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{table} \caption{Fourth table} \end{table}
+
+\subsubsection{Even a sub-sub-section!}
+\subsubsection{And yet another one}
+
+\part{Part~2}
+\parttoc \mtcskip \partlof \mtcskip \partlot
+
+\section{Fourth section}
+\index{section!normal}
+\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot
+\subsection{Fifth subsection}
+
+\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Fifth figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{table}[tp] \caption{Fifth table} \end{table}
+
+\subsection{Sixth subsection}
+A small nice citation from~\cite{dark}:\\
+\index{small}\index{citation}\index{nice}\index{A}%
+\index{a}\index{and}\index{bird}\index{But}%
+\index{cannot}\index{claim}\index{great}\index{he}%
+\index{I}\index{imagine}\index{it}\index{know}%
+\index{land}\index{on}\index{once}\index{that}%
+\index{to}\index{tree}\index{would}\index{yes}%
+A bird cannot land once on a great tree and claim to know it.
+But I imagine that he would, yes.\\
+\hbox{}\hfill
+Iain~M.~\textsc{Banks} (1993), \textsl{Against a dark background.}%
+\index{Iain}\index{Banks}\index{Against}\index{dark}\index{background}
+
+\begin{figure}[tp] \caption{Sixth figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{table} \caption{Sixth table} \end{table}
+
+\section*{Fifth section, starred}
+\index{section!starred}
+%% UNCOMMENT ONE AND ONLY ONE OF THE 4 FOLLOWING LINES
+\mtcaddsection[Fifth section, starred] % OK
+%% \mtcaddsection[]     % OK
+%% \mtcaddsection[~]    % produces a (strange) correct result.
+%% \mtcaddsection       % OK
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\index{tests}
+
+This is a starred section; you can test here variations on
+the \verb|\mtcaddsection| command. Just uncomment one (and
+only one) of the \verb|\mtcaddsection| commands after
+\verb|\section*| in the source code of \texttt{mtc-add.tex}.
+For each case, look at the \index{Table of Contents}Table of Contents
+and at this section.\index{a}%
+\index{added}\index{after}\index{also}\index{and}%
+\index{at}\index{can}\index{case}\index{section}%
+\index{code}\index{command}\index{commands}\index{Contents}%
+\index{each}\index{entries}\index{For}\index{here}%
+\index{I}\index{in}\index{index}\index{is}%
+\index{Just}\index{just}\index{look}\index{lot}%
+\index{of}\index{on}\index{one}\index{only}%
+\index{source}\index{starred}\index{Table}\index{test}%
+\index{the}\index{This}\index{this}\index{to}%
+\index{uncomment}\index{variations}\index{you}%
+I also added a lot of index entries, just to test.
+
+\section{Sixth section}
+\index{section!normal}
+\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot
+\subsection{Seventh subsection}
+
+\begin{figure} \caption{Seventh figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{table} \caption{Seventh table} \end{table}
+
+\subsection{Eighth subsection}
+
+\begin{figure} \caption{Eighth figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{table} \caption{Eighth table} \end{table}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibliographystyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibliography}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The bibliography: as we want an entry for it in the table of contents, we use the
+% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} and a correction with \com{adjuststc}:
+% \or\relax
+% La bibliographie: comme nous voulons une entrée pour elle dans la table des matières, nous utilisons le
+% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} et une correction avec \com{adjuststc}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\nocite*
+\def\noopsort#1{\relax}
+\bibliographystyle{plain}
+\bibliography{mtc-add}
+\adjuststc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\printindex}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The index: as we want an entry for it in the table of contents, we use the
+% \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} and a correction with \com{mtcfixindex}:
+% \or\relax
+% L'index: comme nous voulons une entrée pour lui dans la table des matières, nous utilisons le
+% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} et une correction avec \com{mtcfixindex}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\printindex
+\mtcfixindex % use this OR the 3 following lines
+%% \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{}
+%% \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{}
+%% \mtcaddsection
+
+\appendix
+\section{App.~1}
+\index{section!appendix}
+\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot
+\subsection{Ninth subsection}
+
+\begin{figure} \caption{Ninth figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{table} \caption{Ninth table} \end{table}
+
+\subsection{Tenth subsection}
+
+\begin{figure} \caption{Tenth figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{table} \caption{Tenth table} \end{table}
+
+\section{App.~2}
+\index{section!appendix}
+%% contains no tables but asks for a sectlot! No sectlot printed.
+\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof \mtcskip \sectlot
+\subsection{Eleventh subsection}
+
+\begin{figure} \caption{Eleventh figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{figure} \caption{Twelfth figure} \end{figure}
+
+\subsection{Twelfth subsection}
+
+\begin{figure} \caption{Thirdteenth figure} \end{figure}
+\begin{figure} \caption{Fourteenth figure} \end{figure}
+
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-ads>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-amm.tex} document file}\label{mtc-amm.tex}\iexam{mtc-amm.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-amm.tex}}\label{mtc-amm.tex}\iexam{mtc-amm.tex}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This example shows the use of the \env{appendices} environment in a \class{memoir} class document when
+% the \upack{minitoc} package is loaded. First, the preamble:
+% \or\relax
+% Cet exemple montre l'utilisation de l'environnement \env{appendices} dans un document de classe \class{memoir}
+% lorsque le paquetage \upack{minitoc} a été chargé. Tout d'abord, le préambule:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-amm>
+\documentclass[oneside]{memoir}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-amm.tex}%
+  [2007/08/29]
+\usepackage{lipsum} % filling text
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\usepackage{memhfixc}
+\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
+\begin{document}
+\dominitoc \tableofcontents
+\adjustmtc
+\chapter{First chapter}
+\minitoc
+\lipsum[1]
+\section{First section}
+\lipsum[2]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{environment}{appendices}
+% \begin{macro}{\addappheadtotoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The appendices are set in an \env{appendices} environment; we can add an entry in the TOC with
+% \com{addappheadtotoc} (a command from the \class{memoir} class):
+% \or\relax
+% Les appendices sont composés dans un environnement \env{appendices}; nous pouvons ajouter une entrée dans la table
+% des matières avec \com{addappheadtotoc} (une commande fournie par la classe \class{memoir}):
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{appendices}
+\addappheadtotoc
+\adjustmtc %correction!
+\chapter{Afterthoughts}
+\minitoc
+\lipsum[3]
+Afterthoughts appendix
+\section{Further remarks}
+\lipsum[4]
+\chapter{Last wills}
+\minitoc
+\section{Testament}
+\lipsum[5]
+\end{appendices}
+\chapter{Conclusion}
+\minitoc
+\section{Bye}
+\lipsum[6]
+\chapter{Back from Hell}
+\minitoc
+\section{Not dead yet!}
+\lipsum[7]
+\section{I will survive}
+\lipsum[8]
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-amm>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{9}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-apx.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-apx.tex}\iexam{mtc-apx.tex}
+% The \exam{mtc-apx.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-apx.tex}}\label{1mtc-apx.tex}\iexam{mtc-apx.tex}
+% Le document \exam{mtc-apx.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-art.tex} document file}\label{mtc-art.tex}\iexam{mtc-art.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-art.tex}}\label{mtc-art.tex}\iexam{mtc-art.tex}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This is a basic document using the \upack{minitoc} package. It contains sections but no chapters, so it must use an
+% \class{article}-like document class. You should work on a \emph{copy} of this file and
+% can alter its preamble and its contents to make experiments with parameters. A typical preamble follows:
+% \or\relax
+% C'est un document basique utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Il contient des sections mais pas de chapitres,
+% donc il doit utiliser une classe de document analogue à~\class{article}. Vous devriez travailler sur
+% une \emph{copie} de ce fichier et vous pouvez modifier son préambule et son contenu pour faire des essais avec
+% les paramètres. Voici donc un préambule typique:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-art>
+%% mtc-art.tex
+%% This file contains a set of tests for minitoc
+%% package. You can alter most of parameters to test.
+%% article (\section must be defined)
+\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{article}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-art.tex}%
+  [2007/06/06]
+\usepackage{lipsum} % provides filling text
+%% \usepackage{hyperref}      % If used, load it BEFORE minitoc
+\usepackage[tight,insection]{minitoc}
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{5}   % depth of numbering of sectionning commands
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}      % depth of table of contents
+\setlength{\stcindent}{24pt}  % indentation of secttocs, default
+%%                            % font for secttocs, default
+\renewcommand{\stcfont}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries}%
+%%                            % font for secttocs, subsections
+%% \renewcommand{\stcSSfont}{\small\sf}%
+%%                            % you can make experiments with
+%%                            % \stcSSSfont, \stcPfont and \stcSPfont
+%%                            % but it is ``fontomania''...
+\raggedbottom                 % or \flushbottom, at your choice
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If you want to use sections numbered in each part (the section number restarts to~1 at the beginning of each
+% part), uncomment the 3~lines of code below. This demonstrates that the numbering of the secttoc files is
+% independent on the numbering of the sections (it is absolute).
+% \or\relax
+% Si vous voulez utiliser des sections numérotées dans chaque partie (le numéro de section repart à~1 au début de
+% chaque partie), décommentez les 3~lignes de code ci-dessous. Ceci montre que la numérotation des fichiers
+% secttoc est indépendante de celle des sections (elle est absolue).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%% TEST: uncomment the next line to test
+%%% resetting section number in each part
+%%% \makeatletter \@addtoreset{section}{part} \makeatother
+%%% END TEST
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We begin the body of the document. You can still alter some parameters (presence or absence of rules and page numbers in
+% the mini-tables):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous commençons le corps du document. Vous pouvez encore altérer certains paramètres (présence ou absence de filets et
+% de numéros de pages dans les mini-tables):
+% \fi
+% \lneed{5}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The preparation commands, with their optional argument if necessary:
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes de préparation, avec leur argument optionnel si nécessaire:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\dosecttoc
+\dosectlof[c]                   % center titles of the sectlofs
+\dosectlot
+\doparttoc                      % test of parttoc/partlof stuff
+\dopartlof                      % added in version #15
+\dopartlot                      % added in version #15
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% It is necessary to create the contents files; use the ``fake'' version to not print.
+% \or\relax
+% Il est nécessaire de créer les fichiers de contenu; utilisez la version «~fake~» pour ne pas imprimer.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\faketableofcontents            % or \tableofcontents
+\fakelistoffigures              % to check compatibility
+\fakelistoftables               % to check compatibility
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% There is the text of the document, with its sectionning commands;
+% we define a part, with a parttoc, a partlof (with the title on the right) and a parttoc:
+% \or\relax
+% Voici le texte du document, avec ses commandes de sectionnement;
+% nous définissons une partie, avec une parttoc, une partlof (avec le titre sur la droite) et une parttoc:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\part{First Part} \parttoc \partlof[r] \partlot
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A section, in two columns mode, with a secttoc (title on the right), and a sectlof; this section contains
+% subsections to make a non-empty secttoc but no figures (to detect an empty sectlof).
+% \or\relax
+% Une section, en mode deux colonnes, avec une secttoc (titre sur la droite), et une sectlof; cette section contient
+% des sous-sections pour que la secttoc ne soit pas vide mais pas de figures (pour détecter une sectlof vide).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\twocolumn\sloppy               % the secttoc in twocolumn layout is ugly,
+                                % but works. Ideas to make it better?
+\section{AAAAA}                 % a section with a lot of sections
+\secttoc[r]                     % secttoc title on the right
+\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED
+\lipsum[1]
+\subsection{S1} \lipsum[2]
+\subsection{S2} \lipsum[3]
+\subsection{S3} \lipsum[4]
+\subsection*{S4}
+%% \addcontentsline{toc}{starsubsection}{*S4*}
+\lipsum[5]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A lot of subsections:
+% \or\relax
+% Un tas de sous-sections:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\subsection{S5} \lipsum[6]
+\subsection{S6} \lipsum[7]
+\subsection{S7} \lipsum[8]
+\subsection{S8} \lipsum[9]
+\subsection{S9} \lipsum[10]
+\subsection{S10} \lipsum[11]
+\subsection{S11} \lipsum[12]
+\subsection{S12} \lipsum[13]
+\subsection{S13} \lipsum[14]
+\subsection{S14} \lipsum[15]
+\subsection{S15} \lipsum[16]
+\subsection{S16} \lipsum[17]
+\subsection{S17} \lipsum[18]
+\subsection{S18} \lipsum[19]
+\subsection{S19} \lipsum[20]
+\subsection{S20} \lipsum[21]
+\subsection{S21} \lipsum[22]
+\subsection{S22} \lipsum[23]
+\subsection{S23} \lipsum[24]
+\subsection{S24} \lipsum[25]
+\subsection{S25} \lipsum[26]
+\subsection{S26} \lipsum[27]
+\subsection{S27} \lipsum[28]
+\subsection{S28} \lipsum[29]
+\subsection{S29} \lipsum[30]
+\subsection{S30} \lipsum[31]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \begin{macro}{\FloatBarrier}
+% \begin{macro}{\section*}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We return to the one column mode. Then a section with a secttoc and a sectlof (there are subsections and figures).
+% The \opt{insection} package option should ensure that floating objects (like figures) do not drift outside
+% their section.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous revenons au mode une colonne. Puis une section avec une secttoc et une sectlof (il y~a des sous-sections et
+% des figures).
+% L'option de paquetage \opt{insection} devrait garantir que les objets flottants (tels que les figures) ne
+% dérivent pas en dehors de leur section.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\onecolumn\fussy         % back to one column
+\section{BBBBB}
+\secttoc
+\mtcskip                 % put some skip here
+\sectlof                 % a sectlof
+\lipsum[32]
+\subsection{T1} \lipsum[33]
+\begin{figure}[t]        % tests compatibility with floating bodies
+\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
+\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture}
+\caption{F1}             % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar)
+\end{figure}
+\FloatBarrier
+\subsubsection[tt1]{TT1} % tests optional arg. of a sectionning command
+\lipsum[34]
+\paragraph{TTT1} \lipsum[35]
+\subparagraph{TTTT1} \lipsum[36]
+\begin{figure}[t]
+\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
+\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture}
+\caption[f2]{F2}         % tests optional arg. of a caption
+\end{figure}
+\FloatBarrier
+\subsection{T2} \lipsum[37]
+\section*{CCCCC}         % tests a pseudo-section. should have no secttoc
+%% \addstarredsection{CCCCC}
+\mtcaddsection[CCCCC]
+\secttoc \mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED
+\lipsum[38]
+\subsection{U1} \lipsum[39]
+\subsubsection{UU1} \lipsum[40]
+\paragraph{UUU1} \lipsum[41]
+\subparagraph{UUUU1} \lipsum[42]
+\subsection{U2} \lipsum[43]
+\part{Second Part}
+\parttoc
+\partlof[c]
+\partlot
+%%                       % the following section should have no secttoc,
+\section{DDDDD}          % but if you uncomment \secttoc,
+%% \secttoc
+\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED
+%                        % the secttoc appears
+\lipsum[44]
+\subsection{V1} \lipsum[45]
+\subsubsection{VV1} \lipsum[46]
+\paragraph{VVV1} \lipsum[47]
+\subparagraph{VVVV1} \lipsum[48]
+\begin{figure}[t]        % tests compatibility with floating bodies
+\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
+\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture}
+\caption{F3}             % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar)
+\end{figure}
+\FloatBarrier
+\lipsum[49] \subsection{V2} \lipsum[50]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{10}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\FloatBarrier}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We change the depth of the secttocs, inside a local group (a pair of braces):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous changeons la profondeur des secttocs, dans un groupe local (une paire d'accolades):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\section{EEEEE}                 % this section should have a secttoc
+{%                              % left brace, see below
+\setcounter{secttocdepth}{3}    % depth of sect table of contents;
+                                % try with different values.
+\secttoc
+\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED
+}                               % right brace
+%% this pair of braces is used to keep local the change on secttocdepth.
+\lipsum[51]
+\subsection{W1}                 % with the given depth
+\lipsum[52]
+\subsubsection{WW1} \lipsum[53]
+\paragraph{WWW1} \lipsum[54]
+\begin{figure}[t]            % tests compatibility with floating bodies
+\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
+\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture}
+\caption{F4}                 % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar)
+\end{figure}
+\FloatBarrier
+bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla
+\subparagraph{WWWW1} \lipsum[55]
+\subsection{W2} \lipsum[56]
+% no chapter in article class \chapter*{}
+\part{Appendices}
+\parttoc \mtcskip
+\partlof \mtcskip
+\partlot
+\FloatBarrier
+\appendix
+\section{Comments} \lipsum[57]
+\secttoc
+\mtcskip \sectlof %ADDED
+\subsection{C1} \lipsum[58]
+\subsection{C2} \lipsum[59]
+\subsection{C3} \lipsum[60]
+\begin{figure}[hb]        % tests compatibility with floating bodies
+\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
+\begin{picture}(100,50) \end{picture}
+\caption{F5}              % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar)
+\end{figure}
+\FloatBarrier
+\subsection{C4} \lipsum[61]
+\FloatBarrier
+\section{Evolution}
+\secttoc
+\sectlof % empty
+\sectlot % empty
+\lipsum[62]
+\subsection{D1} \lipsum[63] \subsection{D2} \lipsum[64]
+\subsection{D3} \lipsum[65] \subsection{D4} \lipsum[66]
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-art>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-bk.tex} document file}\label{mtc-bk.tex}\iexam{mtc-bk.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-bk.tex}}\label{mtc-bk.tex}\iexam{mtc-bk.tex}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This is a basic document using the \upack{minitoc} package. It contains chapters, so it must use a
+% \class{book}-like or \class{report}-like document class. You should work on a \emph{copy} of this file and
+% can alter its preamble and its contents to make experiments with parameters. A typical preamble follows:
+% \or\relax
+% C'est un document basique utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Il contient des chapitres, donc il doit
+% utiliser une classe de document analogue à~\upack{book} ou à~\class{report}. Vous devriez travailler sur
+% une \emph{copie} de ce fichier et vous pouvez modifier son préambule et son contenu pour faire des essais avec
+% les paramètres. Voici donc un préambule typique:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-bk>
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% A example file (differs from previous versions)
+%% mtc-bk.tex
+%% This file contains a set of tests for minitoc package file.
+%% You can alter most of parameters to test.
+%% Class: book/report (\chapter must be defined).
+%% You can use a copy of this file to play with minitoc commands and parameters.
+\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{report} % the report class uses less pages
+%% \documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{book}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-bk.tex}%
+  [2007/06/06]
+\usepackage{lipsum} % provides filling text
+%% \usepackage{hyperref} % if used, load it BEFORE minitoc
+%% \usepackage{mtcoff}
+\usepackage[tight]{minitoc} % tight option make shorter mini-tables
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{5} % depth of numbering of sectionning commands
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}               % depth of table of contents
+\setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt}           % indentation of minitocs, default
+\renewcommand{\mtcfont}{\small\rm}     % font for minitocs, default
+\renewcommand{\mtcSfont}{\small\bf}    % font for minitocs, sections, default
+%% \renewcommand{\mtcSSfont}{\small\sf} % font for minitocs, subsections
+%% you can make experiments with \mtcSSSfont, \mtcPfont and \mtcSPfont
+%% but it is ``fontomania''...
+\raggedbottom                   % or \flushbottom, at your choice
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If you want to use chapters numbered in each part (the chapter number restarts to~1 at the beginning of each
+% part), uncomment the 3~lines of code below. This demonstrates that the numbering of the minitoc files is
+% independent on the numbering of the chapters (it is absolute).
+% \or\relax
+% Si vous voulez utiliser des chapitres numérotés dans chaque partie (le numéro de partie repart à~1 au début de
+% chaque partie), décommentez les 3~lignes de code ci-dessous. Ceci montre que la numérotation des fichiers
+% minitoc est indépendante de celle des chapitres (elle est absolue).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%% TEST: uncomment the next line to test resetting chapter number in each part
+%% \makeatletter \@addtoreset{chapter}{part} \makeatother
+%%% END TEST
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\noptcrule}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We begin the body of the document. You can still alter some parameters (presence or absence of rules and page numbers in
+% the mini-tables):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous commençons le corps du document. Vous pouvez encore altérer certains paramètres (présence ou absence de filets et
+% de numéros de pages dans les mini-tables):
+% \fi
+% \lneed{5}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}
+\mtcpagenumbers
+\noptcrule
+%% \nomtcrule                    % suppresses minitoc rules
+%% \nomtcpagenumbers             % suppresses minitoc page numbers
+%% \nomlfpagenumbers             % ---------- minilof ---- -------
+%% \nomltpagenumbers             % ---------- minilot ---- -------
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The preparation commands, with their optional argument if necessary:
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes de préparation, avec leur argument optionnel si nécessaire:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\dominitoc
+\dominilof[c]                   % centers title of minilof's
+\dominilot
+\doparttoc                      % test of parttoc/partlof stuff
+\dopartlof                      % added in version #15
+\dopartlot                      % added in version #15
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% It is necessary to create the contents files; use the ``fake'' version to not print.
+% \or\relax
+% Il est nécessaire de créer les fichiers de contenu; utilisez la version «~fake~» pour ne pas imprimer.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\tableofcontents            % or \faketableofcontents
+\listoffigures              % or \fakelistoffigures
+\fakelistoftables           % or \listoftables
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Uncomment the following line if the first chapter must be numbered~``0'':
+% \or\relax
+% Décommentez la ligne suivante si le premier chapitre doit être numéroté~«~0~»:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%% \addtocounter{chapter}{-1} % to begin with Chapter 0
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% There is the text of the document, with its sectionning commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Voici le texte du document, avec ses commandes de sectionnement:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\part{First Part}
+\parttoc \partlof[r] \partlot[r]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A chapter, in two column mode, with a minitoc (title on the right):
+% \or\relax
+% Un chapitre, en mode deux colonnes, avec une minitoc (titre sur la droite):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\twocolumn\sloppy               % the minitoc in twocolumn layout is ugly,
+\chapter{AAAAA}                 % a chapter with a lot of sections
+\minitoc[r]                     % minitoc title on the right
+\lipsum[1]
+\section{S1} \lipsum[2]
+\section{S2} \lipsum[3]
+\section{S3} \lipsum[4]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\section*}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A starred section; we want an entry in the TOC, so we add it the normal way:
+% \or\relax
+% Une section étoilée: nous voulons une entrée dans la table des matières, donc nous l'ajoutons de la manière
+% normale:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\section*{S4}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\protect\numberline{}{S4}}
+\lipsum[5]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A lot of subsections:
+% \or\relax
+% Un tas de sous-sections:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\section{S5} \lipsum[6]
+\section{S6} \lipsum[6]
+\section{S7} \lipsum[7]
+\section{S8} \lipsum[9]
+\section{S9} \lipsum[10]
+\section{S10} \lipsum[11]
+\section{S11} \lipsum[12]
+\section{S12} \lipsum[13]
+\section{S13} \lipsum[14]
+\section{S14} \lipsum[15]
+\section{S15} \lipsum[16]
+\section{S16} \lipsum[17]
+\section{S17} \lipsum[18]
+\section{S18} \lipsum[19]
+\section{S19} \lipsum[20]
+\section{S20} \lipsum[21]
+\section{S21} \lipsum[22]
+\section{S22} \lipsum[23]
+\section{S23} \lipsum[24]
+\section{S24} \lipsum[25]
+\section{S25} \lipsum[26]
+\section{S26} \lipsum[27]
+\section{S27} \lipsum[28]
+\section{S28} \lipsum[29]
+\section{S29} \lipsum[30]
+\section{S30} \lipsum[31]
+\subsection{SS1} \lipsum[32]
+\section{S31} \lipsum[33]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We return to one column mode. A new chapter, with a minitoc, a minilof and a minilot:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous revenons au mode sur une colonne. Un nouveau chapitre, avec une minitoc, une minilof et une minilot:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\onecolumn\fussy        % back to one column
+\chapter{BBBBB}
+\minitoc
+\mtcskip                % put some skip here
+\minilof                % a minilof
+\mtcskip                % put some skip here
+\minilot                % a minilot
+\lipsum[34]
+\section{T1} \lipsum[35]
+\begin{figure}[t]       % tests compatibility with floating bodies
+\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
+\begin{picture}(100,50)
+\end{picture}
+\caption{F1}            % (tables are similar)
+\end{figure}
+\begin{table}[b]        % tests compatibility with floating bodies
+\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
+\begin{picture}(100,50)
+\end{picture}
+\caption{T1}            % (tables are similar)
+\end{table}
+\clearpage
+\subsection[tt1]{TT1}   % tests optional arg. of a sectionning command
+\lipsum[36]
+\subsubsection{TTT1} \lipsum[37]
+\paragraph{TTTT1} \lipsum[38]
+\begin{figure}
+\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
+\begin{picture}(100,50)
+\end{picture}
+\caption[f2]{F2}        % tests optional arg. of a caption
+\end{figure}
+\section{T2} \lipsum[39]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter*}
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\section*}
+% \begin{macro}{\paragraph*}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A starred chapter with an entry added in the TOC; all subordinate (lower)
+% sectionning commands must also be starred.
+% \or\relax
+% Un chapitre étoilé avec une entrée ajoutée dans la table des matières;
+% toutes les commandes de sectionnement subalternes (plus basses) doivent aussi être étoilées.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter*{CCCCC}        % tests a pseudo-chapter; could have a minitoc.
+\addstarredchapter{CCCCC}
+\lipsum[40]
+\section*{U1}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U1}
+\lipsum[41]
+\subsection*{UU1}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{UU1}
+\lipsum[42]
+\subsubsection*{UUU1}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{subsubsection}{UUU1}
+\lipsum[43]
+\paragraph*{UUUU1}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{paragraph}{UUUU1}
+\lipsum[44]
+\section*{U2}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U2}
+\lipsum[45]
+\part{Second Part}
+\parttoc
+\partlof[c]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This chapter has no minitoc, but if you uncomment \com{minitoc},
+% the minitoc will appear.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce chapitre n'a pas de minitoc, mais si vous décommentez \com{minitoc},
+% la minitoc apparaîtra.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%                       % the following chapter should have no minitoc,
+\chapter{DDDDD}          % but if you uncomment \minitoc,
+%% \minitoc              % the minitoc appears
+\lipsum[46]
+\section{V1} \lipsum[47]
+\subsection{VV1} \lipsum[48]
+\subsubsection{VVV1} \lipsum[49]
+\paragraph{VVVV1} \lipsum[50]
+\begin{figure}[t]        % tests compatibility with floating bodies
+\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
+\begin{picture}(100,50)
+\end{picture}
+\caption{F3}             % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar)
+\end{figure}
+\lipsum[51]
+\section{V2} \lipsum[52]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We change the depth of the minitocs, inside a local group (a pair of braces):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous changeons la profondeur des minitocs, dans un groupe local (une paire d'accolades):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter{EEEEE}                 % this chapter should have a minitoc
+{%                              % left brace, see below
+\setcounter{minitocdepth}{3}    % depth of mini table of contents;
+                                % try with different values.
+\minitoc
+}                               % right brace
+%% this pair of braces is used to keep local the change
+%% on minitocdepth.
+\lipsum[53]
+\section{W1}                    % with the given depth
+\lipsum[54]
+\subsection{WW1} \lipsum[55]
+\subsubsection{WWW1} \lipsum[56]
+\begin{figure}[t]        % tests compatibility with floating bodies
+\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
+\begin{picture}(100,50)
+\end{picture}
+\caption{F4}             % (I have not tested tables here, but it is similar)
+\end{figure}
+\lipsum[57]
+\paragraph{WWWW1} \lipsum[58]
+\subparagraph{WWWWW1} \lipsum[59]
+\section{W2} \lipsum[60]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Here, we encounter a classical problem: to make a local table of contents for a set
+% of appendices, while hiding these entries in the main table of contents. First, we
+% create a part, with its parttoc:
+% \or\relax
+% Ici, nous rencontrons un problème classique: faire une table des matières locale pour un ensemble d'appendices,
+% et tout en masquant ces entrées dans la table des matières principale. Tout d'abord, nous créons une partie, avec sa
+% parttoc:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\appendix
+\part{Appendices}
+\parttoc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we begin a \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment, with the hiding depth as optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous commençons un environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}, avec la profondeur de masquage requise:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{mtchideinmaintoc}[-1]
+\chapter{Comments}
+\minitoc
+\section{C1} \lipsum[61]
+\section{C2} \lipsum[62]
+\section{C3} \lipsum[63]
+\begin{figure}[t]        % tests compatibility with floating bodies
+\setlength{\unitlength}{1mm}
+\begin{picture}(100,50)
+\end{picture}
+\caption{F5}             % (I have not tested tables, but it is similar)
+\end{figure}
+\section{C4}
+\chapter{Evolution}
+\minitoc
+\minilof %Empty => invisible
+\minilot %Empty => invisible
+\section{D1} \lipsum[64]
+\section{D2} \lipsum[65]
+\section{D3} \lipsum[66]
+\section{D4} \lipsum[67]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% We terminate the part by adding a marker in the TOC file, then we must close this \env{mtchideinmaintoc}
+% environment:
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% Nous terminons la partie en ajoutant un marqueur dans le fichier table des matières, puis nous devons fermer
+% cet environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%% this line closes the omitted part
+\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}
+%% this line restore the depth in the main TOC
+\end{mtchideinmaintoc}
+\lipsum[68]
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-bk>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-bo.tex} document file}\label{mtc-bo.tex}\iexam{mtc-bo.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-bo.tex}}\label{mtc-bo.tex}\iexam{mtc-bo.tex}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document using a two column layout for some
+% portions and the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}. The aim is to begin a chapter with a special head and a
+% preliminary block containing a minitoc and some indications, on two columns.
+% The preamble loads the \pack{geometry} package~\cite{geometry}, which defines the global page layout,
+% the \pack{multicol} package~\cite{multicol}, the \pack{color} package~\cite{color}, because we want a colored
+% background
+% for the minitoc, the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}, to change some parameters of the minitoc, and, at
+% least, the \upack{minitoc} package itself:
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document utilisant une mise en page sur
+% deux colonnes pour certaines portions et le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}. Le but est de commencer
+% un chapitre avec un en-tête spécial et un bloc préliminaire contenant une minitoc et quelques indications, sur
+% deux colonnes.
+% Le préambule charge le paquetage \pack{geometry}~\cite{geometry},
+% qui définit la mise en page globale, le paquetage \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol},
+% le paquetage \pack{color}~\cite{color},
+% car nous voulons un fond coloré pour la minitoc, le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}, pour changer
+% quelques paramètres de la minitoc, et, enfin, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} lui-même:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-bo>
+\documentclass[10pt]{book}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-bo.tex}%
+  [2007/04/17]
+\usepackage[paperwidth=8.5in,paperheight=11in,%
+      lmargin=1.25in,rmargin=1.25in,tmargin=1in,bmargin=1in]{geometry}
+\usepackage{multicol}
+\usepackage{color}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\setlength}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtolength}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftsecindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftsecnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsubsecindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsubsecnumwidth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We use the \pack{tocloft} package and its commands to set the indentations in the TOC and the minitoc:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous utilisons le paquetage \pack{tocloft} et ses commandes pour établir les indentations dans la table des
+% matières et la minitoc:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\usepackage{tocloft}
+\setlength{\cftsecindent}{0cm}
+\setlength{\cftsecnumwidth}{15 pt}
+\setlength{\cftsubsecindent}{\cftsecindent}
+\addtolength{\cftsubsecindent}{\cftsecnumwidth}
+\setlength{\cftsubsecnumwidth}{20 pt}
+\setlength{\cftsubsubsecindent}{\cftsubsecindent}
+\addtolength{\cftsubsubsecindent}{\cftsubsecnumwidth}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftpagenumbersoff}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Note that if we want to suppress the page numbers in the minitoc, we must use the commands from \pack{tocloft}:
+% \or\relax
+% Notez que si nous voulons supprimer les numéros de page dans la minitoc, nous devons utiliser les commandes
+% de \pack{tocloft}:
+% \fi
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\cftpagenumbersoff{sec}
+\cftpagenumbersoff{subsec}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomtcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We load the \upack{minitoc} package and change the indentation, suppress the rules and change the minitoc
+% title. The \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref} can also be loaded (\emph{after} \upack{minitoc}).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et changeons l'indentation, supprimons les filets et changeons le
+% titre. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref} peut aussi être chargé (\emph{après} \upack{minitoc}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\usepackage[francais,tight]{minitoc}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt}
+\nomtcrule        % pas de filets en haut et en bas de la mini-tdm
+\nomtcpagenumbers % pas de numéro de pages
+%                   (non fonctionnel avec tocloft)
+\renewcommand{\mtctitle}{Contenu de la rencontre}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We load also some packages for the french language (some are local):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous chargeons aussi quelques paquetages pour la langue française:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\usepackage[francais]{babel}
+\usepackage{franc,frnew}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+\usepackage{mypatches}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This code redefines the format of the chapter head:
+% \or\relax
+% Ce code redéfinit le format de l'en-tête de chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% MACRO POUR AVOIR LE MOT « RENCONTRE » AU LIEU DE « CHAPITRE »       %
+% Sans saut de ligne (modification du code qui se trouve dans la FAQ) %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\makeatletter
+\def\@makechapterhead#1{%
+  \vspace*{10\p@}%
+  {\parindent \z@ \raggedleft \normalfont
+   \interlinepenalty\@M
+   \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+     \Huge\bfseries\sffamily Rencontre \thechapter\\% \quad
+   \fi
+   \Huge\bfseries\sffamily #1\par\nobreak
+   \vskip 10\p@
+}}
+\def\@makeschapterhead#1{%
+  \vspace*{10\p@}%
+  {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont
+   \interlinepenalty\@M
+   \Huge \sffamily #1\par\nobreak
+   \vskip 10\p@
+}} \makeatother
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define an environment (\env{pageUn}) for the block placed at the beginning of a chapter. This block
+% contains a minitoc, then a sequence of informations given by the 6~parameters of the environment. The block
+% uses a \env{multicols} environment to typeset on two columns. Some decorations are added: rules, colored
+% background for the minitoc.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons un environnement (\env{pageUn}) pour le bloc placé en début de chapitre. Ce bloc contient
+% une minitoc, puis une séquence d'informations données par les 6~paramètres de l'environnement. Ce bloc utilise
+% un environnement \env{multicols} pour composer sur deux colonnes. Quelques décorations sont ajoutées: des
+% filets, un fond coloré pour la minitoc.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%: ENVIRONNEMENT POUR LA PAGE 1 DES RENCONTRES %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% param1: date de la rencontre
+% param2: nombre de périodes
+% param3: liste des documents distribués
+% param4: messages
+% param5: lecture
+% param6: exercices
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\newenvironment{pageUn}[6]{%
+\parindent = 0.0in
+\rule{\linewidth}{1pt}
+\begin{multicols}{2}
+        {\large \bfseries Math. pour médecine nucléaire\\
+        \textit{(#2)}}
+        \vfill\columnbreak
+        \raggedleft\bfseries Automne 2003\\
+        #1
+\end{multicols}
+\vspace{-18pt}
+\rule{\linewidth}{1pt}
+
+\setlength{\columnseprule}{.3pt} \setlength{\columnsep}{1cm}
+\begin{multicols}{2}%
+
+%: TABLE DES MATIÈRES (col. gauche)
+\colorbox[cmyk]{.1,0,0,0}{%
+        \parbox{\linewidth}{%
+        \setcounter{minitocdepth}{3}%
+        \minitoc%
+        }}
+%\vfill \columnbreak ~ \vfill
+
+\mtcskip
+
+%: DOCUMENTS DISTRIBUÉS (début col. droite)
+
+{\large \bfseries Documents distribués}
+\begin{itemize} \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\star$} #3 \end{itemize}
+
+%: MESSAGES AUX ÉTUDIANTS
+
+\vspace{12pt}{\large \bfseries Messages}
+\begin{itemize} \renewcommand{\labelitemi}{$\star$}#4\end{itemize}
+
+%: LECTURE
+\vspace{12pt}{\large \bfseries Lecture}\vspace{-6pt} \par#5 \par
+
+% EXERCICES
+\vspace{12pt}{\large \bfseries Exercices}\vspace{-6pt}\par#6\par
+
+%\newpage
+\end{multicols}%
+}
+%{\newpage}
+{\hrule}
+
+%\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{1.2} %interligne
+
+%\pagestyle{empty}  %pas de # de page
+%\parindent = 0.0in
+\parskip = 0.1in
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%: REDÉFINIR LES SECTIONS %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\renewcommand{\thesection}{\Alph{section}}
+%\renewcommand{\thesection}{\thechapter-\Alph{section}}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The body of the document:
+% \or\relax
+% Le corps du document:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%%%%%%%%%
+%: BEGIN %
+%%%%%%%%%%
+\begin{document}
+\dominitoc \faketableofcontents
+\chapter{Première étape (début)}
+%\minitoc
+\begin{pageUn}
+        {%1     Date du cours
+                lundi 25 août
+                }
+        {%2     Durée du cours
+                2 périodes
+                }
+        {%3     Liste des documents à~distribuer
+                \item Plan de cours
+                \item Fiche d'identification
+                \item Grille horaire
+                \item Feuilles d'exercices supplémentaires
+                }
+        {%4     Ne pas oublier
+                \item Acheter le livre de référence
+                \item Apporter une disquette
+                }
+        {%5     Lecture
+                Lire les pages ppp à~ppp et ppp à~ppp
+                }
+        {%6     Exercice
+                Faire les exercices nnn de la page ppp
+                }
+\end{pageUn}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Titre de la section} %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+Texte dans la section
+
+%%
+\subsection{Une sous-section}
+%%
+Bla bla bla
+
+%%
+\subsection{Une autre sous-section}
+%%
+Bla bla bla
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Titre d'une autre section} %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+Texte dans la section
+
+%%
+\subsection{Une sous-section}
+%%
+Bla bla bla
+
+%%
+\subsection{Une autre sous-section}
+%%
+Bla bla bla
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+\section{Encore une autre section} %
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+Texte dans la section
+
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-bo>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ch0.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ch0.tex}\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ch0.tex}}\label{mtc-ch0.tex}\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document using a starred first chapter,
+% inducing the ``Chapter Zero'' problem.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document utilisant un premier chapitre
+% étoilé, induisant le problème du «~Chapitre~zéro~».
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-ch0>
+\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{report}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-ch0.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+\usepackage[tight,english]{minitoc}
+\begin{document}
+\dominitoc \tableofcontents
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter*}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The first chapter is starred, but contains real numbered sections. We add an entry in the TOC for this chapter
+% and see that its sections are using ``0'' as chapter number:
+% \or\relax
+% Le premier chapitre est étoilé, mais contient de vraies sections numérotées. Nous ajoutons une entrée pour ce
+% chapitre dans la table des matières et voyons que ses sections utilisent «~0~» comme numéro de chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter*{Chapter One (starred)}
+\mtcaddchapter[Fake chapter one]
+\minitoc
+\section{Chap 1, section 1}
+That's right, folks -- we're close to the release of Firefox and
+Thunderbird~1.0 and, just like our last 1.0~release, we want to organize
+worldwide parties to celebrate.
+
+Thanks to Dominik 'Aeneas' Schnitzer, we have an all-new and improved
+Mozilla Party Webtool~2.0. You can create your own party, or sign up for
+one already in progress -- and, in an improvement on Webtool~1.0,
+organizers can now edit and update party details. The tool allows you to
+organize a celebration in any of 243~countries, principalities,
+dominions and islands around the world. Never let it be said that we do
+things by halves around here.
+
+\subsection{Chap 1, section 1, subsection 1}
+That's right, folks -- we're close to the release of Firefox and
+Thunderbird~1.0 and, just like our last 1.0~release, we want to organize
+worldwide parties to celebrate.
+
+Thanks to Dominik 'Aeneas' Schnitzer, we have an all-new and improved
+Mozilla Party Webtool~2.0. You can create your own party, or sign up for
+one already in progress -- and, in an improvement on Webtool~1.0,
+organizers can now edit and update party details. The tool allows you to
+organize a celebration in any of 243~countries, principalities,
+dominions and islands around the world. Never let it be said that we do
+things by halves around here.
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The second chapter is normal:
+% \or\relax
+% Le second chapitre est normal:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter{Chapter Two (numbered one)}
+\minitoc
+\section{Chapter 2, section 1}
+That's right, folks -- we're close to the release of Firefox and
+Thunderbird 1.0 and, just like our last 1.0~release, we want to organize
+worldwide parties to celebrate.
+
+Thanks to Dominik 'Aeneas' Schnitzer, we have an all-new and improved
+Mozilla Party Webtool~2.0. You can create your own party, or sign up for
+one already in progress -- and, in an improvement on Webtool~1.0,
+organizers can now edit and update party details. The tool allows you to
+organize a celebration in any of 243~countries, principalities,
+dominions and islands around the world. Never let it be said that we do
+things by halves around here.
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-ch0>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{12}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-cri.tex} document file}\label{mtc-cri.tex}\iexam{mtc-cri.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-cri.tex}}\label{mtc-cri.tex}\iexam{mtc-cri.tex}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\part*}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter*}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document
+% with a starred part and starred chapters. Note the use of the adjustment commands.
+% This example is not commented: just follow the insertion of the mini-tables in the \xfile{mtc-cri.log} file.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document
+% avec une partie étoilée et des chapitres étoilés. Notez l'utilisation des commandes d'ajustement.
+% Cet exemple n'est pas commenté: suivez simplement l'insertion des mini-tables dans le fichier \xfile{mtc-cri.log}.
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-cri>
+\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]%
+  {report}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-cri.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+\usepackage[francais]{babel}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+\usepackage%
+  [french2,tight]%
+  {minitoc}
+
+\mtcsetdepth{parttoc}{2}
+
+\begin{document}
+\doparttoc \dominitoc
+\tableofcontents
+\part*{Présentation générale}
+\mtcaddpart[Présentation générale]
+\adjustptc[-2]
+\parttoc
+
+Texte de la
+présentation générale\ldots
+
+\chapter*{Les auteurs}
+\mtcaddchapter[Les auteurs]
+Présentation des auteurs\ldots
+
+\chapter*{Les lecteurs}
+\mtcaddchapter[Les lecteurs]
+Présentation des lecteurs\ldots
+
+\part{Première partie}
+\parttoc
+\chapter*{Introduction}
+\mtcaddchapter[Introduction]
+\chapter{Premier chapitre}
+\minitoc
+\section{Première section~A}
+\section{Deuxième section~A}
+\chapter{Deuxième chapitre}
+\minitoc
+\section{Première section~B}
+\section{Deuxième section~B}
+
+\part{Deuxième partie}
+\parttoc
+\chapter{Premier chapitre}
+\minitoc
+\section{Première section~C}
+\section{Deuxième section~C}
+\chapter{Deuxième chapitre}
+\minitoc
+\section{Première section~D}
+\section{Deuxième section~D}
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-cri>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-fko.tex} document file}\label{mtc-fko.tex}\iexam{mtc-fko.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-fko.tex}}\label{mtc-fko.tex}\iexam{mtc-fko.tex}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This is a document using the \class{scrbook} class. Without any precaution, some entries in the minitocs are
+% not in the right font (bold sans serif) like in the main table of contents; moreover, the language of the
+% minitoc titles is not correct because the options of the \pack{babel} package are not transferred to the
+% \upack{minitoc} package. To solve the language problem, we just set ``\lopt{german}'' as a \emph{global} option in
+% the \com{documentclass} command (\pack{babel} and \upack{minitoc} will hence use this global option).
+% \or\relax
+% C'est un document qui utilise la classe \class{scrbook}. Sans aucune précaution, certaines entrées dans les minitocs ne
+% sont pas dans la fonte correcte (grasse et sans empattements) comme dans la table des matières principale; de
+% plus, la langue des titres des minitocs n'est pas correcte car les options du paquetage \pack{babel} ne sont
+% pas transmises au paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Pour résoudre ce problème de langue, nous mettons
+% simplement «~\lopt{german}~» comme option \emph{globale} dans la commande \com{documentclass} (\pack{babel}
+% et \upack{minitoc} utiliseront donc cette option globale).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{4}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-fko>
+\documentclass[german,a4paper,oneside]{scrbook}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-fko.tex}%
+  [2007/02/19]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we load the packages and set some parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous chargeons les paquetages et établissons quelques paramètres:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\usepackage[germanb]{babel}
+\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
+\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt} % optional
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we set explicitly the fonts for the entries\footnote{Here we only gave the commands for the section entries in
+% the minitocs, but analog commands may be used for lower entries.} and the font of the titles of the minitocs,
+% knowing that the font command \com{sectfont} is defined in \xfile{scrbook.cls}; we change also the title for
+% the minitocs:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous établissons explicitement les fontes pour les entrées\,\footnote{Nous ne donnons ici que les commandes
+% pour les entrées de sections dans les minitocs, mais des commandes analogues peuvent être utilisées pour des
+% entrées inférieures.} et la fonte des titres des minitocs, en sachant que la commande de fonte \com{sectfont}
+% est définie dans \xfile{scrbook.cls}; nous changeons aussi le titre des minitocs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\sectfont\small}
+\mtcsettitlefont{minitoc}{\sectfont\large}
+\mtcsettitle{minitoc}{Inhalt}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then the body of the document, with a chapter (with a minitoc) containing a section. The section entry did not
+% appear in bold sans serif in the original document (before the corrections).
+% \or\relax
+% Et voici le corps du document, avec un chapitre (et sa minitoc) contenant une section. L'entrée de section
+% n'apparaissait pas en gras sans empattement dans le document original (avant les corrections).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}
+\dominitoc \tableofcontents
+%
+\chapter{Ein serifenloses Kapitel}
+\minitoc % Aufruf Minitoc
+\section{Dieser Text ist in minitoc serifenlos}
+Auch der Text \glqq Inhaltsangabe\grqq\ will
+so wie koma es definiert.
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-fko>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-fo1.tex} document file}\label{mtc-fo1.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-fo1.tex}}\label{mtc-fo1.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document creates several copies of the same parttoc, but with different fonts (for the chapter level
+% entries); you can compare the results.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document crée plusieurs copies de la même parttoc, mais avec des fontes différentes (pour les entrées du niveau
+% chapitre); vous pouvez comparer les résultats.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-fo1>
+\documentclass{report}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-fo1.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+\usepackage{lipsum}
+\usepackage{txfonts}
+\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
+\begin{document}
+\doparttoc \dominitoc \tableofcontents
+\part{Introduction} \clearpage
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A first copy, with default fonts:
+% \or\relax
+% Une première copie, avec les fontes par défaut:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\parttoc \clearpage
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A second copy, roman bold font for chapter entries:
+% \or\relax
+% Une deuxième copie, fonte romaine grasse pour les entrées de chapitres:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
+\parttoc \clearpage
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A third copy, typewriter bold font for chapter entries:
+% \or\relax
+% Une troisième copie, fonte bâton grasse pour les entrées de chapitres:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\bfseries}
+\parttoc \clearpage
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A fourth copy, not bold typewriter font for chapter entries:
+% \or\relax
+% Une quatrième copie, fonte bâton non grasse pour les entrées de chapitres:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{*}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries}
+\parttoc \clearpage
+\chapter{A very short chapter}
+\minitoc
+\lipsum[1]
+\section{First section} \lipsum[2]
+\subsection{Alpha} \lipsum[3]
+\subsection{Beta} \lipsum[4]
+\section{Second section} \lipsum[5]
+\subsection{Gamma} \lipsum[6]
+\subsection{Delta} \lipsum[7]
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-fo1>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-fo2.tex} document file}\label{mtc-fo2.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-fo2.tex}}\label{mtc-fo2.tex}\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document creates several copies of the same parttoc, but with different fonts (for the chapter level
+% entries); you can compare the results. As the fonts are not declared the same way, compare the results
+% with those of \exam{mtc-fo1.tex} (see section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}).
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document crée plusieurs copies de la même parttoc, mais avec des fontes différentes (pour les entrées du niveau
+% chapitre); vous pouvez comparer les résultats. Comme les fontes ne sont pas déclarées de la même manière,
+% comparez les résultats avec ceux de \exam{mtc-fo1.tex} (voir la section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-fo2>
+\documentclass{report}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-fo2.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+\usepackage{lipsum}
+\usepackage{txfonts}
+\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \lneed{11}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\plffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We declare the fonts with the old method:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous déclarons les fontes avec l'ancienne méthode:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \def\ptcSSfont{\ptcfont}     % (subsections)
+   \def\ptcSSSfont{\ptcfont}    % (subsubsections)
+   \def\ptcPfont{\ptcfont}      % (paragraphs)
+   \def\ptcSPfont{\ptcfont}     % (subparagraphs)
+   \def\plffont{\ptcfont}       % (figures)
+   \def\plfSfont{\ptcfont}      % (subfigures)
+   \def\pltfont{\ptcfont}       % (tables)
+   \def\pltSfont{\ptcfont}      % (subtables)
+\begin{document}
+\doparttoc \dominitoc
+\tableofcontents
+\part{Introduction}
+\clearpage
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A first version of the parttoc, with the fonts defined above:
+% \or\relax
+% Une première version de la parttoc, avec les fontes définies ci-dessus:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\parttoc \clearpage
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A second version of the parttoc, with chapter entries in a roman bold font:
+% \or\relax
+% Une deuxième version de la parttoc, avec les entrées de chapitres en fonte romane grasse:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
+\parttoc \clearpage
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A third version of the parttoc, with chapter entries in a typewriter bold font:
+% \or\relax
+% Une troisième version de la parttoc, avec les entrées de chapitres en fonte bâton grasse:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{chapter}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\bfseries}
+\parttoc \clearpage
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A fourth version of the parttoc, with chapter entries in a non bold typewriter font:
+% \or\relax
+% Une quatrième version de la parttoc, avec les entrées de chapitres en fonte bâton non grasse:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mtcsetfont{parttoc}{*}{\normalsize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries}
+\parttoc \clearpage
+\chapter{A very short chapter}
+\minitoc
+\lipsum[1]
+\section{First section} \lipsum[2]
+\subsection{Alpha} \lipsum[3] \subsection{Beta} \lipsum[4]
+\section{Second section} \lipsum[5]
+\subsection{Gamma} \lipsum[6] \subsection{Delta} \lipsum[7]
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-fo2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-gap.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-gap.tex}\iexam{mtc-gap.tex}
+% The \exam{mtc-gap.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-gap.tex}}\label{1mtc-gap.tex}\iexam{mtc-gap.tex}
+% Le document \exam{mtc-gap.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hi1.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-hi1.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex}
+% The \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hi1.tex}}\label{1mtc-hi1.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex}
+% Le document \exam{mtc-hi1.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hi2.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-hi2.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex}
+% The \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hi2.tex}}\label{1mtc-hi2.tex}\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex}
+% Le document \exam{mtc-hi2.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{12}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hia.tex} document file}\label{mtc-hia.tex}\iexam{mtc-hia.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hia.tex}}\label{mtc-hia.tex}\iexam{mtc-hia.tex}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document where the entries for some tables
+% must be hidden in the main list of tables. The document uses the \class{article} class.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document où les entrées pour certains
+% tableaux doivent être masquées dans la liste des tableaux principale. Le document utilise la classe \class{article}.
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-hia>
+\documentclass%
+  [oneside,a4paper]{article}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-hia.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+\usepackage{lipsum}
+\usepackage%
+  [tight,insection]%
+           {minitoc}
+\dosectlot
+\begin{document}
+\listoftables
+\section{First section}
+\sectlot
+\lipsum[1]
+\begin{table}[hb]
+\caption{My first visible table}
+\end{table}
+\lipsum[2]
+\begin{table}[ht]
+\caption{A second visible table}
+\end{table}
+\lipsum[3]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{3}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For\virage{} the \emph{first} hidden table, we add \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{before} its caption:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour\virage{} le \emph{premier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{avant} son caption:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{table}[hb]
+\mtchideinmainlot
+\caption{My first hidden table}
+\end{table}
+\lipsum[4-6]
+\begin{table}[ht]
+\caption{A second hidden table}
+\end{table}
+\lipsum[7]
+\section{Second section}
+\sectlot
+\lipsum[8]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{3}
+% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For\virage{} the \emph{last} hidden table, we add \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{after} its caption:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour\virage{} le \emph{dernier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{après} son caption:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{table}[hb]
+\caption{My last hidden table}
+\endmtchideinmainlot
+\end{table}
+\lipsum[9]
+\begin{table}[ht]
+\caption{A third visible table}
+\end{table}
+\lipsum[10]
+\begin{table}[hb]
+\caption{A fourth visible table}
+\end{table}
+\lipsum[11]
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-hia>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hir.tex} document file}\label{mtc-hir.tex}\iexam{mtc-hir.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hir.tex}}\label{mtc-hir.tex}\iexam{mtc-hir.tex}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document where the entries for some tables
+% must be hidden in the main list of tables. The document uses the \class{report} class.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document où les entrées pour certains
+% tableaux doivent être masquées dans la liste des tableaux principale. Le document utilise la classe \class{report}.
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-hir>
+\documentclass[a4paper]{report}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-hir.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+\usepackage{lipsum}
+\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
+\dominilot
+\begin{document}
+\listoftables
+\chapter{First chapter}
+\minilot
+\lipsum[1]
+\begin{table}[hb]
+\caption{My first visible table}
+\end{table}
+\lipsum[2]
+\begin{table}[ht]
+\caption{A second visible table}
+\end{table}
+\lipsum[3]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtchideinmainlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For\virage{} the \emph{first} hidden table, we add \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{before} its caption:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour\virage{} le \emph{premier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{mtchideinmainlot} \emph{avant} son caption:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{table}[hb]
+\mtchideinmainlot     % <--
+\caption{My first hidden table}
+\end{table}
+\lipsum[4-6]
+\begin{table}[ht]
+\caption{A second hidden table}
+\end{table}
+\lipsum[7]
+\chapter{Second chapter}
+\minilot
+\lipsum[8]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{3}
+% \begin{macro}{\endmtchideinmainlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For\virage{} the \emph{last} hidden table, we add \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{after} its caption:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour\virage{} le \emph{dernier} tableau masqué, nous ajoutons \com{endmtchideinmainlot} \emph{après} son caption:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{table}[hb]
+\caption{My last hidden table}
+\endmtchideinmainlot  %  <--
+\end{table}
+\lipsum[9]
+\begin{table}[ht]
+\caption{A third visible table}
+\end{table}
+\lipsum[10]
+\begin{table}[hb]
+\caption{A fourth visible table}
+\end{table}
+\lipsum[11]
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-hir>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-hop.tex} document file}\label{mtc-hop.tex}\iexam{mtc-hop.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-hop.tex}}\label{mtc-hop.tex}\iexam{mtc-hop.tex}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of class \class{scrbook}.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de la classe \class{scrbook}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-hop>
+\documentclass[oneside,12pt]{scrbook}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-hop.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+\usepackage{lipsum}
+\usepackage[hints]{minitoc}
+\begin{document}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We prepare the minitocs and the minilofs, we print the TOC but not the LOF (while the LOF file is prepared):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous préparons les minitocs et les minilofs, nous imprimons la table des matières mais pas la liste des figures
+% (cependant son fichier est préparé):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\dominitoc \tableofcontents
+\dominilof \fakelistoffigures
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\part*}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A starred part with its entry in the TOC:
+% \or\relax
+% Une partie étoilée avec son entrée dans la table des matières:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\part*{Part 1: Strategic Marketing}
+\mtcaddpart[Part 1: Strategic Marketing]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then two chapters with their minitocs and minitocs:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis deux chapitres avec leurs minitocs et minilofs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter{Chapter 1}
+\minitoc \minilof
+\section{Section one of first chapter} \lipsum[1]
+\begin{figure}
+    \centering Test
+    \caption{Picture one of first chapter}
+\end{figure}
+
+\section{Section two of first chapter} \lipsum[2]
+\begin{figure}
+    \centering Test
+    \caption{Picture two of first chapter}
+\end{figure}
+
+\chapter{Chapter 2}
+\minitoc \minilof
+
+\section{Section one of second chapter} \lipsum[3]
+\begin{figure}
+    \centering Test
+    \caption{Picture one of second chapter}
+\end{figure}
+\cleardoublepage
+\section{Section two of second chapter} \lipsum[4]
+\begin{figure}
+    \centering Test
+    \caption{Picture two of second chapter}
+\end{figure}
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-hop>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-liv.tex} document file}\label{mtc-liv.tex}\iexam{mtc-liv.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-liv.tex}}\label{mtc-liv.tex}\iexam{mtc-liv.tex}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of \class{book} class, with
+% customized TOC and minitocs.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{book}, avec
+% une table de matières et des minitocs personnalisées.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-liv>
+\documentclass[10pt,twoside,openright]{book}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-liv.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we want that empty pages be really empty, without page number nor headers,
+% so we redefine \com{cleardoublepage}:
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, nous souhaitons que les pages vides le soient vraiment, sans numéro de page ni en-tête, donc nous
+% redéfinissons \com{cleardoublepage}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\makeatletter
+\def\ps@chapterverso{\ps@empty}%
+\def\cleardoublepage{\clearpage
+ \if@twoside
+  \ifodd\c@page\else
+   \null\thispagestyle{chapterverso}\newpage
+   \if@twocolumn\null\newpage\fi
+   \fi
+  \fi
+ }%
+\def\ps@chapterverso{\ps@empty}%
+\makeatother
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the encodings, for input and output, because the document is in french and uses accented letters:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons les codages, en entrée et en sortie, car le document est en français et utilise des lettres
+% accentuées:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[TS1,T1]{fontenc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We load two packages, \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}, to customize the TOC and the minitocs, and
+% \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}, to customize the sectionning commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous chargeons deux paquetages, \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}, pour adapter la table des matières et les minitocs,
+% et \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}, pour adapter les commandes de sectionnement:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\usepackage{tocloft}
+\usepackage{sectsty}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We load the \upack{minitoc} package then some complementary local packages for the french language:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} puis quelques paquetages locaux complémentaires pour le français:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\usepackage[french,undotted,tight]{minitoc}
+\usepackage[english,francais]{babel}
+\usepackage{franc,frnew,mypatches}
+\providecommand{\fup}{\textsuperscript}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{9}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtolength}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftsetrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\thesection}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectionfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We make some customizations: indentation for the subsection entries in the TOC and the minitocs, depth of the
+% TOC, numerotation depth, depth of the minitocs, some fonts:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous faisons quelques adaptations: indentation pour les entrées de sous-sections dans la table des matières et
+% les minitocs, profondeur de la table des matières, profondeur de la numérotation, profondeur des minitocs,
+% quelques fontes:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\addtolength{\cftsubsecindent}{1em} % for tocloft
+\cftsetrmarg{2.55em plus 1fil} % to avoid hyphenations in the ToC (tocloft).
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{1}
+\setcounter{minitocdepth}{4}
+\chapterfont{\huge\bfseries\sffamily} % for sectsty
+\renewcommand{\thesection}{\arabic{section}}
+\sectionfont{\Large\raggedright} % for sectsty (to avoid hyphenations in section titles)
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some informations for the title page:
+% \or\relax
+% Des informations pour la page de titre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\title{Systèmes d'occultation} \author{Laurent~\textsc{Bloch}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection*}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And the document body\footnote{The text has been shortened, so there is an undefined reference; do not worry.}:
+% \or\relax
+% Et le corps de document\,\footnote{Le texte a été abrégé, donc il reste une référence non satisfaite; ne vous
+% inquiétez pas.}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\dominitoc \tableofcontents
+
+\chapter{Définition et contrôle du travail à~faire}%
+\label{chap+controle}
+\minitoc
+
+\section{Le modèle de la grande industrie et le taylorisme}%
+\index{taylorisme}
+C'est au \textsc{xviii}\fup{e}~siècle que la vision du travail comme
+marchandise est vraiment devenue dominante, pour s'imposer au
+\textsc{xix}\fup{e}~siècle dans l'organisation type de la grande usine
+industrielle.
+
+\subsection*{Après l'usine, le centre d'appel}\index{centre d'appel}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{Après l'usine, le centre d'appel}
+Aujourd'hui le taylorisme\index{taylorisme} au sens
+strict est en déclin parce qu'il n'est plus guère adapté aux
+besoins de la production industrielle contemporaine non plus qu'aux
+nouvelles normes de comportement individuel et collectif.
+
+\section{Tout travail émet de la pensée}
+Le travail a vocation à~produire du sens, pour son auteur comme pour
+son destinataire.
+
+\section{Théorie et pratique de la commande publique}
+En France, les prestations de service commandées par les
+services publics à~des entreprises font l'objet de contrôles
+de leur bonne réalisation selon des procédures et des règles
+qui sont des cas particuliers d'un ensemble plus vaste, la
+réglementation des marchés publics de l'État, dont nous
+allons donner ci-dessous une brève description.
+
+\subsection{Réglementation des marchés publics}
+Le dispositif juridique, réglementaire et comptable qui encadre les
+actes contractuels de la puissance publique en France est très~[...]
+
+\subsubsection{Premier principe: séparation de l'ordonnateur et du comptable}
+Le premier élément du dispositif est le principe de
+séparation de l'ordonnateur et du comptable. Il a été
+instauré en 1319 par l'ordonnance portant création de la~[...]
+
+\subsubsection{Second principe: contrôle \emph{a~priori}}
+Le second élément du dispositif est le principe du contrôle
+\emph{a~priori}. Lorsque le directeur de l'organisme public
+de recherche pris ici comme exemple (l'ordonnateur) décide~[...]
+
+\subsubsection{Le Code des Marchés Publics}
+Le troisième pilier de la commande publique est le Code des Marchés
+Publics (CMP), qui régit tous les contrats, conclus par des organismes
+publics ou des collectivités territoriales, dont le montant excède un~[...]
+
+\subsection{La pratique des marchés publics}
+Lorsque l'administration française fait réaliser un système
+informatique par un prestataire, elle est en position de maître
+d'ouvrage\index{maîtrise d'ouvrage}.  Elle rédige (ou fait rédiger) un
+cahier des charges\index{cahier des charges} qui décrit les
+spécifications du système à~réaliser. Ce cahier des charges constitue~[...]
+
+\subsection{Quels sont les services publics «~rentables~»?}
+Pour parler comme les informaticiens, nous pouvons identifier un
+« effet de bord », c'est-à-dire une conséquence non intentionnelle de
+la réglementation des marchés publics: les administrations ne disposent
+d'aucun moyen pour envisager la notion d'investissement. Le~[...]
+
+\section{Projet et cahier des charges}\index{cahier des charges}
+Jean-Pierre~\textsc{Boutinet} nous guidera ici pour ce qui concerne
+l'histoire de la notion de~[...]
+
+\subsection{La frontière entre conception et fabrication}
+La vision classique de la conduite d'un projet informatique de gestion
+est la suivante: le maître d'ouvrage\index{maîtrise d'ouvrage}~[...]
+
+\subsection{Bâtiment, mécanique, programmation}
+Nous y reviendrons au chapitre~\ref{chap+travail}, mais nous savons
+déjà que la mise en {\oe}uvre de l'informatique s'est beaucoup
+inspirée des procédures de travail les plus élaborées du
+\textsc{xx}\fup{e}~siècle~[...]
+
+\chapter{Le travail informatique}
+\minitoc
+
+\section{De la nature de l'informatique}
+
+\subsection{Premières croyances}\label{sub+premcroyances}
+Les premiers ordinateurs, qui entrèrent en fonction à~l'extrême fin
+des années 1940 et durant les années 1950, étaient consacrés à~des
+travaux militaires ou scientifiques puisque, à~cette époque,
+on pensait~[...]
+
+\subsection{Comment l'informatique diffère des mathématiques}
+J'aimerai à~l'occasion de cette analyse attirer l'attention du
+lecteur sur une question qui est une source constante de malentendus
+au sujet de la programmation.
+
+\subsubsection{Les preuves de programme}
+L'écriture de programmes informatiques obéit à~de tout autres principes.
+Il convient de préciser cette affirmation pour la préserver~[...]
+
+\section{Programmation dans le monde réel}
+\subsection{La vraie nature de la programmation des ordinateurs}
+
+Alors, comment s'écrivent les programmes informatiques? Et
+d'ailleurs, qu'est-ce qu'une erreur\index{erreur} de programmation?
+Ces questions sont liées et elles sont, bien sûr, au c{\oe}ur de notre
+préoccupation.
+
+\subsection{Méthodes de programmation}
+Un processeur quelconque est caractérisé par le jeu des actions
+élémentaires qu'il est capable d'effectuer. Ces actions élémentaires
+sont appelées les \emph{primitives} du processeur, ou, si le
+processeur est une machine, les «~instructions machine~».  Un~[...]
+
+\subsection{Méthodes de construction de programmes}
+Nous avons décrit ci-dessus le processus élémentaire de la
+programmation, celui qui consiste à~écrire les instructions ou les
+expressions qui vont composer un programme.
+
+\subsubsection{La programmation structurée}
+Le premier courant de pensée qui associa la recherche d'une syntaxe
+claire et expressive à~une organisation logique et commode des unités
+de programme fut la \emph{programmation
+structurée}\index{programmation!structurée} des années 1970, dont~[...]
+
+\subsubsection{La programmation par objets}
+Après la programmation structurée vint un autre courant significatif:
+la programmation par objets\index{programmation!par objets}, inventée
+en Norvège à~la fin des années 1960 par l'équipe de~[...]
+
+\subsubsection{Excès dans la pensée}
+Il y a eu beaucoup de verbiage autour de l'aptitude supposée du
+modèle~[...]
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-liv>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-mem.tex} document file}\label{mtc-mem.tex}\iexam{mtc-mem.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-mem.tex}}\label{mtc-mem.tex}\iexam{mtc-mem.tex}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This example shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a \class{memoir} class document.
+% First, the preamble:
+% \or\relax
+% Cet exemple montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{memoir}.
+% Tout d'abord, le préambule:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-mem>
+\documentclass%
+   [oneside]{memoir}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-mem.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+\usepackage{lipsum}
+%% \usepackage{hyperref}
+%% \usepackage{memhfixc}
+\usepackage%
+  [tight]{minitoc}
+%% \usepackage{mtcoff}
+\begin{document}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents*}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We use the starred form \com{tableofcontents*} specific of the \class{memoir} class. Note that the
+% the \com{chapter} command has \emph{two} optional arguments in the \class{memoir} class.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous utilisons la forme étoilée \com{tableofcontents*} spécifique de la classe \class{memoir}. Notez que la
+% commande \com{chapter} a \emph{deux} arguments optionnels dans la classe \class{memoir}.
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\dominitoc
+\tableofcontents*
+
+\chapter[oneA][oneB]{oneC}
+\minitoc
+\lipsum[1] \newpage \lipsum[2]
+\section{S-1-one} \lipsum[3]
+\section{S-1-two} \lipsum[4]
+
+\chapter[twoA][twoB]{twoC}
+\minitoc
+\lipsum[4] \newpage \lipsum[5]
+\section{S-2-one} \lipsum[6]
+\section{S-2-two} \lipsum[7]
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-mem>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-mm1.tex} document file}\label{mtc-mm1.tex}\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-mm1.tex}}\label{mtc-mm1.tex}\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This example shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a \class{memoir} class document and shows some of
+% the necessary adaptations for fonts.
+% First, the preamble:
+% \or\relax
+% Cet exemple montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{memoir} et
+% montre certaines des adaptations nécessaires pour les fontes.
+% Tout d'abord, le préambule:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-mm1>
+\documentclass[oneside]{memoir}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-mm1.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+\usepackage{lipsum} % filling text
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\providecommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\empty}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We inhibit some font commands of the \class{memoir} class:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous inhibons certaines commandes de fontes de la classe \class{memoir}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand{\cftsecfont}{\empty}
+\providecommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\empty}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\renewcommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we redefine them:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous les redéfinissons:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\cftsecfont}{\normalsize\scshape}
+\renewcommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\normalsize\scshape}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We load the \upack{minitoc} package and try to use some minitoc font
+% commands, but without any success:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et essayons d'utiliser quelques commandes de \upack{minitoc} pour
+% les fontes, mais sans aucun succès:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%% hyperref before minitoc, optional
+%% \usepackage[linktocpage=true]{hyperref}\usepackage{memhfixc}
+\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
+\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\normalsize\scshape}   % <- no scshape
+\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{subsection}{\normalsize\scshape}% <- no scshape
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\providecommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftsecfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\cftsubsecfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\empty}
+% \begin{macro}{\renewcommand}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But if we use the font commands of the \class{memoir} class, it works!
+% \or\relax
+% Mais si nous utilisons les commandes de fontes de la classe \class{memoir}, cela marche!
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand{\cftsecfont}{\empty}
+\providecommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\empty}
+\renewcommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\normalsize\rmfamily\scshape}
+\renewcommand{\cftsubsecfont}{\normalsize\rmfamily\scshape}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But for mini-table titles (font and text), we can use the \upack{minitoc} commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Mais pour les titres des mini-tables (fonte et texte), nous pouvons utiliser les commandes de \upack{minitoc}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mtcsettitlefont{minitoc}{\Large\scshape}
+%%  this is working beautifully ->
+\mtcsettitle{minitoc}{Chapter Contents}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents*}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The document body:
+% \or\relax
+% Le corps du document:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}
+\dominitoc \tableofcontents*
+
+\chapter[OneA][OneB]{OneC}
+\minitoc
+\section{This section} \lipsum[1]
+\section{Second section} \lipsum[2]
+\section{Third section} \lipsum[3]
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-mm1>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{9}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-mu.tex} document file}\label{mtc-mu.tex}\iexam{mtc-mu.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-mu.tex}}\label{mtc-mu.tex}\iexam{mtc-mu.tex}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document,
+% the minitoc being inserted in the text with the \pack{wrapfig} package~\cite{wrapfig}.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document,
+% la minitoc étant incrustée dans le texte grâce au paquetage \pack{wrapfig}~\cite{wrapfig}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-mu>
+\documentclass[12pt]{report}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-mu.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
+\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt}
+\usepackage{wrapfig}
+\newcommand{\LangSig}[1]{\textsc{[#1]}} % smallcaps
+\begin{document}
+\dominitoc \tableofcontents
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{7}
+% \begin{environment}{wrapfigure}
+% \begin{environment}{minipage}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\linewidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\vspace}
+% \begin{macro}{\baselineskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A chapter, with its minitoc set in a \env{minipage}, included in a \env{wrapfigure} environment on the half
+% of the text width, with some vertical adjustements:
+% \or\relax
+% Un chapitre, avec sa minitoc composée dans une \env{minipage}, incluse dans un environnement \env{wrapfigure}
+% sur la moitié de la largeur du texte, avec quelques ajustements verticaux:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter{Mulspren}\label{chapter+mulspren}
+\begin{wrapfigure}{r}{0.5\linewidth}
+\begin{minipage}{\linewidth}
+\vspace{-2.\baselineskip}
+\minitoc
+\vspace{-1.\baselineskip}
+\end{minipage}
+\end{wrapfigure}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The remaining of the text:
+% \or\relax
+% Le reste du texte:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+The previous chapter examined many end-user programming environments
+and found that most contain cognitive programming gulfs.
+These gulfs were often created when programing environments used
+multiple notations, and could manifest themselves in a variety of
+usability problems, ranging from users being unable to understand
+a program representation, to not wanting to execute their programs.
+Conversely, the previous chapter also found circumstances where multiple
+notations helped users understand programs.
+It concluded that there was a place for multiple notation programming
+environments, but developers had to be very careful to avoid creating
+programming gulfs.
+It concluded that there was a place for multiple notation programming
+environments, but developers had to be very careful to avoid creating
+programming gulfs.
+
+This chapter introduces our programming environment, Mulspren.
+Mulspren was designed to avoid these gulfs and gain the potential
+benefits of multiple notations.
+Users program using two notations, one similar to English and one
+similar to conventional code.
+Changes in one notation are immediately reflected in the other notation,
+and users can move rapidly and seamlessly between the notations.
+This is programming using dual notations.
+When the program is executed, both notations are animated.
+Mulspren's language signature is \LangSig{Re/Wr/Wa + Re/Wr/Wa + Wa}.
+
+Papers describing Mulspren have been published in~\cite{Wright02-2}
+and~\cite{Wright03-3}.
+
+\section{section 1}
+\section{section 2 bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla
+bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla}
+\section{section 3}
+\section{section 4}
+\section{section 5 bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla bla
+bla bla bla bla bla}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{environment}{thebibliography}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibitem}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% I tried to find some articles of the net to fill the citations:
+% \or\relax
+% J'ai essayé de trouver quelques articles pour remplir les citations:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{thebibliography}{1}
+\bibitem{Wright02-2}
+Tim Wright and Andy Cockburn.
+\newblock Mulspren: a multiple language simulation programming
+  environment.
+\newblock In {\em HCC '02: Proceedings of the IEEE 2002 Symposia
+  on Human Centric Computing Languages and Environments (HCC'02)},
+  page 101, Washington, DC, USA, 2002. IEEE Computer Society.
+
+\bibitem{Wright03-3}
+Tim Wright and Andy Cockburn.
+\newblock Evaluation of two textual programming notations for children.
+\newblock In {\em AUIC '05: Proceedings of the Sixth Australasian
+  conference on User interface}, pages 55--62, Darlinghurst, Australia,
+  Australia, 2005.
+  Australian Computer Society, Inc.
+\end{thebibliography}
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-mu>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-nom.tex} document file}\label{mtc-nom.tex}\iexam{mtc-nom.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-nom.tex}}\label{mtc-nom.tex}\iexam{mtc-nom.tex}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document\,\footnote{It is derived from the example given in the documentation of \pack{nomencl}.} shows
+% the interaction of the \upack{minitoc} package with the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl},
+% when this package uses its option \optp{intoc}{nomencl}.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document\,\footnote{Il est dérivé de l'exemple donné dans la documentation de \pack{nomencl}.} montre
+% l'interaction du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl}, lorsque celui-ci
+% utilise son option \optp{intoc}{nomencl}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-nom>
+\documentclass[oneside]{book}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-nom.tex}%
+  [2007/04/02]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\makenomenclature}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We load the packages and prepare the nomenclature:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous chargeons les paquetages et préparons la nomenclature:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\usepackage[intoc]{nomencl}
+\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
+\makenomenclature
+\begin{document}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We prepare the minitocs and the table of contents:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous préparons les minitocs et la table des matières:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\dominitoc
+\tableofcontents
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomenclature}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A first chapter, with its minitoc, a section and some
+% entries for the nomenclature:
+% \or\relax
+% Un premier chapitre, avec sa minitoc, une section et
+% quelques entrées pour la nomenclature:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter{Angels}
+\minitoc
+\section{Main equations}
+\begin{equation}
+  a=\frac{N}{A}
+\end{equation}%
+\nomenclature{$a$}{The number of angels per unit area}%
+\nomenclature{$N$}{The number of angels per needle point}%
+\nomenclature{$A$}{The area of the needle point}%
+The equation $\sigma = m a$%
+\nomenclature{$\sigma$}{The total mass of angels per unit area}%
+\nomenclature{$m$}{The mass of one angel}
+follows easily.
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\printnomenclature}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We print the nomenclature; but that adds a chapter entry in
+% the TOC because of the \optp{intoc}{nomencl} option of the
+% \pack{nomencl}, hence we add a correction with
+% \com{mtcfixnomenclature} (try to remove the correction and
+% look at the result: the next minitocs are wrong):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous imprimons la nomenclature; mais ceci ajoute une entrée
+% de chapitre dans la table des matières à~cause de
+% l'option \optp{intoc}{nomencl} de \pack{nomencl}, donc nous
+% ajoutons une correction avec \com{mtcfixnomenclature} (essayez
+% de retirer correction et regardez le résultat: les minitocs
+% suivantes sont fausses):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\printnomenclature \mtcfixnomenclature
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomenclature}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A second chapter, with its minitoc, a section, and an entry
+% in the nomenclature. This entry will be present in the
+% nomenclature printed above.
+% \or\relax
+% Un second chapitre, avec sa minitoc, une section, et une
+% entrée dans la nomenclature. Cette entrée sera présente dans la
+% nomenclature imprimée plus haut.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter{Demons}
+\minitoc
+\section{False equations}
+\begin{equation} i=\sqrt{-1} \end{equation}
+\nomenclature{$i$}{The imaginary unit}%
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-nom>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ocf.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ocf.tex}\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ocf.tex}}\label{mtc-ocf.tex}\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document shows the use of the \feat{open} and
+% \feat{close} features of the \upack{minitoc} package
+% to prepare a minitoc on three columns.
+% The old package \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} is used to have a wide text area.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document montre l'utilisation des dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close} du paquetage \upack{minitoc}
+% pour préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes.
+% Le vieux paquetage \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} est utilisé pour avoir une grande zone de texte.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-ocf>
+\documentclass[oneside]{book}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-ocf.tex}%
+ [2007/04/02]
+\usepackage{multicol} % to make multi-columns.
+\usepackage[french]{babel}
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[OT1,TS1,T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage{fullpage}
+% to allow a page breaks before a section
+\let\osection\section \def\section{\penalty-1\relax\osection}
+%
+\usepackage[french,tight]{minitoc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
+% \begin{environment}{multicols}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\feat{open}'' feature for minitocs opens a \env{multicols}
+% environment, with 3~columns:
+% \or\relax
+% Le dispositif «~\feat{open}~» pour les minitocs ouvre un
+% environnement \env{multicols}, avec 3~colonnes:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{3}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
+% \begin{environment}{multicols}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\feat{close}'' feature for minitocs close the \env{multicols} environment:
+% \or\relax
+% Le dispositif «~\feat{close}~» pour les minitocs ferme l'environnement \env{multicols}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As the \env{multicols} environment adds some vertical spacing before and after it, we added some corrections.
+%
+% \or\relax
+% Comme l'environnement \env{multicols} ajoute un peu d'espacement avant et après lui, nous avons ajouté quelques
+% corrections.
+
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedcolumns}
+% \begin{macro}{\flushcolumns}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As the number of sections is not a multiple of three (or some entries are long), we cannot always balance the
+% columns nicely, so we use ragged columns, using the ``\feat{before}'' and ``\feat{after}'' features:
+% \or\relax
+% Comme le nombre de sections n'est pas un multiple de trois (ou lorsque certaines entrées sont longues), nous ne
+% pouvons pas toujours équilibrer les colonnes agréablement, donc nous utilisons des colonnes inégales, grâce aux
+% dispositifs «~\feat{before}~» et «~\feat{after}~»:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{before}{\raggedcolumns}
+\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{after}{\flushcolumns}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And the body of the document, a chapter with many sections,
+% listed in a~minitoc:
+% \or\relax
+% Et le corps du document, un chapitre avec beaucoup de
+% sections, listées dans une minitoc:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}
+\dominitoc
+\tableofcontents
+\chapter{Premier chapitre}
+\minitoc
+% A lot of sections
+\section{Alfa}
+\section{Bravo}
+\section{Charlie}
+\section{Delta}
+\section{Echo}
+\section{Fox-Trot}
+\section{Golf}
+\section{Hotel}
+\section{India}
+\section{Juliet}
+\section{Kilo}
+\section{Lima}
+\section{Mike}
+\section{November}
+\section{Oscar}
+\section{Papa}
+\section{Quebec}
+\section{Romeo}
+\section{Sierra}
+\section{Tango}
+\section{Uniform}
+\section{Victor}
+\section{Whiskey}
+\section{X-Ray}
+\section{Yankee}
+\section{Zulu}
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-ocf>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-ofs.tex} document file}\label{mtc-ofs.tex}\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-ofs.tex}}\label{mtc-ofs.tex}\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document shows the use of the \com{mtcsetoffset} command to shift a minitoc to the left, trying to put it
+% along the left margin of the text. The \feat{open} and \feat{close} features of the \upack{minitoc} package are
+% also used to prepare the minitoc on three columns.
+% The old package \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} is used to have a wide text area.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document montre l'utilisation de la commande \com{mtcsetoffset} pour décaler vers la gauche une minitoc, en
+% essayant de la placer le long de la marge gauche du texte. Les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close} du
+% paquetage \upack{minitoc} sont aussi utilisés pour préparer la  minitoc sur trois colonnes.
+% Le vieux paquetage \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} est utilisé pour avoir une grande zone de texte.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-ofs>
+\documentclass[a4paper]{book}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-ofs.tex}%
+  [2007/04/17]
+\usepackage{lipsum}
+\usepackage{multicol}
+\usepackage{fullpage}
+%\usepackage[a4paper]{geometry}
+\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\setlength}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedcolumns}
+% \begin{macro}{\flushcolumns}
+% \begin{environment}{multicols}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We remove the minitoc indentation and set up the \feat{open} and \feat{close} features:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous retirons l'indentation de la minitoc et mettons en place les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt}
+\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\kern1sp\vspace*{-.1ex}\begin{multicols}{4}[\kern-2.5ex]}
+\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\kern-2.ex}
+\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{before}{\raggedcolumns}
+\mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{after}{\flushcolumns}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We begin the document with a chapter and its minitoc:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous commençons le document par un chapitre et sa minitoc:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}
+\dominitoc \faketableofcontents
+\chapter{Introduction}
+\minitoc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As the minitoc is not aligned on the left margin of the text, we set a negative offset and print again the minitoc:
+% \or\relax
+% Comme la minitoc n'est pas alignée sur la marge gauche du texte, nous établissons un décalage négatif et
+% ré-imprimons la minitoc:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-1.75em}
+\mtcskip \minitoc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\setlength}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But then the minitoc does not use the full width of the text; it would be better to modify both the offset and the
+% indentation, each by the half of the total correction:
+% \or\relax
+% Mais alors la minitoc n'utilise pas toute la largeur du texte; il serait mieux de modifier à~la fois le décalage
+% et l'indentation, par moitiés de la correction nécessaire:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.875em}
+\setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.875em}
+\mtcskip \minitoc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then a lot of sections, with some text:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis un tas de sections, avec du texte quelconque:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\section{Alfa}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Bravo}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Charlie}  \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Delta}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Echo}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Fox-Trot} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Golf}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Hotel}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{India}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Juliet}   \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Kilo}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Lima}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Mike}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{November} \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Oscar}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Papa}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Quebec}   \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Romeo}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Sierra}   \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Tango}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Uniform}  \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Victor}   \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Whiskey}  \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{X-Ray}    \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Yankee}   \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\section{Zulu}     \lipsum[\arabic{section}]
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-ofs>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \textbf{Note:}\virage{} if you add a sub-section in this example, the corresponding entry in the minitoc
+% may stick out if it appears in the last column, and the offset and the indentation should then be corrected again.
+% \or\relax
+% \textbf{Note:}\virage{} si vous ajoutez une sous-section dans cet exemple, l'entrée correspondante dans la minitoc
+% peut dépasser si elle apparaît dans la dernière colonne, et alors le décalage et l'indentation doivent de
+% nouveau être corrigés.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-sbf.tex} document file}\label{mtc-sbf.tex}\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-sbf.tex}}\label{mtc-sbf.tex}\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\l@subfigure}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedxxxline}
+% \begin{macro}{\ext@subfigure}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a document containing subfigures (here with the
+% \pack{subfigure} package~\cite{subfigure}). We show how to use minilofs and to adjust their depth.
+%
+% The preamble loads the \pack{subfigure} package and redefines the format of subfigure entries in the list of figures:
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec un document contenant des sous-figures
+% (ici avec le paquetage \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure}). Nous montrons comment utiliser des minilofs et
+% ajuster leur profondeur.
+%
+% Le préambule charge le paquetage \pack{subfigure} et redéfinit le format des entrées des sous-figures dans la
+% liste des figures:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-sbf>
+\documentclass[12pt]{report}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-sbf.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+\usepackage{subfigure}
+\makeatletter
+\renewcommand{\l@subfigure}{\@dottedxxxline{\ext@subfigure}{2}{3.9em}{3.3em}}
+\makeatother
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We load the \pack{varioref}~\cite{varioref} package (to have nice cross-references) and the \upack{minitoc} package:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous chargeons le paquetage \pack{varioref}~\cite{varioref} (pour avoir de meilleures références croisées) et le
+% paquetage \upack{minitoc}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\usepackage{varioref}
+\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\newcommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\goodap}
+% \begin{macro}{\subfigtopskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\subfigbottomskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define some features for the layout of the subfigures, then the depth of the list of figures:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons quelques dispositifs pour la mise en place des sous-figures, puis la profondeur de la liste des
+% figures:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\goodap}{%
+  \hspace{\subfigtopskip}%
+  \hspace{\subfigbottomskip}}
+\setcounter{lofdepth}{2}
+\begin{document}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the depth of the mini-lists of figures, then some fonts:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons la profondeur des mini-listes des figures, puis quelques fontes:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mtcsetdepth{minilof}{2}
+\mtcsetfont{minitoc}{section}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
+\mtcsetfont{partlof}{subfigure}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries}
+\mtcsetfont{partlof}{figure}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
+\mtcsetfont{minilof}{subfigure}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries}
+\mtcsetfont{minilof}{figure}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
+%% no tables in this document
+%% \mtcsetfont{partlot}{subtable}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries}
+%% \mtcsetfont{partlot}{table}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
+%% \mtcsetfont{minilot}{subtable}{\small\rmfamily\slshape\bfseries}
+%% \mtcsetfont{minilot}{table}{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We prepare the minilofs, the table of contents and the list of figures:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous préparons les minilofs, la table des matières et la liste des figures:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\dominilof \listoffigures \tableofcontents
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A chapter, with is minilof, twice but with different depths:
+% \or\relax
+% Un chapitre, avec sa minilof, deux fois mais avec des profondeurs différentes:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter{First Chapter}
+\minilof \mtcskip
+\mtcsetdepth{minilof}{1} \minilof
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A figure containing three subfigures and their captions:
+% \or\relax
+% Une figure contenant trois sous-figures et leurs captions:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{figure}
+\centering
+   \fbox{%
+     \begin{minipage}{3.5in}%
+       \raggedright
+       \begin{center}
+         \subfigure[First]{%
+           \fbox{\hbox to 20mm{\vbox to 15mm{\vfil\null}\hfil}}}%
+           \hspace{\subfigtopskip}\hspace{\subfigbottomskip}%
+         \subfigure[Second Figure]{%
+           \fbox{\hbox to 20mm{\vbox to 10mm{\vfil\null}\hfil}}}\\
+         \subfigure[Third]{\label{3figs-c}%
+           \fbox{\hbox to 20mm{\vbox to 10mm{\vfil\null}\hfil}}}\\
+         \caption{Three subfigures.}\label{3figs}%
+       \end{center}
+       \vspace{4pt}%
+       This figure contains two top `subfigures' and
+       Figure~\ref{3figs-c}.
+       \end{minipage}}
+\end{figure}
+Figure~\vref{3figs} contains two top ``subfigures'' and
+Figure~\vref{3figs-c}.
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-sbf>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-scr.tex} document file}\label{mtc-scr.tex}\iexam{mtc-scr.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-scr.tex}}\label{mtc-scr.tex}\iexam{mtc-scr.tex}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a {\KOMAScript} document class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3},
+% \class{scrreprt}.
+% Some precautions are needed, because these classes have specific interfaces with the TOC (class options and
+% commands).
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une classe de document
+% {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3},
+% \class{scrreprt}. Certaines précautions sont nécessaires, car ces classes ont des interfaces spécifiques avec la
+% table des matières (options de classe et commandes).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-scr>
+\documentclass[12pt,halfparskip,liststotoc,bibtotoc]{scrreprt}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-scr.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{4}
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+\usepackage{longtable}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \pack{hyperref} package, if used, must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}:
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, s'il est utilisé, doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbering}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% With a {\KOMAScript} class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, use the \opt{k-tight} package option in place of \opt{tight};
+% as it is a document in german, use also a language package option:
+% \or\relax
+% Avec une classe {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, utilisez l'option de paquetage \opt{k-tight} au lieu
+% de \opt{tight}; comme c'est un document en allemand, utilisez aussi une option de langue pour le paquetage:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\usepackage[k-tight,germanb]{minitoc}
+\usepackage[germanb]{babel}
+\begin{document}
+\pagenumbering{Roman} % page number in Roman, reset to 1 (I)
+\dominitoc \tableofcontents
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% In this document class, with the \optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script} class option, the \com{listoftables} macro
+% adds a chapter entry in
+% the TOC, so we must add \com{mtcaddchapter} after \com{listoftables}:
+% \or\relax
+% Dans cette classe de document, avec l'option de classe \optp{liststotoc}{KOMA-Script}, la macro \com{listoftables} ajoute une
+% entrée de niveau chapitre dans la table des matières, donc nous devons ajouter \com{mtcaddchapter}
+% après \com{listoftables}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\listoftables \mtcaddchapter
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\pagenumbering}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% With the \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script} class option, it is necessary to add a \com{adjustmtc} command after \com{bibliography}.
+% This problem is similar to the one of compatibility with the \pack{tocbibind} package.
+% \or\relax
+% Avec l'option de classe \optp{bibtotoc}{KOMA-Script}, il est nécessaire d'ajouter une commande \com{adjustmtc}
+% après \com{bibliography}.
+% Ce problème est similaire à~celui de la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\clearpage
+\pagenumbering{arabic} % page number in arabic digits
+\setcounter{page}{1} % forced to 1
+
+\chapter{Test 1}\label{cha:test-1}
+
+Text.
+
+\section{Tabelle}\label{sec:tabelle}
+
+\begin{table}
+  \centering
+  \begin{longtable}[l]{ll}
+  \underline{Ausbildungsbetrieb}  \hspace{10mm} & Kommanditgesellschaft
+\\
+  \underline{Ausbildender} & Hammer \\
+  Ausbildungsstätte & XXXXX Ort
+  \end{longtable}
+  \caption{Ausbildungsbetrieb}
+\end{table}
+
+Text.
+
+\appendix
+\chapter{Dokumente}
+\minitoc % Aufruf Minitoc
+
+\section{Anhang}\label{sec:anhang}
+Text.\\
+Hier sollte nun der Anhang sein, davor das Verzeichnis dafür.
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-scr>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-syn.tex} document file}\label{mtc-syn.tex}\iexam{mtc-syn.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-syn.tex}}\label{mtc-syn.tex}\iexam{mtc-syn.tex}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package when
+% the table of contents is not at the beginning of the
+% document, but is preceded by some starred chapters.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}
+% lorsque la table des matières n'est pas au début du
+% document, mais est placée après quelques chapitres étoilés.
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We have the preamble, then we invoke \com{dominitoc} to
+% prepare the minitocs:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous avons le préambule, puis nous invoquons \com{dominitoc}
+% pour préparer les minitocs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-syn>
+\documentclass[a4paper,twoside,12pt]{book}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-syn.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+\usepackage{minitoc}
+\begin{document}
+\dominitoc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter*}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some starred chapters, with calls to \com{mtcaddchapter}
+% to synchronize. The optional argument is used when an entry
+% in the ToC is wanted:
+% \or\relax
+% Quelques chapitres étoilés, avec des appels
+% à~\com{mtcaddchapter} pour synchroniser. L'argument
+% optionnel est utilisé lorsque quune entrée dans la table des
+% matières est désirée:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter*{ } % Dedication chapter, no title
+\mtcaddchapter           % Added for a starred chapter
+                         % without entry in the ToC
+Dedication goes here
+
+\chapter*{Abstract}
+\mtcaddchapter[Abstract] % Added for a starred chapter
+                         % with an entry in the ToC
+Abstract goes here
+
+\chapter*{Declaration}
+\mtcaddchapter[Declaration] % Added for a starred chapter
+                            % with an entry in the ToC
+Declaration goes here
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The table of contents comes here. Looking at the
+% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file shows that the minitoc files inserted
+% after here are from one chapter to far: we add a correction.
+% \or\relax
+% La table des matières vient ici. En regardant le fichier
+% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, nous voyons que les fichiers minitoc insérés
+% après ce point correspondent à~un chapitre de trop: nous ajoutons
+% une correction:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\tableofcontents \decrementmtc % Synchro added (look at the .log file)
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The following chapters are normal (unstarred):
+% \or\relax
+% Les chapitres suivants sont normaux (non étoilés):
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter{Chapter One}
+\minitoc
+\section{Section 1} Some text.
+\section{Section 2} Some text.
+
+\chapter{Chapter Two}
+\minitoc
+\section{Another Section 1}
+Some more text.
+\section{Another Section 2}
+Some more text.
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-syn>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tbi.tex} document file}\label{mtc-tbi.tex}\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tbi.tex}}\label{mtc-tbi.tex}\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a document using
+% the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec un document utilisant le
+% paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}.
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-tbi>
+\documentclass[a4paper]{report}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-tbi.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We dont want an entry for the TOC in the TOC: option \optp{nottoc}{tocbibind} for the \pack{tocbibind} package:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous ne voulons pas d'entrée pour la table des matières dans la table des matières: option \optp{nottoc}{tocbibind} pour
+% le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\usepackage[nottoc]{tocbibind}
+\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
+\begin{document}
+\dominitoc \tableofcontents
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As there is no entry for the TOC in the TOC, no correction is necessary; we comment out the usual
+% correction\,\footnote{It is recommended to keep this comment; you could change your mind.}:
+% \or\relax
+% Puisqu'il n'y a pas d'entrée pour la table des matières dans la table des matières, aucune correction n'est
+% nécessaire: nous mettons la correction habituelle en commentaire\,\footnote{Il est recommandé de conserver ce
+% commentaire; vous pourriez changer d'avis.}:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%% tocbibind compatibility
+%% not used if nottoc option :
+%% \mtcaddchapter[]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter*}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A starred chapter with an entry in the TOC; we add it;
+% \or\relax
+% Un chapitre étoilé avec une entrée dans la table des matières; nous l'ajoutons:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter*{Introduction}
+\mtcaddchapter[Introduction]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some normal chapters:
+% \or\relax
+% Quelques chapitres normaux:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter{Title of chapter~1}
+\minitoc
+\section{as1} \section{as2}
+\chapter{Title of chapter~2}
+\minitoc
+\section{bs1} \section{bs2}
+\chapter{Title of chapter~3}
+\minitoc
+\section{cs1} \section{cs2}
+\chapter{Title of chapter~4}
+\minitoc
+\section{ds1} \section{ds2}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{4}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter*}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Another starred chapter, with an entry in the TOC:
+% \or\relax
+% Un autre chapitre étoilé, avec une entrée dans la table des matières:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter*{Conclusion}
+\mtcaddchapter[Conclusion]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter*}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\section*}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Yet another starred chapter, with an entry in the TOC, but with starred sections, also listed in the TOC:
+% \or\relax
+% Encore un autre chapitre étoilé, avec une entrée dans la table des matières, mais avec des sections étoilées,
+% elles aussi listées dans la table des matières:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter*{Appendices}
+\mtcaddchapter[Appendices]
+\minitoc
+\section*{first appendix}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}%
+  {first appendix}
+\section*{second appendix}
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}%
+  {second appendix}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The list of figures has an entry in the TOC (via the \pack{tocbibind} package), so a correction must be applied:
+% \or\relax
+% La liste des figures a une entrée dans la table des matières (via le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}), donc une
+% correction doit être appliquée:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%% tocbibind compatibility
+\listoffigures \mtcaddchapter
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{environment}{thebibliography}
+% \begin{macro}{\bibitem}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \pack{tocbibind} package adds an entry in the TOC for the bibliography, so we must add the recommended
+% correction:
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \pack{tocbibind} ajoute une entrée dans la table des matières pour la bibliographie, donc nous
+% devons ajouter la correction recommandée:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{thebibliography}{3}
+   \bibitem {s1}{title ...}
+\end{thebibliography}
+%% tocbibind compatibility
+\adjustmtc
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-tbi>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tlc.tex} document file}\label{mtc-tlc.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tlc.tex}}\label{mtc-tlc.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document shows the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of the \class{article} class.
+% It is the example of~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernized.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document de classe \class{article}.
+% C'est l'exemple de~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernisé.
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-tlc>
+\documentclass{article}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-tlc.tex}%
+  [2007/01/04]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\setlength}
+% \begin{macro}{\textwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\textheight}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Dimensions of the text on the page:
+% \or\relax
+% Dimensions du texte sur la page:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength{\textwidth}%
+   {124.20126pt}
+\setlength{\textheight}%
+   {19\baselineskip}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{4}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\setlength}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We load the \upack{minitoc} package and set some parameters (indentation, base font and depth) for the secttocs:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous chargeons le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et établissons quelques paramètres (indentation, fonte de base et
+% profondeur) pour les secttocs:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\usepackage{minitoc}
+\setlength{\stcindent}{0pt}
+\mtcsetfont{secttoc}{*}%
+   {\footnotesize}
+\mtcsetdepth{secttoc}{3}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We prepare the secttocs, without title, and the table of contents which is not printed:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous préparons les secttocs, sans titre, et la table des matières qui n'est pas imprimée:
+% \fi
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}
+\dosecttoc[e] \faketableofcontents
+
+\section{Afghanistan} \secttoc
+\subsection{Geography}
+\subsubsection{Total area}
+    647,500 km2
+\subsubsection{Land area}
+    647,500 km2
+\subsection{History} \ldots
+
+\section{Albania} \secttoc
+\subsection{Geography}
+\subsubsection{Total area}
+    28,750 km2
+\subsubsection{Land area}
+    27,400 km2
+\subsection{History} \ldots
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-tlc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{multicols}}%
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tlo.tex} document file}\label{1mtc-tlo.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex}
+% The \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} document file is described in section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tlo.tex}}\label{1mtc-tlo.tex}\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex}
+% Le document \exam{mtc-tlo.tex} est décrit dans la section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-tsf.tex} document file}\label{mtc-tsf.tex}\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-tsf.tex}}\label{mtc-tsf.tex}\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This document\footnote{It is derived from one of the examples distributed with
+% the \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}.} shows
+% the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a document containing subfigures (here with the
+% \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}). We show how to use minilofs and to adjust their depth.
+% The old package \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} is used to have a wide text area.
+%
+% The preamble loads the \pack{subfig} package and redefines the format of subfigure entries in the list of figures:
+% \or\relax
+% Ce document\,\footnote{Il est dérivé de l'un des exemples distribués avec le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}.}
+% montre l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec un document contenant des sous-figures
+% (ici avec le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}). Nous montrons comment utiliser des minilofs et
+% ajuster leur profondeur.
+% Le vieux paquetage \pack{fullpage}~\cite{fullpage} est utilisé pour avoir une grande zone de texte.
+%
+% Le préambule charge le paquetage \pack{subfig} et redéfinit le format des entrées des sous-figures dans la
+% liste des figures:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-tsf>
+\documentclass{report}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-tsf.tex}[2008/04/03]%
+\usepackage{fullpage}
+\usepackage[config=altsf]{subfig}
+\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This is utility code to make graduated rules and a box around a figure.
+% \or\relax
+% Ceci est du code utilitaire pour faire un trait gradué et une boîte autour d'une figure.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\testtemp
+\newcommand{\ru}[1]{%
+  \testtemp #1%
+  \advance\testtemp .5pt \divide\testtemp 2%
+  \hbox to \testtemp{\leaders\hbox to 1mm{%
+    \vrule height1mm depth0pt width.25pt\hfil}\hfil}%
+  \hbox to 0pt{\hss\vrule height3mm depth0pt width.25pt\hss}%
+  \hbox to \testtemp{\leaders\hbox to 1mm{%
+    \hfil\vrule height1mm depth0pt width.25pt}\hfil}}
+%%
+\fboxsep=-\fboxrule
+\newcommand{\figbox}[1]{%
+  \fbox{\vbox to 1in{%
+      \vfil\hbox to 2in{\parbox{2in}{\centering #1}}\vfil
+      \vbox to 0pt{\vss\hbox to 2in{\hfil\ru{1.1in}\hfil}}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The body of the document. We set the depth of the list of figures and prepare the minilofs and the list of
+% figures:
+% \or\relax
+% Le corps du document. Nous définissons la profondeur de la liste des figures et préparons les minilofs et la liste
+% des figures:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begin{document}
+\setcounter{lofdepth}{2} \dominilof \listoffigures
+\newpage
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A chapter containing a figure with subfigures. We print its minilof twice, with different depths:
+% \or\relax
+% Un chapitre contenant une figure avec des sous-figures. Nous imprimons sa minilof deux fois, avec des
+% profondeurs différentes:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter{Reference Test}
+\minilof \mtcskip
+\mtcsetdepth{minilof}{1}
+\minilof
+
+\begin{figure}[ht]%
+  \centering
+  \subfigure{%
+    \label{fig+A}\figbox{SUBFIGURE ONE:\\(no opt)}}
+  \quad
+  \subfigure[]{%
+    \label{fig+B}\figbox{SUBFIGURE TWO:\\(empty opt)}}\\
+
+  \subfigure[Subfigure Three.]{%
+    \label{fig+C}\figbox{SUBFIGURE THREE:\\(opt)}}
+  \quad
+  \subfigure[][Subfigure Four.]{%
+    \label{fig+D}\figbox{SUBFIGURE FOUR:\\(empty opt and opt)}}
+  \quad
+  \subfigure[][]{%
+    \label{fig+E}\figbox{SUBFIGURE FIVE:\\(both empty opt)}}\\
+
+  \subfigure[The Sixth Subfigure.][Subfigure Six.]{%
+    \label{fig+F}\figbox{SUBFIGURE SIX:\\(both opt)}}
+  \quad
+  \subfigure[The Seventh Subfigure][]{%
+    \label{fig+G}\figbox{SUBFIGURE SEVEN:\\(opt and empty opt)}}
+
+  \caption{Optional argument test.}%
+  \label{fig+main}%
+\end{figure}
+
+The figure~\ref{fig+main} on page~\pageref{fig+main} is composed
+of the seven subfigures~\subref{fig+A} (aka: \ref{fig+A}),
+\subref{fig+B} (aka: \ref{fig+B}), \subref{fig+C} (aka: \ref{fig+C}),
+\subref{fig+D} (aka: \ref{fig+D}), \subref{fig+E} (aka: \ref{fig+E}),
+\subref{fig+F} (aka: \ref{fig+F}), and \subref{fig+G} (aka: \ref{fig+G}).
+
+\section{Centering Test}
+Note that figures~\ref{fig+B}, \ref{fig+E} and \ref{fig+G} are centered.
+This means that \verb|\subfigcapskip| has been set to zero and is not
+offsetting the simple label to the left.  Also the remaining captioned
+subfigures (figures~\ref{fig+C}, \ref{fig+D}, and \ref{fig+F}) should
+have centered labels.
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-tsf>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \flushcolumns
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uexam{mtc-vti.tex} document file}\label{mtc-vti.tex}\iexam{mtc-vti.tex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le document \uexam{mtc-vti.tex}}\label{mtc-vti.tex}\iexam{mtc-vti.tex}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \exam{mtc-vti.tex} example shows how to change the sectionnal titles when they appear in a mini-table: a
+% section title (or a chapter title) can have variants in a parttoc or in a minitoc (similar effects are possible
+% with figure ou table titles). Such entries are said ``polymorphic'' (section~\vref{ss+polym}).
+% First, the preamble of the document, with utility packages:
+% \or\relax
+% L'exemple \exam{mtc-vti.tex} montre comment changer des titres de sectionnements lorsqu'ils apparaissent dans
+% une mini-table: un titre de section (ou de chapitre) peut avoir des variantes dans une parttoc ou une minitoc
+% (des effets similaires sont possibles avec des titres de figures ou de tableaux).
+% De telles entrées sont dites «~polymorphes~» (section~\vref{ss+polym}).
+% Tout d'abord, le préambule du document, avec les paquetages utilitaires:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtc-vti>
+\documentclass[10pt,a4paper,oneside]{book}
+\ProvidesFile{mtc-vti.tex}[2008/06/26]%
+\usepackage{lipsum}
+\usepackage{txfonts}
+\usepackage[tight]{minitoc}
+\begin{document}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the demonstration, we will use a parttoc and a minitoc, so we must prepare them:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour la démonstration, nous utiliserons une parttoc et une minitoc, donc nous devons les préparer:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\dominitoc
+\doparttoc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We will use a multi-form title for the first section: a form to appear in the parttoc (``Alfa in parttoc''),
+% a form to appear in the minitoc of the chapter (``Alfa in minitoc''), a form to appear elsewhere (``Alfa out subtoc''),
+% and a form as title at the beginning othe section (``Alfa the first section''). So we define a command
+% \ucom{alfati} using the flags \com{ifinparttoc} and \com{ifinminitoc} to select which title is used in each of
+% its instances.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous utiliserons un titre multi-forme pour la première section: une forme devant apparaître dans la parttoc
+% («~Alfa in parttoc~»), une forme pour apparaître dans la minitoc du chapitre (<<~Alfa in minitoc~»),
+% une forme pour apparaître ailleurs («~Alfa out subtoc~»), et une forme comme titre en début de la section
+% («~Alfa the first section~»). Donc nous définissons une commande \ucom{alfati} utilisant les
+% indicateurs \com{ifinparttoc} et \com{ifinminitoc} pour sélectionner le titre à~utiliser dans chacune des ses instances.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\alfati{\ifinparttoc Alfa in parttoc
+                   \else\ifinminitoc Alfa in minitoc
+                        \else Alfa out subtoc
+                        \fi
+                   \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But we can define a more general macro, \ucom{varsecti}, with three arguments for the three variants
+% of a section title\,\footnote{You will eventually need to define similar macros for other sectionning commands or for
+% figures or table titles; proceed with care from this model.}:
+% \or\relax
+% Mais nous pouvons définir une macro plus générale, \ucom{varsecti}, avec trois arguments pour les trois variantes
+% d'un titre de section\,\footnote{Vous aurez éventuellement besoin de définir des macros similaires pour d'autres
+% commandes de sectionnement ou pour les titres de figures ou de tableaux; procédez avec soin à~partir de ce modèle.}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\varsecti}[3]%
+          {\ifinparttoc{#1}\relax
+           \else\ifinminitoc{#2}\relax
+                \else{#3}\relax
+                \fi
+           \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then the document with a table of contents, a part with its parttoc and a chapter with its minitoc. And an other
+% chapter. You can verify that the entry for the ``Alfa'' section varies in the main toc, the parttoc, the
+% minitoc and the effective title of the section.
+% Note that the variable title (here \ucom{alfati}) should be defined \virage\emph{before} any use, like in the main
+% toc or any minitable.
+% \or\relax
+% Puis le document avec une table des matières, une partie avec sa parttoc et un chapitre avec sa minitoc. Puis un
+% autre chapitre. Vous pouvez vérifier que l'entrée pour la section «~Alfa~» change dans la table des matières
+% principale, la parttoc, la minitoc et dans le titre effectif de la section.
+% Notez que le titre variable (ici \ucom{alfati}) doit être défini \virage\emph{avant} toute utilisation, comme
+% dans la table des matières principale ou dans une des minitables.
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\protect}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\tableofcontents
+\part{Part~A}
+\parttoc
+
+\chapter{One}
+\minitoc
+\section[\protect\alfati]{Alfa the first section}
+\lipsum[1]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We can use the more general macro \ucom{varsecti}\,\footnote{This macro is not part of the \upack{minitoc} package, it is
+% just an example.}, with its three arguments given when the section begins; but that macro must
+% be \virage\emph{protected} (or look at the \pack{makerobust}~\cite{makerobust} package by \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}),
+% or declared ``robust'' by \com{DeclareRobustCommand} as above:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous pouvons utiliser la macro plus générale \ucom{varsecti}\,\footnote{Cette macro ne fait pas partie du paquetage
+% \upack{minitoc}, c'est simplement un exemple.}, avec ses trois arguments fournis lors du début de la section;
+% mais cette macro doit être \virage\emph{protégée} (ou regardez le paquetage \pack{makerobust}~\cite{makerobust}
+% de \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}), ou déclarée «~robuste~» par \com{DeclareRobustCommand} comme plus haut:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\section[\varsecti{Bravo in parttoc}%
+                          {Bravo in minitoc}%
+                          {Bravo out of subtoc}]% % in maintoc and headers
+        {Bravo the second section}   % local title
+\lipsum[2]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymtoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But is is even easier to use a ``polymorphic'' entry in the optionnal argument\,\footnote{They are no secttocs
+% in a book-class document, but all the four arguments of \com{mtcpolymtoc} must be specified, even empty!}:
+% \or\relax
+% Mais il est encore plus facile d'utiliser une entrée «~polymorphique~» dans l'argument optionnel\,\footnote{Il
+% n'y~a pas de secttocs dans un document de classe book, mais les quatre arguments de \com{mtcpolymtoc} doivent
+% tous être spécifiés, même vides!}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chapter{Two}
+\minitoc
+\section[\mtcpolymtoc%
+        {Charlie in parttoc}%
+        {Charlie in minitoc}%
+        {Charlie in secttoc}% % <- see/voir note 
+        {Charlie out subtoc}]%
+        {Charlie}
+\lipsum[3]
+\end{document}
+%</mtc-vti>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A  %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{Messages}\label{c+messages}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{Messages}\label{c+messages}
+% \fi
+% \minitoc
+% \mtcskip
+% \minilot
+% \mtcskip
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \def\mstrut{\rule[-5pt]{0pt}{5pt}}
+% \centering
+% \changeskips
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \caption[Message identifiers]{Message identifiers (click on a message identifier to see its meaning).}\label{t+allmess}
+% \or\relax
+% \caption[Identificateurs des messages]{Identificateurs des messages (cliquez sur un identificateur de message
+% pour voir sa signification).}\label{t+allmess}
+% \fi\relax
+% ^^A {\footnotesize\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}O{1}@{}}
+% {\footnotesize\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}X@{}c@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \mstrut\lmess{E0001}&&\lmess{E0002}&&\lmess{E0003}&&\lmess{E0004}&&\lmess{E0005}&&\lmess{E0006}&&\lmess{E0007}&&\lmess{E0008}&&\lmess{E0009}&&\lmess{E0010}\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{E0011}&&\lmess{E0012}&&\lmess{E0013}&&\lmess{E0014}&&\lmess{E0015}&&\lmess{E0016}&&\lmess{E0017}&&\lmess{E0018}&&\lmess{E0019}&&\lmess{E0020}\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{E0021}&&\lmess{E0022}&&\lmess{E0023}&&\lmess{E0024}&&\lmess{E0025}&&\lmess{E0026}&&\lmess{E0027}&&\lmess{E0028}&&\lmess{E0029}&&\lmess{E0030}\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{E0031}&&\lmess{E0032}&&\lmess{E0033}&&\lmess{E0034}&&\lmess{E0035}&&\lmess{E0036}&&\lmess{E0037}&&\lmess{E0038}&&\lmess{E0039}&&\lmess{E0040}\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{E0041}&&\lmess{E0042}&&\lmess{E0043}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\
+% \midrule
+% \mstrut\lmess{F0001}&&\lmess{F0002}&&\lmess{F0003}&&\lmess{F0004}&&\lmess{F0005}&&\lmess{F0006}&&\lmess{F0007}&&\lmess{F0008}&&\lmess{F0009}&&\\
+% \midrule
+% \mstrut\lmess{I0000}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{I0001}&&\lmess{I0002}&&\lmess{I0003}&&\lmess{I0004}&&\lmess{I0005}&&\lmess{I0006}&&\lmess{I0007}&&\lmess{I0008}&&\lmess{I0009}&&\lmess{I0010}\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{I0011}&&\lmess{I0012}&&\lmess{I0013}&&\lmess{I0014}&&\lmess{I0015}&&\lmess{I0016}&&\lmess{I0017}&&\lmess{I0018}&&\lmess{I0019}&&\lmess{I0020}\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{I0021}&&\lmess{I0022}&&\lmess{I0023}&&\lmess{I0024}&&\lmess{I0025}&&\lmess{I0026}&&\lmess{I0027}&&\lmess{I0028}&&\lmess{I0029}&&\lmess{I0030}\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{I0031}&&\lmess{I0032}&&\lmess{I0033}&&\lmess{I0034}&&\lmess{I0035}&&\lmess{I0036}&&\lmess{I0037}&&\lmess{I0038}&&\lmess{I0039}&&\lmess{I0040}\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{I0041}&&\lmess{I0042}&&\lmess{I0043}&&\lmess{I0044}&&\lmess{I0045}&&\lmess{I0046}&&\lmess{I0047}&&\lmess{I0048}&&\lmess{I0049}&&\lmess{I0050}\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{I0051}&&\lmess{I0052}&&\lmess{I0053}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\
+% \midrule
+% \mstrut\lmess{M0001}&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&\\
+% \midrule
+% \mstrut\lmess{W0001}&&\lmess{W0002}&&\lmess{W0003}&&\lmess{W0004}&&\lmess{W0005}&&\lmess{W0006}&&\lmess{W0007}&&\lmess{W0008}&&\lmess{W0009}&&\lmess{W0010}\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{W0011}&&\lmess{W0012}&&\lmess{W0013}&&\lmess{W0014}&&\lmess{W0015}&&\lmess{W0016}&&\lmess{W0017}&&\lmess{W0018}&&\lmess{W0019}&&\lmess{W0020}\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{W0021}&&\lmess{W0022}&&\lmess{W0023}&&\lmess{W0024}&&\lmess{W0025}&&\lmess{W0026}&&\lmess{W0027}&&\lmess{W0028}&&\lmess{W0029}&&\lmess{W0030}\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{W0031}&&\lmess{W0032}&&\lmess{W0033}&&\lmess{W0034}&&\lmess{W0035}&&\lmess{W0036}&&\lmess{W0037}&&\lmess{W0038}&&\lmess{W0039}&&\lmess{W0040}\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{W0041}&&\lmess{W0042}&&\lmess{W0043}&&\lmess{W0044}&&\lmess{W0045}&&\lmess{W0046}&&\lmess{W0047}&&\lmess{W0048}&&\lmess{W0049}&&\lmess{W0050}\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{W0051}&&\lmess{W0052}&&\lmess{W0053}&&\lmess{W0054}&&\lmess{W0055}&&\lmess{W0056}&&\lmess{W0057}&&\lmess{W0058}&&\lmess{W0059}&&\lmess{W0060}\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{W0061}&&\lmess{W0062}&&\lmess{W0063}&&\lmess{W0064}&&\lmess{W0065}&&\lmess{W0066}&&\lmess{W0067}&&\lmess{W0068}&&\lmess{W0069}&&\lmess{W0070}\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{W0071}&&\lmess{W0072}&&\lmess{W0073}&&\lmess{W0074}&&\lmess{W0075}&&\lmess{W0076}&&\lmess{W0077}&&\lmess{W0078}&&\lmess{W0079}&&\lmess{W0080}\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{W0081}&&\lmess{W0082}&&\lmess{W0083}&&\lmess{W0084}&&\lmess{W0085}&&\lmess{W0086}&&\lmess{W0087}&&\lmess{W0088}&&\lmess{W0089}&&\lmess{W0090}\\
+% \mstrut\lmess{W0091}&&\lmess{W0092}&&\lmess{W0093}&&\lmess{W0094}&&\lmess{W0095}&&\lmess{W0096}&&\lmess{W0097}&&\lmess{W0098}&&\lmess{W0099}&&\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}}
+% \end{table}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Introduction}
+% This chapter lists and comments the messages given by the \upack{minitoc} package, and is associates,
+% \pack{mtcoff} and \pack{mtcpatchmem}\footnote{The
+% texts of the messages given in this chapter may slighty differ from the real text, because some messages contain
+% variable elements and the layout may vary.}.
+% The table~\vref{t+allmess} lists all messages; in this table, you can click on a message identifier to find quickly its meaning.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item The first line of each message contains usually the name of the package and an unique identifier (this
+%       identifier may be useful to search in this chapter of the documentation, but has no special meaning,
+%       except the leading letter: \texttt{I}~for informative, \texttt{W}~for warning, and \texttt{E}~for error).
+% \item Informative messages are written only in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file; the prefix is~\texttt{F}
+%       for the warning messages from the \pack{mtcoff} package and~\texttt{M} for the informative message from
+%       the \pack{mtcpatchmem} package.
+% \item Warning messages are shown on the screen (but often too quickly to be seen, because normally \LaTeX\ does not stop
+%       for warnings) and written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file.
+% \item Error messages are shown on the screen and written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file,
+%       but \LaTeX\ stops, so you can ask for help by typing~``\texttt{h}''.
+% \item In this chapter, some words in the messages are typeset in italic characters; they represent the variable
+%       parts of the message:
+%       \begin{itemize}
+%       \item \emph{ARG1}~The first argument of the command.
+%       \item \emph{ARG2}~The second argument of the command.
+%       \item \emph{ARG3}~The third argument of the command.
+%       \item \emph{\CCC}~The name of the class of your document.
+%       \item \emph{\COMMAND}~The name of the command.
+%       \item \emph{\CTR}~The name of a \LaTeX\ counter.
+%       \item \emph{document}~The name of your document, without its \suffix{.tex} extension.
+%       \item \emph{\EXTEN}~The extension part of the name of a file.
+%       \item \emph{\FILE}~The name of a file (often a minitoc auxiliary file, the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}
+%             file, the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file, or the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file).
+%       \item \emph{\INAME}~The name of an internal macro redefined by a \verb|\mtcset...| command.
+%       \item \emph{\LLL}~The name of the language (for \com{mtcselectlanguage}).
+%       \item \emph{\NNN}~The number of the line in the source file.
+%       \item \emph{macro}~The name of a minitoc font command redefined by \com{mtcsetfont}.
+%       \item \emph{\NTITLE}~The new value of a title redefined by \com{mtcsettitle}.
+%       \item \emph{\NB}~The number of mini-tables of the given type in your document (when you are using short
+%             extensions and that number is greater than~99).
+%       \item \emph{\OFFSET}~The new value of an offset redefined by \com{mtcsetoffset}.
+%       \item \emph{\PREPA}~The name of a minitoc preparation command.
+%       \item \emph{\SEQ}~A sequence of commands used to redefine an internal macro via a \verb|\mtcset...| command.
+%       \item \emph{\STRING}~A string of characters, often part of a command name.
+%       \item \emph{\VAL}~The new value of a counter.
+%       \end{itemize}
+% \end{itemize}
+% The messages are produced using macros from the \pack{mtcmess} package, described in chapter~\vref{c+code+mtcmess.sty}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Introduction}
+% Ce chapitre liste et commente les messages émis par le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, et ses associés \pack{mtcoff} et
+% \pack{mtcpatchmem}\,\footnote{Les
+% textes des messages donnés dans ce chapitre peuvent être légèrement différents du texte réel, car certains
+% messages contiennent des éléments variables et la mise en page peut aussi varier.}.
+% Le tableau~\vref{t+allmess} liste tous les messages; vous pouvez cliquer dans ce tableau sur un identifieur de message pour
+% trouver rapidement sa signification.
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item La première ligne de chaque message contient normalement le nom du paquetage et un identificateur unique
+%       (il peut être utile pour chercher dans ce chapitre de la documentation, mais n'a aucune signification
+%       particulière, sauf la lettre de tête: \texttt{I}~pour informatif, \texttt{W}~pour avertissement (\emph{warning}),
+%       et \texttt{E}~pour erreur); le préfixe est~\texttt{F} pour les messages d'avertissement émis par le
+%       paquetage \pack{mtcoff} et~\texttt{M} pour le message informatif émis par le paquetage \pack{mtcpatchmem}.
+% \item Les messages informatifs ne sont écrits que dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}.
+% \item Les messages d'avertissement (\emph{warning}) sont affichés sur l'écran (mais souvent trop rapidement pour
+%       être vus, car normalement \LaTeX\ ne s'arrête pas pour les avertissements) et sont écrits dans
+%       le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}.
+% \item Les messages d'erreur (\emph{error}) sont affichés sur l'écran et écrits dans le fichier
+%       \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, mais \LaTeX\ s'arrête, donc vous pouvez demander de l'aide
+%       en tapant~«~\texttt{h}~» (\emph{help}).
+% \item Dans ce chapitre, certains mots dans les messages sont écrits en italique; ils représentent les parties
+%       variables du message:
+%       \begin{itemize}
+%       \item \emph{ARG1}~Le premier argument de la commande.
+%       \item \emph{ARG2}~Le deuxième argument de la commande.
+%       \item \emph{ARG3}~Le troisième argument de la commande.
+%       \item \emph{\CCC}~Le nom de la classe de votre document.
+%       \item \emph{\COMMAND}~Le nom de la commande.
+%       \item \emph{\STRING}~Une chaîne de caractères, faisant souvent partie d'un nom de commande.
+%       \item \emph{\CTR}~Le nom d'un compteur \LaTeX.
+%       \item \emph{document}~Le nom de votre document, sans son suffixe \suffix{.tex}.
+%       \item \emph{\FILE}~Le nom d'un fichier (Souvent un fichier auxiliaire minitoc, le fichier
+%            \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof},
+%            ou le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot}).
+%       \item \emph{\LLL}~Le nom de la langue (pour \com{mtcselectlanguage}).
+%       \item \emph{\NNN}~Le numéro de la ligne dans le fichier source.
+%       \item \emph{macro}~Le nom d'une commande de fonte minitoc redéfinie par \com{mtcsetfont}.
+%       \item \emph{\NTITLE}~La nouvelle valeur d'un titre redéfinie par \com{mtcsettitle}.
+%       \item \emph{\NB}~Le nombre de mini-tables du type donné dans votre document (lorsque vous utilisez des
+%            suffixes courts et que ce nombre dépasse~99).
+%       \item \emph{\INAME}~Le nom d'une macro interne redéfinie par une commande \verb|\mtcset...|.
+%       \item \emph{\OFFSET}~La nouvelle valeur d'un déplacement (décalage) redéfinie par \com{mtcsetoffset}.
+%       \item \emph{\PREPA}~Le nom d'une commande minitoc de préparation.
+%       \item \emph{\SEQ}~Une séquence de commandes utilisée pour redéfinir une macro interne via une commande
+%            \verb|\mtcset...|.
+%       \item \emph{\EXTEN}~La partie suffixe du nom d'un fichier.
+%       \item \emph{\VAL}~La nouvelle valeur d'un compteur.
+%       \end{itemize}
+% \end{itemize}
+% Les messages sont produits en utilisant des macros du paquetage \pack{mtcmess},
+% décrit au chapitre~\vref{c+code+mtcmess.sty}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{15}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Messages from the \upack{minitoc} package}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Messages émis par le paquetage \upack{minitoc}}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Informative messages}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Messages informatifs}
+% \fi
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0000]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package: minitoc 2015/07/13 v61 Package minitoc (JPFD/et al.)|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This is the announce message of the \upack{minitoc} package, with its name, date and version. ``JPFD'' are my
+% initials. This message has no real identifier because it is emitted by \com{ProvidesPackage}, but, for indexing it,
+% we use \texttt{I0000}.
+% \or\relax
+% Ceci est le message annonçant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, avec son nom, sa date et sa version. «~JPFD~» sont
+% mes initiales. Ce message n'a pas d'identificateur réel car il est émis par \com{ProvidesPackage}, mais, pour
+% l'indexer, nous utilisons \texttt{I0000}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0001]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0001|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             *** minitoc package, version 61 ***.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Remember the version of the package.
+% \or\relax
+% Rappel de la version du paquetage.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0002]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0002|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             Autoconfiguration of extensions.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \upack{minitoc} package tries to determine if short or long extensions for file names are used by the operating
+% system.
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} essaye de déterminer si des suffixes courts pour les noms de fichiers ou longs sont
+% utilisés par le système d'exploitation.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0003]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0003|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             chapter level macros available.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{chapter} sectionning command is available, so you can use the mini-table commands at the chapter level,
+% but \emph{not} the mini-table commands at the section level.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande de sectionnement \com{chapter} est disponible, donc vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des
+% mini-tables au niveau chapitre, \emph{mais pas} les commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau section.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0004]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0004|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             chapter level macros NOT available.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{chapter} sectionning command is \emph{not} available, so you cannot use the mini-table commands at the
+% chapter level, but, if the \com{section} sectionning command is available, you can use mini-table commands at
+% the section level.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande de sectionnement \com{chapter} \emph{n'est pas} disponible, donc vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les
+% commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau chapitre, mais, si la commande de sectionnement \com{section} est
+% disponible, vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau section.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0005]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0005|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)       compatible with hyperref.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This version of \upack{minitoc} is compatible with the \pack{hyperref} package.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette version de \upack{minitoc} est compatible avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0006]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0006|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)            |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.|\emph{\EXTEN}\verb| is empty on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The auxiliary file for a mini-table is found empty (or inexistent) when \upack{minitoc} tries to insert it. If
+% the \optd{checkfiles} option is active, it is skipped.
+% \or\relax
+% Le fichier auxiliaire pour une mini-table est trouvé vide (ou inexistant) lorsque \upack{minitoc} essaye de
+% l'insérer. Si l'option \optd{checkfiles} est active, il est sauté.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0007]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0007|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             Horizontal rules are activated|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The horizontal rules will be present in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les filets horizontaux seront présents dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0008]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0008|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             Horizontal rules are inhibited|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The horizontal rules will be omitted in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les filets horizontaux seront omis dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0009]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0009|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             Listing minitoc auxiliary files.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             Creating the |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.maf file.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have used the \optd{listfiles} package option. A list of the minitoc auxiliary files is written in the
+% \emph{document}\suffix{.maf} file. It may be helpful to delete these files. See section~\vref{s+listfiles}.
+% This option is the default since version~\#48.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}. Une liste des fichiers auxiliaires pour minitoc est
+% écrite dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. Ceci peut être utile pour détruire ces fichiers.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}.
+% Cette option est active par défaut depuis la version~\#48.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0010]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0010|\\
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: The |\emph{\LLL}\verb| language is selected.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} file has been successfully loaded for the \emph{\LLL} language\footnote{The
+% \xfile{english.mld} file is always loaded first, to have english as default language.}
+% by the \com{mtcselectlanguage} command at line~\emph{\NNN}. The titles for the mini-tables are changed.
+% \or\relax
+% Le fichier \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} a été correctement chargé pour la langue \emph{\LLL},\footnote{Le
+% fichier \xfile{english.mld} est toujours chargé d'abord, pour avoir l'anglais comme langue par défaut.} par la commande
+% \com{mtcselectlanguage} à~la ligne~\emph{\NNN}. Les titres pour les mini-tables sont changés.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0011]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0011|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             |\emph{\LLL}\verb| language object selected.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)              on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcselectlanguage} macro has successfully (indirectly) loaded
+% the \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} minitoc object file.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{mtcselectlanguage} a (indirectement) chargé avec succès le fichier minitoc objet de langue
+% \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0012]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0012|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             Long extensions (Unix-like) will be used.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The autoconfiguration has detected that your operating system is able to use long extensions; this will be the
+% default.
+% \or\relax
+% L'autoconfiguration a détecté que votre système d'exploitation est capable d'utiliser des suffixes longs; ce sera
+% le choix par défaut.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0013]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0013|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             \mtcsetdepth redefines the counter|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             "|\mbox{\emph{\CTR}}\verb|" as "|\emph{\VAL}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcsetdepth} macro changes the value of the specified depth counter and forces it to \emph{\VAL}.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{mtcsetdepth} change la valeur du compteur de profondeur spécifié et lui donne la \emph{\VAL}
+% demandée.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0014]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0014|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             \mtcsetfeature redefines the macro|
+% \verb|(minitoc)             "\|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             "\|\emph{\SEQ}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcsetfeature} macro has redefined the internal macro \emph{\INAME} with the given \emph{\SEQ}.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{mtcsetfeature} a redéfini la macro interne \emph{\INAME} par la \emph{\SEQ} donnée.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0015]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0015|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             \mtcsetfont redefines the macro|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             "|\mbox{\emph{macro}}\verb|" as "|\emph{\SEQ}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcsetfont} command redefines the (old style) \emph{macro} by the given \emph{\SEQ} of font
+% commands.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{mtcsetfont} redéfinit la macro (en ancien style) par la \emph{\SEQ} de commandes de fontes
+% donnée.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0016]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0016|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             \mtcsetformat redefines the macro|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             "\|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as "|\emph{ARG3}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The macro \com{mtcsetformat} redefines an internal macro with the value given by its third argument.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{mtcsetformat} redéfinit une macro interne avec la valeur de son troisième argument.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0017]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0017|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             \mtcsettitle redefines the macro|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             "|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             "|\emph{\NTITLE}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A mini-table title is redefined via the \com{mtcsettitle} macro.
+% \or\relax
+% Un titre de mini-table est redéfini via la macro \com{mtcsettitle}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0018]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0018|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             \mtcsettitlefont redefines the macro|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             "\|\emph{\INAME}\verb|" as|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             "|\emph{\SEQ}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcsettitlefont} macro redefines the (old style) \verb|\|\emph{\INAME} macro which the given sequence
+% \emph{\SEQ}.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{mtcsettitlefont} redéfinit la macro \verb|\|\emph{\INAME} (ancien style) par la séquence \emph{\SEQ}
+% donnée.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0019]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0019|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             No hints have been written|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             in the |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.log file.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \optd{hints} package option has detected no potential problem.
+% \or\relax
+% L'option de paquetage \optd{hints} n'a détecté aucun problème potentiel.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0020]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0020|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             old version of the memoir class.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The version of the \class{memoir} class is old. The \upack{minitoc} package does not need to patch this class.
+% \or\relax
+% La version de la classe \class{memoir} est ancienne. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} n'a pas besoin de corriger
+% cette classe.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0021]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0021|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             Page numbers are activated|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The page numbers will be present in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les numéros de pages seront présents dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0022]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0022|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             Page numbers are inhibited|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             for the |\emph{ARG1}\verb|s on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The page numbers will be omitted in the mini-tables of type \emph{ARG1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les numéros de pages seront omis dans les mini-tables de type \emph{ARG1}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0023]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0023|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             part level macros available.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{part} sectionning command is available, so you can use the mini-table commands at the part level.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande de sectionnement \com{part} est disponible, donc vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des
+% mini-tables au niveau partie.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0024]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0024|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             PREPARING MINITOCS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A \com{dominitoc} command prepares the \upack{minitoc} auxiliary files for minitocs from \emph{\FILE}.
+% \or\relax
+% Une commande \com{dominitoc} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \upack{minitoc} pour les minitocs depuis le \emph{\FILE}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0025]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0025|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             PREPARING PARTTOCS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A \com{doparttoc} command prepares the \texttt{parttoc} auxiliary files for parttocs from \emph{\FILE}.
+% \or\relax
+% Une commande \com{doparttoc} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{parttoc} pour les parttocs depuis le \emph{\FILE}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0026]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0026|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             PREPARING SECTTOCS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A \com{dosecttoc} command prepares the \texttt{secttoc} auxiliary files for secttocs from \emph{\FILE}.
+% \or\relax
+% Une commande \com{dosecttoc} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{secttoc} pour les secttocs depuis le \emph{\FILE}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0027]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0027|
+% \verb|(minitoc)             recent version of the memoir class.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The version of the \class{memoir} class is recent. The \upack{minitoc} package will try to patch it.
+% \or\relax
+% La version de la classe \class{memoir} est récente. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} va essayer de corriger cette
+% classe.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0028]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0028|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             section level macros available.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{section} sectionning command is available but the \com{chapter} sectionning command is \emph{not}
+% available, so you can use the mini-table commands at the section level.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande de sectionnement \com{section} est disponible mais la commande de sectionnement
+% \com{chapter} \emph{n'est pas} disponible, donc vous pouvez utiliser les commandes pour des mini-tables au
+% niveau section.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0029]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0029|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             section level macros NOT available.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{section} sectionning command is not defined (by the document class), so the section level commands of
+% the \upack{minitoc} package are not available.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande de sectionnement \com{section} n'est pas définie (par la classe du document),  donc les commandes au
+% niveau section du paquetage \upack{minitoc} ne sont pas disponibles.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0030]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0030|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             the memoir class is loaded:|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             compatibility attempted.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \class{memoir} document class is used. The \upack{minitoc} package tries to ensure compatibility.
+% \or\relax
+% La classe de document \class{memoir} est utilisée. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} essaye d'assurer la compatibilité.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0031]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0031|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             ==> this version is configured for UNIX-like|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             (long extensions) file names.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The autoconfiguration has detected that your operating uses UNIX-like (long extensions) file names.
+% \or\relax
+% L'autoconfiguration a détecté que votre système d'exploitation utilise des noms de fichiers à~la mode UNIX
+% (suffixes longs).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0032]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0032|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             This version of the memoir class uses|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             a version of \chapter which is|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             incompatible with the minitoc package.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             We try to patch.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \class{memoir} class uses a version of the \com{chapter} command which needs to be corrected because its syntax has
+% been changed. A patch is loaded.
+% \or\relax
+% La classe \class{memoir} utilise une version de la commande \com{chapter} qui a besoin d'être corrigée car sa
+% syntaxe a changé. Une correction (\emph{patch}) est chargée.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0033]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0033|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             Writing |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.|\emph{\EXTEN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% An auxiliary file for a mini-table is written by a \upack{minitoc} preparation command (like \com{dominitoc}).
+% \or\relax
+% Un fichier auxiliaire pour une mini-table est écrit par une commande \upack{minitoc} de préparation
+% (telle que \com{dominitoc}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0034]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0034|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             PREPARING MINILOFS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A \com{dominilof} command prepares the \upack{minilof} auxiliary files for minilofs from \emph{\FILE}.
+% \or\relax
+% Une commande \com{dominilof} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \upack{minilof} pour les minilofs depuis le \emph{\FILE}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0035]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0035|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             PREPARING PARTLOFS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A \com{dopartlof} command prepares the \texttt{partlof} auxiliary files for partlofs from \emph{\FILE}.
+% \or\relax
+% Une commande \com{dopartlof} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{partlof} pour les partlofs depuis le \emph{\FILE}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0036]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0036|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             PREPARING SECTLOFS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A \com{dosectlof} command prepares the \texttt{sectlof} auxiliary files for sectlofs from \emph{\FILE}.
+% \or\relax
+% Une commande \com{dosectlof} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{sectlof} pour les sectlofs depuis le \emph{\FILE}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0037]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0037|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             PREPARING MINILOTS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A \com{dominilot} command prepares the \texttt{minilot} auxiliary files for minilots from \emph{\FILE}.
+% \or\relax
+% Une commande \com{dominilot} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{minilot} pour les minilots depuis le \emph{\FILE}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0038]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0038|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             PREPARING PARTLOTS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A \com{dopartlot} command prepares the \texttt{partlot} auxiliary files for partlots from \emph{\FILE}.
+% \or\relax
+% Une commande \com{dopartlot} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{partlot} pour les partlots depuis le \emph{\FILE}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0039]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0039|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             PREPARING SECTLOTS FROM |\emph{\FILE}\verb| on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A \com{dosectlot} command prepares the \texttt{sectlot} auxiliary files for sectlots from \emph{\FILE}.
+% \or\relax
+% Une commande \com{dosectlot} prépare les fichiers auxiliaires \texttt{sectlot} pour les sectlots depuis le \emph{\FILE}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Informative messages for hints}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Messages informatifs pour les indications (\emph{hints})}
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0040]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0040|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             The ``abstract'' package has been|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             loaded with the ``addtotoc'' option.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             You need to look at the|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             documentation to adjust.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As you are using the \pack{abstract} package with its \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option,
+% you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation
+% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq.27}.
+% \or\relax
+% Puisque vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{abstract} avec son option \optp{addtotoc}{abstract},
+% vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage
+% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq.27}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0041]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0041|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             --- The amsbook class is loaded.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             See the minitoc package documentation|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             for specific precautions.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As you are using the \class{amsbook} class, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation
+% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{s+AMS}.
+% \or\relax
+% Puisque vous utilisez la classe \class{amsbook}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage
+% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{s+AMS}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0042]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0042|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             --- The appendix package is loaded.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             See the minitoc package documentation|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             for specific precautions.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As you are using also the \pack{appendix} package, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation
+% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq+appendix}.
+% \or\relax
+% Puisque vous utilisez aussi le paquetage \pack{appendix}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage
+% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq+appendix}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0043]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0043|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             --- The KOMAScript |\emph{\CCC}\verb| class is loaded.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             See the minitoc package documentation|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             for specific precautions.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As you are using also the \emph{\CCC} class, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation
+% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{special.entries}.
+% The classes involved here are \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt}, and \class{scrartcl}, i.e., the \KOMAScript{}
+% classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} compatible with \upack{minitoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% Puisque vous utilisez aussi la classe \emph{\CCC}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage
+% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{special.entries}.
+% Les classes concernées ici sont \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} et \class{scrartcl}, c'est-à-dire les
+% classes \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} compatibles avec \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0044]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0044|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             --- The memoir class is loaded.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             See the minitoc package documentation|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             for specific precautions.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As you are using the \class{memoir} class, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation
+% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq+memoir}.
+% \or\relax
+% Puisque vous utilisez la classe \class{memoir}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage
+% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq+memoir}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0045]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0045|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             The |\texttt{\bs}\PREPA\verb| command|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             has been invoked more than once|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A minitoc preparation command has been invoked more than once.
+% \or\relax
+% Une commande minitoc de préparation a été invoquée plus d'une fois.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0046]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0046|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             --- The tocbibind package is loaded.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             See the minitoc package documentation|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             for specific precautions.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As you are using also the \pack{tocbibind} package, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation
+% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{special.entries}.
+% \or\relax
+% Puisque vous utilisez aussi le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage
+% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{special.entries}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0047]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0047|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             --- The tocloft package is loaded.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             See the minitoc package documentation|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             for specific precautions.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As you are using also the \pack{tocloft} package, you should look at the \upack{minitoc} package documentation
+% for specific precautions. See section~\vref{faq+tocloft}.
+% \or\relax
+% Puisque vous utilisez aussi le paquetage \pack{tocloft}, vous devriez consulter la documentation du paquetage
+% \upack{minitoc} pour les précautions spécifiques. Voir la section~\vref{faq+tocloft}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0048]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0048|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             Using \mtcprepare may induce some|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             hints about the preparation commands,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             because it invokes ALL the preparation|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             commands allowed by the document class,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             without any previous check.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcprepare} command invoke all the possible preparation commands, depending only on the document class and the
+% available contents files. It does not known exactly what you want, so it can prepare too many mini-tables
+% files.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{mtcprepare} invoque toutes les commandes de préparation possibles, selon la classe du document et
+% les fichiers de contenu disponibles. Elle ne sait pas exactement ce que vous désirez, donc elle peut préparer trop
+% de fichiers de mini-tables.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0049]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Info: I0049|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             ==> You requested the hints option.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))             Some hints are eventually given below.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As you have requested the \optd{hints} package option (which is set by default), some ``hints'' are eventually
+% given in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. You can find them easily by searching for the string
+% ``\texttt{minitoc(hints)}'' with a text editor.
+% \or\relax
+% Puisque vous avez demandé l'option de paquetage \optd{hints} (qui est activée par défaut), quelques
+% «~indications~» (\emph{hints}) sont éventuellement écrites dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. Vous
+% pourrez les trouver facilement en recherchant la chaîne «~\texttt{minitoc(hints)}~» avec un éditeur de texte.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0050]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: I0050|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                The required "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mld" file is missing.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                The "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|" language option will not be available.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Please install it from a recent distribution|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                or from the CTAN archives.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} file has not been installed on your system. You should take it from a recent distribution or
+% from the CTAN archives to complete your installation, else the \emph{\LLL} language option will not be available.
+% \or\relax
+% Le fichier \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} n'a pas été installé sur votre système. Vous devriez le prendre dans une distribution
+% récente ou depuis les archives CTAN pour compléter votre installation, sinon l'option de langue \emph{\LLL} ne sera pas
+% disponible.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0051]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: I0051|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                The required "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mlo" file is missing.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                The "|\emph{\LLL}\verb|" language option will not be available.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Please install it from a recent distribution|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                or from the CTAN archives.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} file has not been installed on your system. You should take it from a recent distribution or
+% from the CTAN archives to complete your installation, else the \emph{\LLL} language option will not be available.
+% \or\relax
+% Le fichier \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} n'a pas été installé sur votre système. Vous devriez le prendre dans une distribution
+% récente ou depuis les archives CTAN pour compléter votre installation, sinon l'option de langue ne sera pas
+% disponible.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0052]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0052|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             \mtcsetoffset redefines the offset|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             "|\mbox{\emph{\OFFSET}}\verb|" as "|\emph{\VAL}\verb|" on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcsetoffset} macro changes the value of the specified offset and forces it to \emph{\VAL}.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{mtcsetoffset} change la valeur du déplacement spécifié et lui donne la \emph{\VAL}
+% demandée.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[I0053]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Info: I0053|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             You have loaded the |\mbox{\emph{\PACK}}\verb| package;|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             please be aware that the minitoc package|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             facilities can not be used for new types|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)             of floats defined by the |\mbox{\emph{\PACK}}\verb| package|\\
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \upack{minitoc} package does not manage new types of floats defined via the \pack{float}~\cite{float},
+% \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}
+% and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages\,\footnote{As the
+% \pack{trivfloat} and \pack{rotfloat} packages load the \pack{float} package, this message will then appear twice!}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} ne traite pas les nouveaux types de flottants définis via les
+% paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow},
+% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages\,\footnote{Comme les paquetages
+% \pack{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat} chargent le paquetage
+% \pack{float}, ce message apparaîtra alors deux fois!}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \lneed{15}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Warning messages}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Messages d'avertissement}
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0001]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0001|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \chapter and \section are undefined.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Cannot use \mtcfixglossary without|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                optional argument [part].|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The sectionning commands \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined (by the document class), hence the
+% \com{mtcfixglossary} macro cannot be used without an optional argument (try \com{part}). This situation is very
+% unlikely to happen, so also verify your document class.
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies (par la classe du document),
+% donc la macro \com{mtcfixglossary} ne peut pas être utilisée sans son argument optionnel (essayez \verb|[part]|).
+% Il est très improbable que cette situation se produise, donc vérifiez aussi la classe de votre document.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0002]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0002|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \chapter and \section are undefined.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Cannot use \mtcfixindex without|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                optional argument [part].|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The sectionning commands \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined (by the document class), hence the
+% \com{mtcfixindex} macro cannot be used without an optional argument (try \com{part}). This situation is very
+% unlikely to happen, so also verify your document class.
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies (par la classe du document),
+% donc la macro \com{mtcfixindex} ne peut pas être utilisée sans son argument optionnel (essayez \verb|[part]|).
+% Il est très improbable que cette situation se produise, donc vérifiez aussi la classe de votre document.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0003]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0003|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \firstchapteris is an obsolete (ignored)|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                command on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstchapteris}). You should remove it.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstchapteris}. Vous devriez l'enlever.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0004]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0004|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \firstpartis is an obsolete (ignored)|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                command on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstpartis}). You should remove it.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstpartis}. Vous devriez l'enlever.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0005]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0005|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \firstsectionis is an obsolete (ignored)|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                command on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstsectionis}). You should remove it.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstsectionis}. Vous devriez l'enlever.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0006]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0006|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcfixglossary can only be used|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                with the [part] optional argument,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                which becomes the default.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcfixglossary} macro can only use \texttt{[part]} as optional argument (which becomes the default), because
+% \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{mtcfixglossary} ne peut utiliser que \texttt{[part]} comme argument optionnel (qui devient le choix
+% par défaut), car \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0007]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0007|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcfixindex can only be used|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                with the [part] optional argument,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                which becomes the default.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcfixindex} macro can only use \texttt{[part]} as optional argument (which becomes the default), because
+% \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{mtcfixindex} ne peut utiliser que \texttt{[part]} comme argument optionnel (qui devient le choix
+% par défaut), car \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0008]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0008|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                MINILOFS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dominilof} command. Please check if
+% you have called \com{dominilof} in the correct sequence of commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dominilof}. Vérifiez si
+% vous avez invoqué \com{dominilof} dans la bonne séquence de commandes.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0009]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0009|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                MINILOTS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dominilot} command. Please check if
+% you have called \com{dominilot} in the correct sequence of commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dominilot}. Vérifiez si
+% vous avez invoqué \com{dominilot} dans la bonne séquence de commandes.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0010]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0010|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                MINITOCS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dominitoc} command. Please check if
+% you have called \com{dominitoc} in the correct sequence of commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dominitoc}. Vérifiez si
+% vous avez invoqué \com{dominitoc} dans la bonne séquence de commandes.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0011]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0011|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                PARTLOFS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dopartlof} command. Please check if
+% you have called \com{dopartlof} in the correct sequence of commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dopartlof}. Vérifiez si
+% vous avez invoqué \com{dopartlof} dans la bonne séquence de commandes.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0012]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0012|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                PARTLOTS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dopartlot} command. Please check if
+% you have called \com{dopartlot} in the correct sequence of commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dopartlot}. Vérifiez si
+% vous avez invoqué \com{dopartlot} dans la bonne séquence de commandes.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0013]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0013|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                PARTTOCS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{doparttoc} command. Please check if
+% you have called \com{doparttoc} in the correct sequence of commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{doparttoc}. Vérifiez si
+% vous avez invoqué \com{doparttoc} dans la bonne séquence de commandes.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0014]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0014|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                SECTLOFS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dosectlof} command. Please check if
+% you have called \com{dosectlof} in the correct sequence of commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dosectlof}. Vérifiez si
+% vous avez invoqué \com{dosectlof} dans la bonne séquence de commandes.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0015]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0015|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                SECTLOTS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dosectlot} command. Please check if
+% you have called \com{dosectlot} in the correct sequence of commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dosectlot}. Vérifiez si
+% vous avez invoqué \com{dosectlot} dans la bonne séquence de commandes.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0016]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0016|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                No file |\emph{\FILE}\verb|.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                SECTTOCS NOT PREPARED on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \emph{\FILE} cannot be found, because it has not been created by a \com{dosecttoc} command. Please check if
+% you have called \com{dosecttoc} in the correct sequence of commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Le \emph{\FILE} n'a pu être trouvé, parce qu'il n'a pas été créé par une commande \com{dosecttoc}. Vérifiez si
+% vous avez invoqué \com{dosecttoc} dans la bonne séquence de commandes.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0017]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0017|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                no section or chapter level macros available|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                PLEASE VERIFY YOUR MAIN DOCUMENT CLASS.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{chapter} and \com{section} sectionning commands are not defined. Your document class is likely
+% without any sectionning command, so the \upack{minitoc} package is pointless. \emph{Verify your main
+% document class.}
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies. Votre classe de document
+% est probablement sans aucune commande de sectionnement, donc le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est sans objet. \emph{Vérifiez
+% la classe principale de votre document.}
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0018]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0018|\\
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: part level macros NOT available.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{part} sectionning command is not defined (by the document class), so the part level commands of the
+% \upack{minitoc} package are not available. It is a warning message because most classes with sectionning commands
+% define the \com{part} command, so you should verify which class you are using.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande de sectionnement \com{part} n'est pas définie (par la classe du document), donc les commandes au
+% niveau partie du paquetage \upack{minitoc} ne sont pas disponibles. C'est un message d'avertissement
+% (\emph{warning}) car la plupart des classes ayant des commandes de sectionnement définissent la commande
+% \com{part}, donc vous devriez vérifier quelle classe vous utilisez.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0019]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0019|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Short extensions (MSDOS-like) will be used.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                ==> this version is configured for MSDOS-like|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                    (8+3) file names.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The autofiguration has found that the operating system uses file names with short extensions (8+3 scheme).
+% \or\relax
+% L'autoconfiguration a trouvé que le système d'exploitation utilise des noms de fichiers avec des suffixes courts
+% (schéma 8+3).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0020]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0020|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                You have forced the use of short extensions.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have used the \opt{shortext} package option to force the use of short extensions (8+3 scheme). This action
+% limits the number of usable mini-tables of each kind and may be problematic if you have more that 99~mini-tables
+% of the same kind. If your operating system allows for long extensions, do not use the \opt{shortext} package
+% option, except for testing purposes.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez spécifié l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext} pour forcer l'utilisation de suffixes courts (schéma
+% 8+3). Cette action limite le nombre de mini-tables utilisables dans chaque sorte et peut poser des problèmes si
+% vous avez plus de 99~mini-tables du même genre. Si votre système d'exploitation permet des suffixes longs,
+% n'utilisez pas l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext}, sauf à~des fins de test.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0021]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0021|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Trying to continue...|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You\virage{} are using an obsolete version of \LaTeX, but the \upack{minitoc} package will still try to continue. It would be
+% better to update your \LaTeX\ installation.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous\virage{} utilisez une version obsolète de \LaTeX, mais le paquetage \upack{minitoc} va quand même essayer de continuer. Il
+% serait préférable de mettre à~jour votre installation de \LaTeX.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0022]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0022|\\
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Trying to continue... crossing fingers.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Your\Virage{} version of \LaTeX\ is very obsolete, and almost unusable with the \upack{minitoc} package. You can try to
+% continue the compilation, but you are urged to update your \LaTeX\ installation as soon as possible.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous\Virage{} utilisez une version totalement périmée de \LaTeX, presque inutilisable avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Vous pouvez essayer de continuer la compilation, mais vous êtes instamment priés de mettre à~jour votre installation
+% de \LaTeX{} dès que possible.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0093]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0093|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Some "*.mld" or "*.mlo" files are missing|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                in your installation.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Search for the I0050 and I0051 info messages|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                in the \jobname.log file.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                The full list of the missing language files|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                is gigen in the W0094 warning message.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Please install the missing files from|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                a recent distribution|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                or from the CTAN archives.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files have not been installed on your system.
+% Search for the \texttt{I0050}\imess{I0050} and
+% \texttt{I0051}\imess{I0051} info messages in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file to find which files are missing.
+% You can retrieve them from a recent distribution or from the CTAN archives to complete your installation,
+% else some language options will not be available.
+% The full list of the missing language files is given in the \texttt{W0094}\imess{W0094}
+% warning message.
+% \or\relax
+% Certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} n'ont pas été installés sur votre système. Cherchez les
+% messages informatifs \texttt{I0050}\imess{I0050} et \texttt{I0051}\imess{I0051} dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} pour
+% trouver quels fichiers sont manquants. Vous pouvez les récupérer depuis une distribution récente ou depuis les
+% archives CTAN pour compléter votre installation, sinon certaines options de langue ne seront pas disponibles.
+% La liste complète des fichiers de langue manquants est donnée dans le message d'avertissement \imess{W0094}\texttt{W0094}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0094]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0094|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Missing minitoc language file(s):|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                ...|\\
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files have not been installed on your system.
+% The list is given in the message.
+% \or\relax
+% Certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} n'ont pas été installés sur votre système.
+% Leur liste est donnée dans le message.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0095]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0095|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \chapter and \section are undefined.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Cannot use \mtcfixnomenclature without|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                optional argument [part].|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The sectionning commands \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined (by the document class), hence the
+% \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro cannot be used without an optional argument (try \com{part}). This situation is very
+% unlikely to happen, so also verify your document class.
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes de sectionnement \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies (par la classe du document),
+% donc la macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature} ne peut pas être utilisée sans son argument optionnel (essayez \verb|[part]|).
+% Il est très improbable que cette situation se produise, donc vérifiez aussi la classe de votre document.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0096]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0096|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcfixnomenclature can only be used|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                with the [part] optional argument,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                which becomes the default.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro can only use \texttt{[part]} as optional argument (which becomes the default), because
+% \com{chapter} and \com{section} are not defined.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature} ne peut utiliser que \texttt{[part]} comme argument optionnel (qui devient le choix
+% par défaut), car \com{chapter} et \com{section} ne sont pas définies.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0098]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc Warning: W0098|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                --- You have used the \nofiles command|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                in your preamble; all preparation commands|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                in the body of the document will be ignored.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have used the \com{nofiles} command in the preamble of your document; hence the preparation commands will be
+% ignored in your document. Please verify that the mini-table auxiliary files are in their final state.
+% See page~\pageref{x+W0098}.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez utilisé la commande \com{nofiles} dans le préambule de votre document; veuillez vérifier que les
+% fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-ables sont dans leur état final. Voir page~\pageref{x+W0098}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Warning messages for hints}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Messages d'avertissement pour les indications (\emph{hints})}
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0023]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0023|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                --- It may be the consequence|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                of loading the ``hyperref'' package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some sectionning commands have been altered \emph{after} the loading of the \upack{minitoc} package. The
+% \pack{hyperref} package does that, but it is harmless. For other packages or user-made alterations, it is
+% recommended to alter the sectionning commands only \emph{before} loading the \upack{minitoc} package. See
+% section~\vref{faq.17}.
+% \or\relax
+% Certaines commandes de sectionnement ont été modifiées \emph{après} le chargement du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Le paquetage \pack{hyperref} fait cela, mais sans dommages. Pour des altérations faites par d'autres paquetages
+% ou par l'utilisateur, il est recommandé de modifier les commandes de sectionnement seulement \emph{avant} le
+% chargement du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{faq.17}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0024]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0024|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                Some hints have been written|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                in the |\mbox{\emph{document}}\verb|.log file.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \optd{hints} package option has detected some potential problems and written hints into the
+% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. You can search it for the ``\texttt{minitoc(hints)}'' string with a text
+% editor.
+% \or\relax
+% L'option de paquetage \optd{hints} a détecté des problèmes potentiels et écrit des indications (\emph{hints})
+% dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. Vous pouvez l'examiner en y cherchant la chaîne
+% «~\texttt{minitoc(hints)}~» avec un éditeur de texte.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0025]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0025|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                --- The alphanum package is loaded.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                It is incompatible|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                with the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{alphanum} package which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package. The
+% compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{alphanum} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. La
+% compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0026]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0026|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                --- The amsart class is loaded.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                It is incompatible|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                with the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You\Virage{} are using the \class{amsart} document class which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous\Virage{} utilisez la classe de document \class{amsart} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le
+% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0027]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0027|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                --- The amsproc class is loaded.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                It is incompatible|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                with the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You\Virage{} are using the \class{amsproc} document class which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous\Virage{} utilisez la classe de document \class{amsproc} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le
+% paquetage \upack{minitoc}. La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0028]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0028|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                --- The \chapter command is altered|\\
+% \verb|                                after minitoc.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some packages alter the sectionning commands, like \com{chapter}. Most of them should be loaded \emph{before}
+% the \upack{minitoc} package. The \pack{hyperref} package, even if it is loaded \emph{before} the
+% \upack{minitoc} package (as recommended), alters the sectionning commands in an \com{AtBeginDocument}, so this
+% message is always printed when you use the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}, but then it is harmless.
+% \or\relax
+% Certains paquetages modifient les commandes de sectionnement, telles que \com{chapter}. La plupart d'entre-eux
+% devraient être chargés \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, même s'il est
+% chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (comme recommandé), altère les commandes de sectionnement dans
+% un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, donc ce message est toujours émis lorsque vous utilisez le paquetage
+% \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}, mais il est alors bénin.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0029]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0029|\\
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: --- The jura class is loaded.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                It is incompatible|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                with the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You\Virage{} are using the \class{jura} document class which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous\Virage{} utilisez la classe de document \class{jura} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être insatisfaisant.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0030]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0030|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                --- The \part command is altered|\\
+% \verb|                                after minitoc.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some packages alter the sectionning commands, like \com{part}. Most of them should be loaded \emph{before}
+% the \upack{minitoc} package. The \pack{hyperref} package, even if it is loaded \emph{before} the
+% \upack{minitoc} package (as recommended), alters the sectionning commands in an \com{AtBeginDocument}, so this
+% message is always printed when you use the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}, but then it is harmless.
+% \or\relax
+% Certains paquetages modifient les commandes de sectionnement, telles que \com{part}. La plupart d'entre-eux
+% devraient être chargés \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, même s'il est
+% chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (comme recommandé), altère les commandes de sectionnement dans
+% un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, donc ce message est toujours émis lorsque vous utilisez le paquetage
+% \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}, mais il est alors bénin.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0031]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0031|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                --- The placeins package is loaded|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                without the section option,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but minitoc used the insection option|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                which implies it. Try to inverse the|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                loading order and use consistent options.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You may have got a message|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))        ! LaTeX Error: Option clash for package placeins.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You are using the \pack{placeins} package, but without its \optp{section}{placeins} option, while
+% \upack{minitoc} is called with its \opt{insection} option which implies it. See page~\pageref{rem+FB},
+% near a ``dangerous bend'' symbol\DBEND.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{placeins}, mais sans son option \optp{section}{placeins}, alors que
+% \upack{minitoc} est appelé avec son option \opt{insection} qui l'implique. Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB},
+% près d'un symbole «~virage dangereux~»\DBEND.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0032]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0032|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                --- The placeins package loaded is|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                too old. You should use a version|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                dated of 2005/04/18 at least.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You are using an obsolete version of the \pack{placeins} package. Please update it from the CTAN archives or a
+% recent distribution.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous utilisez une version obsolète du paquetage \pack{placeins}. Vous devriez le mettre à~jour depuis les
+% archives CTAN ou une distribution récente.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0033]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0033|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                The caption package should be|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \pack{caption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% See section~\vref{faq.31}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \pack{caption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0034]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0034|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                The caption2 package should be|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \pack{caption2} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% See section~\vref{faq.31}. Note that the \pack{caption2} package is now obsolete; please use a recent version of
+% the \pack{caption} package.
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \pack{caption2} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}. Notez que le paquetage \pack{caption2} est désormais obsolète; veuillez utiliser
+% une version récente du paquetage \pack{caption}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0035]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0035|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                The ccaption package should be|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \pack{ccaption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% See section~\vref{faq.31}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \pack{ccaption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0036]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0036|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                The mcaption package should be|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \pack{mcaption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% See section~\vref{faq.31}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \pack{mcaption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{faq.31}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0037]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0037|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                The sectsty package should be|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \pack{sectsty} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% See section~\vref{faq.28}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \pack{sectsty} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{faq.28}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0038]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0038|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                The varsects package should be|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \pack{varsects} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% See section~\vref{faq.33}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \pack{varsects} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{faq.33}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0039]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0039|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                --- The \section command is altered|\\
+% \verb|                                after minitoc.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some packages alter the sectionning commands, like \com{section}. Most of them should be loaded \emph{before}
+% the \upack{minitoc} package. The \pack{hyperref} package, even if it is loaded \emph{before} the
+% \upack{minitoc} package (as recommended), alters the sectionning commands in an \com{AtBeginDocument}, so this
+% message is always printed when you use the \pack{hyperref} package with \upack{minitoc}, but then it is harmless.
+% \or\relax
+% Certains paquetages modifient les commandes de sectionnement, telles que \com{section}. La plupart d'entre-eux
+% devraient être chargés \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, même s'il est
+% chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (comme recommandé), altère les commandes de sectionnement dans
+% un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, donc ce message est toujours émis lorsque vous utilisez le paquetage
+% \pack{hyperref} avec \upack{minitoc}, mais il est alors bénin.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0040]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0040|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                --- The titletoc package is loaded.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                It is incompatible|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                with the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You\Virage{} are trying to use also the \pack{titletoc} package, but it is \emph{incompatible} with
+% the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% See note~\vref{fn+titlesec}.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous\Virage{} essayez d'utiliser aussi le paquetage \pack{titletoc}, mais il est \emph{incompatible} avec le
+% paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la note~\vref{fn+titlesec}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0041]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0041|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have attempted to insert|\\
+% \verb|                                empty minilofs.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have attempted to insert empty minilofs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will
+% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles}
+% package option), you will only get this harmless message.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des minilofs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles},
+% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut
+% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0042]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0042|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have attempted to insert|\\
+% \verb|                                empty minilots.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have attempted to insert empty minilots. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will
+% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles}
+% package option), you will only get this harmless message.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des minilots vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles},
+% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut
+% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0043]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0043|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have attempted to insert|\\
+% \verb|                                empty minitocs.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have attempted to insert empty minitocs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will
+% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles}
+% package option), you will only get this harmless message.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des minitocs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles},
+% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut
+% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0044]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0044|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have attempted to insert|\\
+% \verb|                                empty partlofs.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have attempted to insert empty partlofs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will
+% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles}
+% package option), you will only get this harmless message.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des partlofs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles},
+% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut
+% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0045]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0045|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have attempted to insert|\\
+% \verb|                                empty partlots.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have attempted to insert empty partlots. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will
+% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles}
+% package option), you will only get this harmless message.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des partlots vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles},
+% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut
+% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0046]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0046|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have attempted to insert|\\
+% \verb|                                empty parttocs.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have attempted to insert empty parttocs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will
+% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles}
+% package option), you will only get this harmless message.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des parttocs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles},
+% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut
+% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0047]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0047|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have attempted to insert|\\
+% \verb|                                empty sectlofs.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have attempted to insert empty sectlofs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will
+% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles}
+% package option), you will only get this harmless message.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des sectlofs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles},
+% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut
+% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0048]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0048|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have attempted to insert|\\
+% \verb|                                empty sectlots.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have attempted to insert empty sectlots. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will
+% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles}
+% package option), you will only get this harmless message.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des sectlots vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles},
+% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut
+% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0049]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0049|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have attempted to insert|\\
+% \verb|                                empty secttocs.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have attempted to insert empty secttocs. If you have used the \opt{nocheckfiles} package option, you will
+% get some ugly empty mini-tables, with only a title and two horizontal rules. By default (\optd{checkfiles}
+% package option), you will only get this harmless message.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez tenté d'insérer des secttocs vides. Si vous avez utilisé l'option de paquetage \opt{nocheckfiles},
+% vous aurez quelques mini-tables vides et laides, avec seulement un titre et deux filets horizontaux. Par défaut
+% (option de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}), vous n'aurez que ce message bénin.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0050]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0050|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)|\\
+% \verb|                                command: \firstchapteris.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstchapteris}). You should remove it.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstchapteris}. Vous devriez l'enlever.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0051]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0051|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)|\\
+% \verb|                                command: \firstpartis.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstpartis}). You should remove it.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstpartis}. Vous devriez l'enlever.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0052]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0052|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)|\\
+% \verb|                                command: \firstsectionis.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have used an obsolete command (\com{firstsectionis}). You should remove it.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez utilisé la commande obsolète \com{firstsectionis}. Vous devriez l'enlever.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0053]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0053|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used short extensions|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                and more than 99 chapters (|\emph{\NB}\verb|).|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have used short extensions (limited to 3~characters) and more than 99~chapters, so the number of the auxiliary
+% file does not fit in the extension. \emph{\NB} is the number of effective chapters in your document. See
+% section~\vref{MS-DOS}.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez utilisé des suffixes courts (limités à~3~caractères) et plus de 99~chapitres, donc le numéro du fichier
+% auxiliaire ne tient plus dans le suffixe. \emph{\NB} est le nombre de chapitres effectifs dans votre document.
+% Voir la section~\vref{MS-DOS}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0054]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0054|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used short extensions|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                and more than 99 parts (|\emph{\NB}\verb|).|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have used short extensions (limited to 3~characters) and more than 99~parts, so the number of the auxiliary
+% file does not fit in the extension. \emph{\NB} is the number of effective parts in your document. See
+% section~\vref{MS-DOS}.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez utilisé des suffixes courts (limités à~3~caractères) et plus de 99~parties, donc le numéro du fichier
+% auxiliaire ne tient plus dans le suffixe. \emph{\NB} est le nombre de parties effectives dans votre document.
+% Voir la section~\vref{MS-DOS}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0055]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0055|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used short extensions|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                and more than 99 sections (|\emph{\NB}\verb|).|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have used short extensions (limited to 3~characters) and more than 99~sections, so the number of the auxiliary
+% file does not fit in the extension. \emph{\NB} is the number of effective sections in your document. See
+% section~\vref{MS-DOS}.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez utilisé des suffixes courts (limités à~3~caractères) et plus de 99~sections, donc le numéro du fichier
+% auxiliaire ne tient plus dans le suffixe. \emph{\NB} est le nombre de sections effectives dans votre document.
+% Voir la section~\vref{MS-DOS}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0056]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0056|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You are using \dosectlof and/or|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                \dosectlot, \sectlof and/or \sectlot,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                hence the ``insection'' package|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                option is recommended.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You are asking for mini-lists of figures or tables at the section level. But as floats (figures and tables) could
+% drift somewhere outside the printing area of the text of the section, the sectlofs and sectlots can be rather strange.
+% In order to have a better behaviour of these mini-tables, it may be useful to add the \opt{insection} package option.
+% See page~\pageref{rem+FB}.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez demandé des mini-listes des figures ou des tables au niveau section. Mais Comme les éléments flottants
+% (figures et tableaux) pourraient dériver quelque part en dehors de la zone d'impression du texte de la section,
+% les sectlofs et sectlots peuvent être assez étranges. Afin d'avoir un meilleur comportement de ces mini-tables,
+% il peut être utile d'ajouter l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}. Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0057]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0057|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \minilof,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \dominilof.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have attempted to insert some minilofs (via \com{minilof}), but the minilofs have not been prepared
+% (via \com{dominilof}).
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilofs (via \com{minilof}), mais les minilofs n'ont pas été préparées
+% (via \com{dominilof}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0058]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0058|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \minilot,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \dominilot.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have attempted to insert some minilots (via \com{minilot}), but the minilots have not been prepared
+% (via \com{dominilot}).
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilots (via \com{minilot}), mais les minilots n'ont pas été préparées
+% (via \com{dominilot}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0059]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0059|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \minitoc,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \dominitoc.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have attempted to insert some minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), but the minitocs have not been prepared
+% (via \com{dominitoc}).
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), mais les minitocs n'ont pas été préparées
+% (via \com{dominitoc}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0060]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0060|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \partlof,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \dopartlof.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have attempted to insert some partlofs (via \com{partlof}), but the partlofs have not been prepared
+% (via \com{dopartlof}).
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlofs (via \com{partlof}), mais les partlofs n'ont pas été préparées
+% (via \com{dopartlof}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0061]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0061|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \partlot,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \dopartlot.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have attempted to insert some partlots (via \com{partlot}), but the partlots have not been prepared
+% (via \com{dopartlot}).
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlots (via \com{partlot}), mais les partlots n'ont pas été préparées
+% (via \com{dopartlot}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0062]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0062|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \parttoc,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \doparttoc.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have attempted to insert some parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), but the parttocs have not been prepared
+% (via \com{doparttoc}).
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), mais les parttocs n'ont pas été préparées
+% (via \com{doparttoc}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0063]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0063|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \sectlof,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \dosectlof.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have attempted to insert some sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), but the sectlofs have not been prepared
+% (via \com{dosectlof}).
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), mais les sectlofs n'ont pas été préparées
+% (via \com{dosectlof}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0064]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0064|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \sectlot,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \dosectlot.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have attempted to insert some sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), but the sectlots have not been prepared
+% (via \com{dosectlot}).
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), mais les sectlots n'ont pas été préparées
+% (via \com{dosectlot}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0065]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0065|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \secttoc,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \dosecttoc.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have attempted to insert some secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), but the secttocs have not been prepared
+% (via \com{dosecttoc}).
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), mais les secttocs n'ont pas été préparées
+% (via \com{dosecttoc}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0066]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0066|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \minilof,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \listoffigures nor|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                \fakelistoffigures.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have tried to insert some minilofs (via \com{minilof}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file is not
+% available because you have not invoked \com{listoffigures} nor \com{fakelistoffigures}.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilofs (via \com{minilof}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} n'est
+% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoffigures},  ni \com{fakelistoffigures}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0067]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0067|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \minilot but not|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                \listoftables| nor\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                \fakelistoftables.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have tried to insert some minilots (via \com{minilot}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file is not
+% available because you have not invoked \com{listoftables} nor \com{fakelistoftables}.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minilots (via \com{minilot}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} n'est
+% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoftables},  ni \com{fakelistoftables}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0068]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0068|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \minitoc but not|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                \tableofcontents|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                nor \faketableofcontents.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have tried to insert some minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file is not
+% available because you have not invoked \com{tableofcontents} nor \com{faketableofcontents}.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des minitocs (via \com{minitoc}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} n'est
+% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{tableofcontents},  ni \com{faketableofcontents}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0069]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0069|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \partlof but not|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                \listoffigures|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                nor \fakelistoffigures.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have tried to insert some partlofs (via \com{partlof}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file is not
+% available because you have not invoked \com{listoffigures} nor \com{fakelistoffigures}.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlofs (via \com{partlof}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} n'est
+% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoffigures},  ni \com{fakelistoffigures}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0070]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0070|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \partlot but not|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                \listoftables|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                nor \fakelistoftables.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have tried to insert some partlots (via \com{partlot}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file is not
+% available because you have not invoked \com{listoftables} nor \com{fakelistoftables}.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des partlots (via \com{partlot}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} n'est
+% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoftables},  ni \com{fakelistoftables}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0071]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0071|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \parttoc but not|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                \tableofcontents|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                nor \faketableofcontents.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have tried to insert some parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file is not
+% available because you have not invoked \com{tableofcontents} nor \com{faketableofcontents}.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des parttocs (via \com{parttoc}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} n'est
+% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{tableofcontents},  ni \com{faketableofcontents}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0072]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0072|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \sectlof but not|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                \listoffigures|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                nor \fakelistoffigures.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have tried to insert some sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} file is not
+% available because you have not invoked \com{listoffigures} nor \com{fakelistoffigures}.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlofs (via \com{sectlof}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} n'est
+% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoffigures},  ni \com{fakelistoffigures}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0073]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0073|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \sectlot but not|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                \listoftables|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                nor \fakelistoftables.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have tried to insert some sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} file is not
+% available because you have not invoked \com{listoftables} nor \com{fakelistoftables}.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des sectlots (via \com{sectlot}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} n'est
+% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{listoftables},  ni \com{fakelistoftables}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0074]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0074|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \secttoc but not|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                \tableofcontents|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                nor \faketableofcontents.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have tried to insert some secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), but the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file is not
+% available because you have not invoked \com{tableofcontents} nor \com{faketableofcontents}.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez essayé d'insérer des secttocs (via \com{secttoc}), mais le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} n'est
+% pas disponible car vous n'avez invoqué ni \com{tableofcontents},  ni \com{faketableofcontents}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0075]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0075|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \doparttoc|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \parttoc.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have prepared some parttocs (via \com{doparttoc}), but you never used one of them.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez préparé des parttocs (via \com{doparttoc}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0076]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0076|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \dopartlof|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \partlof.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have prepared some partlofs (via \com{dopartlof}), but you never used one of them.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez préparé des partlofs (via \com{dopartlof}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0077]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0077|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \dopartlot|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \partlot.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have prepared some partlots (via \com{dopartlot}), but you never used one of them.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez préparé des partlots (via \com{dopartlot}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0078]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0078|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \dominitoc|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \minitoc.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have prepared some minitocs (via \com{dominitoc}), but you never used one of them.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez préparé des minitocs (via \com{dominitoc}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0079]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0079|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \dominilof|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \minilof.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have prepared some minilofs (via \com{dominilof}), but you never used one of them.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez préparé des minilofs (via \com{dominilof}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0080]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0080|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \dominilot|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \minilot.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have prepared some minilots (via \com{dominilot}), but you never used one of them.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez préparé des minilots (via \com{dominilot}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0081]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0081|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \dosecttoc|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \secttoc.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have prepared some secttocs (via \com{dosecttoc}), but you never used one of them.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez préparé des secttocs (via \com{dosecttoc}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0082]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0082|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \dosectlof|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \sectlof.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have prepared some sectlofs (via \com{dosectlof}), but you never used one of them.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez préparé des sectlofs (via \com{dosectlof}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0083]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0083|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                You have used \dosectlot|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but not \sectlot.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have prepared some sectlots (via \com{dosectlot}), but you never used one of them.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez préparé des sectlots (via \com{dosectlot}), mais vous n'en avez utilisé aucune.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0084]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0084|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                --- The placeins package is loaded|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                with the above option,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but minitoc used the insection option|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                which is incompatible with it.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                Try to remove the above option and|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                use consistent options.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{placeins} package, but with its \optp{above}{placeins} option, while
+% \upack{minitoc} is called with its \opt{insection} option which is \emph{incompatible} with it.
+% See page~\pageref{rem+FB}, near a ``dangerous bend'' symbol.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{placeins}, mais avec son option \optp{above}{placeins}, alors que
+% \upack{minitoc} est appelé avec son option \opt{insection} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec elle.
+% Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB}, près d'un symbole «~virage dangereux~».
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0085]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0085|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                --- The placeins package is loaded|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                with the below option,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                but minitoc used the insection option|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                which is incompatible with it.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                Try to remove the below option|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                and use consistent options.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{placeins} package, but with its \optp{below}{placeins} option, while
+% \upack{minitoc} is called with its \opt{insection} option which is \emph{incompatible} with it.
+% See page~\pageref{rem+FB}, near a ``dangerous bend'' symbol.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{placeins}, mais avec son option \optp{below}{placeins}, alors que
+% \upack{minitoc} est appelé avec son option \opt{insection} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec elle.
+% Voir page~\pageref{rem+FB}, près d'un symbole «~virage dangereux~».
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0086]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0086|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                The fncychap package should be|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \pack{fncychap} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% See section~\vref{faq.38}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \pack{fncychap} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{faq.38}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0087]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0087|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                The quotchap package should be|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \pack{quotchap} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% See section~\vref{faq.39}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \pack{quotchap} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{faq.39}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0088]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0088|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                The romannum package should be|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \pack{romannum} package alters the numbering of some sectionning
+% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% See section~\vref{faq.40}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \pack{romannum} altère la numérotation de certaines commandes
+% de sectionnement et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{faq.40}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0089]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0089|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                The sfheaders package should be|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \pack{sfheaders} package alters the sectionning
+% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% See section~\vref{faq.41}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \pack{sfheaders} altère les commandes
+% de sectionnement et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{faq.41}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0090]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0090|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                The alnumsec package should be|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \pack{alnumsec} package alters the sectionning
+% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% See section~\vref{faq.42}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \pack{alnumsec} altère les commandes
+% de sectionnement et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{faq.42}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0091]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0091|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                The captcont package should be|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \pack{captcont} package alters the caption
+% commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% See section~\vref{faq.43}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \pack{captcont} altère les commandes pour les captions
+% et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{faq.43}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0092]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0092|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                The hangcaption package should be|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                loaded BEFORE the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \pack{hangcaption} package alters some commands and must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% See section~\vref{faq.47}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \pack{hangcaption} altère certaines commandes et doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{faq.47}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0097]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0097|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                --- The flowfram package is loaded.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                It is incompatible|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                with the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You\Virage{} are using the \pack{flowfram} package which is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package,
+% because it has its own definitions for minitocs. The compilation can continue, but the result could be unsatisfactory.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous\Virage{} utilisez le paquetage \pack{flowfram} qui est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc},
+% car il a ses propres définitions pour des minitocs. La compilation continue, mais le résultat pourrait être
+% insatisfaisant.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[W0099]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package minitoc(hints) Warning: W0099|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                --- The titlesec package is loaded.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                It is incompatible|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc(hints))                with the minitoc package.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You\Virage{} are trying to use also the \pack{titlesec} package, but it is \emph{incompatible} with
+% the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% See note~\vref{fn+titlesec}.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous\Virage{} essayez d'utiliser aussi le paquetage \pack{titlesec}, mais il est \emph{incompatible} avec le
+% paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la note~\vref{fn+titlesec}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Error messages}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Messages d'erreur}
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0001]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0001|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                But \part is undefined.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb| not usable|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% There are no adequate sectionning command available to use the \com{mtcfixglossary} macro; even \com{part} is
+% undefined. Verify your document class.
+% \or\relax
+% Il n'y a pas de commande de sectionnement adéquate disponible pour utiliser la macro \com{mtcfixglossary};
+% même \com{part} n'est pas définie. Vérifiez la classe de votre document.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0002]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0002|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                But \part is undefined.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb| not usable|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% There are no adequate sectionning command available to use the \com{mtcfixindex} macro; even \com{part} is
+% undefined. Verify your document class.
+% \or\relax
+% Il n'y a pas de commande de sectionnement adéquate disponible pour utiliser la macro \com{mtcfixindex};
+% même \com{part} n'est pas définie. Vérifiez la classe de votre document.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0003]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0003|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Imbrication of mtchideinmainlof environments.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect|\\
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some \env{mtchideinmainlof} environments are incorrectly imbricated (overlapping), so the
+% hiding in the main list of figures will be strange.
+% \or\relax
+% Certains environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} sont imbriqués de manière incorrecte (chevauchement),
+% donc le masquage dans la liste des figures principale sera étrange.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0004]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0004|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Imbrication of mtchideinmainlot environments.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect|\\
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments are incorrectly imbricated (overlapping), so the
+% hiding in the main list of tables will be strange.
+% \or\relax
+% Certains environnements \env{mtchideinmainlot} sont imbriqués de manière incorrecte (chevauchement),
+% donc le masquage dans la liste des tableaux principale sera étrange.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0005]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0005|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Imbrication of mtchideinmaintoc environments.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect|\\
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environments are incorrectly imbricated (overlapping), so the
+% hiding in the main table of contents will be strange.
+% \or\relax
+% Certains environnements \env{mtchideinmaintoc} sont imbriqués de manière incorrecte (chevauchement),
+% donc le masquage dans la table des matières principale sera étrange.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0006]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0006|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                |\emph{\LLL}\verb| is not a known language,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                |\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mld not found.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Command ignored.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source using a valid language name.|\\
+% \verb|Press RETURN|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcselectlanguage} macro has attempted to load the \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} minitoc language definition
+% file, but has not found it. First, verify the name of the language (likely to be misspelt), then check if your
+% installation contains \emph{all} the many distributed \suffix{.mld} files of the \upack{minitoc} package,
+% at the right place.  If it is a local \suffix{.mld} file, it should be installed in the right place (in a local
+% hierarchy) or be in the working directory.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{mtcselectlanguage} a tenté de charger le fichier minitoc de définition de langue
+% \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld}, mais ne l'a pas trouvé. Tout d'abord, vérifiez le nom de la langue (une faute de
+% frappe est fort possible), puis regardez si votre installation contient bien \emph{tous} les nombreux fichiers
+% \suffix{.mld} de la distribution du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, placés au bon endroit. Si c'est un fichier
+% \suffix{.mld} local, il devrait être installé au bon endroit (dans une hiérarchie locale) ou être dans le
+% répertoire de travail.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0007]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0007|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                |\emph{\LLL}\verb| is not a known minitoc|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                language object file (.mlo),|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                |\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mlo not found.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Command ignored.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source using a valid language name.|\\
+% \verb|Press RETURN|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcselectlanguage} macro has attempted to load indirectly the \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo} minitoc language
+% object file, but has not found it. First, verify the name of the language (likely to be misspelt), then check if your
+% installation contains \emph{all} the many distributed \suffix{.mlo} files of the \upack{minitoc} package,
+% at the right place.  If it is a local \suffix{.mlo} file, it should be installed in the right place (in a local
+% hierarchy) or be in the working directory.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{mtcselectlanguage} a tenté de charger (indirectement) le fichier minitoc objet de langue
+% \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mlo}, mais ne l'a pas trouvé. Tout d'abord, vérifiez le nom de la langue (une faute de
+% frappe est fort possible), puis regardez si votre installation contient bien \emph{tous} les nombreux fichiers
+% \suffix{.mlo} de la distribution du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, placés au bon endroit. Si c'est un fichier
+% \suffix{.mlo} local, il devrait être installé au bon endroit (dans une hiérarchie locale) ou être dans le
+% répertoire de travail.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0008]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0008|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcsetdepth attempts to use|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                an undefined counter (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|depth).|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You are trying to set the depth for an inexistent or undefined type of mini-table. Verify the type given and the
+% document class, and the loaded packages.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous essayez d'établir la profondeur pour un type de mini-table inexistant ou non défini. Vérifiez le type donné et
+% la classe du document, ainsi que les paquetages chargés.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0009]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0009|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcsetdepth has a wrong first argument|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                It should be a mini-table type|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (parttoc...sectlot).|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetdepth} macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc},
+% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \or\relax
+% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetdepth} est incorrect.
+% Ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0010]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0010|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcsetdepth: Illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetdepth} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type
+% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \or\relax
+% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetdepth} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table
+% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0011]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0011|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcsetfeature has a wrong first argument|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                It should be a mini-table type|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (parttoc...sectlot).|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type
+% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \or\relax
+% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table
+% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0012]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0012|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc) \mtcsetfeature has a wrong second argument|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                It should be a feature param|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (before, after, open, close, pagestyle).|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro is incorrect. It should be \feat{before}, \feat{after},
+% \feat{open}, \feat{close}, or \texttt{thispagestyle}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le deuxième argument de la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} est incorrect. Ce devrait être \feat{before}, \feat{after}
+% \feat{open}, \feat{close} ou \feat{pagestyle}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0013]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0013|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcsetfont has a wrong first argument|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (|\emph{arg1}\verb|).|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                It should be a mini-table type|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (parttoc...sectlot).|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The first argument of \com{mtcsetfont} is incorrect;
+% it should be the type of a mini-table (\texttt{parttoc} \dots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \or\relax
+% Le premier argument de \com{mtcsetfont} est incorrect; ce devrait être un type de mini-table
+% (\texttt{parttoc} \dots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0014]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0014|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcsetfont has a wrong second argument|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                It should be a sectionning level|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (part...subparagraph) or * .|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The second argument of \com{mtcsetfont} is incorrect; it should be a sectionning level (i.e., a sectionning
+% command without its backslash), like \texttt{part} \ldots, \texttt{subparagraph}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le deuxième argument de \com{mtcsetfont} est incorrect; ce devrait être un niveau de sectionnement (c'est-à-dire,
+% une commande de sectionnement sans sa contre-oblique), comme \texttt{part} \ldots, \texttt{subparagraph}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0015]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0015|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcsetformat has a wrong first argument|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                It should be a mini-table type|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (parttoc...sectlot).|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The first argument of a \com{mtcsetformat} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type (\texttt{parttoc},
+% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \or\relax
+% Le premier argument d'une macro \com{mtcsetformat} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table
+% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0016]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0016|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcsetformat has a wrong second argument|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (|\texttt{ARG2}\verb|).|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                It should be a formatting param choosen from:|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                pagenumwidth, tocrightmargin, dotinterval.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetformat} macro is wrong. It should be one of the following keywords:
+% \texttt{pagenumwidth}, \texttt{tocrightmargin}, or \texttt{dotinterval}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le deuxième argument de la macro \com{mtcsetformat} est incorrect. Ce devrait être l'un des mots-clés suivants:
+% \texttt{pagenumwidth}, \texttt{tocrightmargin} ou \texttt{dotinterval}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0017]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0017|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcsetpagenumbers has a wrong first|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                argument (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|)..|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|It should be a mini-table type|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (parttoc...sectlot)|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} macro must be a type of minitable (\texttt{parttoc},
+% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \or\relax
+% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} doit être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc},
+% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0018]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0018|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcsetpagenumbers has a wrong second|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                argument (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...)|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} must be a keyword chosen in the following lists\FZ:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE},
+%       \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI},
+%       \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1};
+% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE},
+%       \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \or\relax
+% Le second argument de la macro \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} doit être un mot-clé choisi dans l'une des listes
+% suivantes\,\FZ:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE},
+%       \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI},
+%       \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1};
+% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE},
+%       \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-} et~\texttt{0}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0019]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0019|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcsetrules has a wrong first argument|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|It should be a mini-table type|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (parttoc...sectlot)|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetrules} is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type (\texttt{parttoc},
+% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \or\relax
+% Le premier argument d'une macro \com{mtcsetrules} est incorrect.
+% Ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0020]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0020|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcsetrules has a wrong second argument|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|).|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...)|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The second argument of the \com{mtcsetrules} must be a keyword chosen in the following lists\FZ:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE},
+%       \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI},
+%       \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+}, and~\texttt{1};
+% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE},
+%       \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-}, and~\texttt{0}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \or\relax
+% Le second argument de la macro \com{mtcsetrules} doit être un mot-clé choisi dans l'une des listes
+% suivantes\,\FZ:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \texttt{on}, \texttt{ON}, \texttt{yes}, \texttt{YES}, \texttt{y}, \texttt{Y}, \texttt{true}, \texttt{TRUE},
+%       \texttt{t}, \texttt{T}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{v}, \texttt{V}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{OUI},
+%       \texttt{o}, \texttt{O}, \texttt{+} et~\texttt{1};
+% \item \texttt{off}, \texttt{OFF}, \texttt{no}, \texttt{NO}, \texttt{n}, \texttt{N}, \texttt{false}, \texttt{FALSE},
+%       \texttt{faux}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{f}, \texttt{F}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{-} et~\texttt{0}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0021]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0021|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcsettitle has a wrong first argument|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                It should be a mini-table type|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (parttoc...sectlot).|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The first argument of a \com{mtcsettitle} macro is incorrect; it should be a mini-table type (\texttt{parttoc},
+% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \or\relax
+% Le premier argument d'une macro \com{mtcsettitle} est incorrect;
+% ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0022]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0022|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcsettitlefont has a wrong first argument|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                It should be a mini-table type|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (parttoc...sectlot).|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The first argument of the \com{mtcsettitlefont} must be a mini-table type. You likely misspelt it.
+% \or\relax
+% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsettitlefont} doit être un type de mini-table. Vous avez probablement
+% fait une faute de frappe.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0023]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0023|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                The macro \mtcsetfeature has incompatible|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                first (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|) and second (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|) arguments.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The\Virage{} first and second arguments of the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro are \emph{incompatible}. You should verify them.
+% \or\relax
+% Les\Virage{} premier et deuxième arguments de la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} sont \emph{incompatibles}.
+% Vous devriez les vérifier.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0024]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0024|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                The macro \mtcsetfont has incompatible|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                first (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|) and second (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|) arguments.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcsetfont} macro takes a mini-table type as first argument, a sectionning level as second argument (or
+% a star), and a sequence of font commands as third argument. The second argument must have a lower level than the first one
+% (i.e., it is meaningless to specify the font for the chapter level entries for a minitoc or a secttoc).
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{mtcsetfont} prend un type de mini-table comme premier argument (ou une étoile), un niveau de
+% sectionnement comme deuxième argument et une séquence de commandes de fontes comme troisième argument. Le deuxième
+% argument doit être de plus bas niveau que le premier (par exemple, il est absurde de spécifier la fonte pour les
+% entrées de niveau chapitre dans une minitoc ou une secttoc).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0025]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0025|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                The macro \mtcsetformat has incompatible|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                first (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|) and second (|\emph{ARG2}\verb|) arguments.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The\Virage{} first and second arguments of a \com{mtcsetformat} macro are \emph{incompatible}.
+% One is likely to be misspelt.
+% \or\relax
+% Les\Virage{} premier et second arguments d'une macro \com{mtcsetformat} sont \Virage\emph{incompatibles}.
+% Il est probable qu'il y~ait une faute de frappe dans l'un d'eux.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0026]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0026|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                The optional argument of \mtcfixglossary|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                is wrong.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|It must be omitted (chapter), or be part, chapter or section|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The optional argument of the \com{mtcfixglossary} macro is incorrect: it should be omitted (then it defaults
+% to \texttt{chapter}) or be \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter}, or \texttt{section}.
+% \or\relax
+% L'argument optionnel de la macro \com{mtcfixglossary} est incorrect: il devrait être omis (et alors il est pris
+% par défaut comme \texttt{chapter}) ou être \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter} ou \texttt{section}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0027]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0027|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                The optional argument of \mtcfixindex|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                is wrong.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|It must be omitted (chapter), or be part, chapter or section|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The optional argument of the \com{mtcfixindex} macro is incorrect: it should be omitted (then it defaults
+% to \texttt{chapter}) or be \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter}, or \texttt{section}.
+% \or\relax
+% L'argument optionnel de la macro \com{mtcfixindex} est incorrect: il devrait être omis (et alors il est pris
+% par défaut comme \texttt{chapter}) ou être \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter} ou \texttt{section}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0028]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0028|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Unable to patch the memoir class.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|So it remains incompatible. Sorry.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Your\Virage{} version of the \class{memoir} class is really \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package
+% and cannot be automatically patched. Please update the \class{memoir} class and/or the \upack{minitoc} package
+% from the CTAN archives or a recent distribution.
+% \or\relax
+% Votre\Virage{} version de la classe \class{memoir} est vraiment \emph{incompatible} avec le
+% paquetage \upack{minitoc} et ne peut pas être corrigée automatiquement. Vous êtes priés de mettre à~jour
+% la classe \class{memoir} et/ou le paquetage \upack{minitoc} depuis les archives ou une distribution récente.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0029]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0029|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Unbalanced mtchideinmainlof environment.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A \env{mtchideinmainlof} environment is unbalanced, so the hiding in the main list of figures could be incorrect.
+% \or\relax
+% Un environnement \env{mtchideinmainlof} n'est pas équilibré, donc le masquage dans la liste des figures
+% principale pourrait être incorrect.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0030]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0030|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Unbalanced mtchideinmainlot environment.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A \env{mtchideinmainlot} environment is unbalanced, so the hiding in the main list of tables could be incorrect.
+% \or\relax
+% Un environnement \env{mtchideinmainlot} n'est pas équilibré, donc le masquage dans la liste des tableaux
+% principale pourrait être incorrect.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0031]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0031|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Unbalanced mtchideinmaintoc environment.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment is unbalanced, so the hiding in the main table of contents could be incorrect.
+% \or\relax
+% Un environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc} n'est pas équilibré, donc le masquage dans la table des matières
+% principale pourrait être incorrect.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0032]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0032|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                You are using the \mtcloadmlo command|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                outside of a .mld file.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|It will be ignored|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% It is \emph{forbidden} to use the \com{mtcloadmlo} macro outside of a \suffix{.mld} file (which is loaded via
+% \com{mtcselectlanguage}). The command is ignored.
+% \or\relax
+% Il est \emph{interdit} d'utiliser la macro \com{mtcloadmlo} en dehors d'un fichier \suffix{.mld} (qui est chargé via
+% \com{mtcselectlanguage}). La commande est ignorée.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0033]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0033|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                The macro \mtcsettitle uses|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                an illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The first argument of a minitoc macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table, like
+% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot},
+% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le premier argument d'une macro minitoc est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table, comme
+% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot},
+% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0034]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0034|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                The macro \mtcsettitlefont uses|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                an illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The first argument of a minitoc macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table, like
+% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot},
+% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof}, or \texttt{sectlot}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le premier argument d'une macro minitoc est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table, comme
+% \texttt{parttoc}, \texttt{partlof}, \texttt{partlot}, \texttt{minitoc}, \texttt{minilof}, \texttt{minilot},
+% \texttt{secttoc}, \texttt{sectlof} ou \texttt{sectlot}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0035]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0035|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                You have used the `insection' option in|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                a document where chapters are defined.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                This is not compatible: option ignored.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Remove this option.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \opt{insection} package option is intended for \class{article}-like document classes, to prevent floats
+% from drifting out of their section. It is pointless for \class{book}-like or \class{report}-like document
+% classes, where floats are contained in their chapter.
+% \or\relax
+% L'option de paquetage \opt{insection} est destinée aux classes de document analogues à~\class{article},
+% pour empêcher les éléments flottants de dériver en dehors de leur section. Elle est sans objet pour les classes
+% de document analogues à~\class{book} ou \class{report}, où les éléments flottants sont contenus dans leur
+% chapitre.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0036]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0036|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Your minitoc installation is incomplete.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                The minitoc language object file (.mld),|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                english.mld is not found.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                We will try to continue with default values.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\
+% \verb|Please fix your minitoc installation.|
+% \verb|Type <return> to continue|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \xfile{english.mld} language definition file can not be found. You should verify your installation of the
+% \upack{minitoc} package. As an interim solution, we provide the missing english titles.
+% \or\relax
+% Le fichier \xfile{english.mld} de définition de langue n'a pas pu être trouvé. Vous devriez vérifier votre
+% installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Comme solution provisoire, nous fournissons les titres anglais manquants.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0037]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0037|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                The \|\emph{\COMMAND}\verb| command is incompatible|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                with the document class.|\\
+% \verb||\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb| ...                                              |\\
+% \verb|                                                  |\\
+% \verb|l.39 \dominitoc[r]|\\
+% \verb|                  |\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have used a preparation or insertion command
+% (\verb|\|\emph{\COMMAND}) which is not available for the
+% document class you are using. Please verify that the document
+% class is compatible with \upack{minitoc} and if the level of
+% the mini-table is available in the document class
+% (section-level mini-tables are not available in \class{book}- or
+% \class{report}-like classes, chapter-level mini-tables are not
+% available in \class{article}-like classes, mini-tables are not
+% available in \class{letter}-like classes, etc.).
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez utilisé une commande de préparation ou d'insertion
+% (\verb|\|\emph{\COMMAND}) qui n'est pas disponible pour la
+% classe de document que vous utilisez. Veuillez vérifier que
+% votre classe de document est compatible avec \upack{minitoc}
+% et si le niveau de mini-table est disponible dans la classe de
+% document (les mini-tables au niveau section ne sont pas
+% disponibles dans les classes analogues à~\class{book} ou
+% \class{report}, les mini-tables au niveau chapitre ne sont pas
+% disponibles dans les classes analogues à~\class{article}, les mini-tables
+% ne sont pas disponibles dans les classes analogues à~\class{letter}, etc.).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0038]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0038|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                Your minitoc installation is incomplete.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                A mandatory minitoc language object file,|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                |\emph{\LLL}\verb|.mld, is not found.|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                We will try to continue with|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                current/default values.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc documentation.|\\
+% \verb|Please fix your minitoc installation.|
+% \verb|Type <return> to continue|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The mandatory \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} language definition file can not be found.
+% You should verify your installation of the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% As an interim solution, we provide the default english titles.
+% \or\relax
+% Le fichier obligatoire \emph{\LLL}\suffix{.mld} de définition de langue n'a pas pu être trouvé.
+% Vous devriez vérifier votre installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Comme solution provisoire, nous fournissons les titres anglais par défaut.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0039]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0039|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                But \part is undefined.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb| not usable|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% There are no adequate sectionning command available to use the \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro; even \com{part} is
+% undefined. Verify your document class.
+% \or\relax
+% Il n'y a pas de commande de sectionnement adéquate disponible pour utiliser la macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature};
+% même \com{part} n'est pas définie. Vérifiez la classe de votre document.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0040]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0040|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                The optional argument of \mtcfixnomenclature|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                is wrong.|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|It must be omitted (chapter), or be part, chapter or section|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The optional argument of the \com{mtcfixnomenclature} macro is incorrect: it should be omitted (then it defaults
+% to \texttt{chapter}) or be \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter}, or \texttt{section}.
+% \or\relax
+% L'argument optionnel de la macro \com{mtcfixnomenclature} est incorrect: il devrait être omis (et alors il est pris
+% par défaut comme \texttt{chapter}) ou être \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter} ou \texttt{section}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0041]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0041|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcsetoffset attempts to use|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                an undefined mini-table type (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You are trying to set the offset for an inexistent or undefined type of mini-table. Verify the type given and the
+% document class, and the loaded packages.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous essayez d'établir la profondeur pour un type de mini-table inexistant ou non défini. Vérifiez le type donné et
+% la classe du document, ainsi que les paquetages chargés.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0042]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0042|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcsetoffset has a wrong first argument|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                It should be a mini-table type|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                (parttoc...sectlot).|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetoffset} macro is incorrect. It should be a type of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc},
+% \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \or\relax
+% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetoffset} est incorrect.
+% Ce devrait être un type de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[E0043]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|! Package minitoc Error: E0043|\\
+% \verb|(minitoc)                \mtcsetoffset: Illegal type of table (|\emph{ARG1}\verb|).|\\
+% \verb|See the minitoc package documentation for explanation.|\\
+% \verb|Type  H <return>  for immediate help.|\\
+% \verb|? h|\\
+% \verb|Correct the source code.|\\
+% \verb|Type <return> and rerun LaTeX|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The first argument of the \com{mtcsetoffset} macro is incorrect. It should be a mini-table type
+% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \or\relax
+% Le premier argument de la macro \com{mtcsetoffset} est incorrect. Ce devrait être un type de mini-table
+% (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots, \texttt{sectlot}).
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \lneed{15}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Messages from the \upack{mtcoff} package}\ipack{mtcoff}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Messages émis par le paquetage \upack{mtcoff}}\ipack{mtcoff}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \pack{mtcoff} package gives only warning messages; their numbers begin with~\texttt{F}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} ne donne que des messages d'avertissement; leurs numéros commencent par~\texttt{F}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{9}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Warning messages}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Messages d'avertissement}
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[F0001]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0001|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                \addstarredchapter{...} should be replaced|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                by \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...}|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                 on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{addstarredchapter} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff}
+% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}|
+% command.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{addstarredchapter} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée
+% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}.
+% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| équivalente.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[F0002]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0002|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                \addstarredpart{...} should be replaced|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                by \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...}|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                 on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{addstarredpart} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff}
+% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}|
+% command.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{addstarredpart} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}.
+% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}| équivalente.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[F0003]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0003|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                \addstarredsection{...} should be replaced|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                by \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...}|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                 on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{addstarredsection} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff}
+% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}|
+% command.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{addstarredsection} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée
+% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}.
+% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| équivalente.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[F0004]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0004|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                \mtcaddchapter{...} should be replaced|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                by \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...}|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                 on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcaddchapter} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff}
+% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}|
+% command.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{mtcaddchapter} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée
+% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}.
+% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{chapter}{...}| équivalente.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[F0005]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0005|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                \mtcaddpart{...} should be replaced|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                by \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...}|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                 on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcaddpart} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff}
+% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}|
+% command.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{mtcaddpart} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}.
+% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{part}{...}| équivalente.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[F0006]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0006|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                \mtcaddsection{...} should be replaced|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                by \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...}|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                 on input line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcaddsection} command is specific of the \upack{minitoc} package and simulated by the \pack{mtcoff}
+% package. If necessary, it should be replaced by the equivalent \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}|
+% command.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{mtcaddsection} est spécifique du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et simulée
+% par le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}.
+% Si nécessaire, elle devrait être remplacée par la commande \com{addcontentsline}\verb|{toc}{section}{...}| équivalente.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[F0007]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0007|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                You should scan (backwards) your .log|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                file to find some commands needing|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                to be replaced if you decide to|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                DEFINITELY stop using minitoc for this|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                document. It is more wise to keep the|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                \usepackage lines for minitoc and mtcoff|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                and to comment out only one of them.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You have replaced the use of the \upack{minitoc} package by its substitute \pack{mtcoff}.
+% It is recommended to keep the \com{usepackage} lines for both \upack{minitoc} and \pack{mtcoff}
+% and to comment out only one of them. If you decide to \emph{definitely} stop using \upack{minitoc} for this document,
+% it is wise to scan (backwards) the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file (after a compilation using \pack{mtcoff})
+% to locate some commands needing to be replaced.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous avez remplacé l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} par son substitut \pack{mtcoff}.
+% Il est recommandé de conserver les lignes \com{usepackage} à~la fois pour \upack{minitoc} et \pack{mtcoff}
+% et d'en mettre une seule en commentaire. Si vous décidez d'arrêter \emph{définitivement} d'utiliser \upack{minitoc}
+% pour ce document, il est prudent d'examiner (en remontant depuis la fin) le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}
+% (après une compilation utilisant \pack{mtcoff}) pour localiser quelques commandes qu'il faut remplacer.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[F0008]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0008|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                The macro \kernafter|\emph{\STRING}\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                should not be used out of context|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                on line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You are using one of the \verb|\kernafter|\emph{\STRING} macros with the \pack{mtcoff} package.
+% The result may be impredictible. You can only redefine these macros to adjust
+% the position of the bottom rule of a type of minitables. Any other usage is
+% meaningless without the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous utilisez l'une des macros \verb|\kernafter|\emph{\STRING} avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}.
+% Le résultat peut être imprévisible. Vous pouvez seulement redéfinir ces macros pour
+% ajuster la position du filet inférieur d'un type de minitables. Tout autre usage
+% sans objet sans le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[F0009]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package mtcoff Warning: F0009|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                The macro \|\emph{\STRING}\verb|offset|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                should not be used out of context|\\
+% \verb|(mtcoff)                on line |\emph{\NNN}\verb|.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You are using one of the \verb|\|\emph{\STRING}\verb|offset| macros with the \pack{mtcoff} package.
+% The result may be impredictible. You can only redefine these macros to adjust
+% the horizontal position of a type of minitables. Any other usage is
+% meaningless without the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous utilisez l'une des macros \verb|\|\emph{\STRING}\verb|offset| avec le paquetage \pack{mtcoff}.
+% Le résultat peut être imprévisible. Vous pouvez seulement redéfinir ces macros pour
+% ajuster la position horizontale d'un type de minitables. Tout autre usage
+% sans objet sans le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \lneed{15}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Message from the \upack{mtcpatchmem} package}\ipack{mtcpatchmem}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Message émis par le paquetage \upack{mtcpatchmem}}\ipack{mtcpatchmem}
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{xmessage}[M0001]
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|Package mtcpatchmem Info: M0001|\\
+% \verb|Package mtcpatchmem Info: mtcpatchmem package to patch the memoir class.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% You are using a version of the \class{memoir} class which needs a correction. This correction has been
+% automatically loaded if necessary. Very recent versions should not need it anymore. See
+% chapter~\vref{memoir-patch}.
+% \or\relax
+% Vous utilisez une version de la classe \class{memoir} qui nécessite une correction. Cette correction a été
+% chargée automatiquement si nécessaire. Les versions très récentes ne devraient plus en avoir besoin. Voir le
+% chapitre~\vref{memoir-patch}.
+% \fi
+% \end{xmessage}
+%
+% \def\jsection#1{\section*{\null\hspace*{-1cm}\fbox{\mbox{#1}}}}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{Jargon}\label{c+jargon}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{5}\raggedcolumns}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
+% \setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.75em}
+% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.75em}
+% \minitoc
+% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty}
+% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt}
+% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{0pt}
+% \mtcskip
+% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
+% \setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt}
+% \minilot
+% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\empty}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\empty}
+% This chapter attempts to explain some terms used in this documentation, and describes some useful files and suffixes.
+% Many data come from the documentations of various cited packages (often from the abstract), and
+% from~\cite{malayalam,malayalam-o,mlsquick,montex,HLATEX,komab,classes,usrguide,clsguide,fontsel,lunde1993,lunde,ttb,TLC2,koma,CIL2E,NSSL2E,cyrguide}.
+% \clearpage
+% \begin{mtchideinmaintoc}
+% \jsection{.\vphantom{A}}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{``.''}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\usuffix{.aux}]\isuffix{.aux} The suffix of the name for an \emph{auxiliary} file of a \LaTeX{} document. It carries
+%      some information from a \LaTeX{} run to the next.
+% \item[\usuffix{.cls}]\isuffix{.cls} The suffix for the name of a document class file, loaded via \com{documentclass}.
+% \item[\usuffix{.dtx}]\isuffix{.dtx} The suffix of the name for a documented source file of a \LaTeX{} package or class. This file
+%      is often associated with a \suffix{.ins} file to generate the package or class. Compiling a \suffix{.dtx}
+%      file with \LaTeX{} generates the documentation.
+% \item[\usuffix{.F}]\isuffix{.F} The base suffix of the name for a minilof file when short extensions (suffixes) are used.
+%      The full suffix is \suffix{.F}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilof.
+% \item[\usuffix{.G}]\isuffix{.G} The base suffix of the name for a partlof file when short extensions (suffixes) are used.
+%      The full suffix is \suffix{.G}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlof.
+% \item[\usuffix{.H}]\isuffix{.H} The base suffix of the name for a sectlof file when short extensions (suffixes) are used.
+%      The full suffix is \suffix{.H}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlof.
+% \item[\usuffix{.ins}]\isuffix{.ins} The suffix of the name for an installation file of a \LaTeX{} package or class. When
+%      compiled with \LaTeX, it extracts the files of the package or class from an \suffix{.dtx} file.
+% \item[\usuffix{.lof}]\isuffix{.lof} The suffix of the name of the ``list of figures'' file.
+% \item[\usuffix{.log}]\isuffix{.log} The suffix of the name of the log file (compilation report).
+% \item[\usuffix{.lot}]\isuffix{.lot} The suffix of the name of the ``list of tables'' file.
+% \item[\usuffix{.M}]\isuffix{.M} The base suffix of the name for a minitoc file when short extensions (suffixes) are used.
+%      The full suffix is \suffix{.M}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minitoc.
+% \item[\usuffix{.maf}]\isuffix{.maf} The suffix of the name of the file generated by the \optd{listfiles} package option. This file
+%      contains the list of the minitoc auxiliary files.
+% \item[\usuffix{.mld}]\isuffix{.mld} The suffix for the name of a minitoc language definition file. A minitoc language definition file
+%      contains the definitions for the mini-table titles in a given language.
+% \item[\usuffix{.mlf}]\isuffix{.mlf} The base suffix of the name for a minilof file when long extensions (suffixes) are used.
+%      The full suffix is \suffix{.mlf}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilof.
+% \item[\usuffix{.mlo}]\isuffix{.mlo} The suffix for the name of a minitoc language object file. For some exotic languages, the encoding
+%      makes not easy to put direcly the titles in a \suffix{.mld} file;
+%      hence the \suffix{.mld} file must load a \suffix{.mlo} file.
+% \item[\usuffix{.mlt}]\isuffix{.mlt} The base suffix of the name for a minilot file when long extensions (suffixes) are used.
+%      The full suffix is \suffix{.mlt}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilot.
+% \item[\usuffix{.mtc}]\isuffix{.mtc} The base suffix of the name for a minitoc file when long extensions (suffixes) are used.
+%      The full suffix is \suffix{.mtc}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minitoc.
+% \item[\usuffix{.P}]\isuffix{.P} The base suffix of the name for a parttoc file when short extensions (suffixes) are used.
+%      The full suffix is \suffix{.P}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the parttoc.
+% \item[\usuffix{.plf}]\isuffix{.plf} The base suffix of the name for a partlof file when long extensions (suffixes) are used.
+%      The full suffix is \suffix{.plf}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlof.
+% \item[\usuffix{.plt}]\isuffix{.plt} The base suffix of the name for a partlot file when long extensions (suffixes) are used.
+%      The full suffix is \suffix{.plt}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlot.
+% \item[\usuffix{.ptc}]\isuffix{.ptc} The base suffix of the name for a parttoc file when long extensions (suffixes) are used.
+%      The full suffix is \suffix{.ptc}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the parttoc.
+% \item[\usuffix{.S}]\isuffix{.S} The base suffix of the name for a secttoc file when short extensions (suffixes) are used.
+%      The full suffix is \suffix{.S}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the secttoc.
+% \item[\usuffix{.slf}]\isuffix{.slf} The base suffix of the name for a sectlof file when long extensions (suffixes) are used.
+%      The full suffix is \suffix{.slf}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlof.
+% \item[\usuffix{.slt}]\isuffix{.slt} The base suffix of the name for a sectlot file when long extensions (suffixes) are used.
+%      The full suffix is \suffix{.slt}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlot.
+% \item[\usuffix{.stc}]\isuffix{.stc} The base suffix of the name for a secttoc file when long extensions (suffixes) are used.
+%      The full suffix is \suffix{.stc}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the secttoc.
+% \item[\usuffix{.sty}]\isuffix{.sty} The suffix for the name of a package file, loaded via \com{usepackage}.
+% \item[\usuffix{.T}]\isuffix{.T} The base suffix of the name for a minilot file when short extensions (suffixes) are used.
+%      The full suffix is \suffix{.T}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the minilot.
+% \item[\usuffix{.tex}]\isuffix{.tex} The suffix of the name of a \TeX\ or \LaTeX\ normal source file.
+% \item[\usuffix{.toc}]\isuffix{.toc} The suffix of the name of the ``table of contents'' file.
+% \item[\usuffix{.U}]\isuffix{.U} The base suffix of the name for a partlot file when short extensions (suffixes) are used.
+%      The full suffix is \suffix{.U}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the partlot.
+% \item[\usuffix{.V}]\isuffix{.V} The base suffix of the name for a sectlot file when short extensions (suffixes) are used.
+%      The full suffix is \suffix{.V}\emph{nn} where \emph{nn} is the absolute number of the sectlot.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{A}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{A}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[absolute numbering] The auxiliary files for the mini-tables have a suffix containing an \emph{absolute
+%      number}, i.e.,~the number is unique and always increasing from the first part, chapter or section; this has
+%      solved some obscure problems, and also made obsolete some commands, like \com{firstpartis},
+%      \com{firstchapteris}, and \com{firstsectionis}. The absolute numbering has been introduced in
+%      version~\#23.
+% \item[\upack{abstract}] The \pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) needs some
+%      precautions if used with its \optp{addtotoc}{abstract} option.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[adjustment] Some \upack{minitoc} commands and environments are known as ``adjustment commands'' because
+%     they are used in
+%     some circumstances to ``adjust'' a counter or to alter the displaying of contents files. These commands and
+%     environments are
+%     \com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc}, \com{adjuststc},
+%     \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc},
+%     \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, \com{incrementstc},
+%     \com{mtcaddpart}, \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection},
+%     \com{mtcfixglossary}, \com{mtcfixindex}, \com{mtcfixnomenclature},
+%     \env{mtchideinmaintoc},
+%     \env{mtchideinmainlof}, and
+%     \env{mtchideinmainlot}.
+%     It is \virage\emph{strongly recommended} that the user verifies the result of such adjustments in the final document.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\feat{after}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed \emph{after} a given type of mini-table.
+%     Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
+% \item[\pack{afterpage}] The \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage} package is used to add code to be executed \emph{after} the
+%     next page break.
+% \item[\upack{alnumsec}]
+%     The \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} allows you to use alphanumeric section
+%     numbering, e.g. A.~Introduction; III.~International Law. It's
+%     output is similar to the \pack{alphanum} package (part of the \class{jura} class~\cite{jura}),
+%     but you can use the standard \LaTeX\ sectionning commands. Thus it is possible to switch numbering
+%     schemes easily.  Greek letters, double letters~(bb) and different delimiters around them are supported.
+%     It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.alnumsec} and
+%     section~\vref{faq.42}).
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\upack{alphanum}] The \pack{alphanum}\imess{W0025} package, which is part of the specialized \class{jura} class~\cite{jura},
+%      by \xname{Felix}{Braun}, is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{3}
+% \item[\AmS] The\SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}}
+%     American Mathematical Society~\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}. This society has developped some document classes:
+%     unfortunately, \class{amsart} and \class{amsproc} are \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package;
+%     \class{amsbook} is compatible but needs precautions.
+% \item[\uclass{amsart}, \xfile{amsart.cls}]\iclass{amsart} A\imess{W0026} document class for articles~\cite{amslatex},
+%     provided by the American Mathematical
+%     Society (\AmS). Unfortunately, this class is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \item[\uclass{amsbook}, \xfile{amsbook.cls}]\iclass{amsbook} A\imess{I0041} document class for books~\cite{amslatex},
+%     provided by the American Mathematical
+%     Society (\AmS). This class is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package, but needs some precautions.
+%     See section~\vref{s+AMS}.
+% \item[\uclass{amsproc}, \xfile{amsproc.cls}]\iclass{amsproc} A\imess{W0027} document class for conference
+%     proceedings~\cite{amslatex},
+%     provided by the American Mathematical Society (\AmS). Unfortunately, this class is
+%     \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\upack{Antomega}] \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega} (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
+%     is a language support package for \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), based on the original
+%     \xfile{omega.sty} file of the Omega project~($\mathbf{\Omega}$). However, it provides some additional useful
+%     functionalities.
+%     Some languages definition files (\suffix{.mld}) use titles taken from \pack{Antomega}: \xfile{greek-mono.mld},
+%     \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}, \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld},
+%     \xfile{russian2m.mld}, \xfile{russian2o.mld}, and \xfile{spanish3.mld}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\env{appendices}] See \upack{appendix} below.
+% \item[\upack{appendix}] The\imess{I0042} \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix} (by \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson})
+%     provides various ways of formatting the titles of appendices. Also (\texttt{sub})\env{appendices}\ienv{subappendices}
+%     environments\ienv{appendices}\ienv{subappendices}
+%     are provided that can be used, for instance, for per chapter/section appendices. If this package
+%     is used with \upack{minitoc}, some precautions are needed (see section~\vref{faq+appendix}).
+% \item[\upack{\Arabi}] \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi} is a system (by \name{Youssef}{Jabri}) to prepare \LaTeX{} documents in the
+%     \lopt{arabic} or \lopt{farsi} languages. The titles in \xfile{arabi.mld} and \xfile{farsi3.mld} come from the \xfile{arabic.ldf}
+%     and \xfile{farsi.ldf} files of this system.
+% \item[\upack{Arab\TeX}] \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} is a package (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}) to prepare \LaTeX{} documents
+%     in the \lopt{arabic} or \lopt{hebrew} languages. The titles in \xfile{arab.mld} (or \xfile{arabic.mld}),
+%     \xfile{arab2.mld} and
+%     \xfile{hebrew.mld} come from \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}, while those of \xfile{hebrew2.mld} come
+%     from \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
+% \item[\upack{Arm\TeX}] \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex} is a package (prepared by \name{Sergueï}{Dachian},
+%     \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} and \name{Vartan}{Akopian}) to prepare \LaTeX{}
+%     documents in the \lopt{armenian} language. The titles in \xfile{armenian.mld} come from Arm\TeX.
+% \item[\uclass{article}]\iclass{article} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{classes}. It has sectionning commands: \com{part}
+%     and \com{section} (and below), but not \com{chapter}. It is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package
+%     and you can make mini-tables at the part and section levels (but, of course, not at the unavailable chapter level).
+% \item[\com{AtBeginDocument}]
+%     This standard macro allows to add code to be executed at the beginning of the document (if fact, at the very
+%     end of its preamble, but inside it, which implies some restrictions), at the point where \verb|\begin{document}| is
+%     processed. This allows a package (or a class) to add code without creating any conflicts with other packages
+%     trying to do the same.
+% \item[\com{AtEndDocument}]
+%     This standard macro allows to add code to be executed at the end of the document, at the point
+%     where \verb|\end{document}| is processed. This allows a package (or a class) to add code without creating any
+%     conflicts with other packages trying to do the same.
+% \item[\textbf{autoconfiguration}] Since version~\#28, \upack{minitoc} detects automaticaly if the extensions (suffixes)
+%     of the file names are limited to 3~characters (like under MS-DOS) or not. This process is named autoconfiguration.
+%     The package option \opt{shortext} forces the limitation to 3~characters.
+% \item[auxiliary] During the preparation of a document, the \LaTeX\ system uses some \textbf{auxiliary} files to
+%     store information. The standard auxiliary files are \emph{document}\suffix{.aux} (for cross-reference
+%     labels, counters, etc.), \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} for the table of contents,
+%     \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} for the list of figures, and \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} for the list of
+%     tables. The \upack{minitoc} package creates its own auxiliary files, to store the contents of each
+%     mini-table. These files are the \emph{minitoc auxiliary files}, whose names are
+%     \emph{document}\texttt{.}\emph{extension}, the table~\vref{t+suffixes} lists the possible extensions.
+%     See also the \suffix{.maf} extension above.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{B}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{B}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\upack{babel}] The \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and others) is
+%     a large package useful to write \LaTeX\ documents in many languages, not only english.
+%     Many titles for mini-tables come directly from the \pack{babel} package.
+% \item[\upack{Bang\TeX}]\ipacka{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} A package for typesetting documents in the \lopt{bangla}
+%     (\lopt{bengali}) language using the {\TeX/\LaTeX} systems; see~\cite{bangtex}.
+% \item[\feat{before}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed \emph{before} a given type of mini-table.
+%     Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
+% \item[\BibTeX] A program by \name{Oren}{Patashnik} to make bibliographies in \LaTeX{} documents. Distributed with \LaTeX.
+%     See~\cite{ttb,btxdoc,btxhak,btxfaq}.
+% \item[\upack{bibtopic}]\ipack{bibtopic} A \LaTeX\ package~\cite{bibtopic} for including several bibliographies in a document.
+%    These bibliographies might be considered to cover different topics (hence the name) or bibliographic
+%    material (e.g., primary and secondary literature) and the like.
+% \item[\upack{bibunits}] The \pack{bibunits} package~\cite{bibunits} allows separate bibliographies for different
+%     units or parts of the text. The units can be chapters, sections or \env{bibunit} environments. This
+%     package is compatible with a wide variety of packages, including, but not limited to, \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes},
+%     \pack{overcite}~\cite{overcite} and \KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}.
+% \item[\uclass{book}]\iclass{book} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{classes}. It has sectionning commands: \com{part},
+%     \com{chapter}, and \com{section} (and below). It is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package and
+%     you can make mini-tables at the part and chapter levels (but not at the section level, to avoid too many
+%     auxiliary files).
+% \item[\pack{booktabs}] This nice package~\cite{booktabs} helps to the preparation of better tables, \emph{without}
+%     vertical rules nor double rules.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{C}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{C}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\pack{calc}] The \pack{calc}~\cite{calc} package makes easier the numeric computations (on counters and dimensions)
+%     when preparing a \LaTeX{} document.
+% \item[cappuccino] See ``minutes'' below.
+% \item[\upack{captcont}] The \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} provides support for retaining
+%     a figure or caption number across several float environments --- usually over several pages. It allows
+%     control over the contents of the List-of-Figures and the List-of-Tables pages. It should be compatible
+%     with all other packages that modify or extend the float environment and with the \pack{subfig}
+%     package~\cite{subfig} in particular.
+% \item[\upack{caption}] The \pack{caption} package~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\imess{W0033} provides many ways to customize the captions
+%     in floating environments such \env{figure} and \env{table} and cooperates with many other packages.
+% \item[\upack{caption2}] The\footnote{This text comes from the documentation of the \pack{caption} package.
+%     The \pack{caption} and \pack{caption2} packages have the same author, \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}.}
+%     \pack{caption2} package~\cite{caption2}\imess{W0034} used to be an experimental side-version
+%     of the regular \pack{caption} package~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} and has been superseed by the new release of
+%     the regular \pack{caption} package version~\mbox{3.0} in December 2003. \pack{caption2} is still
+%     some kind of supported, that means it will be part of future releases and bugs will still be fixed,
+%     so existing documents using this package will still compile. But \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt} will \emph{not} answer
+%     questions about this package anymore except questions on migrating to the regular version of
+%     the \pack{caption} package. And it will \emph{not} be adapted or enhanced in the future.
+%
+%      So please don't use this package for new documents. It's old, it's obsolete and it starts to begin smell bad!
+%
+%      Please ignore all hints in books or other documents which try to tell you that the \pack{caption2} package should
+%      be used instead of the \pack{caption} package -- these hints are outdated since December 2003.
+% \item[catcode] Short for ``category code''. In\footnote{This definition is taken from
+%     ``\textsl{The \TeX{}book}''~\cite{texbook,ftb}.}
+%     the first place, it's wise to have a precise idea of what your keyboard sends to the machine. There are 256~characters
+%     that \TeX\ might encounter at each step, in a file or in a line of text typed directly on your terminal. These
+%     256~characters are classified into 16~categories numbered~0 to~15. See table~\vref{t+J+catcodes}.
+%     \begin{table}[!tp]
+%     \def?{\phantom{0}}
+%     \centering
+%     \changeskips
+%     \caption{Category codes}\label{t+J+catcodes}
+%     \begin{tabular}{@{}cll@{}}
+%     \toprule
+%     &\textbf{Category}&\textbf{Meaning}\\
+%     \midrule
+%     ?0&Escape character&(\texttt{\bs}~usually)\\
+%     ?1&Beginning of group&(\texttt{\{}~usually)\\
+%     ?2&End of group&(\texttt{\}}~usually)\\
+%     ?3&Math shift&(\texttt{\$}~usually)\\
+%     ?4&Alignment tab&(\texttt{\&}~usually)\\
+%     ?5&End of line&(\emph{return}~usually)\\
+%     ?6&Parameter&(\texttt{\#}~usually)\\
+%     ?7&Superscript&(\texttt{\textasciicircum}~usually)\\
+%     ?8&Subscript&(\texttt{\_}~usually)\\
+%     ?9&Ignored character&(\emph{null}~usually)\\
+%     10&Space&(\texttt{\textvisiblespace}~usually)\\
+%     11&Letter&(\texttt{A}, \dots, \texttt{Z} and~\texttt{a}, \dots, \texttt{z})\\
+%     12&Other character&(none of the above or below)\\
+%     13&Active character&(\texttt{\textasciitilde}~usually)\\
+%     14&Comment character&(\texttt{\%}~usually)\\
+%     15&Invalid character&(\emph{delete}~usually)\\
+%     \bottomrule
+%     \end{tabular}
+%     \end{table}
+%     It's not necessary for you to learn these code numbers; the point is only that \TeX\ responds to 16~different
+%     types of characters. At first, ``\textsl{The \TeX{}book}'' led  you to believe that there were just two types --- the
+%     escape character and the others --- and then you were told about two more types, the grouping symbols~\texttt{\{}
+%     and~\texttt{\}}. The category code for any character can be changed at any time, but it is usually wise to stick to a
+%     particular scheme.
+% \item[\upack{ccaption}] The \pack{ccaption} package~\cite{ccaption}\imess{W0035} provides commands for ``continuation captions'',
+%     unnumbered captions, and a legend heading for any environment. Methods are provided to define captions
+%     for use outside float environments, and to define new float environments and subfloats. Tools are provided
+%     for defining your own captioning styles.
+% \item[\upack{chngpage}] The \pack{chngpage} package (by \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) provides commands to change
+%     the page layout in the middle of a document, and to robustly check for typesetting on odd or even pages.
+% \item[Chapter~0]
+%     Some documents do not begin with chapter number one, but with chapter number zero (or even a weirder number).
+%     This caused a serious problem in old versions of the \upack{minitoc} package: the minitocs appeared in the
+%     wrong chapters, and a first correction was the introduction of specific commands (\com{firstchapteris} and
+%     co.). With the addition of the absolute numbering of the mini-table auxiliary files (see \emph{absolute} above),
+%     the problem was solved in \upack{minitoc} version~\#23, and these commands became obsolete.
+%     See section~\vref{faq.5}.
+% \item[\upack{chapterbib}] The \pack{chapterbib} package~\cite{chapterbib} allows multiple bibliographies in a
+%     \LaTeX\ document, including items \com{cite}'d in more than one bibliography.  Despite the name
+%     ``\pack{chapterbib}'', \emph{the bibliographies are for each included file}, not necessarily for each
+%     chapter.
+% \item[\uopt{checkfiles}]\ioptd{checkfiles}
+%     A package option of \upack{minitoc}. It checks every mini-table to look if it is empty; then empty mini-tables
+%     are \emph{not} printed. This is the default. The opposite package option (\opt{nocheckfiles}) prints even the
+%     empty mini-tables, which look ugly. See section~\vref{o+checkfiles}.
+% \item[\upack{CJK}] The \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg} and others), is a set of packages and fonts to
+%     prepare \LaTeX\ documents in some oriental language, like chinese, japanese, korean (with Hangûl or Hanja fonts),
+%     and thai, plus some variants of russian.
+%     The titles of mini-tables for these languages come from some \pack{CJK} files and were inserted in
+%     \suffix{.mld} files when possible, or in \suffix{.mlo} files when the encoding is incompatible with the
+%     \isuffix{.ins}\isuffix{.dtx}\isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.ins/.dtx} mechanism;
+%     then the \suffix{.mld} file must input the corresponding \suffix{.mlo} file.
+%     \pack{CJK} implements the GB, Big~5, JIS, SJIS, KS, UTF~8, and CNS encodings (on 16~bits, except UTF~8 on 24~bits).
+%     See table~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}.
+%     \begin{table}[tp]
+%     \changeskips
+%     \caption{Encoding schemes implemented in \upack{CJK}}\label{t+jargon+CJK}\ipack{CJK}
+%     \centering
+%     \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
+%     \toprule
+%     \textbf{Encoding}&\textbf{1~byte}&\textbf{2~bytes}&\textbf{3~bytes}\\
+%     \midrule
+%     GB&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF7}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
+%     Big~5&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF9}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
+%     JIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF4}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
+%     SJIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFC}&---\\
+%     KS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFD}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
+%     UTF~8&\texttt{0xC0}--\texttt{0xEF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}\\
+%     CNS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
+%     \bottomrule
+%     \end{tabular}
+%     \end{table}
+%
+%     Some encoding schemes (Big~5, SJIS) have gaps in the range of the second byte.
+%     It is difficult to input Big~5 and SJIS encoding directly into \TeX\ since some of the values used for the
+%     encodings' second bytes are reserved for control characters: `\texttt{\{}', `\texttt{\}}', and
+%     `\texttt{\bs}'. Redefining them breaks a lot of things in \LaTeX; to avoid this, preprocessors are normally
+%     used which convert the second byte into a number followed by a delimiter character. For further details,
+%     please refer to~\cite{lunde1993,lunde}; \name{Ken}{Lunde} discusses in great detail all \pack{CJK} encodings which are
+%     or have been in use.
+%     Please note that the \upack{minitoc} package uses the \suffix{.mlo} files as a workaround for this problem;
+%     see section~\vref{fo+lang}.
+% \item[class] The \textbf{class}\footnote{This note is extracted from~\cite{NSSL2E}, then adapted.} is the first
+%     information \LaTeX{} needs to know when processing an
+%     input file; it is the type of document the author wants to create. This
+%     is specified with the \com{documentclass} command.
+%     \begin{quote}
+%     \com{documentclass}\verb|[|\emph{options}\verb|]{|\emph{class}\verb|}|
+%     \end{quote}
+%     \noindent Here \emph{class} specifies the type of document to be created.
+%     Table~\vref{t+documentclasses} lists the standard document classes~\cite{classes}. The \LaTeXe{} distribution provides additional
+%     classes for other documents, including letters and slides, but the \upack{minitoc} package has not
+%     been tested with all these classes. The
+%     \emph{options} parameters customize the behaviour of the document
+%     class. The options have to be separated by commas.
+%     The standard classes supported by the \upack{minitoc} package
+%     are listed in section~\vref{s+supported+classes}.
+%     \begin{table}[!tp]
+%     \changeskips
+%     \caption{Standard document classes}\label{t+documentclasses}
+%     \centering
+%     \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+%     \toprule
+%     \textbf{Class}&\textbf{Usage}\\
+%     \midrule
+%     \class{article}~\cite{classes}&For articles in scientific journals, presentations, short reports, program documentation,
+%      invitations, \ldots\\
+%     \class{proc}~\cite{proc}&For preparing conference proceedings; analog to the \class{article} class.\\
+%     \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc}&For preparing the documentation of a package or of a class; analog to the \class{article} class.\\
+%     \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews}&For preparing the announcement of a \LaTeX{} release; analog to the \class{article} class.\\
+%     \class{report}~\cite{classes}&For longer reports containing several chapters, small books, PhD theses, \ldots\\
+%     \class{book}~\cite{classes}&For real books.\\
+%     \class{letter}~\cite{letter}&For letters; as this class has no sectionning commands, do not use \upack{minitoc} with
+%       this class.\\
+%     \class{slides}~\cite{slides}&For slides; the class uses big sans serif
+%       letters. You might want to consider using Beamer\TeX{}$^a$ instead.
+%       Do not use \upack{minitoc} with these classes.\\
+%     \midrule
+%     \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{$^a$\phantom{-}\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/beamer/doc/beameruserguide.pdf}\hfill\null}\\
+%     \bottomrule
+%     \end{tabularx}
+%     \end{table}
+% \item[\feat{close}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed immediately after (\emph{close}) the insertion
+%     of the auxiliary file for a given type of mini-table.
+%     Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
+%     See the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file, in section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}.
+% \item[\uscrp{cmk}]\iscrp{cmk}
+%     An example of shell script to prepare the documentation files in PostScript format from the ones in PDF format.
+%     This script should be adapted to your needs.
+% \item[CMR] For ``Computer Modern Roman''. The roman subset of the Computer Modern fonts. See ``Computer Modern''
+%     below.
+% \item[\texttt{comp.text.tex}] The Usenet news group about \TeX\ and \LaTeX, in english.
+% \item[Computer Modern] A set of fonts~\cite{cmt} designed by \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth} for \TeX. Initially
+%     they were built with {\MF}~\cite{meta-des,metabook} (a program also created by \textsc{Knuth}), but PostScript
+%     type~1 (vector) versions
+%     exist today, with extensions (for accented characters, mainly): the EC-fonts (European Computer Modern),
+%     the cm-super fonts, etc.
+% \item[counter] A \TeX\ register containing an integer value. There are 256 counters (from~0 to~255) in \TeX, but
+%     \LaTeX\ uses some of them, and many packages need some counters for their own usage. An extended version
+%     derived from \TeX, \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, allows more counters. Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) also offers more counters.
+% \item[CTAN] The \emph{Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network}, a~set of computer archives containing most of
+%     the \TeX\ related resources (like fonts, sofware, documentations, packages). They are accessible via
+%     Internet.  See \url{http://ctan.org}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{D}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{D}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\pack{dblaccnt}] I~needed to use the \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} package to typeset ``The pdf\TeX\ Program''
+%     entry~\cite{han} in the bibliography, because its author's first name contains a double
+%     accent \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}.
+% \item[\texttt{de.comp.text.tex}] The Usenet news group about \TeX\ and \LaTeX, in german.
+%     \begin{table}[!tp]
+%     \changeskips
+%     \caption{Depths for sectionning commands}\label{t+j+depths}
+%     \centering
+%     \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
+%     \toprule
+%     \textbf{Class:}&\textbf{\class{book}}&\textbf{\class{report}}&\textbf{\class{article}}\\
+%     \midrule
+%     \dcnt{secnumdepth}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$3$\\
+%     \com{part}&$-1$&$-1$&$0$\\
+%     \com{chapter}&$\phantom{-}0$&$\phantom{-}0$&$\times$\\
+%     \com{section}&$\phantom{-}1$&$\phantom{-}1$&$1$\\
+%     \com{subsection}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$2$\\
+%     \com{subsubsection}&$\phantom{-}3$&$\phantom{-}3$&$3$\\
+%     \com{paragraph}&$\phantom{-}4$&$\phantom{-}4$&$4$\\
+%     \com{subparagraph}&$\phantom{-}5$&$\phantom{-}5$&$5$\\
+%     \bottomrule
+%     \end{tabular}
+%     \end{table}
+% \item[depth] In the standard documents classes (and in most classes) with sectionning commands, we have a notion of
+%     \textbf{depth}. The depth of a sectionning command determines the numbering level in its title (from the value of the
+%     \dcnt{secnumdepth} counter), and the entries for a given sectionning command appear in the main table of contents
+%     if the depth of this sectionning command is lower than or equal to the value of the \dcnt{tocdepth} counter; see
+%     table~\vref{t+j+depths} for the depths of the sectionning commands in the main document classes.
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+%     The mechanism is analog for the parttocs, minitocs, and secttocs, using the values of the \dcnt{parttocdepth},
+%     \dcnt{minitocdepth}, and \dcnt{secttocdepth} counters. If you use sub-figures or sub-tables, the corresponding
+%     mini-tables use counters like \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth}, \dcnt{minilofdepth},
+%     \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth}, and \dcnt{sectlotdepth}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[descriptor] (file descriptor). A software entity describing the interface between a program and a file.
+%     For most programs and operating systems, the number of file descriptors is limited. For \TeX{} (and \LaTeX),
+%     there are 16~file descriptors for writing and 16~file descriptors for reading.
+% \item[\xfile{devanagari.sty}] The \emph{\devnag{} for \TeX{}} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}) package~\cite{devanagari} provides a
+%     way to typeset high-quality \devnag{} text with \TeX{}. \devnag{} is a script used for writing and printing
+%     Sanskrit and a number of languages in Northern and Central India such as Hindi and Marathi, as well as Nepali.
+%     The \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} package was originally developed in May 1991 by Frans Velthuis for the University of Groningen,
+%     The Netherlands, and it was the first system to provide support for the \devnag{} script for \TeX{}.
+% ^^A \item[\xfile{duplex2v.pro}] A PostScript header file, which tries to activate recto-verso printing. It works
+% ^^A     with some HP and Canon PostScript printers.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{E}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{E}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\texttt{em}] A length unit equal (approximatively) to the width of a~``m'' letter in the current font.
+% \item[\uscrp{emk}]\iscrp{emk}
+%     An example of shell script to prepare the english documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. The script
+%     \scrp{imk} must have be run previously. See item~\vref{IN10}.
+% \item[\xfile{en-mtc.bst}] A bibliographic style derived from the \xfile{plain.bst}\isuffix{.bst} standard style, but
+%     modified with the \tool{urlbst} tool~\cite{urlbst} to add an~\texttt{URL} field. Family names of authors
+%     and editors are in small caps, years are in old style digits.
+% \item[encoding] This specifies the order that characters appear in the font (e.g., whether the 65th character is ``A'').
+%     The most common value for TeX font encoding is OT1. The other predefined option is T1 (extended \TeX). There's also
+%     US~ASCII (7~bit), ISO~Latin-1 (8~bit), Adobe Standard Encoding, UTF8 (Unicode~\cite{chou,unicode-des,unicode}),
+%     etc. See table~\vref{t+var-encodings} and ~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}.
+% \begin{table}[tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Various encodings}\label{t+var-encodings}
+% \centering
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Encoding}&\textbf{Comment}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{ansinew}&Windows~3.1 ANSI encoding, extension of Latin-1.\\
+% \texttt{applemac}&Macintosh encoding.\\
+% \texttt{ascii}&ASCII encoding for the range 32--127.\\
+% \texttt{cp1250}&Windows 1250 (Central and Eastern Europe) code page.\\
+% \texttt{cp1251}&Windows 1251 (Cyrillic) code page.\\
+% \texttt{cp1252}&Synonym for \texttt{ansinew}.\\
+% \texttt{cp1257}&Windows 1257 (Baltic) code page.\\
+% \texttt{cp437}&IBM~437 code page, which is the original
+%      American code page and contains letters, digits,
+%      mathematical symbols, and some characters useful in the
+%      construction of pseudographics.\\
+% \texttt{cp437de}&IBM~437 code page (German version).\\
+% \texttt{cp850}&IBM~850 code page, almost the same as
+%      ISO~Latin~1, but character arrangement is not the same.\\
+% \texttt{cp852}&IBM~852 code page.\\
+% \texttt{cp855}&IBM~855 code page (Cyrillic).\\
+% \texttt{cp865}&IBM~865 code page.\\
+% \texttt{cp866}&IBM~866 code page (MS-DOS Cyrillic).\\
+% \texttt{decmulti}&DEC Multinational Character Set encoding.\\
+% \texttt{latin1}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed
+%      for most Western European languages, including Danish,
+%      Dutch, English, Faroese, Finnish, Flemish, French,
+%      German, Icelandic, Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese,
+%      Spanish, and Swedish. Some non-European languages, such as
+%      Hawaiian and Indonesian, are also written in this
+%      character set.\\
+% \texttt{latin2}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed
+%      for most Central European languages, including Croatian,
+%      Czech, Hungarian, Polish, Romanian, Slovak, and Slovenian.\\
+% \texttt{latin3}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed
+%      for Esperanto, Maltese, Turkish, and Galicean. However,
+%      \texttt{latin5} is the prefered character set for
+%      Turkish.\\
+% \texttt{latin4}&ASCII encoding plus the characters needed
+%      for the Baltic languages (Latvian, Estonian, and
+%      Lithuanian), Greenlandic, and Lappish (Sámi).\\
+% \texttt{latin5}&Is essentially the same as
+%      \texttt{latin1}, except that some Turkish characters replace
+%      less commonly used Icelandic letters.\\
+% \texttt{next}&Next encoding.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \end{table}
+% \item[environment] An environment is a delimited domain in a document, where special rules apply. Such a
+%     domain is delimited by \verb|\begin{|\emph{env}\verb|}| \ldots{} \verb|\end{|\emph{env}\verb|}| and may take
+%     arguments, like this:
+%     \begin{quote}
+%     \verb|\begin{minipage}[t]{.5\textwidth}|\\
+%     \verb|\end{minipage}|
+%     \end{quote}
+% \item[\packa{\eTeX}{etex}] \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} is an extented version of \TeX, with much more
+%     registers and many new primitives; it supports also left-to-right and right-to-left writing.
+% \item[ethiop]\ipack{ethiop} A \LaTeX\ package~\cite{ethiop} giving the \lopt{ethiopian} language support for the \pack{babel}
+%     package~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
+% \item[extension] The name of a file is often made of 2~parts: a \emph{base name} and an \emph{entension},
+%     separated by a dot. On some old operating systems, the base name is limited to 8~characters and the extension
+%     to 3~characters (the ``8+3'' scheme). See also sections~\vref{MS-DOS} and~\vref{.8+3}.
+%     It is strongly recommended to not have more than one dot in a file name.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{F}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{F}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\xfile{farsi.sty}] See \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} below.
+% \item[\upack{Farsi\TeX}]\ipacka{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} A package~\cite{farsi} to typeset a document in the \lopt{farsi} (iranian, persian) language.
+%     See~\url{http://www.farsitex.org}. But this package is today available only for \LaTeX2.09.
+%     See also sections~\vref{s+mld+farsi1} and~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}.
+% \item[features] A feature (for the \upack{minitoc} package) is a set of actions executed at each occurrence of
+%     a mini-table of a given type. Five features are associated to each mini-table type: a ``\feat{before}'' feature
+%     (executed before the whole mini-table), an ``\feat{after}'' feature (executed after the whole mini-table),
+%     a ``\feat{open}'' feature, executed just before inserting the mini-table file,
+%     a ``\feat{close}'' feature, executed just after inserting the mini-table file,
+%     and a
+%     ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature, which is executed with the mini-table to set its page style.
+%     Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
+% \item[\env{filecontents}]
+%     A special \LaTeX{} environment. It allows to create a file (whose name is passed as an argument of the
+%     environment) by writing the contents of the environment into that file:
+%     \begin{quote}
+%     \texttt{\bs begin\{filecontents\}\{\emph{file}\}}\\
+%     \texttt{\ldots\emph{contents}~~\ldots}\\
+%     \texttt{\bs end\{filecontents\}}
+%     \end{quote}
+%     This environment should be used \emph{before} \com{documentclass}. It is used in \xfile{minitoc.ins}
+%     to prepare the \suffix{.mlo} files (see section~\vref{fo+lang}) and some files used in the compilation
+%     of the documentation.
+% \item[\com{firstchapteris}] An obsolete command, temporarily used as a workaround for the Chapter~0 problem;
+%     see~\textbf{Chapter~0} and \textbf{absolute numbering} above, and section~\vref{faq.5}.
+% \item[\com{firstpartis}] Analog to \com{firstchapteris} above.
+% \item[\com{firstsectionis}] Analog to \com{firstchapteris} above.
+% \item[\pack{float}] This package~\cite{float} (by \name{Anselm}{Lingnau})\imess{I0053} improves the interface for defining floating
+%     objects such as figures and tables in \LaTeX{}. It adds the notion of a `float style' that governs appearance
+%     of floats. New kinds of floats may be defined using a \com{newfloat} command analogous to \com{newtheorem}.
+%     This package also incorporates the functionality of \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}'s package \pack{here},
+%     giving floating environments a \texttt{[H]} option which means `PUT IT HERE' (as opposed to the
+%     standard \texttt{[h]} option which means `You may put it here if you like').
+% \item[\com{FloatBarrier}]
+%     A macro from the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins}. It sets up a ``barrier'' against the drift of
+%     floats (like figures or tables).
+% \item[\pack{floatrow}] This package~\cite{floatrow} (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko})\imess{I0053} is an extension of the
+%     \pack{float} package~\cite{float} (by \name{Anselm}{Lingnau}), reusing its code, with extensions from
+%     the \pack{rotfloat} package~\cite{rotfloat} (by \name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}).
+% \item[\pack{flowfram}] This\imess{W0097} package~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} is designed to enable you
+%     to create text \emph{frames}
+%     in a document such that the contents of the \env{document} environment flow from one frame to the next in the
+%     order that they were defined. This is useful for creating posters or magazines or any other form of document that
+%     does not conform to the standard one or two column layout. As this package defines its own system of
+%     minitocs, it is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \item[\uscrp{fmk}]\iscrp{fmk}
+%     An example of shell script to prepare the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. The script
+%     \scrp{imk} must have be run previously. See item~\vref{IN10}.
+% \item[\upack{fncychap}] The \pack{fncychap}\imess{W0086} package~\cite{fncychap} provides a set of commands for changing
+%     the format used for some headings (chapters) in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes:
+%     \class{book} and \class{report}.
+%     It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.fncychap} and
+%     section~\vref{faq.38}).
+% \item[\texttt{fr.comp.text.tex}] The Usenet newsgroup about \TeX\ and \LaTeX, in french.
+% \item[\upack{franc.sty}]\ipack{franc} A small package file used to prepare the french documentation.
+%     It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\upack{frbib.sty}]\ipack{frbib} A small package file used to prepare the bibliography of the french documentation.
+%     It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\xfile{fr-mtc.bst}] A bibliographic style file used to prepare the bibliography of the french
+%     documentation.
+%     It has been updated from the standard \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plain.bst} for french by \name{Ronan}{Keryell}, then I added
+%     some adaptations for french (like last names in small caps for authors and editors, years in old style digits),
+%     then modified with the \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst} tool to add an \texttt{URL} field.
+% \item[\upack{frnew.sty}]\ipack{frnew} A small package file used to prepare the french documentation.
+%     It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{G}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{G}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\pack{geometry}] The \pack{geometry} package~\cite{geometry} provides a flexible and complete user interface to page
+%     dimensions. You can specify them by using intuitive parameters to get your desired page layout. For instance,
+%     if you want to set margins (the left, right, top and bottom margins) to 2cm from each edge of
+%     the paper, what you need is just:
+%     \begin{quote}
+%     \verb|\usepackage[margin=2cm]{geometry}|
+%     \end{quote}
+%     This powerful (and recommended) package is used in some example documents and in this documentation.
+% \item[\upack{guarani}]\ipack{guarani} A \LaTeX\ package to compose text in \ilopt{guarani}Guaraní,
+%     the main language spoken in Paraguay.
+%     The file \xfile{guarani.ldf}, included in this package, defines the titles. See~\cite{guarani} and
+%     section~\vref{s+mld+guarani}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{H}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{H}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\upack{hangcaption}] The \pack{hangcaption}\imess{W0092} package~\cite{hangcaption} defines a variant of the
+%     \com{caption} command to produce captions with hanging indentation. This package is likely
+%     obsolete (1992, \LaTeX2.09).
+% \item[Hindi] For the Hindi language, see the \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} package~\cite{devanagari} above. The
+%     \upack{minitoc} package accepts the \lopt{devanagari} and \lopt{hindi} language options, which are
+%     synonyms. A \lopt{hindi-modern} language option is also available.
+%     See also~\cite{hindi99} about the Hindi language.
+% \item[hint] An indication, a clue to detect a problem. It is also a message written (into the
+%     \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file) by the \optd{hints} option (see below).
+% \item[\uopt{hints}]\ioptd{hints} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It verifies the loading order of some
+%     packages, the invocation order of some \upack{minitoc} commands, the consistency between main \upack{minitoc}
+%     commands, etc., and gaves warnings and other useful hints (mainly in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file). This is
+%     a default option (use the \opt{nohints} option to skip these checks).
+% \item[\upack{H\LaTeX}]\ipacka{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} A system to write documents in the Korean language, using \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$) (see below).
+%     Written by \name{Un}{Koaunghi}~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX}. It uses special Hangûl or Hanja fonts and the UTF-8 input
+%     encoding.
+% \item[hyperlink] In a document, a reference to another object which is dynamicaly found (via a click with the
+%      mouse). This requires a special type of document (PDF, PostScript with hypertext features) and a suitable
+%      viewer (PDF viewer, recent PS viewer). This is useful to navigate in a document or in many documents,
+%      which can be remote documents.
+% \lneed{4}
+% \item[\upack{hyperref}] The\SMM{\lmess{W0023}\\\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0039}}
+%      \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web} is used to emend cross-referencing commands in
+%      \LaTeX\ to produce some sort of \com{special} commands; there are
+%      backends for the \com{special} set defined for \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX} \texttt{dvi} processors,
+%      for embedded pdfmark commands for processing by \tool{Acrobat Distiller}
+%      (\tool{dvips} and \tool{dvipsone}), for \tool{dviwindo},
+%      for \textbf{pdf\TeX}, for \textbf{\TeX4ht}, and for \tool{VTEX}'s pdf and HTML
+%      backends.
+%
+%      This package derives from, and builds on, the work of the \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}
+%      project, described in \cite{hypertex}. It extends
+%      the functionality of all the \LaTeX\ cross-referencing commands
+%      (including the table of contents, bibliographies, etc.) to produce
+%      \com{special} commands which a driver can turn into hypertext links;
+%      it also provides new commands to allow the user to write \emph{ad hoc}
+%      hypertext links (hyperlinks), including those to external documents and URLs.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{I}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{I}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\upack{ifmtarg}] The \pack{ifmtarg} package~\cite{ifmtarg} provides an if-then-else command
+%      for testing if a macro argument is empty (``empty'' meaning zero or more spaces only).
+% \item[\pack{ifthen}] The \pack{ifthen} package~\cite{ifthen} implements an \com{ifthenelse} command for \LaTeXe.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item [\uscrp{imk}]\iscrp{imk}
+%     An example of shell script, which prepares the \upack{minitoc} package from \xfile{minitoc.ins} and
+%     \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; note that \scrp{imk} must be run before running \scrp{emk} or \scrp{fmk}.
+%     See item~\vref{IN10}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\uopt{insection}] The \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} package option loads the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins}
+%     with adequate options to avoid the floats (like figures and tables) to drift outside of their sections.
+%     This package option is recommended if you use sectlofs or sectlots in your document. See
+%     section~\vref{mtcsecttoc}.
+% \item[insertion] The insertion commands of the \upack{minitoc} package insert a mini-table in the document.
+%     A~corresponding \emph{preparation} command must have been invoked (only once) before. The insertion commands
+%     are (see table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}):
+%        \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}
+%        \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\
+%        \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\
+%        \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot},\\
+%        \com{mtcprepare}
+%        \end{tabular}
+% \item[\xfile{INSTALL}] A text file describing the installation of the \upack{minitoc} package. See
+%     chapter~\vref{c+installation}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{J}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{J}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\com{jobname}] A \TeX\ primitive containing the name of the document in preparation, i.e.,~the name of
+%     the file read first by \TeX{} (or \LaTeX), without its extension. Very useful to build the names of other
+%     files.
+% \item[\uclass{jura}] The \class{jura}\imess{W0029} class~\cite{jura}, by \xname{Felix}{Braun}, is \emph{incompatible} with the
+%      \upack{minitoc} package. It is used for german judicial documents.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{K}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{K}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}] A project~\cite{kannadatex} to use \LaTeX{} for typesetting in the
+%      Kannada language. See section~\vref{s+mld+kannada}.
+% \item[\uopt{k-loose}]\ioptd{k-loose} A \upack{minitoc} package option useful if your document is written with one of the \KOMAScript{}
+%     classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. This option tries to set a loose line spacing in the mini-tables.
+%     Analog to the \optd{loose}
+%     package option for standard classes.
+% \item[\uopt{k-tight}]\iopt{k-tight} A \upack{minitoc} package option useful if your document is written with one of the \KOMAScript{}
+%     classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}.
+%     This option tries to set a tight line spacing in the mini-tables. Analog to the \opt{tight}
+%     package option for standard classes.
+% \lneed{3}
+% \item[\KOMAScript]
+%     {\KOMAScript}\imess{I0043}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} is a very complex bundle. You may see this, because it
+%     is not only one class or one package but a bundle of many classes and
+%     packages. The classes (\class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook},
+%     \class{scrlettr}, \class{scrlttr2}, and \class{scrreprt})
+%     are counterparts to the standard classes but never they come with
+%     only the same commands, environments, options and optional possibilities
+%     like the standard classes nor they result in the same look-a-like.
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+%     The \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt}, and \class{scrartcl} classes are compatible with the
+%     \upack{minitoc} package, with some precautions (see section~\vref{special.entries}).
+%     The \class{scrlettr} and \class{scrlttr2} have no sectionning commands, so
+%     the \upack{minitoc} package is pointless with them.
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+%     \KOMAScript{} comes with a lot of classes, packages, commands,
+%     environments and possibilities. Some of these you may find also at the
+%     standard classes, many of them you wouldn't. Some are even supplements
+%     to the \LaTeX{} kernel.
+%
+%     The main classes of the {\KOMAScript} bundle are designed as
+%     counterparts to the standard {\LaTeX} classes. This means that the
+%     {\KOMAScript} bundle contains replacements for the three standard
+%     classes \class{book}, \class{report}, and \class{article}.
+%     There is also a replacement for the standard class \class{letter}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{L}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{L}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[Lambda] The \LaTeX{} format (in the \TeX\ meaning of that word) adapted to the special features of
+%     Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) is called ``\emph{Lambda}'' ($\mathbf{\Lambda}$).
+% \item[Lamed] The \LaTeX{} format (in the \TeX\ meaning of that word) adapted to the special features of
+%     \pack{Aleph}~($\aleph$) is called ``\emph{Lamed}''~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/).
+% \item[\LaTeX] \LaTeX~\cite{latex-manual} is a typesetting system that is very
+%     suitable for producing scientific and mathematical
+%     documents of high typographical quality. It is also suitable for
+%     producing all sorts of other documents, from simple letters
+%     to complete books. \LaTeX{} uses \TeX~\cite{texbook,ftb} as its
+%     formatting engine (from~\cite{NSSL2E}).
+%
+%     In fact, \LaTeX{} is a macro package that enables authors to typeset and print
+%     their work at the highest typographical quality, using a predefined,
+%     professional layout. \LaTeX{} was originally written by
+%     \name{Leslie}{Lamport}~\cite{latex-manual}. It uses the
+%     \TeX{} formatter as its typesetting engine.
+%     These days \LaTeX{} is maintained by \name{Frank}{Mittelbach}
+%     and his team.
+%
+%     \begin{SMOOTH}
+%     In 1994 the \LaTeX{} package was (deeply) updated by the
+%     \LaTeX3 team, led \mbox{by~\name{Frank}{Mittelbach}},
+%     to include some long-requested improvements, and to re\-unify all the
+%     patched versions which had cropped up since the release of
+%     \LaTeX2.09 some years earlier. To distinguish the new version from
+%     the old, it is called \LaTeXe.
+%     \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+%     \LaTeX{} is pronounced ``Lay-tech'' or ``Lah-tech.'' If you refer to
+%     \LaTeX{} in an \texttt{ASCII} environment, you type \texttt{LaTeX}.
+%     \LaTeXe{} is pronounced ``Lay-tech two~e'' and typed \texttt{LaTeX2e}.
+% \item[\LaTeX2.09] An obsolete version of the \LaTeX\ program, before 1994; it is no more supported.
+%     Do not use it\footnote{Except in the case of a very old document; if possible, try to convert
+%     it.}. Use the current version of \LaTeXe, which is supported and much more efficient.
+% \item[\LaTeXe] The current version of the \LaTeX\ program, after 1994; it is supported.
+% \item[\LaTeX3] The future version of \LaTeX, whose development is still in progress.
+% \item[leaders] A repetitive sequence of dots (or of one another small character), regulary spaced, used to link
+%     two objects on the same line (leading from a title to a page number in a table of contents or the like).
+% \item[\uclass{letter}]\iclass{letter} A\Virage{} standard document class~\cite{letter} to prepare letters for postal
+%     mail (mail on paper). As such documents have no sectionning commands nor structure, the \upack{minitoc} package
+%     is pointless (hence \emph{incompatible}) with them.
+% \item[\upack{lipsum}] The \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} allows to easily insert sentences
+%     in a test file with a minimum of typing. The sentences are in latin but are modified and made nearly
+%     senseless. I have used this package in some of the examples of documents.
+%     See also~\url{http://lipsum.com} for the origin of this text (pieces of
+%     \emph{De Finibus Bonorum et Malorum} by Marcus \textsc{Tullius Cicero}).
+% \item[\uopt{listfiles}]\ioptd{listfiles} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It creates a list of the minitoc auxiliary
+%     files (these files contains the mini-tables and may be removed after the \LaTeX\ run) in the
+%     \emph{document}\suffix{.maf} file. Default. See section~\vref{s+listfiles}.
+% \item[LOF, LoF] An acronym for ``list of figures''.
+% \item[\dcnt{lofdepth}] This counter, if it exists, contains the depth of the list of figures.
+% \item[\uopt{loose}]\ioptd{loose} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It gives a loose line spacing in the
+%     mini-tables. It is the default. The opposite option is \opt{tight}.
+% \item[LOT, LoT] An acronym for ``list of tables''.
+% \item[\dcnt{lotdepth}] This counter, if it exists, contains the depth of the list of tables.
+% \item[LPPL] The \emph{LaTeX Project Public License}, available at
+% \begin{quote}
+%    \url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}
+% \end{quote}
+%    Its current version is 1.3 (2003-12-01). The \upack{minitoc} package is distributed under this license.
+% \item[\uclass{ltxdoc}]\iclass{ltxdoc} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{ltxdoc}, for preparing the documentation of a package or of a class.
+%     For the \upack{minitoc} package, it is very similar to the \class{article} document class; see above.
+% \item[\uclass{ltnews}]\iclass{ltnews} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{ltnews}, for preparing the announcement of a \LaTeX{} release. For the
+%     \upack{minitoc} package, it is very similar to the \class{article} document class; see above.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{M}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{M}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\com{makeatletter} \textmd{and} \com{makeatother}] Many\footnote{Informations
+%     from~\cite[page~843]{TLC2}.} internal commands of \LaTeX{}, of
+%     packages and classes contain the \texttt{@}~character in their names. This effectively prevents such names
+%     from being used in documents for user-defined commands. However, it also means that they cannot appear in a
+%     document, even in the preamble, without taking special precautions. As it is sometimes necessary to have
+%     such bits of ``internal code'' in the preamble, the commands \com{makeatletter}
+%     and \com{makeatother} make it easy to do: the difficult bit is to remember to add them, failure to do
+%     so can result in some strange errors. And these two commands \Virage\emph{should never be used in a package or class file}.
+% \item[makefile] A special text file containing instructions describing the creation and the installation of a
+%     piece of software, using the ``\textbf{make}'' utility; \textbf{make} is a nice tool coming from the Unix
+%     operating system, but variants exists.
+% \item[\upack{mcaption}] The \pack{mcaption}\imess{W0036} package~\cite{mcaption} provides a \env{margincap}
+%     environment for putting captions in the outer document margin with either a top or bottom alignment.
+% \item[\textbf{MCE}] A minimal [complete] example is the smallest possible complete document that illustrates a problem.
+%      A minimal example file should not include any packages or code that do not contribute to the problem, but must
+%      include a document class and the \env{document} environment (from~\cite{talbot-mini}). See also~\cite{preusse},
+%      \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl} and
+%      \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} for good advices.
+% \lneed{7}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\uclass{memoir}, \xfile{memoir.cls}]\iclass{memoir} A very%
+%     \SMM{\lmess{E0028}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0032}\\\lmess{I0044}\\\lmess{M0001}}
+%     general and powerful document class
+%     (by \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}, described in~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}); this class
+%     is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package (with some precautions) if you use a recent version. See
+%     section~\vref{faq+memoir}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[mini-bibliography] See \textbf{minibbl} below.
+% \item[mini-list] Synonym for ``mini-table'' below.
+% \item[mini-lof] See ``minilof'' below.
+% \item[mini-lot] See ``minilot'' below.
+% \item[mini-table] This term refers to a local table of contents (like a table of contents, a list of figures or a
+%     list of tables) for a sectionning unit (part, chapter or section), by opposition to a global table (the
+%     table of contents, the list of figures or the list of tables for the whole document). The main aim of the
+%     \upack{minitoc} package is the creation of such mini-tables. But the term ``minitoc'' is also used to refer
+%     to such mini-table, as a generic term, because the first versions of the package allowed only tables of
+%     contents for chapters.
+% \item[mini-toc] See ``minitoc'' below.
+% \item[minibbl] Short for ``mini-bibliography'', i.e.,~to have a bibliography per part, chapter or section, or
+%     even by theme or subject. This is out of the domain of the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{faq.9}.
+% \item[minilof] A list of figures for a chapter.
+% \item[\dcnt{minilofdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the minilofs.
+% \item[minilot] A list of tables for a chapter.
+% \item[\dcnt{minilotdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the minilots.
+% \item[minitoc] A table of contents for a chapter. Also used as a generic term for any mini-table (see
+% ``mini-table'' above).
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}] A bibliographic data base for the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}] The source file for the french documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package. In
+%     fact, it just sets \com{jobname} then loads \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, which itself loads
+%     \com{jobname}\suffix{.lan}\isuffix{.lan} to select the language used in \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; \xfile{minitoc.dtx} contains
+%     both english and french documentation fragments, selected by \com{ifcase} constructs with the
+%     \com{LANG} variable, set to~0 by \xfile{minitoc.lan}\isuffix{.lan} or to~1 by \xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} (i.e.,~by
+%     \com{jobname}\suffix{.lan}). \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}This file contains a style for formating the index in the french documentation. It
+%     is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} A file used to force the french language in the documentation.
+%     It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}] The french documentation in PDF format.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ps}] The french documentation in PostScript format. No more distributed (but look at the
+%     \scrp{cmk} script).
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bib}] A bibliographic data base for the english documentation of the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bug}] A plain text file containing a list of problems and questions about the \upack{minitoc}
+%     package. See chapter~\vref{FAQ}.
+% \item[\dcnt{minitocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the minitocs.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.dtx}] The file containing the documentation and the commented code of the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc-hyper.sty}]\ipack{minitoc-hyper} A special version~\cite{minitoc-hyper} of the \upack{minitoc} package which has been
+%      prepared by \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne},
+%      \xname{Didier}{Verna} and \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts} to work with the powerful \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web};
+%      \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} has integrated their work so since version \#31, \upack{minitoc} is compatible with
+%      \pack{hyperref}.
+%      \emph{Hence\Virage{} the \pack{minitoc-hyper} package~\cite{minitoc-hyper} is now obsolete and
+%      should no more be used.
+%      It it still present on the CTAN archives for compatibility with old documents.}
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ins}] The installation file for the \upack{minitoc} package. Compiling it with \LaTeX\
+%     produces most of the files of the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}This file contains a style for formating the index in the english documentation.
+%     It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.l}] A text file containing the list of all the files being included in the
+%     \upack{minitoc} package. Files not listed in \xfile{minitoc.l} are files used only to install the package or
+%     to produce its documentation.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} A file used to force the english language in the documentation.
+%     It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pdf}] The english documentation in PDF format.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pre}]\isuffix{.pre} This file contains a \LaTeX{} preamble for the documentation.
+%     It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ps}] The english documentation in PostScript format. No more distributed (but look at the
+%     \scrp{cmk} scripts).
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sty}] This file contains the main part of the \upack{minitoc} package, with comments removed.
+%     It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sum}] A plain text file containing a commented list of the minitoc commands and environments. See
+%     chapter~\vref{c+memento}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}] A ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy containing all files in the
+%     \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \item[\upack{minutes}] The \pack{minutes} package~\cite{minutes} (by \name{Knut}{Lickert}) is used to prepare
+%     conference proceedings. The \upack{minitoc} package allows to add ``coffee breaks'' in the table of contents
+%     via commands like \com{addcoffeeline} and \com{coffeeline} (and internal commands) whose names contain
+%     the string ``\texttt{coffee}'', hence the footnote about ``cappuccino''{\myCoffeecup} in the
+%     installation chapter!%
+%     \IfFileExists{marvosym.sty}{\footnote{The little cups \myCoffeecup{} come from the \pack{marvosym} package~\cite{marvosym}.}}{}
+% \item[\upack{Mon\TeX}] \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} is a large package to prepare documents in various dialects
+%     of the Mongol language (Bicig and Bicig2, Mongol, Bithe and Manju, Buryat, Xalx and Khalkha) and in a
+%     dialect of Russian used in Mongolia (Russianc). Bicig is another name for Uighur.
+%     You can find many things about Mongolia and Mongolian at the web site~\cite{mongol-web}.
+% See also:
+% {\small\begin{quote}
+% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}\\
+% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_language}\\
+% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_script}\\
+% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Clear_script}\\
+% \url{http://www.indiana.edu/~mongsoc/mong/language.htm}\\
+% \url{http://www.viahistoria.com/SilverHorde/main.html?research/MongolScripts.html}\\
+% \url{http://www.krysstal.com/writing_evolution.html}\\
+% \url{http://mongolxel.webz.cz/qaguchin/index.htm}
+% \end{quote}}
+%
+%     The following description is extracted from~\cite{montex}.
+%
+%     \reversemarginpar
+%      \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} is a package which offers support for writing documents in
+%      Mongolian, Manju, Buryat and Russian.
+%
+%      \lneed{3}
+%      Mongolian
+%      can be represented in traditional Uighur script (also known as Classical or Traditional
+%      Script) and Cyrillic. Manju resembles the Traditional Mongolian script
+%      (from which it is derived) but uses a rich choice of diacritics in
+%      order to eliminate numerous ambiguities of the Mongolian script
+%      ancestor. Modern Buryat, like Mongolian in its present form, is written
+%      with a Cyrillic alphabet,
+%      but both Mongolian (35 letters) and Buryat
+%      (36 letters) use more letters than Russian (33 letters).
+%
+%     \normalmarginpar
+%      \begin{description}
+%      \item[Mongolian]
+%      The word \emph{Mongolian} is actually an umbrella term for
+%      several languages rather than the precise name of a single language.
+%      Things become more complicated when names of ethnic groups, languages
+%      and writing systems are mixed.
+%      \begin{description}
+%              \item [Xalx] or Khalkha is the name of the Mongolian
+%                      nationality residing in Mongolia proper. Their
+%                      dialect forms the basis of Mongolian written with
+%                      Cyrillic letters. Throughout this text, \emph{Modern
+%                      Mongolian} is used as a synonym.
+%              \item [Buryat]
+%                      is the name of the Mongolian nationality
+%                      residing in Buryatia, north of Mongolia, east of
+%                      Lake Baikal, being a part of the Russian Federation.
+%                      The Buryat call themselves \emph{Buryaad} while Xalx
+%                      Mongolians call them \emph{Buriad}. The English name
+%                      follows the Russian orthography.
+%                      Linguistically, Xalx and Buryat Mongol are fairly
+%                      close languages; Buryat has a slightly different
+%                      sound system in which the phoneme /s/ partially
+%                      shifted to /h/; the modern Buryat Cyrillic alphabet
+%                      (virtually identical with the Cyrillic alphabet used
+%                      for writing Modern Mongolian) has one additional
+%                      letter (H/h, \verb|\xalx{H/h}|) for marking the difference to /s/.
+%                      %\enlargethispage*{1ex}
+%              \item [Bicig] (literally \emph{script} in Mongolian) denotes
+%                      text written in the traditional Mongolian script
+%                      which is also referred to as Uighur. Throughout this
+%                      document, the term \emph{Bicig} will be used on an
+%                      equal footing with \emph{Classical} and
+%                      \emph{Traditional} Mongolian. The latter term is
+%                      used in the names of the Unicode/ISO10646 character
+%                      plane U1800 which contains Mongolian, Manju, Sibe
+%                      and sets of special characters called Ali Gali or
+%                      Galig. In order to identify Mongolian script related
+%                      commands distinct for Mongolian and Manju, the
+%                      Mongolian commands have the name root \lopt{bicig}
+%                      whereas the Manju commands have the name root
+%                      \lopt{bithe}.
+%      \end{description}
+%
+%      Xalx Mongolian, or Modern Colloquial Mongolian, is about as
+%      different from the form written in Classical script as modern
+%      English in phonetical spelling (assume it be written in Shavian
+%      letters) from the highly historical orthography of Standard English.
+%      Beyond these differences, Mongolian written in Classical Script
+%      usually preserves a substantial amount of historical grammatical
+%      features which make it look a bit like Elizabethan English.
+%
+%      \item[Manju]
+%      Manju is a Tungusic language closely related to Mongolian. Though
+%      Manju is virtually not spoken anymore, it has been the official
+%      language during 300 years of Manju government in Qing Dynasty China.
+%      Vast amounts of official documents survive, as well as some of the
+%      finest multilingual dictionaries ever compiled, e.\,g. the
+%      Pentaglot, or Mirror in Five Languages, a dictionary with 18671
+%      entries in five languages (Manju, Tibetan, Mongolian, Uighur and
+%      Chinese). See~\cite{pentaglot} for more details. Manju writing is derived from Uighur Mongolian by adding
+%      diacritics in the form of dots and circles (\emph{tongki fuka sindaha hergen}, script with dots and
+%      circles).
+%      \end{description}
+% \item[MS-DOS] (Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered} Disk Operating System) An old operating system
+%     for personnal computers (PCs).
+%     From the \upack{minitoc} point of view,
+%     its main drawback is the use of filenames with short extensions (the ``8+3'' scheme), which limits to~99 the number
+%     of mini-tables for each kind.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-2c.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2c.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a two columns
+%      page layout. See section~\vref{mtc-2c.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-2nd.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex} An example of document using the \upack{minitoc} package and its \lopt{french2}
+%     language option. See section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.bib}]\iexam{mtc-add.bib} A small bibliographic data base for the \exam{mtc-add.tex}
+%      and \exam{mtc-ads.tex} example documents. See section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-3co.tex}]\iexam{mtc-3co.tex} An example of document using the \upack{minitoc} package to
+%      prepare a minitoc on three columns. See section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.tex}]\iexam{mtc-add.tex} An example document showing how to use \com{mtcaddchapter} and the
+%      \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} with \upack{minitoc}. See section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-ads.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ads.tex} An example document showing how to use \com{mtcaddsection} and the
+%      \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} with \upack{minitoc}. See section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}.
+%      It also shows how it is challenging to manage the mini-lists of floats at the section level.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-amm.tex}]\iexam{mtc-amm.tex} An example file showing the use of the \env{appendices} environment in a
+%     \class{memoir} class document with the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-apx.tex}]\iexam{mtc-apx.tex} An example file showing the use of the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment
+%     to hide the entries of the appendices in the main TOC and to create a part-level TOC for the appendices. See
+%     section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-art.tex}]\iexam{mtc-art.tex} An example of document (\class{article} class) using the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{mtc-art.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-bk.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bk.tex} An example of document (\class{book} or \class{report} class)
+%     using the \upack{minitoc} package.  See section~\vref{mtc-bk.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-bo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bo.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a two columns
+%      page layout and using the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}. See section~\vref{mtc-bo.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-ch0.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document with a
+%      starred first chapter. See section~\vref{mtc-ch0.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-cri.tex}]\iexam{mtc-cri.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with starred parts
+%      and chapters. See section~\vref{mtc-cri.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-fko.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fko.tex} An example file showing the problem of fonts in minitocs when
+%      using the \class{scrbook} class. See section~\vref{mtc-fko.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with changing some fonts. See section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex} Another example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with changing some fonts. See section~\vref{mtc-fo2.tex}.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-gap.tex}]\iexam{mtc-gap.tex} An example file showing the use of the \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} and
+%     \com{mtcgapafterheads} commands. See section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex} An example file showing the use of the \env{mtchideinmainlof}
+%     and \env{mtchideinmainlot} specialized environments. See section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex} An example file showing the use of the following pairs of commands:
+%     \begin{itemize}
+%     \item \com{mtchideinmainlof} and \com{endmtchideinmainlof},
+%     \item \com{mtchideinmainlot} and \com{endmtchideinmainlot}.
+%     \end{itemize}
+%     See section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-hia.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hia.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package to hide the entries for
+%     some tables in the main list of tables of an \class{article} class document. See section~\vref{mtc-hia.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-hir.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hir.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package to hide the entries for
+%     some tables in the main list of tables of a \class{report} class document. See section~\vref{mtc-hir.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-hop.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hop.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the
+%     \class{scrbook} document class. See section~\vref{mtc-hop.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-liv.tex}]\iexam{mtc-liv.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a \class{book} with
+%     customized table of contents and minitocs. See section~\vref{mtc-liv.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-mem.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mem.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package
+%     with the \class{memoir} class. See section~\vref{mtc-mem.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-mm1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package
+%     with the \class{memoir} class, if you want to change some fonts. See section~\vref{mtc-mm1.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-mu.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mu.tex} A document using a minitoc set in a \env{wrapfigure} environment with the
+%     \pack{wrapfig} package~\cite{wrapfig}. See section~\vref{mtc-mu.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-nom.tex}]\iexam{mtc-nom.tex} A document swowing an interaction betwen the \upack{minitoc}
+%      package and the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl}. See section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-ocf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex} A document using the \feat{open} and \feat{close} features to
+%      prepare a minitoc on three columns. See section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-ofs.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex} A document using the \feat{open} and \feat{close} features to
+%      prepare a minitoc on three columns and \com{mtcsetoffset} to shift the minitoc to align it on the left.
+%       See section~\vref{mtc-ofs.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-sbf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the
+%      \pack{subfigure} package~\cite{subfigure}. See section~\vref{mtc-sbf.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-scr.tex}]\iexam{mtc-scr.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with a {\KOMAScript}
+%      class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, \class{scrreprt}. See section~\vref{mtc-scr.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-syn.tex}]\iexam{mtc-syn.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package when the table of
+%      contents is prededed by some starred chapters. See section~\vref{mtc-syn.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-tbi.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the
+%      \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}. See section~\vref{mtc-tbi.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlc.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package in a document of
+%      \class{article} class. It is the example of~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernized. See section~\vref{mtc-tlc.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the
+%      \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft} and their interaction about the page numbers in the mini-tables.
+%      See section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-tsf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex} An example file showing the use of the \upack{minitoc} package with the
+%      \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}. See section~\vref{mtc-tsf.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-vti.tex}]\iexam{mtc-vti.tex} An example file showing the use of the \com{mtcpolymtoc} command
+%      and explaining \index{polymorphic entry}``polymorphic entries''. See section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\upack{mtcmess}]\ipack{mtcmess} A package used to provide variants of the standard commands
+%     \com{PackageInfo}, \com{PackageWarning}, \com{PackageWarningNoLine}, and \com{PackageError}
+%     by adding an optional argument for an unique message identifier.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\upack{mtcoff}]\ipack{mtcoff} A package which is used in place of the \upack{minitoc} package to
+%     ignore all the commands and environments of the \upack{minitoc} package. In fact, it defines them to
+%     do nothing. Useful if you want a version of your document without any mini-table.
+% \item[\upack{mtcpatchmem}]\ipack{mtcpatchmem} A\SMMZ{\lmess{M0001}} small package which is automatically loaded if
+%     necessary when you use the \class{memoir} document class with a version \emph{incompatible} with the
+%     \upack{minitoc} package, but correctible. It is generated when compiling \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\texttt{mu}] A length unit normaly used in math mode (\texttt{mu} means ``math unit''); 18~math units make
+%     \texttt{1em} (one quad), which is about the width of a~``m'' in the current font. So the size of \texttt{1mu}
+%     is font dependent. The separation between dots in the dotted lines in the mini-tables is expressed in math units.
+% \item[\upack{multibib}] The \pack{multibib} package~\cite{multibib} allows to create references to multiple
+%     bibliographies within one document. It thus provides a complementary functionality to packages
+%     like \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits} or \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib}, which allow
+%     to create one bibliography for multiple, but different parts of the document.
+% \item[\upack{multicol}] The \pack{multicol} package~\cite{multicol} defines the \env{multicols} environment
+%     (with a~``\textbf{s}'') to typeset text on several columns. Used in some example documents.
+% \item[\upack{multitoc}] This package~\cite{multitoc} allows setting only the table of contents, list of
+%     figures and/or list of tables in two or more columns (using the \pack{multicol} package~\cite{multicol}, of course).
+%     The number of columns can be configured via commands; the
+%     multicolumn toc(s) can be selected via package options.
+%     The \exam{mtc-3co.tex} example document uses this package; see section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{N}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{N}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\pack{natbib}] It is a \LaTeXe{} (but with some support for \LaTeX2.09) package~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} to act
+%     as generalized interface for standard and non-standard bibliographic style files (\BibTeX).
+% \item[\upack{needspace}] The \pack{needspace} package~\cite{needspace} provides commands to reserve space
+%     at the bottom of a page. If there is not enough space on the current page (column) a new page (column) is started.
+% \item[NFSS] The \emph{New Font Selection Scheme}. The \LaTeXe{} font selection system~\cite{fontsel}
+%     was first released as the ``New Font Selection Scheme'' (NFSS) in 1989, and then in release~2 in 1993.
+%     \LaTeXe{} includes NFSS release~2 as standard.
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+%     Every text font in \LaTeX{} has five \emph{attributes}:
+%     \begin{description}
+%     \item[encoding] This specifies the order that characters appear in the
+%        font.  The two most common text encodings used in \LaTeX{} are
+%        \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth}'s ``\TeX{} text'' encoding (OT1), and the ``\TeX{} text extended''
+%        encoding (T1) developed by the \TeX{} Users Group members during a \TeX{}
+%        Conference at Cork in~1990 (hence its informal name ``Cork encoding'').
+%        See~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}.
+%     \item[family] The name for a collection of fonts, usually grouped under
+%        a common name by the font foundry. For instance, ``Adobe Times'', ``ITC
+%        Garamond'', and \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth}'s ``Computer Modern Roman'' are all font families.
+%     \item[series] How heavy or expanded a font is. For instance, ``medium
+%        weight'', ``narrow'' and ``bold extended'' are all series.
+%     \item[shape] The form of the letters within a font family.  For
+%        instance, ``italic'', ``oblique'' and ``upright'' (sometimes called
+%        ``roman'') are all font shapes.
+%     \item[size] The design size of the font, for instance ``10pt''.
+%     \end{description}
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+%     The possible values for these attributes are given short acronyms by
+%     \LaTeX. The most common values for the font encoding are given in table~\vref{t+nfss+1}.
+% \begin{table}[!p]
+% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
+% \changeskips
+%     \caption{Most common font encodings}\label{t+nfss+1}
+% \centering
+%        \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+%        \toprule
+%           \textbf{Encoding}&\textbf{Description}\\
+%        \midrule
+%           \texttt{T1}    &\LaTeX{} extended text (``Cork encoding'')\\
+%           \texttt{TS1}   &\LaTeX{} symbols (Latin)\\
+%           \texttt{T2A}, \texttt{T2B}, \texttt{T2C}&\LaTeX{} text (Cyrillic)\\
+%           \texttt{T3}    &\LaTeX{} phonetic alphabet\\
+%           \texttt{TS3}   &\LaTeX{} phonetic alphabet (extra symbols)\\
+%           \texttt{T4}    &\LaTeX{} text (African languages)\\
+%           \texttt{T5}    &\LaTeX{} text (Vietnamese)\\
+%           \texttt{T7}    &\LaTeX{} text (reserved for Greek)\\
+%           \texttt{OT1}   &\TeX{} text (as defined by \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\
+%           \texttt{OT2}   &\TeX{} text for Cyrillic languages (obsolete)\\
+%           \texttt{OT3}   &International phonetic alphabet (obsolete)\\
+%           \texttt{OT4}   &\TeX{} text with extensions for the Polish language\\
+%           \texttt{OT6}   &\TeX{} text with extensions for the Armenian language\\
+%           \texttt{OML}   &\TeX{} math italic (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\
+%           \texttt{OMS}   &\TeX{} math symbols (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\
+%           \texttt{OMX}   &\TeX{} math large symbols (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\
+%           \texttt{X2}    &\LaTeX{} extended text (Cyrillic)\\
+%           \texttt{U}     &Unknown \\
+%           \texttt{L}\meta{xx}&A local encoding\\
+%           \texttt{L7x}   &Encoding used for the Lithuanian language\\
+%           \texttt{LTH}   &Encoding used for the Thai language\\
+%           \texttt{LV1}   &Encoding used with some \texttt{VTeX} fonts\\
+%           \texttt{LY1}   &Alternative to \texttt{T1} encoding, for Y\&Y software\\
+%           \texttt{PD1}   &Implements the PDFDocEncoding for use with \LaTeXe's NFSS.\\
+%           \texttt{PU}    &Implements the Unicode encoding for use with \LaTeX's NFSS.\\
+%        \bottomrule
+%        \end{tabularx}
+% ^^A \end{table}
+% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
+% ^^A \begin{table}[!tp]
+%     \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}}
+%     \begin{minipage}[t]{.54\textwidth}
+%        \capstart
+%        \caption{Most common font families}\label{t+nfss+2}
+%     \centering
+%        \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}}
+%        \toprule
+%           \textbf{Family}&\textbf{Description}\\
+%        \midrule
+%           \texttt{cmr} &Computer Modern Roman \\
+%           \texttt{cmss}&Computer Modern Sans \\
+%           \texttt{cmtt}&Computer Modern Typewriter \\
+%           \texttt{cmm} &Computer Modern Math Italic \\
+%           \texttt{cmsy}&Computer Modern Math Symbols \\
+%           \texttt{cmex}&Computer Modern Math Extensions \\
+%           \texttt{ptm} &Adobe Times \\
+%           \texttt{phv} &Adobe Helvetica \\
+%           \texttt{pcr} &Adobe Courier\\
+%           \texttt{lazy}&Additional \LaTeX{} symbols\\
+%        \bottomrule
+%        \end{tabular}%
+%     \end{minipage}%
+%     &&%
+%     \begin{minipage}[t]{.45\textwidth}
+%        \capstart
+%        \caption{Most common font series}\label{t+nfss+3}
+%     \centering
+%        \leavevmode\null\hfill\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}}
+%        \toprule
+%           \textbf{Series}&\textbf{Description}\\
+%        \midrule
+%           \texttt{ul}&Ultra light\\
+%           \texttt{el}&Extra light\\
+%           \texttt{l}&Light\\
+%           \texttt{sl}&Semi light\\
+%           \texttt{m} &Medium  \\
+%           \texttt{sb} &Semi bold  \\
+%           \texttt{b} &Bold  \\
+%           \texttt{eb} &Extra bold  \\
+%           \texttt{bx}&Bold extended \\
+%           \texttt{ub}&Ultra bold \\
+%           \texttt{c} &Condensed\\
+%        \bottomrule
+%        \end{tabular}\hfill\null
+%     \end{minipage}
+%     \end{tabularx}
+% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
+%     \end{table}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%     \begin{table}[!tp]
+%     \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}}
+%     \begin{minipage}[t]{.54\textwidth}
+%        \capstart
+%        \caption{Most common font shapes}\label{t+nfss+4}
+%     \centering
+%        \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}}
+%        \toprule
+%           \textbf{Shape}&\textbf{Description}\\
+%        \midrule
+%           \texttt{n} &Normal (that is ``upright'' or ``roman'') \\
+%           \texttt{it}&Italic \\
+%           \texttt{sl}&Slanted (or ``oblique'') \\
+%           \texttt{sc}&Caps and small caps\\
+%           \texttt{u}&Unslanted (upright italic)\\
+%        \bottomrule
+%        \end{tabular}
+%     \end{minipage}%
+%     &&%
+%     \begin{minipage}[t]{.45\textwidth}
+%        \capstart
+%        \caption{Most common font widths}\label{t+nfss+4a}
+%     \centering
+%        \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}lcl@{}}
+%        \toprule
+%           \textbf{Width}&\textbf{\%}&\textbf{Description}\\
+%        \midrule
+%           \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra condensed\\
+%           \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra condensed\\
+%           \texttt{c}&50.0&Condensed\\
+%           \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi condensed\\
+%           \texttt{m}&50.0&Medium\\
+%           \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi extended\\
+%           \texttt{c}&50.0&Extended\\
+%           \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra extended\\
+%           \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra extended\\
+%        \bottomrule
+%        \end{tabular}
+%     \end{minipage}
+%     \end{tabularx}
+%     \end{table}
+%     The ``local'' encodings are intended for font encodings which are only
+%     locally available, for instance a font containing an organisation's
+%     logo in various sizes.
+%
+% \lneed{4}
+%     There are far too many font families to list them all, but some common
+%     ones are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+2}.
+%     The most common values for the font series are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+3}.
+%     The most common values for the font shape are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+4}.
+%     The most common values for the font width are listed in table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}.
+%
+%     The font size is specified as a dimension, for instance \texttt{10pt} or
+%     \texttt{1.5in} or \texttt{3mm}; if no unit is specified, \texttt{pt} is assumed.  These five
+%     parameters specify every \LaTeX{} font, see table~\vref{t+nfss+5}, for instance.
+%     \begin{table}[!tp]
+%     \changeskips
+%     \centering
+%     \caption{The five font parameters of some fonts}\label{t+nfss+5}
+% ^^A      \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}ll@{}l@{}}
+%        \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllllZ{1}l@{}}
+%        \toprule
+%           \multicolumn{5}{@{}l}{\textbf{\LaTeX{} specification}}&
+%           \textbf{Font}&\textbf{\TeX{} name}\\
+%        \midrule
+%           \texttt{OT1}&\texttt{cmr} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{n} & \texttt{10} &
+%           Computer Modern Roman 10 point &
+%           \texttt{cmr10}\\
+%           \texttt{OT1} & \texttt{cmss} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{sl} & \texttt{1pc} &
+%           Computer Modern Sans Oblique 1 pica &
+%           \texttt{cmssi12} \\
+%           \texttt{OML} & \texttt{cmm} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{10pt} &
+%           Computer Modern Math Italic 10 point &
+%           \texttt{cmmi10} \\
+%           \texttt{T1} & \texttt{ptm} & \texttt{b} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{1in} &
+%           Adobe Times Bold Italic 1 inch &
+%           \texttt{ptmb8t at 1in}\\
+%        \bottomrule
+%        \end{tabularx}
+%     \end{table}
+%     \begin{table}[!tp]
+%     \changeskips
+%     \centering
+%     \caption{Author commands for fonts}\label{t+nfss+6}
+%        \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+%        \toprule
+%           \textbf{Author command} &
+%           \textbf{Attribute} &
+%           \textbf{Value in} \uclass{article} \textbf{class} \\
+%        \midrule
+%           \com{textrm}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{rmfamily}    & family & \texttt{cmr} \\
+%           \com{textsf}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{sffamily}    & family & \texttt{cmss} \\
+%           \com{texttt}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{ttfamily}    & family & \texttt{cmtt} \\
+%           \com{textmd}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{mdseries}    & series & \texttt{m} \\
+%           \com{textbf}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{bfseries}    & series & \texttt{bx} \\
+%           \com{textup}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{upshape}     & shape  & \texttt{n} \\
+%           \com{textit}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{itshape}     & shape  & \texttt{it} \\
+%           \com{textsl}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{slshape}     & shape  & \texttt{sl} \\
+%           \com{textsc}\texttt{\ldots} or \com{scshape}     & shape  & \texttt{sc} \\
+%           \com{tiny}         & size   & \texttt{5pt} \\
+%           \com{scriptsize}   & size   & \texttt{7pt} \\
+%           \com{footnotesize} & size   & \texttt{8pt} \\
+%           \com{small}        & size   & \texttt{9pt} \\
+%           \com{normalsize}   & size   & \texttt{10pt} \\
+%           \com{large}        & size   & \texttt{12pt} \\
+%           \com{Large}        & size   & \texttt{14.4pt} \\
+%           \com{LARGE}        & size   & \texttt{17.28pt} \\
+%           \com{huge}         & size   & \texttt{20.74pt} \\
+%           \com{Huge}         & size   & \texttt{24.88pt}\\
+%           \com{textnormal}   & normal & \textnormal{normal text}\\
+%        \bottomrule
+%        \end{tabular}
+%     \end{table}
+%
+%     These five parameters are displayed whenever \LaTeX{} gives an overfull
+%     box warning, for instance:
+%     \begin{verse}
+%        \texttt{Overfull \bs hbox (3.80855pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 314-{}-318}\\
+%        \texttt{[]\bs OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Normally [] and [] will be iden-ti-cal,}
+%     \end{verse}
+%     \lneed{6}
+%     The table~\vref{t+nfss+6} lists the author commands for fonts which set these five attributes\footnote{The
+%     values used by these commands are determined by the document class.}.
+% \item[\uopt{nocheckfiles}]\iopt{nocheckfiles} A package option of \upack{minitoc}. The opposite of the \optd{checkfiles}
+%     package option (see above).
+% \item[\uopt{nohints}]\iopt{nohints} A package option of \upack{minitoc}. The opposite of the \optd{hints}
+%     package option (see above).
+% \item[\uopt{nolistfiles}]\iopt{nolistfiles} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It is the opposite of the
+%     \optd{listfiles} above. See section~\vref{s+listfiles}.
+% \item[\uopt{notoccite}]\iopt{notoccite} This option of the \upack{minitoc} package loads
+%     the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite} (by \name{Donald}{Arseneau}).
+%     It avoids problems with \com{cite} commands in sectionning commands or captions. See
+%     section~\vref{ss+notoccite}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{O}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{O}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[Omega] The Omega typesetting system\,\footnote{Most but not all of this note is taken in the Omega documentation
+%    \cite{yannis1994b,yannis1994a,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998}.
+%    See~\url{http://omega.enstb.org/} for more information.}
+%    ($\mathbf{\Omega}$) (by \xname{Yannis}{Haralambous} and \xname{John}{Plaice})
+%    is an extension of \TeX{} that is aimed primarily at improving \TeX's multilingual abilities.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% When the \TeX{} program was originally developed in the mid seventies [\emph{circa} 1975] by
+% Professor \xname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}
+% it was mainly aimed at typesetting mathematical texts in the english language. Since then \TeX{} has
+% made inroads in broader and broader areas of scientific, literary and other scholarly activities in many
+% countries all over the world. In 1991, \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} froze \TeX, mainly in the interest of stability.
+% However, he allows the \TeX{} code to be used as the basis for further developments, so long as the resulting system is
+% distributed under a different name.
+%
+% In Omega all characters and pointers into data-structures are 31-bit
+% wide, instead of 8-bit, thereby eliminating many of the trivial
+% limitations of \TeX. Omega also allows multiple input and output
+% character sets, and uses programmable filters to translate from one
+% encoding to another, to perform contextual analysis, etc. Internally,
+% Omega uses the universal Unicode/ISO-10646 character set. Omega also
+% includes support for multiple writing directions.
+%
+% These improvements not only make it a lot easier for \TeX{} users to cope
+% with multiple or complex languages, like Arabic, Indic, Khmer, Chinese,
+% Japanese or Korean, in one document, but also form the basis for future
+% developments in other areas, such as native color support and hypertext
+% features.
+%
+% The \LaTeX{} format (in the \TeX\ meaning of that word) adapted to the special features of Omega is called
+% ``\emph{Lambda}''~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$).
+% Extending Omega with the \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} extensions is a separate
+% project, known as ``\pack{Aleph}'' ($\aleph$)~\cite{aleph,aleph-hagen} and led by \xname{Giuseppe}{Bilotta}.
+% The \LaTeX\ for \pack{Aleph} is known as
+% ``\emph{Lamed}''~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/).
+% There is an experimental system, named \packa{\textsc{Lua}\TeX}{LuaTeX}~\cite{luatex,luatex2007}, which will regroup
+% \textsc{pdf}\TeX, \pack{Aleph}, \packa{\eTeX}{etex} and other developments.
+% A promising development is \packa{\protect\XeTeX}{xetex}~\cite{xetex} by~\name{Jonathan}{Kew}, with
+% \packa{\protect\XeLaTeX}{xelatex}.
+% \begin{table}[tp!]
+% ^^A \changeskips
+% \caption{Some systems derived from \TeX{} and \LaTeX}\label{t+tex-latex}
+% \centering
+% \[ \begin{array}{ccccccc}
+% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Omega}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Lambda}\\
+% &&+&&&&+\\
+% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eTeX}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eLaTeX}\\
+% &&&&&&\\
+% \cline{3-3}\cline{5-5}\cline{7-7}
+% &&&&&&\\
+% &&\aleph&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,height=10pt]{lamed3.png}}}
+% \end{array} \]
+% \end{table}
+% \item[\feat{open}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed immediately before
+%     (\emph{open}) the insertion of the auxiliary file for a given type of mini-table.
+%     Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
+%     See the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file, in section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{P}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{P}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[package] Packages\footnote{This info is taken from~\cite[page~12--13]{kopka} and adapted.} are a very important
+%     feature of \LaTeX. These are extensions to the basic \LaTeX{} commands that are written to files with names
+%     that end with \suffix{.sty} and are loaded with the command \com{usepackage} in the preamble. Packages can be
+%     classified by they origin.
+%     \begin{itemize}
+%        \item \textbf{Core} packages (in fact, \textbf{base} and \textbf{required} packages) are an integral part of
+%              the \LaTeX{} basic installation and are therefore fully standard.
+%        \item \textbf{Tools} packages are a set written by members of the \LaTeX3 Team and should always be in the
+%              installation.
+%        \item \textbf{Graphics} packages are a standardized set for including pictures generated by other programs
+%              and for handling colors; they are at the same level as the tools packages.
+%        \item \textbf{\AmS-\LaTeX} packages, published by the American Mathematical
+%              Society\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}, should be in any
+%              installation\footnote{They are indispensable if you use a lot of mathematics.}.
+%        \item \textbf{Contributed} packages have been submitted by actual users; certain of these have established
+%              themselves as ``essential'' to standard \LaTeX{} usage, but all are useful.
+%      \end{itemize}
+% \item[\feat{pagestyle}] A type of \emph{feature} (see this term) which is executed at each occurrence of
+%     a given type of mini-table, to force the page style to use for the current page.
+%     Look at the documentation of the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, in section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
+% \item[partlof] A list of figures for a part.
+% \item[\dcnt{partlofdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the partlofs.
+% \item[partlot] A list of tables for a part.
+% \item[\dcnt{partlotdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the partlots.
+% \item[parttoc] A table of contents for a part.
+% \item[\dcnt{parttocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the parttocs.
+% \item[PDF] Portable Document Format~\cite{pdfspec}. A descendant of the PostScript language from Adobe,
+%     optimized for navigation on the Internet. It adds hypertext, font substitution, and compression features.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\upack{placeins}] The \pack{placeins}\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0032}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}}
+% package~\cite{placeins} keeps floats ``in their place'',
+%     preventing them from floating past a \com{FloatBarrier} command into another section. To use it, declare
+%     \com{usepackage}\texttt{\{placeins\}} in the preamble and
+%     insert \com{FloatBarrier} commands at places that floats
+%     should not move past, perhaps at every \com{section}. The \opt{insection} package option of the
+%     \upack{minitoc} package does that with adequate options, and loads also the \pack{flafter} package
+%     (described in~\cite{ltoutput} and~\cite[page~286]{TLC2});
+%     see section~\vref{s+placing}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\xfile{placeins.txt}] A plain text file containing the documentation of
+%     the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins}.
+% \item[\upack{\PLaTeX}]\ipacka{\PLaTeX}{PLaTeX} A\virage{} version of \LaTeX\ customized
+%     for the polish (\lopt{polski}) language. It has been replaced by the \pack{polski} package. See~\cite{polski,platex-pl}.
+%     But the \emph{same} name was referring also to a version of \LaTeX\ customized for the japanese language,
+%     \packa{\PLaTeXe}{PLaTeX2e}~\cite{platex-jp,kakuto}.
+% \item[\uscrp{pmk}]\iscrp{pmk}
+%      An example of shell script to prepare the \upack{minitoc} package
+%      and its documentation; you should adapt it to your needs.
+%      See item~\vref{IN10}.
+% \item[polymorphic entry] An entry\index{polymorphic entry} in the TOC, LOF or LOT which changes its aspect
+%      depending on the place where it appears (main TOC, minitable, etc.); see section~\vref{ss+polym}.
+% \item[PostScript] A page description language, by Adobe. It describes the appearance of a page, including
+%      elements such as text, graphics, and scanned images, to a printer or visualization device. Introduced by
+%      Adobe in 1985, it has become the language of choice in high quality printing.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[preamble] In the main file of a \LaTeX{} source document, the part of it between the commands
+%     \com{documentclass}\texttt{[.{}.{}.]\{.{}.{}.\}} and \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}. In the preamble,
+%     you can insert global declarations and the loading of packages via \com{usepackage} commands.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[preparation] The preparation commands of the \upack{minitoc} package prepare the auxiliary files for the
+%     mini-tables of a given type. A~\emph{preparation} command must have been invoked (only once) before any
+%     insertion command for the mini-table type. The preparation commands are (see table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}):
+%        \par\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
+%        \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},&(part level)\\
+%        \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},&(chapter level)\\
+%        \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},&(section level)\\
+%        \com{mtcprepare}&(all levels)
+%        \end{tabular}
+% \item[\uclass{proc}]\iclass{proc} A standard \LaTeX\ document class, for preparing conference proceedings. For the
+%     \upack{minitoc} package, it is very similar to the \class{article} document class; see above.
+% \item[pseudo-chapter]
+%     Or starred chapter. A chapter introduced by a \com{chapter*} command. By default, it has no entry in
+%     the table of contents. \com{chapter*} needs some precautions with the \upack{minitoc} package.
+%     See section~\vref{s+starred.chap}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{Q}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Q}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\upack{quotchap}] The \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} provides a set of commands for adding quotations to
+%     some headings (chapters) in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes:
+%     \class{book}, and \class{report}.
+%     It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.quotchap} and
+%     section~\vref{faq.39}).
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{R}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{R}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[README] is a plain text file (english) describing briefly the \upack{minitoc} package,
+%       plus some useful infos.
+% \item[\uclass{report}]\iclass{report} A standard \LaTeX\ document class~\cite{classes}. It has sectionning commands: \com{part},
+%     \com{chapter}, and \com{section} (and below). It is compatible with the \upack{minitoc} package and
+%     you can make mini-tables at the part and chapter levels (but not at the section level, to avoid too many
+%     auxiliary files).
+% \item[\uscrp{rmk}]\iscrp{rmk} An example of shell script, which sorts the files
+%      of the \upack{minitoc} package into classes (one directory
+%      for each class). It should be run after the scripts
+%      \scrp{imk} (mandatory) and \scrp{emk} and/or
+%      \scrp{fmk}, in that sequence. See item~\vref{IN10}.
+% \item[\upack{romannum}] The \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} changes the numbers (for sectionning commands)
+%     generated by \LaTeX{} from arabic digits to roman numerals. This package uses
+%     the \pack{stdclsdv} package~\cite{stdclsdv}.
+%     It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.romannum} and
+%     section~\vref{faq.40}).
+% \item[\pack{rotating}] The \pack{rotating}~\cite{rotating} package performs all the different sorts of
+%     rotation one might like, including complete figures.
+% \item[\pack{rotfloat}] The pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}\imess{I0053} package provides commands to define new floats
+%     of various styles (\texttt{plain}, \texttt{boxed}, \texttt{ruled}, and userdefined ones);
+%     the \pack{rotating} package~\cite{rotating} provides new environments (\env{sidewaysfigure}
+%     and \env{sidewaystable}) which are rotated by $90^\circ$ or $270^\circ$.
+%     But what about new rotated floats, e.g.\ a rotated ruled one?
+%     This package makes this possible; it builds a bridge between both packages
+%     and extend the commands from the \pack{float} package to define rotated
+%     versions of the new floats, too.
+% \item[rubber] \tool{rubber}~\cite{rubber} is a wrapper for \LaTeX\ and companion programs.
+%     Its purpose is, given a \LaTeX\ source to process,
+%     to compile it enough times to resolve all references, possibly running satellite programs such as \textbf{\BibTeX},
+%     \textbf{makeindex}, \textbf{Metapost}, etc., to produce appropriate data files. It has facilities to make
+%     some post-processing cleanup actions, like deleting the auxiliary files created by \upack{minitoc}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{S}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{S}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\uclass{scrartcl}]\iclass{scrartcl} See {\KOMAScript} above.
+% \item[\uclass{scrbook}]\iclass{scrbook} See {\KOMAScript} above.
+% \item[\uclass{scrreprt}]\iclass{scrreprt} See {\KOMAScript} above.
+% \item[sectionning commands] These are the \LaTeX\ commands which specify the logical structure of your document.
+%     The main sectionning commands are \com{part}, \com{chapter}, \com{section},
+%     \com{subsection}, \com{subsubsection}, \com{paragraph}, or \com{subparagraph}.
+%     Some standard document classes have not the \com{chapter} command (like the \class{article} and
+%     \class{proc} classes), some have no sectionning commands (like the \class{letter} class). In the later
+%     case, the \upack{minitoc} package is pointless. If some of the \com{part}, \com{chapter},
+%     or \com{section} commands are not defined, the \upack{minitoc} commands for that level are
+%     unavailable. If \com{chapter} is defined, the \upack{minitoc} commands at the section level are not
+%     defined in the current and older versions of the \upack{minitoc} package, but if \com{chapter} is
+%     not defined and \com{section} is defined, then the \upack{minitoc} commands at the section level are
+%     defined. See section~\vref{note+sectionning}.
+%     In non-standard document classes, sectionning commands with non-standard names cannot be recognized by the
+%     \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \item[sectlof] A list of figures for a section.
+% \item[\dcnt{sectlofdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the sectlofs.
+% \item[sectlot] A list of tables for a section.
+% \item[\dcnt{sectlotdepth}] This counter, if defined, contains the depth of the sectlots.
+% \item[\upack{sectsty}] The \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} provides a set of commands for changing
+%     the font used for the various sectional headings in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes: \class{article},
+%     \class{book}, and \class{report}. This package also works with the {\KOMAScript} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}
+%     \class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook}, and \class{scrreprt}.
+%     It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.sectsty} and
+%     section~\vref{faq.28}).
+% \item[secttoc] A table of contents for a section.
+% \item[\dcnt{secttocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the secttocs.
+% \item[\upack{sfheaders}] The \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (for \LaTeXe) borrows
+%     some definitions from the standard \class{article}/\class{report}/\class{book} classes
+%     and modifies them in order to print the part, chapter, section, subsection\ldots{} headers with
+%     the Sans-Serif variant of the current font.
+%     It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.sfheaders} and
+%     section~\vref{faq.41}).
+% \item[shell] In the Unix, Unix-like and Linux operating systems, the \textbf{shell} is a program used as an
+%     interface between the operating system and the user. It can also be used as a scripting language to write
+%     programs or scripts to prepare routinely used sequences of tasks. The main shells are the
+%     Bourne shell (\textbf{sh}), the C~shell (\textbf{csh}), the Korn shell (\textbf{ksh}),
+%     and their many successors (like \textbf{bash}, \textbf{tcsh}, etc.).
+% \item[\uopt{shortext}]\iopt{shortext} An\imess{W0020} option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It forces the use of short extensions
+%     (3~characters) in the names of the minitoc auxiliary files. This option is inactive by default, but is
+%     automatically activated if your operating system needs short extensions. See \textbf{autoconfiguration}
+%     above and the section~\vref{.8+3}.
+% \item[\upack{shorttoc}] The \pack{shorttoc} package~\cite{shorttoc} allows to create an other table of
+%     contents in a document, with an other title and an other depth than the main table of contents.
+% \item[SJIS] The SJIS character encoding (for the japanese language), also known as MS-Kanji (Kanji for
+%     Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered}),
+%     consists of two overlaid character sets: the so-called halfwidth Katakana (JIS X0201-1976, 1-byte characters
+%     encoded in the range \texttt{0xA1} to \texttt{0xDF}) and the (fullwidth) JIS character set (JIS X0208-1990,
+%     mapped to the remaining code points). This information is taken from~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}.
+% \item[\upack{\SLaTeX}]\ipacka{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX} A version of \LaTeX\ customized for the swedish language. See~\cite{slatex}.
+% \item[\upack{splitbib}]\ipack{splitbib} A \LaTeX\ package~\cite{splitbib} which allows for sorting a bibliography
+%     into categories and
+%     subcategories; this is interesting for lists of publications, for grouping references by subject, by year,~...
+% \item[\upack{stdclsdv}] The \pack{stdclsdv} package~\cite{stdclsdv} is intended to be used by the authors
+%     of \LaTeX{} packages that need to know about the sectional divisions provided by the document class.
+% \item[strut] A vertical invisible rule used to force a minimal separation between two lines of text.
+% \item[\upack{subfig}] The \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig} provides support for the
+%    inclusion of small, ``sub-figures'' and ``sub-tables''. It simplifies the positioning, captioning and labeling of
+%    them within a single \env{figure} or \env{table} environment. In addition, this package allows
+%    such sub-captions to be written to the List of Figures or List of Tables if desired.
+% \item[\upack{subfigure}] The \pack{subfigure} package~\cite{subfigure} is an obsolete version (by the same
+%    author) of the \pack{subfig} package~\cite{subfig}.
+% \item[suffix] See ``extension'' above.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{T}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{T}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[TDS] \index{TDS}The \TeX~Directory Structure~\cite{ftds,tds}; a directory structure highly recommended to
+%    store macros, fonts, and the other implementation-independent \TeX{} system files; it also suggests how to
+%    incorporate the rest of the \TeX{} files in a single structure; the \index{TDS}TDS has been designed to work on all
+%    modern systems.
+% \item[\TeX] \TeX{} is a computer program created by \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth}~\cite{texbook,ftb}.
+%    It is aimed at typesetting text and mathematical formulae.
+%    \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} started writing the \TeX{} typesetting
+%    engine in 1977 to explore the potential of the digital printing
+%    equipment that was beginning to infiltrate the publishing industry at
+%    that time, especially in the hope that he could reverse the trend of
+%    deteriorating typographical quality that he saw affecting his own
+%    books and articles. \TeX{} as we use it today was released in 1982,
+%    with some slight enhancements added in 1989 to better support 8-bit
+%    characters and multiple languages. \TeX{} is renowned for being
+%    extremely stable, for running on many different kinds of computers,
+%    and for being virtually bug free. The version number of \TeX{} is
+%    converging to $\pi$ and is now at $3.141592$.
+%
+%    \TeX{} is pronounced ``Tech,'' with a ``ch'' as in the German word
+%    ``Ach'' or in the Scottish ``Loch.'' In an ASCII environment, \TeX{}
+%    becomes \texttt{TeX}.
+% \item[\upack{thailatex}] The \pack{thailatex} package~\cite{thailatex} allows to typeset
+%     documents in the Thai language. You can also use the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}.
+% \item[\uopt{tight}]\iopt{tight} An option of the \upack{minitoc} package. It gives a tight line spacing in the
+%     mini-tables. The opposite option is \optd{loose}.
+% \item[\upack{titlesec}] The \pack{titlesec}\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} package~\cite{titletoc} allows to change the sectioning titles.
+%     Amongst its many features it provides margin titles, different format in left and right pages, rules above
+%     and below the title, etc. Unfortunately, it is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \item[\upack{titletoc}] The\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} \pack{titletoc} package is useful for toc entries formatting,
+%     providing the possibility of changing the format in the middle of a document, grouping the entries
+%     in a single paragraph, pretty free-forms entries, partial tocs, etc.
+%     Unfortunately, it is \emph{incompatible} with the \upack{minitoc} package.
+%
+%     The \xfile{titletoc.sty} file is not part of the \pack{titlesec} package; it's an independent package,
+%     but it's described in the \pack{titlesec} package documentation~\cite{titletoc}.
+% \item[\uscrp{tmk}]\iscrp{tmk} A script file which creates a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant
+%     hierarchy~\cite{ftds,tds} (to be ajusted to your system).
+% \item[TOC, ToC] Acronym for ``table of contents''.
+% \item[\upack{tocbibind}] The \pack{tocbibind}\imess{I0046} package~\cite{tocbibind} can be used to add the ToC
+%     and/or bibliography and/or the index etc., to the Table of Contents listing. But it needs some precautions
+%     when used with the \upack{minitoc} package. See section~\vref{special.entries}.
+% \item[\dcnt{tocdepth}] This counter contains the depth of the table of contents.
+% \item[\upack{tocloft}] The \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}\imess{I0047} provides means of controlling the
+%     typographic design of the Table of Contents, List of Figures and List of Tables.
+%     New kinds of ``List of \ldots' can be defined. If you use the \pack{tocloft} package and the
+%     \upack{minitoc} package, see section~\vref{faq+tocloft} about fixing some minor compatibility issues.
+% \item[\xfile{TODO}] is a plain text file (english) which lists some suggested developments of the package,
+%     not yet implemented. Comments and suggestions are welcome.
+% \item[token] A token\footnote{This definition is taken from ``\textsl{The \TeX{}book}''~\cite{texbook,ftb}.} is either
+%     (a)~a single character with an attached category code (see ``catcode'' above), or (b)~a control sequence.
+%     \virage{} You \emph{should} remember two chief things about \TeX's tokens: (1)~A~control sequence is considered to be
+%     a single object that is no longer composed of a sequence of symbols. Therefore long control sequence names
+%     are no harder for \TeX\ to deal with than short ones, after they have been replaced by tokens. Furthermore,
+%     spaces are not ignored after control sequences inside a token list; the ignore-space rule applies only in an
+%     input file, during the time that strings of characters are being tokenized. (2)~Once a category code has been
+%     attached to a character token, the attachment is permanent. For instance, if character `\verb|{|' were
+%     suddenly declared to be of category~12 instead of category~1, the characters `\verb|{|$_1$' already inside token
+%     lists of \TeX\ would still remain of category~1; only newly made lists would contain `\verb|{|$_{12}$' tokens.
+%     In other words, individual characters receive a fixed interpretation as soon as they have been read from a file,
+%     based on the category they have at the time of reading. Control sequences are different, since they can change
+%     their interpretation at any time.  \TeX's digestive processes always know exactly what a character token signifies,
+%     because the category code appears in the token itself; but when the digestive processes encounter a control sequence
+%     token, they must look up the current definition of that control sequence in order to figure out what it means.
+% \item[\pack{trivfloat}] The \pack{trivfloat} package~\cite{trivfloat} (by \name{Joseph~A.}{Wright})\imess{I0053} provides
+%     a quick method for defining new float types in \LaTeX.  A single command sets up a new float in the
+%     same style as the \LaTeX{} kernel \env{figure} and \env{table} float types.
+% \item[\pack{txfonts}] The \pack{txfonts} package~\cite{txfonts} provides the \texttt{TX} fonts, which consist of
+%     \begin{enumerate}\itemsep=0pt
+%     \item virtual text roman fonts using Adobe Times (or URW NimbusRomNo9L) with
+%           some modified and additional text symbols in OT1, T1, TS1, and LY1 encodings;
+%     \item \textsf{virtual text sans serif fonts using Adobe Helvetica (or URW NimbusSanL) with
+%           additional text symbols in OT1, T1, TS1, and LY1 encodings};
+%     \item {\smooth\texttt{monospaced typewriter fonts in the OT1, T1, TS1, and LY1\linebreak[4] encodings}};
+%     \item math alphabets using Adobe Times (or URW NimbusRomNo9L) with modified metrics;
+%     \item math fonts of all symbols corresponding to those of Computer Modern math fonts (CMSY, CMMI, CMEX,
+%           and Greek letters of CMR);
+%     \item math fonts of all symbols corresponding to those of AmS{} fonts (MSAM and MSBM);
+%     \item additional math fonts of various symbols.
+%     \end{enumerate}
+%     All fonts are in the Type~1 format (in \suffix{.afm} and \suffix{.pfb} files).
+%     Necessary \suffix{.tfm} and \suffix{.vf} files together with \LaTeXe\ package files and font map files
+%     (\suffix{.map}) for \tool{dvips} are provided.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{U}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[UNIX] A modern operating system, available on many computers and in various flavors. From the
+%     \upack{minitoc} point of view, it has the advantage of using filenames with long extensions (the length
+%     limit is too high to be a problem with the number of mini-tables).
+% \item[UNIX-like] Operating systems analog to Unix, with the same advantages. Linux is a good example, but others
+%     exist.
+% \item[\utool{urlbst}]\itool{urlbst} A PERL script, by \name{Norman}{Gray}~\cite{urlbst},
+%     to add a \texttt{webpage} \BibTeX{} entry type,
+%     and add support for general \texttt{url} and \texttt{lastchecked} fields, to (most) \BibTeX{} \suffix{.bst} files.
+%     Optionally adds basic support for \texttt{eprint} and \texttt{doi} fields, and \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}/\pack{hyperref}
+%     support, too. See \cite{hypertex,hyperref.web}.
+% \item[UTF\phantom{-}8] UTF~8 (Unicode Transformation Format~8), also called UTF~2 or FSS-UTF, is a special representation
+%     of Unicode (resp. ISO~10\,646). It uses multibyte sequences of various lengths, but only 2-byte and 3-byte
+%     sequences are implemented in \pack{CJK}. ASCII characters will be used as-is --- without this property it would be
+%     impossible to use UTF~8 with \TeX. See table~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{V}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{V}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\upack{varsects}] The \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} provides a set of commands for changing
+%     the font used for the various sectional headings in the standard \LaTeXe\ document classes: \class{article},
+%     \class{book}, and \class{report}.
+%     It must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package (see point~\vref{h.varsects} and
+%     section~\vref{faq.33}).
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{W}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{W}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \par\reversemarginpar
+% \item[Wikipedia] The \index{Wikipedia}Wikipedia\index{Wikipedia}
+% is a free, multilingual, open content (neutral, verifiable, modifiable and improvable by anyone)
+% encyclopedia project operated by the non-profit Wikimedia Foundation.
+% Its name is a portemanteau of the words \emph{wiki} (a type of collaborative website) and \emph{encyclopedia}.
+% Launched in 2001 by \name{Jimmy}{Wales} and \name{Larry}{Sanger}, it is the largest, fastest growing and most
+% popular general reference work currently available on the Internet.
+% \par\normalmarginpar
+% \item[\upack{wrapfig}] The \pack{wrapfig} package~\cite{wrapfig} provides the \env{wrapfigure} and
+%     \env{wraptable} environments to place a figure or table at the side of the page and wrap text around~it.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{X}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{X}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\scrp{xmk}] An example of shell script, which typesets the example document files into PDF documents.
+% \item[\upack{xr}] The \pack{xr} package~\cite{xr} implements a system for eXternal References. I wrote the
+%     first version of this package, but it had severe problems. \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle} rewrote it in a much
+%     better and more robust way. With his permission, I used some of his code in the \upack{minitoc} package
+%     to implement the preparation commands (like \com{dominitoc}). If you use also the \pack{hyperref}
+%     package~\cite{hyperref.web}, use \pack{xr-hyper}~\cite{xr-hyper} in place of the \upack{xr} package.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \end{mtchideinmaintoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{Jargon}\label{c+jargon}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{5}\raggedcolumns}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
+% \setlength{\mtcindent}{-0.75em}
+% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{-0.75em}
+% \minitoc
+% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty}
+% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt}
+% \mtcsetoffset{minitoc}{0pt}
+% \mtcskip
+% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
+% \setlength{\mtcindent}{0pt}
+% \minilot
+% \setlength{\mtcindent}{24pt}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{open}{\empty}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minilot}{close}{\empty}
+% Ce chapitre tente d'expliquer certains termes utilisés dans cette documentation et décrit quelques fichiers et suffixes
+% utiles.
+% De nombreuses informations proviennent des documentations de divers paquetages cités (souvent du résumé ou
+% \emph{abstract}), et
+% de~\cite{malayalam,malayalam-o,mlsquick,montex,HLATEX,komab,classes,usrguide,clsguide,fontsel,lunde1993,lunde,ttb,TLC2F,koma,CIL2E,NSSL2E,cyrguide}.
+% \clearpage
+% \begin{mtchideinmaintoc}
+% \jsection{<<~.~>>\vphantom{A}}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{<<~.~>>}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\suffix{.aux}] Le suffixe du nom pour un fichier \emph{auxiliaire} d'un document \LaTeX{}. Il transfère
+%      des informations d'une exécution de \LaTeX{} à~la suivante.
+% \item[\usuffix{.cls}]\isuffix{.aux} Le suffixe du nom pour un fichier classe de document,
+%      chargé via la commande \com{documentclass}.
+% \item[\usuffix{.dtx}]\isuffix{.dtx} Le suffixe du nom pour le fichier source documenté d'un paquetage ou d'une classe \LaTeX.
+%      Ce fichier est souvent associé à~un fichier \suffix{.ins} pour engendrer le paquetage ou la classe.
+%      Compiler un fichier \suffix{.dtx} avec \LaTeX{} engendre la documentation.
+% \item[\usuffix{.F}]\isuffix{.F} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilof lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le
+%      suffixe complet est \suffix{.F}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilof.
+% \item[\usuffix{.G}]\isuffix{.G} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlof lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le
+%      suffixe complet est \suffix{.G}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlof.
+% \item[\usuffix{.H}]\isuffix{.H} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlof lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le
+%      suffixe complet est \suffix{.H}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlof.
+% \item[\usuffix{.ins}]\isuffix{.ins} Le suffixe du nom pour un fichier d'installation d'un paquetage ou d'une classe \LaTeX.
+%      Lorsque qu'il est compilé avec \LaTeX, il extrait les fichiers du paquetage ou de la classe depuis un
+%      fichier \suffix{.dtx}.
+% \item[\usuffix{.lof}]\isuffix{.lot} Le suffixe du nom du fichier \og{} liste des figures\fg.
+% \item[\usuffix{.log}]\isuffix{.log} Le suffixe du nom du fichier rapport de compilation.
+% \item[\usuffix{.lot}]\isuffix{.lot} Le suffixe du nom du fichier \og{} liste des tableaux\fg.
+% \item[\usuffix{.M}]\isuffix{.M} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minitoc lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le
+%      suffixe complet est \suffix{.M}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minitoc.
+% \item[\usuffix{.maf}]\suffix{.maf} Le suffixe du nom du fichier engendré par l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}.
+%      Option par défaut.
+%      Ce fichier contient la liste des fichiers auxiliaires minitoc.
+% \item[\usuffix{.mld}]\isuffix{.mld} Le suffixe pour le nom d'un fichier minitoc de définition de langue. Un fichier minitoc de
+%      définition de langue contient les définitions des titres des mini-tables dans une langue donnée.
+% \item[\usuffix{.mlf}]\isuffix{.mlf} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilof lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le
+%      suffixe complet est \suffix{.mlf}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilof.
+% \item[\usuffix{.mlo}]\isuffix{.mlo} Le suffixe pour le nom d'un fichier minitoc objet de langue. Pour certaines langues
+%      exotiques, le codage rend difficile l'insertion directe des titres dans un fichier \suffix{.mld}; donc
+%      le fichier \suffix{.mld} doit charger un fichier \suffix{.mlo}.
+% \item[\usuffix{.mlt}]\isuffix{.mlt} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilot lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le
+%      suffixe complet est \suffix{.mlt}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilot.
+% \item[\usuffix{.mtc}]\isuffix{.mtc} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minitoc lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le
+%      suffixe complet est \suffix{.mtc}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minitoc.
+% \item[\usuffix{.P}]\isuffix{.P} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier parttoc lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le
+%      suffixe complet est \suffix{.P}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la parttoc.
+% \item[\usuffix{.plf}]\isuffix{.plf} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlof lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le
+%      suffixe complet est \suffix{.plf}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlof.
+% \item[\usuffix{.plt}]\isuffix{.plt} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlot lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le
+%      suffixe complet est \suffix{.plt}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlot.
+% \item[\usuffix{.ptc}]\suffix{.ptc} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier parttoc lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le
+%      suffixe complet est \suffix{.ptc}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la parttoc.
+% \item[\usuffix{.S}]\isuffix{.S} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier secttoc lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le
+%      suffixe complet est \suffix{.S}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la secttoc.
+% \item[\usuffix{.slf}]\isuffix{.slf} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlof lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le
+%      suffixe complet est \suffix{.slf}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlof.
+% \item[\usuffix{.slt}]\isuffix{.slt} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlot lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le
+%      suffixe complet est \suffix{.slt}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlot.
+% \item[\usuffix{.stc}]\isuffix{.stc} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier secttoc lorsque les suffixes longs sont utilisés. Le
+%      suffixe complet est \suffix{.stc}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la secttoc.
+% \item[\usuffix{.sty}]\isuffix{.sty} Le suffixe pour le nom d'un fichier paquetage, chargé via \com{usepackage}.
+% \item[\usuffix{.T}]\isuffix{.T} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier minilot lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le
+%      suffixe complet est \suffix{.T}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la minilot.
+% \item[\usuffix{.tex}]\isuffix{.tex} Le suffixe du nom d'un fichier source \TeX\ ou \LaTeX\ normal.
+% \item[\usuffix{.toc}]\isuffix{.toc} Le suffixe du nom du fichier \og{} table des matières\fg.
+% \item[\usuffix{.U}]\isuffix{.U} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier partlot lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le
+%      suffixe complet est \suffix{.U}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la partlot.
+% \item[\usuffix{.V}]\isuffix{.V} Le suffixe de base pour un fichier sectlot lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés. Le
+%      suffixe complet est \suffix{.V}\emph{nn} où \emph{nn} est le numéro absolu de la sectlot.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{A}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{A}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[absolue (numérotation)] Les fichiers auxiliaires pour les minitables ont un suffixe contenant un
+%      \emph{numéro absolu}, c'est-à-dire un numéro qui est unique et toujours croissant depuis la première
+%      partie, le premier chapitre ou la première section; ceci a résolu quelques problèmes obscurs, et aussi
+%      frappé d'obsolescence quelques commandes, telles que \com{firstpartis},
+%      \com{firstchapteris} et \com{firstsectionis}. La numérotation absolue a été introduite dans
+%      la version~\#23.
+% \item[\upack{abstract}] Le paquetage \pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}\imess{I0040} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) nécessite
+%      quelques précautions s'il est utilisé avec son option \optp{addtotoc}{abstract}.
+% \item[\feat{after}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté \emph{après} un type donné de mini-table.
+%     Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[ajustement] Quelques commandes et environnements de \upack{minitoc} sont dits \og{} commandes
+%     d'ajustement\fg{} car ils sont utilisés dans certaines circonstances pour \og{} ajuster\fg{} un compteur ou
+%     altérer l'affichage de fichiers de contenu. Ces commandes et environnements sont
+%     \com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc}, \com{adjuststc},
+%     \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, \com{decrementstc},
+%     \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, \com{incrementstc},
+%     \com{mtcaddpart}, \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection},
+%     \com{mtcfixglossary}, \com{mtcfixindex}, \com{mtcfixnomenclature},
+%     \env{mtchideinmaintoc},
+%     \env{mtchideinmainlof} et
+%     \env{mtchideinmainlot}.
+%     Il est \virage\emph{fortement recommandé} que l'utilisateur vérifie le résultat de tels ajustements dans le
+%     document final.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\pack{afterpage}] La paquetage \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage} est utilisé pour ajouter du code qui sera
+%     exécuté \emph{après} la prochaine coupure de page.
+% \item[\upack{alnumsec}]
+%     Le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}\imess{W0090} vous permet d'utiliser une numérotation alphanumérique des sections,
+%     c'est-à-dire: A.~Introduction; III.~Loi internationale. Ce résultat est similaire
+%     à~celui du paquetage \pack{alphanum} (qui fait partie de la classe \class{jura}~\cite{jura}),
+%     mais vous pouvez utiliser les commandes de sectionnement standard de \LaTeX. Il est donc possible
+%     de changer facilement de schéma de numérotation. Lettres grecques, lettres doubles~(bb) et différents
+%     délimiteurs autour des numéros sont supportés.
+%     Ce paquetage doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.alnumsec} et la
+%     section~\vref{faq.42}).
+% \item[\upack{alphanum}]  Le\imess{W0025} paquetage \pack{alphanum}, qui fait partie de la
+%      classe spécialisée \class{jura}~\cite{jura},
+%      de \name{Felix}{Braun}, est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \lneed{3}
+% \item[\AmS] L'\emph{American Mathematical Society}~\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}\fron.%
+%     \SMM{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}\\\lmess{I0041}}
+%     Cette société savante a développé les classes de document suivantes:
+%     \class{amsart} et \class{amsproc} sont, malheureusement, \emph{incompatibles} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc},
+%     \class{amsbook} est compatible mais demande des précautions. Voir la section~\vref{s+AMS}.
+% \item[\uclass{amsart}]\iclass{amsart} Une\imess{W0026} classe de document pour des articles~\cite{amslatex},
+%     fournie par l'\emph{American Mathematical Society} (\AmS). Malheureusement, cette classe
+%     est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\uclass{amsbook}]\iclass{amsbook} Une\imess{I0041} classe de document pour des livres~\cite{amslatex}, fournie par
+%     l'\emph{American Mathematical Society} (\AmS). Cette classe est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc},
+%     mais requiert des précautions.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\uclass{amsproc}]\iclass{amsproc} Une\imess{W0027} classe de document pour des comptes-rendus de
+%     congrès~\cite{amslatex}, fournie par l'\emph{American Mathematical Society} (\AmS). Malheureusement, cette
+%     classe est \emph{incompatible} avec le
+%     paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\upack{Antomega}] \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega} (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
+%     est un paquetage de support de langues pour \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$), fondé sur le
+%     fichier \xfile{omega.sty} original du projet Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$). Cependant, il offre quelques
+%     fonctionnalités additionnelles utiles.
+%     Certains fichiers de définition de langue (\suffix{.mld}) utilisent des titres définis par \pack{Antomega}:
+%     \xfile{greek-mono.mld},
+%     \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}, \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld},
+%     \xfile{russian2m.mld}, \xfile{russian2o.mld} et \xfile{spanish3.mld}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\env{appendices}] Voir \upack{appendix} ci-dessous.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\upack{appendix}] Le\imess{I0042} paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix} (de \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson})
+%     fournit diverses manières de formater les titres des appendices. Des environnements
+%     nommés (\texttt{sub})\env{appendices}\ienv{subappendices}
+%     sont aussi fournis pouvant être utilisés, par exemple, pour des appendices par chapitre ou par section. Si
+%     ce paquetage est utilisé avec \upack{minitoc}, certaines précautions sont nécessaires (voir la
+%     section~\vref{faq+appendix}).
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\upack{\Arabi}] \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi} est un système (de \name{Youssef}{Jabri}) pour préparer des documents \LaTeX{} dans
+%     les langues arabe (\lopt{arab}) ou \lopt{farsi}. Les titres dans \xfile{arabi.mld} et \xfile{farsi3.mld} proviennent
+%     des fichiers \xfile{arabic.ldf} et \xfile{farsi.ldf} de ce système.
+% \item[\upack{Arab\TeX}] \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} est un paquetage (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}) pour préparer des
+%     documents en langue arabe (\lopt{arab}) ou hébraïque (\lopt{hebrew}). Les titres dans \xfile{arab.mld} (ou \xfile{arabic.mld}),
+%     \xfile{arab2.mld} et
+%     \xfile{hebrew.mld} proviennent d'\packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}, mais ceux donnés par \xfile{hebrew2.mld} proviennent
+%     de \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
+% \item[\upack{Arm\TeX}] \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex} est un paquetage (réalisé par \name{Sergueï}{Dachian},
+%     \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} et \name{Vartan}{Akopian}) pour préparer des
+%     documents \LaTeX{} en langue arménienne.
+%     Les titres dans \xfile{armenian.mld} proviennent du paquetage \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}.
+% \item[\uclass{article}]\iclass{article} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{classes}. Elle offre des commandes de sectionnement:
+%     \com{part} et \com{section} (et en dessous), mais pas \com{chapter}. Elle est compatible avec le
+%     paquetage \upack{minitoc} et vous pouvez faire des mini-tables aux niveaux partie et section (mais, bien
+%     sûr, pas au niveau chapitre indisponible).
+% \item[\com{AtBeginDocument}]
+%     Cette macro standard permet d'ajouter du code à~exécuter au début du document (en fait, à~la fin exacte de
+%     son préambule, mais à~l'intérieur de celui-ci, ce qui implique quelques restrictions), à~l'endroit
+%     où \verb|\begin{document}| est traité. Ceci permet à~un paquetage (ou à~une classe) d'ajouter du code sans
+%     créer de conflits avec d'autres paquetages essayant de faire de même.
+% \item[\com{AtEndDocument}]
+%     Cette macro standard permet d'ajouter du code à~exécuter à~la fin du document, à~l'endroit
+%     où \verb|\end{document}| est traité. Ceci permet à~un paquetage (ou à~une classe) d'ajouter du code sans
+%     créer de conflits avec d'autres paquetages essayant de faire de même.
+% \item[\textbf{autoconfiguration}] Depuis la version~\#28, \upack{minitoc} détecte automatiquement si les
+%     suffixes des noms de fichiers sont limités à~3~caractères (comme sous MS-DOS). Ce processus se nomme
+%     l'autoconfiguration. L'option de paquetage \opt{shortext} force la limitation à~3~caractères.
+% \item[auxiliaire] Pendant la préparation d'un document, le système \LaTeX\ utilise quelques fichiers
+%     \textbf{auxiliaires} pour stocker des informations. Les fichiers auxiliaires standard sont
+%     \emph{document}\suffix{.aux} (pour les labels de références croisées, les compteurs, etc.),
+%     \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} pour la table des matières, \emph{document}\suffix{.lof} pour la liste des figures
+%     et \emph{document}\suffix{.lot} pour la liste des tableaux. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} crée ses propres
+%     fichiers auxiliaires, pour y~stocker les contenus de chaque mini-table. Ces fichiers sont les
+%     \emph{fichiers auxiliaires minitoc}, dont les noms sont de la forme \emph{document}\texttt{.}\emph{suffixe},
+%     le tableau~\vref{t+suffixes} liste les suffixes possibles.
+%     Voir aussi le suffixe \suffix{.maf} plus haut.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{B}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{B}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\upack{babel}] Le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et autres) est un
+%     vaste paquetage permettant de préparer des documents \LaTeX\ dans de nombreuses langues, et pas seulement en
+%     anglais. De nombreux titres pour les mini-tables proviennent directement du paquetage \pack{babel}.
+% \item[\upack{Bang\TeX}]\ipacka{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} Un paquetage pour composer des documents dans la langue \lopt{bangla}
+%     (\lopt{bengali}) en utilisant les systèmes {\TeX/\LaTeX}; voir~\cite{bangtex}.
+% \item[\feat{before}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté \emph{avant} un type donné de mini-table.
+%     Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
+% \item[\BibTeX] Un programme écrit par \name{Oren}{Patashnik} pour produire des bibliographies dans des documents \LaTeX.
+%      Distribué avec \LaTeX. Voir~\cite{ttb,btxdoc,btxhak,btxfaq}.
+% \item[\upack{bibtopic}]\ipack{bibtopic} Un paquetage~\cite{bibtopic} \LaTeX{} pour inclure plusieurs bibliographies dans
+%     un document. Ces bibliographies pourraient être considérées comme couvrant des sujets différents (d'où le nom)
+%     ou du matériel bibliographique (par exemple, documentation de premier et second niveaux), etc.
+% \item[\upack{bibunits}] Le paquetage \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits} permet de faire des bibliographies
+%     distinctes pour différentes unités ou partie du texte. Les unités peuvent être des chapitres, des sections ou
+%     des environnements \env{bibunit}. Ce paquetage est compatible avec une large variété de paquetages, dont
+%     (mais sans y~être limité) \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes}, \pack{overcite}~\cite{overcite}
+%     et les classes \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}.
+% \item[\uclass{book}]\iclass{book} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{classes}. Elle a des commandes de sectionnement:
+%     \com{part}, \com{chapter} et \com{section} (et en dessous).
+%     Elle est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et vous pouvez faire des mini-tables aux niveaux partie et
+%     chapitre (mais pas au niveau section, pour éviter de trop nombreux fichiers auxiliaires).
+% \item[\pack{booktabs}] Ce beau paquetage~\cite{booktabs} vous aide à~préparer de plus belles tables, \emph{sans}
+%     filets verticaux ni filets doubles.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{C}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{C}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[cadratin] Voir «~em~» ci-dessous.
+% \item[\pack{calc}] Le paquetage \pack{calc}~\cite{calc} facilite les calculs numériques (sur des compteurs et
+%     des dimensions) lors le la préparation d'un document \LaTeX.
+% \item[cappuccino] Voir «~minutes~» ci-dessous.
+% \item[\upack{captcont}] Le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}\imess{W0091} fournit un support pour conserver
+%     un numéro de figure ou de caption pour plusieurs environnements flottants --- habituellement sur plusieurs pages.
+%     Il permet de contrôler le contenu des pages de la liste des figures et de la liste des tableaux. Il devrait
+%     être compatible avec tous les autres paquetages qui modifient ou étendent l'environnement flottant et avec
+%     le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig} en particulier.
+% \item[\upack{caption}] Le paquetage \upack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung}\imess{W0033} offre de nombreuses façons d'adapter les
+%     captions (légendes) dans des environnements flottants tels que \env{figure} et \env{table}, et coopère
+%     avec de nombreux autres paquetages.
+% \item[\upack{caption2}] Le paquetage\,\footnote{Ce texte provient de la documentation du paquetage \pack{caption},
+%     et a été traduit. Les paquetages \pack{caption} et \pack{caption2} ont le même auteur, \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}.}
+%     \pack{caption2}~\cite{caption2}\imess{W0034} était considéré comme étant une version expérimentale
+%     parallèle du paquetage normal \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} et a été supplanté par la nouvelle version~\mbox{3.0}
+%     du paquetage normal \pack{caption} en décembre 2003. \pack{caption2} est encore supporté
+%     d'une certaine manière, ce qui signifie qu'il fera partie des prochaines distributions et que les erreurs
+%     seront encore corrigées, afin que les documents existants utilisant ce paquetage puissent encore être
+%     compilés. Mais \xname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt} \emph{ne répondra plus} aux questions concernant ce paquetage sauf
+%     pour les questions sur le passage à~la nouvelle version du paquetage \pack{caption}. Et ce paquetage
+%     \emph{ne sera ni adapté ni amélioré} dans le futur.
+%
+%     Vous êtes donc priés de ne pas utiliser ce paquetage pour de nouveaux documents. Il est vieux, il est
+%     obsolète et il commence à~sentir mauvais!
+%
+%     Vous êtes également priés d'ignorer tous les conseils dans des livres ou autres documents qui essayent de
+%     vous dire que le paquetage \pack{caption2} devrait être utilisé à~la place du paquetage \pack{caption} -- ces
+%     conseils sont démodés depuis décembre 2003.
+% \item[catcode] Abréviation de «~code de catégorie~» (\emph{category code}).  Tout\,\footnote{Cette définition
+%     est tirée du <<~\textsl{The \TeX{}book}~>>~\cite{texbook,ftb}.} d'abord, il est sage d'avoir une idée précise de ce
+%     que votre clavier envoie à~la machine. Il y~a 256~caractères que \TeX\ peut rencontrer à~chaque étape, dans un
+%     fichier ou dans une ligne de texte frappé directement sur votre terminal. Ces 256~caractères sont classés en
+%     16~catégories numérotées de~0 à~15. Voir la table~\vref{t+J+catcodes}.
+%     \begin{table}[!tp]
+%     \def?{\phantom{0}}
+%     \centering
+%     \changeskips
+%     \caption{Codes de catégorie}\label{t+J+catcodes}
+%     \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}clZ{1}@{}}
+%     \toprule
+%     &\textbf{Catégorie}&\textbf{Signification}\\
+%     \midrule
+%     ?0&Caractère d'échappement&(\texttt{\bs}~habituellement)\\
+%     ?1&Début de groupe&(\texttt{\{}~habituellement)\\
+%     ?2&Fin de groupe&(\texttt{\}}~habituellement)\\
+%     ?3&Début et fin de mode mathématique&(\texttt{\$}~habituellement)\\
+%     ?4&Taquet d'alignement&(\texttt{\&}~habituellement)\\
+%     ?5&Fin de ligne&(\emph{return}~habituellement)\\
+%     ?6&Paramètre&(\texttt{\#}~habituellement)\\
+%     ?7&Exposant&(\texttt{\textasciicircum}~habituellement)\\
+%     ?8&Indice&(\texttt{\_}~habituellement)\\
+%     ?9&Caractère ignoré&(\emph{null}~habituellement)\\
+%     10&Espace&(\texttt{\textvisiblespace}~habituellement)\\
+%     11&Lettre&(\texttt{A}, \ldots, \texttt{Z} et~\texttt{a}, \ldots, \texttt{z})\\
+%     12&Autre caractère&(aucun de ceux ci-dessus ou ci-dessous)\\
+%     13&Caractère actif&(\texttt{\textasciitilde}~habituellement)\\
+%     14&Caractère commentaire&(\texttt{\%}~habituellement)\\
+%     15&Caractère invalide&(\emph{delete}~habituellement)\\
+%     \bottomrule
+%     \end{tabularx}
+%     \end{table}
+%     Il n'est pas nécessaire que vous appreniez ces numéros de code; l'important est que \TeX\ connaisse 16~types
+%     différents de caractères. Tout d'abord, «~\textsl{The \TeX{}book}~» vous laisse croire qu'il n'y a que deux
+%     types --- le caractère d'échappement et les autres --- puis il vous parle de deux types de plus, les symboles de
+%     groupement~\texttt{\{} et~\texttt{\}}. Le code de catégorie pour tout caractère peut être changé à~tout moment,
+%     mais il est habituellement prudent de se conformer à~un schéma particulier.
+% \item[\upack{ccaption}] Le paquetage \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption}\imess{W0035} fournit des commandes pour des
+%     \og{} captions de continuation\fg, des captions non numérotés, et un en-tête de légende pour tout
+%     environnement. Des méthodes sont fournies pour définir des captions à~utiliser en dehors des environnements
+%     flottants et pour définir de nouveaux environnements flottants et des sous-flottants. Des outils sont fournis
+%     pour définir vos propres styles de captions.
+% \item[\upack{chngpage}] Le paquetage \pack{chngpage} (de \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}) fournit des commandes pour changer
+%      la mise en page au milieu d'un document et pour tester de manière robuste la mise en page pour les pages
+%      paires ou impaires.
+% \item[Chapter~0]
+%      Certains documents ne commencent pas par le chapitre numéro un, mais par un chapitre numéroté zéro (ou même
+%      avec un numéro plus bizarre). Ceci posait un sérieux problème dans les anciennes versions du paquetage
+%      \upack{minitoc}: les minitocs n'apparaissaient plus dans les bons chapitres, et une première correction
+%      fut l'introduction de commandes spécifiques (\com{firstchapteris} et analogues). Avec l'ajout de la
+%      numérotation absolue des fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-tables (voir \emph{absolue} plus haut), le
+%      problème fut résolu dans \upack{minitoc} version~\#23, et ces commandes devinrent obsolètes.
+%      Voir la section~\vref{faq.5}.
+% \item[\upack{chapterbib}] Le paquetage \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib} permet d'avoir plusieurs bibliographies
+%     dans un document \LaTeX, y~compris des éléments cités (par \com{cite}) dans plus d'une bibliographie.
+%     Un dépit du nom \og{}\pack{chapterbib}\fg, \emph{les bibliographies sont pour chaque fichier inclus par
+%     \com{include}}, pas nécessairement pour chaque chapitre.
+% \item[\uopt{checkfiles}]\ioptd{checkfiles}
+%      Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle teste chaque mini-table pour voir si elle est vide; puis les
+%      mini-tables vides \emph{ne sont pas} imprimées. C'est le choix par défaut. L'option contraire
+%      (\opt{nocheckfiles}) imprime aussi les mini-tables vides, qui sont laides. Voir la
+%      section~\vref{o+checkfiles}.
+% \item[\upack{CJK}] Le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et autres) est un ensemble de paquetages et de
+%     fontes pour préparer des documents \LaTeX\ dans certaines langues orientales, telles que le chinois,
+%     le coréen (fontes Hangûl ou Hanja), le japonais et le thaï, ainsi que certaines variantes du russe.
+%     Les titres des mini-tables pour ces langues
+%     proviennent de fichiers du système \pack{CJK} et ont été insérés dans des fichiers \suffix{.mld} lorsque ceci
+%     était possible, ou dans des fichiers \suffix{.mlo} lorsque le codage est incompatible avec le mécanisme
+%     \isuffix{.ins}\isuffix{.dtx}\isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.ins/.dtx};
+%     le fichier \suffix{.mld} doit alors charger le fichier \suffix{.mlo} correspondant.
+%     \pack{CJK} implante les codages GB, Big~5, JIS, SJIS, KS, UTF~8 et CNS (sur 16~bits, sauf UTF~8 sur 24~bits).
+%     Voir le tableau~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}.
+%     \begin{table}[tp]
+%     \changeskips
+%     \caption{Schémas de codage implantés dans \upack{CJK}}\label{t+jargon+CJK}\ipack{CJK}
+%     \centering
+%     \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
+%     \toprule
+%     \textbf{Codage}&\textbf{1~octet}&\textbf{2~octets}&\textbf{3~octets}\\
+%     \midrule
+%     GB&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF7}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
+%     Big~5&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF9}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
+%     JIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xF4}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
+%     SJIS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0x40}--\texttt{0xFC}&---\\
+%     KS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFD}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
+%     UTF~8&\texttt{0xC0}--\texttt{0xEF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}&\texttt{0x80}--\texttt{0xBF}\\
+%     CNS&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&\texttt{0xA1}--\texttt{0xFE}&---\\
+%     \bottomrule
+%     \end{tabular}
+%     \end{table}
+%
+%     Certains schémas de codage (Big~5, SJIS) ont des trous dans le domaine du deuxième octet.
+%     Il est difficile de lire avec les codages Big~5 et SJIS directement vers \TeX\ puisque certaines des valeurs
+%     utilisées pour les deuxièmes octets des codages sont réservées pour des caractères de contrôle:
+%     «~\texttt{\{}~», «~\texttt{\}}~» et «~\texttt{\bs}~». Le fait de les redéfinir casse beaucoup de choses dans
+%     \LaTeX; pour éviter ceci, normalement des préprocesseurs sont utilisés pour convertir le deuxième octet en
+%     un nombre suivi d'un caractère délimiteur. Pour plus de détails, voir~\cite{lunde1993,lunde}; \name{Ken}{Lunde}
+%     y~présente en grand détail tous les codages \pack{CJK} qui sont ou ont été utilisés.
+%     Notez que le paquetage \upack{minitoc} utilise les fichiers \suffix{.mlo} pour contourner ce problème;
+%     voir la section~\vref{fo+lang}.
+% \item[classe] La \textbf{classe}\,\footnote{Cette note a été extraite de~\cite{NSSL2E}, puis adaptée.}
+%     est la première information que \LaTeX{} a besoin de connaître lors du traitement d'un fichier d'entrée;
+%     c'est le type de document que l'auteur souhaite produite. Ceci est spécifié par la commande
+%     \com{documentclass}.
+%     \begin{quote}
+%     \com{documentclass}\verb|[|\emph{options}\verb|]{|\emph{classe}\verb|}|
+%     \end{quote}
+%     \noindent Ici \emph{classe} spécifie le type du document à~produire.
+%     Le tableau~\vref{t+documentclasses} liste les classes standard de documents~\cite{classes}. La distribution \LaTeXe{}
+%     fournit d'autres classes pour d'autres documents, y~compris des lettres et des transparents,
+%     mais le paquetage \upack{minitoc} n'a pas été testé avec toutes ces classes.
+%     Les paramètres \emph{options} adaptent le comportement de la classe du document. Les options doivent être
+%     séparées par des virgules. Les classes standard supportées par le paquetage \upack{minitoc} sont listées
+%     dans la section~\vref{s+supported+classes}.
+%     \begin{table}[!tp]
+%     \changeskips
+%     \caption{Classes standard de documents}\label{t+documentclasses}
+%     \centering
+%     \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+%     \toprule
+%     \textbf{Classe}&\textbf{Usage}\\
+%     \midrule
+%     \class{article}~\cite{classes}&Pour des articles dans des journaux scientifiques, des présentations, des rapports courts,
+%      de la documentation de programmes, des invitations, \ldots\\
+%     \class{proc}~\cite{proc}&Pour préparer les comptes-rendus d'une conférence; analogue à~la classe \class{article}.\\
+%     \class{ltxdoc}~\cite{ltxdoc}&Pour préparer la documentation d'un paquetage ou d'une classe; analogue à~la classe
+%       \class{article}.\\
+%     \class{ltnews}~\cite{ltnews}&Pour préparer l'annonce d'une version de \LaTeX{}; analogue à~la classe \class{article}.\\
+%     \class{report}~\cite{classes}&Pour des rapports plus longs contenant plusieurs chapitres, de petits livres, des thèses, \ldots\\
+%     \class{book}~\cite{classes}&Pour de vrais livres.\\
+%     \class{letter}&Pour des lettres; comme cette classe n'a pas de commandes de sectionnement, n'utilisez pas
+%       \upack{minitoc} avec cette classe.\\
+%     \class{slides}~\cite{slides}&Pour des transparents; cette classe utilise de grandes lettres sans empattements. Vous
+%     pouvez aussi envisager d'utiliser Beamer\TeX{}\,$^a$ à~la place. N'utilisez pas \upack{minitoc} avec ces classes.\\
+%     \midrule
+%     \multicolumn{2}{@{}p{\textwidth}@{}}{{\froff$^a$\phantom{-}\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/beamer/doc/beameruserguide.pdf}}\hfill\null}\\
+%     \bottomrule
+%     \end{tabularx}
+%     \end{table}
+% \item[\feat{close}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté immédiatement après
+%     (fermeture, \emph{close}) l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire pour un type donné de mini-table.
+%     Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
+%     Voir le fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, dans la section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}.
+% \item[\uscrp{cmk}]\iscrp{cmk}
+%     Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer les fichiers de documentation
+%     en format PostScript à~partir de ceux en format PDF.
+%     Vous devriez adapter ce script à~vos besoins.
+% \item[CMR] Pour «~Computer Modern Roman~». Le sous-ensemble romain des fontes «~Computer Modern~».
+%     Voir «~Computer Modern~» ci-dessous.
+% \item[codage] Un codage (\emph{encoding}) spécifie l'ordre selon lequel les caractères apparaissent dans la
+%      fonte (par exemple, si le soixante-quinzième caractère est un «~A~»). Le codage de fonte le plus courant
+%      pour \TeX\ est OT1. L'autre option prédéfinie est~T1 (\TeX\ étendu). Il y~a aussi
+%      US~ASCII (7~bits), ISO~Latin-1 (8~bits), Adobe Standard Encoding, UTF8 (Unicode~\cite{chou,unicode-des,unicode}),
+%      etc. Voir la table~\vref{t+var-encodings} et~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}.
+% \begin{table}[!tp]
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Codages divers}\label{t+var-encodings}
+% \centering
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \textbf{Codage}&\textbf{Commentaire}\\
+% \midrule
+% \texttt{ansinew}&Codage ANSI pour Windows~3.1, extension de Latin-1.\\
+% \texttt{applemac}&Codage Macintosh.\\
+% \texttt{ascii}&Codage ASCII pour l'intervalle 32--127.\\
+% \texttt{cp1250}&Page de code Windows 1250 (Europe centrale et orientale).\\
+% \texttt{cp1251}&Page de code Windows 1251 (cyrillique).\\
+% \texttt{cp1252}&Synonyme de \texttt{ansinew}.\\
+% \texttt{cp1257}&Page de code Windows 1257 (baltique).\\
+% \texttt{cp437}&Page de code IBM~437, qui est la page de code
+%      américaine d'origine et contient les lettres, les
+%      chiffres, des symboles mathématiques et quelques
+%      caractères utiles pour construire des pseudo-graphiques.\\
+% \texttt{cp437de}&Page de code IBM~437 (version allemande).\\
+% \texttt{cp850}&Page de code IBM~850, presque identique à~ISO~Latin~1,
+%      mais la disposition des caractères n'est pas la même.\\
+% \texttt{cp852}&Page de code IBM~852.\\
+% \texttt{cp855}&Page de code IBM~855 (cyrillique).\\
+% \texttt{cp865}&Page de code IBM~865.\\
+% \texttt{cp866}&Page de code IBM~866 (MS-DOS cyrillique).\\
+% \texttt{decmulti}&Codage du jeu international de caractères DEC.\\
+% \texttt{latin1}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires
+%      à~la plupart des langues européennes occidentales, y~compris
+%      le danois, le néerlandais, l'anglais, le féroéen, le
+%      finnois, le flamand, le français, l'allemand,
+%      l'islandais, l'italien, le norvégien, le portugais,
+%      l'espagnol et le suédois. Certaines langues non
+%      européennes, comme l'hawaïen et l'indonésien, sont aussi
+%      écrites avec ce jeu de caractères.\\
+% \texttt{latin2}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires
+%      à~la plupart des langues d'Europe centrale, y~compris
+%      le croate, le tchèque, le hongrois, le polonais, le
+%      roumain, le slovaque et le slovène.\\
+% \texttt{latin3}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires
+%      à~l'espéranto, le maltais, le turc et le galicien.
+%      Cependant, \texttt{latin5} est le jeu de caractères
+%      préféré pour le turc.\\
+% \texttt{latin4}&Codage ASCII plus les caractères nécessaires
+%      pour les langues baltes (latvien ou letton, estonien et
+%      lituanien), le groendlandais et le lapon (sâme, sámi).\\
+% \texttt{latin5}&Est essentiellement identique à~\texttt{latin1},
+%      excepté que certains caractères turcs remplacent des
+%      lettres islandaises moins souvent utilisées.\\
+% \texttt{next}&Codage pour Next.\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \end{table}
+% \item[\texttt{comp.text.tex}] Le groupe de discussion Usenet sur \TeX\ et \LaTeX, en anglais.
+% \item[compteur] Un registre \TeX\ contenant une valeur entière. Il~y a 256 compteurs (de~0 à~255) dans \TeX, mais
+%     \LaTeX\ en utilise certains, et de nombreux paquetages ont besoin de quelques compteurs pour leur propre
+%      usage. Une version étendue, dérivée de \TeX, \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, permet davantage de compteurs.
+%      Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$), lui aussi, permet davantage de compteurs.
+% \item[Computer Modern] Pour \og Computer Modern\fg. Un ensemble de fontes~\cite{cmt} conçues
+%     par \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth} pour \TeX. Initialement, elles étaient construites avec
+%     {\MF}~\cite{meta-des,metabook} (un programme lui aussi créé par \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth}),
+%     mais aujourd'hui il en existe des versions PostScript type~1 (vectoriel), avec des extensions (pour les caractères
+%     accentués, principalement): les fontes EC (\emph{European Computer Modern}), les fontes cm-super, etc.
+% \item[CTAN] Le \emph{Comprehensive \TeX\ Archive Network} (réseau d'archives \TeX\ complètes), un ensemble
+%     d'archives informatiques contenant la plupart des ressources relatives à~\TeX{} (telles que fontes,
+%     logiciels, documentations, paquetages). Elles sont accessibles par
+%     Internet. Voir \url{http://ctan.org}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{D}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{D}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\pack{dblaccnt}] J'ai dû utiliser le paquetage \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} pour préparer l'entrée
+%     <<~The pdf\TeX\ Program~>>~\cite{han} dans la bibliographie, parce que le prénom de son auteur comporte un
+%     accent double \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}; I used it also to typeset some other vietnamese words.
+% \item[\texttt{de.comp.text.tex}] Le groupe de discussion Usenet sur \TeX\ et \LaTeX, en allemand.
+% \item[\emph{depth}] Voir \textbf{profondeur} plus loin.
+% \item[descripteur] (de fichier). Une entité logicielle décrivant l'interface entre un programme et un fichier.
+%     Pour la plupart des programmes et des systèmes d'exploitation, le nombre de descripteurs de fichiers est
+%     limité. Pour {\TeX} et {\LaTeX}, il y a 16~descripteurs de fichiers en écriture et 16~descripteurs de
+%     fichiers en lecture.
+% \item[\xfile{devanagari.sty}] Le paquetage \emph{\devnag{} pour \TeX{}} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari})\cite{devanagari}
+%      offre  un moyen pour composer avec une haute qualité du texte \devnag{} avec \TeX{}. \devnag{} est une
+%      écriture utilisée pour écrire et imprimer le sanskrit et de nombreuses langues d'Inde du nord et centrale
+%      telles que l'hindi et le marathi, ainsi que le népalais. Le paquetage \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari} a été initialement
+%      développé en mai~1991 par \name{Frans}{Velthuis} pour l'Université de Groningen, aux Pays-Bas, et ce fut le
+%      premier système à~supporter l'écriture \devnag{} pour \TeX{}.
+% \item[dispositifs] Un dispositif (\emph{feature}) (au sens du paquetage \upack{minitoc}) est un ensemble
+%     d'actions qui est exécuté lors de chaque occurrence d'un certain type de mini-table. Cing dispositifs sont
+%     associés à~chaque type de mini-table: un dispositif «~\feat{before}~» (exécuté avant la mini-table complète), un dispositif
+%     «~\feat{after}~» (exécuté après la mini-table complète),
+%     un dispositif «~\feat{open}~» (exécuté juste avant l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire contenant la minitable),
+%     un dispositif «~\feat{close}~» (exécuté juste après l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire contenant la minitable),
+%     et un dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~», qui est exécuté avec la
+%     mini-table pour forcer son style de page.
+%     Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
+% ^^A \item[\xfile{duplex2v.pro}] Un fichier d'en-tête PostScript, qui essaye d'activer l'impression en recto-verso.
+% ^^A     Il fonctionne avec certaines imprimantes PostScript HP et Canon.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{E}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{E}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\textbf{ECM}] Un exemple minimal complet est le plus petit document complet possible qui illustre un
+%      problème. Un exemple minimal ne devrait aucun paquetegage ni code qui ne contribue pas au problème, mais
+%      il doit contenir une classe de document et l'environnement \env{document} (d'après~\cite{talbot-mini}).
+%      Voir aussi~\cite{preusse}, \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=minxampl} et
+%      \url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=askquestion} pour de bons conseils.
+% \item[\texttt{em}] Une unité de longueur égale (approximativement) à~la largeur de la lettre~\og m\fg
+%     dans la fonte courante. En typographie, c'est un \og cadratin\fg.
+% \item[\uscrp{emk}]\iscrp{emk}
+%     Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer la documentation en anglais du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+%     Le script \scrp{imk} doit avoir été exécuté au préalable. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}.
+% \item[\xfile{en-mtc.bst}] Un style bibliographique similaire au style \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plain.bst} standard, mais
+%     modifié avec l'outil \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst} pour ajouter un champ \texttt{URL}. Les noms de famille
+%     des auteurs et rédacteurs (\emph{editors}) sont en petites capitales, les années en chiffres de style ancien.
+% \item[environnement] Un environnement (\emph{environment}) est un domaine délimité dans un document, où des
+%     règles spéciales s'appliquent. Un tel domaine est délimité
+%     par \verb|\begin{|\emph{env}\verb|}| \ldots{} \verb|\end{|\emph{env}\verb|}| et peut prendre des arguments,
+%     comme ceci:
+%     \begin{quote}
+%     \verb|\begin{minipage}[t]{.5\textwidth}|\\
+%     \verb|\end{minipage}|
+%     \end{quote}
+% \item[\packa{\eTeX}{etex}] \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} est une version étendue de \TeX, avec bien plus de
+%     registres et de nombreuses nouvelles primitives; elle supporte aussi l'écriture de gauche à~droite et de
+%     droite à~gauche.
+% \item[\upack{ethiop}]\ipack{ethiop} Un paquetage~\cite{ethiop} \LaTeX\ offrant le support de la langue éthiopienne pour
+%     le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
+% \item[extension] Voir «~suffixe~» plus loin.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{F}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{F}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\xfile{farsi.sty}] Voir \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} ci-dessous.
+% \item[\upack{Farsi\TeX}]\ipacka{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX} Un paquetage~\cite{farsi} pour composer un document dans la langue \lopt{farsi} (iranien, persan).
+%     Voir~{\froff\url{http://www.farsitex.org}}. Mais ce n'est actuellement disponible que pour \LaTeX2.09.
+%     Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+farsi1} et~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}.
+% \item[features] Voir «~dispositifs~» plus haut.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\env{filecontents}] Un environnement \LaTeX{} spécial. Il permet de créer un fichier (dont le nom est donné
+%     en argument de cet environnement) en écrivant le contenu de l'environnement dans ce fichier.
+%     \begin{quote}
+%     \texttt{\bs begin\{filecontents\}\{\emph{fichier}\}}\\
+%     \texttt{\ldots\emph{contenu}~\ldots}\\
+%     \texttt{\bs end\{filecontents\}}
+%     \end{quote}
+%     Cet environnement devrait être utilisé \emph{avant} \com{documentclass}.
+%     Il est utilisé dans \xfile{minitoc.ins} pour préparer les fichiers \suffix{.mlo} (voir la
+%     section~\vref{fo+lang}) et quelques fichiers utilisés dans la compilation de la documentation.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\com{firstchapteris}] Une commande obsolète, utilisée temporairement pour contourner le problème
+%     du Chapitre~0;
+%     voir~\textbf{Chapitre~0} et \textbf{absolue (numérotation)} plus haut, et la section~\vref{faq.5}.
+% \item[\com{firstpartis}] Analogue à~\com{firstchapteris} ci-dessus.
+% \item[\com{firstsectionis}] Analogue à~\com{firstchapteris} ci-dessus.
+% \item[\pack{float}] Ce paquetage~\cite{float} (de \name{Anselm}{Lingnau})\imess{I0053} améliore l'interface de définition
+%     d'objets flottants tels que figures et tableaux en \LaTeX. Il ajoute la notion de <<~style de flottant~>>
+%     qui régit l'aspect des flottants. De nouvelles sortes de flottants peuvent être définies en utilisant une
+%     commande \com{newfloat} analogue à~\com{newtheorem}. Ce paquetage incorpore aussi la fonctionnalité du
+%     paquetage \pack{here} de \name{David~P.}{Carlisle}, donnant aux environnements flottants une option
+%     \texttt{[H]} qui signifie <<~METTEZ-LE ICI~>> (par opposition à~l'option standard \texttt{[h]} qui signifie
+%     <<~vous pouvez le mettre ici si vous voulez~>>).
+% \item[\com{FloatBarrier}]
+%     Une macro du paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins}. Elle établit une «~barrière~» contre la dérive
+%     des éléments flottants (tels que figures ou tableaux).
+% \item[\pack{floatrow}] Ce paquetage~\cite{floatrow} (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko})\imess{I0053} est une extension du paquetage
+%     \pack{float}~\cite{float} (de \name{Anselm}{Lingnau}), réutilisant son code, avec des extensions venant du
+%     paquetage \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} (de \name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}).
+% \item[\pack{flowfram}] Ce\imess{W0097} paquetage~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} est conçu pour vous permettre de créer des
+%     blocs (\emph{frames}) de texte dans un document de manière que le contenu de l'environnement \env{document}
+%     coule d'un bloc au suivant dans l'ordre où ils ont été définis. Ceci est utile pour créer des posters ou des
+%     magazines ou toute autre forme de document qui n'est pas conforme à~la mise en page standard sur une ou deux colonnes.
+%     Comme ce paquetage définit son propre système de minitocs, il est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage
+%     \upack{minitoc}.
+% \item[\uscrp{fmk}]\iscrp{fmk}
+%     Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer la documentation en français du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+%     Le script \scrp{imk} doit avoir été exécuté au préalable. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}.
+% \item[\upack{fncychap}] Le paquetage \imess{W0086}\pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap} fournit diverses commandes pour changer
+%     le format utilisé pour certaines en-têtes (chapitres) dans les classes stantard de documents de \LaTeXe:
+%     \class{book} et \class{report}.
+%     Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.fncychap} et la
+%     section~\vref{faq.38}).
+% \item[\texttt{fr.comp.text.tex}] Le groupe de discussion Usenet sur \TeX\ et \LaTeX, en français.
+% \item[\upack{franc}]\ipack{franc} Un petit paquetage utilisé pour préparer la documentation en français. Il est
+%     produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\upack{frbib}]\ipack{frbib} Un petit paquetage utilisé pour préparer la bibliographie de la documentation en
+%     français. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\xfile{fr-mtc.bst}] Un fichier de style bibliographique utilisé pour préparer la bibliographie de la
+%     documentation en français.
+%     Il a été amélioré pour le français par \name{Ronan}{Keryell} en partant de la version standard
+%     \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plain.bst}, puis j'ai ajouté quelques adaptations pour le français (comme les noms de famille en
+%     petites capitales pour les auteurs et les éditeurs, les années en chiffres anciens),
+%     puis je l'ai modifié avec l'outil \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}.
+% \item[\upack{frnew.sty}]\ipack{frnew} Un petit paquetage utilisé pour préparer la documentation en français. Il est
+%     produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{G}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{G}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\pack{geometry}] Le paquetage \pack{geometry}~\cite{geometry} fournit une interface utilisateur flexible
+%     et complète pour les dimensions de la page. Vous pouvez les spécifier en utilisant des paramètres intuitifs
+%     pour obtenir votre mise en page désirée. Par exemple, si vous voulez établir des marges (à~gauche, à~droite,
+%     en haut et en bas) à~2\,cm de chaque bord du papier, il vous suffit de dire:
+%     \begin{quote}
+%     \verb|\usepackage[margin=2cm]{geometry}|
+%     \end{quote}
+%     Ce paquetage puissant (et recommandé) est utilisé dans certains des exemples de documents et dans la présente
+%     documentation.
+% \item[\upack{guarani}]\ipack{guarani} Un paquetage \LaTeX\ pour composer du texte guarani, la principale langue parlée
+%     au Paraguay.
+%     Le fichier \xfile{guarani.ldf}, inclus dans ce paquetage, définit les titres. Voir~\cite{guarani} et la
+%     section~\vref{s+mld+guarani}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{H}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{H}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\upack{hangcaption}] Le paquetage \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption} définit une variante de la
+%     commande \com{caption} pour produire des captions (légendes) avec une indentation pendante
+%     (\emph{hanging indentation}), c'est-à-dire dont la première ligne déborde sur la gauche. Ce paquetage est
+%     sans doute obsolète (1992, \LaTeX2.09).
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[Hindi] Pour la langue hindi, voir le paquetage \packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}~\cite{devanagari} plus haut. Le
+%     paquetage \upack{minitoc} accepte les options de langue \lopt{devanagari} et \lopt{hindi}, qui sont
+%     synonymes. Une option de langue \lopt{hindi-modern} est également disponible.
+%     Voir aussi~\cite{hindi99} sur la langue hindi.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\emph{hint}] Une indication, un indice pour détecter un problème. C'est aussi un message écrit (dans
+%     le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}) par l'option \optd{hints} (voir ci-dessous).
+% \item[\uopt{hints}]\ioptd{hints} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle vérifie l'ordre ce chargement de certains
+%     paquetages, l'ordre des invocations de certaines commandes de \upack{minitoc}, la cohérence entre les
+%     principales commandes de \upack{minitoc}, etc., et produit des avertissements et d'autres indications
+%     (\emph{hints}) utiles (principalement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}).
+%     C'est une option active par défaut
+%     (utilisez l'option \opt{nohints} pour sauter ces vérifications).
+% \item[\upack{H\LaTeX}]\ipacka{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} Un système pour écrire des documents en langue coréenne, en utilisant \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$)
+%     (voir plus bas).
+%     Écrit par \name{Un}{Koaunghi}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX}. Il utilise des fontes Hangûl
+%     ou Hanja spéciales et le codage UTF-8 en entrée.
+% \item[hyperlien] (\emph{hyperlink}) Dans un document, une référence à~un autre objet qui peut être trouvé de
+%     manière dynamique (en cliquant avec la  souris). Ceci requiert un type spécial de document (PDF, PostScript
+%     avec dispositifs d'hypertexte) et un visualisateur adapté (visualisateur PDF, visualisateur PostScript
+%     récent). Ceci est pratique pour naviguer dans un document ou plusieurs documents, qui peuvent être des
+%     documents distants.
+% \lneed{4}
+% \item[\upack{hyperref}] Le\SMM{\lmess{W0023}\\\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0039}}
+%     paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} est utilisé pour modifier les commandes
+%     de références croisées de \LaTeX\ afin de produire une certaine sorte de commandes \com{special};
+%     elles sont des prémices de l'ensemble de commandes \com{special} définis pour les processeurs de
+%     \texttt{dvi} vers \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}, pour les commandes \texttt{pdfmark} incluses pour le traitement par
+%     \tool{Acrobat Distiller} (\tool{dvips} et \tool{dvipsone}), pour \tool{dviwindo}, pour \textbf{pdf\TeX},
+%     pour \textbf{\TeX4ht} et pour les outils de conversion en PDF et HTML de \tool{VTEX}.
+%
+%     Ce paquetage dérive de, et est bâti sur, le travail du projet \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX},
+%     décrit dans~\cite{hypertex}. Il étend la fonctionnalité de toutes les commandes de
+%     références croisées de \LaTeX\ (y~compris la table des matières, les bibliographies, etc.) pour produire des
+%     commandes \com{special} qu'un programme pilote (\emph{driver}) pourra transformer en liens
+%     hypertextes; il fournit aussi de nouvelles commandes permettant à~l'utilisateur d'écrire des liens
+%     hypertextes (hyperliens) \emph{ad hoc}, y~compris ceux vers des documents externes et des URLs.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{I}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{I}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\upack{ifmtarg}] Le paquetage \pack{ifmtarg}~\cite{ifmtarg} fournit une commande si-alors-sinon
+%     (\emph{if-then-else}) pour tester si un argument de macro est vide («~vide~» signifiant seulement zéro espaces ou
+%     plus).
+% \item[\pack{ifthen}] Le paquetage \pack{ifthen}~\cite{ifthen} définit une commande \com{ifthenelse} pour \LaTeXe.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item [\uscrp{imk}]\iscrp{imk} Un exemple de script \emph{shell}, qui prépare le paquetage \upack{minitoc}
+%     depuis \xfile{minitoc.ins} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; notez que \scrp{imk} doit être exécuté avant
+%     de lancer \scrp{emk} ou \scrp{fmk}. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\uopt{insection}]\iopt{insection} L'option de paquetage \opt{insection}\imess{W0056} charge le paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins}
+%     avec les options adéquates pour éviter que les éléments flottants (tels que figures et tableaux) dérivent
+%     en dehors de leurs sections, et charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter} (décrit dans~\cite{ltoutput}
+%     et~\cite[page~292]{TLC2F}).
+%     Cette option de paquetage est recommandée si vous utilisez des sectlofs ou
+%     des sectlots dans votre document. Voir la section~\vref{mtcsecttoc}.
+% \item[insertion] Les commandes d'insertion du paquetage \upack{minitoc} insèrent une mini-table dans le document.
+%     Une commande de \emph{préparation} correspondante doit avoir été invoquée (une seule fois) auparavant.
+%     Les commandes d'insertion sont (voir la table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}):
+%        \par\begin{tabular}{@{}l@{}}
+%        \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof}, \com{partlot},\\
+%        \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}, \com{minilot},\\
+%        \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof}, \com{sectlot}
+%        \end{tabular}
+% \item[\xfile{INSTALL}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) l'installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+%     Voir le chapitre~\vref{c+installation}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{J}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{J}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\com{jobname}] Une primitive \TeX\ contenant le nom du document en préparation, c'est-à-dire le nom
+%     du fichier lu en premier par \TeX{} (ou \LaTeX), sans son suffixe. Elle est très utile pour construire les
+%     noms d'autres fichiers.
+% \item[\uclass{jura}] La classe \imess{W0029}\class{jura}~\cite{jura}, de \name{Felix}{Braun}, est \emph{incompatible} avec le
+%     paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle est utilisée pour des documents juridiques en allemand.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{K}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{K}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\uopt{k-loose}]\ioptd{k-loose} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc} utile si votre document est écrit avec une des
+%     classes de \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. Cette option essaye d'établir un espacement peu serré (\emph{loose})
+%     dans les mini-tables. Analogue à~l'option de paquetage \optd{loose} pour les classes standard.
+% \item[\uopt{k-tight}]\iopt{k-tight} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc} utile si votre document est écrit avec une des
+%     classes de \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}. Cette option essaye d'établir un espacement serré (\emph{tight}) dans les
+%     mini-tables. Analogue à~l'option de paquetage \opt{tight} pour les classes standard.
+% \item[\packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}] Un projet~\cite{kannadatex} pour utiliser \LaTeX{} pout la composition
+%      dans la langue Kannada language. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+kannada}.
+% \item[\KOMAScript]
+%     {\KOMAScript}\imess{I0043}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} est un ensemble très complexe.
+%     Vous pouvez le voir, car il n'y a pas seulement
+%     une seule classe ou un seul paquetage, mais tout un ensemble de classes et paquetages nombreux. Les
+%     classes (\class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook}, \class{scrlettr}, \class{scrlttr2} et
+%     \class{scrreprt}) sont bien les contreparties des classes standard, mais elles n'ont jamais seulement les
+%     mêmes commandes, environnements, options et possibilités optionnelles que les classes standard et ne donnent
+%     pas un résultat de même aspect.
+%
+%     \begin{SMOOTH}
+%     Les classes \class{scrbook}, \class{scrreprt} et \class{scrartcl} sont compatibles avec le
+%     paquetage \upack{minitoc}, avec certaines précautions (voir la section~\vref{special.entries}).
+%     Les classes \class{scrlettr} et \class{scrlttr2} n'ont pas de commandes
+%     de sectionnement, donc le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est sans objet avec elles.
+%     \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+%     \KOMAScript{} offre des tas de classes, paquetages, commandes, environnements et possibilités. Vous en
+%     trouverez certains aussi dans les classes standard, mais il y en a beaucoup que vous ne trouverez pas.
+%     Certains sont même des ajouts au noyau de \LaTeX.
+%
+%     Les classes principales de l'ensemble {\KOMAScript} sont conçues comme des contreparties des classes
+%     \LaTeX{} standard. Ceci signifie que l'ensemble {\KOMAScript} contient des remplacements pour les trois
+%     classes standard \class{book}, \class{report} et \class{article}. Il y a aussi un remplacement pour la
+%     classe standard \class{letter}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{L}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{L}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[Lambda] Le format (au sens \TeX\ du terme) \LaTeX{} adapté aux capacités spéciales du système
+%     Omega~($\mathbf{\Omega}$) est appelé «~\emph{Lambda}~»~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$).
+% \item[Lamed] Le format (au sens \TeX\ du terme)  \LaTeX{} adapté aux capacités spéciales du système
+%     \pack{Aleph}~($\aleph$) est appelé «~\emph{Lamed}~»~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/).
+% \item[\LaTeX] \LaTeX~\cite{latex-manual} est un système de préparation de documents qui convient fort bien pour
+%     produire des documents scientifiques et mathématiques de haute qualité typographique. Il convient aussi pour
+%     produire toutes sortes d'autres documents, depuis de simples lettres jusqu'à des livres complets.
+%     \LaTeX{} utilise \TeX~\cite{texbook,ftb} comme moteur de composition (d'après~\cite{NSSL2E}).
+%
+%     \LaTeX{} est en fait un ensemble de macros \TeX{} qui permet aux auteurs de
+%     composer et d'imprimer leur document avec la plus haute
+%     qualité typographique, en utilisant une mise en page
+%     prédéfinie professionnelle. \LaTeX{} avait été originellement
+%     écrit par \name{Leslie}{Lamport}~\cite{latex-manual}. Il utilise le
+%     formateur \TeX{} comme moteur de composition typographique.
+%     Aujourd'hui, la maintenance de \LaTeX{} est faite par
+%     \name{Frank}{Mittelbach} et son équipe.
+%
+%     \begin{SMOOTH}
+%     En 1994, le système \LaTeX{} fut (profondément) mis à~jour par l'équipe de \LaTeX3,
+%     conduite par \name{Frank}{Mittelbach}, pour inclure certaines
+%     améliorations attendues depuis longtemps, et pour réunifier
+%     toutes les versions modifiées qui ont pullulé depuis la sortie
+%     de \LaTeX2.09 quelques années plus tôt. Pour distinguer la
+%     nouvelle version de l'ancienne, elle est appelée \LaTeXe.
+%     \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+%     \LaTeX{} se prononce \textbf{[latex]}. Si vous voulez faire référence à~\LaTeX{} dans un environnement
+%     \texttt{ASCII}, utilisez \texttt{LaTeX}. \LaTeXe{} se prononce \textbf{[latex d\o{}z\o{}]} et s'écrit
+%     \texttt{LaTeX2e}.
+%
+%     En anglais, cela donne \textbf{[la\i{}tex]} et \usebox{\latexbox}.
+% ^^A     {\selectlanguage{english}\froff\textbf{[la\i{}tex tu:i:]}\selectlanguage{french}}.
+% \item[\LaTeX2.09] Une version obsolète du programme \LaTeX, antérieure à~1994; elle n'est plus supportée.
+%     Ne l'utilisez pas\,\footnote{Sauf exceptionnellement, pour un très vieux document; si possible, essayez de le
+%     convertir.}. Utilisez la version actuelle de \LaTeXe, qui est supportée et bien plus puissante.
+% \item[\LaTeXe] La version actuelle du programme \LaTeX, après 1994; elle est supportée.
+% \item[\LaTeX3] La future version de \LaTeX, toujours en cours de développement.
+% \item[\uclass{letter}]\iclass{letter} Une\Virage{} classe de documents standard~\cite{letter} pour préparer des
+%     lettres postales (courrier papier).
+%     Comme de tels documents n'ont ni commandes ni structure de sectionnement, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est
+%     sans objet pour eux (et est donc \emph{incompatible} avec cette classe).
+% \item[\upack{lipsum}] Le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} permet d'insérer facilement du
+%     texte dans un fichier de test avec un minimum de frappe. Les textes sont en latin mais ont été altérés et
+%     rendus incompréhensibles. J'ai utilisé ce paquetage dans certains des exemples de documents.
+%     Voir aussi~\url{http://lipsum.com} pour les origines du texte
+%     utilisé (des passages du \emph{De finibus bonorum et malorum} de Marcus \textsc{Tullius Cicero} (\textsc{Cicéron})).
+% \item[\uopt{listfiles}]\ioptd{listfiles} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle crée une liste des fichiers minitoc
+%     auxiliaires (ces fichiers contiennent les mini-tables et peuvent être éliminés après l'exécution de \LaTeX)
+%     dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}. Option par défaut. Voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}.
+% \item[LOF, LoF] Un acronyme pour «~\emph{list of figures}~», ou «~liste des figures~».
+% \item[\dcnt{lofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur de la liste des figures.
+% \item[\uopt{loose}]\ioptd{loose} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle donne un espacement lache des lignes dans
+%     les mini-tables. C'est le choix par défaut. L'option contraire est \opt{tight}.
+% \item[LOT, LoT] Un acronyme pour «~\emph{list of tables}~», ou «~liste des tableaux~».
+% \item[\dcnt{lotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur de la liste des tableaux.
+% \item[LPPL] La \emph{LaTeX Project Public License}, disponible~à:
+% \begin{quote}
+%    {\froff\url{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt}}
+% \end{quote}
+%    Sa version actuelle est (2003-12-01). Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est distribué sous cette licence.
+%    Une traduction en français de cette licence est disponible~à:
+% \begin{quote}
+%    {\froff\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/info/french-translations/macros/latex/base/f-lppl.txt}}
+% \end{quote}
+% \item[\uclass{ltxdoc}]\iclass{ltxdoc} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{ltxdoc},
+%     pour préparer la documentation d'un paquetage ou d'une
+%     classe. Pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, elle est
+%     très similaire à~la classe de document \class{article}; voir plus haut.
+% \item[\uclass{ltnews}]\iclass{ltnews} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{ltnews},
+%     pour préparer l'announce d'une version de \LaTeX.
+%     Pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, elle est
+%     très similaire à~la classe de document \class{article}; voir plus haut.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{M}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{M}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\com{makeatletter} \textmd{et} \com{makeatother}] De\,\footnote{Ces informations proviennent
+%     de~\cite[page~857]{TLC2F}.} nombreuses commandes internes de \LaTeX{}, de paquetages et de classes contiennent
+%     le caractère~\texttt{@} dans leurs noms. Ceci empêche efficacement que de tels noms soient utilisés dans des
+%     documents pour des commandes définies par l'utilisateur. Cependant, ceci signifie aussi qu'ils ne peuvent
+%     pas apparaître dans un document, même pas dans le préambule, sans prendre des précautions spéciales. Comme
+%     il est parfois nécessaire d'avoir de tels morceaux de «~code interne~» dans le préambule,
+%     les commandes \com{makeatletter} et \com{makeatother} permettent de le faire facilement: ce
+%     qui est difficile, c'est de se rappeler qu'il faut les ajouter, faute de quoi des erreurs étranges
+%     surviennent. Et ces deux commandes \Virage\emph{ne devraient jamais être utilisées dans un fichier de paquetage ou de classe}.
+% \item[makefile] Un fichier de texte particulier contenant des instructions pour construire et installer un
+%     logiciel, à~l'aide de l'utilitaire «~\textbf{make}~»; \textbf{make} est un outil pratique provenant du
+%     système d'exploitation Unix, mais il en existe des variantes.
+% \item[\upack{mcaption}] Le paquetage \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption}\imess{W0036} fournit un environnement
+%     \env{margincap} pour placer les captions (légendes) dans la marge externe du document, avec un alignement
+%     par le haut ou par le bas.
+% \lneed{7}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\uclass{memoir}]\iclass{memoir}
+%     Une\SMM{\lmess{E0028}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0032}\\\lmess{I0044}\\\lmess{M0001}}
+%     très générale et puissante classe de document
+%     (de \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}, décrite dans~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3});
+%     cette classe est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (avec quelques précautions) si vous utilisez
+%     une version récente. Voir la section~\vref{faq+memoir}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[mini-bibliographie] Voir \textbf{minibbl} ci-dessous.
+% \item[mini-liste] Synonyme de «~mini-table~» ci-dessous.
+% \item[mini-lof] Voir «~minilof~» ci-dessous.
+% \item[mini-lot] Voir «~minilot~» ci-dessous.
+% \item[mini-table] Ce terme désigne une table de contenu locale (comme une table des matières, une liste des
+%     figures ou une liste des tableaux) pour une unité de sectionnement (partie, chapitre ou section), par
+%     opposition à~une table globale (la table des matières, la liste des figures ou la liste des tableaux pour
+%     l'ensemble du document). Le but principal du paquetage \upack{minitoc} est la création de telles
+%     mini-tables. Mais le terme «~minitoc~» est aussi utilisé pour désigner une telle mini-table, comme un terme
+%     générique, car les premières versions du paquetage ne permettaient que des tables des matières par chapitre.
+% \item[mini-toc] Voir «~minitoc~» ci-dessous.
+% \item[minibbl] Abréviation pour «~mini-bibliographie~», c'est-à-dire avoir une bibliographie par partie, par
+%     chapitre ou par section, ou même par thème ou par sujet. Ceci est en dehors du domaine du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+%     Voir la section~\vref{faq.9}.
+% \item[minilof] Une liste des figures pour un chapitre.
+% \item[\dcnt{minilofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il est défini, contient la profondeur des minilofs.
+% \item[minilot] Une liste des tableaux pour un chapitre.
+% \item[\dcnt{minilotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il est défini, contient la profondeur des minilots.
+% \item[minitoc] Une table des matières pour un chapitre. Aussi utilisé comme terme générique pour toute mini-table (voir
+%      «~mini-table~» plus haut).
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}] Une base de données bibliographiques pour la documentation en français du paquetage
+%     \upack{minitoc}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}] Le fichier source pour la documentation en français du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+%     En fait, il ne fait que définir \com{jobname} puis charger \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, qui lui-même charge
+%     \com{jobname}\suffix{.lan} pour choisir la langue utilisée dans \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; \xfile{minitoc.dtx} contient
+%     à~la fois des fragments de documentation en anglais et en français, choisis par des constructions
+%     \com{ifcase} avec la variable \com{LANG}, forcée à~0 par \xfile{minitoc.lan} ou à~1 par
+%     \xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} (c'est-à-dire par \com{jobname}\suffix{.dtx}). \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} est produit lors de la
+%     compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}Ce fichier contient un style pour mettre en forme l'index dans la documentation en
+%     français. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} Ce fichier est utilisé pour forcer la langue française dans la documentation.
+%     Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}] La documentation en français, en format PDF.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc-fr.ps}] La documentation en français, en format PostScript. N'est plus distribuée (mais
+%     regardez le script \scrp{cmk}).
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bib}] Une base de données bibliographiques pour la documentation en anglais du paquetage
+%     \upack{minitoc}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.bug}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) contenant une liste de problèmes et
+%     de questions concernant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir le chapitre~\vref{FAQ}.
+% \item[\dcnt{minitocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur des minitocs.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.dtx}] Le fichier contenant la documentation et le code commenté du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \item[\upack{minitoc-hyper}]\ipack{minitoc-hyper} Une version spéciale~\cite{minitoc-hyper} du paquetage \upack{minitoc}
+%      préparée par \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne},
+%      \xname{Didier}{Verna} et \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts} pour fonctionner avec le puissant paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web};
+%      \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} a intégré leur travail et donc depuis la version \#31, \upack{minitoc} est compatible avec
+%      \pack{hyperref}.
+%      \emph{Donc le paquetage\Virage{} \pack{minitoc-hyper} est désormais obsolète et ne devrait plus être
+%      utilisé. Il est encore présent sur les archives CTAN pour la compatibilité avec des anciens documents.}
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ins}] Le fichier d'installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Compiler ce fichier avec
+%     \LaTeX\ produit la plupart des fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ist}] \isuffix{.ist}Ce fichier contient un style pour mettre en forme l'index dans la documentation en
+%     anglais. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.l}] Un fichier texte contenant la liste de tous les fichiers inclus dans le paquetage
+%     \upack{minitoc}. Les fichiers non listés dans \xfile{minitoc.l} sont des fichiers utilisés seulement pour
+%     installer le paquetage ou produire sa documentation.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.lan}]\isuffix{.lan} Ce fichier est utilisé pour forcer la langue anglaise dans la documentation.
+%     Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pdf}] La documentation en anglais, en format PDF.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.pre}]\isuffix{.pre} Ce fichier contient un préambule \LaTeX{} pour la documentation.
+%     Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.ps}] La documentation en anglais, en format PostScript. N'est plus distribuée (mais
+%     regarde les script \scrp{cmk}).
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sty}] Ce fichier contient la partie principale du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, avec ses
+%     commentaires retirés.
+%     Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.sum}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) contenant une liste commentée des commandes
+%     et environnements minitoc. Voir le chapitre~\vref{c+memento}.
+% \item[\xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}] Une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS et
+%     contenant tous les fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \item[\upack{minutes}] Le paquetage \pack{minutes}~\cite{minutes} (de \name{Knut}{Lickert}) est utilisé
+%     pour préparer des comptes-rendus de conférences. Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} permet d'ajouter
+%     des «~pauses-café~» dans la table des matières grâce à~des commandes telles que \com{addcoffeeline} et
+%     \com{coffeeline} (et des commandes internes) dont les noms contiennent la chaîne «~\texttt{coffee}~»,
+%     d'où la note de bas de page sur «~cappuccino~»{\myCoffeecup} dans le chapitre sur l'installation!%
+%     \IfFileExists{marvosym.sty}{\footnote{Les petites tasses \myCoffeecup{} proviennent du paquetage \pack{marvosym}~\cite{marvosym}.}}{}
+% \item[\upack{Mon\TeX}] \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} est un important paquetage utilisé
+%     pour préparer des documents
+%     dans divers dialectes de la langue mongole (Bicig et Bicig2, Mongol, Bithe et Manju, Buryat, Xalx et Khalkha) et dans
+%     un dialecte du russe utilisé en Mongolie (Russianc). Bicig est un autre nom pour le Ouïghour.
+%     Vous pourrez trouver beaucoup d'informations sur la langue mongole et la Mongolie sur le site web~\cite{mongol-web}.
+% Voir aussi:
+% {\small\froff\begin{quote}
+% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_writing_systems}\\
+% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_language}\\
+% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mongolian_script}\\
+% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Clear_script}\\
+% \url{http://www.indiana.edu/~mongsoc/mong/language.htm}\\
+% \mbox{\url{http://www.viahistoria.com/SilverHorde/main.html?research/MongolScripts.html}}\\
+% \url{http://www.krysstal.com/writing_evolution.html}\\
+% \url{http://mongolxel.webz.cz/qaguchin/index.htm}
+% \end{quote}}
+%     La description suivante a été extraite de~\cite{montex} et traduite:
+%
+%     \reversemarginpar
+%     \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} est un paquetage qui fournit le support pour écrire des documents en mongol
+%     (\emph{mongolian}), mandchou (\emph{manju}), bouriate (\emph{buryat}) et russe.
+%
+%     \lneed{3}
+%     Le mongol peut être représenté en écriture ouïghure (\emph{uighur})
+%     traditionnelle
+%     (appelée aussi écriture classique ou traditionnelle) et en écriture cyrillique. Le mandchou
+%     (\emph{manju}) ressemble à~l'écriture mongole traditionnelle (dont elle dérive) mais utilise un grand choix de
+%     signes diacritiques afin d'éliminer de nombreuses ambiguïtés de son ancêtre l'écriture mongole. Le bouriate
+%     (\emph{buryat}) moderne, comme le mongol dans sa forme actuelle,
+%     est écrit avec un alphabet cyrillique,%
+%     mais tant le mongol (35~lettres) que le bouriate (36~lettres) utilisent davantage de lettres
+%     que le russe (33~lettres).
+%
+%     \normalmarginpar
+%      \begin{description}
+%      \item[Mongol]
+%      Le terme \emph{mongol} (\emph{mongolian} en anglais) recouvre en fait plusieurs langues et n'est pas le nom précis
+%      d'une seule langue. Les choses se compliquent encore lorsque des noms de groupes ethniques, de langues et de
+%      systèmes d'écriture sont mélangés.
+%              \begin{description}
+%              \item [Xalx] ou Khalkha est le nom de la nationalité mongole résidant en Mongolie proprement dite.
+%                      Leur dialecte forme la base du mongol écrit avec des lettres cyrilliques.
+%                      Dans le présent texte, \emph{mongol moderne} est utilisé comme synonyme.
+%              \item [Bouriate] (\emph{buryat}) est le nom de la nationalité mongole résidant en Bouriatie
+%                      (\emph{Buryatia}), au nord de la Mongolie, à~l'est du Lac Baïkal, et faisant partie de la
+%                      Fédération Russe. Les Bouriates se nomment eux-mêmes \emph{Buryaad} tandis que les Mongols Xlax
+%                      s'appellent \emph{Buriad}. Le nom anglais suit l'orthographe russe (tandis que le nom français
+%                      est pris phonétiquement).
+%                      Du point de vue linguistique, le mongol xalx et le mongol bouriate sont des langues assez proches;
+%                      le bouriate a un système de sons légèrement différent dans lequel le phonème~\verb|/s/| est
+%                      partiellement décalé vers~\verb|/h/|; l'alphabet moderne bouriate cyrillique (virtuellement
+%                      identique à~l'alphabet cyrillique utilisé pour écrire le mongol moderne) a une lettre
+%                      additionnelle (H/h, \verb|\xalx{H/h}|) pour marquer la différence avec \verb|/s/|.
+%              \item [Bicig] (littéralement \emph{écriture} en mongol) désigne le texte écrit avec l'écriture mongole
+%                      traditionnelle, qui est aussi dénommée Ouïghour (\emph{Uighur}). Ici, le texme \emph{bicig} sera
+%                      utilisé sur un pied d'égalité avec le mongol \emph{classique} et \emph{traditionnel}. Ce dernier
+%                      terme est utilisé dans les noms du plan de caractères U1800 de Unicode/ISO10646, qui contient le
+%                      mongol (\emph{mongolian}), le mandchou (\emph{manju}), le Sibe et des ensembles de caractères
+%                      spéciaux appelés Ali Gali ou Galig. Afin d'identifier les commandes concernant l'écriture mongole
+%                      distinctes pour le mongol et le mandchou, les commandes mongoles (\emph{mongolian}) ont un nom
+%                      avec le radical \lopt{bicig} tandis que les commandes manchoues (\emph{manju}) ont un nom
+%                      avec le radical \lopt{bithe}.
+%      \end{description}
+%
+%      Le Mongol Xalx, ou Mongol Moderne Courant (\emph{Modern Colloquial Mongolian}), est à~peu près aussi différent de
+%      la forme en écriture classique que l'anglais moderne est différent en orthographe phonétique (en supposant qu'il
+%      soit écrit en lettres Shaviennes) de l'orthographe hautement historique de l'Anglais Standard.
+%      Au-delà de ces différences. le mongol écrit en écriture classique conserve habituellement une quantité
+%      substantielle des aspects grammaticaux historiques qui le font ressembler un peu à~l'anglais élizabéthain.
+%
+%      \item[Manchou] Le mandchou (\emph{mandju}) est une langue du groupe toungouze (\emph{tungusic}) étroitement
+%      liée au mongol. Bien que le
+%      mandchou ne soit virtuellement plus parlé, il a été la langue officielle pendant 300~ans de gouvernement mandchou
+%      sur la Chine de la dynastie Qing. De grandes quantités de documents officiels ont survécu, ainsi que certains
+%      des meilleurs dictionnaires multilingues jamais réalisés, par exemple le Pentaglote, ou Miroir des Cinq Langues, un
+%      dictionnaire avec 18671 entrées en cinq langues (mandchou, tibétain, mongol, ouïghour et chinois).
+%      Voir~\cite{pentaglot} pour plus de détails. L'écriture mandchoue est dérivée du mongol ouïghour par l'ajout
+%      de signes diacritiques sous la forme de points et de cercles (\emph{tongki fuka sindaha hergen}, écriture
+%      avec points et cercles).
+%      \end{description}
+% \item[MS-DOS] (\emph{Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered} Disk Operating System}) Un ancien système
+%      d'exploitation pour ordinateurs personnels (PCs). Du point de vue de \upack{minitoc}, son principal
+%      inconvénient est l'utilisation de noms de fichiers avec des suffixes courts (le schéma «~8+3~»), qui limite à~99
+%      le nombre de mini-tables dans chaque sorte.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-2c.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2c.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une mise
+%      en page sur deux colonnes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-2c.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-2nd.tex}]\iexam{mtc-2nd.tex} Un exemple de document utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et son option de
+%     langue \lopt{french2}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-3co.tex}]\iexam{mtc-3co.tex} Un exemple de document utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour
+%      préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.bib}]\iexam{mtc-add.bib} Une petite base de données bibliographiques pour les exemples
+%      de documents \exam{mtc-add.tex} et \exam{mtc-ads.tex}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-add.tex}]\iexam{mtc-add.tex} Un exemple de document montrant comment utiliser \com{mtcaddchapter} et le
+%      paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} avec \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-add.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-ads.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ads.tex} Un exemple de document montrant comment utiliser \com{mtcaddsection} et le
+%      paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} avec \upack{minitoc}.
+%      Il montre aussi quel défi représente la gestion des mini-listes de flottants au niveau des sections.
+%      Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ads.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-amm.tex}]\iexam{mtc-amm.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation de l'environnement \env{appendices}
+%     dans un document de classe \class{memoir} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-amm.tex}.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-apx.tex}]\iexam{mtc-apx.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant comment utiliser l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}
+%     pour masquer les entrées pour les appendices dans la table des matières principale et créer une table des
+%     matières au niveau partie pour les appendices. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-apx.tex}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-art.tex}]\iexam{mtc-art.tex} Un exemple de document (classe \class{article}) utilisant le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-art.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-bk.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bk.tex} Un exemple de document (classe \class{book} ou \class{report}) utilisant le
+%     paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-bk.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-bo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-bo.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une mise
+%     en page sur deux colonnes et utilisant le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-bo.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-ch0.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ch0.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document
+%     dont le premier chapitre est étoilé. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ch0.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-cri.tex}]\iexam{mtc-cri.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage minitoc avec des parties et des
+%     chapitres étoilés. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-cri.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-fko.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fko.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant le problème des fontes lors de
+%     l'utilisation de la classe \class{scrbook}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-fko.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo1.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec
+%     changement de quelques fontes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-fo1.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-fo2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-fo2.tex} Un autre exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec
+%     changement de quelques fontes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-fo2.tex}.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-gap.tex}]\iexam{mtc-gap.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation des commandes \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} et
+%     \com{mtcgapafterheads}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-gap.tex}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi1.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation des environnements
+%     spécialisés \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hi1.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-hi2.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hi2.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation des paires de commandes:
+%     \begin{itemize}
+%     \item \com{mtchideinmainlof} et \com{endmtchideinmainlof},
+%     \item \com{mtchideinmainlot} et \com{endmtchideinmainlot}.
+%     \end{itemize}
+%     Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hi2.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-hia.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hia.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour masquer les
+%     entrées pour certains tableaux dans la liste des tableaux principale d'un document de la classe \class{article}.
+%     Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hia.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-hir.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hir.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour masquer les
+%     entrées pour certains tableaux dans la liste des tableaux principale d'un document de la classe \class{report}.
+%      Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hir.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-hop.tex}]\iexam{mtc-hop.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la classe de
+%     document \class{scrbook}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-hop.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-liv.tex}]\iexam{mtc-liv.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un
+%     livre avec une table des matières et des minitocs personnalisées. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-liv.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-mem.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mem.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la
+%     classe \class{memoir}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-mem.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-mm1.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mm1.tex} Un exemple de fichier montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la
+%     classe \class{memoir}, dans le cas où vous souhaiteriez changer quelques fontes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-mm1.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-mu.tex}]\iexam{mtc-mu.tex} Un document utilisant une minitoc composée, avec le paquetage \pack{wrapfig}~\cite{wrapfig},
+%     pour être placée dans un environnement \env{wrapfigure}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-mu.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-nom.tex}]\iexam{mtc-nom.tex} Un document montrant une interaction entre le paquetage \upack{minitoc}
+%      et le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-nom.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-ocf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ocf.tex} Un document utilisant les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close}
+%      pour préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-ofs.tex}]\iexam{mtc-ofs.tex} Un document utilisant les dispositifs \feat{open} et \feat{close}
+%      pour préparer une minitoc sur trois colonnes et \com{mtcsetoffset} pour décaler la minitoc afin de
+%      l'aligner sur la gauche. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-ofs.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-sbf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-sbf.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le
+%      paquetage \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-sbf.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-scr.tex}]\iexam{mtc-scr.tex} Un exemple de document montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec une
+%      classe {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, \class{scrreprt}.  Voir la
+%      section~\vref{mtc-scr.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-syn.tex}]\iexam{mtc-syn.tex} Un exemple de document montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} lorsque
+%      la table des matières est précédée de quelques chapitres étoilés. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-syn.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-tbi.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tbi.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec
+%      le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tbi.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlc.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlc.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} dans un document
+%      de la classe \class{article}. C'est l'exemple de~\cite[page~58]{TLC2}, modernisé. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tlc.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-tlo.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tlo.tex} Un fichier d'exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le
+%      paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft} et leur interaction pour les numéros de pages dans les mini-tables.
+%      Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tlo.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-tsf.tex}]\iexam{mtc-tsf.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec le
+%      paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}. Voir la section~\vref{mtc-tsf.tex}.
+% \item[\uexam{mtc-vti.tex}]\iexam{mtc-vti.tex} Un fichier exemple montrant l'utilisation de la commande \com{mtcpolymtoc}
+%      et expliquant les \index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe}«~entrées polymorphes~».
+%      Voir la section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\upack{mtcmess}]\ipack{mtcmess} Un paquetage qui est utilisé pour fournir des variantes des commandes
+%     standard \com{PackageInfo}, \com{PackageWarning}, \com{PackageWarningNoLine} et \com{PackageError}
+%     en leur ajoutant un argument optionnel pour un identificateur unique de message.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\upack{mtcoff}]\ipack{mtcoff} Un paquetage qui est utilisé à~la place du paquetage \upack{minitoc}
+%     pour ignorer toutes les commandes et tous les environnements du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. En fait, il les
+%     définit pour qu'elles/ils ne fassent rien. Utile si vous désirez une version de votre document sans aucune
+%     mini-table.
+% \item[\upack{mtcpatchmem}]\ipack{mtcpatchmem} Un\SMMZ{\lmess{M0001}} petit paquetage qui est chargé automatiquement si
+%     nécessaire lorsque vous utilisez la classe de document \class{memoir} dans une version \emph{incompatible}
+%     avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, mais corrigible. Il est produit lors de la compilation de \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% \item[\texttt{mu}] Une unité de longueur utilisée normalement en mode mathématique (\texttt{mu} signifie
+%     «~\emph{math unit}~»); 18~unités mathématiques font \texttt{1em} (un cadratin), qui est à~peu près la
+%     largeur d'un~«~m~» dans la fonte courante. Donc la taille de \texttt{1mu} dépend de la fonte.
+%     La séparation entre les points des lignes de pointillés dans les mini-tables est exprimée en unités
+%     mathématiques.
+% \item[\upack{multibib}] Le paquetage \pack{multibib}~\cite{multibib} permet de créer des références
+%     à~plusieurs bibliographies à~l'intérieur d'un même document. Il fournit donc une fonctionnalité
+%     complémentaire à~des paquetages tels que \pack{bibunits}~\cite{bibunits} ou \pack{chapterbib}~\cite{chapterbib},
+%     qui permettent de créer une seule bibliographie pour plusieurs, mais différentes, parties du document.
+% \item[\upack{multicol}] Le paquetage \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol} définit l'environnement \env{multicols}
+%     (avec un~<<~\textbf{s}~>>) pour composer du texte sur plusieurs colonnes. Utilisé dans certains exemples de documents.
+% \item[\upack{multitoc}] Ce paquetage~\cite{multitoc} permet de composer seulement la table des matières, la
+%     liste des figures et/ou la liste des tableaux sur deux colonnes ou plus (en utilisant le paquetage
+%     pquetage \pack{multicol}~\cite{multicol}, bien sûr).
+%     Le nombre de colonnes peut être configuré par des commandes; les tables multi-colonnes peuvent être choisies
+%     par des options du paquetage.
+%     L'exemple de document \exam{mtc-3co.tex} utilise ce paquetage; voir la section~\vref{mtc-3co.tex}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{N}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{N}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\pack{natbib}] C'est un paquetage \LaTeXe{} (mais avec un certain support pour \LaTeX2.09)~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes}
+%     qui agit comme interface généralisée pour des fichiers de styles bibliographiques standard et non-standard (\BibTeX).
+% \item[\upack{needspace}] Le paquetage \pack{needspace}~\cite{needspace} fournit des commandes pour réserver
+%     de l'espace en bas d'une page. S'il n'y a pas assez d'espace sur la page (colonne) courante, une nouvelle
+%     page (colonne) est commencée.
+% \item[NFSS] Le «~Nouveau Schéma de Sélection de Fonte~» (\emph{New Font Selection Scheme}).
+%     Le système de sélection des fontes~\cite{fontsel} \LaTeXe{}
+%     a été publié pour la première fois sous le nom de «~\emph{New Font Selection Scheme}~» (NFSS) en 1989, puis
+%     dans une seconde version en 1993. \LaTeXe{} inclut NFSS version~2 de manière standard.
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+%     Dans \LaTeX, chaque fonte (police) textuelle a cinq \emph{attributs}:
+%     \begin{description}
+%     \item[codage\,\footnotemark]\footnotetext{Et non \og{} encodage~\fg, qui est un anglicisme.} (\emph{encoding})
+%        Un codage spécifie
+%        l'ordre selon lequel les caractères apparaissent dans la fonte. Les deux codages les plus courants
+%        utilisés dans \LaTeX{} sont le codage «~texte \TeX~» de \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} (OT1) et
+%        le codage «~texte \TeX{} étendu~» (T1) développé par les membres du \emph{\TeX{} Users Group} pendant une
+%        conférence sur \TeX{} à~Cork en~1990 (d'où son nom informel de «~codage de Cork~»). Voir~\cite{encguide,enc-inter}.
+%     \item[famille] (\emph{family}) Le nom d'une collection de fontes, habituellement groupées sous un nom commun
+%        par le fondeur de ces fontes. Par exemple, «~Adobe Times~», «~ITC Garamond~» et «~Computer Modern Roman~»
+%        de \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} sont toutes des familles de fontes.
+%     \item[graisse] (\emph{series}) Elle détermine comment une fonte est épaisse (\emph{heavy}) ou
+%        étirée (\emph{extended}). Par exemple, «~medium weight~», «~narrow~» et «~bold extended~» sont toutes des graisses.
+%     \item[forme] (\emph{shape}) La forme des lettres à~l'intérieur d'une famille de fontes. Par exemple,
+%        «~italique~» (\emph{italic}), «~oblique~» et  «~droit~» (\emph{upright}) (parfois appelé
+%        «~romain~» (\emph{roman})) sont toutes des formes de fontes.
+%     \item[taille] (\emph{size}) La taille de conception (\emph{design size}) de la fonte, par exemple «~10pt~».
+%     \end{description}
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+%     Dans \LaTeX, les valeurs possibles pour ces attributs ont reçu des acronymes courts. Les valeurs les plus
+%     courantes pour le codage d'une fonte sont données dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+1}.
+%     \begin{table}[!p]
+% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
+%     \changeskips
+%     \caption{Codages de fontes les plus courants}\label{t+nfss+1}
+%     \centering
+%        \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+%        \toprule
+%           \textbf{Codage}&\textbf{Description}\\
+%        \midrule
+%           \texttt{T1}    & texte \TeX{} étendu («~codage de Cork~») \\
+%           \texttt{TS1}   & codages des symboles pour \LaTeX{} (latin)\\
+%           \texttt{T2A}, \texttt{T2B}, \texttt{T2C} & texte \LaTeX{} (cyrillique)\\
+%           \texttt{T3}    & alphabet phonétique pour \LaTeX{}\\
+%           \texttt{TS3}   & alphabet phonétique pour \LaTeX{}, symboles supplémentaires\\
+%           \texttt{T4}    & texte \LaTeX{} (langues africaines)\\
+%           \texttt{T5}    & texte \LaTeX{} (vietnamien)\\
+%           \texttt{T7}    & texte \LaTeX{} (réservé pour le grec)\\
+%           \texttt{OT1}   & texte \TeX{} (comme défini par \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\
+%           \texttt{OT2}   & texte \TeX{} pour les langues en cyrillique (obsolète)\\
+%           \texttt{OT3}   & Alphabet phonétique international (obsolète)\\
+%           \texttt{OT4}   & Texte \TeX{} avec extensions pour la langue polonaise\\
+%           \texttt{OT6}   & Texte \TeX{} avec extensions pour la langue arménienne\\
+%           \texttt{OML}   & italique mathématique \TeX\ (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\
+%           \texttt{OMS}   & symboles mathématiques \TeX\ (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\
+%           \texttt{OMX}   & grands symboles mathématiques \TeX\ (\name{Donald~E.}{Knuth})\\
+%           \texttt{X2}    & texte \LaTeX{} étendu (cyrillique)\\
+%           \texttt{U}     & inconnu \\
+%           \texttt{L}\meta{xx} & un codage local\\
+%           \texttt{L7x}   & codage utilisé pour la langue lithuanienne\\
+%           \texttt{LTH}   & codage utilisé pour la langue thaïe\\
+%           \texttt{LV1}   & codage utilisé par quelques fontes de \texttt{VTeX}\\
+%           \texttt{LY1}   & alternative au \texttt{T1}, pour les logiciels Y\&Y\\
+%           \texttt{PD1}   & réalise le codage PDFDocEncoding pour une utilisation avec NFSS de \LaTeXe.\\
+%           \texttt{PU}    & réalise le codage Unicode pour une utilisation avec NFSS de \LaTeXe.\\
+%        \bottomrule
+%        \end{tabularx}
+% ^^A     \end{table}
+%         \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
+% ^^A     \begin{table}[!p]
+% ^^A     \changeskips
+%     \centering
+%     \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}}
+%     \begin{minipage}[t]{.50\textwidth}
+% ^^A     \changeskips
+%     \capstart
+%        \caption{Familles de fontes les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+2}
+%     \centering
+%        \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}}
+%        \toprule
+%           \textbf{Famille}&\textbf{Description}\\
+%        \midrule
+%           \texttt{cmr}  & Computer Modern Roman \\
+%           \texttt{cmss} & Computer Modern Sans \\
+%           \texttt{cmtt} & Computer Modern Typewriter \\
+%           \texttt{cmm}  & Computer Modern Math Italic \\
+%           \texttt{cmsy} & Computer Modern Math Symbols \\
+%           \texttt{cmex} & Computer Modern Math Extensions \\
+%           \texttt{ptm}  & Adobe Times \\
+%           \texttt{phv}  & Adobe Helvetica \\
+%           \texttt{pcr}  & Adobe Courier\\
+%           \texttt{lazy} & Symboles \LaTeX{} additionnels\\
+%        \bottomrule
+%        \end{tabular}%
+%     \end{minipage}%
+%     &&%
+%     \begin{minipage}[t]{.45\textwidth}
+% ^^A     \changeskips
+%     \capstart
+%        \caption{Graisses les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+3}
+%        \centering
+%        \leavevmode\null\hfill\begin{tabular}[t]{@{}ll@{}}
+%        \toprule
+%           \textbf{Graisse}&\textbf{Description}\\
+%        \midrule
+%           \texttt{ul}&Ultra fin\\
+%           \texttt{el}&Extra fin\\
+%           \texttt{l}&Fin\\
+%           \texttt{sl}&Semi fin\\
+%           \texttt{m}    & Moyen (\emph{medium})\\
+%           \texttt{sb}   & Demi-gras (\emph{semi-bold}) \\
+%           \texttt{b} &Bold  \\
+%           \texttt{eb} &Extra gras  \\
+%           \texttt{bx}   & Gras étendu (\emph{bold extended})\\
+%           \texttt{ub}&Ultra gras \\
+%           \texttt{c}    & Condensé (\emph{condensed})\\
+%        \bottomrule
+%        \end{tabular}\hfill\null
+%     \end{minipage}
+%     \end{tabularx}
+% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
+%     \end{table}
+%     \newlength{\ww}
+%     \begin{table}[!tp]
+%     \centering
+%     \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}l@{}Z{1}@{}r@{}}
+%     \setlength{\ww}{.64\textwidth}
+%     \addtolength{\ww}{-1.5em}
+%     \begin{minipage}[t]{\ww}
+%        \changeskips
+%        \capstart
+%        \caption{Formes de fontes les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+4}
+%        {\begin{tabularx}{\ww}{@{}lZ{1}@{}}
+%        \toprule
+%           \textbf{Forme}&\textbf{Description}\\
+%        \midrule
+%           \texttt{n}    & Normale (c'est-à-dire «~droite~» (\emph{upright}) ou «~romaine~» (\emph{roman})) \\
+%           \texttt{it}   & Italique \\
+%           \texttt{sl}   & Penchée (\emph{slanted}) (ou «~oblique~») \\
+%           \texttt{sc}   & Capitales et petites capitales (\emph{caps and small caps})\\
+%           \texttt{u}    & Italique redressée (\emph{upright italic}) \\
+%        \bottomrule
+%        \end{tabularx}}
+%     \end{minipage}%
+%     &&%
+%     \begin{minipage}[t]{.35\textwidth}
+%        \changeskips
+%        \capstart
+%        \caption{Largeurs de fontes les plus courantes}\label{t+nfss+4a}
+%        \begin{tabular}[t]{@{}lcl@{}}
+%        \toprule
+%           \textbf{Largeur}&\textbf{\%}&\textbf{Description}\\
+%        \midrule
+%           \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra condensé\\
+%           \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra condensé\\
+%           \texttt{c}&50.0&Condensé\\
+%           \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi condensé\\
+%           \texttt{m}&50.0&Normal\\
+%           \texttt{sc}&50.0&Semi étendu\\
+%           \texttt{c}&50.0&Étendu\\
+%           \texttt{ec}&50.0&Extra étendu\\
+%           \texttt{uc}&50.0&Ultra étendu\\
+%        \bottomrule
+%        \end{tabular}
+%     \end{minipage}%
+%     \end{tabularx}
+%     \end{table}
+%     Les codages «~locaux~» sont destinés aux codages de fontes qui ne sont disponibles que localement, par
+%     exemple une fonte contenant le logo d'une organisation dans diverses tailles.
+%
+% \lneed{4}
+%     Il y a bien trop de familles de fontes pour les lister toutes, mais certaines familles courantes sont
+%     listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+2}.
+%     Les valeurs les plus courantes pour les graisses (\emph{series}) sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+3}.
+%     Les valeurs les plus courantes pour la forme de fonte sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+4}.
+%     Les valeurs les plus courantes pour la largeur de fonte sont listées dans le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+4a}.
+%
+%     La taille de fonte est spécifiée comme une dimension, par exemple \texttt{10pt} ou
+%     \texttt{1.5in} ou \texttt{3mm}; si aucune unité n'est spécifiée, \texttt{pt} est pris par défaut. Ces cinq
+%     paramètres spécifient chaque fonte \LaTeX{}, voir le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+5}, par exemple.
+%     \begin{table}[!tp]
+%     \changeskips
+%     \capstart
+%     \caption{Les cinq paramètres de fontes de quelques fontes}\label{t+nfss+5}
+%     \centering
+% ^^A        \begin{tabular}{@{}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}l@{\,}ll@{}l@{}}
+%         \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}lllllZ{1}l@{}}
+%        \toprule
+%           \multicolumn{5}{@{}l}{\textbf{Spécification \LaTeX}} &
+%           \textbf{Fonte} &
+%           \textbf{Nom \TeX{}} \\
+%        \midrule
+%           \texttt{OT1} & \texttt{cmr} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{n} & \texttt{10} &
+%           Computer Modern Roman 10 point &
+%           \texttt{cmr10} \\
+%           \texttt{OT1} & \texttt{cmss} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{sl} & \texttt{1pc} &
+%           Computer Modern Sans Oblique 1 pica &
+%           \texttt{cmssi12} \\
+%           \texttt{OML} & \texttt{cmm} & \texttt{m} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{10pt} &
+%           Computer Modern Math Italic 10 point &
+%           \texttt{cmmi10} \\
+%           \texttt{T1} & \texttt{ptm} & \texttt{b} & \texttt{it} & \texttt{1in} &
+%           Adobe Times Bold Italic 1 inch &
+%           \texttt{ptmb8t at 1in}\\
+%        \bottomrule
+%        \end{tabularx}
+%     \end{table}
+%     \begin{table}[!tp]
+%     \changeskips
+%     \caption{Commandes de l'utilisateur pour les fontes}\label{t+nfss+6}
+%     \centering
+%        \begin{tabular}{@{}lll@{}}
+%        \toprule
+%           \textbf{Commande utilisateur} &
+%           \textbf{Attribut} &
+%           \textbf{Valeur dans la classe} \class{article} \\
+%        \midrule
+%           \com{textrm}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{rmfamily}    & famille & \texttt{cmr} \\
+%           \com{textsf}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{sffamily}    & famille & \texttt{cmss} \\
+%           \com{texttt}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{ttfamily}    & famille & \texttt{cmtt} \\
+%           \com{textmd}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{mdseries}    & graisse & \texttt{m} \\
+%           \com{textbf}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{bfseries}    & graisse & \texttt{bx} \\
+%           \com{textup}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{upshape}     & forme  & \texttt{n} \\
+%           \com{textit}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{itshape}     & forme  & \texttt{it} \\
+%           \com{textsl}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{slshape}     & forme  & \texttt{sl} \\
+%           \com{textsc}\texttt{\ldots} ou \com{scshape}     & forme  & \texttt{sc} \\
+%           \com{tiny}         & taille   & \texttt{5pt} \\
+%           \com{scriptsize}   & taille   & \texttt{7pt} \\
+%           \com{footnotesize} & taille   & \texttt{8pt} \\
+%           \com{small}        & taille   & \texttt{9pt} \\
+%           \com{normalsize}   & taille   & \texttt{10pt} \\
+%           \com{large}        & taille   & \texttt{12pt} \\
+%           \com{Large}        & taille   & \texttt{14.4pt} \\
+%           \com{LARGE}        & taille   & \texttt{17.28pt} \\
+%           \com{huge}         & taille   & \texttt{20.74pt} \\
+%           \com{Huge}         & taille   & \texttt{24.88pt}\\
+%           \com{textnormal}   & normal & \textnormal{texte normal}\\
+%        \bottomrule
+%        \end{tabular}
+%     \end{table}
+%
+%     Ces cinq paramètres sont affichés chaque fois que \LaTeX{} donne un avertissement de débordement de boîte,
+%     par exemple:
+%     \begin{verse}
+%        \texttt{Overfull \bs hbox (3.80855pt too wide) in paragraph at lines 314-{}-318}\\
+%        \texttt{[]\bs OT1/cmr/m/n/10 Normally [] and [] will be iden-ti-cal,}
+%     \end{verse}
+%     \lneed{6}
+%     Le tableau~\vref{t+nfss+6} liste les commandes de fontes que l'utilisateur peut invoquer pour établir ces
+%     cinq attributs\,\footnote{Les valeurs utilisées par ces commandes sont déterminées par la classe du document.}.
+%
+% \item[\uopt{nocheckfiles}]\iopt{nocheckfiles} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le contraire de l'option de
+%     paquetage \optd{checkfiles} (voir plus haut).
+% \item[\uopt{nohints}]\iopt{nohints} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Le contraire de l'option de
+%     paquetage \optd{hints} (voir plus haut).
+% \item[\uopt{nolistfiles}]\iopt{nolistfiles} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. C'est l'opposée de
+%     \optd{listfiles} ci-dessus. Voir la section~\vref{s+listfiles}.
+% \item[\uopt{notoccite}]\iopt{notoccite} Cette option du paquetage \upack{minitoc} charge le paquetage
+%     \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite} (de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}). Elle évite des problèmes avec des
+%     commandes \com{cite} dans des commandes de sectionnement ou dans des captions (légendes).
+%     Voir la section~\vref{ss+notoccite}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{O}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{O}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[Omega] Le système de typographie\,\footnote{L'essentiel (mais pas la totalité) de cette note provient de
+%     la documentation d'Omega \cite{yannis1994b,yannis1994a,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998}.
+%     Voir~\url{http://omega.enstb.org/} pour plus d'informations.}
+%     Omega ($\mathbf{\Omega}$) (de \xname{Yannis}{Haralambous} et \xname{John}{Plaice}).
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% Omega est une extension de \TeX{} conçue surtout afin d'améliorer les capacités multilingues de TeX.
+%
+% Quand le programme \TeX{} a été développé au milieu des années [mille neuf cent] soixante-dix
+% par le professeur \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth},
+% il a surtout été conçu pour la mise en page de textes mathématiques en anglais. Depuis lors \TeX{} a fait de grandes
+% avancées dans des domaines scientifiques, littéraires et autres, dans tous
+% les pays du monde. En 1991, \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} a gelé \TeX{} avec pour objectif la
+% stabilité. Cependant, il permet que le code \TeX{} soit utilisé comme base
+% pour des développements futurs, à~condition que le système résultant
+% soit distribué sous un autre nom.
+%
+% En Omega, tous les caractères et les pointeurs dans les structures de
+% données sont de 32 bits plutôt que 8 bits, éliminant ainsi beaucoup de
+% limitations triviales de \TeX. Omega permet aussi l'utilisation de
+% multiples jeux de caractères en entrée et en sortie, et utilise des
+% filtres programmables afin de traduire d'un jeu de caractères à~un
+% autre, afin de faire de l'analyse contextuelle, etc. En interne, Omega
+% utilise le jeu de caractères Unicode/ISO-10646. Omega soutient aussi
+% l'utilisation de multiples directions d'écriture.
+%
+% Ces améliorations non seulement facilitent la tâche des utilisateurs de \TeX{}
+% pour gérer des langues multiples et complexes telles que l'arabe, les
+% langues indiennes, le khmer, le chinois, le japonais ou le coréen, dans
+% un seul document, mais aussi forment la base de développements futurs
+% dans d'autres domaines, tels le soutien de la couleur et de l'hypertexte.
+%
+% Le format (au sens \TeX\ du terme) \LaTeX{} adapté aux capacités spéciales d'Omega est
+% appelé «~\emph{Lambda}~»~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$).
+% L'ajout à~Omega des extensions de \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex} est un projet
+% distinct, connu sous le nom de «~\pack{Aleph}~» ($\aleph$)~\cite{aleph,aleph-hagen} et conduit par \xname{Giuseppe}{Bilotta}.
+% La version de \LaTeX\ pour \pack{Aleph} est connue sous le nom de
+% «~\emph{Lamed}~»~(\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[height=10pt,keepaspectratio]{lamed3.png}}\/).
+% Il~y~a un système expérimental, nommé \packa{\textsc{Lua}\TeX}{LuaTeX}~\cite{luatex,luatex2007}, qui regroupera
+% \textsc{pdf}\TeX, \pack{Aleph}, \packa{\eTeX}{etex} et d'autres développements.
+% Une voie prometteuse est \packa{\protect\XeTeX}{xetex}~\cite{xetex} par~\name{Jonathan}{Kew}, avec
+% \packa{\protect\XeLaTeX}{xelatex}.
+% \begin{table}[tp!]
+% ^^A \changeskips
+% \caption{Quelques systèmes dérivés de \TeX{} et \LaTeX}\label{t+tex-latex}
+% \centering
+% \[ \begin{array}{ccccccc}
+% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Omega}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mathbf{\Lambda}\\
+% &&+&&&&+\\
+% \mbox{\TeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eTeX}&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\eLaTeX}\\
+% &&&&&&\\
+% \cline{3-3}\cline{5-5}\cline{7-7}
+% &&&&&&\\
+% &&\aleph&+&\mbox{\LaTeX}&\longrightarrow&\mbox{\raisebox{-1pt}[0pt][0pt]{\ixgrf{lamed3.png}\includegraphics[keepaspectratio,height=10pt]{lamed3.png}}}
+% \end{array} \]
+% \end{table}
+% \item[\feat{open}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté immédiatement
+%     avant (ouverture, \emph{open}) l'insertion du fichier auxiliaire pour un type donné de mini-table.
+%     Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
+%     Voir le fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}, dans la section~\vref{mtc-ocf.tex}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{P}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{P}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\feat{pagestyle}] Un type de \emph{dispositif} (voir ce terme) qui est exécuté lors de chaque occurrence d'un
+%     type donné de mini-table, pour forcer le style de page à~utiliser pour la page courante.
+%     Regardez la documentation de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, dans la section~\vref{t+parttoc+features}.
+% \item[paquetage] (\emph{package})
+% Les paquetages\,\footnote{Ces informations ont été extraites de~\cite[page~12--13]{kopka} puis adaptées et
+% traduites.}\textsuperscript{,}\footnote{Notez que j'utilise le terme <<~paquetage~>> pour traduire
+% le terme anglais \emph{package}. D'autres
+% préféreront <<~extension~>> (qui signifie <<~suffixe~>> en anglais), <<~package~>> (anglicisme), ou <<~module~>>;
+% c'est une question de goût et d'habitude, sans plus.} sont un dispositif très important de \LaTeX. Ce sont des
+% extensions aux commandes de base de \LaTeX{} qui sont écrites dans des fichiers dont les noms se terminent par
+% \suffix{.sty} et qui sont chargés via la commande \com{usepackage} dans le préambule du document. Les paquetages
+% peuvent être classés selon leur origine:
+% \begin{itemize}
+%       \item les paquetages \textbf{centraux} (\emph{core}) (en fait, les paquetages \textbf{basiques} et \textbf{requis})
+%             sont une partie fondamentale de l'installation de base de \LaTeX{} et sont donc complètement standard;
+%       \item les paquetages \textbf{outils} (\emph{tools}) forment un ensemble écrit par les membres de l'équipe
+%             \LaTeX3 et devraient toujours être présents dans l'installation;
+%       \item les paquetages \textbf{graphiques} (\emph{graphics}) sont un ensemble standardisé pour l'inclusion de
+%             dessins produits par d'autres programmes et pour la gestion des couleurs; ils sont au même niveau que
+%             les paquetages outils;
+%       \item les paquetages \textbf{\AmS-\LaTeX}, publiés par
+%             l'\emph{American Mathematical Society}\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.ams.org}}\fron, devraient
+%             être présents dans toute installation\,\footnote{Ils sont indispensables si vous utilisez beaucoup
+%             de mathématiques.};
+%       \item les paquetages des \textbf{contributions} (\emph{contributed}) ont été proposés par de vrais
+%             utilisateurs; certains de ces paquetages se sont révélés comme étant «~essentiels~» dans l'utilisation
+%             standard de \LaTeX, mais tous sont utiles.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \item[partlof] Une liste des figures pour une partie.
+% \item[\dcnt{partlofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des partlofs.
+% \item[partlot] Une liste des tableaux pour une partie.
+% \item[\dcnt{partlotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des partlots.
+% \item[parttoc] Une table des matières pour une partie.
+% \item[\dcnt{parttocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur des parttocs.
+% \item[PDF] \emph{Portable Document Format}~\cite{pdfspec}. Un descendant du langage PostScript d'Adobe,
+%     optimisé pour la navigation sur l'Internet. Il ajoute des dispositifs d'hypertexte, de substitution de fontes
+%     et de compression.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\upack{placeins}] Le paquetage
+%     \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins}\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0032}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}}
+%     permet de forcer les éléments flottants à~«~rester à~leur place~», en les empêchant de dériver au-delà d'une
+%     commande \com{FloatBarrier} vers une autre section. Pour l'utiliser,
+%     déclarez \com{usepackage}\texttt{\{placeins\}} dans le préambule et insérez des commandes
+%     \com{FloatBarrier} aux endroits que les éléments flottants ne devraient pas franchir, peut-être
+%     à~chaque \com{section}. L'option \opt{insection} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} le fait avec des
+%     options adéquates de \pack{placeins}, et charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter};
+%     voir la section~\vref{s+placing}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[\xfile{placeins.txt}] Un fichier en texte pur (anglais) contenant la documentation du paquetage
+%     \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins}.
+% \item[\upack{\PLaTeX}]\ipacka{\PLaTeX}{PLaTeX} Une\virage{} version de \LaTeX\ adaptée
+%     à~la langue polonaise (\lopt{polski}). A~été remplacée par le paquetage \pack{polski}. Voir~\cite{polski,platex-pl}.
+%     Mais le \emph{même} nom désignait aussi une version de \LaTeX\ adaptée à~la langue japonaise,
+%     \packa{\PLaTeXe}{PLaTeX2e}~\cite{platex-jp,kakuto}.
+% \item[\uscrp{pmk}]\iscrp{pmk}
+%      Un exemple de script \emph{shell} pour préparer le paquetage \upack{minitoc}
+%      et sa documentation; vous devriez l'adapter à~vos besoins.
+%      Voir le point~\vref{IN10}.
+% \item[points de conduite] (\emph{leaders}) Une séquence répétive de points (ou d'un autre petit caractère),
+%      espacés régulièrement, utilisée pour relier deux objets sur la même ligne (conduisant d'un titre à~un
+%      numéro de page dans une table des matières ou analogue).
+% \item[polymorphe (entrée)] Une entrée\index{entree polymorphe=entrée polymorphe} dans la table des matières, la
+%      liste des figures ou la liste des tableaux, qui change d'aspect selon l'endroit où elle apparaît (TdM
+%      principale, minitable, etc.); voir la section~\vref{ss+polym}.
+% \item[PostScript] Un langage de description de page, par Adobe. Il décrit l'apparence d'une page, y~compris
+%      d'éléments tels que texte, graphiques et images scannées, vers une imprimante ou un appareil de
+%      visualisation. Introduit par Adobe en 1985, il est devenu le langage de choix dans l'impression de haute
+%      qualité.
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \item[préambule] (\emph{preamble}) Dans le fichier principal d'un document \LaTeX{} source, la partie de ce
+%     fichier qui se trouve entre les commandes \com{documentclass}\texttt{[.{}.{}.]\{.{}.{}.\}} et
+%     \ienv{document}\ucom{begin}\texttt{\{document\}}. Dans le préambule, vous pouvez insérer des déclarations globales et le
+%     chargement de paquetages par des commandes \com{usepackage}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[préparation] Les commandes de préparation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} préparent les fichiers auxiliaires
+%     pour les mini-tables d'un type donné. Une commande de~\emph{préparation} doit avoir été invoqué
+%     préalablement (et une seule fois) à~toute commande d'insertion pour le type de mini-table. Les commandes
+%     de préparation sont (voir la table~\vref{t+SUC-PI}):
+%        \par\begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}}
+%        \com{doparttoc}, \com{dopartlof}, \com{dopartlot},&(niveau partie)\\
+%        \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof}, \com{dominilot},&(niveau chapitre)\\
+%        \com{dosecttoc}, \com{dosectlof}, \com{dosectlot},&(niveau section)\\
+%        \com{mtcprepare}&(tous niveaux)
+%        \end{tabular}
+% \item[\uclass{proc}]\iclass{proc} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX, pour préparer les comptes-rendus d'une conférence.
+%     Pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, elle est très semblable à~la classe de document \class{article}; voir
+%     plus haut.
+%     \begin{table}[tp]
+%     \changeskips
+%     \caption{Profondeurs pour les commandes de sectionnement}\label{t+j+depths}
+%     \centering
+%     \begin{tabular}{@{}lccc@{}}
+%     \toprule
+%     \textbf{Classe:}&\textbf{\class{book}}&\textbf{\class{report}}&\textbf{\class{article}}\\
+%     \midrule
+%     \dcnt{secnumdepth}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$3$\\
+%     \com{part}&$-1$&$-1$&$0$\\
+%     \com{chapter}&$\phantom{-}0$&$\phantom{-}0$&$\times$\\
+%     \com{section}&$\phantom{-}1$&$\phantom{-}1$&$1$\\
+%     \com{subsection}&$\phantom{-}2$&$\phantom{-}2$&$2$\\
+%     \com{subsubsection}&$\phantom{-}3$&$\phantom{-}3$&$3$\\
+%     \com{paragraph}&$\phantom{-}4$&$\phantom{-}4$&$4$\\
+%     \com{subparagraph}&$\phantom{-}5$&$\phantom{-}5$&$5$\\
+%     \bottomrule
+%     \end{tabular}
+%     \end{table}
+% \item[profondeur] Dans les classes de documents standard (et dans la plupart des classes) ayant des commandes se
+%     sectionnement, nous avons une notion de \textbf{profondeur} (\emph{depth}). La profondeur d'une commande de
+%     sectionnement détermine le niveau jusqu'auquel descend la numérotation dans son titre (selon la valeur du compteur
+%     \dcnt{secnumdepth}), et les entrées pour une commande de sectionnement données apparaissent dans la table
+%     des matières principale si la profondeur de cette commande de sectionnement est inférieure ou égale à~la
+%     valeur du compteur \dcnt{tocdepth}; consultez le tableau~\vref{t+j+depths} pour les profondeurs des commandes
+%     de sectionnement dans les principales classes de document.
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+%     Le mécanisme est analogue pour les parttocs, minitocs et secttocs, en utilisant les valeurs des compteurs
+%     \dcnt{parttocdepth}, \dcnt{minitocdepth} et \dcnt{secttocdepth}. Si vous utilisez des sous-figures ou
+%     des sous-tableaux, les mini-tables correspondantes utilisent des compteurs tels que
+%     \dcnt{partlofdepth}, \dcnt{partlotdepth}, \dcnt{minilofdepth}, \dcnt{minilotdepth}, \dcnt{sectlofdepth}
+%     et \dcnt{sectlotdepth}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \item[pseudo-chapitre]
+%     Ou chapitre étoilé. Un chapitre qui commence par une commande «~étoilée~» \com{chapter*}.
+%     Par défaut, il n'a pas
+%     d'entrée dans la table des matières. \com{chapter*} nécessite quelques précautions avec le paquetage
+%     \upack{minitoc}. Voir la section~\vref{s+starred.chap}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{Q}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Q}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\upack{quotchap}] Le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap}\imess{W0087} fournit des commandes pour ajouter des
+%     citations à~certaines en-têtes (chapitres) dans les classes standard de document \LaTeXe:
+%     \class{book} et \class{report}. Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}
+%     (voir le point~\vref{h.quotchap} et la section~\vref{faq.39}).
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{R}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{R}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[README] est un fichier en texte pur (anglais) décrivant sommairement le paquetage \upack{minitoc},
+%     plus quelques informations utiles.
+% \item[\uclass{report}]\iclass{report} Une classe standard de document \LaTeX~\cite{classes}. Elle a des commandes de sectionnement:
+%     \com{part}, \com{chapter} et \com{section} (et en dessous).
+%     Elle est compatible avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc} et vous pouvez faire des mini-tables aux niveaux partie
+%     et chapitre (mais pas au niveau section, pour éviter de trop nombreux fichiers auxiliaires).
+% \item[\uscrp{rmk}]\iscrp{rmk} Un exemple de script \emph{shell}, qui trie les fichiers
+%     du paquetage \upack{minitoc} en classes (un répertoire pour chaque classe).
+%     Il devrait être exécuté après les scripts
+%     \scrp{imk} (obligatoire) et \scrp{emk} et/ou
+%     \scrp{fmk}, dans cet ordre. Voir le point~\vref{IN10}.
+% \item[\upack{romannum}] Le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum}\imess{W0088} change les numéros (pour les commandes de
+%     sectionnement) engendrés par \LaTeX{} de chiffres arabes en chiffres romains. Ce paquetage utilise le
+%     paquetage \pack{stdclsdv}~\cite{stdclsdv}.
+%     Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.romannum} et la
+%     section~\vref{faq.40}).
+% \item[\pack{rotating}] Le paquetage \pack{rotating}~\cite{rotating} effectue toutes les sortes de rotations
+%     que vous pouvez souhaiter, y~compris celles de figures complètes.
+% \item[\pack{rotfloat}] Le paquetage pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}\imess{I0053} fournit des commandes pour définir de
+%     nouveaux flottants de divers styles
+%     of various styles (\texttt{plain}, \texttt{boxed}, \texttt{ruled}, et des styles non définis);
+%     le paquetage \pack{rotating}~\cite{rotating} fournit de nouveaux environnements (\env{sidewaysfigure}
+%     et \env{sidewaystable}) qui sont tournés de $90^\circ$ ou $270^\circ$.
+%     Mais qu'en est-t-il de nouveaux flottants tournés, par exemple un flottant avec filets et tourné?
+%     Ce paquetage rend ceci possible; il établit un pont entre les deux paquetages et étend aussi les commandes du
+%     paquetage \pack{float} pour définir des versions tournées des nouveaux flottants.
+% \item[rubber] \tool{rubber}~\cite{rubber} est un programme d'emballage (\emph{wrapper})
+%     pour \LaTeX\ et ses programmes associés. Son
+%     but est, étant donné un source \LaTeX\ à~traiter, de le compiler un nombre de fois suffisant pour résoudre
+%     toutes les références, en exécutant éventuellement des programmes satellites tels que \textbf{\BibTeX},
+%     \textbf{makeindex}, \textbf{Metapost}, etc., pour produire les fichiers de données adéquats. Il a des
+%     dispositifs pour effectuer certaines actions de nettoyage en post-traitement, comme de détruire les fichiers
+%     auxiliaires produits par \upack{minitoc}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{S}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{S}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\uclass{scrartcl}]\iclass{scrartcl} Voir {\KOMAScript} plus haut.
+% \item[\uclass{scrbook}]\iclass{scrbook} Voir {\KOMAScript} plus haut.
+% \item[\uclass{scrreprt}]\iclass{scrreprt} Voir {\KOMAScript} plus haut.
+% \item[sectionnement (commandes de)] Ce sont les commandes \LaTeX\ qui spécifies la structure logique de votre document.
+%     Les principales commandes de sectionnement sont \com{part}, \com{chapter}, \com{section},
+%     \com{subsection}, \com{subsubsection}, \com{paragraph} et \com{subparagraph}.
+%     Certaines classes standard de documents n'ont pas la commande \com{chapter} (ainsi les classes
+%     \class{article} et \class{proc}), certaines n'ont pas de commandes de sectionnement (ainsi la classe
+%     \class{letter}). Dans ce dernier cas, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est sans objet. Si certaines des
+%     commandes \com{part}, \com{chapter} ou \com{section} ne sont pas définies, les
+%     commandes de \upack{minitoc} pour le niveau associé ne sont pas disponibles. Si \com{chapter} est définie,
+%     les commandes de \upack{minitoc} au niveau section ne sont pas définies dans la version courante du
+%     paquetage \upack{minitoc} et les antérieures, mais si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie mais que
+%     \com{section} l'est, alors les commandes de \upack{minitoc} au niveau section sont définies.
+%     Voir la section~\vref{note+sectionning}.
+%     Dans les classes non-standard de documents, les commandes de sectionnement portant des noms non-standard ne
+%     peuvent pas être reconnues par le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \item[sectlof] Une liste des figures pour une section.
+% \item[\dcnt{sectlofdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des sectlofs.
+% \item[sectlot] Une liste des tableaux pour une section.
+% \item[\dcnt{sectlotdepth}] Ce compteur, s'il existe, contient la profondeur des sectlots.
+% \item[\upack{sectsty}] Le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}\imess{W0037} offre un ensemble de commandes pour changer
+%     la fonte utilisée pour les divers en-têtes de sectionnement dans les classes standard de document de \LaTeXe:
+%     \class{article}, \class{book} et \class{report}. Ce paquetage fonctionne aussi avec
+%     les classes {\KOMAScript}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}:
+%     \class{scrartcl}, \class{scrbook} et \class{scrreprt}.
+%     Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.sectsty} et la
+%     section~\vref{faq.28}).
+% \item[secttoc] Une table des matières pour une section.
+% \item[\dcnt{secttocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur des secttocs.
+% \item[\upack{sfheaders}] Le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders}\imess{W0089} (pour \LaTeXe) emprunte
+%     quelques définitions des classes standard \class{article}/\class{report}/\class{book}
+%     et les modifie afin d'imprimer les en-têtes de partie, chapitre, section, sous-section\ldots{} avec la
+%     variante Sans-Serif de la fonte courante.
+%     Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.sfheaders} et la
+%     section~\vref{faq.41}).
+% \item[shell] Dans les systèmes d'exploitation Unix, analogues à~Unix et Linux, le \emph{shell} est un programme
+%     utilisé comme interface entre le système d'exploitation et l'utilisateur. Il peut aussi être utilisé comme
+%     un langage de programmation pour écrire des programmes ou \emph{scripts} afin de préparer de séquences de
+%     tâches utilisées de manière routinière. Les principaux \emph{shells} sont le \emph{shell} de Bourne (\textbf{sh}),
+%     le C~\emph{shell} (\textbf{csh}), le \emph{shell} de Korn (\textbf{ksh}), et leurs nombreux descendants
+%     (tels que \textbf{bash}, \textbf{tcsh}, etc.).
+% \item[\uopt{shortext}]\iopt{shortext} Une option\imess{W0020} du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle force l'utilisation de suffixes courts
+%     (3~caractères) dans les noms des fichiers auxiliaires de minitoc. Cette option est inactive par défaut, mais
+%     est automatiquement activée si votre système d'exploitation requiert des suffixes courts. Voir
+%     \textbf{autoconfiguration} plus haut et la section~\vref{.8+3}.
+% \item[\upack{shorttoc}] Le paquetage \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc} permet de créer une autre table des
+%     matières dans un document, avec un autre titre et une autre profonteur que la table des matières principale.
+% \item[SJIS] Le codage SJIS de caractères (pour le japonais), aussi connu sous le nom de MS-Kanji
+%     (Kanji pour Microsoft\textsuperscript{\textregistered}),
+%     consiste en deux jeux de caractères se recouvrant: celui surnommé Katakana demi-largeur (JIS X0201-1976,
+%     caractères codés sur 1~octet dans l'intervalle de \texttt{0xA1} à~\texttt{0xDF}) et le jeu de caractères JIS
+%     (pleine largeur) (JIS X0208-1990, associé aux points de codage restants).
+%     Cette information provient de~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}.
+% \item[\upack{\SLaTeX}]\ipacka{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX} Une version of \LaTeX\ adaptée pour la langue suédoise. Voir~\cite{slatex}.
+% \item[\upack{splitbib}]\ipack{splitbib} Un paquetage~\cite{splitbib} \LaTeX\ qui permet de trier une bibliographie
+%     en catégories et sous-catégories; ceci est intéressant pour des listes de publications, pour grouper les
+%     références par sujet, par année,~...
+% \item[\upack{stdclsdv}] Le paquetage \pack{stdclsdv}~\cite{stdclsdv} est destiné à~être utilisé par les
+%     auteurs de paquetages \LaTeX{} qui ont besoin de savoir quelles divisions de sectionnement sont fournies par
+%     la classe du document.
+% provided by the document class.
+% \item[strut] Un trait vertical invisible utilisé pour forcer une séparation minimale entre deux lignes de texte.
+%     Ce terme anglais signifiant «~étai~» est conservé car il fait partie du jargon \TeX{} et \LaTeX.
+% \item[\upack{subfig}] Le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig} permet l'inclusion de petites,
+%     «~sous-~» figures et tables. Il en simplifie le positionnement, l'ajout de légendes (\emph{captions}) et
+%     l'étiquetage à~l'intérieur d'un seul environnement \env{figure} ou \env{table}. De plus, ce paquetage
+%     permet que de tels sous-captions (sous-légendes) soient écrits dans la liste des figures ou dans la liste des
+%     tableaux si vous le désirez.
+% \item[\upack{subfigure}] Le paquetage \pack{subfigure}~\cite{subfigure} est une version obsolète (par le même
+%     auteur) du paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}.
+% \item[suffixe] (\emph{extension}) Le nom d'un fichier est souvent constitué de 2~parties: un \emph{nom de base}
+%     et un \emph{suffixe}, séparées par un point. Sous certains anciens systèmes d'exploitation, le nom de base
+%     est limité à~8~caractères et le suffixe à~3~caractères (le schéma «~8+3~»). Voir aussi les sections~\vref{MS-DOS}
+%     et~\vref{.8+3}. Il est fortement recommandé d'avoir au plus un seul point dans un nom de fichier.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{T}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{T}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[TDM, TdM] Acronyme pour «~table des matières~» (\emph{TOC, ``table of contents''}).
+% \item[TDS] \index{TDS}La \emph{\TeX~Directory Structure}~\cite{tds,ftds}; une structure de répertoires fortement
+%     recommandée pour ranger les fichiers de macros, fontes et autres fichiers systèmes \TeX{} indépendants de
+%     l'implantation; elle suggère aussi comment incorporer le reste des fichiers \TeX{} dans une seule structure;
+%     la \index{TDS}TDS a été pensée pour fonctionner sur tous les systèmes modernes.
+% \item[\TeX] \TeX{} est un programme écrit par \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth}~\cite{texbook,ftb}.
+%     Il est conçu pour la composition de textes et d'équations mathématiques.
+%
+%     \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} a commencé le développement de \TeX{} en 1977 parce qu'il était
+%     frustré par la manière avec laquelle ses articles étaient publiés par
+%     l'\emph{American Mathematical Society}. Il avait arrêté de soumettre des
+%     articles vers 1974 parce que \og{} le résultat final était trop pénible
+%     à~regarder \fg{}. \TeX{}, tel que nous l'utilisons aujourd'hui, est sorti en
+%     1982 et a été amélioré au fil des ans. Ces dernières années \TeX{} a
+%     atteint une grande stabilité. Aujourd'hui \iname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}\textsc{Knuth} affirme qu'il n'y a
+%     virtuellement plus de \og{} bug \fg{}. Le numéro de version de \TeX{} tend
+%     vers $\pi$ et est actuellement $3.141592$.
+%
+%     \TeX{} se prononce \og{} Tech \fg{}, avec un \og{} ch \fg{} comme dans le mot
+%     écossais \og{} Loch \fg{}. En alphabet phonétique cela donne
+%     \textbf{[tex]}\dots Dans un environnement \texttt{ASCII}, \TeX{}
+%     devient \texttt{TeX}.
+% \item[\upack{thailatex}] Le paquetage \pack{thailatex}~\cite{thailatex} permet de composer
+%     des documents en langue thaïe. Vous pouvez aussi utiliser le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}.
+% \item[\uopt{tight}]\iopt{tight} Une option du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Elle donne un espacement serré des lignes dans
+%     les mini-tables. L'option contraire est \optd{loose}.
+% \item[\upack{titlesec}] Le\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc} permet de changer les titres de
+%     sectionnement. Parmi ses nombreux dispositifs, il permet des titres dans la marge, un format différent dans
+%     les pages de gauche et de droite, des filets au-dessus et en dessous du titre, etc.
+%     Malheureusement, il est \emph{incompatible} avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \item[\upack{titletoc}] Le\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} paquetage \pack{titletoc} est utile pour la mise
+%     en forme des entrées de la table
+%     des matières, en offrant la possibilité de changer de format au milieu du document, de regrouper des entrées
+%     en un seul paragraphe, d'avoir de jolies entrées en format libre, de faire des tables des matières
+%     partielles, etc.
+%     Malheureusement, il est avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+%
+%     Le fichier \xfile{titletoc.sty} ne fait pas partie du paquetage \pack{titlesec}; c'est un paquetage
+%     indépendant, mais il est décrit dans la documentation~\cite{titletoc} du paquetage \pack{titlesec}.
+% \item[\uscrp{tmk}]\iscrp{tmk} Un fichier script file qui crée une hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS~\cite{tds,ftds} (à~adapter
+%     pour votre système).
+% \item[TOC] Acronyme pour «~\emph{table of contents}~», ou «~table des matières~».
+% \item[\upack{tocbibind}] Le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}\imess{I0046} peut être utilisé pour ajouter une
+%     entrée pour la table des matières et/ou pour la bibliographie et/ou pour l'index dans la table des matières.
+%     Mais il nécessite quelques précautions si vous l'utilisez avec le paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+%     Voir la section~\vref{special.entries}.
+% \item[\dcnt{tocdepth}] Ce compteur contient la profondeur de la table des matières.
+% \item[\upack{tocloft}] Le paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}\imess{I0047} offre des outils pour contrôler
+%     la conception typographique de la table des matières, de la liste des figures et de la liste des tables. De
+%     nouvelles sortes de «~liste des \ldots~» peuvent être définies. Si vous utilisez le paquetage
+%     \pack{tocloft} et le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, regardez la section~\vref{faq+tocloft}, sur la manière de
+%     traiter quelques problèmes mineurs de compatibilité.
+% \item[\xfile{TODO}] est un fichier en texte pur (anglais) qui liste quelques propositions de développement du
+%     paquetage, pas encore réalisées. Commentaires et suggestions sont les bienvenus.
+% \item[token] Un \emph{token}\,\footnote{Cette définition est tirée
+%     du <<~\textsl{The \TeX{}book}~>>~\cite{texbook,ftb}.}\textsuperscript{,}\footnote{Gardons cet anglicisme bien pratique!}
+%     est soit (a)~un seul caractère avec son code de
+%     catégorie attaché (voir «~catcode~» plus haut), soit (b)~une séquence de contrôle. \virage{} Vous \emph{devriez}
+%     vous souvenir de deux choses importantes à~propos des \emph{tokens} de \TeX: (1)~Une séquence de contrôle est
+%     considérée comme étant un seul objet qui n'est plus composée d'une suite de symboles. En conséquence, les noms longs
+%     de séquences de contrôle ne sont pas plus difficiles à~traiter par \TeX\ que les noms courts, une fois qu'ils
+%     ont été remplacés par des \emph{tokens}. De plus, les espaces ne sont pas ignorés après les séquences de
+%     contrôle à~l'intérieur d'une liste de \emph{tokens}; la règle d'ignorance des espaces ne s'applique que dans un
+%     fichier d'entrée, au moment où les chaînes de caractères sont découpées en \emph{tokens}. (2)~Une fois qu'un
+%     code de catégorie a été attaché à~un \emph{token} caractère, cet attachement est permanent. Par exemple, si le
+%     caractère~`\verb|{|' était soudainement déclaré comme étant de catégorie~12 au lieu de catégorie~1, les
+%     les caractères `\verb|{|$_1$' déjà à~l'intérieur de listes de \emph{tokens} de \TeX\ resteraient encore de
+%     catégorie~1; seules les listes nouvellement construites contiendraient des \emph{tokens} `\verb|{|$_{12}$'.
+%     En d'autres termes, les caractères individuels reçoivent une interprétation figée dès qu'ils ont été lus depuis
+%     un fichier, selon la catégorie qu'ils ont au moment de la lecture. Les séquences de contrôle sont différents,
+%     car elles peuvent changer d'interprétation à~tout moment. Les processus digestifs de \TeX\ savent toujours
+%     exactement ce qu'un \emph{token} signifie, parce que le code de catégorie apparaît dans le \emph{token}
+%     lui-même; mais lorsque les processus digestifs rencontrent un \emph{token} séquence de contrôle, ils doivent
+%     examiner la définition courante de cette séquence de contrôle afin d'en trouver la signification.
+% \item[\pack{trivfloat}] Le paquetage \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} (de \name{Joseph~A.}{Wright})\imess{I0053} fournit une
+%     méthode rapide pour définir de nouveaux types de flottants en \LaTeX. Un seule commande définit un nouveau
+%     flottant dans le même style que les types de flottants \env{figure} et \env{table} du noyau \LaTeX{} kernel.
+% \item[\pack{txfonts}] Le paquetage \pack{txfonts}~\cite{txfonts} fournit les fontes \texttt{TX}, qui comprennent
+%     \begin{enumerate}\itemsep=0pt
+%     \item des fontes romanes textuelles virtuelles utilisant Adobe Times (ou URW NimbusRomNo9L) avec quelques
+%           symboles textuels modifiés ou additionnels dans les codages OT1, T1, TS1 et LY1;
+%     \item {\textsf{des fontes sans empattement (sans serif) utilisant Adobe Helvetica (ou URW NimbusSanL) avec
+%           quelques symboles textuels additionnels dans les codages  OT1, T1, TS1 et LY1}};
+%     \item {\smooth\texttt{des fontes à~chasse fixe (dites <<~machine à~écrire~>>) dans\linebreak[4] les
+%           codages OT1, T1, TS1 et LY1}};
+%     \item des alphabets mathématiques utilisant Adobe Times (ou URW NimbusRomNo9L) avec des métriques modifiées;
+%     \item des fontes mathématiques de tous les symboles correspondant à~ceux des fontes mathématiques
+%           Computer Modern (CMSY, CMMI, CMEX et les lettres grecques de CMR);
+%     \item des fontes mathématiques de tous les symboles correspondant à~ceux des fontes \AmS{} fonts (MSAM et MSBM);
+%     \item des fontes mathématiques de divers symboles.
+%     \end{enumerate}
+%     Toutes ces fontes sont en format Type~1 (dans des fichiers \suffix{.afm} et \suffix{.pfb}).
+%     Les fichiers \suffix{.tfm} et \suffix{.vf} nécessaires ainsi que les fichiers de paquetage \LaTeXe{} et
+%     fichiers <<~font map~>> (\suffix{.map}) pour \tool{dvips} sont fournis.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{U}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{U}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[UNIX] Un système d'exploitation moderne, disponible sur divers types d'ordinateurs et dans diverses
+%     variantes. Du point de vue de \upack{minitoc}, il a l'avantage d'utiliser des noms de fichiers avec des
+%     suffixes longs (la limite est trop haute pour que le nombre de mini-tables soit un problème).
+% \item[UNIX (analogues~à)] Les systèmes d'exploitation analogues à~Unix, avec les mêmes avantages. Linux en est
+%     un bon exemple, mais il en existe d'autres.
+% \item[\utool{urlbst}]\itool{urlbst} Un script PERL script, par \name{Norman}{Gray}~\cite{urlbst}, pour ajouter un type
+%     d'entrée \BibTeX{} \texttt{webpage},
+%     et ajouter le support des champs généraux \texttt{url} et \texttt{lastchecked}, aux fichiers \suffix{.bst}
+%     de \BibTeX{} (du moins à~la plupart d'entre eux). Ajoute optionnellement un support basique pour les champs
+%     \texttt{eprint} et \texttt{doi}, et aussi le support pour \packa{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}/\pack{hyperref}.
+% \item[UTF\phantom{-}8] UTF~8 (Unicode Transformation Format~8), aussi appelée UTF~2 ou FSS-UTF, est une représentation
+%     spéciale d'Unicode (resp. ISO~10\,646). Elle utilise des séquences de plusieurs octets de longueurs
+%     diverses, mais seules les séquences d'un, de deux ou de trois octets sont implantées dans \pack{CJK}.
+%     Les caractères ASCII seront utilisés tels quels --- sans cette propriété, il serait impossible d'utiliser
+%     UTF~8 avec \TeX. Voir le tableau~\vref{t+jargon+CJK}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{V}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{V}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\upack{varsects}] Le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}\imess{W0038} offre un ensemble de commandes pour changer
+%     la fonte utilisée pour les divers en-têtes de sectionnement dans les classes standard de document de \LaTeXe:
+%     \class{article}, \class{book} et \class{report}.
+%     Il doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc} (voir le point~\vref{h.varsects} et la
+%     section~\vref{faq.33}).
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{W}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{W}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \par\reversemarginpar
+% \item[Wikipédia] La Wikipédia\index{Wikipedia=Wikipédia}\marginpar{\null\hfill%
+% \raisebox{0cm}[2.87cm][0cm]{\href{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wikipédia}}}
+% est un projet d'encyclopédie libre, multilingue et de contenu ouvert (libre, neutre et vérifiable
+% que chacun peut éditer et améliorer) géré par la \emph{Wikimedia Foundation}
+% à~but non lucratif. Son nom est un assemblage des mots \emph{wiki} (un type de site Web collaboratif) et
+% \emph{encyclopedia}. Lancé en 2001 par \name{Jimmy}{Wales} et \name{Larry}{Sanger}, c'est le projet de travail
+% de référence général le plus vaste, celui qui croît le plus vite, et le plus populaire disponible sur l'Internet.
+% \par\normalmarginpar
+% \item[\upack{wrapfig}] Le paquetage \pack{wrapfig}~\cite{wrapfig} fournit les environnements \env{wrapfigure} et
+%     \env{wraptable} pour placer une figure ou un tableau sur le côté de la page et faire que le texte
+%     enveloppe cette figure ou ce tableau.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \jsection{X}\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{X}
+% \begin{wdesc}{XXXXXX}
+% \item[\scrp{xmk}] Un exemple de script \emph{shell}, qui compose les fichiers exemples de documents et produit
+%     des documents PDF.
+% \item[\upack{xr}] Le paquetage \pack{xr}~\cite{xr} met en place un système pour les références externes
+%     (\emph{eXternal References}). J'en ai écrit la première version, mais elle avait de graves problèmes.
+%     \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle} a réécrit ce paquetage d'une manière bien meilleure et plus robuste. Avec sa permission,
+%     j'ai utilisé une partie de son code dans le paquetage \upack{minitoc} pour réaliser les commandes de
+%     préparation (telles que \com{dominitoc}). Si vous utilisez aussi le paquetage
+%     \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}, utilisez \pack{xr-hyper}~\cite{xr-hyper} au lieu du paquetage \upack{xr}.
+% \end{wdesc}
+% \end{mtchideinmaintoc}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{Installation}\label{c+installation}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{Installation}\label{c+installation}
+% \fi
+% \bgroup\mtcindent=0pt
+% \minilot
+% \egroup
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This chapter describes the installation of the \upack{minitoc} package (version~\#61).
+%
+% This package contains a lot of files. The list of all files is given in \xfile{minitoc.l}. See
+% tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}.
+% The files are sorted into ``classes'' below (a file can appear in more than one class). Each class specifies
+% the function and the placement of its files.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce chapitre décrit l'installation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} (version~\#61).
+%
+% Ce paquetage contient de nombreux fichiers. La liste de tous les fichiers est donnée dans
+% \xfile{minitoc.l}. Voir le tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}.
+% Les fichiers sont répartis en «~classes~» ci-dessous (un même fichier peut apparaître dans plusieurs classes).
+% Chaque classe spécifie la fonction et le placement de ses fichiers.
+% \fi
+% \begin{table}[!p]
+% \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
+% \centering
+% \changeskips
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \def\CLA{class}
+% ^^A \def\ET{\textrm{, and}\xspace}
+% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace}
+% \caption{List of files (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), first part}\label{t+files1}\ixfile{minitoc.l}
+% \or\relax
+% \def\CLA{classe}
+% ^^A \def\ET{ \textrm{et}\xspace}
+% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace}
+% \caption{Liste des fichiers (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), première partie}\label{t+files1}\ixfile{minitoc.l}
+% \fi
+% \vspace*{-1\baselineskip}
+% \medskip
+% \fboxsep=1em
+% ^^A % was -.22\textwidth
+% \null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries
+% \flushleft
+% \smash{\vphantom{\mpfootnotemark[0]}}\vspace{-.5\baselineskip}%
+% \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}\raggedcolumns
+% \begin{multicols}{4}\selectlanguage{french}
+% \def\NL{\mbox{}\hfill\mbox{}\\}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em
+% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN0}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc.ins}
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc.dtx}
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN1}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc.sty}
+%    \item \xfile{mtcoff.sty}
+%    \item \xfile{mtcmess.sty}
+%    \item \xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty}
+%    \item \xfile{acadian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{acadien.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{afrikaan.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{afrikaans.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{albanian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{american.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{arab.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{arab2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{arabi.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{arabic.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{armenian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{australian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{austrian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{bahasa.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{bahasai.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{bahasam.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{bangla.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{basque.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{bengali.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{bicig.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{bicig2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{bicig3.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{bithe.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{brazil.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{brazilian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{breton.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{british.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{bulgarian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{bulgarianb.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{buryat.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{buryat2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{canadian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{canadien.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{castillan.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{castillian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{catalan.mld}
+%    \item \xmldo{chinese1}
+%    \item \xmldo{chinese2}
+%    \item \xfile{croatian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{czech.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{danish.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{devanagari.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{dutch.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{english.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{english1.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{english2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{esperant.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{esperanto.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{estonian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{ethiopia.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{ethiopian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{ethiopian2.mld}
+%    \item \xmldo{farsi1}
+%    \item \xmldo{farsi2}
+%    \item \xfile{farsi3.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{finnish.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{finnish2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{francais.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{french.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{french1.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{french2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{frenchb.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{frenchle.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{frenchpro.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{galician.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{german.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{germanb.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{germanb2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{greek.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{greek-mono.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{guarani.mld}
+%    \item \xmldo{hangul1}
+%    \item \xmldo{hangul2}
+%    \item \xmldo{hangul3}
+%    \item \xmldo{hangul4}
+%    \item \xmldo{hangul-u8}
+%    \item \xmldo{hanja1}
+%    \item \xmldo{hanja2}
+%    \item \xmldo{hanja-u8}
+%    \item \xfile{hebrew.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{hebrew2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{hindi.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{hungarian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{icelandic.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{indon.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{indonesian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{interlingua.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{irish.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{italian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{italian2.mld}
+%    \item \xmldo{japanese}
+%    \item \xmldo{japanese2}
+%    \item \xmldo{japanese3}
+%    \item \xmldo{japanese4}
+%    \item \xmldo{japanese5}
+%    \item \xmldo{japanese6}
+%    \item \xfile{kannada.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{khalkha.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{latin.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{latin2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{latinc.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{latinc2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{latvian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{latvian2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{letton.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{letton2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{lithuanian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{lsorbian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{magyar.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{magyar2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{magyar3.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{malay.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{malayalam-keli.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld}
+%    \item \xmldo{malayalam-omega}
+%    \item \xfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{manju.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{mexican.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{meyalu.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{mongol.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{mongolb.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{mongolian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{naustrian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{newzealand.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{ngerman.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{ngermanb.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{ngermanb2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{norsk.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{norsk2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{nynorsk.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{nynorsk2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{occitan.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{occitan2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{polish.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{polish2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{polski.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{portuges.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{portuguese.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{romanian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{romanian2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{romanian3.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{russian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{russianb.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{russianc.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{russian2m.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{russian2o.mld}
+%    \item \xmldo{russian-cca}
+%    \item \xmldo{russian-cca1}
+%    \item \xmldo{russian-lh}
+%    \item \xmldo{russian-lhcyralt}
+%    \item \xmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}
+%    \item \xmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}
+%    \item \xfile{samin.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{scottish.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{serbian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{serbianc.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{slovak.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{slovene.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{spanish.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{spanish2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{spanish3.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{spanish4.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{swahili.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{swedish.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{swedish2.mld}
+%    \item \xmldo{thai}
+%    \item \xfile{turkish.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{uighur.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{uighur2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{uighur3.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{UKenglish.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{ukraineb.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{ukrainian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{USenglish.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{usorbian.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{vietnam.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{vietnamese.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{welsh.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{xalx.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{xalx2.mld}
+%    \item \xfile{xalx3.mld}
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN2}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item \xfile{INSTALL}, \xfile{README}, \xfile{TODO},
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc.l}
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN3}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+% \item
+%     \exam{mtc-2c.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-2nd.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-3co.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-add.bib},
+%     \exam{mtc-add.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-ads.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-amm.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-apx.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-art.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-bo.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-bk.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-ch0.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-cri.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-fko.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-fo1.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-fo2.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-gap.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-hi1.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-hi2.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-hia.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-hir.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-hop.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-liv.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-mem.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-mm1.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-mu.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-nom.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-ocf.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-ofs.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-sbf.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-scr.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-syn.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-tbi.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-tlc.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-tlo.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-tsf.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-vti.tex}
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{multicols}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \footnotetext{See continuation in table~\vref{t+files2}.}
+% \or\relax
+% \footnotetext{Voir la suite dans le tableau~\vref{t+files2}.}
+% \fi
+% \end{minipage}}
+% \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
+% \end{table}
+% \begin{table}[!tp]
+% ^^A \ifDP\begin{fullpage}\fi
+% \centering
+% \changeskips
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \def\CLA{class}
+% ^^A \def\ET{\textrm{, and}\xspace}
+% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace}
+% \caption{List of files (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), second part}\label{t+files2}\ixfile{minitoc.l}
+% \or\relax
+% \def\CLA{classe}
+% ^^A \def\ET{ \textrm{et}\xspace}
+% \def\ET{\textrm{,}\xspace}
+% \caption{Liste des fichiers (\uxfile{minitoc.l}), seconde partie}\label{t+files2}\ixfile{minitoc.l}
+% \fi
+% \vspace*{-1\baselineskip}
+% \medskip
+% \fboxsep=1em
+% ^^A % was -.22\textwidth
+% \null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\ttfamily\upshape\mdseries
+% \flushleft
+% \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}\raggedcolumns
+% \begin{multicols}{4}\selectlanguage{french}
+% \def\NL{\mbox{}\hfill\mbox{}\\}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=0em
+% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN4}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc.bug}
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc.sum}
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN5}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc.ins}
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc.dtx}
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc.bib}
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc.ist}\isuffix{.ist}
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc.lan}\isuffix{.lan}
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc.pre}\isuffix{.pre}
+%    \item \xfile{en-mtc.bst}\isuffix{.bst}
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN6}):}}}]\NL
+%     {\rmfamily\slshape\ifcase\LANG\relax
+%     The list of the graphic and flag files is given in tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}.
+%     \or\relax
+%     La liste des fichiers graphiques et drapeaux est donnée dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}.
+%     \fi}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN7}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc.dtx}
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}\isuffix{.ist}
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}\isuffix{.lan}
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc.pre}\isuffix{.pre}
+%    \item \xfile{franc.sty}, \xfile{frbib.sty}, \xfile{frnew.sty}
+%    \item \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}\isuffix{.bst}
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN8}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc.pdf}
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN9}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN10}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item \scrp{cmk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{imk}, \scrp{pmk}, \scrp{rmk}, \scrp{tmk}, \scrp{xmk}
+% ^^A    \item \xfile{duplex2v.pro}
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \medskip
+% \item[\textrm{\small\textup{\textbf{\CLA~(\ref{IN11}):}}}]\NL
+%    \begin{itemize}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \leftmargin=0pt
+% \listparindent=1em
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{multicols}
+% \end{minipage}}
+% ^^A \ifDP\end{fullpage}\fi
+% \end{table}
+% \begin{table}[!t]
+% \changeskips
+% \centering
+% \setlength{\winf}{\textwidth}% ^^A width in frame textwidth+marginparwidth+marginparsep-2*fboxrule-2*fboxsep
+% \setlength{\winp}{\marginparwidth}% ^^A left shift (marginparwidth+marginparsep)
+% \addtolength{\winp}{\marginparsep}%
+% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparwidth}
+% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparsep}
+% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxrule}
+% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxsep}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \caption[List of the graphic files]{List of the graphic files (class~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF1}
+% \or\relax
+% \caption[Liste des fichiers graphiques]{Liste des fichiers graphiques (classe~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF1}
+% \fi
+% ^^A \noindent\null\hspace*{1cm}\hspace*{-\winp}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{\winf}\footnotesize\RaggedRight
+% \noindent\null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\RaggedRight
+% \columnseprule=.4pt
+% \begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns
+%     \xgrf{lamed3.png},
+% \end{multicols}
+% \end{minipage}}
+% \end{table}
+% \begin{table}[!t]
+% \changeskips
+% \centering
+% \setlength{\winf}{\textwidth}% ^^A width in frame textwidth+marginparwidth+marginparsep-2*fboxrule-2*fboxsep
+% \setlength{\winp}{\marginparwidth}% ^^A left shift (marginparwidth+marginparsep)
+% \addtolength{\winp}{\marginparsep}%
+% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparwidth}
+% \addtolength{\winf}{\marginparsep}
+% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxrule}
+% \addtolength{\winf}{-2.\fboxsep}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \caption[List of the flag files]{List of the flag files (class~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF2}
+% \or\relax
+% \caption[Liste des fichiers drapeaux]{Liste des fichiers drapeaux (classe~\ref{IN6})}\label{t+GRF2}
+% \fi
+% ^^A \noindent\null\hspace*{1cm}\hspace*{-\winp}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{\winf}\footnotesize\RaggedRight
+% \noindent\null\hspace*{-.24\textwidth}\fbox{\begin{minipage}{1.32\textwidth}\footnotesize\RaggedRight
+% \columnseprule=.4pt
+% \begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns
+% \end{multicols}
+% \end{minipage}}
+% \end{table}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{enumerate}[(1)]
+% \addtocounter{enumi}{-1}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN0}The files \xfile{minitoc.ins} and \xfile{minitoc.dtx}
+%        are the basic source files of this package. The file \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} loads
+%        \xfile{minitoc.dtx} but selects the french documentation.
+%        The language selection is done by using
+%        \com{ifcase} \ldots\ \com{or} \ldots\ \com{fi} constructs.
+% \or\relax
+%   \label{IN0}Les fichiers \xfile{minitoc.ins} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx}
+%        sont les fichiers sources basiques de ce paquetage. Le fichier \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} charge
+%        \xfile{minitoc.dtx} mais sélectionne la documentation en français. La sélection de la
+%        langue est faite en utilisant des constructions \com{ifcase} \ldots\ \com{or}
+%        \ldots\ \com{fi}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN1}The files \xfile{minitoc.sty}, \xfile{mtcoff.sty},
+%     \xfile{mtcmess.sty},
+%     and \emph{all}\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}}
+%     \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} and \texttt{*}\suffix{.mlo} files are the package
+%     itself\,\footnote{The large number of \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} files is (partially) a consequence
+%     of the fact that some languages have
+%     aliases (or dialects) and hence one \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} file for each name (a \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} file may load
+%     another one) and, if necessary, a \suffix{.mlo} file; the english and french languages are evident examples.
+%     For some languages, the multiplicity of the \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} files corresponds to a multiplicity of fonts
+%     and/or encodings (chinese, greek, japanese, korean, malayalam, polish, russian, serbian), or even
+%     for spelling reforms (german, greek, norsk). \emph{Note that the presence of
+%     the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory.} Since version~\#50, the \upack{minitoc} package signals the
+%     missing \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files and gives their list in a warning message.}.
+%
+%     The table~\vref{t+languages} lists the available languages; for each of these languages, a
+%     \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file is available; the languages in parentheses are aliases of a main language
+%     and their \suffix{.mld} files will load the \suffix{.mld} file of that main language.
+%
+%     \ipack{mtcpatchmem}\xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty} is a temporary fix for compatibility with the \class{memoir} class.
+%
+%     The files of this class must be \emph{all} installed in a directory where \LaTeXe{} finds the \suffix{.sty} files.
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN1}Les fichiers \xfile{minitoc.sty}, \xfile{mtcoff.sty},
+%     \xfile{mtcmess.sty}
+%     et \emph{tous}\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}}
+%     les fichiers \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} et \texttt{*}\suffix{.mlo} constituent le
+%     paquetage lui-même\,\footnote{Le grand nombre de fichiers \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} est (en partie)
+%     une conséquence du fait que certaines
+%     langues ont des alias (ou dialectes) et donc un fichier \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} pour chaque nom (un fichier
+%     \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} peut en charger un autre) et, si nécessaire, un fichier \suffix{.mlo};
+%     les langues \emph{english} et \emph{french} sont des exemples évidents.
+%     Pour certaines langues, la multiplicité des fichiers \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld} correspond  à~une multiplicité de fontes
+%     et/ou de codages (chinois, grec, japonais, coréen, malayalam, polonais, russe, serbe), ou même à~des
+%     réformes de l'orthographe (allemand, grec, norvégien). \emph{Notez que la présence du fichier
+%     \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire.}. Depuis la version~\#50, le paquetage \upack{minitoc} signale les
+%     fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} manquants et en donne une liste dans un message d'avertissement.}.
+%
+%     Le tableau~\vref{t+languages} liste les langues disponibles; pour chacune de ces langues, un fichier
+%     \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} est disponible; les langues entre parenthèses sont des alias d'une langue
+%     principale et leurs fichiers \suffix{.mld} chargeront le fichier \suffix{.mld} de cette langue principale.
+%
+%     \ipack{mtcpatchmem}\xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty} est une correction temporaire pour compatibilité avec la classe \class{memoir}.
+%
+%     Les fichiers de cette classe doivent être \emph{tous} installés dans un répertoire où \LaTeXe{} trouve
+%     les fichiers \suffix{.sty}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{4}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN2}Informative text files:
+%    \begin{itemize}
+%    \item \xfile{INSTALL} is a file describing the installation of the package.
+%          You are (almost) reading it (but it is shorter).
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc.l} contains the list of all files of the \upack{minitoc} distribution. See
+%          tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}.
+%    \item \xfile{README} is a file describing briefly the \upack{minitoc} package,
+%          plus some useful infos.
+%    \item \xfile{TODO} lists some suggested developments of the package, not yet implemented.
+%          Comments and suggestions are welcome.
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN2}Fichiers informatifs textuels:
+%    \begin{itemize}
+%    \item \xfile{INSTALL} est un fichier décrivant l'installation du paquetage. À~part la langue,
+%          vous êtes (presque) en train de le lire (mais il est plus court).
+%    \item \xfile{minitoc.l} contient la liste de tous les fichiers de la distribution de
+%          \upack{minitoc}. Voir les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}.
+%    \item \xfile{README} est un fichier décrivant sommairement le paquetage \upack{minitoc},
+%          plus quelques informations utiles.
+%    \item \xfile{TODO} liste quelques propositions de développement du paquetage, pas encore réalisées.
+%          Commentaires et suggestions sont les bienvenus.
+%    \end{itemize}
+% \fi
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN3}Examples of documents:
+%          \exam{mtc-2c.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-2nd.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-3co.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-add.bib},
+%          \exam{mtc-add.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-ads.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-amm.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-apx.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-art.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-bk.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-bo.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-ch0.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-cri.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-fko.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-fo1.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-fo2.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-gap.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-hi1.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-hi2.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-hia.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-hir.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-hop.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-liv.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-mem.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-mm1.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-mu.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-nom.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-ocf.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-ofs.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-sbf.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-scr.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-syn.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-tbi.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-tlc.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-tlo.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-tsf.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-vti.tex},
+%          are example files, to play with.
+%          The associated \suffix{.pdf} files are provided.
+%          Another (\emph{short}) examples are welcome.
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN3}Exemples de documents:
+%          \exam{mtc-2c.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-2nd.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-3co.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-add.bib},
+%          \exam{mtc-add.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-ads.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-amm.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-apx.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-art.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-bk.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-bo.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-ch0.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-cri.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-fko.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-fo1.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-fo2.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-gap.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-hi1.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-hi2.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-hia.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-hir.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-hop.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-liv.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-mem.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-mm1.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-mu.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-nom.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-ocf.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-ofs.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-sbf.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-scr.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-syn.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-tbi.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-tlc.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-tlo.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-tsf.tex},
+%          \exam{mtc-vti.tex},
+%          sont des exemples de fichiers, avec lesquels vous pouvez jouer.
+%          Les fichiers \suffix{.pdf} associés sont fournis.
+%          D'autres exemples (\emph{courts}) sont les bienvenus.
+% \fi
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN4}\xfile{minitoc.bug}, \xfile{minitoc.sum}
+%              are plain text documentation: list of problems (faq, see chapter~\vref{FAQ}) and summary of commands
+%              (see chapter~\vref{c+memento}).
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN4}\xfile{minitoc.bug}, \xfile{minitoc.sum}
+%              sont de la documentation en texte pur: liste des problèmes (questions fréquemment posées, voir le
+%              chapitre~\vref{FAQ}) et sommaire des commandes (voir le chapitre~\vref{c+memento}).
+% \fi
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN5} \xfile{minitoc.ins}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist},
+%             \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre},
+%             \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{en-mtc.bst},
+%             \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, and
+%             \xfile{minitoc.bib} are the source of the documentation in (non perfect) english.
+%             \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} is the common preamble code for the documentation.
+% \else\relax
+% \label{IN5} \xfile{minitoc.ins}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist},
+%             \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre},
+%             \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{en-mtc.bst},
+%             \xfile{minitoc.dtx} et
+%             \xfile{minitoc.bib} forment le code source de la documentation en anglais (ou presque).
+%             \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} est le code de préambule commun pour la documentation.
+% \fi
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN6}
+%     {\rmfamily\slshape The list of the graphic and flag files is given in tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2};
+%             they are images to include.}
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN6}
+%     {\rmfamily\slshape  La liste des fichiers graphiques et drapeaux est donnée dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2};
+%     ce sont des images à~inclure.}
+% \fi
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN7}\xfile{minitoc.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx},
+%            \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib},
+%            \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist},
+%            \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan},
+%            \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre},
+%            \ipack{franc}\upack{franc.sty}, \ipack{frbib}\upack{frbib.sty},
+%            \ipack{frnew}\upack{frnew.sty}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{fr-mtc.bst} are the source
+%            (and tools) of the documentation in french\,\footnote{This seems rather strange. In fact, the english and
+%            french documentations are both contained in the \xfile{minitoc.dtx} file. \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} sets
+%            a flag then
+%            loads \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; hence the file \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} is much smaller than \xfile{minitoc.dtx}.
+%            Thus, \xfile{minitoc.ins} contains also some utilitary files which are automatically created (some
+%            \suffix{.sty} files, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist},
+%            \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan},
+%            \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}).
+%            The english and french versions are not word-by-word translations, but they are in parallel in the
+%            \xfile{minitoc.dtx} file, and this helps the maintenance.}.
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN7}\xfile{minitoc.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx},
+%            \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib},
+%            \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist},
+%            \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan},
+%            \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre},
+%            \ipack{franc}\upack{franc.sty}, \ipack{frbib}\upack{frbib.sty},
+%            \ipack{frnew}\upack{frnew.sty}, \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{fr-mtc.bst} sont les codes sources
+%            (et les outils) pour la documentation en français\,\footnote{Ceci peut sembler assez étrange. En fait, les
+%            documentations en anglais et en français sont toutes deux contenues dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.dtx}.
+%            \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} établit un indicateur puis charge \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; en conséquence, le fichier
+%            \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} est bien plus petit que \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. Donc, \xfile{minitoc.ins}
+%            contient aussi certains fichiers utilitaires qui sont créés automatiquement (quelques fichiers
+%            \suffix{.sty}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist},
+%            \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist},
+%            \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan}, \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan}).
+%            Les versions anglaise et française ne sont pas des traductions mot-à-mot, mais elles sont en
+%            parallèle dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, et ceci aide pour la maintenance.}.
+% \fi
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN8}\xfile{minitoc.pdf},
+%              is the documentation in (non perfect) english, in PDF format.
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN8}\xfile{minitoc.pdf}
+%              forme la documentation en anglais (ou presque), en format PDF.
+% \fi
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN9}\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}
+%              is the documentation in french, in PDF format. The french documentation and its source
+%              files must not be left out.
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN9}\xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf}
+%              forme la documentation en français, en format PDF. La documentation en français
+%              et ses fichiers sources ne doivent pas être omis.
+% \fi
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN10} \scrp{pmk} is a shell script\,\footnote{You can sip a big cappuccino{\myCoffeecup}
+%              while this script is running! Be patient.}
+%              to prepare the package and its documentation;
+%              the \scrp{pmk} script uses the \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk}
+%              and \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} directories to not waste disk space under your home directory;
+%              there are also six partial scripts\footnote{In fact, \scrp{pmk} assembles the scripts
+%              \scrp{imk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{xmk}, \scrp{rmk}, and \scrp{tmk} (but \emph{not} \scrp{cmk}).}
+%              and a supplementary one, \scrp{cmk} (all to be adapted):
+%              \begin{itemize}
+%              \item \scrp{imk}, which prepares the package from \xfile{minitoc.ins} and
+%                    \xfile{minitoc.dtx}; note that \scrp{imk} must be run before running
+%                    \scrp{emk} or \scrp{fmk}; it creates also some \suffix{.sty} files necessary to prepare
+%                    the documentation but that are to be installed with it;
+%                    the \scrp{imk} script uses the \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk} directory to not waste disk space
+%                    under your home directory;
+%              \item \scrp{emk}, which prepares the english documentation from
+%                    \xfile{minitoc.dtx};
+%              \item \scrp{fmk}, which prepares the french documentation from
+%                    \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} and \xfile{minitoc.dtx};
+%              \item \scrp{xmk}, which typesets the example files (in PDF format);
+%              \item \scrp{rmk}, which sorts the files into classes (one directory for each class);
+%              \item \scrp{tmk}, which creates a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy~\cite{ftds,tds}
+%                    (to be tailored to your system); see table~\vref{t+TDS}; this hierarchy is saved
+%                    in \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip};
+%              \item \scrp{cmk}, which converts the PDF documentation files into PostScript files.
+%              \end{itemize}
+%              These scripts are currently written in C-shell, but they are very simple, and should be easy to
+%              convert in another classic shell. The documentation in PostScript format is no more distributed on
+%              the CTAN archives, but the \scrp{cmk} script can prepare it from the documentation in PDF format
+%              (recto-verso printing).
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN10} \scrp{pmk} est un script \emph{shell}\,\footnote{Vous avez le temps de déguster un
+%              grand cappuccino{\myCoffeecup} pendant que ce script s'exécute! Soyez patients.} pour préparer le paquetage
+%              et sa documentation;
+%              le script \scrp{pmk} utilise les répertoires \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk}
+%              et \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} pour ne pas gâcher de l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base;
+%              il y~a aussi six scripts partiels\,\footnote{En fait, \scrp{pmk} regroupe les scripts
+%              \scrp{imk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{xmk}, \scrp{rmk} et \scrp{tmk} (mais \emph{pas}
+%              \scrp{cmk}).} et un supplémentaire, \scrp{cmk} (tous à~adapter):
+%              \begin{itemize}
+%              \item \scrp{imk}, qui prépare le paquetage en partant de
+%                    \xfile{minitoc.ins} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx};
+%                    notez que \scrp{imk} doit être exécuté avant de lancer \scrp{emk} ou \scrp{fmk};
+%                    il crée aussi quelques fichiers \suffix{.sty} nécessaires pour préparer la documentation et
+%                    ils doivent être installés avec elle;
+%                    le script \scrp{imk} utilise le répertoire \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.imk}  pour ne pas gâcher
+%                    de l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base;
+%              \item \scrp{emk}, qui prépare la documentation anglaise en partant de
+%                    \xfile{minitoc.dtx};
+%              \item \scrp{fmk}, qui prépare la documentation française en partant de
+%                    \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} et \xfile{minitoc.dtx};
+%              \item \scrp{xmk}, qui compose les fichiers d'exemples (en format PDF);
+%              \item \scrp{rmk}, qui trie les fichiers en classes (un répertoire pour chaque classe);
+%              \item \scrp{tmk}, qui crée une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS~\cite{ftds,tds}
+%                    (à~adapter pour votre système); voir le tableau~\vref{t+TDS}; cette hiérarchie est sauvegardée
+%                    dans \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip};
+%              \item \scrp{cmk}, qui convertit les fichiers PDF de la documentation en fichiers PostScript.
+%              \end{itemize}
+%              Ces scripts sont actuellement écrits en C-\emph{shell}, mais ils sont très simples et devraient être
+%              faciles à~convertir dans tout autre \emph{shell} classique. La documentation en format PostScript
+%              n'est plus distribuée sur les archives CTAN, mais le script \scrp{cmk} peut la préparer à~partir de
+%              celle en format PDF (impression recto-verso).
+% \fi
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \label{IN11} \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} is a ZIP-archive file containing a
+%              \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy with all the files of the \upack{minitoc} package.
+% \or\relax
+% \label{IN11} \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} est un fichier archive ZIP contenant une
+%              hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS avec tous les fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some remarks about the \scrp{rmk}, \scrp{tmk} and \scrp{pmk} scripts (which you should tailor to your needs):
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \textbf{with \scrp{rmk}:}
+% \nopagebreak[4]
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item the hierarchy is \emph{not} \index{TDS}TDS-compliant;
+% \item the files of~(\ref{IN0}) must be installed in a directory where \LaTeXe{} finds \suffix{.dtx}
+%  and \suffix{.ins} files;
+% \item the files of~(\ref{IN1}) must be installed in a directory where \LaTeXe{} finds \suffix{.sty} files;
+% \item the files of~(\ref{IN2}), (\ref{IN3}), (\ref{IN4}), (\ref{IN5}), (\ref{IN6}), (\ref{IN7}) and~(\ref{IN10})
+%  must be installed in a separate directory, but must not be left out;
+% \item the files of~(\ref{IN8}) and~(\ref{IN9}) must be installed as on-line documentation;
+% \item the directories created by the \scrp{rmk} script are under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} to not waste disk space
+%  under your home directory.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \item \textbf{with \scrp{tmk}:}
+% \nopagebreak[4]
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item the hierarchy is \index{TDS}TDS-compliant;
+% \item each file appears only once in the hierarchy;
+% \item the installation is much easier: you only need a \suffix{.zip} or a \suffix{.tar} (or \suffix{.tgz})
+%       dump file\footnote{The \scrp{tmk} script creates the \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} file.} of the hierarchy
+%       to be deployed into the installed \index{TDS}TDS hierarchy; you should examine \emph{very carefully}\Virage{} (by
+%       comparison with your \index{TDS}TDS installation) and tailor the \scrp{tmk} script before using it;
+% \item the directories created by the \scrp{tmk} script are under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} to not waste disk space
+%       under your home directory;
+% \item the file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}~(\ref{IN11}) should not be installed; it is just a method to help making
+%       a~\index{TDS}TDS-compliant installation.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \nopagebreak[4]
+% \item \textbf{with \scrp{pmk}:}
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item the \scrp{pmk} script performs the actions of \scrp{imk} (preparation of the basic files), \scrp{emk} and
+%       \scrp{fmk} (preparation of the english and french documentation), \scrp{xmk} (preparation of the
+%       examples of documents), \scrp{rmk} and \scrp{tmk} (repartition of files into classes and in
+%       a~\index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy);\par
+% \begin{RaggedRight}
+% \item the directories created by the \scrp{pmk} script are under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} and
+%       \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} to not waste disk space under your home directory;
+% ^^A \item the \scrp{pmk} script creates its directories under \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} and
+% ^^A       \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} to not waste disk space under your home directory.
+% \par\end{RaggedRight}
+% \item the \emph{same precautions}\Virage{} as for \scrp{tmk} are needed.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \end{itemize}
+% \or\relax
+% Quelques remarques sur les scripts \scrp{rmk}, \scrp{tmk} et \scrp{pmk} (que vous devriez adapter à~vos besoins):
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \textbf{avec \scrp{rmk}:}
+% \nopagebreak[4]
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item la hiérarchie \emph{n'est pas} conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS;
+% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN0}) doivent être installés dans un répertoire où \LaTeXe{} trouve les fichiers \suffix{.dtx}
+%  et \suffix{.ins};
+% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN1}) doivent être installés dans un répertoire où \LaTeXe{} trouve les
+%  fichiers \suffix{.sty};
+% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN2}), (\ref{IN3}), (\ref{IN4}), (\ref{IN5}), (\ref{IN6}), (\ref{IN7}) et~(\ref{IN10})
+%  doivent être  installés dans un répertoire distinct, mais ne doivent pas être omis;
+% \item les fichiers de~(\ref{IN8}) et~(\ref{IN9}) doivent être installés comme documentation en ligne;
+% \item les répertoires créés par le script \scrp{rmk} le sont sous \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} pour de pas gâcher de
+%       l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \item \textbf{avec \scrp{tmk}:}
+% \nopagebreak[4]
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item la hiérarchie est conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS;
+% \item chaque fichier n'apparaît qu'une seule fois dans la hiérarchie;
+% \item l'installation est plus facile: il vous suffit d'un fichier de sauvegarde \suffix{.zip} ou \suffix{.tar}
+%       (ou \suffix{.tgz}) de la hiérarchie\,\footnote{Le script \scrp{tmk} crée le fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}.}
+%       pour le déployer dans la hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS installée;
+%       vous devriez examiner \emph{très soigneusement}\Virage{} (par
+%       comparaison avec votre installation de la \index{TDS}TDS) et adapter le script \scrp{tmk} avant de l'utiliser;
+% \item les répertoires créés par le script \scrp{tmk} le sont sous \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} pour de pas gâcher de
+%       l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base;
+% \item le fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}~(\ref{IN11}) ne devrait pas être installé; c'est juste une méthode
+%       pour aider à~faire une installation conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \item \textbf{avec \scrp{pmk}:}
+% \nopagebreak[4]
+% ^^A \begin{RaggedRight}
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item le script \scrp{pmk} effectue les actions de \scrp{imk} (préparation des fichiers de base), \scrp{emk} et
+%       \scrp{fmk} (préparation de la documentation en anglais et en français), \scrp{xmk} (préparation des
+%       exemples de documents), \scrp{rmk} et \scrp{tmk} (répartition des fichiers en classes et dans une
+%       hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS);
+% \item le script \scrp{pmk} crée ses répertoires sous \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.rmk} et
+%       \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`.tmk} pour de pas gâcher de l'espace disque sous votre répertoire de base;
+% \item les \emph{mêmes précautions}\Virage{} que pour \scrp{tmk} sont nécessaires.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% ^^A \end{RaggedRight}
+% \end{itemize}
+% \fi
+% \begin{table}[!t]
+% \centering
+% \changeskips
+% \def\TDSPH{\vphantom{\'TDSj}}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \caption{A TDS-compliant hierarchy for the \upack{minitoc} files}\label{t+TDS}\index{TDS}
+% \def\tdstitle{TDS~Root~Directory\TDSPH}
+% \or\relax
+% \caption{Une hiérarchie conforme à~la TDS pour les fichiers de \upack{minitoc}}\label{t+TDS}\index{TDS}
+% \def\tdstitle{Répertoire~racine~TDS\TDSPH}
+% \fi
+% {\footnotesize\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}|O{1}@{}}
+% \toprule
+% \multicolumn{7}{@{}c@{}}{\large\textbf{\tdstitle}}\\
+% \midrule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}c|}{\texttt{bibtex/}}&\texttt{doc/}&\texttt{makeindex/}&\texttt{scripts/}&\texttt{source/}&\texttt{tex/}\\
+% \cmidrule(r){1-2}\cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}\cmidrule(lr){5-5}\cmidrule(lr){6-6}\cmidrule(l){7-7}
+% \texttt{bib/}&\texttt{bst/}&\texttt{latex/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{latex/}&\texttt{latex/}\\
+% \cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}\cmidrule(lr){5-5}\cmidrule(lr){6-6}\cmidrule(l){7-7}
+% \texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\textbf{(D)}&\textbf{(E)}&\texttt{minitoc/}&\texttt{minitoc/}\\
+% \cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(lr){2-2}\cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){6-6}\cmidrule(l){7-7}%
+% \textbf{(A)}&\textbf{(B)}&\textbf{(C)}&\multicolumn{2}{c|}{}&\textbf{(F)}&\textbf{(G)}\\
+% ^^A \cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}%
+% \cmidrule{3-4}%
+% \multicolumn{2}{c|}{}&\texttt{examples/}&\texttt{images/}&\multicolumn{3}{c}{}\\
+% \cmidrule(lr){3-3}\cmidrule(lr){4-4}%
+% \multicolumn{2}{c|}{}&\textbf{(H)}&\textbf{(I)}&\multicolumn{3}{c}{}\\
+% \morecmidrules\cmidrule[\heavyrulewidth]{1-7}
+% \multicolumn{7}{@{}c@{}}{%
+% \begin{minipage}{\textwidth}\footnotesize
+% \raggedright
+% \setlength{\columnseprule}{.4pt}
+% \begin{multicols}{2} %^^A \raggedcolumns\setcounter{unbalance}{5}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=2em
+% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=0pt
+% \begin{description}
+% \parskip=0pt \itemsep=0pt \parsep=0pt \topsep=0pt \partopsep=0pt
+% \labelwidth=-1em \labelsep=1em
+% \rightmargin=0pt \leftmargin=-1em \itemindent=-1em
+% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\textbf{(H)}}
+% \parindent=0pt
+% \def\sepitem{\vspace*{-1.5\baselineskip}\item[]\null\hspace*{-2em}\hrulefill\pagebreak[1]}
+% \item[(A)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc-fr.bib}, \xfile{minitoc.bib};
+% \sepitem
+% \item[(B)\hfill\null]~\unskip\isuffix{.bst}\xfile{en-mtc.bst}, \xfile{fr-mtc.bst};
+% \sepitem
+% \item[(C)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{INSTALL},
+%     \xfile{README},
+%     \xfile{TODO},
+%     \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan},
+%     \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf},
+%     \xfile{minitoc.bug},
+%     \xfile{minitoc.l},
+%     \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan},
+%     \xfile{minitoc.pdf},
+%     \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre},
+%     \xfile{minitoc.sum},
+%     \ipack{franc}\upack{franc.sty},
+%     \ipack{frbib}\upack{frbib.sty},
+%     \ipack{frnew}\upack{frnew.sty};
+% \sepitem
+% \item[(D)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}, \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{minitoc.ist};
+% \sepitem
+% \item[(E)\hfill\null]~\unskip\scrp{cmk}, \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, \scrp{imk}, \scrp{pmk}, \scrp{rmk},
+%            \scrp{tmk}, \scrp{xmk};
+% \sepitem
+% \item[(F)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, \xfile{minitoc.ins};
+% \sepitem
+% \item[(G)\hfill\null]~\unskip\xfile{minitoc.sty}, \xfile{mtcoff.sty}, \xfile{mtcmess.sty}, \xfile{mtcpatchmem.sty},
+%            \texttt{*}\suffix{.mld}, \texttt{*}\suffix{.mlo};
+% \sepitem
+% \item[(H)\hfill\null]~\unskip\exam{mtc-2c.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-2c.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-2nd.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-2nd.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-3co.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-3co.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-add.bib},
+%     \exam{mtc-add.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-add.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-ads.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-ads.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-amm.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-amm.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-apx.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-apx.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-art.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-art.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-bk.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-bk.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-bo.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-bo.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-ch0.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-ch0.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-cri.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-cri.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-fko.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-fko.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-fo1.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-fo1.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-fo2.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-fo2.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-gap.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-gap.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-hi1.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-hi1.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-hi2.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-hi2.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-hia.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-hia.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-hir.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-hir.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-hop.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-hop.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-liv.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-liv.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-mem.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-mem.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-mm1.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-mm1.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-mu.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-mu.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-nom.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-nom.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-ocf.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-ocf.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-ofs.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-ofs.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-sbf.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-sbf.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-scr.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-scr.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-syn.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-syn.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-tbi.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-tbi.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-tlc.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-tlc.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-tlo.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-tlo.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-tsf.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-tsf.tex},
+%     \exam{mtc-vti.pdf},
+%     \exam{mtc-vti.tex};
+% \sepitem
+% \item[(I)\hfill\null]
+%     {\rmfamily\slshape\ifcase\LANG\relax
+%     The list of the graphic and flag files is given in tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}.
+%     \or\relax
+%     La liste des fichiers graphiques et drapeaux est donnée dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+GRF2}.
+%     \fi}
+% \end{description}
+% \end{multicols}
+% \end{minipage}}\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}}
+% \smash{%
+% \ixfile{acadian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{acadien.mld}%
+% \ixfile{afrikaan.mld}%
+% \ixfile{afrikaans.mld}%
+% \ixfile{albanian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{american.mld}%
+% \ixfile{arabic.mld}%
+% \ixfile{arabi.mld}%
+% \ixfile{arab.mld}%
+% \ixfile{arab2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{armenian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{australian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{austrian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{bahasai.mld}%
+% \ixfile{bahasa.mld}%
+% \ixfile{bahasam.mld}%
+% \ixfile{bangla.mld}%
+% \ixfile{basque.mld}%
+% \ixfile{bengali.mld}%
+% \ixfile{bicig.mld}%
+% \ixfile{bicig2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{bicig3.mld}%
+% \ixfile{bithe.mld}%
+% \ixfile{brazilian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{brazil.mld}%
+% \ixfile{breton.mld}%
+% \ixfile{british.mld}%
+% \ixfile{bulgarianb.mld}%
+% \ixfile{bulgarian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{buryat.mld}%
+% \ixfile{buryat2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{canadian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{canadien.mld}%
+% \ixfile{castillan.mld}%
+% \ixfile{castillian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{catalan.mld}%
+% \ixmldo{chinese1}%
+% \ixmldo{chinese2}%
+% \ixfile{croatian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{czech.mld}%
+% \ixfile{danish.mld}%
+% \ixfile{devanagari.mld}%
+% \ixfile{dutch.mld}%
+% \ixfile{english.mld}%
+% \ixfile{english1.mld}%
+% \ixfile{english2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{esperant.mld}%
+% \ixfile{esperanto.mld}%
+% \ixfile{estonian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{ethiopia.mld}%
+% \ixfile{ethiopian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{ethiopian2.mld}%
+% \ixmldo{farsi1}%
+% \ixmldo{farsi2}%
+% \ixfile{farsi3.mld}%
+% \ixfile{finnish.mld}%
+% \ixfile{finnish2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{francais.mld}%
+% \ixfile{french.mld}%
+% \ixfile{french1.mld}%
+% \ixfile{french2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{frenchb.mld}%
+% \ixfile{frenchle.mld}%
+% \ixfile{frenchpro.mld}%
+% \ixfile{galician.mld}%
+% \ixfile{german.mld}%
+% \ixfile{germanb.mld}%
+% \ixfile{germanb2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{greek.mld}%
+% \ixfile{greek-mono.mld}%
+% \ixfile{greek-polydemo.mld}%
+% \ixfile{greek-polykatha.mld}%
+% \ixfile{guarani.mld}%
+% \ixmldo{hangul1}%
+% \ixmldo{hangul2}%
+% \ixmldo{hangul3}%
+% \ixmldo{hangul4}%
+% \ixmldo{hangul-u8}%
+% \ixmldo{hanja1}%
+% \ixmldo{hanja2}%
+% \ixmldo{hanja-u8}%
+% \ixfile{hebrew.mld}%
+% \ixfile{hebrew2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{hindi.mld}%
+% \ixfile{hindi-modern.mld}%
+% \ixfile{hungarian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{icelandic.mld}%
+% \ixfile{indonesian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{indon.mld}%
+% \ixfile{interlingua.mld}%
+% \ixfile{irish.mld}%
+% \ixfile{italian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{italian2.mld}%
+% \ixmldo{japanese}%
+% \ixmldo{japanese2}%
+% \ixmldo{japanese3}%
+% \ixmldo{japanese4}%
+% \ixmldo{japanese5}%
+% \ixmldo{japanese6}%
+% \ixfile{kannada.mld}%
+% \ixfile{khalkha.mld}%
+% \ixfile{latin.mld}%
+% \ixfile{latin2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{latinc.mld}%
+% \ixfile{latinc2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{latvian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{latvian2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{letton.mld}%
+% \ixfile{letton2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{lithuanian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{lithuanian2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{lowersorbian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{lsorbian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{magyar.mld}%
+% \ixfile{magyar2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{magyar3.mld}%
+% \ixfile{malayalam-b.mld}%
+% \ixfile{malayalam-keli.mld}%
+% \ixfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{malayalam-mr.mld}%
+% \ixmldo{malayalam-omega}%
+% \ixfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}%
+% \ixfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}%
+% \ixfile{malay.mld}%
+% \ixfile{manju.mld}%
+% \ixfile{mexican.mld}%
+% \ixfile{meyalu.mld}%
+% \ixfile{mongol.mld}%
+% \ixfile{mongolb.mld}%
+% \ixfile{mongolian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{naustrian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{newzealand.mld}%
+% \ixfile{ngermanb.mld}%
+% \ixfile{ngermanb2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{ngerman.mld}%
+% \ixfile{norsk.mld}%
+% \ixfile{norsk2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{nynorsk.mld}%
+% \ixfile{nynorsk2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{occitan.mld}%
+% \ixfile{occitan2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{polish.mld}%
+% \ixfile{polish2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{polski.mld}%
+% \ixfile{portuges.mld}%
+% \ixfile{portuguese.mld}%
+% \ixfile{romanian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{romanian2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{romanian3.mld}%
+% \ixfile{russian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{russian2m.mld}%
+% \ixfile{russian2o.mld}%
+% \ixfile{russianb.mld}%
+% \ixmldo{russian-cca1}%
+% \ixmldo{russian-cca}%
+% \ixfile{russianc.mld}%
+% \ixmldo{russian-lhcyralt}%
+% \ixmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}%
+% \ixmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}%
+% \ixmldo{russian-lh}%
+% \ixfile{samin.mld}%
+% \ixfile{scottish.mld}%
+% \ixfile{serbianc.mld}%
+% \ixfile{serbian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{slovak.mld}%
+% \ixfile{slovene.mld}%
+% \ixfile{spanish.mld}%
+% \ixfile{spanish2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{spanish3.mld}%
+% \ixfile{spanish4.mld}%
+% \ixfile{swahili.mld}%
+% \ixfile{swedish.mld}%
+% \ixfile{swedish2.mld}%
+% \ixmldo{thai}%
+% \ixfile{turkish.mld}%
+% \ixfile{uighur.mld}%
+% \ixfile{uighur2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{uighur3.mld}%
+% \ixfile{UKenglish.mld}%
+% \ixfile{ukraineb.mld}%
+% \ixfile{ukrainian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{uppersorbian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{USenglish.mld}%
+% \ixfile{usorbian.mld}%
+% \ixfile{vietnamese.mld}%
+% \ixfile{vietnam.mld}%
+% \ixfile{welsh.mld}%
+% \ixfile{xalx.mld}%
+% \ixfile{xalx2.mld}%
+% \ixfile{xalx3.mld}%
+% }%
+% \end{table}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} contains a ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy of all files of the
+% \upack{minitoc} package. It has been prepared by the \scrp{pmk} or \scrp{tmk} scripts.
+% \or\relax
+% Le fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} contient une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS de tous les
+% fichiers du paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Il a été préparé par l'un des scripts \scrp{pmk} ou \scrp{tmk}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Note that \xfile{minitoc.dtx} and hence \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} are (not so trivial) examples of using \upack{minitoc}
+% with \pack{hyperref}. They show how the combinaison of these two packages may be useful.
+% \or\relax
+% Notez que \xfile{minitoc.dtx} et donc \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} sont des exemples (non triviaux) de l'utilisation de
+% \upack{minitoc} avec \pack{hyperref}. Ils montrent combien la combinaison de ces deux paquetages peut être
+% utile.
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{Postface}\label{c+postface}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{Postface}\label{c+postface}
+% \fi
+% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
+% \bgroup\mtcindent=0pt
+% \minitoc
+% \egroup
+% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{open}{\empty}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minitoc}{close}{\empty}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This chapter summarizes the evolution of the \upack{minitoc} package, year by year. A more detailed history is
+% available in ``Changes History'', page~\pageref{c+history}. Many minor changes are skipped here.
+%
+% In fact, this chapter is for the average user of the package, who wants to have an overview ot its evolution;
+% the chapter ``Changes History'' is more oriented towards peoples interested in the code of the package and the
+% problems encountered during its development.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce chapitre résume l'évolution du paquetage \upack{minitoc}, année par année. Un historique plus détaillé est
+% disponible dans «~Historique des modifications~», page~\pageref{c+history}. De nombreuses modifications mineures ne
+% sont pas citées ici.
+%
+% En fait, le présent chapitre s'adresse à~l'utilisateur normal du paquetage, qui voudrait avoir une idée générale
+% de son évolution; le chapitre «~Historique des modifications~» s'adresse par contre aux personnes qui seraient
+% intéressées par le code du paquetage et les problèmes rencontrés lors de son développement.
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{RaggedRight}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The origins}
+% The \upack{minitoc} package was initially written by \name{Nigel}{Ward} in~1990 and~1991, with major contributions
+% by \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}. But \upack{minitoc} suffered of a major weakness: when the number of chapters
+% exceeded~9 or~10, you got a rather mysterious error message:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|No room for a new \write.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les origines}
+% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} fut initialement écrit par \name{Nigel}{Ward}, en~1990 et~1991, avec des contributions
+% majeures de \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}. Mais \upack{minitoc} souffrait d'une faiblesse majeure: lorsque le nombre de chapitres
+% dépassait~9 ou~10, vous obteniez un message d'erreur assez mystérieux:
+% \begin{quote}
+% \verb|No room for a new \write.|
+% \end{quote}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As I needed the basic fonctionnality of this package (printing mini-tables of contents for each chapter), I looked further
+% in its code and finally found the culprit: \upack{minitoc} used a \com{newwrite} command to create a new file for the
+% contents table of each chapter, allocating a new file descriptor each time. But the number of file descriptors for
+% writing is limited to~16 under \LaTeX\ (in fact, by the underlying \TeX\ program itself). As some descriptors are already
+% used by \LaTeX, writing more than 9~or~10~chapters was too much. Such errors are difficult to find when testing on
+% too small documents: with few chapters, everything goes fine. But on a real document, with many chapters, the mysterious
+% error happens.
+% \or\relax
+% Comme j'avais besoin de la fonctionnalité basique de ce paquetage (imprimer une mini-table des matières pour chaque
+% chapitre), j'ai regardé de plus près son code et finalement trouvé le maillon faible: \upack{minitoc} utilisait
+% une commande \com{newwrite} pour créer un nouveau fichier pour la table de manières de chaque chapitre,
+% en allouant un nouveau
+% descripteur de fichier chaque fois. Mais le nombre de descripteurs de fichiers en écriture est limité à~16 sous
+% \LaTeX\ (en fait, par le programme \TeX\ sous-jacent lui-même). Comme quelques descripteurs sont déjà utilisés par
+% \LaTeX, écrire plus de 9~ou~10~chapitres allait trop loin. De telles erreurs sont difficiles à~trouver lors de tests
+% sur de trop petits documents: avec peu de chapitres, tout se passe bien. Mais sur un document réel, avec de nombreux
+% chapitres, l'erreur mystérieuse survient.
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{New design in~1993}
+% So I~decided (June~1993, when I took the maintenance of the package) to change the allocation method to always
+% use the same file descriptor for all the
+% mini-table of contents files. Some major improvements happened in 1993: the addition of the \pack{mtcoff}
+% (\pack{minitocoff} at this time)
+% package and a rewrite of \upack{minitoc} to extract the data from the \emph{document}\suffix{.toc} file, with a
+% selection mechanism.
+% Then a first solution for the short extension problem was added (still manual). An elementary system for the fonts
+% in the mini-tables was added. In December 1993, the minilofs and minilots were added.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Nouvelle conception en~1993}
+% Donc je décidai (en juin~1993, lorsque je repris le support du paquetage) de changer la méthode d'allocation
+% pour toujours utiliser le même descripteur de fichier pour tous les fichiers des mini-tables des matières.
+% Quelques améliorations majeures furent faites en 1993: l'addition du paquetage \pack{mtcoff} (\pack{minitocoff}
+% à~cette époque) et une ré-écriture
+% de \upack{minitoc} pour extraire les données depuis le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.toc}, avec un mécanisme de
+% sélection. Puis une première solution
+% pour le problème des suffixes courts fut ajoutée (encore manuelle). Un système élémentaire pour les fontes dans
+% les mini-tables fut ajouté. En décembre~1993, les minilofs et minilots furent ajoutées.
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Developments in~1994}
+% The first improvements in 1994 were about the formating of the mini-tables: spacing was improved and the position
+% of the title became ajustable (with the optional parameter of \com{minitoc} or \com{dominitoc}). But a major
+% addition was done: part-level mini-tables (parttocs, partlofs, partlots) and, for articles, section-level
+% mini-tables (secttocs, sectlofs, sectlots).
+%
+% With the emergence of \LaTeXe, replacing the ageing \LaTeX2.09, some work was necessary to support the
+% compatibility with this new version. This was not easy, but \name{Denis~B.}{Roegel} and \name{Frank}{Mittelbach} gave
+% me many helpful hints.
+%
+% Another major addition is the language option feature, with the concept of the \emph{minitoc language definition
+% file} (or \suffix{.mld} file), coming from the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user},
+% by \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}.
+% But at this time, these files were still named as \suffix{.sty} files.
+%
+% An important simplification is introduced by the notion of ``absolute numbering'', with avoids many problems when the
+% chapters are not numbered the standard way (consecutively, starting from~1, with arabic digits).
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Développements en~1994}
+% Les premières améliorations en 1994 concernaient la mise en forme des mini-tables: l'espacement fut ajusté et la
+% position du titre devient adaptable (avec le paramètre optionnel de \com{minitoc} ou \com{dominitoc}). Mais
+% une addition majeure fut faite: les mini-tables au niveau partie (parttocs, partlofs, partlots) et, pour les articles,
+% les mini-tables au niveau section (secttocs, sectlofs, sectlots).
+%
+% Avec l'émergence de \LaTeXe, remplaçant \LaTeX2.09 vieillissant, un certain travail était nécessaire pour
+% supporter la compatibilité avec la nouvelle version. Ce ne fut pas facile, mais \name{Denis~B.}{Roegel} et
+% \name{Frank}{Mittelbach} m'apportèrent bien des conseils utiles.
+%
+% Une autre addition majeure est le système des options de langue, avec le concept de fichier minitoc de définition de
+% langue (\emph{minitoc language definition file} ou fichier \suffix{.mld}), provenant du paquetage
+% \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}, de \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}.
+% Mais à~cette époque, ces fichiers étaient encore nommés comme des fichiers \suffix{.sty}.
+%
+% Une simplification importante est introduite par la notion de «~numérotation absolue~», qui évite de nombreux
+% problèmes lorsque les chapitres ne sont pas numérotés de manière standard (consécutivement, en commençant à~1, avec
+% des chiffres arabes).
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{No developments in~1995}
+% Sorry, I was busy with an other project.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Pas de développements en~1995}
+% Désolé, j'étais très occupé par un autre projet.
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Developments in~1996}
+% The very annoying problem with the starred sectionning commands received some (rather primitive) solutions, but it
+% is very complex, so manual interventions are often required.
+%
+% The names of the minitoc language definition files take now the extension \suffix{.mld}, more specific, and english
+% is the default language. Some new languages are added.
+%
+% The work on the starred sectionning commands continues.
+%
+% The \pack{minitocoff} companion package is renamed \pack{mtcoff} to keep its name short.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Développements en~1996}
+% Le très gênant problème avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées a reçu quelques solutions (assez primitives),
+% mais il est très complexe, donc des interventions manuelles sont souvent nécessaires.
+%
+% Les noms des fichiers minitoc de définition de langue prennent maintenant le suffixe \suffix{.mld},
+% plus spécifique, et l'anglais (\loptd{english}) est la langue par défaut. Quelques nouvelles langues sont
+% ajoutées (ceci continue autant que possible).
+%
+% Le travail sur les commandes de sectionnement étoilées continue.
+%
+% Le paquetage compagnon \pack{minitocoff} est renommé \pack{mtcoff} pour que son nom reste court.
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Developments in~1997}
+% The problem of short extensions for files names under some operating systems is addressed via the
+% new \opt{shortext} package option and by the new autoconfiguration feature.
+%
+% For the starred sectionning commands, the \com{addstarredchapter} command is added (with analog commands for starred
+% parts and sections).
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Développements en~1997}
+% Le problème des suffixes courts pour les noms de fichiers sous certains systèmes d'exploitation est résolu via la
+% nouvelle option de paquetage \opt{shortext} et le nouveau système d'autoconfiguration.
+%
+% Pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées, la commande \com{addstarredchapter} est ajoutée (avec des
+% commandes analogues pour les parties et sections étoilées).
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Developments in~1998}
+% The \opt{tight} and \optd{loose} package options are added to improve the line spacing in the mini-tables.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Développements en~1998}
+% Les options de paquetage \opt{tight} et \optd{loose} sont ajoutées pour changer l'interlignage dans les mini-tables.
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Developments in~1999}
+% The \optd{dotted} and \opt{undotted} package options are added to add or suppress some lines of dots
+% (leaders) in the mini-tables.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Développements en~1999}
+% Les options de paquetage \optd{dotted} et \opt{undotted} sont ajoutées pour activer ou inhiber certaines lignes de
+% points (points de conduite) dans les mini-tables.
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Developments in~2000}
+% A major addition is the compatibility with the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web}, and I~ought to thank
+% loudly \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} and \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}~\cite{minitoc-hyper}.
+%
+% Some corrections about the starred sectionning commands are added by \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}.
+%
+% The mini-tables features (\com{beforeparttoc} and co.) commands are added.
+%
+% Some adjustment commands, like \com{mtcaddchapter}, are added, again about the problem with the starred
+% sectionning commands.
+%
+% The\imess{I0046} compatibility with the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind} is documented.
+%
+% Aliases for some languages are added.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Développements en~2000}
+% Un ajout majeur est la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}, et je dois
+% remercier chaleureusement \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna},  \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} et
+% \xname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}~\cite{minitoc-hyper}.
+%
+% Quelques corrections concernant les commandes de sectionnement étoilées ont été apportées par \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}.
+%
+% Les commandes relatives aux dispositifs pour les (\com{beforeparttoc} et co.) ont été ajoutées.
+%
+% Quelques commandes d'adjustement, telles que \com{mtcaddchapter}, sont ajoutées, encore pour le problème des
+% commandes de sectionnement étoilées.
+%
+% La\imess{I0046} compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind} est documentée.
+%
+% Des alias pour certaines langues sont ajoutés.
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Developments in~2001}
+% Added the \optd{checkfiles} and \opt{nocheckfiles} package options, to avoid the insertion of (ugly) empty
+% mini-tables.
+%
+% Added the \com{mtcselectlanguage} command to change more easily the language of the mini-tables titles.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Développements en~2001}
+% Ajout des options de paquetage \optd{checkfiles} et \opt{nocheckfiles}, pour éviter d'insérer des minitables
+% vides (et laides).
+%
+% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcselectlanguage} pour changer plus facilement la langue des titres des mini-tables.
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Developments in~2002}
+% Correction of an interaction between \com{tableofcontents} (creating a hidden \com{chapter*} or
+% \com{section*} command) and the numbering of the mini-table files.
+%
+% Added the \com{mtcskip} and \com{mtcskipamount} commands.
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \section{Développements en~2002}
+% Correction d'une interaction entre \com{tableofcontents} (qui crée une commande \com{chapter*} ou
+% \com{section*} cachée) et la numérotation des fichiers mini-tables.
+%
+% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcskip} et \com{mtcskipamount}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Developments in~2003}
+% Added the \opt{insection} package option (which was temporarily done by the \opt{flsection} and \opt{flsectionb}
+% package options)
+% to deal with floats drifting out of their section. The \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} (by
+% \name{Donald}{Arseneau}) is used.
+%
+% The font commands are made compatible with the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}.
+%
+% Added compatibility with the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Développements en~2003}
+% Ajout de l'option de paquetage \opt{insection} (qui était temporairement réalisée par les options
+% de paquetage \opt{flsection}
+% et \opt{flsectionb}) pour traiter les éléments flottants dérivant hors de leur section. Le paquetage
+% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} (de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}) est utilisé.
+%
+% Les commandes de fontes sont rendues compatibles avec la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}.
+%
+% Ajout de la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Developments in~2004}
+% Added comments in the \suffix{.mld} files needing special fonts. Better documentation about languages.
+%
+% Added an explanation about making a local table of contents for an appendix, eventually masking it in the main
+% table of contents. Compatibility\imess{I0042} with the \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix}.
+%
+% A major addition is the \optd{hints} package option, to detect some programming and compatibility problems.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Développements en~2004}
+% Amélioration de la documentation sur les langues.
+%
+% Ajout d'une explication sur la manière de faire une table des matières locale pour un appendice, éventuellement en
+% la masquant dans la table des matières principale. Compatibilité\imess{I0042} avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix}.
+%
+% Un ajout majeur est l'option de paquetage \optd{hints}, pour détecter certains problèmes de programmation et de
+% compatibilité.
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \section{Developments in~2005}
+% All messages are now written via the standard interface commands (\com{PackageInfo}, \com{PackageWarning}, and
+% \com{PackageError}), so the \upack{minitoc} package is less verbose on the terminal.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Added the \com{mtcsetfont} and \com{mtcsettitlefont} commands (from a suggestion by \xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}) to
+% replace many font commands by only one command with a better user interface.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% Comments about the \AmS\ classes (some ones are incompatible with \upack{minitoc}).
+%
+% Added the \com{mtcsetformat} and \com{mtcsettitle} commands, again to have a simpler user interface.
+%
+% Added various hints (\opt{insection} package option, order of minitoc basic commands, short extensions).
+%
+% Added the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and \com{mtcsetrules} commands, again to have a simpler user interface.
+%
+% Added the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment, to hide a group of entries in the main table of contents; added
+% also the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments.
+%
+% Added the \com{mtcfixindex} and \com{mtcsettitle} commands.
+%
+% Added the description of the installation of the package (a new chapter and the file \xfile{INSTALL}).
+%
+% Improved and added hints about consistency of \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} and co.
+%
+% Added the \com{mtcsetfeature} command (very complex).
+%
+% Added a hint about the \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}.
+%
+% The \upack{minitoc} package is now written using the \suffix{.dtx}-\suffix{.ins} system.
+% Some cleanup is done in the code.
+%
+% Added the \com{mtcfixglossary} command, like \com{mtcfixindex}.
+%
+% Some improvements are made to print the documentation.
+%
+% Some new hints are added (\pack{sectsty}\imess{I0043} package~\cite{sectsty}, empty mini-tables, obsolete commands).
+%
+% Added the notion of depth for mini-tables of figures/tables. Added the \com{mtcsetdepth} command.
+%
+% The \optd{hints} package option is now the default.
+%
+% Added a method for making a bilingual documentation in one file (the \xfile{minitoc.dtx} file). This method could be used
+% for more languages.
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Added or improved some adjustement commands (\com{adjustptc}, \com{incrementptc}, \com{decrementptc}, etc.).
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% Added the \opt{k-tight} and \optd{k-loose} package options, for the \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} document classes.
+%
+% Added a patch for the recent version of the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}.
+%
+% Use \com{mtcselectlanguage} in language options and in ``secondary'' \suffix{.mld} files.
+%
+% Added the \com{mtcloadmlo} command to be used in some \suffix{.mld} files to load a \suffix{.mlo} file. The
+% extension \suffix{.mlo} means \emph{minitoc language object}; such files contains characters not easily
+% manipulated in a \suffix{.dtx} file.
+%
+% The history of changes is now displayed in a much simpler way (using a glossary was too cumbersome).
+%
+% Added the \optd{listfiles} package option, to create a list of the minitoc auxiliary files, which can be removed after
+% the \LaTeX\ compilation of the document. It is the \emph{document}\suffix{.maf} file.
+%
+% Added a remark in the FAQ chapter (and \xfile{minitoc.bug}) about precautions to take with the starred
+% sectionning commands.
+%
+% Added hints about the \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption}, and \pack{mcaption} packages
+% (they must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
+%
+% A ``Jargon'' chapter is added. It will grow slowly.
+%
+% Added a note about a problem with \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} and \class{memoir} used together.
+%
+% Some bugs in the \verb|\mtcset...| commands are fixed.
+%
+% Added a hint about the \pack{varsects}\imess{W0038} package~\cite{varsects}.
+%
+% Added a hint on the number of mini-tables when short extensions are used.
+%
+% Added a chapter with all the (explained) messages.
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \section{Développements en~2005}
+% Tous les messages sont désormais écrits via les commandes de l'interface standard (\com{PackageInfo},
+% \com{PackageWarning} et \com{PackageError}), donc le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est moins bavard sur le terminal.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetfont} et \com{mtcsettitlefont} (d'après une suggestion de \xname{Benjamin}{Bayart})
+% pour remplacer de nombreuses commandes de fontes par une seule commande avec une meilleure interface avec
+% l'utilisateur.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% Commentaires sur les classes de l'\AmS\ (certaines sont incompatibles avec \upack{minitoc}).
+%
+% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetformat} et \com{mtcsettitle}, encore pour avoir une meilleure interface avec
+% l'utilisateur.
+%
+% Ajout de divers \emph{hints} (option de paquetage \opt{insection}, ordre des commandes minitoc basiques, suffixes
+% courts).
+%
+% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et \com{mtcsetrules}, encore pour avoir une meilleure interface
+% avec l'utilisateur.
+%
+% Ajout de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}, pour masquer un groupe d'entrées dans la table des matières
+% principale; ajout aussi des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}.
+%
+% Ajout des commandes \com{mtcfixindex} et \com{mtcsettitle}.
+%
+% Ajout d'une description de l'installation du paquetage (un nouveau chapitre et le fichier \xfile{INSTALL}).
+%
+% \emph{Hints} améliorés et ajoutés sur la cohérence des commandes \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} et co.
+%
+% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcsetfeature} (très complexe).
+%
+% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}.
+%
+% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est maintenant écrit en utilisant le système \suffix{.dtx}-\suffix{.ins}. Un peu de
+% nettoyage a été fait dans le code.
+%
+% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcfixglossary}, analoque à~\com{mtcfixindex}.
+%
+% Quelques améliorations sont faites pour l'impression de la documentation.
+%
+% Ajout de quelques nouveaux \emph{hints} (paquetage\imess{I0043} \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty}, mini-tables vides, commandes
+% obsolètes).
+%
+% Ajout de la notion de profondeur pour les mini-tables des figures/tableaux. Ajout de la commande \com{mtcsetdepth}.
+%
+% L'option de paquetage \optd{hints} est maintenant le choix par défaut.
+%
+% Ajout d'une méthode pour faire une documentation bilingue en un seul fichier (le fichier \xfile{minitoc.dtx}).
+% Cette méthode pourrait être utilisée pour plusieurs langues.
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Ajout ou amélioration de quelques commandes d'ajustement (\com{adjustptc}, \com{incrementptc},
+% \com{decrementptc}, etc.).
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{k-tight} et \optd{k-loose}, pour les classes de document
+% \KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}.
+%
+% Ajout d'une correction (\emph{patch}) pour une version récente de la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}.
+%
+% Utilisation de \com{mtcselectlanguage} dans les options de langue et dans les fichiers \suffix{.mld}
+% «~secondaires~».
+%
+% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcloadmlo} à~utiliser dans certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour charger un fichier
+% \suffix{.mlo}. Le suffixe \suffix{.mlo} signifie \emph{minitoc language object} (objet de langage minitoc); de
+% tels fichiers contiennent des caractères qui ne sont pas faciles à~manipuler dans un fichier \suffix{.dtx}.
+%
+% L'historique des modifications est maintenant imprimé d'une manière bien plus simple (utiliser un glossaire était
+% trop pénible).
+%
+% Ajout de l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}, pour créer une liste des fichiers auxiliaires de minitoc, qui
+% peuvent être éliminés après la compilation \LaTeX\ du document. C'est le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.
+%
+% Ajout d'une remarque dans le chapitre des questions fréquemment posées (et dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.bug})
+% sur les précautions à~prendre avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées.
+%
+% Ajout de \emph{hints} sur les paquetages \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption} et \pack{mcaption}
+% (ils doivent être chargés \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
+%
+% Un chapitre «~Jargon~» est ajouté. Il grossira lentement.
+%
+% Ajout d'une note sur un problème avec \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} et \class{memoir} utilisés ensemble.
+%
+% Quelques erreurs dans les commandes \verb|\mtcset...| sont corrigées.
+%
+% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0038}\pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects}.
+%
+% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le nombre de mini-tables lorsque les suffixes courts sont utilisés.
+%
+% Ajout d'un chapitre avec tous les messages (expliqués).
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \section{Developments in~2006}
+% Added the ``\texttt{*}'' keyword as first argument of the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and \com{mtcsetrules}
+% command, to get an action on all kinds of mini-tables.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% Corrections in the \com{mtcaddsection}, \com{mtcfixglossary}, and \com{mtcfixindex} commands.
+%
+% In the PDF documentation, the panel of bookmarks shows initialy only the bookmarks for parts and chapters, but you
+% can open them to show deeper entries.
+%
+% Added a comment about the initialization of fonts in the FAQ (point~34). It is still an open domain and I am
+% working on it.
+%
+% Added a hint about the \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript{} classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, and an entry in the FAQ chapter
+% (and in \xfile{minitoc.bug}).
+%
+% Added the ``Postface'' chapter.
+%
+% Added the \com{mtcprepare} command.
+%
+% Added an~\texttt{URL} field in the bibliography (the styles are modified with the \tool{urlbst} tool~\cite{urlbst}).
+%
+% Added the \pack{mtcmess} package to add unique identifiers to the messages.
+%
+% Suppressed the PostScript documentation files from the distribution (no more accepted on CTAN archives), but the
+% scripts still creates them.
+%
+% Corrections in the \opt{insection} package option.
+%
+% Reordering of the chapters in the user's manual (part~I).
+%
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Développements en~2006}
+% Ajout du mot-clé «~\texttt{*}~» comme premier argument des commandes \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et \com{mtcsetrules},
+% pour avoir une action sur toutes les sortes de mini-tables.
+%
+% \begin{raggedright}
+% Corrections dans les commandes \com{mtcaddsection}, \com{mtcfixglossary} et \com{mtcfixindex}.
+%
+% \end{raggedright}
+% Dans la documentation en PDF, le panneau des signets (panneau de gauche) ne montre initialement que les signets
+% pour les parties et les chapitres, mais vous pouvez les ouvrir pour accéder aux entrées plus profondes.
+%
+% Ajout d'un commentaire sur l'initialisation des fontes dans le chapitre des questions fréquemment posées (point~34).
+% C'est encore un sujet ouvert et je travaille dessus.
+%
+% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les classes \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, et d'une note dans le chapitre des questions
+% fréquemment posées (et dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}).
+%
+% Ajout du chapitre «~Postface~».
+%
+% Ajout de la commande \com{mtcprepare}.
+%
+% Ajout d'un champ \texttt{URL} dans la bibliographie (les styles ont été modifiés à~l'aide de l'outil
+% \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}).
+%
+% Ajout du paquetage \pack{mtcmess} pour ajouter des identificateurs uniques aux messages.
+%
+% Suppression des fichiers de documentation en format PostScript dans la distribution (ils ne sont plus acceptés
+% sur les archives CTAN), mais les scripts les créent encore.
+%
+% Corrections dans l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}.
+%
+% Ré-ordonnancement des chapitres du manuel de l'utilisateur (partie~I).
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Developments in~2007}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Développements en~2007}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%   Removed the preparation of documentation in PostScript format.
+%
+%   Added the \scrp{cmk} script to convert the documentation from PDF format to PostScript format.
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{raggedright}
+% Added hints about the\SMM{\lmess{W0086}\\\lmess{W0087}\\\lmess{W0088}\\\lmess{W0089}\\\lmess{W0090}}
+% \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap},
+% \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap},
+% \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum},
+% \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders},
+% \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec},
+% and
+% \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont} packages.
+%
+% \end{raggedright}
+%
+% \begin{raggedright}
+% Added FAQ~44 and the \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} and \com{mtcgapafterheads} formatting commands.
+%
+% \end{raggedright}
+% Added the chapter~\ref{c+exdocs}, ``Examples of documents'', page~\pageref{c+exdocs}.
+%
+% Added FAQ~45 and the \com{kernafterparttoc} and co. commands for the vertical space between a minitable and
+% its bottom rule.
+%
+% Increased the text width and adjusted the format of the entries in the TOC in the documentation.
+%
+% Correction of the preamble in the generated files (spurious lines have been eliminated, at least).
+%
+% Added \xfile{devanagari.mld} and \xfile{hindi.mld}.
+% Added \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}.
+%
+% The bibliographic styles \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} and \xfile{frplain1.bst} are renamed \xfile{en-mtc.bst} and
+% \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}.
+%
+% All example documents are renamed with names beginning with ``\uexam{mtc-}''.
+%
+% The ``\optd{listfiles}'' package option is active by default.
+%
+% Better error messages about undefined preparation and insertion commands.
+%
+% Added \xfile{japanese6.mld} and \xfile{japanese6.mlo}.
+%
+% Added a hint about the \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption}.
+%
+% Added (in the memento) a table of the classes and packages which are incompatible or need precautions with
+%       \upack{minitoc}.
+%
+% Added a validation of the language options with the presence of the \suffix{.mld} and \suffix{.mlo} files.
+%
+% Added the \scrp{tmk} script and a table describing a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant structure for \upack{minitoc}.
+%
+% Updated the \xfile{INSTALL} file and the ``Installation'' chapter.
+%
+% Added the file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (a ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy of all files of
+% the package) to the distribution.
+%
+% Improving the index (entries for: packages and classes, scripts, tools, names, examples, extensions, option,
+%         language options).
+%
+% The names of some internal macros are shortened to fit into the margin.
+%
+% Indexing the environments and the files.
+%
+% Indexing the counters and depth counters.
+%
+% The example files are in their own directory in the (proposed) \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy.
+%
+% Indexing referenced commands (begin).
+%
+% Added \xfile{mongolb.mld} and \xfile{mongolb.mlo}.
+%
+% Removed \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (new T2 and X2 cyrillic encodings in \xfile{mongolb.mld}).
+%
+% Added the \exam{mtc-3co.tex} example file.
+%
+% Added \xfile{mongolian.mld} (loads \xfile{mongolb.mld}).
+%
+% Improved the layout of the index.
+%
+% Indexing the names of authors.
+%
+% Added the \exam{mtc-fko.tex} example file.
+%
+% Bibliographic references for packages and classes in the index.
+%
+% Features in the index.
+%
+% Added the ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features.
+%
+% Added the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file.
+%
+% Added the ``\com{mtcfixnomenclature}'' command.
+%
+% Added the \exam{mtc-nom.tex} example file.
+%
+% Corrected the last argument of \com{mtcsetfeature} and siblings, using \com{mtc@toks}.
+%
+% Indexing the messages. Messages noted in the right margin.
+%
+% Added \xfile{latinc.mld} and \xfile{latinc2.mld} for classical latin.
+%
+% Added internal hyperlinks for messages.
+%
+% Added \com{mtcoffset} and co. for an horizontal offset of a mini-table.
+%
+% Added \com{mtcsetoffset} for an horizontal offset of a mini-table type.
+%
+% Added the \exam{mtc-ofs.tex} example file.
+%
+% Added flagging of macros in example files.
+%
+% Added a clickable table of all messages.
+%
+% Added a local minitoc in the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%
+% Added \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}.
+%
+% Added \xfile{latvian2.mld} and \xfile{letton2.mld}.
+%
+% Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} about the \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide}
+%       package (incompatible).
+%
+% Added a \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} about the \pack{float}~\cite{float},
+%       \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages.
+%
+% Regrouping some marginal notes about messages; improving their positions.
+%
+% Corrected a bug about minitocs in appendices for the \class{memoir} class.
+%
+% Changed the color of hyperlinks.
+%
+% Revised the format of headers.
+%
+% Corrected some \verb|\mtcset...| commands to use \com{edef} to correctly evaluate \com{mtc@toks}.
+%
+% Added \xfile{swahili.mld}.
+%
+% Added stuff (files) for maps of areas of some languages.
+%
+% Added the \lopt{bengali} language synonym of \lopt{bangla}.
+%
+% Split the list of files into two tables (tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}).
+%
+% Replaced the \suffix{.mtc1} extension by \suffix{.mtc0} in the auto-configuration test (to avoid
+%         erasing (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1} file).
+%
+% Corrected a problem with \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}).
+%
+% The acknowledgements are moved to the ``Complements'' part.
+%
+% Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099} about the \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc} package.
+%
+% Complete indexing of the messages.
+%
+% Updated \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}.
+%
+% Using the \pack{chngpage} package~\cite{chngpage} to make increase the width of the pages of the bibliography.
+%
+% Renamed \ucom{if@longextensions@} as \com{if@mtc@longext@}.
+%
+% Updated \xfile{czech.mld}.
+%
+% Removed \ucom{l@xsection}.
+%
+% Graphic files are indexed separately.
+%
+% Added a specific directory for image files in the TDS hierarchy.
+%
+% Updated \xfile{galician.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld}, and \xfile{usorbian.mld}.
+%
+% Added \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld},
+% and \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}.
+%
+% Updated \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}.
+%
+% Suppressed parasite entries from the index.
+%
+% Added \xfile{occitan.mld}.
+%
+% Updated \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld},
+%         \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld},
+%         \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld}, and \xfile{turkish.mld}.
+%
+% \or\relax
+%   Retrait de la préparation de la documentation en format PostScript.
+%
+%   Ajout du script \scrp{cmk} pour convertir la documentation du format PDF en format PostScript.
+%
+% \begin{raggedright}
+% Ajout de \emph{hints}\SMM{\lmess{W0086}\\\lmess{W0087}\\\lmess{W0088}\\\lmess{W0089}\\\lmess{W0090}} sur les paquetages
+% \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap},
+% \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap},
+% \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum},
+% \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders},
+% \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec}
+% et
+% \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont}.
+%
+% \end{raggedright}
+%
+% \begin{raggedright}
+% Ajout du point~44 de la FAQ et des commandes de mise en page \com{mtcgapbeforeheads}
+% et \com{mtcgapafterheads}.
+%
+% \end{raggedright}
+% Ajout du chapitre~\ref{c+exdocs}, «~Exemples de documents~», page~\pageref{c+exdocs}.
+%
+% Ajout du point~45 de la FAQ et des commandes \com{kernafterparttoc} et analogues pour l'espacement vertical
+% entre une minitable et son filet inférieur.
+%
+% Augmentation de la largeur du texte et ajustement du format des entrées dans la table des matières pour la
+% documentation.
+%
+% Correction du préambule des fichiers engendrés (les lignes superflues ont été enfin éliminées).
+%
+% Ajout de \xfile{devanagari.mld} et \xfile{hindi.mld}.
+% Ajout de \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}.
+%
+% Les styles bibliographiques \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} et \xfile{frplain1.bst} sont renommés \xfile{en-mtc.bst} et
+% \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}.
+%
+% Tous les exemples de documents sont renommés avec des noms commençant par «~\uexam{mtc-}~».
+%
+% L'option de paquetage «~\optd{listfiles}~» est active par défaut.
+%
+% Meilleurs messages d'erreur pour les commandes de préparation et d'insertion non définies.
+%
+% Ajout de \xfile{japanese6.mld} et \xfile{japanese6.mlo}.
+%
+% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption}.
+%
+% Ajout (dans le mémento) d'un tableau des classes et paquetages qui sont incompatibles ou ont besoin de
+%       précautions avec \upack{minitoc}.
+%
+% Ajout d'une validation des options de langue avec la présence des fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo}.
+%
+% Ajout du script \scrp{tmk} et d'un tableau décrivant une structure \index{TDS}TDS pour \upack{minitoc}.
+%
+% Mise à~jour du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et du chapitre «~Installation~».
+%
+% Ajout du fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS et contenant tous
+% les fichiers du paquetage) à~la distribution.
+%
+% Amélioration de l'index (entrées pour: paquetages et classes, scripts, outils, noms, exemples, suffixes, options,
+%         options de langue).
+%
+% Les noms de certaines macros internes sont raccourcis pour tenir dans la marge.
+%
+% Indexation des environnements et fichiers.
+%
+% Indexation des compteurs et compteurs de profondeur.
+%
+% Les fichiers exemples sont dans leur propre répertoire de la hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS (proposée).
+%
+% Indexation des commandes référencées (début).
+%
+% Ajout de \xfile{mongolb.mld} et \xfile{mongolb.mlo}.
+%
+% Retrait de \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (nouveaux codages cyrilliques T2 et X2 dans \xfile{mongolb.mld}).
+%
+% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-3co.tex}.
+%
+% Amélioration de la mise en page de l'index.
+%
+% Ajout de \xfile{mongolian.mld} (charge \xfile{mongolb.mld}).
+%
+% Indexation des noms des auteurs.
+%
+% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-fko.tex}.
+%
+% Références bibliographiques pour les paquetages et les classes dans l'index.
+%
+% Dispositifs dans l'index.
+%
+% Ajout des dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~».
+%
+% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}.
+%
+% Ajout de la commande «~\com{mtcfixnomenclature}~».
+%
+% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-nom.tex}.
+%
+% Correction du dernier argument de \com{mtcsetfeature} et analogues, en utilisant \com{mtc@toks}.
+%
+% Indexation des messages. Messages notés dans la marge de droite.
+%
+% Ajout de \xfile{latinc.mld} et \xfile{latinc2.mld} pour le latin classique.
+%
+% Ajout d'hyperliens internes pour les messages.
+%
+% Ajout de \com{mtcoffset} et consorts pour un décalage horizontal d'une mini-table.
+%
+% Ajout de \com{mtcsetoffset} pour un décalage horizontal d'un type de mini-table.
+%
+% Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}.
+%
+% Ajout du marquage des macros dans les fichiers exemples.
+%
+% Ajout d'une table cliquable de tous les messages.
+%
+% Ajout d'une minitoc locale dans le chapitre <<~Jargon~>>.
+%
+% Ajout de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}.
+%
+% Ajout de \xfile{latvian2.mld} et \xfile{letton2.mld}.
+%
+% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} sur le
+%       paquetage \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} (incompatible).
+%
+% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} sur les paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float},
+%       \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}.
+%
+% Regroupement de notes marginales concernant des messages; amélioration de leur placement.
+%
+% Correction d'un problème sur les minitocs dans les appendices pour la classe \class{memoir}.
+%
+% Changement de la couleur des hyperliens.
+%
+% Correction de quelques commandes \verb|\mtcset...| pour utiliser \com{edef} afin d'évaluer correctement \com{mtc@toks}.
+%
+% Changement du format des en-têtes.
+%
+% Ajout de \xfile{swahili.mld}.
+%
+% Ajout de ce qu'il faut (fichiers) pour des figures (cartes) de régions où certaines langues sont parlées.
+%
+% Ajout de la langue \lopt{bengali}, synonyme de \lopt{bangla}.
+%
+% Éclatement de la liste des fichiers en deux tableaux (tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}).
+%
+% Remplacement du suffixe \suffix{.mtc1} par \suffix{.mtc0} dans le test d'auto-configuration (pour éviter
+%         d'écraser le fichier (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1}).
+%
+% Correction d'un problème avec \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}).
+%
+% Les remerciements sont déplacés vers la partie «~Compléments~».
+%
+% Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099}
+%        à~propos du paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc}.
+%
+% Indexation complète des messages.
+%
+% Mise à~jour de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}.
+%
+% Utilisation du paquetage \pack{chngpage}~\cite{chngpage} pour élargir les pages de la bibliographie.
+%
+% Renommage de \ucom{if@longextensions@} en \com{if@mtc@longext@}.
+%
+% Mise à~jour de \xfile{czech.mld}.
+%
+% Suppression de \ucom{l@xsection}.
+%
+% Les fichiers graphiques sont indexés séparément.
+%
+% Ajout d'un répertoire spécifique pour les fichiers images dans la hiérarchie TDS.
+%
+% Mise à~jour de \xfile{galician.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld} et \xfile{usorbian.mld}.
+%
+% Ajout de \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld} et
+% \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}.
+%
+% Mise à~jour de \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}.
+%
+% Suppression d'entrées parasites dans l'index.
+%
+% Ajout de \xfile{occitan.mld}.
+%
+% Mise à~jour de \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld},
+%      \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld},
+%      \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld} et \xfile{turkish.mld}.
+%
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Developments in~2008}
+% Corrected \xfile{polski.mld}.
+%
+% Added table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}.
+%
+% Added many maps about languages and dialects, etc.
+%
+% Better captions for maps.
+%
+% Added an entry for the Wikipedia in the jargon.
+%
+% Splitted the TDS hierarchy into three tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}.
+%
+% The page numbers in the index are now hyperlinks (thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}).
+%
+% Colors added in figure~\vref{f+barrier}.
+%
+% Corrected an error of message number.
+%
+% Updated from the \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j of 2008/03/16.
+%
+% Used \ucom{vrefrange} to compress ranges of internal cross-references.
+%
+% Added flags for many countries.
+%
+% Added a figure about lusophonia.
+%
+% Added a figure about germanophonia.
+%
+% Added a figure about hispanophonia.
+%
+% Added a figure about italophonia.
+%
+% Added a minitoc in the index to make it easier to consult (not trivial).
+%
+% Added figures about francophones countries.
+%
+% Added a figure about swahili-speaking countries.
+%
+% Added a figure about arabic-speaking countries.
+%
+% Added a figure about russian-speaking countries.
+%
+% Added a figure about english-speaking countries.
+%
+% Added flags \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot},
+% \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot},
+% \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof}, and \com{ifinsectlot}.
+%
+% Added example document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}.
+%
+% Added commands for polymorphic entries: \com{mtcpolymtoc}, \com{mtcpolymlof}, and \com{mtcpolymlot}.
+%
+% Added a figure about dutch-speaking countries.
+%
+% Renamed \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} and consorts as \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} and consorts.
+%
+% Added missing flag files (thanks to \namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}).
+%
+% Replaced many \suffix{.pdf} image files (most of them are flag files) by the original \suffix{.png} file
+% because they were corrupted during the conversion by \tool{ImageMagick} (\tool{xpdf} didnt see the problem but
+% \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuses to show the file); many thanks to \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}
+% and \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}.
+%
+% Back to standard colors and default \pack{hyperref} color options.
+%
+% ^^A MAJ-E
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Développements en~2008}
+% Correction de \xfile{polski.mld}.
+%
+% Ajout de nombreuses cartes pour les langues et les dialectes, etc.
+%
+% Ajout de la table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}.
+%
+% Amélioration des légendes des cartes.
+%
+% Ajout d'une entrée pour la Wikipédia dans le jargon.
+%
+% Éclatement de la hiérarchie TDS en trois tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}.
+%
+% Les numéros de pages dans l'index sont maintenant des hyperliens (grâce à~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}).
+%
+% Ajout de couleurs dans la figure~\vref{f+barrier}.
+%
+% Correction d'une erreur de numéro de message.
+%
+% Mise à~jour depuis le paquetage \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j du 2008/03/16.
+%
+% Utilisation de \ucom{vrefrange} pour compresser les intervales de références croisées internes.
+%
+% Ajout des drapeaux de nombreux pays.
+%
+% Ajout d'une figure sur la lusophonie.
+%
+% Ajout d'une figure sur la germanophonie.
+%
+% Ajout d'une figure sur l'hispanophonie.
+%
+% Ajout d'une figure sur l'italophonie.
+%
+% Ajout d'une minitoc dans l'index pour faciliter sa consultation (pas trivial).
+%
+% Ajout de figures sur les pays francophones.
+%
+% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le swahili.
+%
+% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'arabe.
+%
+% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le russe.
+%
+% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'anglais.
+%
+% Ajout des indicateurs \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot},
+% \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot},
+% \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof} et \com{ifinsectlot}.
+%
+% Ajout de l'exemple de document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}.
+%
+% Ajout de commandes pour les entrées polymorphes: \com{mtcpolymtoc}, \com{mtcpolymlof} et \com{mtcpolymlot}.
+%
+% Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le néerlandais.
+%
+% Renommage de \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} et consorts en \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} et consorts.
+%
+% Ajout de fichiers drapeaux manquants (merci à~\namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}).
+%
+% Remplacement de nombreux fichiers images \suffix{.pdf} (la plupart étant des fichiers drapeaux)
+% par le fichier \suffix{.png} parce qu'ils ont été corrompus lors de la conversion par \tool{ImageMagick}
+% (\tool{xpdf} ne voit pas le problème mais \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuse de montrer le fichier);
+% grands mercis à~\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} et \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}.
+%
+% Retour aux couleurs standard et aux options de couleur standard de \pack{hyperref}.
+%
+% ^^A MAJ-F
+% \fi
+% \par\end{RaggedRight}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \part{Implementation}\label{p+ID}
+% \or\relax
+% \part{Implantation}\label{p+ID}
+% \fi
+% ^^A FIX INDEX?
+% \let\macro\svmacro
+% \let\endmacro\svendmacro
+% \let\environment\svenvironment
+% \let\endenvironment\svendenvironment
+% \makeatletter
+% \def\macro{\begingroup
+%     \catcode`\\12
+%     \MakePrivateLetters \m@cro@ \iftrue}
+% \def\environment{\begingroup
+%     \catcode`\\12
+%     \MakePrivateLetters \m@cro@ \iffalse}
+% \let\endmacro \endtrivlist
+% \let\endenvironment\endmacro
+% \makeatother
+% ^^A FIX INDEX?
+% \parttoc
+% ^^A \partlof
+% ^^A \partlot
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{Commented code of the \upack{minitoc} package}\label{c+code+minitoc.sty}\ipack{minitoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{Code commenté du paquetage \upack{minitoc}}\label{c+code+minitoc.sty}\ipack{minitoc}
+% \fi
+% \minitoc
+% \mtcskip
+% \lneed{4}
+% \minilof
+% \mtcskip
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \section{Introduction}\label{s+code+intro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This very long chapter presents the code of the \upack{minitoc} package and attempts to explain it.
+% Some comments of the original source file\,\footnote{The source file of version~\#42. Version~\#43 includes the
+% conversion of the package to \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.dtx-.ins} format.
+% Version~\#42 has not been distributed because of that.}
+% are skipped, like the history, because they do not need further examination (they will be put in the change history).
+%
+% The code is split in sections to make the reading easier, and the sections are sometimes reordered to make the reading
+% easier.
+%
+% Most of the \upack{minitoc} external commands have \texttt{mtc}, \texttt{ptc}, \texttt{stc}, or one of the
+% mini-table names (\texttt{parttoc},\ldots, \texttt{sectlot}) in their names.
+% Most of the \upack{minitoc} internal commands
+% have \texttt{@mtc}, \texttt{@ptc}, \texttt{@stc}, or \texttt{parttoc@},\ldots, \texttt{sectlot@} in their names, or
+% a similar convention. The few exceptions should be explicit enough to not conflict with other packages.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce très long chapitre présente le code du paquetage \upack{minitoc} et tente de l'expliquer.
+% Certains commentaires du fichier source original\,\footnote{C'est-à-dire, celui de la version~\#42. La
+% version~\#43 inclut la conversion du paquetage au format \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}\usuffix{.dtx/.ins}.
+% La version~\#42 n'a pas été distribuée pour cette raison.} sont sautés,
+% comme l'historique, car ils n'ont pas besoin d'être examinés davantage (ils seront mis dans l'historique des
+% modifications).
+%
+% Le code est éclaté en sections pour faciliter la lecture, et ces sections sont parfois réordonnées, dans ce même
+% but.
+%
+% La plupart des commandes externes de \upack{minitoc} ont \texttt{mtc}, \texttt{ptc}, \texttt{stc}
+% ou le nom de l'un des types de mini-tables (\texttt{parttoc},\ldots, \texttt{sectlot}) dans leurs noms. La plupart
+% des commandes internes de \upack{minitoc} ont \texttt{@mtc}, \texttt{@ptc}, \texttt{@stc} ou \texttt{parttoc@},\ldots,
+% \texttt{sectlot@} dans leurs noms, ou suivent une convention similaire. Les quelques exceptions devraient être
+% assez explicites pour ne pas entrer en conflit avec d'autres paquetages.
+% \fi
+%
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Identification code}\label{s+code+ident}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Code d'identification}\label{s+code+ident}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{9.375mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The code
+% of \xfile{minitoc.sty} starts here:
+% \or\relax
+% Le code
+% de \xfile{minitoc.sty} commence ici:
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*minitoc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\NeedsTeXFormat}
+% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesPackage}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageInfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This\SMM{\lmess{I0000}\\\lmess{I0001}} code section identifies the package with its name, version number and date.
+% A trace is written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. This package will not work with \LaTeX2.09.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette\SMM{\lmess{I0000}\\\lmess{I0001}} section de code identifie le paquetage par son nom, son numéro de version
+% et sa date. Une trace est écrite dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}.
+% Ce paquetage ne fonctionnera pas avec \LaTeX2.09.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/02]%
+\ProvidesPackage{minitoc}%
+   [2018/07/12 v62 Package minitoc] % message I0000
+\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14]
+\mtcPackageInfo[I0001]{minitoc}%
+   {*** minitoc package, version 62 ***\@gobble}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{A file descriptor to write}\label{s+code+fd-write}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Un descripteur de fichier pour écrire}\label{s+code+fd-write}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\newwrite}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A file descriptor is needed to write the files containing the mini-tables, it is \com{tf@mtc}.
+% The \upack{minitoc} package uses only one file descriptor for writing. See section~\vref{s+code+autoconf}.
+% \or\relax
+% Un descripteur de fichier est nécessaire pour écrire les fichiers contenant les mini-tables, c'est \com{tf@mtc}.
+% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} utilise un seul descripteur de fichier en écriture. Voir la
+% section~\vref{s+code+autoconf}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newwrite\tf@mtc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Indentation and skip}\label{s+code+indent.skip}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Indentation et saut}\label{s+code+indent.skip}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskipamount}
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\addvspace}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the indentation \com{mtcindent} (both sides) of the mini-tables and the
+% command \com{mtcskip} to make a vertical skip before a mini-table, its value is \com{mtcskipamount}
+% (default: \com{bigskipamount}).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons l'indentation \com{mtcindent} (des deux côtés) des mini-tables et la commande
+% \com{mtcskip} pour faire un saut vertical avant une mini-table, sa valeur est \com{mtcskipamount}
+% (défaut: \com{bigskipamount}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\mtcindent
+\newskip\mtcskipamount
+\setlength{\mtcskipamount}{\bigskipamount}
+\def\mtcskip{{\parskip=\z@\addvspace{\mtcskipamount}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Note that \com{mtcskip} uses a local group to avoid the influence of \com{parskip}.
+% \or\relax
+% Notez que \com{mtcskip} utilise un groupe local pour éviter l'influence de \com{parskip}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the default values for the vertical gaps before and after titles part level mini-tables.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons les valeurs par défaut pour les sauts verticaux avant et après les titres des mini-tables au
+% niveau partie.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtcgapbeforeheads{50\p@}
+\def\mtcgapafterheads{40\p@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernafterparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the vertical kernings between the minitables and their before the bottom rule.
+% The names of these macros is rather explicit. The values are empirical and can be changed via \com{renewcommand}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons les crênages verticaux placés entre les minitables et leurs filets horizontaux inférieurs.
+% Les noms de ces macros sont assez explicites. Les valeurs sont empiriques et peuvent être changées
+% via \com{renewcommand}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     \@ifundefined{part}{}{%
+        \def\kernafterparttoc{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
+        \def\kernafterpartlof{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
+        \def\kernafterpartlot{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
+                          }%
+     \@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+        \@ifundefined{section}{}%
+                              {%
+            \def\kernaftersecttoc{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
+            \def\kernaftersectlof{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
+            \def\kernaftersectlot{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
+                              }%
+                           }%
+                           {%
+            \def\kernafterminitoc{\kern-.5\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
+            \def\kernafterminilof{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern0.ex}%
+            \def\kernafterminilot{\kern-1.\baselineskip\kern0.ex}%
+                           }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\pfloffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\sfloffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltoffset}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We defines horizontal offets by which the margins in the mini-tables are corrected (added to the right margin and
+% substracted from the left margin). These are \emph{commands}, \emph{not} lengths\,\footnote{We avoid to
+% allocate a precious length register.}, to be redefined by \com{renewcommand}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons les décalages horizontaux servant à~corriger les marges dans les mini-tables (ajout à~la marge
+% gauche et retrait à~la marge droite). Ce sont des \emph{commandes}, \emph{pas} des longueurs\,\footnote{Nous
+% évitons d'allouer un précieux registre de longueur.}, à~redéfinir via \com{renewcommand}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     \@ifundefined{part}{}{%
+        \def\ptcoffset{0pt}%
+        \def\plfoffset{0pt}%
+        \def\pltoffset{0pt}%
+                          }%
+     \@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+        \@ifundefined{section}{}%
+                              {%
+            \def\stcoffset{0pt}%
+            \def\slfoffset{0pt}%
+            \def\sltoffset{0pt}%
+                              }%
+                           }%
+                           {%
+            \def\mtcoffset{0pt}%
+            \def\mlfoffset{0pt}%
+            \def\mltoffset{0pt}%
+                           }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We defines flags which will be true when inside a mini-table of the matching type, false outside.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons des indicateurs qui seront vrais à~l'intérieur d'une mini-table du type correspondant, faux
+% à~l'extérieur.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifinparttoc\inparttocfalse%
+\newif\ifinpartlof\inpartloffalse%
+\newif\ifinpartlot\inpartlotfalse%
+\newif\ifinsecttoc\insecttocfalse%
+\newif\ifinsectlof\insectloffalse%
+\newif\ifinsectlot\insectlotfalse%
+\newif\ifinminitoc\inminitocfalse%
+\newif\ifinminilof\inminiloffalse%
+\newif\ifinminilot\inminilotfalse%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Tests and flags}\label{s+code+test-flags}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Tests et indicateurs}\label{s+code+test-flags}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We need to declare some flags\,\footnote{Not so many years ago, some authors had a preference for using counters
+% rather than flags,
+% because a flag costs 3~control sequences (\ucom{iffoo}, \ucom{foofalse} and \ucom{footrue}),
+% which use memory. But the number of count registers is limited to 256 in the native \TeX\ engine (much more with
+% \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, but still limited in number), while memory has become rather cheap today.
+% And a code programmed with flags (\texttt{\ucom{iffoo} .{}.{}. \com{else} .{}.{}. \com{fi}}) is easier to structure
+% and debug than a code programmed with counters, \textsc{imho}.} (via \com{newif}) to detect
+% the loading of some packages or classes and the availability of some commands (this will be used by the
+% \optd{hints} option (section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}) or to allow the definition of some \upack{minitoc} commands).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous avons besoin de déclarer quelques indicateurs\,\footnote{Il n'y a pas tant d'années, certains auteurs
+% préféraient utiliser des compteurs plutôt que des indicateurs, car un indicateur coûte 3~séquences de contrôle
+% (\ucom{iftoto}, \ucom{totofalse} et \ucom{tototrue}), qui consomment de la mémoire. Mais le
+% nombre de registres compteurs est limité à~256 dans le moteur \TeX\ natif (bien plus avec
+% \packa{\eTeX}{etex}~\cite{etex}, mais encore en nombre limité), tandis que le coût de la mémoire a beaucoup baissé
+% aujourd'hui. Et un code programmé avec des indicateurs (\texttt{\ucom{iftoto} .{}.{}. \com{else} .{}.{}. \com{fi}}) est
+% plus facile à~structurer et à~mettre au point qu'un code programmé à~l'aide de compteurs, à~mon humble avis.}
+% (via \com{newif}) pour détecter le chargement de certains paquetages ou classes et la disponibilité de certaines
+% commandes (ceci sera utilisé par l'option \optd{hints} (voir la section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}) ou
+% pour autoriser la définition de certaines commandes de \upack{minitoc}).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Flags for the \uopt{hints} option}\ioptd{hints}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Indicateurs pour l'option \uopt{hints}}\ioptd{hints}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@giben@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But first, we define some flags for the \optd{hints} option:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item The flag \com{if@mtc@hints@} is true if the \optd{hints} option is required (default).
+% \item The flag \com{if@mtc@hints@w@} is set true if we detect that some sectionning commands have been
+%       altered since the loading of the document class.
+% \item The flag \com{if@mtc@hints@given@} is set true if the \optd{hints} option detects something curious
+%       and writes messages in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. It will be used at the end of the document to signal that
+%       you should look for hints in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \or\relax
+% Mais tout d'abord, nous définissons quelques indicateurs pour l'option \optd{hints}:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@hints@} est vrai si l'option \optd{hints} est demandée (défaut).
+% \item L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@hints@w@} est forcé à~vrai si nous détectons que certaines commandes de
+%       sectionnement ont été altérées depuis le chargement de la classe de document.
+% \item L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@hints@given@} est forcé à~vrai si l'option \optd{hints} détecte quelque
+%       chose de curieux et écrit des messages dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}.
+%       Il sera utilisé en fin de document
+%       pour signaler que vous devriez chercher des \emph{hints} dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@hints@ \@mtc@hints@true
+\newif\if@mtc@hints@w@ \@mtc@hints@w@false
+\newif\if@mtc@hints@given@ \@mtc@hints@given@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Use of section-level mini-lists of floats}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Utilisation de mini-listes d'éléments flottants, au niveau \texorpdfstring{\mbox{section}}{section}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sect@floats@}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We will check if the commands \com{dosectlof} and \com{dosectlot} are used:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testerons si les commandes \com{dosectlof} et \com{dosectlot} ont été utilisées:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@sect@floats@ \@mtc@sect@floats@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8} %% ^^A 25
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Presence of some packages and classes}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Présence de certains paquetages et classes}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirnew@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We will check if the \pack{placeins} package is loaded, then if the \class{memoir}
+% is loaded (and if it is a recent enough version), then if the \pack{sectsty} package is loaded
+% (before or after \upack{minitoc}).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testerons si le paquetage \pack{placeins} est chargé, puis si la classe
+% \class{memoir} est chargée (et si c'est une version suffisamment récente), puis si le
+% paquetage \pack{sectsty} est chargé (avant ou après \upack{minitoc}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@ \@mtc@placeinsLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@ \@mtc@memoirLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@memoirnew@ \@mtc@memoirnew@false
+\newif\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@ \@mtc@sectstyLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@ \@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We do the same for some caption-related packages:
+% \else\relax
+% Nous faisons de même pour quelques paquetages relatifs aux captions:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@captionLoaded@ \@mtc@captionLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@ \@mtc@captionLoaded@a@false
+\newif\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@ \@mtc@captionIILoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@ \@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@false
+\newif\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@ \@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@ \@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@false
+\newif\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@ \@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@ \@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@false
+\newif\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@ \@mtc@captcontLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@ \@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And the \pack{varsects} package and other packages altering the sectionning commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Et pour le paquetage \pack{varsects} et
+% d'autres paquetages altérant les commandes de sectionnement:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@ \@mtc@varsectsLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@ \@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@false
+\newif\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@ \@mtc@fncychapLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@ \@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@false
+\newif\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@ \@mtc@HgcLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@ \@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@false
+\newif\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@ \@mtc@quotchapLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@ \@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And yet other packages altering the sectionning commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Et encore d'autres paquetages altérant les commandes de sectionnement:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@ \@mtc@romannumLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@ \@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@false
+\newif\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@ \@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@ \@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@false
+\newif\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@ \@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@ \@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Flags for packages dealing with floats}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Indicateurs pour des paquetages traitant des flottants}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must warn about a limitation with the \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow},
+% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons signaler une limitation avec les paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float}, \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow},
+% \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@floatLoaded@ \@mtc@floatLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@ \@mtc@floatrowLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@ \@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@ \@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{12}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Insertion of empty mini-tables}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Insertion de mini-tables vides}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We will check if you have attempted to insert some empty mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testerons si vous avez tenté d'insérer des mini-tables vides:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@ \@mtc@empty@parttoc@false
+\newif\if@mtc@empty@partlof@ \@mtc@empty@partlof@false
+\newif\if@mtc@empty@partlot@ \@mtc@empty@partlot@false
+\newif\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@ \@mtc@empty@minitoc@false
+\newif\if@mtc@empty@minilof@ \@mtc@empty@minilof@false
+\newif\if@mtc@empty@minilot@ \@mtc@empty@minilot@false
+\newif\if@mtc@empty@secttoc@ \@mtc@empty@secttoc@false
+\newif\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@ \@mtc@empty@sectlof@false
+\newif\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@ \@mtc@empty@sectlot@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Presence or absence of some sectionning commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Présence ou absence de certaines commandes de sectionnement}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define and set flags about the presence of the sectionning commands (in fact, the counters associated with
+% these commands).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons et positionnons des indicateurs concernant la présence des commandes de sectionnement (en fait,
+% celle des compteurs associés à~ces commandes).
+%
+% \fi
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \cnt{part} counter:
+% \or\relax
+% Le compteur \cnt{part}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@part@def@ \@mtc@part@def@false
+  \@ifundefined{part}{\@mtc@part@def@false}{\@mtc@part@def@true}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \cnt{chapter} counter:
+% \or\relax
+% Le compteur \cnt{chapter}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@chapter@def@ \@mtc@chapter@def@false
+  \@ifundefined{chapter}{\@mtc@chapter@def@false}{\@mtc@chapter@def@true}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \cnt{section} counter:
+% \or\relax
+% Le compteur \cnt{section}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@section@def@ \@mtc@section@def@false
+  \@ifundefined{section}{\@mtc@section@def@false}{\@mtc@section@def@true}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define and set flags about the absence of the sectionning commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons et positionnons des indicateurs concernant l'absence des commandes de sectionnement:
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@undef@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \cnt{part} counter:
+% \or\relax
+% Le compteur \cnt{part}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@part@undef@ \@mtc@part@undef@true
+   \@ifundefined{part}{\@mtc@part@undef@true}{\@mtc@part@undef@false}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@undef@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \cnt{chapter} counter:
+% \or\relax
+% Le compteur \cnt{chapter}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@chapter@undef@ \@mtc@chapter@undef@true
+   \@ifundefined{chapter}{\@mtc@chapter@undef@true}{\@mtc@chapter@undef@false}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@undef@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \cnt{section} counter:
+% \or\relax
+% Le compteur \cnt{section}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@section@undef@ \@mtc@section@undef@true
+   \@ifundefined{section}{\@mtc@section@undef@true}{\@mtc@section@undef@false}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Flags to check if some commands are used}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Indicateurs pour tester si certaines commandes ont été utilisées}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define a pair of flags for each mini-table type: one for the command itself and one for the preparation
+% command (\ucom{do.{}.{}.}). These flags will be used by the \optd{hints} package option
+% (section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons une paire d'indicateurs pour chaque type de mini-table: un pour la commande elle-même et un
+% pour la commande de préparation  (\ucom{do.{}.{}.}). Ces indicateurs seront utilisés par l'option de
+% paquetage \optd{hints} (section~\vref{s+code+hints.option}).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the part level:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour le niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@parttoc@used@ \global\@parttoc@used@false
+\newif\if@partlof@used@ \global\@partlof@used@false
+\newif\if@partlot@used@ \global\@partlot@used@false
+\newif\if@doparttoc@used@ \global\@doparttoc@used@false
+\newif\if@dopartlof@used@ \global\@dopartlof@used@false
+\newif\if@dopartlot@used@ \global\@dopartlot@used@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the chapter level:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour le niveau chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@minitoc@used@ \global\@minitoc@used@false
+\newif\if@minilof@used@ \global\@minilof@used@false
+\newif\if@minilot@used@ \global\@minilot@used@false
+\newif\if@dominitoc@used@ \global\@dominitoc@used@false
+\newif\if@dominilof@used@ \global\@dominilof@used@false
+\newif\if@dominilot@used@ \global\@dominilot@used@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the section level:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour le niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@secttoc@used@ \global\@secttoc@used@false
+\newif\if@sectlof@used@ \global\@sectlof@used@false
+\newif\if@sectlot@used@ \global\@sectlot@used@false
+\newif\if@dosecttoc@used@ \global\@dosecttoc@used@false
+\newif\if@dosectlof@used@ \global\@dosectlof@used@false
+\newif\if@dosectlot@used@ \global\@dosectlot@used@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@firstpartis@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@firstchapteris@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@firstsectionis@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We also detect the use of some obsolete commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous détectons aussi l'utilisation de certaines commandes obsolètes:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@firstpartis@used@ \global\@firstpartis@used@false
+\newif\if@firstchapteris@used@ \global\@firstchapteris@used@false
+\newif\if@firstsectionis@used@ \global\@firstsectionis@used@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Check if the document has exactly 2~parts}\label{ss+2parts}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Tester si le document a exactement 2~parties}\label{ss+2parts}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% In french, the ordinal adjective is ``deuxième'' if the second object is not the last object, but ``second''
+% (masculine) or ``seconde'' (feminine) when it is also the last one (see~\cite[page~204]{fnul}). So we define a specific flag:
+% \or\relax
+% En français, l'adjectif ordinal est \og deuxième \fg si le deuxième objet n'est pas le dernier objet, mais
+% \og second \fg (masculin) ou \og seconde \fg (féminin) si c'est le dernier (voir~\cite[page~204]{fnul}).
+% Donc nous définissons un indicateur
+% spécifique:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifmtcsecondpart \mtcsecondpartfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% At the beginning of the document, we test this flag and make it global:
+% \or\relax
+% Au début du document, nous testons cet indicateur et le rendons global:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \ifmtcsecondpart
+    \global\mtcsecondparttrue
+  \else
+    \global\mtcsecondpartfalse
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mainaux}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% At the end of the document, we set and memorize the value of the flag in the \suffix{.aux} file:
+% \or\relax
+% À~la fin du document, nous établissons et mémorisons la valeur de l'indicateur dans le fichier \suffix{.aux}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtEndDocument{%
+\ifnum\value{part}=2\relax
+  \mtcsecondparttrue
+\else
+  \mtcsecondpartfalse
+\fi
+\if@filesw
+  \ifmtcsecondpart
+    \immediate\write\@mainaux
+      {\string\global\string\mtcsecondparttrue}%
+  \else
+    \immediate\write\@mainaux
+      {\string\global\string\mtcsecondpartfalse}%
+  \fi
+\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% So we need two \LaTeX\ runs to get a correct result. The \xfile{french2.mld} language definition file
+% (see section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) uses this trick to form the titles of part level mini-tables.
+% See the \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} example file in section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}.
+% \or\relax
+% Il nous faut donc deux exécutions de \LaTeX\ pour obtenir un résultat correct. Le fichier de définition de
+% langue \xfile{french2.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french2}) utilise cette astuce pour former les titres
+% des mini-tables au niveau partie.
+% Voir le fichier d'exemple \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} dans la section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Preparation for the \uopt{notoccite} option}\label{s+code+notoccite1}\iopt{notoccite}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Préparation pour l'option \uopt{notoccite}}\label{s+code+notoccite1}\iopt{notoccite}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@notoccite@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We declare a flag for the presence of this option and the new internal ``hook'' command
+% (redefinable command) \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile},
+% used by this option (this has been requested by \name{Donald}{Arseneau} for his \pack{notoccite}
+% package~\cite{notoccite}). See section~\vref{ss+notoccite}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous déclarons un indicateur pour la présence de cette option et la nouvelle commande interne «~\emph{hook}~»
+% (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} utilisée par cette option
+% (ceci a été demandé par \name{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage
+% \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}). Voir la section~\vref{ss+notoccite}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@notoccite@ \@mtc@notoccite@false
+\@ifundefined{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}%
+   {\let\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile\relax}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Preparation for the \uopt{tight} and \uopt{k-tight} options}\label{s+code+tight.flag}\iopt{tight}\iopt{k-tight}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Préparation pour les options \uopt{tight} et \uopt{k-tight}}\label{s+code+tight.flag}\iopt{tight}\iopt{k-tight}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We just declare a flag for each of these options; they are set false by default (\optd{loose} and
+% \optd{k-loose} options):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous déclarons simplement un indicateur pour chacune de ces options; ils sont faux par défaut (options \optd{loose}
+% et \optd{k-loose}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\iftightmtc \tightmtcfalse
+\newif\ifktightmtc \ktightmtcfalse
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Preparation to work with \upack{hyperref}}\label{s+code+hyperref.prep}\ipack{hyperref}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Préparation pour travailler avec \upack{hyperref}}\label{s+code+hyperref.prep}\ipack{hyperref}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This\imess{I0005} code prepares the interface with the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web}.
+% A flag is defined, then this preparation is performed in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block if this package is loaded.
+% This action defines some commands for the \pack{hyperref} package.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce\imess{I0005} code prépare l'interface avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web}.
+% Un indicateur est défini, puis cette préparation est effectuée dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument} si ce
+% paquetage est chargé. Cette action définit quelques commandes pour le paquetage \pack{hyperref}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mtcPackageInfo[I0005]{minitoc}{compatible with hyperref\@gobble}
+\newif\if@mtc@hyper@used@ \global\@mtc@hyper@used@false
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%
+    \global\@mtc@hyper@used@true
+    \def\toclevel@xpart{1000}%
+    \def\toclevel@xchapter{1000}%
+    \def\toclevel@xsect{1000}%
+    \let\toclevel@starpart\toclevel@part
+    \let\toclevel@starchapter\toclevel@chapter
+    \let\toclevel@starsection\toclevel@section
+    \let\toclevel@starsubsection\toclevel@subsection
+    \let\toclevel@starsubsubsection\toclevel@subsubsection
+    \let\toclevel@starparagraph\toclevel@paragraph
+    \let\toclevel@starsubparagraph\toclevel@subparagraph
+  }{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \lneed{8}
+% \section{Checking the presence of some packages}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Tester la présence de certains paquetages}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Check if the \upack{sectsty} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{sectsty}\label{s+sectsty.h1}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{sectsty} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{sectsty}\label{s+sectsty.h1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must test if the \pack{sectsty} package~\cite{sectsty} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
+% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
+% loaded. See section~\vref{s+sectsty.h2}.
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{sectsty}~\cite{sectsty} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
+% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
+% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+sectsty.h2}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifpackageloaded{sectsty}{\@mtc@sectstyLoaded@true}{}%
+ \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{sectsty}{\@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@true}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Check if the \upack{varsects} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{varsects}\label{s+varsects.h1}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{varsects} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{varsects}\label{s+varsects.h1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must test if the \pack{varsects} package~\cite{varsects} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
+% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
+% loaded. See section~\vref{s+varsects.h2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{varsects}~\cite{varsects} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
+% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
+% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+varsects.h2}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifpackageloaded{varsects}%{\@mtc@varsectsLoaded@true}{}
+ \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{varsects}{\@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@true}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Check if the \upack{fncychap} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{fncychap}\label{s+fncychap.h1}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{fncychap} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{fncychap}\label{s+fncychap.h1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must test if the \pack{fncychap} package~\cite{fncychap} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
+% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
+% loaded. See section~\vref{s+fncychap.h2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{fncychap}~\cite{fncychap} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
+% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
+% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+fncychap.h2}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifpackageloaded{fncychap}{\@mtc@fncychapLoaded@true}{}%
+ \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{fncychap}{\@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@true}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Check if the \upack{hangcaption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{hangcaption}\label{s+hangcaption.h1}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{hangcaption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{hangcaption}\label{s+hangcaption.h1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must test if the \pack{hangcaption} package~\cite{hangcaption} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
+% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
+% loaded. See section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{hangcaption}~\cite{hangcaption} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
+% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
+% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h2}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifpackageloaded{hangcaption}{\@mtc@HgcLoaded@true}{}%
+ \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{hangcaption}{\@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@true}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Check if the \upack{quotchap} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{quotchap}\label{s+quotchap.h1}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{quotchap} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{quotchap}\label{s+quotchap.h1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must test if the \pack{quotchap} package~\cite{quotchap} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
+% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
+% loaded. See section~\vref{s+quotchap.h2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{quotchap}~\cite{quotchap} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
+% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
+% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+quotchap.h2}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifpackageloaded{quotchap}{\@mtc@quotchapLoaded@true}{}%
+ \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{quotchap}{\@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@true}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Check if the \upack{romannum} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{romannum}\label{s+romannum.h1}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{romannum} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{romannum}\label{s+romannum.h1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must test if the \pack{romannum} package~\cite{romannum} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
+% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
+% loaded. See section~\vref{s+romannum.h2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{romannum}~\cite{romannum} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
+% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
+% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+romannum.h2}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifpackageloaded{romannum}{\@mtc@romannumLoaded@true}{}%
+ \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{romannum}{\@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@true}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Check if the \upack{sfheaders} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{sfheaders}\label{s+sfheaders.h1}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{sfheaders} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{sfheaders}\label{s+sfheaders.h1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must test if the \pack{sfheaders} package~\cite{sfheaders} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
+% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
+% loaded. See section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{sfheaders}~\cite{sfheaders} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
+% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
+% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h2}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifpackageloaded{sfheaders}{\@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@true}{}%
+ \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{sfheaders}{\@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@true}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Check if the \upack{alnumsec} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{alnumsec}\label{s+alnumsec.h1}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{alnumsec} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{alnumsec}\label{s+alnumsec.h1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must test if the \pack{alnumsec} package~\cite{alnumsec} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
+% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
+% loaded. See section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{alnumsec}~\cite{alnumsec} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
+% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
+% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h2}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifpackageloaded{alnumsec}{\@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@true}{}%
+ \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{alnumsec}{\@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@true}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Check if the \upack{captcont} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{captcont}\label{s+captcont.h1}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{captcont} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{captcont}\label{s+captcont.h1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must test if the \pack{captcont} package~\cite{captcont} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
+% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
+% loaded. See section~\vref{s+captcont.h2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{captcont}~\cite{captcont} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
+% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
+% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+captcont.h2}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifpackageloaded{captcont}{\@mtc@captcontLoaded@true}{}%
+ \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{captcont}{\@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@true}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Check if the \upack{caption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{caption}\label{s+caption.h1}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{caption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{caption}\label{s+caption.h1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must test if the \pack{caption} package~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
+% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
+% loaded. See section~\vref{s+caption.h2}.
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{caption}~\cite{caption,caption-eng,cap-anleitung} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
+% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
+% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+caption.h2}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifpackageloaded{caption}{\@mtc@captionLoaded@true}{}%
+ \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{caption}{\@mtc@captionLoaded@a@true}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Check if the \upack{caption2} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{caption2}\label{s+caption2.h1}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{caption2} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{caption2}\label{s+caption2.h1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must test if the \pack{caption2} package~\cite{caption2} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
+% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
+% loaded. See section~\vref{s+caption2.h2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{caption2}~\cite{caption2} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
+% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
+% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+caption2.h2}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifpackageloaded{caption2}{\@mtc@captionIILoaded@true}{}%
+ \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{caption2}{\@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@true}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Check if the \upack{ccaption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{ccaption}\label{s+ccaption.h1}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{ccaption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{ccaption}\label{s+ccaption.h1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must test if the \pack{ccaption} package~\cite{ccaption} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
+% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
+% loaded. See section~\vref{s+ccaption.h2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{ccaption}~\cite{ccaption} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
+% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
+% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+ccaption.h2}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifpackageloaded{ccaption}{\@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@true}{}%
+ \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{ccaption}{\@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@true}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Check if the \upack{mcaption} package is loaded, and when}\ipack{mcaption}\label{s+mcaption.h1}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{mcaption} est chargé, et quand}\ipack{mcaption}\label{s+mcaption.h1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must test if the \pack{mcaption} package~\cite{mcaption} is loaded before or after \upack{minitoc}, so we
+% test when \upack{minitoc} is loaded and also in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block, when all packages have been
+% loaded. See section~\vref{s+mcaption.h2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{mcaption}~\cite{mcaption} est chargé avant ou après \upack{minitoc},
+% donc nous testons lors du chargement de \upack{minitoc} et aussi dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}, une fois
+% que tous les paquetages ont été chargés. Voir la section~\vref{s+mcaption.h2}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifpackageloaded{mcaption}{\@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@true}{}%
+ \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{mcaption}{\@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@true}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Check if the \upack{float} package is loaded}\ipack{float}\label{s+float.h1}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{float} est chargé}\ipack{float}\label{s+float.h1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatLoaded@}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must test if the \pack{float} package~\cite{float} is loaded
+% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block.
+% See section~\vref{s+float.h2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{float}~\cite{float} est chargé dans le préambule,
+% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+float.h2}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{float}{\@mtc@floatLoaded@true}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Check if the \upack{floatrow} package is loaded}\ipack{floatrow}\label{s+floatrow.h1}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{floatrow} est chargé}\ipack{floatrow}\label{s+floatrow.h1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must test if the \pack{floatrow} package~\cite{floatrow} is loaded
+% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block.
+% See section~\vref{s+floatrow.h2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow} est chargé dans le préambule,
+% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+floatrow.h2}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{floatrow}{\@mtc@floatrowLoaded@true}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Check if the \upack{trivfloat} package is loaded}\ipack{trivfloat}\label{s+trivfloat.h1}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{trivfloat} est chargé}\ipack{trivfloat}\label{s+trivfloat.h1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must test if the \pack{trivfloat} package~\cite{trivfloat} is loaded
+% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block.
+% See section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} est chargé dans le préambule,
+% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h2}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{trivfloat}{\@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@true}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Check if the \upack{rotfloat} package is loaded}\ipack{rotfloat}\label{s+rotfloat.h1}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Tester si le paquetage \upack{rotfloat} est chargé}\ipack{rotfloat}\label{s+rotfloat.h1}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must test if the \pack{rotfloat} package~\cite{rotfloat} is loaded
+% in the preamble, so we use an \com{AtBeginDocument} block.
+% See section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons tester si le paquetage \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} est chargé dans le préambule,
+% donc nous utilisons un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h2}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{rotfloat}{\@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@true}{}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Is the \uclass{memoir} class loaded?}\label{s+code+memoir.loaded}\iclass{memoir}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{La classe \uclass{memoir} est-elle chargée?}\label{s+code+memoir.loaded}\iclass{memoir}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirnew@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcpatchmemoir@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\SMM{\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0032}}
+% test if the \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} class is loaded.
+% This class needs some compatibility adjustments or may be \emph{incompatible} if too recent.
+% In the later case, a patch
+% is inserted (see chapter~\vref{memoir-patch}). This correction is no more necessary after the 2005/09/25 version
+% of \xfile{memoir.cls}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\SMM{\lmess{I0030}\\\lmess{I0020}\\\lmess{I0027}\\\lmess{I0032}} testons si la
+% classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} est chargée.
+% Cette classe nécessite certains ajustements pour la compatibilité ou peut être \emph{incompatible} si
+% elle est trop récente.
+% Dans ce dernier cas, une correction est insérée (voir le chapitre~\vref{memoir-patch}). Cette correction n'est
+% plus nécessaire après la version de \xfile{memoir.cls} datée 2005/09/25.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtcpatchmemoir@ \@mtcpatchmemoir@false
+\@ifclassloaded{memoir}{\@mtc@memoirLoaded@true\relax%
+                        \mtcPackageInfo[I0030]{minitoc}%
+                        {the memoir class is loaded:
+                         \MessageBreak
+                         compatibility attempted\@gobble}}%
+                       {\@mtc@memoirLoaded@false}
+\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@
+ \@ifundefined{@m@mchapter}%
+   {\@mtc@memoirnew@false\mtcPackageInfo[I0020]{minitoc}%
+      {old version of the memoir class\@gobble}}
+   {\@mtc@memoirnew@true\mtcPackageInfo[I0027]{minitoc}%
+      {recent version of the memoir class\@gobble}
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0032]{minitoc}%
+         {This version of the memoir class uses
+          \MessageBreak
+          a version of \string\chapter\space which is
+          \MessageBreak
+          incompatible with the minitoc package.
+          \MessageBreak
+          We try to patch\@gobble}%
+   \@mtcpatchmemoir@true}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcpatchmemoir@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And\imess{E0028} now the patch:
+% \or\relax
+% Et\imess{E0028} voici cette correction:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtcpatchmemoir@
+\IfFileExists{mtcpatchmem.sty}{%
+   \@ifclasslater{memoir}{2005/09/25}{}{\RequirePackage{mtcpatchmem}}}{%
+   \mtcPackageError[E0028]{minitoc}%
+     {Unable to patch the memoir class}%
+     {So it remains incompatible. Sorry.}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Testing the emptiness of a file}\label{s+code+emptiness}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Tester la vacuité d'un fichier}\label{s+code+emptiness}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@xifmtarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@EndWhile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhilePreCondition}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhileCondition}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhileBody}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@While}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@WhileNext}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some macros for testing if an argument of a macro is empty (taken from the package
+% \pack{ifmtarg}~\cite{ifmtarg}, by \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson} and
+% \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}, and from \uxfile{while.tip},
+% by \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}~\cite[Vol~III, page~408]{tex-bech}). The group is necessary to keep local the catcode
+% change of ``Q'', hence a \com{gdef} is needed for \com{mtc@ifmtarg}.
+% \or\relax
+% Quelques macros pour tester si un argument d'une macro est vide (elles sont tirées du paquetage
+% \pack{ifmtarg}~\cite{ifmtarg}, de \xname{Peter~R.}{Wilson} et
+% \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}, et de \uxfile{while.tip},
+% de \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}~\cite[Vol~III, page~408]{tex-bech}). Le groupe est nécessaire pour garder local le
+% changement de «~\emph{catcode}~» de «~Q~», il faut donc utiliser un \com{gdef} pour définir \com{mtc@ifmtarg}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\Q=3
+\long\gdef\mtc@ifmtarg#1{%
+\mtc@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil}
+\long\gdef\mtc@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4}
+\endgroup
+\let\mtc@EndWhile = \fi
+\def\mtc@While #1#2#3\mtc@EndWhile{%
+   \def\mtc@WhilePreCondition{#1}%
+   \def\mtc@WhileCondition{#2}%
+   \def\mtc@WhileBody{#3}%
+   \mtc@@While
+}
+\def\mtc@@While{%
+   \mtc@WhilePreCondition
+   \mtc@WhileCondition
+      \def\mtc@WhileNext{%
+          \mtc@WhileBody
+          \mtc@@While
+      }%
+   \else
+      \def\mtc@WhileNext{}%
+   \fi
+   \mtc@WhileNext
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@checkfiles}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@LI}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@While}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@Body}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@EndWhile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@Rline}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some macros to test if a file is empty or not: \com{mtc@CkFile}\verb|{|\emph{file}\verb|}| returns \com{@mtc@FEtrue} if the file
+% is empty, \com{@mtc@FEfalse} if the is file not empty. An inexistent file is empty. A file full of white
+% space (space, tabulation, newline) is empty. Comments are empty.
+% \or\relax
+% Quelques macros pour tester si un fichier est vide ou non: \com{mtc@CkFile}\verb|{|\emph{fichier}\verb|}|
+% rend \com{@mtc@FEtrue} si le fichier est vide, \com{@mtc@FEfalse} si le fichier n'est pas vide.
+% Un fichier inexistant est vide. Un
+% fichier rempli d'espace blanc (espace, tabulation, saut de ligne) est vide. Les commentaires sont vides.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \noindent
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \textbf{Note:} on a big empty file, the \com{mtc@While} loop may be
+% time consuming, but not an eternity (33\,s for
+% $10^6$~lines on my computer), and the first non-empty line stops the loop.
+% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} is used as scratch file. Its contents is erased after use.
+% \or\relax
+% \textbf{Note:} sur un gros fichier vide, la boucle \com{mtc@While} peut prendre du temps, mais pas une
+% éternité (33\,s pour $10^6$~lignes avec mon ordinateur), et la première ligne non vide arrête la boucle.
+% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} est utilisé comme fichier de travail. Son contenu est effacé après usage.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@LI\@mtc@LItrue
+\newif\if@mtc@FE\@mtc@FEtrue
+\newif\if@mtc@checkfiles\@mtc@checkfilestrue
+\def\mtc@Body{\immediate\read\@inputcheck to \mtc@Rline\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck\relax\@mtc@LIfalse\fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\mtc@Rline\par\relax
+     \def\mtc@Rline{}
+  \else
+     \ifeof\@inputcheck\relax\global\@mtc@LIfalse\fi
+     \mtc@ifmtarg{\mtc@Rline}{\relax}{\@mtc@FEfalse\@mtc@LIfalse}
+  \fi}
+\def\mtc@CkFile#1{%
+  \@mtc@LItrue\@mtc@FEtrue
+  \if@mtc@checkfiles
+  \IfFileExists{#1}{%
+    \immediate\openin\@inputcheck #1\relax
+    \mtc@While{}{\if@mtc@LI\relax}{\mtc@Body}\mtc@EndWhile}%
+   {\@mtc@FEtrue}%
+  \else
+   \@mtc@FEfalse%
+  \fi}
+\closein\@inputcheck\relax
+\def\mtc@CkStr#1{%
+  \immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc
+  \immediate\write\tf@mtc{#1}%
+  \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+  \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.mtc}%
+  \immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc
+  \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Internal macros to decrement \upack{minitoc} counters}\label{s+code+d.count}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Macros internes pour décrémenter les compteurs de \upack{minitoc}}\label{s+code+d.count}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebackpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebackchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebacksection}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% It is sometimes necessary to decrement a \upack{minitoc} counter (\cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc} or \cnt{stc}) by one.
+% These macros are:
+% \or\relax
+% Il est parfois nécessaire de décrémenter un compteur de \upack{minitoc} (\cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc} ou \cnt{stc})
+% de un. Ces macros sont:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@onebackpart{\addtocounter{ptc}{-1}}
+\def\mtc@onebackchap{\addtocounter{mtc}{-1}}
+\def\mtc@onebacksect{\addtocounter{stc}{-1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Patching the \ucom{part} command}\label{s+code+patching.part}\icom{part}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{part}}\label{s+code+patching.part}\icom{part}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svspart}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the \com{part} command is not defined (by the document class, usually),
+% we cannot patch it and a warning is
+% displayed\,\footnote{Document classes with sectionning commands but no \com{part} command are likely non
+% standard, hence the warning displayed on the terminal.}. Else, we patch its two branches,
+% \com{@part} (for the unstarred version) or
+% \com{@spart} (for the starred version, \com{part*}): we add \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{ptc}\verb|}| to increment the parttoc
+% counter \cnt{ptc}. See also section~\vref{s+code+patching.part.2}.
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% The code\SMM{\lmess{W0018}\\\lmess{I0023}} of the next section (section~\vref{s+code+mtcaddpart}) is also skipped if \com{part} is not defined.
+% \or\relax
+% Si la commande \com{part} n'est pas définie (par la classe de document, habituellement), nous ne pouvons pas la
+% modifier et un avertissement est émis\,\footnote{Une classe de document ayant des commandes de sectionnement mais
+% pas de commande \com{part} est probablement non standard, d'où l'avertissement affiché sur le terminal.}.
+% Sinon, nous modifions ses deux branches, \com{@part} (pour la version non étoilée) ou \com{@spart} (pour la
+% version étoilée, \com{part*}): nous ajoutons \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{ptc}\verb|}| pour incrémenter le compteur de parttocs
+% \cnt{ptc}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+code+patching.part.2}.
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% Le\SMM{\lmess{W0018}\\\lmess{I0023}} code de la section suivante (section~\vref{s+code+mtcaddpart}) est aussi sauté si \com{part} n'est pas
+% définie.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{part}{%
+  \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0018]{minitoc}%
+     {part level macros NOT available}
+}{%% else undefined part (\part defined)
+  \mtcPackageInfo[I0023]{minitoc}%
+     {part level macros available\@gobble}
+  \let\mtc@svspart\@spart
+  \def\@spart{\stepcounter{ptc}\mtc@svspart}
+  \let\mtc@svpart\@part
+  \def\@part{\stepcounter{ptc}\mtc@svpart}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Adding an entry in the TOC for a starred part}\label{s+code+mtcaddpart}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une partie étoilée}\label{s+code+mtcaddpart}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@xpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@part}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To add an entry in the TOC for a starred part, we need the \com{mtcaddpart} macro,
+% which has an optional
+% argument, the title of the part as if should appear in the TOC.
+%
+% By default, this argument is empty. If it is empty
+% (tested via \com{mtc@ifmtarg})
+% or omitted, we add a \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| line in the
+% \suffix{.toc} file. If it is not empty, we add a
+% \com{contentsline}\verb|{part}{title...}...| line in the \suffix{.toc} file. We always add a
+% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| line in the \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files. Then we increment the
+% \cnt{ptc} counter, via \com{adjustptc}
+% (defined in section~\vref{s+code+part.level}).
+% Using \texttt{xpart} as first argument of
+% \com{contentsline} means that \com{l@xpart} will be invoked in place of
+% \com{l@part} to print the entry in
+% the TOC, but \com{l@xpart} uses a huge depth (10\,000) for this entry, hence it will never be really printed
+% (except if you cheat).
+% \or\relax
+% Pour ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières pour une partie étoilée, nous avons besoin de la macro
+% \com{mtcaddpart}, qui a un argument optionnel, le titre de la partie tel qu'il devrait apparaître dans la table
+% des matières.
+%
+% Par défaut, cet argument est vide. S'il est vide (le test est fait par \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) ou omis, nous ajoutons
+% une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. S'il n'est pas vide, nous ajoutons une
+% ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{part}{titre...}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. Nous ajoutons toujours une ligne
+% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xpart}{}...| dans les fichiers \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot}. Puis nous
+% incrémentons le compteur \cnt{ptc}, via \com{adjustptc} (définie dans la section~\vref{s+code+part.level}).
+% Utiliser \texttt{xpart} comme premier argument de \com{contentsline} signifie que \com{l@xpart} sera invoquée
+% au lieu de \com{l@part} pour imprimer l'entrée dans la table des matières, mais \com{l@xpart} utilise une très
+% grande profondeur (10\,000) pour cette entrée, donc celle-ci ne sera jamais vraiment imprimée (sauf si vous trichez).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcaddpart}[1][]{%
+    \mtc@ifmtarg{#1}{\addcontentsline{toc}{xpart}{}}%
+                    {\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}}%
+    \addcontentsline{lof}{xpart}{}%
+    \addcontentsline{lot}{xpart}{}%
+    \adjustptc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This code terminates (temporarily) the part level commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce code termine (temporairement) les commandes au niveau partie.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Section level macros}\label{s+code+def.section.level.macros}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Macros au niveau section}\label{s+code+def.section.level.macros}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The\SMM{\lmess{I0004}\\\lmess{I0029}\\\lmess{W0017}\\\lmess{I0028}}
+% section level macros are defined if \com{chapter} is not defined and \com{section} defined, i.e.,~in
+% document classes like \class{article}, but not in document classes
+% like \class{book} or \class{report}. So we
+% test if \com{chapter} is defined and if \com{section} is defined, with adequate warnings. If neither are
+% defined, you are in big trouble to use the \upack{minitoc} package with the class of your document.
+% \or\relax
+% Les\SMM{\lmess{I0004}\\\lmess{I0029}\\\lmess{W0017}\\\lmess{I0028}}
+% macros au niveau section sont définies si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie mais \com{section} est définie,
+% c'est-à-dire dans les classes de document telles que \class{article}, mais pas dans les classes de
+% document telles que \class{book} ou \class{report}. Donc nous testons si \com{chapter}
+% est définie et si \com{section} est définie, avec les avertissements adéquats. Si aucune de ces deux commandes
+% n'est définie, vous avez un sérieux problème pour utiliser le paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec la classe de votre
+% document.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{\mtcPackageInfo[I0004]{minitoc}%
+           {chapter level macros NOT available\@gobble}%
+  \@ifundefined{section}{\mtcPackageInfo[I0029]{minitoc}%
+           {section level macros NOT available\@gobble}%
+    \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0017]{minitoc}%
+       {no section or chapter level macros available
+        \MessageBreak
+        PLEASE VERIFY YOUR MAIN DOCUMENT CLASS}}%
+  {\mtcPackageInfo[I0028]{minitoc}%
+       {section level macros available\@gobble}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Corrections for numbering}\label{s+code+correction.numbering.sections}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Corrections pour la numérotation}\label{s+code+correction.numbering.sections}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@onebacksect}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsv@tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsv@listoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsv@listoftables}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As the TOC, the LOF and the LOT are considered as (starred) sections, we must decrement the secttoc counter
+% (\cnt{stc}) via \com{mtc@onebacksect} when the corresponding commands are executed. Hence we patch these
+% commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Comme la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux sont considérées comme des sections
+% (étoilées), il nous faut décrémenter le compteur de secttocs (\cnt{stc}) via \com{mtc@onebacksect}
+% lorsque les commandes correspondantes sont exécutées. Donc nous modifions ces commandes:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\mtcsv@tableofcontents\tableofcontents
+    \let\mtcsv@listoffigures\listoffigures
+    \let\mtcsv@listoftables\listoftables
+    \def\tableofcontents{\mtcsv@tableofcontents\mtc@onebacksect}
+    \def\listoffigures{\mtcsv@listoffigures\mtc@onebacksect}
+    \def\listoftables{\mtcsv@listoftables\mtc@onebacksect}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Patching the \ucom{section} command}\label{s+code+patching.section.1}\icom{section}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Modification de la commande \ucom{section}}\label{s+code+patching.section.1}\icom{section}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svss}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the \com{section} command is not defined (by the document class, usually),
+% we cannot patch it and a warning is displayed.
+% Else, we patch its two branches, \com{@sect} (for the unstarred version)
+% or \com{@ssect} (for the starred version, \com{section*}): we add \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{stc}\verb|}| to increment
+% the secttoc counter \cnt{stc},
+% only in the unstarred case\footnote{Version \#25 has removed a spurious decrementation of this counter.}.
+% \or\relax
+% Si la commande \com{section} n'est pas définie (par la classe de document, habituellement), nous ne pouvons pas
+% la modifier et un avertissement est affiché. Sinon, nous modifions ses deux branches, \com{@sect} (pour la version
+% non étoilée) ou \com{@ssect} (pour la version étoilée, \com{section*}): nous ajoutons
+% \com{stepcounter}\verb}|{|\cnt{stc}\verb|}| pour incrémenter le compteur de secttocs \cnt{stc}, seulement dans le cas non
+% étoilé\,\footnote{La version~\#25 a éliminé une décrémentation superflue de ce compteur.}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     \let\mtc@svsection\section
+     \def\section{\stepcounter{stc}\mtc@svsection}
+     \let\mtc@svss\@ssect
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Adding an entry in the TOC for a starred section}\label{s+code+mtcaddsection}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour une section étoilée}\label{s+code+mtcaddsection}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@xsect}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To add an entry in the TOC for a starred section, we need the \com{mtcaddsection} macro, which has an optional
+% argument, the title of the section as it should appear in the TOC. By default, this argument is empty. If it is empty
+% (tested via \com{mtc@ifmtarg})
+% or omitted, we add a \com{contentsline}\verb|{xsect}{}...|
+% line in the \suffix{.toc} file. If it is not empty, we add a
+% \com{contentsline}\verb|{section}{title...}...| line in the \suffix{.toc} file. We always add a
+% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xsect}{}...| line in the \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files.
+% Then we increment the
+% \cnt{stc} counter, via \com{adjuststc} (this command is defined in section~\vref{s+code+section.level.commands}).
+% Using \texttt{xsect} as first argument of
+% \com{contentsline} means that \com{l@xsect} will be invoked
+% in place of \com{l@section} to print the entry in
+% the TOC, but \com{l@xsect} uses a huge depth (10\,000) for this entry, hence it will never be really printed
+% (except if you cheat).
+% \or\relax
+% Pour ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières pour une section étoilée, nous avons besoin de la macro
+% \com{mtcaddsection}, qui a un argument optionnel, le titre de la section tel qu'il doit apparaître dans la
+% table des matières. Par défaut, cet argument est vide. S'il est vide (ce qui est testé par \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) ou
+% omis, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|xsect}{}...| dans le fichier
+% \suffix{.toc}. S'il n'est pas vide, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{section}{title...}...|
+% dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}. Nous ajoutons toujours une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xsect}{}...| dans les
+% fichiers \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot}. Puis nous incrémentons le compteur \cnt{stc},
+% via \com{adjuststc} (cette commande est définie dans la section~\vref{s+code+section.level.commands}).
+% Le fait d'utiliser
+% \texttt{xsect} comme premier argument de \com{contentsline} signifie que \com{l@xsect} sera invoquée au
+% lieu de \com{l@section} pour imprimer l'entrée dans la table des matières, mais \com{l@xsect} utilise une
+% très grande profondeur (10\,000) pour cette entrée, donc elle ne sera jamais réellement imprimée (sauf si vous
+% trichez).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcaddsection}[1][]{%
+    \mtc@ifmtarg{#1}{\addcontentsline{toc}{xsect}{}}%
+                    {\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}}%
+    \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{}%
+    \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{}%
+    \adjuststc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This code terminates (temporarily) the section level commands, and we continue with chapter level macros.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce code termine (temporairement) les commandes au niveau section et nous continuons avec les commandes au niveau chapitre.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  }}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Chapter level macros}\label{s+code+def.chapter.level.macros}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Macros au niveau chapitre}\label{s+code+def.chapter.level.macros}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The\imess{I0003} chapter level macros are defined if \com{chapter} is defined, i.e.,~in
+% document classes like \class{book} or \class{report}. So we
+% test if \com{chapter} is defined, with adequate warnings. The test is already done above, we are in the
+% ``else'' branch of \com{@ifundefined}\texttt{\{chapter\}}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les\imess{I0003} macros au niveau chapitre sont définies si \com{chapter} est définie, c'est-à-dire, dans les classes de
+% document telles que \class{book} ou \class{report}. Donc nous testons si \com{chapter}
+% est définie, avec les avertissements adéquats. Ce test a déjà été fait plus haut, nous sommes dans la branche
+% «~sinon~» de \com{@ifundefined}\texttt{\{chapter\}}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \mtcPackageInfo[I0003]{minitoc}{chapter level macros available\@gobble}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Patching the \ucom{chapter} command}\label{s+code+patching.chapter}\icom{chapter}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{chapter}}\label{s+code+patching.chapter}\icom{chapter}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{chapter} command is defined (by the document class, usually).
+% We patch its two branches, \com{@chapter} (for the unstarred version) or \com{@schapter} (for the
+% starred version, \com{chapter*}): we add call to \com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{mtc}\verb|}| to increment the minitoc counter \cnt{mtc}.
+% Only the unstarred branch (\com{@chapter}) is patched here.
+% The other branch is patched later (section~\vref{s+code+patching.chapter.2}).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{chapter} est définie (par la classe de document, habituellement). Nous modifions ses deux
+% branches, \com{@chapter} (pour la version non étoilée) ou \com{@schapter} (pour la version étoilée,
+% \com{chapter*}): nous ajoutons un appel à~\com{stepcounter}\verb|{|\cnt{mtc}\verb|}| pour incrémenter le compteur de minitocs \cnt{mtc}.
+% Seule la branche non étoilée est modifiée ici. L'autre branche sera modifiée plus loin (voir la
+% section~\vref{s+code+patching.chapter.2}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtc@svchapter\@chapter \def\@chapter{\stepcounter{mtc}\mtc@svchapter}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Adding an entry in the TOC for a starred chapter}\label{s+code+mtcaddchapter}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Ajout d'une entrée dans la TdM pour un chapitre étoilé}\label{s+code+mtcaddchapter}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ifmtarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@xchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To add an entry in the TOC for a starred chapter, we need the \com{mtcaddchapter} macro, which has an optional
+% argument, the title of the chapter as if should appear in the TOC. By default, this argument is empty. If it is empty
+% (tested via \com{mtc@ifmtarg})
+% or omitted, we add a \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| line
+% in the \suffix{.toc} file. If it is not empty, we add a
+% \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}{title...}...| line in the \suffix{.toc} file. We always add a
+% \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| line in the \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files. Then we increment the
+% \cnt{mtc} counter, via \com{adjustmtc}
+% (defined in section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}).
+% Using \texttt{xchapter} as first argument of
+% \com{contentsline} means that \com{l@xchapter} will be invoked in place of
+% \com{l@chapter} to print the entry in
+% the TOC, but \com{l@xchapter} uses a huge depth (10\,000) for this entry, hence it will never be really printed
+% (except if you cheat).
+% \or\relax
+% Pour ajouter une entrée dans la table des matières pour un chapitre étoilé, nous avons besoin de la macro
+% \com{mtcaddchapter}, qui a un argument optionnel, le titre du chapitre tel qu'il devrait apparaître dans la
+% table des matières. Par défaut, cet argument est vide. S'il est vide (ce qui est testé via \com{mtc@ifmtarg}) ou
+% omis, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}.
+% S'il n'est pas vide, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}{titre...}...| dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}.
+% Nous ajoutons toujours une ligne \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}{}...| dans les fichiers \suffix{.lof} et
+% \suffix{.lot}. Puis nous incrémentons le compteur \cnt{mtc}, via \com{adjustmtc} (définie dans la
+% section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}). Le fait d'utiliser \texttt{xchapter} comme premier argument
+% de \com{contentsline} signifie que \com{l@xchapter} sera invoquée au lieu de \com{l@chapter} pour imprimer
+% l'entrée dans la table des matières, mais \com{l@xchapter} utilise une très grande profondeur (10\,000) pour cette
+% entrée, et donc elle ne sera jamais vraiment imprimée (sauf si vous trichez).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcaddchapter}[1][]{%
+    \mtc@ifmtarg{#1}{\addcontentsline{toc}{xchapter}{}}%
+                    {\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}}%
+    \addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{}%
+    \addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{}%
+    \adjustmtc}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This code terminates (temporarily) the chapter level commands,
+% i.e.,~terminates the \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| at the beginning of
+% section~\vref{s+code+def.section.level.macros}.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce code termine (temporairement) les commandes au niveau chapitre, c'est-à-dire termine la construction
+% \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| du début de la section~\vref{s+code+def.section.level.macros}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Miscellaneous declarations}\label{s+code+misc.decls}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Déclarations diverses}\label{s+code+misc.decls}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\newread}
+% \begin{macro}{\newtoks}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strutbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hstrut}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hstrutbox}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{newread} command must be redeclared as being \com{outer} (as \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} told me).
+% We need a token register (\com{mtc@toks}), a temporary string (\com{mtc@string}), struts (two kinds, each
+% one using a box containing an invisible vertical rule), a rule with all
+% dimensions equal to zero (\com{mtc@zrule}) and a command discouraging page breaks (\com{mtc@BBR}, for ``bad
+% break''). For the struts, which are boxes containing an invisible vertical rule, we use ``\texttt{ex}''~units,
+% to follow the current font.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{newread} doit étre redéclarée comme étant \com{outer} (comme me l'a conseillé
+% \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}).
+% Nous avons besoin d'un registre \emph{token} (\com{mtc@toks}), d'une chaîne temporaire (\com{mtc@string}),
+% d'étais ou \emph{struts} (de deux sortes, dont chacune utilise une boîte contenant un filet vertical invisible)
+% un filet dont toutes les dimensions sont à~zéro (\com{mtc@zrule}) et d'une commande pour décourager les
+% coupures de page (\com{mtc@BBR}, pour «~\emph{bad break}~»). Pour les étais, qui sont des boîtes contenant un
+% filet vertical invisible, nous utilisons des unités «~\texttt{ex}~», pour suivre la fonte courante.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newread{\alloc@6\read\chardef\sixt@@n}
+\newtoks\mtc@toks
+\def\mtc@string{\relax}
+\newbox\mtc@strutbox
+\setbox\mtc@strutbox=\hbox{\rule[1.8ex]{\z@}{2.5ex}}
+\def\mtc@strut{\relax\ifmmode\copy\mtc@strutbox
+                     \else\unhcopy\mtc@strutbox\fi}
+\newbox\mtc@hstrutbox
+\setbox\mtc@hstrutbox=\hbox{\rule[1.ex]{\z@}{1.ex}}
+\def\mtc@hstrut{\relax\ifmmode\copy\mtc@hstrutbox
+                      \else\unhcopy\mtc@hstrutbox\fi}
+\def\mtc@v{\leavevmode\mtc@strut}
+\def\mtc@zrule{\rule[\z@]{\z@}{\z@}}
+\def\mtc@BBR{\unpenalty\nopagebreak[4]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Autoconfiguration of extensions}\label{s+code+autoconf}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Autoconfiguration des suffixes}\label{s+code+autoconf}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This code is a trick to determine if the operating system is able or unable to use long extensions (${}>3$~characters)
+% in file names. We define a file descriptor (\com{tf@mtc}) to write files\footnote{\samepage It is
+% the \emph{only} new
+% file descriptor created by the \upack{minitoc} package. All files written by \upack{minitoc} use this
+% descriptor, or one of the standard descriptors, e.g., for the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file.
+% In fact, \upack{minitoc} writes also in the
+% \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files, but via file descriptors already used by standard commands
+% like \com{tableofcontents}, \com{listoffigures} and \com{listoftables}. We can conclude that
+% \upack{minitoc} itself uses only one file descriptor (or write stream). Some other attempts to make per chapter
+% TOCs have failed by quickly leading to exhaustion of file descriptors (\TeX\ offers only 16~file descriptors for writing),
+% because they called the standard internal \com{@starttoc} macro, which invokes \com{newwrite},
+% for each mini-table. As \upack{minitoc} writes into only one file at a~time (and in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log}
+% file, and in the standard contents files,
+% of course), we can reuse the same file descriptor and avoid this serious problem (which was present in the
+% original version of the package).
+% The \upack{minitoc} package writes in the contents files when it encounters a major sectionning command
+% (\com{part}, \com{chapter}, or \com{section}), if necessary. It writes into the mini-table
+% auxiliary files only via the mini-table preparing commands (\com{doparttoc}, \ldots,
+% \com{dosectlot}), once at a time.
+% You do not need a new hammer for each nail.}.
+% This code is verbose if long extensions cannot
+% be used, else the messages are only written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file.
+% The sequencing of these operations is vital. The table~\vref{t+code+8.3} shows this sequence.
+% A~star~($*$) denotes which file is read in phase~3.
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{table}[t]
+% \centering
+% \changeskips
+% \caption{Trick to detect the limitation to short extensions}\label{t+code+8.3}
+% \begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}lccc}
+% \toprule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{Phase (time runs from left to right):}}&1&2&3\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{OS with long extensions}&\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc0}&TRUE&TRUE&$*$\\
+% \space &\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc}&&FALSE&\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{OS with short extensions}&\uxfile{\bs jobname.mtc(0)}&TRUE&FALSE&$*$\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}
+% \end{table}
+% \or\relax
+% Ce code est une astuce pour déterminer si le système d'exploitation est capable ou non d'utiliser des suffixes
+% longs (${}>3$~caractères) dans les noms de fichiers. Nous définissons un descripteur de fichier (\com{tf@mtc})
+% pour écrire des fichiers\,\footnote{C'est le \emph{seul} nouveau descripteur de fichier créé par
+% le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. Tous les
+% fichiers écrits par \upack{minitoc} utilisent ce descripteur, ou l'un des descripteurs standard, comme pour le fichier
+% \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. En fait, \upack{minitoc} écrit aussi dans les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}
+% et \suffix{.lot},
+% mais via des descripteurs de fichiers déjà utilisés par des commandes standard telles que \com{tableofcontents},
+% \com{listoffigures} et \com{listoftables}. Nous pouvons en conclure que \upack{minitoc} lui-même
+% utilise un seul descripteur de fichier (ou flux d'écriture). Certaines autres tentatives pour faire des tables des
+% matières par chapitre ont échoué en conduisant rapidement à~un épuisement des descripteurs de fichiers (\TeX\
+% offre seulement 16~descripteurs de fichiers en écriture), parce qu'elles appelaient la macro interne standard
+% \com{@starttoc}, qui invoque \com{newwrite}, pour chaque mini-table. Puisque \upack{minitoc} écrit
+% dans seulement un seul fichier à~la fois (et dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log},
+% et dans les fichiers standard de
+% contenus, bien sûr), nous pouvons réutiliser le même descripteur de fichier et éviter ce sérieux problème (qui
+% était présent dans la version originale du paquetage).
+% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} écrit dans les fichiers de contenus lorsqu'il rencontre une commande de
+% sectionnement majeure (\com{part}, \com{chapter}, ou \com{section}), si nécessaire. Il écrit
+% dans les fichiers auxiliaires pour les mini-tables seulement via les commandes de préparation des mini-tables
+% (\com{doparttoc}, \ldots, \com{dosectlot}), un à~la fois. Vous n'avez pas besoin d'un nouveau
+% marteau pour chaque clou.}. Ce code est bavard si les suffixes longs ne peuvent pas être utilisés, sinon les
+% messages sont écrits seulement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. Le séquencement de ces opérations est vital.
+% Le tableau~\vref{t+code+8.3} montre ce séquencement. Un astérisque~($*$) indique quel fichier est lu lors de la phase~3.
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{table}[t]
+% \changeskips
+% \centering
+% \caption{Astuce pour détecter la limitation à~des suffixes courts}\label{t+code+8.3}
+% {\begin{tabularx}{\textwidth}{@{}Z{1}lccc}
+% \toprule
+% \multicolumn{2}{@{}l@{}}{\textbf{Phase (le temps s'écoule de gauche à~droite):}}&1&2&3\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{S.E\@. avec suffixes longs}&\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc0}&VRAI&VRAI&$*$\\
+% \space &\xfile{\bs jobname.mtc}&&FAUX&\\
+% \midrule
+% \textbf{S.E\@. avec suffixes courts}&\uxfile{\bs jobname.mtc(0)}&VRAI&FAUX&$*$\\
+% \bottomrule
+% \end{tabularx}}
+% \end{table}
+% \fi
+% \lneed{7}
+% \begin{macro}{\newif}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\immediate}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \begin{macro}{\write}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\input}
+% \begin{macro}{\jobname}
+% \begin{enumerate}[(1)]
+% \addtocounter{enumi}{-1}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%    First, a message and a new flag:\imess{I0002}
+% \or\relax
+%    D'abord, un message et un nouvel indicateur:\imess{I0002}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mtcPackageInfo[I0002]{minitoc}%
+   {Autoconfiguration of extensions\@gobble}
+\newif\if@mtc@longext@\@mtc@longext@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       We write ``\com{@mtc@longext@true}'' in \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. But if the OS has short extensions, the
+%       real name of the file will be truncated to \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}.
+% \or\relax
+%       Nous écrivons «~\com{@mtc@longext@true}~» dans \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. Mais si le système
+%       d'exploitation a des suffixes courts, le vrai nom du fichier sera tronqué à~\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc0
+\immediate\write\tf@mtc{\string\@mtc@longext@true}
+\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       We write ``\com{@mtc@longext@false}'' in \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}.
+% \or\relax
+%       Nous écrivons «~\com{@mtc@longext@false}~» dans \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc
+\immediate\write\tf@mtc{\string\@mtc@longext@false}
+\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%        We read \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. But if the OS has short extensions, the real name of the file will be
+%        truncated to \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}.
+% \or\relax
+%        Nous lisons \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}. Mais si le système d'exploitation a des suffixes courts, le vrai nom du
+%        fichier sera tronqué à~\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\input{\jobname.mtc0}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       Hence,\SMM{\lmess{I0012}\\\lmess{I0031}\\\lmess{W0019}} the flag is true if we read really
+%       from \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}, but false if we read from
+%       \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. The text and the severity of the messages are different.
+% \or\relax
+%       En\SMM{\lmess{I0012}\\\lmess{I0031}\\\lmess{W0019}} conséquence,
+%       l'indicateur est vrai si nous lisons effectivement depuis le fichier \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0}, mais faux
+%       si nous lisons depuis \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}. Le texte et la sévérité des messages sont différents.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@longext@
+ \mtcPackageInfo[I0012]{minitoc}%
+   {Long extensions (Unix-like) will be used\@gobble}
+ \mtcPackageInfo[I0031]{minitoc}%
+ {==> this version is configured for UNIX-like
+  \MessageBreak
+  \space\space\space\space(long extensions) file names\@gobble}%
+\else
+ \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0019]{minitoc}%
+   {Short extensions (MSDOS-like) will be used
+    \MessageBreak
+    ==> this version is configured for MSDOS-like
+    \MessageBreak
+    \space\space\space\space(8+3) file names}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \item
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%       We erase the contents of the two files (because \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} is also used later as a~scratch file,
+%       see section~\vref{s+code+emptiness}).
+% \or\relax
+%       Nous effaçons le contenu des deux fichiers (car \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc} est aussi utilisé comme fichier de
+%       travail plus tard, voir la section~\vref{s+code+emptiness}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc
+\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+\immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.mtc0
+\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Detecting obsolete versions of \LaTeX}\label{s+code+latex.obs}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Détection des versions obsolètes de \LaTeX}\label{s+code+latex.obs}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
+% \begin{macro}{\reset@font}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0021}\\\lmess{W0022}} code detects old versions of the \LaTeX\ kernel that are no more supported and
+% with which the \upack{minitoc}% package can hardly work. The trick is to detect the absence of some
+% internal \LaTeX\ commands, \com{@inputcheck} and \com{reset@font}.
+% If you get one of these messages, your are in bad luck and should \emph{urgently} update your
+% \LaTeX\ installation, which is just rusting since\ldots\ a~lot of years!
+% \or\relax
+% Ce\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0021}\\\lmess{W0022}} code détecte les vieilles versions du noyau \LaTeX\ qui ne sont plus maintenues
+% et avec lesquelles le paquetage \upack{minitoc} aura beaucoup de mal à~fonctionner.
+% L'astuce est de détecter l'absence de certaines commandes
+% internes de \LaTeX, \com{@inputcheck} et \com{reset@font}. Si vous recevez l'un de ces messages, vous êtes
+% dans une mauvaise situation et devriez, \emph{dans l'urgence,} mettre à~jour votre installation de \LaTeX,
+% qui rouille depuis\ldots\ pas mal d'années!
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{@inputcheck}%
+  {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0021]{minitoc}%
+     {Your version of latex.tex is obsolete.
+      \MessageBreak
+      Trying to continue..}\newread\@inputcheck\relax}{}
+\@ifundefined{reset@font}%
+  {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0022]{minitoc}%
+     {Your version of latex.tex is very obsolete.
+      \MessageBreak
+      Trying to continue... crossing fingers}%
+  \let\reset@font\relax}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Adding a TOC entry without leaders nor page numbers}\label{s+code+@undottedtocline}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Ajouter une entrée dans la TdM sans points de conduite ni numéro de page}\label{s+code+@undottedtocline}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\undottedmtcfalse}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The (internal) macro \com{@undottedtocline} is a modified version of the standard command \com{@dottedtocline}.
+% It will be used in customization macros.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro (interne) \com{@undottedtocline} est une version modifiée de la commande standard \com{@dottedtocline}.
+% Elle sera utilisée dans les macros de personnalisation.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifundottedmtc\undottedmtcfalse
+\def\@undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{%
+  \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth\relax \else
+  \vskip \z@ plus.2\p@
+  {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip
+   \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue
+   \interlinepenalty\@M
+   \leavevmode
+   \@tempdima #3\relax \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \hbox{}%
+   \hskip -\leftskip
+    #4\nobreak\hfill \nobreak
+           \null\par}%
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Default values for the page-number customizations}\label{s+code+custom.defaults}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Valeurs par défaut pour les personnalisations des numéros de page}\label{s+code+custom.defaults}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This section defines some customization macros for the presence or
+% absence of page numbers in the mini-tables. But if the \class{memoir}
+% class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} is loaded,
+% it does the job. So, we test first \com{if@mtc@memoirLoaded@}
+% to use the commands of \class{memoir} when they are available.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette section définit quelques macros de personnalisation concernant la présence ou l'absence des numéros de
+% pages dans les mini-tables. Mais si la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} est chargée, elle
+% sait faire ce travail. Donc, nous testons d'abord \com{if@mtc@memoirLoaded@} pour utiliser les commandes de
+% \class{memoir} lorsqu'elles sont disponibles.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@memoirLoaded@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For entries in minitocs:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les entrées dans les minitocs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtcpagenumbers{%
+  \cftpagenumberson{section}
+  \cftpagenumberson{subsection}
+  \cftpagenumberson{subsubsection}
+  \cftpagenumberson{paragraph}
+  \cftpagenumberson{subparagraph}}
+\def\nomtcpagenumbers{%
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{section}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{subsection}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{subsubsection}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{paragraph}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{subparagraph}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nostcpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For entries in secttocs:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les entrées dans les secttocs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\stcpagenumbers{%
+  \cftpagenumberson{subsection}
+  \cftpagenumberson{subsubsection}
+  \cftpagenumberson{paragraph}
+  \cftpagenumberson{subparagraph}}
+\def\nostcpagenumbers{%
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{subsection}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{subsubsection}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{paragraph}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{subparagraph}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\noptcpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For entries in parttocs:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les entrées dans les parttocs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ptcpagenumbers{%
+  \cftpagenumberson{chapter}
+  \cftpagenumberson{section}
+  \cftpagenumberson{subsection}
+  \cftpagenumberson{subsubsection}
+  \cftpagenumberson{paragraph}
+  \cftpagenumberson{subparagraph}}
+\def\noptcpagenumbers{%
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{chapter}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{section}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{subsection}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{subsubsection}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{paragraph}
+  \cftpagenumbersoff{subparagraph}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\noslfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\noplfpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For entries in minilofs, sectlofs, and partlofs:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les entrées dans les minilofs, sectlofs et partlofs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\mlfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{figure}}
+  \def\nomlfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{figure}}
+  \def\slfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{figure}}
+  \def\noslfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{figure}}
+  \def\plfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{figure}}
+  \def\noplfpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{figure}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nosltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nopltpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For entries in minilots, sectlots, and partlots:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les entrées dans les minilots, sectlots et partlots:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\mltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{table}}
+  \def\nomltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{table}}
+  \def\sltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{table}}
+  \def\nosltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{table}}
+  \def\pltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumberson{table}}
+  \def\nopltpagenumbers{\cftpagenumbersoff{table}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Else, \upack{minitoc} will use its own commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Sinon, \upack{minitoc} utilisera ses propres commandes.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, for minitocs, secttocs and parttocs:
+% \or\relax
+% D'abord, pour les minitocs, secttocs et parttocs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\mtcpagenumbers{\let\mtc@pgno\null}
+ \def\nomtcpagenumbers{\let\mtc@pgno\relax}
+ \def\stcpagenumbers{\let\stc@pgno\null}
+ \def\nostcpagenumbers{\let\stc@pgno\relax}
+ \def\ptcpagenumbers{\let\ptc@pgno\null}
+ \def\noptcpagenumbers{\let\ptc@pgno\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, for minilofs, sectlofs and partlofs:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, pour les minilofs, sectlofs et partlofs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\mlfpagenumbers{\let\mlf@pgno\null}
+ \def\nomlfpagenumbers{\let\mlf@pgno\relax}
+ \def\slfpagenumbers{\let\slf@pgno\null}
+ \def\noslfpagenumbers{\let\slf@pgno\relax}
+ \def\plfpagenumbers{\let\plf@pgno\null}
+ \def\noplfpagenumbers{\let\plf@pgno\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, for minilots, sectlots and partlots:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, pour les minilots, sectlots et partlots:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\mltpagenumbers{\let\mlt@pgno\null}
+ \def\nomltpagenumbers{\let\mlt@pgno\relax}
+ \def\sltpagenumbers{\let\slt@pgno\null}
+ \def\nosltpagenumbers{\let\slt@pgno\relax}
+ \def\pltpagenumbers{\let\plt@pgno\null}
+ \def\nopltpagenumbers{\let\plt@pgno\relax}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{9}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then the default values are set; page numbers are present:
+% \or\relax
+% Et enfin, les valeurs par défaut sont établies; les numéros de pages sont présents:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ptcpagenumbers
+\plfpagenumbers
+\pltpagenumbers
+\mtcpagenumbers
+\mlfpagenumbers
+\mltpagenumbers
+\stcpagenumbers
+\slfpagenumbers
+\sltpagenumbers
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A \need{.85\textheight}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Features'' for the mini-tables}\label{s+code+features}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{<<~Dispositifs~>> pour les mini-tables}\label{s+code+features}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Each kind of mini-table has five ``features'': a ``\feat{before}'' feature, an ``\feat{after}'' feature,
+% an ``\feat{open}'' feature, an ``\feat{close}'' feature,
+% and a ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature.
+%
+% A ``\feat{before}'' feature is defined by a macro like \com{beforeparttoc} which contains code to be executed
+% before any mini-table of a given type: \com{beforeparttoc} is executed before each parttoc. Usually such features
+% contain only trivial commands like \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page|, or \com{empty}.
+%
+% An ``\feat{after}'' feature is analog but its code is executed after each mini-table of a given type.
+%
+% An ``\feat{open}'' feature contains code to be executed just before the insertion of the file containing the
+% mini-table. Usally such features either do nothing, either prepare some basic formatting (like multi-column).
+% It does not concern the title of the mini-table or the decorative rules.
+%
+% An ``\feat{close}'' feature contains code to be executed just after the insertion of the file containing the
+% mini-table. Usally such features either do nothing, either finish some basic formatting (like multi-column).
+% It does not concern the title of the mini-table or the decorative rules.
+%
+% A ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature is defined by a macro like \com{thispageparttocstyle} which contains code to define the page
+% style implied by mini-tables of a given type: the command \com{thispageparttocstyle} can be defined as
+% \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|. Usually, the ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature is only defined for part-level mini-tables,
+% which use page breaks in their \feat{before} and \feat{after} features. For chapter- and section-level
+% mini-tables, the ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature is usually defined as \com{empty}.
+%
+% We set the default values for the part-level features depending on the presence of the \com{chapter} command, as
+% \class{article}-like documents are different from the \class{book}- or \class{report}-like documents for the
+% layout of part-level mini-tables.
+% \or\relax
+% À~chaque type de mini-table sont associés cinq «~dispositifs~» (\emph{features}): un dispositif «~\feat{before}~»
+% (avant), un dispositif «~\feat{after}~» (après),
+% un dispositif «~\feat{open}~» (ouverture), un dispositif «~\feat{close}~» (fermeture),
+% et un dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» (style de cette page).
+%
+% Un dispositif «~\feat{before}~» est défini par une macro telle que \com{beforeparttoc} qui contient du code à~exécuter
+% avant toute mini-table d'un type donné: \com{beforeparttoc} est exécutée avant chaque parttoc. Habituellement,
+% de tels dispositifs ne contiennent que des commandes triviales telles que \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page| ou \com{empty}.
+%
+% Un dispositif «~\feat{after}~» est analogue mais son code est exécuté après chaque mini-table d'un type donné.
+%
+% Un dispositif «~\feat{open}~» contient du code à~exécuter juste avant l'insertion du fichier contenant la
+% mini-table. Habituellement, de tels dispositifs soit ne font rien, soit préparent une mise en forme basique
+% (comme un multi-colonnage). Il ne concerne pas le titre de la mini-table ni les filets décoratifs.
+%
+% Un dispositif «~\feat{close}~» contient du code à~exécuter juste après l'insertion du fichier contenant la
+% mini-table. Habituellement, de tels dispositifs soit ne font rien, soit achèvent une mise en forme basique
+% (comme un multi-colonnage). Il ne concerne pas le titre de la mini-table ni les filets décoratifs.
+%
+% Un dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» est défini par une macro comme \com{thispageparttocstyle} qui contient du
+% code pour définir le style de page impliqué par les mini-tables d'un type donné: la commande \com{thispageparttocstyle}
+% peut être définie comme étant \com{thispagestyle}\verb|{...}|. Habituellement, le dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» n'est
+% défini que pour les mini-tables au niveau partie, qui utilisent des sauts de page dans leurs dispositifs «~\feat{before}~»
+% et «~\feat{after}~». Pour les mini-tables aux niveaux chapitre et section, le dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» est
+% habituellement défini comme étant \com{empty}.
+%
+% Nous établissons les valeurs par défaut pour les dispositifs au niveau partie selon la présence de la commande
+% \com{chapter}, car les documents du genre \class{article} sont différents des documents du genre \class{book}
+% ou \class{report} pour la mise en page des mini-tables au niveau partie.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If \com{chapter} is not defined, the part level mini-tables have no ``\feat{before}'' feature (by default):
+% \or\relax
+% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, les mini-tables au niveau partie n'ont pas de dispositif «~\feat{before}~» (par défaut):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+   \let\beforeparttoc\empty
+   \let\beforepartlof\empty
+   \let\beforepartlot\empty}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But if \com{chapter} is defined, they have a \com{cleardoublepage} as default ``\feat{before}'' feature:
+% \or\relax
+% Mais si \com{chapter} est définie, elles ont \com{cleardoublepage} comme dispositif «~\feat{before}~» par défaut
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   {\let\beforeparttoc\cleardoublepage
+    \let\beforepartlof\cleardoublepage
+    \let\beforepartlot\cleardoublepage}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Chapter level mini-tables have no ``\feat{before}'' feature (by default):
+% \or\relax
+% Les mini-tables au niveau chapitre n'ont (par défaut), pas de dispositif «~\feat{before}~»:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\beforeminitoc\empty
+\let\beforeminilof\empty
+\let\beforeminilot\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Section level mini-tables have no ``\feat{before}'' feature (by default):
+% \or\relax
+% Les mini-tables au niveau section n'ont (par défaut), pas de dispositif «~\feat{before}~»:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\beforesecttoc\empty
+\let\beforesectlof\empty
+\let\beforesectlot\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If \com{chapter} is not defined, the part level mini-tables have no ``\feat{after}'' feature (by default):
+% \or\relax
+% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, les mini-tables au niveau partie n'ont pas de dispositif «~\feat{after}~» (par défaut):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+   \let\afterparttoc\empty
+   \let\afterpartlof\empty
+   \let\afterpartlot\empty}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But if \com{chapter} is defined, they have a \com{cleardoublepage} as default ``\feat{after}'' feature:
+% \or\relax
+% Mais si \com{chapter} est définie, elles ont \com{cleardoublepage} comme dispositif «~\feat{after}~» par défaut
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   {\let\afterparttoc\cleardoublepage
+    \let\afterpartlof\cleardoublepage
+    \let\afterpartlot\cleardoublepage}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterminilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Chapter level mini-tables have no ``\feat{after}'' feature (by default):
+% \or\relax
+% Les mini-tables au niveau chapitre n'ont, par défaut, pas de dispositif «~\feat{after}~»:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\afterminitoc\empty
+\let\afterminilof\empty
+\let\afterminilot\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Section level mini-tables have no ``\feat{after}'' feature (by default):
+% \or\relax
+% Les mini-tables au niveau section n'ont, par défaut, pas de dispositif «~\feat{after}~»:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\aftersecttoc\empty
+\let\aftersectlof\empty
+\let\aftersectlot\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{12}
+% \begin{macro}{\openparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\openpartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\openpartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\openminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\openminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\openminilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\opensecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\opensectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\opensectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, the ``\feat{open}'' features do nothing:
+% \or\relax
+% Par défaut, les dispositifs ``\feat{open}'' ne font rien:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\openparttoc\empty
+\let\openpartlof\empty
+\let\openpartlot\empty
+\let\openminitoc\empty
+\let\openminilof\empty
+\let\openminilot\empty
+\let\opensecttoc\empty
+\let\opensectlof\empty
+\let\opensectlot\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{12}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\closepartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\closepartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeminilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\closesecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\closesectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\closesectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, ``\feat{close}'' features do nothing:
+% \or\relax
+% Par défaut, les dispositifs ``\feat{close}'' ne font rien:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\closeparttoc\empty
+\let\closepartlof\empty
+\let\closepartlot\empty
+\let\closeminitoc\empty
+\let\closeminilof\empty
+\let\closeminilot\empty
+\let\closesecttoc\empty
+\let\closesectlof\empty
+\let\closesectlot\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{9}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagestyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageparttocstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlofstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlotstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageminitocstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilofstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilotstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagesecttocstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlofstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlotstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, all the ``\feat{pagestyle}'' features (at part level) use the \texttt{empty} page style.
+% It affects only the first page of the mini-table. If \com{chapter} is not defined, there is no default
+% ``\feat{pagestyle}'' features at the part level.
+% \or\relax
+% Par défaut, tous les dispositifs «~\feat{pagestyle}~» (au niveau partie) utilisent le style de page \texttt{empty}.
+% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, il n'y a pas de dispositif «~\feat{pagestyle}~» au niveau partie.
+% Ceci affecte seulement la première page de la mini-table.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+ \def\thispageparttocstyle{\empty}
+ \def\thispagepartlofstyle{\empty}
+ \def\thispagepartlotstyle{\empty}}%
+{\def\thispageparttocstyle{\thispagestyle{empty}}
+ \def\thispagepartlofstyle{\thispagestyle{empty}}
+ \def\thispagepartlotstyle{\thispagestyle{empty}}}
+\def\thispageminitocstyle{\empty}
+\def\thispageminilofstyle{\empty}
+\def\thispageminilotstyle{\empty}
+\def\thispagesecttocstyle{\empty}
+\def\thispagesectlofstyle{\empty}
+\def\thispagesectlotstyle{\empty}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% In section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}, we will define the \com{mtcsetfeature} macro which is
+% a~much easier user interface to set the mini-tables ``features''.
+% \or\relax
+% Dans la section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}, nous définirons la macro \com{mtcsetfeature} qui est une
+% interface utilisateur bien plus facile pour mettre en place les «~dispositifs~» des mini-tables.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Fake tables of contents}\label{s+code+fake}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Tables des matières invisibles}\label{s+code+fake}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\fake@starttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@filesw}
+% \begin{macro}{\newwrite}
+% \begin{macro}{\immediate}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If you don't want a table of contents, but want minitocs,
+% you need to create the \suffix{.toc} file, without inserting it
+% into your document. This \com{faketableofcontents} command is a stripped off version
+% of the standard command \com{tableofcontents}.
+% We define in the same way the analog commands \com{fakelistoffigures} and \com{fakelistoftables},
+% using in fact just a stripped version \com{fake@starttoc} of \com{@starttoc}. But it is nice to reset to zero the
+% \cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc}, and \cnt{stc} counters now, if they are defined\,\footnote{Remember the infamous
+% ``\texttt{stc0}'' bug.}.
+% \or\relax
+% Si vous souhaitez ne pas avoir de table des matières, mais avoir quand même des minitocs, il vous faut créer le
+% fichier \suffix{.toc}, sans l'insérer dans votre document. Cette commande
+% \com{faketableofcontents} est une version restreinte de la commande \com{tableofcontents} standard. Nous
+% définissons de la même manière les deux autres commandes analogues \com{fakelistoffigures} et \com{fakelistoftables},
+% en utilisant en fait simplement une version restreinte \com{fake@starttoc} de \com{@starttoc}.
+% Mais il est bon de remettre à~zéro
+% maintenant les compteurs \cnt{ptc}, \cnt{mtc} et \cnt{stc}, s'ils sont définis\,\footnote{Souvenez-vous
+% de l'infâme erreur <<~\texttt{stc0}~>>.}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{4}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\faketableofcontents{\fake@starttoc{toc}%
+    \@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\setcounter{ptc}{0}}%
+    \@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{\setcounter{mtc}{0}}%
+    \@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\setcounter{stc}{0}}%
+    }
+\def\fakelistoffigures{\fake@starttoc{lof}}
+\def\fakelistoftables{\fake@starttoc{lot}}
+\def\fake@starttoc#1{\begingroup \makeatletter
+  \if@filesw \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
+             \immediate\openout \csname tf@#1\endcsname
+             \jobname.#1\relax \fi
+  \global\@nobreakfalse \endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This code uses the same file descriptors (for writing) than the original commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce code utilise les mêmes descripteurs de fichier (en écriture) que les commandes d'origine.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Depth counters for minilofs and minilots}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Compteurs de profondeur pour les minilofs et les minilots}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\newcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the counters \dcnt{lofdepth} and \dcnt{lotdepth} are defined,
+% we create the necessary new counters:
+% \dcnt{minilofdepth} and \dcnt{minilofdepth}.
+% These counters are initialized to~2.
+% This is done after the loading of the packages, in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block:
+% \or\relax
+% Si les compteurs \dcnt{lofdepth} et \dcnt{lotdepth} sont définis, nous créons
+% les nouveaux compteurs nécessaires:
+% \dcnt{minilofdepth} et \dcnt{minilofdepth}.
+% Ces compteurs sont initialisés à~2.
+% Ceci est fait après le chargement des paquetages, dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}%
+   {\newcounter{minilofdepth}\setcounter{minilofdepth}{2}}%
+ \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}%
+   {\newcounter{minilotdepth}\setcounter{minilotdepth}{2}}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Chapter level commands}\label{s+code+chapter.level}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Commandes au niveau chapitre}\label{s+code+chapter.level}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% From here, we define the chapter-level commands.
+% \or\relax
+% À~partir d'ici, nous définissons les commandes au niveau chapitre.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we memorize the marks (not used today, but\ldots):
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, nous mémorisons les marques (ceci n'est pas encore utilisé, mais\ldots):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth
+\global\let\@mkboth\markboth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Starred parts, chapters or sections}\label{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Parties, chapitres et section étoilés}\label{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\addst@rred}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@ptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@stc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define commands to manage the starred sectionning commands: \com{part*}, \com{chapter*} and \com{section*}.
+% The section-level is different depending on the presence of the \com{chapter} command.
+% Eventually, a counter is incremented.
+% A~contents line is added in the \suffix{.toc} file, with the right depth to print it (see \verb|\l@star...| later,
+% in section~\vref{s+code+necessary.l@}).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons des commandes pour traiter les commandes de sectionnement étoilées: \com{part*}, \com{chapter*}
+% et \com{section*}. Le niveau section est différent selon que \com{chapter} est définie ou non. Éventuellement,
+% un compteur est incrémenté. Une ligne de contenu est ajoutée dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}, avec la bonne
+% profondeur pour l'imprimer (voir \verb|\l@star...| plus loin, dans la section~\vref{s+code+necessary.l@}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addst@rred#1#2{%
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{star#1}{#2}%
+  \@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{%
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax
+      \stepcounter{ptc}%
+    \fi
+  }%
+  \@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{%
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax
+      \stepcounter{mtc}%
+    \fi
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\appendix\relax
+      \stepcounter{mtc}%
+    \fi
+  }%
+  \@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{%
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax
+%%      \@ifundefined{chapter}{\stepcounter{stc}}{}%
+      \stepcounter{stc}%
+    \fi
+  }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\addst@rred}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If \com{chapter} is not defined, we just define \com{addstarredsection}:
+% \or\relax
+% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, nous définissons simplement \com{addstarredsection}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+\gdef\addstarredsection#1{\addst@rred{section}{#1}}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Else we begin to define the stuff for chapter-level commands (the ``else'' branch of \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}|):
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% Sinon, nous commençons à~définir le matériel pour les commandes au niveau chapitre (branche «~sinon~» de
+% \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}|):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\The@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@firstchapteris@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\newcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\incrementmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{W0003} define now: the internal format of the \cnt{mtc} counter (\com{The@mtc}), the obsolete command
+% \com{firstchapteris} (it just emits a harmless warning), the \cnt{mtc} counter (initialized to~0),
+% the \com{adjustmtc} command (increments the \cnt{mtc} counter, by~1 by default),
+% the \com{decrementmtc} command (decrements the \cnt{mtc} counter by~1),
+% the \com{incrementmtc} command (increments the \cnt{mtc} counter by~1),
+% the format of the \cnt{mtc} counter (\com{themtc}),
+% the counter \dcnt{minitocdepth}, initialized to~2, for the depth of a minitoc
+% (analog to the standard \dcnt{tocdepth} counter).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{W0003} définissons ensuite: le format interne du compteur \cnt{mtc} (\com{The@mtc}), la commande
+% obsolète \com{firstchapteris} (elle ne fait qu'émettre un avertissement bénin), le compteur \cnt{mtc} (initialisé
+% à~0), la commande \com{adjustmtc} (incrémente le compteur \cnt{mtc}, de~1 par défaut),
+% la commande \com{decrementmtc} (décrémente le compteur \cnt{mtc} de~1),
+% la commande \com{incrementmtc} (incrémente le compteur \cnt{mtc} de~1),
+% le format du compteur \cnt{mtc} (\com{themtc}),
+% le compteur \dcnt{minitocdepth}, initialisé à~2, pour la profondeur d'une minitoc (analogue
+% au compteur standard \dcnt{tocdepth}).
+% \fi
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\The@mtc{\arabic{mtc}}
+\def\firstchapteris#1%
+  {\mtcPackageWarning[W0003]{minitoc}%
+     {\string\firstchapteris \space is an obsolete (ignored)
+      \MessageBreak
+      command}%
+     \@firstchapteris@used@true}
+\newcounter{mtc}
+\setcounter{mtc}{0}
+\newcommand{\adjustmtc}[1][1]{\addtocounter{mtc}{#1}}
+\def\decrementmtc{\addtocounter{mtc}{-1}}
+\def\incrementmtc{\addtocounter{mtc}{+1}}
+\gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}
+\newcounter{minitocdepth}
+\setcounter{minitocdepth}{2}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlf@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlt@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\plt@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\slf@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\slt@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the horizontal rules to draw before and after minitocs (\com{mtc@rule}), and we copy
+% that definition into analog macros for other kinds of mini-tables. We also set the default value (24pt) of
+% \com{mtcindent}, the indentation for minitocs (both sides). The rules are 0.4pt thick. They are defined via
+% \com{hrule} to stay in vertical mode for the final \com{kern}.
+% \or\relax %
+% Nous définissons les filets horizontaux à~tracer avant et après les minitocs
+% (\com{mtc@rule}), puis nous copions cette définition dans des macros analogues pour les autres sortes de
+% mini-tables. Nous établissons aussi la valeur par défaut (24pt) de \com{mtcindent}, l'indentation pour les minitocs (des
+% deux côtés). Les filets sont épais de 0.4pt. Ils sont définis via \com{hrule} pour rester en mode vertical
+% pour le \com{kern} final.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule \@width\columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}
+\let\mlf@rule\mtc@rule
+\let\mlt@rule\mtc@rule
+\let\plf@rule\mtc@rule
+\let\plt@rule\mtc@rule
+\let\slf@rule\mtc@rule
+\let\slt@rule\mtc@rule
+\mtcindent=24\p@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{14}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Font commands for the mini-tables}\label{s+code+font.commands.ch}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Commandes de fontes pour les mini-tables}\label{s+code+font.commands.ch}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtifont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define these commands with full NFSS~\cite{fontsel} descriptions. These definitions are effective if \com{chapter} is
+% defined.
+% The fonts for titles are also defined here. See also the \com{mtcsetfont} macro
+% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}) and the \com{mtcsettitlefont} macro later
+% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons ces commandes avec des descriptions NFSS~\cite{fontsel} complètes. Ces définitions sont effectives
+% si \com{chapter}
+% est définie. Les fontes pour les titres sont aussi définies ici. Voir aussi la macro \com{mtcsetfont}
+% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}) et la macro \com{mtcsettitlefont} plus loin
+% (section~\vref{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtcfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries}
+\def\mtcSfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
+\let\mtcSSfont\mtcfont \let\mtcSSSfont\mtcfont
+\let\mtcPfont\mtcfont  \let\mtcSPfont\mtcfont
+\let\mlffont\mtcfont   \let\mlfSfont\mtcfont
+\let\mltfont\mtcfont   \let\mltSfont\mtcfont
+\def\mtifont{\large\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And \com{coffeefont} is used for ``coffee breaks{\myCoffeecup}'' in the \pack{minutes}
+% package~\cite{minutes}.
+% \or\relax
+% Et \com{coffeefont} est utilisée pour les «~pauses café{\myCoffeecup}~» dans le
+% paquetage \pack{minutes}~\cite{minutes}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\coffeefont{\small\rmfamily\slshape\mdseries}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Internal commands to position the mini-table titles}\label{s+code+position.title.mini}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Commandes internes pour positionner les titres des mini-tables}\label{s+code+position.title.mini}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilt}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The commands \verb|\miniXXX| and \verb|\dominiXXX| accept an optional argument to left justify, center,
+% right justify or omit the title of the chapter-level mini-tables. By default, these titles are left justified.
+% The choice made in a \verb|\dominiXXX| command is global and memorized in \com{df@mtitc}, \com{df@mtilf} or
+% \com{df@mtilt}; the choice made in a \verb|\miniXXX| command is local and stored in \com{do@mtitc},
+% \com{do@mtilf} or \com{do@mtilt}. See the \com{minitoc@} macro later
+% (section~\vref{s+code+minitoc.command}). An empty title needs a vertical correction (\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes \verb|\miniXXX| et \verb|\dominiXXX| acceptent un argument optionnel pour justifier à~gauche,
+% centrer, justifier à~droite ou omettre le titre des mini-tables au niveau chapitre. Par défaut, ces titres sont
+% justifiés à~gauche. Le choix fait dans une commande \verb|\dominiXXX| est global et mémorisé dans \com{df@mtitc},
+% \com{df@mtilf} ou \com{df@mtilt}; le choix fait dans une commande \verb|\miniXXX| est local et rangé dans
+% \com{do@mtitc}, \com{do@mtilf} ou \com{do@mtilt}. Voir la macro \com{minitoc@} plus loin
+% (section~\vref{s+code+minitoc.command}). Un titre vide nécessite une correction verticale
+% (\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Centering, flushleft, flushright or empty titles:
+% \or\relax
+% Titres centrés, justifiés à~gauche, justifiés à~droite ou vides:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\c@mti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null}
+\def\l@mti#1{\null #1\hfill\null}
+\def\r@mti#1{\null\hfill #1\null}
+\def\e@mti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
+\def\n@mti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mtilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilt}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Default: titles on left:
+% \or\relax
+% Par défaut, les titres sont justifiés à~gauche:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\do@mtitc\l@mti
+\let\df@mtitc\l@mti
+\let\do@mtilf\l@mti
+\let\df@mtilf\l@mti
+\let\do@mtilt\l@mti
+\let\df@mtilt\l@mti
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{12}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{mtc@verse} environment}\label{s+code+mtc@verse.env}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{L'environnement \texttt{mtc@verse}}\label{s+code+mtc@verse.env}
+% \fi
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\\}
+% \begin{macro}{\list}
+% \begin{macro}{\itemsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\itemindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\listparindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\topsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\parsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Each minitoc is placed inside a \env{mtc@verse} environment. This environment is analog to the
+% standard \env{verse} environment and hence defined via two commands: \com{mtc@verse} and \com{endmtc@verse}.
+% As it is a list environment, we first define (in a local way) \verb|\\|, then call \com{list}\verb|{}| and set some
+% dimensions like \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent}, \com{listparindent}, \com{topsep}.
+% \com{parsep} is set to zero if the \opt{tight} option is active (to reduce the spacing of the lines).
+% \com{parskip} is set to zero if the \opt{k-tight} option is active
+% (to reduce the spacing of the lines).
+% Both margins are set to \com{mtcindent}. \com{endmtc@verse} terminates the list and discourages a page break.
+% The \env{mtc@verse} environment has an argument which is an horizontal offset (a command like \com{mtcoffset}).
+% \or\relax
+% Chaque minitoc est placée à~l'intérieur d'un environnement \env{mtc@verse}. Cet environnement est analogue
+% à~l'environnement standard \env{verse} et donc il est défini à~l'aide de deux commandes: \com{mtc@verse} et
+% \com{endmtc@verse}. Comme c'est un environnement de liste, nous définissons d'abord (de manière locale) \verb|\\|,
+% puis nous appelons \com{list}\verb|{}| et établissons quelques dimensions telles que \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent},
+% \com{listparindent}, \com{topsep}.
+% \com{parsep} est forcée à~zéro si l'option \opt{tight} est active
+% (pour réduire l'espacement des lignes).
+% \com{parskip} est forcée à~zéro si l'option \opt{k-tight} est active
+% (pour réduire l'espacement des lignes).
+% Les deux marges sont établies à~\com{mtcindent}.
+% L'environnement \env{mtc@verse} a un argument qui est un déplacement horizontal (une commande telle que \com{mtcoffset}).
+% \com{endmtc@verse} termine la liste et décourage une coupure de page.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@verse#1{\let\\=\@centercr
+  \list{}{%
+     \itemsep=\z@ \itemindent=\z@ \partopsep=\z@
+     \listparindent=\itemindent \topsep=1ex
+     \iftightmtc \parsep=\z@ \fi \ifktightmtc \parskip=\z@ \fi
+     \leftmargin=\mtcindent \rightmargin=\leftmargin
+     \addtolength{\leftmargin}{+#1}%
+     \addtolength{\rightmargin}{-#1}%
+  }%
+  \item[]}
+\def\endmtc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% ^^A \need{.5\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars.
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \ucom{minitoc}, \ucom{minilof}, and \ucom{minilot} commands}\icom{minitoc}\icom{minilof}\icom{minilot}
+% These three commands are very similar, with only cosmetic differences.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les commandes \ucom{minitoc}, \ucom{minilof} et \ucom{minilot}}\icom{minitoc}\icom{minilof}\icom{minilot}
+% Ces trois commandes sont très similaires, avec seulement des différences de détail.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \ucom{minitoc} command}\label{s+code+minitoc.command}\icom{minitoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \ucom{minitoc}}\label{s+code+minitoc.command}\icom{minitoc}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{minitoc} command must be used after \com{chapter} if you need a minitoc (no automatic minitoc).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{minitoc} doit être utilisée après \com{chapter} si vous voulez une minitoc (il n'y a pas de
+% minitoc automatique).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command accepts an optional argument, whose default value has eventually been set earlier by a
+% \com{dominitoc} command. The letter~``\texttt{d}'' represents this default value.
+% \com{dominitoc} has itself an
+% optional argument which sets the default value of the optional argument of \com{minitoc}. The default value of
+% the optional argument of the \com{dominitoc} command is~``\texttt{l}''. It seems tortuous, but it is simple to use:
+% we have a default behaviour~(\texttt{l}) which can be altered globally via the optional argument of
+% \com{dominitoc}, or locally via the optional argument of \com{minitoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut éventuellement été établie plus tôt par
+% une commande \com{dominitoc}. La lettre~«~\texttt{d}~» représente cette valeur par défaut. \com{dominitoc} a elle-même
+% un argument optionnel qui établit la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel de \com{minitoc}. La valeur par
+% défaut de l'argument optionnel de la commande \com{dominitoc} est~«~\texttt{l}~». Ceci semble tortueux, mais
+% c'est simple à~utiliser: nous avons un comportement par défaut~(\texttt{l}) qui peut être altéré globalement via
+% l'argument optionnel de \com{dominitoc}, ou localement via l'argument optionnel de \com{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% So we define \com{minitoc} with an optional argument and its (current) default value, and call the true code in
+% the \com{minitoc@} macro (which has one delimited argument); we use the \com{@ifnextchar} trick to detect a
+% left bracket for the optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Donc nous définissons \com{minitoc} avec un argument optionnel et sa valeur par défaut (courante), puis
+% appelons le vrai code dans la macro \com{minitoc@} (qui a un argument délimité); nous utilisons l'astuce
+% \com{@ifnextchar} pour détecter le crochet gauche de l'argument optionnel:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\minitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\minitoc@}{\minitoc@[d]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The real code of \com{minitoc} is in \com{minitoc@}, which has a mandatory argument (delimited by brackets)
+% specifying the position of the title.
+% \or\relax
+% Le véritable code de \com{minitoc} est dans \com{minitoc@}, qui a un argument obligatoire (délimité par les
+% crochets) spécifiant la position du titre.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we set the global flag \com{@minitoc@used@true} to note that \com{minitoc} has been called (this will be
+% used by a hint later, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous établissons d'abord l'indicateur global \com{@minitoc@used@true} pour noter que la macro \com{minitoc} a été
+% appelée (ceci sera utilisé par une indication ou \emph{hint} plus tard, comme le décrit la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\minitoc@[#1]{%
+\global\@minitoc@used@true
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The name of the file containing the minitoc is constructed from \com{jobname} and a
+% suffix \com{@tocfile}, which is \suffix{.mtc} (long extensions) or~\suffix{.M} (short extensions)
+% followed by the absolute number of the minitoc.
+% \or\relax
+% Le nom du fichier contenant la minitoc est construit à~partir de \com{jobname} et d'un suffixe \com{@tocfile},
+% qui est \suffix{.mtc} (suffixes longs) ou~\suffix{.M} (suffixes courts) suivi du numéro absolu
+% de la minitoc.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@longext@
+   \def\@tocfile{mtc\The@mtc}%
+\else
+   \def\@tocfile{M\The@mtc}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then\imess{I0006} we test (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) the emptiness of this file.
+% A warning is given if the file is empty and a flag is set (a hint will signal that an empty minitoc has been
+% requested).
+% \or\relax
+% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) la vacuité de ce fichier. Un avertissement est émis si le
+% fichier est % vide et un indicateur est établi (une indication ou \emph{hint} signalera qu'une minitoc vide
+% a été demandée).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+        \if@mtc@FE
+        \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}%
+           {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
+        \@mtc@empty@minitoc@true
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageminitocstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We call \com{thispageminitocstyle} to set the page style
+% (by default, this does nothing because, by default, there is no page break before a minitoc).
+% The marks are not treated, because usually there is no new page for a minitoc.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous appelons \com{thispageminitocstyle} pour établir le style de page (par défaut, ceci ne fait rien car, par
+% défaut, il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minitoc). Les marques ne sont pas traitées, car, habituellement,
+% il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minitoc.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \thispageminitocstyle
+%%        \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\mtctitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\mtctitle}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{12}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeminitoc}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtic}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
+% \begin{environment}{tabular}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We call \com{beforeminitoc},
+% then begin a \env{samepage} environment (to try to discourage page breaks in a minitoc)
+% and look at the position of the title. If the title is empty, the
+% layout is corrected. We print the title with its font (\com{mtifont}),
+% then the top rule of the minitoc (if rules are present), using a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page
+% break between the title and the top rule).
+% The font is set to \com{mtcfont}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous appelons \com{beforeminitoc}, puis commençons un environnement \env{samepage} (pour essayer de
+% décourager les coupures de page à~l'intérieur d'une minitoc) et examinons la position du titre. Si le titre est
+% vide, la mise en page est corrigée. Nous imprimons le titre avec sa fonte (\com{mtifont}), puis le filet du haut
+% de la minitoc (si les filets sont présents), en utilisant un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher une
+% coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut). La fonte est établie à~\com{mtcfont}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \beforeminitoc
+        \relax\begin{samepage}%
+        \if #1e\let\do@mtitc\e@mti
+         \else\if #1n\let\do@mtitc\n@mti
+         \else\if #1c\let\do@mtitc\c@mti
+         \else\if #1l\let\do@mtitc\l@mti
+         \else\if #1r\let\do@mtitc\r@mti
+         \else\if #1d\let\do@mtitc\df@mtitc
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+        \mtc@CkStr{\mtctitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@mtitc\e@mti\relax\fi
+        \raggedright
+        \parskip=\z@%
+        \reset@font\mtcfont%
+        \parindent=\z@%
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+        \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
+        \par\noindent %%
+        \ifx\mtc@rule\relax
+         \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+         \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtitc{\mtc@v\mtctitle}\\
+         \end{tabular}%
+        \else
+         \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+         \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtitc{\mtc@v\mtctitle}\\\hline
+         \end{tabular}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcoffset}
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We forbid a page break after the title and the top rule, then set some layout parameters and begin
+% an \env{mtc@verse} environment:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous interdisons une coupure de page après le titre et le filet supérieur, puis établissons quelques paramètres
+% de mise en page et commençons un environnement \env{mtc@verse}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR
+        \leftmargin\mtcindent \rightmargin\mtcindent
+        \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
+        \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
+        \begin{mtc@verse}{\mtcoffset}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@minitocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\\}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We force the effective depth of the mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) to the required depth (\com{c@minitocdepth}),
+% so the printing is done inside the \env{mtc@verse} environment, where \dcnt{tocdepth}
+% has been forced to \dcnt{minitocdepth}, to print only the entries whose level is low enough,
+% then inhibit a page break. The blank line is necessary to avoid a parasite negative indentation.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous forçons la profondeur effective de la mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) à~la profondeur demandée
+% (\com{c@minitocdepth}), donc l'impression est faite à~l'intérieur de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, où
+% \dcnt{tocdepth} a été forcée à~\dcnt{minitocdepth}, pour n'imprimer que
+% les entrées dont le niveau est assez bas, puis nous inhibons une coupure de page. La ligne blanche est nécessaire
+% pour éviter une indentation négative parasite.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \c@tocdepth=\c@minitocdepth
+        \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pgno}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setform}
+% \begin{macro}{\openminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test the presence of leaders and page numbers, then print the minitoc by inputing the minitoc file.
+% But before reading the minitoc file, we must call the hook macro (asked for by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} for his
+% \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite})
+% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} and the macro
+% \com{mtc@setform} which adjusts some layout parameters (defined by the user via
+% some \com{mtcsetformat} commands).
+% We work in a group to keep local some macro redefinitions.
+% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons la présence de points de conduite et de numéros de pages, puis imprimons la minitoc en insérant le
+% fichier de minitoc. Mais avant de lire ce fichier de minitoc, nous devons appeler la macro d'attache (\emph{hook})
+% (demandée par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite})
+% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} et la macro \com{mtc@setform} qui ajuste certains paramètres de mise en page
+% (définis par l'utilisateur via quelques commandes \com{mtcsetformat}).
+% Nous travaillons dans un groupe pour que certaines redéfinitions de macros restent locales.
+% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \@ifundefined{mtc@pgno}%
+  {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
+  \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
+  \mtc@setform%
+  \openminitoc \global\inminitoctrue
+  \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}%
+  \global\inminitocfalse\closeminitoc
+  \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip}
+  \leavevmode\mtc@strut
+  \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\\}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterminitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We close the \env{mtc@verse} environment, add the bottomrule (while preventing a page break), then close the
+% \env{samepage} environment, and call \com{afterminitoc}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous fermons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, ajoutons le filet inférieur (tout en évitant une coupure de page),
+% puis fermons l'environnement \env{samepage}, et enfin appelons \com{afterminitoc}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|)
+% est essentielle.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \end{mtc@verse}%
+        \kernafterminitoc
+        \nopagebreak[4]\mtc@bottom@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
+        \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
+        \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\afterminitoc\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And we define the bottom rule for a minitoc, with some space under the minitoc:
+% \or\relax
+% Et nous définissons le filet inférieur pour une minitoc, avec un peu d'espace en dessous de la minitoc:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@bottom@rule{%
+  \ifx\mtc@rule\relax\relax\else
+      \vskip -2.5ex
+        \rule[2.4\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A \need{.5\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars.
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \ucom{minilof} command}\label{s+code+minilof.command}\icom{minilof}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \ucom{minilof}}\label{s+code+minilof.command}\icom{minilof}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{minilof} command is very similar to the \com{minitoc} command.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{minilof} est très similaire à~la commande \com{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{minilof} command must be used after \com{chapter} if you need a minilof (no automatic minilof).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{minilof} doit être utilisée après \com{chapter} si vous voulez une minilof (il n'y a pas de
+% minilof automatique).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command accepts an optional argument, whose default value has eventually been set earlier by a
+% \com{dominilof} command. The letter~``\texttt{d}'' represents this default value.
+% \com{dominilof} has itself an
+% optional argument which sets the default value of the optional argument of \com{minilof}. The default value of
+% the optional argument of the \com{dominilof} command is~``\texttt{l}''. It seems tortuous, but it is simple to use:
+% we have a default behaviour~(\texttt{l}) which can be altered globally via the optional argument of
+% \com{dominilof}, or locally via the optional argument of \com{minilof}.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut éventuellement été établie plus tôt par
+% une commande \com{dominilof}. La lettre~«~\texttt{d}~» représente cette valeur par défaut. \com{dominilof} a elle-même
+% un argument optionnel qui établit la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel de \com{minilof}. La valeur par
+% défaut de l'argument optionnel de la commande \com{dominilof} est~«~\texttt{l}~». Ceci semble tortueux, mais
+% c'est simple à~utiliser: nous avons un comportement par défaut~(\texttt{l}) qui peut être altéré globalement via
+% l'argument optionnel de \com{dominilof}, ou localement via l'argument optionnel de \com{minilof}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% So we define \com{minilof} with an optional argument and its (current) default value, and call the true code in
+% the \com{minilof@} macro (which has one delimited argument); we use the \com{@ifnextchar} trick to detect a
+% left bracket for the optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Donc nous définissons \com{minilof} avec un argument optionnel et sa valeur par défaut (courante), puis
+% appelons le vrai code dans la macro \com{minilof@} (qui a un argument délimité); nous utilisons l'astuce
+% \com{@ifnextchar} pour détecter le crochet gauche de l'argument optionnel:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\minilof{\@ifnextchar[{\minilof@}{\minilof@[d]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The real code of \com{minilof} is in \com{minilof@}, which has a mandatory argument (delimited by brackets)
+% specifying the position of the title.
+% \or\relax
+% Le véritable code de \com{minilof} est dans \com{minilof@}, qui a un argument obligatoire (délimité par les
+% crochets) spécifiant la position du titre.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we set the global flag \com{@minilof@used@true} to note that \com{minilof} has been called (this will be
+% used by a hint later, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous établissons d'abord l'indicateur global \com{@minilof@used@true} pour noter que la macro \com{minilof} a été
+% appelée (ceci sera utilisé par une indication ou \emph{hint} plus tard, comme le décrit la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\minilof@[#1]{%
+\global\@minilof@used@true
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The name of the file containing the minilof is constructed from \com{jobname} and a
+% suffix \com{@tocfile}, which is \suffix{.mlf} (long extensions) or~\suffix{.F} (short extensions)
+% followed by the absolute number of the minilof.
+% \or\relax
+% Le nom du fichier contenant la minilof est construit à~partir de \com{jobname} et d'un suffixe \com{@tocfile},
+% qui est \suffix{.mlf} (suffixes longs) ou~\suffix{.F} (suffixes courts) suivi du numéro absolu
+% de la minilof.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@longext@%
+   \def\@tocfile{mlf\The@mtc}%
+\else
+   \def\@tocfile{F\The@mtc}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilof@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then\imess{I0006} we test (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) the emptiness of this file.
+% A warning is given if the file is empty and a flag is set (a hint will signal that an empty minilof has been
+% requested).
+% \or\relax
+% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) la vacuité de ce fichier. Un avertissement est émis
+% si le fichier est vide et un indicateur est établi (une indication ou \emph{hint} signalera qu'une minilof
+% vide a été demandée).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+        \if@mtc@FE
+        \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}%
+           {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
+        \@mtc@empty@minilof@true
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilofstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We call \com{thispageminilofstyle} to set the page style
+% (by default, this does nothing because, by default, there is no page break before a minilof).
+% The marks are not treated, because usually there is no new page for a minilof.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous appelons \com{thispageminilofstyle} pour établir le style de page (par défaut, ceci ne fait rien car, par
+% défaut, il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilof). Les marques ne sont pas traitées, car, habituellement,
+% il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilof.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \thispageminilofstyle
+%%        \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\mlftitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\mlftitle}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{12}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilof}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtic}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlf@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
+% \begin{environment}{tabular}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We call \com{beforeminilof},
+% then begin a \env{samepage} environment (to try to discourage page breaks in a minilof)
+% and look at the position of the title. If the title is empty, the
+% layout is corrected. We print the title with its font (\com{mtifont}),
+% then the top rule of the minilof (if rules are present), using a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit
+% a page break between the title and the top rule).
+% The font is set to \com{mlffont}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous appelons \com{beforeminilof}, puis commençons un environnement \env{samepage} (pour essayer de
+% décourager les coupures de page à~l'intérieur d'une minilof) et examinons la position du titre. Si le titre est
+% vide, la mise en page est corrigée. Nous imprimons le titre avec sa fonte (\com{mtifont}), puis le filet du haut
+% de la minilof (si les filets sont présents), en utilisant un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher
+% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut). La fonte est établie à~\com{mlffont}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \beforeminilof
+        \relax\begin{samepage}%
+        \if #1e\let\do@mtilf\e@mti
+        \else\if #1n\let\do@mtilf\n@mti
+        \else\if #1c\let\do@mtilf\c@mti
+        \else\if #1l\let\do@mtilf\l@mti
+        \else\if #1r\let\do@mtilf\r@mti
+        \else\if #1d\let\do@mtilf\df@mtilf
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+        \mtc@CkStr{\mlftitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@mtilf\e@mti\relax\fi
+        \raggedright
+        \parskip=\z@
+        \reset@font\mlffont
+        \parindent=\z@
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+        \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
+        \par\noindent
+        \ifx\mlf@rule\relax
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilf{\mtc@v\mlftitle}\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \else
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilf{\mtc@v\mlftitle}\\\hline
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfoffset}
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We forbid a page break after the title and the top rule, then set some layout parameters and begin
+% an \env{mtc@verse} environment:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous interdisons une coupure de page après le titre et le filet supérieur, puis établissons quelques paramètres
+% de mise en page et commençons un environnement \env{mtc@verse}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR
+        \leftmargin\mtcindent \rightmargin\mtcindent
+        \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
+        \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
+        \begin{mtc@verse}{\mlfoffset}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@minilofdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\\}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We force the effective depth of the mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) to the required depth (\com{c@minilofdepth}),
+% so the printing is done inside the \env{mtc@verse} environment, where \dcnt{tocdepth}
+% has been forced to \dcnt{minilofdepth}, to print only the entries whose level is low enough,
+% then inhibit a page break. The blank line is necessary to avoid a parasite negative indentation.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous forçons la profondeur effective de la mini-table (\com{c@tocdepth}) à~la profondeur demandée
+% (\com{c@minitocdepth}), donc l'impression est faite à~l'intérieur de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, où
+% \dcnt{tocdepth} a été forcée à~\dcnt{minilofdepth}, pour n'imprimer que
+% les entrées dont le niveau est assez bas, puis nous inhibons une coupure de page. La ligne blanche est nécessaire
+% pour éviter une indentation négative parasite.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{4}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}%
+          {\c@lofdepth=\c@minilofdepth
+         \ifnum\c@lofdepth<1\relax\c@lofdepth=1\fi}
+         \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pgno}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlf@setform}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\openminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test the presence of leaders and page numbers, then print the minilof by inputing the minilof file.
+% But before reading the minilof file, we must call the hook macro (asked for by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} for his
+% \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite})
+% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} and the macro
+% \com{mlf@setform} which adjusts some layout parameters (defined by the user via some
+% \com{mtcsetformat} commands).
+% We work in a group to keep local some macro redefinitions.
+% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons la présence de points de conduite et de numéros de pages, puis imprimons la minilof en insérant le
+% fichier de minilof. Mais avant de lire ce fichier de minilof, nous devons appeler la macro d'attache (\emph{hook})
+% (demandée par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite})
+% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} et la macro \com{mlf@setform} qui ajuste certains paramètres de mise en page
+% (définis par l'utilisateur via quelques commandes \com{mtcsetformat}).
+% Nous travaillons dans un groupe pour que certaines redéfinitions de macros restent locales.
+% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \@ifundefined{mlf@pgno}%
+  {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
+  \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
+  \mlf@setform
+  \global\openminilof\inminiloftrue
+  \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}%
+  \global\inminiloffalse\closeminilof
+  \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip}
+  \leavevmode\mtc@strut
+  \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\\}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterminilof}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We close the \env{mtc@verse} environment, add the bottomrule (while preventing a page break), then close the
+% \env{samepage} environment, and call \com{afterminilof}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous fermons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, ajoutons le filet inférieur (tout en évitant une coupure de page),
+% puis fermons l'environnement \env{samepage}, et enfin appelons \com{afterminilof}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|)
+% est essentielle.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \end{mtc@verse}%
+        \kernafterminilof
+        \nopagebreak[4]\mlf@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
+        \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
+        \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\afterminilof\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% ^^A \need{.5\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars.
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \ucom{minilot} command}\label{s+code+minilot.command}\icom{minilot}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \ucom{minilot}}\label{s+code+minilot.command}\icom{minilot}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{minilot} command is absolutely similar to the \com{minilof} command:
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{minilot} est absolument similaire à~la commande \com{minilof}:
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{minilot} command must be used after \com{chapter} if you need a minilot (no automatic minilot).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{minilot} doit être utilisée après \com{chapter} si vous voulez une minilot (il n'y a pas de
+% minilot automatique).
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command accepts an optional argument, whose default value has eventually been set earlier by a
+% \com{dominilot} command. The letter~``\texttt{d}'' represents this default value.
+% \com{dominilot} has itself an
+% optional argument which sets the default value of the optional argument of \com{minilot}. The default value of
+% the optional argument of the \com{dominilot} command is~``\texttt{l}''. It seems tortuous, but it is simple to use:
+% we have a default behaviour~(\texttt{l}) which can be altered globally via the optional argument of
+% \com{dominilot}, or locally via the optional argument of \com{minilot}.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut éventuellement été établie plus tôt par
+% une commande \com{dominilot}. La lettre~«~\texttt{d}~» représente cette valeur par défaut. \com{dominilot} a elle-même
+% un argument optionnel qui établit la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel de \com{minilot}. La valeur par
+% défaut de l'argument optionnel de la commande \com{dominilot} est~«~\texttt{l}~». Ceci semble tortueux, mais
+% c'est simple à~utiliser: nous avons un comportement par défaut~(\texttt{l}) qui peut être altéré globalement via
+% l'argument optionnel de \com{dominilot}, ou localement via l'argument optionnel de \com{minilot}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% So we define \com{minilot} with an optional argument and its (current) default value, and call the true code in
+% the \com{minilot@} macro (which has one delimited argument); we use the \com{@ifnextchar} trick to detect a
+% left bracket for the optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Donc nous définissons \com{minilot} avec un argument optionnel et sa valeur par défaut (courante), puis
+% appelons le vrai code dans la macro \com{minilot@} (qui a un argument délimité); nous utilisons l'astuce
+% \com{@ifnextchar} pour détecter le crochet gauche de l'argument optionnel:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\minilot{\@ifnextchar[{\minilot@}{\minilot@[d]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The real code of \com{minilot} is in \com{minilot@}, which has a mandatory argument (delimited by brackets)
+% specifying the position of the title.
+% \or\relax
+% Le véritable code de \com{minilot} est dans \com{minilot@}, qui a un argument obligatoire (délimité par les
+% crochets) spécifiant la position du titre.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we set the global flag \com{@minilot@used@true} to note that \com{minilot} has been called (this will be
+% used by a hint later, section~\vref{ss+final.coh}).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous établissons d'abord l'indicateur global \com{@minilot@used@true} pour noter que la macro \com{minilot} a été
+% appelée (ceci sera utilisé par une indication ou \emph{hint} plus tard, comme le décrit la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\minilot@[#1]{%
+\global\@minilot@used@true
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The name of the file containing the minilot is constructed from \com{jobname} and a
+% suffix \com{@tocfile}, which is \suffix{.mlt} (long extensions) or~\suffix{.T} (short extensions)
+% followed by the absolute number of the minilot.
+% \or\relax
+% Le nom du fichier contenant la minilot est construit à~partir de \com{jobname} et d'un suffixe \com{@tocfile},
+% qui est \suffix{.mlt} (suffixes longs) ou~\suffix{.T} (suffixes courts) suivi du numéro absolu
+% de la minilot.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@longext@%
+   \def\@tocfile{mlt\The@mtc}%
+\else
+   \def\@tocfile{T\The@mtc}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilot@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then\imess{I0006} we test (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) the emptiness of this file.
+% A warning is given if the file is empty and a flag is set (a hint will signal that an empty minilot has been
+% requested).
+% \or\relax
+% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons (via \com{mtc@CkFile}) la vacuité de ce fichier. Un avertissement est émis si le fichier
+% est vide et un indicateur est établi (une indication ou \emph{hint} signalera qu'une minilot vide a été demandée).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+        \if@mtc@FE
+        \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}%
+           {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
+        \@mtc@empty@minilot@true
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilotstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We call \com{thispageminilotstyle} to set the page style
+% (by default, this does nothing because, by default, there is no page break before a minilot).
+% The marks are not treated, because usually there is no new page for a minilot.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous appelons \com{thispageminilotstyle} pour établir le style de page (par défaut, ceci ne fait rien car, par
+% défaut, il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilot). Les marques ne sont pas traitées, car, habituellement,
+% il n'y~a pas de saut de page avant une minilot.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \thispageminilotstyle
+%%        \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\mlttitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\mlttitle}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{12}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilot}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@mtitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtic}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlt@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
+% \begin{environment}{tabular}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We call \com{beforeminilot},
+% then begin a \env{samepage} environment (to try to discourage page breaks in a minilot)
+% and look at the position of the title. If the title is empty, the
+% layout is corrected. We print the title with its font (\com{mtifont}),
+% then the top rule of the minilot (if rules are present), using a \env{tabular} environment
+% (to inhibit a page break between the title and the top rule).
+% The font is set to \com{mltfont}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous appelons \com{beforeminilot}, puis commençons un environnement \env{samepage} (pour essayer de
+% décourager les coupures de page à~l'intérieur d'une minilot) et examinons la position du titre. Si le titre est
+% vide, la mise en page est corrigée. Nous imprimons le titre avec sa fonte (\com{mtifont}), puis le filet du haut
+% de la minilot (si les filets sont présents), en utilisant un environnement \env{tabular}
+% (pour empêcher une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut). La fonte est établie à~\com{mltfont}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \beforeminilot
+        \relax\begin{samepage}%
+        \if #1e\let\do@mtilt\e@mti
+        \else\if #1n\let\do@mtilt\n@mti
+        \else\if #1c\let\do@mtilt\c@mti
+        \else\if #1l\let\do@mtilt\l@mti
+        \else\if #1r\let\do@mtilt\r@mti
+        \else\if #1d\let\do@mtilt\df@mtilt
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+        \mtc@CkStr{\mlttitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@mtilt\e@mti\relax\fi
+        \raggedright
+        \parskip=\z@%
+        \reset@font\mltfont%
+        \parindent=\z@%
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+        \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
+        \par\noindent
+        \ifx\mlt@rule\relax
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilt{\mtc@v\mlttitle}\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+      \else
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\mtifont\do@mtilt{\mtc@v\mlttitle}\\\hline
+        \end{tabular}%
+      \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltoffset}
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We forbid a page break after the title and the top rule, then set some layout parameters and begin
+% an \env{mtc@verse} environment:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous interdisons une coupure de page après le titre et le filet supérieur, puis établissons quelques paramètres
+% de mise en page et commençons un environnement \env{mtc@verse}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR
+        \leftmargin\mtcindent \rightmargin\mtcindent
+        \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
+        \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
+        \begin{mtc@verse}{\mltoffset}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@minilotdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\\}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We force the effective depth of the mini-table (\com{c@lotdepth}) to the required depth (\com{c@minilotdepth}),
+% so the printing is done inside the \env{mtc@verse} environment, where \dcnt{lotdepth}
+% has been forced to \dcnt{minilotdepth}, to print only the entries whose level is low enough,
+% then inhibit a page break. The blank line is necessary to avoid a parasite negative indentation.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous forçons la profondeur effective de la mini-table (\com{c@lotdepth}) à~la profondeur demandée
+% (\com{c@minilotdepth}), donc l'impression est faite à~l'intérieur de l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, où
+% \dcnt{lotdepth} a été forcée à~\dcnt{minilotdepth}, pour n'imprimer que
+% les entrées dont le niveau est assez bas, puis nous inhibons une coupure de page. La ligne blanche est nécessaire
+% pour éviter une indentation négative parasite.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}%
+        {\c@lotdepth=\c@minilotdepth
+         \ifnum\c@lotdepth<1\relax\c@lotdepth=1\fi}
+         \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pgno}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlt@setform}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\openminilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeminilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test the presence of leaders and page numbers, then print the minilot by inputing the minilot file.
+% But before reading the minilot file, we must call the hook macro (asked for by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} for his
+% \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite})
+% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} and the macro
+% \com{mlt@setform} which adjusts some layout parameters (defined by the user via some
+% \com{mtcsetformat} commands).
+% We work in a group to keep local some macro redefinitions.
+% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons la présence de points de conduite et de numéros de pages, puis imprimons la minilot en insérant le
+% fichier de minilot. Mais avant de lire ce fichier de minilot, nous devons appeler la macro d'attache (\emph{hook})
+% (demandée par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} pour son paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite})
+% \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} et la macro \com{mlt@setform} qui ajuste certains paramètres de mise en page
+% (définis par l'utilisateur via quelques commandes \com{mtcsetformat}).
+% Nous travaillons dans un groupe pour que certaines redéfinitions de macros restent locales.
+% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \@ifundefined{mlt@pgno}%
+  {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
+  \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
+  \mlt@setform
+  \global\openminilot\inminilottrue
+  \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}%
+  \global\inminilotfalse\closeminilot
+  \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip}
+  \leavevmode\mtc@strut
+  \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@bottom@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\\}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterminilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We close the \env{mtc@verse} environment, add the bottomrule (while preventing a page break), then close the
+% \env{samepage} environment, and call \com{afterminilot}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous fermons l'environnement \env{mtc@verse}, ajoutons le filet inférieur (tout en évitant une coupure de page),
+% puis fermons l'environnement \env{samepage}, et enfin appelons \com{afterminilot}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|)
+% est essentielle.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \end{mtc@verse}%
+        \kernafterminilot
+        \nopagebreak[4]\mlt@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
+        \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
+        \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\afterminilot\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% ^^A \need{.75\textheight} ^^A% for marginpars.
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Patching the \ucom{chapter} command, \texorpdfstring{\mbox{continued}}{continued}}\label{s+code+patching.chapter.2}\icom{chapter}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{chapter}, \texorpdfstring{\mbox{suite}}{suite}}\label{s+code+patching.chapter.2}\icom{chapter}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\l@xchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}%
+% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}%
+% \begin{macro}{\xchapter}%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we define \com{l@xchapter} which is like \com{l@chapter}, but with a huge depth, to inhibit its
+% printing (except if you cheat):
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, nous définissons \com{l@xchapter} qui est semblable à~\com{l@chapter}, mais avec une profondeur
+% très grande, pour inhiber son impression (sauf si vous trichez):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\l@xchapter{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1em}{2.3em}}
+\def\xchapter{xchapter}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}%
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@chapter}%
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\ignorespaces}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we patch \com{@chapter} (the non-starred branch of \com{chapter})
+% to add pseudo-chapter entries in the LOF and the LOT (these entries will be used by
+% the \verb|\dominiXXX| commands to split the LOF and the LOT into slices).
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous modifions \com{@chapter} (la branche non étoilée de \com{chapter}) pour ajouter des entrées de
+% pseudo-chapitres dans la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux (ces entrées seront utilisées par les
+% commandes \verb|\dominiXXX| pour découper en tranches la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\sv@chapter\@chapter
+\def\@chapter[#1]#2{\sv@chapter[{#1}]{#2}\relax%
+   \addcontentsline{lof}{xchapter}{#1}%
+   \addcontentsline{lot}{xchapter}{#1}%
+   \ignorespaces}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@schapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterend}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We also patch \com{@schapter} (the starred branch of \com{chapter})
+% to add marks in the TOC to delimit
+% chapters; these marks will be used by the \verb|\dominiXXX| commands to take slices from the LOF and the LOT; as
+% they are defined as \com{relax}, they should not perturbate other packages.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous modifions aussi \com{@schapter} (la branche étoilée de \com{chapter}) pour ajouter des marques dans la
+% table des matières afin de délimiter les chapitres; ces marques seront utilisées par les commandes \verb|\dominiXXX|
+% pour prélever des tranches dans la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux; comme elles sont définies comme
+% étant \com{relax}, elles ne devraient pas perturber d'autres paquetages.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtc@schapter\@schapter
+\def\@schapter{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\chapterend}\mtc@schapter}
+\def\@schapter{\addtocontents{@@@}{\protect\chapterbegin}\mtc@schapter}
+\let\chapterbegin\relax
+\let\chapterend\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+addstarred}\icom{addstarredpart}\icom{addstarredchapter}\icom{addstarredsection}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les commandes \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.}}\label{s+code+addstarred}\icom{addstarredpart}\icom{addstarredchapter}\icom{addstarredsection}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\addst@rred}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the command \com{chapter} is undefined, we define the command \com{addstarredsection}
+% (only if \com{section} is defined). If the command \com{chapter} is defined, we define the command
+% \com{addstarredchapter}. If the command \com{part} is defined, we define the command \com{addstarredpart}.
+% We use the utility command \com{addst@rred} defined in section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}.
+% \or\relax
+% Si la commande \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, alors nous devons définir la commande \com{addstarredsection} (mais
+% seulement si \com{section} est définie). Si la commande \com{chapter} est définie, nous définissons la
+% commande \com{addstarredchapter}. Si la commande \com{part} est définie, nous définissons la commande
+% \com{addstarredpart}. Nous utilisons la commande utilitaire \com{addst@rred} définie dans la
+% section~\vref{s+code+starred.parts.chapters.or.sections}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}%
+   {\@ifundefined{section}%
+      {}{\def\addstarredsection#1{\addst@rred{section}{#1}}}}%
+   {\def\addstarredchapter#1{\addst@rred{chapter}{#1}}}
+\@ifundefined{part}%
+   {}{\def\addstarredpart#1{\addst@rred{part}{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{TOC entries without leaders}\label{s+code+TOC.entries.no.leaders}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Entrées de TdM sans points de conduite}\label{s+code+TOC.entries.no.leaders}
+% \fi
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont}%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define two internal macros to format TOC entries without leaders. The macro
+% \com{@Undottedtocline} prints no page number, but \com{@Undottedtoclinep} prints~it.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons deux macros internes pour mettre en forme des entrées de table des matières sans points de
+% conduite. La macro \com{@Undottedtocline} n'imprime pas de numéro de page, mais \com{@Undottedtoclinep}
+% l'imprime.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@Undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{%
+  \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth\relax \else
+    \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@
+    {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip
+     \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue
+     \interlinepenalty\@M
+     \leavevmode
+     \@tempdima #3\relax
+     \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
+     {\coffeefont #4}\nobreak \nobreak\null
+    \par}%
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtoclinep}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The same but with the page number:
+% \or\relax
+% La même chose, mais avec le numéro de page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@Undottedtoclinep#1#2#3#4#5{%
+  \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth\relax \else
+    \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@
+    {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \parfillskip -\rightskip
+     \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue
+     \interlinepenalty\@M
+     \leavevmode
+     \@tempdima #3\relax
+     \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
+     {#4}\nobreak \hfill \nobreak\null
+     \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\normalfont \normalcolor #5}%
+    \par}%
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Mini-tables with or without leaders}\label{s+code+mini-tables.w/wo.leaders}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Mini-tables avec ou sans points de conduite}\label{s+code+mini-tables.w/wo.leaders}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtoclinep}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@minitoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@minilof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@minilot@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This code sets the flag to false, then patches each mini-table command (its internal part).
+% We alter the commands \com{minitoc@}, \com{minilof@}, etc., to test the flag \com{ifundottedmtc} and,
+% if true, replace locally \com{@dottedtocline} by its dotless version \com{@Undottedtoclinep}. Of course,
+% we must also test the availability of the \com{chapter}, \com{part} and \com{section} commands, to avoid to
+% define many unnecessary commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce code force l'indicateur à~faux, puis modifie chaque commande de mini-table (en fait, sa partie interne). Nous modifions
+% les commandes \com{minitoc@}, \com{minilof@}, etc., pour tester l'indicateur \com{ifundottedmtc} et, s'il
+% est vrai, remplacer localement \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version sans points de conduite \com{@Undottedtoclinep}.
+% Bien sûr, nous devons aussi tester la disponibilité des commandes \com{chapter}, \com{part} et \com{section},
+% pour éviter de définir de nombreuses commandes non nécessaires.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{4}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{%
+   \let\sv@minitoc@\minitoc@
+   \def\minitoc@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
+      \sv@minitoc@[#1]}}%
+   \let\sv@minilof@\minilof@
+   \def\minilof@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
+      \sv@minilof@[#1]}}%
+   \let\sv@minilot@\minilot@
+   \def\minilot@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
+      \sv@minilot@[#1]}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@parttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@partlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@partlot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the part level:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour le niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{part}{}{%
+   \let\sv@parttoc@\parttoc@
+   \def\parttoc@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
+      \sv@parttoc@[#1]}}%
+   \let\sv@partlof@\partlof@
+   \def\partlof@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
+      \sv@partlof@[#1]}}%
+   \let\sv@partlot@\partlot@
+   \def\partlot@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
+      \sv@partlot@[#1]}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@secttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@sectlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@sectlot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the section level:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour le niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+   \@ifundefined{section}{}{%
+      \let\sv@secttoc@\secttoc@
+      \def\secttoc@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
+         \sv@secttoc@[#1]}}%
+      \let\sv@sectlof@\sectlof@
+      \def\sectlof@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
+         \sv@sectlof@[#1]}}%
+      \let\sv@sectlot@\sectlot@
+      \def\sectlot@[#1]{{\ifundottedmtc\let\@dottedtocline\@Undottedtoclinep\fi
+         \sv@sectlot@[#1]}}}}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \ucom{dominitoc} command and its siblings}\label{s+code+dominitoc}\icom{dominitoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{La commande \ucom{dominitoc} et ses analogues}\label{s+code+dominitoc}\icom{dominitoc}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\starchapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The three commands \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} and \com{dominilot} are, of course, very similar.
+% They take the \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc} file (resp. the \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} and \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot} files)
+% produced by the previous \LaTeX\ run and
+% cut it in slices (one slice per chapter or starred chapter) into the \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} files
+% (resp. the \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} and \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} files), using specific
+% lines in the \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc} (resp. \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} and \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot}) file. These lines are
+% essentially chapter-level entry commands (like \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}...|, \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}...|,
+% \com{contentsline}\verb|{starchapter}...|, \com{chapbegin}) delimiting chapters in the TOC (or in the LOF or the
+% LOT). Analog part-level lines delimit parts, hence also chapters.
+% \or\relax
+% Les trois commandes \com{dominitoc}, \com{dominilof} et \com{dominilot} sont, bien sûr, très similaires.
+% Elles prennent le fichier \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc} (respectivement les fichiers \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} et \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot})
+% produit par l'exécution précédente de \LaTeX\ et l'éclatent en tranches (une tranche par chapitre ou chapitre
+% étoilé) vers les fichiers \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc}\meta{N} (respectivement, les fichiers \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlf}\meta{N} et
+% \com{jobname}\suffix{.mlt}\meta{N} files), en utilisant des lignes spécifiques dans le fichier \com{jobname}\suffix{.toc}
+% (respectivement, \com{jobname}\suffix{.lof} et \com{jobname}\suffix{.lot}). Ces lignes sont essentiellement des commandes pour
+% des entrées au niveau chapitre (telles que \com{contentsline}\verb|{chapter}...|, \com{contentsline}\verb|{xchapter}...|,
+% \com{contentsline}\verb|{starchapter}...|, \com{chapbegin}) délimitant les chapitres dans la table des matières (ou
+% dans la liste des figures ou dans la liste des tableaux). Des lignes analogues au niveau partie délimitent les
+% parties, donc aussi les chapitres.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% As \com{dominitoc} has an optional argument, whose default value is~``\texttt{l}'' (left), it calls \com{dominitoc@}
+% with a argument delimited by brackets.
+%
+% The macros are \com{dominitoc} (user interface), which calls \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| (or with the optional argument
+% of \com{dominitoc}).
+% Then \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| processes its argument and calls \com{@@dominitoc}.
+% \com{@@dominitoc} calls \com{@dominitoc} (passing \com{jobname} as argument) then close the minitoc file
+% written. \com{@dominitoc} reset to zero the counter of mini-tables, calls \verb|\MTC@next#1.toc| (where
+% \verb|#1| is the value of \com{jobname}), then reset again to zero the counter of mini-tables. Each call to
+% \com{dominitoc@} (i.e.,~to \com{dominitoc}) sets the flag \com{@dominitoc@used@true}. This will be used later
+% for a hint (which detects that you have correctly called \com{minitoc} \emph{after} \com{dominitoc} and that both
+% or neither have been called). See section~\vref{ss+final.coh}.
+% The code is similar for \com{dominilof} and \com{dominilot}.
+% \or\relax
+% Puisque \com{dominitoc} a un argument optionnel, dont la valeur par défaut est~«~\texttt{l}~» (gauche), elle
+% appelle  \com{dominitoc@} avec un argument délimité par des crochets.
+%
+% Les macros sont \com{dominitoc} (interface utilisateur), qui appelle \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| (ou avec l'argument
+% optionnel de \com{dominitoc}). Puis \com{dominitoc@}\verb|[l]| traite son argument et appelle \com{@@dominitoc}.
+% \com{@@dominitoc} appelle \com{@dominitoc} (en passant \com{jobname} comme argument) puis ferme le fichier
+% minitoc écrit. \com{@dominitoc} remet à~zéro le compteur de mini-tables, appelle \verb|\MTC@next#1.toc| (où
+% \verb|#1| est la valeur de \com{jobname}), puis remet encore à~zéro le compteur de mini-tables. Chaque appel
+% à~\com{dominitoc@} (c'est-à-dire, à~\com{dominitoc}) établit l'indicateur \com{@dominitoc@used@true}. Ceci
+% sera utilisé plus tard pour une indication (\emph{hint}) (qui détecte si vous avez appelé correctement \com{minitoc}
+% \emph{après} \com{dominitoc} et que les deux ont été appelées). Voir la section~\vref{ss+final.coh}.
+% Le code est similaire pour \com{dominilof} et \com{dominilot}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{dominitoc} command extracts information from the \suffix{.toc} file and create the minitocs files, with the
+% adequate extension.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{dominitoc} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.toc} et crée les fichiers minitocs,
+% avec le suffixe adéquat.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dominitoc#1{{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \setcounter{mtc}{0}
+  \MTC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}}
+\def\dominitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\dominitoc@}{\dominitoc@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{dominilof} command extracts information from the \suffix{.lof} file and create the minilofs files, with the
+% adequate extension.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{dominilof} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lof} et crée les fichiers minilofs,
+% avec le suffixe adéquat.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dominilof#1{{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \setcounter{mtc}{0}
+  \MLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}}
+\def\dominilof{\@ifnextchar[{\dominilof@}{\dominilof@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{dominilot} command extracts information from the \suffix{.lot} file and create the minilots files, with the
+% adequate extension.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{dominilot} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lot} et crée les fichiers minilots,
+% avec le suffixe adéquat.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dominilot#1{{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \setcounter{mtc}{0}
+  \MLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{mtc}{0}}
+\def\dominilot{\@ifnextchar[{\dominilot@}{\dominilot@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dominitoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some\imess{I0045} code to flag the use of the command and manage the position of the minitoc title;
+% a hint detects any spurious invocation.
+% \or\relax
+% Un\imess{I0045} peu de code pour noter que la commande a été utilisée et gérer la position du titre de la minitoc;
+% un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dominitoc@[#1]{%
+\if@mtc@hints@
+   \if@dominitoc@used@
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
+        {The \string\dominitoc \space command
+         \MessageBreak
+         has been invoked more than once
+         \MessageBreak}
+   \global\@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+\fi
+\global\@dominitoc@used@true
+\if #1e\let\df@mtitc\e@mti%
+\else\if #1n\let\df@mtitc\n@mti%
+\else\if #1c\let\df@mtitc\c@mti%
+\else\if #1l\let\df@mtitc\l@mti%
+\else\if #1r\let\df@mtitc\r@mti%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\@@dominitoc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilof}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some\imess{I0045} code to flag the use of the command and manage the position of the minilof title;
+% a hint detects any spurious invocation.
+% \or\relax
+% Un\imess{I0045} peu de code pour noter que la commande a été utilisée et gérer la position du titre de la minilof;
+% un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dominilof@[#1]{%
+\if@mtc@hints@
+   \if@dominilof@used@
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
+        {The \string\dominilof \space command
+         \MessageBreak
+         has been invoked more than once
+         \MessageBreak}
+   \global\@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+\fi
+\global\@dominilof@used@true
+\if #1e\let\df@mtilf\e@mti%
+\else\if #1n\let\df@mtilf\n@mti%
+\else\if #1c\let\df@mtilf\c@mti%
+\else\if #1l\let\df@mtilf\l@mti%
+\else\if #1r\let\df@mtilf\r@mti%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\@@dominilof}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@mtilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@mti}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some\imess{I0045} code to flag the use of the command and manage the position of the minilot title;
+% a hint detects any spurious invocation.
+% \or\relax
+% Un\imess{I0045} peu de code pour noter que la commande a été utilisée et gérer la position du titre de la minilot;
+% un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dominilot@[#1]{%
+\if@mtc@hints@
+   \if@dominilot@used@
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
+        {The \string\dominilot \space command
+         \MessageBreak
+         has been invoked more than once
+         \MessageBreak}
+   \global\@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+\fi
+\global\@dominilot@used@true
+\if #1e\let\df@mtilt\e@mti%
+\else\if #1n\let\df@mtilt\n@mti%
+\else\if #1c\let\df@mtilt\c@mti%
+\else\if #1l\let\df@mtilt\l@mti%
+\else\if #1r\let\df@mtilt\r@mti%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\@@dominilot}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These macros invoke the \verb|\@domini...| macros to create the mini-table file, then close the file
+% descriptor.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces macros invoquent les macros \verb|\@domini...| pour créer le fichier de mini-table, puis ferment le
+% descripteur de fichier.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@dominitoc{\@dominitoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+\def\@@dominilof{\@dominilof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+\def\@@dominilot{\@dominilot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Analysis and splitting of the TOC file}\label{s+code+an.split.TOC}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Analyse et éclatement du fichier TdM}\label{s+code+an.split.TOC}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This is done via a loop managed by the following macros\,\footnote{This code is derived from the
+% \pack{xr} package~\cite{xr}, by \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}, with his permission.
+% Some modifications were made by \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek},
+% \xname{Didier}{Verna}, and \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne} for the support of \pack{hyperref}, essentially by adding an
+% argument to some macros, to use the hyperlink argument in the contents lines.}:
+% \or\relax
+% Ceci est fait grâce à~une boucle gérée par les macros suivantes\,\footnote{Ce code est dérivé du paquetage
+% \pack{xr}~\cite{xr}, de \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}, avec sa permission.
+% Des modifications ont été faites par
+% \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \xname{Didier}{Verna} et \xname{Bernd}{Jaehne} pour le support de \pack{hyperref},
+% essentiellement en ajoutant un argument à~certaines macros, pour utiliser l'argument hyperlien dans les lignes de
+% contenu.}:
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@loop}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Processes the next entry in the list and removes it from the head of the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retire de la tête de la liste:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MTC@next#1\relax#2\\{%
+  \edef\MTC@list{#2}%
+  \MTC@loop{#1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@toc}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@explist}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Check if the list is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Teste si la liste est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MTC@toc{%
+  \ifx\MTC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MTC@explist\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The macro \com{MTC@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the TOC file and detects interesting keywords.
+% If \com{chapter} is found, the \cnt{mtc} counter (which simulates the chapter counter, but is absolute)
+% is incremented and a new minitoc file is created.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{MTC@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues depuis le fichier table des matières et détecte les
+% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{chapter} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{mtc} (qui simule le compteur de
+% chapitre, mais est absolu) est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier minitoc est créé.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MTC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{%
+  \gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter
+    \stepcounter{mtc}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcname}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it (after
+% closing the file descriptor):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0033} regardons si des suffixes longs ou courts ont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table,
+% puis l'ouvrir (après avoir fermé le descripteur de fichier):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@mtc@longext@%
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc\@gobble}%
+      \def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}%
+    \else
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc\@gobble}%
+      \def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcname}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0033} need a similar code to detect TOC entries for appendices in the \class{memoir} class\,\footnote{\name{Tim}{Arnold}
+% has signaled the problem; thanks!}:
+% \or\relax
+% Il\imess{I0033} nous faut un code similaire pour détecter les entrées dans la TdM pour les appendices dans
+% la classe \class{memoir}\,\footnote{\name{Tim}{Arnold} a signalé le problème; merci!}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\appendix
+    \stepcounter{mtc}%
+    \if@mtc@longext@%
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc\@gobble}%
+      \def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}%
+    \else
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc\@gobble}%
+      \def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines, the token register \com{mtc@toks} is used as a verbatim memory.
+% \or\relax
+% Maintenant, nous filtrons les lignes de contenu utiles, le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} étant utilisé
+% comme mémoire \emph{verbatim}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\paragraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Each interesting contents line is copied, with a font command added before it. We begin with the standard
+% sectionning commands, below \com{chapter}:
+% \or\relax
+% Chaque ligne de contenu intéressante est copiée, avec une commande de fonte ajoutée devant
+% elle. Nous commençons par les commandes de sectionnement standard, en dessous de \com{chapter}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffee}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteCoffeeline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A coffee break contents line{\myCoffeecup} is written for \com{coffee}:
+% \or\relax
+% Une ligne de contenu de pause-café{\myCoffeecup} est écrite pour \com{coffee}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\coffee
+    \MTC@WriteCoffeeline{#1}{#3}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\starchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcname}
+% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If\imess{I0033} it is \com{starchapter} (for a starred chapter), we increment the \cnt{mtc} counter,
+% build a new minitoc file name, close the file descriptor and open it with this new file.
+% \or\relax
+% Si\imess{I0033} c'est \com{starchapter} (pour un chapitre étoilé), nous incrémentons le compteur \cnt{mtc},
+% construisons un nouveau nom de fichier minitoc, fermons le descripteur de fichier puis le ré-ouvrons avec ce
+% nouveau fichier.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starchapter
+    \stepcounter{mtc}%
+    \if@mtc@longext@
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.mtc\themtc\@gobble}%
+      \def\mtcname{\jobname.mtc\themtc}%
+    \else
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.M\themtc\@gobble}%
+      \def\mtcname{\jobname.M\themtc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mtcname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsubsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\starparagraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsubparagraph}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For starred sectionning commands lower than \com{chapter}, a contents line is written into the minitoc file,
+% with a font command added:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées plus basses que \com{chapter}, une ligne de contenu est écrite
+% dans le fichier minitoc, en lui ajoutant une commande de fonte:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mtcSP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@explist}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The loop to read the lines of the TOC file; it expands the list of entries and call \com{MTC@next} to process the
+% first one:
+% \or\relax
+% La boucle de lecture du fichier table des matières; elle expanse la liste des entrées et appelle
+% \com{MTC@next} pour traiter la première:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MTC@explist{\expandafter\MTC@next\MTC@list\\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@loop}
+% \begin{macro}{\openin}
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@toc}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If\SMM{\lmess{W0010}\\\lmess{I0024}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries.
+% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0010}\\\lmess{I0024}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en cherchant des entrées
+% intéressantes. Sinon, on traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MTC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \mtcPackageWarning[W0010]{minitoc}%
+       {No file #1.
+        \MessageBreak
+        MINITOCS NOT PREPARED}%
+    \expandafter\MTC@toc
+  \else
+    \mtcPackageInfo[I0024]{minitoc}{PREPARING MINITOCS FROM #1}%
+    \expandafter\MTC@read
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\read}
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.toc} file.
+% \or\relax
+% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MTC@read{%
+  \read\@inputcheck to\MTC@line
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@line}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{MTC@test} has enough arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% La série de points \verb|.....| garantit que \com{MTC@test} a suffisamment d'arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\MTC@test\MTC@line.....\MTC@%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@contentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{MTC@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the TOC file, mainly to
+% delimit chapters\footnote{The macro \com{MTC@test} has been patched to call \com{MTC@contentsline} with
+% four parameters~instead of three (thanks to \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} and
+% \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}). The same remark applies to similar macros.}:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{MTC@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier table des matières,
+% principalement pour délimiter les chapitres\,\footnote{La macro \com{MTC@test} a été modifiée pour
+% appeler \com{MTC@contentsline} avec quatre paramètres ~au lieu de trois
+% (merci à~\name{Heiko}{Oberdiek}, \name{Didier}{Verna}, \name{Bernd}{Jaehne} et \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}).
+% La même remarque s'applique aux macros similaires.}:
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{12}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\@input}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterend}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@toc}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the
+% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file.
+% Finally process the next file in the list.
+% ^^A Thanks to \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous regardons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée intéressante, nous la traitons.
+% Si c'est \com{@input}, le fichier est ajouté à~la liste. Sinon, elle est ignorée. Nous recommençons la boucle si
+% la fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin, nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste.
+% ^^A Merci à~\name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\MTC@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\MTC@{%
+  \ifx#1\contentsline
+    \let\mtc@string\string
+    \MTC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
+    \let\mtc@string\relax
+  \else\ifx#1\@input
+    \edef\MTC@list{\MTC@list#2\relax}%
+  \else\ifx#1\chapterend
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
+  \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin
+    \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \expandafter\MTC@toc
+  \else
+    \expandafter\MTC@read
+  \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Mini-lists of figures}\label{s+code+mlf}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Mini-listes des figures}\label{s+code+mlf}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The code is similar to the code for mini-tables of contents, but with less commands to recognize.
+% \or\relax
+% Le code est similaire à~celui pour les mini-tables des matières, mais avec moins de commandes à~reconnaître.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Analysis and splitting of the list of figures file}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Analyse et éclatement du fichier liste des figures}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@loop}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This is done via a loop managed by the following macros:
+% \or\relax
+% Ceci est fait grâce à~une boucle gérée par les macros suivantes:
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Processes the next entry in the list and removes it from the head of the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retire de la tête de la liste:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLF@next#1\relax#2\\{%
+  \edef\MLF@list{#2}%
+  \MLF@loop{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@lof}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@explist}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Checks if the list is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Teste si la liste est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLF@lof{%
+  \ifx\MLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MLF@explist\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
+% \begin{macro}{\xchapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The macro \com{MLF@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOF file and detects interesting keywords.
+% If \com{xchapter} is found, the counter \cnt{mtc} is incremented and a new minilof file is created.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{MLF@contentsline} analyse les lignes du fichier liste des figures et détecte les mots-clés
+% intéressants. Si \com{xchapter} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{mtc} est incrémenté et
+% un nouveau fichier minilof est créé.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLF@contentsline#1#2#3#4{%
+  \gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xchapter
+    \stepcounter{mtc}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfname}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The\imess{I0033} name of the minilof file is built from \com{jobname} and a long or short extension:
+% \or\relax
+% Le\imess{I0033} nom du fichier minilof est construit avec \com{jobname} et un suffixe long ou court:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@mtc@longext@%
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.mlf\themtc\@gobble}
+      \def\mlfname{\jobname.mlf\themtc}%
+    \else
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.F\themtc\@gobble}
+      \def\mlfname{\jobname.F\themtc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mlfname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\figure}
+% \begin{macro}{\subfigure}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
+% If we found a \com{figure} entry, we copy it into the minilof file:
+% \or\relax
+% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
+% Si nous trouvons une entrée \com{figure} ou \com{subfigure}, nous la copions dans le fichier minilof:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure
+    \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mlf}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subfigure
+    \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mlfS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@explist}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The loop to read the LOF file; it expands the list of entries and calls \com{MLF@next} to process the
+% first one:
+% \or\relax
+% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des figures; elle expanse la liste des entrées et appelle
+% \com{MLF@next} pour traiter la première:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLF@explist{\expandafter\MLF@next\MLF@list\\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@loop}
+% \begin{macro}{\openin}
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@lof}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And\SMM{\lmess{W0008}\\\lmess{I0034}} now, we scan the \suffix{.lof} file:
+% \or\relax
+% Et\SMM{\lmess{W0008}\\\lmess{I0034}} maintenant, nous examinons le fichier \suffix{.lof}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \mtcPackageWarning[W0008]{minitoc}%
+       {No file #1.
+        \MessageBreak
+        MINILOFS NOT PREPARED}%
+    \expandafter\MLF@lof
+  \else
+    \mtcPackageInfo[I0034]{minitoc}%
+       {PREPARING MINILOFS FROM #1}%
+    \expandafter\MLF@read\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\read}
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Read the next entry in the \suffix{.lof} file:
+% \or\relax
+% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lof}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLF@read{%
+  \read\@inputcheck to\MLF@line
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@line}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{MLF@test} has enough arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% La série de points \verb|.....| garantit que \com{MLF@test} a suffisamment d'arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\MLF@test\MLF@line.....\MLF@%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@test}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{MLF@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOF file, mainly to
+% delimit chapters.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{MLF@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des figures,
+% principalement pour délimiter les chapitres.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@input}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterend}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@lof}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLF@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the
+% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file.
+% Finally process the next file in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous regardons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée intéressante, nous la traitons.
+% Si c'est \com{@input}, le fichier est ajouté à~la liste. Sinon, elle est ignorée. Nous recommençons la boucle si
+% la fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin, nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\MLF@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\MLF@{%
+  \ifx#1\contentsline
+    \let\mtc@string\string
+    \MLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
+    \let\mtc@string\relax
+  \else\ifx#1\@input
+     \edef\MLF@list{\MLF@list#2\relax}%
+  \else\ifx#1\chapterend
+     \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+     \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
+  \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin
+    \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\MLF@lof
+  \else\expandafter\MLF@read\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Mini-lists of tables}\label{s+code+mlt}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Mini-listes des tableaux}\label{s+code+mlt}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The code is similar to the code for mini-tables of contents, but with less commands to recognize.
+% \or\relax
+% Le code est similaire à~celui pour les mini-tables des matières, mais avec moins de commandes à~reconnaître.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Analysis and splitting of the list of tables file}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Analyse et éclatement du fichier liste des tableaux}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@loop}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This is done via a loop managed by the following macros:
+% \or\relax
+% Ceci est fait grâce à~une boucle gérée par les macros suivantes:
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Processes the next entry in the list and removes it from the head of the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Traite l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retire de la tête de la liste:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLT@next#1\relax#2\\{%
+  \edef\MLT@list{#2}%
+  \MLT@loop{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@lot}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@explist}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Checks if the list is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Teste si la liste est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLT@lot{%
+  \ifx\MLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\MLT@explist\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
+% \begin{macro}{\xchapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The macro \com{MLT@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOT file and detects interesting keywords.
+% If \com{xchapter} is found, the \cnt{mtc} counter is incremented and a new minilot file is created.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{MLT@contentsline} analyse les lignes du fichier liste des tableaux et détecte les mots-clés
+% intéressants. Si \com{xchapter} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{mtc} est incrémenté et
+% un nouveau fichier minilot est créé.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLT@contentsline#1#2#3#4{%
+  \gdef\themtc{\arabic{mtc}}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xchapter
+    \stepcounter{mtc}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\themtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltname}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The\imess{I0033} name of the minilot file it build from \com{jobname} and a long or short extension:
+% \or\relax
+% Le\imess{I0033} nom du fichier minilot est construit avec \com{jobname} et un suffixe long ou court:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@mtc@longext@%
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.mlt\themtc\@gobble}%
+      \def\mltname{\jobname.mlt\themtc}%
+    \else
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.T\themtc\@gobble}%
+      \def\mltname{\jobname.T\themtc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\mltname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\table}
+% \begin{macro}{\subtable}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
+% If we found a \com{table} entry, we copy it into the minilot file:
+% \or\relax
+% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
+% Si nous trouvons une entrée \com{table}, nous la copions dans le fichier minilot:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table
+    \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mlt}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subtable
+    \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{mltS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@explist}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The loop to read the LOT file; it expands the list of entries and calls \com{MLT@next} to process the
+% first one:
+% \or\relax
+% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des tableaux; elle expanse la liste des entrées et appelle
+% \com{MLT@next} pour traiter la première:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLT@explist{\expandafter\MLT@next\MLT@list\\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@loop}
+% \begin{macro}{\openin}
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@lot}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And\SMM{\lmess{W0009}\\\lmess{I0037}} now, we scan the \suffix{.lot} file:
+% \or\relax
+% Et\SMM{\lmess{W0009}\\\lmess{I0037}} maintenant, nous examinons le fichier \suffix{.lot}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \mtcPackageWarning[W0009]{minitoc}%
+       {No file #1.
+        \MessageBreak
+        MINILOTS NOT PREPARED}%
+    \expandafter\MLT@lot
+  \else
+    \mtcPackageInfo[I0037]{minitoc}%
+       {PREPARING MINILOTS FROM #1}%
+    \expandafter\MLT@read\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\read}
+% \begin{macro}{\@inputcheck}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Read the next entry in the \suffix{.lot} file:
+% \or\relax
+% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lot}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MLT@read{%
+  \read\@inputcheck to\MLT@line
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@line}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{MLT@test} has enough arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% La série de points \verb|.....| garantit que \com{MLT@test} a suffisamment d'arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\MLT@test\MLT@line.....\MLT@%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@test}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{MLT@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOT file, mainly to
+% delimit chapters.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{MLT@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des tableaux,
+% principalement pour délimiter les chapitres.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{13}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@input}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterend}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@lot}
+% \begin{macro}{\MLT@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the
+% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file.
+% Finally process the next file in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous regardons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée intéressante, nous la traitons.
+% Si c'est \com{@input}, le fichier est ajouté à~la liste. Sinon, elle est ignorée. Nous recommençons la boucle si
+% la fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin, nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\MLT@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\MLT@{%
+  \ifx#1\contentsline
+    \let\mtc@string\string
+    \MLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
+    \let\mtc@string\relax
+  \else\ifx#1\@input
+     \edef\MLT@list{\MLT@list#2\relax}%
+  \else\ifx#1\chapterend
+     \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+     \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
+  \else\ifx#1\chapterbegin
+    \addtocounter{mtc}{-1}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\MLT@lot
+  \else\expandafter\MLT@read\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Note that we terminate with a closing brace to end the chapter-level macros (end of the \emph{else} branch of a
+% \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| alternative).
+% \or\relax
+% Notez que nous terminons par une accolade fermante pour achever les macros du niveau chapitre (fin de la
+% branche \emph{sinon} d'une alternative \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}|).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Macro to write a contents line}\label{s+code+MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Macro pour écrire une ligne de contenu}\label{s+code+MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@dot}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@param}
+% \begin{macro}{\write}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@resetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} macro makes the definition of \com{MTC@contentsline} shorter. An extra \com{edef}
+% level is removed (\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}):
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} rend la définition de \com{MTC@contentsline} plus courte. Un niveau
+% supplémentaire de \com{edef} est retiré (\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The arguments of \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} are:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] the \texttt{\#1} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline};
+% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] font shorthand $\Longrightarrow$ \com{csname}\verb| #2font|\com{endcsname};
+% \item[\texttt{\#3}:] the \texttt{\#3} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline};
+% \item[\texttt{\#4}:] the \texttt{\#4} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline} (hyperlink).
+% \end{itemize}
+% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les arguments de \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} sont:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] l'argument \texttt{\#1} de \com{MTC@contentsline};
+% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] un raccourci pour la fonte $\Longrightarrow$ \com{csname}\verb| #2font|\com{endcsname};
+% \item[\texttt{\#3}:] l'argument \texttt{\#3} de \com{MTC@contentsline};
+% \item[\texttt{\#4}:] l'argument \texttt{\#4} de \com{MTC@contentsline} (hyperlien).
+% \end{itemize}
+% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@dot{.}
+\def\MTC@WriteContentsline#1#2#3#4{%
+  \def\mtc@param{#4}%
+   \immediate\write\tf@mtc{%
+    {\string\reset@font
+     \expandafter\string\csname #2font\endcsname
+     \string\mtc@string
+     \string\contentsline{#1}%
+     {\the\mtc@toks}%
+     {\string\reset@font
+      \expandafter\string\csname #2font\endcsname
+      \space #3%
+     }%
+     \ifx\mtc@dot\mtc@param
+     \else
+       {#4}%
+     \fi
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteCoffeeline}
+% \begin{macro}{\write}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@resetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And the same for a ``coffee''{\myCoffeecup} line. The arguments of the macro \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline} are:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] the \texttt{\#1} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline};
+% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] the \texttt{\#3} argument of \com{MTC@contentsline}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}.
+% \or\relax
+% Et la même chose pour une ligne de «~pause café~»{\myCoffeecup}. Les arguments de
+% la macro \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline} sont:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item[\texttt{\#1}:] l'argument \texttt{\#1} de \com{MTC@contentsline};
+% \item[\texttt{\#2}:] l'argument \texttt{\#3} de \com{MTC@contentsline}.
+% \end{itemize}
+% \fi
+% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MTC@WriteCoffeeline#1#2#3{%
+  \immediate\write\tf@mtc{%
+    {\string\reset@font \string\coffeefont \string\mtc@string
+     {\the\mtc@toks}%
+     {\string\reset@font \string\coffeefont \space #3%
+     }%
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Depth counters for partlofs and partlots}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Compteurs de profondeur pour les partlofs et les partlots}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\newcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the counters \dcnt{lofdepth} and \dcnt{lotdepth} are defined, we create the corresponding new counters:
+% \dcnt{partlofdepth} and \dcnt{partlotdepth}.
+% These counters are initialized to~2.
+% This is done after the loading of the packages, in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block:
+% \or\relax
+% Si les compteurs \dcnt{lofdepth} et \dcnt{lotdepth} sont définis, nous créons les nouveaux compteurs
+% correspondants: \dcnt{partlofdepth} et \dcnt{partlotdepth}.
+% Ces compteurs sont initialisés à~2.
+% Ceci est fait après le chargement des paquetages, dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}%
+   {\newcounter{partlofdepth}\setcounter{partlofdepth}{2}}%
+ \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}%
+   {\newcounter{partlotdepth}\setcounter{partlotdepth}{2}}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Part level commands}\label{s+code+part.level}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Commandes au niveau partie}\label{s+code+part.level}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\xpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\theptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\Thepart}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\incrementptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@firstpartis@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\newcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If\imess{W0004} \com{part} is defined, we define some utility commands, a counter (\cnt{ptc})
+% for the parttocs and related commands (\com{theptc}, \com{Thepart}, \com{adjustptc}, \com{decrementptc},
+% \com{incrementptc}), the
+% obsolete command \com{firstpartis}, and the depth counter \dcnt{parttocdepth}.
+% \or\relax
+% Si\imess{W0004} \com{part} est définie, nous définissons quelques commandes utilitaires, un compteur (\cnt{ptc})
+% pour les parttocs et les commandes associées (\com{theptc}, \com{Thepart}, \com{adjustptc},
+% \com{decrementptc}, \com{incrementptc}), la commande
+% obsolète \com{firstpartis} et le compteur de profondeur \dcnt{parttocdepth}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{part}{}%
+{%
+\def\xpart{xpart}
+\def\Thepart{\arabic{ptc}}
+\def\firstpartis#1%
+  {\mtcPackageWarning[W0004]{minitoc}%
+     {\string\firstpartis \space is an obsolete (ignored)
+      \MessageBreak
+      command}%
+     \@firstpartis@used@true}
+\newcounter{ptc}
+\setcounter{ptc}{0}
+\newcommand{\adjustptc}[1][1]{\addtocounter{ptc}{#1}}
+\def\decrementptc{\addtocounter{ptc}{-1}}
+\def\incrementptc{\addtocounter{ptc}{+1}}
+\def\theptc{\arabic{ptc}}
+\newcounter{parttocdepth}
+\setcounter{parttocdepth}{2}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But, sometimes, we need to make a difference between book/report and article classes (is \com{chapter} defined?), to
+% have a different layout: the definition of \com{ptc@rule} is empty except if \com{chapter} is undefined.
+% By default, there is no rule before/after  parttocs, partlofs, and partlots for books. You should redeclare
+% \com{ptc@rule} if you want these rules.
+% \or\relax
+% Mais, parfois, nous voulons faire une différence entre les classes \class{book}\texttt{/}\class{report} et \class{article}
+% (\com{chapter} est-elle définie?), pour avoir une présentation différente:
+% la définition de la macro \com{ptc@rule} est
+% vide sauf si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie. Par défaut, il n'y~a pas de filets avant et après les  parttocs,
+% partlofs et partlots pour les livres. Vous devriez redéclarer \com{ptc@rule} si vous voulez ces filets.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}%
+   {\def\ptc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}}%
+   {\let\ptc@rule\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And we declare the default indentation (both sides) of the parttocs:
+% \or\relax
+% Et nous déclarons l'indentation (des deux côtés) par défaut des parttocs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newlength\ptcindent
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{\ptcindent=24\p@}{\ptcindent=\z@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{12}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Fonts for the parttocs}\label{s+code+fonts.parttocs}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Fontes pour les parttocs}\label{s+code+fonts.parttocs}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\plffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the fonts for the parttocs. Note that they are larger if \com{chapter} is defined
+% (\class{book}\texttt{/}\class{report}-like
+% document classes) than when it is not (\class{article}-like document classes):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons les fontes pour les parttocs. Notez qu'elles sont plus grandes si \com{chapter} est définie
+% (classes de document analogues à~\class{book}\texttt{/}\class{report}) que lorsqu'elle ne l'est pas (classes de
+% document analogues à~\class{article}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+   \def\ptcfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} % the parttoc
+   \def\ptcSfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% (sections)
+   \let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont     % (subsections)
+   \let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont    % (subsubsections)
+   \let\ptcPfont\ptcfont      % (paragraphs)
+   \let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont     % (subparagraphs)
+   \let\plffont\ptcfont       % (figures)
+   \let\plfSfont\ptcfont      % (subfigures)
+   \let\pltfont\ptcfont       % (tables)
+   \let\pltSfont\ptcfont      % (subtables)
+   \def\ptifont{\Large\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% titles
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcCfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\plffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If \com{chapter} is defined, the fonts are larger and \com{ptcCfont} must be defined:
+% \or\relax
+% Si \com{chapter} est définie, les fontes sont plus grandes et \com{ptcCfont} doit être définie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+{%
+   \def\ptcfont{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries} % the parttoc
+   \def\ptcCfont{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% (chapters)
+   \def\ptcSfont{\normalsize\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries}% (sections)
+   \let\ptcSSfont\ptcfont     % (subsections)
+   \let\ptcSSSfont\ptcfont    % (subsubsections)
+   \let\ptcPfont\ptcfont      % (paragraphs)
+   \let\ptcSPfont\ptcfont     % (subparagraphs)
+   \let\plffont\ptcfont       % (figures)
+   \let\plfSfont\ptcfont      % (subfigures)
+   \let\pltfont\ptcfont       % (tables)
+   \let\pltSfont\ptcfont      % (subtables)
+   \def\ptifont{\LARGE\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}% titles
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Default titles for part-level mini-tables}\label{s+code+default.titles.part.level}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Titres par défaut pour les mini-tables au niveau partie}\label{s+code+default.titles.part.level}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the default position, the fonts and the layout for titles of the part-level mini-tables (\com{parttoc},
+% \com{partlof} and \com{partlot}). This formating is different if \com{chapter} is defined or undefined.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons la position par défaut, les fontes et la mise en page pour les titres des mini-tables du niveau
+% partie (\com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} et \com{partlot}). Cette mise en page est différente selon que
+% \com{chapter} est définie ou non.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If \com{chapter} is undefined, the definitions are very simple, for
+% centered, flushleft, flushright or empty titles.
+% Here, empty titles need a vertical correction \linebreak[0](\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
+% \or\relax
+% Si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie, les définitions sont très simples, pour des titres centrés, cadrés
+% à~gauche, cadrés à~droite, ou vides.
+% Ici, les titres vides auront encore besoin d'une correction verticale \linebreak[0](\nolinebreak[4]selon \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+  \def\c@pti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null}
+  \def\l@pti#1{\null #1\hfill\null}
+  \def\r@pti#1{\null\hfill #1\null}
+  \def\e@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
+  \def\n@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But, if \com{chapter} is defined, we must simulate the formatting of a chapter head, which is more complex.
+% Here, empty titles need a vertical correction \linebreak[0](\xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
+% \or\relax
+% Mais, si \com{chapter} est définie, nous devons simuler la mise en page d'une tête de chapitre, qui est plus
+% complexe.
+% Ici, les titres vides auront encore besoin d'une correction verticale \linebreak[0](\nolinebreak[4]selon \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+{%
+\def\e@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}} \def\n@pti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\@afterheading}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@l}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For a title on the left, we must test if the main text is on two columns:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour un titre cadré à~gauche, nous devons tester si le corps du texte est sur deux colonnes:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\l@pti#1{\if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makephead@l{#1}]%
+    \else \@makephead@l{#1}\@afterheading \fi}
+\def\@makephead@l#1{%
+    \vspace*{\mtcgapbeforeheads}%
+    {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \ptifont #1\par \nobreak
+     \vskip \mtcgapafterheads\hbox{}
+    }}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@r}
+% \begin{macro}{\@afterheading}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For a title on the right, we must also test if the main text is on two columns:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour un titre cadré à~droite, nous devons tester si le corps du texte est sur deux colonnes:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\r@pti#1{\if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makephead@r{#1}]
+    \else \@makephead@r{#1}\@afterheading \fi}
+\def\@makephead@r#1{%
+    \vspace*{\mtcgapbeforeheads}%
+    {\parindent \z@ \raggedleft \ptifont #1\par \nobreak
+     \vskip \mtcgapafterheads\hbox{}
+    }}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@twocolumn}
+% \begin{macro}{\@topnewpage}
+% \begin{macro}{\@makephead@c}
+% \begin{macro}{\@afterheading}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For a centered title, we must also test if the main text is on two columns:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour un titre centré, nous devons aussi tester si le corps du texte est sur deux colonnes:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\c@pti#1{\if@twocolumn \@topnewpage[\@makephead@c{#1}]%
+    \else \@makephead@c{#1}\@afterheading \fi}
+\def\@makephead@c#1{%
+    \vspace*{\mtcgapbeforeheads}%
+    {\parindent \z@ \centering \ptifont #1\par \nobreak
+     \vskip \mtcgapafterheads\hbox{}
+    }}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@ptitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@ptitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilt}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, titles are on left:
+% \or\relax
+% Par défaut, les titres sont à~gauche:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\do@ptitc\l@pti \let\df@ptitc\l@pti
+\let\do@ptilf\l@pti \let\df@ptilf\l@pti
+\let\do@ptilt\l@pti \let\df@ptilt\l@pti
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{15} ^^A many macros
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{ptc@verse} environment}\label{s+code+ptc@verse.env}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{L'environnement \texttt{ptc@verse}}\label{s+code+ptc@verse.env}
+% \fi
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\endptc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\\}
+% \begin{macro}{\@centercr}
+% \begin{macro}{\list}
+% \begin{macro}{\itemsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\itemindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\listparindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\topsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\parsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\partopsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Each parttoc is placed inside a \env{ptc@verse} environment. This environment is analog to the
+% standard \env{verse} environment and hence defined via two commands: \com{ptc@verse} and
+% \com{endptc@verse}.
+% As it is a list environment, we first define (in a local way)~\texttt{\bs\bs}, then call \com{list}\texttt{\{\}} and
+% set some dimensions like \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent}, \com{listparindent},
+% \com{itemindent}, \com{partopsep}, \com{topsep}.
+% \com{parsep} is set to zero if
+% the \opt{tight} option is active (this reduces the spacing between the lines).
+% \com{parskip} is set to zero if
+% the \opt{k-tight} option is active (this reduces the spacing between the lines).
+% Both margins are set to \com{ptcindent}. \com{endptc@verse} terminates the list and discourages
+% a page break.
+% The \env{ptc@verse} environment has an argument which is an horizontal offset (a command like \com{ptcoffset}).
+% \or\relax
+% Chaque parttoc est placée à~l'intérieur d'un environnement \env{ptc@verse}. Cet environnement est analogue
+% à~l'environnement standard \env{verse} et est donc défini à~l'aide de deux commandes:
+% \com{ptc@verse} et \com{endptc@verse}. Puisque c'est un environnement de liste, nous définissons d'abord
+% (de manière locale)~\texttt{\bs\bs}, puis appelons \com{list}\texttt{\{\}} et établissons quelques dimensions
+% telles que \com{itemsep}, \com{itemindent}, \com{listparindent}, \com{itemindent},
+% \com{partopsep}, \com{topsep}.
+% \com{parsep} est forcée à~zéro si
+% l'option \opt{tight} est active (ceci réduit l'espacement entre les lignes).
+% \com{parskip} est forcée à~zéro si
+% l'option \opt{k-tight} est active (ceci réduit l'espacement entre les lignes).
+% Les deux marges sont
+% forcées à~\com{ptcindent}. \com{endptc@verse} termine la liste et décourage une coupure de page.
+% L'environnement \env{ptc@verse} a un argument qui est un déplacement horizontal (une commande telle que \com{ptcoffset}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ptc@verse#1{\let\\=\@centercr
+  \list{}{%
+     \topsep=1ex \itemsep=\z@   \itemindent=\z@
+     \listparindent=\itemindent \partopsep=\z@
+     \leftmargin=\ptcindent     \rightmargin=\leftmargin
+     \iftightmtc \parsep=\z@ \fi
+     \ifktightmtc \parskip=\z@ \fi
+     \addtolength{\leftmargin}{+#1}
+     \addtolength{\rightmargin}{-#1}
+     }%
+  \item[]}
+\def\endptc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{raggedright}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The part level mini-tables: \ucom{parttoc}, \ucom{partlof}, and \ucom{partlot}}\label{s+code+parttoc.command}\icom{parttoc}\icom{partlof}\icom{partlot}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les mini-tables au niveau partie: \ucom{parttoc}, \ucom{partlof} et \ucom{partlot}}\label{s+code+parttoc.command}\icom{parttoc}\icom{partlof}\icom{partlot}
+% \fi
+% \end{raggedright}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These commands are essentially similar to the \com{minitoc} command, except that they should be placed after a
+% \com{part} command to produce a parttoc, a partlof or a partlot, and the formatting is different and depends on
+% the availability of the
+% \com{chapter} command (for the fonts and the horizontal rules). The code is very similar. The \com{partlof}
+% and \com{partlot} commands are siblings of the \com{parttoc} command.
+% Note that \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} and \com{partlot} use page styles, because \verb|\beforepart...| and
+% \verb|\afterpart...| commands imply usually a \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page| command, and hence
+% \com{markboth}\verb|{...}{...}| must be called.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces commandes sont essentiellement similaires à~la commande \com{minitoc}, sauf qu'elles devraient être placées
+% après une commande \com{part} pour produire une parttoc, une partlof ou une partlot, et que la mise en page est
+% différente et dépend de la disponibilité de la commande \com{chapter} (pour les fontes et les filets
+% horizontaux). Le code est très similaire. Les commandes \com{partlof} et \com{partlof} sont les cousines
+% de la commande \com{parttoc}. Notez que \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} et \com{partlot} utilisent des styles
+% de page, car les commandes \verb|\beforepart...| et \verb|\afterpart...| impliquent habituellement une commande
+% \icom{clearpage}\icom{cleardoublepage}\verb|\clear[double]page|, et donc \com{markboth}\verb|{...}{...}| doit être appelée.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \ucom{parttoc} command}\icom{parttoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \ucom{parttoc}}\icom{parttoc}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command must be used after \com{part} if you need a parttoc (no automatic parttoc).
+% First, \com{parttoc} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if
+% it is missing. Then, \com{parttoc@} is called with the effective position as argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande doit être utilisée après \com{part} si vous souhaitez avoir une parttoc (pas de parttoc
+% automatique). Tout d'abord, \com{parttoc} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur
+% par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il est absent. Puis, \com{parttoc@} est appelée avec la position effective comme
+% argument:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\parttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\parttoc@}{\parttoc@[d]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\Thepart}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{parttoc@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@parttoc@used@} (for a consistency
+% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the parttoc file):
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{parttoc@} fait le véritable travail.
+% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@parttoc@used@}
+% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les suffixes longs sont utilisés ou non (pour construire
+% le nom du fichier parttoc):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\parttoc@[#1]{%
+\global\@parttoc@used@true
+\if@mtc@longext@%
+   \def\@tocfile{ptc\Thepart}%
+\else
+   \def\@tocfile{P\Thepart}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence of the parttoc file and give a warning if it is not here:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis,\imess{I0006} nous vérifions la présence du fichier parttoc et donnons un avertissement s'il n'est pas là:
+% \fi
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+        \if@mtc@FE
+        \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}%
+           {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
+        \@mtc@empty@parttoc@true
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeparttoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the parttoc file is present, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first,
+% \com{beforeparttoc}, of course:
+% \or\relax
+% Si le fichier est présent, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais devons ajouter un peu de code pour la présentation;
+% d'abord, \com{beforeparttoc}, bien sûr:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \beforeparttoc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageparttocstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If \com{chapter} is defined, we just set the page marks with the parttoc title and set the page style:
+% \or\relax
+% Si \com{chapter} est définie, nous mettons simplement le titre de la parttoc dans les marques de page et
+% établissons le style de page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{%
+        \global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth \global\let\@mkboth\markboth
+        \thispageparttocstyle
+        \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\ptctitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\ptctitle}}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@ptitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A \env{samepage} environment is begun, then the argument is treated to set the position of
+% the parttoc title. If the title string is empty, this forces the positionning.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis l'argument est traité pour établir la
+% position du titre de la parttoc. Si la chaîne de titre est vide, le positionnement est forcé.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \relax\begin{samepage}%
+        \if #1e\let\do@ptitc\e@pti
+        \else\if #1n\let\do@ptitc\n@pti
+        \else\if #1c\let\do@ptitc\c@pti
+        \else\if #1l\let\do@ptitc\l@pti
+        \else\if #1r\let\do@ptitc\r@pti
+        \else\if #1d\let\do@ptitc\df@ptitc
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+        \mtc@CkStr{\ptctitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@ptitc\e@pti\relax\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the parttoc, then we set the font:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la parttoc,
+% puis établissons la fonte:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \raggedright \reset@font\ptcfont \parskip=\z@ \parindent=\z@%
+        \nopagebreak[4]\kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
+        \par\noindent \nopagebreak[4]%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule}
+% \begin{environment}{tabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@ptitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\hline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The parttoc title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between
+% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary.
+% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the parttoc.
+% \or\relax
+% Le titre de la parttoc est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher une coupure
+% de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si
+% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la parttoc.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifx\ptc@rule\relax
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptitc{\mtc@v\ptctitle}\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \else
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptitc{\mtc@v\ptctitle}\\\hline
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we adjust the position close the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques
+% paramètres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\*[-\baselineskip]\mtc@BBR
+        \leftmargin\ptcindent \rightmargin\ptcindent
+        \itemindent=\z@ \labelwidth=\z@ \labelsep=\z@ \listparindent=\z@%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@parttocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We enter in a \env{ptc@verse} environment to format the parttoc. The toc depth is forced (locally) to
+% \dcnt{parttocdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. A blank line is
+% necessary to avoid a negative indentation.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous entrons dans un environnement \env{ptc@verse} pour mettre en page la parttoc. La profondeur de table
+% des matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{parttocdepth}. Une petite astuce est
+% nécessaire pour ajuster la position. Une ligne blanche est nécessaire pour éviter une indentation négative.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \begin{ptc@verse}{\ptcoffset}\c@tocdepth=\c@parttocdepth%
+        \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@pgno}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@setform}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\openparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version.
+% For chapter-level entries, we must invoke \com{l@chapter} ignoring the page number argument.
+% A hook (redefinissable command) is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated
+% via \com{ptc@setform}.
+% Then the parttoc file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{ptc@verse} environment is terminated.
+% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file.
+% \or\relax
+% Si les lignes de contenu doivent ne pas avoir de numéros de pages, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa
+% version sans points de conduite. Pour les entrées au niveau chapitre, nous devons invoquer \com{l@chapter} en
+% ignorant l'argument numéro de page. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et
+% les choix de mise en page de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{ptc@setform}. Puis le fichier parttoc est
+% inséré, suivi d'un étai, puis l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} est terminé.
+% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \@ifundefined{ptc@pgno}%
+    {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
+  \@ifundefined{ptc@pgno}%
+    {\let\l@chapter@SVPN\l@chapter%
+     \def\l@chapter##1##2{\l@chapter@SVPN{##1}{\hbox{}}}}{}
+  \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
+  \ptc@setform
+  \openparttoc\global\inparttoctrue
+  \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}%
+  \global\inparttocfalse\closeparttoc
+  \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-1\baselineskip}
+  \leavevmode\mtc@strut
+  \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
+        \end{ptc@verse}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterparttoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break (if \com{chapter} is
+% not defined), and \com{afterparttoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% La partie finale consiste seulement à~ajouter le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la possibilité d'une coupure de page
+% (si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie), et \com{afterparttoc}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \kernafterparttoc
+        \nopagebreak[4]\ptc@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
+        \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
+        \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}%
+        \afterparttoc\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \ucom{partlof} command}\icom{partlof}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \ucom{partlof}}\icom{partlof}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command must be used after \com{part} if you need a partlof (no automatic partlof).
+% First, \com{partlof} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if
+% it is missing. Then, \com{partlof@} is called with the effective position as argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande doit être utilisée après \com{part} si vous souhaitez avoir une partlof (pas de partlof
+% automatique). Tout d'abord, \com{partlof} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur
+% par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il est absent. Puis, \com{partlof@} est appelée avec la position effective comme
+% argument:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\partlof{\@ifnextchar[{\partlof@}{\partlof@[d]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\Thepart}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{partlof@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@partlof@used@} (for a consistency
+% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the partlof file):
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{partlof@} fait le véritable travail.
+% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@partlof@used@}
+% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les suffixes longs sont utilisés ou non (pour construire
+% le nom du fichier partlof):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\partlof@[#1]{%
+\global\@partlof@used@true
+\if@mtc@longext@%
+   \def\@tocfile{plf\Thepart}%
+\else
+   \def\@tocfile{G\Thepart}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence of the partlof file and give a warning if it is not here:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis,\imess{I0006} nous vérifions la présence du fichier partlof et donnons un avertissement s'il n'est pas là:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+        \if@mtc@FE
+        \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}%
+           {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
+        \@mtc@empty@partlof@true
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlof}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the partlof file is present, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first,
+% \com{beforepartlof}, of course:
+% \or\relax
+% Si le fichier est présent, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais devons ajouter un peu de code pour la présentation;
+% d'abord, \com{beforepartlof}, bien sûr:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \beforepartlof
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlofstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase}
+% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If \com{chapter} is defined, we just set the page marks with the partlof title and set the page style:
+% \or\relax
+% Si \com{chapter} est définie, nous mettons simplement le titre de la partlof dans les marques de page et
+% établissons le style de page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \@ifundefined{chapter}{}%
+        {\global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth
+         \global\let\@mkboth\markboth
+         \thispagepartlofstyle
+         \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\plftitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\plftitle}}%
+        }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A \env{samepage} environment is begun, then the argument is treated to set the position of
+% the partlof title. If the title string is empty, this forces the positionning.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis l'argument est traité pour établir la
+% position du titre de la partlof. Si la chaîne de titre est vide, le positionnement est forcé.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \relax\begin{samepage}%
+        \if #1e\let\do@ptilf\e@pti
+        \else\if #1n\let\do@ptilf\n@pti
+        \else\if #1c\let\do@ptilf\c@pti
+        \else\if #1l\let\do@ptilf\l@pti
+        \else\if #1r\let\do@ptilf\r@pti
+        \else\if #1d\let\do@ptilf\df@ptilf
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+        \mtc@CkStr{\plftitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@ptilf\e@pti\relax\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\plffont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the parttoc, then we set the font:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la partlof,
+% puis établissons la fonte:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \raggedright
+        \parskip=\z@%
+        \reset@font\plffont%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule}
+% \begin{environment}{tabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
+% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\hline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The parttoc title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between the
+% title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary.
+% This rule is an \com{hline}.  It is the top rule of the partlof.
+% \or\relax
+% Le titre de la partlof est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher une coupure
+% de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si
+% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la partlof.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \parindent=\z@%
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+        \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
+        \par\noindent
+        \ifx\plf@rule\relax
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilf{\mtc@v\plftitle}\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \else
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilf{\mtc@v\plftitle}\\\hline
+        \mtc@hstrut\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques
+% paramètres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\*[-\baselineskip]\mtc@BBR
+        \leftmargin\ptcindent \rightmargin\ptcindent
+        \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
+        \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We enter in a \env{ptc@verse} environment to format the partlof.
+% If necessary, the toc depth is forced (locally) to \dcnt{partlofdepth}.
+% A little trick is necessary to adjust the position. A blank line is necessary to avoid a negative indentation.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous entrons dans un environnement \env{ptc@verse} pour mettre en page la partlof.
+% Si nécessaire la profondeur de table des matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{partlofdepth}.
+% Une petite astuce est nécessaire pour ajuster la position. Une ligne blanche est nécessaire pour éviter une
+% indentation négative.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \begin{ptc@verse}{\plfoffset}%
+        \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}%
+         {\c@lofdepth=\c@partlofdepth
+          \ifnum\c@lofdepth<1\relax\c@lofdepth=1\fi}
+        \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\plf@pgno}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\plf@setform}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\openpartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\closepartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version.
+% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{plf@setform}.
+% Then the partlof file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{ptc@verse} environment is terminated.
+% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file.
+% \or\relax
+% Si les lignes de contenu doivent ne pas avoir de numéros de pages, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa
+% version sans points de conduite. Pour les entrées au niveau chapitre, nous devons invoquer \com{l@chapter} en
+% ignorant l'argument numéro de page. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et
+% les choix de mise en page de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{plf@setform}. Puis le fichier partlof est
+% inséré, suivi d'un étai, puis l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} est terminé.
+% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \@ifundefined{plf@pgno}%
+   {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
+  \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
+  \plf@setform
+  \openpartlof\global\inpartloftrue
+  \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}%
+  \global\inpartloffalse\closepartlof
+  \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-1\baselineskip}
+  \leavevmode\mtc@strut
+  \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
+        \end{ptc@verse}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlof}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break (if \com{chapter} is
+% not defined), and \com{afterpartlof}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential.
+% \or\relax
+% La partie finale consiste seulement à~ajouter le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la possibilité d'une coupure de page
+% (si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie), et \com{afterpartlof}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) est essentielle.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \kernafterpartlof
+        \nopagebreak[4]\plf@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
+        \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
+        \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}%
+        \afterpartlof\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \ucom{partlot} command}\icom{partlot}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \ucom{partlot}}\icom{partlot}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command must be used after \com{part} if you need a partlot (no automatic partlot).
+% First, \com{partlot} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if
+% it is missing. Then, \com{partlot@} is called with the effective position as argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande doit être utilisée après \com{part} si vous souhaitez avoir une partlot (pas de partlot
+% automatique). Tout d'abord, \com{partlot} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur
+% par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il est absent. Puis, \com{partlot@} est appelée avec la position effective comme
+% argument:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\partlot{\@ifnextchar[{\partlot@}{\partlot@[d]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\Thepart}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{partlot@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@partlot@used@} (for a consistency
+% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the partlot file):
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{partlot@} fait le véritable travail.
+% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@partlot@used@}
+% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les suffixes longs sont utilisés ou non (pour construire
+% le nom du fichier partlot):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%
+\def\partlot@[#1]{%
+\global\@partlot@used@true
+\if@mtc@longext@%
+   \def\@tocfile{plt\Thepart}%
+\else
+   \def\@tocfile{U\Thepart}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence of the partlot file and give a warning if it is not here:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis,\imess{I0006} nous vérifions la présence du fichier partlot et donnons un avertissement s'il n'est pas là:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+        \if@mtc@FE
+        \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}%
+           {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
+        \@mtc@empty@partlof@true
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the partlot file is present, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first,
+% \com{beforepartlot}, of course:
+% \or\relax
+% Si le fichier est présent, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais devons ajouter un peu de code pour la présentation;
+% d'abord, \com{beforepartlot}, bien sûr:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \beforepartlot
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@markboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlotstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase}
+% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If \com{chapter} is defined, we just set the page marks with the partlot title and set the page style:
+% \or\relax
+% Si \com{chapter} est définie, nous mettons simplement le titre de la partlot dans les marques de page et
+% établissons le style de page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{%
+         \global\let\mtc@markboth\markboth
+         \global\let\@mkboth\markboth
+         \thispagepartlotstyle
+         \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\plttitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\plttitle}}%
+        }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A \env{samepage} environment is begun, then the argument is treated to set the position of
+% the partlof title. If the title string is empty, this forces the positionning.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis l'argument est traité pour établir la
+% position du titre de la partlot. Si la chaîne de titre est vide, le positionnement est forcé.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \relax\begin{samepage}%
+        \if #1e\let\do@ptilt\e@pti
+        \else\if #1n\let\do@ptilt\n@pti
+        \else\if #1c\let\do@ptilt\c@pti
+        \else\if #1l\let\do@ptilt\l@pti
+        \else\if #1r\let\do@ptilt\r@pti
+        \else\if #1d\let\do@ptilt\df@ptilt
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+        \mtc@CkStr{\plttitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@ptilt\e@pti\relax\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the partlot, then we set the font:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la partlot,
+% puis établissons la fonte:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \raggedright
+        \parskip=\z@%
+        \reset@font\pltfont%
+        \parindent=\z@%
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+        \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
+        \par\noindent
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\plt@rule}
+% \begin{environment}{tabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@ptilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
+% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\hline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The partlot title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between
+% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary.
+% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the partlot.
+% \or\relax
+% Le titre de la partlot est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher
+% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si
+% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la partlot.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifx\plt@rule\relax
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilt{\mtc@v\plttitle}\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \else
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\ptifont\do@ptilt{\mtc@v\plttitle}\\\hline
+        \mtc@hstrut\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques
+% paramètres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\*[-\baselineskip]\mtc@BBR
+        \leftmargin\ptcindent \rightmargin\ptcindent
+        \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
+        \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We enter in a \env{ptc@verse} environment to format the parttoc.
+% If necessary, the toc depth is forced (locally) to \dcnt{partlotdepth}.
+% A little trick is necessary to adjust the position.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous entrons dans un environnement \env{ptc@verse} pour mettre en page la partlot.
+% Si nécessaire la profondeur de table des matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{partlotdepth}.
+% Une petite astuce est nécessaire pour ajuster la position. Une ligne blanche est nécessaire pour éviter une
+% indentation négative.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \begin{ptc@verse}{\pltoffset}%
+        \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}%
+        {\c@lotdepth=\c@partlotdepth
+         \ifnum\c@lotdepth<1\relax\c@lotdepth=1\fi}
+        \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\plt@pgno}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\plt@setform}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\openpartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\closepartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version.
+% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{plt@setform}.
+% Then the partlot file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{ptc@verse} environment is terminated.
+% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file.
+% \or\relax
+% Si les lignes de contenu doivent ne pas avoir de numéros de pages, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa
+% version sans points de conduite. Pour les entrées au niveau chapitre, nous devons invoquer \com{l@chapter} en
+% ignorant l'argument numéro de page. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et
+% les choix de mise en page de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{plt@setform}. Puis le fichier partlot est
+% inséré, suivi d'un étai, puis l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} est terminé.
+% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \@ifundefined{plt@pgno}%
+   {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
+  \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
+  \plt@setform
+  \openpartlot\global\inpartlottrue
+  \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}%
+  \global\inpartlotfalse\closepartlot
+  \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-1\baselineskip}
+  \leavevmode\mtc@strut
+  \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
+        \end{ptc@verse}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break (if \com{chapter} is
+% not defined), and \com{afterpartlot}. The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential.
+% \or\relax
+% La partie finale consiste seulement à~ajouter le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la possibilité d'une coupure de page
+% (si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie), et \com{afterpartlot}. La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) est essentielle.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \kernafterpartlot
+        \nopagebreak[4]\plt@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
+        \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
+        \par\@ifundefined{chapter}{\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}}%
+        \afterpartlot\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Auxiliary commands for printing parttocs}\label{s+code+aux.commands.parttoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Commandes auxiliaires pour l'impression des parttocs}\label{s+code+aux.commands.parttoc}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@xpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@psect}
+% \begin{macro}{\pchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\psect}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The following auxiliary commands are used in the printing of parttocs. Note that \com{l@xpart} uses a huge depth
+% to inhibit the printing of its contents line (except if you cheat). These commands are similar to
+% \com{l@subsection}, only the arguments have been altered:
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes auxiliaires suivantes sont utilisées dans l'impression des parttocs. Notez que \com{l@xpart}
+% utilise une profondeur énorme pour inhiber l'impression de sa ligne de contenu (sauf si vous trichez). Ces
+% commandes sont similaires à~\com{l@subsection}, seuls les arguments ont été altérés:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\l@xpart{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}}
+\def\l@pchapter{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.0em}{2.3em}}
+\def\l@psect{\@dottedtocline{2}{1.0em}{2.3em}}
+\def\pchapter{pchapter}
+\def\psect{psect}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Patching the \ucom{part} command, continued}\label{s+code+patching.part.2}\icom{part}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{part}, suite}\label{s+code+patching.part.2}\icom{part}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\sv@spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\partbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\partend}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We patch both branches of the \com{part} command: \com{@part} (unstarred \com{part}) and \com{@spart}
+% (\com{part*}). We add the incrementation of the \cnt{ptc} counter to both branches.
+% In the unstarred branch,
+% we add \texttt{xpart} entries in the TOC, the LOF and the LOT. In the starred branch, we add a \com{partbegin}
+% line in the TOC. This command is just a marker and does nothing real (\com{relax}).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous modifions les deux branches de la commande \com{part}: \com{@part} (\com{part} non étoilée) et \com{@spart}
+% (\com{part*}). Nous ajoutons l'incrémentation du compteur \cnt{ptc} dans les deux branches. Dans
+% la branche non étoilée, nous ajoutons des entrées
+% \texttt{xpart} dans les fichiers table des matières, liste des figures et liste des tableaux. Dans la branche
+% étoilée, nous ajoutons une ligne \com{partbegin} dans le fichier table des matières. Cette commande est juste un
+% marqueur et ne fait rien de concret (\com{relax}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\sv@part\mtc@svpart
+\def\@part[#1]#2{\sv@part[{#1}]{#2}\relax
+\addcontentsline{lof}{xpart}{#1}%
+\addcontentsline{lot}{xpart}{#1}%
+\addcontentsline{toc}{xpart}{#1}%
+\stepcounter{ptc}}
+\let\sv@spart\@spart
+\def\@spart{\stepcounter{ptc}\sv@spart}
+\let\ptc@spart\@spart
+\def\@spart{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partend}\ptc@spart}
+\def\@spart{\addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}\ptc@spart}
+\let\partend\relax
+\let\partbegin\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \ucom{doparttoc} command and its siblings}\label{s+code+doparttoc}\icom{doparttoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{La commande \ucom{doparttoc} et ses cousines}\label{s+code+doparttoc}\icom{doparttoc}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{doparttoc} command works like the \com{dominitoc} command, \com{dopartlof} like \com{dominilof}
+% and \com{dopartlot} like \com{dominilot}.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{doparttoc} fonctionne comme la commande \com{dominitoc}, \com{dopartlof} comme \com{dominilof}
+% et \com{dopartlot} comme \com{dominilot}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{doparttoc} command extracts information from the \suffix{.toc} file and creates the
+% \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.ptc} becomes \suffix{.P} on MS-DOS).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{doparttoc} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.toc} et crée les fichiers
+% \suffix{.ptc}\meta{N} (\suffix{.ptc} devient \suffix{.P} sous MS-DOS).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@doparttoc#1{{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \setcounter{ptc}{0}%
+  \PTC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{dopartlof} command extracts information from the
+% \suffix{.lof} file and creates the \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.plf} becomes \suffix{.G} on MS-DOS).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{dopartlof} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lof} et crée les fichiers
+% \suffix{.plf}\meta{N} (\suffix{.plf} devient \suffix{.G} sous MS-DOS).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dopartlof#1{{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \setcounter{ptc}{0}%
+  \PLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dopartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{dopartlot} command extracts information from the
+% \suffix{.lot} file and creates the \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.plt} becomes \suffix{.U} on MS-DOS).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{dopartlot} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lot} et crée les fichiers
+% \suffix{.plt}\meta{N} (\suffix{.plt} devient \suffix{.U} sous MS-DOS).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dopartlot#1{{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \setcounter{ptc}{0}%
+  \PLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{ptc}{0}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the user macros, who detect the optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons les macros pour l'utilisateur, qui détectent l'argument optionnel:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\doparttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\doparttoc@}{\doparttoc@[l]}}
+\def\dopartlof{\@ifnextchar[{\dopartlof@}{\dopartlof@[l]}}
+\def\dopartlot{\@ifnextchar[{\dopartlot@}{\dopartlot@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@ptitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{doparttoc} (it becomes the default position for titles of parttocs)
+% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{doparttoc} (il devient la position par défaut pour les
+% titres des parttocs) et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\doparttoc@[#1]{%
+\if@mtc@hints@
+   \if@doparttoc@used@
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
+        {The \string\doparttoc \space command
+         \MessageBreak
+         has been invoked more than once
+         \MessageBreak}
+   \global\@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+\fi
+\global\@doparttoc@used@true
+\if #1e\let\df@ptitc\e@pti%
+\else\if #1n\let\df@ptitc\n@pti%
+\else\if #1c\let\df@ptitc\c@pti%
+\else\if #1l\let\df@ptitc\l@pti%
+\else\if #1r\let\df@ptitc\r@pti%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\@@doparttoc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dopartlof} (it becomes the default position for titles of partlofs)
+% and flag this macro as used, a hint detects any spurious invocation.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dopartlof} (il devient la position par défaut pour les
+% titres des partlofs) et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dopartlof@[#1]{%
+\if@mtc@hints@
+   \if@dopartlof@used@
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
+        {The \string\dopartlof \space command
+         \MessageBreak
+         has been invoked more than once
+         \MessageBreak}
+   \global\@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+\fi
+\global\@dopartlof@used@true
+\if #1e\let\df@ptilf\e@pti%
+\else\if #1n\let\df@ptilf\n@pti%
+\else\if #1c\let\df@ptilf\c@pti%
+\else\if #1l\let\df@ptilf\l@pti%
+\else\if #1r\let\df@ptilf\r@pti%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\@@dopartlof}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@ptilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@pti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@pti}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dopartlot} (it becomes the default position for titles of partlofs)
+% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dopartlot} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres
+% des partlots) et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dopartlot@[#1]{%
+\if@mtc@hints@
+   \if@dopartlot@used@
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
+        {The \string\dopartlot \space command
+         \MessageBreak
+         has been invoked more than once
+         \MessageBreak}
+   \global\@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+\fi
+\global\@dopartlot@used@true
+\if #1e\let\df@ptilt\e@pti%
+\else\if #1n\let\df@ptilt\n@pti%
+\else\if #1c\let\df@ptilt\c@pti%
+\else\if #1l\let\df@ptilt\l@pti%
+\else\if #1r\let\df@ptilt\r@pti%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\@@dopartlot}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dopartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These macros invoke the \verb|@dopart...| commands to create the mini-table file, then close the file
+% descriptor.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces macros invoquent les \verb|\@dopart...| pour créer le fichier de mini-table, puis ferment le descripteur de
+% fichier.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@doparttoc{\@doparttoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+\def\@@dopartlof{\@dopartlof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+\def\@@dopartlot{\@dopartlot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Processing macros for the parttocs}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Macros de traitement pour les parttocs}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@loop}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste puis la retirons de la tête de liste:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PTC@next#1\relax#2\\{%
+  \edef\PTC@list{#2}%
+  \PTC@loop{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@toc}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@explist}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Check if the list is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si la liste est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PTC@toc{%
+  \ifx\PTC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PTC@explist\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\theptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcname}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The\imess{I0033} macro \com{PTC@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the TOC file and detects interesting keywords.
+% If \com{part} is found, the \cnt{ptc} counter is incremented and a new partlof file is created.
+% \or\relax
+% La\imess{I0033} macro \com{PTC@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier table des matières et détecte les
+% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{part} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{ptc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier parttoc
+% est créé.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PTC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part
+    \stepcounter{ptc}%
+    \if@mtc@longext@%
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.ptc\theptc\@gobble}%
+      \def\ptcname{\jobname.ptc\theptc}%
+    \else
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.P\theptc\@gobble}%
+      \def\ptcname{\jobname.P\theptc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\ptcname
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starpart\relax
+    \stepcounter{ptc}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcname}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si des suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table,
+% puis nous ouvrons ce fichier:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@mtc@longext@%
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.ptc\theptc}%
+      \def\ptcname{\jobname.ptc\theptc}%
+    \else
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.P\theptc}%
+      \def\ptcname{\jobname.P\theptc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\ptcname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}:
+% \or\relax
+% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\pchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffee}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\paragraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines; this code extracts and writes info for chapters, sections, etc.:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées; ce code extrait et écrit les informations pour les
+% chapitres, sections, etc.:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\appendix
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\pchapter
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\coffee
+    \MTC@WriteCoffeeline{#1}{#3}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\starchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsubsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\starparagraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsubparagraph}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And for the starred sectionning commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Et pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starchapter
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcC}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{ptcSP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@explist}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The loop to read the lines of the TOC file; expands the list of entries and call \com{PTC@next} to process the
+% first one:
+% \or\relax
+% La boucle de lecture du fichier table des matières; expanse la liste des entrées et appelle \com{PTC@next} pour
+% traiter la première:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PTC@explist{\expandafter\PTC@next\PTC@list\\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@loop}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@toc}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If\SMM{\lmess{W0013}\\\lmess{I0025}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries.
+% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0013}\\\lmess{I0025}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en recherchant des entrées
+% intéressantes. Sinon, traiter l'entrée suivante de la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PTC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \mtcPackageWarning[W0013]{minitoc}%
+       {No file #1
+        \MessageBreak
+        PARTTOCS NOT PREPARED}%
+    \expandafter\PTC@toc
+  \else
+    \mtcPackageInfo[I0025]{minitoc}%
+       {PREPARING PARTTOCS FROM #1}%
+    \expandafter\PTC@read\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.toc} file.
+% \or\relax
+% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PTC@read{%
+  \read\@inputcheck to\PTC@line
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{PTC@test} has enough arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{PTC@test} a suffisamment d'arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\PTC@test\PTC@line.....\PTC@%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@test}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{PTC@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the TOC file, mainly to
+% delimit parts:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{PTC@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier table des matières,
+% principalement pour délimiter les parties:
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@toc}
+% \begin{macro}{\PTC@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\partend}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the
+% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. Finally process the next file in the
+% list.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous examinons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée «~intéressante~», nous la traitons. Si
+% c'est \com{@input}, nous ajoutons le fichier à~la liste. Sinon, nous l'ignorons. La boucle est recommencée si la
+% fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\PTC@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\PTC@{%
+  \ifx#1\contentsline
+    \let\mtc@string\string
+    \PTC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
+    \let\mtc@string\relax
+  \else\ifx#1\@input
+     \edef\PTC@list{\PTC@list#2\relax}%
+  \else\ifx#1\partend
+     \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+     \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
+  \else\ifx#1\partbegin
+     \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PTC@toc
+  \else\expandafter\PTC@read\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Processing macros for the partlofs}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Macros de traitement pour les partlofs}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@loop}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante de la liste et le retirons de la tête de la liste:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLF@next#1\relax#2\\{%
+  \edef\PLF@list{#2}%
+  \PLF@loop{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@lof}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@explist}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Check if the list is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si la liste est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLF@lof{%
+  \ifx\PLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PLF@explist\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\theptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfname}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@WriteContentsLine}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The macro \com{PLF@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOF file and detects interesting keywords.
+% If \com{part} is found, the \cnt{ptc} counter is incremented and a new partlof file is created.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{PLF@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des figures et détecte les
+% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{part} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{ptc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier partlof
+% est créé.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLF@contentsline#1#2#3#4{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xpart
+    \stepcounter{ptc}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfname}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si des suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table,
+% puis nous ouvrons ce fichier:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@mtc@longext@%
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.plf\theptc}%
+      \def\plfname{\jobname.plf\theptc}%
+    \else
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.G\theptc}%
+      \def\plfname{\jobname.G\theptc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\plfname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\figure}
+% \begin{macro}{\subfigure}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
+% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines:
+% \or\relax
+% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
+% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure
+    \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{plf}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subfigure
+    \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{plfS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@explist}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The loop to read the lines of the LOF file; expands the list of entries and call \com{PLF@next} to process the
+% first one:
+% \or\relax
+% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des figures; expanse la liste des entrées et appelle \com{PLF@next} pour
+% traiter la première:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLF@explist{\expandafter\PLF@next\PLF@list\\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@loop}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@lof}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If\SMM{\lmess{W0011}\\\lmess{I0035}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries.
+% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0011}\\\lmess{I0035}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en recherchant des entrées
+% intéressantes. Sinon, traiter l'entrée suivante de la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \mtcPackageWarning[W0011]{minitoc}%
+       {No file #1
+        \MessageBreak
+        PARTLOFS NOT PREPARED}%
+    \expandafter\PLF@lof
+  \else
+    \mtcPackageInfo[I0035]{minitoc}%
+       {PREPARING PARTLOFS FROM #1}%
+    \expandafter\PLF@read\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lof} file.
+% \or\relax
+% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lof}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLF@read{%
+  \read\@inputcheck to\PLF@line
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{PLF@test} has enough arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{PLF@test} a suffisamment d'arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\PLF@test\PLF@line.....\PLF@%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@test}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{PLF@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOF file, mainly to
+% delimit parts:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{PLF@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des figures,
+% principalement pour délimiter les parties:
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@lof}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLF@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\partend}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the
+% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. Finally process the next file in the
+% list.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous examinons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée «~intéressante~», nous la traitons. Si
+% c'est \com{@input}, nous ajoutons le fichier à~la liste. Sinon, nous l'ignorons. La boucle est recommencée si la
+% fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\PLF@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\PLF@{%
+  \ifx#1\contentsline
+    \let\mtc@string\string
+    \PLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
+    \let\mtc@string\relax
+  \else\ifx#1\@input
+     \edef\PLF@list{\PLF@list#2\relax}%
+  \else\ifx#1\partend
+     \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+     \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
+  \else\ifx#1\partbegin
+     \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PLF@lof
+  \else\expandafter\PLF@read\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Processing macros for the partlots}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Macros de traitement pour les partlots}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@loop}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante de la liste et le retirons de la tête de la liste:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLT@next#1\relax#2\\{%
+  \edef\PLT@list{#2}%
+  \PLT@loop{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@lot}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@explist}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Check if the list is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si la liste est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLT@lot{%
+  \ifx\PLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\PLT@explist\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\theptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltname}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@WriteContentsLine}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The macro \com{PLT@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOT file and detects interesting keywords.
+% If \com{part} is found, the \cnt{ptc} counter is incremented and a new partlot file is created.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{PLT@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des tableaux et détecte les
+% mots-clés intéressants. Si \com{part} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{ptc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier partlot
+% est créé.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLT@contentsline#1#2#3#4{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xpart
+    \stepcounter{ptc}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltname}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si des suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table,
+% puis nous ouvrons ce fichier:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@mtc@longext@%
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.plt\theptc}%
+      \def\pltname{\jobname.plt\theptc}%
+    \else
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.U\theptc}%
+      \def\pltname{\jobname.U\theptc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\pltname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\table}
+% \begin{macro}{\subtable}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
+% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines:
+% \or\relax
+% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
+% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table
+    \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{plt}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subtable
+    \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode#2}%
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{pltS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@explist}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The loop to read the lines of the LOT file; expands the list of entries and call \com{PLT@next} to process the
+% first one:
+% \or\relax
+% La boucle de lecture du fichier liste des tableaux; expanse la liste des entrées et appelle \com{PLT@next} pour
+% traiter la première:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLT@explist{\expandafter\PLT@next\PLT@list\\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@loop}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@lot}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If\SMM{\lmess{W0012}\\\lmess{I0038}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries.
+% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0012}\\\lmess{I0038}} une entrée est trouvée, on boucle ligne par ligne en recherchant des entrées
+% intéressantes. Sinon, traiter l'entrée suivante de la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \mtcPackageWarning[W0012]{minitoc}%
+       {No file #1
+        \MessageBreak
+        PARTLOTS NOT PREPARED}%
+    \expandafter\PLT@lot
+  \else
+    \mtcPackageInfo[I0038]{minitoc}%
+       {PREPARING PARTLOTS FROM #1}%
+    \expandafter\PLT@read\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lot} file.
+% \or\relax
+% Lire l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lot}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PLT@read{%
+  \read\@inputcheck to\PLT@line
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{PLT@test} has enough arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{PLT@test} a suffisamment d'arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\PLT@test\PLT@line.....\PLT@%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@test}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{PLT@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOT file, mainly to
+% delimit parts:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{PLT@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des tableaux,
+% principalement pour délimiter les parties:
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@lot}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\partend}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Look at the first token of the line. If it is an interesting entry, process it. If it is \com{@input}, add the
+% file to the list. Otherwise ignore. Go around the loop if not at end of file. Finally process the next file in the
+% list.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous examinons le premier \emph{token} de la ligne. Si c'est une entrée «~intéressante~», nous la traitons. Si
+% c'est \com{@input}, nous ajoutons le fichier à~la liste. Sinon, nous l'ignorons. La boucle est recommencée si la
+% fin du fichier n'est pas atteinte. Enfin nous traitons le fichier suivant dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\PLT@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\PLT@{%
+  \ifx#1\contentsline
+    \let\mtc@string\string
+    \PLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
+    \let\mtc@string\relax
+  \else\ifx#1\@input
+     \edef\PLT@list{\PLT@list#2\relax}%
+  \else\ifx#1\partend
+     \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+     \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
+  \else\ifx#1\partbegin
+     \addtocounter{ptc}{-1}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\PLT@lot
+  \else\expandafter\PLT@read\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% End of the part level stuff (begun in section~\vref{s+code+part.level}):
+% \or\relax
+% Fin du code pour le niveau partie (débuté dans la section~\vref{s+code+part.level}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Depth counters for sectlofs and sectlots}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Compteurs de profondeur pour les sectlofs et les sectlots}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@lofdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@lotdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\newcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the counters \dcnt{lofdepth} and \dcnt{lotdepth} are defined, we create new counters for the depths of
+% the corresponding mini-tables:
+% \dcnt{sectlofdepth} and \dcnt{sectlotdepth}.
+% These counters are initialized to~2.
+% This is done after the loading of the packages, in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block:
+% \or\relax
+% Si les compteurs \dcnt{lofdepth} et \dcnt{lotdepth} sont définis, nous créons de nouveaux compteurs pour les
+% profondeurs des mini-tables correspondantes:
+% \dcnt{sectlofdepth} et \dcnt{sectlotdepth}.
+% Ces compteurs sont initialisés à~2.
+% Ceci est fait après le chargement des paquetages, dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}%
+   {\newcounter{sectlofdepth}\setcounter{sectlofdepth}{2}}%
+ \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}%
+   {\newcounter{sectlotdepth}\setcounter{sectlotdepth}{2}}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Section-level commands}\label{s+code+section.level.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Commandes au niveau section}\label{s+code+section.level.commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@undef@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The section-level commands are defined only if \com{chapter} is \emph{not} defined, hence in article-like
+% document classes, and only if \com{section} is defined:
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes au niveau section sont définies seulement si \com{chapter} \emph{n'est pas} définie, donc dans
+% les classes de document du genre article, et seulement si \com{section} est définie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@chapter@undef@ \if@mtc@section@def@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementstc}
+% \begin{macro}{\incrementstc}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{W0005} define the obsolete command \com{firstsectionis} (with its harmless warning), the counter \cnt{stc}
+% of secttocs, the \com{adjuststc}, \com{decrementstc} and \com{incrementstc} commands,
+% the depth counter \dcnt{secttocdepth} and its default
+% value~2 (to include at least the subsections), the horizontal rule \com{stc@rule} (rule before/after
+% secttoc/sectlof/sectlot), the indentation (both sides) \com{stcindent} for the secttocs (with its default
+% values).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{W0005} définissons la commande obsolète \com{firstsectionis} (avec son avertissement bénin),
+% le compteur \cnt{stc} de secttocs, les commandes \com{adjuststc}, \com{decrementstc}
+% et \com{incrementstc},
+% le compteur de profondeur \dcnt{secttocdepth} et sa valeur par défaut~2 (pour inclure au moins
+% les sous-sections), le filet horizontal \com{stc@rule} (filet avant/après la secttoc/sectlof/sectlot), l'indentation
+% (des deux côtés) \com{stcindent} pour les secttocs (avec leurs valeurs par défaut).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\firstsectionis#1{\mtcPackageWarning[W0005]{minitoc}%
+     {\string\firstsectionis \space is an obsolete (ignored)
+      \MessageBreak
+      command}%
+     \@firstsectionis@used@true}
+\newcounter{stc}\setcounter{stc}{0}%
+\newcommand{\adjuststc}[1][1]{\addtocounter{stc}{#1}}%
+\def\decrementstc{\addtocounter{stc}{-1}}%
+\def\incrementstc{\addtocounter{stc}{+1}}%
+\newcounter{secttocdepth}\setcounter{secttocdepth}{2}%
+\def\stc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}%
+\newlength\stcindent \stcindent=24\p@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Fonts commands for secttocs and co.}\label{s+code+fonts.commands.secttocs}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Commands de fontes pour les secttocs et co.}\label{s+code+fonts.commands.secttocs}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\stcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\slffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stifont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the fonts commands for the secttocs, sectlofs and sectlots and their titles:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons les commandes de fontes pour les secttocs, sectlofs et sectlots et pour leurs titres:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\stcfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\mdseries}    % secttoc
+\def\stcSSfont{\small\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}  % (subsections)
+\let\stcSSSfont\stcfont    % (subsubsections)
+\let\stcPfont\stcfont      % (paragraphs)
+\let\stcSPfont\stcfont     % (subparagraphs)
+\let\slffont\stcfont       % sectlof (figures)
+\let\slfSfont\stcfont      % sectlof (subfigures)
+\let\sltfont\stcfont       % sectlot (tables)
+\let\sltSfont\stcfont      % sectlot (subtables)
+\def\stifont{\large\rmfamily\upshape\bfseries}    % titles
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Internal macros for title positionning}\label{s+code+int.macros.title.pos.secttocs}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Macros internes pour le positionnement du titre}\label{s+code+int.macros.title.pos.secttocs}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some internal macros for title positionning, from the optional arguments of \com{dosecttoc} and \com{secttoc}
+% commands (and siblings).
+% Centering, flushleft, flushright or empty titles (with a vertical correction for empty titles,
+% from \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}):
+% \or\relax
+% Voici quelques macros internes pour le positionnement du titre, selon les arguments optionnels des
+% commandes \com{dosecttoc} et \com{secttoc} (et leurs cousines).
+% Titres centrés, cadrés à~gauche, cadrés à~droite ou vides (avec un correction verticale pour les titres vides,
+% d'après \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\c@sti#1{\null\hfill #1\hfill\null}
+\def\l@sti#1{\null #1\hfill\null}
+\def\r@sti#1{\null\hfill #1\null}
+\def\e@sti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
+\def\n@sti#1{\vspace{-\baselineskip}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@stitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@stitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@stilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@stilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@stilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@stilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% By default, titles are flushleft.
+% \or\relax
+% Par défaut, les titres sur cadrés à~gauche.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\do@stitc\l@sti
+\let\df@stitc\l@sti
+\let\do@stilf\l@sti
+\let\df@stilf\l@sti
+\let\do@stilt\l@sti
+\let\df@stilt\l@sti
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{stc@verse} environment}\label{s+code+stc@verse}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{L'environnement \texttt{stc@verse}}\label{s+code+stc@verse}
+% \fi
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \env{stc@verse} environment is a very simple list environment, analog to the standard \env{verse} environment.
+% Some formatting parameters are adjusted. The \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\uopt{tight/loose}
+% and \iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose}\uopt{k-tight/k-loose} package options
+% are honored.
+% The \env{stc@verse} environment has an argument which is an horizontal offset (a command like \com{stcoffset}).
+% \or\relax
+% L'environnement \env{stc@verse} est un environnement de liste très simple, analogue à~l'environnement
+% standard \env{verse}. Certains paramètres de mise en page sont ajustés. Les options de paquetage
+% \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\uopt{tight/loose} et \iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose}\uopt{k-tight/k-loose} sont honorées.
+% L'environnement \env{stc@verse} a un argument qui est un déplacement horizontal (une commande telle que \com{stcoffset}).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\stc@verse#1{\let\\=\@centercr
+  \list{}{%
+    \itemsep=\z@ \itemindent=\z@ \topsep=1ex
+    \listparindent=\itemindent \partopsep=\z@
+    \iftightmtc \parsep=\z@ \fi
+    \ifktightmtc \parskip=\z@ \fi
+    \leftmargin=\stcindent \rightmargin=\leftmargin
+    \addtolength{\leftmargin}{+#1}%
+    \addtolength{\rightmargin}{-#1}%
+    }%
+  \item[]}%
+\def\endstc@verse{\nopagebreak[4]\endlist}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \ucom{secttoc}, \ucom{sectlof}, and \ucom{sectlot} commands}\icom{secttoc}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot}
+% These three commands are very similar.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les commandes \ucom{secttoc}, \ucom{sectlof} et \ucom{sectlot}}\icom{secttoc}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot}
+% Ces trois commandes sont très similaires.
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \ucom{secttoc} command}\label{s+code+secttoc}\icom{secttoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \ucom{secttoc}}\label{s+code+secttoc}\icom{secttoc}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{secttoc} command must be used after \com{section} if you need a secttoc (no automatic secttoc).
+% Its code is similar to the code of \com{minitoc} (but simpler).
+% First, \com{secttoc} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if
+% it is missing. Then, \com{secttoc@} is called with the effective position as argument:
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{secttoc} doit être utilisée après \com{section} si vous désirez une secttoc (pas de secttoc
+% automatique). Son code est similaire à~celui de \com{minitoc} (mais plus simple). Tout d'abord,
+% \com{secttoc} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il
+% est omis. Puis, \com{secttoc@} est appelée avec la position effective comme argument:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\secttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\secttoc@}{\secttoc@[d]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{secttoc@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@secttoc@used@} (for a consistency
+% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the secttoc file):
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{secttoc@} effectue le vrai travail.
+% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@secttoc@used@}
+% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les longs suffixes sont utilisés ou non (pour
+% construire le nom du fichier secttoc):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\secttoc@[#1]{%
+\global\@secttoc@used@true
+\if@mtc@longext@%
+   \def\@tocfile{stc\thestc}%
+\else
+   \def\@tocfile{S\thestc}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence and the emptiness of the secttoc file and give a warning if it is not here or is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons la présence et la vacuité du fichier secttoc, en donnant un avertissement s'il est absent ou
+% est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+        \if@mtc@FE
+        \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}%
+           {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
+        \@mtc@empty@secttoc@true
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagesecttocstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the secttoc file is present and not empty, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first,
+% \com{beforesecttoc}, of course, and the page style feature:
+% \or\relax
+% Si le fichier secttoc est présent et non vide, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais nous devons au préalable ajouter du
+% code de présentation: d'abord, \com{beforesecttoc}, bien sûr, et le dispositif de style de page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \beforesecttoc
+        \thispagesecttocstyle
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@stitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\stctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We begin a \env{samepage} environment, then treat the positionning argument. If the title is empty, we
+% simulate the ``\texttt{e}'' positionning.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis traitons l'argument de positionnement. Si le titre est
+% vide, nous simulons le positionnement «~\texttt{e}~».
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%      \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\stctitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\stctitle}}%
+        \relax\begin{samepage}%
+        \if #1e\let\do@stitc\e@sti
+        \else\if #1n\let\do@stitc\n@sti
+        \else\if #1c\let\do@stitc\c@sti
+        \else\if #1l\let\do@stitc\l@sti
+        \else\if #1r\let\do@stitc\r@sti
+        \else\if #1d\let\do@stitc\df@stitc
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+        \mtc@CkStr{\stctitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@stitc\e@sti\relax\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the secttoc, then we set the font:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la secttoc, puis nous
+% établissons la fonte:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \raggedright
+        \parskip=\z@%
+        \reset@font\stcfont%
+        \parindent=\z@%
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
+% \begin{environment}{tabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\stifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@stitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
+% \begin{macro}{\stctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\hline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The secttoc title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between
+% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary.
+% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the secttoc.
+% \or\relax
+% Le titre de la secttoc est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher
+% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si
+% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la secttoc.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
+        \par\noindent
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+        \ifx\stc@rule\relax
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\stifont\do@stitc{\mtc@v\stctitle}\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \else
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\stifont\do@stitc{\mtc@v\stctitle}\\\hline
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{5}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques
+% paramètres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR
+        \leftmargin\stcindent \rightmargin\stcindent
+        \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
+        \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@secttocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We enter in a \env{stc@verse} environment to format the secttoc. The toc depth is forced (locally) to
+% \dcnt{secttocdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous débutons un environnement \env{stc@verse} pour mettre en page la secttoc. La profondeur de table des
+% matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{secttocdepth}. Une petite astuce est nécessaire
+% pour ajuster le positionnement.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \begin{stc@verse}{\stcoffset}\c@tocdepth=\c@secttocdepth%
+        \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@pgno}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@setform}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\opensecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\closesecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version.
+% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{stc@setform}.
+% Then the secttoc file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{stc@verse} environment is terminated.
+% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file.
+% \or\relax
+% Si les lignes de contenu ne doivent pas avoir de numéros, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version
+% sans points de conduite. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et les choix
+% de mise en page issus de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{stc@setform}. Puis le fichier secttoc est
+% inséré, suivi d'un étai, et l'environnement \env{stc@verse} est terminé.
+% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \stc@setform%
+  \@ifundefined{stc@pgno}%
+  {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
+  \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
+  \stc@setform%
+  \opensecttoc\global\insecttoctrue
+  \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}%
+  \global\insecttocfalse\closesecttoc
+  \vspace{-1ex} \vspace{-\baselineskip}
+  \leavevmode\mtc@strut
+  \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
+        \end{stc@verse}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break and \com{aftersecttoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% La partie finale ajoute le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la permission d'une coupure de page et \com{aftersecttoc}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \kernaftersecttoc
+        \nopagebreak[4]\stc@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
+        \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
+        \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\aftersecttoc\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \ucom{sectlof} command}\label{s+code+sectlof}\icom{sectlof}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \ucom{sectlof}}\label{s+code+sectlof}\icom{sectlof}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{sectlof} command must be used after \com{section} if you need a sectlof (no automatic sectlof).
+% Its code is similar to the code of \com{minilof} (but simpler).
+% First, \com{sectlof} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if
+% it is missing. Then, \com{sectlof@} is called with the effective position as argument:
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{sectlof} doit être utilisée après \com{section} si vous désirez une sectlof (pas de sectlof
+% automatique). Son code est similaire à~celui de \com{minilof} (mais plus simple). Tout d'abord,
+% \com{sectlof} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il
+% est omis. Puis, \com{sectlof@} est appelée avec la position effective comme argument:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\sectlof@}{\sectlof@[d]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{sectlof@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@sectlof@used@} (for a consistency
+% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the sectlof file):
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{sectlof@} effectue le vrai travail.
+% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@sectlof@used@}
+% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les longs suffixes sont utilisés ou non (pour
+% construire le nom du fichier sectlof):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sectlof@[#1]{%
+\global\@sectlof@used@true
+\if@mtc@longext@%
+   \def\@tocfile{slf\thestc}%
+\else
+   \def\@tocfile{H\thestc}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence and the emptiness of the sectlof file and give a warning if it is not here or is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons la présence et la vacuité du fichier sectlof, en donnant un avertissement s'il est absent ou
+% est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+        \if@mtc@FE
+        \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}%
+           {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
+        \@mtc@empty@sectlof@true
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlofstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the sectlof file is present and not empty, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first,
+% \com{beforesectlof}, of course, and the page style feature:
+% \or\relax
+% Si le fichier sectlof est présent et non vide, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais nous devons au préalable ajouter du
+% code de présentation: d'abord, \com{beforesectlof}, bien sûr, et le dispositif de style de page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \thispagesectlofstyle
+%%        \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\slftitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\slftitle}}%
+        \beforesectlof
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{11}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@stilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\slftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We begin a \env{samepage} environment, then treat the positionning argument. If the title is empty, we
+% simulate the ``\texttt{e}'' positionning.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis traitons l'argument de positionnement. Si le titre est
+% vide, nous simulons le positionnement «~\texttt{e}~».
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \relax\begin{samepage}%
+        \if #1e\let\do@stilf\e@sti
+        \else\if #1n\let\do@stilf\n@sti
+        \else\if #1c\let\do@stilf\c@sti
+        \else\if #1l\let\do@stilf\l@sti
+        \else\if #1r\let\do@stilf\r@sti
+        \else\if #1d\let\do@stilf\df@stilf
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+        \mtc@CkStr{\slftitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@stilf\e@sti\relax\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\slffont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the sectlof, then we set the font:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la sectlof, puis nous
+% établissons la fonte:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \raggedright
+        \parskip=\z@%
+        \reset@font\slffont%
+        \parindent=\z@%
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\slf@rule}
+% \begin{environment}{tabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\stifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@stilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
+% \begin{macro}{\slftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\hline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The sectlof title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break between
+% the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary.
+% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the sectlof.
+% \or\relax
+% Le titre de la sectlof est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher
+% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si
+% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la sectlof.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
+        \par\noindent
+        \ifx\slf@rule\relax
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\stifont\do@stilf{\mtc@v\slftitle}\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \else
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \mtc@hstrut
+        \reset@font\stifont\do@stilf{\mtc@v\slftitle}\\\hline
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques
+% paramètres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR
+        \leftmargin\stcindent \rightmargin\stcindent
+        \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
+        \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sectlofdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We enter in a \env{stc@verse} environment to format the sectlof. The toc depth is forced (locally) to
+% \dcnt{sectlofdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous débutons un environnement \env{stc@verse} pour mettre en page la sectlof. La profondeur de table des
+% matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{sectlofdepth}. Une petite astuce est nécessaire
+% pour ajuster le positionnement.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \begin{stc@verse}{\slfoffset}%
+        \@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{}%
+          {\c@lofdepth=\c@sectlofdepth
+           \ifnum\c@lofdepth<1\relax\c@lofdepth=1\fi}
+        \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{9}
+% \begin{macro}{\slf@pgno}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\slf@setform}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\opensectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\closesectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version.
+% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{slf@setform}.
+% Then the sectlof file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{stc@verse} environment is terminated.
+% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file.
+% \or\relax
+% Si les lignes de contenu ne doivent pas avoir de numéros, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version
+% sans points de conduite. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et les choix
+% de mise en page issus de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{slf@setform}. Puis le fichier sectlof est
+% inséré, suivi d'un étai, et l'environnement \env{stc@verse} est terminé.
+% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \@ifundefined{slf@pgno}%
+  {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
+  \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
+  \slf@setform%
+  \opensectlof\global\insectloftrue
+  \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}%
+  \global\insectloffalse\closesectlof
+  \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
+        \end{stc@verse}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlof}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break and \com{aftersectlof}.
+% The blank line (\verb|\\|) is essential.
+% \or\relax
+% La partie finale ajoute le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la permission d'une coupure de page et \com{aftersectlof}.
+% La ligne blanche (\verb|\\|) est essentielle.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \kernaftersectlof
+        \nopagebreak[4]\slf@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
+        \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
+        \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\aftersectlof\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \ucom{sectlot} command}\label{s+code+sectlot}\icom{sectlot}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \ucom{sectlot}}\label{s+code+sectlot}\icom{sectlot}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{sectlot} command must be used after \com{section} if you need a sectlot (no automatic sectlot).
+% Its code is similar to the code of \com{minilot} (but simpler).
+% First, \com{sectlot} detects the presence of its optional argument, and uses its default value,~\texttt{d}, if
+% it is missing. Then, \com{sectlot@} is called with the effective position as argument:
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{sectlot} doit être utilisée après \com{section} si vous désirez une sectlot (pas de sectlot
+% automatique). Son code est similaire à~celui de \com{minilot} (mais plus simple). Tout d'abord,
+% \com{sectlot} détecte la présence de son argument optionnel, et utilise sa valeur par défaut,~\texttt{d}, s'il
+% est omis. Puis, \com{sectlot@} est appelée avec la position effective comme argument:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\sectlot@}{\sectlot@[d]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{sectlot@} macro does the real work. It first sets the flag \com{if@sectlot@used@} (for a consistency
+% hint) and checks if long extensions are used or not (to create the name of the sectlot file):
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{sectlot@} effectue le vrai travail.
+% Elle positionne tout d'abord l'indicateur \com{if@sectlot@used@}
+% (pour une indication (\emph{hint}) de cohérence) et teste si les longs suffixes sont utilisés ou non (pour
+% construire le nom du fichier sectlot):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\sectlot@[#1]{%
+\global\@sectlot@used@true
+\if@mtc@longext@%
+   \def\@tocfile{slt\thestc}%
+\else
+   \def\@tocfile{I\thestc}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkFile}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then,\imess{I0006} we check the presence and the emptiness of the sectlot file and give a warning if it is not here or is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis\imess{I0006} nous testons la présence et la vacuité du fichier sectlot, en donnant un avertissement s'il est absent ou
+% est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \mtc@CkFile{\jobname.\@tocfile}
+        \if@mtc@FE
+        \mtcPackageInfo[I0006]{minitoc}%
+           {\jobname.\@tocfile\space is empty}
+        \@mtc@empty@sectlot@true
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlotstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the sectlot file is present and not empty, we can insert it, but we must add some presentation code: first,
+% \com{beforesectlot}, of course, and the page style feature:
+% \or\relax
+% Si le fichier sectlot est présent et non vide, nous pouvons l'insérer, mais nous devons au préalable ajouter du
+% code de présentation: d'abord, \com{beforesectlot}, bien sûr, et le dispositif de style de page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \thispagesectlotstyle
+%%      \mtc@markboth{\MakeUppercase{\slttitle}}{\MakeUppercase{\slttitle}}%
+        \beforesectlot
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@stilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@CkStr}
+% \begin{macro}{\slttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@FE}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We begin a \env{samepage} environment, then treat the positionning argument. If the title is empty, we
+% simulate the ``\texttt{e}'' positionning.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous débutons un environnement \env{samepage}, puis traitons l'argument de positionnement. Si le titre est
+% vide, nous simulons le positionnement «~\texttt{e}~».
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \relax\begin{samepage}%
+        \if #1e\let\do@stilt\e@sti
+        \else\if #1n\let\do@stilt\n@sti
+        \else\if #1c\let\do@stilt\c@sti
+        \else\if #1l\let\do@stilt\l@sti
+        \else\if #1r\let\do@stilt\r@sti
+        \else\if #1d\let\do@stilt\df@stilt
+        \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+        \mtc@CkStr{\slttitle}\if@mtc@FE \let\do@stilt\e@sti\relax\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
+% \begin{macro}{\parskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We adjust some formatting parameters and avoid a page break between the title and the sectlot, then we set the font:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous ajustons quelques paramètres de mise en page et évitons une coupure de page entre le titre et la sectlot, puis nous
+% établissons la fonte:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \raggedright
+        \parskip=\z@%
+        \reset@font\sltfont%
+        \parindent=\z@%
+        \nopagebreak[4]%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
+% \begin{environment}{tabular}
+% \begin{macro}{\stifont}
+% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\do@stilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@v}
+% \begin{macro}{\slttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\hline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The sectlot title is set in a \env{tabular} environment (to inhibit a page break
+% between the title and the top rule), with a rule at its bottom if necessary.
+% This rule is an \com{hline}. It is the top rule of the sectlot.
+% \or\relax
+% Le titre de la sectlot est composé dans un environnement \env{tabular} (pour empêcher
+% une coupure de page entre le titre et le filet du haut), avec un filet en dessous si
+% nécessaire. Ce filet est une \com{hline}. C'est le filet supérieur de la sectlot.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \kern-0.8\baselineskip\nopagebreak[4]%
+        \par\noindent
+        \ifx\slt@rule\relax
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \reset@font\stifont\do@stilt{\mtc@v\slttitle}\\
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \else
+        \begin{tabular}{@{}p{\columnwidth}@{}}
+        \mtc@hstrut
+        \reset@font\stifont\do@stilt{\mtc@v\slttitle}\\\hline
+        \end{tabular}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we adjust the position under the top rule and set the indentation and some formatting parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, nous ajustons la position en dessous du filet supérieur et établissons l'indentation et quelques
+% paramètres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \nopagebreak[4]\null\leavevmode\mtc@zrule\\\mtc@BBR
+        \leftmargin\stcindent \rightmargin\stcindent
+        \itemindent=\z@\labelwidth=\z@%
+        \labelsep=\z@\listparindent=\z@%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sectlotdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@BBR}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We enter in a \env{stc@verse} environment to format the sectlot. The toc depth is forced (locally) to
+% \dcnt{sectlotdepth}. A little trick is necessary to adjust the position.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous débutons un environnement \env{stc@verse} pour mettre en page la sectlot. La profondeur de table des
+% matières est forcée (localement) à~\dcnt{sectlotdepth}. Une petite astuce est nécessaire
+% pour ajuster le positionnement.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \begin{stc@verse}{\sltoffset}%
+        \@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{}%
+          {\c@lotdepth=\c@sectlotdepth
+        \ifnum\c@lotdepth<1\relax\c@lotdepth=1\fi}
+        \leavevmode\\\mtc@BBR\vskip -.5\baselineskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\slt@pgno}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\slt@setform}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\opensectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\closesectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocfile}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@strut}
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If the contents lines must have no numbers, we replace the macro \com{@dottedtocline} with its undotted version.
+% A hook is added, and the formatting settings coming from \com{mtcsetformat} are activated via \com{slt@setform}.
+% Then the sectlot file is inserted, followed by a strut, and the \env{stc@verse} environment is terminated.
+% The ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features are called just before and after the insertion of the mini-table file.
+% \or\relax
+% Si les lignes de contenu ne doivent pas avoir de numéros, nous remplaçons la macro \com{@dottedtocline} par sa version
+% sans points de conduite. Un «~\emph{hook}~» (point d'attache, commande redéfinissable) est ajouté, et les choix
+% de mise en page issus de \com{mtcsetformat} sont activés par \com{slt@setform}. Puis le fichier sectlot est
+% inséré, suivi d'un étai, et l'environnement \env{stc@verse} est terminé.
+% Les dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~» sont appelés juste avant et juste après l'insertion du fichier mini-table.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \makeatletter
+  \@ifundefined{slt@pgno}%
+  {\let\@dottedtocline\@undottedtocline}{}
+   \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}
+  \@fileswfalse\mtc@hook@beforeinputfile
+  \slt@setform%
+  \opensectlot\global\insectlottrue
+  \@input{\jobname.\@tocfile}%
+  \global\insectlotfalse\closesectlot
+  \global\@nobreakfalse\endgroup
+        \end{stc@verse}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@zrule}
+% \begin{environment}{samepage}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The final part is just to add the bottom rule, if necessary, a possible page break and \com{aftersectlot}.
+% \or\relax
+% La partie finale ajoute le filet inférieur, si nécessaire, la permission d'une coupure de page et \com{aftersectlot}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \kernaftersectlof
+        \nopagebreak[4]\slt@rule\null\leavevmode\\%
+        \vskip-1.0\baselineskip\mtc@zrule\end{samepage}%
+        \par\pagebreak[1]\vspace*{-1ex}\aftersectlot\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Auxiliary internal commands, section level}\label{s+code+aux.int.commands.section.level}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Commandes internes auxiliaires, niveau section}\label{s+code+aux.int.commands.section.level}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\l@xsect}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@schapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\xsect}
+% \begin{macro}{\schapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define auxiliary commands, used for the mini-tables and as delimiters in the TOC file (and LOF and LOT files).
+% The depth of \texttt{xsect} is huge to inhibit the printing of its contents line (except if you cheat).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons quelques commandes auxiliaires, utilisées pour les mini-tables et comme délimiteurs dans le
+% fichier table des matières (et les fichiers liste des figures et liste des tableaux).
+% La profondeur de \texttt{xsect} est énorme pour inhiber l'impression de ses lignes de contenu (sauf si vous
+% trichez).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\l@xsect{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}}
+\def\l@xsection{\@dottedtocline{\@M}{1.0em}{2.3em}}
+\def\l@schapter{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.0em}{2.3em}}
+\def\xsect{xsect} \def\schapter{schapter}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Patching the \ucom{section} command (continued)}\label{s+code+patching.section.2}\icom{section}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Modifier la commande \ucom{section} (suite)}\label{s+code+patching.section.2}\icom{section}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We patch the both branches of the \com{section} command: \com{@sect} for the unstarred version and
+% \com{@ssect} for the starred version. First, for the unstarred version (\com{@sect}), we add a
+% \texttt{xsect} contents line in the LOF and in the LOT. The test \com{ifnum}\texttt{~\#2=1} restricts the action to the
+% section level macros (because \com{@sect} is also used by \com{subsection} and below, which have no
+% mini-tables).
+% \or\relax
+% Nous modifions les deux branches de la commande \com{section}: \com{@sect} pour la version non étoilée et
+% \com{@ssect} pour la version étoilée. Tout d'abord, pour la version non étoilée (\com{@sect}), nous ajoutons
+% une ligne de contenu \texttt{xsect} dans la liste des figures et dans la liste des tableaux.
+% Le test \com{ifnum}\texttt{~\#2=1} restreint l'action aux macros de niveau section (parce que \com{@sect} est
+% aussi utilisée par \com{subsection} et en dessous, qui n'ont pas de mini-tables).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\sv@sect\@sect
+\gdef\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
+\ifnum #2=1\relax
+   \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}%
+   \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}%
+\fi
+\sv@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#4}{#5}{#6}[{#7}]{#8}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If it is a section (unstarred or starred via \com{starsection}), we add a \texttt{xsect} entry
+% in the LOF and in the LOT.
+% \or\relax
+% Si c'est une section (non étoilée ou étoilée via \com{starsection}), nous ajoutons une entrée \texttt{xsect}
+% dans la liste des figures et dans la liste des tableaux.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{
+\expandafter
+\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax
+   \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}%
+   \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}%
+\fi
+\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection\relax
+   \addcontentsline{lof}{xsect}{#7}%
+   \addcontentsline{lot}{xsect}{#7}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@svsec}
+% \begin{macro}{\refstepcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tempskipa}
+% \begin{macro}{\@hangfrom}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\numberline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@svsechd}
+% \begin{macro}{\@xsect}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And the remainder of the section header formatting:
+% \or\relax
+% Et le reste de la mise en page d'un en-tête de section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax
+   \let\@svsec\@empty
+\else
+   \refstepcounter{#1}%
+   \edef\@svsec{\csname the#1\endcsname\hskip 1em}%
+\fi
+\@tempskipa #5\relax
+\ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
+   \begingroup #6\relax
+      \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%
+         {\interlinepenalty \@M #8\par}%
+   \endgroup
+   \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}\addcontentsline
+   {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax
+             \else
+             \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
+             \fi
+             #7}%
+\else
+   \def\@svsechd{#6\hskip #3\relax
+   \@svsec #8\csname #1mark\endcsname
+   {#7}\addcontentsline
+   {toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax
+             \else
+                \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}
+             \fi
+   #7}}%
+\fi
+\@xsect{#5}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectend}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@sect}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we patch the unstarred branch (\com{@sect}). We define also the delimiting commands \com{sectbegin} and
+% \com{sectend} commands. We do not add \com{sectbegin} if it is a subsection or deeper.
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous modifions la branche non étoilée (\com{@sect}). Nous définissons aussi les commandes de délimitation
+% \com{sectbegin} et \com{sectend}. Nous n'ajoutons pas \com{sectbegin} si c'est une sous-section ou plus
+% profond.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\stc@sect\@sect
+\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
+   \ifnum #2<1 \relax
+   \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\sectbegin}
+   \fi
+   \stc@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}[{#7}]{#8}}
+\let\sectend\relax
+\let\sectbegin\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \ucom{dosecttoc} command and siblings}\label{s+code+dosecttoc.etc}\icom{dosecttoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{La commande \ucom{dosecttoc} et ses cousines}\label{s+code+dosecttoc.etc}\icom{dosecttoc}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{dosecttoc} command is very similar to \com{dominitoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{dosecttoc} est très similaire à~\com{dominitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@next}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{dosecttoc} command extracts information from the
+% \suffix{.toc} file and creates the \suffix{.stc}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.stc} becomes \suffix{.S} on MS-DOS).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{dosecttoc} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.toc} et crée les fichiers
+% \suffix{.stc}\meta{N} (\suffix{.stc} devient \suffix{.S} sous MS-DOS).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dosecttoc#1{{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \setcounter{stc}{0}
+  \STC@next#1.toc\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@next}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{dosectlof} command extracts information from the
+% \suffix{.lof} file and creates the \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.slf} becomes \suffix{.H} on MS-DOS).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{dosectlof} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lof} et crée les fichiers
+% \suffix{.slf}\meta{N} (\suffix{.slf} devient \suffix{.H} sous MS-DOS).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dosectlof#1{{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \setcounter{stc}{0}
+  \SLF@next#1.lof\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dosectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\PLT@next}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{dosectlot} command extracts information from the
+% \suffix{.lot} file and creates the \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} files (\suffix{.slt} becomes \suffix{.V} on MS-DOS).
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{dosectlot} extrait des informations du fichier \suffix{.lot} et crée les fichiers
+% \suffix{.slt}\meta{N} (\suffix{.slt} devient \suffix{.V} sous MS-DOS).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@dosectlot#1{{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \setcounter{stc}{0}
+  \SLT@next#1.lot\relax\\}\setcounter{stc}{0}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the user-level macros, who detect the optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons les commandes pour l'utilisateur, commandes qui détectent l'argument optionnel:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dosecttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\dosecttoc@}{\dosecttoc@[l]}}
+\def\dosectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\dosectlof@}{\dosectlof@[l]}}
+\def\dosectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\dosectlot@}{\dosectlot@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@stitc}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dosecttoc} (it becomes the default position for titles of secttocs)
+% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dosecttoc} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres des secttocs)
+% et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dosecttoc@[#1]{%
+\if@mtc@hints@
+   \if@dosecttoc@used@
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
+        {The \string\dosecttoc \space command
+         \MessageBreak
+         has been invoked more than once
+         \MessageBreak}
+   \global\@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+\fi
+\global\@dosecttoc@used@true
+\if #1e\let\df@stitc\e@sti%
+\else\if #1n\let\df@stitc\n@sti%
+\else\if #1c\let\df@stitc\c@sti%
+\else\if #1l\let\df@stitc\l@sti%
+\else\if #1r\let\df@stitc\r@sti%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\@@dosecttoc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@stilf}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dosectlof} (it becomes the default position for titles of sectlofs)
+% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dosectlof} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres des sectlofs)
+% et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dosectlof@[#1]{%
+\if@mtc@hints@
+   \if@dosectlof@used@
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
+        {The \string\dosectlof \space command
+         \MessageBreak
+         has been invoked more than once
+         \MessageBreak}
+   \global\@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+\fi
+\global\@dosectlof@used@true
+\if #1e\let\df@stilf\e@sti%
+\else\if #1n\let\df@stilf\n@sti%
+\else\if #1c\let\df@stilf\c@sti%
+\else\if #1l\let\df@stilf\l@sti%
+\else\if #1r\let\df@stilf\r@sti%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\@@dosectlof}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mtc@hints@given@true}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\df@stilt}
+% \begin{macro}{\e@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\n@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@sti}
+% \begin{macro}{\r@sti}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0045} treat the optional argument of \com{dosectlot} (it becomes the default position for titles of sectlofs)
+% and flag this macro as used; a hint detects any spurious invocation.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0045} traitons l'argument optionnel de \com{dosectlot} (il devient la position par défaut pour les titres des sectlots)
+% et marquons cette macro comme ayant été utilisée; un \emph{hint} détecte toute invocation superflue.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dosectlot@[#1]{%
+\if@mtc@hints@
+   \if@dosectlot@used@
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
+        {The \string\dosectlot \space command
+         \MessageBreak
+         has been invoked more than once
+         \MessageBreak}
+   \global\@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+\fi
+\global\@dosectlot@used@true
+\if #1e\let\df@stilt\e@sti%
+\else\if #1n\let\df@stilt\n@sti%
+\else\if #1c\let\df@stilt\c@sti%
+\else\if #1l\let\df@stilt\l@sti%
+\else\if #1r\let\df@stilt\r@sti%
+\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi%
+\@@dosectlot}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\@@dosectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These macros invoke the \verb|\@dosect...| commands to create the mini-table file, then close the file
+% descriptor.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces macros invoquent les commandes \verb|\@dosect...| pour créer le fichier mini-table, puis ferment le
+% descripteur de fichier.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@dosecttoc{\@dosecttoc{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+\def\@@dosectlof{\@dosectlof{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+\def\@@dosectlot{\@dosectlot{\jobname}\immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@loop}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retirons de la tête de la liste:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\STC@next#1\relax#2\\{%
+  \edef\STC@list{#2}%
+  \STC@loop{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@toc}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@explist}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Check if the list is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si la liste est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\STC@toc{%
+  \ifx\STC@list\@empty\else\expandafter\STC@explist\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcname}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The macro \com{STC@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the TOC file.
+% If \com{section} is found, the \cnt{stc} counter is incremented and a new secttoc file is created.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{STC@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier table des matières.
+% Si \com{section} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{stc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier secttoc est créé.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\STC@contentsline#1#2#3#4{%
+  \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section
+    \stepcounter{stc}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcname}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si les suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis
+% nous l'ouvrons:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@mtc@longext@%
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.stc\thestc}%
+      \def\stcname{\jobname.stc\thestc}%
+    \else
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.S\thestc}%
+      \def\stcname{\jobname.S\thestc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\stcname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteCoffeeline}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffee}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\subsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\paragraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\subparagraph}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline} or \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}.
+% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines:
+% \or\relax
+% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline} ou
+% \com{MTC@WriteCoffeeline}.
+% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\coffee
+    \MTC@WriteCoffeeline{#1}{#3}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subsubsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\paragraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subparagraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\stepcounter}
+% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
+% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcname}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeout}
+% \begin{macro}{\openout}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A\imess{I0033} starred section terminates the current section and creates a new secttoc file:
+% \or\relax
+% Une\imess{I0033} section étoilée termine la section courante et crée un nouveau fichier secttoc:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsection
+    \stepcounter{stc}%
+    \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}
+    \if@mtc@longext@%
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.stc\thestc}%
+      \def\stcname{\jobname.stc\thestc}%
+    \else
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.S\thestc}%
+      \def\stcname{\jobname.S\thestc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\stcname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsubsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\starparagraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\starsubparagraph}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We process the entries for starred sectionning commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons les entrées pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubsubsection
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSSS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starparagraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\starsubparagraph
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{stcSP}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@explist}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@list}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The loop to read the lines of the TOC file; expands the list of entries and call \com{STC@next} to process the
+% first one.
+% \or\relax
+% Voici la boucle de lecture des lignes du fichier table des matières; nous expansons la liste des entrées et
+% appelons \com{STC@next} pour traiter la première.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\STC@explist{\expandafter\STC@next\STC@list\\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@loop}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@toc}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If\SMM{\lmess{W0016}\\\lmess{I0026}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries.
+% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0016}\\\lmess{I0026}} une entrée est trouvée, on examine ligne par ligne, en recherchant les
+% entrées «~intéressantes~». Sinon, nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\STC@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \mtcPackageWarning[W0016]{minitoc}%
+       {No file #1
+        \MessageBreak
+        SECTTOCS NOT PREPARED}%
+    \expandafter\STC@toc
+  \else
+    \mtcPackageInfo[I0026]{minitoc}%
+       {PREPARING SECTTOCS FROM #1}%
+    \expandafter\STC@read\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.toc} file.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous lisons l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.toc}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\STC@read{%
+  \read\@inputcheck to\STC@line
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{STC@test} has enough arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{STC@test} a suffisamment d'arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\STC@test\STC@line.....\STC@%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@toc}
+% \begin{macro}{\STC@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectend}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{STC@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the TOC file, mainly to delimit sections;
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{STC@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier table des matières,
+% essentiellement pour délimiter les sections:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\STC@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\STC@{%
+  \ifx#1\contentsline
+    \let\mtc@string\string
+    \STC@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
+    \let\mtc@string\relax
+  \else\ifx#1\@input
+     \edef\STC@list{\STC@list#2\relax}%
+  \else\ifx#1\sectend
+     \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+     \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
+  \else\ifx#1\sectbegin
+     \addtocounter{stc}{-1}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\STC@toc
+  \else\expandafter\STC@read\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@loop}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retirons de la tête de la liste:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLF@next#1\relax#2\\{%
+  \edef\SLF@list{#2}%
+  \SLF@loop{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@lof}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@explist}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Check if the list is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si la liste est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLF@lof{%
+  \ifx\SLF@list\@empty\else\expandafter\SLF@explist\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfname}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The macro \com{SLF@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOF file.
+% If \com{section} is found, the \cnt{stc} counter is incremented and a new sectlof file is created.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{SLF@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des figures.
+% Si \com{section} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{stc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier sectlof est créé.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLF@contentsline#1#2#3#4{%
+  \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xsect
+    \stepcounter{stc}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfname}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si les suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis
+% nous l'ouvrons:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@mtc@longext@%
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.slf\thestc}%
+      \def\slfname{\jobname.slf\thestc}%
+    \else
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.H\thestc}%
+      \def\slfname{\jobname.H\thestc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\slfname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\figure}
+% \begin{macro}{\subfigure}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
+% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines:
+% \or\relax
+% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
+% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\figure
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{slf}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subfigure
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{slfS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@explist}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The loop to read the lines of the LOF file; expands the list of entries and call \com{SLF@next} to process the
+% first one.
+% \or\relax
+% Voici la boucle de lecture des lignes du fichier liste des figures; nous expansons la liste des entrées et
+% appelons \com{SLF@next} pour traiter la première.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLF@explist{\expandafter\SLF@next\SLF@list\\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@loop}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@lof}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If\SMM{\lmess{W0014}\\\lmess{I0036}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries.
+% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0014}\\\lmess{I0036}} une entrée est trouvée, on examine ligne par ligne, en recherchant les
+% entrées «~intéressantes~». Sinon, nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLF@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \mtcPackageWarning[W0014]{minitoc}%
+       {No file #1
+        \MessageBreak
+        SECTLOFS NOT PREPARED}%
+    \expandafter\SLF@lof
+  \else
+    \mtcPackageInfo[I0036]{minitoc}%
+       {PREPARING SECTLOFS FROM #1}%
+    \expandafter\SLF@read\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lof} file.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous lisons l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lof}.
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{SLF@test} has enough arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{SLF@test} a suffisamment d'arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLF@read{%
+  \read\@inputcheck to\SLF@line
+  \expandafter\SLF@test\SLF@line.....\SLF@%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@lof}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLF@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectend}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{SLF@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOF file, mainly to delimit sections;
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{SLF@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des figures,
+% essentiellement pour délimiter les sections:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\SLF@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\SLF@{%
+  \ifx#1\contentsline
+    \let\mtc@string\string
+    \SLF@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
+    \let\mtc@string\relax
+  \else\ifx#1\@input
+     \edef\SLF@list{\SLF@list#2\relax}%
+  \else\ifx#1\sectend
+     \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+     \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
+  \else\ifx#1\sectbegin
+     \addtocounter{stc}{-1}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\SLF@lof
+  \else\expandafter\SLF@read\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@loop}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Processing the next entry in the list and remove it from the head of the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste et la retirons de la tête de la liste:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLT@next#1\relax#2\\{%
+  \edef\SLT@list{#2}%
+  \SLT@loop{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@lot}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@explist}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Check if the list is empty:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si la liste est vide:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLT@lot{%
+  \ifx\SLT@list\@empty\else\expandafter\SLT@explist\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\thestc}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltname}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsLine}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The macro \com{SLT@contentsline} analyses the lines read from the LOT file.
+% If \com{section} is found, the \cnt{stc} counter is incremented and a new sectlot file is created.
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{SLT@contentsline} analyse les lignes lues dans le fichier liste des tableaux.
+% Si \com{section} est trouvée, le compteur \cnt{stc} est incrémenté et un nouveau fichier sectlot est créé.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLT@contentsline#1#2#3#4{%
+  \gdef\thestc{\arabic{stc}}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\xsect
+    \stepcounter{stc}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltname}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0033} test if long or short extensions are used, to build the name of the mini-table file, then open it:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0033} testons si les suffixes longs ou courts sont utilisés, pour construire le nom du fichier mini-table, puis
+% nous l'ouvrons:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if@mtc@longext@%
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.slt\thestc}%
+      \def\sltname{\jobname.slt\thestc}%
+    \else
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0033]{minitoc}%
+         {Writing\space\jobname.V\thestc}%
+      \def\sltname{\jobname.V\thestc}%
+    \fi
+    \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+    \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\sltname
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\MTC@WriteContentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\table}
+% \begin{macro}{\subtable}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The token register \com{mtc@toks} is used to pass the entry to \com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
+% Now, we filter the relevant contents lines:
+% \or\relax
+% Le registre \emph{token} \com{mtc@toks} est utilisé pour passer l'entrée à~\com{MTC@WriteContentsline}.
+% Puis nous filtrons les lignes de contenu concernées:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \mtc@toks{\noexpand\leavevmode #2}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\table
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{slt}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\subtable
+    \MTC@WriteContentsline{#1}{sltS}{#3}{#4}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@explist}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@next}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The loop to read the lines of the LOT file; expands the list of entries and call \com{SLT@next} to process the
+% first one.
+% \or\relax
+% Voici la boucle de lecture des lignes du fichier liste des tableaux; nous expansons la liste des entrées et
+% appelons \com{SLT@next} pour traiter la première.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLT@explist{\expandafter\SLT@next\SLT@list\\}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@loop}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@lot}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@read}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If\SMM{\lmess{W0015}\\\lmess{I0039}} an entry is found, loop through line by line, looking for interesting entries.
+% Otherwise, process the next entry in the list.
+% \or\relax
+% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0015}\\\lmess{I0039}} une entrée est trouvée, on examine ligne par ligne, en recherchant les
+% entrées «~intéressantes~». Sinon, nous traitons l'entrée suivante dans la liste.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLT@loop#1{\openin\@inputcheck#1\relax
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck
+    \mtcPackageWarning[W0015]{minitoc}%
+       {No file #1
+        \MessageBreak
+        SECTLOTS NOT PREPARED}%
+    \expandafter\SLT@lot
+  \else
+    \mtcPackageInfo[I0039]{minitoc}%
+       {PREPARING SECTLOTS FROM #1}%
+    \expandafter\SLT@read\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Read the next entry of the \suffix{.lot} file.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous lisons l'entrée suivante dans le fichier \suffix{.lot}.
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@line}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \verb|.....| make sure that \com{SLT@test} has enough arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Les \verb|.....| garantissent que \com{SLT@test} a suffisamment d'arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SLT@read{%
+  \read\@inputcheck to\SLT@line
+  \expandafter\SLT@test\SLT@line.....\SLT@%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@test}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@contentsline}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@list}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@lot}
+% \begin{macro}{\SLT@read}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectend}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{SLT@test} macro finds the ``interesting'' commands in the LOT file, mainly to delimit sections;
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{SLT@test} trouve les commandes «~intéressantes~» dans le fichier liste des tableaux,
+% essentiellement pour délimiter les sections:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\SLT@test#1#2#3#4#5#6\SLT@{%
+  \ifx#1\contentsline
+    \let\mtc@string\string
+    \SLT@contentsline{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}%
+    \let\mtc@string\relax
+  \else\ifx#1\@input
+     \edef\SLT@list{\SLT@list#2\relax}%
+  \else\ifx#1\sectend
+     \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+     \immediate\openout\tf@mtc=\jobname.mtc
+  \else\ifx#1\sectbegin
+     \addtocounter{stc}{-1}%
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \ifeof\@inputcheck\expandafter\SLT@lot
+  \else\expandafter\SLT@read\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{End of section-level commands}\label{s+code+end.section.level.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Fin des commandes du niveau section}\label{s+code+end.section.level.commands}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We terminate the \emph{else} branch of the test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{section}|, the \emph{true} branch of the
+% test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| and add an empty \emph{else} branch to that test:
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Nous terminons la branche \emph{sinon} du test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{section}|, la branche \emph{vraie} du
+% test \com{@ifundefined}\verb|{chapter}| et ajoutons une branche \emph{sinon} vide à~ce test:
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fi% end of \if@mtc@section@def@
+\fi% end of \if@mtc@chapter@undef@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{16}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \ucom{mtcprepare} command}\icom{mtcprepare}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{La commande \ucom{mtcprepare}}\icom{mtcprepare}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists}
+% \begin{macro}{\jobname}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageInfo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This\imess{I0048} command tests the availability of the \verb|\do|\texttt{\ldots} minitoc preparation commands and
+% of the contents files, then calls as much as possible of these preparation commands. A hint is given.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette\imess{I0048} commande teste la disponibilité des commandes minitoc de préparation \verb|\do|\texttt{\ldots} et des
+% fichiers de contenu, puis appelle autant de ces commandes de préparation que possible. Un \emph{hint} est
+% émis.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtcprepare{\@ifnextchar[{\mtcprepare@}{\mtcprepare@[l]}}%
+\def\mtcprepare@[#1]{%
+\@ifundefined{part}{}{%
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.toc}{\doparttoc[#1]}{}%
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.lof}{\dopartlof[#1]}{}%
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.lot}{\dopartlot[#1]}{}%
+}%
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+  \@ifundefined{section}{}%
+  {%
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.toc}{\dosecttoc[#1]}{}%
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.lof}{\dosectlof[#1]}{}%
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.lot}{\dosectlot[#1]}{}%
+  }%
+}{%
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.toc}{\dominitoc[#1]}{}%
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.lof}{\dominilof[#1]}{}%
+\IfFileExists{\jobname.lot}{\dominilot[#1]}{}%
+}%
+\if@mtc@hints@
+  \@mtc@hints@given@true
+  \mtcPackageInfo[I0048]{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {Using \string\mtcprepare\space may induce some
+      \MessageBreak
+      hints about the preparation commands,
+      \MessageBreak
+      because it invokes ALL the preparation
+      \MessageBreak
+      commands allowed by the document class,
+      \MessageBreak
+      without any previous check\@gobble}%
+\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Use with \ucom{nofiles}}\label{s+nofiles}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Utilisation avec \ucom{nofiles}}\label{s+nofiles}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\nofiles}
+% \begin{macro}{\gobbleopt@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% In case the document uses the \com{nofiles} command (in its preamble), the auxiliary files for the mini-tables
+% should not be overwritten by the preparation commands, so these ones must be just faked; as these commands may
+% have an optional argument, they will be faked using the internal \LaTeX\ macro \com{@ifnextchar} (to get
+% the optional argument) and the new utility command \com{gobbleopt@}. Problem signaled by \name{Andreas}{Deininger}.
+% \or\relax
+% Dans le cas où le document utilise la commande \com{nofiles} (dans son préambule), les fichiers auxiliaires pour
+% les mini-tables ne doivent pas être ré-écrits par les commandes de préparation, donc celles-ci doivent seulement être
+% simulées; comme ces commandes peuvent avoir un argument optionnel, elles seront simulées en utilisant la
+% macro interne de \LaTeX\ \com{@ifnextchar} (pour obtenir l'argument optionnel) et la nouvelle commande
+% utilitaire \com{gobbleopt@}. Problème signalé par \name{Andreas}{Deininger}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\gobbleopt@[#1]{\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@filesw}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A test is placed in a \com{AtBeginDocument} and gives a warning if \com{nofiles} is used:
+% \or\relax
+% Un test est placé dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument} et donne un avertissement si \com{nofiles} est utilisée:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{\if@filesw\relax\else
+    \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0098]{minitoc}%
+       {--- You have used the \string\nofiles\space command
+        \MessageBreak
+        in your preamble; all preparation commands
+        \MessageBreak
+        in the body of the document will be ignored}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Since \com{nofiles} has been used, we must disable all the
+% preparation commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Puisque \com{nofiles} a été utilisée, nous devons inhiber
+% toutes les commandes de préparation:
+% \fi
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Commands for part level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\doparttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\dopartlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\dopartlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Commands for chapter level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dominitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\dominilof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\dominilot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Commands for section level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dosecttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\dosectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\dosectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Command \com{mtcprepare}:
+% \or\relax
+% Commande \com{mtcprepare}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtcprepare{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% End of the inhibition of the preparation commands and of the \com{AtBeginDocument} block:
+% \or\relax
+% Fin de l'inhibition des commandes de préparation et du bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Necessary \ucom{l@.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+necessary.l@}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Commandes \ucom{l@.{}.{}.} nécessaires}\label{s+code+necessary.l@}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\l@listof}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starparagraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubparagraph}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some \verb|\l@...| commands (analog to \com{l@section} or \com{l@paragraph}) are required to format some
+% entries in the mini-tables, for starred sectionning commands essentially:
+% \or\relax
+% Quelques commandes \verb|\l@...| (analogues à~\com{l@section} ou \com{l@paragraph}) sont requises pour
+% mettre en page certaines entrées dans les mini-tables, essentiellement pour les commandes de sectionnement
+% étoilées:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@listof\l@section}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@listof\l@chapter}
+\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\l@starpart\l@part}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@starchapter\l@chapter}
+\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@starsection\l@section}
+\@ifundefined{subsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsection\l@subsection}
+\@ifundefined{subsubsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsubsection\l@subsubsection}
+\@ifundefined{paragraph}{}{\let\l@starparagraph\l@paragraph}
+\@ifundefined{subparagraph}{}{\let\l@starsubparagraph\l@subparagraph}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{13}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The horizontal rules and their default values}\label{s+code+horiz.rules.default.values}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les filets horizontaux et leurs valeurs par défaut}\label{s+code+horiz.rules.default.values}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\noptcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomtcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nostcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@rule}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define here the various commands to activate ou inhibit the horizontal rules in the various kinds of
+% mini-tables. Each such command is an indirect definition of the corresponding horizontal rule. The rules are
+% .4\,pt high horizontal rules. We begin with rules for mini-tables of contents.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons ici les diverses commandes pour activer ou inhiber les filets horizontaux dans les diverses
+% sortes de mini-tables. Chacune de ces commandes est une définition indirecte du filet horizontal correspondant.
+% Les filets sont des filets horizontaux épais de 0.4\,pt. Nous commençons par les filets pour les mini-tables des matières.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\noptcrule{\let\ptc@rule\relax}
+\def\nomtcrule{\let\mtc@rule\relax}
+\def\nostcrule{\let\stc@rule\relax}
+\def\ptcrule{\def\ptc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
+\def\mtcrule{\def\mtc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
+\def\stcrule{\def\stc@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
+\def\ptc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
+\def\mtc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
+\def\stc@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\noplfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomlfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\noslfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\plf@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlf@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\slf@rule}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, the rules for mini-lists of figures:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis les filets pour les mini-listes de figures:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\noplfrule{\let\plf@rule\relax}
+\def\nomlfrule{\let\mlf@rule\relax}
+\def\noslfrule{\let\slf@rule\relax}
+\def\plfrule{\def\plf@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
+\def\mlfrule{\def\mlf@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
+\def\slfrule{\def\slf@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
+\def\plf@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
+\def\mlf@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
+\def\slf@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \begin{macro}{\columnwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\nopltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nosltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\plt@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlt@rule}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\slt@rule}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, the rules for mini-lists of tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis les filets pour les mini-listes de tableaux:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nopltrule{\let\plt@rule\relax}
+\def\nomltrule{\let\mlt@rule\relax}
+\def\nosltrule{\let\slt@rule\relax}
+\def\pltrule{\def\plt@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
+\def\mltrule{\def\mlt@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
+\def\sltrule{\def\slt@rule{\kern-3\p@ \hrule width \columnwidth \kern2.6\p@}}
+\def\plt@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
+\def\mlt@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
+\def\slt@rule{\rule[3\p@]{\columnwidth}{.4\p@}\vspace*{2.6\p@}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+mtcsetXXX.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.}}\label{s+code+mtcsetXXX.commands}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These commands\,\footnote{The general concept of the \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands was proposed
+% by \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}.} have been introduced to build a nicer user interface, and each of them replaces
+% numerous user commands, offering a rather unified and logical syntax.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces commandes\,\footnote{Le concept général des commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} a été proposé par
+% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart}.} ont été introduites pour construire une meilleure interface utilisateur, et chacune
+% d'elles remplace de nombreuses commandes utilisateur, offrant une syntaxe assez unifiée et logique.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Keywords for the \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+code+keywords.mtcset}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Mots-clés pour les commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.}}\label{s+code+keywords.mtcset}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define some common keywords for the \verb|\mtcset...| commands. A keyword is created via
+% the \com{@namedef} -- \com{@nameuse} mechanism the following way:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{@namedef}\verb|{mtc@|\emph{family}\verb|@|\emph{name}\verb|}{|\emph{abbreviation}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% where \emph{family} is the name of a group of keywords relative to one or several \verb|\mtcset...| macros,
+% \emph{name} is the keyword that the user gives as argument to the \verb|\mtcset...| macro, and
+% \emph{abbreviation} is a string used to build the name of the macro effectively used. As some \verb|\mtcset...|
+% macros have several keyword parameters, this method can reduce the number of macros at the user level, at the cost
+% of few keyword families.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons quelques mots-clés communs pour les commandes \verb|\mtcset...|. Un mot-clé est créé via le
+% mécanisme \com{@namedef} -- \com{@nameuse} de la manière suivante:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{@namedef}\verb|{mtc@|\emph{famille}\verb|@|\emph{nom}\verb|}{|\emph{abréviation}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% où \emph{famille} est le nom d'un groupe de mots-clés concernent une ou plusieurs macros \verb|\mtcset...|,
+% \emph{nom} est le mot-clé que l'utilisateur donne comme argument à~la macro \verb|\mtcset...|, et
+% \emph{abréviation} est une chaîne utilisée pour construire le nom de la macro effectivement utilisée. Comme
+% certaines macros \verb|\mtcset...| ont plusieurs paramètres mots-clés, cette méthode peut réduire le nombre de
+% macros au niveau de l'utilisateur, au prix de quelques familles de mots-clés.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define a family (\texttt{typetable}) of keywords for the types of mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons une famille (\texttt{typetable}) de mots-clés pour les types de mini-tables:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetable@parttoc}{ptc}\def\mtc@typetable@parttoc{ptc}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetable@partlof}{plf}\def\mtc@typetable@partlof{plf}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetable@partlot}{plt}\def\mtc@typetable@partlot{plt}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetable@minitoc}{mtc}\def\mtc@typetable@minitoc{mtc}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetable@minilof}{mlf}\def\mtc@typetable@minilof{mlf}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetable@minilot}{mlt}\def\mtc@typetable@minilot{mlt}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetable@secttoc}{stc}\def\mtc@typetable@secttoc{stc}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetable@sectlof}{slf}\def\mtc@typetable@sectlof{slf}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetable@sectlot}{slt}\def\mtc@typetable@sectlot{slt}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then another family (\texttt{typetitle}) for the titles of the mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis une autre famille (\texttt{typetitle}) pour les titres des mini-tables:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@parttoc}{pti}\def\mtc@typetitle@parttoc{pti}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@partlof}{pti}\def\mtc@typetitle@partlof{pti}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@partlot}{pti}\def\mtc@typetitle@partlot{pti}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@minitoc}{mti}\def\mtc@typetitle@minitoc{mti}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@minilof}{mti}\def\mtc@typetitle@minilof{mti}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@minilot}{mti}\def\mtc@typetitle@minilot{mti}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@secttoc}{sti}\def\mtc@typetitle@secttoc{sti}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@sectlof}{sti}\def\mtc@typetitle@sectlof{sti}
+\@namedef{mtc@typetitle@sectlot}{sti}\def\mtc@typetitle@sectlot{sti}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define a family (\texttt{YN}) of keywords to recognize the keywords ``\texttt{off}'' and ``\texttt{on}'', with their
+% many synonyms\,\footnote{This (deliberately extreme) case shows the easyness for creating synonyms of frequently
+% used keywords. Note also that when a keyword contains a non-letter character, we must use a hack with
+% \com{expandafter} \com{csname} \texttt{...} \com{endcsname}.}
+% and meaning false or true\FZ:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons une famille (\texttt{YN}) de mots-clés pour reconnaître les mots-clés «~\texttt{off}~» et
+% «~\texttt{on}~», avec leurs nombreux synonymes\,\footnote{Ce cas (délibérément extrême) montre la facilité de création de
+% synonymes pour des mots-clés fréquemment utilisés. Notez aussi que lorsqu'un mot-clé contient un caractère qui
+% n'est pas une lettre, nous devons ruser en utilisant \com{expandafter} \com{csname} \texttt{...}
+% \com{endcsname}.} et signifiant faux ou vrai\,\FZ:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@off}{no}\def\mtc@YN@off{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@OFF}{no}\def\mtc@YN@OFF{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@no}{no}\def\mtc@YN@no{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@NO}{no}\def\mtc@YN@NO{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@n}{no}\def\mtc@YN@n{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@N}{no}\def\mtc@YN@N{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@false}{no}\def\mtc@YN@false{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@FALSE}{no}\def\mtc@YN@FALSE{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@faux}{no}\def\mtc@YN@faux{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@FAUX}{no}\def\mtc@YN@FAUX{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@f}{no}\def\mtc@YN@f{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@F}{no}\def\mtc@YN@F{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@NON}{no}\def\mtc@YN@NON{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@non}{no}\def\mtc@YN@non{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@0}{no}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@0\endcsname{no}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@-}{no}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@-\endcsname{no}
+%
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@on}{}\def\mtc@YN@on{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@ON}{}\def\mtc@YN@ON{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@yes}{}\def\mtc@YN@yes{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@YES}{}\def\mtc@YN@YES{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@y}{}\def\mtc@YN@y{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@Y}{}\def\mtc@YN@Y{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@true}{}\def\mtc@YN@true{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@TRUE}{}\def\mtc@YN@TRUE{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@t}{}\def\mtc@YN@t{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@T}{}\def\mtc@YN@T{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@vrai}{}\def\mtc@YN@vrai{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@VRAI}{}\def\mtc@YN@VRAI{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@v}{}\def\mtc@YN@v{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@V}{}\def\mtc@YN@V{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@OUI}{}\def\mtc@YN@OUI{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@oui}{}\def\mtc@YN@oui{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@O}{}\def\mtc@YN@O{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@o}{}\def\mtc@YN@o{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@1}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@1\endcsname{}
+\@namedef{mtc@YN@+}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@YN@+\endcsname{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetfont} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}\icom{mtcsetfont}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetfont}}\label{s+code+mtcsetfont.command}\icom{mtcsetfont}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the sectionning level keywords (note that \texttt{part} is not a member of this family (\texttt{sectlevel}),
+% because no contents line for a
+% part can appear in a mini-table, part being the highest sectionning level); ``\texttt{*}''~represents ``any level'',
+% and is used to set the global default font for a given kind of mini-table.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons les mots-clés pour les niveaux de sectionnement (notez que \texttt{part} n'est pas membre de
+% cette famille (\texttt{sectlevel}), car aucune ligne de contenu pour une partie ne peut apparaître dans une
+% mini-table, la partie étant le plus haut niveau de sectionnement); <<~\texttt{*}~>>~représente <<~tout
+% niveau~>>, et est utilisée pour établir la fonte globale par défaut pour un genre donné de mini-table.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@chapter}{C}\def\mtc@sectlevel@chapter{C}
+\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@section}{S}\def\mtc@sectlevel@section{S}
+\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subsection}{SS}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subsection{SS}
+\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subsubsection}{SSS}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subsubsection{SSS}
+\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@paragraph}{P}\def\mtc@sectlevel@paragraph{P}
+\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subparagraph}{SP}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subparagraph{SP}
+\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@*}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@sectlevel@*\endcsname{}
+\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@figure}{}\def\mtc@sectlevel@figure{}
+\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@table}{}\def\mtc@sectlevel@table{}
+\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subfigure}{S}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subfigure{S}
+\@namedef{mtc@sectlevel@subtable}{S}\def\mtc@sectlevel@subtable{S}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcsetfont} command has the following syntax:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{level-name}\verb|}{|\emph{font commands}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{mtcsetfont} a la syntaxe suivante:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{mtcsetfont}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{nom-niveau}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes de fonte}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \verb|minitoc|, the \emph{level-name} is a sectionning level like
+% \verb|subsection| (no backslash). The \emph{font commands} are a font specification, using NFSS~\cite{fontsel} basic
+% commands usually.
+% \or\relax
+% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \verb|minitoc|, le \emph{nom-niveau} est un niveau de
+% sectionnement tel que \verb|subsection| (sans contre-oblique). Les \emph{commandes de fonte} sont une spécification
+% de fonte, utilisant habituellement des commandes basiques de NFSS~\cite{fontsel}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we declare a flag, set true:
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, mis à~vrai:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@setfont@\@mtc@setfont@true
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we begin the command, which has three arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, nous commençons la commande, qui a trois arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcsetfont}[3]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mta@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The\imess{E0013} two first arguments of this command are keywords. They must be translated into the effective strings.
+% We process the first argument, a keyword from the \texttt{typetable} family. The result is stored in
+% \com{mtc@mta@abbrev}. Example: if \verb|#1| is \verb|minitoc|, we get \cnt{mtc}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les\imess{E0013} deux premiers arguments sont des mots-clés. Ils doivent être traduits en chaînes effectives.
+% Nous traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}. Le résultat est rangé dans
+% \com{mtc@mta@abbrev}. Exemple: si \verb|#1| est \verb|minitoc|, nous obtenons \cnt{mtc}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@mta@abbrev{X}
+\@mtc@setfont@true
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@setfont@false
+   \def\mtc@mta@abbrev{X}
+   \mtcPackageError[E0013]{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsetfont \space has a wrong first argument
+       \MessageBreak
+       (#1).
+       \MessageBreak
+       It should be a mini-table type
+       \MessageBreak
+       (parttoc...sectlot)}%
+      {Correct the source code.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@mta@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@level@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The\imess{E0014} second argument, a keyword from the family \texttt{sectlevel}, is processed the same way and
+% the result is stored into a macro \com{mtc@level@abbrev}.
+% Example: if \verb|#2| is the \verb|subparagraph| keyword, we get~\verb|SP|.
+% \or\relax
+% Le\imess{E0014} deuxième argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{sectlevel}, est traité de la même manière
+% et le résultat est rangé dans \com{mtc@level@abbrev}. Exemple: si \verb|#2| est le mot-clé \verb|subparagraph|,
+% nous obtenons~\verb|SP|.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@level@abbrev{X}
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@sectlevel@#2\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@setfont@false
+   \def\mtc@level@abbrev{X}
+   \mtcPackageError[E0014]{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsetfont \space has a wrong second argument
+       \MessageBreak
+       (#2).
+       \MessageBreak
+       It should be a sectionning level
+       \MessageBreak
+       (part...subparagraph) or * }%
+      {Correct the source code.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@level@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@sectlevel@#2}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmp@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mta@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@level@abbrev}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we construct the effective macro to be applied:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous construisons la macro effective qui sera appliquée:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@tmp@name{\mtc@mta@abbrev\mtc@level@abbrev font}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Example: if \verb|#1| is \verb|minitoc| and \verb|#2| is \verb|subsection|, we get \verb|mtcSSfont|, which is the
+% name of the command for the font of a subsection entry in a minitoc (the backslash is missing, but we will use
+% a \com{csname} \ldots\ \com{endcsname} pair to apply the constructed command).
+% \or\relax
+% Exemple: si \verb|#1| est \verb|minitoc| et \verb|#2| est \verb|subsection|, nous obtenons \verb|mtcSSfont|, qui
+% est le nom de la commande pour la fonte d'une entrée de sous-section dans une minitoc (il manque la
+% contre-oblique, mais nous utiliserons une paire \com{csname} \ldots\ \com{endcsname} pour appliquer la
+% commande construite).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But all combinaisons are not legal (the level of the entry must be lower than the level of the mini-table, and
+% the kind\,\footnote{``Kind'' being sectionning, (sub-)figure, or (sub-)table.} of the entry must be consistent
+% with that of the mini-table),
+% so we must test. Special care must be taken for testing via internal defined commands (\emph{quarks})
+% with \texttt{@mtcqk} at the end of their names).
+% \or\relax
+% Mais toutes les combinaisons ne sont pas légales (le niveau de l'entrée doit être plus bas que celui de la
+% mini-table et le genre\,\footnote{Le <<~genre~>> étant sectionnement, (sous-)figure ou (sous)-table.} de
+% l'entrée doit être cohérent avec celui de la mini-table),), donc nous devons tester.
+% Un soin particulier doit être pris pour tester en utilisant
+% des commandes internes définies (\emph{quarks} avec \texttt{@mtcqk} à~la fin de leurs noms).
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\parttoc@mtcqk{parttoc@mtcqk}
+\def\minitoc@mtcqk{minitoc@mtcqk}
+\def\secttoc@mtcqk{secttoc@mtcqk}
+\def\partlof@mtcqk{partlof@mtcqk}
+\def\minilof@mtcqk{minilof@mtcqk}
+\def\sectlof@mtcqk{sectlof@mtcqk}
+\def\partlot@mtcqk{partlot@mtcqk}
+\def\minilot@mtcqk{minilot@mtcqk}
+\def\sectlot@mtcqk{sectlot@mtcqk}
+\def\part@mtcqk{part@mtcqk}
+\def\chapter@mtcqk{chapter@mtcqk}
+\def\appendix@mtcqk{appendix@mtcqk}
+\def\section@mtcqk{section@mtcqk}
+\def\subsection@mtcqk{subsection@mtcqk}
+\def\subsubsection@mtcqk{subsubsection@mtcqk}
+\def\paragraph@mtcqk{paragraph@mtcqk}
+\def\subparagraph@mtcqk{subparagraph@mtcqk}
+\def\figure@mtcqk{figure@mtcqk}
+\def\table@mtcqk{table@mtcqk}
+\def\subfigure@mtcqk{subfigure@mtcqk}
+\def\subtable@mtcqk{subtable@mtcqk}
+\@mtc@setfont@true
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\parttoc@mtcqk\relax
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+\fi
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\partlof@mtcqk\relax
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+\fi
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\partlot@mtcqk\relax
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+\fi
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\minitoc@mtcqk\relax
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+\fi
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\minilof@mtcqk\relax
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+\fi
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\minilot@mtcqk\relax
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+\fi
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\secttoc@mtcqk\relax
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\section@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+\fi
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\sectlof@mtcqk\relax
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\section@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\table@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subtable@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+\fi
+\expandafter\ifx\csname #1@mtcqk\endcsname\sectlot@mtcqk\relax
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\part@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\chapter@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\appendix@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\section@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\figure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #2@mtcqk\endcsname\subfigure@mtcqk\relax\@mtc@setfont@false\fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfont@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmp@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mta@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@level@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If\SMM{\lmess{I0015}\\\lmess{E0024}} the combinaison is legal,
+% we apply it, i.e.,~we redefine the meaning of the constructed macro with the sequence
+% of commands given as third argument of \com{mtcsetfont} and we log that event (we store the third argument in a
+% token register to can print it \emph{verbatim});
+% if the combinaison is not legal, an error message is displayed.
+% \or\relax
+% Si\SMM{\lmess{I0015}\\\lmess{E0024}} la combinaison est légale,
+% nous l'appliquons, c'est-à-dire que nous redéfinissons la signification de la
+% macro construite comme étant la séquence de commandes donnée en troisième argument de \com{mtcsetfont} et nous
+% notons cet événement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} (nous rangeons le troisième argument dans un registre
+% \emph{token} pour pouvoir l'écrire \emph{verbatim});
+% si la combinaison n'est pas légale, un message d'erreur est affiché.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@setfont@
+   \def\mtc@tmp@name{\mtc@mta@abbrev\mtc@level@abbrev font}
+   \mtc@toks{#3}
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0015]{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsetfont\space redefines the macro
+       \MessageBreak
+       "\mtc@tmp@name" as "\the\mtc@toks"}%
+   \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmp@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}%
+\else
+   \mtcPackageError[E0024]{minitoc}%
+      {The macro \string\mtcsetfont\space has incompatible
+       \MessageBreak
+       first (#1) and second (#2) arguments}%
+      {Correct the source code.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsettitlefont} command}\label{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}\icom{mtcsettitlefont}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsettitlefont}}\label{s+code+mtcsettitlefont.command}\icom{mtcsettitlefont}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsetfont} command. Its syntax is almost identical:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \icom{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|\mtcsettitlefont{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{font commands}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsetfont}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \icom{mtcsettitlefont}\verb|\mtcsettitlefont{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes de fonte}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitlefont@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \verb|minitoc|. The \emph{font commands} are a font specification, using
+% NFSS~\cite{fontsel} basic commands usually. The difference is the absence of the second keyword argument, because
+% the \emph{font commands} will be applied to the title of each mini-table of the given kind.
+%
+% First, we declare a flag, set true:
+% \or\relax
+% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \verb|minitoc|. Les \emph{commandes de fonte} sont une
+% spécification de fonte, utilisant habituellement des commandes basiques de NFSS~\cite{fontsel}. La différence est
+% l'absence du deuxième argument mot-clé, car les \emph{commandes de fonte} seront appliquées au titre de chaque
+% mini-table du genre donné.
+%
+% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, mis à~vrai:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@settitlefont@\@mtc@settitlefont@true
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And we begin the definition of the \com{mtcsettitlefont} command, which has two arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Et nous commençons la définition de la commande \com{mtcsettitlefont}, qui a deux arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcsettitlefont}[2]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtatf@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitlefont@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{E0022} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetitle} family, then the result is stored into
+% \com{mtc@mtatf@abbrev}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{E0022} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetitle}, puis le résultat est
+% rangé dans \com{mtc@mtatf@abbrev}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@mtatf@abbrev{X}
+\@mtc@settitlefont@true
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetitle@#1\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@settitlefont@false
+   \def\mtc@mtatf@abbrev{X}
+   \mtcPackageError[E0022]{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsettitlefont \space has a wrong first argument
+       \MessageBreak
+       (#1).
+       \MessageBreak
+       It should be a mini-table type
+       \MessageBreak
+       (parttoc...sectlot)}%
+      {Correct the source code.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@mtatf@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetitle@#1}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitlefont@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmptf@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtatf@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then\SMM{\lmess{I0018}\\\lmess{E0034}} we build the name of the effective command and apply this command:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis\SMM{\lmess{I0018}\\\lmess{E0034}} nous construisons le nom de la commande effective et appliquons cette commande:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@settitlefont@
+   \def\mtc@tmptf@name{\mtc@mtatf@abbrev font}
+   \mtc@toks{#2}%
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0018]{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsettitlefont\space redefines the macro
+       \MessageBreak
+       "\mtc@tmptf@name" as
+       \MessageBreak
+       "\the\mtc@toks"}%
+   \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmptf@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}%
+\else
+   \mtcPackageError[E0034]{minitoc}%
+      {The macro \string\\mtcsettitlefont\space uses
+       \MessageBreak
+       an illegal type of table (#1)}%
+      {Correct the source code.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax}
+\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsettitle} command}\label{s+code+mtcsettitle.command}\icom{mtcsettitle}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsettitle}}\label{s+code+mtcsettitle.command}\icom{mtcsettitle}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsettitlefont} command. Its syntax is almost identical:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \icom{mtcsettitle}\verb|\mtcsettitle{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{text}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsettitlefont}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \icom{mtcsettitle}\verb|\mtcsettitle{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{texte}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \verb|minitoc|. The \emph{text} is the text for a mini-table title.
+% \or\relax
+% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \verb|minitoc|. Le \emph{texte} est le texte pour un titre
+% de mini-table.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitle@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we declare a flag, set true:
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, mis à~vrai:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@settitle@\@mtc@settitle@true
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we define the \com{mtcsettitle} command, which has two arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous définissons la commande \com{mtcsettitle}, qui a deux arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcsettitle}[2]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtati@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitle@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{E0021} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family. The result is stored in
+% \com{mtc@mtati@abbrev}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{E0021} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}. Le résultat est rangé
+% dans \com{mtc@mtati@abbrev}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@mtati@abbrev{X}
+\@mtc@settitle@true
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@settitle@false
+   \def\mtc@mtati@abbrev{X}
+   \mtcPackageError[E0021]{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsettitle \space has a wrong first argument
+       \MessageBreak
+       (#1).
+       \MessageBreak
+       It should be a mini-table type
+       \MessageBreak
+       (parttoc...sectlot)}%
+      {Correct the source code.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@mtati@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@settitle@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpti@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtati@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And\SMM{\lmess{I0017}\\\lmess{E0033}} we construct the name of the effective macro and apply it:
+% \or\relax
+% Et\SMM{\lmess{I0017}\\\lmess{E0033}} nous construisons le nom de la macro effective et nous l'appliquons:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@settitle@
+   \def\mtc@tmpti@name{\mtc@mtati@abbrev title}%
+   \mtc@toks{#2}%
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0017]{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsettitle\space redefines the macro
+       \MessageBreak
+       "\mtc@tmpti@name" as
+       \MessageBreak
+       "\the\mtc@toks"}%
+   \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmpti@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}%
+\else
+   \mtcPackageError[E0033]{minitoc}%
+      {The macro \string\mtcsettitle\space uses
+       \MessageBreak
+       an illegal type of table (#1)}%
+      {Correct the source code.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax}
+\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetformat} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetformat.command}\icom{mtcsetformat}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetformat}}\label{s+code+mtcsetformat.command}\icom{mtcsetformat}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@namedef}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define first the keywords (family \texttt{formatparam}) for the three formatting parameters that this command
+% can alter:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons d'abord les mots-clés (famille \texttt{formatparam}) pour les trois paramètres de mise en page
+% que cette commande peut altérer:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{mtc@formatparam@dotinterval}{dotsep}%
+\def\mtc@arg@dotinterval{dotsep}
+\@namedef{mtc@formatparam@tocrightmargin}{tocrmarg}%
+\def\mtc@arg@tocrightmargin{tocrightmargin}
+\@namedef{mtc@formatparam@pagenumwidth}{pnumwidth}%
+\def\mtc@arg@pagenumwidth{\mtc@arg@pagenumwidth}
+%% \@namedef{mtc@arg@numwidth}{numwidth} %not yet available
+%% \def\mtc@arg@numwidth{\mtc@arg@numwidth} %not yet available
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{13}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcsetformat} command needs an initialization to be done at the beginning of the document, to set the
+% defaults values of the formatting parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{mtcsetformat} a besoin qu'une initialisation soit faite en début de document pour établir les
+% valeurs par défaut des paramètes de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\@pnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcpnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcpnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcpnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfpnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfpnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfpnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltpnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltpnumwidth}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltpnumwidth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We take, if possible, the default value of \com{@pnumwith} for each type of mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous prenons, si possible, la valeur par défaut de \com{@pnumwith} pour chaque type de mini-tables:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{ptcpnumwidth}{\let\ptcpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
+\@ifundefined{stcpnumwidth}{\let\stcpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
+\@ifundefined{mtcpnumwidth}{\let\mtcpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
+\@ifundefined{plfpnumwidth}{\let\plfpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
+\@ifundefined{mlfpnumwidth}{\let\mlfpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
+\@ifundefined{slfpnumwidth}{\let\slfpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
+\@ifundefined{pltpnumwidth}{\let\pltpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
+\@ifundefined{mltpnumwidth}{\let\mltpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
+\@ifundefined{sltpnumwidth}{\let\sltpnumwidth\@pnumwidth}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{9}
+% \begin{macro}{\@tocrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptctocrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtclofrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\stclotrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\plftocrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlflofrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\slflotrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\plttocrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltlofrmarg}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltlotrmarg}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We take, if possible, the default value of \com{@tocrmarg} for each type of mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous prenons, si possible, la valeur par défaut de \com{@tocrmarg} pour chaque type de mini-tables:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{ptctocrmarg}{\let\ptctocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
+\@ifundefined{mtctocrmarg}{\let\mtctocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
+\@ifundefined{stctocrmarg}{\let\stctocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
+\@ifundefined{plftocrmarg}{\let\plftocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
+\@ifundefined{mlftocrmarg}{\let\mlftocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
+\@ifundefined{slftocrmarg}{\let\slftocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
+\@ifundefined{plttocrmarg}{\let\plttocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
+\@ifundefined{mlttocrmarg}{\let\mlttocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
+\@ifundefined{slttocrmarg}{\let\slttocrmarg\@tocrmarg}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{9}
+% \begin{macro}{\@dotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltdotsep}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltdotsep}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We take, if possible, the default value of \com{@dotsep} for each type of mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous prenons, si possible, la valeur par défaut de \com{@dotsep} pour chaque type de mini-tables:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{ptcdotsep}{\let\ptcdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
+\@ifundefined{mtcdotsep}{\let\mtcdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
+\@ifundefined{stcdotsep}{\let\stcdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
+\@ifundefined{plfdotsep}{\let\plfdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
+\@ifundefined{mlfdotsep}{\let\mlfdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
+\@ifundefined{slfdotsep}{\let\slfdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
+\@ifundefined{pltdotsep}{\let\pltdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
+\@ifundefined{mltdotsep}{\let\mltdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
+\@ifundefined{sltdotsep}{\let\sltdotsep\@dotsep}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{4}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And we terminate the \com{AtBeginDocument} block:
+% \or\relax
+% Et nous terminons le bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The executive part is done via the following macros, which are invoked in the \env{mtc@verse}-like
+% environments for each kind of mini-table. These commands activate the values recorded by \com{mtcsetformat}.
+% \or\relax
+% La partie exécutive est effectuée via les macros suivantes, qui sont invoquées dans les environnements analogues
+% à~\env{mtc@verse} pour chaque genre de mini-table. Ces commandes activent les valeurs enregistrées par
+% \com{mtcsetformat}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptc@setform}
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{ptc@setform} macro is invoked in \env{ptc@verse} to set format parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{ptc@setform} est invoquée dans \env{ptc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ptc@setform{%
+\let\@pnumwidth\ptcpnumwidth\relax
+\let\@tocrmarg\ptctocrmarg\relax
+\let\@dotsep\ptcdotsep\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setform}
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtc@setform} macro is invoked in \env{mtc@verse} to set format parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{mtc@setform} est invoquée dans \env{mtc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@setform{%
+\let\@pnumwidth\mtcpnumwidth\relax
+\let\@tocrmarg\mtctocrmarg\relax
+\let\@dotsep\mtcdotsep\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\stc@setform}
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{stc@setform} macro is invoked in \env{stc@verse} to set format parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{stc@setform} est invoquée dans \env{stc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\stc@setform{%
+\let\@pnumwidth\stcpnumwidth\relax
+\let\@tocrmarg\stctocrmarg\relax
+\let\@dotsep\stcdotsep\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\plf@setform}
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{plf@setform} macro is invoked in \env{ptc@verse} to set format parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{plf@setform} est invoquée dans \env{ptc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\plf@setform{%
+\let\@pnumwidth\plfpnumwidth\relax
+\let\@tocrmarg\plftocrmarg\relax
+\let\@dotsep\plfdotsep\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlf@setform}
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mlf@setform} macro is invoked in \env{mtc@verse} to set format parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{mlf@setform} est invoquée dans \env{mtc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mlf@setform{%
+\let\@pnumwidth\mlfpnumwidth\relax
+\let\@tocrmarg\mlftocrmarg\relax
+\let\@dotsep\mlfdotsep\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\slf@setform}
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{slf@setform} macro is invoked in \env{stc@verse} to set format parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{slf@setform} est invoquée dans \env{stc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\slf@setform{%
+\let\@pnumwidth\slfpnumwidth\relax
+\let\@tocrmarg\slftocrmarg\relax
+\let\@dotsep\slfdotsep\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\plt@setform}
+% \begin{environment}{ptc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{plt@setform} macro is invoked in \env{ptc@verse} to set format parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{plt@setform} est invoquée dans \env{ptc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\plt@setform{%
+\let\@pnumwidth\pltpnumwidth\relax
+\let\@tocrmarg\plttocrmarg\relax
+\let\@dotsep\pltdotsep\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlt@setform}
+% \begin{environment}{mtc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mlt@setform} macro is invoked in \env{mtc@verse} to set format parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{mlt@setform} est invoquée dans \env{mtc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mlt@setform{%
+\let\@pnumwidth\plfpnumwidth\relax
+\let\@tocrmarg\plftocrmarg\relax
+\let\@dotsep\plfdotsep\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\slt@setform}
+% \begin{environment}{stc@verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{slt@setform} macro is invoked in \env{stc@verse} to set format parameters:
+% \or\relax
+% La macro \com{slt@setform} est invoquée dans \env{stc@verse} pour établir les paramètres de mise en page:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\slt@setform{%
+\let\@pnumwidth\plfpnumwidth\relax
+\let\@tocrmarg\plftocrmarg\relax
+\let\@dotsep\plfdotsep\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setformat@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We now define a flag and the \com{mtcsetformat} command, with has the following syntax:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{parameter-name}\verb|}{|\emph{value}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family, \emph{parameter-name} is a keyword of
+% the \texttt{formatparam} family and \emph{value}, the value of this parameter for the given kind of mini-table.
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcsetformat}, avec syntaxe suivante:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{mtcsetformat}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{nom-paramètre}\verb|}{|\emph{valeur}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% où \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}, \emph{nom-paramètre} est un mot-clé de la
+% famille \texttt{formatparam} et \emph{valeur}, la valeur de ce paramètre pour le genre de mini-table donné.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@setformat@\@mtc@setformat@true
+\newcommand{\mtcsetformat}[3]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtf@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@fparam@abbrev}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{E0021} now process the first argument and store the result in \com{mtc@mtf@abbrev}:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis\imess{E0021} nous traitons le premier argument et rangeons le résultat dans \com{mtc@mtf@abbrev}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@mtf@abbrev{X}
+\def\mtc@fparam@abbrev{X}
+\@mtc@setformat@true
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax
+  \@mtc@setformat@false
+  \def\mtc@mtf@abbrev{X}
+  \mtcPackageError[E0015]{minitoc}%
+     {\string\mtcsetformat \space has a wrong first argument
+      \MessageBreak
+      (#1).
+      \MessageBreak
+      It should be a mini-table type
+      \MessageBreak
+      (parttoc...sectlot)}%
+     {Correct the source code.
+      \MessageBreak
+      Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else \edef\mtc@mtf@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@fparam@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then\imess{E0016} we process the second argument and store the result into a macro \com{mtc@fparam@abbrev}:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis\imess{E0016} le deuxième argument est traité et le résultat est rangé dans \com{mtc@fparam@abbrev}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@formatparam@#2\endcsname\relax
+ \@mtc@setformat@false
+  \def\mtc@fparam@abbrev{X}
+  \mtcPackageError[E0016]{minitoc}%
+     {\string\mtcsetformat \space has a wrong second argument
+      \MessageBreak
+      (#2).
+      \MessageBreak
+      It should be a formatting param choosen from:
+      \MessageBreak
+      pagenumwidth, tocrightmargin, dotinterval}%
+     {Correct the source code.
+      \MessageBreak
+      Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}%
+\else
+  \edef\mtc@fparam@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@formatparam@#2}}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setformat@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpfm@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtf@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@fparam@abbrev}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The\SMMZZ{\lmess{I0016}\\\lmess{E0025}} name of the storage macro is built and it receives the third parameter
+% as value (\emph{via}~\com{edef} because it can contain some complex code):
+% \or\relax
+% Le\SMMZZ{\lmess{I0016}\\\lmess{E0025}} nom de la macro de stockage est construit et elle reçoit le troisième paramètre
+% comme valeur (\emph{via}~\com{edef} car il peut contenir du code complexe):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@setformat@
+  \mtc@toks{#3}%
+  \def\mtc@tmpfm@name{\mtc@mtf@abbrev\mtc@fparam@abbrev}%
+  \mtcPackageInfo[I0016]{minitoc}%
+     {\string\mtcsetformat\space redefines the macro
+      \MessageBreak
+      "\mtc@tmpfm@name" as "\the\mtc@toks"}
+  \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmpfm@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}%
+\else
+  \mtcPackageError[E0025]{minitoc}%
+     {The macro \string\mtcsetformat\space has incompatible
+      \MessageBreak
+      first (#1) and second (#2) arguments}%
+      {Correct the source code.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}%
+\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetpagenumbers} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetpagenumbers.command}\icom{mtcsetpagenumbers}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetpagenumbers}}\label{s+code+mtcsetpagenumbers.command}\icom{mtcsetpagenumbers}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command activates of inhibits page numbers in the mini-tables of a given kind. Its syntax is the following:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb+\mtcsetpagenumbers{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+
+% \end{verse}
+% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword for a kind of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}),
+% or \texttt{on} and
+% \texttt{off} a keyword to activate (\texttt{on}) or inhibit (\texttt{off}) the page numbers. \texttt{on} and
+% \texttt{off} have many synonyms.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande active ou inhibe les numéros de pages dans les mini-tables du genre donné. Sa syntaxe est la
+% suivante:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb+\mtcsetpagenumbers{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+
+% \end{verse}
+% où \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé pour un genre de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot})
+% et \texttt{on} ou \texttt{off} un mot-clé pour activer (\texttt{on}) ou inhiber (\texttt{off}) les numéros de
+% pages. \texttt{on} et \texttt{off} ont de nombreux synonymes.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setpagenumbers@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@spn@ok@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define some flags:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons quelques indicateurs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@setpagenumbers@ \@mtc@setpagenumbers@false
+\newif\if@mtc@spn@ok@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the user-level macro. If the first argument is a star, we call the internal macro
+% \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@} for each type of mini-table available; else, we call this internal macro only once,
+% for the specified type of mini-table.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons la macro au niveau utilisateur. Si le premier argument est une étoile, nous appelons la macro
+% interne \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@} pour chaque type de mini-table disponible; sinon, nous appelons cette macro
+% interne une seule fois, pour le type de mini-table spécifié.
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \fi %
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcsetpagenumbers}[2]{%
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\*\relax
+     \@ifundefined{part}{}%
+     {\mtcsetpagenumbers@{parttoc}{#2}
+      \mtcsetpagenumbers@{partlof}{#2}
+      \mtcsetpagenumbers@{partlot}{#2}}
+     \@ifundefined{chapter}{}%
+     {\mtcsetpagenumbers@{minitoc}{#2}
+      \mtcsetpagenumbers@{minilof}{#2}
+      \mtcsetpagenumbers@{minilot}{#2}}
+     \@ifundefined{section}{}%
+     {\mtcsetpagenumbers@{secttoc}{#2}
+      \mtcsetpagenumbers@{sectlof}{#2}
+      \mtcsetpagenumbers@{sectlot}{#2}}
+   \else
+   \mtcsetpagenumbers@{#1}{#2}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumber@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then the \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@} internal macro, with two arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis la macro interne \com{mtcsetpagenumbers@}, avec deux arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcsetpagenumbers@}[2]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttpn@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pnsw@abbrev}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{E0017} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family, and store the result in
+% \com{mtc@mttpn@abbrev}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{E0017} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}, et rangeons le résultat dans
+% \com{mtc@mttpn@abbrev}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X}
+\@mtc@setpagenumbers@true
+\def\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{}
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@setpagenumbers@false
+   \def\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{X}
+   \def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X}
+   \mtcPackageError[E0017]{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsetpagenumbers \space has a wrong first
+       \MessageBreak
+       argument (#1)}%
+      {It should be a mini-table type
+       \MessageBreak
+       (parttoc...sectlot)
+       \MessageBreak
+       Correct the source code.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@spn@ok@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@pnsw@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttpn@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setpagenumbers@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmppn@name}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then\SMM{\lmess{E0018}\\\lmess{I0022}\\\lmess{I0021}} the second argument, a keyword of the \texttt{YN} family,
+% and store the result into a macro \com{mtc@pnsw@abbrev}.
+% The name of the effective macro is built and the macro executed.
+% \or\relax
+% Puis\SMM{\lmess{E0018}\\\lmess{I0022}\\\lmess{I0021}} le second argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{YN},
+% et nous rangeons le résultat dans \com{mtc@pnsw@abbrev}.
+% Le nom de la macro effective est construit puis la macro exécutée.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@mtc@spn@ok@true
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@YN@#2\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@spn@ok@false
+   \def\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{X}
+   \def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X}
+   \@mtc@setpagenumbers@false
+   \def\mtc@mttpn@abbrev{X}
+   \mtcPackageError[E0018]{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsetpagenumbers \space has a wrong second
+       \MessageBreak
+       argument (#2)}%
+      {It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...)
+       \MessageBreak
+       Correct the source code.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@pnsw@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@YN@#2}}
+   \def\mtc@pnsw@abbrevX{X}
+   \def\mtc@noX{mtc@noX}
+   \def\mtc@tmppn@name{\mtc@pnsw@abbrev\mtc@mttpn@abbrev pagenumbers}
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@\mtc@pnsw@abbrev X\endcsname\mtc@noX
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0022]{minitoc}%
+         {Page numbers are inhibited
+          \MessageBreak
+          for the #1s}
+   \else
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0021]{minitoc}%
+         {Page numbers are activated
+          \MessageBreak for the #1s}
+   \fi
+   \csname\mtc@tmppn@name\endcsname{}
+\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetrules} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetrules.command}\icom{mtcsetrules}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetrules}}\label{s+code+mtcsetrules.command}\icom{mtcsetrules}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This macro is very similar to \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and its syntax is the same:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb+\mtcsetrules{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+
+% \end{verse}
+% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword for a kind of mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot}),
+% or \texttt{on} and
+% \texttt{off} a keyword to activate (\texttt{on}) or inhibit (\texttt{off}) the horizontal rules. \texttt{on} and
+% \texttt{off} have many synonyms.
+%
+% Hence the code is similar.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette macro ressemble beaucoup à~\com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et sa syntaxe est la même:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb+\mtcsetrules{+\emph{mini-table}\verb+}{on|off}+
+% \end{verse}
+% où \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé pour un genre de mini-table (\texttt{parttoc}, \ldots\ \texttt{sectlot})
+% et \texttt{on} ou
+% \texttt{off} un mot-clé pour activer (\texttt{on}) ou inhiber (\texttt{off}) les filets horizontaux. \texttt{on} et
+% \texttt{off} ont de nombreux synonymes.
+%
+% Donc le code est similaire.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setrules@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sru@ok@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define some flags:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons quelques indicateurs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@setrules@ \@mtc@setrules@false
+\newif\if@mtc@sru@ok@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define the user-level macro. If the first argument is a star, we call the internal macro
+% \com{mtcsetrules@} for each type of mini-table available; else, we call this internal macro only once,
+% for the specified type of mini-table.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons la macro au niveau utilisateur. Si le premier argument est une étoile, nous appelons la macro
+% interne \com{mtcsetrules@} pour chaque type de mini-table disponible; sinon, nous appelons cette macro
+% interne une seule fois, pour le type de mini-table spécifié.
+% \fi %
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcsetrules}[2]{%
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\*\relax
+     \@ifundefined{part}{}%
+     {\mtcsetrules@{parttoc}{#2}
+      \mtcsetrules@{partlof}{#2}
+      \mtcsetrules@{partlot}{#2}}
+     \@ifundefined{chapter}{}%
+     {\mtcsetrules@{minitoc}{#2}
+      \mtcsetrules@{minilof}{#2}
+      \mtcsetrules@{minilot}{#2}}
+     \@ifundefined{section}{}%
+     {\mtcsetrules@{secttoc}{#2}
+      \mtcsetrules@{sectlof}{#2}
+      \mtcsetrules@{sectlot}{#2}}
+   \else
+   \mtcsetrules@{#1}{#2}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then the \com{mtcsetrules@} internal macro, which has two arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis la macro interne \com{mtcsetrules@}, qui a deux arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcsetrules@}[2]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttru@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setrules@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rusw@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{E0019} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family and store the result in a macro
+% \com{mtc@mttru@abbrev}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{E0019} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable} puis rangeons le résultat
+% dans \com{mtc@mttru@abbrev}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@mttru@abbrev{X}
+\@mtc@setrules@true
+\def\mtc@rusw@abbrev{}
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@setrules@false
+   \def\mtc@rusw@abbrev{X}
+   \def\mtc@mttru@abbrev{X}
+   \mtcPackageError[E0019]{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsetrules \space has a wrong first argument
+       \MessageBreak
+       (#1)}%
+      {It should be a mini-table type
+       \MessageBreak
+       (parttoc...sectlot)
+       \MessageBreak
+       Correct the source code.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@mttru@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sru@ok@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@rusw@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mttru@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{if@setrules@false}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@noX}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmppn@name}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then\SMM{\lmess{E0020}\\\lmess{I0008}\\\lmess{I0007}} the second argument, a keyword of the \texttt{YN} family,
+% and store the result in a macro \com{mtc@rusw@abbrev}.
+% The name of the effective macro is built and the macro executed.
+% \or\relax
+% Puis\SMM{\lmess{E0020}\\\lmess{I0008}\\\lmess{I0007}} le second argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{YN},
+% et nous rangeons le résultat dans \com{mtc@rusw@abbrev}.
+% Le nom de la macro effective est construit et cette macro est exécutée.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@mtc@sru@ok@true
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@YN@#2\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@sru@ok@false
+   \def\mtc@rusw@abbrev{X}
+   \def\mtc@mttru@abbrev{X}
+   \@mtc@setrules@false
+   \mtcPackageError[E0020]{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsetrules \space has a wrong second argument
+       \MessageBreak
+       (#2)}%
+      {It should be a boolean value (0/1, yes/no, on/off, ...)
+       \MessageBreak
+       Correct the source code.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@rusw@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@YN@#2}}
+   \def\mtc@rusw@abbrevX{X}
+   \def\mtc@noX{mtc@noX}
+   \def\mtc@tmppn@name{\mtc@rusw@abbrev\mtc@mttru@abbrev rule}
+   \expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@\mtc@rusw@abbrev X\endcsname\mtc@noX
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0008]{minitoc}%
+         {Horizontal rules are inhibited
+          \MessageBreak
+          for the #1s}
+   \else
+      \mtcPackageInfo[I0007]{minitoc}%
+         {Horizontal rules are activated
+          \MessageBreak
+          for the #1s}
+   \fi
+   \csname\mtc@tmppn@name\endcsname{}
+\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetfeature} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}\icom{mtcsetfeature}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetfeature}}\label{s+code+mtcsetfeature.command}\icom{mtcsetfeature}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For this command, we must define three families of keywords, but the third is just used to add the word
+% ``\texttt{style}'' for the ``\texttt{pagestyle}'' when ``\feat{pagestyle}'' is used.
+%
+% \or\relax
+% Pour cette commande, nous devons définir trois familles de mots-clés, mais la troisième ne sert qu'à~ajouter le mot
+% <<~\texttt{style}~>> pour le <<~\texttt{pagestyle}~>> lorsque <<~\feat{pagestyle}~>> est utilisé.
+%
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A family (\texttt{ltypetable}) for the long names of the types of mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Une famille (\texttt{ltypetable}) pour les noms longs des types de mini-tables:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@parttoc}{parttoc}\def\mtc@ltypetable@parttoc{parttoc}
+\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@partlof}{partlof}\def\mtc@ltypetable@partlof{partlof}
+\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@partlot}{partlot}\def\mtc@ltypetable@partlot{partlot}
+\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@minitoc}{minitoc}\def\mtc@ltypetable@minitoc{minitoc}
+\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@minilof}{minilof}\def\mtc@ltypetable@minilof{minilof}
+\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@minilot}{minilot}\def\mtc@ltypetable@minilot{minilot}
+\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@secttoc}{secttoc}\def\mtc@ltypetable@secttoc{secttoc}
+\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@sectlof}{sectlof}\def\mtc@ltypetable@sectlof{sectlof}
+\@namedef{mtc@ltypetable@sectlot}{sectlot}\def\mtc@ltypetable@sectlot{sectlot}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A family (\texttt{featureparam}) for the type of feature:
+% \or\relax
+% Une famille (\texttt{featureparam}) pour le type de dispositif:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@before}{before}%
+   \def\mtc@featureparam@before{before}
+\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@after}{after}%
+   \def\mtc@featureparam@after{after}
+\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@open}{open}%
+   \def\mtc@featureparam@open{open}
+\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@close}{close}%
+   \def\mtc@featureparam@close{close}
+\@namedef{mtc@featureparam@pagestyle}{thispage}%
+   \def\mtc@featureparam@pagestyle{thispage}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And a family (\texttt{ft3}) to add ``style'' if it is a ``\feat{pagestyle}'' feature:
+% \or\relax
+% Et une famille (\texttt{ft3}) pour ajouter <<~style~>> si c'est un dispositif <<~\feat{pagestyle}~>>:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{mtc@ft3@before}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@before\endcsname{}
+\@namedef{mtc@ft3@after}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@after\endcsname{}
+\@namedef{mtc@ft3@open}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@open\endcsname{}
+\@namedef{mtc@ft3@close}{}\expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@close\endcsname{}
+\@namedef{mtc@ft3@pagestyle}{style}%
+    \expandafter\def\csname mtc@ft3@pagestyle\endcsname{style}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \com{mtcsetfeature} command has the following syntax:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{feature-name}\verb|}{|\emph{commands}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% where \emph{mini-table} is a keyword of the \texttt{ltypetable} family, \emph{feature-name} is a keyword of
+% the \texttt{featureparam} family (but also of the \texttt{ft3} family), and \emph{commands} are the commands which
+% constitute the selected feature.
+% \or\relax
+% La commande \com{mtcsetfeature} a la syntaxe suivante:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{mtcsetfeature}\verb|{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{nom-dispositif}\verb|}{|\emph{commandes}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+% où \emph{mini-table} est une mot-clé de la famille \texttt{ltypetable} family, \emph{nom-dispositif} est un mot-clé
+% de la famille \texttt{featureparam} (mais aussi de la famille \texttt{ft3}), et \emph{commandes} sont les
+% commandes qui constituent le dispositif choisi.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfeature@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We define a flag and the \com{mtcsetfeature} command, with three arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcsetfeature}, qui a trois arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@setfeature@\@mtc@setfeature@true
+\newcommand{\mtcsetfeature}[3]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@abbrev}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{E0011} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{ltypetable} family, and store
+% the result in \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{E0011} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{ltypetable}, et rangeons le résultat
+% dans \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev{X}
+\def\mtc@featparam@abbrev{X}
+\@mtc@setfeature@true
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@ltypetable@#1\endcsname\relax
+  \@mtc@setfeature@false
+  \def\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev{X}
+  \mtcPackageError[E0011]{minitoc}%
+     {\string\mtcsetfeature \space has a wrong first argument
+      \MessageBreak
+      (#1).
+      \MessageBreak
+      It should be a mini-table type
+      \MessageBreak
+      (parttoc...sectlot)}%
+     {Correct the source code.
+      \MessageBreak
+      Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+  \edef\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@ltypetable@#1}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfeature@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@third}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The\imess{E0012} second argument is a keyword of the \texttt{featureparam} family, the result is stored in
+% \com{mtc@featparam@}; and the complement is computed from the first argument, interpreted as a keyword of the
+% \texttt{ft3} family and whose result is stored in \com{mtc@featparam@third}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le\imess{E0012} deuxième argument est un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{featureparam}, le résultat est rangé dans
+% \com{mtc@featparam@}; et le complément est calculé d'après le premier argument, interprété comme un mot-clé de
+% la famille \texttt{ft3} et dont le résultat est rangé dans \com{mtc@featparam@third}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@featureparam@#2\endcsname\relax
+ \@mtc@setfeature@false
+  \def\mtc@featparam@abbrev{X}
+  \def\mtc@featparam@third{X}
+  \mtcPackageError[E0012]{minitoc}%
+     {\string\mtcsetfeature \space has a wrong second argument
+      \MessageBreak
+      (#2).
+      \MessageBreak
+      It should be a feature param
+      \MessageBreak
+      (before, after, open, close, pagestyle)}%
+     {Correct the source code.
+      \MessageBreak
+      Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+  \edef\mtc@featparam@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@featureparam@#2}}
+  \edef\mtc@featparam@third{\@nameuse{mtc@ft3@#2}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setfeature@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpfeat@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@featparam@third}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% The\SMM{\lmess{I0014}\\\lmess{E0023}} name of the effective macro is built by concatenating these three
+% pieces (named \com{mtc@featparam@abbrev},\space
+% \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev},\space and \com{mtc@featparam@third}\space respectively), then this macro is executed:
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% Le\SMM{\lmess{I0014}\\\lmess{E0023}} nom de la macro effective est construit en concaténant ces trois
+% morceaux (nommés \com{mtc@featparam@abbrev},
+% \com{mtc@mtfeat@abbrev} et \com{mtc@featparam@third} respectivement), puis cette macro est exécutée:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@setfeature@
+  \def\mtc@tmpfeat@name%
+     {\mtc@featparam@abbrev\mtc@mtfeat@abbrev\mtc@featparam@third}%
+     \mtc@toks{#3}%
+  \mtcPackageInfo[I0014]{minitoc}%
+     {\string\mtcsetfeature\space redefines the macro
+      \MessageBreak
+      "\csname mtc@tmpfeat@name\endcsname" as
+      \MessageBreak
+      "\the\mtc@toks"}%
+  \expandafter\edef\csname\mtc@tmpfeat@name\endcsname{\the\mtc@toks}%
+\else
+  \mtcPackageError[E0023]{minitoc}%
+     {The macro \string\mtcsetfeature\space has incompatible
+      \MessageBreak
+      first (#1) and second (#2) arguments}%
+     {Correct the source code.
+      \MessageBreak
+      Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetdepth} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetdepth.command}\icom{mtcsetdepth}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetdepth}}\label{s+code+mtcsetdepth.command}\icom{mtcsetdepth}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsettitle} command. Its syntax is almost identical:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \icom{mtcsetdepth}\verb|\mtcsetdepth{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{depth}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+%
+% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \texttt{minitoc}. The \emph{depth} is the depth for a mini-table.
+% If it is a mini-table for a list of figures or tables, the corresponding depth counter \virage\emph{must be
+% available}, i.e.,~must have been created (often by an adequate package, like the \pack{subfig}
+% package~\cite{subfig}).
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsettitle}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \icom{mtcsetdepth}\verb|\mtcsetdepth{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{profondeur}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+%
+% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \texttt{minitoc}. La \emph{profondeur} est la profondeur
+% pour une mini-table. Si c'est une mini-table pour une liste de figures ou de tableaux, le compteur profondeur
+% correspondant \virage\emph{doit être disponible}, c'est-à-dire qu'il doit avoir été créé (souvent par un paquetage
+% adéquat, tel que le paquetage \pack{subfig}~\cite{subfig}).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setdepth@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we declare a flag, set true:
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, vrai par défaut:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@setdepth@\@mtc@setdepth@true
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we define the \com{mtcsetdepth} command, with two arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous définissons la commande \com{mtcsetdepth}, avec deux arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcsetdepth}[2]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtade@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setdepth@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{E0009} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{ltypetable} family. The result is stored in
+% \com{mtc@mtade@abbrev}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{E0009} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{ltypetable}. Le résultat est rangé
+% dans \com{mtc@mtade@abbrev}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@mtade@abbrev{X}
+\@mtc@setdepth@true
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@ltypetable@#1\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@setdepth@false
+   \def\mtc@mtade@abbrev{X}
+   \mtcPackageError[E0009]{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsetdepth \space has a wrong first argument
+       \MessageBreak
+       (#1).
+       \MessageBreak
+       It should be a mini-table type
+       \MessageBreak
+       (parttoc...sectlot)}%
+      {Correct the source code.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@mtade@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@ltypetable@#1}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setdepth@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpde@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtade@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And\SMM{\lmess{E0008}\\\lmess{I0013}\\\lmess{E0010}} we construct the name of the effective counter
+% and gave it the value:
+% \or\relax
+% Et\SMM{\lmess{E0008}\\\lmess{I0013}\\\lmess{E0010}} nous construisons le nom du compteur effectif
+% et lui donnons la valeur:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@setdepth@
+   \def\mtc@tmpde@name{\mtc@mtade@abbrev depth}
+   \@ifundefined{c@\mtc@mtade@abbrev depth}%
+      {\mtcPackageError[E0008]{minitoc}%
+       {\string\mtcsetdepth \space attempts to use
+        \MessageBreak
+             an undefined counter (#1depth).}%
+      {Correct the source code.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}}{%
+   \mtc@toks{#2} % trick for explicit message using \the.
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0013]{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsetdepth\space redefines the counter
+       \MessageBreak
+       "\mtc@tmpde@name" as "\the\mtc@toks"}%
+    \expandafter\csname c@\mtc@tmpde@name\endcsname=#2}%
+\else
+   \mtcPackageError[E0010]{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsetdepth:\space Illegal type of table (#1)}%
+      {Correct the source code.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax}%
+\fi}% end of \mtcsetdepth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{The \ucom{mtcsetoffset} command}\label{s+code+mtcsetoffset.command}\icom{mtcsetoffset}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{La commande \ucom{mtcsetoffset}}\label{s+code+mtcsetoffset.command}\icom{mtcsetoffset}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command is very similar to the \com{mtcsettitle} command. Its syntax is almost identical:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \icom{mtcsetoffset}\verb|\mtcsetoffset{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{value}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+%
+% The \emph{mini-table} type is a keyword like \texttt{minitoc}. The \emph{value} is the offset value for a mini-table.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande est très similaire à~la commande \com{mtcsettitle}. Sa syntaxe est presque identique:
+% \begin{verse}
+% \icom{mtcsetoffset}\verb|\mtcsetoffset{|\emph{mini-table}\verb|}{|\emph{valeur}\verb|}|
+% \end{verse}
+%
+% Le type de \emph{mini-table} est un mot-clé tel que \texttt{minitoc}. La \emph{valeur} est celle du déplacement
+% latéral pour une mini-table.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setoffset@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we declare a flag, set true:
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, nous déclarons un indicateur, vrai par défaut:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@setoffset@\@mtc@setoffset@true
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we define the \com{mtcsetoffset} command, with two arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous définissons la commande \com{mtcsetoffset}, avec deux arguments:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcsetoffset}[2]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setoffset@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nameuse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{E0042} process the first argument, a keyword of the \texttt{typetable} family. The result is stored in
+% \com{mtc@mtaof@abbrev}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{E0042} traitons le premier argument, un mot-clé de la famille \texttt{typetable}. Le résultat est rangé
+% dans \com{mtc@mtaof@abbrev}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@mtaof@abbrev{X}
+\@mtc@setoffset@true
+\expandafter\ifx\csname mtc@typetable@#1\endcsname\relax
+   \@mtc@setoffset@false
+   \def\mtc@mtaof@abbrev{X}
+   \mtcPackageError[E0042]{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsetoffset \space has a wrong first argument
+       \MessageBreak
+       (#1).
+       \MessageBreak
+       It should be a mini-table type
+       \MessageBreak
+       (parttoc...sectlot)}%
+      {Correct the source code.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+\else
+   \edef\mtc@mtaof@abbrev{\@nameuse{mtc@typetable@#1}}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@setoffset@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@tmpof@name}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@toks}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And\SMM{\lmess{E0041}\\\lmess{I0052}\\\lmess{E0043}} we construct the name of the effective offset and gave it the value:
+% \or\relax
+% Et\SMM{\lmess{E0041}\\\lmess{I0052}\\\lmess{E0043}} nous construisons le nom du déplacement effectif
+% et lui donnons la valeur:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@setoffset@
+   \def\mtc@tmpof@name{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset.}
+   \@ifundefined{\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset}%
+      {\mtcPackageError[E0041]{minitoc}%
+       {\string\mtcsetoffset \space attempts to use
+        \MessageBreak
+             an undefined offset (\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset).}%
+      {Correct the source code.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}}{%
+   \mtc@toks{#2} % trick for explicit message using \the.
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0052]{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsetoffset\space redefines
+       \MessageBreak
+       "\mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset" as "\the\mtc@toks"}%
+    \expandafter\def\csname \mtc@mtaof@abbrev offset\endcsname{#2}}%
+\else
+   \mtcPackageError[E0043]{minitoc}%
+      {\string\mtcsetoffset:\space Illegal type of table (#1)}%
+      {Correct the source code.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}{\relax}%
+\fi}% end of \mtcsetoffset
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Polymorphic entries}\label{s+code+polym}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Entrées polymorphes}\label{s+code+polym}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymtoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% A toc entry should be able to have variants when it appears in the normal text (like the mandatory argument of
+% a sectionning command), in a page header or in the main TOC (like the optionnal argument of a sectionning
+% command), in a minitable (parttoc, minitoc or secttoc). Similar behaviour should be available for entries in th
+% LOF or the LOT. So we define three commands to be used inside the optionnal argument of a sectionning command or
+% of \com{caption} for a figure or a table. These commands must be robust (because used in optionnal arguments)
+% and have 4~arguments: (1)~the variant to appear in a parttoc (or partlof or partlof), 
+% (2)~the variant to appear in a minitoc (or minilof or minilof),
+% (3)~the variant to appear in a secttoc (or sectlof or sectlof).
+% (4)~the variant to appear in the main TOC (or LOF or LOT).
+% The variant to appear locally as title of the sectionning unit or as local caption of the figure or table is
+% the mandatory argument of the sectionning command or of the caption command (see section~\vref{ss+polym}).
+% We use the \verb|\ifin...| flags.
+% \or\relax
+% Une entrée de table des matières devrait disposer de variantes selon qu'elle apparaît dans le texte normal
+% (comme l'argument obligatoire d'une commande de sectionnement), dans un en-tête de page ou dans la table des
+% matières principale (comme l'argument optionnel d'une commande de sectionnement), dans une minitable (parttoc, minitoc
+% ou secttoc). Un comportement similaire devrait être possible pour les entrées de la liste des figures ou des
+% tableaux. Donc nous définissons trois commandes à~utiliser à~l'intérieur de l'argument optionnel d'une commande
+% de sectionnement ou de celui de \com{caption} pour une figure ou un tableau. Ces commandes doivent être robustes
+% (car utilisées à~l'intérieur d'un argument optionnel) et ont 4~arguments: (1)~la variante apparaissant dans une
+% parttoc (ou partlof ou partlof), 
+% (2)~la variante apparaissant dans une a minitoc (ou minilof ou minilof),
+% (3)~la variante apparaissant dans une secttoc (ou sectlof ou sectlof).
+% (4)~la variante apparaissant la la table des matières (ou liste des figures ou liste des tableaux) principale.
+% La variante apparaissant localement comme titre de l'unité de sectionnement ou comme légende locale de la figure
+% ou du tableau est l'argument obligatoire de la commande de sectionnement ou de la commande de caption (voir la
+% section~\vref{ss+polym}).
+% Nous utilisons les indicateurs \verb|\ifin...|.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymtoc}[4]{%
+      \ifinparttoc\relax{#1}%
+      \else\ifinminitoc\relax{#2}%
+           \else\ifinsecttoc\relax{#3}%
+                \else\relax{#4}
+                \fi
+           \fi
+      \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For entries of the list of figures:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les entrées le la liste des figures:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlof}[4]{%
+      \ifinpartlof\relax{#1}%
+      \else\ifinminilof\relax{#2}%
+           \else\ifinsectlof\relax{#3}%
+                \else\relax{#4}
+                \fi
+           \fi
+      \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For entries of the list of tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les entrées le la liste des tableaux:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlot}[4]{%
+      \ifinpartlot\relax{#1}%
+      \else\ifinminilot\relax{#2}%
+           \else\ifinsectlot\relax{#3}%
+                \else\relax{#4}
+                \fi
+           \fi
+      \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \texttt{mtchideinmaintoc} environment and siblings}\label{s+code+mtchideinmaintoc.env}\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{L'environnement \texttt{mtchideinmaintoc} et ses comparses}\label{s+code+mtchideinmaintoc.env}\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himtoc@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The flag \com{if@mtc@Himtoc@} is used to detect an incorrect imbrication of this environment:
+% \or\relax
+% L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@Himtoc@} est utilisé pour détecter une imbrication incorrecte de cet environnement:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@Himtoc@ \@mtc@Himtoc@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{9}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savetocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restoretocdepth}
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himtoc@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\SMM{\lmess{E0005}\\\lmess{E0031}} define a macro \com{mtc@savetocdepth} to save the current value
+% of the counter \dcnt{tocdepth}.
+% Then we define this environment, which inserts into the TOC file this command and commands of the
+% form \com{setcounter}\verb|{|\dcnt{tocdepth}\verb|}{...}|. Note that \com{xdef} is necessary!
+% It also save and restore the value of the counter \dcnt{tocdepth}, as the optional argument is the hiding depth of
+% the entries in the main TOC.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\SMM{\lmess{E0005}\\\lmess{E0031}} définissons une macro \com{mtc@savetocdepth} pour sauvegarder la valeur
+% courante du compteur \dcnt{tocdepth}.
+% Notez que \com{xdef} est nécessaire!
+% Puis nous définissons cet environnement, qui écrit dans le fichier table des matières cette commande et
+% des commandes de la
+% forme \com{setcounter}\verb|{|\dcnt{tocdepth}\verb|}{...}|.
+% Il sauvegarde et restaure aussi la valeur du compteur \dcnt{tocdepth}, car
+% l'argument optionnel est la profondeur de masquage des entrées dans la table des matières principale.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtc@savetocdepth}{\xdef\mtc@sv@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}}%
+\newcommand{\mtc@restoretocdepth}{\setcounter{tocdepth}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth}}%
+\newenvironment{mtchideinmaintoc}[1][-1]%
+{\if@mtc@Himtoc@\mtcPackageError[E0005]{minitoc}%
+    {Imbrication of mtchideinmaintoc environments}%
+    {The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect}\fi
+ \global\@mtc@Himtoc@true
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\mtc@savetocdepth}%
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}%
+{\if@mtc@Himtoc@\else\mtcPackageError[E0031]{minitoc}%
+    {Unbalanced mtchideinmaintoc environment}%
+    {The hiding in main ToC could be incorrect}\fi
+ \global\@mtc@Himtoc@false
+ \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himlof@}
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelofdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\empty}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@lofdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svf@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments are similar, but we must verify the
+% presence of the associated depth counter, so we have two versions of each of these environments.
+% This must be done \emph{after} the loading of the packages.
+%
+% First, for the list of figures:\SMM{\lmess{E0003}\\\lmess{E0029}}
+% \or\relax
+% Les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot} sont similaires, mais nous devons
+% véfifier la présence du compteur de profondeur associé, donc nous avons deux versions de ces environnements.
+% Ceci doit être fait \emph{après} le chargement des paquetages.
+%
+% D'abord, pour la liste des figures:\SMM{\lmess{E0003}\\\lmess{E0029}}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@Himlof@ \@mtc@Himlof@false
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+\@ifundefined{c@lofdepth}{%
+   \providecommand{\mtc@savelofdepth}{\empty}
+   \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlof}[1][-1]%
+   {\if@mtc@Himlof@\mtcPackageError[E0003]{minitoc}%
+       {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlof environments}%
+       {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi
+    \global\@mtc@Himlof@true
+    \def\mtc@sv@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}%
+    \def\mtc@sv@lofdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}%
+    \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@savetocdepth}%
+    \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}%
+   {\if@mtc@Himlof@\else\mtcPackageError[E0029]{minitoc}%
+       {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlof environment}%
+       {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi
+    \global\@mtc@Himlof@false
+    \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}%
+}}%
+{%
+   \newcommand{\mtc@savelofdepth}{\xdef\mtc@sv@lofdepth{\arabic{lofdepth}}}%
+   \newcommand{\mtc@restorelofdepth}{\setcounter{lofdepth}{\mtc@sv@lofdepth}}%
+   \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlof}[1][-1]%
+   {\if@mtc@Himlof@\mtcPackageError[E0003]{minitoc}%
+       {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlof environments}%
+       {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi
+    \global\@mtc@Himlof@true
+    \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@savelofdepth}%
+    \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}%
+   {\if@mtc@Himlof@\else\mtcPackageError[E0029]{minitoc}%
+       {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlof environment}%
+       {The hiding in main LoF could be incorrect}\fi
+    \global\@mtc@Himlof@false
+    \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@Himlot@}
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelotdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\empty}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@lotdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@svt@tocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\arabic}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then for the list of tables:\SMM{\lmess{E0004}\\\lmess{E0030}}
+% \or\relax
+% Puis pour la liste des tableaux:\SMM{\lmess{E0004}\\\lmess{E0030}}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@Himlot@ \@mtc@Himlot@false
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+\@ifundefined{c@lotdepth}{%
+   \providecommand{\mtc@savelotdepth}{\empty}
+   \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlot}[1][-1]%
+   {\if@mtc@Himlot@\mtcPackageError[E0004]{minitoc}%
+       {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlot environments}%
+       {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi
+    \global\@mtc@Himlot@true
+    \def\mtc@sv@tocdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}%
+    \def\mtc@sv@lotdepth{\arabic{tocdepth}}%
+    \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@savetocdepth}%
+    \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}%
+   {\if@mtc@Himlot@\else\mtcPackageError[E0030]{minitoc}%
+       {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlot environment}%
+       {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi
+    \global\@mtc@Himlot@false
+    \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}%
+}}%
+{%
+   \newcommand{\mtc@savelotdepth}{\xdef\mtc@sv@lotdepth{\arabic{lotdepth}}}%
+   \newcommand{\mtc@restorelotdepth}{\setcounter{lotdepth}{\mtc@sv@lotdepth}}%
+   \newenvironment{mtchideinmainlot}[1][-1]%
+   {\if@mtc@Himlot@\mtcPackageError[E0004]{minitoc}%
+       {Imbrication of mtchideinmainlot environments}%
+       {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi
+    \global\@mtc@Himlot@true
+    \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@savelotdepth}%
+    \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\setcounter{tocdepth}{#1}}}%
+   {\if@mtc@Himlot@\else\mtcPackageError[E0030]{minitoc}%
+       {Unbalanced mtchideinmainlot environment}%
+       {The hiding in main LoT could be incorrect}\fi
+    \global\@mtc@Himlot@false
+    \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\mtc@restoretocdepth}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Fixing the ``Glossary'' entry in the TOC}\label{s+code+mtcfixglossary}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Correction de l'entrée <<~Glossaire~>> dans la TdM}\label{s+code+mtcfixglossary}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This macro is complex. Its syntax is:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette macro est complexe. Sa syntaxe est la suivante:
+% \fi
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{mtcfixglossary}\verb+[part|chapter|section]+
+% \end{verse}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@glofix@level}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Depending\SMM{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{W0006}} on the document class,
+% the ``Glossary'' entry in the TOC is treated as a starred chapter or a starred
+% section. Hence we must first determine the default value of the optional argument. The default value is then
+% stored in the macro \com{mtc@glofix@level}. This is done by the following code, which eventually gives a warning
+% message:
+% \or\relax
+% Selon\SMM{\lmess{W0001}\\\lmess{E0001}\\\lmess{W0006}} la classe du document,
+% l'entrée <<~Glossaire~>> dans la table des matières est traitée comme un chapitre étoilé
+% ou une section étoilée. Donc nous devons d'abord déterminer la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel. La
+% valeur par défaut est alors rangée dans la macro \com{mtc@glofix@level}. Ceci est fait par le code suivant, qui
+% produit éventuellement un message d'avertissement:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+   \@ifundefined{section}%
+      {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0001]{minitoc}%
+       {\string\chapter\space and \string\section\space are undefined.%
+        \MessageBreak
+        Cannot use \string\mtcfixglossary \space without
+        \MessageBreak
+        optional argument [part]}%
+       \@ifundefined{part}%
+         {\mtcPackageError[E0001]{minitoc}%
+            {But \string\part\space is undefined}%
+            {\string\mtcfixglossary\space not usable}}%
+       {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0006]{minitoc}%
+          {\string\mtcfixglossary\space can only be used
+           \MessageBreak
+           with the [part] optional argument,
+           \MessageBreak
+           which becomes the default}%
+        \def\mtc@glofix@level{part}%
+       }}%
+       {\def\mtc@glofix@level{section}}}%
+{\def\mtc@glofix@level{chapter}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcfixglossary@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixglossary}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then\imess{E0026} we define a flag (\com{if@mtcfixglossary@}) and the command \com{mtcfixglossary}, which adds
+% the necessary lines in the TOC, the LOF and the LOT.
+% \or\relax
+% Puis\imess{E0026} nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcfixglossary}, qui ajoute les lignes
+% nécessaires dans la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtcfixglossary@ \@mtcfixglossary@false
+\newcommand{\mtcfixglossary}[1][\mtc@glofix@level]{%
+   \@mtcfixglossary@false
+   \expandafter%
+    \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax\@mtcfixglossary@true\fi
+   \expandafter%
+    \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax\@mtcfixglossary@true\fi
+   \expandafter%
+    \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax\@mtcfixglossary@true\fi
+   \if@mtcfixglossary@
+   \addcontentsline{lof}{x\mtc@glofix@level}{}%
+   \addcontentsline{lot}{x\mtc@glofix@level}{}%
+   \csname mtcadd\mtc@glofix@level\endcsname\relax
+   \else
+   \mtcPackageError[E0026]{minitoc}%
+      {The optional argument of \string\mtcfixglossary
+       \MessageBreak
+       is wrong}%
+      {It must be omitted (\mtc@glofix@level), or be part, chapter or section}%
+   \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Fixing the ``Index'' entry in the TOC}\label{s+code+mtcfixindex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Correction de l'entrée <<~Index~>> dans la TdM}\label{s+code+mtcfixindex}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This macro is complex. Its syntax is:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette macro est complexe. Sa syntaxe est la suivante:
+% \fi
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{mtcfixindex}\verb+[part|chapter|section]+
+% \end{verse}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ixfix@level}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Depending\SMM{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}} on the document class,
+% the ``Index'' entry in the TOC is treated as a starred chapter or a starred
+% section. Hence we must first determine the default value of the optional argument. The default value is then
+% stored in the macro \com{mtc@ixfix@level}. This is done by the following code, which eventually gives a warning message:
+% \or\relax
+% Selon\SMM{\lmess{W0002}\\\lmess{W0007}\\\lmess{E0002}} la classe du document,
+% l'entrée <<~Index~>> dans la table des matières est traitée comme un chapitre étoilé
+% ou une section étoilée. Donc nous devons d'abord déterminer la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel. La
+% valeur par défaut est alors rangée dans la macro \com{mtc@ixfix@level}. Ceci est fait par le code suivant, qui
+% produit éventuellement un message d'avertissement:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+   \@ifundefined{section}%
+      {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0002]{minitoc}%
+       {\string\chapter\space and \string\section\space are undefined.%
+        \MessageBreak
+        Cannot use \string\mtcfixindex \space without
+        \MessageBreak
+        optional argument [part]}%
+       \@ifundefined{part}%
+         {\mtcPackageError[E0002]{minitoc}%
+            {But \string\part\space is undefined}%
+            {\string\mtcfixindex\space not usable}}%
+       {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0007]{minitoc}%
+          {\string\mtcfixindex\space can only be used with
+           \MessageBreak
+           the [part] optional argument,
+           \MessageBreak
+           which becomes the default}%
+        \def\mtc@ixfix@level{part}%
+       }}%
+       {\def\mtc@ixfix@level{section}}}%
+{\def\mtc@ixfix@level{chapter}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcfixindex@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then\imess{E0027} we define a flag and the command \com{mtcfixindex}, which adds the necessary lines in the TOC, the LOF
+% and the LOT.
+% \or\relax
+% Puis\imess{E0027} nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcfixindex}, qui ajoute les lignes nécessaires dans
+% la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtcfixindex@ \@mtcfixindex@false
+\newcommand{\mtcfixindex}[1][\mtc@ixfix@level]{%
+   \@mtcfixindex@false
+   \expandafter%
+    \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax\@mtcfixindex@true\fi
+   \expandafter%
+    \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax\@mtcfixindex@true\fi
+   \expandafter%
+    \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax\@mtcfixindex@true\fi
+   \if@mtcfixindex@
+   \addcontentsline{lof}{x\mtc@ixfix@level}{}%
+   \addcontentsline{lot}{x\mtc@ixfix@level}{}%
+   \csname mtcadd\mtc@ixfix@level\endcsname\relax
+   \else
+   \mtcPackageError[E0027]{minitoc}%
+      {The optional argument of \string\mtcfixindex
+       \MessageBreak
+       is wrong}%
+      {It must be omitted (\mtc@ixfix@level), or be part, chapter or section}%
+   \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Fixing the ``Nomenclature'' entry in the TOC}\label{s+code+ature}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Correction de l'entrée <<~Nomenclature~>> dans la TdM}\label{s+code+ature}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This macro is complex. Its syntax is:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette macro est complexe. Sa syntaxe est la suivante:
+% \fi
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{mtcfixnomenclature}\verb+[part|chapter|section]+
+% \end{verse}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@nomenclfix@level}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Depending\SMM{\lmess{W0095}\\\lmess{E0039}\\\lmess{W0096}} on the document class,
+% the ``Nomenclature'' entry\,\footnote{If you are using the \pack{nomencl} package~\cite{nomencl} or
+% \pack{nomentbl} package~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomencl} calls \pack{nomentbl}).}
+% in the TOC is treated as a starred chapter or a starred
+% section. Hence we must first determine the default value of the optional argument. The default value is then
+% stored in the macro \com{mtc@nomenclfix@level}.
+% This is done by the following code, which eventually gives a warning message:
+% \or\relax
+% Selon\SMM{\lmess{W0095}\\\lmess{E0039}\\\lmess{W0096}} la classe du document,
+% l'entrée <<~Nomenclature~>>\,\footnote{Si vous utilisez le paquetage \pack{nomencl}~\cite{nomencl} ou le
+% paquetage \pack{nomentbl}~\cite{nomentbl} (\pack{nomencl} appelle \pack{nomentbl}).}
+% dans la table des matières est traitée comme un chapitre étoilé
+% ou une section étoilée. Donc nous devons d'abord déterminer la valeur par défaut de l'argument optionnel. La
+% valeur par défaut est alors rangée dans la macro \com{mtc@nomenclfix@level}. Ceci est fait par le code suivant, qui
+% produit éventuellement un message d'avertissement:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+   \@ifundefined{section}%
+      {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0095]{minitoc}%
+       {\string\chapter\space and \string\section\space are undefined.%
+        \MessageBreak
+        Cannot use \string\mtcfixnomenclature \space without
+        \MessageBreak
+        optional argument [part]}%
+       \@ifundefined{part}%
+         {\mtcPackageError[E0039]{minitoc}%
+            {But \string\part\space is undefined}%
+            {\string\mtcfixnomclature\space not usable}}%
+       {\mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0096]{minitoc}%
+          {\string\mtcfixnomenclature\space can only be used with
+           \MessageBreak
+           the [part] optional argument,
+           \MessageBreak
+           which becomes the default}%
+        \def\mtc@nomenclfix@level{part}%
+       }}%
+       {\def\mtc@nomenclfix@level{section}}}%
+{\def\mtc@nomenclfix@level{chapter}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtcfixnomclature@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then\imess{E0040} we define a flag and the command \com{mtcfixnomenclature}, which adds the necessary lines in the TOC,
+% the LOF and the LOT.
+% \or\relax
+% Puis\imess{E0040} nous définissons un indicateur et la commande \com{mtcfixnomclature}, qui ajoute les lignes
+% nécessaires dans la table des matières, la liste des figures et la liste des tableaux.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtcfixnomenclature@ \@mtcfixnomenclature@false
+\newcommand{\mtcfixnomenclature}[1][\mtc@nomenclfix@level]{%
+   \@mtcfixnomenclature@false
+   \expandafter%
+    \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\part\relax\@mtcfixnomenclature@true\fi
+   \expandafter%
+    \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\chapter\relax\@mtcfixnomenclature@true\fi
+   \expandafter%
+    \ifx\csname #1\endcsname\section\relax\@mtcfixnomenclature@true\fi
+   \if@mtcfixnomenclature@
+   \addcontentsline{lof}{x\mtc@nomenclfix@level}{}%
+   \addcontentsline{lot}{x\mtc@nomenclfix@level}{}%
+   \csname mtcadd\mtc@nomenclfix@level\endcsname\relax
+   \else
+   \mtcPackageError[E0040]{minitoc}%
+      {The optional argument of \string\mtcfixnomenclature
+       \MessageBreak
+       is wrong}%
+      {It must be omitted (\mtc@nomenclfix@level), or be part, chapter or section}%
+   \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \ucom{mtcselectlanguage} command}\label{s+code+mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{La commande \ucom{mtcselectlanguage}}\label{s+code+mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@insellang@}
+% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists}
+% \begin{macro}{\@input}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This\SMM{\lmess{I0010}\\\lmess{E0006}} command loads a minitoc language definition
+% file \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} to set the language-dependent
+% titles for the mini-tables.
+% But first, we verify that this file exists.
+% The flag \com{if@mtc@insellang@} is true while we are in this macro.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette\SMM{\lmess{I0010}\\\lmess{E0006}} commande charge un fichier minitoc de définition
+% de langue \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} pour établir les
+% titres dépendants de la langue pour les mini-tables.
+% Mais au préalable, nous vérifions que ce fichier existe.
+% L'indicateur \com{if@mtc@insellang@} est vrai tant que nous sommes dans cette macro.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@insellang@ \@mtc@insellang@false
+\def\mtcselectlanguage#1{%
+     \@mtc@insellang@true
+     \InputIfFileExists{#1.mld}%
+       {\mtcPackageInfo[I0010]{minitoc}{The #1 language is selected.%
+         \MessageBreak
+         }}%
+       {\mtcPackageError[E0006]{minitoc}%
+          {#1 is not a known language,
+           \MessageBreak
+           #1.mld not found.
+           \MessageBreak
+           Command ignored}%
+          {See the minitoc documentation.
+           \MessageBreak
+           Correct the source using a valid language name.
+           \MessageBreak
+           Press RETURN}}%
+     \@mtc@insellang@false
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \ucom{mtcloadmlo} internal command}\label{s+code+mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{La commande interne \ucom{mtcloadmlo}}\label{s+code+mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@insellang@}
+% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists}
+% \begin{macro}{\@input}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command loads a minitoc language object file \emph{language}\suffix{.mlo} to set the language-dependent
+% titles for the mini-tables when exotic characters are needed.
+% This command is used only in some \suffix{.mld} files when the title strings can not be generated by the normal
+% processing of \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. The \suffix{.mlo} files are generated by \env{filecontents} environments in the
+% \xfile{minitoc.ins} file.
+% But first, we verify that this \suffix{.mlo} file exists.
+%
+% \emph{This command}\SMMZ{\lmess{I0011}\\\lmess{E0007}\\\lmess{E0032}}
+% \emph{should not be invoked directly by the user. This is verified via the flag
+% \com{if@mtc@insellang@}.}
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande charge un fichier minitoc objet de langue \emph{langue}\suffix{.mlo} pour établir les
+% titres dépendants de la langue pour les mini-tables lorsque des caractères exotiques sont nécessaires.
+% Cette commande n'est utilisée que dans certains fichiers \suffix{.mld}, lorsque les chaînes de titres ne peuvent
+% pas être produites par le traitement normal de \xfile{minitoc.dtx}. Les fichiers \suffix{.mlo} sont produits
+% par des environments \env{filecontents} dans le fichier \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+% Mais au préalable, nous vérifions que ce fichier \suffix{.mlo} existe.
+%
+% \emph{Cette commande}\SMMZ{\lmess{I0011}\\\lmess{E0007}\\\lmess{E0032}}
+% \emph{ne devrait pas être invoquée directement par l'utilisateur. Ceci est vérifié grâce
+% à~l'indicateur \com{if@mtc@insellang@}.}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtcloadmlo#1{%
+     \if@mtc@insellang@
+     \InputIfFileExists{#1.mlo}%
+       {\mtcPackageInfo[I0011]{minitoc}%
+          {#1 minitoc language object selected.
+           \MessageBreak}}%
+       {\mtcPackageError[E0007]{minitoc}%
+          {#1 is not a known minitoc
+           \MessageBreak
+           language object file (.mlo),
+           \MessageBreak
+           #1.mlo not found.
+           \MessageBreak
+           Command ignored}%
+          {See the minitoc documentation.
+           \MessageBreak
+           Correct the source using a valid language name.
+           \MessageBreak
+           Press RETURN}}%
+     \else
+       \mtcPackageError[E0032]{minitoc}%
+           {You are using the \string\mtcloadmlo\space command
+            \MessageBreak
+            outside of a .mld file}%
+           {It will be ignored}
+       \@mtc@insellang@false
+     \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The ``coffee breaks''}\label{s+cod+coffee.breaks}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les <<~pauses café~>>}\label{s+cod+coffee.breaks}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\addcoffeeline}
+% \begin{macro}{\addtocontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffeeline}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@coffee}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtocline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the \pack{minutes} package~\cite{minutes} (by \name{Knut}{Lickert}), we need some commands to insert special
+% entries, undotted, in the
+% TOC to mark ``coffee breaks''{\myCoffeecup} in a conference.
+% Hence we define \com{addcoffeeline}, \com{coffeeline} and
+% \com{l@coffee}, and internal commands analog to the standard internal commands to format the TOC.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour le paquetage \pack{minutes}~\cite{minutes} (de \name{Knut}{Lickert}), nous avons besoin de quelques
+% commandes pour insérer des entrées spéciales, sans points de conduite, dans la table des matières pour marquer les
+% <<~pauses café~>>{\myCoffeecup} dans une conférence. Donc nous définissons \com{addcoffeeline}, \com{coffeeline} et
+% \com{l@coffee}, et des commandes internes analogues aux commandes internes standard pour mettre en forme la
+% table des matières.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addcoffeeline#1#2#3{%
+  \addtocontents{#1}{\protect\coffeeline{#2}{#3}{\null}}}
+\def\coffeeline#1{\csname l@#1\endcsname}
+\newcommand*\l@coffee{\@Undottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Initialization of counters}\label{s+verse+init.counters}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Initialisation des compteurs}\label{s+verse+init.counters}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\setcounter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% At the beginning of the document, we initialize the absolute counters for parts, chapters and sections, if they
+% are defined.
+% \or\relax
+% Au début du document, nous initialisons les compteurs absolus pour les parties, chapitres et sections, s'ils
+% sont définis.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+\@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\setcounter{ptc}{0}}
+\@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{\setcounter{mtc}{0}}
+\@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\setcounter{stc}{0}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Declarations for simple options}\label{s+code+simple.options}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Déclarations pour les options simples}\label{s+code+simple.options}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These options are just setting a flag.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces options ne font que positionner un indicateur.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Options \uopt{tight} and \uopt{loose}, \uopt{k-tight} and \uopt{k-loose}}%
+% \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Options \uopt{tight} et \uopt{loose}, \uopt{k-tight} et \uopt{k-loose}}%
+% \iopt{tight}\ioptd{loose}\iopt{k-tight}\ioptd{k-loose}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These options influence the interline separation in the mini-tables.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces options influencent l'interlignage dans les mini-tables.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{tight}{\tightmtctrue}
+\DeclareOption{loose}{\tightmtcfalse} % default
+\DeclareOption{k-tight}{\ktightmtctrue}
+\DeclareOption{k-loose}{\ktightmtcfalse} % default
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Options \uopt{checkfiles} and \uopt{nocheckfiles}}\label{o+checkfiles}\ioptd{checkfiles}\iopt{nocheckfiles}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Options \uopt{checkfiles} et \uopt{nocheckfiles}}\label{o+checkfiles}\ioptd{checkfiles}\iopt{nocheckfiles}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@checkfiles}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These options activate or inhibit the checking for empty mini-table files.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces options activent ou inhibent les tests de vacuité sur les fichiers des mini-tables.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{checkfiles}{\@mtc@checkfilestrue} % default
+\DeclareOption{nocheckfiles}{\@mtc@checkfilesfalse}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Options \uopt{dotted} and \uopt{undotted}}\ioptd{dotted}\iopt{undotted}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Options \uopt{dotted} et \uopt{undotted}}\ioptd{dotted}\iopt{undotted}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These options activate or inhibit the leaders (lines of dots) in the mini-tables.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces options activent ou inhibent les points de conduite dans les mini-tables.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{undotted}{\undottedmtctrue}
+\DeclareOption{dotted}{\undottedmtcfalse} % default
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Option \uopt{notoccite}}\iopt{notoccite}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Option \uopt{notoccite}}\iopt{notoccite}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@notoccite@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This option will later load the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette option chargera plus loin le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{notoccite}{\@mtc@notoccite@true}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Option \uopt{shortext}}\iopt{shortext}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Option \uopt{shortext}}\iopt{shortext}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This\imess{W0020} option forces the use of short extensions.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette\imess{W0020} option force l'utilisation de suffixes courts.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{shortext}{%
+   \@mtc@longext@false
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0020]{minitoc}%
+      {You have forced the use of short extensions}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uopt{insection} option}\label{s+code+insection.option}\iopt{insection}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{L'option \uopt{insection}}\label{s+code+insection.option}\iopt{insection}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ss@insection@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This\imess{E0035} option is available only if \com{chapter} is not defined and \com{section} defined.
+% It is to be revised when chapter/section level commands will ever be allowed together, sometime in the far away future,
+% with a lot of luck (and work)\footnote{Please, do not dream too much!}.
+% \or\relax
+% Cette\imess{E0035} option n'est disponible que si \com{chapter} n'est pas définie et \com{section} est définie.
+% Il faudra la revoir si un jour les commandes aux niveaux chapitre et section sont éventuellement permises
+% ensemble, peut-être dans un avenir lointain, avec beaucoup de chance (et de travail)\,\footnote{Ne révez pas trop
+% quand même!}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@ss@insection@ \@mtc@ss@insection@false
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+   \@ifundefined{section}{\DeclareOption{insection}{%
+   \mtcPackageError[E0035]{minitoc}%
+      {You have used the `insection' option in
+       \MessageBreak
+       a document where chapters are defined.
+       \MessageBreak
+       This is not compatible: option ignored.}%
+      {Remove this option.
+       \MessageBreak
+       Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}
+                          }}%
+                         {%
+                          \DeclareOption{insection}%
+                           {\@mtc@ss@insection@true}%
+                         }%
+}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uopt{listfiles} and \uopt{nolistfiles} options}\label{s+code+listfiles.option}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Les options \uopt{listfiles} et \uopt{nolistfiles}}\label{s+code+listfiles.option}\ioptd{listfiles}\iopt{nolistfiles}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@listfiles@}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \optd{listfiles} option creates a file containing a list of the auxiliary files created
+% by the \upack{minitoc} package. This is the default.
+% This file is named \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.
+% The \opt{nolistfiles} option inhibits this listing.
+% \or\relax
+% L'option \optd{listfiles} crée un fichier contenant une liste des fichiers auxiliaires créés par
+% le paquetage \upack{minitoc}. C'est le choix par défaut.
+% Ce fichier est nommé \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.
+% L'option \opt{nolistfiles} inhibe ce listage.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@listfiles@ \@mtc@listfiles@true
+\DeclareOption{listfiles}{\@mtc@listfiles@true}
+\DeclareOption{nolistfiles}{\@mtc@listfiles@false}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Language options}\label{s+section+language.options}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Options pour les langues}\label{s+section+language.options}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobblethree}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@listmisslanguages}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addmisslanguage}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@LML}
+% \begin{macro}{\MessageBreak}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we define an utility macro (\com{@gobblethree}), a list of the missing files
+% (accumulated in the \com{mtc@listmisslanguages} macro),
+% and a macro (\com{mtc@addmisslanguage}) to add a file name to the list:
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, nous définissons une macro utilitaire (\com{@gobblethree}), une liste des fichiers manquants
+% (accumulée dans la macro \com{mtc@listmisslanguages}), et une macro pour ajouter un nom de fichier à~la liste
+% (\com{mtc@addmisslanguage}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@gobblethree#1#2#3{\empty}
+\def\mtc@listmisslanguages{}
+\def\mtc@addmisslanguage#1{%
+    \let\mtc@LML\mtc@listmisslanguages
+    \edef\mtc@listmisslanguages{\mtc@LML \MessageBreak #1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@misslang}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopt}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopto}
+% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addmisslanguage}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Before\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}} defining a language option,
+% we must verify that the corresponding \suffix{.mld} file exists, and, if
+% necessary, that the corresponding \suffix{.mlo} file exists.
+% Hence, we must first define a flag \com{if@mtc@misslang} and
+% two macros to test the presence of these files; if the files are available, we define the language option.
+% \or\relax
+% Avant\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}} de définir une option de langue,
+% nous devons vérifier si le fichier \suffix{.mld} existe, et, si
+% nécessaire, que le fichier \suffix{.mlo} correspondant existe. Donc, nous devons d'abord définir un indicateur
+% \com{if@mtc@misslang} et deux macros pour tester la présence de ces fichiers; si les fichiers sont
+% disponibles, nous définissons l'option de langue.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@misslang\@mtc@misslangfalse
+\newcommand{\mtc@setlangopt}[1]{%
+   \IfFileExists{#1.mld}%
+      {\DeclareOption{#1}{\mtcselectlanguage{#1}}}%
+      {\@mtc@misslangtrue \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mld}
+       \mtcPackageInfo[I0050]{minitoc}%
+          {The required "#1.mld" file is missing.
+           \MessageBreak
+           The "#1" language option will not be available.
+           \MessageBreak
+           Please install it from a recent distribution
+           \MessageBreak
+           or from the CTAN archives\@gobble}}%
+}%
+\newcommand{\mtc@setlangopto}[1]{%
+   \IfFileExists{#1.mlo}%
+     {\mtc@setlangopt{#1}}%
+     {\@mtc@misslangtrue \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mlo}
+       \mtcPackageInfo[I0051]{minitoc}%
+          {The required "#1.mlo" file is missing.
+           \MessageBreak
+           The "#1" language option will not be available.
+           \MessageBreak
+           Please install it from a recent distribution
+           \MessageBreak
+           or from the CTAN archives\@gobble}%
+   \IfFileExists{#1.mld}{}%
+       {\@mtc@misslangtrue
+        \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mld}
+       \mtcPackageInfo[I0050]{minitoc}%
+          {The required "#1.mld" file is missing.
+           \MessageBreak
+           The "#1" language option will not be available.
+           \MessageBreak
+           Please install it from a recent distribution
+           \MessageBreak
+           or from the CTAN archives\@gobble}%
+       }%
+     }%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@misslang}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangoptm}
+% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists}
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addmisslanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0038}} \suffix{.mld} files are mandatory (\xfile{english.mld} because english is the default language),
+% so their absence is a serious error:
+% \or\relax
+% Certains\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0038}} fichiers \suffix{.mld} sont obligatoires (\xfile{english.mld} car l'anglais est la langue
+% par défaut), donc leur absence est une erreur sévère):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtc@setlangoptm}[1]{%
+   \IfFileExists{#1.mld}%
+      {\DeclareOption{#1}{\mtcselectlanguage{#1}}}%
+      {\@mtc@misslangtrue
+       \mtc@addmisslanguage{#1.mld}
+       \mtcPackageError[E0038]{minitoc}%
+          {Your minitoc installation is incomplete.
+           \MessageBreak
+           A mandatory minitoc language object file,
+           \MessageBreak
+           #1.mld, is not found.
+           \MessageBreak
+           We will try to continue with
+           \MessageBreak
+           current/default values}%
+          {See the minitoc documentation.
+           \MessageBreak
+           Please fix your minitoc installation.
+           \MessageBreak
+           Press <return> to continue}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\providecommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\stctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\slftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\slttitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must define the default titles (english):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons définir les titres par défaut (anglais):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+           \providecommand{\ptctitle}{Table of Contents}%
+           \providecommand{\plftitle}{List of Figures}%
+           \providecommand{\plttitle}{List of Tables}%
+           \providecommand{\mtctitle}{Contents}%
+           \providecommand{\mlftitle}{Figures}%
+           \providecommand{\mlttitle}{Tables}%
+           \providecommand{\stctitle}{Contents}%
+           \providecommand{\slftitle}{Figures}%
+           \providecommand{\slttitle}{Tables}%
+}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@misslang}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine}
+% \begin{macro}{\MessageBreak}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@listmisslanguages}
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobblethree}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If\SMM{\lmess{W0093}\\\lmess{W0094}} a \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} file is missing,
+% we signal that at the end of the document, with also the full list of the missing language files:
+% \or\relax
+% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0093}\\\lmess{W0094}} un fichier \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} est manquant,
+% nous le signalons en fin de document, avec aussi liste complète des fichiers de langue manquants:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtEndDocument{%
+  \if@mtc@misslang
+     \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0093]{minitoc}%
+       {Some "*.mld" or "*.mlo" files are missing
+        \MessageBreak
+        in your installation.
+        \MessageBreak
+        Search for the I0050 and I0051 info messages
+        \MessageBreak
+        in the \string\jobname.log file.
+        \MessageBreak
+        The full list of the missing language files
+        \MessageBreak
+        is given in the W0094 warning message.
+        \MessageBreak
+        Please install the missing files from
+        \MessageBreak
+        a recent distribution
+        \MessageBreak
+        or from the CTAN archives}%
+     \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0094]{minitoc}%
+       {Missing minitoc language file(s)\string:
+        \MessageBreak
+        \mtc@listmisslanguages\@gobblethree}%
+  \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopt}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangopto}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@setlangoptm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Each language option reads the corresponding \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file via
+% the specialized macro \com{mtcselectlanguage}, after verification by \com{mtc@setlangopt} or
+% \com{mtc@setlangopto} (when a \suffix{.mlo} file is required), by \com{mtc@setlangoptm} when the language is
+% mandatory. If the file
+% does not exist, a standard error message is displayed. The language options are (should be) in alphabetical order
+% (to make maintenance easier).
+% Several options could load the same file, but, by convention, there should be a \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file for
+% each language option, given that this file may load another one (as \xfile{american.mld} loads \xfile{english.mld}).
+% \or\relax
+% Chaque option de langue lit le fichier \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} correspondant via
+% la macro spécialisée \com{mtcselectlanguage}, après vérification par \com{mtc@setlangopt} ou
+% \com{mtc@setlangopto} (lorsqu'un fichier \suffix{.mlo} est requis), par \com{mtc@setlangoptm} lorsque la
+% langue est obligatoire. Si le fichier
+% n'existe pas, un message d'erreur standard est affiché. Les options de langue sont (devraient) être par ordre
+% alphabétique (pour faciliter la maintenance). Plusieurs options pourraient charger le même fichier, mais,
+% par convention, il devrait y~avoir un
+% fichier \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} pour chaque option de langue, étant donné que ce fichier peut en charger un autre
+% (ainsi \xfile{francais.mld} charge-t-il \xfile{french.mld}).
+% \fi
+% \raggedcolumns
+% {\columnseprule=.4pt\columnsep=45pt\begin{multicols}{2}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\mtc@setlangopt{acadian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{acadien}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{afrikaan}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{afrikaans}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{albanian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{american}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{arab}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{arab2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{arabi}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{arabic}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{armenian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{australian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{austrian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{bahasa}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{bahasai}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{bahasam}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{bangla}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{basque}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{bengali}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{bicig}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{bicig2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{bicig3}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{bithe}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{brazil}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{brazilian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{breton}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{british}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{bulgarian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{bulgarianb}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{buryat}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{buryat2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{canadian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{canadien}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{castillan}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{castillian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{catalan}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{chinese1}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{chinese2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{croatian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{czech}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{danish}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{devanagari}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{dutch}%
+\mtc@setlangoptm{english}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{english1}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{english2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{esperant}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{esperanto}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{estonian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{ethiopia}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{ethiopian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{ethiopian2}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{farsi1}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{farsi2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{farsi3}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{finnish}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{finnish2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{francais}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{french}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{french1}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{french2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{frenchb}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{frenchle}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{frenchpro}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{galician}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{german}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{germanb}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{germanb2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{greek}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{greek-mono}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{greek-polydemo}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{greek-polykatha}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{guarani}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{hangul1}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{hangul2}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{hangul3}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{hangul4}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{hangul-u8}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{hanja1}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{hanja2}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{hanja-u8}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{hebrew}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{hebrew2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{hindi}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{hindi-modern}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{hungarian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{icelandic}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{indon}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{indonesian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{interlingua}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{irish}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{italian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{italian2}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{japanese}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{japanese2}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{japanese3}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{japanese4}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{japanese5}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{japanese6}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{kannada}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{khalkha}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{latin}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{latin2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{latinc}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{latinc2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{latvian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{latvian2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{letton}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{letton2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{lithuanian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{lithuanian2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{lowersorbian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{lsorbian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{magyar}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{magyar2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{magyar3}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{malay}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-b}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-keli}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-keli2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-mr}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{malayalam-omega}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-rachana}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-rachana2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{malayalam-rachana3}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{manju}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{mexican}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{meyalu}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{mongol}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{mongolb}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{mongolian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{naustrian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{ngerman}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{newzealand}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{ngermanb}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{ngermanb2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{norsk}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{norsk2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{nynorsk}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{nynorsk2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{occitan}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{occitan2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{polish}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{polish2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{polski}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{portuges}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{portuguese}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{romanian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{romanian2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{romanian3}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{russian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{russianb}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{russianc}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{russian2m}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{russian2o}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{russian-cca}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{russian-cca1}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lh}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lhcyralt}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lhcyrkoi}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{russian-lhcyrwin}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{samin}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{scottish}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{serbian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{serbianc}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{slovak}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{slovene}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{spanish}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{spanish2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{spanish3}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{spanish4}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{swahili}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{swedish}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{swedish2}%
+\mtc@setlangopto{thai}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{turkish}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{uighur}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{uighur2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{uighur3}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{UKenglish}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{ukraineb}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{ukrainian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{uppersorbian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{USenglish}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{usorbian}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{vietnam}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{vietnamese}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{welsh}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{xalx}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{xalx2}%
+\mtc@setlangopt{xalx3}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \end{multicols}}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uopt{hints} option}\label{s+code+hints.option}\ioptd{hints}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{L'option \uopt{hints}}\label{s+code+hints.option}\ioptd{hints}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareOption}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We declare the \optd{hints} (default) and \opt{nohints} options:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous déclarons les options \optd{hints} (défaut) et \opt{nohints}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{hints}{\@mtc@hints@true}
+\DeclareOption{nohints}{\@mtc@hints@false}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \optd{hints} option is made of three parts: the first, \com{mtc@hints@begindoc}, is executed via
+% \com{AtBeginDocument} and looks if some packages or classes are loaded, then gives warnings about their compatibility
+% with \upack{minitoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% L'option \optd{hints} est constituée de trois parties: la première, \com{mtc@hints@begindoc}, est exécutée
+% via \com{AtBeginDocument} et regarde si certains paquetages ou classes sont chargés, puis donne des
+% avertissements à~propos de leur compatibilité avec \upack{minitoc}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The second part is made of tiny pieces of code inserted in the \upack{minitoc} code, to verify that some macros
+% are called in the right order.
+% \or\relax
+% La deuxième partie est faite de petits fragments de code insérés dans le code de \upack{minitoc}, pour vérifier
+% que certaines macros sont appelées dans le bon ordre.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The third and last part, \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}, is executed via \com{AtEndDocument} and examines the flags set
+% by the first and the second parts. Then, if necessary, it writes some infos in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log}
+% file and/or warnings on the screen and in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file.
+% The \optd{hints} option \virage\emph{does not signal errors}, only infos
+% and warnings, so it does not stop the \LaTeX\ run.
+% \or\relax
+% La troisième et dernière partie, \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}, est exécutée via \com{AtEndDocument} et examine
+% les indicateurs positionnés par les première et deuxième parties. Puis, si nécessaire, elle écrit quelques
+% informations dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log} et/ou des avertissements sur l'écran
+% et dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}.
+% L'option \optd{hints} \virage\emph{ne signale pas d'erreurs}, seulement des informations et des avertissements, et
+% donc n'interrompt pas l'exécution de \LaTeX.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{First part: \ucom{mtc@hints@begindoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}\icom{mtc@hints@begindoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Première partie: \ucom{mtc@hints@begindoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}\icom{mtc@hints@begindoc}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@abstract@loaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0049} declare some flags and the first part of the \optd{hints} option (for an \com{AtBeginDocument} block):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0049} déclarons quelques indicateurs et la première partie de l'option \optd{hints}
+% (pour un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@abstract@loaded@ \@mtc@abstract@loaded@false
+\newif\if@mtc@toc@used@ \global\@mtc@toc@used@false
+\newif\if@mtc@lof@used@ \global\@mtc@lof@used@false
+\newif\if@mtc@lot@used@ \global\@mtc@lot@used@false
+\def\mtc@hints@begindoc{%
+\mtcPackageInfo[I0049]{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {==> You requested the hints option.
+    \MessageBreak
+    Some hints are eventually given below\@gobble}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{alphanum} package}\ipack{alphanum}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{alphanum}}\ipack{alphanum}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0025}} test the presence of the \pack{alphanum} package (part of the \class{jura} class~\cite{jura}),
+% and emit a warning, because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0025}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{alphanum} (qui fait partie de la
+% classe \class{jura}~\cite{jura}), et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible}
+% avec \upack{minitoc}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{alphanum}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+    \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0025]{minitoc(hints)}%
+       {--- The alphanum package is loaded.
+        \MessageBreak
+        It is incompatible
+        \MessageBreak
+        with the minitoc package}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{appendix} package}\ipack{appendix}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{appendix}}\ipack{appendix}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0042} test the presence of the \pack{appendix} package~\cite{appendix}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0042} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{appendix}~\cite{appendix}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{appendix}{%
+\@mtc@hints@given@true
+\mtcPackageInfo[I0042]{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {--- The appendix package is loaded.
+    \MessageBreak
+    See the minitoc package documentation
+    \MessageBreak
+    for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{tocbibind} package}\ipack{tocbibind}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{tocbibind}}\ipack{tocbibind}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0046} test the presence of the \pack{tocbibind} package~\cite{tocbibind}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0046} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{tocbibind}~\cite{tocbibind}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{tocbibind}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0046]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {--- The tocbibind package is loaded.
+       \MessageBreak
+       See the minitoc package documentation
+       \MessageBreak
+       for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \KOMAScript{} classes}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur les classes \KOMAScript}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0043} test the presence of each \upack{minitoc}-compatible \KOMAScript{}
+% class~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0043} testons la présence de chaque classe \KOMAScript~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} compatible
+% avec \upack{minitoc}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifclassloaded{scrbook}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0043]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {--- The KOMAScript scrbook class is loaded.
+       \MessageBreak
+       See the minitoc package documentation
+       \MessageBreak
+       for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}%
+\@ifclassloaded{scrreprt}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0043]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {--- The KOMAScript scrreprt class is loaded.
+       \MessageBreak
+       See the minitoc package documentation
+       \MessageBreak
+       for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}%
+\@ifclassloaded{scrartcl}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0043]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {--- The KOMAScript scrartcl class is loaded.
+       \MessageBreak
+       See the minitoc package documentation
+       \MessageBreak
+       for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{tocloft} package}\ipack{tocloft}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{tocloft}}\ipack{tocloft}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0047} test the presence of the \pack{tocloft} package~\cite{tocloft}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0047} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{tocloft}~\cite{tocloft}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{tocloft}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+    \mtcPackageInfo[I0047]{minitoc(hints)}%
+       {--- The tocloft package is loaded.
+        \MessageBreak
+        See the minitoc package documentation
+        \MessageBreak
+        for specific precautions\@gobble}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{titlesec} package}\ipack{titlesec}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{titlesec}}\ipack{titlesec}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} test the presence of the \pack{titlesec} package~\cite{titletoc}, and emit a warning,
+% because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0099}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc},
+% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{titlesec}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+    \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0099]{minitoc(hints)}%
+       {--- The titlesec package is loaded.
+        \MessageBreak
+        It is incompatible
+        \MessageBreak
+        with the minitoc package}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{titletoc} package}\ipack{titletoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{titletoc}}\ipack{titletoc}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} test the presence of the \pack{titletoc} package~\cite{titletoc}, and emit a warning,
+% because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0040}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{titletoc}~\cite{titletoc},
+% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{titletoc}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+    \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0040]{minitoc(hints)}%
+       {--- The titletoc package is loaded.
+        \MessageBreak
+        It is incompatible
+        \MessageBreak
+        with the minitoc package}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{placeins} package}\ipack{placeins}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{placeins}}\ipack{placeins}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ss@insection@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackagewith}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}\\\lmess{W0032}} test if the \pack{placeins}
+% package~\cite{placeins} is loaded and, if yes, we check if the selected options are correct (see section~\vref{rem+FB}):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0031}\\\lmess{W0084}\\\lmess{W0085}\\\lmess{W0032}} testons si le paquetage
+% \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} est chargé et, si oui, nous regardons si les options choisies
+% sont correctes (voir la section~\vref{rem+FB}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{placeins}%
+   {\if@mtc@ss@insection@
+    \@ifpackagewith{placeins}{section}{}%
+       {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+        \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0031]{minitoc(hints)}%
+           {--- The placeins package is loaded
+            \MessageBreak
+            without the section option,
+            \MessageBreak
+            but minitoc used the insection option
+            \MessageBreak
+            which implies it. Try to inverse the
+            \MessageBreak
+            loading order and use consistent options.
+            \MessageBreak
+            You may have got a message
+            \MessageBreak
+    ! LaTeX Error: Option clash for package placeins}%
+       }%
+    \@ifpackagewith{placeins}{above}%
+       {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+        \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0084]{minitoc(hints)}%
+           {--- The placeins package is loaded
+            \MessageBreak
+            with the above option,
+            \MessageBreak
+            but minitoc used the insection option
+            \MessageBreak
+            which is incompatible with it.
+            \MessageBreak
+            Try to remove the above option
+            \MessageBreak
+            and use consistent options}%
+       }{}%
+    \@ifpackagewith{placeins}{below}%
+       {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+        \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0085]{minitoc(hints)}%
+           {--- The placeins package is loaded
+            \MessageBreak
+            with the below option,
+            \MessageBreak
+            but minitoc used the insection option
+            \MessageBreak
+            which is incompatible with it.
+            \MessageBreak
+            Try to remove the below option
+            \MessageBreak
+            and use consistent options}%
+       }{}%
+    \fi
+   \@ifpackagelater{placeins}{2005/04/18}{}{%
+      \@mtc@hints@given@true
+      \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0032]{minitoc(hints)}%
+         {--- The placeins package loaded is
+          \MessageBreak
+          too old. You should use a version
+          \MessageBreak
+          dated of 2005/04/18 at least}%
+   }%
+   }{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{memoir} class}\iclass{memoir}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la classe \uclass{memoir}}\iclass{memoir}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0044} test if the \class{memoir} class~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} is loaded:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0044} testons si la classe \class{memoir}~\cite{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3} est chargée:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifclassloaded{memoir}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+    \mtcPackageInfo[I0044]{minitoc(hints)}%
+       {--- The memoir class is loaded.
+        \MessageBreak
+        See the minitoc package documentation
+        \MessageBreak
+        for specific precautions\@gobble}{}%
+   }{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{amsart} and \uclass{amsproc} classes}\iclass{amsart}\iclass{amsproc}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur les classes \uclass{amsart} et \uclass{amsproc}}\iclass{amsart}\iclass{amsproc}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}} test if the \class{amsart} or \class{amsproc} class is loaded and emit a warning,
+% because these classes are \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0026}\\\lmess{W0027}} regardons si l'une des classes \class{amsart} ou \class{amsproc} a été chargée
+% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ces classes sont \emph{incompatibles} avec \upack{minitoc}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifclassloaded{amsart}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+    \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0026]{minitoc(hints)}%
+       {--- The amsart class is loaded.
+        \MessageBreak
+        It is incompatible
+        \MessageBreak
+        with the minitoc package}}{}%
+\@ifclassloaded{amsproc}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+    \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0027]{minitoc(hints)}%
+       {--- The amsproc class is loaded.
+        \MessageBreak
+        It is incompatible
+        \MessageBreak with the minitoc package}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{amsbook} class}\iclass{amsbook}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la classe \uclass{amsbook}}\iclass{amsbook}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0041} test if the \class{amsbook} class is loaded:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0041} testons si la classe \class{amsbook} est chargée:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifclassloaded{amsbook}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+    \mtcPackageInfo[I0041]{minitoc(hints)}%
+       {--- The amsbook class is loaded.
+        \MessageBreak
+        See the minitoc package documentation
+        \MessageBreak
+        for specific precautions\@gobble}{}%
+   }{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{abstract} package}\ipack{abstract}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{abstract}}\ipack{abstract}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackagewith}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0040} test the presence of the \pack{abstract} package~\cite{abstract}, then its options:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0040} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{abstract}~\cite{abstract}, puis ses options:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{abstract}%
+   {\@mtc@abstract@loaded@true%
+   \@ifpackagewith{abstract}{addtotoc}%
+      {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+       \mtcPackageInfo[I0040]{minitoc(hints)}%
+          {The ``abstract'' package has been
+           \MessageBreak
+           loaded with the ``addtotoc'' option.
+           \MessageBreak
+           You need to look at the
+           \MessageBreak
+           documentation to adjust.
+           \MessageBreak}
+      }}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \uclass{jura} class}\iclass{jura}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la classe \uclass{jura}}\iclass{jura}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifclassloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}} test if the \class{jura} class is loaded and emit a warning, because this class is
+% \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0029}} regardons si la classe \class{jura} a été chargée et émettons un
+% avertissement, puisque cette classe est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifclassloaded{jura}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+    \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0029]{minitoc(hints)}%
+       {--- The jura class is loaded.
+        \MessageBreak
+        It is incompatible
+        \MessageBreak with the minitoc package}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the \upack{flowfram} package}\ipack{flowfram}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur le paquetage \upack{flowfram}}\ipack{flowfram}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We \SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}} test the presence of the \pack{flowfram} package~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide},
+% and emit a warning, because this package is \emph{incompatible} with \upack{minitoc}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\SMMZZ{\lmess{W0097}} testons la présence du paquetage \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide},
+% et émettons un avertissement, puisque ce paquetage est \emph{incompatible} avec \upack{minitoc}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{flowfram}%
+   {\@mtc@hints@given@true
+    \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0097]{minitoc(hints)}%
+       {--- The flowfram package is loaded.
+        \MessageBreak
+        It is incompatible
+        \MessageBreak
+        with the minitoc package}}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the alteration of the sectionning commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur l'altération des commandes de sectionnement}
+% \fi
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@section}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To check if the sectionning commands \com{part}, \com{chapter} or \com{section} have been altered by some
+% package or in the preamble, we compare them (when executing an \com{AtBeginDocument} block) with their saved
+% versions (saved by the
+% \upack{minitoc} package when it is loaded) \com{mtc@hints@part}, \com{mtc@hints@chapter} and
+% \com{mtc@hints@section}. For each sectionning command, we must perform the comparaison for the command itself,
+% its unstarred branch and its starred branch. But the \pack{hyperref} package~\cite{hyperref.web} may interfere,
+% hence the formal precautions in the messages.
+% \or\relax
+% Pour vérifier si les commandes de sectionnement \com{part}, \com{chapter} ou \com{section} ont été altérées
+% par un paquetage ou dans le préambule, nous les comparons (lors de l'exécution d'un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument})
+% avec leurs versions sauvegardées (par le paquetage \upack{minitoc} lors de son chargement) \com{mtc@hints@part},
+% \com{mtc@hints@chapter} et \com{mtc@hints@section}. Pour chacune de ces commandes de sectionnement, nous
+% devons effectuer la comparaison pour la commande elle-même, sa branche non étoilée et sa branche étoilée. Mais le
+% paquetage \pack{hyperref}~\cite{hyperref.web} peut interférer, d'où les précautions formelles dans les messages.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{13}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \paragraph{Alteration of \ucom{part}}\icom{part}
+% \or\relax
+% \paragraph{Altération de \ucom{part}}\icom{part}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\SMM{\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0023}} check the alteration of \com{part}, \com{@part} and \com{@spart}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0030}\\\lmess{W0023}} regardons si \com{part}, \com{@part} and \com{@spart} ont été altérées:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@mtc@hints@w@false
+\@ifundefined{part}{}{\ifx\part\mtc@hints@part\relax
+   \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}
+\@ifundefined{part}{}{\ifx\@part\mtc@hints@@part\relax
+   \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}
+\@ifundefined{part}{}{\ifx\@spart\mtc@hints@@spart\relax
+   \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}
+\if@mtc@hints@w@\@mtc@hints@given@true%
+  \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0030]{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {--- The \string\part\space command is altered
+          \MessageBreak
+          after minitoc}
+  \if@mtc@hyper@used@
+     \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0023]{minitoc(hints)}%
+        {--- It may be the consequence
+             \MessageBreak
+             of loading the ``hyperref'' package}
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{13}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \paragraph{Alteration of \ucom{chapter}}\icom{chapter}
+% \or\relax
+% \paragraph{Altération de \ucom{chapter}}\icom{chapter}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@schapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\SMM{\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0023}} check the alteration of \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter} and \com{@schapter}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0028}\\\lmess{W0023}} regardons si \com{chapter}, \com{@chapter} and \com{@schapter} ont été altérées:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@mtc@hints@w@false
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\ifx\chapter\mtc@hints@chapter\relax
+   \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}%
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\ifx\@chapter\mtc@hints@@chapter\relax
+   \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}%
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\ifx\@schapter\mtc@hints@@schapter\relax
+   \else\@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}%
+\if@mtc@hints@w@\@mtc@hints@given@true%
+  \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0028]{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {--- The \string\chapter\space command is altered
+          \MessageBreak
+          after minitoc}
+  \if@mtc@hyper@used@
+     \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0023]{minitoc(hints)}%
+        {--- It may be the consequence
+             \MessageBreak
+             of loading the ``hyperref'' package}
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{13}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \paragraph{Alteration of \ucom{section}}\icom{section}
+% \or\relax
+% \paragraph{Altération de \ucom{section}}\icom{section}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@section}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@sect}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@ssect}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hyper@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\SMM{\lmess{W0039}\\\lmess{W0023}} check the alteration of \com{section}, \com{@sect} and \com{@ssect}:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0039}\\\lmess{W0023}} regardons si \com{section}, \com{@sect} and \com{@ssect} ont été altérées:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@mtc@hints@w@false
+\@ifundefined{chapter}%
+   {\@ifundefined{section}{}{\ifx\section\mtc@hints@section\relax\else
+      \@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}
+   \@ifundefined{section}{}{\ifx\@sect\mtc@hints@@sect\relax\else
+      \@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}
+   \@ifundefined{section}{}{\ifx\@ssect\mtc@hints@@ssect\relax\else
+      \@mtc@hints@w@true\fi}
+\if@mtc@hints@w@\@mtc@hints@given@true%
+  \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0039]{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {--- The \string\section\space command is altered
+          \MessageBreak
+          after minitoc}
+  \if@mtc@hyper@used@
+     \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0023]{minitoc(hints)}%
+        {--- It may be the consequence
+             \MessageBreak
+             of loading the ``hyperref'' package}
+  \fi
+  \relax\else\fi}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about the consistency of the calling sequences of the commands}
+% And finally, we prepare the consistency tests about the calling sequences of triplets of associated commands
+% like \com{doparttoc}, \com{parttoc} and \fkcom{tableofcontents}, and similar: to be able to use
+% \com{parttoc}, a table of contents file must have been
+% created via \fkcom{tableofcontents} and splitted into parttoc files via \com{doparttoc}.
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur la cohérence des séquences d'appel des commandes}
+% Et enfin, nous préparons les tests de cohérence sur les séquences d'appel de triplets de commandes associées
+% telles que \com{doparttoc}, \com{parttoc} et \fkcom{tableofcontents}, et similaires: pour pouvoir
+% utiliser \com{parttoc}, un fichier table des matières doit avoir été créé via \fkcom{tableofcontents} et
+% éclaté en fichiers parttocs via \com{doparttoc}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Hence we initialize some flags:
+% \or\relax
+% Donc nous initialisons quelques indicateurs:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@hints@
+\global\@mtc@toc@used@false
+\global\@mtc@lof@used@false
+\global\@mtc@lot@used@false
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@listoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@listoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then we patch the involved commands to set the corresponding flag when they are used. First, the commands for
+% the main summaries:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous modifions les commandes concernées pour positionner l'indicateur correspondant lorsqu'elles sont
+% utilisées. Nous commençons par les commandes des sommaires principaux:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtc@sv@tableofcontents\tableofcontents
+\def\tableofcontents%
+   {\global\@mtc@toc@used@true\mtc@sv@tableofcontents}
+\let\mtc@sv@listoffigures\listoffigures
+\def\listoffigures%
+   {\global\@mtc@lof@used@true\mtc@sv@listoffigures}
+\let\mtc@sv@listoftables\listoftables
+\def\listoftables%
+   {\global\@mtc@lot@used@true\mtc@sv@listoftables}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@fktableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@toc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@fklistoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@sv@fklistoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@lot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, their ``fake'' siblings:
+% \or\relax
+% Puis, leurs cousines <<~fake~>>:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtc@sv@fktableofcontents\faketableofcontents
+\def\faketableofcontents%
+   {\global\@mtc@toc@used@true\mtc@sv@fktableofcontents}
+\let\mtc@sv@fklistoffigures\fakelistoffigures
+\def\fakelistoffigures%
+   {\global\@mtc@lof@used@true\mtc@sv@fklistoffigures}
+\let\mtc@sv@fklistoftables\fakelistoftables
+\def\fakelistoftables%
+   {\global\@mtc@lot@used@true\mtc@sv@fklistoftables}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And the \com{mtc@hints@begindoc} definition is finished (it begins in
+% section~\vref{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}):
+% \or\relax
+% Et la définition de \com{mtc@hints@begindoc} est terminée (elle avait commencé à~la
+% section~\vref{s+code+mtc@hints@begindoc}):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Final part: \ucom{mtc@hints@enddoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@enddoc}\icom{mtc@hints@enddoc}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Partie finale: \ucom{mtc@hints@enddoc}}\label{s+code+mtc@hints@enddoc}\icom{mtc@hints@enddoc}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The final part of the \optd{hints} option is executed via \com{AtEndDocument}. Its code is in the
+% \com{mtc@hints@enddoc} macro. It is a sequence of tests on the packages or classes loaded and the flags set
+% during the first and the second parts of this option. First, we declare the \com{mtc@hints@enddoc} macro:
+% \or\relax
+% La partie finale de l'option \optd{hints} est exécutée via \com{AtEndDocument}. Son code est dans la
+% macro \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}. C'est une séquence de tests sur les paquetages et classes chargés et sur les
+% indicateurs positionnés durant les première et deuxième parties de cette option. Tout d'abord, nous déclarons
+% la macro \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@hints@enddoc{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Hint about \ucom{sect-lof{\BAR}lot} and the \uopt{insection} option}\iopt{insection}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{\emph{Hint} sur \ucom{sect-lof{\BAR}lot} et l'option \uopt{insection}}\iopt{insection}\icom{sectlof}\icom{sectlot}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sect@floats@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We look if some section-level lists of figures or tables have been requested.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous regardons si des listes de figures ou de tableaux ont été demandées au niveau section.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@dosectlof@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi
+\if@dosectlot@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi
+\if@sectlof@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi
+\if@sectlot@used@\@mtc@sect@floats@true\fi
+\if@mtc@section@def@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sect@floats@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@w@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If\imess{W0056} yes, we verify that the
+% \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} has been loaded with the correct options or that the \opt{insection}
+% option of the \upack{minitoc} package has been invoked.
+% If not, a warning is given.
+% \or\relax
+% Si\imess{W0056} oui, nous
+% vérifions que le paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} a été chargé avec les options correctes ou que
+% l'option \opt{insection} du paquetage \upack{minitoc} a été invoquée.
+% Sinon, un avertissement est émis.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@ \else
+  \if@mtc@sect@floats@%
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0056]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You are using \string\dosectlof\space and/or
+       \MessageBreak
+       \string\dosectlot, \string\sectlof\space and/or \string\sectlot,
+       \MessageBreak
+       hence the ``insection'' package
+       \MessageBreak
+       option is recommended}%
+   \@mtc@hints@w@true \@mtc@hints@given@true
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the consistency tests}\label{ss+final.coh}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale des tests de cohérence}\label{ss+final.coh}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test if \com{parttoc} has been used without \com{doparttoc}, etc., for each pair
+% of preparation/insertion commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons si \com{parttoc} a été utilisée \com{doparttoc}, etc., pour chaque paire de commandes
+% préparation/insertion.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For\SMM{\lmess{W0062}\\\lmess{W0060}\\\lmess{W0061}} the part level commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour\SMM{\lmess{W0062}\\\lmess{W0060}\\\lmess{W0061}} les commandes au niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@part@def@
+ \if@parttoc@used@
+   \if@doparttoc@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0062]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\parttoc,
+       \MessageBreak
+       but not \string\doparttoc}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@partlof@used@
+   \if@dopartlof@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0060]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\partlof,
+       \MessageBreak
+       but not \string\dopartlof}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@partlot@used@
+   \if@dopartlot@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0061]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\partlot,
+       \MessageBreak
+       but not \string\dopartlot}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For\SMM{\lmess{W0059}\\\lmess{W0057}\\\lmess{W0058}} the chapter level commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour\SMM{\lmess{W0059}\\\lmess{W0057}\\\lmess{W0058}} les commandes au niveau chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@chapter@def@
+ \if@minitoc@used@
+   \if@dominitoc@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0059]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\minitoc,
+       \MessageBreak
+       but not \string\dominitoc}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@minilof@used@
+   \if@dominilof@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0057]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\minilof,
+       \MessageBreak
+       but not \string\dominilof}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@minilot@used@
+   \if@dominilot@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0058]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\minilot,
+       \MessageBreak
+       but not \string\dominilot}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For\SMM{\lmess{W0065}\\\lmess{W0063}\\\lmess{W0064}} the section level commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour\SMM{\lmess{W0065}\\\lmess{W0063}\\\lmess{W0064}} les commandes au niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@section@def@
+ \if@secttoc@used@
+   \if@dosecttoc@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0065]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\secttoc,
+       \MessageBreak
+       but not \string\dosecttoc}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@sectlof@used@
+   \if@dosectlof@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0063]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\sectlof,
+       \MessageBreak
+       but not \string\dosectlof}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@sectlot@used@
+   \if@dosectlot@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0064]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\sectlot,
+       \MessageBreak
+       but not \string\dosectlot}
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Check if the main tables have been prepared (first part)}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Les tables principales ont-elles été préparées (première partie)?}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Now, we test if a \com{doparttoc} macro has been called but without any matching \com{parttoc}, hence it is a
+% vain call. We do the same for each analog command.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons maintenant si une macro \com{doparttoc} a été appelée sans aucune commande \com{parttoc}
+% correspondante, car sinon cet appel est vain. Nous faisons de même pour chaque commande analogue.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@doparttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dopartlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Part\SMM{\lmess{W0075}\\\lmess{W0076}\\\lmess{W0077}} level commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0075}\\\lmess{W0076}\\\lmess{W0077}} au niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@part@def@
+ \if@doparttoc@used@
+   \if@parttoc@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0075]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\doparttoc,
+       \MessageBreak
+       but not \string\parttoc}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@dopartlof@used@
+   \if@partlof@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0076]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\dopartlof,
+       \MessageBreak
+       but not \string\partlof}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@dopartlot@used@
+   \if@partlot@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0077]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\dopartlot,
+       \MessageBreak
+       but not \string\partlot}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominitoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dominilot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Chapter\SMM{\lmess{W0078}\\\lmess{W0079}\\\lmess{W0080}} level commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0078}\\\lmess{W0079}\\\lmess{W0080}} au niveau chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@chapter@def@
+ \if@dominitoc@used@
+   \if@minitoc@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0078]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\dominitoc,
+       \MessageBreak
+       but not \string\minitoc}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@dominilof@used@
+   \if@minilof@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0079]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\dominilof,
+       \MessageBreak
+       but not \string\minilof}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@dominilot@used@
+   \if@minilot@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0080]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\dominilot,
+       \MessageBreak
+       but not \string\minilot}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosecttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@dosectlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Section\SMM{\lmess{W0081}\\\lmess{W0082}\\\lmess{W0083}} level commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0081}\\\lmess{W0082}\\\lmess{W0083}} au niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@section@def@
+ \if@dosecttoc@used@
+   \if@secttoc@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0081]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\dosecttoc,
+       \MessageBreak
+       but not \string\secttoc}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@dosectlof@used@
+   \if@sectlof@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0082]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\dosectlof,
+       \MessageBreak
+       but not \string\sectlof}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@dosectlot@used@
+   \if@sectlot@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0083]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\dosectlot,
+       \MessageBreak
+       but not \string\sectlot}
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Check if the main tables have been prepared (second part)}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Les tables principales ont-elles été préparées (seconde partie)?}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Another consistency test verifies that if the macro \com{parttoc} has been called,
+% then the macro \com{tableofcontents} or \com{faketableofcontents} has also been called
+% (to create the necessary contents file); similar tests are made
+% for the other mini-table commands.
+% \or\relax
+% Un autre test de cohérence vérifie que si la macro \com{parttoc} a été appelée,
+% alors la macro \com{tableofcontents} ou
+% \com{faketableofcontents} a aussi été appelée (créant le fichier de contenu nécessaire); des tests
+% analogues sont faits pour les autres commandes de mini-tables.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@parttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@toc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@partlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Part\SMM{\lmess{W0071}\\\lmess{W0069}\\\lmess{W0070}} level commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0071}\\\lmess{W0069}\\\lmess{W0070}} au niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@part@def@
+ \if@parttoc@used@
+   \if@mtc@toc@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0071]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\parttoc\space but not
+       \MessageBreak
+       \string\tableofcontents
+       \MessageBreak
+       nor \string\faketableofcontents}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@partlof@used@
+   \if@mtc@lof@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0069]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\partlof\space but not
+       \MessageBreak
+       \string\listoffigures
+       \MessageBreak
+       nor \string\fakelistoffigures}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@partlot@used@
+   \if@mtc@lot@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0070]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\partlot\space but not
+       \MessageBreak
+       \string\listoftables
+       \MessageBreak
+       nor \string\fakelistoftables}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minitoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@toc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@minilot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Chapter\SMM{\lmess{W0068}\\\lmess{W0066}\\\lmess{W0067}} level commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0068}\\\lmess{W0066}\\\lmess{W0067}} au niveau chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@chapter@def@
+ \if@minitoc@used@
+   \if@mtc@toc@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0068]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\minitoc\space but not
+       \MessageBreak
+       \string\tableofcontents
+       \MessageBreak
+       nor \string\faketableofcontents}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@minilof@used@
+   \if@mtc@lof@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0066]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\minilof\space but not
+       \MessageBreak
+       \string\listoffigures
+       \MessageBreak
+       nor \string\fakelistoffigures}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@minilot@used@
+   \if@mtc@lot@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0067]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\minilot\space but not
+       \MessageBreak
+       \string\listoftables
+       \MessageBreak
+       nor \string\fakelistoftables}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@secttoc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@toc@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lof@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@sectlot@used@}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtc@lot@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Section\SMM{\lmess{W0074}\\\lmess{W0072}\\\lmess{W0073}} level commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes\SMM{\lmess{W0074}\\\lmess{W0072}\\\lmess{W0073}} au niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@section@def@
+ \if@secttoc@used@
+   \if@mtc@toc@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0074]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\secttoc\space but not
+       \MessageBreak
+       \string\tableofcontents
+       \MessageBreak
+       nor \string\faketableofcontents}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@sectlof@used@
+   \if@mtc@lof@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0072]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\sectlof\space but not
+       \MessageBreak
+       \string\listoffigures
+       \MessageBreak
+       nor \string\fakelistoffigures}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+ \if@sectlot@used@
+   \if@mtc@lot@used@\else
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0073]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {You have used \string\sectlot\space but not
+       \MessageBreak
+       \string\listoftables
+       \MessageBreak
+       nor \string\fakelistoftables}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+   \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Check the number of mini-tables, in case of short extensions}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Tester le nombre de mini-tables, dans le cas de suffixes courts}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@checklongext}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@part@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\value}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@true}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@chapter@def@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@section@def@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If\SMM{\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0055}} short extensions are used,
+% you can use only 99~mini-tables of each kind. If more are created, the auxiliary
+% files can be overwritten: the hundredth minitoc file \com{jobname}\verb|.U100| has its name truncated to
+% \com{jobname}\verb|.U10|, which is already the tenth minitoc file. Thus, we need a hint to signal this situation. The
+% code is rather simple, but the remedy is bitter and costly: either use a better operating system\,\footnote{On
+% the long term, a good investment.}, either redesign the document.
+% \or\relax
+% Si\SMM{\lmess{W0054}\\\lmess{W0053}\\\lmess{W0055}} les suffixes courts sont utilisés,
+% vous ne pouvez utiliser que 99~mini-tables de chaque genre. Si davantage de
+% mini-tables sont créées, les fichiers auxiliaires seront écrasés; le centième fichier minitoc \com{jobname}\verb|.U100|
+% a son nom tronqué à\com{jobname}\verb|.U10|, qui est déjà le dixième fichier minitoc. Donc nous avons besoin d'une
+% indication (\emph{hint}) pour signaler cette situation. Le code est assez simple, mais le remède est amer et
+% coûteux: soit utiliser un meilleur système d'exploitation\,\footnote{Dans le long terme, un bon investissement.},
+% soit revoir la conception du document.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@hints@checklongext{%
+\if@mtc@longext@
+\else
+  \if@mtc@part@def@
+    \ifnum 99 < \value{ptc}\relax \@mtc@hints@given@true
+       \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0054]{minitoc(hints)}%
+          {You have used short extensions
+           \MessageBreak
+           and more than 99 parts (\arabic{ptc})}
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \if@mtc@chapter@def@
+    \ifnum 99 < \value{mtc}\relax \@mtc@hints@given@true
+       \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0053]{minitoc(hints)}%
+          {You have used short extensions
+           \MessageBreak
+           and more than 99 chapters (\arabic{mtc})}
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \if@mtc@section@def@
+      \ifnum 99 < \value{stc}\relax \@mtc@hints@given@true
+         \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0055]{minitoc(hints)}%
+            {You have used short extensions
+             \MessageBreak
+             and more than 99 sections (\arabic{stc})}
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+\fi}
+\mtc@hints@checklongext
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{sectsty} package}\label{s+sectsty.h2}\ipack{sectsty}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{sectsty}}\label{s+sectsty.h2}\ipack{sectsty}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{W0037} test if \pack{sectsty} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% See section~\vref{s+sectsty.h1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{W0037} testons si \pack{sectsty} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+sectsty.h1}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@\else
+  \if@mtc@sectstyLoaded@a@
+     \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0037]{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {The sectsty package should be
+      \MessageBreak
+      loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
+     \@mtc@hints@given@true
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{varsects} package}\label{s+varsects.h2}\ipack{varsects}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{varsects}}\label{s+varsects.h2}\ipack{varsects}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{W0038} test if \pack{varsects} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% See section~\vref{s+varsects.h1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{W0038} testons si \pack{varsects} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+varsects.h1}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@\else
+  \if@mtc@varsectsLoaded@a@
+     \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0038]{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {The varsects package should be
+      \MessageBreak
+      loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
+     \@mtc@hints@given@true
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{fncychap} package}\label{s+fncychap.h2}\ipack{fncychap}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{fncychap}}\label{s+fncychap.h2}\ipack{fncychap}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{W0086} test if \pack{fncychap} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% See section~\vref{s+fncychap.h1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{W0086} testons si \pack{fncychap} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+fncychap.h1}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@\else
+  \if@mtc@fncychapLoaded@a@
+     \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0086]{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {The fncychap package should be
+      \MessageBreak
+      loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
+     \@mtc@hints@given@true
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{hangcaption} package}\label{s+hangcaption.h2}\ipack{hangcaption}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{hangcaption}}\label{s+hangcaption.h2}\ipack{hangcaption}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{W0092} test if \pack{hangcaption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% See section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{W0092} testons si \pack{hangcaption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+hangcaption.h1}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@HgcLoaded@\else
+  \if@mtc@HgcLoaded@a@
+     \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0092]{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {The hangcaption package should be
+      \MessageBreak
+      loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
+     \@mtc@hints@given@true
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{quotchap} package}\label{s+quotchap.h2}\ipack{quotchap}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{quotchap}}\label{s+quotchap.h2}\ipack{quotchap}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{W0087} test if \pack{quotchap} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% See section~\vref{s+quotchap.h1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{W0087} testons si \pack{quotchap} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+quotchap.h1}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@\else
+  \if@mtc@quotchapLoaded@a@
+     \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0087]{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {The quotchap package should be
+      \MessageBreak
+      loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
+     \@mtc@hints@given@true
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{romannum} package}\label{s+romannum.h2}\ipack{romannum}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{romannum}}\label{s+romannum.h2}\ipack{romannum}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{W0088} test if \pack{romannum} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% See section~\vref{s+romannum.h1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{W0088} testons si \pack{romannum} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+romannum.h1}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@romannumLoaded@\else
+  \if@mtc@romannumLoaded@a@
+     \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0088]{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {The romannum package should be
+      \MessageBreak
+      loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
+     \@mtc@hints@given@true
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{sfheaders} package}\label{s+sfheaders.h2}\ipack{sfheaders}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{sfheaders}}\label{s+sfheaders.h2}\ipack{sfheaders}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{W0089} test if \pack{sfheaders} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% See section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{W0089} testons si \pack{sfheaders} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+sfheaders.h1}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@\else
+  \if@mtc@sfheadersLoaded@a@
+     \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0089]{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {The sfheaders package should be
+      \MessageBreak
+      loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
+     \@mtc@hints@given@true
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{alnumsec} package}\label{s+alnumsec.h2}\ipack{alnumsec}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{alnumsec}}\label{s+alnumsec.h2}\ipack{alnumsec}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{W0090} test if \pack{alnumsec} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% See section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{W0090} testons si \pack{alnumsec} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+alnumsec.h1}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@\else
+  \if@mtc@alnumsecLoaded@a@
+     \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0090]{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {The alnumsec package should be
+      \MessageBreak
+      loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
+     \@mtc@hints@given@true
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{captcont} package}\label{s+captcont.h2}\ipack{captcont}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{captcont}}\label{s+captcont.h2}\ipack{captcont}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{W0091} test if \pack{captcont} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% See section~\vref{s+captcont.h1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{W0091} testons si \pack{captcont} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+captcont.h1}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@captcontLoaded@\else
+  \if@mtc@captcontLoaded@a@
+     \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0091]{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {The captcont package should be
+      \MessageBreak
+      loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
+     \@mtc@hints@given@true
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{caption} package}\label{s+caption.h2}\ipack{caption}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{caption}}\label{s+caption.h2}\ipack{caption}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{W0033} test if \pack{caption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% See section~\vref{s+caption.h1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{W0033} testons si \pack{caption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+caption.h1}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@captionLoaded@\else
+  \if@mtc@captionLoaded@a@
+     \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0033]{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {The caption package should be
+      \MessageBreak
+      loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
+     \@mtc@hints@given@true
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{caption2} package}\label{s+caption2.h2}\ipack{caption2}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{caption2}}\label{s+caption2.h2}\ipack{caption2}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{W0034} test if \pack{caption2} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% See section~\vref{s+caption2.h1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{W0034} testons si \pack{caption2} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+caption2.h1}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@captionIILoaded@\else
+  \if@mtc@captionIILoaded@a@
+     \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0034]{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {The caption2 package should be
+      \MessageBreak
+      loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
+     \@mtc@hints@given@true
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{ccaption} package}\label{s+ccaption.h2}\ipack{ccaption}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{ccaption}}\label{s+ccaption.h2}\ipack{ccaption}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{W0035} test if \pack{ccaption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% See section~\vref{s+ccaption.h1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{W0035} testons si \pack{ccaption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+ccaption.h1}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@\else
+  \if@mtc@ccaptionLoaded@a@
+     \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0035]{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {The ccaption package should be
+      \MessageBreak
+      loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
+     \@mtc@hints@given@true
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{mcaption} package}\label{s+mcaption.h2}\ipack{mcaption}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{mcaption}}\label{s+mcaption.h2}\ipack{mcaption}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{W0036} test if \pack{mcaption} has been loaded before (correct) or after (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% See section~\vref{s+mcaption.h1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{W0036} testons si \pack{mcaption} a été chargé avant (correct) ou après (incorrect) \upack{minitoc}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+mcaption.h1}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@\else
+  \if@mtc@mcaptionLoaded@a@
+     \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0036]{minitoc(hints)}%
+     {The mcaption package should be
+      \MessageBreak
+      loaded BEFORE the minitoc package}
+     \@mtc@hints@given@true
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{float} package}\label{s+float.h2}\ipack{float}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{float}}\label{s+float.h2}\ipack{float}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{float} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+float.h1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{float} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+float.h1}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@floatLoaded@\
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {You have loaded the float package;
+    \MessageBreak
+    please be aware that the minitoc package
+    \MessageBreak
+    facilities can not be used for new types
+    \MessageBreak
+    of floats defined by the float package\@gobble}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{floatrow} package}\label{s+floatrow.h2}\ipack{floatrow}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{floatrow}}\label{s+floatrow.h2}\ipack{floatrow}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{floatrow} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+floatrow.h1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{floatrow} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+floatrow.h1}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@floatrowLoaded@\
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {You have loaded the floatrow package;
+    \MessageBreak
+    please be aware that the minitoc package
+    \MessageBreak
+    facilities can not be used for new types
+    \MessageBreak
+    of floats defined by the floatrow package\@gobble}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{trivfloat} package}\label{s+trivfloat.h2}\ipack{trivfloat}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{trivfloat}}\label{s+trivfloat.h2}\ipack{trivfloat}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{trivfloat} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{trivfloat} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+trivfloat.h1}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@trivfloatLoaded@\
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {You have loaded the trivfloat package;
+    \MessageBreak
+    please be aware that the minitoc package
+    \MessageBreak
+    facilities can not be used for new types
+    \MessageBreak
+    of floats defined by the trivfloat package\@gobble}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Final part of the hint about the \upack{rotfloat} package}\label{s+rotfloat.h2}\ipack{rotfloat}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Partie finale du \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \upack{rotfloat}}\label{s+rotfloat.h2}\ipack{rotfloat}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0053} test if \pack{rotfloat} has been loaded. See section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h1}.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0053} testons si \pack{rotfloat} a été chargé. Voir la section~\vref{s+rotfloat.h1}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@rotfloatLoaded@\
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0053]{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {You have loaded the rotfloat package;
+    \MessageBreak
+    please be aware that the minitoc package
+    \MessageBreak
+    facilities can not be used for new types
+    \MessageBreak
+    of floats defined by the rotfloat package\@gobble}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Check if empty mini-tables have been detected}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Tester si des mini-tables vides ont été détectées}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We test for each kind of mini-tables.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous testons pour chaque sorte de mini-tables.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For parttocs:\imess{W0046}
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les parttocs:\imess{W0046}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@empty@parttoc@
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0046]{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {You have attempted to insert
+    \MessageBreak
+    empty parttocs}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlof@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For partlofs:\imess{W0044}
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les partlofs:\imess{W0044}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@empty@partlof@
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0044]{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {You have attempted to insert
+    \MessageBreak
+    empty partlofs}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@partlot@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For partlots:\imess{W0045}
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les partlots:\imess{W0045}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@empty@partlot@
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0045]{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {You have attempted to insert
+    \MessageBreak
+    empty partlots}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For minitocs:\imess{W0043}
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les minitocs:\imess{W0043}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@empty@minitoc@
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0043]{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {You have attempted to insert
+    \MessageBreak
+    empty minitocs}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilof@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For minilofs:\imess{W0041}
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les minilofs:\imess{W0041}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@empty@minilof@
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0041]{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {You have attempted to insert
+    \MessageBreak
+    empty minilofs}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@minilot@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For minilots:\imess{W0042}
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les minilots:\imess{W0042}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@empty@minilot@
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0042]{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {You have attempted to insert
+    \MessageBreak
+    empty minilots}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@secttoc@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For secttocs:\imess{W0049}
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les secttocs:\imess{W0049}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@empty@secttoc@
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0049]{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {You have attempted to insert
+    \MessageBreak
+    empty secttocs}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For sectlofs:\imess{W0047}
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les sectlofs:\imess{W0047}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@empty@sectlof@
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0047]{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {You have attempted to insert
+    \MessageBreak
+    empty sectlofs}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For sectlots:\imess{W0048}
+% \or\relax
+% Pour les sectlots:\imess{W0048}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@empty@sectlot@
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0048]{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {You have attempted to insert
+    \MessageBreak
+    empty sectlots}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG
+% \subsubsection{Check if obsolete commands have been used}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Tester si des commandes obsolètes ont été utilisées}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG
+% This hint is just a reminder if you have used obsolete commands, which are also signalled
+% in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce \emph{hint} est juste un rappel dans le cas où vous auriez utilisé des commandes obsolètes, qui sont aussi
+% signalées dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@firstpartis@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Obsolete macro \com{firstpartis}:\imess{W0051}
+% \or\relax
+% Macro obsolète \com{firstpartis}:\imess{W0051}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@firstpartis@used@
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0051]{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)
+    \MessageBreak
+    command: \string\firstpartis}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@firstchapteris@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Obsolete macro \com{firstchapteris}:\imess{W0050}
+% \or\relax
+% Macro obsolète \com{firstchapteris}:\imess{W0050}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@firstchapteris@used@
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0050]{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)
+    \MessageBreak
+    command: \string\firstchapteris}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@firstsectionis@used@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Obsolete macro \com{firstsectionis}:\imess{W0052}
+% \or\relax
+% Macro obsolète \com{firstsectionis}:\imess{W0052}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@firstsectionis@used@
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0052]{minitoc(hints)}%
+   {You have invoked an obsolete (ignored)
+    \MessageBreak
+    command: \string\firstsectionis}
+   \@mtc@hints@given@true
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsubsection{Check if some hints have been written}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsubsection{Tester si des \emph{hints} ont été écrits}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@given@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\SMM{\lmess{W0024}\\\lmess{I0019}} come at the end of the third part of the \optd{hints} option:
+% if problems have been detected, a warning is displayed;
+% the warning is not displayed but only written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file if no problems have been detected.
+% And we terminate the \com{mtc@hints@enddoc} macro by a closing brace.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\SMM{\lmess{W0024}\\\lmess{I0019}} arrivons à~la fin de la troisième partie de l'option \optd{hints}:
+% si des problèmes ont été détectés, un
+% avertissement est affiché; cet avertissement n'est pas affiché mais seulement écrit dans le fichier
+% \emph{document}\suffix{.log} si aucun problème n'a été détecté. Et nous terminons la macro \com{mtc@hints@enddoc}
+% par une accolade fermante.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@hints@given@
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[W0024]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {Some hints have been written
+       \MessageBreak
+       in the \jobname.log file}
+\else
+   \mtcPackageInfo[I0019]{minitoc(hints)}%
+      {No hints have been written
+       \MessageBreak
+       in the \jobname.log file.\@gobble}
+\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Processing of options}\label{s+code+processing.options}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Traitement des options}\label{s+code+processing.options}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\InputIfFileExists}
+% \begin{macro}{\ExecuteOptions}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, if possible, we apply the default language option, \loptd{english}:
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, si possible, nous exécutons l'option de langue par défaut, \loptd{english}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     \InputIfFileExists{english.mld}%
+       {\ExecuteOptions{english}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError}
+% \begin{macro}{\providecommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\stctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\slftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\slttitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Else,\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} we signal a severe error and provide the missing default titles:
+% \else\relax
+% Sinon,\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} nous signalons une erreur sévère et fournissons les titres par défaut manquants:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       {\mtcPackageError[E0036]{minitoc}%
+          {Your minitoc installation is incomplete.
+           \MessageBreak
+           The minitoc language object file (.mld),
+           \MessageBreak
+           english.mld is not found.
+           \MessageBreak
+           We will try to continue with default values}%
+          {See the minitoc documentation.
+           \MessageBreak
+           Please fix your minitoc installation.
+           \MessageBreak
+           Press <return> to continue}%
+        \providecommand{\ptctitle}{Table of Contents}%
+        \providecommand{\plftitle}{List of Figures}%
+        \providecommand{\plttitle}{List of Tables}%
+        \providecommand{\mtctitle}{Contents}%
+        \providecommand{\mlftitle}{Figures}%
+        \providecommand{\mlttitle}{Tables}%
+        \providecommand{\stctitle}{Contents}%
+        \providecommand{\slftitle}{Figures}%
+        \providecommand{\slttitle}{Tables}%
+      }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\ProcessOptions*}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then, we execute all requested options: for most options, it is just setting a flag, or loading a file for the
+% language options.
+% \or\relax
+% Puis nous exécutons toutes les options demandées; pour la plupart des options, ceci consiste seulement
+% à~positionner un indicateur, ou à~charger un fichier pour les options de langue.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptions*
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We now examine the flags for some options and execute the necessary actions.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous examinons maintenant les indicateurs pour certaines options et exécutons les actions nécessaires.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{insection} option}\iopt{insection}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{insection}}\iopt{insection}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@ss@insection@}
+% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifpackageloaded}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@placeinsLoaded@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the \opt{insection} option, we load the \pack{placeins} package~\cite{placeins} with its options
+% \optp{verbose}{placeins} and \optp{section}{placeins}, after the \pack{flafter} package (described in~\cite{ltoutput}
+% and~\cite[page~286]{TLC2}); the correct loading is verified:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour l'option \opt{insection}, nous chargeons
+% le paquetage \pack{placeins}~\cite{placeins} avec ses options
+% \optp{verbose}{placeins} et \optp{section}{placeins}, après le paquetage \pack{flafter} (décrit dans~\cite{ltoutput}
+% et~\cite[page~292]{TLC2F}); le chargement correct est vérifié:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@ss@insection@
+   \RequirePackage{flafter}[2000/07/23]%
+   \RequirePackage[section,verbose]{placeins}[2005/04/18]%
+   \@ifpackageloaded{placeins}%
+      {\@mtc@placeinsLoaded@true}{\@mtc@placeinsLoaded@false}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{notoccite} option}\iopt{notoccite}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{notoccite}}\iopt{notoccite}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@notoccite@}
+% \begin{macro}{\RequirePackage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the \opt{notoccite} option, we just load the \pack{notoccite} package~\cite{notoccite}:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour l'option \opt{notoccite}, nous chargeons simplement le paquetage \pack{notoccite}~\cite{notoccite}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@notoccite@
+   \RequirePackage{notoccite}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{listfiles} option}\ioptd{listfiles}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{listfiles}}\ioptd{listfiles}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf@long}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf@short}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@addtomaf}
+% \begin{macro}{\IfFileExists}
+% \begin{macro}{\jobname}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{I0009} define the \com{mtc@maf} macro which closes \com{tf@mtc}
+% and reopens it to write into the file \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.
+% It calls \com{mtc@maf@long} or \com{mtc@maf@short} (long or short extensions), then
+% closes \com{tf@mtc}. \com{mtc@maf@long} or \com{mtc@maf@short} writes the names of the existing auxiliary
+% files using decrementing loops on the associated counters, and includes \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc} in the list
+% (but \emph{not} the \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\,\footnote{Some users could made a cleanup using this file as a list of
+% files to delete, so it must not be in the list.} file).
+% We must also check the existence of \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} if long extensions are used.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{I0009} définissons la macro \com{mtc@maf} qui ferme \com{tf@mtc}
+% puis le ré-ouvre pour écrire dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}.
+% Elle appelle \com{mtc@maf@long} ou \com{mtc@maf@short} (suffixes longs ou courts), puis ferme \com{tf@mtc}.
+% \com{mtc@maf@long} ou \com{mtc@maf@short} écrit les noms des fichiers auxiliaires existants en utilisant des boucles
+% par ordre décroissant sur les compteurs associés, et inclut \emph{document}\suffix{.mtc} dans la liste
+% (mais \emph{pas} le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.maf}\,\footnote{Certains utilisateurs pourraient faire un nettoyage
+% en utilisant ce fichier comme liste des fichiers à~détruire, donc il ne doit pas être dans la liste.}).
+% Nous devons aussi tester l'existence de \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} si les suffixes longs sont utilisés.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@maf{%
+       \mtcPackageInfo[I0009]{minitoc}%
+                      {Listing minitoc auxiliary files.
+                       \MessageBreak
+                       Creating the \jobname.maf file\@gobble}
+       \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc
+       \immediate\openout\tf@mtc \jobname.maf
+       \if@mtc@longext@\mtc@maf@long\else\mtc@maf@short\fi
+       \immediate\closeout\tf@mtc}
+\def\mtc@addtomaf#1{%
+  \IfFileExists{#1}{\immediate\write\tf@mtc{#1}}{}}
+\def\mtc@maf@long{%
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc}
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc0}
+\@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@ptc>\z@\relax
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.ptc\arabic{ptc}}
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.plf\arabic{ptc}}
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.plt\arabic{ptc}}
+       \advance\c@ptc\m@ne\repeat}
+\@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{%
+       \loop\ifnum\c@mtc>\z@\relax
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc\arabic{mtc}}
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mlf\arabic{mtc}}
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mlt\arabic{mtc}}
+       \advance\c@mtc\m@ne\repeat}
+\@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@stc>\z@\relax
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.stc\arabic{stc}}
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.slf\arabic{stc}}
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.slt\arabic{stc}}
+       \advance\c@stc\m@ne\repeat}}
+\def\mtc@maf@short{%
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.mtc}
+\@ifundefined{c@ptc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@ptc>\z@\relax
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.P\arabic{ptc}}
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.G\arabic{ptc}}
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.U\arabic{ptc}}
+       \advance\c@ptc\m@ne\repeat}
+\@ifundefined{c@mtc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@mtc>\z@\relax
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.M\arabic{mtc}}
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.F\arabic{mtc}}
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.T\arabic{mtc}}
+       \advance\c@mtc\m@ne\repeat}
+\@ifundefined{c@stc}{}{\loop\ifnum\c@stc>\z@\relax
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.S\arabic{stc}}
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.H\arabic{stc}}
+       \mtc@addtomaf{\jobname.V\arabic{stc}}
+       \advance\c@stc\m@ne\repeat}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@listfiles@}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@maf}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% If this option is active, we call \com{mtc@maf} in an \com{AtEndDocument} block.
+% \or\relax
+% Si cette option est active, nous appellons \com{mtc@maf} dans un bloc \com{AtEndDocument}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@listfiles@{\AtEndDocument{\mtc@maf}}\else\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Processing the \uopt{hints} option}\ioptd{hints}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Traitement de l'option \uopt{hints}}\ioptd{hints}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@hints@}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@begindoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtEndDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@enddoc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the \optd{hints} option, we set its first part in an \com{AtBeginDocument} block and its third (last) part
+% in an \com{AtEndDocument} block:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour l'option \optd{hints}, nous plaçons sa première partie dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument} et sa
+% troisième (dernière) partie dans un bloc \com{AtEndDocument}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@mtc@hints@
+   \AtBeginDocument{\mtc@hints@begindoc}%
+   \AtEndDocument{\mtc@hints@enddoc}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \subsection{Saving the sectionning commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \subsection{Sauvegarde des commandes de sectionnement}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And, at least, we save the definitions of sectionning commands (and of their unstarred and starred branches),
+% for comparaisons (this is a part of the \optd{hints} option executed in the preamble):
+% \or\relax
+% Et, enfin, nous sauvegardons les définitions des commandes de sectionnement (avec leurs branches non étoilées et
+% étoilées), pour des comparaisons (ceci est une partie de l'option \optd{hints} exécutée dans le préambule).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\part}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\@part}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@spart}
+% \begin{macro}{\@spart}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the \com{part} command:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour la commande \com{part}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\mtc@hints@part\part
+                         \let\mtc@hints@@part\@part
+                         \let\mtc@hints@@spart\@spart}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \vspace{3\baselineskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@schapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the \com{chapter} command:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour la commande \com{chapter}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\mtc@hints@chapter\chapter
+                         \let\mtc@hints@@chapter\@chapter
+                         \let\mtc@hints@@schapter\@schapter}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \vspace{3\baselineskip}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@section}
+% \begin{macro}{\section}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@sect}
+% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@hints@@ssect}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For the \com{section} command:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour la commande \com{section}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\mtc@hints@section\section
+                         \let\mtc@hints@@sect\@sect
+                         \let\mtc@hints@@ssect\@ssect}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Trapping the undefined preparation and insertion commands}\label{s+undef+trap}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Interception des commandes de préparation et d'insertion non définies}\label{s+undef+trap}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@classck}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% It\imess{E0037} may happen that you use a preparation command (like \com{dominitoc}) or an insertion command
+% (like \com{dominitoc}) in a document using a class where that command is not available (like
+% \class{article}). To get a better diagnostic for such errors, we intercept such commands by providing a default
+% definition which just emits an error message. These default definitions are made in an \com{AtBeginDocument}
+% block.
+% \or\relax
+% Il\imess{E0037} peut arriver que vous utilisiez une commande de préparation (comme \com{dominitoc}) ou une commande
+% d'insertion (comme \com{dominitoc}) dans un document utilisant une classe pour laquelle cette commande n'est pas
+% disponible (comme \class{article}). Pour obtenir un meilleur diagnostic pour ce type d'erreurs, nous interceptons de
+% telles commandes en fournissant une définition par défaut qui émet simplement un message d'erreur. Ces définitions
+% par défaut sont faites dans un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtc@classck#1{%
+  \mtcPackageError[E0037]{minitoc}%
+     {The \csname #1\endcsname\space command is incompatible
+      \MessageBreak
+      with the document class}%
+     {Correct the source code.
+      \MessageBreak
+      Type <return> and rerun LaTeX}%
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% An \com{AtBeginDocument} bloc:
+% \or\relax
+% Un bloc \com{AtBeginDocument}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\providecommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Part-level preparation commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes de préparation au niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \providecommand{\doparttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{doparttoc}}%
+ \providecommand{\dopartlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dopartlof}}%
+ \providecommand{\dopartlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dopartlot}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Chapter-level preparation commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes de préparation au niveau chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \providecommand{\dominitoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dominitoc}}%
+ \providecommand{\dominilof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dominilof}}%
+ \providecommand{\dominilot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dominilot}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Section-level preparation commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes de préparation au niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \providecommand{\dosecttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dosecttoc}}%
+ \providecommand{\dosectlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dosectlof}}%
+ \providecommand{\dosectlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{dosectlot}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Part-level insertion commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes d'insertion au niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \providecommand{\parttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{parttoc}}%
+ \providecommand{\partlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{partlof}}%
+ \providecommand{\partlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{partlot}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Chapter-level insertion commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes d'insertion au niveau chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \providecommand{\minitoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{minitoc}}%
+ \providecommand{\minilof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{minilof}}%
+ \providecommand{\minilot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{minilot}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Section-level insertion commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes d'insertion au niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \providecommand{\secttoc}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{secttoc}}%
+ \providecommand{\sectlof}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{sectlof}}%
+ \providecommand{\sectlot}[1][l]{\mtc@classck{sectlot}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% ^^A \vspace{3\baselineskip}
+% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{19.45525292mm}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{9.727626459mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And
+% the package is terminated.
+% \or\relax
+% Et
+% le paquetage est terminé.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</minitoc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{The \uxfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} file}\ixfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Le fichier \uxfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}}\ixfile{minitoc-fr.dtx}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\jobname}
+% \begin{macro}{\input}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This short file is necessary to create the french documentation. Its rôle is to
+% set \com{jobname} to \texttt{minitoc-fr} in place of \texttt{minitoc}. As \xfile{minitoc.ins}
+% generates the \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan} and \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} files which set a language number \com{LANG},
+% and \xfile{minitoc.dtx} reads then the \icom{jobname}\xfile{\bs jobname.lan} file, the documentation can be in several languages
+% (english and french here) in
+% \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, the language being selected by \com{ifcase}\com{LANG}\com{relax} \ldots\ \com{or}\com{relax}
+% \ldots\ \com{fi} constructs. The \com{relax} primitives are necessary to avoid bad surprises.
+% \or\relax
+% Ce court fichier est nécessaire pour créer la documentation en français. Son rôle est de forcer \com{jobname}
+% à~\texttt{minitoc-fr} au lieu de \texttt{minitoc}. Comme \xfile{minitoc.ins} engendre les fichiers
+% \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc.lan} et \isuffix{.lan}\xfile{minitoc-fr.lan} qui établissent un numéro de langue \com{LANG}, et comme
+% \xfile{minitoc.dtx} lit alors le fichier \icom{jobname}\xfile{\bs jobname.lan}, la documentation peut être en plusieurs langues
+% (anglais et français ici) dans \xfile{minitoc.dtx}, la langue étant choisie par des constructions
+% \com{ifcase}\com{LANG}\com{relax} \ldots\ \com{or}\com{relax} \ldots\ \com{fi}. Les primitives
+% \com{relax} sont nécessaires pour éviter de mauvaises surprises.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*minitoc-fr>
+\ProvidesFile{minitoc-fr.dtx}%
+             [2018/07/12 minitoc v62 french documentation start file]
+\input{minitoc.dtx}
+%</minitoc-fr>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{Commented code of the \upack{mtcoff} package}\label{c+code+mtcoff.sty}\ipack{mtcoff}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{Code commenté du paquetage \upack{mtcoff}}\label{c+code+mtcoff.sty}\ipack{mtcoff}
+% \fi
+% \minitoc
+% \mtcskip
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Why \upack{mtcoff}?}\label{s+mtcoff+why}\ipack{mtcoff}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Pourquoi \upack{mtcoff}?}\label{s+mtcoff+why}\ipack{mtcoff}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \upack{minitoc} package~\cite{minitoc-fr,minitoc} requires that the user inserts many commands in the source
+% code of her/his document, and not only into the preamble of the document. Hence the concept of a replacement
+% package, \pack{mtcoff} (means ``minitoc off''), which substitutes to all commands and environments of the
+% \upack{minitoc} package some alternative commands and environments with the same names and syntaxes, but doing nothing
+% (except emitting some harmless warnings, for special cases). This way, to turn off easily the \upack{minitoc} package,
+% you just have to write, in the preamble of your document, something like:
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc}~\cite{minitoc-fr,minitoc} requiert que l'utilisateur insère de nombreuses commandes
+% dans le code source de son document, mais pas seulement dans le préambule du document. D'où le concept d'un
+% paquetage de remplacement, \pack{mtcoff} (c'est-à-dire, «~\emph{minitoc off}~»), qui substitue à~toutes les
+% commandes et à~tous les environnements du paquetage \upack{minitoc} d'autres commandes et environnements ayant
+% les mêmes noms et syntaxes, mais ne faisant rien (sauf émettre quelques avertissements bénins, dans des cas
+% spéciaux). De cette manière, pour inhiber facilement le paquetage \upack{minitoc}, il vous suffit d'écrire,
+% dans le préambule de votre document, quelque chose comme ceci:
+% \fi
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{usepackage}\verb|[...options...]{minitoc}|\\
+% \verb|%\usepackage{mtcoff}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% then the \upack{minitoc} package is activated with the specified options. If you modify this two lines this way:
+% \or\relax
+% alors le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est activé avec les options spécifiées. Si vous modifiez ces deux lignes de
+% la manière suivante:
+% \fi
+% \begin{verse}
+% \verb|%\usepackage[...options...]{minitoc}|\\
+% \com{usepackage}\verb|{mtcoff}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% then the \upack{minitoc} package is desactivated and all its commands and environments are ignored. This is much
+% easier, faster and safer than commenting out all the commands and environments of \upack{minitoc}. Moreover,
+% this operation is reversible.
+% \or\relax
+% alors le paquetage \upack{minitoc} est désactivé et toutes ses commandes et environnements sont ignorés. Ceci
+% est beaucoup plus facile, rapide et sûr que de mettre en commentaire toutes les commandes et environnements
+% de \upack{minitoc}. De plus, cette opération est réversible.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Identification of the package}\label{s+mtcoff+ident}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Identification du paquetage}\label{s+mtcoff+ident}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\NeedsTeXFormat}
+% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesPackage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% First, we identify the package and check the version of \LaTeX\,\footnote{This checking is not really useful for
+% the \pack{mtcoff} package itself, but it is good to check that your version of \LaTeX\ is not too old to
+% support \upack{minitoc}.}; we need the \pack{mtcmess} package to write messages with unique identifiers.
+% \or\relax
+% Tout d'abord, nous identifions le paquetage et vérifions la version de \LaTeX\,\footnote{Cette vérification
+% n'est pas vraiment utile pour le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} lui-même, mais il est bon de vérifier que votre
+% version de \LaTeX\ n'est pas trop ancienne pour supporter \upack{minitoc}.}; nous avons besoin du paquetage
+% \pack{mtcmess} pour écrire des messages avec des identificateurs uniques.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtcoff>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}%
+\ProvidesPackage{mtcoff}[2018/07/12 v62 The mtcoff package]
+\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{9}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Faking counters and dimensions}\label{s+mtcoff+faking.counters.dimensions}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Simuler compteurs et dimensions}\label{s+mtcoff+faking.counters.dimensions}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\count@}
+% \begin{macro}{\dimen@}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@minitocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskipamount}
+% \begin{macro}{\bigskipamount}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@parttocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcindent}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@secttocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcindent}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% As \upack{minitoc} declares some counters and dimensions registers, we fake them using \com{count@} or
+% \com{dimen@}. For \com{mtcskipamount}, we must use its default definition, \com{bigskipamount}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% Puisque \upack{minitoc} déclare quelques registres compteurs et dimensions, nous les simulons en utilisant
+% \com{count@} ou \com{dimen@}. Pour \com{mtcskipamount}, nous utilisons sa définition par défaut,
+% \com{bigskipamount}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\c@minitocdepth\count@
+\let\mtcindent\dimen@
+\let\mtcskipamount\bigskipamount
+\let\c@parttocdepth\count@
+\let\ptcindent\dimen@
+\let\c@secttocdepth\count@
+\let\stcindent\dimen@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@ptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\c@stc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The basic mini-table counters are provided by \com{count@}:
+% \or\relax
+% Les compteurs de mini-tables basiques sont fournis par \com{count@}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\c@mtc\count@   \let\c@ptc\count@   \let\c@stc\count@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapbeforeheads}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcgapafterheads}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The gaps before and after parttoc heads receive their default values:
+% \or\relax
+% Les intervalles avant et après les têtes de parttocs reçoivent leurs valeurs par défaut:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtcgapbeforeheads{50\p@}  \def\mtcgapafterheads{40\p@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernafterparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernafterpartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernaftersectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\kernafterminilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{F0008} must define the macros for the vertical kernings between the minitables and their before the bottom rule.
+% The default values are used. We must issue a warning if one of these macros is used.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{F0008} devons définir les macros pour les crênages verticaux placés entre les minitables et leurs filets
+% horizontaux inférieurs. Les valeurs par défaut sont utilisées. Nous devons émettre un avertissement si l'une de ces
+% macros est utilisée.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     \@ifundefined{part}{}{%
+        \def\kernafterparttoc{%
+         \mtcoffwarn@true
+         \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}%
+           {The macro \string\kernafterparttoc
+            \MessageBreak
+            should not be used out of context
+            \MessageBreak}%
+          \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
+        \def\kernafterpartlof{%
+         \mtcoffwarn@true
+         \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}%
+           {The macro \string\kernafterpartlof
+            \MessageBreak
+            should not be used out of context
+            \MessageBreak}%
+          \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
+        \def\kernafterpartlot{%
+         \mtcoffwarn@true
+         \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}%
+           {The macro \string\kernafterpartlot
+            \MessageBreak
+            should not be used out of context
+            \MessageBreak}%
+          \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
+                          }%
+     \@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+        \@ifundefined{section}{}%
+                              {%
+            \def\kernaftersecttoc{%
+                   \mtcoffwarn@true
+                   \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}%
+                     {The macro \string\kernaftersecttoc
+                      \MessageBreak
+                      should not be used out of context
+                      \MessageBreak}%
+               \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
+            \def\kernaftersectlof{%
+                   \mtcoffwarn@true
+                   \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}%
+                     {The macro \string\kernaftersectlof
+                      \MessageBreak
+                      should not be used out of context
+                      \MessageBreak}%
+               \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
+            \def\kernaftersectlot{%
+                   \mtcoffwarn@true
+                   \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}%
+                     {The macro \string\kernaftersectlot
+                      \MessageBreak
+                      should not be used out of context
+                      \MessageBreak}%
+               \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
+                              }%
+                           }%
+                           {%
+            \def\kernafterminitoc{%
+                   \mtcoffwarn@true
+                   \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}%
+                     {The macro \string\kernafterminitoc
+                      \MessageBreak
+                      should not be used out of context
+                      \MessageBreak}%
+                \kern-.5\baselineskip\kern.5ex}%
+            \def\kernafterminilof{%
+                   \mtcoffwarn@true
+                   \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}%
+                     {The macro \string\kernafterminilof
+                      \MessageBreak
+                      should not be used out of context
+                      \MessageBreak}%
+                \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.0ex}%
+            \def\kernafterminilot{%
+                   \mtcoffwarn@true
+                   \mtcPackageWarning[F0008]{mtcoff}%
+                     {The macro \string\kernafterminilot
+                      \MessageBreak
+                      should not be used out of context
+                      \MessageBreak}%
+                \kern-1.\baselineskip\kern.0ex}%
+                           }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifundefined}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltoffset}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We\imess{F0009} must define the macros for the horizontal offsets of the mini-tables.
+% The default values are used. We must issue a warning if one of these macros is used.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous\imess{F0009} devons définir les macros pour les corrections horizontales des mini-tables.
+% Les valeurs par défaut sont utilisées. Un avertissement sera émis si l'une de ces macros est utilisée.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     \@ifundefined{part}{}{%
+        \def\ptcoffset{%
+         \mtcoffwarn@true
+         \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}%
+           {The macro \string\ptcoffset
+            \MessageBreak
+            should not be used out of context
+            \MessageBreak}%
+          0pt}%
+        \def\plfoffset{%
+         \mtcoffwarn@true
+         \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}%
+           {The macro \string\plfoffset
+            \MessageBreak
+            should not be used out of context
+            \MessageBreak}%
+          0pt}%
+        \def\pltoffset{%
+         \mtcoffwarn@true
+         \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}%
+           {The macro \string\pltoffset
+            \MessageBreak
+            should not be used out of context
+            \MessageBreak}%
+          0pt}%
+                          }%
+     \@ifundefined{chapter}{%
+        \@ifundefined{section}{}%
+                              {%
+            \def\stcoffset{%
+                   \mtcoffwarn@true
+                   \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}%
+                     {The macro \string\stcoffset
+                      \MessageBreak
+                      should not be used out of context
+                      \MessageBreak}%
+               0pt}%
+            \def\slfoffset{%
+                   \mtcoffwarn@true
+                   \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}%
+                     {The macro \string\slfoffset
+                      \MessageBreak
+                      should not be used out of context
+                      \MessageBreak}%
+               0pt}%
+            \def\sltoffset{%
+                   \mtcoffwarn@true
+                   \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}%
+                     {The macro \string\sltoffset
+                      \MessageBreak
+                      should not be used out of context
+                      \MessageBreak}%
+               0pt}%
+                              }%
+                           }%
+                           {%
+            \def\mtcoffset{%
+                   \mtcoffwarn@true
+                   \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}%
+                     {The macro \string\mtcoffset
+                      \MessageBreak
+                      should not be used out of context
+                      \MessageBreak}%
+                0pt}%
+            \def\slfoffset{%
+                   \mtcoffwarn@true
+                   \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}%
+                     {The macro \string\slfoffset
+                      \MessageBreak
+                      should not be used out of context
+                      \MessageBreak}%
+                0pt}%
+            \def\mltoffset{%
+                   \mtcoffwarn@true
+                   \mtcPackageWarning[F0009]{mtcoff}%
+                     {The macro \string\mltoffset
+                      \MessageBreak
+                      should not be used out of context
+                      \MessageBreak}%
+                0pt}%
+                           }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Faking simple commands}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.simple.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Simuler les commandes simples}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.simple.commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\faketableofcontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoffigures}
+% \begin{macro}{\fakelistoftables}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcskip}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some user commands are easy to fake:
+% \or\relax
+% Certaines commandes utilisateur sont faciles à~simuler:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\faketableofcontents\relax
+\let\fakelistoffigures\relax
+\let\fakelistoftables\relax
+\let\mtcskip\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjustmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\adjuststc}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\decrementstc}
+% \begin{macro}{\incrementptc}
+% \begin{macro}{\incrementmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\incrementstc}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Basic adjustment commands are also easy:
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes d'ajustement de base sont aussi faciles:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\adjustptc}[1][1]{\relax}
+\newcommand{\adjustmtc}[1][1]{\relax}
+\newcommand{\adjuststc}[1][1]{\relax}
+\let\decrementptc\relax \let\incrementptc\relax
+\let\decrementmtc\relax \let\incrementmtc\relax
+\let\decrementstc\relax \let\incrementstc\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\partend}
+% \begin{macro}{\partbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterend}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapterbegin}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectend}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectbegin}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The following commands are not directly called by the user, in normal circumstances, but must be faked:
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes suivantes ne sont pas appelées directement par l'utilisateur, dans des circonstances normales,
+% mais il faut les simuler:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\partend\relax    \let\partbegin\relax
+\let\chapterend\relax \let\chapterbegin\relax
+\let\sectend\relax    \let\sectbegin\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Faking commands with one optional argument}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.user.commands.1opt}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Simulation des commandes ayant un \texorpdfstring{\mbox{argument}}{argument} optionnel}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.user.commands.1opt}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\gobbleopt@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The user commands with an optional argument are faked using the internal \LaTeX\ macro \com{@ifnextchar} (to get
+% the optional argument) and the new utility command \com{gobbleopt@}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les commandes utilisateur ayant un argument optionnel sont simulées en utilisant la macro interne \LaTeX{}
+% \com{@ifnextchar} (pour prendre l'argument optionnel) et la nouvelle commande utilitaire \com{gobbleopt@}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\gobbleopt@[#1]{\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \begin{macro}{\doparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dopartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\parttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\partlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Commands for part level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\doparttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\dopartlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\dopartlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\parttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\partlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\partlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dominilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\minitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\minilot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Commands for chapter level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dominitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\dominilof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\dominilot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\minitoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\minilof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\minilot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\dosectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\secttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\sectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Commands for section level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes pour les mini-tables au niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dosecttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\dosectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\dosectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\secttoc{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\sectlof{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+\def\sectlot{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\@ifnextchar}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcprepare}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Command \com{mtcprepare}:
+% \or\relax
+% Commande \com{mtcprepare}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\mtcprepare{\@ifnextchar[{\gobbleopt@}{\gobbleopt@[l]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Faking flags}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.iflags}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Simulation d'indicateurs}\label{s+mtcoff+fake.iflags}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinpartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinminilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinsecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifinsectlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We defines flags which were true when inside a mini-table of the matching type, false outside.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous définissons des indicateurs qui étaient vrais à~l'intérieur d'une mini-table du type correspondant, faux
+% à~l'extérieur.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifinparttoc\inparttocfalse%
+\newif\ifinpartlof\inpartloffalse%
+\newif\ifinpartlot\inpartlotfalse%
+\newif\ifinsecttoc\insecttocfalse%
+\newif\ifinsectlof\insectloffalse%
+\newif\ifinsectlot\insectlotfalse%
+\newif\ifinminitoc\inminitocfalse%
+\newif\ifinminilof\inminiloffalse%
+\newif\ifinminilot\inminilotfalse%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the internal commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.internal.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des commandes internes}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.internal.commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobbletwo}
+% \begin{macro}{\tf@mtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@string}
+% \begin{macro}{\appendixmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@xchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\xchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\pchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\psect}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@xpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\xpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@xsect}
+% \begin{macro}{\xsect}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We need also to disable some \upack{minitoc} commands, with \com{relax} (macros with no argument) or
+% \com{@gobbletwo} (macros with two arguments):
+% \or\relax
+% Il nous faut aussi inhiber quelques commandes de \upack{minitoc}, avec \com{relax} (macros sans argument) ou
+% \com{@gobbletwo} (macros avec arguments):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\tf@mtc\count@
+\let\mtc@string\relax
+\let\appendixmtc\relax
+\let\l@xchapter\@gobbletwo
+\let\xchapter\relax
+\let\pchapter\relax
+\let\psect\relax
+\let\l@xpart\@gobbletwo
+\let\xpart\relax
+\let\l@xsect\@gobbletwo
+\let\xsect\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the font commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.font.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Désactivation des commandes de fonte}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.font.commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\empty}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We disable the \upack{minitoc} font commands (like \com{mtcSSfont}) with \com{empty}, because some users
+% might have used:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous désactivons commandes de fonte de \upack{minitoc} (telles que \com{mtcSSfont}) avec \com{empty}, car
+% certains utilisateurs pourraient avoir utilisé:
+% \fi
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{renewcommand}\verb|{|\com{mtcSSfont}\verb|}{...}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% which will not work if we use \com{relax} here.
+% \or\relax
+% ce qui ne marcherait pas si nous utilisions \com{relax} ici.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcCfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\plffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptifont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Fonts for part level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Fontes pour les mini-tables au niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\ptcfont\empty
+\let\ptcCfont\empty
+\let\ptcSfont\empty
+\let\ptcSSfont\empty
+\let\ptcSSSfont\empty
+\let\ptcPfont\empty
+\let\ptcSPfont\empty
+\let\plffont\empty
+\let\plfSfont\empty
+\let\pltfont\empty
+\let\pltSfont\empty
+\let\ptifont\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtifont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Fonts for chapter level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Fontes pour les mini-tables au niveau chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtcfont\empty
+\let\mtcSfont\empty
+\let\mtcSSfont\empty
+\let\mtcSSSfont\empty
+\let\mtcPfont\empty
+\let\mtcSPfont\empty
+\let\mlffont\empty
+\let\mlfSfont\empty
+\let\mltfont\empty
+\let\mltSfont\empty
+\let\mtifont\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcSSSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcSPfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\slffont}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltSfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\stifont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Fonts for section level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Fontes pour les mini-tables au niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\stcfont\empty
+\let\stcSSfont\empty
+\let\stcSSSfont\empty
+\let\stcPfont\empty
+\let\stcSPfont\empty
+\let\slffont\empty
+\let\slfSfont\empty
+\let\sltfont\empty
+\let\sltSfont\empty
+\let\stifont\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffeefont}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Font for ``coffee''{\myCoffeecup} lines:
+% \or\relax
+% Fonte pour les lignes de «~pause-café~»{\myCoffeecup}:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\coffeefont\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcsetXXX.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcsetXXX.commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobbletwo}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetoffset}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitlefont}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsettitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetformat}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetfeature}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcsetrules}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These commands use two or three mandatory arguments:
+% \or\relax
+% Ces commandes utilisent deux ou trois arguments obligatoires:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtcsetdepth\@gobbletwo
+\let\mtcsetoffset\@gobbletwo
+\def\mtcsetfont#1#2#3{\empty}
+\let\mtcsettitlefont\@gobbletwo
+\let\mtcsettitle\@gobbletwo
+\def\mtcsetformat#1#2#3{\empty}
+\def\mtcsetfeature#1#2#3{\empty}
+\let\mtcsetpagenumbers\@gobbletwo
+\let\mtcsetrules\@gobbletwo
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcpolym.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcpolymXXX.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{mtcpolym.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcsetpolym.commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\DeclareRobustCommand}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymtoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcpolymlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We simulate these commands by keeping only the fourth argument; they must still be robust.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous simulons ces commandes en ne gardant que le quatrième argument; elles doivent encore être robustes.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% \DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymtoc}[4]{{#4}}
+% \DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlof}[4]{{#4}}
+% \DeclareRobustCommand{\mtcpolymlot}[4]{{#4}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the new \ucom{l@.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.l@XXX.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des nouvelles commandes \ucom{l@.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.l@XXX.commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubsubsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starparagraph}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@starsubparagraph}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \upack{minitoc} package defines the \verb|\l@starXXX| commands to format TOC entries for starred sectionning
+% commands. We reset to the unstarred version, when necessary:
+% \or\relax
+% Le paquetage \upack{minitoc} définit les commandes \verb|\l@starXXX| pour la mise en forme d'entrées de la
+% table des matières pour des commandes de sectionnement étoilées. Nous revenons à~la version non étoilée, lorsque
+% cela est nécessaire:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{part}{}{\let\l@starpart\l@part}
+\@ifundefined{chapter}{}{\let\l@starchapter\l@chapter}
+\@ifundefined{section}{}{\let\l@starsection\l@section}
+\@ifundefined{subsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsection\l@subsection}
+\@ifundefined{subsubsection}{}{\let\l@starsubsubsection\l@subsubsection}
+\@ifundefined{paragraph}{}{\let\l@starparagraph\l@paragraph}
+\@ifundefined{subparagraph}{}{\let\l@starsubparagraph\l@subparagraph}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Ignore the obsolete commands}\label{s+mtcoff+ignore.obsolete.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Ignorer les commandes obsolètes}\label{s+mtcoff+ignore.obsolete.commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobble}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstpartis}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstchapteris}
+% \begin{macro}{\firstsectionis}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We just ignore the obsolete commands (with one mandatory argument):
+% \or\relax
+% Nous ignorons simplement les commandes obsolètes (qui ont un seul argument, obligatoire):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\firstpartis\@gobble \let\firstchapteris\@gobble \let\firstsectionis\@gobble
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcselectlanguage} and \ucom{mtcloadmlo} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{mtcselectlanguage} et \ucom{mtcloadmlo}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcselectlanguage.command}\icom{mtcselectlanguage}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcloadmlo.command}\icom{mtcloadmlo}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobble}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These command have one mandatory argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Ces commandes ont un seul argument, obligatoire:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtcselectlanguage\@gobble   \let\mtcloadmlo\@gobble
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{16}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the commands for the horizontal rules}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+horiz.rules}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les filets horizontaux}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+horiz.rules}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\noptcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomtcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nostcrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\noplfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomlfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\noslfrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nopltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltrule}
+% \begin{macro}{\nosltrule}
+% % \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These commands have no argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Ces commandes n'ont aucun argument:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\ptcrule\relax
+\let\noptcrule\relax
+\let\mtcrule\relax
+\let\nomtcrule\relax
+\let\stcrule\relax
+\let\nostcrule\relax
+\let\plfrule\relax
+\let\noplfrule\relax
+\let\mlfrule\relax
+\let\nomlfrule\relax
+\let\slfrule\relax
+\let\noslfrule\relax
+\let\pltrule\relax
+\let\nopltrule\relax
+\let\mltrule\relax
+\let\nomltrule\relax
+\let\sltrule\relax
+\let\nosltrule\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{15}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the commands for the page numbers}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+page.numbers}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les numéros de page}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling+page.numbers}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\ptcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\noptcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomtcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\stcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nostcpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\plfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\noplfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomlfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\slfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\noslfpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\pltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nopltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\mltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nomltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\sltpagenumbers}
+% \begin{macro}{\nosltpagenumbers}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These commands have no argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Ces commandes n'ont aucun argument:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtcpagenumbers\relax
+\let\nomtcpagenumbers\relax
+\let\stcpagenumbers\relax
+\let\nostcpagenumbers\relax
+\let\ptcpagenumbers\relax
+\let\noptcpagenumbers\relax
+\let\mlfpagenumbers\relax
+\let\nomlfpagenumbers\relax
+\let\slfpagenumbers\relax
+\let\noslfpagenumbers\relax
+\let\plfpagenumbers\relax
+\let\noplfpagenumbers\relax
+\let\mltpagenumbers\relax
+\let\nomltpagenumbers\relax
+\let\sltpagenumbers\relax
+\let\nosltpagenumbers\relax
+\let\pltpagenumbers\relax
+\let\nopltpagenumbers\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the mini-table features commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.features}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les dispositifs des mini-tables}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.features}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We disable the commands for features (like \com{beforeparttoc}) with \com{empty}, because some users may have
+% used:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous inhibons les commandes pour les dispositifs (telles que \com{beforeparttoc}) avec \com{empty}, car
+% certains utilisateurs ont pu avoir fait:
+% \fi
+% \begin{verse}
+% \com{renewcommand}\verb|{|\com{beforeparttoc}\verb|}{...}|
+% \end{verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% which will not work if we use \com{relax} here. These commands have no argument,
+% \or\relax
+% ce qui ne marcherait pas si nous utilisions \com{relax} ici. Ces commandes n'ont aucun argument,
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforepartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterpartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\openparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\openpartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\openpartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeparttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\closepartlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\closepartlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageparttocstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlofstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagepartlotstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Commands for part level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau partie:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\beforeparttoc\empty
+\let\beforepartlof\empty
+\let\beforepartlot\empty
+\let\afterparttoc\empty
+\let\afterpartlof\empty
+\let\afterpartlot\empty
+\let\openparttoc\empty
+\let\openpartlof\empty
+\let\openpartlot\empty
+\let\closeparttoc\empty
+\let\closepartlof\empty
+\let\closepartlot\empty
+\let\thispageparttocstyle\empty
+\let\thispagepartlofstyle\empty
+\let\thispagepartlotstyle\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforeminilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\afterminilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\openminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\openminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\openminilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeminitoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeminilof}
+% \begin{macro}{\closeminilot}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageminitocstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilofstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispageminilotstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Commands for chapter level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau chapitre:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\beforeminitoc\empty
+\let\beforeminilof\empty
+\let\beforeminilot\empty
+\let\afterminitoc\empty
+\let\afterminilof\empty
+\let\afterminilot\empty
+\let\openminitoc\empty
+\let\openminilof\empty
+\let\openminilot\empty
+\let\closeminitoc\empty
+\let\closeminilof\empty
+\let\closeminilot\empty
+\let\thispageminitocstyle\empty
+\let\thispageminilofstyle\empty
+\let\thispageminilotstyle\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\beforesectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\aftersectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\opensecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\opensectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\opensectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\closesecttoc}
+% \begin{macro}{\closesectlof}
+% \begin{macro}{\closesectlot}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagesecttocstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlofstyle}
+% \begin{macro}{\thispagesectlotstyle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Commands for section level mini-tables:
+% \or\relax
+% Commandes pour des mini-tables au niveau section:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\beforesecttoc\empty
+\let\beforesectlof\empty
+\let\beforesectlot\empty
+\let\aftersecttoc\empty
+\let\aftersectlof\empty
+\let\aftersectlot\empty
+\let\opensecttoc\empty
+\let\opensectlof\empty
+\let\opensectlot\empty
+\let\closesecttoc\empty
+\let\closesectlof\empty
+\let\closesectlot\empty
+\let\thispagesecttocstyle\empty
+\let\thispagesectlofstyle\empty
+\let\thispagesectlotstyle\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling miscellaneous flags and commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.misc}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition de divers indicateurs et commandes}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.misc}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\if@mtc@longext@}
+% \begin{macro}{\iftightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifktightmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifundottedmtc}
+% \begin{macro}{\l@listof}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\chapter}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% There are some flags and commands that it is wise to declare:
+% \or\relax
+% Il y~a quelques indicateurs et commandes qu'il est bon de déclarer:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@mtc@longext@ \@mtc@longext@true
+\newif\iftightmtc \tightmtcfalse
+\newif\ifktightmtc \ktightmtcfalse
+\newif\ifundottedmtc \undottedmtcfalse
+\newif\ifmtcsecondpart \mtcsecondpartfalse
+\let\l@listof\chapter
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Caution for some commands}\label{s+mtcoff+caution}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Précaution pour certaines commandes}\label{s+mtcoff+caution}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\AtBeginDocument}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcoffwarn@}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Some\SMMZ{\lmess{F0007}} \upack{minitoc} commands should eventually be replaced if you decide to \emph{definitely}
+% stop using the \upack{minitoc} package with your document. So we declare a flag and an \com{AtEndDocument} block to signal
+% that you have used these commands:
+% \or\relax
+% Certaines\SMMZ{\lmess{F0007}} commandes de \upack{minitoc} devraient éventuellement être remplacées si vous décidez
+% d'arrêter \emph{définitivement} l'utilisation du paquetage \upack{minitoc} avec votre document. Donc nous déclarons un
+% indicateur et un bloc \com{AtEndDocument} pour signaler que vous avez utilisé ces commandes:
+% \fi
+% \lneed{6}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifmtcoffwarn@ \mtcoffwarn@false
+\AtEndDocument{\ifmtcoffwarn@
+   \mtcPackageWarningNoLine[F0007]{mtcoff}%
+      {You should scan (backwards) your .log
+       \MessageBreak
+       file to find some commands needing
+       \MessageBreak
+       to be replaced if you decide to
+       \MessageBreak
+       DEFINITELY stop using minitoc for this
+       \MessageBreak
+       document. It is more wise to keep the
+       \MessageBreak
+       \string\usepackage\space lines for minitoc and mtcoff
+       \MessageBreak
+       and to comment out only one of them}
+\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcaddpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcoffwarn@}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@ck}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Then\SMM{\lmess{F0004}\\\lmess{F0006}\\\lmess{F0005}} these commands are disabled
+% and they set the flag and give a warning (useful to get the line number):
+% \or\relax
+% Puis\SMM{\lmess{F0004}\\\lmess{F0006}\\\lmess{F0005}} ces commandes sont inhibées
+% de manière qu'elles positionnent l'indicateur et donnent un avertissement (ce
+% qui est utile pour avoir le numéro de ligne):
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcaddchapter}[1][]{\mtcoffwarn@true
+   \mtcPackageWarning[F0004]{mtcoff}%
+   {\protect\mtcaddchapter{...} should be replaced
+    \MessageBreak
+    by \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...}
+    \MessageBreak}
+\def\mtc@ck{#1}
+\ifx\mtc@ck\empty
+\else
+   \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
+\fi}
+\newcommand{\mtcaddsection}[1][]{\mtcoffwarn@true
+   \mtcPackageWarning[F0006]{mtcoff}%
+      {\protect\mtcaddsection{...} should be replaced
+       \MessageBreak
+       by \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...}
+       \MessageBreak}
+\def\mtc@ck{#1}
+\ifx\mtc@ck\empty
+\else
+     \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
+\fi}
+\newcommand{\mtcaddpart}[1][]{\mtcoffwarn@true
+   \mtcPackageWarning[F0005]{mtcoff}%
+      {\protect\mtcaddpart{...} should be replaced
+       \MessageBreak
+       by \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...}
+       \MessageBreak}
+\def\mtc@ck{#1}
+\ifx\mtc@ck\empty
+\else
+   \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
+\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling commands for ``coffee''}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.coffee.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des commandes pour les <<~pauses-café~>>}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.coffee.commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\addcoffeeline}
+% \begin{macro}{\coffeeline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@gobble}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtocline}
+% \begin{macro}{\@Undottedtoclinep}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We disable the commands relative to ``coffee'' lines, and the specific version of contents lines without leaders
+% of dots:
+% \or\relax
+% Nous inhibons les commandes concernant les lignes de contenu pour les «~pauses-café~», ainsi que la version
+% spécifique de ligne de contenu sans points de conduite:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addcoffeeline#1#2#3{\relax}
+\let\coffeeline\@gobble
+\let\l@coffee\relax
+\def\@Undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{\relax}
+\def\@Undottedtoclinep#1#2#3#4#5{\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the \texttt{mtchideinmain.{}.{}.} environments}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtchideinmainXXX.envs}
+% ^^A \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des environnements \texttt{mtchideinmain.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtchideinmainXXX.envs}
+% ^^A \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}
+% \fi
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmaintoc}
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlof}
+% \begin{environment}{mtchideinmainlot}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These environments accept one optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Ces environnements acceptent un argument optionnel:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{mtchideinmaintoc}[1][-1]{\empty}{\empty}
+\newenvironment{mtchideinmainlof}[1][-1]{\empty}{\empty}
+\newenvironment{mtchideinmainlot}[1][-1]{\empty}{\empty}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% ^^A \section{Inhibition of the \ucom{mtc@saveXXXdepth} and \ucom{mtc@restoreXXXdepth} internal commands}
+% \section{Inhibition of the \ucom{mtc@[save\BAR{}restore]XXXdepth} internal commands}
+% \or\relax
+% ^^A \section{Inhibition des commandes internes \ucom{mtc@saveXXXdepth} et \ucom{mtc@restoreXXXdepth}}
+% \section{Inhibition des commandes internes \ucom{mtc@[save\BAR{}restore]XXXdepth}}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savetocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelofdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@savelotdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restoretocdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restorelofdepth}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtc@restorelotdepth}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% We must inhibit these commands, inserted in the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files by the
+% hiding commands. So we will not have to delete these files when switching from the \upack{minitoc} package to
+% the \pack{mtcoff} package.
+% \or\relax
+% Nous devons inhiber ces commandes, insérées dans les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} et \suffix{.lot} par
+% les commandes de masquage. Ainsi nous n'aurons pas à~détruire ces fichiers lors du passage du paquetage
+% \upack{minitoc} au paquetage \pack{mtcoff}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\mtc@savetocdepth\empty
+\let\mtc@savelofdepth\empty
+\let\mtc@savelotdepth\empty
+\let\mtc@restoretocdepth\empty
+\let\mtc@restorelofdepth\empty
+\let\mtc@restorelotdepth\empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcfixglossary} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixglossary.command}\icom{mtcfixglossary}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition de la commande \ucom{mtcfixglossary}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixglossary.command}\icom{mtcfixglossary}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixglossary}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command accepts one optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcfixglossary}[1][]{\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcfixindex} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixindex.command}\icom{mtcfixindex}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition de la commande \ucom{mtcfixindex}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixindex.command}\icom{mtcfixindex}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixindex}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command accepts one optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcfixindex}[1][]{\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the \ucom{mtcfixnomenclature} command}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixnomenclature.command}\icom{mtcfixnomenclature}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition de la commande \ucom{mtcfixnomenclature}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.mtcfixnomenclature.command}\icom{mtcfixnomenclature}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcfixnomenclature}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This command accepts one optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Cette commande accepte un argument optionnel:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mtcfixnomenclature}[1][]{\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Disabling the \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.} commands}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.addstarredXXX.commands}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Inhibition des commandes \ucom{addstarred.{}.{}.}}\label{s+mtcoff+disabling.addstarredXXX.commands}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcoffwarn@}
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredchapter}
+% \begin{macro}{\addstarredsection}
+% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsline}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These\SMM{\lmess{F0002}\\\lmess{F0001}\\\lmess{F0003}} commands should be replaced by standard commands,
+% but \pack{mtcoff} simulates and gives a warning, which will be reminded at the end of document:
+% \or\relax
+% Ces\SMM{\lmess{F0002}\\\lmess{F0001}\\\lmess{F0003}} commandes devraient être remplacées par des commandes standard,
+% mais \pack{mtcoff} les simule et donne un avertissement, qui sera rappelé en fin de document:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addstarredpart#1{\mtcoffwarn@true
+   \mtcPackageWarning[F0002]{mtcoff}%
+   {\protect\addstarredpart{...} should be replaced by
+    \MessageBreak
+    \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{...}
+    \MessageBreak}
+   \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}}
+\def\addstarredchapter#1{\mtcoffwarn@true
+   \mtcPackageWarning[F0001]{mtcoff}%
+   {\protect\addstarredchapter{...} should be replaced by
+    \MessageBreak
+    \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{...}
+    \MessageBreak}
+   \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}}
+\def\addstarredsection#1{\mtcoffwarn@true
+   \mtcPackageWarning[F0003]{mtcoff}%
+   {\protect\addstarredsection{...} should be replaced by
+    \MessageBreak
+    \protect\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{...}
+    \MessageBreak}
+   \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% And the \pack{mtcoff} package is terminated.
+% \or\relax
+% Et le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} est terminé.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</mtcoff>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{Commented code of the \upack{mtcmess} package}\label{c+code+mtcmess.sty}\ipack{mtcmess}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{Code commenté du paquetage \upack{mtcmess}}\label{c+code+mtcmess.sty}\ipack{mtcmess}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageInfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\PackageInfo}
+% \begin{macro}{\MessageBreak}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarning}
+% \begin{macro}{\PackageWarning}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine}
+% \begin{macro}{\PackageWarningNoLine}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcPackageError}
+% \begin{macro}{\PackageError}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% To make easier the search of a message in the documentation\footnote{For instance, using the search facility of some PDF
+% reader utility.}, we will assign an unique identifier to each
+% message of the \upack{minitoc} and \pack{mtcoff} packages. As the standard commands for such messages do not
+% include this feature, we make extended versions, with the same syntax, plus a first optional argument:
+% \or\relax
+% Pour faciliter la recherche d'un message dans la documentation\,\footnote{Par exemple, en utilisant le système de
+% recherche d'un utilitaire de lecture de fichier PDF.}, nous attribuerons un identificateur unique à~chaque
+% message des paquetages \upack{minitoc} et \pack{mtcoff}. Puisque les commandes standard pour de tels messages
+% n'offrent pas ce dispositif, nous en faisons des versions étendues, avec la même syntaxe, plus un premier argument
+% optionnel:
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtcmess>
+\ProvidesPackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14]%
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/01]%
+\newcommand{\mtcPackageInfo}[3][]%
+   {\PackageInfo{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}}%
+\newcommand{\mtcPackageWarning}[3][]%
+   {\PackageWarning{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}}%
+\newcommand{\mtcPackageWarningNoLine}[3][]%
+   {\PackageWarningNoLine{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}}%
+\newcommand{\mtcPackageError}[4][]%
+   {\PackageError{#2}{#1\MessageBreak #3}{#4}}%
+%</mtcmess>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Hence the first line of the message will contain the package name and the unique identifier of the message.
+% \or\relax
+% Donc la première ligne du message contiendra le nom du paquetage et l'identificateur unique du message.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% These macros are defined in a separate package because they are used by at least two packages
+% (\upack{minitoc} and \pack{mtcoff}) and because they could be useful for other packages.
+% \or\relax
+% Ces macros sont définies dans un paquetage distinct car elles sont utilisées par au moins deux paquetages
+% (\upack{minitoc} et \pack{mtcoff}) et parce qu'elles pourraient être utiles pour d'autres paquetages.
+% \fi
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{Patch for the \uclass{memoir} class}\label{memoir-patch}\iclass{memoir}\ipack{mtcpatchmem}
+% This\SMMZZ{\lmess{M0001}} code must be loaded to fix an \emph{incompatibility} of the \upack{minitoc} package
+% with some recent versions of the \class{memoir} class.
+% This correction is no more necessary after the 2005/09/25 version of \class{memoir}.
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{Correction pour la classe \uclass{memoir}}\label{memoir-patch}\iclass{memoir}\ipack{mtcpatchmem}
+% Ce\SMMZZ{\lmess{M0001}} code doit être chargé pour corriger une \emph{incompatibilité} du paquetage \upack{minitoc}
+% avec certaines versions récentes de la classe \class{memoir}.
+% Cette correction n'est plus nécessaire après la version datée 2005/09/25 de \class{memoir}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mtcpatchmem>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/06/01]%
+\ProvidesPackage{mtcpatchmem}%
+   [2018/07/12 v62 package mtcpatchmem]
+\RequirePackage{mtcmess}[2006/03/14]
+\mtcPackageInfo[M0001]{mtcpatchmem}%
+   {mtcpatchmem package to patch the memoir class\@gobble}
+\renewcommand{\@m@mchapter}[1][]{%
+  \def\ch@pt@c{#1}% capture first optional arg
+   \@ifnextchar[{\@chapter}{\@chapter[]}%
+}
+\def\@chapter[#1]#2{%
+% if |\ch@pt@c| is empty, no [ was found at all. Use |#2| as
+% entry for all fields.
+   \ifx\ch@pt@c\@empty
+     \def\f@rtoc{#2}%
+     \def\f@rhdr{#2}%
+   \else
+% otherwise at least one [ was found. If |#1| is empty then only
+% one was found.
+     \let\f@rtoc\ch@pt@c
+     \ifx\@empty#1\@empty
+       \let\f@rhdr\ch@pt@c
+     \else
+       \def\f@rhdr{#1}%
+     \fi
+   \fi
+   \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne\relax
+     \if@mainmatter
+       \refstepcounter{chapter}%
+     \fi
+   \fi
+   \chaptermark{\f@rhdr}%
+   \ifartopt
+     \@makechapterhead{#2}%
+     \@afterheading
+   \else
+     \insertchapterspace
+     \if@twocolumn
+       \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
+     \else
+       \@makechapterhead{#2}%
+     \fi
+     \@afterheading
+   \fi
+   \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne\relax
+     \if@mainmatter
+       \ifanappendix
+         \addcontentsline{toc}{appendix}{%
+           \protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}%
+       \else
+         \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{%
+           \protect\chapternumberline{\thechapter}\f@rtoc}%
+       \fi
+     \else
+       \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\f@rtoc}%
+     \fi
+   \else
+     \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\f@rtoc}%
+   \fi
+   \ifheadnameref\M@gettitle{\f@rhdr}\else\M@gettitle{\f@rtoc}\fi
+}
+%</mtcpatchmem>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter{Language definition (\usuffix{.mld}) and object (\usuffix{.mlo}) files}\label{c+code+mld.files}%
+% \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter{Fichiers de définition (\usuffix{.mld}) et objets (\usuffix{.mlo}) de langue}\label{c+code+mld.files}%
+% \isuffix{.mld}\isuffix{.mlo}
+% \fi
+% \minitoc
+% \mtcskip
+% \lneed{7}
+% ^^A MINILOF BLOCK WAS HERE
+% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{open}{\vspace{-1ex}\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
+% \mtcindent=0pt
+% \minilof
+% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{open}{\empty}
+% \mtcsetfeature{minilof}{close}{\empty}
+% \setcounter{columnbadness}{9000}%
+% \raggedcolumns
+% \mtcskip
+
+% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
+
+
+
+% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
+
+
+
+
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{Overview}
+% This chapter shows the code of each \suffix{.mld} file. A \suffix{.mld} file is a \emph{minitoc language
+% definition} file, which defines the titles of the mini-tables for a given language. It contains often some
+% comments about its origin, if you need further details.
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% For some languages, I~have added a map (and a flag) of the country or area where the language is spoken, if it is not
+% trivial. The origin of each map is given by an URL to the graphic file or to the WEB page where I~found it.
+% Note that the~\cite{tlfq} and~\cite{LMP} Web sites are useful sources. Maps from~\cite{LMP} are under the
+% Creative Commons License, see~\url{http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/1.0/deed.en_GB}.
+% The site \url{http://www.expatries.senat.fr/pays.html} allows to look at the maps of many countries (but not of France!).
+% The Perry-Castañeda Library Map Collection~\cite{texasmaps} (The University of Texas at Austin,
+% \url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps}) contains countless maps.
+%
+% \reversemarginpar
+% Many
+% free maps were also found by a search in the vast Wikipedia
+% (i.e. \url{http://en.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org},
+% \url{http://de.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://simple.wikipedia.org}, etc.).
+% If you are curious and brave, you can also find many
+% maps and documents about Eastern Europa and about Asia at \url{http://www.hunmagyar.org}; that site give many
+% historical informations.
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \normalmarginpar
+% A \suffix{.mld} file is loaded either via a
+% package option in the \com{usepackage} command
+% for the \upack{minitoc} package (or a global option for the document), either via the command:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Généralités}
+% Ce chapitre montre le code de chaque fichier \suffix{.mld}. Un fichier \suffix{.mld} est un fichier
+% de définition de langue pour minitoc (\emph{minitoc language definition file}), qui définit les titres des
+% mini-tables pour une langue donnée. Il contient souvent quelques informations sur son origine, si vous avez
+% besoin de plus de détails.
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% Pour certaines langues, j'ai ajouté une carte (et un drapeau) du pays ou des zones où la langue est parlée, si ce n'est pas trivial.
+% L'origine de chaque carte est donnée par un URL vers le fichier graphique ou vers la page où je l'ai trouvée.
+% Notez que les sites Web~\cite{tlfq} et~\cite{LMP} sont des sources utiles. Les cartes de~\cite{LMP} sont sous la
+% \emph{Creative Commons License}, voir~\url{http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-sa/1.0/deed.fr}.
+%
+% Le site \url{http://www.expatries.senat.fr/pays.html} permet de regarder les cartes de nombreux
+% pays (mais pas de la France!). La \emph{Perry-Castañeda Library Map Collection}~\cite{texasmaps} (Université du Texas
+% à~Austin, \url{http://www.lib.utexas.edu/maps}) contient d'innombrables cartes.
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% De
+% nombreuses cartes publiques proviennent aussi de la Wikipédia ({\froff\url{http://en.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org},
+% \url{http://de.wikipedia.org}, \url{http://simple.wikipedia.org}, etc.}).
+% Si vous êtes curieux et courageux, vous pourrez aussi trouver de nombreux documents et cartes concernant l'Europe de
+% l'Est et l'Asie sur le site \url{http://www.hunmagyar.org}; il donne de nombreuses informations historiques.
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \normalmarginpar
+% Un fichier \suffix{.mld} est chargé soit via une option du paquetage
+% dans la commande \com{usepackage} pour le paquetage \upack{minitoc}
+% (ou une  option globale pour le document),
+% soit via la commande:
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \begin{verse}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\marg{language}
+% \or\relax
+% \com{mtcselectlanguage}\marg{langue}
+% \fi
+% \end{verse}
+% \end{macro}
+% \lneed{10}
+% \begin{macro}{\ptctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\plftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\plttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\mlttitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\stctitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\slftitle}
+% \begin{macro}{\slttitle}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Each \suffix{.mld} file must define the nine following commands (for the mini-tables of contents,
+% mini-lists of figures and mini-lists of tables, at the part, chapter and section levels):
+% \or\relax
+% Chaque fichier \suffix{.mld} doit définir les neuf commandes suivantes (pour les mini-tables des
+% matières, les mini-listes des figures et les mini-listes des tableaux, aux niveaux partie, chapitre et section):
+% \fi
+% \begin{multicols}{3}
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \com{ptctitle}
+% \item \com{plftitle}
+% \item \com{plttitle}\columnbreak
+% \item \com{mtctitle}
+% \item \com{mlftitle}
+% \item \com{mlttitle}\columnbreak
+% \item \com{stctitle}
+% \item \com{slftitle}
+% \item \com{slttitle}
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{multicols}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Many \suffix{.mld} files require special fonts adequate for the corresponding language; as this is a
+% language-dependent issue, the user must set up the correct language and font context for each language, like using
+% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,BEP}, the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}, the
+% \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} system~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX}, the \pack{Antomega}
+% system~\cite{antomega}, the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}~\cite{bangtex},
+% \ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}\devnag{} for \TeX~\cite{devanagari},
+% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}, \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi}{\protect\FARSINOTE}, \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani},
+% \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} et \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o}, \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex},
+% or \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex} packages.
+% Note that it is often the \virage\emph{english} name of the language which is used to name the corresponding
+% \suffix{.mld} file.
+% \or\relax
+% De nombreux fichiers \suffix{.mld} ont besoin de fontes spéciales adéquates pour la langue
+% correspondante; comme ceci est une question concernant la langue, l'utilisateur doit mettre en place un contexte
+% linguistique et typographique correct pour la langue correspondante, en utilisant par exemple le paquetage
+% \pack{babel}~\cite{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,BEP}, le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}, le système
+% \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX}, le système \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega},
+% les paquetages \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}, \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}~\cite{bangtex},
+% \ipacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}\devnag{} for \TeX~\cite{devanagari},
+% \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop},
+% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi}\,{\protect\FARSINOTE}, \pack{guarani}~\cite{guarani}, \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam}
+% et \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o},
+% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex} ou \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex}.
+% Notez que c'est souvent le nom en \virage\emph{anglais} de la langue qui est utilisé pour nommer le fichier \suffix{.mld}
+% correspondant.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{environment}{filecontents}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% But for some oriental languages\,\footnote{Mainly for chinese, farsi (iranian), hangûl (korean), hanja (korean), japanese,
+% \lopt{malayalam-omega}, thai, and russian variants.}, the source of the titles
+% use some \virage\emph{exotic encodings}, difficult to manipulate
+% in a \suffix{.dtx} file, the \suffix{.mld} file is then just a wrapper loading
+% a \suffix{.mlo} file\,\footnote{The extension
+% \suffix{.mlo} means \emph{minitoc language object}.}, not generated by the
+% \suffix{.dtx} files in the current version of \upack{minitoc} package.
+% To go around this limitation, the \xfile{minitoc.ins} file uses
+% \env{filecontents} environments to generate the \suffix{.mlo} files.
+% The adequate input encoding must be set up
+% by the user \emph{before}\virage{} loading the \suffix{.mld} file via the \com{mtcselectlanguage} command.
+% \or\relax
+% Mais pour certaines langues orientales\,\footnote{Principalement pour les variantes du chinois, du farsi
+% (iranien), du coréen (hangûl et hanja), du japonais, du \lopt{malayalam-omega}, du thaï et du russe.}, le code source des
+% titres utilise quelques \virage\emph{codages exotiques},
+% difficiles à~manipuler dans un fichier \suffix{.dtx}, le fichier \suffix{.mld} est alors une simple enveloppe qui charge
+% un fichier \suffix{.mlo}\,\footnote{Le suffixe \suffix{.mlo} signifie \emph{minitoc language object},
+% objet minitoc de langue.}, qui n'est pas engendré par les fichiers \suffix{.dtx} dans la version actuelle du
+% paquetage \upack{minitoc}.
+% Pour contourner cette limitation, le fichier \xfile{minitoc.ins} utilise simplement des
+% environnements \env{filecontents} pour engendrer les fichiers \suffix{.mlo}.
+% Le codage d'entrée adéquat doit être mis en place par l'utilisateur \emph{avant}\virage{} le
+% chargement du fichier \suffix{.mld} via la commande \com{mtcselectlanguage}.
+% \fi
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \lneed{4}
+% {\bfseries
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Since\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}} version~\#49,
+% the \upack{minitoc} package checks the presence of the
+% \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} file
+% (and of the \emph{language}\suffix{.mlo} file if necessary) for each language option of the package,
+% before validating the option. If a \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} file is missing, the corresponding language option
+% is not enabled and a warning message is written in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file. But the presence of
+% the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory, because english is the default language.
+% If some \suffix{.mld} or \suffix{.mlo} files are missing,
+% the list of this files is given in the \suffix{.log} file. You should find these files on CTAN.
+% \or\relax
+% À~partir\SMM{\lmess{I0050}\\\lmess{I0051}\\\lmess{E0036}\\\lmess{E0038}\\\lmess{W0094}} de la version~\#49,
+% le paquetage \upack{minitoc} vérifie la présence du fichier
+% \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} (et du fichier \emph{langue}\suffix{.mlo} si nécessaire) pour
+% chaque option de langue du paquetage, avant de valider l'option. Si un fichier \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo}
+% est manquant, l'option de langue correspondante n'est pas validée et un message d'avertissement est écrit dans
+% le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}. Mais la présence du fichier \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire, car
+% l'anglais est la langue par défaut.
+% Si certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} ou \suffix{.mlo} sont manquants,
+% la liste de ces fichiers est écrite dans le fichier \suffix{.log}. Vous devriez pouvoir les trouver sur CTAN.
+% \fi
+% \par} ^^A %BF>
+% ^^A \clearpage ^^A %% BEGIN OF LANGUAGE SECTIONS
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Acadian'' language: \uxfile{acadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadian}\ixfile{acadian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~acadian~>>: \uxfile{acadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadian}\ixfile{acadian.mld}
+% \fi
+
+% \lneed{5}
+% \reversemarginpar
+%    \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The
+% \lopt{acadian} language\,\FAC{}
+% is just french, so we load the \xfile{french.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
+% \or\relax
+% La
+% langue \lopt{acadian} (acadien)\,\FAC{} est simplement du français,
+% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*acadian>
+\ProvidesFile{acadian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
+%</acadian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Acadien'' language: \uxfile{acadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadien}\ixfile{acadien.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~acadien~>>: \uxfile{acadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+acadien}\ixfile{acadien.mld}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The
+% ``\lopt{acadien}'' language\,\FAC{}
+% is just french (``\texttt{acadien}'' is the french term for ``\texttt{acadian}''), so we load the \xfile{french.mld}
+% file (see section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
+% \or\relax
+% La
+% <<~\lopt{acadien}~>>\,\FAC{}
+% est simplement du français (<<~\texttt{acadien}~>> est le terme français pour <<~\texttt{acadian}~>>, en anglais),
+% donc nous chargons le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*acadien>
+\ProvidesFile{acadien.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
+%</acadien>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Afrikaan'' language: \uxfile{afrikaan.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaan}\ixfile{afrikaan.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~afrikaan~>>: \uxfile{afrikaan.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaan}\ixfile{afrikaan.mld}
+% \fi
+
+% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{33.33333333mm}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{afrikaan}'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in South Africa and Namibia, it has dutch origins; compare with
+% section~\vref{s+mld+dutch}.
+% See also \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/afrikaans.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}. }
+% come from the \xfile{dutch.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and \name{Stoffel}{Lombard})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}:
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \lneed{5}
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{afrikaan}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée en Afrique du Sud et en Namibie, elle a des origines
+% néerlandaises; comparez avec la section~\vref{s+mld+dutch}.
+% Voir aussi \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/afrikaans.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{dutch.dtx}
+% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et \name{Stoffel}{Lombard})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}:
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*afrikaan>
+\ProvidesFile{afrikaan.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Afrikaan(s) titles from dutch.dtx (babel) by Braams, Johannes~L.
+\def\ptctitle{Inhoudsopgawe}%
+\def\plftitle{Lys van figure}%
+\def\plttitle{Lys van tabelle}%
+\def\mtctitle{Inhoudsopgawe}%
+\def\mlftitle{Lys van figure}%
+\def\mlttitle{Lys van tabelle}%
+\def\stctitle{Inhoudsopgawe}%
+\def\slftitle{Lys van figure}%
+\def\slttitle{Lys van tabelle}%
+%</afrikaan>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Afrikaans'' language: \uxfile{afrikaans.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaans}\ixfile{afrikaans.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~afrikaans~>>: \uxfile{afrikaans.mld}}\label{s+mld+afrikaans}\ixfile{afrikaans.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The term ``\lopt{afrikaans}'' is a synonym of ``\lopt{afrikaan}'', so we just load \xfile{afrikaan.mld}
+% (see section~\vref{s+mld+afrikaan}):
+% \or\relax
+% Le terme <<~\lopt{afrikaans}~>> est un synonyme de <<~\lopt{afrikaan}~>>,
+% donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{afrikaan.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+afrikaan}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*afrikaans>
+\ProvidesFile{afrikaans.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{afrikaan}%
+%</afrikaans>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{17.25352113mm}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Albanian'' language: \uxfile{albanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+albanian}\ixfile{albanian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~albanian~>>: \uxfile{albanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+albanian}\ixfile{albanian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The
+% albanian language (\emph{shqip}) is spoken in Albania and some regions of Macedonia, Montenegro, Serbia and Kosovo.
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{albanian}'' language are taken from the \xfile{albanian.dtx} file
+% (with a contribution of \name{Adi}{Zaimi}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,albanian}:
+% \or\relax
+% La
+% langue albanaise (\emph{shqip}) est parlée en Albanie et quelques régions de Macédoine, du Montenegro,
+% de Serbie et du Kosovo.
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{albanian}~>> (albanais) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{albanian.dtx}
+% (avec une contribution de \name{Adi}{Zaimi})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,albanian}:
+% \fi
+
+% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
+
+
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*albanian>
+\ProvidesFile{albanian.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Albanian titles from albabian.dtx (babel).
+%% Adi Zaimi (zami1st at yahoo.com / adizaimi at yahoo.com).
+\def\ptctitle{P\"ermbajta}%
+\def\plftitle{Figurat}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabelat}%
+\def\mtctitle{P\"ermbajta}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figurat}%
+\def\mltitle{Tabelat}%
+\def\stctitle{P\"ermbajta}%
+\def\slftitle{Figurat}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabelat}%
+%</albanian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{13.15625mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``American'' language: \uxfile{american.mld}}\label{s+mld+american}\ixfile{american.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~american~>>: \uxfile{american.mld}}\label{s+mld+american}\ixfile{american.mld}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The
+% ``\lopt{american}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}''
+% (the languages themselves have some differences,
+% like the hyphenation rules, some spellings and phonetics),
+% so we just load \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \or\relax
+% La
+% langue <<~\lopt{american}~>> (américain) est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>
+% (les langues elles-mêmes ont quelques différences,
+% par exemple les règles de coupure des mots, l'orthographe et la prononciation),
+% donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{english.mld} (voir
+% la section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*american>
+\ProvidesFile{american.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
+%</american>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Arab'' language: \uxfile{arab.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab}\ixfile{arab.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~arab~>>: \uxfile{arab.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab}\ixfile{arab.mld}
+% \fi
+
+% \vspace*{1\baselineskip}
+
+% ^^A (ARAB
+% ^^A ARAB)
+% \par\reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{arab}'' language (\textsf{al-'Arabiyyah}) are taken
+% from the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}
+% (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), which should be used, with the associated fonts.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{arab}~>> (arabe) (\textsf{al-'Arabiyyah}) sont tirés
+% du paquetage \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}
+% (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées.
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The arabic language is spoken in:
+% Algeria, Bahrain, Egypt, Iraq, Jordan, Kuwait, Lebanon, Libya, Mauritania, Morocco, Oman, Palestinian territories,
+% Qatar, Saudi Arabia, Sudan, Syria, Tunisia, United Arab Emirates, Western Sahara, Yemen by a majority; it is also
+% the liturgical language of Islam.
+% \or\relax
+% La langue arabe est parlée dans les pays suivants:
+% Algérie, Bahrain, Égypte, Irak, Jordanie, Koweït, Liban, Libye, Mauritanie, Maroc, Oman, Territoires Palestiniens,
+% Qatar, Arabie Saoudite, Soudan, Syrie, Tunisie, Émirats Arabes Unis, Sahara Occidental, Yémen par une
+% majorité de la population; c'est aussi la langue liturgique de l'Islam
+%.\looseness=-1
+% \fi
+% \par\normalmarginpar
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*arab>
+\ProvidesFile{arab.mld}[1999/03/16]%
+%% Arabic titles. Needs arabic fonts (cf. documentation of arabtex)
+\def\ptctitle{al-mu.htawayAtu}%
+\def\plftitle{qA'imaTu a.s-.suwari}%
+\def\plttitle{qA'imaTu al-^gadAwili}%
+\def\mtctitle{al-mu.htawayAtu}%
+\def\mlftitle{qA'imaTu a.s-.suwari}%
+\def\mlttitle{qA'imaTu al-^gadAwili}%
+\def\stctitle{al-mu.htawayAtu}%
+\def\slftitle{qA'imaTu a.s-.suwari}%
+\def\slttitle{qA'imaTu al-^gadAwili}%
+%</arab>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Arab2'' language: \uxfile{arab2.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab2}\ixfile{arab2.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~arab2~>>: \uxfile{arab2.mld}}\label{s+mld+arab2}\ixfile{arab2.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcArabTok}
+% \begin{macro}{\tcArabTok}
+% \begin{macro}{\a@tok}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{arab2}'' language are taken from the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex}
+% (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}), which should be used, with the associated fonts.
+% It is a variant of the ``\lopt{arab}'' language.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{arab2}~>> (arabe, variante) sont tirés du
+% paquetage \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}),
+% qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*arab2>
+\ProvidesFile{arab2.mld}[2006/03/31]%
+%% Arabic titles. Variant. Needs arabic fonts (cf. documentation of arabtex)
+{\makeatletter\global\let\mtcArabTok\a@tok}%
+\def\ptctitle{\mtcArabTok(al-muHtawayAtu)}%
+\def\plftitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu aS-Suwari)}%
+\def\plttitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu al-GadAwili)}%
+\def\mtctitle{\mtcArabTok(al-muHtawayAtu)}%
+\def\mlftitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu aS-Suwari)}%
+\def\mlttitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu al-GadAwili)}%
+\def\stctitle{\mtcArabTok(al-muHtawayAtu)}%
+\def\slftitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu aS-Suwari)}%
+\def\slttitle{\mtcArabTok(qAQAimaTu al-GadAwili)}%
+%</arab2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Arabi'' language: \uxfile{arabi.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabi}\ixfile{arabi.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~arabi~>>: \uxfile{arabi.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabi}\ixfile{arabi.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\R}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{arabi}'' language are taken from the \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} package~\cite{arabi}
+% (by \name{Youssef}{Jabri}),
+% which should be used, with the associated fonts.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{arabi}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}
+% (par \name{Youssef}{Jabri}), qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*arabi>
+\ProvidesFile{arabi.mld}[2006/07/27]%
+%% Arabic titles (strings taken from arabi.ldf; to be used with arabi)
+%% Needs arabic fonts (cf. documentation of the Arabi package, by Youssef Jabri)
+\def\ptctitle{\R{\alef\lam\fa\ha\ra\seen}}%
+\def\plftitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\alefhamza\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}%
+\def\plttitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\R{\alef\lam\fa\ha\ra\seen}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\alefhamza\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}%
+\def\stctitle{\R{\alef\lam\fa\ha\ra\seen}}%
+\def\slftitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\alefhamza\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}%
+\def\slttitle{\R{\qaf\alef\yahamza\meem\T\space\alef\lam\jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}%
+%</arabi>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Arabic'' language: \uxfile{arabic.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabic}\ixfile{arabic.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~arabic~>>: \uxfile{arabic.mld}}\label{s+mld+arabic}\ixfile{arabic.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{arabic}'' language is a synomym for ``\lopt{arab}'', so we just load \xfile{arab.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+arab}):
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{arabic}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{arab}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{arab.mld}
+% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+arab}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*arabic>
+\ProvidesFile{arabic.mld}[2005/02/10]\mtcselectlanguage{arab}%
+%</arabic>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Armenian'' language: \uxfile{armenian.mld}}\label{s+mld+armenian}\ixfile{armenian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~armenian~>>: \uxfile{armenian.mld}}\label{s+mld+armenian}\ixfile{armenian.mld}
+% \fi
+
+% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
+
+% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{6.213285133mm}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{armenian}'' language (\emph{hayeren}) are taken from the \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX} package~\cite{armtex}
+% (by \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} and \name{Vartan}{Akopian}), which should be
+% used, with the associated fonts.
+% The armenian language is spoken in Armenia, in a part of Azerbaidjan and in the armenian diaspora.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{armenian}~>> (arménien, \emph{hayeren}) sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex}
+% (de \name{Sergueï}{Dachian}, \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan} et \name{Vartan}{Akopian}),
+% qui devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes associées.
+% La langue arménienne est parlée en Arménie, dans une partie de l'Azerbaïdjan et dans la diaspora arménienne.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*armenian>
+\ProvidesFile{armenian.mld}[1999/06/28]%
+%% Armenian titles from ArmTeX. Sergueï Dachian (Serguei.Dachian@univ-lemans.fr),
+%% Arnak Dalalyan & Vartan Akopian
+\def\ptctitle{Bovandakuthyun}%
+\def\plftitle{Patkerneri cank}%
+\def\plttitle{Aghyusakneri cank}%
+\def\mtctitle{Bovandakuthyun}%
+\def\mlftitle{Patkerneri cank}%
+\def\mlttitle{Aghyusakneri cank}%
+\def\stctitle{Bovandakuthyun}%
+\def\slftitle{Patkerneri cank}%
+\def\slttitle{Aghyusakneri cank}%
+%</armenian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Australian'' language: \uxfile{australian.mld}}\label{s+mld+australian}\ixfile{australian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~australian~>>: \uxfile{australian.mld}}\label{s+mld+australian}\ixfile{australian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The 
+% ``\lopt{australian}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'', so we just load \xfile{english.mld}
+% (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \or\relax
+% La
+% langue <<~\lopt{australian}~>> (australien) est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{4}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*australian>
+\ProvidesFile{australian.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
+%</australian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Austrian'' language: \uxfile{austrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+austrian}\ixfile{austrian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~austrian~>>: \uxfile{austrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+austrian}\ixfile{austrian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% For
+% the mini-table titles, the ``\lopt{austrian}'' language is like the ``\lopt{german}'' language, so we load
+% \xfile{german.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+german}):
+% \or\relax
+% Pour
+% les titres des mini-tables, la langue <<~\lopt{austrian}~>> (autrichien) est comme la langue <<~\lopt{german}~>>
+% (allemand), donc nous chargeons \xfile{german.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+german}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{4}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*austrian>
+\ProvidesFile{austrian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{german}%
+%</austrian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Bahasa'' language: \uxfile{bahasa.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasa}\ixfile{bahasa.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~bahasa~>>: \uxfile{bahasa.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasa}\ixfile{bahasa.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{bahasa}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasai}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasai.mld}
+% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}):
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{bahasa}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \xfile{bahasai.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bahasa>
+\ProvidesFile{bahasa.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasai}%
+%</bahasa>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Bahasai'' language: \uxfile{bahasai.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasai}\ixfile{bahasai.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~bahasai~>>: \uxfile{bahasai.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasai}\ixfile{bahasai.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.321112516\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.678887484\iwidth}
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% of the mini-tables for the ``\lopt{bahasai}'' language\,\footnote{Bahasa is spoken in Indonesia and Malaysia,
+% with different pronunciations and titles but the same writing. Bahasai is the indonesian variant. See
+% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/indonesie-1_langues.htm} in~\cite{tlfq}.} (bahasa indonesia / bahasa meyalu) are
+% taken from the file \xfile{bahasa.dtx} (by \name{Jörg}{Knappen} and \name{Terry}{Mart})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasa}.
+% Specific fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}. The word ``bahasa'' means ``language'' in bahasa.
+% For other names for this language, see sections~\vref{s+mld+bahasa} and \vrefrange{s+mld+indon}{s+mld+indonesian}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% des mini-tables pour la langue <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>\,\footnote{Le bahasa est parlé en Indonésie et en Malaisie,
+% avec des prononciations et des titres différents mais avec la même écriture. Bahasai est la variante indonésienne.
+% Voir \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/asie/indonesie-1_langues.htm} dans~\cite{tlfq}.}
+%  (bahasa indonesia / bahasa meyalu) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{bahasa.dtx} (de \name{Jörg}{Knappen}
+% et \name{Terry}{Mart}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasa}.
+% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}. Le mot «~bahasa~» signifie
+% «~langage~» en bahasa. Pour d'autres noms pour cette langue, voir les sections~\vref{s+mld+bahasa} et
+% \vrefrange{s+mld+indon}{s+mld+indonesian}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bahasai>
+\ProvidesFile{bahasai.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Bahasa Indonesia titles from bahasa.dtx in the babel package.
+%% Knappen, Jörg & Mart, Terry
+\def\ptctitle{Daftar Isi}%
+\def\plftitle{Daftar Gambar}%
+\def\plttitle{Daftar Tabel}%
+\def\mtctitle{Daftar Isi}%
+\def\mlftitle{Daftar Gambar}%
+\def\mlttitle{Daftar Tabel}%
+\def\stctitle{Daftar Isi}%
+\def\slftitle{Daftar Gambar}%
+\def\slttitle{Daftar Tabel}%
+%</bahasai>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \lneed{18}
+% \section{``Bahasam'' language: \uxfile{bahasam.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasam}\ixfile{bahasam.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \lneed{20}
+% \section{Langue <<~bahasam~>>: \uxfile{bahasam.mld}}\label{s+mld+bahasam}\ixfile{bahasam.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.293413174\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.706586826\iwidth}
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \lneed{4}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% of the mini-tables for the ``\lopt{bahasam}'' language (Bahasa Malaysia)\,\footnote{Spoken in Indonesia and Malaysia, with
+% different pronunciations and titles
+% but the same writing. Bahasam is the malaysian variant.} are taken from the file \xfile{bahasam.dtx}
+% (by \name{Jörg}{Knappen}, \name{Terry}{Mart} and \name{Bob}{Margolis})
+% in the
+% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasam}.
+% Specific fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bahasa}. For other names for this language, see
+% sections~\vref{s+mld+malay} and~\vref{s+mld+meyalu}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% des mini-tables pour la langue <<~\lopt{bahasam}~>> (Bahasa Malaysia)\,\footnote{Parlée en Indonésie et en Malaisie, avec des
+% prononciations et des titres différents mais avec la même écriture. Bahasam est la variante malaisienne.} sont
+% tirés du fichier \xfile{bahasam.dtx}
+% (de \name{Jörg}{Knappen}, \name{Terry}{Mart} et \name{Bob}{Margolis})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,bahasam}.
+% Des
+% fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasa}. Pour d'autres noms pour cette
+% langue, voir les sections~\vref{s+mld+malay} et~\vref{s+mld+meyalu}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bahasam>
+\ProvidesFile{bahasam.mld}[2006/12/19]%
+%% Bahasa Malaysia titles from bahasam.dtx in the babel package
+%% Knappen, Jörg & Mart, Terry & Margolis, Bob
+\def\ptctitle{Kandungan}%
+\def\plftitle{Senarai Gambar}%
+\def\plttitle{Senarai Jadual}%
+\def\mtctitle{Kandungan}%
+\def\mlftitle{Senarai Gambar}%
+\def\mlttitle{Senarai Jadual}%
+\def\stctitle{Kandungan}%
+\def\slftitle{Senarai Gambar}%
+\def\slttitle{Senarai Jadual}%
+%</bahasam>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \lneed{4}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Bangla'' language: \uxfile{bangla.mld}}\label{s+mld+bangla}\ixfile{bangla.mld}
+% \suppressfloats
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~bangla~>>: \uxfile{bangla.mld}}\label{s+mld+bangla}\ixfile{bangla.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}%
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}%
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}%
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}%
+
+% \vspace*{1.\baselineskip}
+
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0pt}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \noindent\begin{samepage}
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{bangla}'' (\lopt{bengali}) language\,\footnote{Spoken in Bangladesh and some parts of India,
+% like Occidental Bengal~(19), Orissa~(21), Assam~(18), Bihar~(10) and Tripura~(16).} are taken from
+% the \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX} package~\cite{bangtex} (by \name{Palash~Baran}{Pal}); they need specific fonts
+% (the bengali alphabet is derived from sanskrit).
+% \par\end{samepage}
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{bangla}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée au Bangladesh et dans certaines parties de
+% l'Inde, comme le Bengale Occidental~(19), Orissa~(21), Assam~(18), Bihar~(10) et Tripura~(16).} (\lopt{bengali}) sont simplement tirés
+% du paquetage \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}~\cite{bangtex} (de \name{Palash~Baran}{Pal});
+% ils ont besoin de fontes spécifiques (l'alphabet bengalî est dérivé du sanskrit).
+% \fi
+% \par\normalmarginpar
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bangla>
+\ProvidesFile{bangla.mld}[2006/03/31]%
+%% Bangla titles from BangTeX. Needs specific fonts.
+\def\ptctitle{suu\*c*ipotRo}%        <-----
+\def\plftitle{cho\*b*ir ta\*l*ika}%
+\def\plttitle{cho\*k*er ta\*l*ika}%
+\def\mtctitle{suu\*c*i}%
+\def\mlftitle{cho\*b*ir ta\*l*ika}%
+\def\mlttitle{cho\*k*er ta\*l*ika}%
+\def\stctitle{suu\*c*i}%
+\def\slftitle{cho\*b*ir ta\*l*ika}%
+\def\slttitle{cho\*k*er ta\*l*ika}%
+%</bangla>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Basque'' language: \uxfile{basque.mld}}\label{s+mld+basque}\ixfile{basque.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~basque~>>: \uxfile{basque.mld}}\label{s+mld+basque}\ixfile{basque.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
+
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{14mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{basque}'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in the basque country, in the north of Spain and
+% south-west of France.} (\emph{euskara}) are taken from the \xfile{basque.dtx} file
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,basque}, by \name{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria}
+% and \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}, with help from \name{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona}.
+% It seems that 8~bits fonts are preferable.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{basque}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée au Pays Basque, qui est situé dans le nord de l'Espagne
+% et le sud-ouest de la France.} (\emph{euskara}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{basque.dtx} dans le paquetage
+% \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,basque}, par \name{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria} et \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}, avec
+% l'aide de \name{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona}.
+% Il semble que des fontes 8-bits soient préférables.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*basque>
+\ProvidesFile{basque.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Basque titles from basque.dtx (babel).
+%% Aguirregabiria, Juan M. <wtpagagj at lg.ehu.es> WWW: http://tp.lc.ehu.es/jma.html
+%% & Sanchez, Julio <jsanchez at gmv.es>,
+%% and help from Izaola Azkona, Zunbeltz <wmbizazz at lg dot ehu>
+%% Needs special fonts.
+\def\ptctitle{Gaien Aurkibidea}%
+\def\plftitle{Irudien Zerrenda}%
+\def\plttitle{Taulen Zerrenda}%
+\def\mtctitle{Gaien Aurkibidea}%
+\def\mlftitle{Irudien Zerrenda}%
+\def\mlttitle{Taulen Zerrenda}%
+\def\stctitle{Gaien Aurkibidea}%
+\def\slftitle{Irudien Zerrenda}%
+\def\slttitle{Taulen Zerrenda}%
+%</basque>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Bengali'' language: \uxfile{bengali.mld}}\label{s+mld+bengali}\ixfile{bengali.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~bengali~>>: \uxfile{bengali.mld}}\label{s+mld+bengali}\ixfile{bengali.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{bengali}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{bangla}'' language, so we load
+% the file \xfile{bangla.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+bangla}):
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{bengali}~>> (bengalî) est synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{bangla}~>> (bânglâ),
+% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{bangla.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bangla}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bengali>
+\ProvidesFile{bengali.mld}[2007/07/23]\mtcselectlanguage{bangla}%
+%</bengali>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Bicig'' language: \uxfile{bicig.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig}\ixfile{bicig.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~bicig~>>: \uxfile{bicig.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig}\ixfile{bicig.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\bcg}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{bicig}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bicig} is a written form of the mongolian language.
+% It is also known as Uighur or Bichig. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uighur}.} are taken
+% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. See also
+% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig2}{s+mld+bicig3}, and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bicig}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bicig}~>> est une forme écrite de la langue mongole.
+% Il est aussi connu sous le nom de ouïghour (\emph{uighur} en anglais) ou bichig.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uighur}.} sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}.
+% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi les
+% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig2}{s+mld+bicig3} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bicig>
+\ProvidesFile{bicig.mld}[1999/03/16]%
+%% Mongol (Bicig) titles needs mongol fonts
+\def\ptctitle{\bcg{GarciG}}%
+\def\plftitle{\bcg{zuraG-un zigsaalt}}%
+\def\plttitle{\bcg{k"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\bcg{GarciG}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\bcg{zuraG-un zigsaalt}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\bcg{k"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
+\def\stctitle{\bcg{GarciG}}%
+\def\slftitle{\bcg{zuraG-un zigsaalt}}%
+\def\slttitle{\bcg{k"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
+%</bicig>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Bicig2'' language: \uxfile{bicig2.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig2}\ixfile{bicig2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{bicig2}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bicig}, or uighur, is a written form of the mongolian language,
+% \lopt{bicig2} is a variant. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uighur2}.} are taken
+% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. See also
+% sections~\vref{s+mld+bicig}, and~\vref{s+mld+bicig3}, and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~bicig2~>>: \uxfile{bicig2.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig2}\ixfile{bicig2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bicig2}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bicig}~>>, ou ouïghour, est une forme écrite de la langue mongole,
+% \lopt{bicig2} en est une variante. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uighur2}.} sont
+% tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi les
+% sections~\vref{s+mld+bicig}, \vref{s+mld+bicig3} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bicig2>
+\ProvidesFile{bicig2.mld}[2005/11/16]%
+%% Mongol (Bicig2) titles (needs mongol fonts)
+\def\ptctitle{garcag}%
+\def\plftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}%
+\def\plttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}%
+\def\mtctitle{garcag}%
+\def\mlftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}%
+\def\mlttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}%
+\def\stctitle{garcag}%
+\def\slftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}%
+\def\slttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}%
+%</bicig2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{9}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Bicig3'' language: \uxfile{bicig3.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig3}\ixfile{bicig3.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{bicig3}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bicig}, or uighur, is a written form of the mongolian language, \lopt{bicig3} is a
+% variant. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uighur3}.} are taken
+% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts. See also
+% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bicig2} and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \section{Langue <<~bicig3~>>: \uxfile{bicig3.mld}}\label{s+mld+bicig3}\ixfile{bicig3.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bicig3}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bicig}~>>, ou ouïghour, est une forme écrite de la langue mongole,
+% \lopt{bicig3} en est une variante. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uighur}.} sont
+% tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi les
+% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bicig2} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bicig3>
+\ProvidesFile{bicig3.mld}[2006/03/31]%
+%% Mongol (Bicig3) titles (needs mongol fonts)
+\def\ptctitle{aguulag=a}%
+\def\plftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}%
+\def\plttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}%
+\def\mtctitle{aguulag=a}%
+\def\mlftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}%
+\def\mlttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}%
+\def\stctitle{aguulag=a}%
+\def\slftitle{zirug-un zigsagalda}%
+\def\slttitle{kuisunukdu-yin zigsagalda}%
+%</bicig3>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{41.11842105mm}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Bithe'' language: \uxfile{bithe.mld}}\label{s+mld+bithe}\ixfile{bithe.mld}
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{bithe}'' language\,\footnote{The \lopt{bithe} is a written form of the \lopt{manju} variant of the mongolian language.} are taken
+% from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts.
+% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+manju} and~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
+% The Manju writing, or \emph{bithe} system is a close relative
+% of the  Mongolian system; the basical letter shapes are the
+% same. Yet for Manju, a set of diacritics (\emph{dots and circles})
+% was designed to eliminate all the ambiguities of Mongolian.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~bithe~>>: \uxfile{bithe.mld}}\label{s+mld+bithe}\ixfile{bithe.mld}
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{bithe}~>>\,\footnote{Le <<~\lopt{bithe}~>> est une forme écrite de la
+% variante <<~\lopt{manju}~>> de la langue mongole.} sont
+% tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques.
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+manju} et~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
+% L'écriture Manju (Manchou), ou le système \emph{bithe}, est une proche
+% parente du système Mongol; les formes de base des lettres sont les mêmes. Mais pour le Manju, un
+% ensemble de signes diacritiques (\emph{points et cercles}) a
+% été conçu pour éliminer toutes les ambiguïtés du Mongol.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.386473430\iwidth}
+% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.613526570\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
+
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bithe>
+\ProvidesFile{bithe.mld}[2005/11/16]%
+%% Manju (bithe) titles (needs mongol fonts)
+\def\ptctitle{garcag}%
+\def\plftitle{zirug-un? afaha}%
+\def\plttitle{kuisunukdu-yin? afaha}%
+\def\mtctitle{garcag}%
+\def\mlftitle{zirug-un? afaha}%
+\def\mlttitle{kuisunukdu-yin? afaha}%
+\def\stctitle{garcag}%
+\def\slftitle{zirug-un? afaha}%
+\def\slttitle{kuisunukdu-yin? afaha}%
+%</bithe>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Brazil'' language: \uxfile{brazil.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazil}\ixfile{brazil.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~brazil~>>: \uxfile{brazil.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazil}\ixfile{brazil.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
+
+% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.4\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.6\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{17.5mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{brazil}'' language (\emph{português brasileiro} or
+% \emph{português do Brasil})\,\footnote{It is the main portuguese dialect spoken in Brazil. Note that these titles are
+% \emph{different} in Brazil and in Portugal. \namea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima} contributed to brazilian translations.
+% See section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}.} are taken from the \xfile{portuges.dtx} file (for portugese titles by
+% \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}) in the \pack{babel}
+% package~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}:
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{brazil}~>> (brésilien, \emph{português brasileiro} ou
+% \emph{português do Brasil})\,\footnote{C'est le dialecte portugais principal parlé au Brésil.
+% Notez que ces
+% titres sont \emph{différents} au Brésil et au Portugal. \namea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima} a contribué aux
+% traductions brésiliennes. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{portuges.dtx}
+% (de \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete} pour les titres portugais)
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}:
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*brazil>
+\ProvidesFile{brazil.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Portugues (brazil) titles, from portuges.dtx (babel)
+%% Ramalhete, Jose Pedro & "de Lima", Arnaldo Viegas
+\def\ptctitle{Sum\'ario}%
+\def\plftitle{Lista de Figuras}%
+\def\plttitle{Lista de Tabelas}%
+\def\mtctitle{Sum\'ario}%
+\def\mlftitle{Lista de Figuras}%
+\def\mlttitle{Lista de Tabelas}%
+\def\stctitle{Sum\'ario}%
+\def\slftitle{Lista de Figuras}%
+\def\slttitle{Lista de Tabelas}%
+%</brazil>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Brazilian'' language: \uxfile{brazilian.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazilian}\ixfile{brazilian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~brazilian~>>: \uxfile{brazilian.mld}}\label{s+mld+brazilian}\ixfile{brazilian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{brazilian}'' language is just like ``\lopt{brazil}'', so we just load \xfile{brazil.mld}
+% (see section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}):
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{brazilian}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{brazil}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \xfile{brazil.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*brazilian>
+\ProvidesFile{brazilian.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{brazil}%
+%</brazilian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Breton'' language: \uxfile{breton.mld}}\label{s+mld+breton}\ixfile{breton.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~breton~>>: \uxfile{breton.mld}}\label{s+mld+breton}\ixfile{breton.mld}
+% \fi
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{breton}'' language (\emph{brezhoneg})\,\footnote{Spoken as a local celtic dialect in french Brittany.
+% See also \url{http://www.ofis-bzh.org}, \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-fr.jpg} and
+% \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-br.jpg}.} are taken from the
+% \xfile{breton.dtx} file (by \name{Christian}{Rolland}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,breton}:
+% \or\relax
+% \lneed{2}
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{breton}~>> (\emph{brezhoneg})\,\footnote{Parlée comme dialecte celtique local en Bretagne (France). Voir aussi \url{http://www.ofis-bzh.org},
+% \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-fr.jpg} et
+% \url{http://www.geobreizh.com/breizh/images/cartes/carte-bretagne-langue-br.jpg}.}
+% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{breton.dtx} (de \name{Christian}{Rolland}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,breton}:
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*breton>
+\ProvidesFile{breton.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Breton titles from breton.dtx (babel) by Rolland, Christian
+\def\ptctitle{Taolenn}%
+\def\plftitle{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}%
+\def\plttitle{Listenn an taolenno\`u}%
+\def\mtctitle{Taolenn}%
+\def\mlftitle{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}%
+\def\mlttitle{Listenn an taolenno\`u}%
+\def\stctitle{Taolenn}%
+\def\slftitle{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}%
+\def\slttitle{Listenn an taolenno\`u}%
+%</breton>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``British'' language: \uxfile{british.mld}}\label{s+mld+british}\ixfile{british.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~british~>>: \uxfile{british.mld}}\label{s+mld+british}\ixfile{british.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The
+% ``\lopt{british}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'', so we just load \xfile{english.mld}
+% (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \or\relax
+% La
+% langue <<~\lopt{british}~>> est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier
+% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*british>
+\ProvidesFile{british.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
+%</british>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \lneed{5}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Bulgarian'' language: \uxfile{bulgarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarian}\ixfile{bulgarian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~bulgarian~>>: \uxfile{bulgarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarian}\ixfile{bulgarian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.317738791\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.682261209\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
+
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{macro}{\cyr}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{bulgarian}'' language (\emph{b\u{a}lgarski}) are taken from the \xfile{bulgarian.dtx}
+% (adapted from russian by \name{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov}) file in the
+% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,bulgarian}; they require
+% specific cyrillic fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarianb}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{bulgarian}~>> (bulgare, \emph{b\u{a}lgarski}) sont tirés
+% du fichier \xfile{bulgarian.dtx} (adapté du russe par \name{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov}) dans le
+% paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,bulgarian}; ils ont
+% besoin de fontes cyrilliques spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarianb}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bulgarian>
+\ProvidesFile{bulgarian.mld}[2007/03/08]%
+%% Bulgarian titles from bulgarian.dtx (babel) (needs special cyrillic fonts)
+%% by Boshnakov, Georgi N. <georgi.boshnakov at umist.ac.uk>
+\def\ptctitle{%
+   {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
+\def\plftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ %
+    \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
+\def\plttitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ %
+    \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
+\def\mtctitle{%
+   {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
+\def\mlftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ %
+    \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
+\def\mlttitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ %
+    \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
+\def\stctitle{%
+   {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
+\def\slftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ %
+    \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
+\def\slttitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ %
+    \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
+%</bulgarian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Bulgarianb'' language: \uxfile{bulgarianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarianb}\ixfile{bulgarianb.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~bulgarianb~>>: \uxfile{bulgarianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+bulgarianb}\ixfile{bulgarianb.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\cyr}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{bulgarianb}'' (upper bulgarian) language are taken from the \xfile{russianb.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg}, and \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya})
+% of the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb};
+% they require specific cyrillic fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarian}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{bulgarianb}~>> (haut bulgare) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russianb.dtx}
+% (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb};
+% ils requièrent des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+bulgarian}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*bulgarianb>
+\ProvidesFile{bulgarianb.mld}[2006/03/06]%
+%% Upper bulgarian titles from russianb.dtx. Needs cyrillic fonts for upper bulgarian.
+\def\ptctitle{%
+ {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
+\def\plftitle{% Figuri
+  {\cyr \CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri}}%
+\def\plttitle{% Tablici
+  {\cyr \CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri}}%
+\def\mtctitle{% Sydyrzhanie
+ {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
+\def\mlftitle{% Figurite
+  {\cyr \CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri}}%
+\def\mlttitle{% Tablici
+  {\cyr \CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri}}%
+\def\stctitle{% Sydyrzhanie
+ {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
+\def\slftitle{% Figuri
+  {\cyr \CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri}}%
+\def\slttitle{% Tablici
+  {\cyr \CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri}}%
+%</bulgarianb>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{13}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Buryat'' language: \uxfile{buryat.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat}\ixfile{buryat.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~buryat~>>: \uxfile{buryat.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat}\ixfile{buryat.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \begin{macro}{\mnr}
+% \begin{macro}{\sh}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{buryat}'' language\,\footnote{Spoken in some regions of Mongolia and in the Buryatia republic, near
+% Lake Baikal. } are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}.
+% This language requires specific fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{buryat}~>>\,\footnote{Parlée dans certaines régions de la Mongolie et dans la république
+% de Buryatie, près du lac Baïkal. } (bouriate) sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}.
+% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*buryat>
+\ProvidesFile{buryat.mld}[1999/03/16]%
+%% Buryat titles. Needs special fonts.
+\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Gar{\sh}ag}}%
+\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}%
+\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}%
+\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Gar{\sh}ag}}%
+\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}%
+\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}%
+\def\stctitle{{\mnr Gar{\sh}ag}}%
+\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}%
+\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}%
+%</buryat>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Buryat2'' language: \uxfile{buryat2.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat2}\ixfile{buryat2.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~buryat2~>>: \uxfile{buryat2.mld}}\label{s+mld+buryat2}\ixfile{buryat2.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mnr}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{buryat2}'' language (a variant for the ``\lopt{buryat}'' language, see section~\vref{s+mld+buryat})
+% are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. This language requires specific fonts.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{buryat2}~>> (une variante du langage «~\lopt{buryat}~», voir la section~\vref{s+mld+buryat})
+% sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Cette langue
+% requiert des fontes spécifiques. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+mongol}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*buryat2>
+\ProvidesFile{buryat2.mld}[1999/03/16]%
+%% Buryat2 titles. Needs special fonts.
+\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}%
+\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}%
+\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}%
+\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}%
+\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}%
+\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}%
+\def\stctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}%
+\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zuraga"i jagsaalt}}%
+\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"ag"at"a"i jagsaalt}}%
+%</buryat2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Canadian'' language: \uxfile{canadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadian}\ixfile{canadian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~canadian~>>: \uxfile{canadian.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadian}\ixfile{canadian.mld}
+% \fi
+
+%
+% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount}
+%
+
+% \afterpage{\clearpage}
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+%    \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The
+% ``\lopt{canadian}'' language \textcolor{red}{(note the final ``i\emph{a}n'')} is just the \loptd{english} language spoken
+% in Canada. We just load the file \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \or\relax
+% La
+% langue <<~\lopt{canadian}~>> \textcolor{red}{(notez le <<~i\emph{a}n~>> final)} est simplement la langue \emph{anglaise}
+% (\loptd{english}) parlée au Canada.
+% Nous chargeons simplement le fichier \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*canadian>
+\ProvidesFile{canadian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
+%</canadian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Canadien'' language: \uxfile{canadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadien}\ixfile{canadien.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~canadien~>>: \uxfile{canadien.mld}}\label{s+mld+canadien}\ixfile{canadien.mld}
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The
+% ``\lopt{canadien}'' language \textcolor{red}{(note the final ``i\emph{e}n'')} is just the \lopt{french} language spoken
+% in Canada. We just load the file \xfile{french.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
+% \or\relax
+% La
+% langue <<~\lopt{canadien}~>> \textcolor{red}{(notez le <<~i\emph{e}n~>> final)} est simplement la langue \emph{française}
+% (\lopt{french}) parlée au Canada. Nous chargeons simplement le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la
+% section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*canadien>
+\ProvidesFile{canadien.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
+%</canadien>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{19.14587332mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Castillan'' language: \uxfile{castillan.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillan}\ixfile{castillan.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~castillan~>>: \uxfile{castillan.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillan}\ixfile{castillan.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{castillan}'' language is better known as ``\lopt{spanish}'',
+% but is spoken mainly in Castile,
+% a part of central Spain. We
+% just load the \xfile{spanish.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}):
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{castillan}~>> est mieux connue sous le nom de <<~\lopt{spanish}~>>
+% (espagnol),
+% mais est parlée principalement
+% en Castille, une partie du centre de l'Espagne. Nous chargeons simplement le fichier
+% \xfile{spanish.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*castillan>
+\ProvidesFile{castillan.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{spanish}%
+%</castillan>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Castillian'' language: \uxfile{castillian.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillian}\ixfile{castillian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~castillian~>>: \uxfile{castillian.mld}}\label{s+mld+castillian}\ixfile{castillian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% ``Castillian'' is just the english name for ``castillan'', so
+% we just load the \xfile{spanish.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}):
+% \or\relax
+% <<~Castillian~>> est juste le nom anglais du castillan, donc
+% nous chargeons simplement le fichier
+% \xfile{spanish.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*castillian>
+\ProvidesFile{castillian.mld}[2005/07/01]\mtcselectlanguage{spanish}%
+%</castillian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Catalan'' language: \uxfile{catalan.mld}}\label{s+mld+catalan}\ixfile{catalan.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~catalan~>>: \uxfile{catalan.mld}}\label{s+mld+catalan}\ixfile{catalan.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.502354788\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.497645212\iwidth}
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \lneed{3}
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{catalan}'' language (\emph{català, valencià})\,\footnote{Spoken in Catalunya, the eastern part of Spain,
+% around Barcelona, and in Roussillon, in France. }
+% are taken from the \xfile{catalan.dtx} file (adapted from spanish by \name{Gonçal}{Badenes} and \name{Jörg}{Knappen})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,catalan}:
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{catalan}~>> (\emph{català, valencià})\,\footnote{Parlée en Catalogne,
+% la partie orientale de l'Espagne, autour
+% de Barcelone, et dans le Roussillon, en France. } sont tirés du
+% fichier \xfile{catalan.dtx} (adapté de l'espagnol par \name{Gonçal}{Badenes}
+% et \name{Jörg}{Knappen}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,catalan}:
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*catalan>
+\ProvidesFile{catalan.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Catalan titles from catalan.dtx (babel) (Badenes, Gonçal)
+\def\ptctitle{\'Index}%
+\def\plftitle{\'Index de figures}%
+\def\plttitle{\'Index de taules}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\'Index}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figures}%
+\def\mlttitle{Taules}%
+\def\stctitle{\'Index}%
+\def\slftitle{Figures}%
+\def\slttitle{Taules}%
+%</catalan>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Chinese1'' language: \uxmldo{chinese1}}\label{s+mld+chinese1}\ixmldo{chinese1}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~chinese1~>>: \uxmldo{chinese1}}\label{s+mld+chinese1}\ixmldo{chinese1}
+% \fi
+
+
+% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
+
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{6.25mm}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% There
+% are several variants for the chinese language.
+% The ``\lopt{chinese1}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{Bg5.cap} file
+% in the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+chinese2}.
+% See~\cite{china-h} about the history of China and the chinese language.
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm}%
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{chinese1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{chinese1.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Il y~a
+% plusieurs variantes pour la langue chinoise.
+% La langue <<~\lopt{chinese1}~>> (chinois première variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{Bg5.cap} du
+% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+chinese2}.
+% Voir~\cite{china-h} sur l'histoire de la Chine et de la langue chinoise.
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{chinese1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{chinese1.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*chinese1>
+\ProvidesFile{chinese1.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{chinese1}%
+%% From file Bg5.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs with LaTeX2e
+%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%% Chinese captions: character set: Big 5, encoding: Big 5
+%</chinese1>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Chinese2'' language: \uxmldo{chinese2}}\label{s+mld+chinese2}\ixmldo{chinese2}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~chinese2~>>: \uxmldo{chinese2.mld}}\label{s+mld+chinese2}\ixmldo{chinese2}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{chinese2}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{Bg5.cpx} file in the \pack{CJK}
+% system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+chinese1}.
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{chinese2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{chinese2.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{chinese2}~>> (chinois seconde variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{Bg5.cpx} dans
+% le système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Voir aussi la
+% section~\vref{s+mld+chinese1}.
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{chinese2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{chinese2.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*chinese2>
+\ProvidesFile{chinese2.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{chinese2}%
+%% From file Bg5.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs with LaTeX2e
+%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%% Chinese captions: character set: Big 5, encoding: Big 5, preprocessed
+%</chinese2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{12}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Croatian'' language: \uxfile{croatian.mld}}\label{s+mld+croatian}\ixfile{croatian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~\lopt{croatian}~>>: \uxfile{croatian.mld}}\label{s+mld+croatian}\ixfile{croatian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.556818182\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.443181818\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
+
+% \vspace*{1\baselineskip}
+
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{25mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{croatian}'' language (\emph{hrvatski})  are taken from the file \xfile{croatian.dtx} file
+% (by \namea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,croatian}:
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~croatian~>> (croate, \emph{hrvatski}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{croatian.dtx}
+% (de \namea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,croatian}:
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*croatian>
+\ProvidesFile{croatian.mld}[2007/12/18]%
+%% Croatian titles from croatian.dtx (babel). Pai\'{c}, Alan.
+\def\ptctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
+\def\plftitle{Popis slika}%
+\def\plttitle{Popis tablica}%
+\def\mtctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
+\def\mlftitle{Popis slika}%
+\def\mlttitle{Popis tablica}%
+\def\stctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
+\def\slftitle{Slike}%
+\def\slttitle{Tablice}%
+%</croatian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Czech'' language: \uxfile{czech.mld}}\label{s+mld+czech}\ixfile{czech.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~czech~>>: \uxfile{czech.mld}}\label{s+mld+czech}\ixfile{czech.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
+
+% \vspace*{1\baselineskip}
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{czech}'' language (\emph{\v{c}e\v{s}tina, \v{c}esk\'{y} jazyk}) are taken from the file \xfile{czech.dtx}
+% (contributions by \namea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,czech}:
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{czech}~>> (tchèque, \emph{\v{c}e\v{s}tina, \v{c}esk\'{y} jazyk}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{czech.dtx}
+% (contributions de \namea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,czech}:
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*czech>
+\ProvidesFile{czech.mld}[2007/12/04]%
+%% Czech titles from czech.dtx (babel). Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek, Milo\v{s} V.
+\def\ptctitle{Obsah}%
+\def\plftitle{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}%
+\def\plttitle{Seznam tabulek}%
+\def\mtctitle{Obsah}%
+\def\mlftitle{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}%
+\def\mlttitle{Seznam tabulek}%
+\def\stctitle{Obsah}%
+\def\slftitle{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}%
+\def\slttitle{Seznam tabulek}%
+%</czech>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Danish'' language: \uxfile{danish.mld}}\label{s+mld+danish}\ixfile{danish.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~danish~>>: \uxfile{danish.mld}}\label{s+mld+danish}\ixfile{danish.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.362204724\iwidth}
+% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.637795276\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{18.9189892mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{danish}'' language\,\footnote{The danish (\emph{dansk}) language is spoken in Denmark, in the Faeroe
+% Islands and in Greenland.} are taken from the \xfile{danish.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Henning}{Larsen})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,danish}:
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{danish}~>> (danois\,\footnote{Le danois (\emph{dansk}) est parlé au Danemark, dans les Îles
+% Féroé et au Groenland.}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{danish.dtx}
+% (de \name{Henning}{Larsen})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,danish}:
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*danish>
+\ProvidesFile{danish.mld}[2007/12/18]%
+%% Danish titles from danish.dtx (babel). Larsen, Henning (larsen@cernvm.cern.ch)
+\def\ptctitle{Indhold}%
+\def\plftitle{Figurer}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabeller}%
+\def\mtctitle{Indhold}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figurer}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabeller}%
+\def\stctitle{Indhold}%
+\def\slftitle{Figurer}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabeller}%
+%</danish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Devanagari'' language: \uxfile{devanagari.mld}}\label{s+mld+devanagari}\ixfile{devanagari.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~devanagari~>>: \uxfile{devanagari.mld}}\label{s+mld+devanagari}\ixfile{devanagari.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{6.845238095mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{devanagari}'' language are taken from the \xfile{devanagari.sty} and \xfile{captions.dn} files
+% (by \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith},
+% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} and \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk})
+% in the Devan\=agar\={\i}
+% package~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}). See also section~\vref{s+mld+hindi}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{devanagari}~>> (hindi) sont tirés des fichiers \xfile{devanagari.sty} et \xfile{captions.dn}
+% (de \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith},
+% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} et \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk})
+% dans le paquetage Devan\=agar\={\i}~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}).
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+hindi}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\dn}
+% \begin{macro}{\qva}
+% \begin{macro}{\re}
+% \begin{macro}{\rs}
+% \begin{macro}{\8}
+% \begin{macro}{\2}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Specific fonts are required.
+% The home page of the package is~\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}. See also~\cite{hindi99} about the hindi language.
+% \or\relax
+% Des fontes spécifiques sont requises.
+% La page Web du paquetage est~{\froff\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}}.
+% Voir aussi~\cite{hindi99} sur la langue hindi.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*devanagari>
+\ProvidesFile{devanagari.mld}[2006/08/25]%
+%% Devanagari (hindi) titles from devanagari.sty by
+%% Pandey, Anshuman & Radhakrishnan, C.~V. & Wagner, Zden\v{e}k &
+%% Smith, John & Carmody, Kevin & Mahoney, Richard & Wujastyk, Dominik
+\def\ptctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}%
+\def\plftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}%
+\def\plttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}%
+\def\mtctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}%
+\def\mlftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}%
+\def\mlttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}%
+\def\stctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}%
+\def\slftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}%
+\def\slttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}%
+%</devanagari>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Dutch'' language: \uxfile{dutch.mld}}\label{s+mld+dutch}\ixfile{dutch.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~dutch~>>: \uxfile{dutch.mld}}\label{s+mld+dutch}\ixfile{dutch.mld}
+% \fi
+% ^^A (DU
+% ^^A DU)
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth} ^^A % same sizes! (.381017882)
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth} ^^A % same sizes! (.618982118)
+
+% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
+
+% \lneed{3}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{dutch}'' language\,\footnote{The dutch language (\emph{nederlands}) is spoken in
+% the Netherlands and a part of Belgium.} are taken from the \xfile{dutch.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}:
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{dutch}~>> (néerlandais, \emph{nederlands})\,\footnote{La langue néerlandaise
+% est parlée aux Pays-Bas et dans une partie de la Belgique.} sont tirés
+% du fichier \xfile{dutch.dtx} (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}) dans le
+% paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,dutch}:
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*dutch>
+\ProvidesFile{dutch.mld}[2007/12/18]%
+%% Dutch titles from dutch.dtx (babel) (Braams, Johannes~L.)
+\def\ptctitle{Inhoudsopgave}%
+\def\plftitle{L"yst van figuren}%
+\def\plttitle{L"yst van tabellen}%
+\def\mtctitle{Inhoudsopgave}%
+\def\mlftitle{L"yst van figuren}%
+\def\mlttitle{L"yst van tabellen}%
+\def\stctitle{Inhoudsopgave}%
+\def\slftitle{L"yst van figuren}%
+\def\slttitle{L"yst van tabellen}%
+%</dutch>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``English'' language: \uxfile{english.mld}}\label{s+mld+english}\ixfile{english.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~english~>>: \uxfile{english.mld}}\label{s+mld+english}\ixfile{english.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\loptd{english}'' language are taken from the \xfile{english.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}.
+% \emph{The\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} presence of the \xfile{english.mld} file is mandatory, because english is the default language.}
+%
+% \reversemarginpar
+% See
+% also sections~\vref{s+mld+american},\ABK \vref{s+mld+australian},\ABK
+% \vref{s+mld+british},\ABK \vref{s+mld+canadian},\ABK \vref{s+mld+newzealand},\ABK \vref{s+mld+UKenglish},\ABK
+% and~\vref{s+mld+USenglish}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\loptd{english}~>> (anglais) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{english.dtx}
+% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}.
+% \emph{Notez que la\SMMZZ{\lmess{E0036}} présence du fichier \xfile{english.mld} est obligatoire, car l'anglais est la langue par défaut.}
+%
+% \reversemarginpar
+% Voir
+% aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+american},\ABK \vref{s+mld+australian},\ABK \vref{s+mld+british},\ABK
+% \vref{s+mld+canadian},\ABK \vref{s+mld+newzealand},\ABK \vref{s+mld+UKenglish}\ABK et~\vref{s+mld+USenglish}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*english>
+\ProvidesFile{english.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% English titles from english.dtx (babel) (Braams, Johannes~L.)
+\def\ptctitle{Table of Contents}%
+\def\plftitle{List of Figures}%
+\def\plttitle{List of Tables}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Contents}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figures}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tables}%
+\def\stctitle{Contents}%
+\def\slftitle{Figures}%
+\def\slttitle{Tables}%
+%</english>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+
+% ^^A (ENG
+% ^^A ENG)
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``English1'' language: \uxfile{english1.mld}}\label{s+mld+english1}\ixfile{english1.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~english1~>>: \uxfile{english1.mld}}\label{s+mld+english1}\ixfile{english1.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\ifnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\value}
+% \begin{macro}{\Roman}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{english1}'' language come from the \xfile{english.dtx} file
+% (written by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, with some adaptations for the part-level titles.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{english1}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{english.dtx}
+% (écrit par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, avec quelques adaptations pour les titres
+% au niveau partie.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*english1>
+\ProvidesFile{english1.mld}[2006/03/30]%
+%% English titles from english.dtx (babel) Braams, Johannes~L.
+%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD)
+\def\ptctitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax
+  Table of Contents of the First Part\relax
+  \else Table of Contents of Part~\Roman{part}\fi}%
+\def\plftitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax
+  List of Figures in the First Part\relax
+  \else List of Figures in Part~\Roman{part}\fi}%
+\def\plttitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax
+  List of Tables in the First Part\relax
+  \else List of Tables in Part~\Roman{part}\fi}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Contents}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figures}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tables}%
+\def\stctitle{Contents}%
+\def\slftitle{Figures}%
+\def\slttitle{Tables}%
+%</english1>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``English2'' language: \uxfile{english2.mld}}\label{s+mld+english2}\ixfile{english2.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~english2~>>: \uxfile{english2.mld}}\label{s+mld+english2}\ixfile{english2.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcEnglishIIpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifcase}
+% \begin{macro}{\value}
+% \begin{macro}{\Roman}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{english2}'' language are again taken from the \xfile{english.dtx} file
+% (written by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, with adaptations at the part level.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{english2}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{english.dtx}
+% (écrit par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,english}, avec adaptations au niveau partie.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*english2>
+\ProvidesFile{english2.mld}[2006/03/30]%
+%% English titles from english.dtx (babel) Braams, Johannes~L.
+%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD)
+\def\mtcEnglishIIpart{\ifcase\value{part}%
+\or the First Part\or the Second Part\or the Third Part
+\or the Fourth Part\or the Fifth Part\or the Sixth Part
+\or the Seventh Part\or the Eighth Part\or the Ninth Part
+\or the Tenth Part\or the Eleventh Part\or the Twelfth Part
+\or the Thirteenth Part\or the Fourteenth Part \or the Fifteenth Part
+\or the Sixteenth Part \or the Seventeenth Part \or the Eighteenth Part
+\or the Nineteenth Part\or the Twentieth Part \else Part~\Roman{part}\fi}
+\def\ptctitle{Contents of \mtcEnglishIIpart}
+\def\plftitle{List of Figures in \mtcEnglishIIpart}
+\def\plttitle{List of Tables in \mtcEnglishIIpart}
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Contents}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figures}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tables}%
+\def\stctitle{Contents}%
+\def\slftitle{Figures}%
+\def\slttitle{Tables}%
+%</english2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Esperant'' language: \uxfile{esperant.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperant}\ixfile{esperant.mld}
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{esperant}'' (espéranto) language are taken from the \xfile{esperanto.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba} and \name{Jörg}{Knappen})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,esperanto}.
+% The esperanto artificial language was created in the 1877--1885 years
+% by Doctor~\namea{Ludwig~Lejzer}{Zamenhof\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Zamenhof}\footnote{See
+% \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/L.L._Zamenhof},
+% \url{http://uea.org/} and \url{http://www.esperanto-france.org/} for more information; his first names are
+% sometimes spelled ``Ludvic Lazarus'' or ``Louis-Lazare'', with small variations.} (1859--1917) of Warsaw, Poland.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~esperant~>>: \uxfile{esperant.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperant}\ixfile{esperant.mld}
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{esperant}~>> (espéranto) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{esperanto.dtx}
+% (de \name{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba} et \name{Jörg}{Knappen})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,esperanto}.
+% La langue artificielle esperanto a été créée dans les années 1877--1885 par le docteur
+% \namea{Ludwig~Lejzer}{Zamenhof\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Zamenhof}\,{\froff\footnote{Voir
+% \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zamenhof},
+% \url{http://uea.org/} et \url{http://www.esperanto-france.org/} pour plus d'informations. Ses prénoms sont
+% parfois écrits \og~Ludvic Lazarus~\fg{} ou \og~Louis-Lazare~\fg, avec quelques variantes.}} (1859--1917) de
+% Varsovie en Pologne.
+% \fi
+%
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*esperant>
+\ProvidesFile{esperant.mld}[2006/12/19]%
+%% Esperanto titles from esperanto.dtx (babel) Ruiz-Altaba, Marti & Knappen, Jörg
+\def\ptctitle{Enhavo}%
+\def\plftitle{Listo de figuroj}%
+\def\plttitle{Listo de tabeloj}%
+\def\mtctitle{Enhavo}%
+\def\mlftitle{Listo de figuroj}%
+\def\mlttitle{Listo de tabeloj}%
+\def\stctitle{Enhavo}%
+\def\slftitle{Listo de figuroj}%
+\def\slttitle{Listo de tabeloj}%
+%</esperant>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Esperanto'' language: \uxfile{esperanto.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperanto}\ixfile{esperanto.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~esperanto~>>: \uxfile{esperanto.mld}}\label{s+mld+esperanto}\ixfile{esperanto.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{esperanto}'' and ``\lopt{esperant}'' languages are synonyms, so we just load the
+% \xfile{esperant.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+esperant}):
+% \or\relax
+% Les langues <<~\lopt{esperanto}~>> et <<~\lopt{esperant}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier
+% \xfile{esperant.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+esperant}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*esperanto>
+\ProvidesFile{esperanto.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{esperant}%
+%</esperanto>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Estonian'' language: \uxfile{estonian.mld}}\label{s+mld+estonian}\ixfile{estonian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~estonian~>>: \uxfile{estonian.mld}}\label{s+mld+estonian}\ixfile{estonian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{estonian}'' language\,\footnote{Estonian (\emph{eesti keel}) is \emph{not} a baltic language, but a
+% language from the uralian family.} are taken from the \xfile{estonian.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Enn}{Saar})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,estonian}:
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{estonian}~>> (estonien\,\footnote{L'estonien (\emph{eesti keel}) \emph{n'est pas} une langue
+% balte, mais une langue de la famille ouralienne.}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{estonian.dtx}
+% (de \name{Enn}{Saar})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,estonian}:
+% \fi
+
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*estonian>
+\ProvidesFile{estonian.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Estonian titles from estonian.dtx (babel) Saar, Enn
+\def\ptctitle{Sisukord}%
+\def\plftitle{Joonised}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabelid}%
+\def\mtctitle{Sisukord}%
+\def\mlftitle{Joonised}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabelid}%
+\def\stctitle{Sisukord}%
+\def\slftitle{Joonised}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabelid}%
+%</estonian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Ethiopia'' language: \uxfile{ethiopia.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopia}\ixfile{ethiopia.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~ethiopia~>>: \uxfile{ethiopia.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopia}\ixfile{ethiopia.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.447761194\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.552238806\iwidth}
+
+%
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.642441860mm}
+% \begin{macro}{\eth@doaltchar}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{ethiopia}'' language (amharic, \emph{\=amari\"{n}\"{n}a}) are taken from the \pack{ethiop} package~\cite{ethiop}
+% (written by \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer}, and \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}). Specific
+% fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopian2}. for the repartition of
+% the various ethiopian dialects.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{ethiopia}~>> (éthiopien, amarique, \emph{amaregna}) sont tirés du paquetage \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}
+% (écrit par \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer} et \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}).
+% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopian2}.
+% pour la répartition des divers dialectes éthiopiens.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% \normalmarginpar
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ethiopia>
+\ProvidesFile{ethiopia.mld}[1999/03/16]%
+%% Ethopian titles. Needs special fonts.
+\def\ptctitle{yezate}%
+\def\plftitle{%
+    ya\eth@doaltchar{85}`elo\eth@doaltchar{109} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}%
+\def\plttitle{%
+    yasane\eth@doaltchar{176}ra\eth@doaltchar{149} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}%
+\def\mtctitle{yezate}%
+\def\mlftitle{%
+    ya\eth@doaltchar{85}`elo\eth@doaltchar{109} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}%
+\def\mlttitle{%
+    yasane\eth@doaltchar{176}ra\eth@doaltchar{149} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}%
+\def\stctitle{yezate}%
+\def\slftitle{%
+    ya\eth@doaltchar{85}`elo\eth@doaltchar{109} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}%
+\def\slttitle{%
+    yasane\eth@doaltchar{176}ra\eth@doaltchar{149} mAwe\eth@doaltchar{187}}%
+%</ethiopia>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Ethiopian'' language: \uxfile{ethiopian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian}\ixfile{ethopian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~ethiopian~>>: \uxfile{ethiopian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian}\ixfile{ethopian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{ethiopian}'' language is just a synonym for the ``\lopt{ethiopia}'' language, so we just load the
+% \xfile{ethiopia.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}).
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{ethiopian}~>> (éthiopien) est un simple synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{ethiopia}~>>,
+% donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier \xfile{ethiopia.mld}
+% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ethiopian>
+\ProvidesFile{ethiopian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{ethiopia}%
+%</ethiopian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Ethiopian2'' language: \uxfile{ethiopian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian2}\ixfile{ethiopian2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{ethiopian2}'' language (for Omega) are taken from the \pack{ethiop} package~\cite{ethiop}
+% (by \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer}, and \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}).
+% Specific fonts are needed. See also section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~ethiopian2~>>: \uxfile{ethiopian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ethiopian2}\ixfile{ethiopian2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{ethiopian2}~>> (éthiopien pour Omega) sont tirés
+% du paquetage \pack{ethiop}~\cite{ethiop}
+% (de \name{Berhanu}{Beyene}, \name{Manfred}{Kudlek}, \name{Olaf}{Kummer} et \name{Jochen}{Metzinger}).
+% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ethiopia}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ethiopian2>
+\ProvidesFile{ethiopian2.mld}[2006/01/30]%
+%% Ethopian titles  with Omega. Needs special fonts
+\def\ptctitle{^^^^12ed^^^^12d8^^^^1275}%
+\def\plftitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1225^^^^12d5^^^^120e^^^^127d ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}%
+\def\plttitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1230^^^^1295^^^^1320^^^^1228^^^^12e5
+  ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}%
+\def\mtctitle{^^^^12ed^^^^12d8^^^^1275}%
+\def\mlftitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1225^^^^12d5^^^^120e^^^^127d ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}%
+\def\mlttitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1230^^^^1295^^^^1320^^^^1228^^^^12e5
+  ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}%
+\def\stctitle{^^^^12ed^^^^12d8^^^^1275}%
+\def\slftitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1225^^^^12d5^^^^120e^^^^127d ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}%
+\def\slttitle{^^^^12e8^^^^1230^^^^1295^^^^1320^^^^1228^^^^12e5
+  ^^^^121b^^^^12cd^^^^132b}%
+%</ethiopian2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{30.96125mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Farsi1'' language: \uxmldo{farsi1}}\label{s+mld+farsi1}\ixmldo{farsi1}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% There are
+% several variants for the farsi language, spoken in Iran and Afghanistan.
+% The ``\lopt{farsi1}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{farsi.sty} file in the
+% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi} system{\protect\FARSINOTE}, by \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod},
+% \xname{Roozbeh}{Pournader},
+% \xname{Hassan}{Abolhassani}, and others.
+% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}.
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{farsi1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{farsi1.mlo}.
+
+%
+% \or\relax
+% \lneed{8}
+% \section{Langue <<~farsi1~>>: \uxmldo{farsi1}}\label{s+mld+farsi1}\ixmldo{farsi1}
+
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{30.96125mm}
+% Il y~a
+% plusieurs variantes pour la langue farsi, parlée en Iran et en Afghanistan.
+% La langue <<~\lopt{farsi1}~>> (farsi première variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{farsi.sty} du
+% système
+% \packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}~\cite{farsi}\,{\protect\FARSINOTE},
+% par \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, \xname{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, \xname{Hassan}{Abolhassani} et~al.
+% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+farsi2}.
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{farsi1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{farsi1.mlo}.
+% \fi
+
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*farsi1>
+\ProvidesFile{farsi1.mld}[2005/09/13]\mtcloadmlo{farsi1}%
+%% From farsi.sty of the FarsiTeX project by Dr Mohammad Ghodsi,
+%% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu), Hassan Abolhassani, & others.
+%% http://www.farsitex.org
+%</farsi1>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \section{``Farsi2'' language: \uxmldo{farsi2}}\label{s+mld+farsi2}\ixmldo{farsi2}
+% There are several variants for the farsi language, spoken in Iran and Afghanistan.
+% The ``\lopt{farsi2}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{farsi.sty} file in the \mbox{\packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}}
+% system~\cite{farsi}{\protect\FARSINOTE}, by \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}, \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader},
+% \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani}, and others.
+% Special fonts are needed, of course. See also section~\vref{s+mld+farsi1}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~farsi2~>>: \uxmldo{farsi2}}\label{s+mld+farsi2}\ixmldo{farsi2}
+% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour la langue farsi, parlée en Iran et en Afghanistan.
+% La langue <<~\lopt{farsi2}~>> (farsi deuxième variante) utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{farsi.sty} du
+% système \mbox{\packa{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}}~\cite{farsi}\,{\protect\FARSINOTE}, développé par \xname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi},
+% \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader}, \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod}, \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani} et~al.
+% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+farsi1}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{farsi2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated,
+% hence we load \xfile{farsi2.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{farsi2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{farsi2.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*farsi2>
+\ProvidesFile{farsi2.mld}[2005/09/13]\mtcloadmlo{farsi2}%
+%% From farsi.sty (FarsiTeX project: http://www.farsitex.org). Dr Mohammad Ghodsi,
+%% Roozbeh Pournader (roozbeh@sharif.edu), Hassan Abolhassani, & others.
+%</farsi2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Farsi3'' language: \uxfile{farsi3.mld}}\label{s+mld+farsi3}%
+% \ixfile{farsi3.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~farsi3~>>: \uxfile{farsi3.mld}}\label{s+mld+farsi3}%
+% \ixfile{farsi3.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\FR}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% There are several variants for the farsi language, spoken in Iran and Afghanistan.
+% The ``\lopt{farsi3}'' language uses titles taken from the \xfile{farsi.ldf} file in the \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} system\cite{arabi},
+% by \xname{Youssef}{Jabri}. Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% \or\relax
+% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour la langue farsi, parlée en Iran et en Afghanistan.
+% La langue <<~\lopt{farsi3}~>> utilise des titres pris dans le fichier \xfile{farsi.ldf} du
+% système \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}, par \xname{Youssef}{Jabri}.
+% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*farsi3>
+\ProvidesFile{farsi3.mld}[2006/07/27]%
+%% From farsi.ldf of the Arabi system by Youssef Jabri.
+\def\ptctitle{\FR{\fa\ha\ra\seen\taa\space\meem\nun\dal\ra\jeem\alef\taa}}%
+\def\plftitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \alef\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}%
+\def\plttitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\  \jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\FR{\fa\ha\ra\seen\taa\space\meem\nun\dal\ra\jeem\alef\taa}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \alef\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\  \jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}%
+\def\stctitle{\FR{\fa\ha\ra\seen\taa\space\meem\nun\dal\ra\jeem\alef\taa}}%
+\def\slftitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\ \alef\sheen\kaf\alef\lam}}%
+\def\slttitle{\FR{\lam\ya\seen\taa\  \jeem\dal\alef\waw\lam}}%
+%</farsi3>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Finnish'' language: \uxfile{finnish.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish}\ixfile{finnish.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~finnish~>>: \uxfile{finnish.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish}\ixfile{finnish.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.437269373\iwidth}
+% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.562730627\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.505\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.495\iwidth}
+
+
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{15.28125mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{finnish}'' language (\emph{suomi}) are taken from the \xfile{finnish.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} and \name{Keranen}{Reino})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+finnish2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{finnish}~>> (finnois, \emph{suomi}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{finnish.dtx}
+% (de \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} et \name{Keranen}{Reino})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+finnish2}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*finnish>
+\ProvidesFile{finnish.mld}[2006/03/20]%
+%% Finnish titles from finnish.dtx (babel). Kanerva, Mikko & Reino, Keranen
+\def\ptctitle{Sis\"alt\"o}%
+\def\plftitle{Kuvat}%
+\def\plttitle{Taulukot}%
+\def\mtctitle{Sis\"alt\"o}%
+\def\mlftitle{Kuvat}%
+\def\mlttitle{Taulukot}%
+\def\stctitle{Sis\"alt\"o}%
+\def\slftitle{Kuvat}%
+\def\slttitle{Taulukot}%
+%</finnish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Finnish2'' language: \uxfile{finnish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish2}\ixfile{finnish2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{finnish2}'' language are taken from a variant proposed by the \xfile{finnish.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} and \name{Keranen}{Reino})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+finnish}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~finnish2~>>: \uxfile{finnish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+finnish2}\ixfile{finnish2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{finnish2}~>> (finnois seconde variante) sont tirés d'une variante proposée
+% par le fichier \xfile{finnish.dtx}
+% (de \name{Mikko}{Kanerva} et \name{Keranen}{Reino})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,finnish}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+finnish}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*finnish2>
+\ProvidesFile{finnish2.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Finnish titles (variant) from finnish.dtx (babel). Kanerva, Mikko & Reino, Keranen
+\def\ptctitle{Sis\"allys}%
+\def\plftitle{Kuvat}%
+\def\plttitle{Taulukot}%
+\def\mtctitle{Sis\"allys}%
+\def\mlftitle{Kuvat}%
+\def\mlttitle{Taulukot}%
+\def\stctitle{Sis\"allys}%
+\def\slftitle{Kuvat}%
+\def\slttitle{Taulukot}%
+%</finnish2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{12}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Francais'' language: \uxfile{francais.mld}}\label{s+mld+francais}\ixfile{francais.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~francais~>>: \uxfile{francais.mld}}\label{s+mld+francais}\ixfile{francais.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{francais}'' (\emph{français})
+% language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the file \xfile{french.mld} (see
+% section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{francais}~>> (\emph{français}) est synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>,
+% donc nous chargeons le fichier \xfile{french.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*francais>
+\ProvidesFile{francais.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
+%</francais>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``French'' language: \uxfile{french.mld}}\label{s+mld+french}\ixfile{french.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~french~>>: \uxfile{french.mld}}\label{s+mld+french}\ixfile{french.mld}
+% \fi
+
+
+% ^^A (FRANCO-EU
+% ^^A FRANCO-EU)
+% ^^A (FRANCO-AM
+% ^^A FRANCO-AM)
+% ^^A (FRANCO-AFN
+% ^^A FRANCO-AFN)
+% ^^A (FRANCO-AFW
+% ^^A FRANCO-AFW)
+% ^^A (FRANCO-AC
+% ^^A FRANCO-AC)
+% ^^A (FRANCO-AEOI
+% ^^A FRANCO-AEOI)
+% ^^A (FRANCO-AS
+% ^^A FRANCO-AS)
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \lneed{4}
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{french}'' language are taken from the \xfile{frenchb.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Daniel}{Flipo})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}. See also
+% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+acadian}{s+mld+acadien}, \vref{s+mld+canadien}, \vref{s+mld+francais},
+% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+frenchb}{s+mld+frenchpro}.
+% \or\relax
+% \lneed{4}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>> (c'est-à-dire le français) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{frenchb.dtx}
+% (de \name{Daniel}{Flipo})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}. Voir aussi
+% les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+acadian}{s+mld+acadien},\ABK \vref{s+mld+canadien},\ABK \vref{s+mld+francais},\ABK
+% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+frenchb}{s+mld+frenchpro}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*french>
+\ProvidesFile{french.mld}[2006/03/21]%
+%% French titles from frenchb.dtx (babel). Flipo, Daniel
+\def\ptctitle{Table des mati\`eres}%
+\def\plftitle{Liste des figures}%
+\def\plttitle{Liste des tableaux}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Sommaire}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figures}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tableaux}%
+\def\stctitle{Sommaire}%
+\def\slftitle{Figures}%
+\def\slttitle{Tableaux}%
+%</french>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``French1'' language: \uxfile{french1.mld}}\label{s+mld+french1}\ixfile{french1.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~french1~>>: \uxfile{french1.mld}}\label{s+mld+french1}\ixfile{french1.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\ifnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\value}
+% \begin{macro}{\Roman}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{french1}'' language are taken from the \xfile{frenchb.dtx}
+% (by \name{Daniel}{Flipo})
+% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, with some adaptations for the part-level titles.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{french1}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{frenchb.dtx}
+% (de \name{Daniel}{Flipo})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, avec quelques adaptations pour les titres
+% au niveau partie.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*french1>
+\ProvidesFile{french1.mld}[2006/03/29]%
+%% French titles from frenchb.dtx (babel). Flipo, Daniel
+%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD)
+\def\ptctitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax
+  Sommaire de la premi\`ere partie\relax
+  \else Sommaire de la partie~\Roman{part}\fi}%
+\def\plftitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax
+  Liste des figures de la premi\`ere partie\relax
+  \else Liste des figures de la partie~\Roman{part}\fi}%
+\def\plttitle{\ifnum\value{part}=1\relax
+  Liste des tableaux de la premi\`ere partie\relax
+  \else Liste des tableaux de la partie~\Roman{part}\fi}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Sommaire}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figures}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tableaux}%
+\def\stctitle{Sommaire}%
+\def\slftitle{Figures}%
+\def\slttitle{Tableaux}%
+%</french1>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``French2'' language: \uxfile{french2.mld}}\label{s+mld+french2}\ixfile{french2.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~french2~>>: \uxfile{french2.mld}}\label{s+mld+french2}\ixfile{french2.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcFrenchIIpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifmtcsecondpart}
+% \begin{macro}{\ifnum}
+% \begin{macro}{\value}
+% \begin{macro}{\Roman}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{french2}'' language are taken from the \xfile{frenchb.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Daniel}{Flipo})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, with some adaptations for the part-level titles\footnote{This
+% is an example of a \suffix{.mld} file needing some support from code in the \upack{minitoc} package.}.
+% See also section~\vref{ss+2parts}, for the subtle distinction between ``deuxième'' and ``seconde''.
+% See the \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} example file in section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{french2}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{frenchb.dtx}
+% (de \name{Daniel}{Flipo})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,frenchb}, avec quelques adaptations pour les titres
+% au niveau partie\,\footnote{C'est un exemple de fichier \suffix{.mld} ayant besoin de code de support dans le
+% paquetage \upack{minitoc}.}.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{ss+2parts}, pour la subtile nuance entre «~deuxième~» et «~seconde~».
+% Voir le fichier d'exemple \exam{mtc-2nd.tex} dans la section~\vref{mtc-2nd.tex}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*french2>
+\ProvidesFile{french2.mld}[2006/07/07]%
+%% French titles from frenchb.dtx (babel). Flipo, Daniel
+%% ptctitle, plftitle and plttitle modified (JPFD)
+\def\mtcFrenchIIpart{\ifcase\value{part}%
+\or premi\`ere partie\or
+{\ifmtcsecondpart seconde\else deuxi\`eme\fi} partie\or
+troisi\`eme partie\or quatri\`eme partie\or cinqui\`eme partie\or
+sixi\`eme partie\or septi\`eme partie\or huiti\`eme partie\or
+neuvi\`eme partie\or dixi\`eme partie\or onzi\`eme partie\or
+douzi\`eme partie\or treizi\`eme partie\or quatorzi\`eme partie\or
+quinzi\`eme partie\or seizi\`eme partie\or dix-septi\`eme partie\or
+dix-huiti\`eme partie\or dix-neuvi\`eme partie\or
+vingti\`eme partie\else partie~\Roman{part}\fi}%
+\def\ptctitle{\ifnum\value{part}<1\relax
+  Sommaire \else Sommaire de la \mtcFrenchIIpart\fi}%
+\def\plftitle{\ifnum\value{part}<1\relax
+  Liste des figures\else
+  Liste des figures de la \mtcFrenchIIpart\fi}%
+\def\plttitle{\ifnum\value{part}<1\relax
+  Liste des tableaux\else
+  Liste des tableaux de la \mtcFrenchIIpart}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{Sommaire}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figures}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tableaux}%
+\def\stctitle{Sommaire}%
+\def\slftitle{Figures}%
+\def\slttitle{Tableaux}%
+%</french2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Frenchb'' language: \uxfile{frenchb.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchb}\ixfile{frenchb.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~frenchb~>>: \uxfile{frenchb.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchb}\ixfile{frenchb.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{frenchb}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the
+% \xfile{french.mld} file. See section~\vref{s+mld+french}.
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{frenchb}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier
+% \xfile{french.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*frenchb>
+\ProvidesFile{frenchb.mld}[2003/02/11]\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
+%</frenchb>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Frenchle'' language: \uxfile{frenchle.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchle}\ixfile{frenchle.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~frenchle~>>: \uxfile{frenchle.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchle}\ixfile{frenchle.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{frenchle}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the
+% \xfile{french.mld} file. See section~\vref{s+mld+french}. See also~\cite{frenchle}.
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{frenchle}~» est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier
+% \xfile{french.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}. Voir aussi~\cite{frenchle}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*frenchle>
+\ProvidesFile{frenchle.mld}[2003/02/20]\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
+%</frenchle>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Frenchpro'' language: \uxfile{frenchpro.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchpro}\ixfile{frenchpro.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~frenchpro~>>: \uxfile{frenchpro.mld}}\label{s+mld+frenchpro}\ixfile{frenchpro.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{frenchpro}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{french}'' language, so we load the
+% \xfile{french.mld} file. See section~\vref{s+mld+french}. See also~\cite{frenchpro,frenchperso}.
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{frenchpro}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{french}~>>, donc nous chargeons le fichier
+% \xfile{french.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+french}. Voir aussi~\cite{frenchpro,frenchperso}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*frenchpro>
+\ProvidesFile{frenchpro.mld}[2003/02/20]\mtcselectlanguage{french}%
+%</frenchpro>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Galician'' language: \uxfile{galician.mld}}\label{s+mld+galician}\ixfile{galician.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~galician~>>: \uxfile{galician.mld}}\label{s+mld+galician}\ixfile{galician.mld}
+% \fi
+
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.66666666mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{galician}'' language (\emph{galego})\,\footnote{Spoken in Galice, in the north-west part
+% of Spain, around Santiago de Compostela.} are taken from the \xfile{galician.dtx} file,
+% (by \name{Manuel}{Carriba} and \namea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera}) derived from the
+% \xfile{spanish.dtx} file (by \name{Javier}{Bezos}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,galician,galician2}:
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{galician}~>> (galicien, \emph{galego})\,\footnote{Parlée en Galice,
+% dans la partie nord-ouest de l'Espagne, autour de Saint-Jacques de Compostelle.}
+% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{galician.dtx} (de \name{Manuel}{Carriba} et
+% \namea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera}), dérivé du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx} (de \name{Javier}{Bezos}),
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,galician,galician2}:
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*galician>
+\ProvidesFile{galician.mld}[2007/12/18]%
+%% Galician titles from galician.dtx (babel).
+%% Carriba, Manuel (mcarriba@eunetcom.net)
+%% Javier A. Múgica de Rivera (jmugica@digi21.net)
+\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
+\def\ptctitle{\'Indice}\else \def\ptctitle{\'Indice xeral}\fi%
+\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\plttitle{\'Indice de t\'aboas}%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
+\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}\else \def\mtctitle{\'Indice xeral}\fi%
+\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de t\'aboas}%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
+\def\stctitle{\'Indice}\else \def\stctitle{\'Indice xeral}\fi%
+\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\slttitle{\'Indice de t\'aboas}%
+%</galician>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``German'' language: \uxfile{german.mld}}\label{s+mld+german}\ixfile{german.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~german~>>: \uxfile{german.mld}}\label{s+mld+german}\ixfile{german.mld}
+% \fi
+
+% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
+
+
+
+
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{german}'' language (\emph{deutsch}) are taken from the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
+% See also the section~\vref{s+mld+austrian}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{german}~>> (allemand, \emph{deutsch}) sont tirés du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+austrian}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*german>
+\ProvidesFile{german.mld}[1999/03/16]%
+%% German titles
+\def\ptctitle{Inhaltsangabe}%
+\def\plftitle{Figuren}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabellen}%
+\def\mtctitle{Inhaltsangabe}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figuren}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabellen}%
+\def\stctitle{Inhaltsangabe}%
+\def\slftitle{Figuren}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabellen}%
+%</german>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Germanb'' language: \uxfile{germanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb}\ixfile{germanb.mld}
+% The ``\lopt{germanb}'' language is a variant for the ``german'' language. The titles come from
+% \xfile{germanb.dtx}
+% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,germanb}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~germanb~>>: \uxfile{germanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb}\ixfile{germanb.mld}
+% La langue <<~\lopt{germanb}~>> (allemand, variante) est une variante de la langue <<~german~>>. Les titres sont tirés du
+% fichier \xfile{germanb.dtx}
+% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,germanb}:
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*germanb>
+\ProvidesFile{germanb.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% German titles (variant) from germanb.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Raichle, Bernd
+\def\ptctitle{Inhaltsverzeichnis}%
+\def\plftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}%
+\def\mtctitle{Inhaltsverzeichnis}%
+\def\mlftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}%
+%%
+\def\stctitle{Inhalt}%
+\def\slftitle{Abbildungen}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabellen}%
+%</germanb>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Germanb2'' language: \uxfile{germanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb2}\ixfile{germanb2.mld}
+% The ``\lopt{germanb2}'' language is a variant for the ``\lopt{german}'' language, with short titles.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+germanb}.
+% The titles are taken from the file \xfile{germanb.dtx}
+% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle}) in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}:
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~germanb2~>>: \uxfile{germanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+germanb2}\ixfile{germanb2.mld}
+% La langue <<~\lopt{germanb2}~>> (allemand, variante) est une variante de la langue <<~german~>>, avec des titres courts.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+germanb}.
+% Les titres sont tirés du fichier \xfile{germanb.dtx}
+% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}:
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*germanb2>
+\ProvidesFile{germanb2.mld}[2007/12/18]%
+%% German titles (variant)
+\def\ptctitle{Inhalt}%
+\def\plftitle{Abbildungen}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabellen}%
+\def\mtctitle{Inhalt}%
+\def\mlftitle{Abbildungen}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabellen}%
+\def\stctitle{Inhalt}%
+\def\slftitle{Abbildungen}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabellen}%
+%</germanb2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Greek'' language: \uxfile{greek.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek}\ixfile{greek.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~greek~>>: \uxfile{greek.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek}\ixfile{greek.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.6273522572\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.372647428\iwidth}
+
+%
+% \vspace*{2\bigskipamount}
+%
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm}\reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{greek}'' language (modern greek,
+% $\nu\acute{\epsilon}\alpha~\epsilon\lambda\lambda\eta\nu i\kappa\acute{\alpha}$) are taken from the \xfile{greek.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Apostolos}{Syropoulos}) in the
+% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,greek,greek-ba}.
+% Greek fonts are required.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek}~>> (grec moderne,
+% $\nu\acute{\epsilon}\alpha~\epsilon\lambda\lambda\eta\nu i\kappa\acute{\alpha}$) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{greek.dtx}
+% (de \name{Apostolos}{Syropoulos})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,greek,greek-ba}.
+% Des fontes grecques sont requises.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{5}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*greek>
+\ProvidesFile{greek.mld}[2007/12/18]%
+%% Greek titles from greek.dtx (babel) by Syropoulos, Apostolos. Needs greek fonts.
+\def\ptctitle{Perieq'omena}%
+\def\plftitle{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}%
+\def\plttitle{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}%
+\def\mtctitle{Perieq'omena}%
+\def\mlftitle{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}%
+\def\mlttitle{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}%
+\def\stctitle{Perieq'omena}%
+\def\slftitle{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}%
+\def\slttitle{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}%
+%</greek>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Greek-mono'' language: \uxfile{greek-mono.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-mono}\ixfile{greek-mono.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~greek-mono~>>: \uxfile{greek-mono.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-mono}\ixfile{greek-mono.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\localgreek}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{greek-mono}'' language\,\footnote{Monotonic greek, from a recent (1982) but strongly
+% contested -- and contestable -- reform of the greek language.} are taken from the \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} file
+% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
+% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}:
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek-mono}~>> (grec dit monotonique\,\footnote{Le grec monotonique, selon une récente
+% (1982) mais fortement contestée -- et contestable -- réforme de la langue grecque.}) sont tirés du fichier
+% \xfile{omega-greek.ldf}
+% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
+% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}:
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*greek-mono>
+\ProvidesFile{greek-mono.mld}[2005/02/08]%
+%% from omega-greek.ldf (Antomega project). Needs Omega.
+%% Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov
+\def\ptctitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^03cc^^^^03bc%
+ ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
+\def\plftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^03ac^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
+ ^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\plftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^03ac^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^03cc^^^^03bc%
+ ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
+\def\mlftitle%{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^03ac^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
+ ^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^03ac^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\stctitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^03cc^^^^03bc%
+ ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
+\def\slftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^03ac^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
+ ^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\slftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^03ac^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^03ac^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+%</greek-mono>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Greek-polydemo'' language: \uxfile{greek-polydemo.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-polydemo}\ixfile{greek-polydemo.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~greek-polydemo~>>: \uxfile{greek-polydemo.mld}}\label{s+mld+greek-polydemo}\ixfile{greek-polydemo.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\localgreek}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{greek-polydemo}'' language\,\footnote{Polytonic demotic (popular) greek, for classical greek.}
+% are taken from the file \xfile{omega-greek.ldf}
+% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
+% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}:
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek-polydemo}~>>\,\footnote{Grec polytonique <<~démotique~>> (populaire),
+% pour le grec classique.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{omega-greek.ldf}
+% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
+% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}:
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*greek-polydemo>
+\ProvidesFile{greek-polydemo.mld}[2005/02/08]%
+%% from omega-greek.ldf (Antomega project). Needs Omega.
+%% Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov
+\def\ptctitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc%
+ ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
+\def\plftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
+ ^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\plttitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc%
+ ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
+ ^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\stctitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc%
+ ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
+\def\slftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9%
+ ^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\slttitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+%</greek-polydemo>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Greek-polykatha'' language: \uxfile{greek-polykatha.mld}}%
+% \label{s+mld+greek-polykatha}\ixfile{greek-polykatha.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~greek-polykatha~>>: \uxfile{greek-polykatha.mld}}%
+% \label{s+mld+greek-polykatha}\ixfile{greek-polykatha.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\localgreek}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{greek-polykatha}'' language\,\footnote{Polytonic greek, <<~kathaverousa~>> (purified) style,
+% a form of the Greek language created during the early \textsc{xix}-th century by \xname{Adamantios}{Korais},
+% to purify the language from the Byzantine and non-greek vocabulary.
+% It has now been obsoleted by the demotic (popular) greek, but it
+% has left a very noticeable trace in the modern Greek language.} are
+% taken from the \xfile{omega-greek.ldf} file
+% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
+% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}:
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{greek-polykatha}~>>\,\footnote{Grec polytonique, en style <<~kathaverousa~>> (purifié),
+% une forme de la langue grecque créée au début du \textsc{xix}\fup{e}~siècle par \xname{Adamantios}{Korais}, pour purifier
+% la langue du vocabulaire byzantin ou non grec. Il a maintenant été démodé par le grec démotique (populaire),
+% mais a laissé d'importantes traces dans la langue grecque moderne.}
+% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{omega-greek.ldf}
+% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
+% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}:
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*greek-polykatha>
+\ProvidesFile{greek-polykatha.mld}[2005/02/08]%
+%% from omega-greek.ldf (Antomega project). Needs Omega.
+%% Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov
+\def\ptctitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc%
+ ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
+\def\plftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\plttitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc%
+ ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\stctitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^03a0^^^^03b5^^^^03c1^^^^03b9^^^^03b5^^^^03c7^^^^1f79^^^^03bc%
+ ^^^^03b5^^^^03bd^^^^03b1}}%
+\def\slftitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c3^^^^03c7^^^^03b7^^^^03bc^^^^1f71^^^^03c4^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+\def\slttitle{\localgreek%
+{^^^^039a^^^^03b1^^^^03c4^^^^1f71^^^^03bb^^^^03bf^^^^03b3^^^^03bf%
+ ^^^^03c2 ^^^^03c0^^^^03b9^^^^03bd^^^^1f71^^^^03ba^^^^03c9^^^^03bd}}%
+%</greek-polykatha>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Guarani'' language: \uxfile{guarani.mld}}\label{s+mld+guarani}\ixfile{guarani.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~guarani~>>: \uxfile{guarani.mld}}\label{s+mld+guarani}\ixfile{guarani.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The
+% ``\lopt{guarani}'' (guaraní) language is the main language spoken in Paraguay.
+% Very often, a mixture of Guaraní and Spanish, known as Jopará or Yopará, is spoken.
+% The titles are taken from the \ipack{guarani}\xfile{guarani.ldf} file by \name{Javier}{Bezos}~\cite{guarani}.
+% A special input encoding (\xfile{win-gn.def}) is needed.
+% These files are available on the CTAN archives.
+% \or\relax
+% La
+% langue «~\lopt{guarani}~» (guaraní) est la langue principale parlée au Paraguay.
+% Très souvent, un mélange de guaraní et d'espagnol, appelé «~jopará~» ou «~yopará~», est utilisé.
+% Les titres sont tirés du fichier \ipack{guarani}\xfile{guarani.ldf} de \name{Javier}{Bezos}~\cite{guarani}.
+% Un codage d'entrée spécial (\xfile{win-gn.def}) est nécessaire.
+% Ces fichiers sont disponibles sur les archives CTAN.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*guarani>
+\ProvidesFile{guarani.mld}[2005/08/26]%
+%% Guaraní titles from guarani.ldf by Javier Bezos. Input encoding win-gn.def needed.
+\def\ptctitle{\'Indice general}%
+\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\plttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}%
+\def\mtctitle{\'Indice general}%
+\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}%
+\def\stctitle{\'Indice general}%
+\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\slttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}%
+%</guarani>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hangul1'' language: \uxmldo{hangul1}}\label{s+mld+hangul1}\ixmldo{hangul1}
+% \else\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hangul1~>>: \uxmldo{hangul1}}\label{s+mld+hangul1}\ixmldo{hangul1}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.426693630\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.573306370\iwidth}
+
+%
+% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount}
+%
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.677187948\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.322812052\iwidth}
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{29.15625mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The
+% Korean language was originally written using the Chinese characters; it is now mainly written in Hangûl, the
+% Korean writing system, optionally incorporating Hanja to write Sino-Korean words~\cite{venkatesan}.
+% See~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} and~\cite{park2003}.
+% 
+%
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul1}'' language (korean in hangûl script, first variant) are taken from the file
+% \xfile{hangul.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Special fonts are needed, of course.
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
+%
+% \or\relax
+% La
+% langue coréenne était originellement écrite en caractères chinois; elle est actuellement principalement
+% écrite en caractères hangûl, en incorporant éventuellement des caractères hanja pour écrire des mots
+% sino-coréens~\cite{venkatesan}. Voir~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} et~\cite{park2003}.
+% 
+%
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul1}~>> (coréen, écriture hangûl première variante) sont tirés du fichier
+% \xfile{hangul.cap} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr.
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{2}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{hangul1.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul1.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hangul1>
+\ProvidesFile{hangul1.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul1}%
+%% From the file hangul.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs
+%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) Hangul captions
+%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
+%</hangul1>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hangul2'' language: \uxmldo{hangul2}}\label{s+mld+hangul2}\ixmldo{hangul2}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hangul2~>>: \uxmldo{hangul2}}\label{s+mld+hangul2}\ixmldo{hangul2}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul2}'' language (korean in hangûl script, second variant) are taken from the file
+% \xfile{hangul.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Special fonts are needed, of course.
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1} and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul3}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul2}~>> (coréen en écriture hangûl, deuxième variante) sont tirés du fichier
+% \xfile{hangul.cpx} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr.
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% Voir aussi les variantes dans les sections~\vref{s+mld+hangul1} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul3}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{hangul2.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul2.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hangul2>
+\ProvidesFile{hangul2.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul2}%
+%% From the file hangul.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs
+%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003), Hangul captions
+%% char. set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), encoding: EUC (=Wansung), preprocessed
+%</hangul2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{11}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hangul3'' language: \uxmldo{hangul3}}\label{s+mld+hangul3}\ixmldo{hangul3}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hangul3~>>: \uxmldo{hangul3}}\label{s+mld+hangul3}\ixfile{hangul3}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul3}'' language (korean in hangûl script, third variant) are taken from the file
+% \xfile{hangul2.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul2} and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul4}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul3}~>> (coréen en écriture hangûl, troisième variante) sont tirés du fichier
+% \xfile{hangul2.cap} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi les
+% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul2} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul4}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul3}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{hangul3.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul3}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul3.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hangul3>
+\ProvidesFile{hangul3.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul3}%
+%% From the file hangul2.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs
+%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) Hangul captions set 2
+%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992), encoding: EUC (=Wansung)
+%</hangul3>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{11}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hangul4'' language: \uxmldo{hangul4}}\label{s+mld+hangul4}\ixmldo{hangul4}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hangul4~>>: \uxmldo{hangul4}}\label{s+mld+hangul4}\ixmldo{hangul4}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul4}'' language (korean in hangûl script, fourth variant) are taken from the file
+% \xfile{hangul2.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul3}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul-u8}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
+%
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul4}~>> (coréen en écriture hangûl, quatrième variante) sont tirés du fichier
+% \xfile{hangul2.cpx} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi les
+% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul3} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul-u8}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
+%
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul4}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{hangul4.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul4}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul4.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hangul4>
+\ProvidesFile{hangul4.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hangul4}%
+%% From the file hangul2.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs
+%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%% Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003) Hangul captions set 2,
+%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992),
+%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung), preprocessed
+%</hangul4>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \lneed{9}
+% \section{``Hangul-u8'' language: \uxmldo{hangul-u8}}\label{s+mld+hangul-u8}\ixmldo{hangul-u8}
+% \or\relax
+% \lneed{8}
+% \section{Langue <<~hangul-u8~>>: \uxmldo{hangul-u8}}\label{s+mld+hangul-u8}\ixmldo{hangul-u8}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul-u8}'' language (korean in hangûl script, for \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) are taken
+% from the file \xfile{u8hangul.tex} of the \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} system~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX} by \name{Un}{Koaunghi}.
+% Special fonts are needed, of course. Input encoding is UTF-8.
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul4}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja1}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
+% See~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} and~\cite{park2003}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul-u8}~>> (coréen, écriture hangûl, pour \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) sont tirés du fichier
+% \xfile{u8hangul.tex} du système \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX} de \name{Un}{Koaunghi}.
+% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr.
+% Le codage en entrée est UTF-8.
+%
+% \lneed{4}
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul4} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja1}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
+% Voir~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} et~\cite{park2003}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{hangul-u8}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{hangul-u8.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hangul-u8}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hangul-u8.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hangul-u8>
+\ProvidesFile{hangul-u8.mld}[2006/02/21]\mtcloadmlo{hangul-u8}%
+%% Hangul captions for Lambda. From the file u8hangul.tex
+%% of the HLaTeX package by Koaunghi Un (koaunghi@kornet.net)
+%</hangul-u8>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hanja1'' language: \uxmldo{hanja1.mld}}\label{s+mld+hanja1}\ixmldo{hanja1}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hanja1~>>: \uxmldo{hanja1}}\label{s+mld+hanja1}\ixmldo{hanja1}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja1}'' language (korean in the old script hanja, first variant) are taken from the file
+% \xfile{hanja.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% 
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul-u8}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
+%
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja1}~>>  (coréen en écriture ancienne hanja, première variante) sont tirés du
+% fichier \xfile{hanja.cpx} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi
+% 
+% les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hangul-u8} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+hanja2}{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{hanja1.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hanja1.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hanja1>
+\ProvidesFile{hanja1.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hanja1}%
+%% From the file hanja.cpx of the CJK package for using Asian logographs
+%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Hanja captions.
+%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>, Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%% Character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992),
+%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung), preprocessed
+%</hanja1>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hanja2'' language: \uxmldo{hanja2}}\label{s+mld+hanja2}\ixmldo{hanja2}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hanja2~>>: \uxmldo{hanja2}}\label{s+mld+hanja2}\ixmldo{hanja2}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja2}'' language (Korean in the old script hanja, second variant) are taken from the file
+% \xfile{hanja.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja1}, and~\vref{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
+%
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja2}~>>  (coréen en écriture ancienne hanja, seconde variante) sont tirés du
+% fichier \xfile{hanja.cap} du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi
+% les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja1} et~\vref{s+mld+hanja-u8}.
+% \fi
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{hanja2.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hanja2.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hanja2>
+\ProvidesFile{hanja2.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{hanja2}%
+%% From the file hanja.cap of the CJK package for using Asian logographs
+%% (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e. Hanja captions.
+%% Created by Werner Lemberg <a7971428@unet.univie.ac.at>.
+%% character set: KS X 1001:1992 (=KS C 5601-1992),
+%% encoding: EUC (=Wansung). Version 4.1.3 (20-Jun-1997)
+%</hanja2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{11}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hanja-u8'' language: \uxmldo{hanja-u8}}\label{s+mld+hanja-u8}\ixmldo{hanja-u8}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hanja-u8~>>: \uxmldo{hanja-u8}}\label{s+mld+hanja-u8}\ixmldo{hanja-u8}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja-u8}'' language (korean in hanja script, for \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) are taken from the file
+% \xfile{u8hanja.tex} of the \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX} system~\cite[in~korean]{HLATEX} by \name{Un}{Koaunghi}.
+% Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% Input encoding is UTF-8.
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja2}.
+% See~\cite[page~150]{YH2004}, \cite{YH2007} and~\cite{park2003}.
+%
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja-u8}~>> (coréen, écriture hanja, pour \emph{Lambda}~$\mathbf{\Lambda}$) sont tirés du fichier
+% \xfile{u8hanja.tex} du système \packa{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}~\cite[en~coréen]{HLATEX} de \name{Un}{Koaunghi}.
+% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr.
+% Le codage en entrée est UTF-8.
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+hangul1}{s+mld+hanja2}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{hanja-u8}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{hanja-u8.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hanja-u8}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \xfile{hanja-u8.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hanja-u8>
+\ProvidesFile{hanja-u8.mld}[2006/02/21]\mtcloadmlo{hanja-u8}%
+%% Hanja captions for Lambda. From the file hanja-u8.tex of the HLaTeX package
+%% by Koaunghi Un (koaunghi@kornet.net)
+%</hanja-u8>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \lneed{5}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{29.15625mm}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hebrew'' language: \uxfile{hebrew.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew}\ixfile{hebrew.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hebrew~>>: \uxfile{hebrew.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew}\ixfile{hebrew.mld}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{hebrew}'' language (\emph{ivrit}) are taken from
+% the \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX} package~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (by \name{Klaus}{Lagally}),
+% with the associated fonts. See also section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew2}.
+% See the hebrew alphabet (\emph{alefbet}): \url{http://www.jewfaq.org/graphics/hebrew.gif}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{hebrew}~>> (hébreu, \emph{ivrit}) sont tirés du
+% paquetage \packa{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}~\cite{arabtex2,arabtex} (de \name{Klaus}{Lagally}),
+% avec les fontes associées. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew2}.
+% Voir l'alphabet (\emph{alefbet}) hébreu: \url{http://www.jewfaq.org/graphics/hebrew.gif}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hebrew>
+\ProvidesFile{hebrew.mld}[2001/02/28]%
+%% Hebrew titles. Need hebrew fonts (see arabtex documentation)
+\def\ptctitle{\tav\vav\kaf\finalnun\ \ayin\nun\yod\nun\yod\finalmem}%
+\def\plftitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \alef\yod\vav\resh\yod\finalmem}%
+\def\plttitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \tet\bet\lamed\alef\vav\tav}%
+\def\mtctitle{\tav\vav\kaf\finalnun\ \ayin\nun\yod\nun\yod\finalmem}%
+\def\mlftitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \alef\yod\vav\resh\yod\finalmem}%
+\def\mlttitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \tet\bet\lamed\alef\vav\tav}%
+\def\stctitle{\tav\vav\kaf\finalnun\ \ayin\nun\yod\nun\yod\finalmem}%
+\def\slftitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \alef\yod\vav\resh\yod\finalmem}%
+\def\slttitle{\resh\shin\yod\mem\tav\ \tet\bet\lamed\alef\vav\tav}%
+%</hebrew>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hebrew2'' language: \uxfile{hebrew2.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew2}\ixfile{hebrew2.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hebrew2~>>: \uxfile{hebrew2.mld}}\label{s+mld+hebrew2}\ixfile{hebrew2.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\@ensure@R}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{hebrew2}'' language are taken from the file \xfile{hebrew.dtx}
+% (by \xname{Boris}{Lavva} and \name{Rama}{Porrat})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,hebrew2}, which should be
+% used, with the associated fonts and encodings. See also section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{hebrew2}~>> (hébreu, une variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{hebrew.dtx}
+% (de \name{Boris}{Lavva} et \name{Rama}{Porrat}) dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,hebrew2}, qui
+% devrait être utilisé, avec les fontes et codages associés. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+hebrew}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hebrew2>
+\ProvidesFile{hebrew2.mld}[2006/01/11]%
+%% From hebrew.dtx in the Babel package. Boris Lavva (lavva@tx.technion.ac.il)
+%% Need hebrew fonts.
+\def\ptctitle{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ %
+  \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}%
+\def\plftitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ %
+  \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}%
+\def\plttitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\
+  \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ %
+  \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ %
+  \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\
+  \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}%
+\def\stctitle{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ %
+  \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}%
+\def\slftitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ %
+  \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}%
+\def\slttitle{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\
+  \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}%
+%</hebrew2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hindi'' language: \uxfile{hindi.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi}\ixfile{hindi.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hindi~>>: \uxfile{hindi.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi}\ixfile{hindi.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{hindi}'' language is just like ``\lopt{devanagari}'',
+% so we just load \xfile{devanagari.mld}
+% (see section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}):
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{hindi}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{devanagari}~>>, donc nous
+% chargeons \xfile{devanagari.mld} simplement  (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hindi>
+\ProvidesFile{hindi.mld}[2006/08/24]\mtcselectlanguage{devanagari}%
+%</hindi>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{9}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hindi-modern'' language: \uxfile{hindi-modern.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi-modern}\ixfile{hindi-modern.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hindi-modern~>>: \uxfile{hindi-modern.mld}}\label{s+mld+hindi-modern}\ixfile{hindi-modern.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.417475728\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.582524272\iwidth}
+
+% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
+
+% \lneed{6}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{hindi-modern}'' language are taken from the \xfile{captions.dn} file
+% (by \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith},
+% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} and \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk})
+% in the Devan\=agar\={\i}
+% package~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}) after conversion.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}. Specific fonts are required.
+% The home page of the package is~\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{hindi-modern}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{captions.dn}
+% (de \name{Anshuman}{Pandey}, \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}, \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}, \name{John}{Smith},
+% \name{Kevin}{Carmody}, \name{Richard}{Mahoney} et \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk})
+% dans le paquetage Devan\=agar\={\i}~\cite{devanagari} (\packa{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}), après conversion.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+devanagari}.
+% Des fontes spécifiques sont requises.
+% La page Web du paquetage est~{\froff\url{http://devnag.sarovar.org}}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{6}
+% \begin{macro}{\dn}
+% \begin{macro}{\qva}
+% \begin{macro}{\re}
+% \begin{macro}{\rs}
+% \begin{macro}{\2}
+% \begin{macro}{\8}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hindi-modern>
+\ProvidesFile{hindi-modern.mld}[2006/08/29]%
+%% Hindi modern titles from captions.dn in ``Devanagari for TeX''
+%% by Pandey, Anshuman & Radhakrishnan, C.~V. & Wagner, Zden\v{e}k &
+%% Smith, John & Carmody, Kevin & Mahoney, Richard & Wujastyk, Dominik
+\def\ptctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}%
+\def\plftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}%
+\def\plttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}%
+\def\mtctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}%
+\def\mlftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}%
+\def\mlttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}%
+\def\stctitle{{\dn Evqy{\rs -\re}\8{s}cF}}%
+\def\slftitle{{\dn Ec/o{\qva} kF \8{s}cF}}%
+\def\slttitle{{\dn tAElkAao\2 kF \8{s}cF}}%
+%</hindi-modern>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Hungarian'' language: \uxfile{hungarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+hungarian}\ixfile{hungarian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~hungarian~>>: \uxfile{hungarian.mld}}\label{s+mld+hungarian}\ixfile{hungarian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{hungarian}'' language is a synonym of the ``\lopt{magyar}'' language,
+% so we load \xfile{magyar.mld}.
+% See section~\vref{s+mld+magyar}.
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{hungarian}~>> (hongrois) est synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{magyar}~>>, donc nous chargeons
+% \xfile{magyar.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+magyar}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*hungarian>
+\ProvidesFile{hungarian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{magyar}%
+%</hungarian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Icelandic'' language: \uxfile{icelandic.mld}}\label{s+mld+icelandic}\ixfile{icelandic.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~icelandic~>>: \uxfile{icelandic.mld}}\label{s+mld+icelandic}\ixfile{icelandic.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{18mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{icelandic}'' language (\emph{íslenska}) are taken from the \xfile{icelandic.dtx} file
+% (by \namea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,icelandic}. See also~\cite{icelandic2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{icelandic}~>> (islandais, \emph{íslenska}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{icelandic.dtx}
+% (par \namea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,icelandic}. Voir aussi~\cite{icelandic2}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*icelandic>
+\ProvidesFile{icelandic.mld}[2007/12/18]%
+%% From icelandic.dtx (babel). Needs inputenc with 8-bits encoding. Árnason, Einar
+\def\ptctitle{Efnisyfirlit}%
+\def\plftitle{Myndaskr\'{a}}%
+\def\plttitle{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}%
+\def\mtctitle{Efnisyfirlit}%
+\def\mlftitle{Myndaskr\'{a}}%
+\def\mlttitle{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}%
+\def\stctitle{Efnisyfirlit}%
+\def\slftitle{Myndaskr\'{a}}%
+\def\slttitle{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}%
+%</icelandic>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Indon'' language: \uxfile{indon.mld}}\label{s+mld+indon}\ixfile{indon.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~indon~>>: \uxfile{indon.mld}}\label{s+mld+indon}\ixfile{indon.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{indon}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasai}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasai.mld}
+% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}):
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{indon}~>> (indon) est comme <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \xfile{bahasai.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*indon>
+\ProvidesFile{indon.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasai}%
+%</indon>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Indonesian'' language: \uxfile{indonesian.mld}}\label{s+mld+indonesian}\ixfile{indonesian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~indonesian~>>: \uxfile{indonesian.mld}}\label{s+mld+indonesian}\ixfile{indonesian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{indonesian}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasai}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasai.mld}
+% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}):
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{indonesian}~>> (indonésien) est comme <<~\lopt{bahasai}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \xfile{bahasai.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasai}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*indonesian>
+\ProvidesFile{indonesian.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasai}%
+%</indonesian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Interlingua'' language: \uxfile{interlingua.mld}}\label{s+mld+interlingua}\ixfile{interlingua.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{interlingua}'' language are taken from the \xfile{interlingua.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Peter}{Kleiweg})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,interlingua}.
+% Interlingua is an auxiliary language, built from the common
+% vocabulary of Spanish/Portuguese, English, Italian and French,
+% with some normalisation of spelling. The grammar is very easy,
+% more similar to English's than to neolatin languages\footnote{The site
+% \url{http://www.interlingua.com} is mostly written in interlingua
+% (as is \url{http://interlingua.altervista.org}), in case you want to read some sample of it.}.
+% See also:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua},
+% \item Union Interlinguiste de France: \url{http://www.interlingua.com.fr/}
+% \item interlingua-english dictionnary: \url{http://www.interlingua.com/ied/}
+% \item interlingua grammar (in french): \url{http://filip.ouvaton.org/ia/gram/entra1.html}
+% \item somes sites in interlingua: \url{http://www.dmoz.org/World/Interlingua}
+% \item other sites about interlingua: \url{http://www.cle.unicamp.br/wcp3/interlingua.htm}
+% \end{itemize}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~interlingua~>>: \uxfile{interlingua.mld}}\label{s+mld+interlingua}\ixfile{interlingua.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{interlingua}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{interlingua.dtx}
+% (de \name{Peter}{Kleiweg})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,interlingua}.
+% Interlingua est une langue auxiliaire, construite à~partir du vocabulaire commun de l'espagnol/portugais, de
+% l'anglais de l'italien et du français, avec une certaine normalisation de l'orthographe. La grammaire est très
+% facile, plus similaire à~celle de l'anglais qu'à celles des langues néo-latines\,\footnote{Le site
+% {\froff\url{http://www.interlingua.com}} est écrit principalement en interlingua
+% (comme l'est {\froff\url{http://interlingua.altervista.org}}), au cas où vous souhaiteriez en lire un exemple.}.
+% Voir aussi:
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua}, \url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Interlingua},
+% \item Union Interlinguiste de France: \url{http://www.interlingua.com.fr/}
+% \item dictionnaire interlingua-anglais: \url{http://www.interlingua.com/ied/}
+% \item grammaire de l'interlingua (en français): \url{http://filip.ouvaton.org/ia/gram/entra1.html}
+% \item quelques sites en interlingua: \url{http://www.dmoz.org/World/Interlingua}
+% \item d'autres sites sur interlingua: \url{http://www.cle.unicamp.br/wcp3/interlingua.htm}
+% \end{itemize}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*interlingua>
+\ProvidesFile{interlingua.mld}[2007/12/18]%
+%% Interlingua titles from interlingua.dtx (babel). Kleiweg, Peter
+\def\ptctitle{Contento}%
+\def\plftitle{Lista de figuras}%
+\def\plttitle{Lista de tabellas}%
+\def\mtctitle{Contento}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figuras}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabellas}%
+\def\stctitle{Contento}%
+\def\slftitle{Figuras}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabellas}%
+%</interlingua>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Irish'' language: \uxfile{irish.mld}}\label{s+mld+irish}\ixfile{irish.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~irish~>>: \uxfile{irish.mld}}\label{s+mld+irish}\ixfile{irish.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
+
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{irish}'' language (\emph{gaeilge}) come from the \xfile{irish.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{Marion}{Gunn} and \name{Fraser}{Grant})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,irish}:
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{irish}~>> (irlandais, \emph{gaeilge}) viennent du fichier \xfile{irish.dtx}
+% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{Marion}{Gunn} et \name{Fraser}{Grant})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,irish}:
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*irish>
+\ProvidesFile{irish.mld}[2006/02/28]%
+%% From irish.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Gunn, Marion & Grant, Fraser
+\def\ptctitle{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}%
+\def\plftitle{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}%
+\def\plttitle{T\'abla\'{\i}}%
+\def\mtctitle{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}%
+\def\mlftitle{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}%
+\def\mlttitle{T\'abla\'{\i}}%
+\def\stctitle{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}%
+\def\slftitle{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}%
+\def\slttitle{T\'abla\'{\i}}%
+%</irish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Italian'' language: \uxfile{italian.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian}\ixfile{italian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~italian~>>: \uxfile{italian.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian}\ixfile{italian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.55\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.45\iwidth}
+
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{italian}'' language (\emph{italiano}) come from the file \xfile{italian.dtx}
+% (by \name{Maurizio}{Codogno} and \name{Claudio}{Beccari})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,italian}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+italian2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{italian}~>> (italien, \emph{italiano}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{italian.dtx}
+% (de \name{Maurizio}{Codogno} et \name{Claudio}{Beccari})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,italian}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+italian2}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*italian>
+\ProvidesFile{italian.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Italian titles from italian.dtx (babel). Same authors.
+%% Maurizio Codogno (mau@beatles.cselt.stet.it) & Claudio Beccari (beccari@polito.it)
+\def\ptctitle{Indice}%
+\def\plftitle{Elenco delle figure}%
+\def\plttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}%
+\def\mtctitle{Indice}%
+\def\mlftitle{Elenco delle figure}%
+\def\mlttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}%
+\def\stctitle{Indice}%
+\def\slftitle{Elenco delle figure}%
+\def\slttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}%
+%</italian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Italian2'' language: \uxfile{italian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian2}\ixfile{italian2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{italian2}'' language are the same as for the ``\lopt{italian}'' language, except at the part
+% level (``Contenuto''). See also section~\vref{s+mld+italian}.\iname{Maurizio}{Codogno}\iname{Claudio}{Beccari}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~italian2~>>: \uxfile{italian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+italian2}\ixfile{italian2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{italian2}~>> (italien, variante) sont les mêmes que pour la langue «~\lopt{italian}~»,
+% sauf au niveau partie («~Contenuto~»).
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+italian}.\iname{Maurizio}{Codogno}\iname{Claudio}{Beccari}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*italian2>
+\ProvidesFile{italian2.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Italian titles. Variant, from italian.dtx (babel). Same authors.
+\def\ptctitle{Contenuto}%
+\def\plftitle{Elenco delle figure}%
+\def\plttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}%
+\def\mtctitle{Contenuto}%
+\def\mlftitle{Elenco delle figure}%
+\def\mlttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}%
+\def\stctitle{Contenuto}%
+\def\slftitle{Elenco delle figure}%
+\def\slttitle{Elenco delle tabelle}%
+%</italian2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \lneed{7}
+% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{29.15625mm}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Japanese'' language: \uxmldo{japanese}}\label{s+mld+japanese}\ixmldo{japanese}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~japanese~>>: \uxmldo{japanese}}\label{s+mld+japanese}\ixmldo{japanese}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.516379310\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.483620690\iwidth}
+
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% There
+% are several variants for the japanese titles.
+% The titles for a first variant of the ``\lopt{japanese}'' language have been found (by a Google search) on
+% the Web site of
+% Professor \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}.
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% But see also other variants in sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese2}{s+mld+japanese6}.
+% \or\relax
+% Il y~a
+% plusieurs variantes pour les titres en japonais.
+% Les titres pour une première variante de la langue <<~\lopt{japanese}~>> (japonais) ont été trouvés
+% (par une recherche avec Google) sur le site Web du Professeur
+% \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}}.
+%
+% Mais il faut aussi regarder les autres variantes dans les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese2}{s+mld+japanese6}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{japanese.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*japanese>
+\ProvidesFile{japanese.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese}%
+%% Japanese titles. Needs japanese fonts (CJK) and special input encoding.
+%% From Kumazawa Toshiki <kumazawa@biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp>
+%% http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html
+%</japanese>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Japanese2'' language: \uxmldo{japanese2}}\label{s+mld+japanese2}\ixmldo{japanese2}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese2}'' language (japanese, second variant) are taken from file
+% \xfile{JIS.cap} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese3}{s+mld+japanese6}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~japanese2~>>: \uxmldo{japanese2}}\label{s+mld+japanese2}\ixmldo{japanese2}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese2}~>> (japonais, deuxième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{JIS.cap} du
+% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr.
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+japanese} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese3}{s+mld+japanese6}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese2}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{japanese2.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese2}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese2.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*japanese2>
+\ProvidesFile{japanese2.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese2}%
+%% From the file JIS.cap of the CJK package
+%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e.
+%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: EUC
+%</japanese2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Japanese3'' language: \uxmldo{japanese3}}\label{s+mld+japanese3}\ixmldo{japanese3}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese3}'' language (japanese, third variant) are taken from
+% file \xfile{JIS.cpx} of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese2}, and~\vref{s+mld+japanese4}{s+mld+japanese6}.
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese3}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{japanese3.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~japanese3~>>: \uxmldo{japanese3}}\label{s+mld+japanese3}\ixmldo{japanese3}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese3}~>> (japonais, troisième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{JIS.cpx} du
+% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Des fontes spéciales sont bien sûr nécessaires.
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese2} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese4}{s+mld+japanese6}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese3}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{japanese3.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Notez que les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese3}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas
+% être générés facilement, donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese3.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*japanese3>
+\ProvidesFile{japanese3.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese3}%
+%% From the file JIS.cpx of the CJK package
+%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e.
+%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: EUC, preprocessed
+%</japanese3>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Japanese4'' language: \uxmldo{japanese4}}\label{s+mld+japanese4}\ixmldo{japanese4}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese4}'' language (japanese, fourth version) are taken from file \xfile{SJIS.cap} of the
+% \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}). Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese3}, and~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese5}{s+mld+japanese6}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~japanese4~>>: \uxmldo{japanese4}}\label{s+mld+japanese4}\ixmldo{japanese4}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese4}~>> (japonais, quatrième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{SJIS.cap}
+% du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, bien sûr. Voir aussi les
+% sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese3} et~\vref{s+mld+japanese5}{s+mld+japanese6}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese4}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{japanese4.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese4}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese4.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*japanese4>
+\ProvidesFile{japanese4.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese4}%
+%% From SJIS.cap in CJK package for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean)
+%% with LaTeX2e. Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28/03/2003).
+%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: SJIS
+%</japanese4>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{12}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Japanese5'' language: \uxmldo{japanese5}}\label{s+mld+japanese5}\ixmldo{japanese5}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese5}'' (japanese, fifth variant) language are taken from file \xfile{SJIS.cpx} of
+% the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Special fonts are needed, of course.
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese4}, and~\vref{s+mld+japanese6}.
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese5}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{japanese5.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \section{Langue <<~japanese5~>>: \uxmldo{japanese5}}\label{s+mld+japanese5}\ixmldo{japanese5}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese5}~>> (japonais, cinquième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{SJIS.cpx} du
+% système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% Des fontes spéciales sont nécessaires, évidemment. Regardez aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese4}
+% et~\vref{s+mld+japanese6}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese5}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{japanese5.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese5}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese5.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*japanese5>
+\ProvidesFile{japanese5.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcloadmlo{japanese5}%
+%% From the file SJIS.cpx of the CJK package
+%% for using Asian logographs (Chinese/Japanese/Korean) with LaTeX2e.
+%% Created by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>. Version 4.5.2 (28-Mar-2003)
+%% Character set: JIS X 0208:1997 (or JIS X 0208-1990), encoding: SJIS, preprocessed
+%</japanese5>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{11}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Japanese6'' language: \uxmldo{japanese6}}\label{s+mld+japanese6}\ixmldo{japanese6}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese6}'' (japanese, sixth variant) language have been found (by a Google search)
+% on the Web site of
+% Professor \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}.
+% ^^A \lneed{4}
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese5}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~japanese6~>>: \uxmldo{japanese6}}\label{s+mld+japanese6}\ixmldo{japanese6}
+% Les titres pour la langue «~\lopt{japanese6}~» (japonais, sixième variante) ont été trouvés (par une recherche avec
+% Google) sur le site Web du Professeur
+% \xname{Toshiki}{Kumazawa}\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html}}}.
+% ^^A \lneed{4}
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+japanese}{s+mld+japanese5}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{japanese6}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{japanese6.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{japanese6}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \xfile{japanese6.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*japanese6>
+\ProvidesFile{japanese6.mld}[2006/10/31]\mtcloadmlo{japanese6}%
+%% Japanese6 titles. Needs japanese fonts (CJK) and special input encoding.
+%% From Kumazawa Toshiki <kumazawa@biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp>
+%% http://www.biwako.shiga-u.ac.jp/sensei/kumazawa/tex/minitoc.html
+%</japanese6>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Kannada'' language: \uxfile{kannada.mld}}\label{s+mld+kannada}\ixfile{kannada.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue «~kannada~»: \uxfile{kannada.mld}}\label{s+mld+kannada}\ixgrf{kannada.mld}
+% \fi
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{7.180851064mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The
+% Kannada (``\lopt{kannada}'') (or Kannara) language is a dravidian language spoken in the Karnataka state
+% (main town: Bangalore) of India.
+% Titles are taken in the \xfile{kanlel.sty} package file from the
+% \packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX} project~\cite{kannadatex}\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/kannadatex}} by \name{C.~S.}{Yogananda} and \name{K.~K.}{Subramaniam}.
+% Specific fonts are required. See the alphabet here: \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/kannada.htm}.
+% \or\relax
+% Le
+% «~\lopt{kannada}~» (ou kannara) est une langue dravidienne parlée dans l'état Karnataka (capitale Bangalore) de l'Inde. Les textes pour les
+% titres sont tirées du fichier paquetage \xfile{kanlel.sty} du projet
+% \packa{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}~\cite{kannadatex}\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/kannadatex}}} de \name{C.~S.}{Yogananda} et \name{K.~K.}{Subramaniam}.
+% Des fontes spécifiques sont nécessaires. Voir l'alphabet ici: \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/kannada.htm}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kannada>
+\ProvidesFile{kannada.mld}[2007/02/22]%
+%% From kanlel.sty of Kannadatex
+%% (C. S. Yogananda yoga@math.iisc.ernet.in yogacs@users.sarovar.org)
+%% (K. K. Subramaniam subbukk@users.sarovar.org)
+\def\ptctitle{pariviDi}%
+\def\plftitle{citarxgaLa paTiTx}%
+\def\plftitle{koVSaTxkagaLa paTiTx}%
+\def\mtctitle{pariviDi}%
+\def\mlftitle{citarxgaLa paTiTx}%
+\def\mlftitle{koVSaTxkagaLa paTiTx}%
+\def\stctitle{pariviDi}%
+\def\slftitle{citarxgaLa paTiTx}%
+\def\slftitle{koVSaTxkagaLa paTiTx}%
+%</kannada>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Khalkha'' language: \uxfile{khalkha.mld}}\label{s+mld+khalkha}\ixfile{khalkha.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~khalkha~>>: \uxfile{khalkha.mld}}\label{s+mld+khalkha}\ixfile{khalkha.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% ``\lopt{khalkha}'' is a synomym for ``\lopt{xalx}'',
+% so we just load \xfile{xalx.mld} (see sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}):
+% \or\relax
+% Le <<~\lopt{khalkha}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{xalx}~>>,
+% donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{xalx.mld}
+% (voir les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*khalkha>
+\ProvidesFile{khalkha.mld}[2005/11/16]\mtcselectlanguage{xalx}%
+%</khalkha>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Latin'' language: \uxfile{latin.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin}\ixfile{latin.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{latin}'' language (medieval) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco}, and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latin2}.
+% The latin
+% language is still used by the Catholic Church and the Vatican for archives and some texts.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~latin~>>: \uxfile{latin.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin}\ixfile{latin.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latin}~>> (médiéval) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx}
+% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latin2}.
+% La langue latine
+% est encore utilisée par l'Église Catholique et le Vatican pour des archives et certains textes.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latin>
+\ProvidesFile{latin.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Latin (medieval) titles from latin.dtx (babel)
+%% Beccari, Claudio & Tabacco, Raffalla & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad
+\def\ptctitle{Index}%
+\def\plftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}%
+\def\plttitle{Conspectus tabularum}%
+\def\mtctitle{Index}%
+\def\mlftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}%
+\def\mlttitle{Conspectus tabularum}%
+\def\stctitle{Index}%
+\def\slftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}%
+\def\slttitle{Conspectus tabularum}%
+%</latin>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Latin2'' language: \uxfile{latin2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin2}\ixfile{latin2.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~latin2~>>: \uxfile{latin2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latin2}\ixfile{latin2.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\ae}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{latin2}'' language (latin, medieval, abbreviated variant) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx}
+% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco}, and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski})
+% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, but abbreviated. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latin}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latin2}~>> (latin, médiéval,  variante abrégée) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx}
+% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari}, \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, mais ont été abrégés. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latin}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latin2>
+\ProvidesFile{latin2.mld}[2007/04/06]%
+%% Latin (medieval) titles (abbreviated) from latin.dtx (babel)
+%% Beccari, Claudio & Tabacco, Raffalla & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad
+\def\ptctitle{Index}%
+\def\plftitle{Conspectus descriptionum}%
+\def\plttitle{Conspectus tabularum}%
+\def\mtctitle{Index}%
+\def\mlftitle{Descriptiones}%
+\def\mlttitle{{Tabul\ae}}%
+\def\stctitle{Index}%
+\def\slftitle{Descriptiones}%
+\def\slttitle{{Tabul\ae}}%
+%</latin2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Latinc'' language: \uxfile{latinc.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc}\ixfile{latinc.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{latinc}'' language (classical latin) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari} and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latinc2}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~latinc~>>: \uxfile{latinc.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc}\ixfile{latinc.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latinc}~>> (latin classique) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx}
+% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latinc2}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latinc>
+\ProvidesFile{latinc.mld}[2007/04/13]%
+%% Latin (classical) titles from latin.dtx (babel)
+%% Beccari, Claudio & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad
+\def\ptctitle{Index}%
+\def\plftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}%
+\def\plttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}%
+\def\mtctitle{Index}%
+\def\mlftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}%
+\def\mlttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}%
+\def\stctitle{Index}%
+\def\slftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}%
+\def\slttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}%
+%</latinc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Latinc2'' language: \uxfile{latinc2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc2}\ixfile{latinc2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{latinc2}'' language (classical latin, abbreviated variant) are taken from the \xfile{latin.dtx}
+% (by \name{Claudio}{Beccari} and \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski})
+% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, but abbreviated. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latinc}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~latinc2~>>: \uxfile{latinc2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latinc2}\ixfile{latinc2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latinc2}~>> (latin classique, variante abrégée) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{latin.dtx}
+% (de \name{Claudio}{Beccari} et \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,latin}, mais ont été abrégés. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+latinc}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latinc2>
+\ProvidesFile{latinc2.mld}[2007/04/06]%
+%% Latin (classical) titles (abbreviated) from latin.dtx (babel)
+%% Beccari, Claudio & {\.Zelechowski}, Krzysztof Konrad
+\def\ptctitle{Index}%
+\def\plftitle{Conspectvs descriptionvm}%
+\def\plttitle{Conspectvs tabvlarvm}%
+\def\mtctitle{Index}%
+\def\mlftitle{Descriptiones}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabvlae}%
+\def\stctitle{Index}%
+\def\slftitle{Descriptiones}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabvlae}%
+%</latinc2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \section{``Latvian'' language: \uxfile{latvian.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian}\ixfile{latvian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~latvian~>>: \uxfile{latvian.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian}\ixfile{latvian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.3649022507\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.635097493\iwidth}
+
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
+
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{latvian}'' language\,\footnote{Note that ``\lopt{latvian}'' is the original name for
+% ``\lopt{letton}''.} (\emph{latvie\v{s}u valoda}) come from the \xfile{latvian.ldf} file
+% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
+% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}.  See also section~\vref{s+mld+letton}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian}~>>\,\footnote{Notez que <<~\lopt{latvian}~>> (latvien) est
+% l'autre nom du <<~\lopt{letton}~>>.} (\emph{latvie\v{s}u valoda}) viennent du fichier \xfile{latvian.ldf}
+% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
+% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+letton}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latvian>
+\ProvidesFile{latvian.mld}[2005/02/08]%
+%% From latvian.ldf (Antomega project).
+%% Needs Omega. Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov
+\def\ptctitle{\locallatvian{Saturs}}%
+\def\plftitle{\locallatvian{Att^^^^0113lu saraksts}}%
+\def\plttitle{\locallatvian{Tabulu saraksts}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\locallatvian{Saturs}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\locallatvian{Att^^^^0113lu saraksts}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\locallatvian{Tabulu saraksts}}%
+\def\stctitle{\locallatvian{Saturs}}%
+\def\slftitle{\locallatvian{Att^^^^0113lu saraksts}}%
+\def\slttitle{\locallatvian{Tabulu saraksts}}%
+%</latvian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \section{``Latvian2'' language: \uxfile{latvian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian2}\ixfile{latvian2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{latvian2}'' language come from the \xfile{latvian.ldf} file
+% (by \name{Andris}{Lasis} and \namea{Ivars}{Dri\k{k}is}{Drikis})
+% at~\url{http://home.lanet.lv/~drikis/TeX/2e/latvian.ldf}.  See also section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \section{Langue <<~latvian2~>>: \uxfile{latvian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+latvian2}\ixfile{latvian2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian2}~>> viennent du fichier \xfile{latvian.ldf}
+% (de \name{Andris}{Lasis} et \namea{Ivars}{Dri\k{k}is}{Drikis})
+% à~{\froff\url{http://home.lanet.lv/~drikis/TeX/2e/latvian.ldf}}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*latvian2>
+\ProvidesFile{latvian2.mld}[2007/06/05]%
+% Andris Lasis (andris_lisis@simms.lv) Ivars Drikis (drikis@lanet.lv)
+% http://home.lanet.lv/~drikis/TeX/2e/latvian.ldf
+\def\ptctitle{Saturs}%
+\def\plftitle{Att\= elu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabulu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}%
+\def\mtctitle{Saturs}%
+\def\mlftitle{Att\= elu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabulu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}%
+\def\stctitle{Saturs}%
+\def\slftitle{Att\= elu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabulu r\= ad\={\i}t\= ajs}%
+%</latvian2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Letton'' language: \uxfile{letton.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton}\ixfile{letton.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~letton~>>: \uxfile{letton.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton}\ixfile{letton.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{letton}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{latvian}'' language, so we just load
+% \xfile{latvian.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}.
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{letton}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \xfile{latvian.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+latvian}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*letton>
+\ProvidesFile{letton.mld}[2005/02/08]\mtcselectlanguage{latvian}%
+%</letton>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Letton2'' language: \uxfile{letton2.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton2}\ixfile{letton2.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~letton2~>>: \uxfile{letton2.mld}}\label{s+mld+letton2}\ixfile{letton2.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{letton2}'' language is a synonym for the ``\lopt{latvian2}'' language, so we just load
+% \xfile{latvian2.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+latvian2}.
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{letton2}~>> est un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{latvian2}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \xfile{latvian2.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+latvian2}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*letton2>
+\ProvidesFile{letton2.mld}[2007/06/05]\mtcselectlanguage{latvian2}%
+%</letton2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Lithuanian'' language: \uxfile{lithuanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian}\ixfile{lithuanian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~lithuanian~>>: \uxfile{lithuanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian}\ixfile{lithuanian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.442069741\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.557930259\iwidth}
+
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{lithuanian}'' language (\emph{lietuvi\k{u} kalba}) are taken from the \xfile{lithuanian.ldf}
+% file\footnote{Found in \url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/download/zip/babel.zip}.}
+% (by \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis})
+% for the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{lithuanian}~>> (lituanien, \emph{lietuvi\k{u} kalba}) sont simplement tirés du fichier
+% \xfile{lithuanian.ldf}\,\footnote{Trouvé dans {\froff{\url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/download/zip/babel.zip}}}.}
+% (de \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis})
+% pour le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian2}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lithuanian>
+\ProvidesFile{lithuanian.mld}[2007/12/04]%
+%% Lithuanian titles from lithuanian.ldf
+%% in http://www.vtex.lt/tex/download/zip/babel.zip
+%% by Tolusis, Sigitas (sigitas@vtex.lt)
+\def\ptctitle{Turinys}%
+\def\plftitle{Paveiksl\protect\k u s\protect\k ara\protect\v sas}%
+\def\plttitle{Lentel\protect\.es}%
+\def\mtctitle{Turinys}%
+\def\mlftitle{Paveiksl\protect\k u s\protect\k ara\protect\v sas}%
+\def\mlttitle{Lentel\protect\.es}%
+\def\stctitle{Turinys}%
+\def\slftitle{Paveiksl\protect\k u s\protect\k ara\protect\v sas}%
+\def\slttitle{Lentel\protect\.es}%
+%</lithuanian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Lithuanian2'' language: \uxfile{lithuanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian2}\ixfile{lithuanian2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{lithuanian2}'' language (variant) are taken from the \xfile{lithuanian.ldf}
+% file, found in \url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/littex/littex-20070713.tar.gz},
+% (by \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis})
+% for the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian}.
+% The L7x encoding and the Latin Modern fonts are needed.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~lithuanian2~>>: \uxfile{lithuanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+lithuanian2}\ixfile{lithuanian2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{lithuanian2}~>> (lituanien, variante) sont simplement tirés du fichier
+% \xfile{lithuanian.ldf}, trouvé dans {\froff{\url{http://www.vtex.lt/tex/littex/littex-20070713.tar.gz}}},
+% (de \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis})
+% pour le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+lithuanian}.
+% Le codage L7x et les fontes Latin Modern sont nécessaires.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lithuanian2>
+\ProvidesFile{lithuanian2.mld}[2007/12/04]%
+%% Lithuanian titles (variant) from lithuanian.ldf
+%% in http://www.vtex.lt/tex/littex/littex-20060928.tar.gz
+%% by Tolusis, Sigitas (sigitas@vtex.lt)
+\def\ptctitle{Turinys}%
+\def\plftitle{Iliustracij\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}as}%
+\def\plttitle{Lenteli\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}}%
+\def\mtctitle{Turinys}%
+\def\mlftitle{Iliustracij\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}as}%
+\def\mlttitle{Lenteli\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}}%
+\def\stctitle{Turinys}%
+\def\slftitle{Iliustracij\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}as}%
+\def\slttitle{Lenteli\k{u} s\k{a}ra\v{s}}%
+%</lithuanian2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \par
+%
+% \lneed{9}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Lowersorbian'' language: \uxfile{lowersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lowersorbian}\ixfile{lowersorbian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~lowersorbian~>>: \uxfile{lowersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lowersorbian}\ixfile{lowersorbian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{lowersorbian}'' language\,\footnote{Lower sorbian. Sorbian, or wendisch,
+% is a member of the west slavic subgroup of indo-european languages spoken in Lower Lusatia in the german
+% \emph{länder} of Saxony and Brandenburg. The Sorbs are descendents of the Wends, the german name for the slavic tribes
+% who occupied the area between the Elbe and Saale rivers in the west and the Odra (Oder) river in the east during
+% the medieval period (\textsc{vi}-th century).
+% } (\emph{dolnoserbski, dolnoserv\v{s}\'{c}ina}) are taken from the \xfile{lsorbian.dtx} file (by \name{Eduard}{Werner})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,lsorbian}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}.
+% A shorter language name is \lopt{lsorbian} (see section~\vref{s+mld+lsorbian}).
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{lowersorbian}~>> (bas sorabe)\,\footnote{%
+% ^^A \interfootnotelinepenalty=10000\interlinepenalty=10000\relax
+% Le bas sorabe, le sorabe ou wende,
+% est un membre du sous-groupe slave occidental des langues indo-européennes parlé en Basse-Lusace dans les \emph{länder}
+% allemands de Saxe et de Brandebourg. Les Sorabes sont des descendants des Wendes, nom germain des tribus slaves
+% qui occupaient la zone entre l'Elbe et la Saale à~l'ouest et l'Oder à~l'est pendant la période médiévale
+% (\textsc{vi}\fup{e}~siècle). }
+% (\emph{dolnoserbski, dolnoserv\v{s}\'{c}ina}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{lsorbian.dtx}
+% (de \name{Eduard}{Werner})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,lsorbian}.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}.
+% Un nom plus court pour cette langue est \lopt{lsorbian} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+lsorbian}).
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+
+
+
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lowersorbian>
+\ProvidesFile{lowersorbian.mld}[2006/02/28]%
+%% Lower sorbian titles from lsorbian.dtx (babel) by Werner, Eduard
+\def\ptctitle{Wop\'simje\'se}%
+\def\plftitle{Zapis wobrazow}%
+\def\plttitle{Zapis tabulkow}%
+\def\mtctitle{Wop\'simje\'se}%
+\def\mlftitle{Zapis wobrazow}%
+\def\mlttitle{Zapis tabulkow}%
+\def\stctitle{Wop\'simje\'se}%
+\def\slftitle{Zapis wobrazow}%
+\def\slttitle{Zapis tabulkow}%
+%</lowersorbian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Lsorbian'' language: \uxfile{lsorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lsorbian}\ixfile{lsorbian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~lsorbian~>>: \uxfile{lsorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+lsorbian}\ixfile{lsorbian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{lsorbian}'' language is a synonym for ``\lopt{lowersorbian}'', so we just need to load \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}.
+% See section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}.
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{lsorbian}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{lowersorbian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{4}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lsorbian>
+\ProvidesFile{lsorbian.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcselectlanguage{lowersorbian}%
+%</lsorbian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Magyar'' language: \uxfile{magyar.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar}\ixfile{magyar.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~magyar~>>: \uxfile{magyar.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar}\ixfile{magyar.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.588235294\iwidth}
+% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.411764706\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}\reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{magyar}'' language are taken from the \xfile{magyar.dtx}
+% (by \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces} and \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, with help from \name{Attila}{Koppanyi})
+% file in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}. A synonym of ``\lopt{magyar}'' is
+% ``\lopt{hungarian}'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+hungarian}). See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar2}{s+mld+magyar3} for variants.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{magyar}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{magyar.dtx}
+% (de \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces} et \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, avec l'aide de \name{Attila}{Koppanyi})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}. Un synonyme de <<~\lopt{magyar}~>>
+% est <<~\lopt{hungarian}~>> (hongrois) (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+hungarian}).
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar2}{s+mld+magyar3} pour des variantes.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{4}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*magyar>
+\ProvidesFile{magyar.mld}[2006/03/08]%
+%% Magyar titles from magyar.dtx (babel). Bíró, Árpád & Bérces, József
+\def\ptctitle{Tartalom}%
+\def\plftitle{\'Abr\'ak}%
+\def\plttitle{T\'abl\'azatok}%
+\def\mtctitle{Tartalom}%
+\def\mlftitle{\'Abr\'ak}%
+\def\mlttitle{T\'abl\'azatok}%
+\def\stctitle{Tartalom}%
+\def\slftitle{\'Abr\'ak}%
+\def\slttitle{T\'abl\'azatok}%
+%</magyar>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Magyar2'' language: \uxfile{magyar2.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar2}\ixfile{magyar2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{magyar2}'' language are taken from a variant proposed
+% in the \xfile{magyar.dtx} file of the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} (by \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces},
+% \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, and \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}).
+% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+magyar} and~\vref{s+mld+magyar3}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~magyar2~>>: \uxfile{magyar2.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar2}\ixfile{magyar2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{magyar2}~>> sont tirés d'une variante proposée
+% dans le fichier \xfile{magyar.dtx} du  paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} (de \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces},
+% \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro} et \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}).
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+magyar} et~\vref{s+mld+magyar3}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*magyar2>
+\ProvidesFile{magyar2.mld}[2008/04/03]%
+%% Magyar2 titles (variant) from magyar.dtx (babel).
+%% Bíró, Árpád & Bérces, József
+\def\ptctitle{Tartalom}%
+\def\plftitle{\'Abr\'ak list\'aja}%
+\def\plttitle{T\'abl\'azatok list\'aja}%
+\def\mtctitle{Tartalom}%
+\def\mlftitle{\'Abr\'ak list\'aja}%
+\def\mlttitle{T\'abl\'azatok list\'aja}%
+\def\stctitle{Tartalom}%
+\def\slftitle{\'Abr\'ak list\'aja}%
+\def\slttitle{T\'abl\'azatok list\'aja}%
+%</magyar2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Magyar3'' language: \uxfile{magyar3.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar3}\ixfile{magyar3.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{magyar3}'' language (third variant of magyar) are taken
+% from the \xfile{magyar.dtx} file (by \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}, and \name{Attila}{Koppanyi})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}\,\footnote{The situation of the magyar language in
+% the \pack{babel} package is not clear; some experimental versions exist.}.
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar}{s+mld+magyar2}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~magyar3~>>: \uxfile{magyar3.mld}}\label{s+mld+magyar3}\ixfile{magyar3.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{magyar3}~>> (troisième variante de la langue magyar) sont tirés
+% du fichier \xfile{magyar.dtx} (de \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}, \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro} et \name{Attila}{Koppanyi}).
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,magyar}\,\footnote{La situation de la langue magyar dans
+% le paquetage \pack{babel} n'est pas claire; il existe des versions expérimentales.}.
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+magyar}{s+mld+magyar2}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*magyar3>
+\ProvidesFile{magyar3.mld}[2006/03/08]%
+%% Magyar3 titles (variant) from magyar.dtx (babel).
+%% Bíró, Árpád & Bérces, József
+\def\ptctitle{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}%
+\def\plftitle{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}%
+\def\plttitle{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}%
+\def\mtctitle{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}%
+\def\mlftitle{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}%
+\def\mlttitle{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}%
+\def\stctitle{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}%
+\def\slftitle{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}%
+\def\slttitle{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}%
+%</magyar3>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Malay'' language: \uxfile{malay.mld}}\label{s+mld+malay}\ixfile{malay.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~malay~>>: \uxfile{malay.mld}}\label{s+mld+malay}\ixfile{malay.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{malay}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasam}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasam.mld}
+% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}):
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{malay}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{bahasam}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \xfile{bahasam.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*malay>
+\ProvidesFile{malay.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasam}%
+%</malay>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Malayalam-b'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-b.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-b}\ixfile{malayalam-b.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-b~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-b.mld}}%
+% \label{s+mld+malayalam-b}\ixfile{malayalam-b.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.528700906\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.471299094\iwidth}
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \begin{macro}{\mm}
+% \begin{macro}{\X}
+% \begin{macro}{\<>}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-b}'' language
+% are taken from the
+% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
+% The Malayalam language is spoken from the western coast of
+% Malabar to the extreme southern India, mainly in the Kerala state. It is one of the dravidian languages strongly
+% bound to the Tamil language.
+% The
+% alphabet and the script are dated from the 8th or 9th centuries.
+% This language option requires specific fonts (depending on the
+% option of the \pack{malayalam} package).
+% It should be used with the following options of the
+% \pack{malayalam} package\,\footnote{There is a great variety of fonts for malayalam; hence I have attempted to limit
+% the number of \suffix{.mld} files.}:
+% \optp{aathira}{malayalam},
+% \optp{ambili}{malayalam},
+% \optp{anahka}{malayalam},
+% \optp{ashtamudi}{malayalam},
+% \optp{aswathi}{malayalam},
+% \optp{ayilyambold}{malayalam},
+% \optp{bhanu}{malayalam},
+% \optp{bhavana}{malayalam},
+% \optp{chippi}{malayalam},
+% \optp{gauri}{malayalam},
+% \optp{gopika}{malayalam},
+% \optp{indulekha}{malayalam},
+% \optp{ISMashtamudi}{malayalam},
+% \optp{ISMkarthika}{malayalam},
+% \optp{ISMkaumudi}{malayalam},
+% \optp{ISMrevathi}{malayalam},
+% \optp{jaya}{malayalam},
+% \optp{karthika}{malayalam},
+% \optp{kaumudi}{malayalam},
+% \optp{kottakkal}{malayalam},
+% \optp{makam}{malayalam},
+% \optp{malavika},
+% \optp{mridula}{malayalam},
+% \optp{payippad}{malayalam},
+% \optp{periyar}{malayalam},
+% \optp{ravivarma}{malayalam},
+% \optp{revathi}{malayalam},
+% \optp{sabari}{malayalam},
+% \optp{sarada}{malayalam},
+% \optp{sruthy}{malayalam}, and
+% \optp{triruvathira}{malayalam}.
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-b}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
+% La langue Malayalam est
+% parlée de la côte occidentale de Malabar jusqu'à l'extrême sud de l'Inde, principalement dans l'état de Kerala.
+% C'est l'une des langues dravidiennes fortement liées au Tamoul. L'alphabet%
+% 
+% et l'écriture datent du \textsc{viii}\fup{e} ou
+% \textsc{ix}\fup{e}~siècle.
+% Cette option de langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (selon l'option
+% du paquetage \pack{malayalam}).
+% Elle devrait être utilisée avec les options suivantes du paquetage
+% \pack{malayalam}\,\footnote{Il y~a une grande variété de fontes pour le malayalam; j'ai donc essayé de limiter
+% le nombre de fichiers \suffix{.mld}.}:
+% \optp{aathira}{malayalam},
+% \optp{ambili}{malayalam},
+% \optp{anahka}{malayalam},
+% \optp{ashtamudi}{malayalam},
+% \optp{aswathi}{malayalam},
+% \optp{ayilyambold}{malayalam},
+% \optp{bhanu}{malayalam},
+% \optp{bhavana}{malayalam},
+% \optp{chippi}{malayalam},
+% \optp{gauri}{malayalam},
+% \optp{gopika}{malayalam},
+% \optp{indulekha}{malayalam},
+% \optp{ISMashtamudi}{malayalam},
+% \optp{ISMkarthika}{malayalam},
+% \optp{ISMkaumudi}{malayalam},
+% \optp{ISMrevathi}{malayalam},
+% \optp{jaya}{malayalam},
+% \optp{karthika}{malayalam},
+% \optp{kaumudi}{malayalam},
+% \optp{kottakkal}{malayalam},
+% \optp{makam}{malayalam},
+% \optp{malavika}{malayalam},
+% \optp{mridula}{malayalam},
+% \optp{payippad}{malayalam},
+% \optp{periyar}{malayalam},
+% \optp{ravivarma}{malayalam},
+% \optp{revathi}{malayalam},
+% \optp{sabari}{malayalam},
+% \optp{sarada}{malayalam},
+% \optp{sruthy}{malayalam} et
+% \optp{triruvathira}{malayalam}.
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*malayalam-b>
+\ProvidesFile{malayalam-b.mld}[2007/12/04]%
+\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
+\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}%
+\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
+\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
+\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
+\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}%
+\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
+%</malayalam-b>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Malayalam-keli'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-keli.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-keli}\ixfile{malayalam-keli.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-keli~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-keli.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-keli}\ixfile{malayalam-keli.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mm}
+% \begin{macro}{\X}
+% \begin{macro}{\<>}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-keli}'' language,
+% with the ``Keli'' fonts, are taken from the \pack{malayalam}
+% package~\cite{malayalam} by~\name{A.J.}{Alex}. This language requires specific fonts.
+% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-b} and \vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-keli}~>> (malayalam, écriture \emph{keli}), avec les fontes <<~Keli~>>,
+% sont tirés du paquetage
+% \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}. Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques.
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-b} et \vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*malayalam-keli>
+\ProvidesFile{malayalam-keli.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Malayalam: Keli fonts
+\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
+\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}%
+\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
+\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
+\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
+\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<110>}\X{\<123>\<88>}\X{\<167>}\X{\<196>}}%
+\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
+%</malayalam-keli>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Malayalam-keli2'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}\ixfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-keli2~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}}%
+% \label{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}\ixfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mm}
+% \begin{macro}{\X}
+% \begin{macro}{\<>}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-keli2}'' language
+% are taken from the
+% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
+% This language requires specific fonts (keli second variant).
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli}
+% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-mr}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-keli2}~>> sont
+% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
+% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (keli seconde variante).\ABK
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli}
+% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-mr}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*malayalam-keli2>
+\ProvidesFile{malayalam-keli2.mld}[2007/12/04]%
+% Keli fonts (mkl)
+\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
+\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}
+\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
+\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}
+\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
+\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<197>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<161>}\<119>}%
+\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}
+\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<116>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<110>}\X{\<102>\<112>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<196>}}%
+%</malayalam-keli2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Malayalam-mr'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-mr.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-mr}\ixfile{malayalam-mr.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-mr~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-mr.mld}}%
+% \label{s+mld+malayalam-mr}\ixfile{malayalam-mr.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mm}
+% \begin{macro}{\X}
+% \begin{macro}{\<>}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-mr}'' language
+% are taken from the
+% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
+% This language requires specific fonts (traditional rachana).
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}
+% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-omega}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-mr}~>> sont
+% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
+% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (rachana traditionnel).\ABK
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-keli2}
+% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-omega}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*malayalam-mr>
+\ProvidesFile{malayalam-mr.mld}[2007/12/04]%
+% mr fonts (rachana: mr1,...,mr6)
+\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}
+\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}
+\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}
+\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}
+\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}
+\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}
+\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}
+\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}
+\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}
+%</malayalam-mr>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Malayalam-omega'' language: \uxmldo{malayalam-omega}}%
+% \label{s+mld+malayalam-omega}\ixmldo{malayalam-omega}\label{s+mlo+malayalam-omega}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue «~malayalam-omega~»: \uxmldo{malayalam-omega}}%
+% \label{s+mld+malayalam-omega}\ixmldo{malayalam-omega}\label{s+mlo+malayalam-omega}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This is the Malayalam language implementation ``\lopt{malayalam-omega}''
+% based on \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$) (the version of \LaTeX\ for
+% Omega) via the \pack{omal} package~\cite{malayalam-o} (by~\name{A.J.}{Alex}) of the Malayalam-Omega
+% project\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/malayalam}}. As the titles contain characters in a special encoding,
+% we must load a \suffix{.mlo} file. A lot of fonts are available via options of the \pack{omal} package.
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-mr}
+% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
+% \or\relax
+% C'est l'implantation «~\lopt{malayalam-omega}~» de la langue malayalam lorsque vous utilisez
+% \emph{Lambda}~($\mathbf{\Lambda}$) (la version de \LaTeX\ pour
+% Omega) via le paquetage \pack{omal}~\cite{malayalam-o} (de \name{A.J.}{Alex}) du projet
+% Malayalam-Omega\,{\froff\footnote{\url{http://Sarovar.org/projects/malayalam}}}. Comme les titres contiennent des
+% caractères dans un codage spécial, nous devons charger un fichier \suffix{.mlo}. De nombreuses fontes sont disponibles
+% via des options du paquetage \pack{omal}.
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-mr}
+% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*malayalam-omega>
+\ProvidesFile{malayalam-omega.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcloadmlo{malayalam-omega}%
+%% from omal.sty (Alex A.J. indicTeX@gmail.com)
+%</malayalam-omega>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{9}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Malayalam-rachana'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}}%
+% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-rachana~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}}%
+% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mm}
+% \begin{macro}{\X}
+% \begin{macro}{\C}
+% \begin{macro}{\F}
+% \begin{macro}{\<>}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-rachana}'' language,
+% with the traditionnal ``Rachana'' fonts (old lipi), are taken from
+% the \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by~\name{A.J.}{Alex}.
+% This language requires specific fonts.
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-omega}
+% and~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-rachana}~>>,
+% avec les fontes traditionnelles <<~Rachana~>> (ancien \emph{lipi}),
+% sont tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
+% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques.
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-omega}
+% et~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*malayalam-rachana>
+\ProvidesFile{malayalam-rachana.mld}[2005/06/07]%
+%% Malayalam: Rachana fonts, traditionnal.
+\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
+\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
+\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
+\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
+\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
+\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
+\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
+%</malayalam-rachana>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Malayalam-rachana2'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-rachana2~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}}%
+% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mm}
+% \begin{macro}{\X}
+% \begin{macro}{\<>}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-rachana2}'' language,
+% with the reformed ``Rachana'' fonts (new lipi), are taken from the
+% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
+% This language requires specific fonts.
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana} and~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-rachana2}~>>,
+% avec les fontes <<~Rachana~>> réformées (nouveau \emph{lipi}), sont
+% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
+% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques.
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana} et~\vref{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*malayalam-rachana2>
+\ProvidesFile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}[2006/01/13]% %% Malayalam: Rachana fonts, reformed.
+\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
+\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
+\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
+\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
+\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
+\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{\<125>\<88>}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
+\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{\<106>\<113>}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
+%</malayalam-rachana2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{9}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Malayalam-rachana3'' language: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}}\label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~malayalam-rachana3~>>: \uxfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}}%
+% \label{s+mld+malayalam-rachana3}\ixfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \begin{macro}{\mm}
+% \begin{macro}{\X}
+% \begin{macro}{\<>}
+% \begin{macro}{\C}
+% \begin{macro}{\F}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{malayalam-rachana3}'' language
+% are taken from the
+% \pack{malayalam} package~\cite{malayalam} by \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
+% This language requires specific fonts (rachana).
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{malayalam-rachana3}~>> sont
+% tirés du paquetage \pack{malayalam}~\cite{malayalam} de \name{A.J.}{Alex}.
+% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques (rachana).
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+malayalam-b}{s+mld+malayalam-rachana2}.
+% \fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*malayalam-rachana3>
+\ProvidesFile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}[2007/12/04]% % Rachana fonts (mr2,...,mr6)
+\def\ptctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
+\def\plftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
+\def\plttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
+\def\mlftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
+\def\stctitle{\mm \X{\<68>}\X{\<201>}\X{\<83>}\X{\<183>}\<119>}%
+\def\slftitle{\mm \X{\<78>\<111>}\X{{\C\<94>}}\X{\<186>}\X{\<179>}}%
+\def\slttitle{\mm \X{\<117>\<83>}\X{\<95>\<111>}\X{{\F\<59>}}\X{\<73>}\X{\<179>}}%
+%</malayalam-rachana3>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Manju'' language: \uxfile{manju.mld}}\label{s+mld+manju}\ixfile{manju.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~manju~>>: \uxfile{manju.mld}}\label{s+mld+manju}\ixfile{manju.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{manju}'' language is a synomym for ``\lopt{bithe}'',
+% so we just load \xfile{bithe.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+bithe}):
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{manju}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{bithe}~>>, donc nous chargeons
+% simplement \xfile{bithe.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bithe}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*manju>
+\ProvidesFile{manju.mld}[2005/11/16]\mtcselectlanguage{bithe}%
+%</manju>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{14.28125mm}\reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Mexican'' language: \uxfile{mexican.mld}}\label{s+mld+mexican}\ixfile{mexican.mld}
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{mexican}'' language (\emph{español mexicano}) are taken from the \xfile{mexican.ldf} file
+% (by \name{Luis}{Rivera}) in \url{http://mirror.ctan.org/language/spanish/nonstandard/mx/}.
+% Mexican is a spanish (castillan) dialect.
+% The title of the parttocs is shorter for articles. See also section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}.
+% 
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~mexican~>>: \uxfile{mexican.mld}}\label{s+mld+mexican}\ixfile{mexican.mld}
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{mexican}~>> (mexicain, \emph{español mexicano}) sont tirés du
+% fichier \xfile{mexican.ldf} (de \name{Luis}{Rivera})
+% dans \url{http://mirror.ctan.org/language/spanish/nonstandard/mx/}. Le mexicain est un dialecte de l'espagnol
+% (castillan).
+% Le titre des parttocs est plus court dans les articles. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}.
+% 
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \def\LBAS{Less than 20\,000 speakers.}
+% \def\LMED{From 20\,000 to 100\,000 speakers.}
+% \def\LHAUT{More than 100\,000 speakers.}
+% \else\relax
+% \def\LBAS{Moins de 20\,000 locuteurs.}
+% \def\LMED{De 20\,000 à~100\,000 locuteurs.}
+% \def\LHAUT{Plus de 100\,000 locuteurs.}
+% \fi
+
+% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
+
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mexican>
+\ProvidesFile{mexican.mld}[2008/04/03]%
+%% Spanish titles (from mexican.ldf) Rivera, Luis (jlrn77@gmail.com)
+\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
+\def\ptctitle{\'Indice} \else \def\ptctitle{\'Indice general} \fi % <----
+\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\plttitle{\'Indice de tablas}%
+\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}%
+\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de tablas}%
+\def\stctitle{\'Indice}%
+\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\slttitle{\'Indice de tablas}%
+%</mexican>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Meyalu'' language: \uxfile{meyalu.mld}}\label{s+mld+meyalu}\ixfile{meyalu.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~meyalu~>>: \uxfile{meyalu.mld}}\label{s+mld+meyalu}\ixfile{meyalu.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{meyalu}'' language is just like ``\lopt{bahasam}'', so we just load \xfile{bahasam.mld}
+% (see section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}):
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{meyalu}~>> est comme <<~\lopt{bahasam}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \xfile{bahasam.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bahasam}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*meyalu>
+\ProvidesFile{meyalu.mld}[2006/01/13]\mtcselectlanguage{bahasam}%
+%</meyalu>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{12}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Mongol'' language: \uxfile{mongol.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongol}\ixfile{mongol.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~mongol~>>: \uxfile{mongol.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongol}\ixfile{mongol.mld}
+% \fi
+
+%
+% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount}
+%
+
+
+%
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \lneed{5}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{22.8125mm}
+% \begin{macro}{\mnr}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% ^^A \begin{SMOOTH}
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{mongol}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}
+% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}).
+% This language requires specific fonts. See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bithe},
+% \vrefrange{s+mld+buryat}{s+mld+buryat2}, and \vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}.
+% ^^A \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% ^^A \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{mongol}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}
+% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}).
+% Cette langue requiert des fontes spécifiques.
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+bicig}{s+mld+bithe}, \vrefrange{s+mld+buryat}{s+mld+buryat2} et
+% \vrefrange{s+mld+xalx}{s+mld+xalx3}.
+% ^^A \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{8}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mongol>
+\ProvidesFile{mongol.mld}[1999/03/16]%
+%% Mongol (xalx) titles. Needs mongol fonts
+\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}%
+\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}%
+\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
+\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}%
+\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}%
+\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
+\def\stctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}%
+\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}%
+\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
+%</mongol>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Mongolb'' language: \uxfile{mongolb.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolb}\ixfile{mongolb.mld}
+% This
+% is an other variant for the mongolian titles,
+% taken from the \xfile{mongolian.dtx} file~\cite{mongolian} (by \name{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh})
+% for the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} (hence the final ``\texttt{b}'' in ``\texttt{mongolb}'').
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~mongolb~>>: \uxfile{mongolb.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolb}\ixfile{mongolb.mld}
+% Ceci
+% est une autre variante pour les titres en mongol.
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{mongolb}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{mongolian.dtx}~\cite{mongolian}
+% (de \name{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh})
+% pour le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} (d'où le «~\texttt{b}~» final dans «~\texttt{mongolb}~»).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+% \begin{macro}{\cyr}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{mongolb}'' language use cyrillic characters and the X2 and T2 encodings and are derived
+% from the \xfile{russianb.dtx} file (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich} and \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue «~\lopt{mongolb}~» utilisent des caractères cyrilliques et les codages X2 et T2
+% sont dérivés du fichier \xfile{russianb.dtx} (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich} et
+% \name{Werner}{Lemberg}).
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mongolb>
+\ProvidesFile{mongolb.mld}[2007/01/29]%
+%% Mongolian titles from mongolian.dtx for the babel package
+%% Dorjgotov Batmunkh (batmunkh@num.edu.mn)
+%% Needs some cyrillic fonts and special cyrillic encoding T2 and X2.
+%% Vladimir Volovich (TeX@vvv.vsu.ru) & Werner Lemberg (wl@gnu.org)
+\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
+  \def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRA\cyrg\cyru\cyru\cyrl\cyrg\cyra}}\relax%
+\else\relax
+  \def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRG\cyra\cyrr\cyrch\cyri\cyrg}}\relax%
+\fi
+\def\plftitle{{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyru\cyrr\cyrg\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn
+   \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}%
+\def\plttitle{{\cyr\CYRH\cyry\cyrs\cyrn\cyrerev\cyrg\cyrt\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn
+   \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
+  \def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRA\cyrg\cyru\cyru\cyrl\cyrg\cyra}}\relax%
+\else\relax
+  \def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRG\cyra\cyrr\cyrch\cyri\cyrg}}\relax%
+\fi
+\def\mlftitle{{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyru\cyrr\cyrg\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn
+   \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}%
+\def\mlttitle{{\cyr\CYRH\cyry\cyrs\cyrn\cyrerev\cyrg\cyrt\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn
+   \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}%
+\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
+  \def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRA\cyrg\cyru\cyru\cyrl\cyrg\cyra}}\relax%
+\else\relax
+  \def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRG\cyra\cyrr\cyrch\cyri\cyrg}}\relax%
+\fi
+\def\slftitle{{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyru\cyrr\cyrg\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn
+   \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}%
+\def\slttitle{{\cyr\CYRH\cyry\cyrs\cyrn\cyrerev\cyrg\cyrt\cyri\cyrishrt\cyrn
+   \ \cyrzh\cyra\cyrg\cyrs\cyra\cyra\cyrl\cyrt}}%
+%</mongolb>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Mongolian'' language: \uxfile{mongolian.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolian}\ixfile{mongolian.mld}\ilopt{mongolian}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~mongolian~>>: \uxfile{mongolian.mld}}\label{s+mld+mongolian}\ixfile{mongolian.mld}\ilopt{mongolian}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% This is an other name for the ``mongolb'' language, because
+% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user} uses the name ``\lopt{mongolian}''.
+% We just load \xfile{mongolb.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+mongolb}.
+% \or\relax
+% C'est un autre nom pour la langue «~mongolb~», car le paquetage
+% \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user} utilise le nom «~\lopt{mongolian}~»
+% Nous chargeons simplement \xfile{mongolb.mld}. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+mongolb}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*mongolian>
+\ProvidesFile{mongolian.mld}[2007/02/05]\mtcselectlanguage{mongolb}%
+%</mongolian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Naustrian'' language: \uxfile{naustrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+naustrian}\ixfile{naustrian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~naustrian~>>: \uxfile{naustrian.mld}}\label{s+mld+naustrian}\ixfile{naustrian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{naustrian}'' language is a synonym of the ``\lopt{ngermanb}'' language
+% (a revised version of the \texttt{germanb} variant of the german language),
+% so we just load the \xfile{ngermanb.mld} file.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}.
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{naustrian}~>> (néo-autrichien) est un synonyme de la langue <<~\lopt{ngermanb}~>> (néo-allemand) (une
+% version réformée de la variante \texttt{germanb} de la langue allemande), donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \xfile{ngermanb.mld}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*naustrian>
+\ProvidesFile{naustrian.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{ngermanb}%
+%</naustrian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Newzealand'' language: \uxfile{newzealand.mld}}\label{s+mld+newzealand}\ixfile{newzealand.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~newzealand~>>: \uxfile{newzealand.mld}}\label{s+mld+newzealand}\ixfile{newzealand.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The
+% ``\lopt{newzealand}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'',
+% so we just load \xfile{english.mld}
+% (section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \or\relax
+% La
+% langue <<~\lopt{newzealand}~>> (néo-zélandais) est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*newzealand>
+\ProvidesFile{newzealand.mld}[2006/01/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
+%</newzealand>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Ngerman'' language: \uxfile{ngerman.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngerman}\ixfile{ngerman.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~ngerman~>>: \uxfile{ngerman.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngerman}\ixfile{ngerman.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{ngerman}'' language is a synonym of the ``\lopt{ngermanb}'' language\,\footnote{A revised version of the
+% \lopt{germanb} variant of the german language.}, so we just load the \xfile{ngermanb.mld} file.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}.
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{ngerman}~>> (néo-allemand) est un synonyme de la langue
+% <<~\lopt{ngermanb}~>>\,\footnote{Une version réformée
+% de la variante \lopt{germanb} de la langue allemande.}, donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{ngermanb.mld}.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ngerman>
+\ProvidesFile{ngerman.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{ngermanb}%
+%</ngerman>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Ngermanb'' language: \uxfile{ngermanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb}\ixfile{ngermanb.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{ngermanb}'' language\,\footnote{A variant of the german language, with revised spelling.} are
+% taken from the file \xfile{ngermanb.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Bernd}{Raichle} and \name{Walter}{Schmidt})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}.
+% See also sections~\vref{s+mld+naustrian}, and~\vref{s+mld+ngerman}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~ngermanb~>>: \uxfile{ngermanb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb}\ixfile{ngermanb.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{ngermanb}~>>\,\footnote{Une variante pour la langue allemande, avec une orthographe
+% réformée.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{ngermanb.dtx}
+% (de \name{Bernd}{Raichle} et \name{Walter}{Schmidt})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}. Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+naustrian}
+% et~\vref{s+mld+ngerman}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ngermanb>
+\ProvidesFile{ngermanb.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% New german (B) titles from ngermanb.dtx (babel). Raichle, Bernd & Schmidt, Walter
+\def\ptctitle{Inhaltsverzeichnis}%    % oder nur: Inhalt % <-----
+\def\plftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}%
+\def\mtctitle{Inhalt}%
+\def\mlftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}%
+\def\stctitle{Inhalt}%
+\def\slftitle{Abbildungsverzeichnis}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabellenverzeichnis}%
+%</ngermanb>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Ngermanb2'' language: \uxfile{ngermanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb2}\ixfile{ngermanb2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{ngermanb2}'' language (revised spelling and
+% short titles) are taken from the \xfile{ngermanb.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Bernd}{Raichle} and \name{Walter}{Schmidt})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}, and abbreviated.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}.
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \section{Langue <<~ngermanb2~>>: \uxfile{ngermanb2.mld}}\label{s+mld+ngermanb2}\ixfile{ngermanb2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{ngermanb2}~>> (orthographe réformée et titres courts) sont tirés du
+% fichier \xfile{ngermanb.dtx}
+% (de \name{Bernd}{Raichle} et \name{Walter}{Schmidt})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,ngermanb}, et abrégés.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+ngermanb}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ngermanb2>
+\ProvidesFile{ngermanb2.mld}[2005/09/27]%
+%% New german (B) short (2) titles
+\def\ptctitle{Inhalt}%
+\def\plftitle{Abbildungen}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabellen}%
+\def\mtctitle{Inhalt}%
+\def\mlftitle{Abbildungen}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabellen}%
+\def\stctitle{Inhalt}%
+\def\slftitle{Abbildungen}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabellen}%
+%</ngermanb2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \section{``Norsk'' language: \uxfile{norsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk}\ixfile{norsk.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~norsk~>>: \uxfile{norsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk}\ixfile{norsk.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.591188475\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.408811475\iwidth}
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{18.1875mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{norsk}'' language (or \emph{bokm\r{a}l}, ``language of the kingdom'') are taken from the
+% \xfile{norsk.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen},
+% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} and \name{Rune}{Kleveland})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, with help
+% from \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{norsk}~>> (norvégien, ou \emph{bokm{\aa}l}, <<~langue du royaume~>>) sont tirés du
+% fichier \xfile{norsk.dtx}
+% (de \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen},
+% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} et \name{Rune}{Kleveland})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk},
+% avec l'aide de \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}.
+% \fi
+
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*norsk>
+\ProvidesFile{norsk.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Norsk titles from norsk.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Helstrup, Haavard
+%% & Holme, Alv Kjetil & Iversen, Per Steinar &  Petterst, Terje Engeset
+%% & Kleveland, Rune. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no)
+\def\ptctitle{Innhold}%
+\def\plftitle{Figurer}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabeller}%
+\def\mtctitle{Innhold}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figurer}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabeller}%
+\def\stctitle{Innhold}%
+\def\slftitle{Figurer}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabeller}%
+%</norsk>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Norsk2'' language: \uxfile{norsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk2}\ixfile{norsk2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{norsk2}'' language (or \emph{bokm\r{a}l}, ``language of the kingdom'') are taken from the
+% \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, with help
+% from \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}, and abbreviated.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~norsk2~>>: \uxfile{norsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+norsk2}\ixfile{norsk2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{norsk2}~>> (norvégien, ou \emph{bokm{\aa}l}, <<~langue du royaume~>>) sont tirés
+% du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, avec l'aide de \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}, et abrégés.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*norsk2>
+\ProvidesFile{norsk2.mld}[2005/09/27]%
+%% Short norsk titles. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no)
+\def\ptctitle{Innhold}%
+\def\plftitle{Figurliste}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabelliste}%
+\def\mtctitle{Innhold}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figurliste}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabelliste}%
+\def\stctitle{Innhold}%
+\def\slftitle{Figurliste}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabelliste}%
+%</norsk2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \section{``Nynorsk'' language: \uxfile{nynorsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk}\ixfile{nynorsk.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{nynorsk}'' language\,\footnote{Created around 1800
+% by \namea{Ivar}{{\AA}ssen}{Assen} to make a real
+% independent and national norvegian language, in reaction to danish, from the various dialects spoken in the
+% country. But nynorsk has never gained much popularity outside rural regions.} are taken
+% from the \xfile{norsk.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen},
+% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} and \name{Rune}{Kleveland})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, with help from
+% \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+norsk}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \section{Langue <<~nynorsk~>>: \uxfile{nynorsk.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk}\ixfile{nynorsk.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{nynorsk}~>>
+% (néo-norvégien)\,\footnote{Créée vers 1800 par \namea{Ivar}{{\AA}ssen}{Assen}
+% pour construire une vraie langue norvégienne indépendante et nationale, en réaction au danois, à~partir des
+% divers dialectes parlés dans le pays. Mais le néo-norvégien n'a jamais beaucoup gagné en popularité en dehors des régions
+% rurales.} sont tirés du fichier \xfile{norsk.dtx}
+% (par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams}, \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}, \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}, \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen},
+% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst} et \name{Rune}{Kleveland})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,norsk}, avec l'aide de
+% \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+norsk}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*nynorsk>
+\ProvidesFile{nynorsk.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Nynorsk titles from norsk.dtx (babel). Braams, Johannes~L. & Helstrup, Haavard
+%% & Holme, Alv Kjetil & Iversen, Per Steinar & Petterst, Terje Engeset
+%% & Kleveland, Rune. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no)
+\def\mtctitle{Innhald}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figurar}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabellar}%
+\def\ptctitle{Innhald}%
+\def\plftitle{Figurar}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabellar}%
+\def\stctitle{Innhald}%
+\def\slftitle{Figurar}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabellar}%
+%</nynorsk>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Nynorsk2'' language: \uxfile{nynorsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk2}\ixfile{nynorsk2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{nynorsk2}'' language are variants of the titles of the ``\lopt{nynorsk}'' language.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~nynorsk2~>>: \uxfile{nynorsk2.mld}}\label{s+mld+nynorsk2}\ixfile{nynorsk2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{nynorsk2}~>> sont des variantes des titres de la langue <<~\lopt{nynorsk}~>>.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+nynorsk}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*nynorsk2>
+\ProvidesFile{nynorsk.mld}[1999/03/16]%
+%% Nynorsk titles. Thanks to Dag Langmyhr (dag@ifi.uio.no)
+\def\mtctitle{Innhald}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figurliste}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabelliste}%
+\def\ptctitle{Innhald}%
+\def\plftitle{Figurliste}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabelliste}%
+\def\stctitle{Innhald}%
+\def\slftitle{Figurliste}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabelliste}%
+%</nynorsk2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Occitan'' language: \uxfile{occitan.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan}\ixfile{occitan.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~occitan~>>: \uxfile{occitan.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan}\ixfile{occitan.mld}
+% \fi
+
+%
+% \vspace*{1.\bigskipamount}
+%
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{16.65625mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The
+% \lopt{occitan} language\,\footnote{I~used the site {\url{http://www.panoccitan.org/diccionari.aspx}}
+% for the translations.} is still spoken in the south of France,
+% from Limoges (Letmòges), Bordeaux (Bordèu) and Toulouse
+% (Tolosa\,\footnote{\emph{Per Tolosa totjorn mai!}}) to Marseille (Marselha) and Nice (Niça), with many local variants.
+% This bilingual street sign in Toulouse (Tolosa), like many
+% such signs found in historical parts of the city, is maintained
+% primarily for its antique charm; it is typical of what little
+% remains of the ``lenga d'oc'' in southern French cities.
+% See also~\url{http://www.orbilat.com/Maps/Occitan/Occitan.gif}.
+% See also~\cite{occi}.
+% \or\relax
+% La
+% langue occitane (\lopt{occitan} ou langue d'oc)\,\footnote{J'ai utilisé le site
+% {\froff\url{http://www.panoccitan.org/diccionari.aspx}} pour les traductions.}
+% est encore parlée dans le sud de la France,
+% de Limoges (Letmòges), Bordeaux (Bordèu) et Toulouse (Tolosa\,\footnote{\emph{Per Tolosa totjorn mai!}})
+% à~Marseille (Marselha) et Nice (Niça), avec de nombreuses variantes locales.
+% Ces plaques de rue en deux langues dans Toulouse (Tolosa),
+% comme de nombreux signes analogues dans les parties
+% historiques de la cité, sont conservées essentiellement pour
+% leur charme ancien; ceci est typique de ce qui subsiste de la
+% <<~lenga d'oc~>> dans les cités du Midi de la France.
+% Voir aussi {\froff\url{http://www.orbilat.com/Maps/Occitan/Occitan.gif}}.
+% Voir aussi~\cite{occi}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{5}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*occitan>
+\ProvidesFile{occitan.mld}[2007/12/18]%
+%% Occitan titles (translations using http://www.panoccitan.org/diccionari.aspx)
+\def\ptctitle{Ensenhador}%
+\def\plftitle{Ti\`era de las figurats}%
+\def\plttitle{Ti\`era de las taulas}%
+\def\mtctitle{Ensenhador}%
+\def\mlftitle{Ti\`era de las figurats}%
+\def\mlttitle{Ti\`era de las taulas}%
+\def\stctitle{Ensenhador}%
+\def\slftitle{Ti\`era de las figurats}%
+\def\slttitle{Ti\`era de las taulas}%
+%</occitan>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Occitan2'' language: \uxfile{occitan2.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan2}\ixfile{occitan2.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~occitan2~>>: \uxfile{occitan2.mld}}\label{s+mld+occitan2}\ixfile{occitan2.mld}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The \lopt{occitan2} language provides an example of variants for the occitan titles.
+% \or\relax
+% La langue \lopt{occitan2} donne un exemple de variantes des titres occitans.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{5}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*occitan2>
+\ProvidesFile{occitan2.mld}[2008/04/03]%
+% Occitan titles (variants)
+\def\ptctitle{Taula dels ensenhadors}%
+\def\plftitle{Lista de las figuras}%
+\def\plttitle{Lista dels tabl\`eus}%
+\def\mtctitle{Taula dels ensenhadors}%
+\def\mlftitle{Lista de las figuras}%
+\def\mlttitle{Lista dels tabl\`eus}%
+\def\stctitle{Taula dels ensenhadors}%
+\def\slftitle{Lista de las figuras}%
+\def\slttitle{Lista dels tabl\`eus}%
+%</occitan2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Polish'' language: \uxfile{polish.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish}\ixfile{polish.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~polish~>>: \uxfile{polish.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish}\ixfile{polish.mld}
+% \fi
+
+
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{polish}'' language (\emph{j\k{e}zyk polski}) are taken from the \xfile{polish.dtx} file
+% (by \namea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck} and \name{Michael}{Janich})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,polish}.
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish2}{s+mld+polski}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{polish}~>> (polonais, \emph{j\k{e}zyk polski}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{polish.dtx}
+% (de \namea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck} et \name{Michael}{Janich})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,polish}.
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish2}{s+mld+polski}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*polish>
+\ProvidesFile{polish.mld}[2007/12/18]%
+%% Polish titles from polish.dtx (babel). Schalück, Elmar & Janich, Michael
+\def\ptctitle{Spis tre\'sci}%
+\def\plftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}%
+\def\plttitle{Spis tablic}%
+\def\mtctitle{Spis tre\'sci}%
+\def\mlftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}%
+\def\mlttitle{Spis tablic}%
+\def\stctitle{Spis tre\'sci}%
+\def\slftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}%
+\def\slttitle{Spis tablic}%
+%</polish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Polish2'' language: \uxfile{polish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish2}\ixfile{polish2.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~polish2~>>: \uxfile{polish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+polish2}\ixfile{polish2.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\localpolish}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{polish2}'' language\,\footnote{``Polish2'' is a variant of ``\lopt{polish}''.} are taken from
+% the \xfile{omega-polish.ldf}
+% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
+% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. See also sections~\vref{s+mld+polish} and~\vref{s+mld+polski}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{polish2}~>> (polonais, seconde variante) sont tirés
+% du fichier \xfile{omega-polish.ldf}
+% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
+% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}.
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+polish} et~\vref{s+mld+polski}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*polish2>
+\ProvidesFile{polish2.mld}[2005/02/08]%
+%% from omega-polish.ldf (Antomega). Needs Omega. Alexej M. Kryukov, Dmitry Ivanov
+\def\ptctitle{\localpolish{Spis tre^^^^00b1ci}}%
+\def\plftitle{\localpolish{Spis rysunk^^^^00adw}}%
+\def\plttitle{\localpolish{Spis tablic}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\localpolish{Spis tre^^^^00b1ci}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\localpolish{Spis rysunk^^^^00adw}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\localpolish{Spis tablic}}%
+\def\stctitle{\localpolish{Spis tre^^^^00b1ci}}%
+\def\slftitle{\localpolish{Spis rysunk^^^^00adw}}%
+\def\slttitle{\localpolish{Spis tablic}}%
+%</polish2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Polski'' language: \uxfile{polski.mld}}\label{s+mld+polski}\ixfile{polski.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{polski}'' language (variant for polish) are taken from the \xfile{polski.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Mariusz}{Olko} and \namea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski})
+% in the \pack{polski} package~\cite{polski,platex-pl}. See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish}{s+mld+polish2}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~polski~>>: \uxfile{polski.mld}}\label{s+mld+polski}\ixfile{polski.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{polski}~>> (autre nom du polonais) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{polski.dtx}
+% (de \name{Mariusz}{Olko} et \namea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{polski}~\cite{polski,platex-pl}.
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+polish}{s+mld+polish2}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*polski>
+\ProvidesFile{polski.mld}[2008/01/15]%
+%% Polski titles from polski.dtx. Olko, Mariusz & Woli\'nski, Marcin.
+\def\ptctitle{Spis tre\'sci}%
+\def\plftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}%
+\def\plttitle{Spis tabel}%
+\def\mtctitle{Spis tre\'sci}%
+\def\mlftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}%
+\def\mlttitle{Spis tabel}%
+\def\stctitle{Spis tre\'sci}%
+\def\slftitle{Spis rysunk\'ow}%
+\def\slttitle{Spis tabel}%
+%</polski>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Portuges'' language: \uxfile{portuges.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuges}\ixfile{portuges.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~portuges~>>: \uxfile{portuges.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuges}\ixfile{portuges.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% The name ``\lopt{portuges}'' is another spelling for ``\lopt{portuguese}''
+% (see section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}), so we just load \xfile{portuguese.mld}:
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Le nom «~\lopt{portuges}~» est une autre orthographe pour <<~portuguese~>>
+% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+portuguese}), donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{portuguese.mld}:
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*portuges>
+\ProvidesFile{portuges.mld}[2005/06/07]\mtcselectlanguage{portuguese}%
+%</portuges>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Portuguese'' language: \uxfile{portuguese.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuguese}\ixfile{portuguese.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~portuguese~>>: \uxfile{portuguese.mld}}\label{s+mld+portuguese}\ixfile{portuguese.mld}
+% \fi
+
+% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
+
+% ^^A \def\ctextbf#1{\null\hfill\textbf{#1}\hfill\null}
+% ^^A \let\ctextbf\textbf
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.35\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.65\iwidth}
+% \vspace*{1.\baselineskip}
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.4\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.6\iwidth}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% ^^A http://www.gastronomias.com/lusofonia/
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{portuguese}'' language (\emph{português}) are taken from the \xfile{portuges.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}.
+% The portuguese language is spoken in Portugal (with the islands of Azores and Madeira) , in Brazil, and in
+% former portuguese colonies like Angola, Guinea-Bissau, Mozambique, Cape Verde Islands, Sa\~o~Tomé and Príncipe Islands,
+% East Timor, and some old trading posts like Macao and Goa.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}, because the titles are different in Brazil, even if the language is also portuguese.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{portuguese}~>> (portugais, \emph{português}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{portuges.dtx}
+% (de \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,portuges}.
+% Le portugais est parlé au Portugal (avec les Îles des Açores et Madère) , au Brésil, et dans les anciennes
+% colonies telles que l'Angola, la Guinée-Bissau, le Mozambique, les Îles du Cap-Vert, les Îles de Sa\~o~Tomé-et-Príncipe,
+% le Timor Oriental et quelques anciens comptoirs comme Macao et Goa.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+brazil}, parce que les titres sont différents au Brésil,
+% même si l'on y parle aussi le portugais.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*portuguese>
+\ProvidesFile{portuguese.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Portuguese titles from portuges.dtx (babel).
+%% Ramalhete, Jose Pedro
+\def\ptctitle{Conte\'udo}%
+\def\plftitle{Lista de Figuras}%
+\def\plttitle{Lista de Tabelas}%
+\def\mtctitle{Conte\'udo}%
+\def\mlftitle{Lista de Figuras}%
+\def\mlttitle{Lista de Tabelas}%
+\def\stctitle{Conte\'udo}%
+\def\slftitle{Lista de Figuras}%
+\def\slttitle{Lista de Tabelas}%
+%</portuguese>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Romanian'' language: \uxfile{romanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian}\ixfile{romanian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~romanian~>>: \uxfile{romanian.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian}\ixfile{romanian.mld}
+% \fi
+
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{romanian}'' language (\emph{român\u{a}}) come from the \xfile{romanian.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Umstatter}{Horst} and \name{Robert}{Juhasz})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,romanian}.
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian2}{s+mld+romanian3}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{romanian}~>> (roumain, \emph{român\u{a}}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{romanian.dtx}
+% (de \name{Umstatter}{Horst} et \name{Robert}{Juhasz})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,romanian}.
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian2}{s+mld+romanian3}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*romanian>
+\ProvidesFile{romanian.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Romanian titles from romanian.dtx (babel).
+%% Horst, Umstatter & Juhasz, Robert
+\def\ptctitle{Cuprins}%
+\def\plftitle{List\u{a} de figuri}%
+\def\plttitle{List\u{a} de tabele}%
+\def\mtctitle{Cuprins}%
+\def\mlftitle{List\u{a} de figuri}%
+\def\mlttitle{List\u{a} de tabele}%
+\def\stctitle{Cuprins}%
+\def\slftitle{List\u{a} de figuri}%
+\def\slttitle{List\u{a} de tabele}%
+%</romanian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \lneed{9}
+% \section{``Romanian2'' language: \uxfile{romanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian2}\ixfile{romanian2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{romanian2}'' language come from the \xfile{romanian.dtx} file
+% (by \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle})
+% in the \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX} package~\cite{romaniantex}. See also sections~\vref{s+mld+romanian} and~\vref{s+mld+romanian3}.
+% Alas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{is not compatible} with the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \section{Langue <<~romanian2>>: \uxfile{romanian2.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian2}\ixfile{romanian2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{romanian2}~>> (roumain, variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{romanian.dtx}
+% (de \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle})
+% dans le paquetage \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}~\cite{romaniantex}. Voir aussi les sections~\vref{s+mld+romanian}
+% et~\vref{s+mld+romanian3}.
+% Hélas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{n'est pas compatible} avec le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*romanian2>
+\ProvidesFile{romanian2.mld}[2006/08/03]%
+%% Titles in RomanianTeX (romanian.dtx). Adrian Rezus (adriaan@cs.kun.nl),
+%% Bernd Raichle (raichle@azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de)
+\def\ptctitle{Cuprins}%
+\def\plftitle{Lista de figuri}%
+\def\plttitle{Lista de tabele}%
+\def\mtctitle{Cuprins}%
+\def\mlftitle{Lista de figuri}%
+\def\mlttitle{Lista de tabele}%
+\def\stctitle{Cuprins}%
+\def\slftitle{Lista de figuri}%
+\def\slttitle{Lista de tabele}%
+%</romanian2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Romanian3'' language: \uxfile{romanian3.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian3}\ixfile{romanian3.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{romanian3}'' language come from the \xfile{romanian.dtx} file
+% (by \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} and \name{Bernd}{Raichle})
+% in the \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX} package~\cite{romaniantex}.
+% See also sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian}{s+mld+romanian2}.
+% Alas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{is not compatible} with the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \section{Langue <<~romanian3>>: \uxfile{romanian3.mld}}\label{s+mld+romanian3}\ixfile{romanian3.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{romanian3}~>> (roumain, autre variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{romanian.dtx}
+% (de \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus} et \name{Bernd}{Raichle})
+% dans le paquetage \packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}~\cite{romaniantex}.
+% Voir aussi les sections~\vrefrange{s+mld+romanian}{s+mld+romanian3}.
+% Hélas, \mbox{\packa{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}} \virage\emph{n'est pas compatible} avec le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*romanian3>
+\ProvidesFile{romanian3.mld}[2006/08/03]%
+%% Romanian titles from RomanianTeX (romanian.dtx) variant.
+%% Adrian Rezus (adriaan@cs.kun.nl)
+%% Bernd Raichle (raichle@azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de)
+\def\ptctitle{Tabla de materii}%
+\def\plttitle{Indice de figuri}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabele}%
+\def\mtctitle{Tabla de materii}%
+\def\mlttitle{Indice de figuri}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabele}%
+\def\stctitle{Tabla de materii}%
+\def\slttitle{Indice de figuri}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabele}%
+%</romanian3>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Russian'' language: \uxfile{russian.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian}\ixfile{russian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~russian~>>: \uxfile{russian.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian}\ixfile{russian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+
+% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
+
+% \or\relax
+
+% \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}
+
+% \fi
+
+%
+% \vspace*{2\bigskipamount}
+%
+
+% ^^A (RUSS
+% ^^A RUSS)
+
+
+%
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{18mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \begin{macro}{\cz}
+% \begin{macro}{\mz}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% 
+% for the ``\lopt{russian}'' language (\emph{russkiy yazyk}) are taken from
+% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
+% Specific cyrillic fonts are required.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian}~>> (russe, \emph{russkiy yazyk}) sont tirés
+% du paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user}.
+% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*russian>
+\ProvidesFile{russian.mld}[1999/03/16]%
+%% Russian titles
+\def\ptctitle{Oglavlenie}%
+\def\plftitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} risunkov}%
+\def\plttitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} tablic}%
+\def\mtctitle{Oglavlenie}%
+\def\mlftitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} risunkov}%
+\def\mlttitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} tablic}%
+\def\stctitle{Oglavlenie}%
+\def\slftitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} risunkov}%
+\def\slttitle{Pere{\cz}en{\mz} tablic}%
+%</russian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Russian2m'' language: \uxfile{russian2m.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2m}\ixfile{russian2m.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~russian2m~>>: \uxfile{russian2m.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2m}\ixfile{russian2m.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\localrussian}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian2m}'' language (``\lopt{russian2m}'' is a modern variant of ``\lopt{russian}'')
+% are taken from the \xfile{russian2m.ldf} file
+% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
+% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}.
+% Specific cyrillic fonts are required. See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian2m}~>> (une variante moderne de <<~\lopt{russian}~>>) sont tirés du fichier
+% \xfile{russian2m.ldf}
+% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
+% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}.
+% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*russian2m>
+\ProvidesFile{russian2m.mld}[2005/02/08]%
+%% from russian2m.ldf (Antomega project, russian modern)
+%% Needs Omega and cyrillic fonts. Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov
+\def\ptctitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0438^^^^0435}}%
+\def\plftitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0438^^^^043b%
+ ^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0438^^^^0439}}%
+\def\plttitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0442^^^^0430%
+ ^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0438^^^^0435}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0438^^^^043b%
+ ^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0438^^^^0439}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0442^^^^0430%
+ ^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446}}%
+\def\stctitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0438^^^^0435}}%
+\def\slftitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0438^^^^043b%
+ ^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0438^^^^0439}}%
+\def\slttitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a ^^^^0442^^^^0430%
+ ^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446}}%
+%</russian2m>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Russian2o'' language: \uxfile{russian2o.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2o}\ixfile{russian2o.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~russian2o~>>: \uxfile{russian2o.mld}}\label{s+mld+russian2o}\ixfile{russian2o.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\localrussian}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian2o}'' language (``\lopt{russian2o}'' is an old variant of ``\lopt{russian}'')
+% are taken from the \xfile{omega-russian.ldf} file
+% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} and \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
+% in the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. Specific cyrillic fonts are required.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian2o}~>> (<<~\lopt{russian2o}~>> est une ancienne variante
+% de <<~\lopt{russian}~>>) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{omega-russian.ldf}
+% (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov} et \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov})
+% dans le projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}.
+% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*russian2o>
+\ProvidesFile{russian2o.mld}[2005/02/08]%
+%% from russian2o.mld (Antomega project - russian old)
+%% Needs Omega and cyrillic fonts. Alexej M. Kryukov & Dmitry Ivanov
+\def\ptctitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0456^^^^0435}}%
+\def\plftitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0438%
+ ^^^^043b^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0456^^^^0439}}%
+\def\plttitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0442%
+ ^^^^0430^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446^^^^044a}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0456^^^^0435}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0438%
+ ^^^^043b^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0456^^^^0439}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0442%
+ ^^^^0430^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446^^^^044a}}%
+\def\stctitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^041e^^^^0433^^^^043b^^^^0430^^^^0432^^^^043b^^^^0435^^^^043d^^^^0456^^^^0435}}%
+\def\slftitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0438%
+ ^^^^043b^^^^043b^^^^044e^^^^0441^^^^0442^^^^0440^^^^0430^^^^0446^^^^0456^^^^0439}}%
+\def\slttitle{\localrussian%
+{^^^^0421^^^^043f^^^^0438^^^^0441^^^^043e^^^^043a^^^^044a ^^^^0442%
+ ^^^^0430^^^^0431^^^^043b^^^^0438^^^^0446^^^^044a}}%
+%</russian2o>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Russianb'' language: \uxfile{russianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianb}\ixfile{russianb.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~russianb~>>: \uxfile{russianb.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianb}\ixfile{russianb.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\cyr}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{russianb}'' language (``\lopt{russianb}'' is a variant of ``\lopt{russian}'')
+% are taken from the \xfile{russianb.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg}, and \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb}.
+% Specific cyrillic fonts are required. See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. The parttoc title varies depending
+% on the presence of chapters defined or not by the document class.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russianb}~>> (<<~\lopt{russianb}~>> est une variante de <<~\lopt{russian}~>>)
+% sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russianb.dtx}
+% (de \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,russianb1,russianb}.
+% Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+russian}. Le titre des
+% parttocs dépend de l'existence de chapitres dans la classe de document.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*russianb>
+\ProvidesFile{russianb.mld}[2006/02/15]%
+%% Russian (russianb) titles from russianb.dtx (babel)
+%% Lapko, Olga & Volovitch, Vladimir & Lemberg, Werner
+\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
+\def\ptctitle{%
+  {\cyr\CYRS\cyro\cyrd\cyre\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
+\else\def\ptctitle{%
+  {\cyr \CYRO\CYRg\CYRl\CYRa\CYRv\CYRl\CYRe\CYRn\CYRi\CYRe}}%
+\fi
+\def\plftitle{%
+  {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space
+    \CYRi\CYRl\CYRl\CYRyu\CYRs\CYRt\CYRr\CYRa\CYRc\CYRi\CYRishrt}}%
+\def\plttitle{%
+  {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space
+  \CYRt\CYRa\CYRb\CYRl\CYRi\CYRc}}%
+\def\mtctitle{%
+  {\cyr \CYRO\CYRg\CYRl\CYRa\CYRv\CYRl\CYRe\CYRn\CYRi\CYRe}}%
+\def\mlftitle{%
+  {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space
+    \CYRi\CYRl\CYRl\CYRyu\CYRs\CYRt\CYRr\CYRa\CYRc\CYRi\CYRishrt}}%
+\def\mlttitle{%
+  {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space
+  \CYRt\CYRa\CYRb\CYRl\CYRi\CYRc}}%
+\def\stctitle{%
+  {\cyr \CYRO\CYRg\CYRl\CYRa\CYRv\CYRl\CYRe\CYRn\CYRi\CYRe}}%
+\def\slftitle{%
+  {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space
+    \CYRi\CYRl\CYRl\CYRyu\CYRs\CYRt\CYRr\CYRa\CYRc\CYRi\CYRishrt}}%
+\def\slttitle{%
+  {\cyr \CYRS\CYRp\CYRi\CYRs\CYRo\CYRk\space
+  \CYRt\CYRa\CYRb\CYRl\CYRi\CYRc}}%
+%</russianb>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Russianc'' language: \uxfile{russianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianc}\ixfile{russianc.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~russianc~>>: \uxfile{russianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+russianc}\ixfile{russianc.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\xalx}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{russianc}'' language (``\lopt{russianc}'' is a variant of ``\lopt{russian}'',
+% used in the part of Mongolia under russian influence) are taken from the file \xfile{russian.def} in the
+% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Specific cyrillic fonts are required.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russianc}~>> (<<~\lopt{russianc}~>> est une variante du russe <<~\lopt{russian}~>>,
+% utilisée dans la partie de la Mongolie sous influence russe) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russian.def} dans le paquetage
+% \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}. Des fontes cyrilliques spécifiques sont requises. Voir aussi la
+% section~\vref{s+mld+russian}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*russianc>
+\ProvidesFile{russianc.mld}[1999/03/16]%
+%% Russian titles (Mongolia). Needs cyrillic fonts.
+\def\ptctitle{\xalx{Oglawlenie}}%
+\def\plftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}%
+\def\plttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}%
+\def\stctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}%
+\def\slftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}%
+\def\slttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}%
+%</russianc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Russian-cca'' language: \uxmldo{russian-cca}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca}\ixmldo{russian-cca}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~russian-cca~>>: \uxmldo{russian-cca}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca}\ixmldo{russian-cca}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% They are several variants for the russian titles with the cmcyralt fonts.
+% The titles for a first variant of the ``\lopt{russian-cca}'' are taken from the \xfile{russian.sty}
+% (by \name{Victor}{Boyko} and \name{Vadim}{Maslov})
+% file in the \pack{cmcyralt} package~\cite{cmcyralt/russian.sty}.
+% \or\relax
+% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour les titres en russe avec les fontes cmcyralt.
+% Les titres pour une première variante de la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russian.sty}
+% (de \name{Victor}{Boyko} de \name{Vadim}{Maslov})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{cmcyralt}~\cite{cmcyralt/russian.sty}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-cca}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{russian-cca.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-cca.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*russian-cca>
+\ProvidesFile{russian-cca.mld}[2006/03/08]\mtcloadmlo{russian-cca}%
+%% Russian-cca titles. From russian.sty in the cmcyralt package
+%% Vadim Maslov (vadik@cs.umd.edu) & Victor Boyko (vb1890@cs.nyu.edu)
+%% Needs cmcyralt fonts and special input encoding.
+%</russian-cca>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Russian-cca1'' language: \uxmldo{russian-cca1}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca1}\ixmldo{russian-cca1}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~russian-cca1~>>: \uxmldo{russian-cca1}}\label{s+mld+russian-cca1}\ixmldo{russian-cca1}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% They are several variants for the russian titles with the cmcyralt fonts.
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-cca1}'' language are taken from the \xfile{cmcyralt.sty} file
+% (by \name{Vadim}{Maslov}, \name{Alexander}{Harin} and \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov})
+% in the \pack{cmcyralt} package\cite{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}.
+% \or\relax
+% Il y~a plusieurs variantes pour les titres en russe avec les fontes cmcyralt.
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca1}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{cmcyralt.sty}
+% (de \name{Vadim}{Maslov}, \name{Alexander}{Harin} et \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{cmcyralt}\cite{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-cca1}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{russian-cca1.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-cca1}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-cca1.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*russian-cca1>
+\ProvidesFile{russian-cca1.mld}[2006/03/08]\mtcloadmlo{russian-cca1}%
+%% Russian-cca1 titles. From cmcyralt.sty in the cmcyralt package
+%% with cmcyr fonts in alt encoding.
+%% Vadim Maslov (vadik@cs.umd.edu) & Alexander Harin (harin@lourie.und.ac.za)
+%% & Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@phy.ncu.edu.tw)
+%</russian-cca1>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Russian-lh'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lh}}\label{s+mld+russian-lh}\ixmldo{russian-lh}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~russian-lh~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lh}}\label{s+mld+russian-lh}\ixmldo{russian-lh}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The russian titles for the LH fonts (``\lopt{russian-lh}'' language) are taken from the \xfile{russian.sty} file
+% (by \name{Sergei~O.}{Naumov})
+% in the \pack{LH} package~\cite{LH/russian.sty}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LH (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lh}~>>) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{russian.sty}
+% (de \name{Sergei~O.}{Naumov})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{LH}~\cite{LH/russian.sty}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lh}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{russian-lh.mlo}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lh}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lh.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*russian-lh>
+\ProvidesFile{russian-lh.mld}[2006/03/08]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lh}%
+%% Russian-lh titles from russian.sty in the LH package
+%% LH fonts in special encoding. By Sergei O. Naumov (serge@astro.unc.edu)
+%</russian-lh>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Russian-lhcyralt'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyralt}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyralt}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyralt}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~russian-lhcyralt~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyralt}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyralt}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyralt}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The russian titles for the LHCYRALT fonts (``\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}'' language) are taken
+% from the \xfile{lhcyralt.sty} file (by \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) in the \pack{lhcyr} package~\cite{lhcyr}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LHCYRALT (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}~>>) sont tirés
+% du fichier \xfile{lhcyralt.sty} (de \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) dans le paquetage \pack{lhcyr}~\cite{lhcyr}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mlo}. The input encoding is ALT (code page CP866).
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyralt}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être
+% générés facilement, donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mlo}. Le codage en entrée est ALT (page de code CP866).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*russian-lhcyralt>
+\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyralt.mld}[2006/03/10]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lhcyralt}%
+%% Russian-lhcyralt titles from lhcyralt.sty in the LHCYR package
+%% LHCYRALT fonts in special encoding ALT (CP866).
+%% Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru)
+%</russian-lhcyralt>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Russian-lhcyrkoi'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrkoi}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~russian-lhcyrkoi~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrkoi}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrkoi}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The russian titles for the LHCYRKOI fonts (``\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}'' language) are taken
+% from the \xfile{lhcyrkoi.sty} file (by \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) in the \pack{lhcyr} package~\cite{lhcyr}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LHCYRKOI (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}~>>) sont tirés
+% du fichier \xfile{lhcyrkoi.sty} (de \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) dans le paquetage \pack{lhcyr}~\cite{lhcyr}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mlo}. The input encoding is KOI-8.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrkoi}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être générés facilement,
+% donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mlo}. Le codage en entrée est KOI-8.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*russian-lhcyrkoi>
+\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mld}[2006/03/13]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lhcyrkoi}%
+%% Russian-lhcyrkoi titles from lhcyrkoi.sty in the LHCYR package
+%% LHCYRKOI fonts in special encoding KOI-8. Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru)
+%</russian-lhcyrkoi>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Russian-lhcyrwin'' language: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrwin}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~russian-lhcyrwin~>>: \uxmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}}\label{s+mld+russian-lhcyrwin}\ixmldo{russian-lhcyrwin}
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The russian titles for the LHCYRWIN fonts (``\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}'' language) are taken
+% from the \xfile{lhcyrwin.sty} file (by \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) in the \pack{lhcyr} package~\cite{lhcyr}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres en russe avec les fontes LHCYRWIN (langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}~>>) sont tirés
+% du fichier \xfile{lhcyrwin.sty} (de \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}) dans le paquetage \pack{lhcyr}~\cite{lhcyr}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mlo}. The input encoding is CP1251.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{russian-lhcyrwin}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas
+% être générés facilement, donc nous chargeons \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mlo}.
+% Le codage en entrée est CP1251.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*russian-lhcyrwin>
+\ProvidesFile{russian-lhcyrwin.mld}[2006/03/13]\mtcloadmlo{russian-lhcyrwin}%
+%% Russian titles from lhcyrwin.sty in the LHCYR package
+%% LHCYRWIN fonts in encoding CP1251. Vadim V. Zhytnikov (vvzhy@td.lpi.ac.ru)
+%</russian-lhcyrwin>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Samin'' language: \uxfile{samin.mld}}\label{s+mld+samin}\ixfile{samin.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~samin~>>: \uxfile{samin.mld}}\label{s+mld+samin}\ixfile{samin.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{samin}'' language come from the \xfile{samin.dtx} file (by \name{Regnor}{Jernsletten})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,samin}. Specific fonts are required.
+% ^^A
+% ^^A \lneed{3}
+% Note that several Sámi dialects/languages are spoken in Finland, Norway, Sweden,
+% and on the Kola Peninsula (Russia). The alphabets differ, so there will eventually be a need for more \suffix{.dtx}
+% files for, e.g., Lule and South Sámi.
+% Hence the (artificial) name \xfile{samin.dtx} (and not \uxfile{sami.dtx} or the like) in the North Sámi
+% case\,\footnote{Adapted from the \xfile{samin.dtx} file.}. These dialects and languages are part of
+% the Finnic group. See also \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sápmi_(area)}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{samin}~>> (Sámi (ou Sâme) du Nord) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{samin.dtx}
+% (by \name{Regnor}{Jernsletten})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,samin}. Des fontes spécifiques sont requises.
+% ^^A
+% ^^A \lneed{3}
+% Notez que plusieurs dialectes ou langues Sámi/Sâme sont parlés en Finlande, Norvège, Suède et dans la péninsule
+% de Kola (Russie). Les alphabets sont différents, donc il y~aurait éventuellement besoin de plusieurs
+% fichiers \suffix{.dtx} pour, par exemple, le Lule et le Sámi (ou Sâme) du Sud.
+% D'où le nom (artificiel) \xfile{samin.dtx} (et non pas \uxfile{sami.dtx} ou analogue) dans le cas du
+% Sámi (Sâme) du Nord\,\footnote{D'après le fichier \xfile{samin.dtx}.}. Ces dialectes et langues font partie
+% du groupe finnois. Voir aussi \url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sápmi_(area)}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*samin>
+\ProvidesFile{samin.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% North Sámi (samin) titles from samin.dtx (babel). Jernsletten, Regnor
+\def\ptctitle{Sisdoallu}%
+\def\plftitle{Govvosat}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabeallat}%
+\def\mtctitle{Sisdoallu}%
+\def\mlftitle{Govvosat}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabeallat}%
+\def\stctitle{Sisdoallu}%
+\def\slftitle{Govvosat}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabeallat}%
+%</samin>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Scottish'' language: \uxfile{scottish.mld}}\label{s+mld+scottish}\ixfile{scottish.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~scottish~>>: \uxfile{scottish.mld}}\label{s+mld+scottish}\ixfile{scottish.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-1cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.275526742\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.358184765\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{.366288493\iwidth}
+
+% ^^A \setlength{\wkdim}{5.508474576mm}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{scottish}'' language (gaelic scottish, \emph{gàidhlig}) come from the \xfile{scottish.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Fraser}{Grant})
+% in the \pack{babel} language~\cite{babel,babel-user,scottish}:
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{scottish}~>> (gaélique écossais, \emph{gàidhlig}) sont tirés du fichier \uxfile{scottish.dtx}
+% (de \name{Fraser}{Grant})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,scottish}:
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*scottish>
+\ProvidesFile{scottish.mld}[2007/12/18]%
+%% Scottish titles from scottish.dtx (babel). Grant, Fraser
+\def\ptctitle{Cl\`ar-obrach}%
+\def\plftitle{Liosta Dhealbh}%
+\def\plttitle{Liosta Chl\`ar}%
+\def\mtctitle{Cl\`ar-obrach}%
+\def\mlftitle{Liosta Dhealbh}%
+\def\mlttitle{Liosta Chl\`ar}%
+\def\stctitle{Cl\`ar-obrach}%
+\def\slftitle{Liosta Dhealbh}%
+\def\slttitle{Liosta Chl\`ar}%
+%</scottish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Serbian'' language: \uxfile{serbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbian}\ixfile{serbian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~serbian~>>: \uxfile{serbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbian}\ixfile{serbian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.500713267\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.499286733\iwidth}
+
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{serbian}'' (serbocroatian) (\emph{srpski jezik}, \emph{srpskohrvatski jezik}) language are taken from the \xfile{serbian.dtx} file
+% (by \namea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic} and \name{Jankovic}{Slobodan})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,serbian}.
+% Serbocroatian is spoken by Serbs, Croats and Chernogors, but only Serbs and Chernogors use the cyrillic alphabet
+% (a variant).
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+serbianc} .
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{serbian}~>> (serbocroate) (\emph{srpski jezik}, \emph{srpskohrvatski jezik}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{serbian.dtx}
+% (de \namea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic} et \name{Jankovic}{Slobodan})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,serbian}.
+% Le serbocroate est parlé par les Serbes, les Croates et les Chernogores, mais seuls les Serbes et les Chernogores
+% utilisent l'alphabet cyrillique (une variante).
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+serbianc}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*serbian>
+\ProvidesFile{serbian.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Serbian titles in serbian.dtx (babel). Muhamedagi\'{c}, Dejan & Slobodan, Jankovic
+\def\ptctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
+\def\plftitle{Slike}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabele}%
+\def\mtctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
+\def\mlftitle{Slike}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabele}%
+\def\stctitle{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
+\def\slftitle{Slike}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabele}%
+%</serbian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{6}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Serbianc'' language: \uxfile{serbianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbianc}\ixfile{serbianc.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~serbianc~>>: \uxfile{serbianc.mld}}\label{s+mld+serbianc}\ixfile{serbianc.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\cyr}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{serbianc}'' language\,\footnote{The ``\lopt{serbianc}'' language is written
+% with cyrillic characters.} have been gently provided by \namea{Marko}{Èehaja}{Eehaja} and \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}.
+% Cyrillic fonts are required.
+% Serbocroatian is spoken by Serbs, Croats and Chernogors, but only Serbs and Chernogors use the cyrillic alphabet
+% (a variant).
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+serbian}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{serbianc}~>> (serbe cyrillique)\,\footnote{La langue <<~\lopt{serbianc}~>> est
+% écrite en caractères cyrilliques.} ont été aimablement fournis par \namea{Marko}{Èehaja}{Eehaja} et
+% \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}. Des fontes cyrilliques sont requises.
+% Le serbocroate est parlé par les Serbes, les Croates et les Chernogores, mais seuls les Serbes et les Chernogores
+% utilisent l'alphabet cyrillique (une variante).
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+serbian}.
+% \fi
+% ^^A %% Abt. Biophysikalische Chemie | Küster
+% \lneed{14}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*serbianc>
+\ProvidesFile{serbianc.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Serbian cyrillic titles. Marko Èehaja Internut@Thetaworld.Org
+%% Frank Küster, Biozentrum der Univ. Basel, frank@kuesterei.ch
+\def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyra\cyrd\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrje}}%
+\def\plftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyri\cyrk\cyre}}%
+\def\plttitle{\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyre}%
+\def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyra\cyrd\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrje}}%
+\def\mlftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyri\cyrk\cyre}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyre}%
+\def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyra\cyrd\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrje}}%
+\def\slftitle{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyri\cyrk\cyre}}%
+\def\slttitle{\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyre}%
+%</serbianc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Slovak'' language: \uxfile{slovak.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovak}\ixfile{slovak.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~slovak~>>: \uxfile{slovak.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovak}\ixfile{slovak.mld}
+% \fi
+
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{slovak}'' language (\emph{sloven\v{c}ina, slovenk\'{y} jazyk}) are taken from the \xfile{slovak.dtx} file
+% (\namea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova} and \name{Tobias}{Schlemmer})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovak}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{slovak}~>> (slovaque, \emph{sloven\v{c}ina, slovenk\'{y} jazyk}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{slovak.dtx}
+% (\namea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova} et \name{Tobias}{Schlemmer})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovak}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*slovak>
+\ProvidesFile{slovak.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Slovak titles from slovak.dtx (babel). Chlebîková, Jana & Schlemmer, Tobias. T1 encoding.
+\def\ptctitle{Obsah}%
+\def\plftitle{Zoznam obr\'azkov}%
+\def\plttitle{Zoznam tabuliek}%
+\def\mtctitle{Obsah}%
+\def\mlftitle{Zoznam obr\'azkov}%
+\def\mlttitle{Zoznam tabuliek}%
+\def\stctitle{Obsah}%
+\def\slftitle{Zoznam obr\'azkov}%
+\def\slttitle{Zoznam tabuliek}%
+%</slovak>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Slovene'' language: \uxfile{slovene.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovene}\ixfile{slovene.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~slovene~>>: \uxfile{slovene.mld}}\label{s+mld+slovene}\ixfile{slovene.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.5\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.5\iwidth}
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The 
+% slovene language (\emph{sloven\v{s}\v{c}ina, slovenski jezik}) is spoken in Slovenia, but somewhat also in Italy (Frioul), in Austria (Carinthia and Styria), in
+% Hungary (Szlovénviék and Porabje), in West Germany and Sweden.
+% \or\relax
+% La
+% langue slovène (\emph{sloven\v{s}\v{c}ina, slovenski jezik}) est parlée en Slovénie, mais un peu aussi en Italie (Frioul), en Autriche (Carinthie et Styrie), en
+% Hongrie (Szlovénviék et Porabje), en Allemagne de l'Ouest et en Suède.
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{slovene}'' language come from the \xfile{slovene.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Danilo}{Zavrtanik} and \namea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovene}:
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{slovene}~>> (slovène) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{slovene.dtx}
+% (de \name{Danilo}{Zavrtanik} et \namea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,slovene}:
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*slovene>
+\ProvidesFile{slovene.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Slovene titles from slovene.dtx (babel). Zavrtanik, Danilo & \v{Z}lajpah, Leon
+\def\ptctitle{Kazalo}%
+\def\plftitle{Slike}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabele}%
+\def\mtctitle{Kazalo}%
+\def\mlftitle{Slike}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabele}%
+\def\stctitle{Kazalo}%
+\def\slftitle{Slike}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabele}%
+%</slovene>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{10}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Spanish'' language: \uxfile{spanish.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish}\ixfile{spanish.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~spanish~>>: \uxfile{spanish.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish}\ixfile{spanish.mld}
+% \fi
+
+
+%
+% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount}
+%
+
+
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{spanish}'' (\emph{español, castellano}) language are taken from the \xfile{spanish.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Javier}{Bezos}, initialy by \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish}.
+% Note that the ``\lopt{spanish}'' language is in
+% fact ``\lopt{castillan}'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+castillan}). But note also that other languages are spoken in Spain: ``basque''
+% (section~\vref{s+mld+basque}), ``\lopt{catalan}'' (section~\vref{s+mld+catalan}), and ``\lopt{galician}''
+% (section~\vref{s+mld+galician}). Note that ``\lopt{spanish2}'' is a version of ``\lopt{spanish}''
+% with shorter titles (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish2}).
+% And ``\lopt{spanish3}'' (see section~\vref{s+mld+spanish3}) is a version for
+% the \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega} project; some titles are
+% differents.
+% And ``\lopt{spanish4}'' is a variant of ``\lopt{spanish}'' where \com{ptctitle} is shorter for
+% articles (section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}).
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> (espagnol) (\emph{español, castellano}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx}
+% (de \name{Javier}{Bezos}, initialement par \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish}.
+% Notez que le <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> (espagnol) est en fait le <<~\lopt{castillan}~>>
+% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+castillan}).
+% Mais notez aussi que d'autres langues sont parlées en Espagne: <<~\lopt{basque}~>> (section~\vref{s+mld+basque}), <<~\lopt{catalan}~>>
+% (section~\vref{s+mld+catalan}), et <<~\lopt{galician}~>> (galicien) (section~\vref{s+mld+galician}).
+% La langue <<~\lopt{spanish2}~>> est une variante de <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> avec des titres plus courts
+% (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish2}).
+% La langue <<~\lopt{spanish3}~>> (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish3}) est une variante pour le
+% projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}; certains titres sont différents.
+% La langue <<~\lopt{spanish4}~>> est une variante de <<~\lopt{spanish}~>> où \com{ptctitle} est plus court
+% pour les articles (section~\vref{s+mld+spanish4}).
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*spanish>
+\ProvidesFile{spanish.mld}[2008/04/03]%
+%% Spanish titles from spanish.dtx (babel) by Bezos, Javier & CervanTeX
+\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
+\def\ptctitle{\'Indice}\else\def\ptctitle{\'Indice general}\fi
+\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\plttitle{\'Indice de tablas}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}%
+\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de tablas}%
+\def\stctitle{\'Indice}%
+\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\slttitle{\'Indice de tablas}%
+%</spanish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Spanish2'' language: \uxfile{spanish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish2}\ixfile{spanish2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{spanish2}'' language are taken from the \xfile{spanish.dtx} file in
+% the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish},
+% but made shorter for chapter and section levels. See section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~spanish2~>>: \uxfile{spanish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish2}\ixfile{spanish2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish2}~>> (espagnol deuxième variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx}
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,spanish},
+% mais abrégés pour les niveaux chapitre et section. Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*spanish2>
+\ProvidesFile{spanish2.mld}[2008/04/03]%
+\def\ptctitle{\'Indice general}%
+\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\plttitle{\'Indice de tablas}%
+\def\mtctitle{Contenido}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figuras}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tablas}%
+\def\stctitle{Contenido}%
+\def\slftitle{Figuras}%
+\def\slttitle{Tablas}%
+%</spanish2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Spanish3'' language: \uxfile{spanish3.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish3}\ixfile{spanish3.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~spanish3~>>: \uxfile{spanish3.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish3}\ixfile{spanish3.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\localspanish}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{spanish3}'' language are taken from the \xfile{omega-spanish.ldf} file
+% (by \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov})
+% of the \pack{Antomega} project~\cite{antomega}. See section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish3}~>> (espagnol troisième variante) sont tirés du fichier
+% \xfile{omega-spanish.ldf} (de \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov}) du projet \pack{Antomega}~\cite{antomega}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*spanish3>
+\ProvidesFile{spanish3.mld}[2005/09/06]%
+%% Spanish titles from omega-spanish.ldf of the Antomega project.
+\def\ptctitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice general}}%
+\def\plftitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de figuras}}%
+\def\plttitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de cuadros}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice general}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de figuras}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de cuadros}}%
+\def\stctitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice general}}%
+\def\slftitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de figuras}}%
+\def\slttitle{\localspanish{^^^^00cdndice de cuadros}}%
+%</spanish3>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Spanish4'' language: \uxfile{spanish4.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish4}\ixfile{spanish4.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{spanish4}'' language are taken from the \xfile{spanish.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Javier}{Bezos})
+% from the \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX} package~\cite{spanish4}.
+% The title of the parttocs is shorter for articles. See also section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~spanish4~>>: \uxfile{spanish4.mld}}\label{s+mld+spanish4}\ixfile{spanish4.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{spanish4}~>> sont tirés du fichier \xfile{spanish.dtx}
+% (de \name{Javier}{Bezos})
+% du paquetage \packa{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX}~\cite{spanish4}.
+% Le titre des parttocs est plus court dans les articles. Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+spanish}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*spanish4>
+\ProvidesFile{spanish4.mld}[2006/01/19]%
+%% Spanish titles (from spanish.dtx in CervanTeX) Bezos, Javier
+\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
+\def\ptctitle{\'Indice} \else \def\ptctitle{\'Indice general} \fi
+\def\plftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\plttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}%
+%%
+\def\mtctitle{\'Indice}%
+\def\mlftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\mlttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}%
+\def\stctitle{\'Indice}%
+\def\slftitle{\'Indice de figuras}%
+\def\slttitle{\'Indice de cuadros}%
+%</spanish4>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Swahili'' language: \uxfile{swahili.mld}}\label{s+mld+swahili}\ixfile{swahili.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~swahili~>>: \uxfile{swahili.mld}}\label{s+mld+swahili}\ixfile{swahili.mld}
+% \fi
+
+% ^^A (SWA
+% ^^A SWA)
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{swahili}'' language (\emph{kiswahili}) are taken from the \emph{obsolete}
+% \xfile{swahili.tex} file\,\footnote{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/obsolete/macros/latex209/contrib/ml/swahili.tex}},
+% with adaptations and corrections given on the
+% \texttt{comp.text.tex} news group (messages 57662, 57713, and 57717) by \name{Giancarlo}{Bassi}
+% and \name{Enrico}{Gregorio}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{swahili}~>> (\emph{kiswahili}) sont tirés
+% du fichier \emph{obsolète} \xfile{swahili.tex}\,\footnote{\url{http://mirror.ctan.org/obsolete/macros/latex209/contrib/ml/swahili.tex}\,.},
+% avec des adaptations et des corrections données sur le groupe de discussion \texttt{comp.text.tex} (messages
+% 57662, 57713 et 57717) par \name{Giancarlo}{Bassi} et \name{Enrico}{Gregorio}.
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% Swahili is the main Bantu language and is spoken in East Africa: Tanzania, Kenya,
+% Uganda, Rwanda, Burundi, Zanzibar and in the area of the Great Lakes in the Democratic Republic of Congo (Congo-Kinshasa,
+% formerly Zaire) and in the Republic of Congo (Congo-Brazzaville), in
+% the north of Mozambique and the south of Somalia\,\footnote{\RaggedRight See
+% \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/AXL/monde/swahili.htm}, \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/czaire.htm} in~\cite{tlfq},
+% \url{http://www.glcom.com/hassan/swahili_history.html}, and
+% \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/swahili.htm}\,.}. See~\cite[page~991]{comrie1990} .
+% \or\relax
+% Le swahili (ou «~souaéli~») est la plus importante langue bantoue et est parlée dans l'Afrique de l'Est: Tanzanie, Kenya,
+% Ouganda, Rwanda, Burundi, Zanzibar et la région des grands lacs dans la République Démocratique du Congo (Congo-Kinshasa,
+% ex-Zaïre) et dans la République du Congo (Congo-Brazzaville), au
+% nord du Mozambique et dans le sud de la Somalie\,\footnote{\RaggedRight Voir
+% \url{http://si.unm.edu/linguistics/swahili/swahili}, \url{http://www.tlfq.ulaval.ca/axl/afrique/czaire.htm}
+% dans~\cite{tlfq}, \url{http://www.glcom.com/hassan/swahili_history.html} et
+% \url{http://www.omniglot.com/writing/swahili.htm}}. Voir~\cite[page~991]{comrie1990}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*swahili>
+\ProvidesFile{swahili.mld}[2007/07/02]%
+%% Swahili titles from swahili.tex in articles: 57662,57713,57717
+%% in comp.text.tex by Giancarlo Bassi <g.bassi@iperbole.bologna.it>
+%% & Enrico Gregorio <gregorio@math.unipd.it>
+\def\ptctitle{Yaliyomo}%
+\def\plftitle{Picha zilizomo}%
+\def\plttitle{Orodha ya Mfano}%
+\def\mtctitle{Yaliyomo}%
+\def\mlftitle{Picha zilizomo}%
+\def\mlttitle{Orodha ya Mfano}%
+\def\stctitle{Yaliyomo}%
+\def\slftitle{Picha zilizomo}%
+\def\slttitle{Orodha ya Mfano}%
+%</swahili>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Swedish'' language: \uxfile{swedish.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish}\ixfile{swedish.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~swedish~>>: \uxfile{swedish.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish}\ixfile{swedish.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.450276243\iwidth}
+% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.549723757\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.42\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.58\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\cwidth}{.323437500\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\dwidth}{.676562500\iwidth}
+
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{swedish}'' (\emph{svenska}) language come from the \xfile{swedish.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Sten}{Hellman} and \namea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols}, with a correction by \name{Jan~Michael}{Rynning})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,swedish}.
+% The swedish language is spoken in Sweden and in some regions of Finland like
+% the \r{A}land Islands. See also section~\vref{s+mld+swedish2}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{swedish}~>> (suédois, \emph{svenska}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{swedish.dtx}
+% (de \name{Sten}{Hellman} et \namea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols}, avec une correction de \name{Jan~Michael}{Rynning})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,swedish}.
+% ^^A
+% La langue suédoise est parlée en Suède et dans certaines régions de Finlande,
+% dont les Îles \r{A}land.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+swedish2}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*swedish>
+\ProvidesFile{swedish.mld}[2006/01/13]%
+%% Swedish titles from swedish.dtx (babel). Hellman, Sten & Östhols, Erik
+\def\ptctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}%
+\def\plftitle{Figurer}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabeller}%
+\def\mtctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figurer}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabeller}%
+\def\stctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}%
+\def\slftitle{Figurer}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabeller}%
+%</swedish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Swedish2'' language: \uxfile{swedish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish2}\ixfile{swedish2.mld}
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{swedish2}'' language (variant for swedish) are taken
+% from the \xfile{rapport.doc} file (by \name{Sven}{Mattisson}) in the \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX} package~\cite{slatex}.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+swedish}.
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~swedish2~>>: \uxfile{swedish2.mld}}\label{s+mld+swedish2}\ixfile{swedish2.mld}
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{swedish2}~>> (suédois, variante) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{rapport.doc}
+% (de \name{Sven}{Mattisson})
+% dans le paquetage \packa{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}~\cite{slatex}.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+swedish}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*swedish2>
+\ProvidesFile{swedish2.mld}[2006/04/04]%
+%% Swedish2 titles from rapport.doc (slatex). Mattisson, Sven (sven@tde.lu.se)
+\def\ptctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}%
+\def\plftitle{Figurf\"orteckning}%
+\def\plttitle{Tabellf\"orteckning}%
+\def\mtctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}%
+\def\mlftitle{Figurf\"orteckning}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tabellf\"orteckning}%
+\def\stctitle{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}%
+\def\slftitle{Figurf\"orteckning}%
+\def\slttitle{Tabellf\"orteckning}%
+%</swedish2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Thai'' language: \uxmldo{thai}}\label{s+mld+thai}\ixmldo{thai}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~thai~>>: \uxmldo{thai}}\label{s+mld+thai}\ixmldo{thai}
+% \fi
+
+% \lneed{5}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{thai}'' language come from the \xfile{thaicjk.ldf} file
+% (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg})
+% and use fonts
+% of the \pack{CJK} system~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}.
+% The \pack{thailatex} package~\cite{thailatex} (by \name{Surapant}{Meknavin}, \name{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan},
+% \name{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan} and \name{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap}) provides the same titles in its \xfile{thai.ldf} file.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{thai}~>> (thaï) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{thaicjk.ldf}
+% (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg})
+% et utilisent des fontes du système \pack{CJK}~\cite{cjk,cjk2,cjkomega}.
+% Le paquetage \pack{thailatex}~\cite{thailatex}% (by \name{Surapant}{Meknavin}, \name{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan},
+% \name{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan} and \name{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap}) fournit les mêmes titres dans son
+% fichier \xfile{thai.ldf}. Voir aussi~\cite{thaistd}.
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{2}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcloadmlo}
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{thai}'' language contain characters that cannot be easily generated, hence we load
+% \xfile{thai.mlo}. See also~\cite{thaistd}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{thai}~>> contiennent des caractères qui ne peuvent pas être engendrés facilement, donc
+% nous chargeons \xfile{thai.mlo}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*thai>
+\ProvidesFile{thai.mld}[2005/01/28]\mtcloadmlo{thai}%
+%% From thaicjk.ldf CJK 4.5.2 Thai support for the babel system
+%% by Werner Lemberg <wl@gnu.org>
+%</thai>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Turkish'' language: \uxfile{turkish.mld}}\label{s+mld+turkish}\ixfile{turkish.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~turkish~>>: \uxfile{turkish.mld}}\label{s+mld+turkish}\ixfile{turkish.mld}
+% \fi
+% \newcommand{\TUL}[1]{\textcolor{red}{#1}}
+
+
+% \vspace*{2\baselineskip}
+
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The
+% The
+% turkish language (\emph{türkçe}) is spoken mainly in Turkey and in Cyprus.
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{turkish}'' language are taken from the \xfile{turkish.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Mustafa}{Burc}, \name{Pierre~A.}{MacKay} and \name{Turgut}{Uyar})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,turkish}.
+% \or\relax
+% La
+% langue turque (\emph{türkçe}) est parlée principalement en Turquie et à~Chypre.
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{turkish}~>> (turc) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{turkish.dtx}
+% (de \name{Mustafa}{Burc}, \name{Pierre~A.}{MacKay} et \name{Turgut}{Uyar})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,turkish}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*turkish>
+\ProvidesFile{turkish.mld}[2007/12/18]%
+%% Turkish titles from turkish.dtx (babel). Burc, Mustafa
+\def\ptctitle{\.I\c cindekiler}%
+\def\plftitle{\c Sekil Listesi}%
+\def\plttitle{Tablo Listesi}%
+\def\mtctitle{\.I\c cindekiler}%
+\def\mlftitle{\c Sekil Listesi}%
+\def\mlttitle{Tablo Listesi}%
+\def\stctitle{\.I\c cindekiler}%
+\def\slftitle{\c Sekil Listesi}%
+\def\slttitle{Tablo Listesi}%
+%</turkish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{8}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \lneed{7}
+% \section{``Uighur'' language: \uxfile{uighur.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur}\ixfile{uighur.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~uighur~>>: \uxfile{uighur.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur}\ixfile{uighur.mld}
+% \fi
+
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.308755760\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.691244240\iwidth}
+
+% \lneed{3}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{20mm}
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{uighur}'' and ``\lopt{bicig}'' languages
+% are synonyms, so we just load the
+% \xfile{bicig.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}):
+% \or\relax
+% Les langues
+% <<~\lopt{uighur}~>> (ouïghour) et <<~\lopt{bicig}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier
+% \xfile{bicig.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{4}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*uighur>
+\ProvidesFile{uighur.mld}[2006/05/31]\mtcselectlanguage{bicig}%
+%</uighur>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Uighur2'' language: \uxfile{uighur2.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur2}\ixfile{uighur2.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~uighur2~>>: \uxfile{uighur2.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur2}\ixfile{uighur2.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{uighur2}'' and ``\lopt{bicig2}'' languages are synonyms, so we just load the
+% \xfile{bicig2.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+bicig2}):
+% \or\relax
+% Les langues <<~\lopt{uighur2}~>> (ouïghour deuxième variante)
+% et <<~\lopt{bicig2}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier
+% \xfile{bicig2.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bicig2}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*uighur2>
+\ProvidesFile{uighur2.mld}[2006/05/31]\mtcselectlanguage{bicig2}%
+%</uighur2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Uighur3'' language: \uxfile{uighur3.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur3}\ixfile{uighur3.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~uighur3~>>: \uxfile{uighur3.mld}}\label{s+mld+uighur3}\ixfile{uighur3.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{uighur3}'' and ``\lopt{bicig3}'' languages are synonyms, so we just load the
+% \xfile{bicig3.mld} file (see section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}):
+% \or\relax
+% Les langues <<~\lopt{uighur3}~>> (ouïghour troisième variante)
+% et <<~\lopt{bicig3}~>> sont synonymes, donc nous chargeons simplement le fichier
+% \xfile{bicig3.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+bicig}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*uighur3>
+\ProvidesFile{uighur3.mld}[2006/05/31]\mtcselectlanguage{bicig3}%
+%</uighur3>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{12.5mm}\reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``UKenglish'' language: \uxfile{UKenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+UKenglish}\ixfile{UKenglish.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~UKenglish~>>: \uxfile{UKenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+UKenglish}\ixfile{UKenglish.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The 
+% ``\lopt{UKenglish}'' language is just like ``\loptd{english}'' (``UK'' is for ``United Kingdom''), so we just
+% load \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \or\relax
+% La
+% langue <<~\lopt{UKenglish}~>> est comme <<~\loptd{english}~>> («~UK~» signifie \emph{United Kingdom},
+% le «~Royaume Uni~»), donc nous chargeons simplement \xfile{english.mld}
+% (section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}\normalmarginpar
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*UKenglish>
+\ProvidesFile{UKenglish.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
+%</UKenglish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Ukraineb'' language: \uxfile{ukraineb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukraineb}\ixfile{ukraineb.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~ukraineb~>>: \uxfile{ukraineb.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukraineb}\ixfile{ukraineb.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{ukraineb}'' language is a synonym for ``\lopt{ukrainian}'', so we just load \xfile{ukrainian.mld}.
+% See section~\vref{s+mld+ukrainian}.
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{ukraineb}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{ukrainian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \xfile{ukrainian.mld}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+ukrainian}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ukraineb>
+\ProvidesFile{ukraineb.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcselectlanguage{ukrainian}%
+%</ukraineb>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Ukrainian'' language: \uxfile{ukrainian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukrainian}\ixfile{ukrainian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~ukrainian~>>: \uxfile{ukrainian.mld}}\label{s+mld+ukrainian}\ixfile{ukrainian.mld}
+% \fi
+
+%
+% \vspace*{4\bigskipamount}
+%
+
+%
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{6mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \lneed{2}
+% \begin{macro}{\cyr}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{ukrainian}'' language (\emph{ukrayins'ka mova}) come from the \xfile{ukraineb.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich}, and \name{Werner}{Lemberg})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,ukraineb}. Cyrillic fonts are required.
+% Another language name is \lopt{ukraineb} (see section~\vref{s+mld+ukraineb}).
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{ukrainian}~>> (ukrainien, \emph{ukrayins'ka mova}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{ukrainian.dtx}
+% (de \name{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika}, \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko}, \name{Vladimir}{Volovich} et \name{Werner}{Lemberg})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,ukraineb}. Des fontes cyrilliques sont requises.
+% Un autre nom pour cette langue est \lopt{ukraineb} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+ukraineb}).
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ukrainian>
+\ProvidesFile{ukrainian.mld}[2006/01/33]%
+%% Ukrainian titles from ukraineb.dtx (babel). Shvaika, Andrij & Lapko, Olga
+%% Needs cyrillic fonts
+\def\mtctitle{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}%
+\def\mlftitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
+       \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}%
+\def\mlttitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
+       \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}%
+\def\ptctitle{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}%
+\def\plftitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
+       \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}%
+\def\plttitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
+       \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}%
+\def\stctitle{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}%
+\def\slftitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
+       \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}%
+\def\slttitle{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
+       \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}%
+%</ukrainian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{12}
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{15mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Uppersorbian'' language: \uxfile{uppersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+uppersorbian}\ixfile{uppersorbian.mld}
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{uppersorbian}'' language\,\footnote{Upper sorbian. Sorbian, or wendisch,
+% is a member of the west slavic subgroup of indo-european languages spoken in Upper Lusatia in the german
+% \emph{länder} of Saxony and Brandenburg. The Sorbs are descendents of the Wends, the german name for the slavic tribes
+% who occupied the area between the Elbe and Saale rivers in the west and the Odra (Oder) river in the east during
+% the medieval period (\textsc{vi}-th century).} (\emph{hornjoserbsce, hornjoserb\v{s}\'{c}iba})
+% are taken from the \xfile{usorbian.dtx} file (by \name{Eduard}{Werner})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,usorbian}. See also section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}.
+% A shorter language name is \lopt{usorbian} (see section~\vref{s+mld+usorbian}).
+% \or\relax
+% \begin{SMOOTH}
+% \section{Langue <<~uppersorbian~>>: \uxfile{uppersorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+uppersorbian}\ixfile{uppersorbian.mld}
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{uppersorbian}~>> (haut sorabe)\,\footnote{Le haut sorabe, le sorabe ou wende,
+% est un membre du sous-groupe slave occidental des langues indo-européennes parlé en Haute-Lusace dans les \emph{länder}
+% allemands de Saxe et de Brandebourg. Les Sorabes sont des descendants des Wendes, nom germain des tribus slaves
+% qui occupaient la zone entre l'Elbe et la Saale à~l'ouest et l'Oder à~l'est pendant la période médiévale
+% (\textsc{vi}\fup{e}~siècle).} (\emph{hornjoserbsce, hornjoserb\v{s}\'{c}iba}) sont tirés du fichier \xfile{usorbian.dtx}
+% (de \name{Eduard}{Werner})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,usorbian}.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+lowersorbian}.
+% Un nom plus court pour cette langue est \lopt{usorbian} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+usorbian}).
+% \end{SMOOTH}
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*uppersorbian>
+\ProvidesFile{uppersorbian.mld}[2006/02/38]%
+%% Upper sorbian titles from usorbian.dtx (babel). Needs cyrillic fonts. Werner, Eduard
+\def\ptctitle{Wobsah}%
+\def\plftitle{Zapis wobrazow}%
+\def\plttitle{Zapis tabulkow}%
+\def\mtctitle{Wobsah}%
+\def\mlftitle{Zapis wobrazow}%
+\def\mlttitle{Zapis tabulkow}%
+\def\stctitle{Wobsah}%
+\def\slftitle{Zapis wobrazow}%
+\def\slttitle{Zapis tabulkow}%
+%</uppersorbian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{13.15625mm}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``USenglish'' language: \uxfile{USenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+USenglish}\ixfile{USenglish.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~USenglish~>>: \uxfile{USenglish.mld}}\label{s+mld+USenglish}\ixfile{USenglish.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The
+% ``\lopt{USenglish}'' language (``US'' is for ``United States (of America))'' is just like
+% ``\loptd{english}''\footnote{It should be true for the mini-table titles; the
+% languages themselves have some differences, like the hyphenation rules,
+% see~\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_English}\,.}, so we just
+% load \xfile{english.mld} (see section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \or\relax
+% La
+% langue <<~\lopt{USenglish}~>> (américain, «~US~» signifiant «~\emph{United States (of America)}~») est
+% comme <<~\loptd{english}~>>\footnote{Ceci devrait être vrai pour les titres des mini-tables; les langues elles-mêmes
+% ont quelques différences, dont les règles de coupure des mots,
+% voir~\url{http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_English}\,.}, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \xfile{english.mld} (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+english}):
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*USenglish>
+\ProvidesFile{USenglish.mld}[2005/07/11]\mtcselectlanguage{english}%
+%</USenglish>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Usorbian'' language: \uxfile{usorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+usorbian}\ixfile{usorbian.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~usorbian~>>: \uxfile{usorbian.mld}}\label{s+mld+usorbian}\ixfile{usorbian.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{usorbian}'' language is a synonym for ``\lopt{uppersorbian}'', so we just have
+% to load \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}. See section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}.
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{usorbian}~>> est un synonyme pour <<~\lopt{uppersorbian}~>>, donc nous chargeons simplement
+% \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}.
+% Voir la section~\vref{s+mld+uppersorbian}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*usorbian>
+\ProvidesFile{usorbian.mld}[2007/12/04]\mtcselectlanguage{uppersorbian}%
+%</usorbian>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Vietnam'' language: \uxfile{vietnam.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnam}\ixfile{vietnam.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~vietnam~>>: \uxfile{vietnam.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnam}\ixfile{vietnam.mld}
+% \fi
+
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{vietnam}'' language (\emph{ti\'{\^e}ng vi\d{\^{e}t}})  are taken from the \pack{vietnam} package~\cite{vietnam}
+% (by \name{Werner}{Lemberg} and \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han}).
+% Vietnamese fonts are required; see~\cite{han2003,han2008}. The vietnamese language is spoken in Vietnam
+% and in the vietnamese diaspora.
+% See also section~\vref{s+mld+vietnamese}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{vietnam}~>> (vietnamien, \emph{ti\'{\^e}ng vi\d{\^{e}t}}) sont
+% tirés du paquetage \pack{vietnam}~\cite{vietnam} (de \name{Werner}{Lemberg} et \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han}).
+% Des fontes vietnamiennes sont requises; voir~\cite{han2003,han2008}. Le vietnamien est parlé au Vietnam
+% et dans la diaspora vietnamienne.
+% Voir aussi la section~\vref{s+mld+vietnamese}.
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*vietnam>
+\ProvidesFile{vietnam.mld}[1999/03/16]% Vietnamese titles
+\def\ptctitle{M\d{u}c l\d{u}c}%
+\def\plftitle{Danh s\'ach h\`inh v\~e}%
+\def\plttitle{Danh s\'ach b\h{a}ng}%
+\def\mtctitle{M\d{u}c l\d{u}c}%
+\def\mlftitle{Danh s\'ach h\`inh v\~e}%
+\def\mlttitle{Danh s\'ach b\h{a}ng}%
+\def\stctitle{M\d{u}c l\d{u}c}%
+\def\slftitle{Danh s\'ach h\`inh v\~e}%
+\def\slttitle{Danh s\'ach b\h{a}ng}%
+%</vietnam>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Vietnamese'' language: \uxfile{vietnamese.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnamese}\ixfile{vietnamese.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~vietnamese~>>: \uxfile{vietnamese.mld}}\label{s+mld+vietnamese}\ixfile{vietnamese.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mtcselectlanguage}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The ``\lopt{vietnamese}'' language is just a synonym for the ``\lopt{vietnam}'' language.
+% So we just load \xfile{vietnam.mld}.
+% Vietnamese fonts are required.  See also section~\vref{s+mld+vietnam}.
+% \or\relax
+% La langue <<~\lopt{vietnamese}~>> est simplement un synonyme pour la langue <<~\lopt{vietnam}~>> (vietnamien). Donc nous
+% chargeons simplement \xfile{vietnam.mld}. Des fontes vietnamiennes sont requises, Voir aussi
+% la section~\vref{s+mld+vietnam}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{4}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*vietnamese>
+\ProvidesFile{vietnamese.mld}[2004/12/14]\mtcselectlanguage{vietnam}%
+%</vietnamese>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Welsh'' language: \uxfile{welsh.mld}}\label{s+mld+welsh}\ixfile{welsh.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~welsh~>>: \uxfile{welsh.mld}}\label{s+mld+welsh}\ixfile{welsh.mld}
+% \fi
+% \setlength{\iwidth}{\textwidth}
+% \addtolength{\iwidth}{-.5cm}
+% ^^A \setlength{\awidth}{.346020761\iwidth}
+% ^^A \setlength{\bwidth}{.653979239\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\awidth}{.4\iwidth}
+% \setlength{\bwidth}{.6\iwidth}
+
+% \setlength{\wkdim}{0mm}
+% \reversemarginpar
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles
+% for the ``\lopt{welsh}'' language (\emph{cymraeg}) come from the \xfile{welsh.dtx} file
+% (by \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams})
+% in the \pack{babel} package~\cite{babel,babel-user,welsh}:
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres
+% pour la langue <<~\lopt{welsh}~>> (gallois, \emph{cymraeg}) proviennent du fichier \xfile{welsh.dtx}
+% (écrit par \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams})
+% dans le paquetage \pack{babel}~\cite{babel,babel-user,welsh}:
+% \fi
+%
+% \normalmarginpar
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*welsh>
+\ProvidesFile{welsh.mld}[1999/12/06]%
+%% Welsh titles from welsh.dtx (babel), by Braams, Johannes~L.
+\def\ptctitle{Cynnwys}%
+\def\plftitle{Rhestr Ddarluniau}%
+\def\plttitle{Rhestr Dablau}%
+\def\mtctitle{Cynnwys}%
+\def\mlftitle{Rhestr Ddarluniau}%
+\def\mlttitle{Rhestr Dablau}%
+\def\stctitle{Cynnwys}%
+\def\slftitle{Rhestr Ddarluniau}%
+\def\slttitle{Rhestr Dablau}%
+%</welsh>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \lneed{7}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Xalx'' language: \uxfile{xalx.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx}\ixfile{xalx.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~xalx~>>: \uxfile{xalx.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx}\ixfile{xalx.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mnr}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{xalx}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}
+% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}).
+% Xalx (Khalkha) is the name of the Mongolian nationality residing in Mongolia proper.
+% 
+% Their dialect forms the basis of Mongolian written with
+% Cyrillic letters. See also sections~\vref{s+mld+khalkha} and~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx2}{s+mld+xalx3}.
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{xalx}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}
+% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}).
+% Xalx (Khalkha) est le nom de la nationalité Mongole qui
+% vit en Mongolie proprement dite. 
+% Son dialecte forme la base du Mongol écrit en lettres cyrilliques.
+% Voir les sections~\vref{s+mld+khalkha} et~\vrefrange{s+mld+xalx2}{s+mld+xalx3}.
+% \fi
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xalx>
+\ProvidesFile{xalx.mld}[2005/11/16]%
+%% Mongol (xalx) titles
+\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}%
+\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}%
+\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
+\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}%
+\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}%
+\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
+\def\stctitle{{\mnr Garqig}}%
+\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}%
+\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
+%</xalx>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Xalx2'' language: \uxfile{xalx2.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx2}\ixfile{xalx2.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~xalx2~>>: \uxfile{xalx2.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx2}\ixfile{xalx2.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\mnr}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{xalx2}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}
+% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}).
+% This is a variant for the ``\lopt{xalx}'' language (see section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}).
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{xalx2}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}
+% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}).
+% C'est une variante de la langue ``\lopt{xalx}'' (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xalx2>
+\ProvidesFile{xalx2.mld}[2006/03/31]%
+%% Mongol (xalx2) titles
+\def\ptctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}%
+\def\plftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}%
+\def\plttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
+\def\mtctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}%
+\def\mlftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}%
+\def\mlttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
+\def\stctitle{{\mnr Aguulga}}%
+\def\slftitle{{\mnr Zurgi"in jagsaalt}}%
+\def\slttitle{{\mnr X"usn"agti"in jagsaalt}}%
+%</xalx2>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \lneed{5}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \section{``Xalx3'' language: \uxfile{xalx3.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx3}\ixfile{xalx3.mld}
+% \or\relax
+% \section{Langue <<~xalx3~>>: \uxfile{xalx3.mld}}\label{s+mld+xalx3}\ixfile{xalx3.mld}
+% \fi
+% \begin{macro}{\xalx}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% The titles for the ``\lopt{xalx3}'' language are taken from the \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} package~\cite{mlsquick,montex}
+% (by \name{Oliver}{Corff} and \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}).
+% This is an other variant for the ``\lopt{xalx}'' language (see section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}).
+% \or\relax
+% Les titres pour la langue <<~\lopt{xalx3}~>> sont tirés du paquetage \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}~\cite{mlsquick,montex}
+% (de \name{Oliver}{Corff} et \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}).
+% C'est une autre variante de la langue ``\lopt{xalx}'' (voir la section~\vref{s+mld+xalx}).
+% \fi
+%
+% \lneed{3}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xalx3>
+\ProvidesFile{xalx3.mld}[2006/03/31]%
+%% Mongol (xalx3) titles
+\def\ptctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}%
+\def\plftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}%
+\def\plttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}%
+\def\mtctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}%
+\def\mlftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}%
+\def\mlttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}%
+\def\stctitle{\xalx{Soderjanie}}%
+\def\slftitle{\xalx{Spisok risunkow}}%
+\def\slttitle{\xalx{Spisok tablic}}%
+%</xalx3>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \cleardoublepage
+% ^^A \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\partbegin}
+% \let\NC\relax
+%
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \part{Complements}\label{p+complements}
+% \or\relax
+% \part{Compléments}\label{p+complements}
+% \fi
+% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\begin{multicols}{2}\raggedcolumns}
+% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\end{multicols}\vspace{-1.5ex}}
+% \parttoc
+% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{open}{\empty}
+% \mtcsetfeature{parttoc}{close}{\empty}
+%
+% ^^A \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% ^^A \backrefenglish
+% ^^A \or\relax
+% ^^A \backreffrench
+% ^^A \fi
+%
+% \nocite*
+% \def\noopsort#1{\relax}
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \FTRfalse
+% \bibliographystyle{en-mtc}
+% \begin{raggedright}
+% ^^A DO NOT INDEX AUTHORS
+% \let\name\oname
+% \let\iname\oiname
+% \let\inameA\oinameA
+% \let\inameB\oinameB
+% \let\xname\oxname
+% \let\vname\ovname
+% \bibliography{minitoc}
+%
+% \end{raggedright}
+% \or\relax
+% \FTRtrue
+% \bibliographystyle{fr-mtc}
+% \begin{raggedright}
+% ^^A DO NOT INDEX AUTHORS
+% \let\name\oname
+% \let\iname\oiname
+% \let\inameA\oinameA
+% \let\inameB\oinameB
+% \let\xname\oxname
+% \let\vname\ovname
+% \bibliography{minitoc-fr}
+%
+% \end{raggedright}
+% \fi
+% \adjustmtc
+% ^^A NEW HISTORY BEGIN
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter*{Changes history\markboth{Changes history}{Changes history}}\label{c+history}
+% \markboth{Changes history}{Changes history}
+% \mtcaddchapter[Changes history]
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter*{Historique des modifications\markboth{Historique des modifications}{Historique des modifications}}\label{c+history}
+% \markboth{Historique des modifications}{Historique des modifications}
+% \mtcaddchapter[Historique des modifications]
+% \fi
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \bgroup
+% \def\labelitemi{\ensuremath{\star}~\textbf{version}}
+% \def\labelitemii{\textbullet}
+% \def\labelitemiii{\textopenbullet}
+% \def\labelitemiv{\textperiodcentered}
+% \begin{RaggedRight}
+% %
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \textbf{00}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%   \item 1990/10/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%    \item Original version, by \xname{Nigel}{Ward}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1991/11/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Revised to reuse \com{chapter}, \com{section},
+%             \com{subsection} commands transparently, generate toc-file-name automatically,
+%             assorted other cleanup (by \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{01}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/06/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item New design, to avoid allocating a newwrite, or file descriptor,
+%             for each chapter (a deadly sin!) (\uname{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert}).
+%   \item Added \com{chapterend} to terminate the scope of a minitoc.
+%             (\emph{If you forgot putting} \com{chapterend} at the end
+%             of \emph{each} chapter, an entry for the next chapter
+%             will appear in each minitoc.) (Thanks to \xname{Yufan}{Hu}).
+%   \item Replaced the \env{minipage} environment by a \env{verse}
+%             environment, to allow a minitoc being split across pages.
+%   \item All the layout of the minitoc is in the
+%             command, so if someboby wants
+%             to redefine that layout, he has just to rewrite it (and only it).
+%   \item You can inhibit the minitoc for the next chapter
+%             by preceding it with \ucom{minitocno}. (\ucom{minitocyes}
+%             is useless for the user, because it is implicit \emph{after}
+%             the \com{chapter*} pseudo-chapters).
+%   \item Problems: you \emph{must} have \com{chapterend} to terminate each
+%             chapter with a minitoc. How about avoiding this constraint?
+%   \item The depth of the minitoc is user-adjustable with
+%             the counter \dcnt{minitocdepth} (similar to \dcnt{tocdepth} for the table of contents).
+%   \item At least three passes (3) of \LaTeX{} are necessary to
+%             get correct minitocs (the first pass creates the
+%             \suffix{.mtc}\meta{X} files, the second uses them (but they may
+%             contain wrong page numbers) and recreates them,
+%             the third should be ok).
+%   \item Works with \com{chapter}\texttt{[xxx]\{yyy\}} and floating bodies.
+%             Works with two columns (but the minitoc is composed in
+%             one column; how to make it to spread over the two columns?).
+%   \item Some mods added to work with \pack{xr} (external
+%             references). \upack{xr} version~5 is much more tolerant.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{02}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%   \item 1993/07/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%    \item Added compatibility with \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} (the package
+%             \pack{hangcaption} (if present) must be loaded \emph{before} the \upack{minitoc} package).
+%             \emph{Beware} to options modifying \com{@caption}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{03}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/07/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Version 3 not released (buggy).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{04}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/07/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \ucom{if@realch} to avoid contents lines from pseudo-chapters to go into the toc.
+%   \item The package \pack{mtcoff} allows you to use a \LaTeX\ document
+%         with minitoc commands and to make them transparent: just replace the \upack{minitoc} package by
+%         \pack{mtcoff}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{05}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/07/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a selection mechanism to not write spurious things in the minitocs.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{06}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/07/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Fixed problems about chapters in the toc, removed obsolete \com{caption} stuff
+%       (filters are much better) added compatibility with \pack{toch}
+%       (\pack{toch} makes a table of chapters;
+%       if used, must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}; in fact, it is the ancestor of
+%       the \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc} package).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{07}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/07/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item (\emph{major differences}) Completely rewritten, using tricks from \pack{xr} (the version~5, by
+%   \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}). The info for minitocs is directly stolen from the \suffix{.toc} file.
+%   \com{chapterend} and \ucom{minitocno} are suppressed, \com{minitoc}, \com{dominitoc}
+%   and \com{faketableofcontents} added.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{08}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/07/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Spacing adjustements.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{09}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/08/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added mods for MS-DOS (search for MS-DOS, uncomment; search for UNIX, comment out). MS-DOS allows
+%   only 3 characters for extensions in file names (what a pity!).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{10}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/08/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Works now with appendices. Detects now the obsolete versions of \xfile{latex.tex}
+%         (\com{@inputcheck} or \com{reset@font} not defined).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{11}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/08/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \com{mtcSfont}, font for section entries, \com{mtcSSfont} for subsection entries,
+%   \com{mtcSSSfont} for subsubsection entries, \com{mtcPfont} for paragraph entries,
+%   \com{mtcSPfont} for subparagraph entries.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{12}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/12/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Use \com{kern} in place of \com{vspace*}, and added penalties (\com{nopagebreak})
+%   to avoid a page break just before last \com{mtc@rule}.
+%   \item Also added a \env{samepage} environnement.
+%   \item Removed old commented out lines from previous versions.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{13}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%   \item 1993/12/17
+%    \begin{itemize}
+%    \item Added \com{minilof} and \com{minilot} stuff. For MS-DOS, uncomment the definition of \com{SHORTEXT}.
+%    \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{14}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/01/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrected space under \texttt{minitoc/lof/lot} and added a \com{raggedright}
+%             setting to avoid ``underfull'' warnings.
+%   \item Corrected some spacing problems (avoiding~\texttt{\textasciitilde}'s).
+%             \com{mtifont} is changed from \ucom{normalsize\bs bf} to \ucom{large\bs bf}.
+%   \item Some modifications suggested by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} (thanks):
+%             \ucom{@newread} becomes \com{newread}, not outer version of \com{newread};
+%             \com{empty} replaced by \com{relax} in the spare definition of \com{reset@font}.
+%   \item Removed the setting of \com{clubpenalty} and \com{widowpenalty}
+%             to \texttt{10\,000} (done by \com{samepage}), and \com{noindent}.
+%   \item Simplified processing of optional argument in \com{minitoc},
+%             \com{minilof} and \com{minilot}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{15}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/01/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} and \com{partlot} for books, \com{secttoc},
+%   \com{sectlof} and \com{sectlot} for articles, with some commands and parameters parallel to those
+%   for mini-tables.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/01/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} and \com{partlot} for books,
+%             \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof} and \com{sectlot} for articles,
+%             with some commands and parameters parallel to those for mini-tables.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{16}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/02/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Bug fixes (typos).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{17}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/06/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item `\texttt{n}' (null) synonym of `\texttt{e}' (empty) in the optional argument of \com{minitoc},
+%   \com{dominitoc}, and siblings.
+%   \item Compatibility with ``\LaTeXe''. Thanks to \xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} (who found the problem) and
+%   \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach} (who gave the hints to solve).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{18}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/06/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Make \upack{minitoc} really compatible with \LaTeXe.
+%   \item Introduce the language files as options. Many thanks to \xname{Michel}{Goossens}
+%   (via \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}) who was inspired by the code of the \pack{babel} package
+%   (by \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{19}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/08/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added stuff for numbering of chapters (parts, sections) not starting at 1. \com{firstchapteris} etc.
+%   commands added.
+%   \item \com{mtcrule}, \com{nomtcrule} etc. commands added.
+%   \item Corrected a bug in \com{c@mti}.
+%   \item Corrected \xfile{mtcswedish.sty} (\xname{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}).
+%   \item Corrected appendix in articles.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{20}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/08/25
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrected spacing before and after minitocs and siblings.
+%   \item Added the \com{mtcpagenumbers} and \com{nomtcpagenumbers} commands
+%             (and siblings) to make minitocs with/without page numbers. Default: with page numbers.
+%   \item Corrected (difficult bug) appendix in articles.
+%   \item Corrected vertical spacing.
+%   \item Corrected a problem with chapters numbered with uppercase roman numbers.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{21}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/09/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrected typos in \upack{minitoc} and \xfile{minitoc.tex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{22}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/10/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrected typos in \upack{minitoc}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{23}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/11/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a missing line in \com{sectlof}.
+%   \item Works with document classes resetting chapter (or section) number at each part
+%             (thanks to \xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel}).
+%   \item Added the notion of ``absolute numbering'' for the mini-tables.
+%   \item Removed stuff for \com{firstchapteris} and co. These commands are obsolete.
+%   \item Removed appendix stuff.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{24}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/12/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item The \com{protect} commands have been removed from
+%             the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lot} and \suffix{.lot} files, so some internal macros have been
+%             corrected to be compatible with the \LaTeXe\ release of December 1994. Thanks to
+%             \xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} who did the work.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{25}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1996/09/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Updated \xfile{mtcnorsk.sty} and added \xfile{mtcnynorsk.sty} on a suggestion from \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{26}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1996/11/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Language specific files are now named \emph{language}\suffix{.mld} (replacing names of the form
+%   \texttt{mtc}\emph{language}\suffix{.sty}) because they are not packages and it makes shorter names.
+%   \item Added breton, estonian, germanb, greek, irish, russianb, scottish, lower and upper sorbian; renamed
+%   ``esperanto'' by ``esperant'' like in the \pack{babel} package.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{27}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1996/12/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections for starred sectionning commands.
+%   \item \xfile{english.mld} loaded as default language.
+%   \item Added \xfile{vietnam.mld} and \xfile{arab.mld}.
+%   \item Renamed \pack{minitocoff} into \pack{mtcoff} to keep the name short.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{28}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1997/10/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the afrikaan(s), brazil, and ethiopia(n) languages.
+%   \item Added autoconfiguration of extensions.
+%   \item Added the \opt{shortext} package option.
+%   \item Added \emph{coffee} stuff.
+%   \item Added \com{addstarred} stuff (for starred chapter stuff).
+%   \item Fixed bug in parttocs.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 1998/06/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item A typo corrected by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}:
+%         \begin{quote}
+%         \texttt{\{\bs let@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}}
+%         \end{quote}
+%         should probably be
+%         \begin{quote}
+%         \texttt{\{\bs let\bs@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}}
+%         \end{quote}
+%             (a backslash was missing after \com{let}). Thanks to him.
+%   \item Added the bahasa language.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 1998/12/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the \opt{tight} and \optd{loose} package options.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{29}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1999/03/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the bicig, buryat, mongol and russianc languages.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 1999/06/28
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the armenian language (from \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 1999/07/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the \optd{dotted}/\opt{undotted} package options (default: \optd{dotted}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 1999/07/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{lithuanian.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{30}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1999/12/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the basque, ngermanb, serbian, ukraineb, and welsh languages.
+%   \item Corrected a bug in \com{sltname} definition (\texttt{mlt} should be \texttt{slt}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{31}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2000/04/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added compatibility with the \pack{hyperref} package, thanks to \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek},
+%   who has also simplified some code and fixed the infamous \com{chapter*} bug.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{32}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2000/08/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added very (too) numerous new commands for the mini-table features:
+%             \com{beforeparttoc},\ABK \com{beforepartlof},\ABK \com{beforepartlot},\ABK
+%             \com{afterparttoc},\ABK \com{afterpartlof},\ABK \com{afterpartlot},\ABK
+%             \com{thispageparttocstyle},\goodbreak \com{thispagepartlofstyle},\ABK and \com{thispagepartlotstyle}.
+%   \item Documentation improved by \xname{Stefan}{Ulrich}.
+%   \item \com{nomtcrule} corrected.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{33}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2000/12/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added new adjustment commands: \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection},
+%         and \com{mtcaddpart}.
+%         These commands add stuff in the \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof} and \suffix{.lot} files for the
+%         \com{chapter*} (\com{section*} and \com{part*}) problem. From a suggestion by
+%       \xname{Karl~F.}{Everitt}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2000/12/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrected a feature in \com{mtcaddchapter} and~co. with a blank optional argument.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{34}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2000/12/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added\imess{I0046} in the documentation a section for use with the \pack{tocbibind} package.
+%   \item Added \suffix{.mld} files for alternate names of languages: so, \xfile{american.mld} just loads
+%   \xfile{english.mld}, which contains the real definitions.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{35}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2001/01/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added macros to test if a file is ``empty'' (i.e.,~empty, blank or
+%         inexistent) or ``non empty'' (i.e.,~useful). I used some code from \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}.
+%   \item Added the \optd{checkfiles}/\opt{nocheckfiles} package options.
+%   \item Replaced \ucom{The@chapter} by \com{The@mtc}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2001/02/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{bulgarian.mld}, \xfile{hebrew.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{latin.mld}, and
+%         \xfile{samin.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2001/03/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \com{mtcselectlanguage}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2001/06/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Fixed the \lopt{estonian} package option (missing).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2001/07/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the interlingua language.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{36}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2002/02/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrected an interaction with \com{tableofcontents} which creates a \com{chapter*} or
+%       a \com{section*}, perturbing \cnt{mtc}/\cnt{stc} counters (problem signalled by \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2002/02/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrected a spacing problem with empty titles (problem signalled by \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
+%   \item Workaround for the \com{parttoc}-\com{chapter*} problem.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2002/02/19
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \com{mtcskip} and \com{mtcskipamount}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2002/02/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Fixed test for empty files.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2002/03/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the \lopt{bangla} language.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2002/03/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Reduced depth of \com{mtc@strutbox}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{37}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/01/24
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Version~\#37 dropped.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{38}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/01/24
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item \texttt{pt} becomes \ucom{@pt} and \texttt{0pt} becomes \ucom{z@}.
+%   \item \ucom{hrule} and \ucom{vrule} replaced by \ucom{rule} (\LaTeX).
+%   \item Added \com{mtc@zrule} for zero-dims rules.
+%   \item Added the frenchb language (synonym of french).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/01/30
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Changed the test for empty titles.
+%   \item Added the \opt{flsection} and \opt{flsectionb} package options.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/01/31
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item The \opt{tight} and \optd{loose} package options are applied to
+%             \com{parttoc} (\xname{Thomas}{Leonhardt}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/02/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Package options \opt{flsection} and \opt{flsectionb} removed and
+%             replaced by the \opt{insection} package option (like \opt{flsectionb}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/02/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrected numbering of SLF, SLT.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/02/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \lopt{frenchle} and \lopt{frenchpro} language options (synonyms of \lopt{french}).
+%   \item Corrected secttocs, at least.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/03/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrected some vertical spacings and struts
+%             (I added some mods by \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}, many thanks to him.).
+%             A lot of cleaning remains to do, but the release seems to be needed now.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{39}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/04/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Modern font commands for compatibility with the \class{memoir} class.
+%   \item \com{nomtcpagenumbers} and \class{memoir} class.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/06/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \com{@fileswfalse} and \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile}
+%             for the \pack{notoccite} package (requested by \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}); added the
+%             \opt{notoccite} package option (loads the \pack{notoccite} package).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2004/09/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added language options and \suffix{.mld} files for dialects: \lopt{canadian} (\loptd{english}), \lopt{acadian},
+%   \lopt{acadien}, \lopt{canadien} (\lopt{french}), \lopt{naustrian}, \lopt{ngerman} (\lopt{ngermanb}).
+%   \item Added comments in \suffix{.mld} files using special fonts.
+%   \item Documentation: added a paragraph about making a TOC for
+%             appendices, eventually not listed in the main TOC.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2004/09/17
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation; corrections about rules.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{40}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2004/12/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the japanese and castillan languages.
+%   \item Removed the test on the presence of the \pack{multicol} package in
+%         \xfile{minitoc.tex}, because \pack{multicol} is a required package.
+%   \item Added a figure in \xfile{minitoc.tex} about the need of three compilations.
+%   \item Added some infos in \xfile{minitoc.bug}.
+%   \item Added\imess{I0042} a paragraph about a problem with the \pack{appendix} package.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2004/12/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Updated \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib} and \xfile{minitoc.bib}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2004/12/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the \optd{hints} package option. This option is still experimental; your advice is welcome.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2004/12/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} (french documentation in PDF format).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{41}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in documentation.
+%   \item Message added if some sectionning commands are not available.
+%   \item Replaced \ucom{typeout} commands in \upack{minitoc}
+%             by the \com{PackageInfo} or \com{PackageWarning} commands; with the line number when useful
+%             (\com{@gobble} if no line number).  Hence, the package is less verbose
+%             (\com{PackageInfo} writes only in the \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file, not on the terminal).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the \com{mtcsetfont} (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}) and \com{mtcsettitlefont} commands,
+%       with a much simpler syntax.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item \AmS\ classes: \class{amsart} and \class{amsproc} are incompatible with
+%             \upack{minitoc}, \class{amsbook} needs precautions.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \com{mtcsetformat}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \com{mtcsettitle}.
+%   \item Added a hint for recommending the \opt{insection} package option.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/19
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a hint about the presence of \com{dominitoc} and co.
+%   \item Added a hint about consistency of \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} and co.
+%   \item Improved documentation about hints.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a hint about using short extensions with more that 99~parts or 99~chapters or 99~sections.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/25
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item \com{ptifont}: \texttt{\bs Huge\bs bfseries} becomes \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs bfseries}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/28
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added many new language files: \xfile{serbianc.mld}, \xfile{chinese1.mld},
+%         \xfile{chinese2.mld}, \xfile{hangul1.mld}, \xfile{hangul2.mld}, \xfile{hangul3.mld},
+%         \xfile{hangul4.mld}, \xfile{hanja1.mld}, \xfile{hanja2.mld}, \xfile{japanese2.mld},
+%         \xfile{japanese3.mld}, \xfile{japanese4.mld}, \xfile{japanese5.mld}, \xfile{thai.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \com{mtcsetrules}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \com{plfrule}, \com{noplfrule}, \com{mlfrule},
+%         \com{nomlfrule}, \com{slfrule}, \com{noslfrule}, \com{pltrule},
+%         \com{nopltrule}, \com{mltrule}, \com{nomltrule}, \com{sltrule},
+%         \com{nosltrule}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{letton.mld}, \xfile{greek-mono.mld}, \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld},
+%       \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld}, \xfile{russian2m.mld}, and \xfile{russian2o.mld}
+%       as new language files.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added tests on the \uenv{mtchideinmain*}\ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}
+%         environments.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \com{mtcfixindex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{42}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Version~42 not released.
+%   \item Replaced ``language'' by ``langue'' in the french documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Fixed a minor typo.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Upgraded \com{mtcfixindex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \com{mtcsettitle}, forgotten to be inserted in v41.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{43}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Version~43: consolidation of v40, v41 and v42.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/24
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Fixed a big bug in \com{mtcsetformat}.
+%   \item Fixed a bug in \xfile{mtcoff.sty} about \com{mtcfixindex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Fixed the \ucom{mtcset}\texttt{.{}.{}.}\ macros.
+%   \item Moved history to the end of package code.
+%   \item Added the \xfile{INSTALL} file and a chapter about installation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Fixed a typo (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}).
+%   \item Completed the hint about consistency of \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} and co.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a hint about consistency of \com{minitoc} and \com{tableofcontents}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added comments about fonts.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added  \com{mtcsetfeature}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{bulgarianb.mld} (upper bulgarian).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \texttt{*[-\bs baselineskip]} after the \texttt{\bs\bs} after the top rule of each part level mini-table.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the arguments of \com{mtcsetfeature}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Removed \com{markboth} for minitocs (\ldots) and secttocs (\ldots).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{spanish2.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a hint for the \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract} package.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/04/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrected the \env{stc@verse} environment.
+%   \item Added \xfile{finnish2.mld}, \xfile{latin2.mld}, and \xfile{magyar2.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/04/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Renamed \xfile{portuges.mld} as \xfile{portugues.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/04/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction in \com{mtcskip}.
+%   \item First version in \suffix{.dtx} format.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/04/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Removed \ucom{ypart}, \ucom{ychapter}, \ucom{ysection}, and stuff; unused.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/05/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrected a typo in \com{@dosectlot}.
+%   \item Added \com{mtcfixglossary}.
+%   \item Print the documentation with ``\optp{oneside}{\protect\textsl{many classes}}'' to have all marginal notes on left.
+%       Added the (extended to 54 floats) code of \pack{morefloats} (\xname{Don}{Hosek}) to allow more marginpars
+%         and floats.
+%   \item Added \xfile{minitoc.ist}\isuffix{.ist} to format the index correctly.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/05/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Fixed rules in parttocs, partlofs and partlots.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/05/30
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Fixed chapter-level entries in parttocs, when page numbers must be removed.
+%   \item Added a hint about the \pack{sectsty}\imess{I0043} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a hint about attempts to insert empty mini-tables.
+%   \item Added a hint about the use of obsolete commands.
+%   \item The mini-lists of figures or tables should not be printed empty even if \dcnt{tocdepth}${}<1$.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the notion of depth for mini-tables of figures/tables.
+%   \item Added \com{mtcsetdepth}.
+%   \item The \optd{hints} option is the default and no more considered as experimental.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added an error message in \com{mtcsetdepth} if the counter is not available.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{portuges.mld}, which loads \xfile{portugues.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added three variants for the malayalam language: \xfile{malayalam-keli.mld},
+%       \xfile{malayalam-rachana.mld}, and \xfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added method for bilingual documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}\isuffix{.ist} to format correctly the index in french.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Changed ``Liste des Tables'' by ``Liste des Tableaux'' in \xfile{french.mld}, and in the french documentation,
+%       to stick to the choices of the \pack{babel} package.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/17
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item The file \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} is now generated by \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added ``OUI'', ``NON'', ``oui'', ``non'', ``O'', and ``o'' as true/false keywords.
+%   \item Compacted the code about detection of short/long extensions.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added ``VRAI'', ``FAUX'', ``vrai'', ``faux'', ``V'', and ``v'' as true/false keywords.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correctly set the \com{ifFTR} flag to have the names of months in the right language in the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Set the flag \com{mtcoffwarn@true} in \pack{mtcoff} if a command \ucom{mtcadd...} is found.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/07/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{castillian.mld}.
+%   \item Renamed \xfile{portugues.mld} as \xfile{portuguese.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/07/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{brazilian.mld}, \xfile{british.mld}, \xfile{UKenglish.mld}, and \xfile{USenglish.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/07/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Suppressed ``General:'' in the changes history.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/07/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Replaced some \com{PackageWarning} commands by \com{PackageInfo}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/07/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Restoring the correspondence of each language option with a \suffix{.mld} file.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/07/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Improving the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/07/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Removing unused some flags \ucom{if@mtc@setpagenumbers@act@} and \ucom{if@mtc@setrules@act@}.
+%   \item Added the \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc}, and \com{decrementstc} commands.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/07/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrected a bug in \pack{mtcoff}.
+%   \item Improved some messages in \pack{mtcoff}.
+%   \item Added a test on the version of the \pack{placeins} package.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/08/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a note about \com{FloatBarrier}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/08/24
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a note about an alignment problem in the minitocs.  Updated \xfile{minitoc.bug}.
+%   \item Made two versions of the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments,
+%       depending on the presence of the corresponding depth counter.
+%   \item The \class{memoir} class is incompatible if too recent.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/08/25
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a comment about the position of the \ucom{do.{}.{}.} preparation commands.
+%   \item Corrections in the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/08/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{guarani.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/08/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc}, and \com{incrementstc}.
+%   \item Added an optional argument to \com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc}, and \com{adjuststc}.
+%   \item Added the \opt{k-tight} and \optd{k-loose} package options.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a patch for the recent version of the \class{memoir} class.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{spanish3.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Use \com{mtcselectlanguage} in language options and in ``secondary'' \suffix{.mld} files.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \com{mtcloadmlo} to be used in some \suffix{.mld} files to load a \suffix{.mlo} file.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a test to forbid direct calls of \com{mtcloadmlo} by the user.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{farsi1.mld}, \xfile{farsi1.mlo}, \xfile{farsi2.mld}, and \xfile{farsi2.mlo}.
+%   \item Added a note about the \tool{rubber} tool.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{mtcglo.ist}\isuffix{.ist} to format the glossary.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Removed the page numbers in the glossary. Done in the \texttt{*mk} scripts.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{44}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Changes history (glossary) typeset in \texttt{RaggedRight}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{ngermanb2.mld}, \xfile{norsk2.mld}, and \xfile{nynorsk2.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/28
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item New method for history: embedded lists on 3~levels.
+%   \item Removed \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{mtcglo.ist}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Cleaned the \texttt{*mk} scripts.
+%   \item Added the \optd{listfiles} package option.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/30
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrected typos.
+%   \item Added the name of the \suffix{.maf} file in the message of the \optd{listfiles} package option.
+%   \item Improved the cleaning in the \texttt{*mk} scripts, using a~\suffix{.maf} file.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/10/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Load the patch for the \class{memoir} class only if necessary; do not load it if \class{memoir}
+%         is dated after 2005/09/25.
+%   \item Added a remark in the FAQ chapter (and \xfile{minitoc.bug}) about precautions to take with the starred
+%         sectionning commands.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/10/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the \opt{nolistfiles} package option.
+%   \item Added a hint about the \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption}, and \pack{mcaption} packages
+%         (they must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/10/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Fixed typos in the documentation.
+%   \item Fixed some marginal notes in the commented code.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/10/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Minor corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Use the \tool{xargs} Unix command in the \texttt{*mk} scripts to remove the auxiliary files.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/10/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Minor corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Added a short intro to the ``Frequently Asked Questions'' chapter and to \xfile{minitoc.bug}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Minor corrections in the documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Minor corrections in the documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Begin adding the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the french \LaTeX{} Companion~\cite{TLC2F}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Adding \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} in \xfile{minitoc.l}.
+%   \item Adding a note about the need of running \scrp{imk} before \scrp{emk} or \scrp{fmk}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Fixed typos in the documentation.
+%   \item Added a note about a problem with \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} and \class{memoir}.
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Fixed typos in the documentation.
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Improve the notes about the \class{memoir} class.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Improve the notes about the \class{memoir} class.
+%   \item Added \com{plfSfont}, \com{pltSfont}, \com{mlfSfont}, \com{mltSfont},
+%   \com{slfSfont}, and \com{sltSfont} for subfigures and subtables entries in the mini-tables.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Fixed a bug about fonts for subfigures and subtables entries in the mini-tables.
+%   \item Added \xfile{bicig2.mld}, \xfile{bithe.mld}, \xfile{manju.mld}, \xfile{xalx.mld}, and
+%   \xfile{khalkha.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/17
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Added testing via internal \emph{quarks} commands in \com{mtcsetfont}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Fixed typos in the documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Updating the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/24
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/25
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Changed ``table'' into ``tableau'' in the french doc, where necessary.
+%   \item Updating the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/28
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Fixed typos in the documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Fixed typos in the documentation.
+%   \item Fixed typos in the bibliography.
+%   \item Updating the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/30
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Avoid some warnings ``Token not allowed'' from \texttt{pdftex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Reordering a long sequence of citations.
+%   \item Added \og{} {\texttt{mailto:}}\fg{} in the mailing URLs.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Fixed typos in the documentation.
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0038}\pack{varsects} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Correcting an hyperlink in the bibliography (for the \pack{xr} package).
+%   \item Attempting to avoid broken URLs, using \env{quote}, footnotes and \com{par}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Updating the bibliography.
+%   \item Corrections of layout (some headers, a table).
+%   \item In the warning message of the hint about a number of mini-tables greater than~99 (if short extensions),
+%         give the effective number.
+%   \item Reduce the width of some info, warning or error messages.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections of layout (some headers).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections of french quotes.
+%   \item Added some PDF options.
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Corrected an URL to the \AmS\ in the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/19
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Made some messages shorter (mainly by removing stars).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction of typos.
+%   \item Added some labels.
+%   \item Added a chapter with the (explained) messages. Not yet sorted.
+%   \item The documentation needs 4~\LaTeX\ runs.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Made some messages shorter.
+%   \item Corrections in the list of messages.
+%   \item Updating the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Improving the placement of floats on pages of floats: to the top.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation (thanks to \name{Markus}{Gleiszner}).
+%   \item Added \oexam{addsec.tex}
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrected the flag \com{ifundottedmtc}.
+%   \item Correction to make \oexam{addsec.tex} work.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added ``\texttt{*}'' as keyword for the first argument of \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} and
+%         \com{mtcsetrules} (asked by \name{Markus}{Gleiszner}).
+%   \item Removed ``\com{MessageBreak}'' from the index.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Corrected the bibliography entry about \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Used the \pack{afterpage} package~\cite{afterpage} in the documentation to fix a float positionning problem.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Fixing a float positionning problem.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Continuing the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Added the bahasam language.
+%   \item Added the albanian language.
+%   \item Added the hebrew2 language.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Updated the documentation for the albanian, bahasa, bahasam, and hebrew2 languages.
+%   \item Updated \xfile{french.mld} (removing abusive uppercase letters).
+%   \item Corrected the \xfile{italian.mld} file. Added the italian2 language.
+%   \item Added the australian and newzealand languages (english).
+%   \item Renamed the bahasa language as bahasai; bahasa is synonym of bahasai.
+%   \item Added the malay and meyalu languages, synonyms of bahasam.
+%   \item Added the indon and indonesian languages, synonyms of bahasai.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Updated the acknowledgements.
+%   \item Added references to the new bibliographic entries.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Fixed an instability in page breaks in the documentation of \xfile{japanese3.mld}.
+%   \item Added comments in some \suffix{.mld} files.
+%   \item Added \xfile{magyar3.mld}.
+%   \item Updated \xfile{lithuanian.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction in \com{mtcaddsection}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/17
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction in \com{mtcfixindex} and \com{mtcfixglossary}.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Limitation of the initial depth of displayed bookmarks.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added some comments in point~34 of the FAQ (and in \xfile{minitoc.bug}) about the initialization of fonts.
+%   \item Added \xfile{romanian2.mld} and \xfile{romanian3.mld}.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/19
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Load some packages before \pack{hyperref}.
+%   \item Added \xfile{spanish4.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrected the table about default titles.
+%   \item Corrected the keywords for \com{mtcsetfont}.
+%   \item Added \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}, and \xfile{ukrainian.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/24
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Updated documentation for \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}, and \xfile{ukrainian.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/25
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a hint about the \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript{}
+%         classes~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}, and an entry in the FAQ chapter
+%         (and in \xfile{minitoc.bug}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Added a note in documentation of \xfile{serbian.mld} and \xfile{serbianc.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/30
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{ethiopian2.mld} (for Omega).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/31
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Simplifications in the ``Messages'' chapter.
+%   \item Corrections in the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Added the ``Postface'' chapter.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the ``Postface'' chapter.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Added package \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} for the ``The pdf\TeX\ Program'' entry in the bibliography.
+%         Its author's first name needs a double accent \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}; je l'ai aussi
+%         utilisé pour composer d'autres mots vietnamiens.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{malayalam-omega.mld} and \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{kannada.mld}.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in \xfile{russianb.mld} and \xfile{spanish.mld}.
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation and the bibliography.
+%   \item Place \com{mtcfixglossary} before \com{mtcfixindex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a citation from \name{Donald}{Arseneau}.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Updated the acknowlegments.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/17
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Updated the jargon.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \uxfile{u8hangul.mld}, \uxfile{u8hangul.mlo}, \uxfile{u8hanja.mld}, and \uxfile{u8hanja.mlo}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Renamed languages \texttt{u8hangul} and \texttt{u8hanja} into \xmldo{hangul-u8} and \xmldo{hanja-u8}.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a hint about repeated preparation commands.
+%   \item Moved up the declaration of some flags relative to the \optd{hints} option.
+%   \item Added \com{mtcprepare}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/24
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Added \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} to class~6.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/28
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Corrected the position of tables in the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Corrected \xfile{irish.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld} and \xfile{usorbian.mld}.
+%   \item Added \xfile{polski.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Hints about the \class{jura}\imess{W0029}\imess{W0025} class and the \pack{alphanum} package,
+%         incompatible with \upack{minitoc}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Use bibliographic styles with an~\texttt{URL} field, built with the help of \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in \xfile{magyar.mld}, \xfile{magyar2.mld}, and \xfile{magyar3.mld}.
+%   \item Added \xfile{russian-cca.mld}, \xfile{russian-cca1.mld}, and \xfile{russian-lh.mld}, with their
+%         \suffix{.mlo} files.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \item Added \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mld}, \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mld}, and \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mld}, with their
+%         \suffix{.mlo} files.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the \pack{mtcmess} package.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item The messages are now numbered.
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Update the jargon.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/28
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Update the jargon.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added FAQ~37 about \suffix{.mld} files and \pack{babel}.
+%   \item Added \xfile{french1.mld} and \xfile{french2.mld}.
+%   \item Update the jargon.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/30
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{english1.mld} and \xfile{english2.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{45}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/31
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Suppression of the PostScript versions of the documentation.
+%   \item Added \xfile{arab2.mld}, \xfile{bicig3.mld}, \xfile{buryat2.mld}, \xfile{xalx2.mld}, and \xfile{xalx3.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{swedish2.mld}.
+%   \item The \opt{insection} package option loads also the \pack{flafter} package.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Added \uxgrf{lamed.eps} and \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} as images for the \emph{Lamed} logo (built from \uxfile{lamed.tex}).
+%   \item Reordering of the chapters in the user's manual (part~I).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Use \pack{sectsty} to better format section titles.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Added \com{ifmtcsecondpart} to check if the document has exactly 2~parts.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item In the \opt{insection} package option, load the \pack{flafter} package \emph{before} the
+%         \pack{placeins} package.
+%   \item Added a figure about the float barriers.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added notes in FAQ~20, about the use with the \pack{appendix} package.
+%   \item Added comments about the \opt{insection} option.
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \item Begin correction of the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/05/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added notes in \xfile{minitoc.bug}, point~20, about the use with the \pack{appendix} package.
+%   \item End correction of the \env{mtchideinmaintoc} environment.
+%   \item Analogous corrections in the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments.
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/05/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added notes about the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments.
+%   \item Added \oexam{hide1.tex} and \oexam{hide2.tex}.
+%   \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0086}\pack{fncychap} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0087}\pack{quotchap} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/05/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0088}\pack{romannum} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0089}\pack{sfheaders} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0090}\pack{alnumsec} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/05/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/05/24
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{hide.tex} to \oexam{hide1.tex}.
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/05/30
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Use \com{MakeUpperCase} in \com{markboth} for page styles.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/05/31
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \item Added a hint about the \pack{captcont} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Added \xfile{uighur.mld}, \xfile{uighur2.mld}, and \xfile{uighur3.mld} (as synonyms for the bicig variants).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Added description of \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} in the jargon.
+%   \item Added a comment about the \scrp{imk} script in \xfile{INSTALL} and the ``Installation'' chapter.
+%   \item Added an entry about ``package'' in the jargon.
+%   \item Added the \exam{mtc-apx.tex} example file.
+%   \item Added FAQ 44 and the \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} and \com{mtcgapafterheads} commands.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \item Added the \oexam{gaps.tex} example file.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item Spacing correction in \xfile{french2.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{46}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation and the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \item Comment about the \pack{thailatex} package.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Generate some example files with \xfile{minitoc.dtx}/\xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+%   \item Added chapter ``Example files''.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Renamed chapter ``Example files'' as ``Examples of documents''.
+%   \item Use the \pack{lipsum} package~\cite{lipsum} in some of the examples of documents.
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Update the examples of documents.
+%   \item Added the \oexam{second.tex} example file.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the \oexam{amem.tex}, \oexam{mem.tex} and \oexam{mem1.tex} example files.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/30
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the \oexam{fo1.tex}, \oexam{fo2.tex} and \oexam{scr.tex} example files.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the \oexam{subf.tex} example file.
+%   \item Corrections about the depth of minilofs, minilots and siblings.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the \oexam{tsfc.tex} and \oexam{tbi.tex} example files.
+%   \item Corrections in the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections of typos.
+%   \item Corrections in the bibliography.
+%   \item Added the \oexam{2c.tex} and \exam{mtc-bo.tex} example files.
+%   \item Correction in \xfile{french2.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction in minilots and minilofs (and siblings) about depth.
+%   \item Added the \oexam{hop.tex} and \oexam{cri.tex} example files.
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the \oexam{livre.tex}, \oexam{ch0.tex}, \oexam{tlc.tex} and \oexam{mu.tex} example files.
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Update the jargon.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation.
+%   \item The not released versions are flagged by~\textbf{\textreferencemark} in place of~\ensuremath{\star}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/17
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item The ``About this document'' section becomes a starred first chapter.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the \oexam{hir.tex} and \oexam{hia.tex} example files.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/19
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \item Corrections in \oexam{add.tex} and \oexam{addsec.tex} for the index.
+%   \item Added the \scrp{xmk} script to typeset the examples into PDF documents.
+%   \item Updated the scripts to treat the examples.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Do not forget \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} in the list of files.
+%   \item In the scripts, the backup directory (\xfile{OLD}) is now \xfile{/tmp/`whoami`/OLD}.
+%   \item In the scripts, the repartition directories (\texttt{CL[0-9]}) are
+%         now \texttt{/tmp/`whoami`/CL[0-9]}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{47}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the documentation and the bibliography.
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{arabi.mld} and \xfile{farsi3.mld} (from the \packa{\Arabi}{arabi} system~\cite{arabi}).
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/28
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Update the jargon.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/31
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Fixed \com{l@xsection}.
+%   \item Fixed some spacings in mini-tables.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a \verb|\kernafter...| vertical kern between each minitable and its bottom rule.
+%   \item Added point~45 of the FAQ.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Minor correction in warning message \texttt{F0008}.
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \item Fixed a bug in \xfile{romanian2.mld} and \xfile{romanian3.mld}.
+%   \item Shortened the result of some example documents by using the \class{report} class in place of the
+%         \class{book} class (hence using one side printing).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{48}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Fixed typos.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \item No preamble in \oexam{add.bib}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the TOC formatting.
+%   \item Increasing \com{textwidth}.
+%   \item Correction of the preamble problem in \oexam{add.bib} and all generated files.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/24
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Remove comments about spurious lines in preamble of generated files.
+%   \item Added \xfile{devanagari.mld} and \xfile{hindi.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/25
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \item Added \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}.
+%   \item Corrected the \com{name} macro (for the documentation).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/28
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the bibliography.
+%   \item Correction (conversion) in \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added error \texttt{E0036}\imess{E0036} if \xfile{english.mld} is not found to set the default titles.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/31
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \item Modified the \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} to have family names of authors and editors in small caps and years in
+%         old style digits. Titles are in emphasis. The \xfile{frplain1.bst} style is also updated.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \item The bibliographic styles \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} and \xfile{frplain1.bst} are renamed \xfile{en-mtc.bst} and
+%         \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Update the bibliography.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{add.bib} to \exam{mtc-add.bib}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{add.tex} to \exam{mtc-add.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{addsec.tex} to \exam{mtc-ads.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{2c.tex} to \exam{mtc-2c.tex}.
+%   \item The \optd{listfiles} package option is now active by default.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{app-mem.tex} to \exam{mtc-amm.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{apx.tex} to \exam{mtc-apx.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{bo.tex} to \exam{mtc-bo.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{ch0.tex} to \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{cri.tex} to \exam{mtc-cri.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{fo1.tex} to \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{fo2.tex} to \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{gaps.tex} to \exam{mtc-gap.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{hia.tex} to \exam{mtc-hia.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{hir.tex} to \exam{mtc-hir.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{hide1.tex} to \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{hide2.tex} to \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{hop.tex} to \exam{mtc-hop.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{livre.tex} to \exam{mtc-liv.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{mem.tex} to \exam{mtc-mem.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{mem1.tex} to \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{mini-art.tex} to \exam{mtc-art.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{minitoc-ex.tex} to \exam{mtc-bk.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{mu.tex} to \exam{mtc-mu.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{scr.tex} to \exam{mtc-scr.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{second.tex} to \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{subf.tex} to \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{tbi.tex} to \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{tlc.tex} to \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}.
+%   \item Renamed \oexam{tsfc.tex} to \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Updated the bibliography (added the Pentaglot).
+%   \item Corrected the format of two tables about NFSS.
+%   \item Example documents in alphabetical order in their chapter.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a figure about systems derived from \TeX{} and \LaTeX.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the \exam{mtc-syn.tex} example document file.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{49}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Slightly modified the layout of the list of files (``Installation'' chapter).
+%   \item Simplifications in the scripts.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Added point~46 in the FAQ and example file \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Corrections in the bibliography and the bibliographic styles.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Better error messages about undefined preparation and insertion commands.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Added ``\textbf{+}'' and ``\texttt{-}'' as synonyms for ``\texttt{on}'' and ``\texttt{off}'', respectively.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/10/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the bibliography.
+%   \item Fixed typos.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Added a table of some encodings.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/10/31
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Suppressed the ``Summary'' entry in the summary, but added it in the Table of Contents.
+%   \item Improving some tables.
+%   \item Added the \xfile{japanese6.mld} and \xfile{japanese6.mlo} files.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/11/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in the bibliography.
+%   \item Corrections in formatting a citation from \name{Donald}{Arseneau}.
+%   \item Combine four figures in one (with sub-figures).
+%   \item Added (in the memento) a table of the classes and packages which are incompatible or need precautions with
+%         \upack{minitoc}.
+%   \item Added a hint about the \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} package (must be loaded \emph{before} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/11/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Completed the list of the standard classes.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/11/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a validation of the language options with the presence of the \suffix{.mld} and \suffix{.mlo} files.
+%   \item Added\imess{E0036} notes about the mandatory presence of the \xfile{english.mld} file.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/11/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item The validation of the language options writes only informative messages in the
+%         \emph{document}\suffix{.log} file and, if necessary, gives only one warning message.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{50}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/11/17
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Removed old examples of documents: \oexam{mtc-adds.tex}, \oexam{mtc-amem.tex}, \oexam{mtc-book.tex},
+%         \oexam{mtc-gaps.tex}, \oexam{mtc-mem1.tex}, \oexam{mtc-subf.tex}, and \oexam{mtc-tsfc.tex}.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Added the \scrp{tmk} script and a table describing a \index{TDS}TDS structure for \upack{minitoc}.
+%   \item Added an item about the \index{TDS}TDS in the jargon.
+%   \item Updated the \xfile{INSTALL} file and the ``Installation'' chapter.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/11/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the warning message \texttt{W0094} with the list of the missing minitoc languages files (\suffix{.mld}
+%         and \suffix{.mlo}).
+%   \item Corrections in the bibliography.
+%   \item Updated the \xfile{INSTALL} file and the ``Installation'' chapter.
+%   \item Changed the names of the scratch directories in some scripts.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Added the file \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (a ZIP archive of a \index{TDS}TDS-compliant hierarchy of all files of
+%         the package) to the distribution.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{51}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/12/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Improving the index: packages and classes, scripts, tools, names, examples, extensions, options,
+%         language options.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/12/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Improving the index: names.
+%   \item Updated some \suffix{.mld} files with names of the authors of titles.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Miscellaneous corrections.
+%   \item The names of some internal macros are shortened to fit into the margin.
+%   \item Added a \com{ProvidesFile} command to the example files.
+%   \item Indexing the environments (not perfect).
+%   \item Indexing the files.
+%   \item Renamed the file ``\texttt{catalog}'' into ``\xfile{CATALOG}''.
+%   \item Indexing the counters and depth counters.
+%   \item The example files are in their own directory in the (proposed) \index{TDS}TDS hierarchy.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{52}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction of index ordering.
+%   \item Default option in boldface in the index.
+%   \item Adding some informations about authors for language specific titles.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added fake sections in the ``Examples of documents'' chapter.
+%   \item Removed the preparation of the documentation in PostScript format.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the \scrp{cmk} script to convert the documentation from PDF format into PostScript format.
+%   \item Removed \xfile{duplex2v.pro}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/17
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Indexing the referenced commands.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrected the name \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han} (first name before last name, the english way).
+%   \item Corrected some other names.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/19
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{mongolb.mld} and \xfile{mongolb.mlo}.
+%   \item Removed \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (new cyrillic encodings T2 and X2 in \xfile{mongolb.mld}).
+%   \item Added the example file \exam{mtc-3co.tex}.
+%   \item Trying to use a recent version of the \pack{cite}~\cite{cite} package (2003/11/04, 4.01) to allow
+%         sorting, but still clashes with \pack{hyperref}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Balancing the columns in the index.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction of the indexing of the environments.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/31
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Improving the index layout.
+%   \item Updated \xfile{galician.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/02/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{mongolian.mld} which loads \xfile{mongolb.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/02/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Indexing the names of authors.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/02/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Updated the acknowledgements.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{53}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/02/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the example file \exam{mtc-fko.tex}.
+%   \item Corrected \com{kernafterminitoc} and siblings.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/02/19
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Bibliographic references for packages and classes in the index.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/03/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a header to the index, to explain notations.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Changed the style of page and line numbers in the index.
+%   \item Updated \xfile{kannada.mld}.
+%   \item Dangerous bend symbols are now in the right margin.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/03/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Improved the presentation of example files.
+%   \item Using the \pack{natbib} package~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} to sort the sequences of citations.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/03/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction in table~\vref{t+TDS}.
+%   \item Renamed \uxfile{minitoc-texmf.zip} into \uxfile{minitoc-tds.zip}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/03/19
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Use the \optp{sort\&compress}{natbib} option of the \pack{natbib} package~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} to compress the
+%         sequences of citations; the \pack{hypernat} package must also be loaded (after \pack{natbib} and
+%         \pack{hyperref}).
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/03/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added changing the title of the parttoc for appendices in \xfile{mtc-apx.tex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{54}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/03/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the ``\feat{open}'' and ``\feat{close}'' features.
+%   \item Indexing the features.
+%   \item Added the \exam{mtc-ocf.tex} example file.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/04/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added the ``\com{mtcfixnomenclature}'' command.
+%   \item Added the \exam{mtc-nom.tex} example file.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Corrected the last argument of \com{mtcsetfeature} and siblings, using \com{mtc@toks}.
+%   \item Some mini-tables are set on two columns in the manual.
+%   \item Indexing the messages. Messages noted in the right margin.
+%   \item Corrected a bug in \pack{mtcoff}.
+%   \item Added \xfile{latinc.mld} and \xfile{latinc2.mld} for classical latin.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/04/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added internal hyperlinks for messages.
+%   \item Load the \pack{hypcap} package for hyperlinks in the documentation.
+% ^^A   \item Modification of \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk}, and \scrp{pmk} to remove \verb*|\ | from the index.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/06/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \com{mtcoffset} and co. for an horizontal offset of a mini-table.
+%   \item Added \com{mtcsetoffset} for an horizontal offset of a mini-table type.
+%   \item Added the \exam{mtc-ofs.tex} example file.
+%   \item Added flagging of macros in example files.
+%   \item The 2007 section in the ``Postface'' chapter was garbled.
+%   \item More internal links in the documentation.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Added a clickable table of all messages.
+%   \item Improved column breaks in the index.
+%   \item Added a local minitoc in the ``Jargon'' chapter.
+%   \item Added \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}.
+%   \item Added \xfile{latvian2.mld} and \xfile{letton2.mld}.
+%   \item Grouped \texttt{.mld}/\texttt{.mlo} pairs in tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{55}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/06/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} about the \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} package (incompatible).
+%   \item Added a \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} about the \pack{float}~\cite{float},
+%         \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat}, and \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat} packages.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/06/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Regrouping some marginal notes about messages; improving their positions.
+%   \item Improve page breaks in the documentation.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Corrected a bug about minitocs in appendices for the \class{memoir} class.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/06/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Changed the color of hyperlinks.
+%   \item Revised the format of the headers.
+%   \item Corrected some \verb|\mtcset...| commands to use \com{edef} to correctly evaluate \com{mtc@toks}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \item \textbf{56}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/07/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Added \xfile{swahili.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/08/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Page headers modified in documentation.
+%   \item Added stuff (files) for figures (maps) for many language areas.
+%   \item Removed the \suffix{.eps} files.
+%   \item Added the \lopt{bengali} language synonym of \lopt{bangla}.
+%   \item Split the list of files into two tables (tables~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/12/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Many minor typo fixes.
+%   \item Darker colors for hyperlinks.
+%   \item Updated and corrected the bibliography.
+%   \item Corrected a typo in the \env{ptc@verse} environment (thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}).
+%   \item Corrections of typos in the \env{mtchideinmainlof} and \env{mtchideinmainlot} environments
+%         (thanks to \name{Andrew}{Bowden}).
+%   \item Replaced the \suffix{.mtc1} extension by \suffix{.mtc0} in the auto-configuration test (to avoid
+%         erasing the (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1} file).
+%   \item Corrected a problem with \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}).
+%   \item The acknowledgements are moved to the ``Complements'' part.
+%   \item Added a hint (warning~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099} about the \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc} package.
+%   \item Complete indexing of the messages.
+%   \item Updated \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}.
+%   \item Using the \pack{chngpage} package~\cite{chngpage} to increase the width of the pages of the bibliography.
+%   \item Renamed \ucom{if@longextensions@} as \com{if@mtc@longext@}.
+%   \item Updated \xfile{czech.mld}.
+%   \item Removed \ucom{l@xsection}.
+%   \item Graphic files are indexed separately.
+%   \item Updated \xfile{galician.mld}.
+%   \item Added a specific directory for image files in the TDS hierarchy.
+%   \item Updated \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld}, and \xfile{usorbian.mld}.
+%   \item Added \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld},\ABK and \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}.
+%   \item Updated \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}.
+%   \item Suppressed parasite entries from the index.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \item \textbf{57}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/12/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/12/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections in examples of documents.
+%   \item Added \xfile{occitan.mld}.
+%   \item Updated \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld},
+%         \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld},
+%         \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld}, and \xfile{turkish.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2008/01/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrected \xfile{polski.mld}.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Added table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}.
+%   \item Added maps of Manchuria.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2008/04/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Better captions for maps.
+%         Added maps for Italy, Karnataka, Germany, Mongols and China.
+%   \item Added \xfile{occitan2.mld} and \xfile{mexican.mld}.
+%   \item Added a map of czech dialects.
+%   \item Added maps of danish dialects.
+%   \item Added a map of the dutch language.
+%   \item Added a map of french dialects.
+%   \item Added a map of galician dialects.
+%   \item Added maps of german dialects.
+%   \item Added maps of hindi dialects.
+%   \item Added maps of portugese dialects.
+%   \item Added a map of the turkish language.
+%   \item Added a map of the vietnamese language.
+%   \item Added a map of the armenian diaspora.
+%   \item Added a map of the sami dialects.
+%   \item Added a map of the nationalities in ex-Yugoslavia.
+%   \item Added a map of countries where spanish is an official language.
+%   \item Added a map of the sorbian area.
+%   \item Added an entry for the Wikipedia in the jargon.
+%   \item Added a map of the minorities in Poland.
+%   \item Added a map of the bengali diaspora.
+%   \item Splitted the TDS hierarchy into three tables~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}.
+%   \item Added maps of the basque dialects.
+%   \item Added maps of the latvian dialects.
+%   \item Added a map for the swahili language.
+%   \item Added the turkish alphabet.
+%   \item The page numbers in the index are now hyperlinks (thanks to~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}).
+%   \item Colors added in figure~\vref{f+barrier}.
+%   \item Added maps of the languages in Europe.
+%   \item Added maps of Kosovo.
+%   \item Added a map of the languages in Africa.
+%   \item Corrected an error of message number.
+%   \item Added maps for Russia.
+%   \item Added a map of the districts of Slovakia.
+%   \item Added maps about Islam.
+%   \item Added a figure about hànzì characters.
+%   \item Added a figure about chinese characters usage in the world.
+%   \item Added a figure about chinese dialects.
+%   \item Added maps about writing systems.
+%   \item Added a map of the regions where Finnish is spoken.
+%   \item Shortened the ``Installation'' chapter.
+%   \item Updated from the \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j of 2008/03/16.
+%   \item Files \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} and \uxfile{lamed.tex} replaced by \xgrf{lamed3.png}.
+%   \item Added maps of the indigenous languages of México.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \item \textbf{58}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2008/06/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Renamed \uxfile{minitoc-tds.zip} into \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}.
+%   \item Added a simplified linguistic map of Europe.
+%   \item Added a map of polish dialects.
+%   \item Added a figure about the russian alphabet.
+%   \item Added a map about the russian alphabet.
+%   \item Added a figure about the serbian alphabets.
+%   \item Added a map of the provinces of Vietnam.
+%   \item Used \ucom{vrefrange} to compress ranges of internal cross-references.
+%   \item Added a map of albanian dialects.
+%   \item Added a map of Norway.
+%   \item Added flags for many countries. Added a light gray frame around the flags.
+%   \item Added a figure about lusophonia.
+%   \item Added a figure about germanophonia.
+%   \item Added a figure about hispanophonia.
+%   \item Added a figure about italophonia.
+%   \item Added a minitoc in the index to make it easier to consult.
+%   \item Added figures about francophones countries.
+%   \item Added a figure about swahili-speaking countries.
+%   \item Added a figure about arabic-speaking countries.
+%   \item Added a figure about russian-speaking countries.
+%   \item Added a figure about english-speaking countries.
+%   \item Added flags \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot}.
+%         \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot},
+%         \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof}, and \com{ifinsectlot}.
+%   \item Added example document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}.
+%   \item Added a figure about dutch-speaking countries.
+%   \item Renamed \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} and consorts as \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} and consorts.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+%
+% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{59}:~corrupted PDF files.
+%
+% \item \textbf{60}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2008/07/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Minor correction in figure.
+%   \item Updated the bibliography.
+%   \item Added missing flag files (thanks to \namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}).
+%   \item Replaced many \suffix{.pdf} image files (most of them are flag files) by the original \suffix{.png} file
+%         because they were corrupted during the conversion by \tool{ImageMagick} (\tool{xpdf} didnt see the problem but
+%         \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuses to show the file); many thanks to \xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}
+%         and \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}.
+%   \item Back to standard colors and default \pack{hyperref} color options.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+%
+% \item \textbf{61}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2015/07/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Jean-Pierre F. Drucbert passed away in 2009.  So this package
+%         is now looking for a maintainer.
+%   \item Reduce size of documentation, by eliminating flags and other
+%         images, from 25+mb to less than 2mb.
+%   \item Remove the \texttt{CATALOG} file, as it was redundant and stale.
+%   \item Use \url{mirror.ctan.org} for CTAN references.
+%   \item Done by Nils Ole Tippenhauer (\verb|nils_tippenhauer| at
+%         \verb|sutd.edu.sg|) and Karl Berry (\verb|karl| at
+%         \verb|freefriends.org|). They are not prospective future maintainers.
+%   \item No functional changes.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+%
+% \item \textbf{62}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2018/07/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item sources moved to githib \url{https://github.com/minitoc/minitoc}
+%   \item Correcttion to \verb|\@ifundefined| usage that generates errors
+%         in current latex (and didn't work previously)
+%   \item Repository set up by David carlisle but permanent maintainers still
+%         required
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+%
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{RaggedRight}
+% \egroup
+% ^^A MAJ-E
+% \or\relax
+% ^^A FRENCH
+% \bgroup
+% \def\labelitemi{\ensuremath{\star}~\textbf{version}}
+% \def\labelitemii{\textbullet}
+% \def\labelitemiii{\textopenbullet}
+% \def\labelitemiv{\textperiodcentered}
+% \begin{RaggedRight}
+% %
+% \lneed{5}
+% \begin{itemize}
+% \item \textbf{00}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%   \item 1990/10/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%    \item Version originale, par \xname{Nigel}{Ward}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1991/11/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Révision pour réutiliser de manière transparente les commandes
+%             \com{chapter}, \com{section}, \com{subsection}, et engendrer automatiquement
+%             le nom du fichier minitoc, avec en plus d'autres nettoyages (par \name{Dan}{Jurafsky}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{01}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/06/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Nouvelle conception, pour éviter d'allouer un newwrite, ou descripteur de fichier, pour chaque chapitre
+%         (un péché mortel!) (\uname{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert}).
+%   \item Ajout de \com{chapterend} pour terminer la portée d'une minitoc. (\emph{Si vous oubliez de
+%         mettre} \com{chapterend} à~la fin de \emph{chaque} chapitre, une entrée pour le chapitre suivant
+%         apparaîtra dans chaque minitoc.) (Merci à~\xname{Yufan}{Hu}).
+%   \item Remplacement de l'environnement \env{minipage} par un environnement \env{verse}, pour qu'une
+%         minitoc puisse se répartir sur plusieurs pages.
+%   \item Toute la mise en page de la minitoc est dans la commande, donc si quelqu'un souhaite redéfinir cette
+%         mise en page, il a juste à~la réécrire (et seulement elle).
+%   \item Vous pouvez inhiber la minitoc pour le chapitre suivant en le faisant précéder par \ucom{minitocno}.
+%         (\ucom{minitocyes} est sans objet pour l'utilisateur: elle est implicite \emph{après}
+%         les pseudo-chapitres \com{chapter*}).
+%   \item Problèmes: vous \emph{devez} avoir mis \com{chapterend} pour terminer chaque chapitre ayant une
+%         minitoc. Comment éviter cette contrainte?
+%   \item La profondeur de la minitoc est ajustable par l'utilisateur avec le compteur \dcnt{minitocdepth} (similaire
+%         à~\dcnt{tocdepth} pour la table des matières.).
+%   \item Au moins trois passes~(3) de \LaTeX{} sont nécessaires pour obtenir des minitocs correctes (la première
+%         passe crée les fichiers \suffix{.mtc}\meta{X}, la deuxième les utilise (mais ils peuvent contenir des
+%         numéros de pages faux) et les recrée, la troisième devrait être bonne).
+%   \item Fonctionne avec \com{chapter}\texttt{[xxx]\{yyy\}} et les éléments flottants. Fonctionne en mode deux
+%         colonnes (mais la minitoc est composée sur une colonne; comment faire pour qu'elle s'étende sur les deux
+%         colonnes?).
+%   \item Ajout de quelques modifications pour fonctionner avec \pack{xr} (références externes).
+%         \upack{xr} version~5 est bien plus tolérant.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{02}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%   \item 1993/07/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%    \item Ajout de la compatibilité avec \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} (le paquetage \pack{hangcaption} (s'il est présent)
+%          doit être chargé \emph{avant} le paquetage \upack{minitoc}). \emph{Attention} aux options modifiant
+%          \com{@caption}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{03}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/07/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Version~3 non distribuée (erronée).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{04}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/07/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \ucom{if@realch} pour éviter que des lignes de contenu provenant de pseudo-chapitres
+%         aillent dans la table des matières.
+%   \item Le fichier paquetage \pack{mtcoff} vous permet d'utiliser un document \LaTeX\ contenant des
+%         commandes minitoc et de les rendre transparentes: il suffit de remplacer le paquetage \upack{minitoc}
+%         par \upack{mtcoff}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{05}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/07/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'un mécanisme de sélection pour ne pas écrire des choses superflues dans les minitocs.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{06}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/07/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de problèmes sur les chapitres dans la table des matières, retrait de code obsolète pour
+%         \com{caption} (les filtres sont bien meilleurs), ajout de la compatibilité
+%         avec \pack{toch}
+%         (\pack{toch} crée une table des chapitres; si utilisé, doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc};
+%         en fait, c'est l'ancêtre du paquetage \pack{shorttoc}~\cite{shorttoc}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{07}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/07/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item (\emph{différences majeures}) Réécriture complète, en utilisant des astuces de \pack{xr}
+%         (la version~5, de \xname{David~P.}{Carlisle}). Les informations pour les minitocs sont directement prélevées dans
+%         le fichier \suffix{.toc}. Suppression de \com{chapterend} et \ucom{minitocno}, ajout de
+%         \com{minitoc}, \com{dominitoc} et \com{faketableofcontents}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{08}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/07/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajustements d'espacement.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{09}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/08/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de modifications pour MS-DOS (rechercher MS-DOS, et décommenter; rechercher UNIX, mettre en commentaire).
+%         MS-DOS permet seulement 3~caractères pour les suffixes dans les noms de fichiers (pitoyable\ldots).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{10}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/08/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Fonctionne avec les appendices. Détecte maintenant les versions obsolètes de \xfile{latex.tex}:
+%         (\com{@inputcheck} ou \com{reset@font} non définies).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{11}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/08/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \com{mtcSfont}, fonte pour les entrées de section, \com{mtcSSfont} pour les entrées
+%         de sous-section, \com{mtcSSSfont} pour les entrées de sous-sous-section, \com{mtcPfont} pour
+%         les entrées de paragraphe, \com{mtcSPfont} pour les entrées de sous-paragraphe.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{12}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1993/12/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Utilisation de \com{kern} au lieu de \com{vspace*} et ajout de pénalités
+%         (\com{nopagebreak}) pour éviter une coupure de page juste avant la dernière \com{mtc@rule}.
+%   \item Ajout aussi d'un environnement \env{samepage}.
+%   \item Retrait de vieilles lignes mises en commentaire dans des versions précédentes.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{13}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%   \item 1993/12/17
+%    \begin{itemize}
+%    \item Ajout de code pour \com{minilof} et \com{minilot}. Pour MS-DOS, décommenter la définition
+%          de \com{SHORTEXT}.
+%    \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{14}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/01/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de l'espacement en dessous d'une \texttt{minitoc/lof/lot} et ajout de \com{raggedright}
+%         pour éviter des avertissements \og{} underfull \fg.
+%   \item Correction de quelques problèmes d'espacement (en évitant des~\texttt{\textasciitilde}'s).
+%         \com{mtifont} est changée de \texttt{\bs normalsize\bs bf} en \texttt{\bs large\bs bf}.
+%   \item Quelques modifications suggérées par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau} (merci): \ucom{@newread} devient
+%         \com{newread}, une version \emph{not outer} de \com{newread}; \com{empty} remplacée
+%         par \com{relax} dans la définition par défaut de \com{reset@font}.
+%   \item Retrait du forçage de \com{clubpenalty} et \com{widowpenalty} à~\texttt{10\,000} (fait
+%         par \com{samepage}) et \com{noindent}.
+%   \item Traitement simplifié de l'argument optionnel dans les commandes \com{minitoc}, \com{minilof}
+%         et \com{minilot}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{15}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/01/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \com{parttoc}, \com{partlof} et \com{partlot} pour la classe \class{book},
+%         de \com{secttoc}, \com{sectlof} et \com{sectlot} pour les articles, avec des commandes
+%         et paramètres en parallèle avec ceux pour les mini-tables.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{16}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/02/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections d'erreurs (typos).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{17}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/06/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item \og{} \texttt{n} \fg{} (nul) synonyme de \og{} \texttt{e} \fg{} (\emph{empty}, vide) dans l'argument optionnel
+%         \com{minitoc}, \com{dominitoc}, et analogues.
+%   \item Compatibilité avec \og{} \LaTeXe \fg. Merci à~\xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} (qui a trouvé le problème)
+%         et \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach} (qui a donné les indications pour le résoudre).
+%   \item Ajout de la notion de \og{} numérotation absolue\fg{} pour les the mini-tables.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{18}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/06/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Rendu \upack{minitoc} vraiment compatible avec \LaTeXe.
+%   \item Introduction des fichiers de langue comme options. Grand merci à~\xname{Michel}{Goossens}
+%         (via \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}) qui a été inspiré par le code du paquetage \pack{babel}
+%         (de \xname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{19}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/08/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de code pour numéroter les chapitres (parties, sections) sans commencer à~1.
+%         Ajout des commandes \com{firstchapteris}, etc.
+%   \item Ajout des commandes \com{mtcrule}, \com{nomtcrule}, etc.
+%   \item Correction d'une erreur dans \com{c@mti}.
+%   \item Correction dans \xfile{mtcswedish.sty} (\xname{Jan~Michael}{Rynning}).
+%   \item Correction de l'appendice dans les articles.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{20}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/08/25
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de l'espacement avant et après les minitocs et analogues.
+%   \item Ajout des commandes \com{mtcpagenumbers} et \com{nomtcpagenumbers} (et analogues) pour faire
+%         des minitocs avec ou sans numéros de pages. Défaut: avec numéros de pages.
+%   \item Correction du problème (difficile) de l'appendice dans les articles.
+%   \item Correction de l'espacement vertical.
+%   \item Correction d'un problème avec des chapitres numérotés avec des chiffres romains majuscules.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{21}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/09/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de typos dans \upack{minitoc} et \xfile{minitoc.tex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{22}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/10/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de typos dans \upack{minitoc}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{23}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/11/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'une ligne manquante dans \com{sectlof}.
+%   \item Fonctionne avec les classes de document réinitialisant le numéro de chapitre (ou de section)
+%         à~chaque partie (merci à~\xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel}).
+%   \item Retrait du code pour \com{firstchapteris} et compagnie. Ces commandes sont obsolètes.
+%   \item Retrait du code pour l'appendice.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{24}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1994/12/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Les commandes \com{protect} ont été retirées des fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lot} et
+%         \suffix{.lot}, donc certaines commandes internes on t été corrigées pour être compatibles avec la version
+%         de \LaTeXe\ de décembre 1994. Merci à~\xname{Denis~B.}{Roegel} qui a fait le travail.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{25}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1996/09/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{mtcnorsk.sty} et ajout de \xfile{mtcnynorsk.sty} sur une suggestion
+%         de \xname{Dag}{Langmyhr}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{26}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1996/11/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Les fichiers spécifiques des langues sont maintenant nommés \emph{langue}\suffix{.mld} (remplaçant les
+%         noms de la forme \texttt{mtc}\emph{langue}\suffix{.sty}) parce que ne sont pas des paquetages
+%         et que cela fait des noms plus courts.
+%   \item Ajout des langues breton, estonian, germanb, greek, irish, russianb, scottish, lower- et upper-sorbian;
+%         renommage de \og{} esperanto \fg{} en \og{} esperant \fg{} comme dans le paquetage \pack{babel}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{27}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1996/12/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections pour les commandes de sectionnement étoilées.
+%   \item \xfile{english.mld} chargé comme langue par défaut.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{vietnam.mld} et \xfile{arab.mld}.
+%   \item Renommage de \pack{minitocoff} en \pack{mtcoff} pour que le nom reste court.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{28}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1997/10/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout des langues afrikaan(s), brazil et ethiopia(n).
+%   \item Ajout de l'autoconfiguration des suffixes.
+%   \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \opt{shortext}.
+%   \item Ajout du code \emph{coffee} (pauses café).
+%   \item Ajout du code de \com{addstarred} (pour ce qui concerne un chapitre étoilé).
+%   \item Correction d'une erreur dans les parttocs.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Un typo corrigé par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}:
+%         \begin{quote}
+%         \texttt{\{\bs let@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}}
+%         \end{quote}
+%         devrait probablement être
+%         \begin{quote}
+%         \texttt{\{\bs let\bs@dottedtocline\bs @undottedtocline\}\{\}}
+%         \end{quote}
+%         (une contre-oblique manquait après \com{let}). Merci à~lui.
+%   \item Ajout de la langue bahasa.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 1998/12/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{tight} et \optd{loose}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{29}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1999/03/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout des langues bicig, buryat, mongol et russianc.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 1999/06/28
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de la langue armenian (d'après \packa{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}~\cite{armtex}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 1999/07/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout des options de paquetage \optd{dotted}/\opt{undotted} (défaut: \optd{dotted}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 1999/07/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{lithuanian.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{30}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 1999/12/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout des langues basque, ngermanb, serbian, ukraineb et welsh.
+%   \item Correction d'une erreur dans la définition de \com{sltname} (\texttt{mlt} devrait être \texttt{slt}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{31}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2000/04/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de la compatibilité avec le paquetage \pack{hyperref}, merci à~\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek},
+%         qui a aussi simplifié certains morceaux de code et corrigé l'infâme erreur sur \com{chapter*}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{32}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2000/08/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de très (trop) nombreuses nouvelles commandes pour les dispositifs associés aux mini-tables:
+%         \com{beforeparttoc},\ABK \com{beforepartlof},\ABK \com{beforepartlot},\ABK \com{afterparttoc},\ABK
+%         \com{afterpartlof},\goodbreak \com{afterpartlot},\ABK \com{thispageparttocstyle},\ABK
+%         \com{thispagepartlofstyle}\ABK et \com{thispagepartlotstyle}.
+%   \item Documentation améliorée par \xname{Stefan}{Ulrich}.
+%   \item Correction de \com{nomtcrule}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{33}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2000/12/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de nouvelles commandes d'ajustement: \com{mtcaddchapter}, \com{mtcaddsection} et
+%         \com{mtcaddpart}. Ces commandes ajoutent des choses dans les fichiers \suffix{.toc}, \suffix{.lof}
+%         et \suffix{.lot} pour le problème de \com{chapter*} (\com{section*} et \com{part*}).
+%         D'après une suggestion de \xname{Karl~F.}{Everitt}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2000/12/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction d'un problème dans \com{mtcaddchapter} et~co. avec un argument optionnel blanc.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{34}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2000/12/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout\imess{I0046} dans la documentation d'une section sur l'utilisation avec le paquetage \pack{tocbibind}.
+%   \item Ajout de fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour les noms alternatifs de langues: ainsi, \xfile{american.mld} ne fait
+%         que charger \xfile{english.mld}, qui contient les vraies définitions.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{35}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2001/01/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de macros pour tester si un fichier est \og{} vide\fg{} (c'est-à-dire vide, blanc ou inexistant)
+%         ou \og{} non vide \fg{} (c'est-à-dire utile). J'ai utilisé du code de \xname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}.
+%   \item Ajout des options de paquetage \optd{checkfiles}\\opt{nocheckfiles}.
+%   \item Remplacement de \ucom{The@chapter} par \com{The@mtc}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2001/02/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{bulgarian.mld}, \xfile{hebrew.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{latin.mld} et
+%         \xfile{samin.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2001/03/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item  Ajout de \com{mtcselectlanguage}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2001/06/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de l'option de paquetage \lopt{estonian} (manquante).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2001/07/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de la langue interlingua.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{36}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2002/02/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction d'une interaction avec \com{tableofcontents} qui crée un \com{chapter*} ou
+%         une \com{section*}, en perturbant les compteurs \cnt{mtc}/\cnt{stc} (problème signalé par
+%         \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2002/02/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction d'un problème d'espacement avec des titres vides (problème signalé par \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}).
+%   \item Contournement du problème \com{parttoc}-\com{chapter*}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2002/02/19
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \com{mtcskip} et \com{mtcskipamount}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2002/02/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction du test sur les fichiers vides.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2002/03/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de la langue \lopt{bangla}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2002/03/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Réduction de la profondeur de \com{mtc@strutbox}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{37}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/01/24
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Version~\#37 sautée.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{38}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/01/24
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item \texttt{pt} devient \ucom{@pt} et \texttt{0pt} devient \ucom{z@}.
+%   \item \ucom{hrule} et \ucom{vrule} remplacées par \ucom{rule} (\LaTeX).
+%   \item Ajout de \com{mtc@zrule} pour les filets de dimensions nulles.
+%   \item Ajout de la langue frenchb  (synonyme de french).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/01/30
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Changement du test pour les titres vides.
+%   \item Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{flsection} et \opt{flsectionb}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/01/31
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Les options de paquetage \opt{tight} et \optd{loose} sont appliquées à~\com{parttoc}
+%         (\xname{Thomas}{Leonhardt}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/02/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Options de paquetage \opt{flsection} et \opt{flsectionb} retirées et remplacées par l'option
+%         de paquetage \opt{insection} (comme \opt{flsectionb}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/02/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de la numérotation des SLF, SLT.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/02/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout des langues frenchle et frenchpro (synonymes de french).
+%   \item Correction des secttocs, enfin.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/03/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de certains espacements verticaux et d'étais (j'ai ajouté quelques modifications
+%         de \xname{Frank}{Mittelbach}, grand merci à~lui.). Il reste pas mal de nettoyage à~faire, mais il semble
+%         nécessaire de publier la distribution maintenant.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{39}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/04/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Commandes de fontes modernes pour compatibilité avec la classe \class{memoir}.
+%   \item \com{nomtcpagenumbers} et la classe \class{memoir}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2003/06/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \com{@fileswfalse} et \com{mtc@hook@beforeinputfile} pour le paquetage
+%         \pack{notoccite} (demandé par \xname{Donald}{Arseneau}); ajout de l'option de paquetage
+%         \opt{notoccite} (charge le paquetage \pack{notoccite}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2004/09/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout des options de langue et des fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour les dialectes: \lopt{canadian} (\loptd{english}),
+%         \lopt{acadian}, \lopt{acadien}, \lopt{canadien} (\lopt{french}), \lopt{naustrian}, \lopt{ngerman} (\lopt{ngermanb}).
+%   \item Ajout de commentaires dans les fichiers \suffix{.mld} utilisant des fontes spéciales.
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation: ajout d'un paragraphe sur comment faire une table des matières pour
+%         les appendices, éventuellement non listés dans la table des matières principale.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2004/09/17
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation; corrections sur les filets.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{40}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2004/12/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout des langues japanese et castillan.
+%   \item Retrait du test sur la présence du paquetage \pack{multicol} dans \xfile{minitoc.tex},
+%         puisque \pack{multicol} est un paquetage obligatoire (\emph{required}).
+%   \item Ajout d'une figure dans \xfile{minitoc.tex} sur la nécessité de trois compilations.
+%   \item Ajout de quelques informations dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}.
+%   \item Ajout\imess{I0042} d'un paragraphe sur un problème avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2004/12/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{minitoc-fr.bib} et \xfile{minitoc.bib}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2004/12/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \optd{hints}. Cette option est encore expérimentale; votre avis est le bienvenu.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2004/12/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{minitoc-fr.pdf} (documentation en français en format PDF).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{41}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Message ajouté si certaines commandes de sectionnement ne sont pas disponibles.
+%   \item Remplacement des commandes \ucom{typeout} dans \upack{minitoc} par les commandes
+%         \com{PackageInfo} ou \com{PackageWarning}; avec le numéro de ligne lorsqu'il est utile
+%         (\com{@gobble} si pas de numéro de ligne). En conséquence, le paquetage est moins bavard
+%         (\com{PackageInfo} écrit seulement dans le fichier \emph{document}\suffix{.log}, pas sur le terminal).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout des commandes \com{mtcsetfont} (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}) et \com{mtcsettitlefont},
+%         avec une syntaxe beaucoup plus simple.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Classes \AmS: \class{amsart} et \class{amsproc} sont incompatibles avec \upack{minitoc},
+%        \class{amsbook} demande des précautions.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetformat}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \com{mtcsettitle}.
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} pour recommander l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/19
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur la présence de \com{dominitoc} et co.
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur la cohérence de \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} et co.
+%   \item Amélioration de la documentation sur les \emph{hints}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur l'utilisation des suffixes courts avec plus de 99~parties ou 99~chapitres
+%         ou 99~sections.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/25
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item \com{ptifont}: \texttt{\bs Huge\bs bfseries} devient \texttt{\bs LARGE\bs bfseries}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetpagenumbers}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/01/28
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de nombreux fichiers de langues: \xfile{serbianc.mld}, \xfile{chinese1.mld}, \xfile{chinese2.mld},
+%         \xfile{hangul1.mld}, \xfile{hangul2.mld}, \xfile{hangul3.mld}, \xfile{hangul4.mld}, \xfile{hanja1.mld},
+%         \xfile{hanja2.mld}, \xfile{japanese2.mld}, \xfile{japanese3.mld}, \xfile{japanese4.mld},
+%         \xfile{japanese5.mld}, \xfile{thai.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetrules}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \com{plfrule}, \com{noplfrule}, \com{mlfrule}, \com{nomlfrule},
+%         \com{slfrule}, \com{noslfrule}, \com{pltrule}, \com{nopltrule},
+%         \com{mltrule}, \com{nomltrule}, \com{sltrule}, \com{nosltrule}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de nouvelles langues: \xfile{latvian.mld}, \xfile{letton.mld}, \xfile{greek-mono.mld},
+%         \xfile{greek-polydemo.mld}, \xfile{greek-polykatha.mld}, \xfile{polish2.mld}, \xfile{russian2m.mld},
+%         \xfile{russian2o.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de tests sur les environnements \ienv{mtchideinmaintoc}\ienv{mtchideinmainlof}\ienv{mtchideinmainlot}\env{mtchideinmain*}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \com{mtcfixindex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{42}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Version~42 non distribuée.
+%   \item Remplacement de \og{} language \fg{} par \og{} langue \fg{} dans la documentation française.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction d'un typo mineur.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Amélioration de \com{mtcfixindex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \com{mtcsettitle}, oubliée dans v41.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{43}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Version~43: consolidation de v40, v41 et v42.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/02/24
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction d'une grosse erreur dans \com{mtcsetformat}.
+%   \item Correction d'une erreur dans le paquetage \pack{mtcoff} à~propos de \com{mtcfixindex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction des macros \ucom{mtcset.{}.{}.}
+%   \item Déplacement de l'historique vers la fin du code du paquetage.
+%   \item Ajout du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et d'un chapitre sur l'installation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction d'un typo (\xname{Benjamin}{Bayart}).
+%   \item Compléter le \emph{hint} sur la cohérence de \com{dominitoc}/\com{minitoc} et co.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur la cohérence entre \com{minitoc} et \com{tableofcontents}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de commentaires sur les fontes.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetfeature}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{bulgarianb.mld} (haut bulgare).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%  \item Ajout de \texttt{*[-\bs baselineskip]} après le \texttt{\bs\bs} après le filet supérieur de chaque
+%    mini-table au niveau partie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans les arguments de \com{mtcsetfeature}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Retrait de \com{markboth} pour les minitocs (\ldots) et secttocs (\ldots).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{spanish2.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/03/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} pour le paquetage \imess{I0040}\pack{abstract}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/04/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de l'environnement \env{stc@verse}.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{finnish2.mld}, \xfile{latin2.mld} et \xfile{magyar2.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/04/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Renommage de \xfile{portuges.mld} en \xfile{portugues.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/04/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction dans \com{mtcskip}.
+%   \item Première version en format \suffix{.dtx}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/04/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Retrait de \ucom{ypart}, \ucom{ychapter}, \ucom{ysection}, etc., inutilisées.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/05/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction d'un typo dans \com{@dosectlot}.
+%   \item Ajout de \com{mtcfixglossary}.
+%   \item Impression de la documentation avec \og{} \optp{oneside}{\protect\textsl{nombreuses classes}} \fg{} pour
+%         avoir toutes les notes marginales
+%         sur la gauche. Ajout du code (étendu à~54 éléments flottants) de \pack{morefloats}
+%         (\xname{Don}{Hosek}) pour permettre
+%         davantage de notes marginales et d'éléments flottants.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{minitoc.ist}\isuffix{.ist} pour mettre en page l'index correctement.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/05/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction des filets dans les parttocs, partlofs et partlots.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/05/30
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction des entrées de niveau chapitre dans les parttocs, lorsque les numéros de pages doivent être omis.
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \pack{sectsty}\imess{I0043} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les tentatives d'insertion de mini-tables vides.
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur l'utilisation de commandes obsolètes.
+%   \item Les mini-listes de figures ou de tableaux ne doivent pas être imprimées vides même si \dcnt{tocdepth}${}<1$.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de la notion de profondeur pour les mini-listes de figures/tableaux.
+%   \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetdepth}.
+%   \item L'option \optd{hints} est le choix par défaut et elle n'est plus considérée comme expérimentale.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'un message d'erreur dans \com{mtcsetdepth} si le compteur n'est pas disponible.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{portuges.mld}, qui charge \xfile{portugues.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de trois variantes pour la langue malayalam: \xfile{malayalam-keli.mld},
+%         \xfile{malayalam-rachana.mld} et \xfile{malayalam-rachana2.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'une méthode pour documentation bilingue.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{minitoc-fr.ist}\isuffix{.ist} pour mettre en forme correctement l'index en français.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Changement de \og{} Liste des Tables \fg{} en \og{} Liste des Tableaux \fg{} dans \xfile{french.mld} et
+%    dans la documentation française, pour suivre les choix du paquetage \pack{babel}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/17
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Le fichier \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} est maintenant engendré par \xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout des mots-clés \texttt{OUI}, \texttt{NON}, \texttt{oui}, \texttt{non}, \texttt{O} et~\texttt{o}
+%         pour vrai/faux.
+%   \item Condensation du code de détection des suffixes courts ou longs.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout des mots-clés \texttt{VRAI}, \texttt{FAUX}, \texttt{vrai}, \texttt{faux}, \texttt{V} et~\texttt{v}
+%         pour vrai/faux.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Établir correctement l'indicateur \com{ifFTR} pour avoir les noms des mois dans la langue correcte dans
+%         la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/06/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Établir l'indicateur \com{mtcoffwarn@true} par \pack{mtcoff} si une commande
+%         \texttt{\bs mtcadd...} est trouvée.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/07/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{castillian.mld}.
+%   \item Renommage de \xfile{portugues.mld} en \xfile{portuguese.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/07/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{brazilian.mld}, \xfile{british.mld}, \xfile{UKenglish.mld} et \xfile{USenglish.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/07/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Suppression de \og{} Général: \fg{} dans l'historique des modifications.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/07/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Remplacement de quelques commandes \com{PackageWarning} par \com{PackageInfo}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/07/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Restauration de la correspondance de chaque option de langue avec un fichier \suffix{.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/07/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Amélioration des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/07/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Retrait de deux indicateurs inutiles: \ucom{if@mtc@setpagenumbers@act@} et
+%         \ucom{if@mtc@setrules@act@}.
+%   \item Ajout des commandes \com{decrementptc}, \com{decrementmtc} et \com{decrementstc}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/07/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction d'une bourde dans \pack{mtcoff}.
+%   \item Amélioration de quelques messages dans \pack{mtcoff}.
+%   \item Ajout d'un test sur la version du paquetage \pack{placeins}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/08/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'une note sur \com{FloatBarrier}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/08/24
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'une note sur un problème d'alignement dans les minitocs. Mise à~jour de \xfile{minitoc.bug}.
+%   \item Fait deux versions des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot},
+%         selon la présence du compteur de profondeur correspondant.
+%   \item La classe \class{memoir} est incompatible si elle est trop récente.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/08/25
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'un commentaire sur la position des commandes \texttt{\bs do.{}.{}.} de préparation.
+%   \item Corrections dans les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/08/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{guarani.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/08/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \com{incrementptc}, \com{incrementmtc} et \com{incrementstc}.
+%   \item Ajout d'un argument optionnel à~\com{adjustptc}, \com{adjustmtc} et \com{adjuststc}.
+%   \item Ajout des options de paquetage \opt{k-tight} et \optd{k-loose}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'un patch pour la version récente de la classe \class{memoir}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{spanish3.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Utiliser \com{mtcselectlanguage} dans les options de langue et dans les fichiers
+%        \suffix{.mld} \og{} secondaires\fg.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \com{mtcloadmlo} à~utiliser dans certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} pour charger
+%         un fichier \suffix{.mlo}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'un test pour interdire les appels directs de \com{mtcloadmlo} par l'utilisateur.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{farsi1.mld}, \xfile{farsi1.mlo}, \xfile{farsi2.mld} et \xfile{farsi2.mlo}.
+%   \item Ajout d'une note sur l'outil \tool{rubber}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{mtcglo.ist}\isuffix{.ist} pour formater le glossaire.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Retrait des numéros de pages dans le glossaire. Fait par les scripts \texttt{*mk}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{44}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Historique (glossaire) composé en \texttt{RaggedRight}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{ngermanb2.mld}, \xfile{norsk2.mld} et \xfile{nynorsk2.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/28
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Nouvelle méthode pour l'historique: listes imbriquées sur 3~niveaux.
+%   \item Retrait de \isuffix{.ist}\xfile{mtcglo.ist}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Nettoyage des scripts \texttt{*mk}.
+%   \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/09/30
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de typos.
+%   \item Ajout du nom du fichier \suffix{.maf} dans le message de l'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles}.
+%   \item Amélioration du nettoyage dans les scripts \texttt{*mk}, en utilisant un fichier \suffix{.maf}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/10/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Charger la correction pour la classe \class{memoir} seulement si nécessaire; ne pas la charger si
+%         \class{memoir} est datée après 2005/09/25.
+%   \item Ajout d'une remarque dans le chapitre \og{} Questions Fréquemment Posées\fg{} (et dans \xfile{minitoc.bug})
+%         sur les précautions à~prendre avec les commandes de sectionnement étoilées.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/10/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de l'option de paquetage \opt{nolistfiles}.
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les paquetages \pack{caption}, \pack{caption2}, \pack{ccaption} et
+%         \pack{mcaption} (ils doivent être chargés \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/10/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de typos dans la documentation.
+%   \item Correction de quelques notes marginales dans le code commenté.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/10/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation.
+%   \item Utiliser la commande Unix \tool{xargs} dans les scripts \texttt{*mk} pour détruire les fichiers
+%         auxiliaires.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/10/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation.
+%   \item Ajout d'une courte introduction dans le chapitre \og{} Questions fréquemment posées\fg{} et
+%         dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections mineures dans la documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Début de l'ajout du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de la version française du \LaTeX{} Companion~\cite{TLC2F}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \item Ajout de \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} dans \xfile{minitoc.l}.
+%   \item Ajout d'une note sur la nécessité d'exécuter \scrp{imk} avant \scrp{emk} ou \scrp{fmk}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de typos dans la documentation.
+%   \item Ajout d'une note sur un problème avec \upack{minitoc}, \pack{hyperref} et \class{memoir}.
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de typos dans la documentation.
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \item Amélioration des notes sur la classe \class{memoir}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \item Amélioration des notes sur la classe \class{memoir}.
+%   \item Ajout de \com{plfSfont}, \com{pltSfont}, \com{mlfSfont}, \com{mltSfont},
+%         \com{slfSfont} et \com{sltSfont} pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tables dans
+%         les mini-tables.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \item Correction d'une erreur sur les fontes pour les entrées de sous-figures et de sous-tables dans les
+%         mini-tables.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{bicig2.mld}, \xfile{bithe.mld}, \xfile{manju.mld}, \xfile{xalx.mld} et
+%         \xfile{khalkha.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/17
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \item Ajout de vérifications par des commandes \emph{quarks} internes dans \com{mtcsetfont}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \item Correction de typos dans la documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/24
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/25
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \item Changement de \og{} table\fg{} en \og{} tableau\fg{} dans la documentation en français, là où c'est nécessaire.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/28
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \item Correction de typos dans la documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \item Correction de typos dans la documentation.
+%   \item Correction de typos dans la bibliographie.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/11/30
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \item Éviter quelques avertissements \og{} Token not allowed\fg{} émis par \texttt{pdftex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \item Réordonné une longue séquence de citations.
+%   \item Ajout de \og{} {\froff\texttt{mailto:}}\fg{} pour les URLs de courrier.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de typos dans la documentation.
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0038}\pack{varsects} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \item Correction d'un hyperlien dans la bibliographie (pour le paquetage \pack{xr}).
+%   \item Tentative pour éviter des URLs cassés, en utilisant \env{quote}, des notes infrapaginales et \com{par}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Corrections de mise en page (quelques en-têtes, un tableau).
+%   \item Dans le message d'avertissement du \emph{hint} concernant un nombre de mini-tables dépassant~99 (idans
+%         le cas de suffixes courts), imprimer le nombre effectif.
+%   \item Réduction de la largeur de certains messages d'information, d'avertissement ou d'erreur.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections de mise en page (quelques en-têtes).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections sur les guillemets français.
+%   \item Ajout de quelques options pour PDF.
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \item Correction d'un URL vers l'\AmS\ dans la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/19
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Raccourcissement de quelques messages (essentiellement en enlevant des étoiles).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de typos.
+%   \item Ajout de quelques labels.
+%   \item Ajout d'un chapitre avec les messages (expliqués). Pas encore triés.
+%   \item La documentation a besoin de 4~compilations par \LaTeX.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Raccourcissement de quelques messages.
+%   \item Corrections dans la liste des messages.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2005/12/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Amélioration de la position des flottants dans les pages de flottants: en haut.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation (merci à~\name{Markus}{Gleiszner}).
+%   \item Ajout de \oexam{addsec.tex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de l'indicateur \com{ifundottedmtc}.
+%   \item Correction pour faire marcher \oexam{addsec.tex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \og \texttt{*}\fg comme mot-clé pour le premier argument de \com{mtcsetpagenumbers} et
+%         \com{mtcsetrules} (demandé par \name{Markus}{Gleiszner}).
+%   \item Retrait de \og \com{MessageBreak}\fg de l'index.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \item Correction de l'entrée bibliographique sur \packa{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Utilisation du paquetage \pack{afterpage}~\cite{afterpage} dans la documentation pour résoudre
+%         un problème de placement de flottants.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Résoudre un problème de placement de flottants.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Continuation du chapitre \og{} Jargon\fg.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Ajout de la langue bahasam.
+%   \item Ajout de la langue albanian.
+%   \item Ajout de la langue hebrew2.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la documentation pour les langues albanian, bahasa, bahasam et hebrew2.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{french.mld} (retrait de majuscules abusives).
+%   \item Correction du fichier \xfile{italian.mld} language. Ajout de la langue italian2.
+%   \item Ajout des langues australian et newzealand (english).
+%   \item La langue bahasa est renommée en bahasai; bahasa est synonyme de bahasai.
+%   \item Ajout des langues malay et meyalu, synonymes de bahasam.
+%   \item Ajout des langues indon et indonesian, synonymes de bahasai.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Mise à~jour des remerciements.
+%   \item Ajout de références aux nouvelles entrées bibliographiques.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction d'une instabilité dans les coupures de page dans la documentation de \xfile{japanese3.mld}.
+%   \item Ajout de commentaires dans quelques fichiers \suffix{.mld}.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{magyar3.mld}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{lithuanian.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction dans \com{mtcaddsection}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/17
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction dans \com{mtcfixindex} et \com{mtcfixglossary}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Limitation de la profondeur initiale d'affichage des signets.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de quelques commentaires dans le point~34 des questions fréquemment posées (et dans \xfile{minitoc.bug})
+%         à~propos de l'initialisation des fontes.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{romanian2.mld} et \xfile{romanian3.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/19
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Chargement de certains paquetages avant \pack{hyperref}.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{spanish4.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction du tableau sur les titres par défaut.
+%   \item Correction dans les mots-clés de \com{mtcsetfont}.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld} et \xfile{ukrainian.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/24
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la documentation pour \xfile{lowersorbian.mld}, \xfile{uppersorbian.mld}
+%         et \xfile{ukrainian.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/25
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur les classes \imess{I0043}\KOMAScript{}~\cite{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3} et
+%         d'un point dans les questions fréquemment posées (et dans in \xfile{minitoc.bug}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Ajout d'une note dans la documentation de \xfile{serbian.mld} et \xfile{serbianc.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/30
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{ethiopian2.mld} (pour Omega).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/01/31
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Simplifications dans le chapitre «~Messages~».
+%   \item Corrections dans le chapitre «~Jargon~».
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Ajout du chapitre «~Postface~».
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans le chapitre «~Postface~».
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Ajout du pacquetage \pack{dblaccnt}~\cite{dblaccnt} pour l'entrée «~The pdf\TeX\ Program~» dans la bibliographie.
+%         Le prénom de son auteur a besoin d'un double accent \mbox{(\namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han})}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{malayalam-omega.mld} et \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{kannada.mld}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans \xfile{russianb.mld} et \xfile{spanish.mld}.
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation et la bibliographie.
+%   \item Mettre \com{mtcfixglossary} avant \com{mtcfixindex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'une citation de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Mise à~jour des remerciements.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/17
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Mise à~jour du jargon.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \uxfile{u8hangul.mld}, \uxfile{u8hangul.mlo}, \uxfile{u8hanja.mld} et \uxfile{u8hanja.mlo}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Les langues \texttt{u8hangul} et \texttt{u8hanja} sont renommées \xmldo{hangul-u8} et \xmldo{hanja-u8}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} pour des commandes de préparation répétées.
+%   \item Déplacement vers le haut de la déclaration de certains indicateurs concernant l'option \optd{hints}.
+%   \item Ajout de \com{mtcprepare}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/24
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Ajout de \isuffix{.pre}\xfile{minitoc.pre} à~la classe~6.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/02/28
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Correction de la position des tableaux dans le chapitre «~Jargon~».
+%   \item Correction de \xfile{irish.mld}, \xfile{lsorbian.mld} et \xfile{usorbian.mld}.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{polski.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item \emph{Hints} sur la classe \class{jura}\imess{W0029}\imess{W0025} et le paquetage \pack{alphanum},
+%         incompatibles avec \upack{minitoc}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Utilisation de styles bibliographiques avec un champ \texttt{URL}, construits à~l'aide de
+%         \tool{urlbst}~\cite{urlbst}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans \xfile{magyar.mld}, \xfile{magyar2.mld} et \xfile{magyar3.mld}.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{russian-cca.mld}, \xfile{russian-cca1.mld} et \xfile{russian-lh.mld}, avec leurs
+%         fichiers \suffix{.mlo}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{russian-lhcyralt.mld}, \xfile{russian-lhcyrkoi.mld} et \xfile{russian-lhcyrwin.mld}, avec
+%         leurs fichiers \suffix{.mlo}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout du paquetage \pack{mtcmess}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Désormais, les messages sont numérotés.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour du jargon.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/28
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Mise à~jour du jargon.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de la question~37 sur les fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \pack{babel}.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{french1.mld} et \xfile{french2.mld}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour du jargon.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/30
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{english1.mld} et \xfile{english2.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{45}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/03/31
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Suppression des versions PostScript de la documentation.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{arab2.mld}, \xfile{bicig3.mld}, \xfile{buryat2.mld}, \xfile{xalx2.mld} et \xfile{xalx3.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{swedish2.mld}.
+%   \item L'option de paquetage \opt{insection} charge aussi le paquetage \pack{flafter}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Ajout de \uxgrf{lamed.eps} et \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} comme images pour le logo de \emph{Lamed} (construit depuis
+%         \uxfile{lamed.tex}).
+%   \item Ré-ordonnancement des chapitres du manuel de l'utilisateur (partie~I).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Utilisation de \pack{sectsty} pour mieux mettre en forme les titres des sections.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Ajout de \com{ifmtcsecondpart} pour tester si le document a exactement 2~parties.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Dans l'option de paquetage \opt{insection}, charger le paquetage \pack{flafter} \emph{avant} le
+%         paquetage \pack{placeins}.
+%   \item Ajout d'une figure sur les barrières de flottants.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/04/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout\imess{I0042} de notes dans la question~20, sur l'utilisation avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}.
+%   \item Ajout de commentaires pour l'option \opt{insection}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Début de la correction de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/05/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout\imess{I0042} de notes dans \xfile{minitoc.bug}, point~20, sur l'utilisation avec le paquetage \pack{appendix}.
+%   \item Fin de la correction de l'environnement \env{mtchideinmaintoc}.
+%   \item Corrections analogues dans les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/05/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de notes à~propos des environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot}.
+%   \item Ajout de \oexam{hide1.tex} et \oexam{hide2.tex}.
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0086}\pack{fncychap} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0087}\pack{quotchap} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/05/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0088}\pack{romannum} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0089}\pack{sfheaders} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0090}\pack{alnumsec} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/05/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/05/24
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Renommé \oexam{hide.tex} en \oexam{hide1.tex}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/05/30
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Utilisation de \com{MakeUpperCase} dans \com{markboth} pour les styles de page.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/05/31
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \pack{captcont} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{uighur.mld}, \xfile{uighur2.mld} et \xfile{uighur3.mld} (comme synonymes pour les
+%         variantes de la langue bicig).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Ajout d'une description de \packa{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX} dans le jargon.
+%   \item Ajout d'un commentaire sur le script \scrp{imk} dans \xfile{INSTALL} et le chapitre «~Installation~».
+%   \item Ajout d'une entrée «~paquetage~» dans le jargon.
+%   \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-apx.tex}.
+%   \item Ajout du point~44 de la FAQ et des commandes \com{mtcgapbeforeheads} et \com{mtcgapafterheads}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Ajout du fichier exemple \oexam{gaps.tex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%   \item Correction d'espacement dans \xfile{french2.mld}.
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{46}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation et la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/21
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Commentaire sur le paquetage \pack{thailatex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Engendrer certains fichiers d'exemples avec \xfile{minitoc.dtx}/\xfile{minitoc.ins}.
+%   \item Ajout du chapitre «~Fichiers d'exemples~».
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Renommé le chapitre «~Fichiers d'exemples~» en «~Exemples de documents~».
+%   \item Utiliser le paquetage \pack{lipsum}~\cite{lipsum} dans certains des exemples de documents.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour des exemples de documents.
+%   \item Ajout du fichier d'exemple \oexam{second.tex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \exam{mtc-amm.tex}, \oexam{mem.tex} et \oexam{mem1.tex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/06/30
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{fo1.tex}, \oexam{fo2.tex} et \oexam{scr.tex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout du fichier d'exemple \oexam{subf.tex}.
+%   \item Corrections sur la profondeur des minilofs, minilots et similaires.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{tsfc.tex} et \oexam{tbi.tex}.
+%   \item Corrections dans la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections de typos.
+%   \item Corrections dans la bibliographie.
+%   \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{2c.tex} et \exam{mtc-bo.tex}.
+%   \item Correction dans \xfile{french2.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/10
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction dans les minilots et minilofs (et analogues) sur la profondeur.
+%   \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{hop.tex} et \oexam{cri.tex}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{livre.tex}, \oexam{ch0.tex}, \oexam{tlc.tex} et \oexam{mu.tex}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour du jargon.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation.
+%   \item Les versions non distribuées sont marquées par~\textbf{\textreferencemark} au lieu de~\ensuremath{\star}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/17
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item La section «~À~propos de ce document~» devient un premier chapitre étoilé.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout des fichiers d'exemple \oexam{hir.tex} et \oexam{hia.tex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/19
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Corrections dans \oexam{add.tex} et \oexam{addsec.tex} pour l'index.
+%   \item Ajout du script \scrp{xmk} pour composer les exemples en documents PDF.
+%   \item Mise à~jour des scripts pour traiter les exemples.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ne pas oublier \com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc0} dans la liste des fichiers.
+%   \item Dans les scripts, le répertoire de \emph{backup} (\ixfile{OLD}) est
+%         désormais \ixfile{/tmp/`whoami`/OLD}.
+%   \item Dans les scripts, les répertoires de répartition (\texttt{CL[0-9]}) sont
+%         désormais \texttt{/tmp/`whoami`/CL[0-9]}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{47}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la documentation et la bibliographie.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{arabi.mld} et \xfile{farsi3.mld} (d'après le système \packa{\Arabi}{arabi}~\cite{arabi}).
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/28
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour du jargon.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/31
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de \com{l@xsection}.
+%   \item Correction d'espacements dans les mini-tables.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/07/31
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'un crênage vertical \verb|\kernafter...| entre chaque minitable et son filet inférieur.
+%   \item Ajout du point~45 des questions fréquemment posées.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction mineure dans le message d'avertissement \texttt{F0008}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Correction d'une erreur dans \xfile{romanian2.mld} et \xfile{romanian3.mld}.
+%   \item Raccourcissement du résultat de certains exemples de documents en utilisant la classe \class{report}
+%         au lieu de la classe \class{book} (d'où une impression en recto seul).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{48}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de typos.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Pas de préambule dans \oexam{add.bib}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/23
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans le format de la table des matières.
+%   \item Augmentation de \com{textwidth}.
+%   \item Correction du problème de préambule dans \oexam{add.bib} et tous les fichiers générés.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/24
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Retrait des commentaires sur les lignes superflues dans le préambule des fichiers générés.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{devanagari.mld} et \xfile{hindi.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/25
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}.
+%   \item Correction de la macro \com{name} (pour la documentation).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/28
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la bibliographie.
+%   \item Correction (conversion) dans \xfile{hindi-modern.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de l'erreur \texttt{E0036}\imess{E0036} si \xfile{english.mld} n'est pas trouvé pour établir les titres par défaut.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/08/31
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Modification du style bibliographique \xfile{plainurl.bst}\isuffix{.bst} pour avoir les noms de famille des auteurs
+%         et rédacteurs (\emph{editors}) en petites capitales et les années en chiffres de style ancien. Les
+%         titres sont mis en emphase. Le style \xfile{frplain1.bst} est aussi mis à~jour.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/01
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Les styles bibliographiques \isuffix{.bst}\xfile{plainurl.bst} et \xfile{frplain1.bst} sont renommés \xfile{en-mtc.bst} et
+%         \xfile{fr-mtc.bst}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{add.bib} en \exam{mtc-add.bib}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{add.tex} en \exam{mtc-add.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{addsec.tex} en \exam{mtc-ads.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{2c.tex} en \exam{mtc-2c.tex}.
+%   \item L'option de paquetage \optd{listfiles} est désormais active par défaut.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/07
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{app-mem.tex} en \exam{mtc-amm.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{apx.tex} en \exam{mtc-apx.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{bo.tex} en \exam{mtc-bo.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{ch0.tex} en \exam{mtc-ch0.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{cri.tex} en \exam{mtc-cri.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{fo1.tex} en \exam{mtc-fo1.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{fo2.tex} en \exam{mtc-fo2.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{gaps.tex} en \exam{mtc-gap.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{hia.tex} en \exam{mtc-hia.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{hir.tex} en \exam{mtc-hir.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{hide1.tex} en \exam{mtc-hi1.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{hide2.tex} en \exam{mtc-hi2.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{hop.tex} en \exam{mtc-hop.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{livre.tex} en \exam{mtc-liv.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{mem.tex} en \exam{mtc-mem.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{mem1.tex} en \exam{mtc-mm1.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{mini-art.tex} en \exam{mtc-art.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{minitoc-ex.tex} en \exam{mtc-bk.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{mu.tex} en \exam{mtc-mu.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{scr.tex} en \exam{mtc-scr.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{second.tex} en \exam{mtc-2nd.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{subf.tex} en \exam{mtc-sbf.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{tbi.tex} en \exam{mtc-tbi.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{tlc.tex} en \exam{mtc-tlc.tex}.
+%   \item Renommage de \oexam{tsfc.tex} en \exam{mtc-tsf.tex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/08
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie (ajout du Pentaglot).
+%   \item Correction du format de deux tableaux sur NFSS.
+%   \item Exemples de documents par ordre alphabétique dans leur chapitre.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'une figure sur les systèmes dérivés de \TeX{} et \LaTeX.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout du fichier exemple de document \exam{mtc-syn.tex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{49}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/14
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Légère modification de la mise en forme de la liste des fichiers (chapitre «~Installation~»).
+%   \item Simplifications dans les scripts.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Ajout du point~46 dans les questions fréquemment posées et du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-tlo.tex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Corrections dans la bibliographie et les styles bibliographiques.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/09/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Meilleurs messages d'erreur pour les commandes de préparation et d'insertion non définies.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Ajout de «~\textbf{+}~» et «~\texttt{-}~» comme synonymes pour «~\texttt{on}~» et «~\texttt{off}~»,
+%         respectivement.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/10/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la bibliographie.
+%   \item Corrections de typos.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Ajout d'un tableau de quelques codages.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/10/31
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Suppression de l'entrée «~Sommaire~» dans le sommaire, mais elle est ajoutée dans la table des matières.
+%   \item Amélioration de quelques tableaux.
+%   \item Ajout des fichiers \xfile{japanese6.mld} and \xfile{japanese6.mlo}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/11/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans la bibliographie.
+%   \item Corrections dans la mise en page d'une citation de \name{Donald}{Arseneau}.
+%   \item Combinaison de quatre figures en une (avec des sous-figures).
+%   \item Ajout (dans le mémento) d'un tableau des classes et paquetages qui sont incompatibles ou ont besoin de
+%         précautions avec \upack{minitoc}.
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} sur le paquetage \imess{W0092}\pack{hangcaption} (il doit être chargé \emph{avant} \upack{minitoc}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/11/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Complété la liste des classes standard.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/11/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'une validation des options de langue avec la présence des fichiers \suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo}.
+%   \item Ajout\imess{E0036} de notes sur la présence obligatoire du fichier \xfile{english.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/11/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item La validation des options de langue n'écrit que des messages informatifs dans le fichier
+%         \emph{document}\suffix{.log} et, si nécessaire, donne un seul message d'avertissement.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{50}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/11/17
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Suppression des anciens exemples de documents: \oexam{mtc-adds.tex}, \oexam{mtc-amem.tex}, \oexam{mtc-book.tex},
+%         \oexam{mtc-gaps.tex}, \oexam{mtc-mem1.tex}, \oexam{mtc-subf.tex} et \oexam{mtc-tsfc.tex}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Ajout du script \scrp{tmk} et d'un tableau décrivant une structure \index{TDS}TDS pour \upack{minitoc}.
+%   \item Ajout d'un item sur la \index{TDS}TDS dans le jargon.
+%   \item Mise à~jour du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et du chapitre «~Installation~».
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/11/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout du message d'avertissement \texttt{W0094} avec la liste des fichiers minitoc de langue manquants
+%         (\suffix{.mld} et \suffix{.mlo}).
+%   \item Corrections dans la bibliographie.
+%   \item Mise à~jour du fichier \xfile{INSTALL} et du chapitre «~Installation~».
+%   \item Changement des noms des répertoires \emph{scratch} dans certains scripts.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Ajout du fichier \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip} (une archive ZIP d'une hiérarchie conforme à~la \index{TDS}TDS et
+%         contenant tous les fichiers du paquetage) à~la distribution.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{51}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/12/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Amélioration de l'index: paquetages et classes, scripts, outils, noms, exemples, suffixes, options,
+%         options de langue.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2006/12/20
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Amélioration de l'index: noms.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de certains fichiers \suffix{.mld} avec les noms des auteurs des titres.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections diverses.
+%   \item Les noms de certaines macros internes sont raccourcis pour tenir dans la marge.
+%   \item Ajout d'une commande \com{ProvidesFile} aux fichiers exemples.
+%   \item Indexation des environnements (pas parfaite).
+%   \item Indexation des fichiers.
+%   \item Renommage du fichier «~\texttt{catalog}~» en «~\xfile{CATALOG}~».
+%   \item Indexation des compteurs et des compteurs de profondeur.
+%   \item Les fichiers exemples sont dans leur propre répertoire de la hiérarchie \index{TDS}TDS (proposée).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{52}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de l'ordre dans l'index.
+%   \item Options par défaut en gras dans l'index.
+%   \item Ajout d'informations sur les auteurs pour les titres spécifiques aux langues.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de sections bidons dans le chapitre «~Exemples de documents~».
+%   \item Retrait de la préparation de la documentation en format PostScript.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout du script \scrp{cmk} pour convertir la documentation du format PDF en format PostScript.
+%   \item Retrait de \xfile{duplex2v.pro}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/17
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Indexation des commandes référencées.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction du nom \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han} (le prénom avant le nom de famille, à~la française).
+%   \item Correction de quelques autres noms.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/19
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{mongolb.mld} et \xfile{mongolb.mlo}.
+%   \item Retrait de \xfile{mongolb.mlo} (nouveaux codages cyrilliques T2 et X2 dans \xfile{mongolb.mld}).
+%   \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-3co.tex}.
+%   \item Essai d'utilisation d'une version récente du paquetage \pack{cite}~\cite{cite} (2003/11/04, 4.01) pour permettre le tri,
+%         mais reste en conflit avec \pack{hyperref}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Équilibrage des colonnes de l'index.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de l'indexation des environnements.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/01/31
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Amélioration de la mise en page de l'index.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{galician.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/02/05
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{mongolian.mld} qui charge \xfile{mongolb.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/02/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Indexation des noms des auteurs.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/02/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour des remerciements.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{53}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/02/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-fko.tex}.
+%   \item Correction de \com{kernafterminitoc} et consorts.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/02/19
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Références bibliographiques pour les paquetages et les classes dans l'index.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/03/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'un en-tête à~l'index, pour expliquer les notations.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Changement du style des numéros de pages et de lignes dans l'index.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{kannada.mld}.
+%   \item Les symboles de virages dangereux sont maintenant dans la marge de droite.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/03/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Amélioration de la présentation des exemples de fichiers.
+%   \item Utilisation du paquetage \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} pour trier les séquences de citations.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/03/09
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction dans le tableau~\vref{t+TDS}.
+%   \item Renommage de \uxfile{minitoc-texmf.zip} en \uxfile{minitoc.tds.zip}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/03/19
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Utilisation de l'option \optp{sort\&compress}{natbib} du paquetage \pack{natbib}~\cite{dnatbib,natnotes} pour
+%         compresser les séquences de citations; le paquetage \pack{hypernat} doit aussi être chargé (après \pack{natbib} et
+%         \pack{hyperref}).
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/03/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout du changement de titre de la parttoc des appendices dans \xfile{mtc-apx.tex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{54}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/03/27
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout des dispositifs «~\feat{open}~» et «~\feat{close}~».
+%   \item Indexation des dispositifs.
+%   \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ocf.tex}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/04/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de la commande «~\com{mtcfixnomenclature}~».
+%   \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-nom.tex}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Correction du dernier argument de \com{mtcsetfeature} et analogues, en utilisant \com{mtc@toks}.
+%   \item Certaines mini-tables sont composées sur deux colonnes dans le manuel.
+%   \item Indexation des messages. Messages notés dans la marge de droite.
+%   \item Correction d'une erreur dans \pack{mtcoff}.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{latinc.mld} et \xfile{latinc2.mld} pour le latin classique.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/04/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'hyperliens internes pour les messages.
+%   \item Charger le paquetage \pack{hypcap} pour les hyperliens dans la documentation.
+% ^^A \item Modification de \scrp{emk}, \scrp{fmk} et \scrp{pmk} pour retirer \verb*|\ | de l'index.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/06/06
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \com{mtcoffset} et consorts pour un décalage horizontal d'une mini-table.
+%   \item Ajout de \com{mtcsetoffset} pour un décalage horizontal d'un type de mini-table.
+%   \item Ajout du fichier exemple \exam{mtc-ofs.tex}.
+%   \item Ajout du marquage des macros dans les fichiers exemples.
+%   \item La section 2007 du chapitre «~Postface~» était en pagaille.
+%   \item Plus de liens internes dans la documentation.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Ajout d'une table cliquable de tous les messages.
+%   \item Amélioration des coupures de colonnes dans l'index.
+%   \item Ajout d'une minitoc locale dans le chapitre <<~Jargon~>>.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{latvian2.mld} et \xfile{letton2.mld}.
+%   \item Groupement des paires \texttt{.mld}/\texttt{.mlo} dans les tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \lneed{5}
+% \item \textbf{55}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/06/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0097})\imess{W0097} sur le
+%         paquetage \pack{flowfram}~\cite{flowfram,ffuserguide} (incompatible).
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (\texttt{I0053})\imess{I0053} sur les paquetages \pack{float}~\cite{float},
+%         \pack{floatrow}~\cite{floatrow}, \pack{trivfloat}~\cite{trivfloat} et \pack{rotfloat}~\cite{rotfloat}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/06/22
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Regroupement de notes marginales concernant des messages; amélioration de leur placement.
+%   \item Amélioration des coupures de page dans la documentation.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Correction d'un problème sur les minitocs dans les appendices pour la classe \class{memoir}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/06/29
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Changement de la couleur des hyperliens.
+%   \item Changement du format des en-têtes.
+%   \item Correction de quelques commandes \verb|\mtcset...| pour utiliser \com{edef} afin d'évaluer
+%         correctement \com{mtc@toks}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \item \textbf{56}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/07/02
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{swahili.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/08/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item En-têtes de pages modifiés dans la documentation.
+%   \item Ajout de ce qu'il faut (fichiers) pour des figures (cartes) des régions où sont parlées diverses langues.
+%   \item Retrait des fichiers \suffix{.eps}.
+%   \item Ajout de la langue \lopt{bengali}, synonyme de \lopt{bangla}.
+%   \item Éclatement de la liste des fichiers en deux tableaux (tableaux~\vrefrange{t+files1}{t+files2}).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/12/04
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Nombreuses corrections typographiques mineures.
+%   \item Couleurs plus sombres pour les hyper-liens.
+%   \item Mise à~jour et correction de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Correction d'un typo dans l'environnement \env{ptc@verse} (\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}).
+%   \item Corrections de typos dans les environnements \env{mtchideinmainlof} et \env{mtchideinmainlot} (merci
+%         à~\name{Andrew}{Bowden}).
+%   \item Remplacer le suffixe \suffix{.mtc1} par \suffix{.mtc0} dans le test d'auto-configuration (pour éviter
+%         d'écraser le fichier (\com{jobname}\suffix{.mtc1}).
+%   \item Correction d'un problème avec \com{nofiles} (\name{Andreas}{Deininger}).
+%   \item Les remerciements sont déplacés vers la partie «~Compléments~».
+%   \item Ajout d'un \emph{hint} (avertissement~\texttt{W0099})\imess{W0099}
+%         à~propos du paquetage \pack{titlesec}~\cite{titletoc}.
+%   \item Indexation complète des messages.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{lithuanian2.mld}.
+%   \item Utilisation du paquetage \pack{chngpage}~\cite{chngpage} pour élargir les pages de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Renommage de \ucom{if@longextensions@} en \com{if@mtc@longext@}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{czech.mld}.
+%   \item Suppression de \ucom{l@xsection}.
+%   \item Les fichiers graphiques sont indexés séparément.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{galician.mld}.
+%   \item Ajout d'un répertoire spécifique pour les fichiers images dans la hiérarchie TDS.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{lsorbian.mld}, \xfile{ukraineb.mld} et \xfile{usorbian.mld}.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{malayalam-b.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-keli2.mld}, \xfile{malayalam-mr.mld} et\ABK \xfile{malayalam-rachana3.mld}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{malayalam-omega.mlo}.
+%   \item Suppression d'entrées parasites dans l'index.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \item \textbf{57}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/12/11
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2007/12/18
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Corrections dans les exemples de documents.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{occitan.mld}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de \xfile{croatian.mld}, \xfile{danish.mld}, \xfile{dutch.mld}, \xfile{galician.mld},
+%         \xfile{germanb2.mld}, \xfile{greek.mld}, \xfile{icelandic.mld}, \xfile{interlingua.mld},
+%         \xfile{polish.mld}, \xfile{scottish.mld} et \xfile{turkish.mld}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2008/01/15
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction de \xfile{polski.mld}.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Ajout de la table~\vref{t+nfss+4a}.
+%   \item Ajout de cartes de la Mandchourie.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \item 2008/04/03
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Amélioration des légendes des cartes.
+%         Ajout de cartes pour l'Italie , le Karnataka, l'Allemagne, les Mongols et la Chine.
+%   \item Ajout de \xfile{occitan2.mld} et \xfile{mexican.mld}.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes tchèques.
+%   \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes danois.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte du néerlandais.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes français.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes galiciens.
+%   \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes allemands.
+%   \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes hindi.
+%   \item Ajout de cartes des dialectes portugais.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte de la langue turque.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte de la langue vietnamienne.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte de la diaspora arménienne.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes sâmes.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte des nationalités dans l'ex-Yougoslavie.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte des pays où l'espagnol est une langue officielle.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte de la région sorabe.
+%   \item Ajout d'une entrée pour la Wikipédia dans le jargon.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte des minorités en Pologne.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte de la diaspora bengalî.
+%   \item Éclatement de la hiérarchie TDS en trois tableaux~\vrefrange{t+GRF1}{t+TDS}.
+%   \item Ajout de cartes pour les dialectes basques.
+%   \item Ajout de cartes pour les dialectes lettons.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte pour la langue swahilie.
+%   \item Ajout de l'alphabet turc.
+%   \item Les numéros de pages dans l'index sont maintenant des hyperliens (merci à~\namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard}).
+%   \item Ajout de couleurs dans la figure~\vref{f+barrier}.
+%   \item Ajout de cartes des langues d'Europe.
+%   \item Ajout de cartes du Kosovo.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte des langues d'Afrique.
+%   \item Correction d'une erreur de numéro de message.
+%   \item Ajout de cartes pour la Russie.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte du Kosovo.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte des districts de Slovaquie.
+%   \item Ajout de cartes sur l'Islam.
+%   \item Added a figure about hànzì characters.
+%   \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'utilisation des caractères chinois dans le monde.
+%   \item Ajout d'une figure sur les dialectes chinois.
+%   \item Ajout de cartes sur les systèmes d'écriture.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte des régions où le finnois est parlé.
+%   \item Raccourcissement du chapitre «~Installation~».
+%   \item Mise à~jour depuis le paquetage \pack{babel} package version~v3.8j du 2008/03/16.
+%   \item Remplacement des fichiers \uxgrf{lamed.pdf} et \uxfile{lamed.tex} par \xgrf{lamed3.png}.
+%   \item Ajout de cartes de langues indigènes du Mexique.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \item \textbf{58}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2008/06/26
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Renommage de \uxfile{minitoc-tds.zip} en \xfile{minitoc.tds.zip}.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte linguistique simplifiée de l'Europe.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes polonais.
+%   \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'alphabet russe.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte sur l'alphabet russe.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte sur les alphabets serbes.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte des provinces du Viêtnam.
+%   \item Utilisation de \ucom{vrefrange} pour compresser les intervales de références croisées internes.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte des dialectes albanais.
+%   \item Ajout d'une carte de la Norvège.
+%   \item Ajout des drapeaux de nombreux pays. Ajout d'un cadre gris clair autour des drapeaux.
+%   \item Ajout d'une figure sur la lusophonie.
+%   \item Ajout d'une figure sur la germanophonie.
+%   \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'hispanophonie.
+%   \item Ajout d'une figure sur l'italophonie.
+%   \item Ajout d'une minitoc dans l'index pour faciliter sa consultation.
+%   \item Ajout de figures sur les pays francophones.
+%   \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le swahili.
+%   \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'arabe.
+%   \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le russe.
+%   \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant l'anglais.
+%   \item Ajout des indicateurs \com{ifinparttoc}, \com{ifinpartlof}, \com{ifinpartlot},
+%         \com{ifinminitoc}, \com{ifinminilof}, \com{ifinminilot},
+%         \com{ifinsecttoc}, \com{ifinsectlof} et \com{ifinsectlot}.
+%   \item Ajout de l'exemple de document~\exam{mtc-vti.tex}, section~\vref{mtc-vti.tex}.
+%   \item Ajout d'une figure sur les pays parlant le néerlandais.
+%   \item Renommage de \uxfile{fminitoc.dtx} et consorts en \xfile{minitoc-fr.dtx} et consorts.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+% \item[\textreferencemark~\textbf{version}] \textbf{59}:~fichiers PDF corrompus.
+% \item \textbf{60}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2008/07/16
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Correction mineure dans la figure.
+%   \item Mise à~jour de la bibliographie.
+%   \item Ajout de fichiers drapeaux manquants (merci à~\namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm}).
+%   \item Remplacement de nombreux fichiers images \suffix{.pdf} (la plupart étant des fichiers drapeaux)
+%         par le fichier \suffix{.png} parce qu'ils ont été corrompus lors de la conversion par \tool{ImageMagick}
+%         (\tool{xpdf} ne voit pas le problème mais \tool{Acrobat Reader} refuse de montrer le fichier);
+%         grands mercis à~\xname{Heiko}{Oberdiek} et \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}.
+%   \item Retour aux couleurs standard et aux options de couleur standard de \pack{hyperref}.
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+%
+% \item \textbf{61}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2015/07/13
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Voir l'anglais (d\'esol\'e).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+%
+% \item \textbf{62}
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%  \item 2018/07/12
+%   \begin{itemize}
+%   \item Voir l'anglais (d\'esol\'e).
+%   \end{itemize}
+%  \end{itemize}
+%
+% \end{itemize}
+% \end{RaggedRight}
+% \egroup
+% \fi
+% ^^A MAJ-F
+%
+% ^^A ACK
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \chapter*{Acknowledgments\markboth{Acknowledgements}{Acknowledgements}}
+% \markboth{Acknowledgements}{Acknowledgements}%
+% ^^A \enlargethispage*{1.5\baselineskip}
+% \mtcaddchapter[Acknowledgments]%
+% \noindent
+% I ought to thank the following peoples\,\footnote{And I apologize to all whose I forgot.}, for their help, their
+% questions, their interventions in the news groups\,\footnote{Mainly, \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} (in french) and
+% \texttt{comp.text.tex} (in english), but also \texttt{de.comp.text.tex} (in german, but I do not read it well:
+% send me also a mail in french or in english).},
+% and/or for their packages, classes, documents, and tools:\hfill\mbox{}
+% \or\relax
+% \chapter*{Remerciements\markboth{Remerciements}{Remerciements}}
+% \markboth{Remerciements}{Remerciements}%
+% \mtcaddchapter[Remerciements]%
+% \noindent
+% Il me faut remercier les personnes suivantes\,\footnote{Et que toutes celles que j'ai oubliées me pardonnent.}, pour
+% leur aide, leurs questions, leurs interventions dans les groupes de discussion\,\footnote{Essentiellement,
+% \texttt{fr.comp.text.tex} (en français) et \texttt{comp.text.tex} (en anglais), mais aussi
+% \texttt{de.comp.text.tex} (en allemand, mais je le lis très mal: envoyez-moi aussi un courrier en français ou en anglais).}
+% et/ou leurs paquetages, classes, documents et outils:\hfill\mbox{}
+% \fi
+%
+% \begin{raggedright}\noindent
+% \name{Hassan}{Abolhassani},
+% \name{Paul~W.}{Abrahams},
+% \namea{Nabil}{Abu~El-Ata}{Abu~El-Ata},
+% \name{Tommaso}{Addabbo},
+% \name{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria},
+% \name{Stéphane}{Aicardi},
+% \name{Vartan}{Akopian},
+% \name{A.J.}{Alex},
+% \namea{Élisabeth}{Allès}{Alles},
+% \name{Mark}{Alford},
+% \name{Viviane}{Alleton},
+% \namea{Jacques}{André}{Andre},
+% \name{Jérôme}{Andrieux},
+% \name{Ralf}{Angeli},
+% \name{Walter}{Appel},
+% \name{Achod~André}{Aradian},
+% \name{Patrick}{Andries},
+% \namea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason},
+% \name{Tim}{Arnold},
+% \name{Jouko}{Arponen},
+% \name{Donald}{Arseneau},
+% \name{Helmer}{Aslasken},
+% \name{David}{Aspinall},
+% \namea{Ivar}{{\AA}ssen}{Assen},
+% \name{Philipp}{Bachmann},
+% \name{Gonçal}{Badenes},
+% \name{Guillaume}{Balavoine},
+% \name{Jason}{Baldridge},
+% \name{Marin}{Balgarensky},
+% \name{Leonor}{Barroca},
+% \name{Giancarlo}{Bassi},
+% \name{Pierre}{Basso},
+% \name{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh},
+% \name{Jean-Yves}{Baudais},
+% \name{David}{Bausum},
+% \name{Benjamin}{Bayart},
+% \name{Thierry}{Bayet},
+% \name{Claudio}{Beccari},
+% \name{Beebe}{Nelson~H.~F.},
+% \name{Emmanuel}{Beffara},
+% \name{Benoît}{Belet},
+% \name{Rachid}{Belmouhoub},
+% \namea{Madeleine}{Benoît-Guyot}{Benoit-Guyot},
+% \namea{József}{Bérces}{Berces},
+% \name{Alexander}{Berdnikov},
+% \name{Jens}{Berger},
+% \name{Tobias}{Berndt},
+% \name{Karl}{Berry},
+% \name{Berhanu}{Beyene},
+% \name{Javier}{Bezos},
+% \name{Giuseppe}{Bilotta},
+% \name{Olivier}{Binisti},
+% \namea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro},
+% \name{Justin~K.}{Bisanwa},
+% \namea{Denis}{Bitouzé}{Bitouze},
+% \name{Dr.~Barbara}{Blankenship},
+% \name{Laurent}{Bloch},
+% \namea{Aurélie}{Boissière}{Boissiere},
+% \name{Patrick}{Boman},
+% \name{Onofre}{Bonvila},
+% \name{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov},
+% \name{Patrice}{Bougette},
+% \name{Daniel}{Bourbonnais},
+% \name{Andrew}{Bowden},
+% \name{Victor}{Boyko},
+% \name{Johannes~L.}{Braams},
+% \name{Felix}{Braun},
+% \name{Jim}{Breen},
+% \name{Peter}{Breitenlohner},
+% \name{Roland}{Breton},
+% \name{Catherine}{Bricout},
+% \name{William}{Bright},
+% \namea{Gyöngyi}{Bujdosó}{Bujdoso},
+% \name{Mimi}{Burbank},
+% \name{Mustafa}{Burc},
+% \name{Patrick}{Burgel},
+% \name{Alexey}{Burykin},
+% \name{Jean-Pierre}{Cabestan},
+% \namea{Philippe}{Cadène}{Cadene},
+% \name{Olivier}{Cardi},
+% \name{Samuele}{Carcagno},
+% \name{David}{Carella},
+% \name{David~P.}{Carlisle},
+% \name{Kevin}{Carmody},
+% \name{Manuel}{Carriba},
+% \name{Régis}{Caspar},
+% \name{Waldemar}{Celes},
+% \name{Raymond}{Chabbert\textsuperscript{\textdied}},
+% \name{Winston}{Chang},
+% \name{Jean-C{\^o}me}{Charpentier},
+% \name{Jean-Pascal}{Chauvet},
+% \name{Pehong}{Chen},
+% \name{Céline}{Chevalier},
+% \namea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova},
+% \name{Otfried}{Cheong},
+% \name{Jin-Hwan}{Cho},
+% \name{Pai~H.}{Chou},
+% \name{Pierre}{Chuvin},
+% \name{Yves}{Citoleux},
+% \name{Marian}{Clegg},
+% \name{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran},
+% \name{Maurizio}{Codogno},
+% \name{Bernard}{Comrie},
+% \name{David~B.}{Cook},
+% \name{Emmanuel}{Cornet},
+% \name{Oliver}{Corff},
+% \name{Prakash}{Countcham},
+% \namea{Olivier}{Dabène}{Dabene},
+% \name{Sergueï}{Dachian},
+% \name{Adrian}{Daerr},
+% \name{Arnak}{Dalalyan},
+% \name{Patrick~W.}{Daly},
+% \name{Peter~T.}{Daniels},
+% \name{Holger}{Danielsson},
+% \name{Alice}{Davison},
+% \namea{Luiz~Henrique}{de~Figueiro}{deFigueiro},
+% \namea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima},
+% \name{Sébastien}{Demoustier},
+% \name{Andreas}{Deininger},
+% \name{Éric}{Depardieu},
+% \namea{Ben}{De~Rydt}{DeRydt},
+% \name{Bernard}{Desgraupes},
+% \name{Cécile}{Desprairies},
+% \name{Sébastien}{Desreux},
+% \name{Christine}{Detig},
+% \name{Antoni~R.}{Diller},
+% \name{Gérard}{Dorel},
+% \name{Dorjpalam}{Dorj},
+% \namea{Ivars}{Dri\k{k}is}{Drikis},
+% \name{Matthew~S.}{Dryer},
+% \name{Denys}{Duchier},
+% \name{Lyndon}{Dudding},
+% \namea{Marko}{Èehaja}{Eehaja},
+% \name{Ta~Quang}{Dung},
+% \name{Patrick}{Egan},
+% \namea{Victor}{E{\ij}khout}{Eijkhout},
+% \name{Brian}{Elmegaard},
+% \name{Danie}{Els}, ^^A booktabs
+% \name{Behdad}{Esfahbod},
+% \name{Thomas}{Esser},
+% \name{Gilhooly}{Etienne},
+% \name{Karl~F.}{Everitt},
+% \name{Mike}{Fabian},
+% \name{Robin}{Fairbairns},
+% \name{Christian}{Faulhammer},
+% \name{Simon}{Fear}, ^^A booktabs
+% \name{Jürgen}{Fenn}, ^^A l2tabu
+% \name{Michael~J.}{Ferguson},
+% \name{Jeff}{Fessler},
+% \name{Ulrike}{Fischer},
+% \name{Joshua-A.}{Fishman},
+% \name{Jean-Julien}{Fleck},
+% \name{Daniel}{Flipo},
+% \name{Peter~L.}{Flom},
+% \name{Peter}{Flynn},
+% \name{Jim}{Fox}, ^^A dpfloat
+% \namea{Louis}{Frédéric}{Frederic},
+% \namea{Danny~M.}{Fürniß}{Furniss},
+% \name{Tetsuo}{Furukawa},
+% \name{Federico}{Garcia},
+% \namea{Diego}{García~Morate}{Garcia~Morate},
+% \namea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}, ^^A pict2e
+% \namea{Bernard}{Gaulle\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Gaulle},
+% \name{Maarten}{Gelderman},
+% \name{Chuck}{Genschte},
+% \name{Jacques}{Gernet},
+% \name{Mohammad}{Ghodsi},
+% \name{Helen}{Gilhooly},
+% \name{Henri}{Giordan}%
+% \name{Aleksas~Stanislovas}{Girdenis},
+% \name{François}{Giron},
+% \name{Markus}{Gleiszner},
+% \name{Josiane}{Gonthier},
+% \name{Vitali}{Gontsharuk},
+% \name{Michel}{Goossens},
+% \namea{Raymond~G.}{Gordon,~Jr.}{Gordon},
+% \name{Mathieu}{Goutelle},
+% \name{Bruce~K.}{Grant},
+% \name{Fraser}{Grant},
+% \namea{George}{Grätzer}{Gratzer},
+% \name{Norman}{Gray},
+% \name{George~D.}{Greenwade},
+% \name{Enrico}{Gregorio},
+% \name{Loïc}{Grenon},
+% \name{Charles}{Grether},
+% \name{Barbara~F.}{Grimes},
+% \name{Olga~A.}{Grineva},
+% \name{Sébastien}{Grot},
+% \name{Micael}{Guignard},
+% \name{Marion}{Gunn},
+% \name{Guntermann}{Klaus},
+% \name{Eitan~M.}{Gurari},
+% \name{Thomas}{Hafner},
+% \name{Hans}{Hagen},
+% \name{Reinhard~F.}{Hahn},
+% \name{Boumediene}{Hamzi},
+% \namea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han},
+% \name{Thorsten}{Hansen},
+% \name{Patrick}{Happel},
+% \name{Yannis}{Haralambous},
+% \name{Kathryn~A.}{Hargreaves},
+% \name{Alexander}{Harin},
+% \name{Russel~L.}{Harris},
+% \name{Michael~A.}{Harrison},
+% \name{Stephen}{Hartke},
+% \name{Danny}{Heap},
+% \name{Jim}{Hefferon},
+% \name{André}{Heider},
+% \name{Thorsten}{Hein},
+% \name{Sten}{Hellman},
+% \name{H\aa vard}{Helstrup},
+% \name{Yvon}{Henel}, ^^A l2tabu
+% \name{Hartmut}{Henkel},
+% \name{Thomas}{Henlich}, ^^A marvosym%
+% \name{Stephan}{Hennig},
+% \name{Florence}{Henry},
+% \name{Stephen}{Herborn},
+% \name{Jörg}{Hesoll},
+% \name{Pr.~Thomas~J.}{Hinnenbush},
+% \name{David}{Hoadley},
+% \name{Taco}{Hoekwater},
+% \name{Alan}{Hoenig},
+% \name{Joe}{Hogg},
+% \namea{Morten}{Høgholm}{Hogholm},
+% \name{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme},
+% \namea{Klaus}{H{\"o}ppner}{Hoppner},
+% \name{Umstatter}{Horst},
+% \name{Don}{Hosek},
+% \name{Yufan}{Hu},
+% \name{Jean-Michel}{Hufflen},
+% \name{Dave~W.}{Huseby},
+% \name{Helene}{Hyna},
+% \name{Roberto}{Ierusalimschy},
+% \name{Hiroya}{Ikeda},
+% \name{Dmitry}{Ivanov},
+% \name{Per~Steinar}{Iversen},
+% \name{Victor}{Ivrii},
+% \name{Tetsuo}{Iwakuma},
+% \name{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona},
+% \name{Youssef}{Jabri}, ^^A Arabi
+% \name{Pawe\l}{Jackowski}, ^^A pearls
+% \name{Roland}{Jacques},
+% \name{Christophe}{Jacquet},
+% \name{Bernd}{Jaehne},
+% \name{Radwan}{Jalam},
+% \name{Michael}{Janich},
+% \name{Frank}{Jensen},
+% \name{Alan}{Jeffrey},
+% \name{Regnor}{Jernsletten},
+% \name{Zhuhan}{Jiang},
+% \name{Loïc}{Joly},
+% \name{David~M.}{Jones},
+% \name{Christophe}{Jorssen},
+% \name{Robert}{Juhasz},
+% \name{Jean-Joseph}{Julaud},
+% \name{Stefan}{Junge},
+% \name{Dan}{Jurafsky},
+% \name{Akira}{Kakuto},
+% \name{Mikko}{Kanerva},
+% \name{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan},
+% \name{David}{Kastrup},
+% \name{Ronan}{Keryell},
+% \name{Jonathan}{Kew}, ^^A xetex
+% \name{Axel}{Kielhorn},
+% \name{Ki-Joo}{Kim},
+% \name{Bil}{Kleb},
+% \name{Peter}{Kleiweg},
+% \name{Rune}{Kleveland},
+% \namea{Ingo}{Klöckl}{Klockl},
+% \name{Jörg}{Knappen},
+% \name{Donald~E.}{Knuth},
+% \name{Markus}{Kohm},
+% \name{Helmut}{Kopka},
+% \name{Attila}{Koppanyi},
+% \name{Adamantios}{Korais},
+% \name{Vincent}{Krakoviack},
+% \name{Kai}{Kratt},
+% \name{Thankmar}{Kronzucker},
+% \name{Siep}{Kroonenberg},
+% \name{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov},
+% \name{Manfred}{Kudlek},
+% \name{Markus~G.}{Kuhn},
+% \name{Florian}{Kulzer},
+% \name{Toshiki}{Kumazawa},
+% \name{Olaf}{Kummer},
+% \namea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster},
+% \name{Stéphane}{Laborde},
+% \name{Thomas}{Lachand-Robert},
+% \name{Klaus}{Lagally},
+% \name{Leslie}{Lamport},
+% \name{Fabio}{Lanari},
+% \name{Robert}{Lange},
+% \name{Dag}{Langmyhr},
+% \name{Olga~G.}{Lapko},
+% \name{Henning}{Larsen},
+% \name{Jean-Marc}{Lasgouttes},
+% \name{Andris}{Lasis},
+% \name{Christian}{Laucou},
+% \name{Jean-Philippe}{Lauffenburger},
+% \name{Arnaud}{Launay},
+% \name{Claire}{Lauvernet},
+% \name{Boris}{Lavva},
+% \name{André}{Lebacq},
+% \name{Olivier}{Lecarme},
+% \name{Jacques}{Leclerc},
+% \name{Iksop}{Lee},
+% \namea{Fabrice}{Le~Goff}{LeGoff},
+% \name{Jeanne}{Legrand},
+% \name{Philipp}{Lehman},
+% \name{Werner}{Lemberg},
+% \name{Thomas}{Leonhardt},
+% \namea{Erwan}{Le~Pennec}{LePennec},
+% \name{Stéphane}{Lepolozec},
+% \namea{Julien}{Le~Thuaut}{LeThuaut},
+% \namea{René}{Létoile}{Letoile},
+% \name{Adam}{Lewenberg},
+% \name{Knut}{Lickert},
+% \name{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren},
+% \name{Anselm}{Lingnau},
+% \name{Bernice~Sacks}{Lipkin},
+% \name{Pierre}{Lobel},
+% \namea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek},
+% \name{Stoffel}{Lombard},
+% \name{Maurizio}{Loreti},
+% \name{Tristan}{Lorino},
+% \name{Tim}{Love},
+% \name{Vincent}{Lozano},
+% \name{Daniel~H.}{Luecking},
+% \name{Ken}{Lunde},
+% \name{Anders}{Lyhne},
+% \namea{Jean-François}{Macé}{Mace},
+% \name{Pierre~A.}{MacKay},
+% \name{Lars}{Madsen},
+% \name{Richard}{Mahoney},
+% \name{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya},
+% \name{Pierre}{Malecki},
+% \name{Pascal}{Marchand},
+% \name{Bob}{Margolis},
+% \name{Cécile}{Marin},
+% \name{Nicolas}{Markey},
+% \name{Marcus}{Marr},
+% \name{Françoise}{Marre-Fournier},
+% \name{Alan}{Marshall},
+% \name{Terry}{Mart},
+% \name{Éric}{Martini},
+% \name{Vadim}{Maslov},
+% \name{Henri}{Massias},
+% \name{Stephen}{Matthews},
+% \name{Andreas}{Matthias},
+% \name{Sven}{Mattisson},
+% \name{Krystyna}{Mazoyer},
+% \name{Rowland}{McDonnell},
+% \name{Ben}{McKay},
+% \name{Surapant}{Meknavin},
+% \name{Sébastien}{Mengin},
+% \name{Jochen}{Metzinger},
+% \name{Yanick}{Michou},
+% \name{Frank}{Mittelbach},
+% \name{Young~Joon}{Moon},
+% \name{Ross}{Moore},
+% \name{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski},
+% \name{Florence}{Morgiensztern},
+% \name{Lapo~Filippo}{Mori},
+% \name{Michael~A.}{Morrison},
+% \namea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera},
+% \namea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic},
+% \name{Andrei}{Nacu},
+% \name{}{National Geographic Society},
+% \name{}{National Institute of the Korean},
+% \name{Sergei~O.}{Naumov},
+% \name{Lee}{Netherton},
+% \name{Frank}{Neukam},
+% \name{Cuong}{Nguyen},
+% \name{Julien}{Nicolas},
+% \name{Elke}{Niedermair},
+% \name{Michael}{Niedermair},
+% \name{Rolf}{Niepraschk}, ^^A pict2e
+% \name{Josselin}{Noirel},
+% \name{Tim}{Null},
+% \name{Heiko}{Oberdiek},
+% \name{Tobias}{Oetiker},
+% \name{Haruhito}{Okamura},
+% \name{Mariusz}{Olko},
+% \name{Tanguy}{Ortolo},
+% \namea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols},
+% \name{Jörg}{Ott},
+% \namea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic},
+% \name{Scott}{Pakin},
+% \name{Palash~Baran}{Pal},
+% \name{Anshuman}{Pandey},
+% \name{Minje~Byeng-sen}{Park},
+% \name{Hubert}{Partl},
+% \name{Oren}{Patashnik},
+% \name{Jonathan}{Pechta},
+% \name{Kasper}{Peeters},
+% \namea{Manuel}{Pégourié-Gonnard}{Pegourie-Gonnard},
+% \name{Matthias}{Pelger},
+% \name{Philippe}{Pelletier},
+% \namea{François}{Pétiard}{Petiard},
+% \name{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst},
+% \name{Sébastien}{Peyrouse},
+% \name{Paul}{Pichaureau},
+% \name{Éric}{Picheral},
+% \name{Bruno}{Piguet},
+% \namea{Karel}{P{\'\i}\v{s}ka}{Piska},
+% \name{John}{Plaice},
+% \name{Yves}{Plassereau},
+% \name{Ariane}{Poissonnier},
+% \name{Maria}{Polinsky},
+% \name{Philippe}{Pons},
+% \name{Monique}{Pontault},
+% \name{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap},
+% \name{Fabrice}{Popineau},
+% \name{Nico}{Poppelier},
+% \name{Rama}{Porrat},
+% \namea{Camille-Aimé}{Possamaï}{Possamai},
+% \name{Roozbeh}{Pournader},
+% \namea{Hilmar}{Preuße}{Preusse},
+% \name{Glanville}{Price},
+% \name{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan},
+% \name{Sebastian}{Rahtz},
+% \name{Bernd}{Raichle},
+% \name{Claude}{Raimond},
+% \name{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete},
+% \name{S.~Robert}{Ramsey},
+% \name{Paul}{Rascoe},
+% \name{Keranen}{Reino},
+% \name{Arthur}{Reutenauer},
+% \namea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus},
+% \namea{Alexandre}{de~Rhodes\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Rhodes},
+% \name{François}{Richaudeau},
+% \name{Luis}{Rivera},
+% \name{Yuri}{Robbers},
+% \name{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts},
+% \name{Will}{Robertson},
+% \name{Denis~B.}{Roegel},
+% \name{Christian}{Rolland},
+% \name{Rasmus~Pank}{Roulund},
+% \name{Chris~A.}{Rowley},
+% \name{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba},
+% \name{Jan~Michael}{Rynning},
+% \name{Young}{Ryu}, ^^A txfonts
+% \name{Enn}{Saar},
+% \name{David}{Samsoen},
+% \namea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez},
+% \name{Larry}{Sanger},
+% \name{Morgan}{Sangeux},
+% \name{Thierry}{Sanjuan},
+% \name{Eddie}{Saudrais},
+% \namea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck},
+% \name{Bernd}{Schandl},
+% \name{Elisabeth}{Schlegl},
+% \name{Tobias}{Schlemmer},
+% \name{Walter}{Schmidt},
+% \name{Thomas~A.}{Schmitz},
+% \name{Uwe}{Schneider},
+% \namea{Rainer}{Schöpf}{Schopf},
+% \name{Joachim}{Schrod},
+% \namea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}, ^^A everysel, ragged2e, multitoc
+% \name{Ulrich}{Schwartz},
+% \name{Elizabeth}{Scurfield},
+% \name{Michael}{Shell},
+% \vname{Shin}{Jungshik},
+% \namea{Bai}{Shouyi\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Shouyi},
+% \name{Ali}{Shoukat},
+% \name{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika},
+% \name{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan},
+% \name{Sindhu}{Singh},
+% \name{Anna}{Sitnikova-Rioland},
+% \name{Petra}{Schlager},
+% \name{Kristian}{Slimak},
+% \name{Jankovic}{Slobodan},
+% \name{John}{Smith},
+% \name{Robin~S.}{Socha},
+% \name{Nick}{Sofroniou},
+% \name{Axel}{Sommerfeldt},
+% \name{Lianyi}{Song},
+% \name{Yves}{Soulet},
+% \name{Gérard}{Sournia},
+% \name{Pierre-François}{Souyri},
+% \name{Arjen}{Steiner},
+% \name{D.~P.}{Story},
+% \name{Éric}{Streit},
+% \name{Ralf}{Stubner},
+% \name{K.~K.}{Subramaniam},
+% \name{Cyrille}{Suss},
+% \name{Robert~S.}{Sutor},
+% \name{Chris}{Swoyer},
+% \name{Apostolos}{Syropoulos},
+% \name{Raffaella}{Tabacco},
+% \name{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot},
+% \namea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin},
+% \name{Philip}{Taylor},
+% \namea{Michel}{Tétu}{Tetu},
+% \name{Yves}{Ternon},
+% \name{Manfred}{Thibud},
+% \name{Christina}{Thiele},
+% \name{Harold}{Thimbleby},
+% \name{Kresten~Krab}{Thorup},
+% \name{Aurélien}{Thureau},
+% \name{Karsten}{Tinnefeld},
+% \name{Josef}{Tkadlec}, ^^A pict2e
+% \namea{Ton}{'t~Lam}{tLam},
+% \namea{Sigitas}{Tolu\v{s}is}{Tolusis},
+% \name{Cezare}{Tomczak},
+% \name{Laurent}{Tordella},
+% \name{Mark}{Trettin}, ^^A l2tabu
+% \name{Antonis}{Tsolomitis},
+% \name{Ahto}{Truu},
+% \name{Stefan}{Ulrich},
+% \name{Hideo}{Umeki},
+% \name{Un}{Koaunghi},
+% \name{Turgut}{Uyar},
+% \name{Jari}{Vaario},
+% \name{Christian}{Valantin},
+% \name{Piet}{van~Oostrum},
+% \namea{Thomas}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Géry}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Gery},
+% \name{Timothy}{Van~Zandt},
+% \name{Vincent}{Vaquin},
+% \name{Suki~K.}{Venkatesan},
+% \name{Didier}{Verna},
+% \name{Sylvain}{Vesco},
+% \name{Boris}{Veytsman},
+% \name{Alexandre}{Vial},
+% \name{Carl~F.}{Voegelin},
+% \name{Florence M.}{Voegelin},
+% \name{Martin}{Vogel},
+% \name{Vladimir}{Volovich},
+% \name{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim},
+% \namea{Herbert}{Voß}{Voss},
+% \name{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner},
+% \name{David}{Walden},
+% \name{Jimmy}{Wales},
+% \name{Nigel}{Ward},
+% \name{John}{Warnock},
+% \name{Douglas}{Waud}%
+% \name{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz},
+% \name{Stephan~B.}{Webanck},
+% \name{Eduard}{Werner},
+% \name{Daphne}{West},
+% \name{Ferenc}{Wettl},
+% \name{Graham}{Williams},
+% \name{Peter~R.}{Wilson},
+% \namea{Jeroen}{W{\ij}nhout}{Wijnhout},
+% \name{Alexandre}{Wolf},%
+% \namea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski},
+% \name{Élisabeth}{Wolkowski},
+% \name{Mark}{Wooding},
+% \name{Joseph~A.}{Wright},
+% \name{Tim}{Wright},
+% \name{Dominik}{Wujastyk},
+% \name{Damien}{Wyart},
+% \name{C.~S.}{Yogananda},
+% \name{Adi}{Zaimi},
+% \namea{Ludwig~Lejzer}{Zamenhof\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Zamenhof},
+% \name{Danilo}{Zavrtanik},
+% \namea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski},
+% \name{Charlie~S.}{Zender},
+% \name{Federico}{Zenith},
+% \name{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov},
+% \name{Uwe}{Ziegenhagen}\ifcase\LANG\relax, and\ \or\relax\ et\ \fi
+% \namea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah}.\par
+% \end{raggedright}
+% ^^A NEW HISTORY END
+% ^^A SEE..
+% \ifcase\LANG\relax
+% \index{Suffixes|see{Extensions}}
+% \or\relax
+% \index{Extensions|see{Suffixes}}
+% \fi
+% \iftrue % ^^A to index authors from the bibliography (citations replace the page number)
+% \bname{}{National Institute of the Korean}{korean-beg}%
+% \bname{Iksop}{Lee}{kor-lan}%
+% \bname{Bruce~K.}{Grant}{korean-chars}%
+% \bname{Philippe}{Pelletier}{pelletier2003,pelletier2004,pelletier2007}%
+% \bname{Philippe}{Pons}{pons2007}%
+% \bname{Pierre-François}{Souyri}{pons2007,souyri1999}%
+% \bnamea{Louis}{Frédéric}{Frederic}{japon-dc}%
+% \bname{Jean-Pierre}{Cabestan}{chineco}%
+% \bname{Yves}{Citoleux}{chineco}%
+% \bnamea{Élisabeth}{Allès}{Alles}{chineco}%
+% \bname{Jacques}{Gernet}{gernet1,gernet2,gernet3}%
+% \bname{Viviane}{Alleton}{alleton2008}%
+% \bnamea{Jean-François}{Macé}{Mace}{mace2008}%
+% \bname{Gérard}{Dorel}{atlasmi-us}%
+% \bnamea{Philippe}{Cadène}{Cadene}{atlas-in}%
+% \bname{Guillaume}{Balavoine}{atlas-in}%
+% \bname{Pascal}{Marchand}{atlas-ru}%
+% \bname{Cyrille}{Suss}{atlas-ru}%
+% \bnamea{Olivier}{Dabène}{Dabene}{atlas-amla}%
+% \bnamea{Aurélie}{Boissière}{Boissiere}{atlas-amla}%
+% \bname{Yves}{Plassereau}{atlasmi-eu}%
+% \bname{Henri}{Giordan}{atlasmi-eu}%
+% \bname{Yves}{Ternon}{atlasmi-eu}%
+% \bname{Cécile}{Marin}{atlasmi-eu}%
+% \bname{Thierry}{Sanjuan}{sanjuan,chineco}%
+% \bnamea{Madeleine}{Benoît-Guyot}{Benoit-Guyot}{sanjuan}%
+% \bname{Justin~K.}{Bisanwa}{bisanwa}%
+% \bnamea{Michel}{Tétu}{Tetu}{bisanwa}%
+% \bname{Victor}{Ivrii}{ivrii2007a,ivrii2007b}%
+% \bname{Roland}{Breton}{breton2003,atlasmi-mo}%
+% \bname{Krystyna}{Mazoyer}{breton2003}%
+% \bname{Joshua-A.}{Fishman}{breton2003}%
+% \bname{Stephen}{Matthews}{comrie2004}%
+% \bname{Maria}{Polinsky}{comrie2004}%
+% \bname{Catherine}{Bricout}{comrie2004}%
+% \bname{Petra}{Schlager}{schlager2007}%
+% \bname{Manfred}{Thibud}{schlager2007}%
+% \bname{Monique}{Pontault}{OIF}%
+% \bname{Alexandre}{Wolf}{OIF}%
+% \bname{Christian}{Valantin}{OIF,OIF2003}%
+% \bname{Florence}{Morgiensztern}{OIF,OIF2003}%
+% \bname{Josiane}{Gonthier}{OIF}%
+% \bname{Ariane}{Poissonnier}{AF}%
+% \bname{Gérard}{Sournia}{AF}%
+% \bnamea{Fabrice}{Le~Goff}{LeGoff}{AF}%
+% \bname{Glanville}{Price}{LOE}%
+% \bname{Peter~T.}{Daniels}{WWS}%
+% \bname{William}{Bright}{WWS}%
+% \bname{Bernard}{Comrie}{comrie1990,comrie2004}%
+% \bname{Tristan}{Lorino}{lorino2006}%
+% \bname{S.~Robert}{Ramsey}{ramsey1989,kor-lan}%
+% \bname{Pierre}{Chuvin}{chuvin2008}%
+% \bnamea{René}{Létoile}{Letoile}{chuvin2008}%
+% \bname{Sébastien}{Peyrouse}{chuvin2008}%
+% \bnamea{Manuel}{Pégourié-Gonnard}{Pegourie-Gonnard}{p-xargs,p-xargs-fr}%
+% \bname{Roberto}{Ierusalimschy}{lua2005,lua2006}%
+% \bnamea{Luiz~Henrique}{de~Figueiro}{deFigueiro}{lua2006}%
+% \bname{Waldemar}{Celes}{lua2006}%
+% \bnamea{Alexandre}{de~Rhodes\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Rhodes}{ppvl}%
+% \bname{Alan}{Marshall}{marshall1991}%
+% \bname{Patrick}{Andries}{andries2008}%
+% \bname{Roland}{Jacques}{ppvl}%
+% \bname{Tobias}{Berndt}{berndt2007}%
+% \bname{Joachim}{Schrod}{ilatex,guntermann1986,detig1994}%
+% \bname{Guntermann}{Klaus}{guntermann1986}%
+% \bname{Christine}{Detig}{detig1994}%
+% \bname{Éric}{Martini}{martini2008}%
+% \bname{Olivier}{Binisti}{rich2005}%
+% \bname{Patrick}{Boman}{boman2005}%
+% \bname{Christian}{Laucou}{boman2005}%
+% \bname{François}{Richaudeau}{rich2005}%
+% \bname{Patrick}{Burgel}{pluriels}%
+% \bname{Jin-Hwan}{Cho}{cjkomega}%
+% \bname{Haruhito}{Okamura}{cjkomega}%
+% \bname{}{National Geographic Society}{atlas-china}%
+% \bname{Beebe}{Nelson~H.~F.}{beebe}%
+% \bname{Raymond}{Chabbert\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{occi}%
+% \bname{Elke}{Niedermair}{la-praxis}%
+% \bname{Bernice~Sacks}{Lipkin}{lipkin}%
+% \bname{Michael}{Niedermair}{la-praxis}%
+% \bname{Jean-Joseph}{Julaud}{fnul,fgram,conju}%
+% \bname{Claude}{Raimond}{enul}%
+% \bname{Paul}{Rascoe}{texasmaps}%
+% \bname{Christophe}{Jacquet}{mlatex}%
+% \bname{Alice}{Davison}{hindi99}%
+% \bname{Juan~M.}{Aguirregabiria}{basque}%
+% \bname{Jonathan}{Kew}{xetex}%
+% \bname{Reinhard~F.}{Hahn}{lowlands}%
+% \bname{François}{Giron}{surlatex}%
+% \bname{Patrick}{Egan}{nomentbl}%
+% \bname{Brian}{Elmegaard}{nomentbl}%
+% \bname{Ferenc}{Wettl}{bujdoso,bujdoso-f}%
+% \bname{Stéphane}{Aicardi}{aicardi}%
+% \bname{Jouko}{Arponen}{practical}%
+% \bname{Jason}{Baldridge}{jason}%
+% \bname{Timothy}{Van~Zandt}{fancybox}%
+% \bname{Frank}{Jensen}{calc}%
+% \bname{Kresten~Krab}{Thorup}{calc}%
+% \bname{Akira}{Kakuto}{kakuto}%
+% \bname{Lee}{Netherton}{nomencl}%
+% \bname{Bernd}{Schandl}{nomencl}%
+% \bname{Vartan}{Akopian}{armtex}%
+% \bname{A.J.}{Alex}{malayalam,malayalam-o}%
+% \bnamea{Bai}{Shouyi\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Shouyi}{china-h}%
+% \bnamea{Einar}{Árnason}{Arnason}{icelandic}%
+% \bnamea{Gyöngyi}{Bujdosó}{Bujdoso}{bujdoso,bujdoso-f}%
+% \bnamea{Raymond~G.}{Gordon,~Jr.}{Gordon}{ethno}%
+% \bname{Barbara~F.}{Grimes}{ethno}%
+% \bnamea{Ingo}{Klöckl}{Klockl}{ingo}%
+% \bname{Donald}{Arseneau}{notoccite,placeins,cite,overcite,wrapfig,chapterbib,url,ifmtarg}%
+% \bname{Gonçal}{Badenes}{catalan}%
+% \bname{Pierre}{Basso}{bibtopic}%
+% \bname{Dorjgotov}{Batmunkh}{mongolian}%
+% \bname{David}{Bausum}{trm-b,trm}%
+% \bname{Benjamin}{Bayart}{JMPL1,texfaq-fr}%
+% \bname{Thierry}{Bayet}{texfaq-fr}%
+% \bname{Claudio}{Beccari}{beccari1998,latin,italian,beccari-pj-2007-1}%
+% \bname{Emmanuel}{Beffara}{rubber}%
+% \bnamea{József}{Bérces}{Berces}{magyar}%
+% \bname{Jens}{Berger}{hypernat}%
+% \bname{Alexander}{Berdnikov}{maccents,X2T2,cyri,X2ENC}%
+% \bname{Karl}{Berry}{impatient,fr-impatient,berry1990,berry2003}%
+% \bname{Berhanu}{Beyene}{ethiop}%
+% \bname{Javier}{Bezos}{spanish4,spanish,guarani,titletoc}%
+% \bname{Giuseppe}{Bilotta}{aleph}%
+% \bnamea{Árpád}{Bíró}{Biro}{magyar}%
+% \bnamea{Denis}{Bitouzé}{Bitouze}{latex-synthex}%
+% \bname{Georgi~N.}{Boshnakov}{bulgarian}%
+% \bname{Victor}{Boyko}{cmcyralt/russian.sty}%
+% \bname{Johannes~L.}{Braams}{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,dutch,english,irish,norsk,welsh,basque,%
+%      icelandic,catalan,latin,magyar,bulgarian,turkish,LaTeXbase,galician,galician2,slovak,italian,BEP,%
+%      frenchb,scottish,swedish,romanian,samin,finnish,interlingua,bahasa,bahasam,russianb1,danish,hebrew2,%
+%      czech,serbian,croatian,germanb,ngermanb,portuges,breton,esperanto,estonian,polish,ukraineb,greek,%
+%      lsorbian,usorbian,albanian,slovene,i-ntg,ntg,proc,classes,letter,docstrip-prog,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F}%
+% \bname{Felix}{Braun}{jura}%
+% \bname{Jim}{Breen}{breen}%
+% \bname{Mustafa}{Burc}{turkish}%
+% \bname{Alexey}{Burykin}{X2T2,cyri,X2ENC}%
+% \bname{David}{Carella}{carella}%
+% \bname{David~P.}{Carlisle}{LaTeXbase,xr,afterpage,ltxdoc,xr-hyper,color,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,ltclass,ifthen,backref,textcase}%
+% \bname{Manuel}{Carriba}{galician,galician2}%
+% \bname{Jean-C{\^o}me}{Charpentier}{latex-synthex,ftb,TLC2F,jcc2008,ftds}%
+% \bname{Jean-Pascal}{Chauvet}{kanji}%
+% \bname{Pehong}{Chen}{chen1988}%
+% \bnamea{Jana}{Chlebîková}{Chlebikova}{slovak}%
+% \bname{Bernard}{Desgraupes}{meta-des,desgraupes,unicode-des}%
+% \bname{Steven~Douglas}{Cochran}{subfigure,captcont,subfig}%
+% \bname{Maurizio}{Codogno}{italian}%
+% \bname{Oliver}{Corff}{mlsquick,pentaglot,mongol-web,montex}%
+% \bname{Prakash}{Countcham}{texfaq-fr}%
+% \bname{Sergueï}{Dachian}{armtex}%
+% \bname{Arnak}{Dalalyan}{armtex}%
+% \bname{Patrick~W.}{Daly}{fullpage,dnatbib,natnotes,kopka,daly1998}%
+% \bnamea{Arnaldo~Viegas}{de~Lima}{deLima}{portuges}%
+% \bname{Éric}{Depardieu}{texfaq-fr}%
+% \bname{Dorjpalam}{Dorj}{montex}%
+% \bname{Jean-Pierre~F.}{Drucbert}{texfaq-fr,shorttoc,minitoc-fr,minitoc}%
+% \bnamea{Victor}{E{\ij}khout}{Eijkhout}{BEP,TBT,comment,i-ntg,ntg}%
+% \bname{Behdad}{Esfahbod}{farsi}%
+% \bname{Mike}{Fabian}{cjk-suse}%
+% \bname{Robin}{Fairbairns}{texfaq-en}%
+% \bname{Jürgen}{Fenn}{l2tabufr,l2tabuen,Fenn-pj-2006-4}%
+% \bname{Daniel}{Flipo}{frenchb,CIL2E}%
+% \bname{Peter}{Flynn}{flynn,veryshort,Flynn-pj-2005-3,Flynn-pj-2006-4}%
+% \bname{Mohammad}{Ghodsi}{farsi}%
+% \bname{Michel}{Goossens}{latex-web,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,TLGC}%
+% \bname{Mathieu}{Goutelle}{texfaq-fr}%
+% \bname{Fraser}{Grant}{irish,scottish}%
+% \bnamea{George}{Grätzer}{Gratzer}{gr-mil,gr-mmil,gr-fsl}%
+% \bname{Norman}{Gray}{urlbst}%
+% \bname{George~D.}{Greenwade}{greenwade}%
+% \bname{Enrico}{Gregorio}{gregorio-pj-2007-1,gregorio2007}%
+% \bname{Olga~A.}{Grineva}{maccents}%
+% \bname{Marion}{Gunn}{irish}%
+% \bname{Hans}{Hagen}{aleph-hagen,style-hagen,pdftex,Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,luatex}%
+% \bname{Hartmut}{Henkel}{luatex}%
+% \bname{Taco}{Hoekwater}{luatex,luatex2007}%
+% \bnamea{Th\'{\^e}~Th\`anh}{Hàn}{Han}{han,han2000,pdftex,vietnam,han2003,han2008,han2008a}%
+% \bname{Patrick}{Happel}{lipsum}%
+% \bname{Yannis}{Haralambous}{yannis1990,YH2004,YH2007,yannis1994b,yannis1994a,MAPS24-7,yannis2001,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998,yannis2004,yannis+a}%
+% \bname{Alexander}{Harin}{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}%
+% \bname{Michael~A.}{Harrison}{chen1988}%
+% \bname{Sten}{Hellman}{swedish}%
+% \bname{H\aa vard}{Helstrup}{norsk}%
+% \bname{Yvon}{Henel}{texfaq-fr,l2tabufr}%
+% \bname{Thomas}{Henlich}{marvosym}%
+% \bname{Stephan}{Hennig}{mcaption}%
+% \bname{Florence}{Henry}{texfaq-fr}%
+% \bname{David}{Hoadley}{btxfaq}%
+% \bname{Alv~Kjetil}{Holme}{norsk}%
+% \bname{Umstatter}{Horst}{romanian}%
+% \bname{Per~Steinar}{Iversen}{norsk}%
+% \bname{Zunbeltz}{Izaola~Azkona}{basque}%
+% \bname{Youssef}{Jabri}{arabi}%
+% \bname{Pawe\l}{Jackowski}{pearls}%
+% \bname{Michael}{Janich}{polish}%
+% \bname{Regnor}{Jernsletten}{samin}%
+% \bname{Zhuhan}{Jiang}{vruler}%
+% \bname{Loïc}{Joly}{texfaq-fr}%
+% \bname{David~M.}{Jones}{hangcaption}%
+% \bname{Christophe}{Jorssen}{texfaq-fr}%
+% \bname{Robert}{Juhasz}{romanian}%
+% \bname{Mikko}{Kanerva}{finnish}%
+% \bname{Theppitak}{Karoonboonyanan}{thailatex,thaistd}%
+% \bname{Axel}{Kielhorn}{koma,komab}%
+% \bname{Ki-Joo}{Kim}{bibtex-ki-joo-kim,pdf-ki-joo-kim,latex-fonts-ki-joo-kim}%
+% \bname{Peter}{Kleiweg}{interlingua}%
+% \bname{Rune}{Kleveland}{norsk}%
+% \bname{Jörg}{Knappen}{bahasa,bahasam,esperanto,knappen2004}%
+% \bname{Donald~E.}{Knuth}{cmt,texbook,metabook,ftb}%
+% \bname{Markus}{Kohm}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}%
+% \bname{Yuri}{Robbers}{robbers-pj-2006-3}%
+% \bname{Rasmus~Pank}{Roulund}{robbers-pj-2006-3}%
+% \bname{Helmut}{Kopka}{kopka,kopka-bd1,kopka-bd2,kopka-bd3}%
+% \bname{Attila}{Koppanyi}{magyar}%
+% \bname{Alexej~M.}{Kryukov}{antomega}%
+% \bname{Dmitry}{Ivanov}{antomega}%
+% \bname{Manfred}{Kudlek}{ethiop}%
+% \bname{Markus~G.}{Kuhn}{effective}%
+% \bname{Olaf}{Kummer}{ethiop}%
+% \bnamea{Frank}{Küster}{Kuster}{alnumsec}%
+% \bname{Klaus}{Lagally}{arabtex2,arabtex}%
+% \bname{Leslie}{Lamport}{LaTeXbase,lamport-mkx,latex-manual,ntg,proc,classes,letter}%
+% \bname{Olga~G.}{Lapko}{X2T2,cyri,X2ENC,russianb1,FULLCYR,floatrow,russianb,ukraineb}%
+% \bname{Henning}{Larsen}{danish}%
+% \bname{Boris}{Lavva}{hebrew2}%
+% \bname{Olivier}{Lecarme}{lecarme}%
+% \bname{Jacques}{Leclerc}{tlfq}%
+% \bname{Philipp}{Lehman}{TFIG}%
+% \bname{Werner}{Lemberg}{russianb1,cjk,cjk2,vietnam,dblaccnt,cyrguide,ukraineb}%
+% \bnamea{Erwan}{Le~Pennec}{LePennec}{texfaq-fr}%
+% \bname{Knut}{Lickert}{minutes}%
+% \bname{Ulf~A.}{Lindgren}{fncychap}%
+% \bname{Anselm}{Lingnau}{float}%
+% \bnamea{Milo\v{s}~V.}{Lokaj{\'{\i}}\v{c}ek}{Lokajicek}{czech}%
+% \bname{Maurizio}{Loreti}{sfheaders}%
+% \bname{Tim}{Love}{timlove1994,timlove}%
+% \bname{Vincent}{Lozano}{lozano}%
+% \bname{Ken}{Lunde}{lunde1993,lunde,lunde1999}%
+% \bname{Pierre~A.}{MacKay}{turkish}%
+% \bname{Irina~A.}{Makhovaya}{russianb}%
+% \bname{Bob}{Margolis}{bahasam}%
+% \bname{Nicolas}{Markey}{texfaq-fr,splitbib,ttb}%
+% \bname{Françoise}{Marre-Fournier}{texfaq-fr}%
+% \bname{Terry}{Mart}{bahasa,bahasam}%
+% \bname{Sven}{Mattisson}{slatex}%
+% \bname{Rowland}{McDonnell}{sectsty}%
+% \bname{Surapant}{Meknavin}{thailatex}%
+% \bname{Sébastien}{Mengin}{texfaq-fr}%
+% \bname{Jochen}{Metzinger}{ethiop}%
+% \bname{Frank}{Mittelbach}{LaTeXbase,classes,letter,FMI1990,FMI1992,slides,multicol,varioref,doc,dblaccnt,docstrip-prog,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,FMI1997,ltclass,enc-inter,TLGC}%
+% \bname{Jens-Uwe}{Morawski}{komab,koma}%
+% \bname{Lapo~Filippo}{Mori}{gregorio-pj-2007-1,Mori1-pj-2007-1,Mori2-pj-2007-1}%
+% \bnamea{Javier~A.}{Múgica~de~Rivera}{Mugica de Rivera}{galician,galician2}%
+% \bnamea{Dejan}{Muhamedagi\'{c}}{Muhamedagic}{serbian}%
+% \bname{Sergei~O.}{Naumov}{LH/russian.sty}%
+% \bname{Frank}{Neukam}{koma,komab}%
+% \bname{Rolf}{Niepraschk}{pict2e,texfaq-de}%
+% \bname{Josef}{Tkadlec}{pict2e}%
+% \bname{Josselin}{Noirel}{texfaq-fr}%
+% \bname{Heiko}{Oberdiek}{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hypcap,ifpdf,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf,makerobust}%
+% \bname{Mariusz}{Olko}{polski}%
+% \bnamea{Erik}{Östhols}{Osthols}{swedish}%
+% \bnamea{Alan}{Pai\'{c}}{Paic}{croatian}%
+% \bname{Scott}{Pakin}{dtxtut,symbols,newcommand}%
+% \bname{Palash~Baran}{Pal}{bangtex}%
+% \bname{Anshuman}{Pandey}{pandey1999,devanagari}%
+% \bname{John}{Smith}{devanagari}%
+% \bname{Harold}{Thimbleby}{seealso,seealso1}%
+% \bname{Dominik}{Wujastyk}{devanagari}%
+% \bname{Kevin}{Carmody}{devanagari}%
+% \bname{Zden\v{e}k}{Wagner}{devanagari}%
+% \bname{Oren}{Patashnik}{btxdoc,btxhak}%
+% \bname{Kasper}{Peeters}{hypertex}%
+% \bname{Terje~Engeset}{Petterst}{norsk}%
+% \bname{Bruno}{Piguet}{texfaq-fr}%
+% \bname{John}{Plaice}{yannis1994b,yannis1994a,MAPS24-7,yannis2001,yannis1995,omega1996,yannis1998}%
+% \bname{Veerathanabutr}{Poonlap}{thailatex,thai-how}%
+% \bname{Nico}{Poppelier}{BEP}%
+% \bname{Roozbeh}{Pournader}{farsi}%
+% \bname{Sebastian}{Rahtz}{latex-web,pdftex,hyperref.web,hyperref,TLGC,hyperref-o,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf,backref,nameref,rotating}%
+% \bname{Leonor}{Barroca}{rotating}%
+% \bname{Bernd}{Raichle}{germanb,ngermanb,texfaq-de,romaniantex}%
+% \bname{Jose~Pedro}{Ramalhete}{portuges}%
+% \bname{Keranen}{Reino}{finnish}%
+% \bname{Arthur}{Reutenauer}{reutenauer2008}%
+% \bnamea{Adrian}{Rezu\c{s}}{Rezus}{romaniantex}%
+% \bname{Christian}{Rolland}{breton,rolland1999}%
+% \bname{Marti}{Ruiz-Altaba}{esperanto}%
+% \bname{Young}{Ryu}{txfonts}%
+% \bname{Enn}{Saar}{estonian}%
+% \bnamea{Julio}{Sánchez}{Sanchez}{basque}%
+% \bname{Eddie}{Saudrais}{saudrais2001,saudrais2005}%
+% \bnamea{Elmar}{Schalück}{Schaluck}{polish}%
+% \bname{Tobias}{Schlemmer}{slovak}%
+% \bname{Walter}{Schmidt}{ngermanb,Schmidt-pj-2006-1,psnfss,fftex}%
+% \bnamea{Martin}{Schröder}{Schroder}{multitoc,pdftex,msch2007}%
+% \bname{Michael}{Shell}{btxfaq}%
+% \bname{Andrij~M.}{Shvaika}{ukraineb}%
+% \bname{Chanop}{Silpa-Anan}{thailatex}%
+% \bname{Jankovic}{Slobodan}{serbian}%
+% \bname{Axel}{Sommerfeldt}{caption2,cap-anleitung,caption,caption-eng,rotfloat}%
+% \bname{Joseph~A.}{Wright}{trivfloat}%
+% \bname{D.~P.}{Story}{dpstory}%
+% \bname{Éric}{Streit}{texfaq-fr}%
+% \bname{Apostolos}{Syropoulos}{beccari1998,greek,syro2002,greek-ba}%
+% \bnamea{Daniel}{Taupin\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Taupin}{varsects}%
+% \bnamea{Bernard}{Gaulle\textsuperscript{\textdied}}{Gaulle}{frenchle,frenchpro,frenchperso}%
+% \bname{Karsten}{Tinnefeld}{quotchap}%
+% \bname{Mark}{Trettin}{l2tabufr,l2tabuen}%
+% \bname{Stefan}{Ulrich}{bibtopic}%
+% \bname{Un}{Koaunghi}{HLATEX}%
+% \bname{Turgut}{Uyar}{turkish}%
+% \bname{Piet}{van~Oostrum}{teximpl}%
+% \bnamea{Thomas}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Géry}{van~Oudenhove~de~Saint~Gery}{texfaq-fr,thomasvo}%
+% \bname{Vladimir}{Volovich}{russianb1,cyrguide,ukraineb}%
+% \bname{Stephan~P.}{von~Bechtolsheim}{Bechtolsheim+TB11-3-409,tex-bech}%
+% \bname{Staszek}{Wawrykiewicz}{platex-pl}%
+% \bname{Eduard}{Werner}{lsorbian,usorbian}%
+% \bname{Graham}{Williams}{tcat}%
+% \bname{Peter~R.}{Wilson}{stdclsdv,needspace,tocloft,abstract,appendix,tocbibind,tocvsec2,ccaption,docmfp,memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3,romannum,ifmtarg,ledmac,ledpar,ledarab,chngpage}%
+% \bnamea{Marcin}{Woli\'nski}{Wolinski}{docstrip-prog,polski}%
+% \bname{Damien}{Wyart}{texfaq-fr}%
+% \bname{Adi}{Zaimi}{albanian}%
+% \bname{Danilo}{Zavrtanik}{slovene}%
+% \bnamea{Krzysztof~Konrad}{\.Zelechowski}{Zelechowski}{latin}%
+% \bname{Charlie~S.}{Zender}{latex-cheat}%
+% \bname{Vadim~V.}{Zhytnikov}{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty,lhcyr}%
+% \bnamea{Leon}{\v{Z}lajpah}{Zlajpah}{slovene}%
+% \bname{Kathryn~A.}{Hargreaves}{impatient,fr-impatient}%
+% \bname{Paul~W.}{Abrahams}{impatient,fr-impatient}%
+% \bname{Mark}{Alford}{alford}%
+% \bname{Walter}{Appel}{ltximpat}%
+% \bname{Céline}{Chevalier}{ltximpat}%
+% \bname{Emmanuel}{Cornet}{ltximpat}%
+% \bname{Sébastien}{Desreux}{ltximpat}%
+% \bname{Jean-Julien}{Fleck}{ltximpat}%
+% \bname{Paul}{Pichaureau}{ltximpat}%
+% \bname{Helmer}{Aslasken}{aslaksen,aslaksen2}%
+% \bname{Rachid}{Belmouhoub}{arabe}%
+% \bname{Cécile}{Desprairies}{arabe,japo,chinois,russe}%
+% \bname{Antoni~R.}{Diller}{diller}%
+% \bname{Fabrice}{Popineau}{ftds}%
+% \bname{Alan}{Jeffrey}{LaTeXbase,jeffrey1994,ltnews,ltclass}%
+% \bname{Chris~A.}{Rowley}{LaTeXbase,jeffrey1994,TLC2,TLC2G,TLC2F,FMI1997,ltclass,rowley1999,calc}%
+% \bnamea{Rainer}{Schöpf}{Schopf}{LaTeXbase,letter}%
+% \bname{Peter}{Breitenlohner}{etex}%
+% \bname{Otfried}{Cheong}{cheong}%
+% \bname{Pai~H.}{Chou}{chou}%
+% \bname{Michael~J.}{Ferguson}{fergu90}%
+% \bname{Maarten}{Gelderman}{gelderman}%
+% \bname{Chuck}{Genschte}{pdfspec}%
+% \bname{John}{Warnock}{pdfspec}%
+% \bname{Helen}{Gilhooly}{japo}%
+% \bname{Gilhooly}{Etienne}{japo}%
+% \bname{Eitan~M.}{Gurari}{latex-web}%
+% \bname{Ross}{Moore}{latex-web}%
+% \bname{Robert~S.}{Sutor}{latex-web}%
+% \bname{Thorsten}{Hansen}{multibib,bibunits}%
+% \bname{Éric}{Picheral}{yannis1995}%
+% \bname{Alan}{Hoenig}{unbound}%
+% \bname{Hiroya}{Ikeda}{platex-jp}%
+% \bname{Tetsuo}{Furukawa}{styleuse}%
+% \bname{Tetsuo}{Iwakuma}{styleuse}%
+% \bname{Siep}{Kroonenberg}{MAPS22-13}%
+% \bname{Thomas}{Lachand-Robert}{lachand}%
+% \bname{Denys}{Duchier}{docstrip-prog}%
+% \bname{Mark}{Wooding}{docstrip-prog}%
+% \bname{Young~Joon}{Moon}{young-mm}%
+% \bname{Tobias}{Oetiker}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}%
+% \bname{Hubert}{Partl}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}%
+% \bname{Helene}{Hyna}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}%
+% \bname{Elisabeth}{Schlegl}{CIL2E,NSSL2E}%
+% \bname{Tanguy}{Ortolo}{ortolo}%
+% \bname{Jeanne}{Legrand}{ortolo}%
+% \bnamea{}{{\LaTeX3}~{Project}~{Team}}{latex3}{ltnews,proc,docstrip,ltoutput,usrguide,clsguide,fontsel,encguide,cyrguide}
+% \bname{Minje~Byeng-sen}{Park}{park2003}%
+% \bname{Jonathan}{Pechta}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}%
+% \bname{Federico}{Zenith}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}%
+% \bname{Holger}{Danielsson}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}%
+% \bnamea{Jeroen}{W{\ij}nhout}{Wijnhout}{kile-cjk,kile-encoding,kile}%
+% \bnamea{Karel}{P{\'\i}\v{s}ka}{Piska}{piska}%
+% \bname{Mimi}{Burbank}{piska}%
+% \bname{Christina}{Thiele}{piska,Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis}%
+% \bname{Suki~K.}{Venkatesan}{venkatesan}%
+% \bname{Carl~F.}{Voegelin}{voeg}%
+% \bname{Florence M.}{Voegelin}{voeg}%
+% \bname{Daphne}{West}{russe}%
+% \bname{Anna}{Sitnikova-Rioland}{russe}%
+% \bname{Thomas}{Hafner}{texfaq-de}%
+% \bname{Elizabeth}{Scurfield}{chinois}%
+% \bname{Lianyi}{Song}{chinois}%
+% \bname{Charles}{Grether}{chinois}%
+% \bname{Antonis}{Tsolomitis}{syro2002}%
+% \bname{Nick}{Sofroniou}{syro2002}%
+% \bname{}{TWS-TDS}{ftds,tds}%
+% \bname{Hideo}{Umeki}{geometry}%
+% \bname{Jean-Michel}{Hufflen}{TLC2F,hufflen}%
+% \bname{Benoît}{Belet}{TLC2F}%
+% \bname{Yves}{Soulet}{TLC2F}%
+% \bnamea{Jacques}{André}{Andre}{TLC2F,jcc2008,yannis+a}%
+% \bname{Samuele}{Carcagno}{carcagno}%
+% \bname{Simon}{Fear}{booktabs}%
+% \bname{Danie}{Els}{booktabs}%
+% \bname{Martin}{Vogel}{marvosym}%
+% \bname{Don}{Hosek}{morefloats}%
+% \bname{Stephan}{Hennig}{mcaption}%
+% \bnamea{Hubert}{Gäßlein}{Gasslein}{pict2e}%
+% \bname{Winston}{Chang}{latexsheet}%
+% \bname{Didier}{Verna}{minitoc-hyper}%
+% \bname{Bernd}{Jaehne}{minitoc-hyper}%
+% \bname{A.~J.~``Tony''}{Roberts}{minitoc-hyper}%
+% \bname{C.~V.}{Radhakrishnan}{ltx-primer,nomencl}%
+% \bname{C.~S.}{Yogananda}{kannadatex}%
+% \bname{K.~K.}{Subramaniam}{kannadatex}%
+% \bname{Vadim}{Maslov}{cmcyralt/russian.sty,cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty}%
+% \bname{Thomas~A.}{Schmitz}{Schmitz-pj-2007-1}%
+% \bname{Federico}{Garcia}{Garcia-pj-2006-4,garcia2007}%
+% \bname{Boris}{Veytsman}{Veytsman-pj-2006-4-design,nomencl}%
+% \bname{Sindhu}{Singh}{Singh-pj-2006-4}%
+% \bname{Will}{Robertson}{Robertson-pj-2006-3}%
+% \bname{Stephen}{Hartke}{Hartke-pj-2006-1}%
+% \bname{Jim}{Hefferon}{Hefferon-pj-2005-4,Hefferon-pj-2006-4}%
+% \bname{David}{Walden}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis}%
+% \bname{Philip}{Taylor}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,taylor1996}%
+% \bname{Nicola~L.~C.}{Talbot}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,talbot2004,novices,flowfram,ffuserguide,talbot-admin,talbot-phd,talbot-thesis,talbot-mini}%
+% \bname{Joe}{Hogg}{Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis}%
+% \bnamea{Klaus}{H{\"o}ppner}{Hoppner}{Hoeppner-pj-2005-3}%
+% \bname{Peter~L.}{Flom}{Flom-pj-2005-2,Flom-pj-2005-3-whatis,Flom-pj-2005-4}%
+% \bname{Douglas}{Waud}{Waud-pj-2005-1}%
+% \bname{Tim}{Null}{Waud-pj-2005-1,Null-pj-2005-2-bh02,Null-pj-2005-3-bh03}%
+% \bname{Michael~A.}{Morrison}{morrison}%
+% \bname{Denis~B.}{Roegel}{TLGC}%
+% \bnamea{Herbert}{Voß}{Voss}{TLGC,voss2006}%
+% \bname{Christian}{Faulhammer}{preusse}%
+% \bname{Ulrich}{Schwartz}{preusse}%
+% \bnamea{Hilmar}{Preuße}{Preusse}{preusse}%
+% \bname{Pr.~Thomas~J.}{Hinnenbush}{LMP}%
+% \bname{Dr.~Barbara}{Blankenship}{LMP}%
+% \bpack{xargs}{p-xargs,p-xargs-fr}%
+% \bpack{chngpage}{chngpage}%
+% \bpack{ledmac}{ledmac}%
+% \bpack{ledpar}{ledpar}%
+% \bpack{ledarab}{ledarab}%
+% \bpack{afoot}{ledarab}%
+% \bpack{frenchle}{frenchle}%
+% \bpack{frenchpro}{frenchpro,frenchperso}%
+% \bpack{flowfram}{flowfram,ffuserguide}%
+% \bpack{nomentbl}{nomentbl}%
+% \bpack{minitoc}{minitoc-fr,minitoc}%
+% \bpack{Aleph}{aleph,aleph-hagen}%
+% \bpack{dblaccnt}{dblaccnt}%
+% \bpack{nomencl}{nomencl}%
+% \bpack{hypernat}{hypernat}%
+% \bpack{fancybox}{fancybox}%
+% \bpack{shorttoc}{shorttoc}%
+% \bpack{appendix}{appendix}%
+% \bpack{babel}{Braams+TB12-2-291,babel,babel-user,BEP}%
+% \bpack{hyperref}{hyperref-paper,hyperref.web,hyperref,hyperref-changelog,hyperref-rdm,hyperref-pdf}%
+% \bpack{backref}{backref}%
+% \bpack{nameref}{nameref}%
+% \bpack{rotating}{rotating}%
+% \bpack{hypcap}{hypcap}%
+% \bpack{ifpdf}{ifpdf}%
+% \bpack{notoccite}{notoccite}%
+% \bpack{placeins}{placeins}%
+% \bpack{tocbibind}{tocbibind}%
+% \bpack{tocloft}{tocloft}%
+% \bpack{titletoc}{titletoc}%
+% \bpack{titlesec}{titletoc}%
+% \bpacka{Arab\TeX}{ArabTeX}{arabtex2,arabtex}%
+% \bpacka{\protect\XeTeX}{xetex}{xetex}%
+% \bpack{minutes}{minutes}%
+% \bpack{needspace}{needspace}%
+% \bpack{txfonts}{txfonts}%
+% \bpack{ifmtarg}{ifmtarg}%
+% \bpack{abstract}{abstract}%
+% \bpack{xr}{xr}%
+% \bpack{textcase}{textcase}%
+% \bpack{ethiop}{ethiop}%
+% \bpack{sectsty}{sectsty}%
+% \bpack{subfig}{subfig}%
+% \bpack{comment}{comment}%
+% \bpack{ccaption}{ccaption}%
+% \bpack{caption}{caption,caption-eng}%
+% \bpack{caption2}{caption2,cap-anleitung}%
+% \bpack{bibtopic}{bibtopic}%
+% \bpack{bibunits}{bibunits}%
+% \bpack{chapterbib}{chapterbib}%
+% \bpack{multibib}{multibib}%
+% \bpack{hangcaption}{hangcaption}%
+% \bpack{varsects}{varsects}%
+% \bpack{xr-hyper}{xr-hyper}%
+% \bpack{stdclsdv}{stdclsdv}%
+% \bpack{CJK}{aslaksen,aslaksen2,chou,cjk-suse,cjk,cjk2,kile-cjk}%
+% \bpack{docstrip}{docstrip,docstrip-prog}%
+% \btool{urlbst}{urlbst}%
+% \btool{rubber}{rubber}%
+% \btool{newcommand}{newcommand}%
+% \bpack{float}{float}%
+% \bpack{floatrow}{floatrow}%
+% \bpack{trivfloat}{trivfloat}%
+% \bpack{rotfloat}{rotfloat}%
+% \bpack{fncychap}{fncychap}%
+% \bpack{quotchap}{quotchap}%
+% \bpack{romannum}{romannum}%
+% \bpack{sfheaders}{sfheaders}%
+% \bpack{alnumsec}{alnumsec}%
+% \bpack{captcont}{captcont}%
+% \bpack{vruler}{vruler}%
+% \bpack{doc}{doc}%
+% \bpack{shortverb}{doc}%
+% \bpack{tocvsec2}{tocvsec2}%
+% \bpack{thailatex}{thailatex}%
+% \bpack{lipsum}{lipsum}%
+% \bpack{subfigure}{subfigure}%
+% \bpack{multicol}{multicol}%
+% \bpack{geometry}{geometry}%
+% \bpack{wrapfig}{wrapfig}%
+% \bpacka{\eTeX}{etex}{etex,FMI1990}%
+% \bpacka{\Arabi}{arabi}{arabi}%
+% \bpack{color}{color}%
+% \bpack{docmfp}{docmfp}%
+% \bpack{splitbib}{splitbib}%
+% \bpack{afterpage}{afterpage}%
+% \bpack{multitoc}{multitoc}%
+% \bpack{cite}{cite}%
+% \bpack{booktabs}{booktabs}%
+% \bpack{url}{url}%
+% \bpack{varioref}{varioref}%
+% \bpack{fullpage}{fullpage}%
+% \bpack{marvosym}{marvosym}%
+% \bpack{guarani}{guarani}%
+% \bpacka{Mon\TeX}{MonTeX}{mlsquick,montex}%
+% \bpacka{Arm\TeX}{ArmTeX}{armtex}%
+% \bpack{Antomega}{antomega}%
+% \bpacka{Bang\TeX}{BangTeX}{bangtex}%
+% \bpacka{Cervan\TeX}{CervanTeX}{spanish4}%
+% \bpacka{\protect\devnag}{Devanagari}{devanagari}%
+% \bpack{malayalam}{malayalam}%
+% \bpack{omal}{malayalam-o}%
+% \bpacka{\PLaTeXe}{PLaTeX2e}{platex-jp,kakuto}%
+% ^^A \bpacka{\PLaTeX}{PLaTeX}{polski,platex-pl}%
+% \bpack{polski}{polski,platex-pl}%
+% \bpacka{\SLaTeX}{SLaTeX}{slatex}%
+% \bpacka{Farsi\TeX}{FarsiTeX}{farsi}%
+% \bpacka{H\LaTeX}{HLaTeX}{HLATEX}%
+% \bpack{LH}{LH/russian.sty}%
+% \bpack{lhcyr}{lhcyr}%
+% \bpack{cmcyralt}{cmcyralt/cmcyralt.sty,cmcyralt/russian.sty}%
+% \bpacka{Romanian\TeX}{RomanianTeX}{romaniantex}%
+% \bpack{flafter}{ltoutput,TLC2}%
+% \bpack{alphanum}{jura}%
+% \bpack{morefloats}{morefloats}%
+% \bpack{natbib}{dnatbib,natnotes}%
+% \bpack{overcite}{overcite}%
+% \bpack{pict2e}{pict2e}%
+% \bpacka{Kannada\TeX}{KannadaTeX}{kannadatex}%
+% \bpacka{Hyper\TeX}{HyperTeX}{hypertex}%
+% \bpacka{\textsc{Lua}\TeX}{LuaTeX}{luatex,luatex2007}%
+% \bpack{mcaption}{mcaption}%
+% \bpack{minitoc-hyper}{minitoc-hyper}%
+% \bpack{vietnam}{vietnam}%
+% \bpack{calc}{calc}%
+% \bpack{makerobust}{makerobust}%
+% \bclass{memoir}{memoir,add-memoir,wilson-pj-2006-3}%
+% \bclass{jura}{jura}%
+% \bclass{amsart}{amslatex}%
+% \bclass{amsproc}{amslatex}%
+% \bclass{amsbook}{amslatex}%
+% \bclass{scrbook}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}%
+% \bclass{scrartcl}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}%
+% \bclass{scrreprt}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}%
+% \bclass{scrlettr}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}%
+% \bclass{scrlttr2}{komab,koma,robbers-pj-2006-3}%
+% \bclass{article}{classes}%
+% \bclass{report}{classes}%
+% \bclass{book}{classes}%
+% \bclass{letter}{letter}%
+% \bclass{slides}{slides}%
+% \bclass{ltxdoc}{ltxdoc}%
+% \bclass{ltnews}{ltnews}%
+% \bclass{proc}{proc}%
+% \fi
+% \Finale
+% \endinput
-- 
cgit v1.2.3

